Advanced Process Library (V9.0)

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 2524

Security information 1

Basics of APL 2
Operator control blocks 3
SIMATIC Monitoring blocks 4
Controller blocks 5
Process Control System PCS 7
Advanced Process Library (V9.0 Dosing blocks 6
SP2) Motor and valve blocks 7
Function Manual Interlock blocks 8
Message blocks 9
Counter blocks 10
Timers 11
Mathematical blocks 12
Analog logic blocks 13
Digital logic blocks 14
Generator blocks 15
Channel blocks 16
Conversion blocks 17
Maintenance blocks 18
System blocks 19
Communication blocks 20
Process tag types (insertible
templates) 21
Definitions 22
08/2018
A5E39147331-AC
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be
used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property
damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified
personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding
potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or
approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described.
Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in
this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.

Siemens AG A5E39147331-AC Copyright © Siemens AG 2018.


Division Process Industries and Drives Ⓟ 09/2018 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Table of contents

1 Security information....................................................................................................................................39
2 Basics of APL.............................................................................................................................................41
2.1 Functions of the blocks..........................................................................................................41
2.1.1 General information................................................................................................................41
2.1.1.1 User-configured message classes.........................................................................................41
2.1.1.2 Forcing operating modes.......................................................................................................41
2.1.1.3 Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors.................................................................43
2.1.1.4 Neutral position for motors, valves and controllers................................................................48
2.1.1.5 Specifying warning times for control functions at motors and valves.....................................51
2.1.1.6 Output signal as a static signal or pulse signal......................................................................52
2.1.1.7 Recording the first signal for interlock blocks.........................................................................53
2.1.1.8 Outputting a signal for start readiness...................................................................................54
2.1.1.9 Simulating signals..................................................................................................................59
2.1.1.10 Dead band..............................................................................................................................62
2.1.1.11 Request for maintenance release..........................................................................................63
2.1.1.12 Release for maintenance.......................................................................................................65
2.1.1.13 SIMATIC BATCH functionality...............................................................................................68
2.1.1.14 Flutter suppression for channel blocks...................................................................................68
2.1.1.15 Startup characteristics over Trigger block..............................................................................70
2.1.2 Operating modes of the blocks..............................................................................................70
2.1.2.1 Overview of the modes..........................................................................................................70
2.1.2.2 On..........................................................................................................................................72
2.1.2.3 Out of service.........................................................................................................................72
2.1.2.4 Manual and automatic mode for control blocks......................................................................73
2.1.2.5 Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers .................................................76
2.1.2.6 Program mode for controllers.................................................................................................79
2.1.2.7 Local mode.............................................................................................................................80
2.1.2.8 State graph of the operating modes.......................................................................................84
2.1.3 Monitoring functions...............................................................................................................86
2.1.3.1 Monitoring functions in the Advanced Process Library..........................................................86
2.1.3.2 Group display for limit monitoring, CSF and ExtMsgx............................................................86
2.1.3.3 Limit monitoring......................................................................................................................87
2.1.3.4 Feedbacks..............................................................................................................................98
2.1.3.5 Motor protection function......................................................................................................100
2.1.4 Interlocking functions...........................................................................................................101
2.1.4.1 Interlocks..............................................................................................................................101
2.1.4.2 Disabling interlocks..............................................................................................................104
2.1.4.3 Influence of the signal status on the interlock......................................................................105
2.1.4.4 Forming the group status for interlock information...............................................................106
2.1.4.5 Rapid stop for motors...........................................................................................................108
2.1.4.6 Bypassing signals................................................................................................................109
2.1.5 Form signal status................................................................................................................110
2.1.5.1 Forming and outputting signal status for blocks...................................................................110
2.1.5.2 Forming and outputting the signal status for technologic blocks..........................................110
2.1.5.3 Forming and outputting the signal status of digital logic blocks...........................................112

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 3
Table of contents

2.1.5.4 Forming and outputting the signal status of analog logic blocks..........................................113
2.1.5.5 Forming and outputting the signal status of redundancy blocks..........................................114
2.1.5.6 Forming and outputting the signal status for blocks with configurable status prioritization....116
2.1.5.7 Forming and outputting the signal status for interlock blocks..............................................117
2.1.5.8 Forming and outputting the signal status for mathematical blocks......................................119
2.1.5.9 Forming and outputting the signal status for PCS 7 channel blocks....................................120
2.1.5.10 Forming and outputting the signal status for channel blocks for field devices.....................120
2.1.6 Error handling.......................................................................................................................121
2.1.6.1 Error handling.......................................................................................................................121
2.1.6.2 Outputting group errors........................................................................................................124
2.1.7 Ramp function......................................................................................................................125
2.1.7.1 Using setpoint ramp.............................................................................................................125
2.1.7.2 Gradient limit of the setpoint................................................................................................126
2.1.7.3 Using a manipulated variable ramp......................................................................................127
2.1.7.4 Gradient limiting of the manipulated variable.......................................................................128
2.1.8 Internal/external setting........................................................................................................129
2.1.8.1 Applying the dynamically activated dead band during the PV settling time.........................129
2.1.8.2 Setpoint specification - internal/external..............................................................................130
2.1.8.3 Manipulated variable specification - internal/external..........................................................131
2.1.9 Configurable response using the Feature I/O......................................................................133
2.1.9.1 Configurable functions using the Feature I/O.......................................................................133
2.1.9.2 Stopping dosing at a flow alarm...........................................................................................141
2.1.9.3 Failure handling....................................................................................................................141
2.1.9.4 Set startup characteristics....................................................................................................141
2.1.9.5 Applying the dynamically activated dead band during the PV settling time.........................145
2.1.9.6 Evaluation of signal status...................................................................................................145
2.1.9.7 Evaluation of the signal status of the interlock signals.........................................................146
2.1.9.8 Automatic post dosing for underdosing in automatic mode.................................................146
2.1.9.9 Block as summing unit or integrator.....................................................................................146
2.1.9.10 Switching operator controls for external setpoint to visible..................................................147
2.1.9.11 Limit output Out....................................................................................................................147
2.1.9.12 Activating calculation of the flow rate for dosing by scale....................................................148
2.1.9.13 Condition monitoring information at MOD_Blocks................................................................148
2.1.9.14 Condition monitoring information at the channel blocks.......................................................148
2.1.9.15 Disabling operating points....................................................................................................149
2.1.9.16 Enabling direct changeover between forward and reverse..................................................149
2.1.9.17 Specifying the dosing type...................................................................................................149
2.1.9.18 Flow setpoints in percent.....................................................................................................150
2.1.9.19 Specifying the influence of the signal status on the dosing process....................................150
2.1.9.20 Unit for the rate of change....................................................................................................150
2.1.9.21 Reading messages..............................................................................................................151
2.1.9.22 Setting the scaling for the process values............................................................................151
2.1.9.23 Outputting a de-energized value for block-external simulation............................................152
2.1.9.24 Switch to substitute value.....................................................................................................152
2.1.9.25 Substitute value switch in the event of an error...................................................................152
2.1.9.26 Output substitute value if raw value is invalid......................................................................153
2.1.9.27 Activating recording of the first signal..................................................................................154
2.1.9.28 External control deviation.....................................................................................................154
2.1.9.29 Activating error state for external process control error CSF ..............................................154
2.1.9.30 Frequency converter with separate device feed..................................................................155
2.1.9.31 Separate evaluation for excluded and simulated interlock signals.......................................155
2.1.9.32 Use an internal or external setpoint for the absolute fine dosing quantity............................157

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


4 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Table of contents

2.1.9.33 Activating the run time of feedback signals..........................................................................157


2.1.9.34 Outputting last valid value if raw value is invalid..................................................................157
2.1.9.35 Use the last value following a complete download as the current value during startup of
the block...............................................................................................................................158
2.1.9.36 Activate LowCutOff..............................................................................................................159
2.1.9.37 Selecting values associated with messages........................................................................159
2.1.9.38 Reporting with BATCH parameters......................................................................................160
2.1.9.39 Motor feedback is not available............................................................................................160
2.1.9.40 Display only input values that are interconnected in the faceplate......................................161
2.1.9.41 Activate OS_Perm bits.........................................................................................................161
2.1.9.42 Disabling opening and closing.............................................................................................162
2.1.9.43 Enabling local operator authorization...................................................................................162
2.1.9.44 Enable configuration of the dribbling quantity......................................................................162
2.1.9.45 Enabling program mode.......................................................................................................163
2.1.9.46 Update acknowledgment and error status of the message call...........................................163
2.1.9.47 Control zone with frozen I component .................................................................................164
2.1.9.48 Control zone with specified I component ............................................................................164
2.1.9.49 Resetting the commands for changing the mode.................................................................165
2.1.9.50 Enabling resetting of commands for the control settings.....................................................165
2.1.9.51 Resetting the dosing quantity when dosing starts................................................................166
2.1.9.52 Process value with separate scale range.............................................................................166
2.1.9.53 Resetting via input signals in the event of interlocking (Protection) or errors......................167
2.1.9.54 Set reset depending on the operating mode or the LiOp parameter....................................167
2.1.9.55 Activating reset of protection / error in manual mode...........................................................168
2.1.9.56 Reset even with locked state...............................................................................................169
2.1.9.57 Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect at startup...............................................169
2.1.9.58 Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect with "out of service" operating mode ....170
2.1.9.59 Setting switch or button mode..............................................................................................170
2.1.9.60 Specifying switching mode...................................................................................................171
2.1.9.61 Creep rate is always detected in the dosing quantity...........................................................172
2.1.9.62 Enabling rapid stop via faceplate.........................................................................................172
2.1.9.63 Position feedback signals are active....................................................................................172
2.1.9.64 Separate monitoring time for stopping the motor.................................................................173
2.1.9.65 Separate interlock for each direction, position, or speed.....................................................173
2.1.9.66 Separate delay times for each alarm...................................................................................174
2.1.9.67 Signaling limit violation.........................................................................................................174
2.1.9.68 Alarm setpoint difference.....................................................................................................175
2.1.9.69 Setpoint specification with separate display area and custom unit......................................175
2.1.9.70 Control via auxiliary valve....................................................................................................175
2.1.9.71 Enabling bumpless change to the proportional gain, derivative time and amplification of
the differentiator...................................................................................................................176
2.1.9.72 Enable bumpless switchover to "Automatic" mode for operator only...................................176
2.1.9.73 Disabling bumpless switchover to automatic mode for controllers.......................................176
2.1.9.74 Enabling bumpless switchover to automatic mode for valves, motors, and dosers.............177
2.1.9.75 Summing characteristics continuous or triggered................................................................177
2.1.9.76 Suppression of all messages...............................................................................................178
2.1.9.77 Output invalid raw value.......................................................................................................178
2.1.9.78 Transmission of status information of devices.....................................................................179
2.1.9.79 Control priority in the event of an invalid input command....................................................179
2.1.9.80 Sealing the valve..................................................................................................................179
2.1.9.81 First-in detection response to deactivation...........................................................................180
2.1.9.82 Reaction of the switching points in the "Out of service" operating mode.............................180

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 5
Table of contents

2.1.9.83 Reaction to the out of service mode.....................................................................................181


2.1.9.84 Exiting local mode................................................................................................................181
2.1.9.85 Interlock display with LocalSetting 2 or 4.............................................................................182
2.1.9.86 Vibrate after torque monitoring.............................................................................................182
2.1.9.87 With acknowledge overdosage............................................................................................182
2.1.9.88 Ramp rate calculation..........................................................................................................183
2.1.9.89 SP following PV in open loop has no priority over SP_Ext and SP limits.............................183
2.1.9.90 With accelerated return of the integral action from the manipulated variable limit...............184
2.1.9.91 External/internal selection specification...............................................................................184
2.1.9.92 Setting switch or button mode for local commands..............................................................185
2.1.9.93 Gradient limitation with time duration...................................................................................186
2.1.9.94 Analog input 1 is reserved for the operator..........................................................................187
2.1.9.95 Operator can change the setpoint via faceplate also in the "Local" mode...........................187
2.1.9.96 Define the setpoint after stop and start of the motor............................................................187
2.1.9.97 Retain last output value in case of bad input signal status..................................................188
2.1.9.98 Forcing operating modes in the "Local" mode.....................................................................188
2.1.9.99 Motor stop in end position depends only on the corresponding feedback signal.................188
2.1.9.100 Substitution value is active if the block is in bypass.............................................................189
2.1.9.101 Enable external message.....................................................................................................189
2.1.9.102 Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values...................................190
2.1.9.103 Disable calculation of impulse control in LocalSetting 2 and 4............................................190
2.1.9.104 Inverter enable.....................................................................................................................190
2.1.9.105 Scale dosing can be started only if StandStill = 1................................................................191
2.1.9.106 Delete history of MV and DV moves during restart..............................................................191
2.1.9.107 Status output calculation......................................................................................................191
2.1.9.108 Suppress MsgLock and “Out of service” mode for a connected message block.................192
2.1.9.109 Variants of CPI calculation...................................................................................................192
2.1.9.110 Scalable measuring range...................................................................................................193
2.1.9.111 2 decimal points (scalable measuring range).......................................................................193
2.1.9.112 3 decimal points (scalable measuring range).......................................................................193
2.1.9.113 Output substitute values in case of communications error...................................................194
2.1.9.114 Output last values in case of communications error............................................................194
2.1.9.115 Dosing controls are deactivated during scale is in taring mode...........................................194
2.1.9.116 Do not evaluate the first run of the diagnostic blocks ..........................................................195
2.1.9.117 Selection of metadata and diagnostic blocks.......................................................................195
2.1.9.118 Limits disabled in faceplate..................................................................................................195
2.1.9.119 Keep last valid raw value if input value is bad......................................................................197
2.1.9.120 With PID initialization if mode SP intern extern changes.....................................................197
2.1.9.121 Changes signal status of outputs in OOS ...........................................................................198
2.1.9.122 Behavior in the case of Bus failure.......................................................................................198
2.1.10 Functions for controllers.......................................................................................................199
2.1.10.1 Delay alarm for control deviation at setpoint step changes..................................................199
2.1.10.2 Inverting control direction.....................................................................................................200
2.1.10.3 Error signal generation and dead band................................................................................201
2.1.10.4 Using control zones..............................................................................................................203
2.1.10.5 Setpoint limiting for external setpoints.................................................................................205
2.1.10.6 Tracking setpoint in manual mode.......................................................................................205
2.1.10.7 Tracking and limiting a manipulated variable.......................................................................205
2.1.10.8 Feedforwarding and limiting disturbance variables..............................................................206
2.1.10.9 Structure segmentation at controllers..................................................................................207
2.1.11 Messaging............................................................................................................................208
2.1.11.1 Area of application of the alarm delays................................................................................208

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


6 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Table of contents

2.1.11.2 One time value for all limits..................................................................................................209


2.1.11.3 One time value per limit pair................................................................................................209
2.1.11.4 Two time values per limit pair...............................................................................................210
2.1.11.5 Two time values for each individual limit..............................................................................211
2.1.11.6 Generating instance-specific messages..............................................................................213
2.1.11.7 Suppressing messages using the MsgLock parameter.......................................................214
2.1.11.8 Time stamp..........................................................................................................................214
2.1.11.9 Connection of the time-stamped messages from EventTs or Event16Ts............................216
2.1.12 Settings for operator control and monitoring........................................................................216
2.1.12.1 Display and operator input area for process values and setpoints......................................216
2.1.12.2 Opening additional faceplates..............................................................................................217
2.1.12.3 Labeling of buttons and text.................................................................................................218
2.1.12.4 Displaying auxiliary values...................................................................................................220
2.1.12.5 Selecting a unit of measure..................................................................................................221
2.2 Functions of the block icons.................................................................................................239
2.2.1 Block icon structure..............................................................................................................239
2.2.2 Configuring the block icons..................................................................................................246
2.2.3 Operation via the block icon.................................................................................................248
2.2.4 Block icons for PID and FM controller .................................................................................248
2.2.5 Block icon for interlock blocks..............................................................................................251
2.2.6 Block icons for SFC..............................................................................................................252
2.2.7 Adding block icons to static picture components.................................................................255
2.2.8 Format specification for the analog value display................................................................256
2.3 Functions of the faceplates..................................................................................................258
2.3.1 Fast Operation for PID Controllers.......................................................................................258
2.3.2 Structure of the faceplate.....................................................................................................258
2.3.3 Operator control permissions...............................................................................................265
2.3.4 Display of delay times..........................................................................................................267
2.3.5 Switching operating states and operating modes................................................................268
2.3.6 Changing values..................................................................................................................270
2.3.7 FM controllers standard view (analog) ................................................................................272
2.3.8 FM controllers standard view (pulse controller)...................................................................276
2.3.9 FM controllers standard view (step controller with position feedback).................................280
2.3.10 FM controllers standard view (step controller without position feedback) ...........................284
2.3.11 Interlock blocks standard view.............................................................................................287
2.3.12 Parameter view of PID controllers........................................................................................292
2.3.13 Parameter view of FM controllers........................................................................................295
2.3.14 Parameter view for motors and valves.................................................................................297
2.3.15 Limit view of FM controllers..................................................................................................299
2.3.16 Limit view of PID controllers.................................................................................................302
2.3.17 Limit view of motors.............................................................................................................305
2.3.18 Preview of FM controllers.....................................................................................................308
2.3.19 Preview of interlock blocks...................................................................................................310
2.3.20 Ramp view...........................................................................................................................311
2.3.21 Alarm view............................................................................................................................313
2.3.22 Batch view............................................................................................................................313
2.3.23 Memo view...........................................................................................................................315
2.3.24 Trend view............................................................................................................................317
2.3.25 APL Operator Trend Control (AOTC)...................................................................................319
2.3.26 Limit operation and display in the faceplate.........................................................................331
2.3.27 Central color management...................................................................................................332

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 7
Table of contents

2.4 PCS 7 measuring point browser..........................................................................................353


2.4.1 Overview of the "PCS 7 measuring point browser" window.................................................353
3 Operator control blocks............................................................................................................................357
3.1 Comparison of large & small blocks.....................................................................................357
3.1.1 OpAnL compared to OpAnS................................................................................................357
3.2 OpAnL - Check and output analog signals (large)...............................................................359
3.2.1 Description of OpAnL...........................................................................................................359
3.2.2 OpAnL modes......................................................................................................................360
3.2.3 OpAnL functions...................................................................................................................361
3.2.4 OpAnL error handling...........................................................................................................364
3.2.5 OpAnL messaging................................................................................................................364
3.2.6 OpAnL I/Os..........................................................................................................................366
3.2.7 OpAnL block diagram...........................................................................................................371
3.2.8 Operator control and monitoring..........................................................................................372
3.2.8.1 OpAnL views........................................................................................................................372
3.2.8.2 OpAnL standard view...........................................................................................................372
3.2.8.3 OpAnL parameter view........................................................................................................375
3.2.8.4 OpAnL trend view.................................................................................................................375
3.2.8.5 OpAnL preview.....................................................................................................................377
3.2.8.6 Block icon for OpAnL...........................................................................................................378
3.3 OpAnS - Check and output analog signals (small)..............................................................380
3.3.1 Description of OpAnS...........................................................................................................380
3.3.2 OpAnS modes......................................................................................................................381
3.3.3 OpAnS functions..................................................................................................................382
3.3.4 OpAnS error handling..........................................................................................................384
3.3.5 OpAnS messaging...............................................................................................................385
3.3.6 OpAnS I/Os..........................................................................................................................385
3.3.7 OpAnS block diagram..........................................................................................................388
3.3.8 Operator control and monitoring..........................................................................................388
3.3.8.1 OpAnS views........................................................................................................................388
3.3.8.2 OpAnS standard view..........................................................................................................389
3.3.8.3 OpAnS parameter view........................................................................................................391
3.3.8.4 OpAnS preview....................................................................................................................391
3.3.8.5 OpAnS block icon.................................................................................................................392
3.4 OpDi01 - Manipulating a digital value (2 pushbuttons)........................................................394
3.4.1 Description of OpDi01..........................................................................................................394
3.4.2 OpDi01 modes.....................................................................................................................395
3.4.3 OpDi01 functions..................................................................................................................396
3.4.4 OpDi01 error handling..........................................................................................................398
3.4.5 OpDi01 messaging...............................................................................................................399
3.4.6 OpDi01 I/Os.........................................................................................................................399
3.4.7 OpDi01 block diagram..........................................................................................................402
3.4.8 Operator control and monitoring..........................................................................................402
3.4.8.1 OpDi01 views.......................................................................................................................402
3.4.8.2 OpDi01 standard view..........................................................................................................403
3.4.8.3 OpDi01 preview....................................................................................................................404
3.4.8.4 Block icon for OpDi01..........................................................................................................406
3.5 OpDi03 - Manipulating a digital value (3 pushbuttons)........................................................408
3.5.1 Description of OpDi03..........................................................................................................408

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


8 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Table of contents

3.5.2 OpDi03 modes.....................................................................................................................409


3.5.3 OpDi03 functions..................................................................................................................410
3.5.4 OpDi03 error handling..........................................................................................................413
3.5.5 OpDi03 messaging...............................................................................................................414
3.5.6 OpDi03 I/Os.........................................................................................................................414
3.5.7 OpDi03 block diagram..........................................................................................................417
3.5.8 Operator control and monitoring..........................................................................................418
3.5.8.1 OpDi03 view.........................................................................................................................418
3.5.8.2 OpDi03 standard view..........................................................................................................418
3.5.8.3 OpDi03 preview....................................................................................................................420
3.5.8.4 Block icon for OpDi03..........................................................................................................421
3.6 OpStations - Configuration of the local operator authorization............................................423
3.6.1 Description of OpStations....................................................................................................423
3.6.2 OpStations operating modes................................................................................................425
3.6.3 OpStations functions............................................................................................................426
3.6.4 OpStations error handling....................................................................................................427
3.6.5 OpStations messaging.........................................................................................................427
3.6.6 OpStations I/Os....................................................................................................................428
3.6.7 OpStations block diagram....................................................................................................430
3.6.8 Operator control and monitoring..........................................................................................431
3.6.8.1 OpStations views.................................................................................................................431
3.6.8.2 OpStations standard view....................................................................................................432
3.6.8.3 Block icon of OpStations......................................................................................................434
3.7 OpTrig - Manipulating a digital value (1 pushbutton)...........................................................435
3.7.1 Description of OpTrig...........................................................................................................435
3.7.2 OpTrig modes......................................................................................................................436
3.7.3 OpTrig functions...................................................................................................................436
3.7.4 OpTrig error handling...........................................................................................................438
3.7.5 OpTrig messaging................................................................................................................439
3.7.6 OpTrig I/Os...........................................................................................................................439
3.7.7 OpTrig block diagram...........................................................................................................441
3.7.8 Operator control and monitoring..........................................................................................442
3.7.8.1 OpTrig views........................................................................................................................442
3.7.8.2 OpTrig standard view...........................................................................................................442
3.7.8.3 OpTrig preview.....................................................................................................................443
3.7.8.4 Block icon for OpTrig............................................................................................................444
4 Monitoring blocks......................................................................................................................................447
4.1 Comparison of large & small blocks.....................................................................................447
4.1.1 MonAnL compared to MonAnS............................................................................................447
4.1.2 MonDiL compared to MonDiS..............................................................................................449
4.2 AV - Displaying and monitoring additional value..................................................................451
4.2.1 Description of AV.................................................................................................................451
4.2.2 AV modes.............................................................................................................................452
4.2.3 AV functions.........................................................................................................................453
4.2.4 AV error handling.................................................................................................................455
4.2.5 AV messaging......................................................................................................................456
4.2.6 AV I/Os.................................................................................................................................457
4.2.7 AV block diagram.................................................................................................................460
4.3 MonAnL - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Large).......................................................461

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 9
Table of contents

4.3.1 Description of MonAnL.........................................................................................................461


4.3.2 MonAnL modes....................................................................................................................464
4.3.3 MonAnL functions................................................................................................................465
4.3.4 MonAnL error handling.........................................................................................................472
4.3.5 MonAnL messaging.............................................................................................................473
4.3.6 MonAnL I/Os........................................................................................................................475
4.3.7 MonAnL block diagram........................................................................................................483
4.3.8 Operator control and monitoring..........................................................................................483
4.3.8.1 MonAnL views......................................................................................................................483
4.3.8.2 MonAnL standard view.........................................................................................................484
4.3.8.3 MonAnL limit view................................................................................................................487
4.3.8.4 MonAnL parameter view......................................................................................................489
4.3.8.5 MonAnL preview..................................................................................................................490
4.3.8.6 Block icon for MonAnL ........................................................................................................491
4.4 MonAnS - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Small).......................................................493
4.4.1 Description of MonAnS........................................................................................................493
4.4.2 MonAnS operating modes....................................................................................................495
4.4.3 MonAnS functions................................................................................................................496
4.4.4 MonAnS error handling........................................................................................................498
4.4.5 MonAnS messaging.............................................................................................................499
4.4.6 MonAnS I/Os........................................................................................................................501
4.4.7 MonAnS block diagram........................................................................................................504
4.4.8 Operator control and monitoring..........................................................................................505
4.4.8.1 MonAnS views.....................................................................................................................505
4.4.8.2 MonAnS standard view........................................................................................................505
4.4.8.3 MonAnS limit view................................................................................................................507
4.4.8.4 MonAnS parameter view......................................................................................................508
4.4.8.5 MonAnS preview..................................................................................................................509
4.4.8.6 Block icon for MonAnS.........................................................................................................510
4.5 MonDiL - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Large)...........................................................512
4.5.1 Description of MonDiL..........................................................................................................512
4.5.2 MonDiL modes.....................................................................................................................515
4.5.3 MonDiL functions.................................................................................................................516
4.5.4 MonDiL error handling..........................................................................................................521
4.5.5 MonDiL messaging..............................................................................................................522
4.5.6 MonDiL I/Os.........................................................................................................................523
4.5.7 MonDiL block diagram.........................................................................................................528
4.5.8 Operator control and monitoring..........................................................................................528
4.5.8.1 MonDiL views.......................................................................................................................528
4.5.8.2 MonDiL standard view..........................................................................................................529
4.5.8.3 MonDiL parameter view.......................................................................................................531
4.5.8.4 MonDiL preview...................................................................................................................532
4.5.8.5 Block icon for MonDiL..........................................................................................................533
4.6 MonDiS - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Small)...........................................................537
4.6.1 Description of MonDiS.........................................................................................................537
4.6.2 MonDiS operating modes.....................................................................................................540
4.6.3 MonDiS functions.................................................................................................................541
4.6.4 MonDiS error handling.........................................................................................................544
4.6.5 MonDiS messaging..............................................................................................................545
4.6.6 MonDiS I/Os.........................................................................................................................546
4.6.7 MonDiS block diagram.........................................................................................................549

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


10 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Table of contents

4.6.8 Operator control and monitoring..........................................................................................549


4.6.8.1 MonDiS views......................................................................................................................549
4.6.8.2 MonDiS standard view.........................................................................................................550
4.6.8.3 MonDiS parameter view.......................................................................................................551
4.6.8.4 MonDiS preview...................................................................................................................552
4.6.8.5 Block icon for MonDiS..........................................................................................................553
4.7 MonDi08 - Monitoring 8 digital process tags........................................................................556
4.7.1 Description of MonDi08........................................................................................................556
4.7.2 MonDi08 modes...................................................................................................................558
4.7.3 MonDi08 functions...............................................................................................................559
4.7.4 MonDi08 error handling........................................................................................................562
4.7.5 MonDi08 messaging............................................................................................................562
4.7.6 MonDi08 I/Os.......................................................................................................................564
4.7.7 MonDi08 block diagram.......................................................................................................568
4.7.8 Operator control and monitoring..........................................................................................568
4.7.8.1 MonDi08 views.....................................................................................................................568
4.7.8.2 MonDi08 standard view........................................................................................................569
4.7.8.3 MonDi08 parameter view.....................................................................................................571
4.7.8.4 MonDi08 preview.................................................................................................................572
4.7.8.5 Block icon for MonDi08........................................................................................................573
5 Controller blocks.......................................................................................................................................575
5.1 Comparison of large & small blocks.....................................................................................575
5.1.1 PIDConL compared to PIDConS..........................................................................................575
5.2 ConPerMon - Monitoring of the control performance of control loops..................................579
5.2.1 Description of ConPerMon...................................................................................................579
5.2.2 ConPerMon modes..............................................................................................................583
5.2.3 ConPerMon functions...........................................................................................................583
5.2.4 ConPerMon error handling...................................................................................................595
5.2.5 ConPerMon messaging........................................................................................................595
5.2.6 ConPerMon I/Os..................................................................................................................597
5.2.7 ConPerMon block diagram...................................................................................................603
5.2.8 Operator control and monitoring..........................................................................................604
5.2.8.1 ConPerMon views................................................................................................................604
5.2.8.2 ConPerMon standard view...................................................................................................605
5.2.8.3 ConPerMon limit view..........................................................................................................606
5.2.8.4 ConPerMon parameter view................................................................................................608
5.2.8.5 ConPerMon preview.............................................................................................................609
5.2.8.6 ConPerMon setpoint view....................................................................................................610
5.2.8.7 Block icon for ConPerMon...................................................................................................611
5.3 FmCont - Interface to module FM 355.................................................................................613
5.3.1 Description of FmCont.........................................................................................................613
5.3.2 FmCont modes.....................................................................................................................617
5.3.3 FmCont functions.................................................................................................................619
5.3.4 FmCont error handling.........................................................................................................629
5.3.5 FmCont messaging..............................................................................................................631
5.3.6 FmCont I/Os.........................................................................................................................634
5.3.7 FmCont block diagram.........................................................................................................649
5.3.8 Operator control and monitoring..........................................................................................651
5.3.8.1 FmCont views......................................................................................................................651

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 11
Table of contents

5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2......................................652


5.4.1 Description of FmTemp........................................................................................................652
5.4.2 FmTemp modes...................................................................................................................656
5.4.3 FmTemp functions...............................................................................................................658
5.4.4 FmTemp error handling........................................................................................................670
5.4.5 FmTemp messaging............................................................................................................671
5.4.6 FmTemp I/Os.......................................................................................................................674
5.4.7 FmTemp block diagram.......................................................................................................691
5.4.8 Operator control and monitoring..........................................................................................693
5.4.8.1 FmTemp views.....................................................................................................................693
5.5 GainSched - Adapting parameter values for a PID controller..............................................694
5.5.1 Description of GainSched....................................................................................................694
5.5.2 GainSched modes................................................................................................................696
5.5.3 GainSched functions............................................................................................................697
5.5.4 GainSched error handling....................................................................................................698
5.5.5 GainSched messaging.........................................................................................................698
5.5.6 GainSched I/Os....................................................................................................................699
5.5.7 GainSched block diagram....................................................................................................701
5.5.8 Operator control and monitoring..........................................................................................702
5.5.8.1 GainSched views.................................................................................................................702
5.5.8.2 GainSched standard view....................................................................................................702
5.5.8.3 GainSched parameter view..................................................................................................703
5.5.8.4 GainSched preview..............................................................................................................704
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller.............................................................................705
5.6.1 Description of ModPreCon...................................................................................................705
5.6.2 ModPreCon modes..............................................................................................................710
5.6.3 ModPreCon functions...........................................................................................................711
5.6.4 ModPreCon error handling...................................................................................................724
5.6.5 ModPreCon messaging........................................................................................................726
5.6.6 ModPreCon I/Os..................................................................................................................726
5.6.7 ModPreCon block diagram...................................................................................................737
5.6.8 Operator control and monitoring..........................................................................................737
5.6.8.1 ModPreCon views................................................................................................................737
5.6.8.2 ModPreCon standard view...................................................................................................738
5.6.8.3 ModPreCon parameter view................................................................................................743
5.6.8.4 ModPreCon parameter view channel 1 to 4.........................................................................745
5.6.8.5 ModPreCon preview.............................................................................................................746
5.6.8.6 ModPreCon trend view.........................................................................................................748
5.6.8.7 Block icon for ModPreCon...................................................................................................749
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)......................................................................752
5.7.1 Description of PIDConL........................................................................................................752
5.7.2 PIDConL modes...................................................................................................................757
5.7.3 PIDConL functions...............................................................................................................759
5.7.4 PIDConL error handling.......................................................................................................769
5.7.5 PIDConL messaging............................................................................................................770
5.7.6 PIDConL I/Os.......................................................................................................................773
5.7.7 PIDConL block diagram.......................................................................................................790
5.7.8 Operator control and monitoring..........................................................................................792
5.7.8.1 PIDConL views.....................................................................................................................792
5.7.8.2 PIDConL, PIDConS and PIDConR standard views.............................................................793

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


12 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Table of contents

5.7.8.3 PIDConL, PIDConS and PIDConR previews.......................................................................798


5.8 PIDConS - Continuous PID controller (Small)......................................................................801
5.8.1 Description of PIDConS.......................................................................................................801
5.8.2 PIDConS modes..................................................................................................................804
5.8.3 PIDConS functions...............................................................................................................805
5.8.4 PIDConS error handling.......................................................................................................811
5.8.5 PIDConS messaging............................................................................................................812
5.8.6 PIDConS I/Os.......................................................................................................................814
5.8.7 PIDConS block diagram.......................................................................................................822
5.8.8 Operator control and monitoring..........................................................................................824
5.8.8.1 PIDConS views....................................................................................................................824
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset....................................................825
5.9.1 Description of PIDConR.......................................................................................................825
5.9.2 PIDConR modes..................................................................................................................831
5.9.3 PIDConR functions...............................................................................................................834
5.9.4 PIDConR error handling.......................................................................................................847
5.9.5 PIDConR messaging ...........................................................................................................849
5.9.6 PIDConR I/Os......................................................................................................................851
5.9.7 PIDConR block diagram.......................................................................................................868
5.9.8 Operator control and monitoring..........................................................................................868
5.9.8.1 PIDConR views....................................................................................................................868
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller...................................................................................................869
5.10.1 Description of PIDStepL.......................................................................................................869
5.10.2 PIDStepL modes..................................................................................................................873
5.10.3 PIDStepL functions..............................................................................................................875
5.10.4 PIDStepL error handling.......................................................................................................886
5.10.5 PIDStepL messaging...........................................................................................................888
5.10.6 PIDStepL I/Os......................................................................................................................890
5.10.7 PIDStepL block diagram......................................................................................................905
5.10.8 Operator control and monitoring..........................................................................................910
5.10.8.1 PIDStepL views....................................................................................................................910
5.10.8.2 PIDStepL standard view without position feedback.............................................................911
5.10.8.3 PIDStepL standard view with position feedback..................................................................914
5.10.8.4 PIDStepL preview................................................................................................................918
5.11 Ratio - Ratio controlling........................................................................................................921
5.11.1 Description of Ratio..............................................................................................................921
5.11.2 Ratio modes.........................................................................................................................923
5.11.3 Ratio functions.....................................................................................................................923
5.11.4 Ratio error handling..............................................................................................................926
5.11.5 Ratio messaging..................................................................................................................927
5.11.6 Ratio I/Os.............................................................................................................................927
5.11.7 Ratio block diagram.............................................................................................................931
5.11.8 Operator control and monitoring..........................................................................................932
5.11.8.1 Ratio views...........................................................................................................................932
5.11.8.2 Ratio standard view..............................................................................................................932
5.11.8.3 Ratio parameter view...........................................................................................................935
5.11.8.4 Ratio preview.......................................................................................................................936
5.11.8.5 Block icon for Ratio..............................................................................................................937
5.12 SplRange - Signal splitter.....................................................................................................940
5.12.1 Description of SplRange......................................................................................................940

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 13
Table of contents

5.12.2 SplRange modes..................................................................................................................941


5.12.3 SplRange functions..............................................................................................................942
5.12.4 SplRange error handling......................................................................................................945
5.12.5 SplRange messaging...........................................................................................................945
5.12.6 SplRange I/Os......................................................................................................................946
5.12.7 SplRange block diagram......................................................................................................947
5.13 AutoExcitation - Process trigger for predictive controller.....................................................948
5.13.1 Description of AutoExcitation...............................................................................................948
5.13.2 AutoExcitation modes..........................................................................................................950
5.13.3 AutoExcitation functions.......................................................................................................950
5.13.4 AutoExcitation error handling...............................................................................................951
5.13.5 AutoExcitation messaging....................................................................................................951
5.13.6 AutoExcitation I/Os...............................................................................................................951
5.13.7 AutoExcitation block diagram...............................................................................................952
5.14 LPOptim - Optimization after traversing the linear programming.........................................953
5.14.1 Description of LPOptim........................................................................................................953
5.14.2 LPOptim modes...................................................................................................................954
5.14.3 LPOptim functions................................................................................................................954
5.14.4 LPOptim error handling........................................................................................................954
5.14.5 LPOptim messaging.............................................................................................................954
5.14.6 LPOptim I/Os........................................................................................................................955
5.14.7 LPOptim block diagram........................................................................................................957
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller ..............................................................................958
5.15.1 Description of MPC10x10....................................................................................................958
5.15.2 MPC10x10 modes................................................................................................................965
5.15.3 MPC10x10 functions............................................................................................................967
5.15.4 MPC10x10 error handling....................................................................................................977
5.15.5 MPC10x10 messaging.........................................................................................................978
5.15.6 MPC10x10 I/Os....................................................................................................................979
5.15.7 MPC10x10 block diagram....................................................................................................984
5.15.8 Operator control and monitoring..........................................................................................985
5.15.8.1 MPC10x10 views.................................................................................................................985
5.15.8.2 MPC10x10 standard view....................................................................................................985
5.15.8.3 MPC10x10 parameter view..................................................................................................991
5.15.8.4 MPC10x10 CV parameter view............................................................................................993
5.15.8.5 MPC10x10 MV parameter view...........................................................................................994
5.15.8.6 MPC10x10 preview..............................................................................................................995
5.15.8.7 MPC10x10 trend view..........................................................................................................997
5.15.8.8 Block icon for MPC10x10 ....................................................................................................998
5.16 KalFilt - State observer.......................................................................................................1000
5.16.1 Description of KalFilt..........................................................................................................1000
5.16.2 KalFilt modes.....................................................................................................................1006
5.16.3 KalFilt functions..................................................................................................................1008
5.16.4 KalFilt error handling..........................................................................................................1010
5.16.5 KalFilt I/Os..........................................................................................................................1012
5.16.6 KalFilt messaging...............................................................................................................1016
5.16.7 KalFilt block diagram..........................................................................................................1016
5.16.8 Operator control and monitoring........................................................................................1017
5.16.8.1 KalFilt views.......................................................................................................................1017
5.16.8.2 KalFilt standard view..........................................................................................................1017

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


14 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Table of contents

5.16.8.3 KalFilt parameter view........................................................................................................1021


5.16.8.4 KalFilt parameter view 2.....................................................................................................1022
5.16.8.5 KalFilt preview....................................................................................................................1023
5.16.8.6 KalFilt measurements view................................................................................................1024
5.16.8.7 KalFilt trend view................................................................................................................1025
5.16.8.8 Block icon for KalFilt ..........................................................................................................1026
6 Dosing blocks.........................................................................................................................................1027
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device.......................................................................................................1027
6.1.1 Description of DoseL..........................................................................................................1027
6.1.2 DoseL modes.....................................................................................................................1031
6.1.3 DoseL functions.................................................................................................................1034
6.1.4 DoseL error handling..........................................................................................................1049
6.1.5 DoseL messaging..............................................................................................................1051
6.1.6 DoseL I/Os.........................................................................................................................1054
6.1.7 DoseL block diagram.........................................................................................................1068
6.1.8 Operator control and monitoring........................................................................................1069
6.1.8.1 DoseL views.......................................................................................................................1069
6.1.8.2 DoseL standard view..........................................................................................................1070
6.1.8.3 DoseL limit view.................................................................................................................1074
6.1.8.4 DoseL parameter view.......................................................................................................1076
6.1.8.5 DoseL flow setpoint view....................................................................................................1078
6.1.8.6 DoseL quantity setpoint view.............................................................................................1081
6.1.8.7 DoseL preview...................................................................................................................1083
6.1.8.8 Block icon for DoseL..........................................................................................................1085
7 Motor and valve blocks...........................................................................................................................1089
7.1 Comparison of large & small blocks...................................................................................1089
7.1.1 MotL compared to MotS.....................................................................................................1089
7.1.2 VlvL compared to VlvS.......................................................................................................1092
7.1.3 ShrdResL compared to ShrdResS.....................................................................................1095
7.2 MotL - Motor (Large)..........................................................................................................1097
7.2.1 Description of MotL............................................................................................................1097
7.2.2 MotL modes.......................................................................................................................1101
7.2.3 MotL functions....................................................................................................................1102
7.2.4 MotL error handling............................................................................................................1109
7.2.5 MotL messaging.................................................................................................................1111
7.2.6 MotL I/Os............................................................................................................................1112
7.2.7 MotL block diagram............................................................................................................1120
7.2.8 Operator control and monitoring........................................................................................1121
7.2.8.1 MotL views.........................................................................................................................1121
7.2.8.2 MotL standard view............................................................................................................1122
7.2.8.3 MotL preview......................................................................................................................1125
7.2.8.4 Block icon for MotL.............................................................................................................1128
7.3 MotS - Motor (Small)..........................................................................................................1131
7.3.1 Description of MotS............................................................................................................1131
7.3.2 MotS modes.......................................................................................................................1133
7.3.3 MotS functions...................................................................................................................1135
7.3.4 MotS error handling............................................................................................................1140
7.3.5 MotS messaging................................................................................................................1141
7.3.6 MotS I/Os...........................................................................................................................1142

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 15
Table of contents

7.3.7 MotS block diagram...........................................................................................................1147


7.3.8 Operator control and monitoring........................................................................................1148
7.3.8.1 MotS views.........................................................................................................................1148
7.3.8.2 MotS standard view............................................................................................................1148
7.3.8.3 MotS preview.....................................................................................................................1151
7.3.8.4 Block icon for MotS............................................................................................................1153
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor .............................................................................................1155
7.4.1 Description of MotRevL......................................................................................................1155
7.4.2 MotRevL modes.................................................................................................................1159
7.4.3 MotRevL functions.............................................................................................................1161
7.4.4 MotRevL error handling......................................................................................................1168
7.4.5 MotRevL messaging..........................................................................................................1171
7.4.6 MotRevL I/Os.....................................................................................................................1173
7.4.7 MotRevL block diagram.....................................................................................................1182
7.4.8 Operator control and monitoring........................................................................................1183
7.4.8.1 MotRevL views...................................................................................................................1183
7.4.8.2 MotRevL standard view......................................................................................................1184
7.4.8.3 MotRevL preview...............................................................................................................1188
7.4.8.4 Block icon for MotRevL......................................................................................................1193
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor.........................................................................1196
7.5.1 Description of MotSpdCL...................................................................................................1196
7.5.2 MotSpdCL modes..............................................................................................................1201
7.5.3 MotSpdCL functions...........................................................................................................1203
7.5.4 MotSpdCL error handling...................................................................................................1215
7.5.5 MotSpdCL messaging........................................................................................................1218
7.5.6 MotSpdCL I/Os...................................................................................................................1220
7.5.7 MotSpdCL block diagram...................................................................................................1233
7.5.8 Operator control and monitoring........................................................................................1233
7.5.8.1 MotSpdCL views................................................................................................................1233
7.5.8.2 MotSpdCL standard view...................................................................................................1234
7.5.8.3 MotSpdCL preview.............................................................................................................1240
7.5.8.4 MotSpdCL limit view for readback values..........................................................................1243
7.5.8.5 MotSpdCL parameter view.................................................................................................1245
7.5.8.6 MotSpdCL trend view.........................................................................................................1247
7.5.8.7 Block icon for MotSpdCL....................................................................................................1248
7.6 MotSpdL - Two-speed motor..............................................................................................1251
7.6.1 Description of MotSpdL......................................................................................................1251
7.6.2 MotSpdL modes.................................................................................................................1255
7.6.3 MotSpdL functions.............................................................................................................1257
7.6.4 MotSpdL error handling......................................................................................................1265
7.6.5 MotSpdL messaging..........................................................................................................1267
7.6.6 MotSpdL I/Os.....................................................................................................................1268
7.6.7 MotSpdL block diagram.....................................................................................................1277
7.6.8 Operator control and monitoring........................................................................................1278
7.6.8.1 MotSpdL views...................................................................................................................1278
7.6.8.2 MotSpdL standard view......................................................................................................1278
7.6.8.3 MotSpdL preview...............................................................................................................1282
7.6.8.4 Block icon for MotSpdL......................................................................................................1286
7.7 ShrdResL - Multiplexer for shared resources (Large)........................................................1289
7.7.1 Description of ShrdResL....................................................................................................1289

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


16 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Table of contents

7.7.2 ShrdResL modes...............................................................................................................1292


7.7.3 ShrdResL functions............................................................................................................1293
7.7.4 ShrdResL error handling....................................................................................................1299
7.7.5 ShrdResL messaging.........................................................................................................1299
7.7.6 ShrdResL I/Os....................................................................................................................1300
7.7.7 ShrdResL block diagram....................................................................................................1305
7.7.8 Operator control and monitoring........................................................................................1305
7.7.8.1 ShrdResL views.................................................................................................................1305
7.7.8.2 ShrdResL standard view....................................................................................................1306
7.7.8.3 ShrdResL general preview.................................................................................................1308
7.7.8.4 ShrdResL preview..............................................................................................................1308
7.7.8.5 ShrdResL parameter view..................................................................................................1309
7.7.8.6 Block icon for ShrdResL.....................................................................................................1310
7.8 ShrdResS - Multiplexer for shared resources (Small)........................................................1312
7.8.1 Description for ShrdResS...................................................................................................1312
7.8.2 ShrdResS modes...............................................................................................................1314
7.8.3 ShrdResS functions...........................................................................................................1315
7.8.4 ShrdResS error handling....................................................................................................1318
7.8.5 ShrdResS messaging........................................................................................................1318
7.8.6 ShrdResS I/Os...................................................................................................................1319
7.8.7 ShrdResS block diagram...................................................................................................1327
7.8.8 Operator control and monitoring........................................................................................1328
7.8.8.1 ShrdResS views.................................................................................................................1328
7.8.8.2 ShrdResS standard view....................................................................................................1328
7.8.8.3 ShrdResS preview.............................................................................................................1330
7.8.8.4 Block icon for ShrdResS ...................................................................................................1331
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve ...............................................................................................1333
7.9.1 Description of Vlv2WayL....................................................................................................1333
7.9.2 Vlv2WayL modes...............................................................................................................1337
7.9.3 Vlv2WayL functions............................................................................................................1339
7.9.4 Vlv2WayL error handling....................................................................................................1346
7.9.5 Vlv2WayL messaging.........................................................................................................1349
7.9.6 Vlv2WayL I/Os...................................................................................................................1350
7.9.7 Vlv2WayL block diagram....................................................................................................1361
7.9.8 Operator control and monitoring........................................................................................1361
7.9.8.1 Vlv2WayL views.................................................................................................................1361
7.9.8.2 Vlv2WayL standard view....................................................................................................1362
7.9.8.3 Vlv2WayL parameter view.................................................................................................1365
7.9.8.4 Vlv2WayL preview..............................................................................................................1367
7.9.8.5 Block icon for Vlv2WayL....................................................................................................1372
7.10 VlvL - Valve (Large)...........................................................................................................1375
7.10.1 Description of VlvL.............................................................................................................1375
7.10.2 VlvL modes........................................................................................................................1378
7.10.3 VlvL functions.....................................................................................................................1380
7.10.4 VlvL error handling.............................................................................................................1386
7.10.5 VlvL messaging..................................................................................................................1387
7.10.6 VlvL I/Os.............................................................................................................................1389
7.10.7 VlvL block diagram.............................................................................................................1396
7.10.8 Operator control and monitoring........................................................................................1397
7.10.8.1 VlvL views..........................................................................................................................1397
7.10.8.2 VlvL standard view.............................................................................................................1397

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 17
Table of contents

7.10.8.3 VlvL preview.......................................................................................................................1401


7.10.8.4 VlvL block icon...................................................................................................................1404
7.11 VlvS - Valve (small)............................................................................................................1407
7.11.1 Description of VlvS.............................................................................................................1407
7.11.2 VlvS modes........................................................................................................................1409
7.11.3 VlvS functions....................................................................................................................1411
7.11.4 VlvS error handling.............................................................................................................1415
7.11.5 VlvS reporting.....................................................................................................................1417
7.11.6 VlvS I/Os............................................................................................................................1418
7.11.7 VlvS block diagram............................................................................................................1423
7.11.8 Operator control and monitoring........................................................................................1424
7.11.8.1 VlvS views..........................................................................................................................1424
7.11.8.2 VlvS standard view.............................................................................................................1424
7.11.8.3 VlvS preview......................................................................................................................1427
7.11.8.4 VlvS block icon...................................................................................................................1429
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve........................................................................................................1432
7.12.1 Description of VlvMotL.......................................................................................................1432
7.12.2 VlvMotL modes..................................................................................................................1437
7.12.3 VlvMotL functions...............................................................................................................1439
7.12.4 VlvMotL error handling.......................................................................................................1449
7.12.5 VlvMotL messaging............................................................................................................1452
7.12.6 VlvMotL I/Os.......................................................................................................................1453
7.12.7 VlvMotL block diagram.......................................................................................................1464
7.12.8 Operator control and monitoring........................................................................................1465
7.12.8.1 VlvMotL views....................................................................................................................1465
7.12.8.2 VlvMotL standard view.......................................................................................................1465
7.12.8.3 VlvMotL parameter view.....................................................................................................1469
7.12.8.4 VlvMotL preview.................................................................................................................1472
7.12.8.5 Block icon for VlvMotL........................................................................................................1476
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve........................................................................................................1480
7.13.1 Description of VlvAnL.........................................................................................................1480
7.13.2 VlvAnL modes....................................................................................................................1485
7.13.3 VlvAnL functions................................................................................................................1488
7.13.4 VlvAnL error handling.........................................................................................................1501
7.13.5 VlvAnL messaging.............................................................................................................1502
7.13.6 VlvAnL I/Os........................................................................................................................1504
7.13.7 VlvAnL block diagram........................................................................................................1517
7.13.8 Operator control and monitoring........................................................................................1518
7.13.8.1 VlvAnL views......................................................................................................................1518
7.13.8.2 VlvAnL standard view with auxiliary valve..........................................................................1519
7.13.8.3 VlvAnL standard view without auxiliary valve.....................................................................1525
7.13.8.4 VlvAnL limit view................................................................................................................1530
7.13.8.5 VlvAnL preview..................................................................................................................1533
7.13.8.6 VlvAnL parameter view......................................................................................................1538
7.13.8.7 Block icon for VlvAnL.........................................................................................................1539
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner.................................................................................................1543
7.14.1 Description of VlvPosL.......................................................................................................1543
7.14.2 VlvPosL modes..................................................................................................................1548
7.14.3 VlvPosL functions...............................................................................................................1551
7.14.4 VlvPosL error handling ......................................................................................................1566

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


18 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Table of contents

7.14.5 VlvPosL messaging............................................................................................................1569


7.14.6 VlvPosL I/Os......................................................................................................................1571
7.14.7 VlvPosL block diagram ......................................................................................................1584
7.14.8 Operator control and monitoring........................................................................................1585
7.14.8.1 VlvPosL views ...................................................................................................................1585
7.14.8.2 VlvPosL standard view.......................................................................................................1586
7.14.8.3 VlvPosL limit view..............................................................................................................1591
7.14.8.4 VlvPosL parameter view....................................................................................................1593
7.14.8.5 VlvPosL preview.................................................................................................................1597
7.14.8.6 Block icon for VlvPosL.......................................................................................................1602
8 Interlock blocks.......................................................................................................................................1605
8.1 Intlk02 - Interlock display with 2 input signals....................................................................1605
8.1.1 Description of Intlk02..........................................................................................................1605
8.1.2 Intlk02 modes.....................................................................................................................1608
8.1.3 Intlk02 functions.................................................................................................................1608
8.1.4 Intlk02 error handling.........................................................................................................1611
8.1.5 Intlk02 messaging..............................................................................................................1612
8.1.6 Intlk02 I/Os.........................................................................................................................1612
8.1.7 Intlk02 block diagram.........................................................................................................1616
8.1.8 Operator control and monitoring........................................................................................1616
8.1.8.1 Interlock block views..........................................................................................................1616
8.2 Intlk04 - Interlock display with 4 input signals....................................................................1617
8.2.1 Description of Intlk04..........................................................................................................1617
8.2.2 Intlk04 modes.....................................................................................................................1620
8.2.3 Intlk04 functions.................................................................................................................1620
8.2.4 Intlk04 error handling.........................................................................................................1624
8.2.5 Intlk04 messaging..............................................................................................................1625
8.2.6 Intlk04 I/Os.........................................................................................................................1625
8.2.7 Intlk04 block diagram.........................................................................................................1629
8.2.8 Operator control and monitoring........................................................................................1629
8.2.8.1 Interlock block views..........................................................................................................1629
8.3 Intlk08 - Interlock display with 8 input signals....................................................................1630
8.3.1 Description of Intlk08..........................................................................................................1630
8.3.2 Intlk08 modes.....................................................................................................................1633
8.3.3 Intlk08 functions.................................................................................................................1634
8.3.4 Intlk08 error handling.........................................................................................................1638
8.3.5 Intlk08 messaging..............................................................................................................1639
8.3.6 Intlk08 I/Os.........................................................................................................................1639
8.3.7 Intlk08 block diagram.........................................................................................................1644
8.3.8 Operator control and monitoring........................................................................................1644
8.3.8.1 Interlock block views..........................................................................................................1644
8.4 Intlk16 - Interlock display with 16 input signals..................................................................1645
8.4.1 Description of Intlk16..........................................................................................................1645
8.4.2 Intlk16 modes.....................................................................................................................1650
8.4.3 Intlk16 functions.................................................................................................................1650
8.4.4 Intlk16 error handling.........................................................................................................1654
8.4.5 Intlk16 messaging..............................................................................................................1655
8.4.6 Intlk16 I/Os.........................................................................................................................1655
8.4.7 Intlk16 block diagram.........................................................................................................1663
8.4.8 Operator control and monitoring........................................................................................1663

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 19
Table of contents

8.4.8.1 Interlock block views..........................................................................................................1663


8.5 Firstln - Transform output Intlck FirstIn for message associated value..............................1664
8.5.1 Description of Firstln..........................................................................................................1664
8.5.2 Firstln modes......................................................................................................................1665
8.5.3 Firstln functions..................................................................................................................1666
8.5.4 Firstln error handling..........................................................................................................1666
8.5.5 Firstln messaging...............................................................................................................1667
8.5.6 Firstln I/Os..........................................................................................................................1667
8.5.7 Firstln block diagram..........................................................................................................1668
9 Message blocks......................................................................................................................................1669
9.1 Event - Creating messages................................................................................................1669
9.1.1 Description of Event...........................................................................................................1669
9.1.2 Event modes......................................................................................................................1672
9.1.3 Event functions...................................................................................................................1672
9.1.4 Event error handling...........................................................................................................1674
9.1.5 Event messaging................................................................................................................1675
9.1.6 Event I/Os..........................................................................................................................1677
9.1.7 Event block diagram...........................................................................................................1681
9.2 EventNck - Generating messages without acknowledgment.............................................1682
9.2.1 Description of EventNck.....................................................................................................1682
9.2.2 EventNck modes................................................................................................................1684
9.2.3 EventNck functions............................................................................................................1685
9.2.4 EventNck error handling.....................................................................................................1687
9.2.5 EventNck messaging.........................................................................................................1688
9.2.6 EventNck I/Os....................................................................................................................1689
9.2.7 EventNck block diagram....................................................................................................1693
9.3 EventTs - Creating messages with time stamp..................................................................1694
9.3.1 Description of EventTs.......................................................................................................1694
9.3.2 EventTs modes..................................................................................................................1697
9.3.3 EventTs functions...............................................................................................................1698
9.3.4 EventTs error handling.......................................................................................................1700
9.3.5 EventTs messaging............................................................................................................1701
9.3.6 EventTs I/Os......................................................................................................................1704
9.3.7 EventTs block diagram.......................................................................................................1708
9.4 Event16Ts - Creating 16 messages with time stamp.........................................................1709
9.4.1 Description of Event16Ts...................................................................................................1709
9.4.2 Event16Ts operating modes..............................................................................................1714
9.4.3 Event16Ts functions...........................................................................................................1714
9.4.4 Event16Ts error handling...................................................................................................1717
9.4.5 Event16Ts messages ........................................................................................................1717
9.4.6 Event16Ts I/Os..................................................................................................................1723
9.4.7 Event16Ts block diagram...................................................................................................1725
10 Counter blocks........................................................................................................................................1727
10.1 CountScL - Counter with up and down counting direction.................................................1727
10.1.1 Description of CountScL....................................................................................................1727
10.1.2 CountScL modes................................................................................................................1731
10.1.3 CountScL functions............................................................................................................1732
10.1.4 CountScL error handling ...................................................................................................1735

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


20 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Table of contents

10.1.5 CountScL messaging.........................................................................................................1736


10.1.6 CountScL I/Os....................................................................................................................1737
10.1.7 CountScL block diagram....................................................................................................1741
10.1.8 Operator control and monitoring........................................................................................1742
10.1.8.1 CountScL views.................................................................................................................1742
10.1.8.2 CountScL standard view....................................................................................................1742
10.1.8.3 CountScL limit view............................................................................................................1744
10.1.8.4 CountScL parameter view..................................................................................................1745
10.1.8.5 CountScL preview..............................................................................................................1746
10.1.8.6 Block icon for CountScL.....................................................................................................1747
10.2 CountOh - Determining runtime.........................................................................................1749
10.2.1 Description of CountOh......................................................................................................1749
10.2.2 CountOh modes.................................................................................................................1753
10.2.3 CountOh functions.............................................................................................................1754
10.2.4 CountOh error handling......................................................................................................1758
10.2.5 CountOh messaging .........................................................................................................1759
10.2.6 CountOh I/Os.....................................................................................................................1760
10.2.7 CountOh block diagram.....................................................................................................1765
10.2.8 Operator control and monitoring........................................................................................1765
10.2.8.1 CountOh views...................................................................................................................1765
10.2.8.2 CountOh standard view......................................................................................................1766
10.2.8.3 CountOh limit view.............................................................................................................1768
10.2.8.4 CountOh parameter view...................................................................................................1769
10.2.8.5 CountOh preview...............................................................................................................1770
10.2.8.6 Block icon for CountOh......................................................................................................1771
10.3 TotalL - Additive counter with upward or downward counting direction (totalizer).............1773
10.3.1 Description of TotalL..........................................................................................................1773
10.3.2 TotalL operating modes.....................................................................................................1782
10.3.3 TotalL functions..................................................................................................................1783
10.3.4 TotalL error handling..........................................................................................................1787
10.3.5 TotalL messaging...............................................................................................................1789
10.3.6 TotalL I/Os..........................................................................................................................1790
10.3.7 TotalL block diagram..........................................................................................................1795
10.3.8 Operator control and monitoring........................................................................................1796
10.3.8.1 TotalL views.......................................................................................................................1796
10.3.8.2 TotalL standard view..........................................................................................................1797
10.3.8.3 TotalL limit view..................................................................................................................1800
10.3.8.4 TotalL parameter view........................................................................................................1801
10.3.8.5 TotalL preview....................................................................................................................1803
10.3.8.6 TotalL block icon................................................................................................................1804
10.4 CntOhSc - Runtime determination and counters with counting direction "up"...................1806
10.4.1 Description of CntOhSc......................................................................................................1806
10.4.2 CntOhSc operating modes.................................................................................................1808
10.4.3 CntOhSc functions.............................................................................................................1808
10.4.4 CntOhSc error handling.....................................................................................................1810
10.4.5 CntOhSc messaging..........................................................................................................1811
10.4.6 CntOhSc I/Os.....................................................................................................................1811
10.4.7 CntOhSc block diagram.....................................................................................................1814
10.4.8 Operator control and monitoring........................................................................................1814
10.4.8.1 CntOhSc views...................................................................................................................1814
10.4.8.2 CntOhSc standard view.....................................................................................................1815

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 21
Table of contents

10.4.8.3 CntOhSc limit view.............................................................................................................1817


10.4.8.4 CntOhSc preview...............................................................................................................1818
10.4.8.5 Block icon for CntOhSc......................................................................................................1819
11 Timers.....................................................................................................................................................1821
11.1 TimerP - Time delays signal forwarding / pulse generator.................................................1821
11.1.1 Description of TimerP.........................................................................................................1821
11.1.2 TimerP modes....................................................................................................................1822
11.1.3 TimerP functions................................................................................................................1822
11.1.4 TimerP error handling........................................................................................................1825
11.1.5 TimerP messaging.............................................................................................................1826
11.1.6 TimerP I/Os........................................................................................................................1826
11.1.7 TimerP block diagram........................................................................................................1828
11.2 TimeTrig - Calculations with the date formats DT and TIME ............................................1829
11.2.1 Description of TimeTrig......................................................................................................1829
11.2.2 TimeTrig modes.................................................................................................................1831
11.2.3 TimeTrig functions..............................................................................................................1832
11.2.4 TimeTrig error handling......................................................................................................1835
11.2.5 TimeTrig messaging...........................................................................................................1836
11.2.6 TimeTrig I/Os.....................................................................................................................1836
11.2.7 TimeTrig block diagram......................................................................................................1840
11.2.8 Operator control and monitoring........................................................................................1840
11.2.8.1 TimeTrig views...................................................................................................................1840
11.2.8.2 TimeTrig standard view......................................................................................................1841
11.2.8.3 TimeTrig parameter view...................................................................................................1843
11.2.8.4 TimeTrig preview................................................................................................................1845
11.2.8.5 Block icon for TimeTrig......................................................................................................1846
12 Mathematical blocks...............................................................................................................................1849
12.1 AbsR - Absolute value of a real value................................................................................1849
12.1.1 Description of AbsR...........................................................................................................1849
12.1.2 AbsR modes.......................................................................................................................1850
12.1.3 AbsR functions...................................................................................................................1850
12.1.4 AbsR error handling...........................................................................................................1850
12.1.5 AbsR messaging................................................................................................................1850
12.1.6 AbsR I/Os...........................................................................................................................1850
12.1.7 AbsR block diagram...........................................................................................................1851
12.2 Add04 - Adder with 4 values..............................................................................................1852
12.2.1 Description of Add04..........................................................................................................1852
12.2.2 Add04 modes.....................................................................................................................1853
12.2.3 Add04 functions.................................................................................................................1853
12.2.4 Add04 error handling..........................................................................................................1854
12.2.5 Add04 messaging..............................................................................................................1854
12.2.6 Add04 I/Os.........................................................................................................................1855
12.2.7 Add04 block diagram.........................................................................................................1856
12.3 Add08 - Adder with 8 values..............................................................................................1857
12.3.1 Description of Add08..........................................................................................................1857
12.3.2 Add08 modes.....................................................................................................................1858
12.3.3 Add08 functions.................................................................................................................1858
12.3.4 Add08 error handling..........................................................................................................1859
12.3.5 Add08 messaging..............................................................................................................1859

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


22 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Table of contents

12.3.6 Add08 I/Os.........................................................................................................................1860


12.3.7 Add08 block diagram.........................................................................................................1861
12.4 Average - Mean value calculation......................................................................................1862
12.4.1 Description of Average.......................................................................................................1862
12.4.2 Average modes..................................................................................................................1863
12.4.3 Average functions..............................................................................................................1864
12.4.4 Average error handling.......................................................................................................1864
12.4.5 Average messaging...........................................................................................................1865
12.4.6 Average I/Os......................................................................................................................1866
12.4.7 Average block diagram......................................................................................................1867
12.5 DeadTime - Delayed signal output.....................................................................................1868
12.5.1 Description of DeadTime....................................................................................................1868
12.5.2 DeadTime modes...............................................................................................................1870
12.5.3 DeadTime functions...........................................................................................................1870
12.5.4 DeadTime error handling...................................................................................................1871
12.5.5 DeadTime messaging........................................................................................................1872
12.5.6 DeadTime I/Os...................................................................................................................1873
12.5.7 DeadTime block diagram...................................................................................................1874
12.6 Derivative - Obtaining a derivative.....................................................................................1875
12.6.1 Description of Derivative....................................................................................................1875
12.6.2 Derivative modes...............................................................................................................1877
12.6.3 Derivative functions............................................................................................................1878
12.6.4 Derivative error handling....................................................................................................1879
12.6.5 Derivative messaging.........................................................................................................1879
12.6.6 Derivative I/Os....................................................................................................................1880
12.6.7 Derivative block diagram....................................................................................................1881
12.7 Div02 - Division of two values............................................................................................1882
12.7.1 Description of Div02...........................................................................................................1882
12.7.2 Div02 modes......................................................................................................................1883
12.7.3 Div02 functions...................................................................................................................1883
12.7.4 Div02 error handling...........................................................................................................1884
12.7.5 Div02 messaging................................................................................................................1885
12.7.6 Div02 I/Os..........................................................................................................................1885
12.7.7 Div02 block diagram...........................................................................................................1886
12.8 FlowCorr - Flow correction.................................................................................................1887
12.8.1 Description of FlowCorr......................................................................................................1887
12.8.2 FlowCorr modes.................................................................................................................1889
12.8.3 FlowCorr functions.............................................................................................................1890
12.8.4 FlowCorr error handling.....................................................................................................1891
12.8.5 FlowCorr messaging..........................................................................................................1892
12.8.6 FlowCorr I/Os.....................................................................................................................1892
12.8.7 FlowCorr block diagram.....................................................................................................1894
12.9 Integral - Generating a time integral...................................................................................1895
12.9.1 Description of Integral........................................................................................................1895
12.9.2 Integral modes...................................................................................................................1896
12.9.3 Integral functions................................................................................................................1897
12.9.4 Integral error handling........................................................................................................1899
12.9.5 Integral messaging.............................................................................................................1900
12.9.6 Integral I/Os........................................................................................................................1900

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 23
Table of contents

12.9.7 Integral block diagram........................................................................................................1901


12.10 Lag - Low-pass filter...........................................................................................................1903
12.10.1 Description of Lag..............................................................................................................1903
12.10.2 Lag modes.........................................................................................................................1905
12.10.3 Lag functions......................................................................................................................1905
12.10.4 Lag error handling..............................................................................................................1906
12.10.5 Lag messaging...................................................................................................................1907
12.10.6 Lag I/Os..............................................................................................................................1908
12.10.7 Lag block diagram..............................................................................................................1909
12.11 MeanTime - Averaging.......................................................................................................1910
12.11.1 Description of MeanTime...................................................................................................1910
12.11.2 MeanTime modes..............................................................................................................1911
12.11.3 MeanTime functions...........................................................................................................1911
12.11.4 MeanTime error handling...................................................................................................1914
12.11.5 MeanTime messaging........................................................................................................1914
12.11.6 MeanTime I/Os...................................................................................................................1915
12.11.7 MeanTime block diagram...................................................................................................1916
12.12 Mul04 - Multiplier with 4 values..........................................................................................1917
12.12.1 Description of Mul04..........................................................................................................1917
12.12.2 Mul04 modes......................................................................................................................1919
12.12.3 Mul04 functions..................................................................................................................1919
12.12.4 Mul04 error handling..........................................................................................................1920
12.12.5 Mul04 messaging...............................................................................................................1920
12.12.6 Mul04 I/Os..........................................................................................................................1921
12.12.7 Mul04 block diagram..........................................................................................................1922
12.13 Mul08 - Multiplier with 8 values..........................................................................................1923
12.13.1 Description of Mul08..........................................................................................................1923
12.13.2 Mul08 modes......................................................................................................................1924
12.13.3 Mul08 functions..................................................................................................................1924
12.13.4 Mul08 error handling..........................................................................................................1925
12.13.5 Mul08 messaging...............................................................................................................1926
12.13.6 Mul08 I/Os..........................................................................................................................1926
12.13.7 Mul08 block diagram..........................................................................................................1927
12.14 Polygon - Converting the first signal (non-linear) ..............................................................1929
12.14.1 Description of Polygon.......................................................................................................1929
12.14.2 Polygon modes..................................................................................................................1932
12.14.3 Polygon functions...............................................................................................................1932
12.14.4 Polygon error handling.......................................................................................................1933
12.14.5 Polygon messaging............................................................................................................1934
12.14.6 Polygon I/Os.......................................................................................................................1935
12.14.7 Polygon block diagram.......................................................................................................1938
12.15 Smooth - Low pass filter.....................................................................................................1939
12.15.1 Description of Smooth .......................................................................................................1939
12.15.2 Smooth modes...................................................................................................................1940
12.15.3 Smooth functions...............................................................................................................1940
12.15.4 Smooth error handling........................................................................................................1941
12.15.5 Smooth messaging............................................................................................................1942
12.15.6 Smooth I/Os.......................................................................................................................1943
12.15.7 Smooth block diagram.......................................................................................................1944

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


24 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Table of contents

12.16 SqrRoot - Derive the root of a value...................................................................................1945


12.16.1 Description of SqrRoot.......................................................................................................1945
12.16.2 SqrRoot modes..................................................................................................................1946
12.16.3 SqrRoot functions...............................................................................................................1946
12.16.4 SqrRoot error handling.......................................................................................................1947
12.16.5 SqrRoot messaging............................................................................................................1947
12.16.6 SqrRoot I/Os......................................................................................................................1948
12.16.7 SqrRoot block diagram.......................................................................................................1949
12.17 Sub02 - Subtracting two values.........................................................................................1950
12.17.1 Description of Sub02..........................................................................................................1950
12.17.2 Sub02 modes.....................................................................................................................1951
12.17.3 Sub02 functions.................................................................................................................1951
12.17.4 Sub02 error handling..........................................................................................................1952
12.17.5 Sub02 messaging..............................................................................................................1952
12.17.6 Sub02 I/Os.........................................................................................................................1953
12.17.7 Sub02 block diagram.........................................................................................................1954
12.18 PowerXY - General power function....................................................................................1955
12.18.1 Description of PowerXY.....................................................................................................1955
12.18.2 PowerXY modes................................................................................................................1956
12.18.3 PowerXY functions.............................................................................................................1957
12.18.4 PowerXY error handling.....................................................................................................1957
12.18.5 PowerXY messaging..........................................................................................................1958
12.18.6 PowerXY I/Os.....................................................................................................................1958
12.18.7 PowerXY block diagrams...................................................................................................1959
13 Analog logic blocks.................................................................................................................................1961
13.1 CompAn02 - Comparison of two analog values.................................................................1961
13.1.1 Description of CompAn02..................................................................................................1961
13.1.2 CompAn02 modes.............................................................................................................1962
13.1.3 CompAn02 functions..........................................................................................................1962
13.1.4 CompAn02 error handling..................................................................................................1963
13.1.5 CompAn02 messaging.......................................................................................................1964
13.1.6 CompAn02 I/Os..................................................................................................................1964
13.1.7 CompAn02 block diagram..................................................................................................1965
13.2 Limit - Limiting an analog value..........................................................................................1966
13.2.1 Description of Limit.............................................................................................................1966
13.2.2 Limit modes........................................................................................................................1968
13.2.3 Limit functions....................................................................................................................1968
13.2.4 Limit error handling............................................................................................................1969
13.2.5 Limit messaging.................................................................................................................1970
13.2.6 Limit I/Os............................................................................................................................1970
13.2.7 Limit block diagram............................................................................................................1971
13.3 MuxAn03 - Selection of an analog value to increase availability / safety...........................1972
13.3.1 Description of MuxAn03.....................................................................................................1972
13.3.2 MuxAn03 modes................................................................................................................1973
13.3.3 MuxAn03 functions.............................................................................................................1973
13.3.4 MuxAn03 error handling.....................................................................................................1976
13.3.5 MuxAn03 messaging..........................................................................................................1977
13.3.6 MuxAn03 I/Os....................................................................................................................1977
13.3.7 MuxAn03 block diagram.....................................................................................................1979

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 25
Table of contents

13.4 MuxAn08 - Selection of an analog value to increase availability / safety...........................1980


13.4.1 Description of MuxAn08.....................................................................................................1980
13.4.2 MuxAn08 modes................................................................................................................1980
13.4.3 MuxAn08 functions.............................................................................................................1981
13.4.4 MuxAn08 error handling.....................................................................................................1983
13.4.5 MuxAn08 messaging..........................................................................................................1983
13.4.6 MuxAn08 I/Os....................................................................................................................1983
13.4.7 MuxAn08 block diagram.....................................................................................................1985
13.5 RateLim - Signal ramp.......................................................................................................1986
13.5.1 Description of RateLim.......................................................................................................1986
13.5.2 RateLim modes..................................................................................................................1987
13.5.3 RateLim functions..............................................................................................................1987
13.5.4 RateLim error handling.......................................................................................................1990
13.5.5 RateLim messaging...........................................................................................................1990
13.5.6 RateLim I/Os......................................................................................................................1991
13.5.7 RateLim block diagram......................................................................................................1993
13.6 RedAn02 - 1 out of 2 selection for redundant analog values.............................................1994
13.6.1 Description of RedAn02.....................................................................................................1994
13.6.2 RedAn02 modes................................................................................................................1995
13.6.3 RedAn02 functions.............................................................................................................1995
13.6.4 RedAn02 error handling.....................................................................................................1996
13.6.5 RedAn02 messaging..........................................................................................................1996
13.6.6 RedAn02 I/Os.....................................................................................................................1997
13.6.7 RedAn02 block diagram.....................................................................................................1998
13.7 SelA02In - Output of two analog values.............................................................................1999
13.7.1 Description of SelA02In......................................................................................................1999
13.7.2 SelA02In modes.................................................................................................................2000
13.7.3 SelA02In functions.............................................................................................................2000
13.7.4 SelA02In error handling.....................................................................................................2001
13.7.5 SelA02In messaging..........................................................................................................2002
13.7.6 SelA02In I/Os.....................................................................................................................2002
13.7.7 SelA02In block diagram.....................................................................................................2003
13.8 SelA16In - Output of 16 analog values..............................................................................2004
13.8.1 Description of SelA16In......................................................................................................2004
13.8.2 SelA16In modes.................................................................................................................2005
13.8.3 SelA16In functions.............................................................................................................2006
13.8.4 SelA16In error handling.....................................................................................................2009
13.8.5 SelA16In messaging..........................................................................................................2010
13.8.6 SelA16In I/Os.....................................................................................................................2010
13.8.7 SelA16In block diagram.....................................................................................................2014
13.8.8 Operator control and monitoring........................................................................................2015
13.8.8.1 SelA16In views...................................................................................................................2015
13.8.8.2 SelA16In standard view.....................................................................................................2016
13.8.8.3 SelA16In preview...............................................................................................................2017
13.8.8.4 Block icon for SelA16In......................................................................................................2018
13.9 SelAn16L - Large version of SelAn16In.............................................................................2021
13.9.1 Description of SelAn16L.....................................................................................................2021
13.9.2 SelAn16L modes................................................................................................................2023
13.9.3 SelAn16L functions............................................................................................................2023

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


26 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Table of contents

13.9.4 SelAn16L error handling....................................................................................................2026


13.9.5 SelAn16L messaging.........................................................................................................2027
13.9.6 SelAn16L I/Os....................................................................................................................2027
13.9.7 SelAn16L block diagram ...................................................................................................2033
13.9.8 Operaror control and monitoring........................................................................................2033
13.9.8.1 SenAn16L views................................................................................................................2033
13.9.8.2 SelAn16L standard view....................................................................................................2034
13.9.8.3 SelAn16L preview..............................................................................................................2035
13.9.8.4 Block icon for SelAn16L.....................................................................................................2037
14 Digital logic blocks..................................................................................................................................2039
14.1 And04 - Forming an AND signal from 4 binary input signals.............................................2039
14.1.1 Description of And04..........................................................................................................2039
14.1.2 And04 modes.....................................................................................................................2040
14.1.3 And04 functions.................................................................................................................2040
14.1.4 And04 error handling..........................................................................................................2041
14.1.5 And04 messaging..............................................................................................................2041
14.1.6 And04 I/Os.........................................................................................................................2042
14.1.7 And04 block diagram.........................................................................................................2043
14.2 And08 - Forming an AND signal from 8 binary input signals.............................................2044
14.2.1 Description of And08..........................................................................................................2044
14.2.2 And08 modes.....................................................................................................................2045
14.2.3 And08 functions.................................................................................................................2045
14.2.4 And08 error handling..........................................................................................................2045
14.2.5 And08 messaging..............................................................................................................2046
14.2.6 And08 I/Os.........................................................................................................................2046
14.2.7 And08 block diagram.........................................................................................................2048
14.3 FlipFlop - preparation of a bistabile flip-flop.......................................................................2049
14.3.1 Description of FlipFlop.......................................................................................................2049
14.3.2 FlipFlop modes...................................................................................................................2050
14.3.3 FlipFlop functions...............................................................................................................2051
14.3.4 FlipFlop error handling.......................................................................................................2052
14.3.5 FlipFlop messaging............................................................................................................2053
14.3.6 FlipFlop I/Os.......................................................................................................................2053
14.3.7 FlipFlop block diagram.......................................................................................................2054
14.4 Or04 - Forming an OR signal from 4 binary input signals..................................................2055
14.4.1 Description of Or04............................................................................................................2055
14.4.2 Or04 modes.......................................................................................................................2056
14.4.3 Or04 functions....................................................................................................................2057
14.4.4 Or04 error handling............................................................................................................2057
14.4.5 Or04 messaging.................................................................................................................2058
14.4.6 Or04 I/Os............................................................................................................................2058
14.4.7 Or04 block diagram............................................................................................................2059
14.5 Or08 - Forming an OR signal from 8 binary input signals..................................................2060
14.5.1 Description of Or08............................................................................................................2060
14.5.2 Or08 modes.......................................................................................................................2061
14.5.3 Or08 functions....................................................................................................................2061
14.5.4 Or08 error handling............................................................................................................2062
14.5.5 Or08 messaging.................................................................................................................2062
14.5.6 Or08 I/Os............................................................................................................................2063

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 27
Table of contents

14.5.7 Or08 block diagram............................................................................................................2064


14.6 Not01 - Inversion of an input signal....................................................................................2065
14.6.1 Description of Not01...........................................................................................................2065
14.6.2 Not01 modes......................................................................................................................2066
14.6.3 Not01 functions..................................................................................................................2066
14.6.4 Not01 error handling..........................................................................................................2066
14.6.5 Not01 messaging...............................................................................................................2067
14.6.6 Not01 I/Os..........................................................................................................................2067
14.6.7 Not01 block diagram..........................................................................................................2068
14.7 RedDi02 - 1 out of 2 selection for redundant digital values................................................2069
14.7.1 Description of RedDi02......................................................................................................2069
14.7.2 RedDi02 modes.................................................................................................................2070
14.7.3 RedDi02 functions..............................................................................................................2070
14.7.4 RedDi02 error handling......................................................................................................2071
14.7.5 RedDi02 messaging...........................................................................................................2071
14.7.6 RedDi02 I/Os......................................................................................................................2072
14.7.7 RedDi02 block diagram......................................................................................................2073
14.8 SelD02In - Output of one of two digital signals..................................................................2074
14.8.1 Description of SelD02In.....................................................................................................2074
14.8.2 SelD02In modes.................................................................................................................2075
14.8.3 SelD02In functions.............................................................................................................2075
14.8.4 SelD02In error handling.....................................................................................................2076
14.8.5 SelD02In messaging..........................................................................................................2076
14.8.6 SelD02In I/Os.....................................................................................................................2077
14.8.7 SelD02In block diagram.....................................................................................................2078
14.9 StrctCom - Structure composer for 32-bit structures..........................................................2079
14.9.1 Description of StrctCom.....................................................................................................2079
14.9.2 StrctCom modes................................................................................................................2080
14.9.3 StrctCom functions.............................................................................................................2080
14.9.4 StrctCom error handling.....................................................................................................2081
14.9.5 StrctCom messaging..........................................................................................................2081
14.9.6 StrctCom I/Os.....................................................................................................................2081
14.9.7 StrctCom block diagram.....................................................................................................2082
14.10 StrctDeC - Structure decomposer for 32-bit structures......................................................2084
14.10.1 Description of StrctDeC......................................................................................................2084
14.10.2 StrctDeC modes.................................................................................................................2085
14.10.3 StrctDeC functions.............................................................................................................2085
14.10.4 StrctDeC error handling.....................................................................................................2086
14.10.5 StrctDeC messaging..........................................................................................................2086
14.10.6 StrctDeC I/Os.....................................................................................................................2086
14.10.7 StrctDeC block diagram.....................................................................................................2087
14.11 Trigger - Detection of rising and falling edges....................................................................2089
14.11.1 Description of Trigger.........................................................................................................2089
14.11.2 Trigger modes....................................................................................................................2090
14.11.3 Trigger functions................................................................................................................2091
14.11.4 Trigger error handling.........................................................................................................2091
14.11.5 Trigger messaging.............................................................................................................2092
14.11.6 Trigger I/Os........................................................................................................................2092
14.11.7 Trigger block diagram........................................................................................................2093

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


28 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Table of contents

14.12 XOr04 - EXCLUSIVE OR logic operation...........................................................................2094


14.12.1 Description of XOr04..........................................................................................................2094
14.12.2 XOr04 modes.....................................................................................................................2095
14.12.3 XOr04 functions.................................................................................................................2095
14.12.4 XOr04 error handling..........................................................................................................2096
14.12.5 XOr04 messaging..............................................................................................................2096
14.12.6 XOr04 I/Os.........................................................................................................................2097
14.12.7 XOr04 block diagram.........................................................................................................2098
15 Generator blocks....................................................................................................................................2099
15.1 NoiseGen - Generating signal noise..................................................................................2099
15.1.1 Description of NoiseGen....................................................................................................2099
15.1.2 NoiseGen I/Os....................................................................................................................2100
16 Channel blocks.......................................................................................................................................2101
16.1 Information on using channel blocks..................................................................................2101
16.2 FbAnIn - Analog input channel block for field devices.......................................................2103
16.2.1 Description of FbAnIn.........................................................................................................2103
16.2.2 FbAnIn modes....................................................................................................................2105
16.2.3 FbAnIn functions................................................................................................................2105
16.2.4 FbAnIn error handling........................................................................................................2107
16.2.5 FbAnIn messaging.............................................................................................................2108
16.2.6 FbAnIn I/Os........................................................................................................................2109
16.2.7 FbAnIn block diagram........................................................................................................2111
16.3 FbAnOu - Analog output channel block for field devices...................................................2112
16.3.1 Description of FbAnOu.......................................................................................................2112
16.3.2 FbAnOu modes..................................................................................................................2114
16.3.3 FbAnOu functions..............................................................................................................2114
16.3.4 FbAnOu error handling.......................................................................................................2116
16.3.5 FbAnOu messaging...........................................................................................................2116
16.3.6 FbAnOu I/Os......................................................................................................................2117
16.3.7 FbAnOu block diagram......................................................................................................2121
16.4 FbAnTot - Analog totalizer channel block for field devices................................................2122
16.4.1 Description of FbAnTot......................................................................................................2122
16.4.2 FbAnTot modes..................................................................................................................2123
16.4.3 FbAnTot functions..............................................................................................................2123
16.4.4 FbAnTot error handling......................................................................................................2125
16.4.5 FbAnTot messaging...........................................................................................................2125
16.4.6 FbAnTot I/Os......................................................................................................................2125
16.4.7 FbAnTot block diagram......................................................................................................2128
16.5 FbDiIn - Digital input channel block for field devices..........................................................2129
16.5.1 Description of FbDiIn..........................................................................................................2129
16.5.2 FbDiIn modes.....................................................................................................................2130
16.5.3 FbDiIn functions.................................................................................................................2131
16.5.4 FbDiIn error handling.........................................................................................................2133
16.5.5 FbDiIn messaging..............................................................................................................2133
16.5.6 FbDiIn I/Os.........................................................................................................................2134
16.5.7 FbDiIn block diagram.........................................................................................................2137
16.6 FbDiOu - Digital output channel block for field devices......................................................2138

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 29
Table of contents

16.6.1 Description of FbDiOu........................................................................................................2138


16.6.2 FbDiOu modes...................................................................................................................2140
16.6.3 FbDiOu functions...............................................................................................................2140
16.6.4 FbDiOu error handling........................................................................................................2142
16.6.5 FbDiOu messaging............................................................................................................2142
16.6.6 FbDiOu I/Os.......................................................................................................................2143
16.6.7 FbDiOu block diagram.......................................................................................................2147
16.7 FbDrive - Channel block for compact drives......................................................................2148
16.7.1 Description of FbDrive........................................................................................................2148
16.7.2 FbDrive modes...................................................................................................................2149
16.7.3 FbDrive functions...............................................................................................................2149
16.7.4 FbDrive error handling.......................................................................................................2151
16.7.5 FbDrive messaging............................................................................................................2151
16.7.6 FbDrive status word...........................................................................................................2151
16.7.7 FbDrive I/Os.......................................................................................................................2152
16.7.8 FbDrive block diagram.......................................................................................................2158
16.8 FbEnMe - Channel block for ET 200SP Energy Meter......................................................2159
16.8.1 Description of FbEnMe.......................................................................................................2159
16.8.2 FbEnMe modes..................................................................................................................2160
16.8.3 FbEnMe functions..............................................................................................................2160
16.8.4 FbEnMe error handling......................................................................................................2162
16.8.5 FbEnMe messaging...........................................................................................................2162
16.8.6 FbEnMe I/Os......................................................................................................................2163
16.8.7 FbEnMe block diagram......................................................................................................2169
16.9 FbSwtMMS - Channel block for MM starter.......................................................................2170
16.9.1 Description of FbSwtMMS..................................................................................................2170
16.9.2 FbSwtMMS modes.............................................................................................................2171
16.9.3 FbSwtMMS functions.........................................................................................................2171
16.9.4 FbSwtMMS error handling.................................................................................................2172
16.9.5 FbSwtMMS messaging......................................................................................................2173
16.9.6 FbSwtMMS status word.....................................................................................................2173
16.9.7 FbSwtMMS I/Os.................................................................................................................2174
16.9.8 FbSwtMMS block diagram.................................................................................................2178
16.10 Pcs7AnIn - Analog input channel block..............................................................................2179
16.10.1 Description of Pcs7AnIn.....................................................................................................2179
16.10.2 Pcs7AnIn modes................................................................................................................2181
16.10.3 Pcs7AnIn functions............................................................................................................2182
16.10.4 Pcs7AnIn error handling.....................................................................................................2186
16.10.5 Pcs7AnIn messaging.........................................................................................................2187
16.10.6 Pcs7AnIn I/Os....................................................................................................................2187
16.10.7 Pcs7AnIn block diagram....................................................................................................2190
16.11 Pcs7AnOu - Analog output channel block..........................................................................2191
16.11.1 Description of Pcs7AnOu...................................................................................................2191
16.11.2 Pcs7AnOu modes..............................................................................................................2194
16.11.3 Pcs7AnOu functions...........................................................................................................2194
16.11.4 Pcs7AnOu error handling...................................................................................................2196
16.11.5 Pcs7AnOu messaging........................................................................................................2197
16.11.6 Pcs7AnOu I/Os..................................................................................................................2197
16.11.7 Pcs7AnOu block diagram...................................................................................................2200

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


30 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Table of contents

16.12 Pcs7DiIn - Digital input channel block................................................................................2201


16.12.1 Description of Pcs7DiIn......................................................................................................2201
16.12.2 Pcs7DiIn modes.................................................................................................................2203
16.12.3 Pcs7DiIn functions.............................................................................................................2204
16.12.4 Pcs7DiIn error handling......................................................................................................2205
16.12.5 Pcs7DiIn messaging..........................................................................................................2206
16.12.6 Pcs7DiIn I/Os.....................................................................................................................2206
16.12.7 Pcs7DiIn block diagram.....................................................................................................2208
16.13 Pcs7DiIT - Digital input channel block with time stamp......................................................2210
16.13.1 Description of Pcs7DiIT......................................................................................................2210
16.13.2 Pcs7DiIT modes.................................................................................................................2212
16.13.3 Pcs7DiIT functions.............................................................................................................2212
16.13.4 Pcs7DiIT error handling.....................................................................................................2214
16.13.5 Pcs7DiIT messaging..........................................................................................................2215
16.13.6 Pcs7DiIT I/Os.....................................................................................................................2215
16.13.7 Pcs7DiIT block diagram.....................................................................................................2218
16.14 Pcs7DiOu - Digital output channel block............................................................................2220
16.14.1 Description of Pcs7DiOu....................................................................................................2220
16.14.2 Pcs7DiOu modes...............................................................................................................2222
16.14.3 Pcs7DiOu functions............................................................................................................2222
16.14.4 Pcs7DiOu error handling....................................................................................................2223
16.14.5 Pcs7DiOu messaging.........................................................................................................2224
16.14.6 Pcs7DiOu I/Os...................................................................................................................2225
16.14.7 Pcs7DiOu block diagram....................................................................................................2227
16.15 Pcs7Cnt1 - Controlling and reading FM 350 modules.......................................................2228
16.15.1 Description of Pcs7Cnt1.....................................................................................................2228
16.15.2 Pcs7Cnt1 modes................................................................................................................2230
16.15.3 Pcs7Cnt1 functions............................................................................................................2230
16.15.4 Pcs7Cnt1 error handling....................................................................................................2232
16.15.5 Pcs7Cnt1 messaging.........................................................................................................2233
16.15.6 Pcs7Cnt1 I/Os....................................................................................................................2233
16.15.7 Pcs7Cnt1 block diagram....................................................................................................2237
16.16 Pcs7Cnt2 - Control and read an 8-DI_NAMUR module of the ET 200iSP.........................2238
16.16.1 Description of Pcs7Cnt2.....................................................................................................2238
16.16.2 Pcs7Cnt2 modes................................................................................................................2241
16.16.3 Pcs7Cnt2 functions............................................................................................................2241
16.16.4 Pcs7Cnt2 error handling....................................................................................................2243
16.16.5 Pcs7Cnt2 messaging.........................................................................................................2244
16.16.6 Pcs7Cnt2 I/Os....................................................................................................................2244
16.16.7 Pcs7Cnt2 block diagram....................................................................................................2246
16.17 Pcs7Cnt3 - Control and read the 1 COUNT 24V/100kHz module for count mode............2247
16.17.1 Description of Pcs7Cnt3.....................................................................................................2247
16.17.2 Pcs7Cnt3 modes................................................................................................................2249
16.17.3 Pcs7Cnt3 functions............................................................................................................2249
16.17.4 Pcs7Cnt3 error handling....................................................................................................2250
16.17.5 Pcs7Cnt3 messaging.........................................................................................................2251
16.17.6 Pcs7Cnt3 I/Os....................................................................................................................2251
16.17.7 Pcs7Cnt3 block diagram....................................................................................................2255
16.18 Pcs7HaAI - HART variable channel block for AI-HART modules......................................2256

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 31
Table of contents

16.18.1 Description of Pcs7HaAI....................................................................................................2256


16.18.2 Pcs7HaAI modes...............................................................................................................2257
16.18.3 Pcs7HaAI functions............................................................................................................2257
16.18.4 Pcs7HaAI error handling....................................................................................................2258
16.18.5 Pcs7HaAI messaging.........................................................................................................2258
16.18.6 Pcs7HaAI I/Os....................................................................................................................2259
16.18.7 Pcs7HaAI block diagram....................................................................................................2261
16.19 Pcs7HaAO - HART variable channel block for AO-HART modules...................................2263
16.19.1 Description of Pcs7HaAO..................................................................................................2263
16.19.2 Pcs7HaAO modes..............................................................................................................2264
16.19.3 Pcs7HaAO functions..........................................................................................................2264
16.19.4 Pcs7HaAO error handling..................................................................................................2265
16.19.5 Pcs7HaAO messaging.......................................................................................................2265
16.19.6 Pcs7HaAO I/Os..................................................................................................................2266
16.19.7 Pcs7HaAO block diagram..................................................................................................2268
16.20 Annex for channel blocks...................................................................................................2270
16.20.1 Mode Settings for SM Modules..........................................................................................2270
16.20.2 Mode settings for field devices...........................................................................................2281
17 Conversion blocks..................................................................................................................................2283
17.1 StrgToBy - String in byte structure (Struct of Byte)............................................................2283
17.1.1 Description of StrgToBy.....................................................................................................2283
17.1.2 StrgToBy modes................................................................................................................2284
17.1.3 StrgToBy functions.............................................................................................................2284
17.1.4 StrgToBy error handling.....................................................................................................2285
17.1.5 StrgToBy messaging..........................................................................................................2285
17.1.6 StrgToBy I/Os.....................................................................................................................2285
17.1.7 StrgToBy block diagram.....................................................................................................2286
17.2 StruAnIn - Separating an analog structured variable.........................................................2287
17.2.1 Description of StruAnIn......................................................................................................2287
17.2.2 StruAnIn modes.................................................................................................................2288
17.2.3 StruAnIn functions..............................................................................................................2288
17.2.4 StruAnIn error handling......................................................................................................2288
17.2.5 StruAnIn messaging...........................................................................................................2289
17.2.6 StruAnIn I/Os......................................................................................................................2289
17.2.7 StruAnIn block diagram......................................................................................................2290
17.3 StruAnOu - Creating an analog structured variable...........................................................2291
17.3.1 Description of StruAnOu....................................................................................................2291
17.3.2 StruAnOu modes................................................................................................................2292
17.3.3 StruAnOu functions............................................................................................................2292
17.3.4 StruAnOu error handling....................................................................................................2292
17.3.5 StruAnOu messaging.........................................................................................................2293
17.3.6 StruAnOu I/Os....................................................................................................................2293
17.3.7 StruAnOu block diagram....................................................................................................2294
17.4 StruDiIn - Separating a digital structured variable..............................................................2295
17.4.1 Description of StruDiIn.......................................................................................................2295
17.4.2 StruDiIn modes..................................................................................................................2296
17.4.3 StruDiIn functions...............................................................................................................2296
17.4.4 StruDiIn error handling.......................................................................................................2296
17.4.5 StruDiIn messaging............................................................................................................2297

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


32 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Table of contents

17.4.6 StruDiIn I/Os.......................................................................................................................2297


17.4.7 StruDiIn block diagram.......................................................................................................2298
17.5 StruDiOu - Creating a digital structured variable................................................................2299
17.5.1 Description of StruDiOu.....................................................................................................2299
17.5.2 StruDiOu modes.................................................................................................................2300
17.5.3 StruDiOu functions.............................................................................................................2300
17.5.4 StruDiOu error handling.....................................................................................................2300
17.5.5 StruDiOu messaging..........................................................................................................2301
17.5.6 StruDiOu I/Os.....................................................................................................................2301
17.5.7 StruDiOu block diagram.....................................................................................................2302
17.6 StruScIn - Separating a display area into two variables.....................................................2303
17.6.1 Description of StruScIn......................................................................................................2303
17.6.2 StruScIn modes..................................................................................................................2304
17.6.3 StruScIn functions..............................................................................................................2304
17.6.4 StruScIn error handling......................................................................................................2304
17.6.5 StruScIn messaging...........................................................................................................2305
17.6.6 StruScIn I/Os......................................................................................................................2305
17.6.7 StruScIn block diagram......................................................................................................2306
17.7 StruScOu - Merging two variables into a display area.......................................................2307
17.7.1 Description of StruScOu.....................................................................................................2307
17.7.2 StruScOu modes................................................................................................................2308
17.7.3 StruScOu functions............................................................................................................2308
17.7.4 StruScOu error handling....................................................................................................2308
17.7.5 StruScOu messaging.........................................................................................................2309
17.7.6 StruScOu I/Os....................................................................................................................2309
17.7.7 StruScOu block diagram....................................................................................................2310
17.8 STIn - Separating the signal status into individual binary displays....................................2311
17.8.1 Description of STIn.............................................................................................................2311
17.8.2 STIn modes........................................................................................................................2312
17.8.3 STIn functions....................................................................................................................2312
17.8.4 STIn error handling............................................................................................................2312
17.8.5 STIn messaging.................................................................................................................2313
17.8.6 STIn I/Os............................................................................................................................2313
17.8.7 STIn block diagram............................................................................................................2314
17.9 STOu - Merging individual binary signals into a signal status............................................2315
17.9.1 Description of STOu...........................................................................................................2315
17.9.2 STOu modes......................................................................................................................2316
17.9.3 STOu functions..................................................................................................................2316
17.9.4 STOu error handling...........................................................................................................2316
17.9.5 STOu messaging...............................................................................................................2317
17.9.6 STOu I/Os..........................................................................................................................2317
17.9.7 STOu block diagram..........................................................................................................2318
17.10 MSTIn - Separating the maintenance status into individual status displays......................2319
17.10.1 Description of MSTIn..........................................................................................................2319
17.10.2 MSTIn modes.....................................................................................................................2320
17.10.3 MSTIn functions.................................................................................................................2320
17.10.4 MSTIn error handling.........................................................................................................2320
17.10.5 MSTIn messaging..............................................................................................................2321
17.10.6 MSTIn I/Os.........................................................................................................................2321

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 33
Table of contents

17.10.7 MSTIn block diagram.........................................................................................................2322


17.11 MSTOu - Merging individual status displays into a maintenance status............................2323
17.11.1 Description of MSTOu........................................................................................................2323
17.11.2 MSTOu modes...................................................................................................................2324
17.11.3 MSTOu functions...............................................................................................................2324
17.11.4 MSTOu error handling........................................................................................................2324
17.11.5 MSTOu messaging............................................................................................................2325
17.11.6 MSTOu I/Os.......................................................................................................................2325
17.11.7 MSTOu block diagram.......................................................................................................2326
17.12 RealToDw - Converting REAL to DWORD........................................................................2327
17.12.1 Description of RealToDw...................................................................................................2327
17.12.2 RealToDw modes...............................................................................................................2328
17.12.3 ReaLToDw functions..........................................................................................................2328
17.12.4 RealToDw error handling...................................................................................................2328
17.12.5 RealToDw messaging........................................................................................................2328
17.12.6 RealToDw I/Os...................................................................................................................2329
17.12.7 RealToDw block diagram...................................................................................................2329
17.13 StateMap - Conversion of other signal states into APL signal states ...............................2330
17.13.1 Description of StateMap.....................................................................................................2330
17.13.2 StateMap modes................................................................................................................2331
17.13.3 StateMap functions............................................................................................................2331
17.13.4 StateMap error handling.....................................................................................................2331
17.13.5 StateMap messaging.........................................................................................................2331
17.13.6 StateMap I/Os....................................................................................................................2331
17.13.7 StateMap block diagram....................................................................................................2332
18 Maintenance blocks................................................................................................................................2333
18.1 MuxMST - Determination of the worst maintenance status...............................................2333
18.1.1 Description of MuxMST......................................................................................................2333
18.1.2 MuxMST modes.................................................................................................................2334
18.1.3 MuxMST functions.............................................................................................................2334
18.1.4 MuxMST error handling .....................................................................................................2335
18.1.5 MuxMST messaging..........................................................................................................2335
18.1.6 MuxMST I/Os.....................................................................................................................2336
18.1.7 MuxMST block diagram.....................................................................................................2336
18.2 MuxST- Determination of the worst signal status...............................................................2338
18.2.1 Description of MuxST.........................................................................................................2338
18.2.2 MuxST modes....................................................................................................................2339
18.2.3 MuxST functions................................................................................................................2339
18.2.4 MuxST error handling.........................................................................................................2340
18.2.5 MuxST messaging.............................................................................................................2340
18.2.6 MuxST I/Os........................................................................................................................2341
18.2.7 MuxST block diagram........................................................................................................2342
18.3 STRep - Status display of block groups.............................................................................2343
18.3.1 Description of STRep.........................................................................................................2343
18.3.2 STRep modes....................................................................................................................2344
18.3.3 STRep functions.................................................................................................................2344
18.3.4 STRep error handling.........................................................................................................2344
18.3.5 STRep messaging..............................................................................................................2344
18.3.6 STRep I/Os........................................................................................................................2344

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


34 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Table of contents

18.3.7 STRep block diagram.........................................................................................................2345


18.4 AssetM - Process variable monitoring for violation of limits...............................................2346
18.4.1 Description of AssetM........................................................................................................2346
18.4.2 AssetM modes...................................................................................................................2349
18.4.3 AssetM functions................................................................................................................2349
18.4.4 AssetM error handling........................................................................................................2350
18.4.5 AssetM messages..............................................................................................................2350
18.4.6 AssetM I/Os........................................................................................................................2351
18.4.7 AssetM block diagram........................................................................................................2353
19 System blocks........................................................................................................................................2355
19.1 AddInt64 - Addition of two 64-bit integer variables.............................................................2355
19.1.1 Description of AddInt64......................................................................................................2355
19.2 AddR64 - Addition of two 64-bit REAL variables................................................................2356
19.2.1 Description of AddR64.......................................................................................................2356
19.3 DiToInt64 - Converting from DINT to Int64........................................................................2357
19.3.1 Description of DiToInt64.....................................................................................................2357
19.4 Int64ToDi - Converting from Int64 to DINT........................................................................2358
19.4.1 Description of Int64ToDi.....................................................................................................2358
19.5 MemR256 - Increasing the number of internal previous values.........................................2359
19.5.1 Description of MemR256....................................................................................................2359
19.6 NegInt64 - Negation of an Int64 variable...........................................................................2360
19.6.1 Description of NegInt64......................................................................................................2360
19.7 NegR64 - Negation of a Real64 variable...........................................................................2361
19.7.1 Description of NegR64.......................................................................................................2361
19.8 PIDCoefR - Calculation of coefficients ..............................................................................2362
19.8.1 Description of PIDCoefR....................................................................................................2362
19.9 R64ToReal - Converting Real64 to REAL .........................................................................2363
19.9.1 Description of R64ToReal..................................................................................................2363
19.10 RealToR64 - Converting REAL to Real64..........................................................................2364
19.10.1 Description of RealToR64..................................................................................................2364
19.11 SelST16 - Output of the best or worst signal status...........................................................2365
19.11.1 Description of SelST16......................................................................................................2365
19.12 ShLeInt64 - Left shift of an Int64 variable..........................................................................2366
19.12.1 Description of ShLeInt64....................................................................................................2366
19.13 ShRiInt64 - Right shift of an Int64 variable.........................................................................2367
19.13.1 Description of ShRiInt64....................................................................................................2367
19.14 PIDKernR - Calculation of the manipulated variable..........................................................2368
19.14.1 Description of PIDKernR....................................................................................................2368
20 Communication blocks...........................................................................................................................2369
20.1 Snd_DigVal - Send Boolean values including quality code (Snd_DigVal)..........................2369
20.1.1 Description of Snd_DigVal.................................................................................................2369
20.1.2 Snd_DigVal modes.............................................................................................................2370
20.1.3 Snd_DigVal functions.........................................................................................................2370

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 35
Table of contents

20.1.4 Snd_DigVal error handling.................................................................................................2371


20.1.5 Snd_DigVal messages.......................................................................................................2371
20.1.6 Snd_DigVal I/Os.................................................................................................................2371
20.1.7 Snd_DigVal block diagram.................................................................................................2371
20.2 Rcv_DigVal - Receive Boolean values including quality code (Rcv_DigVal).....................2372
20.2.1 Description of Rcv_DigVal..................................................................................................2372
20.2.2 Rcv_DigVal modes.............................................................................................................2373
20.2.3 Rcv_DigVal functions.........................................................................................................2374
20.2.4 Rcv_DigVal error handling.................................................................................................2374
20.2.5 Rcv_DigVal messages.......................................................................................................2374
20.2.6 Rcv_DigVal I/Os.................................................................................................................2374
20.2.7 Rcv_DigVal block diagram.................................................................................................2375
20.3 Snd_AnaVal - Send analog values including quality code (SND_AnaVal).........................2376
20.3.1 Description of Snd_AnaVal................................................................................................2376
20.3.2 Snd_AnaVal modes............................................................................................................2377
20.3.3 Snd_AnaVal functions........................................................................................................2377
20.3.4 Snd_AnaVal error handling................................................................................................2377
20.3.5 Snd_AnaVal messages......................................................................................................2378
20.3.6 Snd_AnaVal I/Os................................................................................................................2378
20.3.7 Snd_AnaVal block diagram................................................................................................2378
20.4 Rcv_AnaVal - Receive analog values including quality code (Rcv_AnaVal)......................2379
20.4.1 Description of Rcv_AnaVal.................................................................................................2379
20.4.2 Rcv_AnaVal modes............................................................................................................2380
20.4.3 Rcv_AnaVal functions........................................................................................................2380
20.4.4 Rcv_AnaVal error handling................................................................................................2381
20.4.5 Rcv_AnaVal messages......................................................................................................2381
20.4.6 Rcv_AnaVal I/Os................................................................................................................2381
20.4.7 Rcv_AnaVal block diagram................................................................................................2382
21 Process tag types (insertible templates).................................................................................................2383
21.1 Introduction to process tag types.......................................................................................2383
21.2 PID controller (PIDControl_Lean).......................................................................................2386
21.3 PID controller for PA/FF devices (PIDControl_Lean_Fb)...................................................2387
21.4 PID controller with safety logic and control loop monitoring (PIDConL_ConPerMon)........2388
21.5 PIDConR with safety logic and control loop monitoring (PIDConR_ConPerMon)..............2389
21.6 PID controller with safety logic and manipulated variable ramp (PIDConR_MV_Ramp). ..2390
21.7 PID - control with operating-point-oriented parameter control (GainScheduling)...............2391
21.8 PID controller with dynamic feedforward control (FfwdDisturbCompensat).......................2393
21.9 PID controller with Smith predictor (SmithPredictorControl)..............................................2396
21.10 Step controller with direct access to the actuator and without position feedback
(StepControlDirect)............................................................................................................2397
21.11 Step controller with assigned actuator block and position feedback (StepControlActor). ..2398
21.12 Split-range controller with control loop monitoring through ConPerMon
(SplitrangeControl).............................................................................................................2399
21.13 Split-Range control (SplitRangeControl_Lean)..................................................................2401

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


36 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Table of contents

21.14 Ratio control with control loop monitoring through ConPerMon (RatioControl).................2402
21.15 Ratio control (RatioControl_Lean)......................................................................................2404
21.16 Ratio control with PIDConR (RatioR).................................................................................2405
21.17 Cascade control with control loop monitoring through ConPerMon (CascadeControl)......2406
21.18 Cascade control (CascadeControl_Lean)..........................................................................2408
21.19 Cascade control with PIDConR (CascadeR).....................................................................2409
21.20 Cascade control with PIDStepL (CascadeStepControl).....................................................2410
21.21 Source chart for GainSched function block (gain scheduling)...........................................2411
21.22 Override control..................................................................................................................2412
21.23 Override control with PIDConR (OverrideR)......................................................................2414
21.24 Model-based predictive control (ModPreCon)....................................................................2415
21.25 Monitoring of a digital process tag (DigitalMonitoring).......................................................2417
21.26 Monitoring a digital process tag for PA/FF devices (DigitalMonitoring_Fb)........................2418
21.27 Monitoring eight digital process tags (Digital8Monitoring)..................................................2419
21.28 Monitoring an analog process tag (AnalogMonitoring).......................................................2420
21.29 Monitoring of an analog process tag for PA/FF devices (AnalogMonitoring_Fb)...............2421
21.30 Dosing (Dose_Lean)..........................................................................................................2422
21.31 Dosing with PA/FF devices (Dose_Lean_Fb).....................................................................2423
21.32 Motor (Motor_Lean)............................................................................................................2424
21.33 Motor with PROFIdrive Drive Profile telegram 1 and 20 (Namur)......................................2425
21.34 Two-speed motor (Motor2Speed)......................................................................................2426
21.35 Reversing motor (MotorReversible)...................................................................................2427
21.36 Reversible motor with controllable speed (MotorSpeedControlled)...................................2428
21.37 Motor with an additional analog value and time-stamped signals (Motor_AV_EventTs)....2429
21.38 Motor according to the profile for low voltage switchgear devices with profile 1 of the
MM_Starter.........................................................................................................................2430
21.39 Valve (Valve_Lean)............................................................................................................2431
21.40 Two-way valve (Valve2Way)..............................................................................................2432
21.41 Motor valve (ValveMotor)...................................................................................................2433
21.42 Control valve (VlvAnL) ......................................................................................................2434
21.43 Control valve for PA/FF devices (ValveAnalog_Fb)...........................................................2435
21.44 Example project APL_Example_xx....................................................................................2436
21.44.1 Introduction to the PCS 7 example project for Advanced Process Control........................2436
21.44.2 Process simulation including noise generator (ProcSimC; ProcSimS)..............................2437
21.44.3 Cascade control of temperature by using the heat flow (CascadeSim).............................2439
21.44.4 Control loop monitoring for simulation with colored noise (ConPerMonSim).....................2441

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 37
Table of contents

21.44.5 Feedforward control to compensate a measurable disturbance variable


(DisturbCompSim)..............................................................................................................2441
21.44.6 Operating point-oriented adaptation of parameters (gain scheduling) for non-linear
processes (GainSchedSim)...............................................................................................2442
21.44.7 Override control on a pipeline (OverrideSim).....................................................................2443
21.44.8 Smith predictor for a dead time system (SmithPredictorSim)............................................2443
21.44.9 Filtering of noisy measured values in a control loop (SigSmoothSim)...............................2444
21.44.10 Predictive control of a 2x2 multi-variable controlled system (ModPreConSim)..................2445
21.44.11 Predictive control of a non-linear process (ModPreConNonLinSim)..................................2445
22 Definitions...............................................................................................................................................2447
22.1 Batch process....................................................................................................................2447
22.2 Approximation....................................................................................................................2448
22.3 Prediction horizon..............................................................................................................2449
22.4 Trajectory...........................................................................................................................2450
22.5 Maverick.............................................................................................................................2451
22.6 Ergodic process.................................................................................................................2452
22.7 Conti process.....................................................................................................................2453
22.8 Multivariable controller.......................................................................................................2454
22.9 non-phase minimum...........................................................................................................2455
Index.......................................................................................................................................................2457

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


38 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Security information 1
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines, and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens’ products and solutions only form one element of such a concept.
Customer is responsible to prevent unauthorized access to its plants, systems, machines and
networks. Systems, machines and components should only be connected to the enterprise
network or the internet if and to the extent necessary and with appropriate security measures
(e.g. use of firewalls and network segmentation) in place.
Additionally, Siemens’ guidance on appropriate security measures should be taken into
account. You can find more information about industrial security by visiting:
https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity.
Siemens’ products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure.
Siemens strongly recommends you apply product updates as soon as available and always
use the latest product versions. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and
failure to apply latest updates may increase customer’s exposure to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under
https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 39
Security information

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


40 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL 2
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.1 General information

2.1.1.1 User-configured message classes

User-configured message classes


The message classes Alarm, Warning and Tolerance, the corresponding abbreviations in
symbols and colors, and the terms used in this documentation are not valid for user-configured
message classes.
These terms and colors depend on the project-specific setting. The user-configured messages
classes are only supported for block symbols as of V8.

2.1.1.2 Forcing operating modes

Forcing operating modes


The "forcing of operating modes" function lets you set the function block into a different
operating mode using interconnectable input parameters, regardless of the currently active
control. This can, for example, be:
● Forces tracking for closed-loop controllers and control valves
● Enabling and disabling at motors
● Opening and closing of valves
It is only possible to force operating modes with "Large" blocks in the following operating modes:
● Manual mode
● Automatic mode
● Local mode (only if Feature2.Bit8 = 1)
Forcing operating modes has the highest priority over all three operating modes.

Note
It is not possible to force operating modes in local mode.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 41
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Forcing operating modes at closed-loop controllers


In control engineering, this procedure is also known as forced tracking of values. Refer to the
Tracking and limiting a manipulated variable (Page 205) section for more on this.

Forcing operating modes at motors and valves


The input parameter xxxxForce = 1 (for example OpenForce and CloseForce at a valve)
is used for forced controlling of the function block and thus an intervention in the function of
the block, irrespective of currently active controls, interlock conditions and monitoring errors.
If the input parameters are inconsistent (for example OpenForce = 1 and CloseForce =
1 at valves), an error number (Page 121) is output at the parameter ErrorNum and the control
remains unchanged.

Note
If you have set the parameters for the advance warning time WarnTiMan and the idle time
IdleTime to values higher than 0, the control will only take effect once the set times have
elapsed.

Note
With block VlvAnl, the warning time is ignored in tracking MV_TrkOn = 1 and in forced tracking
MV_ForOn.

The Enabling direct changeover between forward and reverse (Page 149) feature bit has no
effect when forcing the operating modes of the MotRevL and MotSpdCL blocks. Direct
switchover between forward and reverse is always possible.

Display in the faceplate and in the block icon


If an operating mode is forced, this is displayed in the block icon and in the standard view of
the faceplate:
Block icon: In the block icon, the display for motors, valves and dosers involves the use of a
red F and a crossed-out padlock.
There is no display for closed-loop controllers.
Faceplate: An information text on the forced operating mode is displayed in the standard view
of the faceplate, for example, "Forced stop" for motors. This is also indicated by a crossed-out
padlock:

Messaging
No messages are assigned to the forcing of operating modes. However, if you want to have
corresponding messages, you can use the freely interconnectable input parameters to
generate the messages. Refer also to the Generating instance-specific messages (Page 213)
section for more on this.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


42 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.1.3 Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors

Resetting the block


The block must be reset when an interlock has been set via the Protect input ("Protection"),
Trip ("Protection") or an error has occurred ("Runtime" or "Control", external error FaultExt
or CSF with Feature.Bit18).

Note
"Small" blocks do not feature protection (Protect).

The RdyToReset output signals when a reset can be carried out via the RstLi input
parameter or the automatic commands.
There are different ways to reset the block:
● Reset by interconnection (input RstLi).
● Reset by the operator using a button in the faceplate (input RstOp).
● Reset with a 0-1 edge transition in the corresponding automatic or local signal (except with
motor protection). Refer to the following sections for more information.

Note
The reset via input RstLi or RstOp does not depend on the selected operating mode.

The operator must have the appropriate authorization to use the reset function in the faceplate
(OS_Perm). After a reset, the output parameter P_Rst is set for a cycle.

Note
Note for VlvMotL and VlvPosL
After resetting the block, in the case of interlocks or errors, the valve position will always be
tracked, depending on FbkOpen and FbkClose.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 43
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Resetting monitoring errors and interlocks in manual and automatic mode


You can influence the reaction using the following Feature Bits:
● Feature.Bit9: Resetting via input signals in the event of interlocking (Protection) or
errors (Page 167)
● Feature.Bit30: Set reset depending on the operating mode or the LiOp parameter
(Page 167)
● Feature.Bit31: Activating reset of protection / error in manual mode (Page 168)
Note
The following applies for valves:
With MonSafePos = 0, no reset is required; the valve can be moved in spite of the
response fault.

Resetting monitoring errors, external errors and interlocks in local mode


The monitoring error can occur in local mode if you have set 1, 3 or 5 for the input parameter
LocalSetting (see Local mode (Page 80)). When LocalSetting is set to 2 or 4, a
monitoring error can only occur when a rapid stop is triggered.
The following applies with LocalSetting 1 or 3:
The monitoring error, the external error and the interlocks cannot be reset when the control
and feedback signals do not match.
● When the control and feedback signals match, the monitoring error, external error and the
interlocks are reset by stopping (StopLocal = 1) the drive.
● With Vlv2WayL in the MonSafePos = 1 setting, a monitoring error is reset by
Pos0Local = 1.
● With VlvL, VlvMotL in the MonSafePos = 1 setting, a monitoring error is reset with the
local command, which moves the valve to the neutral position.
● With Vlv2WayL, VlvMotL and VlvL in the MonSafePos = 0 setting, no reset of the
monitoring error is required. The currently pending control is in effect.
● With Vlv2WayL, VlvL and VlvMotL, an external error is reset with the local command,
which moves the valve to the neutral position
● With DoseL, you must acknowledge the protection (Protect) and flow alarms with a
positive edge at the "CancelLocal" or "PauseLocal" output parameter.

The following applies with LocalSetting 2, 4 or 5:


No reset required.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


44 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Resetting motor protection (Trip) in local mode


In local mode, the "Motor protection" display is reset in the faceplate and not using the Reset
button available there. The display disappears as soon as Trip = 1, the activation signals
and feedback match and a command for stopping the drive has been issued.

Note
A motor protection signal (Trip parameter) with signal status 16#00 or 16#28 is used to activate
motor protection. This is indicated by "Motor protection" in the standard view of the faceplates.

Resetting monitoring errors, external errors and interlocks using the "Forcing operating states" function
With "Forcing operating states", monitoring errors, external errors, interlocks or the motor
protection function are reset under the following conditions and a reset pulse is output at the
P_Rst output:
● The block is in an operating mode in which a reset is necessary and
● a monitoring error, an external error, a "Protection" interlock or the motor protection function
is ready to be reset. This can be seen in the faceplate with the reset button or with the
Request 0/1 indicator in the faceplate. When Feature.Bit19 = 1, the block is ready to
reset as soon as the protection (Protect = 0) or motor protection (Trip = 0) interlock
is set, whereby enabled motor protection prevents the motor from starting.
See also the following chapter: Forcing operating modes (Page 41).

Tabular overview for resetting for interlocks and errors

Permit Interlock Protect


Meaning Activation enable ("Permis‐ Interlock without reset ("Inter‐ Interlock with reset ("Protec‐
sion") lock") tion")
Description The activation enable (input A pending interlock condition A pending interlock condition
Permit = 1) makes it possi‐ brings the block to the neutral brings the block to the neutral
ble to leave the neutral posi‐ position (input Intlock = 0). position (input Protect = 0).
tion of the block in response
to operator input or a com‐
mand from the program
(CFC/SFC). The activation
enable has no effect if the
block is not in the neutral po‐
sition.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 45
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Permit Interlock Protect


Mode: Takes effect if block is in the
After the interlock condition Feature.Bit9 and 30 = 0:
Automatic neutral position. has gone, the currently pend‐ Reset via faceplate or RstLi
After the interlock condition ing control function becomes =1
has gone, the currently pend‐ active again. Feature.Bit9 = 1 and 30 =
ing control function becomes 0: Reset via faceplate or
active again. RstLi = 1 or a 0-1 edge tran‐
sition in the control
Feature.Bit9 = 0 and 30 =
1: Reset via RstLi = 1
Feature.Bit9 and 30 = 1:
Reset via RstLi = 1 or a
0-1 edge transition in the con‐
trol = 1 or 0-1 edge transition
in the control
Mode: Takes effect if block is in the
After the interlock condition The following applies with
Local neutral position. has gone, the currently pend‐ LocalSetting = 1 or 3:
After the interlock condition ing control function becomes Generally: When the control
has gone, the currently pend‐ active again. and feedback signals match,
ing control function becomes reset via StopLocal = 1.
active again. Vlv2WayL, VlvMotL und
VlvL: Reset via local com‐
mand, which moves the valve
into the neutral position.
DoseL: Reset via a positive
edge at "CancelLocal" or
"PauseLocal".
The following applies with
LocalSetting = 2,4 or 5:
No reset required
Mode: Takes effect if block is in the The faceplate can be operat‐ Feature.Bit30 and 31 =
Manual neutral position. ed again after the interlock 0: Resetting not necessary
condition has gone. Feature.Bit30 = 1 and 31
It is possible to leave the neu‐ = 0: Resetting not necessary
tral position with an operation Feature.Bit30 = 0 and 31
in the faceplate. = 1: Reset via faceplate or
RstLi = 1
Feature.Bit30 and 31 = 1:
Reset via faceplate

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


46 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Trip Error Rapid stop


Meaning Motor protection Monitoring errors and exter‐ Rapid stop
nal errors
Description The motor protection function ● Monitoring the startup A rapid stop stops the drive
is used to switch off the motor and stop characteristics immediately.
when there is a heat overload for motors or the runtime
(input Trip = 0). of valves
● Monitoring the operation
of motors or the
maintenance of the
position of valves
● External error FaultExt:
Block goes to error state
without a message being
output.
● External control system
fault CSF with set
Feature.Bit18: block
reports an external
control system fault and
goes to error state.
Mode: Feature.Bit9 and 30 = 0: Reset via faceplate or RstLi = Feature.Bit9 = 0: Reset
Automatic 1 via faceplate or RstLi = 1
Feature.Bit9 = 1 and 30 = 0: Reset via faceplate or Feature.Bit9 = 1: Reset
RstLi = 1 or a 0-1 edge transition in the control via faceplate or RstLi = 1 or
Feature.Bit9 = 0 and 30 = 1: Reset via RstLi = 1 a 0-1 edge transition in the
control
Feature.Bit9 and 30 = 1: Reset via RstLi = 1 or a 0-1
edge transition in the control = 1 or 0-1 edge transition in the
control

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 47
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Trip Error Rapid stop


Mode: The following applies with The following applies with The rapid stop function is un‐
Local LocalSetting = 1 or 3: LocalSetting = 1 or 3: locked in the faceplate via the
When the control and feed‐ ● When the control and "Reset" button (RstOp = 1).
back signals of the drive In CFC, unlocking is carried
feedback signals of the
match, reset via StopLocal out using the input parameter
drive match, reset via
= 1. RstLi = 1
StopLocal = 1.
The following applies with ● With Vlv2WayL, VlvMotL
LocalSetting = 2, 4 or 5:
and VlvL
No reset required.
– Monitoring error with
MonSafePos = 1:
Reset via the local
command, which
moves the valve into
the neutral position.
– Monitoring error with
MonSafePos = 0:
No resetting required;
the currently pending
control function is
active.
– External error: Reset
via the local
command, which
moves the valve into
the neutral position.
● With DoseL, resetting via
a positive edge at
"CancelLocal" or
"PauseLocal".
The following applies with
LocalSetting = 2, 4 or 5:
No reset required.
Mode: Feature.Bit30 and 31 = 0: Resetting not necessary The rapid stop function is un‐
Manual Feature.Bit30 = 1 and 31 = 0: Resetting not necessary locked in the faceplate via the
"Reset" button (RstOp = 1).
Feature.Bit30 = 0 and 31 = 1 Reset via faceplate or
In CFC, unlocking is carried
RstLi = 1
out using the input parameter
Feature.Bit30 and 31 = 1: Reset via faceplate RstLi = 1

2.1.1.4 Neutral position for motors, valves and controllers

Neutral position for motors, valves and controllers


The neutral position always represents the deenergized state.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


48 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Neutral position for motors


The neutral position for motors is always the stopped motor.
The neutral position is adopted when:
● The function Monitoring the feedbacks (Page 98) was triggered.
● One of the interlock conditions is active (see Interlocks (Page 101)).
● An external error via FaultExt or CSF was triggered (see Error handling (Page 121)).
● The Motor protection function (Page 100) was triggered.
● The function Rapid stop for motors (Page 108) was triggered.
● During start-up (see Set startup characteristics (Page 141)).
● The "Out of service" mode is active.
● One of the automatic commands has bad signal status (16#00 or 16#28) and the
Feature2 bit Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values
(Page 190) is set to 1.

Neutral position for valves


There are different forms of the deenergized state for valves:
● Valve is closed in a de-energized state
● Valve is open in a de-energized state
● Valve is stopped in a de-energized state (e.g. motor valve)
The input parameter SafePos is used to set these properties of the valve:
● SafePos = 0: Valve is closed in a de-energized state
● SafePos = 1: Valve is open in a de-energized state
● SafePos = 2: Valve is stopped in a de-energized state (e.g. motor valve)
The neutral position is adopted when:
● The function Monitoring the feedbacks (Page 98) was triggered.
● One of the interlock conditions is active (see Interlocks (Page 101)).
● An external error via FaultExt or CSF was triggered (see Error handling (Page 121)).
● During start-up (see Set startup characteristics (Page 141)).
● The "Out of service" mode is active.
● One of the automatic commands has bad signal status (16#00 or 16#28) and the
Feature2 bit Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values
(Page 190) is set to 1.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 49
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Neutral position for the VlvAnL and VlvPosL blocks (actuator)


The possible neutral positions are set by the SafePos parameter:
● SafePos = 0: Neutral position of the control valve is "Closed"
(MV.Value = MV_LoLim)
● SafePos = 1: Neutral position of the control valve is "Open" (MV.Value = MV_HiLim)
● SafePos = 2: Neutral position of the control valve is "Stop" (MV.Value remains
unchanged)
The control valve VlvAnL is brought to the neutral position when the
FbkAuxVCloseOut = 1 auxiliary valve is closed.
The neutral position of the control valve VlvAnL and VlvPosL is adopted when:
● The function Monitoring the feedbacks (Page 98) was triggered.
● One of the interlock conditions is active (see Interlocks (Page 101)).
● An external error via FaultExt or CSF was triggered (see Error handling (Page 121)).
● During start-up (see Set startup characteristics (Page 141)).
● The "Out of service" mode is active.
● One of the automatic commands has bad signal status (16#00 or 16#28) and the
Feature2 bit Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values
(Page 190) is set to 1.
In case of startup or “Out of service” mode, the valve VlvAnL has additional Feature bits for
adopting the neutral position:
● During start-up, if the Feature bit Set startup characteristics (Page 141) and the
Feature bit Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect at startup (Page 169) are
set.
● In the "Out of service" mode, if the Feature bit Neutral position manipulated variable takes
effect with "out of service" operating mode (Page 170) is set.

Neutral position for continuous controllers (does not apply to controller modules)
● Only the limits or a special analog value for the manual value are taken into consideration
for the neutral position with continuous controllers.
The input parameter SafePos is used to specify the neutral position:
– SafePos = 0 corresponds to the low limit (ManLoLim or MV_LoLim for PIDConS)
– SafePos = 1 corresponds to the high limit (ManHiLim or MV_HiLim for PIDConS)
● The input parameters SafePos and SafePos2 are used to determine the neutral position:

SafePos SafePos2 Neutral position Remarks


=0 =0 ManLoLim for PIDConL, PIDConR or MV_LoLim for Low limit for manipulated variable in
PIDConS manual mode
=1 =0 ManHiLim for PIDConL, PIDConR or MV_HiLim for High limit for manipulated variable in
PIDConS manual mode

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


50 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

SafePos SafePos2 Neutral position Remarks


x =1 MV_SafePos Manipulated variable neutral position
x =2 Last manipulated variable (stop) Last manipulated variable (stop)

x: Not relevant
The neutral position is adopted:
● The interlock conditions is active (see Interlocks (Page 101) only at PIDConL and
PIDConR).
In case of startup or "Out of service" mode, the controller has additional Feature bits for
adopting the neutral position:
● During start-up, if the Feature bit Set startup characteristics (Page 141) and the
Feature bit Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect at startup (Page 169) are
set.
● In the "Out of service" mode, if the Feature bit Neutral position manipulated variable takes
effect with "out of service" operating mode (Page 170) is set.

Neutral position for step controllers (does not apply to controller modules)
You can use the input parameter SafePos to determine if the step controller should close,
open or stop the valve when it enters the neutral position:
SafePos = 0: close valve
SafePos = 1: open valve
SafePos = 2: stop valve
When the neutral position (fully opened or fully closed) is reached and a limit stop signal
(FbkOpened or FbkClosed) is set, the valve is stopped (Stop = 1).
The neutral position is adopted:
● during start-up if the Feature bit Set startup characteristics (Page 141) and the
Feature bit Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect at startup (Page 169) are
set.
● in the "Out of service" mode if the Feature bit Neutral position manipulated variable takes
effect with "out of service" operating mode (Page 170) is set.

Safety control for controllers of the FM 355 or FM 355-2 modules


The controller modules have their own mechanism for feedforwarding a safety value (see
Temperature Controller FM 355-2 manual or Controller Module FM 355 manual)

2.1.1.5 Specifying warning times for control functions at motors and valves

Specifying warning times for control functions at motors and valves


This function is only supported by "Large" blocks.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 51
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

You can generate warning signals when, for example, motors are started or valves are opened.
Warning signals can be generated in the following modes:
● Manual mode (input parameter WarnTiMan)
● Automatic mode (input parameter WarnTiAut)
You specify the warning times in seconds using the input parameters WarnTiMan and
WarnTiAut. If, for example, a motor is started then, this is displayed at the output parameter
with WarnAct = 1. The motor then starts after the configured warning time has expired and
WarnAct is reset (WarnAct = 0).
A corresponding warning is not output if the warning times (WarnTiMan or WarnTiAut) are
specified with a smaller value than the SampleTime parameter.

Note
In this case, the warning time is only active if the block is controlled from the de-energized
state.

Disabling warnings
Configure each parameter with 0 seconds to generate no warnings.

2.1.1.6 Output signal as a static signal or pulse signal

Output signal as a static signal or pulse signal


You can output the control signals for motors, valves and dosers as:
● Static signal or as a
● Pulse signal with configurable pulse length.
You can find the signals in the I/O table of the individual blocks.

Note
The pulse signal is available only for the "large" blocks.

Output signal as a static signal


The control settings are made available as a static signal in the blocks in the form of
interconnectable output parameters. The MotRevL block, for example, provides these as static
signals via the alternative output parameters Fwd, Rev and Run.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


52 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Output signal as a pulse signal


The control is made available as pulse signals at the blocks using interconnectable output
parameters. You specify the pulse length of the output signals in seconds using the input
parameter PulseWidth. The MotRevL block, for example, provides these as pulse signals
via the output parameters P_Fwd, P_Rev and P_Stop.

Fwd

P_Fwd
PulseW idth

Rev

P_Rev
PulseW idth

P_Stop
PulseW idth

Note
Almost all output parameters for pulse control, for example P_Fwd, P_Rev, P_Ctrl, have a
positive effective direction, i.e. a 0→1→0 pulse triggers activation.
The only exception is the P_Stop output parameter with a negative effective direction, i.e. a
1→0→1 pulse triggers activation.

2.1.1.7 Recording the first signal for interlock blocks

Recording the first signal


You activate the function described below using the Feature bit " Activating recording of the
first signal (Page 154)".
The number of the input that caused the last output signal change from 1 to 0 (good state to
locked) is displayed for you in bit coding at the FirstIn output. The cause may be:
● A signal change at the input or a change in inversion
Example: With an OR logic operation, the single 1 changes to 0. The output then changes
from 1 to 0.
● A change to the I/O
Example: Excluding the single 1 then results in an output of 0 with an OR logic operation.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 53
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

● A change to the signal status


If the signal status of the input, which forms the output value alone and has the value 1,
changes from 16#80 to 16#00, the output value changes from 1 to 0.
● FirstIn is not changed if the following events occur, despite a change to the output:
– Change in output value from or to DefaultOut
If several signals are at the same time responsible for the change, all responsible inputs are
indicated in the faceplate and output in bit coding in the FirstIn output. If the input signals
change without this causing the signal at the output to change, FirstIn does not change.
Inputs which are not interconnected or which are excluded are not taken into account.
You can reset FirstIn to 0 if you set the RstLi input from 0 to 1 (positive edge) or you can
operate the RstOp input using the faceplate ("Reset" button).
If at least one bit in FirstIn is set, other signal changes are not taken into account.

2.1.1.8 Outputting a signal for start readiness

Outputting a signal for start readiness


The RdyToStart = 1 output parameter is used to indicate start readiness in automatic mode.
Start readiness is output when the following conditions are met:
● No group error pending (group fault with consideration of Feature.bit18 for CSF and
MonSafePos for feedback errors)
● No interlock is active
● No forced operating mode or manipulated variable is active
● No rapid stop is active (only applies to motors or VlvMotL)
● The block is in automatic mode (not with controller blocks)
● The waiting time for the restart must have expired (only applies to motors or VlvMotL)
The start readiness is shown at the following block groups via the RdyToStart output
parameter:
● Motors
● Valves
● Dosers
● Software controller
● Hardware controller

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


54 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Start readiness for motors


The start readiness for motor blocks is formed as follows:

)HHGEDFNHUURU
0RQ[[[(UU 
*URXSHUURU

! 
*URXSIDXOWWDNLQJLQWR
([WHUQDOHUURU DFFRXQWIHDWXUHELWZLWK
*US(UU &6)
&6) 
)HDWXUHELW $XWR
([WHUQDOHUURU ! 
)DXOW([W

0RWRUSURWHFWLRQ
7ULS 

:DLWWLPHIRUUHVWDUWH[SLUHG 5HDG\WRSRZHUXSLQDXWRPDWLF
ODUJHEORFNVRQO\

%ORFNLQDXWR
5G\7R6WDUW
$XW$FW 
)RUFLQJRSHUDWLQJ
PRGHV
ODUJHEORFNVRQO\
[)RUFH,QSXW$FWLYH 

%ORFNQRWLQWHUORFNHG
/RFN$FW 

5DSLGVWRSQRWDFWLYH
ODUJHEORFNVRQO\
5B6WS$FW 
Figure 2-1 Output signal for start readiness for motors

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 55
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Start readiness for valves


The start readiness for valve blocks is formed as follows:

*URXSHUURU
)HHGEDFNHUURU
0RQ[[[(UU 
9OY0RW/0RWRUSURWHFWLRQ
7ULS  !  *US(UU

([WHUQDOHUURU
&6) 

([WHUQDOHUURU
)DXOW([W

*URXSIDXOWWDNLQJLQWRDFFRXQW
0RQ6DIH3RVDQG)HDWXUHELW


0RQ6DIH3RV 
! 

)HDWXUHELW $XWR

5HDG\WRSRZHUXSLQDXWRPDWLF
9OY0RW/:DLWWLPHIRU
UHVWDUWH[SLUHG

%ORFNLQDXWR 5G\7R6WDUW
$XW$FW 
)RUFLQJRSHUDWLQJ
PRGHV
ODUJHEORFNVRQO\
[)RUFH,QSXW$FWLYH 

%ORFNQRWLQWHUORFNHG
/RFN$FW 

9OY0RW/5DSLGVWRSQRW
DFWLYH
5B6WS$FW 
Figure 2-2 Output signal for start readiness for valves

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


56 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Start readiness for dosers


The start readiness for dosers is formed as follows:

([WHUQDOHUURU )DXOW([W ! 
([WHUQDOHUURU &6)  *US(UU

5HDG\WRSRZHUXSLQDXWRPDWLF


)HDWXUHELW $XWR
%ORFNLQDXWR
5G\7R6WDUW
$XW$FW 

)RUFLQJRSHUDWLQJ
PRGHV
[)RUFH,QSXW$FWLYH 

%ORFNQRWLQWHUORFNHG
/RFN$FW 

'RVLQJVWDWXV
1RWUDFNLQJ
'RV5HOD[ 

1RQH
8QGHUGRVLQJ
'4B$/B$FW 
4XDQWLW\QRWUHDFKHG ! 
'4B2XW'4B63

5HVHWWLQJWKHGRVDJH
TXDQWLW\DWGRVDJHVWDUW
)HDWXUH%LW 

Figure 2-3 Output signal for start readiness for dosers

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 57
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Start readiness for software controllers


The start readiness for software controllers is formed as follows:

([WHUQDOHUURU *US(UU
&6) 
5HDG\WRRSHUDWH

5G\7R6WDUW

)RUFHGPDQLSXODWHG
YDULDEOHQRWDFWLYH
09B)RU2Q 

Figure 2-4 Output signal for start readiness for software controllers

Start readiness for hardware controllers


The start readiness for hardware controllers is formed as follows:

0RGXOHHUURU
0RG(UU 
*URXSHUURU

! 

,2DFFHVVHUURU
*US(UU
3HU$FF(UU 

&RQILJXUDWLRQHUURU
3DU)0B(UU 

([WHUQDOHUURU
&6) 

5HDG\WRVWDUWLQDXWRPDWLF

5G\7R6WDUW

)RUFHGPDQLSXODWHG
YDULDEOHQRWDFWLYH
09B6DIH2Q 

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


58 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Figure 2-5 Output signal for start readiness for hardware controllers

2.1.1.9 Simulating signals

Simulating signals
Simulation means the manipulation of a signal regardless of the actual source of the signal or
logic that generates this signal.
Simulation is carried out either at the field device (externally from the control system) itself or
at a block (internally in the control system).
In either case, the associated status in the signal is set to the simulation value (see also
Forming and outputting signal status for blocks (Page 110)).
During the simulation, every block is considered in isolation. There are two different forms of
simulation here, namely:
● Block-external simulation and
● Block-internal simulation.

Block-external simulation
Block-external simulation is characterized by the fact that:
● The simulation function is not executed in the block itself and
● A signal whose status has the simulation state, for example, a simulation of the signal at
another block or directly in the I/O device, is applied at an input parameter.
The block-external simulation has the following effects on the functionality of the block:
● The technological functions are not influenced
● All the process-relevant output signals do not receive the simulation status. In the case of
technologic blocks, process-related output signals are parameters that actively affect the
process, e.g. "Start" for block MotL.
● In the case of blocks with operator control or monitoring functions (for example faceplates),
these signals are identified in the faceplate with the status for the simulation as follows:

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 59
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

● Blocks with one or more input parameters for signals with "Generate status from individual
status" receive a group status in accordance with the priority table. This group status is
displayed in the status bar of the block icon and of the faceplate with the simulation status
as follows:

● The interlocking functions of the block are not influenced.


Note
For the output channel blocks, you need to specify the exact block response with external
simulation using the Feature bit Outputting a de-energized value for block-external
simulation (Page 152).

Block-internal simulation
Block-internal simulation is characterized by the "simulation" function being run in the block
itself.
With operator control and monitoring blocks, all process values that cannot be controlled (e.g.
PV, AV, In) can be simulated. This is used primarily as an aid for commissioning and servicing
of the system. For example, the control settings of a motor can be simulated and the feedback
values corrected without the monitoring functions being active.
For blocks that can be operated and monitored, simulation can take place via the faceplate as
well as interconnectable inputs:
- SimLiOp = 0: The simulation is activated/deactivated via faceplate (parameter view) at the
input SimOn.
- SimLiOp = 1: The simulation is activated/deactivated via the input SimOnLi. The
interconnectable simulation values (e.g. SimPVLi, SimAVLi, SimInLi) will become effective
in the process. In this case, the input SimOn is written back with SimOnLi.
The Feature bit Activating the run time of feedback signals (Page 157) can be used to delay
tracking of the feedback signals for motors and valves (for example, Fbkxxx).
Simulation can also be carried out for blocks (such as channel blocks) that cannot be controlled
and monitored by the operator.
The control is simulated in the CFC by setting parameters directly in the block with the input
parameters SimOn = 1 and Simxxxx = for the desired simulation value (e.g. SimPV ,
SimAV or SimIn).

Note
With channel blocks, ensure that the Mode parameter is set correctly during simulation.

Note
If the block is not in simulation, the simulation value (SimPV, SimAV or SimRbk) process value
(PV, AV or Rbk) is tracked.

Simulation is triggered during runtime in the faceplate's parameter view by clicking on the
"Simulation" button.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


60 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

This simulation is characterized by the fact that:


● The simulation can only be enabled / disabled with the operator authorization level for
system authorization.
● The technological functions are not influenced.
● All the process-related output signals receive the "simulation" status. In the case of
technologic blocks, process-related output signals are parameters that actively affect the
process, e.g. "Start" for block MotL.
● In the case of blocks with operator control or monitoring functions (for example faceplates),
these signals are identified in the faceplate with the status for the simulation as follows:

● The group status of the block is displayed in the status bar of the block icon and of the
faceplate with the simulation status as follows:

● All the process values displayed in the faceplate that cannot be operated-controlled in
normal operation (e.g. PV).
● When the block control can be manipulated, the readback and feedback values (for example
Rbk, FbkSpd1) are adjusted according to the manipulation of the control.
● Associated values (for example UserAna1) cannot be simulated.
● The interlocking functions of the block are activated in accordance with input parameter
BypProt = 0 or deactivated (BypProt = 1). This is shown as follows in the faceplate
and block icon:

Enabled

Disabled

Block-internal simulation for controllers


How block-internal simulation for controllers works (SimOn = 1):
● In manual mode, both the simulated process value SimPV and the simulated repeated
manipulated variable SimRbk can be entered in the faceplate as a simulated value.
● When a switchover to automatic mode is performed, the simulated process value SimPV
is set so that it is equal to the setpoint SP (= tracking). This means the control deviation is
no longer present and the pending manipulated variable (from the bumpless manual-
automatic switchover, for example) remains constant. SimRbk can still be controlled.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 61
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Note
If you switch a controller block to block-internal simulation during automatic mode and the
controller is connected to the actual process on the actuator side, you will open the control
loop as a result.
The actuating signals calculated on the basis of the simulated actual value are switched to the
process, but the resulting motion in the process is no longer visible in terms of the controller
actual value, as a copy of the setpoint is present at this point instead, where it takes the form
of a simulated actual value. The process could move away from the setpoint without the
controller doing anything to counteract this and without you seeing this happen in the controller
faceplate.
Manipulated variable step changes occur during switchover to automatic mode if an error signal
was already present before the switchover.

The following applies to program mode:


● Program mode with setpoint specification should be considered the same as automatic
mode from a control engineering point of view. Block-internal simulation reacts in the same
way as it does in automatic mode: The process value PV is set so that it is equal to the
setpoint SP, which in this case is derived from the input parameter AdvCoMV.
● Program mode with manipulated variable specification should be considered the same as
manual mode from a control engineering point of view. Block-internal simulation reacts in
the same way as it does in manual mode: The simulated process value SimPV can be
entered as a simulated value. In this case the manipulated variable MV is derived from the
input parameter AdvCoMV.

2.1.1.10 Dead band

Dead band
To suppress values fluctuating around zero, you can set a dead band (Deadband):
Deadband = 0: Dead band is disabled
Deadband ≠ 0: Dead band is enabled
With a negative dead band (Deadband < 0.0), calculation is continued internally with this
value

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


62 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

39B2XW

>'HDGEDQG@

39
>'HDGEDQG@

2.1.1.11 Request for maintenance release

Issuing a request for maintenance (MS → APL)


An operator can issue a request for maintenance release from the Maintenance view of the
ASSET faceplate ("Status service" → "Release request"). After issuing a maintenance request,
the operator can set the maintenance release. This will display the message which the operator
has configured. Later, operator can set the Maintenance Release in the technological Block
(Page 65). It indicates that the maintenance operator can start the maintenance.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 63
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Functional sequence in APL

6\VWHPDUHD 8VHUDUHDൺ0HDVXULQJSRLQWWHPSODWH
$66(7)DFHSODWH 2SHUDWRUUHTXHVWH[WHUQDOPHVVDJH

2SHUDWRUUHTXHVW

06B5HT ([W0VJ[
&RQQHFWWRWKH
06B5(4 ';&+*B;; ';&+*B;; H[WHUQDOPHVVDJH

$3/
'LDJQRVWLFGULYHU $3/LQSXW
WHFKQRORJLFDO
02' FKDQQHOEORFN
EORFN

● The output parameter MS_Req of the channel block will be set to 1 when an operator issues
a maintenance request in Maintenance view of the ASSET faceplate.
● The output parameter MS_Req has to be connected to the input parameter ExtMsgx of the
desired technological block for which the user wants to issue an operator request message.
● The operator has to configure the "Message class" and enter a suitable text in the "Event"
field for the operator request message in the "PCS7 Message Configuration" window of the
technological block.
● With the configured message and issued maintenance release, the maintenance operator
can start the maintenance.
● The operator request message stays active until the user changes to "In service" or "Cancel"
mode in the Maintenance view of ASSET faceplate.
● Once the maintenance is done, the operator can change the mode to "Completed". This
will deactivate the "In service" mode (OosAct = 0).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


64 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.1.12 Release for maintenance

Issuing a release for maintenance


The release for maintenance serves as information about a process tag at which maintenance,
service or calibration should be carried out. You can use the signal for release for maintenance
to transfer the information about the enabling of a process tag from the OS to a Maintenance
Station.

Note
The block must be in either "Manual," "On" or "Out of service" mode to set the release for
maintenance.

You set the release for maintenance (operator control permission "System control" required)
in the parameter view using the input parameter MS_RelOp = 1. A release for maintenance
is then made available via the interconnectable output parameter MS_Release = 1 for further
processing. In order to make this information of the Maintenance Station available, you have
to interconnect the output parameter MS_Release of the technologic block with the input
parameter MS_Releaseof the corresponding channel block.
The issuing of a release for maintenance does not have any influence on the function of the
block. An operation message is generated.

Use of the state "In progress" on the Maintenance Station


The status "In progress" is implemented on the Maintenance Station for a process tag or a
field device using the channel blocks and the interconnectable output parameter
OosAct = 1. You can interconnect the output parameter OosAct of the channel block with
the input parameter OosLi of a technologic block.
Use the Feature bit Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 181) to specify, in case the
input parameter is OosLi = 1, if:
● there is a switchover to the "out of service" mode and the symbol for the "In progress" (see
table) status is displayed. You can change to manual mode at any time.
● Only the "In progress" display (see table) in the block icon and in the faceplate of the
assigned technologic block is made.

Display Meaning
In progress

Function sequence in the APL


● The OS operator issues the release for maintenance (MS_RelOp = 1) in the technologic
block's parameter view.
● The technologic block then sets the MS_Release = 1 output parameter.
● The channel block's MS_Rel input is now also 1.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 65
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

● The channel block signals the release for maintenance to the diagnostics block via the
DXCHG parameter.
● The release for maintenance is only signaled to the Maintenance Station once all 0 bits of
the parameter DXCHG_XX are set on the diagnostics block.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


66 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

● The channel block determines the "in progress" state of the Maintenance Station using the
MS input parameter and makes this information available at the OosAct output parameter.
● On the technologic block, the "working" state is displayed at input parameter OosLi and
forwarded for display to the faceplate.
6\VWHPDUHD 8VHUDUHDà3URFHVVWDJWHPSODWH

(;7B67$7 06B5HOHDVH 06B5HO2S 06B5HOHDVH

202'(B 0RGH
39B2XW 39
202'(B ';FKJ

06 ';&+*B
'HWHUPLQHLQSURJUHVV
';&+*B 09
VWDWXVIURP06

2B06 06 2RV$FW 2RV/L


ุ 2RV2S
39B,Q

$3/
$3/LQSXW
WHFKQRORJLFDO
'LDJQRVWLFGULYHU FKDQQHOEORFN EORFN
02'

3,,

(;7B67$7 06B5HOHDVH
39B2XW

202'(B 0RGH
202'(B ';FKJ

06 ';&+*B
'HWHUPLQHLQSURJUHVV
';&+*B
VWDWXVIURP06

2B06 06 2RV$FW

39B,Q

$3/RXWSXW
'LDJQRVWLFGULYHU FKDQQHOEORFN
02'

3,4

Figure 2-6 Release for maintenance

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 67
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Key to diagram:

PII Process image of inputs


PIQ Process image of outputs
Black lines Automatic system connections
Green lines Process value connections made by the planner
Blue lines Connections for release for maintenance made by the planner

Note
For additional information on the topic of maintenance please refer to PCS 7 OS process
management.

2.1.1.13 SIMATIC BATCH functionality

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


Some blocks have an interface to SIMATIC BATCH. You use them when you connect
BatchEn, BatchID, BatchName, StepNo and Occupied I/Os to the corresponding
SIMATIC BATCH blocks. A new BatchName becomes effective if the BatchID is changed.
Refer to the SIMATIC BATCH documentation.
Please refer to the descriptions of the individual blocks for information about whether a block
supports the SIMATIC BATCH functionality.

2.1.1.14 Flutter suppression for channel blocks

Flutter suppression
The time-controlled "Flutter suppression" function is used to delay the outgoing of a message
by a configurable period.
Flutter suppression is used for
● OB82 events - diagnostic messages
● OB83 events - fault
used.
The flutter time is entered at the channel block at the FlutTmIn parameter. The high byte of
the DataXchg parameter of the channel blocks contains the flutter time.
Flutter suppression comes into effect when FlutEN = 1 and FlutTmIn > 0 is set at the
channel block.
There is only one flutter message per module. The delay times and fault messages are channel-
specific. The fault messages are extended by at least the delay time. Flutter occurs when the
status of fault messages changes from "Outgoing" back to "Incoming" within the delay time.
The last fluttering channel and its set delay time deactivates the flutter message.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


68 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

The following channel blocks have this function:


FbAnIn - Analog input channel block for field devices (Page 2103)
FbAnTot - Analog totalizer channel block for field devices (Page 2122)
FbAnOu - Analog output channel block for field devices (Page 2112)
FbDiIn - Digital input channel block for field devices (Page 2129)
FbDiOu - Digital output channel block for field devices (Page 2138)
Pcs7AnIn - Analog input channel block (Page 2179)
Pcs7AnOu - Analog output channel block (Page 2191)
Pcs7DiIn - Digital input channel block (Page 2201)
Pcs7DiIT - Digital input channel block with time stamp (Page 2210)
Pcs7DiOu - Digital output channel block (Page 2220)
Pcs7Cnt1 - Controlling and reading FM 350 modules (Page 2228)
Pcs7Cnt2 - Control and read an 8-DI_NAMUR module of the ET 200iSP (Page 2238)
Pcs7Cnt3 - Control and read the 1 COUNT 24V/100kHz module for count mode (Page 2247)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 69
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.1.15 Startup characteristics over Trigger block

Startup characteristics over Trigger block


With the function block Trigger, you can influence the startup characteristics of the blocks Limit,
TimerP, FlipFlop, and Trigger. Connect the output parameter InitOut of the Trigger block
with the input parameter Init of the block Limit, TimerP, or FlipFlop to initialize these blocks.
In the second cycle of OB30 to OB38, the output parameter InitOut of the Trigger block will
be reset after a startup.

2.1.2 Operating modes of the blocks

2.1.2.1 Overview of the modes

Overview of the individual modes


The available operating modes are assigned to the block families:
● Motors, valves and dosers
● Controllers
● Blocks without "Manual" and "Automatic" modes

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


70 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

You can find an overview below. Click on one of the operating modes to go directly to the
relevant detailed description.
You can find a state graph for the operating modes (Page 84) at the end of this section.

Operating modes for motors, valves and dosers


The following operating modes are available:
1. Local mode (Page 80)
2. Automatic mode (Page 76)
3. Manual mode (Page 76)
4. Out of service (Page 72)
The mode with the lowest number in the list above has the highest priority. "Manual" and
"Automatic" modes have the same priority. General information on the individual modes is
available in the following sections. The sections also include block-specific information, for
example, non-standard parameter assignment. Refer to the description and function of the
relevant blocks.

Operating modes for controllers


The following operating modes are available:
1. Automatic mode (Page 73)
2. Manual mode (Page 73)
3. Program mode for controllers (Page 79)
4. Out of service (Page 72)
The mode with the lowest number has highest priority. "Manual" and "Automatic" modes have
the same priority. General information on the individual modes is available in the following
sections. The sections also include block-specific information, for example, non-standard
parameter assignment. Refer to the description and function of the relevant blocks.

Operating modes for blocks without "Manual" and "Automatic" operation


The following operating modes are available:
1. On (Page 72)
2. Out of service (Page 72)
The mode with the lowest number has highest priority. General information on the individual
modes is available in the following sections. The sections also include block-specific
information, for example, non-standard parameter assignment. Refer to the description and
function of the relevant blocks.

Note
Note that the operating modes are realized differently in the individual block families.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 71
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.2.2 On

"On" operating mode


The "On" operating mode tells you that the block algorithm is being processed (output
parameter OnAct = 1). This operating mode is only available for blocks that have faceplates
but not the following operating modes:
● Manual mode or
● Automatic mode or
● Local mode
The "On" mode can only be activated via a control on the faceplate (input parameter
OnOp = 1). The block must be in the "Out of service" operating mode for this to be possible.

2.1.2.3 Out of service

Using the "out of service" operating mode


The "Out of service" operating mode is available to all blocks that have an operating mode
switchover and a direct connection to the process (with a connection to a process tag, for
example).
The Out of service" operating mode is intended for purposes of maintenance and servicing
(replacing the device, for example). All of the block's functions are disabled. No incoming or
outgoing messages are generated. The only function still possible is an operating mode
switchover.
All outputs for motors and valves are set to the neutral position in this operating mode.
The timer for the function "Restart disable after the shutoff of motor (Page 1439)" is reset in
this mode.

Note
Notes on VlvMotL and VlvPosL
If the neutral position of VlvMotL is "Closed" or "Open", the corresponding control outputs
"Closed" or "Open" are set. The control outputs are reset after reaching the neutral position or
with an active torque signal. The "Seal valve" function (Feature.bit8) is a component.

Note
Note on VlvMotL
If the timer of the "Restart disable after the shutoff of motor (Page 1439)" function is running
and the block is not in the neutral position, it is not possible to switch to "Out of service" mode.

For controllers, the neutral position manipulated variable (high or low manual limit of the
manipulated variable) is only used if the Feature bit Neutral position manipulated variable
takes effect at startup (Page 169) is active. Otherwise the manipulated variable remains at the
latest value like all the other output parameters.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


72 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

See also the section Neutral position for motors, valves and controllers (Page 48) for more on
this.
The last value available is output permanently for all other blocks.

Requirement for the "out of service" mode


Prerequisite for switching to this operating mode is that the block is in "Manual mode" or "On"
mode.

Activating the "Out of service" operating mode using the faceplate


The "Out of service" operating mode can only be switched on by using the faceplate when it
is in the default block view (OosOp = 1 parameter) and even then, only if ModLiOp = 0.
To switch the operating mode using the faceplate, refer to the descriptions relating to the
standard view of the individual blocks.

Switching on the Out of service operating mode by using the interconnection


The "Out of service" operating mode is switched on by using the configurable parameter
OosLi = 1. This is only possible if the block is in manual mode or "On" mode and the
Feature bit Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 181) was set to 1.
Regardless of operating mode, the parameter view of the faceplate will always display the
status of the parameter OosLi =1 with the symbol for the status "In progress" (see table) next
to the Maintenance enable button.

Display Meaning
In progress

See also the section Release for maintenance (Page 65) for more on this.

Exiting the "Out of service" operating mode


From this operating mode, a block can only be switched by an operator action at the faceplate
into the following operating modes:
● "On"
● "Manual mode"

2.1.2.4 Manual and automatic mode for control blocks

"Manual" and "Automatic" modes for controller blocks


In "manual mode", the control settings for the device are made manually by the operator. The
operator decides how to change the block's manipulated variable (output signal). The
manipulated variable can be analog or binary.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 73
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

In "automatic mode", the control settings for the controller are made automatically as calculated
by the block algorithm.

Changing between operating modes


The switchover between manual and automatic modes takes place as shown in the following
schematic:

6HOHFWLRQRIPDQXDODXWRPDWLFRSHUDWLQJPRGHZLWK

0RG/L2S  0RG/L2S 

IDFHSODWH RU6)& &)&6)&

0DQ0RG2S  $XW0RG2S  0DQ0RG/L  $XW0RG/L 


$XW0RG/L  0DQ0RG/L 

0DQXDOPRGH $XWRPDWLFPRGH

Switchover initiated in the faceplate (ModLiOp = 0): The switchover between operating modes
is carried out in the standard view of the faceplate. In the function block, the parameters
ManModOp for "manual mode" and AutModOp for "automatic mode" are used.
If both signals (ManModOp =1, AutModOp = 1 ) are set, ManModOp = 1 has priority.
Switchover per interconnection (CFC or SFC instance) (ModLiOp = 1): The switchover
between the operating modes is carried out with an interconnection on the function block. The
parameters ManModLi for "manual mode" and AutModLi for "automatic mode" are used in
pushbutton operation. In switching mode (requirement: Feature.Bit4 = 1, see Setting switch
or button mode (Page 170)) connection AutModLi is used exclusively.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


74 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

If both signals (ManModLi =1, AutModLi = 1 ) are set, ManModLi = 1 has priority.

Note
You can access the variable parameters AutModOp and ManModOp from a normal SFC (in
contrast to the instance of an SFC type). The SFC can thus change the operating mode without
revoking the access rights of the operator (i.e. without setting ModLiOp = 1).

Switchover from automatic mode to manual mode


When changing over from "automatic mode" to "manual mode", the last valid control settings
(Manipiulated Value MV)for the controller set in "automatic mode" remain valid until you change
the control settings manually.

Switchover from automatic mode to manual mode


The switchover from manual to automatic mode can take place with or without the internal
setpoint tracking the process value. You specify this behavior on the SP_TrkPV I/O, which
can also be operated from the faceplate in the parameter view (Option "SP = PV"). For the
blocks PIDConL and PIDStepL you can also change the behavior for the switchover via the
parameter Feature bit Disabling bumpless switchover to automatic mode for controllers
(Page 176):
● Switchover with internal setpoint tracking process variable(SP_TrkPV = 1) means that in
"Manual" mode the setpoint (SP) tracks the process value (PV) (bumpless switchover). After
switching back to "Automatic" mode, the manipulated variable remains constant until the
setpoint value (SP) is changed or the process value (PV) changes.
● Switchover without internal setpoint tracking process variable (SP_TrkPV = 0) means
that the block immediately recalculates the value of the manipulated variable based on the
setpoint and process value (PV) when the mode is changed. The Feature parameter is
used to choose between the two variants:
– Switchover without P step (standard setting, Feature bit = 0):
During switchover, the I action of the controller is set in such a way that the switchover
is carried out without a P step (virtually bumpless referring to the manipulated variable).
A control deviation is only regulated via the I action.
– Switchover with P step (Feature bit = 1):
During switchover, the I action of the controller is set in such a way that the switchover
is carried out with a P step (not bumpless referring to the manipulated variable). A control
deviation is regulated via the P and the I action.
Note
Points to note about switchovers with a P step change:
● The P action must be active for the setting "Switchover with P step"
(PropSel = 1)
● If the P action is in the feedback (PropFacSP = 0), the "Switchover with P step"
setting has no effect.
● If the switchover function with the internal setpoint tracking the process variable is
active (SP_TrkPV = 1), the "Switchover with P step" setting has no effect.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 75
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Reaction of signals when operating mode is changed


Using the Feature bit Resetting the commands for changing the mode (Page 165), you can
choose whether the block automatically resets the signal for changing the operating mode.

Switch on program mode


A few controller blocks allow you to operate in program mode. Refer to the relevant sections
for the controller blocks to learn whether a control block allows program mode.
Also refer to the section Program mode for controllers (Page 79) for information on program
mode.

2.1.2.5 Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers

Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers


In "manual mode", the control settings for the device are made manually by the operator. The
operator decides how to change the block's manipulated variable (output signal). The
manipulated variable can be analog or binary in accordance with the function block.
In "automatic mode", the control settings for the device are made by the block algorithm via
interconnected inputs or inputs controlled by SFC.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


76 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Changing between operating modes


The switchover between "manual and automatic mode" takes place as shown in the following
schematic:

6HOHFWLRQRIPDQXDODXWRPDWLFRSHUDWLQJPRGHZLWK

0RG/L2S  0RG/L2S 

IDFHSODWH RU6)& &)&6)&

0DQ0RG2S  $XW0RG2S  0DQ0RG/L  $XW0RG/L 


$XW0RG/L  0DQ0RG/L 

0DQXDOPRGH $XWRPDWLFPRGH

Note
The two selections (manual and automatic) cannot both be set to "1" in switching mode.

Switchover using faceplates (ModLiOp = 0): The switchover between operating modes is
carried out in the standard view of the faceplate. In the function block, the parameters
ManModOp for "manual mode" and AutModOp for "automatic mode" are used.
Switchover per interconnection (CFC or SFC instance) (ModLiOp = 1): The switchover
between the operating modes is carried out with an interconnection on the function block. The
parameters ManModLi for "manual mode" and AutModLi for "automatic mode" are used in

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 77
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

pushbutton operation. In switching mode (requirement: Feature.Bit4 = 1, see Setting switch


or button mode (Page 170)) connection AutModLi is used exclusively.

Note
The Feature Bit 4 is available only for the "large" blocks.

Note
You can access the variable parameters AutModOp and ManModOp from a normal SFC (in
contrast to the instance of an SFC type). The SFC can thus change the operating mode without
revoking the access rights of the operator (i.e. without setting ModLiOp = 1).

Switchover from automatic mode to manual mode


When changing over from "automatic mode" to "manual mode", the last valid control settings
for the block set in "automatic mode" remain valid until you change the control settings
manually.

Note
For VlvAnL, the bumplessness of the switchover depends on the parameter MV_TrkExt.

Switchover from manual to automatic mode


You can set the following options for changing over from "manual mode" to "automatic mode"
using the Feature bit Bumpless switchover to automatic mode (Page 177). Refer to the I/O
descriptions for the relevant block.
● A switchover from manual to automatic mode is possible at any time (standard setting,
Feature bit = 0). The control settings for the automatic mode become effective
immediately.
● Switchover from manual to automatic mode is only possible if the control settings for the
manual and automatic modes match (Bumpless switchover), (Feature bit = 1). An error
message is output if they do not match. In this case, you will need to adapt the control
settings in "manual mode" to the control settings in "automatic mode".
Note
The "Bumpless switchover to automatic mode" function is supported only by "large" blocks.

Reaction of signals when operating mode is changed


Using the Feature bit Resetting the commands for changing the mode (Page 165), you can
choose whether the block automatically resets the signal for changing the operating mode.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


78 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Resetting the commands for the control settings


With the Feature bit Enabling resetting of commands for the control settings (Page 165), you
select how the block handles commands for the control settings (for example motor on) via
the interconnected input parameters.

2.1.2.6 Program mode for controllers

Program mode for controllers - interface for higher-level control functions


The interface for primary controller functions (external Advanced Control software package)
provides primary controller functions, which run on an external PC as an OPC client, the option
of using the control from the controller function block and specifying the setpoint or manipulated
variable from a remote location. This procedure is called program mode.
You can use the Feature bit Enabling program mode (Page 163) to specify whether or not
the controller block is intended for program mode.
Program mode requires an enable signal (input parameter AdvCoEn = 1) from a central
control block. If this enable signal goes from 1 to 0, for example, due to errors in the OPC
communication, the controller block switches to manual mode if it is in program mode with
manipulated variable specification or to automatic mode if it is in program mode with setpoint
specification.
You activate program mode in the standard view of the controller faceplate. In addition to
switching from manual to automatic mode, you are also given the option of using program
mode as the operating mode. You exit program mode by operator input or by switching back
into manual or automatic mode.
A 0-1 edge transition of the interconnectable input parameter AdvCoMstrOn activates program
mode depending on the conditions described below. You can use this to put an entire group
of downstream controller blocks into program mode at the same time from a central control
block. Both the input parameter AdvCoOn and the interconnectable input parameter
AdvCoMstrOn can be used at the same time, since the parameter AdvCoMstrOn only reacts
to edges of the binary signal.
Program mode is deactivated with a 1 - 0 edge transition.

Note
The output parameters ManAct or AutAct display the mode to which the controller changes
with a 1 - 0 edge transition.

The output parameter AdvCoRdy = 1 indicates if the PID controller is ready to switch to
program mode. At a central control block, you can use an AND operation for all AdvCoRdy
signals of the downstream controllers to enable central switchover.
The output parameter AdvCoAct = 1 indicates of the block is in program mode.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 79
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Selecting the type of program mode


There are two types of program mode:
● Program mode driven by setpoint (in automatic mode only)
● Program mode driven by manipulated variable (in manual mode only, not for step controllers
without position feedback)
Program mode with setpoint: If you set the input parameter AdvCoModSP = 1, the analog
value provided by the OPC client (AdvCoMV) is used as an external setpoint for the controller.
The controller and faceplate otherwise react as they do with automatic mode and an external
setpoint. Refer to section Setpoint specification - internal/external (Page 130) for more about
this.
Requirements for program mode with setpoint:
● AdvCoModSP = 1,
● AdvCoEn = 1,
● Controller has to be in automatic mode
● The setpoint can be set to internal as well as external.
Program mode with manipulated variable: If you set the input parameter AdvCoModSP = 0,
the analog value provided by the OPC client (AdvCoMV) is used as an external manipulated
variable for the controller. The algorithm of the PID controller is bypassed. The controller and
faceplate otherwise react as they do with tracking (MV_TrkOn = 1). Refer to section Tracking
and limiting a manipulated variable (Page 205) for more about this.
Requirements for program mode with manipulated variable:
● AdvCoModSP = 0,
● AdvCoEn = 1,
● Controller is preferably in manual mode, but it can also be in automatic mode.
● The setpoint can be set to internal as well as external.
Note
Program mode with manipulated variable is not available for step controllers without
position feedback (available in PIDStepL, FmCont and FmTemp). ErrorNum = 50 is
output on the controller block and the controller cannot switch into program mode
(AdvCoAct=0).

2.1.2.7 Local mode

Areas of application for local mode


This operating mode is used for motors, valves and dosing units. The control settings are made
directly or via a control station that is located "locally". In addition, you can set different control
strategies with the parameter LocalSetting.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


80 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

With LocalSetting = 0, you prevent a change to "local mode".

Note
Differences between "Large" and "Small" blocks
The operating mode described here is valid for "Large" blocks. For "Small" blocks,
LocalSetting can be configured only on a limited basis. For more information, refer to the
respective description for the operating modes of the blocks.

Changing to local mode


Changing to local mode is only possible from the manual and automatic operating modes. The
change to this mode is initiated by:
● An operation on the faceplate (input parameter LocalOp = 1, valid if LocalSetting =
3 or LocalSetting = 4 and ModLiOp = 0) or
● The interconnected input parameter (LocalLi = 1, valid if LocalSetting = 1 or
LocalSetting = 2).

Exiting local mode


You leave local mode using:
● An operation on the faceplate (LocalSetting = 3 or LocalSetting = 4 and
ModLiOp = 0) or
● the interconnected input parameter (LocalSetting = 1 or LocalSetting = 2).
In order to exit local mode via the interconnected input parameter, you can configure various
reactions using a Feature bit Exiting local mode (Page 181).

Operator input in "local mode" using a faceplate


You are not permitted to functionally operate the block in local mode. You can only use the
faceplate to exit local mode if you have also activated "local mode" using the faceplate. The
rules you specified for exiting "local mode" apply here.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 81
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Input in "local mode" via interconnected inputs


In "local mode", the way the block functions is influenced via interconnected input parameters
according to the settings of the LocalSetting parameter. You have the following options:
● LocalSetting = 1 and LocalSetting = 3
– The control settings for the block are adjusted (tracking) via an interconnected input
parameter. The interconnected input parameter includes the control signal for the local
operator station on the system.
– The runtime monitoring of the block is effective in accordance with your configuration.
– The interlocking functions of the block are activated in accordance with input parameter
BypProt = 0 or deactivated (BypProt = 1).
Note
The block VlvAnL does not support LocalSetting = 1/3.

● LocalSetting = 2 and LocalSetting = 4


– The control settings for the block are made based on internal adjustment of the feedback
value.
– Runtime monitoring of the block is active only with rapid stop, external fault, motor
protection, and if both feedback signals are set (discrepancy).
An exception is VlvMotL:
Note
VlvMotL
The motor and valve feedback signals are monitored if the motor feedback signlas exist
and are connected with FbkOpening and FbkClosing (Feature.bit2 = 0). The
motor feedback signals are only monitored in the end positions of the valve and in
discrepancy. For example, if the valve is in end position FbkOpen =1 and the motor
feedback FbkOpening =1 is pending, an error message is generated upon expiration
of the monitoring time. If there are no motor feedback signals (Feature.bit 2 = 1),
monitoring of the valve and motor feedback signals does not take place.

VlvAnL: The auxiliary valve is controlled via internal tracking of the feedback signals
FbkAuxVCloseOut and FbkAuxVOpenOut. The control of the main valve via the
feedback value Rbk is not affected by this.

The texts for labeling the command buttons in the faceplates of the motor and valve blocks
can now be assigned for each specific instance.
The configuration of the texts is performed with the "Text 1" property of the respective control
inputs of the motor and valve blocks in the CFC.
If no instance-specific text is configured, the previous default texts are used and displayed in
the faceplate.
The following table shows the assignment of the command buttons to the corresponding block
input:
The interlock functions of the block are deactivated.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


82 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Overview of behavior in local mode

LocalSetting 0 1 2 3 4 5 (VlvS only)


=
Switch on operat‐ Cannot be CFC/SFC CFC/SFC Faceplate Faceplate CFC
ing mode set
Changing the op‐ - CFC/SFC CFC/SFC - - CFC/SFC
erating mode:
Local mode/to
manual mode only
(Feature = 0)
Changing the op‐ - CFC/SFC CFC/SFC - - CFC/SFC
erating mode:
Local mode/previ‐
ous mode
(Feature = 1)
Operating in the - Only rapid stop Only rapid stop Only switching Only switching -
faceplate and resetting of and resetting of of operating of operating
rapid stop rapid stop (only mode, rapid mode, rapid
for "Large" stop, internal/ stop, and reset‐
blocks) external set‐ ting of rapid
point switch‐ stop
over and reset‐
ting of rapid stop
Executing local - Yes No Yes No No
commands
Reaction of the - Monitoring the Tracking of Monitoring the Tracking of Monitoring the
block feedbacks feedback, moni‐ feedbacks feedback, feedbacks
toring feedback monitoring
during rapid feedback dur‐
stop, external ing rapid stop,
errors, motor external er‐
protection or rors, motor pro‐
discrepancy tection or dis‐
crepancy
Interlock activated - Yes: only at output Yes: only at output only at output
(BypProt = 0) LockAct with (BypProt = 0) LockAct with LockAct with
Feature.Bit2 Feature.Bit Feature.Bit
No: No:
7 = 1 and 27 = 1 and 27 = 1 and
(BypProt = 1) BypProt = 0 (BypProt = 1) BypProt = 0 BypProt = 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 83
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.2.8 State graph of the operating modes

State graph of the operating modes

2XWRIVHUYLFH

0DQXDO
 2Q

 



3URJUDP /RFDO
PRGH


 

$XWRPDWLF

Figure 2-7 State graph of the operating modes

* This operating mode is used for motors, valves, and dosing units.
** This operating mode is used for controllers only.

Number in Condition for status change


graphic (top)
(1) Manual (on) → Out of service
● Via faceplate (OosOp = 1) if ModLiOp = 0 or
● Via edge transition 0 → 1 of OosLi if Feature bit Reaction to the out of service
mode (Page 181)= 1
(2) Out of service → Manual (on)
● Via faceplate (ManModOp = 1)
(3) Local mode → Manual
● Via faceplate (ManModOp = 1) if ModLiOp = 0 and LocalSetting = 3 or
LocalSetting = 4 or
● Via LocalLi = 0 if LocalSetting = 1, LocalSetting = 2 or
LocalSetting = 5. See section Exiting local mode (Page 181) for more
conditions.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


84 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Number in Condition for status change


graphic (top)
(4) Automatic → Manual
● Via faceplate (ManModOp = 1) if ModLiOp = 0 or
● Via ManModLi = 1 if ModLiOp = 1 and Feature bit Setting switch or button
mode (Page 170)= 0 or
● Via AutModLi = 0 if ModLiOp = 1 and Feature bit Setting switch or button
mode (Page 170)= 1
(5) Manual → Automatic
● Via faceplate (AutModOp = 1) if ModLiOp = 0 or
● Via AutModLi = 1 if ModLiOp = 1
(6) Manual → Local mode
● Via faceplate (LocalOp = 1) if ModLiOp = 0 and LocalSetting = 3 or
LocalSetting = 4 or
● Via LocalLi = 1 if LocalSetting = 1, LocalSetting = 2 or
LocalSetting = 5
(7) Automatic → Local mode
● Via faceplate (LocalOp = 1) if ModLiOp = 0 and LocalSetting = 3 or
LocalSetting = 4 or
● Via LocalLi = 1 if LocalSetting = 1, LocalSetting = 2 or
LocalSetting = 5
(8) Local mode → Automatic
● Via faceplate (AutModOp = 1) if ModLiOp = 0 and LocalSetting = 3 or
LocalSetting = 4 or
● Via LocalLi = 0 if LocalSetting = 1, LocalSetting = 2 or
LocalSetting = 5. See section Exiting local mode (Page 181) for more
conditions.
(9) Program mode → Automatic
● Via faceplate (AutModOp = 1) if ModLiOp = 0 or
● Via AutModLi = 1 if ModLiOp = 1 or
● Via edge transition 1 → 0 of AdvCoMstrOn if automatic is set before program mode.
(10) Automatic → Program mode
Requirement for switchover in program mode: AdvCoEn = 1
● Via faceplate (AdvCoOn= 1) if ModLiOp = 0 or
● Via AdvCoMstrOn = 1
(11) Manual → Program mode
Requirement for switchover from manual to program mode: AdvCoEn = 1 and
AdvCoModSP = 0
● Via faceplate (AdvCoOn= 1) if ModLiOp = 0 or
● Via AdvCoMstrOn = 1
(12) Program mode → Manual
● Via faceplate (ManModOp = 1) if ModLiOp = 0 or
● Edge transition 1 → 0 of AdvCoMstrOn if manual is set before program mode.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 85
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.3 Monitoring functions

2.1.3.1 Monitoring functions in the Advanced Process Library

Monitoring functions in the Advanced Process Library


This and the following chapters encompass the standard monitoring functions in the Advanced
Process Library. The monitoring functions include:
● Limit value monitoring
● Feedback monitoring
● Motor protection
Some of the configured time values (e.g. MonTiStatic, MonTiDynamic) are limited at the
low end to the sampling time by the block algorithm and written back to the block input. "Reset
Program" (after a "Download Entire Program" for example) writes the parameter values
changed in this way to the offline data storage system.
For further and detailed information, refer to the following chapters. For the block-specific
monitoring functions, also refer to the description of the particular block.

2.1.3.2 Group display for limit monitoring, CSF and ExtMsgx

Group display for limit monitoring, CSF and ExtMsgx


The SumMsgAct output parameter assembles the following signals of a block and makes them
available to you:
● Limit monitoring of the process value
● Limit monitoring of the count value
● Limit monitoring of the feedback
● Limit monitoring of setpoint difference, manipulated variable difference and error signal
● External control system fault (CSF)
● Freely selectable messages ExtMsg1..4
Note
The signal status of the individual signals is not taken into consideration for forming the
group error.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


86 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.3.3 Limit monitoring

Limit monitoring of the process value


You can monitor the process value to the following high and low alarm, warning and tolerance
limits:
● PV_AH_Lim: Limit for high alarm
● PV_AL_Lim: Limit for low alarm
● PV_WH_Lim: Limit for high warning
● PV_WL_Lim: Limit for low warning
● PV_TH_Lim: Limit for the high tolerance
● PV_TL_Lim: Limit for the low tolerance

Note
The message classes Alarm, Warning and Tolerance are not valid for user-configured
message classes. Please take into consideration the validity of terms for user-configured
message classes (Page 41).

Note
Special note for "Small" blocks
"Small" blocks provide only the monitoring for alarms and warnings.

Result of the limit monitoring


The result of limit monitoring is made available at the interconnectable output parameters:
● PV_AH_Act = 1:: Limit for high alarm reached or exceeded
● PV_AL_Act = 1:: Limit for low alarm reached or undershot
● PV_WH_Act = 1:: Limit for high warning reached or exceeded
● PV_WL_Act = 1:: Limit for low warning reached or undershot
● PV_TH_Act = 1:: Limit for high tolerance reached or exceeded
● PV_TL_Act = 1:: Limit for low tolerance reached or undershot
made available (see figure). The SumMsgAct = 1 output parameter is also set when at least
one limit value is reached or violated.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 87
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

39B2XW

39B;;B/LP
39B+\VW

3URFHVVYDOXH

39B<<B/LP 39B+\VW

7LPH

39B;;B$FW

39B<<B$FW

;; $+IRU$ODUP+LJK ;; :+IRU:DUQLQJ+LJK ;; 7+IRU7ROHUDQFH+LJK


<< $/IRU$ODUP/RZ << :/IRU:DUQLQJ/RZ << 7/IRU7ROHUDQFH/RZ

You can use Feature.Bit29 Signaling limit violation (Page 174) to determine whether the
output parameter triggers limit monitoring with the value "0" or "1".
You can use Feature.Bit28 Disabling operating points (Page 149) to disable limit
monitoring when message suppression is enabled (MsgLock = 1).

Activating limit monitoring


Monitoring is always enabled using the input parameters:
● PV_AH_En = 1: Monitoring of the high alarm limits
● PV_AL_En = 1: Monitoring of the low alarm limits
● PV_WH_En = 1: Monitoring of the high warning limits
● PV_WL_En = 1: Monitoring of the low warning limits
● PV_TH_En = 1: Monitoring of the high tolerance limits
● PV_TL_En = 1: Monitoring of the low tolerance limits
Predefinition: When the block is installed, monitoring of the tolerance limits is disabled,
meaning that the parameters are configured with 0. To activate monitoring, assign 1 to these
parameters.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


88 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

All other monitoring functions are enabled.

Message suppression

Symbol for message suppression

The corresponding message is suppressed using the parameters:


● PV_AH_MsgEn = 0: Alarm (high) messages are suppressed
● PV_AL_MsgEn = 0: Alarm (low) messages are suppressed
● PV_WH_MsgEn = 0: Warning (high) messages are suppressed
● PV_WL_MsgEn = 0: Warning (low) messages are suppressed
● PV_TH_MsgEn = 0: Tolerance (high) messages are suppressed
● PV_TL_MsgEn = 0: Tolerance (low) messages are suppressed
The output of messages is not suppressed when the block is installed (all xx_MsgEn
parameters are preset to 1). Messages can only be output if limit monitoring of the additional
analog value has been enabled.

Hysteresis
You can specify a hysteresis (PV_Hyst) for the limits, for example, to suppress signal flutter.
Refer to the Limit monitoring with hysteresis (Page 98) chapter for more on this.

Alarm delays
You can set alarm delays for incoming and outgoing alarms, warnings and tolerances. Refer
to the Area of application of the alarm delays (Page 208) chapter for more on this.

Operating in the faceplate


You can also change the limits and the hysteresis using the faceplate. Refer to the Limit
operation and display in the faceplate (Page 331) chapter for more on this.

See also
Two time values per limit pair (Page 210)
Two time values for each individual limit (Page 211)
User-configured message classes (Page 41)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 89
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Limit monitoring of the count value


You can monitor the count value to the following high and low alarm, warning and tolerance
limits:
● OutAH_Lim: Limit for high alarm
● OutAL_Lim: Limit for low alarm
● OutWH_Lim: Limit for high warning
● OutWL_Lim: Limit for low warning
● OutTH_Lim: Limit for the high tolerance
● OutTL_Lim: Limit for the low tolerance
Note
The message classes Alarm, Warning and Tolerance are not valid for user-configured
message classes. Please take into consideration the validity of terms for user-configured
message classes (Page 41).

Note
Monitoring the limits
The limits monitored depend on the direction of counting:
● In Mode 1 (summing up or integrating), the high limits are monitored:
– OutAH_Lim
– OutWH_Lim
– OutTH_Lim
● In Mode 2 (summing down or integrating), the low limits are monitored:
– OutAL_Lim
– OutWL_Lim
– OutTL_Lim

Example for limit monitoring with a counter


Monitoring of the high limit is performed only if the counter is running in "up" direction.
If you count "up" but with negative values, for example, from 100 down, you need to adjust the
high limit accordingly (for example, the high limit could be -15).
This behavior applies to the blocks CountScL, CountOh and TotalL.

Result of the limit monitoring


The result of limit monitoring is made available at the interconnectable output parameters:
● OutAH_Act = 1:: Limit for high alarm reached or exceeded
● OutAL_Act = 1:: Limit for low alarm reached or undershot
● OutWH_Act = 1:: Limit for high warning reached or exceeded
● OutWL_Act = 1:: Limit for low warning reached or undershot

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


90 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

● OutTH_Act = 1:: Limit for high tolerance reached or exceeded


● OutTL_Act = 1:: Limit for low tolerance reached or undershot
made available (see figure). The SumMsgAct = 1 output parameter is also set when at least
one limit value is reached or violated.
You can use Feature.Bit29 Signaling limit violation (Page 174) to determine whether the
output parameter triggers limit monitoring with the value "0" or "1".
You can use Feature.Bit28 Disabling operating points (Page 149) to disable limit
monitoring when message suppression is enabled (MsgLock = 1).

Activating limit monitoring


Monitoring is always enabled using the input parameters:
● OutAH_En = 1: Monitoring of the high alarm limits
● OutAL_En = 1: Monitoring of the low alarm limits
● OutWH_En = 1: Monitoring of the high warning limits
● OutWL_En = 1: Monitoring of the low warning limits
● OutTH_En = 1: Monitoring of the high tolerance limits
● OutTL_En = 1: Monitoring of the low tolerance limits
Predefinition: When the block is installed, monitoring of the tolerance limits is disabled,
meaning that the parameters are configured with 0. To activate monitoring, assign 1 to these
parameters.
All other monitoring functions are enabled.

Message suppression
The corresponding message is suppressed using the parameters:
● OutAH_MsgEn = 0: Alarm (high) messages are suppressed
● OutAL_MsgEn = 0: Alarm (low) messages are suppressed
● OutWH_MsgEn = 0: Warning (high) messages are suppressed
● OutWL_MsgEn = 0: Warning (low) messages are suppressed
● OutTH_MsgEn = 0: Tolerance (high) messages are suppressed
● OutTL_MsgEn = 0: Tolerance (low) messages are suppressed
The output of messages is not suppressed when the block is installed (all xx_MsgEn
parameters are preset to 1). Messages can only be output if limit monitoring of the additional
analog value has been enabled.

Operating in the faceplate


You can also change the limits using the faceplate. Refer to the Limit operation and display in
the faceplate (Page 331) chapter for more on this.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 91
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

See also
User-configured message classes (Page 41)

Limit monitoring of an additional analog value

Limit monitoring of an additional analog value


Limit monitoring is performed for an additional analog value on the basis of the AV block, see
Description of AV (Page 451) chapter.
You can monitor an additional analog value to the following high and low limits for alarms
warnings and tolerances at the technologic block:
● AV_AH_Lim: Limit for high alarm
● AV_AL_Lim: Limit for low alarm
● AV_WH_Lim: Limit for high warning
● AV_WL_Lim: Limit for low warning
● AV_TH_Lim: Limit for the high tolerance
● AV_TL_Lim: Limit for the low tolerance
Note
The message classes Alarm, Warning and Tolerance are not valid for user-configured
message classes. Please take into consideration the validity of terms for user-configured
message classes (Page 41).

Note
The AV block and the technologic block must be built into the same cyclic interrupt OB.

Result of the limit monitoring


The result of limit monitoring is made available at the interconnectable output parameters of
the AV block:
● AV_AH_Act = 1:: Limit for high alarm reached or exceeded
● AV_AL_Act = 1:: Limit for low alarm reached or undershot
● AV_WH_Act = 1:: Limit for high warning reached or exceeded
● AV_WL_Act = 1:: Limit for low warning reached or undershot
● AV_TH_Act = 1:: Limit for high tolerance reached or exceeded
● AV_TL_Act = 1:: Limit for low tolerance reached or undershot
made available (see figure).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


92 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

$9B2XW

$9B;;B/LP
$9B+\VW

$QDORJYDOXH

$9B<<B/LP $9B+\VW

7LPH

$9B;;B$FW

$9B<<B$FW

;; $+IRU$ODUP ;; :+IRU:DUQLQJ+LJK ;; 7+IRU7ROHUDQFH+LJK


+LJK << :/IRU:DUQLQJ/RZ << 7/IRU7ROHUDQFH/RZ
<< $/IRU$ODUP/RZ

You can use Feature.Bit29 Signaling limit violation (Page 174) to determine whether the
output parameter triggers limit monitoring with the value "0" or "1".
You can use Feature.Bit28 Disabling operating points (Page 149) to disable limit
monitoring when message suppression is enabled (MsgLock = 1).

Activating limit monitoring


Monitoring is always enabled using the input parameters of the AV block:
● AV_AH_En = 1: Monitoring of the high alarm limits
● AV_AL_En = 1: Monitoring of the low alarm limits
● AV_WH_En = 1: Monitoring of the high warning limits
● AV_WL_En = 1: Monitoring of the low warning limits
● AV_TH_En = 1: Monitoring of the high tolerance limits
● AV_TL_En = 1: Monitoring of the low tolerance limits
Predefinition: When the block is installed, monitoring of the tolerance limits is disabled,
meaning that the parameters are configured with 0. To activate monitoring, assign 1 to these
parameters.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 93
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

All other monitoring functions are enabled.

Message suppression
The corresponding message is suppressed at the block AV using the parameters:
● AV_AH_MsgEn = 0: Alarm (high) messages are suppressed
● AV_AL_MsgEn = 0: Alarm (low) messages are suppressed
● AV_WH_MsgEn = 0: Warning (high) messages are suppressed
● AV_WL_MsgEn = 0: Warning (low) messages are suppressed
● AV_TH_MsgEn = 0: Tolerance (high) messages are suppressed
● AV_TL_MsgEn = 0: Tolerance (low) messages are suppressed
The output of messages is not suppressed when the block is installed (all xx_MsgEn
parameters are preset to 1). Messages can only be output if limit monitoring of the additional
analog value has been enabled.

Hysteresis
You can specify a hysteresis (AV_Hyst) at the technologic block for the limits, for example,
to suppress signal flutter. Refer to the Limit monitoring with hysteresis (Page 98) chapter for
more on this.

Alarm delays
You can set alarm delays for incoming and outgoing alarms, warnings and tolerances. Refer
to the Area of application of the alarm delays (Page 208) chapter for more on this.

Operating in the faceplate


You can also change the limits and the hysteresis using the faceplate. Refer to the Limit
operation and display in the faceplate (Page 331) chapter for more on this.

See also
User-configured message classes (Page 41)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


94 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Limit monitoring of the feedback

Limit monitoring of position feedback


The position feedback of the manipulated variable can be monitored for the following high and
low warning limits:
● RbkWH_Lim: Limit for high warning
● RbkWL_Lim: Limit for low warning
Note
The message classes Alarm, Warning and Tolerance are not valid for user-configured
message classes. Please take into consideration the validity of terms for user-configured
message classes (Page 41).

Result of limit monitoring of the position feedback


The result of limit monitoring of the position feedback is made available at the interconnectable
output parameters:
● RbkWH_Act = 1: High limit reached or exceeded
● RbkWL_Act = 1: Low limit reached or undershot
made available. The SumMsgAct = 1 output parameter is also set when at least one limit
value is reached or violated.
When the limits are reached or exceeded, messages that can be suppressed are output.
You can use Feature.Bit29 Signaling limit violation (Page 174) to determine whether the
output parameter triggers limit monitoring with the value "0" or "1".
You can use Feature.Bit28 Disabling operating points (Page 149) to disable limit
monitoring when message suppression is enabled (MsgLock = 1).

Activating limit monitoring


Monitoring is always enabled using the input parameters:
● RbkWH_En = 0: Monitoring of the high warning limit is disabled
● RbkWL_En = 0: Monitoring of the low warning limit is disabled
Predefinition: When the block is installed, monitoring is enabled (default is 1).

Message suppression
The corresponding message is suppressed using the parameters:
● RbkWH_MsgEn = 0: Messages from the high limit monitoring are suppressed
● RbkWL_MsgEn = 0: Messages from the low limit monitoring are suppressed

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 95
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

The output of messages is not suppressed when the block is installed (for example,
RbkWH_MsgEn = 1). Messages can only be output if limit monitoring of the position feedback
has been enabled.

Hysteresis
You can specify a hysteresis (RbkHyst) for the limits, for example, to suppress signal flutter.
Refer also to chapter Limit monitoring with hysteresis (Page 98) for more on this.

Alarm delays (only for the PIDConR and MotSpdCL blocks)


You can set alarm delays for incoming and outgoing warnings. Refer to the Area of application
of the alarm delays (Page 208) chapter for more on this.

Operating in the faceplate


You can also change the limits and the hysteresis using the faceplate. Refer to the Limit
operation and display in the faceplate (Page 331) chapter for more on this.

See also
User-configured message classes (Page 41)

Limit monitoring of setpoint, manipulated variable and control deviation

Limit monitoring of setpoint, manipulated variable and error signal


The setpoint, manipulated variable and error signal can be monitored for the following high
and low alarm limits:
● ER_AH_Lim: Limit for high alarm
● ER_AL_Lim: Limit for low alarm
Note
The message classes Alarm, Warning and Tolerance are not valid for user-configured
message classes. Please take into consideration the validity of terms for user-configured
message classes (Page 41).

Result of the limit monitoring


The result of limit monitoring is made available at the interconnectable output parameters:
● ER_AH_Act =1: High limit violated (reached or exceeded)
● ER_AL_Act =1: Low limit (reached or undershot)
made available. The SumMsgAct = 1 output parameter is also set when at least one limit
value is reached or violated.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


96 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

When the limits are reached or exceeded, messages that can be suppressed are output.
You can use Feature.Bit29 Signaling limit violation (Page 174) to determine whether the
output parameter triggers limit monitoring with the value "0" or "1".
You can use Feature.Bit28 Disabling operating points (Page 149) to disable limit
monitoring when message suppression is enabled (MsgLock = 1).

Activating limit monitoring


Alarm monitoring is enabled using the input parameters:
● ER_AH_En = 1: Monitoring of the high alarm limit
● ER_AL_En = 1: Monitoring of the low alarm limit
Predefinition: When the block is installed, monitoring is disabled.

Message suppression
The corresponding message is suppressed using the parameters:
● ER_AH_MsgEn = 0: Messages from the high limit monitoring are suppressed
● ER_AL_MsgEn = 0: Messages from the low limit monitoring are suppressed
The output of messages is not suppressed when the block is installed (for example,
ER_AH_MsgEn = 1). Messages can only be output if limit monitoring has been enabled.

Note
With the MotSpdCL block, messages are only output if you have enabled Feature.Bit5
(Alarm setpoint difference (Page 175)).

Hysteresis
You can specify a hysteresis (ER_Hyst) for these limits, for example, in order to suppress
signal flutter . Refer also to chapter Limit monitoring with hysteresis (Page 98) for more on
this.

Alarm delays
You can set alarm delays for incoming and outgoing alarms. Refer to the Area of application
of the alarm delays (Page 208) chapter for more on this.

Operating in the faceplate


You can also influence the limits and the hysteresis by means of the faceplate. Refer to the
Limit operation and display in the faceplate (Page 331) chapter for more on this.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 97
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

See also
User-configured message classes (Page 41)

Limit monitoring with hysteresis

Limit monitoring with hysteresis


You can additionally define a hysteresis for all limit monitoring functions (parameter
xxx_Hyst, xxx can, for example, be PV for the process value). You use the hysteresis, for
example, to suppress signal flutter.
Enter the hysteresis as a physical variable at the block and faceplate (if you have the
appropriate operator control permissions (WinCC)).
For the WinCC operator control permissions, refer to the help on WinCC.

2.1.3.4 Feedbacks

Monitoring the feedbacks

Feedback monitoring
You can use the following monitoring functions:
● Monitoring the start-up and stop characteristics for motors or the runtime of valves
● Monitoring the operation of motors or the maintenance of the position of valves
● Disabling feedback
This monitoring function is enabled via the Monitor = 1 input.
Static and dynamic errors are reset by disabling the monitoring (Monitor = 0). If you
reactivate monitoring during the plant runtime, only dynamic monitoring (MonTiDynamic) will
be performed.

Monitoring the start-up and stop characteristics for motors or the runtime of valves
Monitoring of the startup characteristics is implemented using the parameter
MonTiDynamic. The monitoring time specifies the period within which the feedback value,
for example, FbkStart with motors, must be available in response to a control signal. If this
is not the case, the text "Control error" is displayed in the standard view of the faceplate. An
error message is generated at the same time. The block then goes to its neutral position. In
the case of motors, this is always the stop state. With other blocks, this is an neutral position
you have specified (SafePos parameter). The block signals this at the corresponding output
parameter of the error message with 1, for example, with MonDynErr = 1 for motors.
With the motors MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdL, MotSpdCL and the motor valve VlvMotL, the
Feature.bit13 can be set to use a separate monitoring time MonTiDyStop for the stop
behavior. The monitoring time for the stop behavior is displayed at the MonDynStopErr output.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


98 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Parameters are set in seconds.

Note
In manual mode, you can control all valves (including the motor valve) despite the
MonSafePos = 1 setting and with "End position error" even without reaching the neutral
position.

Monitoring the operation of motors or the maintenance of the position of valves


The following applies for "Large" blocks: Monitoring of the operation or the maintenance of the
position of valves is implemented using the parameter MonTiStatic. The monitoring time
specifies the period in which the feedback value can change its value briefly without an error
message being output. An example would be a running motor with the feedback via the input
parameter FbkStart. This parameter should be static in accordance with the control function.
However, its value can change within the monitoring time. If the change in the FbkStart
parameter takes longer than the monitoring time, the text "End position error" is displayed in
the standard view of the faceplate. An error message is generated at the same time. The block
then goes to its neutral position. In the case of motors, this is always the stop state. With other
blocks, this is an neutral position you have specified (SafePos parameter). The block signals
this at the corresponding output parameter of the error message with 1, for example, with
MonStaErr = 1 for motors.
Parameters are set in seconds.

Note
Please note that MonTiDynamic ≥ MonTiStatic and MonTiDynamic ≥ SampleTime
have to be configured. If something is set outside these limits, the block always returns the
respective limit at the input.
If SampleTime changes, MonTiDynamic may be tracked to the new value for SampleTime.
MonTiStatic is tracked if MonTiDynamic < MonTiStatic changes. With MonTiStatic
= 0, each feedback change without change of the control immediately results in a runtime
error.

The following applies for "Small" blocks: These blocks operate like "Large" blocks; however,
the monitoring time is set to 0 within the block and cannot be changed. Any change is displayed
immediately at the output parameter MonStaErr with 1.

Disabling feedback for valves


You can also disable feedback completely. Please refer to section Disabling feedback for
valves (Page 100) for further information.

Note
This function is only supported by "Large" blocks.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 99
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors


In the event of an interlock or error, the block has to be reset. Refer to the Resetting the block
in case of interlocks or errors (Page 43) section for more on this.

Disabling feedback for valves

Disabling monitoring of feedback for valves


This function is only supported by "Large" blocks.
If you operate a block without feedback, use the parameter NoFbkOpen = 1 bzw.
NoFbkClose = 1. This means, for example, that you do not have any feedbacks for the
opened state of the valve. Monitoring is thus disabled for this feedback. The feedback at the
block is adjusted according to the control signal.

2.1.3.5 Motor protection function

Motor protection function


The motor protection function is used to turn off the motor if there is thermal overload
(Trip = 0, interconnectable input parameter).
If the motor is turned off by the motor protection function, a message (process control message)
is generated. This is indicated in the faceplate by the "Motor protection" text. You can influence
the reset using a various Feature bits. Refer to the Resetting the block in case of interlocks
or errors (Page 43) section for more on this.
You can find more information in Section Influence of the signal status on the interlock
(Page 105).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


100 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.4 Interlocking functions

2.1.4.1 Interlocks

Interlocks at blocks
A maximum of three types of interlock can be used depending on the block. Three separate
inputs named Intlock, Protect and Permit are available for these functions. The blocks
MotRevL, MotSpdL, VlvMotL, VlvPosL, and VlvAnL with Feature2.Bit16 = 1 (see section
Separate interlock for each direction, position, or speed (Page 173)) have inputs for interlock
functionality with direction:

MotRevL MotSpdL VlvMotL, VlvPosL, VlvAnL


(Feature2.Bit16 = 1) (Feature2.Bit16 = 1) (Feature2.Bit16 = 1)
Permit: Enable forward Permit: Enable speed1 Permit: Enable open
PermRev: Enable reverse PermSp2: Enable speed2 PermCls: Enable close
Intlock: Interlock forward Intlock: Interlock speed1 Intlock: Interlock open
IntlRev: Interlock reverse IntlSp2: Interlock speed2 IntlCls: Interlock close
Protect: Protection forward Protect: Protection speed1 Protect: Protection open
ProtRev: Protection reverse ProtSp2: Protection speed2 ProtCls: Protection close

Note
Interlocks for "small" blocks and controller blocks
Ensure that "small" blocks and controller blocks PIDConL and PIDConR have only the
Intlock parameter. The other two interlocks are not included in these block variants.

The following interlock types exist:

All blocks with the interlock function and MotRevL with Feature2.Bit16 = 0
● Activation enable ("Permission"): The activation enable (input Permit/PermRev/PermCls/
PermSp2 = 1) makes it possible to leave the neutral position of the block in response to
operator input or a command from the program (CFC/SFC). The activation enable has no
effect if the block is not in the neutral position. See also the section Neutral position for
motors, valves and controllers (Page 48) for information on the neutral position.
● Interlock without reset ("Interlock"): An active interlock condition brings the block to the
neutral position (input Intlock/IntlRev/IntlCls/IntlSp2 = 0). After the interlock
condition has gone, the currently active control function becomes active again in automatic
or local mode. In manual mode the faceplate can be operated again after the interlock
condition has gone.
● Interlock with reset ("Protection"): An active interlock condition brings the block to the
neutral position (input Protect/ProtRev/ProtCls/ProtSp2 = 0). After the interlock
conditions are cleared, the operator or an activation sequence must perform a reset to once
again enable activation of the control according to the input parameters.
You can influence the reset using a various Feature bits. Refer to the Resetting the block in
case of interlocks or errors (Page 43) section for more on this.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 101
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Only MotRevL with Feature2.Bit16 = 1


● Activation enable forward ("Enable forward"): The activation enable (input Permit = 1)
makes it possible to leave the neutral position of the block in the forward direction in
response to operator input or a command from the program (CFC/SFC). The activation
enable has no effect if the block is not in the neutral position. See also the section Neutral
position for motors, valves and controllers (Page 48) for information on the neutral position.
● Activation enable reverse ("Enable reverse"): The activation enable (input PermRev = 1)
makes it possible to leave the neutral position of the block in the reverse direction in
response to operator input or a command from the program (CFC/SFC). The activation
enable has no effect if the block is not in the neutral position. See also the section Neutral
position for motors, valves and controllers (Page 48) for information on the neutral position.
● Interlock forward without reset ("Interlock forward"): A pending forward interlock condition
only puts the block in the neutral position when the motor is running in this direction (input
Intlock = 0). Once the forward interlock condition is cleared, the currently active forward
control function becomes active again in automatic or local mode. In manual mode, the
faceplate can be operated forward again.
● Interlock reverse without reset ("Interlock reverse"): A pending reverse interlock condition
only puts the block in the neutral position when the motor is running in this direction (input
IntlRev = 0). Once the reverse interlock condition is cleared, the currently active reverse
control function becomes active again in automatic or local mode. In manual mode, the
faceplate can be operated reverse again.
● Interlock forward with reset ("Protection forward"): A pending forward interlock condition
only puts the block in the neutral position when the motor is running in this direction (input
Protect = 0). Once the interlock conditions are cleared, the operator or an activation
sequence must perform a reset to once again enable activation of the forward control
according to the input parameters. You can influence the reset using a various Feature
bits. Refer to the Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors (Page 43) section for
more on this.
● Interlock reverse with reset ("Protection reverse"): A pending reverse interlock condition
only puts the block in the neutral position when the motor is running in this direction (input
ProtRev = 0). Once the interlock conditions are cleared, the operator or an activation
sequence must perform a reset to once again enable activation of the reverse control
according to the input parameters. You can influence the reset using a various Feature
bits. Refer to the Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors (Page 43) section for
more on this.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


102 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Display of the interlock in the faceplate and in the block icon


The interlock state is visualized in the faceplate and in the block icon by a status display
(padlock) as follows:
● Open padlock: No interlock pending
● Closed padlock: One or more interlocks are pending
● No padlock: Individual interlocks are not active
– Perm_En = 0 or Permit.ST = 16#FF:
The input parameter Permit has no effect, the button in the faceplate is invisible.
– PermRevEn/PermClsEn/PermSp2En = 0 or PermRev.ST/PermCls.ST/
PermSp2.ST = 16#FF or Feature2.Bit16 = 0:
The input parameter PermRev/PermCls/PermSp2 has no effect, the button in the
faceplate is invisible.
– Prot_En = 0 or Protect.ST = 16#FF:
The input parameter Protect has no effect, the button in the faceplate is invisible.
– ProtRevEn/ProtClsEn/ProtSp2En = 0 or ProtRev.ST/ProtCls.ST/
ProtSp2.ST = 16#FF or Feature2.Bit16 = 0:
The input parameter ProtRev/ProtCls has no effect, the button in the faceplate is
invisible.
– Intl_En = 0 or Intlock.ST = 16#FF:
The input parameter Intlock has no effect, the button in the faceplate is invisible
– IntlRevEn/IntlClsEn/IntlSp2En = 0 or IntlRev.ST/IntlCls.ST/
IntlSp2.ST = 16#FF or Feature2.Bit16 = 0:
The input parameter has no effect, the button in the faceplate is invisible.
The block icon indicates the prioritized group status according to the active operating state.
See also the section Forming the group status for interlock information (Page 106) for more
on this.
The faceplate visualizes the state of each interlock type separately.
The padlock is not shown in the block icon if all parameters for enabling the button are set to
0 or all parameters have the signal status 16#FF.

Note
Motors and values are not put into the neutral position if one of the interlock inputs is active
(for example Intlock = 0) and the corresponding signal status is 16#FF
(Intlock.ST = 16#FF).

Influence of the signal status on the interlock


See also the section Influence of the signal status on the interlock (Page 105) for more on this.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 103
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Outputting "Interlock active" using the LockAct parameter


If an interlock is set at the parameter:
● Intlock
● Permit
● Protect
● IntlRev/IntlCls/IntlSp2 (only for blocks with directional interlock and
Feature2.Bit16 = 1)
● PermRev/PermCls/PermSp2 (only for blocks with directional interlock and
Feature2.Bit16 = 1)
● ProtRev/ProtCls/ProtSp2 (only for blocks with directional interlock and
Feature2.Bit16 = 1)
● Trip (only for motors and motor valves),
the LockAct parameter is set automatically to active (=1). The parameter LockAct is set to
0 if the interlock is no longer present and those interlocks which require acknowledgement
have been acknowledged.
You can bypass the interlock using BypProt = 1 in local mode and during simulation. This
also makes LockAct = 0.

Note
The LockAct parameter is not set despite a pending interlock, if a value in the block is forced.
See also the section Forcing operating modes (Page 41) for more on this.

Messaging
No messages are assigned to the interlock types. However, if you want to have a message
when an interlock condition is violated, you can use the freely interconnectable input
parameters to generate the messages. See also the section Generating instance-specific
messages (Page 213) for more on this.

2.1.4.2 Disabling interlocks

Disabling individual interlocks


You can disable the block interlocks that are implemented using the input parameters
Intlock, Protect, Permit, IntlRev/Cls/Sp2, ProtRev/Cls/Sp2,and PermRev/Cls/
Sp2.
If you want to disable the block interlock, you have to set the following parameters:
● Perm_En = 0 or Permit.ST = 16#FF:
The input parameter Permit has no effect.
● PermRevEn/PermClsEn/PermSp2En = 0 or PermRev.ST/PermCls.ST/
PermSp2.ST = 16#FF or Feature2.Bit16 = 0:
The input parameter PermRev/PermCls/PermSp2 has no effect.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


104 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

● Prot_En = 0 or Protect.ST = 16#FF:


The input parameter Protect has no effect.
● ProtRevEn/ProtClsEn/ProtSp2En = 0 or ProtRev.ST/ProtCls.ST/
ProtSp2.ST = 16#FF or Feature2.Bit16 = 0:
The input parameter ProtRev/ProtCls/ProtSp2 has no effect.
● Intl_En = 0 or Intlock.ST = 16#FF:
The input parameter Intlock has no effect.
● IntlRevEn/IntlClsEn/IntlSp2En = 0 or IntlRev.ST/IntlCls.ST/
IntlSp2.ST = 16#FF or Feature2.Bit16 = 0:
The input parameter IntlRev/IntlCls/IntlSp2 has no effect.

Note
"Small" blocks have only the Intlock parameter
With "Small" blocks, you can only assign parameters to "Interlock without reset" (input
parameter Intlock or for the deactivation of the interlock for the input parameter Intl_En).

Disabling of all the interlocks (only for local operation and for simulation)
You can use the input parameter BypProt = 1 to disable all the interlocks, irrespective of
the parameter assignment of the individual interlock, in local mode as well as for the
"simulation" function.

2.1.4.3 Influence of the signal status on the interlock

Influence of the signal status on the interlock


There are three ways in which the signal status affects the interlocks:
● Simulation signal status
● Signal status "Bad, device related" (value 16#00) or "Bad, process related" (value 16#28)
● Signal status ≠ "Simulation" and "Bad, device related"

"Simulation" signal status


An interlock signal is displayed differently depending on the "Separate evaluation for excluded
and simulated interlock signals (Page 155)" function and the status of the interlock (see
"Forming the group status for interlock information (Page 106)").

Signal status "Bad, device related" (value 16#00) or "Bad, process related" (value 16#28)
An interlock signal with this status is always processed as an active interlock signal in the block
and displayed with the following icons in the faceplate:

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 105
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

for 16#00 or

for 16#28 and

A motor protection signal (Trip parameter) with signal status 16#00 or 16#28 is used to
activate motor protection. This is indicated by "Motor protection" in the standard view of the
faceplates.
A torque-monitoring signal (TorqOpen, TorqClose parameters) with signal status 16#00 or
16#28 is used to activate torque monitoring for motor valve VlvMotL.

Signal status ≠ "Simulation" as well as "Bad, device related" and "Bad, process related"
Only signal states "Simulation", "Bad, device related" and "Bad, process related" have an effect
on the processing in the block; all others are only displayed with their relevant icon in the
faceplate.

2.1.4.4 Forming the group status for interlock information

Forming the group status for interlock information


A group status for interlock information is required for:
● Interlock state for:
– Interlocked
– Not interlocked
– Disabled

Group status for the interlock state


All the effective interlock states are combined and displayed in the block icon. The interlock
states are displayed with the following prioritization:
1. Function interlocked, shown in the block icon with a closed padlock

2. Function not interlocked, shown in the block icon as an open padlock

3. Function disabled, shown in the block icon as a crossed-out, closed padlock

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


106 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Overview: Display for the interlock status in faceplate


If the Separate evaluation for excluded and simulated interlock signals (Page 155) function is
not enabled (Feature bit =0), the bypass signals in the structures Permission, Protection,
and Interlock are not evaluated.
Interlocks are shown in the faceplate as follows:

Parameter: Parameter: Value: Status: Button Icon Icon


BypProt Perm_En or 2)
Permission 2)
Permission or
2)

Prot_En2) or or Protection2) or
Intl_En 2) Protection2) or Intlock2)
Intlock 2)

x x X 16#FF - - -
x 0 x x - - -
0 1 1 16#00 Visible

0 1 1 16#28 Visible

0 1 0 16#60 Visible

0 1 1 16#60 Visible

0 1 0 ≠ 16#FF Visible Status based


on priority
0 1 1 ≠ (16#FF, Visible Status based
16#60, 16#00, on priority
16#28)
1 (for local 1 x ≠ 16#FF Visible Status based
mode and simu‐ on priority
lation only)

Comments on table:
● X: The value is irrelevant for the display of the icon.
● : Blocks with directional interlock and Feature2.Bit16 = 1: "Perm_En", "Intl_En",
2)

"Prot_En", "Enable", "Interlock" and "Protection" also include the direction


Note
If values are forced in the block, this is indicated in the block icon by a crossed-out, closed
padlock.

If the Separate evaluation for excluded and simulated interlock signals (Page 155) function is
enabled (Feature bit =1), the bypass signals in the structures Permission, Protection, and
Interlock are evaluated. The bypass signals can be read from the upstream interlock block at
the output Bypass.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 107
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Excluded interlock signals are shown in the faceplate as follows:

Parameter: Status: Bypass: Button Icon


Perm_En or 2)
Permission or 2)
Permission or
2)

Prot_En2) or Protection2) or Protection2) or


Intl_En 2)
Intlock 2)
Intlock2)
x 16#FF x - -
0 x x - -
1 ≠ 16#FF 0 Visible 1)
1 ≠ 16#FF 1 Visible 1)

Comments on table:
● X: The value is irrelevant for the display of the icon.
● 1): Icon corresponding to the status of the interlock signal (for 16#80 no icon)
● : Blocks with directional interlock and Feature2.Bit16 = 1: "Perm_En", "Intl_En",
2)

"Prot_En", "Enable", "Interlock" and "Protection" also include the direction

2.1.4.5 Rapid stop for motors

Rapid stop for motors


Rapid stop has the highest priority in all operating modes (manual and automatic mode as well
as local mode) and operating states (such as the forcing of states). It is activated via the
faceplate. This depends on the setting at the Feature bit Enabling rapid stop via faceplate
(Page 172).

Note
"Small" blocks do not feature rapid stop.
The "rapid stop" function is supported only by "Large" blocks.

You issue the command for rapid stop state using the RapidStp = 1 input parameter.
When you click on the "Rapid Stop" button in the faceplate, the drive stops immediately, shown
as follows in the faceplate:

5DSLGVWRS

The R_StpAct = 1 output parameter is set to implement the rapid stop function for local
mode. You need to interconnect this parameter with the corresponding channel block and in
the I/O to realize the rapid stop function in the hardware.
Rapid stop is unlocked for all operating modes using the "Reset" button in the faceplate
(RstOp = 1); in CFC it is unlocked using the RstLi = 1 input parameter. In automatic mode,
the unlocking can also be performed via a 0-1 edge transition in the control if
Feature.Bit9 = 1.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


108 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Rapid stop can be selected even with the motor in stop state. In this case, the motor start is
prevented.

2.1.4.6 Bypassing signals

Bypassing signals
With this function, you can flag a block as bypassed. If the bypass function is active, the output
parameter BypassAct will be set from the block. With a connection from BypassAct to an
input parameter BypLixx of an interlock block, you can bypass the corresponding input of the
interlock block.
If the block is set to bypass, the bypass information bit of the process output and the limit switch
points listed in the following table are set. If you connect one of this listed parameter with
bypass information bit to an interlock input Inx, you can use the bypass information bit to
switch the interlock signal in bypass. For this in the interlock block the corresponding bypass
enable bit BypEn.Inx and the Feature.Bit2 Separate evaluation for excluded and
simulated interlock signals (Page 155) have to set.
Additionally, you can define over the Feature bit Substitution value is active if the block is in
bypass (Page 189) if the block shall use the process value or a substitution value in case of
an active bypass.

Block Process value/sig‐ Process value/ Parameter with bypass information bits
nal signal
MonAnL PV_Out BypPV PV_Out, PV_AH_Act, PV_WH_Act,
PV_TH_Act, PV_AL_Act,
PV_WL_Act, PV_TL_Act, GradHUpAct,
GradHDnAct, GradLAct
PIDConL, PID‐ PV_Out BypPV PV_Out, PV_AH_Act, PV_WH_Act,
ConR, and PID‐ PV_TH_Act, PV_AL_Act, PV_WL_Act,
StepL PV_TL_Act, ER_AH_Act, ER_AL_Act
MonDiL Out BypIn Out
TotalL Out BypOut Out, OutAH_Act, OutWH_Act,
OutTH_Act, OutAL_Act, OutWL_Act,
OutTL_Act

With the parameter BypLiOp, you can decide whether the switching on/off will be done by the
input parameters which are connected in CFC or by the faceplate from an operator.
● BypLiOp = 0: In the "Parameter view", the operator can switch on/off the bypass function
over the parameter BypPVOp or RstBypOp. If BypLock = 1, you cannot make any change
to the parameters BypPVOp or ResBypOp. The button for switching the bypass functionality
on/off in the "Parameter view" is deactivated.
● BypLiOp = 1: With a connection of the parameter BypPVLi or RstBypLi, the bypass
function will be switched on/off.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 109
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.5 Form signal status

2.1.5.1 Forming and outputting signal status for blocks

General information on forming and outputting the signal status


The process values of the function blocks are generated and transferred along with a signal
status as a structured variable. This contains a statement about the signal quality. The function
blocks determine the appropriate signal status for their process outputs depending on the
signal status of the process inputs, which are involved in calculating the process outputs. If
multiple process inputs are involved in calculating a process output, the signal status is formed
according to prioritization defined by function block groups. The highest priority is the signal
status with the value 0.
The blocks are grouped into the following function block groups:
● Technologic blocks (Page 110)
● Digital logic blocks (Page 112)
● Analog logic blocks (Page 113)
● Redundancy blocks (Page 114)
● Blocks with configurable status prioritization (Page 116)
● Interlock blocks (Page 117)
● Mathematical blocks (Page 119)
● PCS 7 channel blocks (Page 120)
● Channel blocks for field devices (Page 120)
All blocks of a group use the same priority specifications and form the signal status of the
process outputs based on them.

Note
The status / quality of control inputs for logic functions and parameters have no influence on
the status / quality of process values and logic functions of the blocks.
The status / quality of process values inherit the results of mathematic and logic functions,
which are directly related to the process value.
The status/quality of process values immediately inherit the results of monitoring and limiting
functions directly related to the process value.

2.1.5.2 Forming and outputting the signal status for technologic blocks

Forming the signal status for technology blocks


For more general information on forming the status signal, refer to the section: Forming and
outputting signal status for blocks (Page 110).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


110 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

In technology blocks, a group status is formed from the input parameters (see description of
the relevant blocks) according to the priority table below (highest priority is 0). This group status
is displayed in the status bar of the faceplate and of the block icon.
The group status is set to 16#68 (Uncertain, device related) with an undefined signal status at
a control input, which is involved in the formation of the group status.

Signal status Priority Value Meaning


icon
0 16#60 Manipulated value (for example, substitute val‐
ue, simulation, last valid value)
1 16#00 Bad, device related

2 16#28 Bad, process related

3 16#68 Uncertain, device related

4 16#78 Uncertain, process related

5 16#A4 Maintenance request

6 16#80 Good

Interconnectable output parameters for limits (for example, PV_AH_Act) that can be influenced
directly by an interconnectable input parameter (for example, PV) inherit the status from the
associated output parameter (for example, PV_Out).
If an output parameter for limits is influenced directly by several interconnectable input
parameters (limit monitoring), it receives the status of the input parameter with the highest
priority (see overview above). Thus, for example, the control deviation is formed from the
setpoint (SP) and the process value (PV). The output parameter for limits ER_AH_Act, for
example, which signals an active violation of the high limit for the error signal, has a signal
status based on the group status formed from the process value and setpoint (ER).

Evaluation of the signal status in case of interlocks in technology blocks


The signal states of the interconnectable input parameters of the interlocking and protective
signals are treated exactly like process values with the following exceptions:
● The signal status is displayed in the faceplate at the buttons for calling the series-connected
interlocking blocks.
● If the input signal has "Simulation" status and the input signal is therefore inactive (for
example, Protect = 1), the input signal in this case is interpreted as a bypassed signal
and is displayed by the icon for bypassing:

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 111
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

● If the input signal has "Simulation" status and the input signal is therefore inactive (for
example, Protect = 0), the input signal in this case is interpreted as a simulated signal
and is displayed by the icon for simulation:

● If the input signal has the "Bad, device related" or "Bad, process related" signal status, this
is evaluated as an active input signal, regardless of its value, i.e. safety interlock signal
(Protect = 1) that is inactive due to its value, triggers a safety interlock when its status is
"Bad, device related" or "Bad, process related".

Display of the signal status in the faceplate and block icon for technology blocks
The signal status is displayed for each individual input parameter in the faceplate next to the
process values or the interlock buttons. The group status is displayed in the block icon and in
the group display of the faceplate.

Note
The interlocks and additional values are not included in the formation of the group status.

2.1.5.3 Forming and outputting the signal status of digital logic blocks

Forming the signal status of digital logic blocks


For more general information on forming the status signal, refer to the section: Forming and
outputting signal status for blocks (Page 110).
The status for the result of the output is formed within digital logic blocks from all input
parameters, according to the following priority table (highest priority is 0)

Signal status Priority Value Meaning


icon
0 16#00 Bad, device related

1 16#28 Bad, process related

2 16#60 Manipulated value (for example, substitute val‐


ue, simulation, last valid value)
3 16#68 Uncertain, device related

4 16#78 Uncertain, process related

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


112 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Signal status Priority Value Meaning


icon
5 16#A4 Maintenance request

6 16#80 Good

The group status is set to 16#68 (uncertain, device-related), with an undefined signal status
at a control input that is involved in forming the group status.
A signal status 16#FF at a control input is not used for the calculation of the group status. If
all relevant control inputs are 16#FF, the group status is 16#80.
If only one process input is decisive for calculating the output value, the status of the process
input is transferred to the status of the output.

Special notes for the Andxx blocks


● If the output value is 1, it has the signal status with the highest priority of all input signals.
● If the output value is 0, it has the signal status with the lowest priority of all input signals,
which have a value of 0.

Special notes for the Orxx blocks


● If the output value is 1, it has the signal status with the lowest priority of all input signals,
which have a value of 1.
● If the output value is 0, it has the signal status with the highest priority of all input signals.

Special notes for the Xor04 block


The worst signal status of all input parameters is always selected and output with the Out
output parameter.

2.1.5.4 Forming and outputting the signal status of analog logic blocks

Forming the signal status of analog logic blocks


For more general information on forming the status signal, refer to the section: Forming and
outputting signal status for blocks (Page 110).
The signal status of the Out output value within the block is taken directly from the Inx input
value.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 113
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Special notes for the CompAn02 block


This block evaluates the signal status of the two input parameters In1 and In2 as shown in
the following table.

Signal status Priority Value Meaning


icon
0 16#60 Manipulated value (for example, substitute val‐
ue, simulation, last valid value)
1 16#00 Bad, device related

2 16#28 Bad, process related

3 16#68 Uncertain, device related

4 16#78 Uncertain, process related

5 16#A4 Maintenance request

6 16#80 Good

2.1.5.5 Forming and outputting the signal status of redundancy blocks

Forming the signal status of redundancy blocks RedAn02 and RedDi02


For more general information on forming the status signal, refer to the section: Forming and
outputting signal status for blocks (Page 110).
The signal status is evaluated according to the following priority:

Signal status Priority Value Meaning


icon
0 16#60 Manipulated value (for example, substitute val‐
ue, simulation, last valid value)
1 16#80 Good

2 16#A4 Maintenance request

3 16#78 Uncertain, process related

4 16#68 Uncertain, device related

5 16#28 Bad, process related

6 16#00 Bad, device related

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


114 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

The output value is generated based on the signal status of the process value with the above
table of priorities. In addition, the output parameters SimAct, Uncertain, and LossRed are
still set according to the signal status.

In1.ST In2.ST Out.ST Out.Value SimAct.Va Uncertain LossRed.V


lue .Value alue
16#80 16#80 16#80 In1 0 0 0
16#80 16#60 16#60 In2 1 1 0
16#80 16#A4 16#80 In1 0 1 0
16#80 16#78 16#80 In1 0 1 0
16#80 16#68 16#80 In1 0 1 0
16#80 16#28 16#68 In1 0 1 1
16#80 16#00 16#68 In1 0 1 1
16#60 16#80 16#60 In1 1 1 0
16#60 16#60 16#60 In1 1 1 0
16#60 16#A4 16#60 In1 1 1 0
16#60 16#78 16#60 In1 1 1 0
16#60 16#68 16#60 In1 1 1 0
16#60 16#28 16#60 In1 1 1 1
16#60 16#00 16#60 In1 1 1 1
16#A4 16#80 16#80 In2 0 1 0
16#A4 16#60 16#60 In2 1 1 0
16#A4 16#A4 16#A4 In1 0 1 0
16#A4 16#78 16#A4 In1 0 1 0
16#A4 16#68 16#A4 In1 0 1 0
16#A4 16#28 16#68 In1 0 1 1
16#A4 16#00 16#68 In1 0 1 1
16#78 16#80 16#80 In2 0 1 0
16#78 16#60 16#60 In2 1 1 0
16#78 16#A4 16#A4 In2 0 1 0
16#78 16#78 16#78 In1 0 1 0
16#78 16#68 16#78 In1 0 1 0
16#78 16#28 16#68 In1 0 1 1
16#78 16#00 16#68 In1 0 1 1
16#68 16#80 16#80 In2 0 1 0
16#68 16#60 16#60 In2 1 1 0
16#68 16#A4 16#A4 In2 0 1 0
16#68 16#78 16#78 In2 0 1 0
16#68 16#68 16#68 In1 0 1 0
16#68 16#28 16#68 In1 0 1 1
16#68 16#00 16#68 In1 0 1 1
16#28 16#80 16#68 In2 0 1 1
16#28 16#60 16#60 In2 1 1 1
16#28 16#A4 16#68 In2 0 1 1
16#28 16#78 16#68 In2 0 1 1

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 115
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

In1.ST In2.ST Out.ST Out.Value SimAct.Va Uncertain LossRed.V


lue .Value alue
16#28 16#68 16#68 In2 0 1 1
16#28 16#28 16#28 In1 0 1 1
16#28 16#00 16#28 In1 0 1 1
16#00 16#80 16#68 In2 0 1 1
16#00 16#60 16#60 In2 1 1 1
16#00 16#A4 16#68 In2 0 1 1
16#00 16#78 16#68 In2 0 1 1
16#00 16#68 16#68 In2 0 1 1
16#00 16#28 16#28 In2 0 1 1
16#00 16#00 16#00 In1 0 1 1

2.1.5.6 Forming and outputting the signal status for blocks with configurable status prioritization

Forming the signal status for blocks with configurable status priority
For more general information on forming the status signal, refer to the section: Forming and
outputting signal status for blocks (Page 110).
The SelPrio parameter is used for this block to define the priority setting for linking the
individual states. You have the option between the following specifications:

Priority SelPrio = SelPrio = SelPrio = SelPrio = SelPrio = SelPrio = SelPrio = SelPrio =


0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0

16#60 16#60 16#60


16#80 16#A4 16#80 16#A4 16#80
1

16#00 16#00 16#00 16#A4 16#A4


16#80 16#80 16#80
2

16#28 16#28 16#28 16#60 16#60 16#78


16#A4 16#A4
3

16#00 16#00 16#00 16#78


16#68 16#68 16#68 16#68
4

16#78 16#78 16#78 16#28 16#28 16#28 16#28 16#68

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


116 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Priority SelPrio = SelPrio = SelPrio = SelPrio = SelPrio = SelPrio = SelPrio = SelPrio =


0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
5

16#60 16#60 16#00 16#28


16#A4 16#68 16#68 16#68
6

16#78 16#78 16#78 16#60 16#00


16#80 16#A4 16#80

Special notes for the MuxAn03 block


The status priority for this block, which is used by the block to process the status of the PV1 ...
PV3 process value inputs, can be set with the SelPrio parameter.

Note
The parameter SelPrio can take a value from 0 to 7 . SelPrio = 6 is set by default.
If you enter a value greater than 7, the setting for 7 is used. If you enter a value lower than 0,
the setting for 0 is used.

For information on evaluating the status of the process value inputs, refer to the section
MuxAn03 functions (Page 1973).

2.1.5.7 Forming and outputting the signal status for interlock blocks

Forming the signal status for interlock blocks


For more general information on forming the status signal, refer to the section: Forming and
outputting signal status for blocks (Page 110).
The block determines the signal status of the output signal, based on the signal status of the
input values from the configured logical operation according to the following table (highest
priority is 0):

Signal status icon Priority Value Meaning


0 16#00 Bad, device related

1 16#28 Bad, process related

2 16#60 Manipulated value (for example, substitute val‐


ue, simulation, last valid value)
3 16#68 Uncertain, device related

4 16#78 Uncertain, process related

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 117
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Signal status icon Priority Value Meaning


5 16#A4 Maintenance request

No icon 6 16#80 Good


No icon - 16#FF Input is not connected

General rules
● If a given input causes a signal change at the output, the signal status of the input with the
highest priority (worst signal status) is set at the output, since each input can influence the
output:
– Logical AND operation (logic = 1):
If the output value is 1, it has the signal status with the highest priority of all
interconnected input signals.
– Logical OR operation (logic = 0):
If the output value is 0, it has the signal status with the highest priority of all
interconnected input signals.
● If several inputs have the same priority and the output therefore cannot be changed, the
signal status of the input with the lowest priority (highest signal status) is set at the output,
since the output is uniquely determined by the signal with the best signal status:
– Logical AND operation (logic = 1):
If the output value is 0, it has the signal status with the lowest priority of all interconnected
input signals, which have a value of 0.
Note
With Feature.bit23 = 1 (evaluation signal status), input signals with a bad signal
status (16#28 or 16#00) are processed with the value 0, regardless of their actual value

– Logical OR operation (logic = 0):


If the output value is 1, it has the signal status with the lowest priority of all interconnected
input signals, which have a value of 1.
● If no inputs are interconnected, the signal status of the output is set to simulation (16#60).

Display of the signal status in the faceplate and block icon for interlocking blocks
The signal status is displayed for each individual parameter (except for the analog values) in
the faceplate next to the process values.
If you bypass a signal, it is displayed in the faceplate of the interlocking block next to the button
for excluding, as well as in the block icon as follows.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


118 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Note
If an excluded interlock signal can become switchover-relevant, the status of the output Out.ST
is set to simulation 16#60, as long as it is not forced by other interlock inputs to Bad, device-
related 16#00 or Bad, process-related 16#28.
An excluded interlock input has no influence on the status when the Separate evaluation for
excluded and simulated interlock signals (Page 155) function is enabled.

The currently valid status for the output signal is also displayed in the faceplate.

2.1.5.8 Forming and outputting the signal status for mathematical blocks

Forming the signal status for mathematical blocks


For more general information on forming the status signal, refer to the section: Forming and
outputting signal status for blocks (Page 110).
The status for the result of the output is formed within mathematical blocks from all process
inputs involved in the calculation, according to the following table (highest priority is 0)

Signal status Priority Value Meaning


icon
0 16#00 Bad, device related

1 16#28 Bad, process related

2 16#60 Manipulated value (for example, substitute value, sim‐


ulation, last valid value)
3 16#68 Uncertain, device related

4 16#78 Uncertain, process related

5 16#A4 Maintenance request

6 16#80 Good

The group status is set to 16#68 (uncertain, device-related), with an undefined signal status
at a control input that is involved in forming the group status.
A 16#FF signal status at a control input is not used for the calculation of the group status. If
all relevant control inputs are 16#FF, the group status in the search for the worst group status
is 16#80 and 16#00 in the search for the best group status.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 119
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

If only one process input is decisive for calculating the output value, the status of the process
input is transferred to the status of the output.

Note
Special notes for the Integral mathematical block
Due to its application area (time integral, I-component for the configuration of a controller), the
Integral block generates the signal status like the technological blocks.

Special notes for the mathematical blocks Addxx, Mulxx, Div02 and Sub02
If the result of the mathematic operation is a floating-point number that cannot be displayed,
the result of the status is set to 16#28. Floating-point numbers that cannot be displayed are
labeled in the CFC with #+Inf (+ infinite), #-Inf (- infinite) or with #NaN (not a number).

2.1.5.9 Forming and outputting the signal status for PCS 7 channel blocks

Forming the signal status for PCS7 channel blocks


For more general information on forming the status signal, refer to the section: Forming and
outputting signal status for blocks (Page 110).
The signal status for PCS7 channel blocks can assume the following values:

Signal status Value Meaning


icon
16#80 Good

16#78 Uncertain, process related:


Limitation of input parameter PV_In is active (analog output
channel blocks only)
16#60 Manipulated value (for example, substitute value, simulation, last
valid value)
16#00 Bad, device related (value not valid)

2.1.5.10 Forming and outputting the signal status for channel blocks for field devices

Forming the signal status for channel blocks (field devices)


For more general information on forming the status signal, refer to the section: Forming and
outputting signal status for blocks (Page 110).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


120 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

The signal status of channel blocks for field devices can assume the following values:

Signal status icon Value Meaning


16#80 Good

16#78 Uncertain, process related

16#68 Uncertain, device related

16#60 Manipulated value (for example, substitute value, simulation,


last valid value)
16#28 Bad, process related

16#00 Bad, device related (value not valid)

16#A4 Maintenance required, maintenance demanded

2.1.6 Error handling

2.1.6.1 Error handling

Error handling
The channel and technologic blocks feature error handling routines. A distinction must be made
between the following areas:
● Error numbers
● External process control error (CSF)
● Process-specific errors
● Invalid signal states
● Mode switchover error
● Errors in channel blocks

Error numbers
Most blocks have an output parameter ErrorNum that can be used to output internal error
states of the block as error numbers.
With some blocks, input parameters are checked for permissible values. They are therefore
only used to prevent the output value from remaining invalid when the input value is once again
in the valid range. If an invalid value is detected, and the corresponding output value is held
at the last displayed value instead of an invalid value being displayed. If blocks do not have

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 121
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

this check, an invalid value can appear at the output. However, a valid value is displayed again
at the output as soon as the input values of the block have changed correspondingly.
Any value set over an interconnection or as a result of a parameter assignment that is outside
the range of values (e.g. "Not a Number") is not processed by the block algorithm. The last
valid value is processed instead.
In addition to the errors stated above, a limit violation is also signaled for example. Each error
number is assigned to a specific error.
If there is more than one error, all error numbers have the same priority. The routine always
displays the error number of the error most recently detected in a block cycle.

External process control error (CSF)


An external process control error always lies outside the process - it exists in the form of device
or other hardware faults. If, for example, a run-time error occurs at a valve, there is an error
or fault in the pneumatic system.
A process control error is output if an external error is set at the input CSF. You can enable
this output function, for example, by interconnecting output Bad of the channel block with input
CSF of the technologic block.
The error message "$$BlockComment$$ External error occurred" is output at CSF = 1.
This state is visualized in the group display by an "S" character in the faceplate overview and
in the block icon.
With motor, valve and dosing blocks, there is also the possibility that the block switches to
error processing. Feature.bit18 Activating error state for external process control error
CSF (Page 154) must be set for this. The device goes into error processing and moves the
drive to the neutral position or switches the dosing operation to off for a doser. If the dosing
operation is already finished, it remains in the completed state. Resetting the error is described
in Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors (Page 43).

External error (FaultExt)


The FaultExt input can be used to pass an external error without the generation of a
message. The device goes into error processing and moves the drive to the neutral position
or switches the dosing operation to off for a doser. If the dosing operation is already finished,
it remains in the completed state. Separate messages can be generated by interconnecting
the external error to ExtMsgx messages that can be freely selected. Resetting the error is
described in Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors (Page 43).

Process-specific errors
Process-specific errors can have the following causes:
● Runtime monitoring: If the feedback signals do not match the control settings after a
selected time has expired, a process-related error is output.
● Feedback monitoring: Refer to the Monitoring the feedbacks (Page 98) section for more on
this.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


122 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

If the block algorithm detects a monitoring error while monitoring is enabled, the corresponding
output parameter is set to 1 in the block. The "$$BlockComment$$ Feedback error xxx" error
message is also output, where xxx, for example, stands for the valve.
This state is visualized in the group display by an "S" character in the faceplate overview and
in the block icon.
The block must be reset after the monitoring error was cleared and if automatic mode is set.

Invalid input signals


This error is output if inconsistencies are detected between associated I/Os. The close and
open commands cannot be output simultaneously to the valve, for example.
If the block algorithm detects an invalid combination of input signals, an error number
(ErrorNum) is output that depends on the block type.
In the case of motors, valves and batches, the faceplates’ standard view will additionally output
the text “invalid signal”.

Mode switchover error


This error is reported if you change the mode of the block from:
● Manual to automatic mode or
● Local mode to automatic mode
and the previous and target state are inconsistent (bumpless switchover). You can only change
the block mode if the subsequent state corresponds with the previous state.
Bumpless switchover can be activated / deactivated using the Feature connection on the
Enabling bumpless switchover to automatic mode for valves, motors, and dosers (Page 177)
or Disabling bumpless switchover to automatic mode for controllers (Page 176) bit.
Bumpless switchover from local to automatic mode is undertaken using the LocalSetting
parameter, as described in section Local mode (Page 80).
In the standard view of the faceplate, the text "Changeover error" is displayed in the event of
an unwanted switchover with bumps.
The block retains local mode if the operator changes the mode from local to automatic and the
error mentioned above occurs. The block changes to manual mode if the mode is changed
from local to automatic over interconnected inputs and the error mentioned above occurs.

Errors in channel blocks


The following errors may be displayed by the channel blocks:
● Channel error
● Device or module fault
● Higher-level error
● Invalid measuring range

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 123
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.6.2 Outputting group errors

Outputting group errors


The GrpErr output parameter assembles the faults of a block and makes them available to
you. A group error is compiled from the following error information:
● Feedback errors (static or dynamic feedback monitoring)
● External error (CSF and FaultExt)
● Motor protection (only for motors)
● Module errors (only for hardware controllers)
● I/O access errors (only for hardware controllers)
● Parameter assignment errors (only for hardware controllers)
For information on how the signal is formed for the group error at the GrpErr output parameter,
refer to the corresponding block descriptions in the "Functions" chapter.

Note
The signal status of the individual signals is not taken into consideration for forming the group
error. The outputs therefore always have the status, 16#80.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


124 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.7 Ramp function

2.1.7.1 Using setpoint ramp

Using setpoint ramp


Starting at the current internal setpoint, the setpoint can be set to a target setpoint value over
a ramp-shaped function. In the faceplate, you can start the function in ramp view (SP_RmpOn
= 1)).

3RVLWLYHFKDQJH 1HJDWLYHFKDQJH

,QSXWYDOXHFXUYH
 

2XWSXWYDOXHFXUYH

2XWSXWYDOXHFXUYH

,QSXWYDOXHFXUYH
 

Use the SP_RmpModTime input parameter or the ramp view of the faceplate to specify whether
the setpoint ramp is defined by time or by gradients:
● If you select time (SP_RmpModTime = 1): The ramp of the setpoint is calculated
automatically by the block so that after the ramp has started (SP_RmpOn = 1), the setpoint
will reach the target setpoint (SP_RmpTarget) after the selected time (SP_RmpTime).
● If you select ramp (SP_RmpModTime = 0): The inclination of the ramp matches the
selected rates of change SP_UpRaLim (positive) or SP_DnRaLim (negative).
Once the setpoint has reached the target setpoint, the function is terminated automatically
(SP_RmpOn = 0). The ramp trip can be prematurely aborted in the faceplate by setting
SP_RmpOn = 0.
Requirements for using a setpoint ramp

Block Manipulated vari‐ Gradient limit Operating mode


able
Controller Internal Off Automatic
OpAnL Internal Off
MotSpdCL Internal Off

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 125
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

If the requirements are not fulfilled during the ramp trip, the ramp trip is automatically canceled.

Note
Special note for the MotSpdCL block
In the case of an interlock, a monitoring error, motor protection or rapid stop, the motor is
switched off and the internal ramp setpoint is reset to the starting setpoint of the ramp trip.

2.1.7.2 Gradient limit of the setpoint

Gradient limit of the setpoint


The gradient limit is activated via the SP_RateOn = 1 input parameter.
The values are set at the SP_UpRaLim and SP_DnRaLim parameters depending on the
TimeFactor.
● TimeFactor = 0: Unit of the gradient limiting is Unit/Second
● TimeFactor = 1: Unit of the gradient limiting is Unit/Minute
● TimeFactor = 2: Unit of the gradient limiting is Unit/Hour
● SP_UpRaLim sets the gradient high limit
● SP_DnRaLim sets the gradient low limit
Note
ParametersSP_UpRaLim and SP_DnRaLim are always evaluated according to their
magnitude.

With the Feature Bit Gradient limitation with time duration (Page 186), you can also use the
parameters SP_RmpModTime and SP_RmpTime in the gradient limit function. If this
Feature Bit = 1 and SP_RmpModTime = 1 is parameterized, the ramp rate is calculated with
a change of setpoint such that the new value of the setpoint will reach after the time of
SP_RmpTime.

External setpoint
If the external setpoint (SP_ExtAct.Value = 1) is switched on, the linkable values
SP_LiUpRaLim, SP_LiDnRaLim, SP_LiRmpTime, of SP_UpRaLim, SP_DnRaLim,
SP_RmpTime respectively will be used. The values will be active only if they are connected
(SP_LiX.ST <> 16#FF).

Displaying active limitation


A gradient limit is indicated at the following output parameters:
● SP_UpRaAct = 1: Gradient has a high limit
● SP_DnRaAct = 1: Gradient has a low limit

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


126 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.7.3 Using a manipulated variable ramp

Using a manipulated variable ramp


Starting at the current internal manipulated variable, the manipulated variable can be brought
to a target value in the form of a ramp. In the faceplate, you can start the function in ramp view
(MV_RmpOn = 1)).

3RVLWLYHFKDQJH 1HJDWLYHFKDQJH

,QSXWYDOXHFXUYH
 

2XWSXWYDOXHFXUYH

2XWSXWYDOXHFXUYH

,QSXWYDOXHFXUYH
 

Use the MV_RmpModTime input parameter or the ramp view of the faceplate to specify whether
the manipulated variable ramp is defined by time or by gradients:
● If you select time (MV_RmpModTime = 1): The gradients of the manipulated variable are
calculated automatically by the block so that after the ramp has started
(MV_RmpOn = 1), the manipulated variable will reach the target value (MV_RmpTarget)
after the configured time (MV_RmpTime).
● Specification with gradients (MV_RmpModTime = 0): The ramp slope matches the
configured rates of change MV_UpRaLim (positive) or MV_DnRaLim (negative).
Once the manipulated variable has reached the target value, the function is terminated
automatically (MV_RmpOn = 0). The ramp trend can be prematurely aborted in the faceplate
by setting MV_RmpOn = 0.
Requirements for using a manipulated value ramp:

Block Manipulated vari‐ Gradient limit Operating


able mode
VlvAnL without auxiliary valve Internal Off Manual
VlvAnL with auxiliary valve Internal Off

If the requirements are not fulfilled during the ramp trip, the ramp trip is automatically canceled.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 127
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.7.4 Gradient limiting of the manipulated variable

Gradient limiting of the manipulated variable


The gradient limit is activated via the MV_RateOn = 1 input parameter.
The values are set at the MV_UpRaLim and MV_DnRaLim parameters depending on the
TimeFactor.
● TimeFactor = 0: Unit of the gradient limiting is Unit/Second
● TimeFactor = 1: Unit of the gradient limiting is Unit/Minute
● TimeFactor = 2: Unit of the gradient limiting is Unit/Hour
● MV_UpRaLim sets the gradient high limit
● MV_DnRaLim sets the gradient low limit
Note
Parameters MV_UpRaLim and MV_DnRaLim are always evaluated according to their
magnitude.

With the Feature Bit Gradient limitation with time duration (Page 186), you can also use the
parameters MV_RmpModTime and MV_RmpTime in the gradient limit function. If this
Feature Bit = 1 and MV_RmpModTime = 1 is parameterized, the ramp rate is calculated with
a change of manipulated variable such that the new value of the manipulated variable will
reach after the time of MV_RmpTime.

External maniputaed variable


If the external maniputaed variable (MV_ExtAct.Value = 1) is switched on, the linkable
values MV_LiUpRaLim, MV_LiDnRaLim, MV_LiRmpTime, of MV_UpRaLim, MV_DnRaLim,
MV_RmpTime respectively will be used. The values will be active only if they are connected
(MV_LiX.ST <> 16#FF).

Displaying active limitation


A gradient limit is indicated at the following output parameters:
● MV_UpRaAct = 1: Gradient has an high limit
● MV_DnRaAct = 1: Gradient has a low limit

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


128 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.8 Internal/external setting

2.1.8.1 Applying the dynamically activated dead band during the PV settling time

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 30.

Dynamic deactivation of the dead band by the PV settling time


You can use this Feature bit to improve the PV settling time in the range of the dead band.
The deadband is deactivated until the PV settles more in the center than at the edges of the
dead band. The probability that the controlled variable is within the dead zone time is increased,
and further control actions are no longer necessary. This leads to reduced wear and less
energy consumption.
Bit = 0: Dead band width is constant
Bit = 1: The dead band is deactivated for the PV settling time. When the PV settling time is
over, the dead zone gets the value of the DeadBand parameter.

Note
If Feature.Bit30 = 1 is set, the ConPerMon block has to be connected with the controller.
The blocks PIDConL or PIDConR monitor this by checking the status signal of MeanMV.ST.
In case of Feature.Bit30 = 1 and MeanMV.ST = 16#78 the dynamic deactivation of
deadband is not possible and the output ErrorNum will be set to 52.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 129
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.8.2 Setpoint specification - internal/external

Setpoint specification internal & external


Some blocks have a function that allows setpoints to be specified. This specification is carried
out either by means of a CFC/SFC program or by means of the faceplate (operator). With
doser blocks and frequency converters, the operator can specify the internal setpoint value
(SP_Int) or a higher-level open-loop control will specify an external setpoint value (SP_Ext).
In principle, the blocks operate according to the same scheme:

63B/L2S

63B/L2S  63B/L2S 

)DFHSODWH RU6)& &)&6)&

63B,QW2S  63B([W2S  63B,QW/L  63B([W/L 

63B,QW 63B([W

First you define whether the setpoint specification is to be carried out by means of a CFC/SFC
program or by means of the faceplate. In the next step you specify whether the internal or the
external setpoint is to be used.
Setpoint specification by means of faceplate or interconnection

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


130 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

With the SP_LiOp parameter, you define whether the setpoint will be set by a CFC/SFC
program or using the faceplate.
● Parameterize Sp_LiOp with 0 so that the setpoint specification is carried out by means of
the faceplate.
● Parameterize SP_LiOp with 1 so that the setpoint specification is carried out by means of
a CFC / SFC program.
Setpoint specification internal & external
You have to set the corresponding parameters depending on how the setpoint specification is
to be carried out.
If the setpoint is set in the faceplate (SP_LiOp = 0), you have to set the parameter:
● SP_IntOp = 1 in order to achieve an internal setpoint specification by means of the
faceplate.
● SP_ExtOp = 1 to have an external setpoint set in the faceplate.
If both signals are set, SP_IntOp = 1 has priority.
If the setpoint is set by a CFC / SFC program (SP_LiOp =1), you have to set the parameter:
1. SP_IntLi = 1 to have an internal setpoint set by a CFC / SFC program.
2. SP_ExtLi = 1 in order to achieve an external setpoint specification by means of a CFC /
SFC program.
Note
For PIDConL, PIDStepL, FmCont, FmTemp: If both signals are set, SP_IntLi = 1 has
priority.

Bumpless switchover from external to internal setpoint


The parameter SP_TrkExt = 1 is used so that the internal setpoint tracks the external
setpoint to achieve a Bumpless switchover from the external to the internal setpoint. This allows
unwanted jumps at the output parameter to be avoided.

2.1.8.3 Manipulated variable specification - internal/external

Manipulated variable specification internal and external


The VlvAnl block provides a function for specifying manipulated variables. This specification
is carried out either using a CFC/SFC program or using a faceplate (operator).
If a auxiliary valve is used for operation, it is possible to switch between internal and external
in the both manual and automatic mode.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 131
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

If no auxiliary valve is used for operation, the external manipulated variable is used for
automatic mode and the internal manipulated variable is used for manual mode. It is not
possible to switch between internal and external.

Note
If no auxiliary valve is used and either the "Open" or "Close" command is active, a new
manipulated variable (internal or external) only takes effect after the change. In automatic
mode, the manipulated variable is ignored as long as the "Open" or "Close" command is
pending.

Manipulated variable specification using a faceplate or interconnection


You can use the MV_LiOp parameter to determine if the manipulated variable should be set
by a CFC/SFC program or via the faceplate.
● Set MV_LiOp to 0 for manipulated variable specification to be performed with the faceplate.
● Set MV_LiOp to 1 for manipulated variable specification to be performed by a CFC/SFC
program.

Manipulated variable specification internal and external


You need to set the corresponding parameters depending on the selected method for
manipulated variable specification.
If the manipulated variable is to specified via the faceplate MV_LiOp = 0, you have to set the
parameter:
● MV_IntOp = 1 in order to achieve internal manipulated variable specification via the
faceplate.
● MV_ExtOp = 1 in order to achieve external manipulated variable specification via the
faceplate.
If both signals are set, the most recently active state is retained.
If the manipulated variable is set by a CFC/SFC program (MV_LiOp = 1), you have to set
the parameter:
● MV_IntLi = 1 to have an internal manipulated variable set by a CFC/SFC program.
● MV_ExtLi = 1 in order to achieve an external manipulated variable specification by a
CFC/SFC program.
If both signals are set, MV_IntLi = 1 has priority.

Note
It is only possible to switch between internal and external when operating with a auxiliary valve.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


132 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bumpless switchover of the manipulated variable from external to internal


The parameter SP_TrkExt = 1 is used so that the internal setpoint tracks the external
setpoint to achieve a Bumpless switchover from the external to the internal setpoint. This allows
unwanted jumps at the output parameter to be avoided.

Forming the manipulated variable externally


With external manipulated variable specification, the manipulated variable is restricted to the
MV_HiLim and MV_LoLim limits and sent to the MV_ExtOut output.

2.1.9 Configurable response using the Feature I/O

2.1.9.1 Configurable functions using the Feature I/O

Configurable functions using the Feature I/O


Some blocks have an input called Feature. This input can be used to influence the way in
which the block works.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 133
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

The Feature bits are assigned in the following order:

Bit number Meaning Block


0 Set startup characteristics (Page 141) AV, Average, CountOh,
CountScL, DeadTime, Deriva‐
tive, DoseL, FmCont, FmTemp,
Integral, Lag, MeanTime, Mod‐
PreCon, MonAnL, MonAnS,
MonDi08, MonDiL, MonDiS,
MotL, MotS, MotRevL,
MotSpdCL, MotSpdL, OpAnL,
Pcs7AnOu, Pcs7DiOu, PID‐
ConL, PIDConR, PIDStepL,
RateLim, Ratio, ShrdResS, To‐
talL, VIv2WayL, VIvAnL, VIv‐
MotL, VIvL, VlvS
1 Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 181) ConPerMon, CountOh,
CountScL, DoseL, Event,
EventNck, EventTs, FmCont,
ModPreCont, MonAnL, Mo‐
nAnS, MonDi08, MonDiL, Mon‐
DiS, MotL, MotS, MotRevL, Mo‐
tRevSpdL, OpAnL, OpDi01, Op‐
Di03, OpTrig, PIDConL, PID‐
ConR, PIDStepL, Ratio, Se‐
lA16In, TotalL, VIv2Way, VI‐
vAnL, VIvL, VlvS, VIvMotL
Changes signal status of outputs in OOS (Page 198) MotL, MotS, MotRevL,
MotSpdL, MotSpdCL, VlvS,
VlvL, Vlv2WayL, VlvMotL,
VlvAnL, VlvPosL
2 Resetting the commands for changing the mode (Page 165) DoseL, FmCont, FmTemp, Mod‐
PreCon, MotL, MotS, MotRevL,
MotSpdCL, MotSpdL, PID‐
ConL, PIDConR, PIDStepL,
VIv2WayL, VIvAnL, VIvL, VlvS,
VIvMotL, SelA16In
Separate evaluation for excluded and simulated interlock signals Intlk02, Intlk04, Intlk08, Intlk16,
(Page 155) OpDi01, OpDi03
3 Enabling resetting of commands for the control settings (Page 165) DoseL, MotL, MotS, MotRevl,
MptSpdCL, MotSpdL,
VIv2WayL, VIvAnL, VIvL, VIv‐
MotL
Control priority in the event of an invalid input command (Page 179) VlvS
Changes signal status of outputs in OOS (Page 198) SelA16In, SelAn16L

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


134 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit number Meaning Block


4 Setting switch or button mode (Page 170) DoseL, FMCont, FMTemp, Mod‐
PreCon, MotL, MotRevL,
MotSpdCL, MotSpdL, PID‐
ConL, PIDStepL, VIv2WayL, VI‐
vAnL, VIvL, VIvMotL, SelA16In
Setting switch or button mode for local commands (Page 185) MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdCL,
MotSpdL, VlvL, Vlv2WayL,
VlvMotL, VlvPosL
Changes signal status of outputs in OOS (Page 198) CntOhSc, CountScL, CountOh,
TotalL
5 Specifying the dosing type (Page 149) DoseL
Control via auxiliary valve (Page 175) VIvAnL
Alarm setpoint difference (Page 175) MotSpdCL
Specifying switching mode (Page 171) MotSpdL
Use the last value following a complete download as the current value TotalL
during startup of the block (Page 158)
Display only input values that are interconnected in the faceplate SelA16In
(Page 161)
Activate OS_Perm bits (Page 161) Intlk02, Intlk04, Intlk08, Intlk16
Limit output Out (Page 147) Polygon
Setting the scaling for the process values (Page 151) FbDrive
Activate LowCutOff (Page 159) Pcs7AnIn
Evaluation of the signal status of the interlock signals (Page 146) OpDi01, OpDi03
DoseL, MotL,MotRevL,MotS,
MotSpdCL,MotSpdL,Vlv2WayL,
VlvAnL,VlvL,VlvS, VlvMotL
Retain last output value in case of bad input signal status (Page 188) MeanTime
Changes signal status of outputs in OOS (Page 198) PIDConS, PIDConR, PIDConL,
PIDStepL, FmTemp, FmCont,
MPC 10x10, KalFit, ModPre‐
Con, TimeTrig, AV, MonAnL,
MonAnS, MonDiL, MonDi08,
MonDiS
6 Resetting the dosing quantity when dosing starts (Page 166) DoseL
Block as summing unit or integrator (Page 146) TotalL
Disabling opening and closing (Page 162) VIvAnL
Substitute value switch in the event of an error (Page 152) Polygon
Failure handling (Page 141) FbDrive
Vibrate after torque monitoring (Page 182) VlvPosL
Ramp rate calculation (Page 183) PIDConL, PIDConR, PIDStepL,
MotSpdCL, OpAnL, FMTemp,
FMCont
External/internal selection specification (Page 184) SelA16In
Operator can change the setpoint via faceplate also in the "Local" mode MotSpdCL
(Page 187)
Scalable measuring range (Page 193) Pcs7AnIn
Changes signal status of outputs in OOS (Page 198) DoseL

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 135
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit number Meaning Block


7 Enabling direct changeover between forward and reverse (Page 149) MotRevL, MotSpdCL
Summing characteristics continuous or triggered (Page 177) TotalL
Activating calculation of the flow rate for dosing by scale (Page 148) DoseL
Ramp rate calculation (Page 183) VlvAnL
Analog input 1 is reserved for the operator (Page 187) SelA16In
Define the setpoint after stop and start of the motor (Page 187) MotSpdCL
2 decimal points (scalable measuring range) (Page 193) Pcs7AnIn
Behavior in the case of Bus failure (Page 198) FbDrive, FbSwtMMS
8 Unit for the rate of change (Page 150) RateLim
Sealing the valve (Page 179) DoseL
Reporting with BATCH parameters (Page 160) Event, EventTS
Sealing the valve (Page 179) VlvMotL
Switch to substitute value (Page 152) FlowCorr
Separate delay times for each alarm (Page 174) MonAnL, PIDConL, PIDConR
Forcing operating modes in the "Local" mode (Page 188) MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdCL,
MotSpdL, VlvL, Vlv2WayL,
VlvMotL, VlvPosL, DoseL
Inverter enable (Page 190) MotSpdCL
Delete history of MV and DV moves during restart (Page 191) ModPreCon, MPC10x10
Status output calculation (Page 191) Integral
Variants of CPI calculation (Page 192) ConPerMon
3 decimal points (scalable measuring range) (Page 193) Pcs7AnIn
9 Resetting via input signals in the event of interlocking (Protection) or er‐ DoseL, MotL, MotS, MotRevL,
rors (Page 167) MotSpdCL, MotSpdL,
VIv2WayL, VIvAnL, VIvL, VlvS,
VIvMotL
Substitution value is active if the block is in bypass (Page 189) MonAnL, MonDiL, PIDConL,
PIDConR, PIDStepL, TotalL
Enable external message (Page 189) EventTs, Event16Ts
Selection of metadata and diagnostic blocks (Page 195) FbSwtMMs, FbDrive

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


136 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit number Meaning Block


10 Exiting local mode (Page 181) DoseL, MotL, MotS, MotRevL,
MotSpdCL, MotSpdL,
VIv2WayL, VIvAnL, VIvL, VlvS,
VIvMotL
Condition monitoring information at MOD_Blocks (Page 148) FbAnIn, FbAnOu, FbDiIn,
FbDiOu, FbAnTot, Pcs7AnIn,
Pcs7AnOu, Pcs7DiIn, Pcs7Di‐
Ou, Pcs7Cnt1, Pcs7Cnt2,
Pcs7Cnt3, FmCont, FmTemp
Condition monitoring information at the channel blocks (Page 148) FbAnIn, FbAnOu, FbAnTot,
FbDiIn, FbDiOu, FbDrive,
FbEnMe, FbSwtMMS,
Pcs7AnIn, Pcs7AnOu,
Pcs7Cnt1, Pcs7Cnt2,
Pcs7Cnt3, Pcs7DiIn, Pcs7DiIT,
Pcs7DiOu, FmCont, FmTemp
Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values MotL, MotS, MotRevL,
(Page 190) MotSpdCL, MotSpdL ,
Vlv2WayL, VlvL, VlvS, VlvMotL,
VlvPosL, VlvAnL, DoseL,
OpAnL, OpAnS, OpDi01, Op‐
Di03, OpTrig
11 Stopping dosing at a flow alarm (Page 141) DoseL
Activating the run time of feedback signals (Page 157) MotL, MotS, MotRevL,
MotSpdL, MotSpdCL, VlvL,
Vlv2WayL, VlvMotL, VlvAnL
Gradient limitation with time duration (Page 186) PIDConL, PIDConR, PIDStepL
Suppress MsgLock and “Out of service” mode for a connected message DoseL, FmCont, FmTemp, PID‐
block (Page 192) ConL, PIDConR, PIDStepL,
MonDi08, MonAnL, MonDiL,
MotL, MotSpdCL, MotRevL,
MotSpdL, VlvL, VlvMotL,
Vlv2WayL, VlvAnL, VlvPosL
12 Automatic post dosing for underdosing in automatic mode (Page 146) DoseL
Control zone with specified I component (Page 164) PIDConL
Motor feedback is not available (Page 160) VlvMotL
Position feedback signals are active (Page 172) Vlv2WayL
Gradient limitation with time duration (Page 186) MotSpdCL, VlvAnL, OpAnL
13 Creep rate is always detected in the dosing quantity (Page 172) DoseL
Control zone with frozen I component (Page 164) PIDConL
Separate monitoring time for stopping the motor (Page 173) MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdCL,
MotSpdL, VlvMotL
14 Enabling rapid stop via faceplate (Page 172) MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdCL,
MotSpdL, VIvMotL
External control deviation (Page 154) PIDConL
Scale dosing can be started only if StandStill = 1 (Page 191) DoseL
With PID initialization if mode SP intern extern changes (Page 197) PIDConR

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 137
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit number Meaning Block


15 Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect with "out of service" ModPreCon, PIDConL, PID‐
operating mode (Page 170) ConR, PIDStepL, VIvAnL
Frequency converter with separate device feed (Page 155) MotSpdL
Frequency converter with separate device feed (Page 155) DoseL
Motor stop in end position depends only on the corresponding feedback VlvMotL
signal (Page 188)
16 Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect at startup (Page 169) ModPreCon, PIDConL, PID‐
ConR, PIDStepL, VIvAnL
Process value with separate scale range (Page 166) OpAnL
Setpoint specification with own scale and unit of the parameter MotSpdCL
(Page 175)
Separate interlock for each direction, position, or speed (Page 173) MotRevL, VlvAnL, MotSpdL
Limits disabled in faceplate (Page 195) DoseL
17 Enabling bumpless switchover to automatic mode for valves, motors, and DoseL, MotL, MotRevL,
dosers (Page 177) MotSpdCL, MotSpdL,
VIv2WayL, VIvAnL, VIvL, VIv‐
MotL
With accelerated return of the integral action from the manipulated varia‐ PIDConR
ble limit (Page 184)
18 Disabling bumpless switchover to automatic mode for controllers PIDConL, PIDConR, PIDStepL
(Page 176)
Activating error state for external process control error CSF (Page 154) DoseL, MotL, MotS, MotRevL,
MotSpdCL, MotSpdL,
VIv2WayL, VIvAnL, VIvL, VlvS,
VIvMotL
19 Enabling program mode (Page 163) PIDConR
Reset even with locked state (Page 169) MotL, MotS, MotRevL,
MotSpdCL, MotSpdL, VlvMotL
20 Enabling bumpless change to the proportional gain, derivative time and PIDConR
amplification of the differentiator (Page 176)
Disable calculation of impulse control in LocalSetting 2 and 4 (Page 190) MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdCL,
MotSpdL, VlvL, VlvMotL,
VlvPosL, Vlv2WayL
21 Enable bumpless switchover to "Automatic" mode for operator only MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdCL,
(Page 176) MotSpdL, VlvMotL, VlvL,
Vlv2WayV, VlvAnl, DoseL
Switching operator controls for external setpoint to visible (Page 147) PIDConR
First-in detection response to deactivation (Page 180) Intlk02, Intlk04, Intlk08, Intlk16
22 Update acknowledgment and error status of the message call (Page 163) AssetM, AV, ConPerMon, Coun‐
tOh, CoutnScL, DoseL, Event,
EventTs, FmCont, FmTemp,
MonAnL, MonDi08, MonDiL,
MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdCL,
MotSpdL, OpAnL, PIDConL,
PIDConR, PIDStepL, TotalL,
VIv2WayL, VIvAnL, VIvL, VIv‐
MotL

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


138 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit number Meaning Block


23 Evaluation of signal status (Page 145) Intlk02, Intlk04, Intlk08, Intlk16
Specifying the influence of the signal status on the dosing process DoseL
(Page 150)
SP following PV in open loop has no priority over SP_Ext and SP limits PIDConL, PIDConR, PIDConS,
(Page 183) PIDStepL, FmTemp, FmCont
Limits disabled in faceplate (Page 195) CntOhSc, CountOh, CountScL,
TotalL, MonAnL, MonAnS,
MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdCL,
MotSpdL, VlvAnL, VlvMotL,
VlvPosL
24 Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162) ConPerMon, CountOh,
CountScL, DoseL, FmCont,
FmTemp, GainSched, Intlk02,
Intlk04, Intlk08, Intlk16, ModPre‐
Con, MonAnL, MonAnS, Mon‐
Di08, MonDiL, MonDiS, MotL,
MotS, MotRevL, MotSpdCL,
MotSpdL, OpAnL, OpDi01, Op‐
Di03, OpTrig, PIDConL, PID‐
ConR, PIDStepL, Ratio, Se‐
lA16In, TotalL, Vlv2WayL,
VlvAnL, VlvL, VlvS, VlvMotL,
KalFilt
With acknowledge overdosage (Page 182) DoseL
25 Suppression of all messages (Page 178) ConPerMon, DoseL, FmCont,
FmTemp, MonAnL, MonAnS,
MonDiL, MonDiS, MotL, MotS,
MotRevL, MotSpdCL, MotSpdL,
PIDConL, PIDConR, PIDStepL,
VIv2WayL, VIvAnL, VIvL, VlvS,
VIvMotL
26 Reaction of the switching points in the "Out of service" operating mode ConPerMon, FmCont,
(Page 180) FmTemp, PIDConL, PIDConR,
PIDStepL, AV, MotL, MotRevL,
MotSpdL, VlvMotL, MotSpdCL,
VlvAnL, DoseL, CountOh,
CountScL, TotalL, MonAnL, Mo‐
nAnS, CntOhSc, PIDConS
27 Selecting values associated with messages (Page 159) Event, EventNck, EventTs
Interlock display with LocalSetting 2 or 4 (Page 182) MotL, MotS, MotRevL,
MotSpdCL, MotSpdL,
VIv2WayL, VIvAnL, VIvL, VlvS,
VIvMotL
Enable configuration of the dribbling quantity (Page 162) DoseL
Do not evaluate the first run of the diagnostic blocks (Page 195) FbAnIn, FbAnOu, FbAnTot,
FbDiIn, FbDiOu, FbDrive,
FbEnMe, FbSwtMMS,
Pcs7AnIn, Pcs7AnOu,
Pcs7Cnt1, Pcs7Cnt2,
Pcs7Cnt3, Pcs7DiIn, Pcs7DiIT,
Pcs7DiOu

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 139
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit number Meaning Block


28 Output invalid raw value (Page 178) Pcs7AnIn, Pcs7DiIn, Pcs7DiIT
Disabling operating points (Page 149) AssetM, AV, ConPerMon, Coun‐
tOh, CountScL, DoseL,
FmCont, MonAnL, PIDConL,
PIDStepL, VIvAnL, FmTemp,
PIDConR, MotL, MotRevL,
MotSpdCL, MotSpdL, TotalL,
VlvMotL
Reading messages (Page 151) FbDrive
29 Output substitute value if raw value is invalid (Page 153) FbAnIn, FbDiIn, Pcs7AnIn,
Pcs7DiIn, Pcs7DiIT
Signaling limit violation (Page 174) AV, ConPerMon, CountOh,
CountScL, DoseL, FmCont,
FmTemp, MonAnL, MotL, Mo‐
tRevL, MotSpdCL, MotSpdL,
PIDConL, PIDConR, PIDStepL,
TotalL, VIvAnL, VlvMotL
Transmission of status information of devices (Page 179) FbDrive, FbSwtMMS
Output substitute values in case of communications error (Page 194) Rcv_AnaVal, Rcv_DigVal
30 Outputting last valid value if raw value is invalid (Page 157) FbAnIn, FbDiIn, Pcs7AnIn,
Pcs7DiIn, Pcs7DiIT
Outputting a de-energized value for block-external simulation (Page 152) FbAnOu, FbDiOu, Pcs7AnOu,
Pcs7DiOu, FbDrive, FbSwtMMS
Set reset depending on the operating mode or the LiOp parameter DoseL, MotL, MotS, MotRevL,
(Page 167) MotSpdL, MotspdCL, VlvL,
VlvS, VlvMotL, VlvAnL,
Vlv2WayL, CountScL, Coun‐
tOh, CntOhSc; TotalL
Applying the dynamically activated dead band during the PV settling PIDConL, PIDConR
time (Page 145)
Output last values in case of communications error (Page 194) Rcv_AnaVal, Rcv_DigVal
31 Activating recording of the first signal (Page 154) Intlk02, Intlk04, Intlk08, Intlk16
Activating reset of protection / error in manual mode (Page 168) DoseL, MotL, MotS, MotRevL,
MotSpdL, MotspdCL, VlvL,
VlvS, VlvMotL, VlvAnL,
Vlv2WayL
Limits disabled in faceplate (Page 195) FmCont, FmTemp, PIDConL,
PIDConR, PIDConS, PIDStepL,
ConPerMon
Keep last valid raw value if input value is bad (Page 197) Pcs7AnOu, Pcs7DiOu, FbA‐
nOu, FbDiOu

See also
Flow setpoints in percent (Page 150)
Use an internal or external setpoint for the absolute fine dosing quantity (Page 157)
Polygon functions (Page 1932)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


140 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.9.2 Stopping dosing at a flow alarm

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 11

Stopping dosing at a flow alarm


You can use this Feature bit to enable stopping dosing at a flow alarm.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Disabled, dosing is not stopped when a flow alarm occurs
Bit = 1: Enabled, dosing is stopped when a flow alarm occurs

2.1.9.3 Failure handling

Feature bit
Number of the Feature Bit: 6

Failure handling
Use this Feature bit to configure "Failure handling" in the case of device failure.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Commands Local and Ackn only active
Bit = 1: All commands active

See also
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133)

2.1.9.4 Set startup characteristics

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 0

Set startup characteristics


With this Feature bit, you set the startup characteristics of the function blocks, for example,
for:
● Motors, valves and controllers
● Channel blocks

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 141
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

● Monitoring blocks, e.g. MonAnL and MonDiL.


● Mathematical and analog logic blocks
● The OpAnL, OpAnS, OpDi01, and OpDi03 block
● The TimeTrg block
● Counter blocks
● The Average block
● The TimeTrig block
● The Trigger block
The default setting is 0.

Note
This Feature bit has no function in the "Out of service" operating mode. The process tag
remains in the "Out of service" operating mode after a warm restart of the CPU.

Note
The message classes Alarm, Warning and Tolerance are not valid for user-configured
message classes. Please take into consideration the validity of terms for user-configured
message classes (Page 41).

Note
With a Run-Stop-Run transition of the CPU and internally pending messages, non-stuck-
through messages with time stamps and auxiliary values beginning with RunUpCycle occur
for blocks with the startup characteristic Feature bit = 0 after expiration of the
RunUpCycle counter in the following cases:
● Alarm, warning or tolerance messages from the operating points (motor, valve, dosing,
controller and analog monitoring blocks)
● Feedback errors (motor and valve blocks)
● Output signals of digital process tags (MonDiL, MonDi08)
● Flutter limits violated (MonDiL)
The restart routines of the blocks reset the following outputs in OB100:
● Operating point outputs xx_AH_Act, xx_AL_Act, xx_WH_Act, xx_WL_Act, xx_TH_Act,
xx_TL_Act or GradHUpAct, GradHDnAct, GradLAct
● Feedback error outputs MonDynErr and MonStaErr
● Output binary signals Out, Out1..8 for MonDiL or MonDi08
● Flutter suppression FlutAct for MonDiL
This causes an outgoing message when initializing Alarm8_P in OB100 and an incoming
message after expiration of the RunUpCycle counter on the cyclic interrupt level.

Note
During a complete download with AS stop, the blocks (with Feature.Bit0 = 1) cannot
resume operation in their previous mode and control when restarted.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


142 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Set startup characteristics for motors, valves and controllers


Bit = 0: Starting the block in manual mode and in neutral position. With controllers, the setpoint
is set to (SP_Int) internally. See also the section Neutral position for motors, valves and
controllers (Page 48) for more on this.
The controller blocks PIDConL, PIDConS, PIDConR, PIDStepL, ModPreCon, MPC10x10, and
the valve block VlvAnL have the additional Feature.Bit16, Neutral position manipulated
variable takes effect at startup (Page 169), which specifies whether the neutral position is
approached
Bit = 1: Starting the block with the last stored values, in other words in the last operating mode
set (manual, automatic or local mode) and at the last valid position.

Note
Special note following complete download to the CPU
Following a complete download to the CPU, the motor protection signal Trip is evaluated
during the initial run as good (=1).
When a motor protection signal is pending, this causes a non-struck-through message with
time stamp and auxiliary values beginning with RunUpCycle after the complete download and
after expiration of the RunUpCycle counter.

Startup characteristics for the ShrdResS block


Bit = 0: The output command interface is reset to 0.
Bit = 1: The block leaves the output command interface unchanged.

Defining the startup characteristics for channel blocks


Bit = 0: The channel block uses either the process value PV_In or the value of SimPV_In as
the startup value, depending on the setting of the input parameter SimOn
(PV_In = PV_Out or SimPV_In = PV_Out).
Bit = 1: The channel block uses the value StartVal as the startup value
(StartVal = PV_Out).

Defining the startup characteristics for monitoring blocks


Bit = 0: The most recently stored values are reset on startup.
Bit = 1: The most recently used value at the output parameter Out is output on startup.

Defining the startup characteristics for mathematical, analog logic blocks


Bit = 0: The Out output parameter is reset to 0 on startup.
Bit = 1: The most recently saved value is output at the Out output parameter on startup.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 143
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Defining startup characteristics for the OpAnL/OpAnS blocks


Bit = 0: The internal setpoint is used for startup.
Bit = 1: The most recently saved value is output at the Out output parameter on startup.

Defining startup characteristics for the OpDi01/OpDi03 blocks


Bit = 0: The output parameters Out or Out1...Out3 will be reset on startup.
Bit = 1: The most recently used value at the output parameter Out or Out1...Out3 is outputted
on startup.

Defining the startup characteristics for counter blocks


Bit = 0: On startup, the counter is stopped and reset to the value specified in the input
parameter.
Bit = 1: On startup, counting continues with the most recently stored value.
Input parameters for the startup characteristics of the counter blocks:
● Block CountOh: Input parameter PresetTime
● Block CountScL: Input parameter PresetVal
● Block TotalL: Input parameter PresetVal
Messages can be suppressed for a short time after startup. You can set the number of cycles
using the input parameter RunUpCyc.

Note
Advanced configuration of the startup characteristics for the counter blocks
Note that you can further affect the startup characteristics via the Feature.Bit5 as a function
of this Feature.Bit0. Refer to the section: Use the last value following a complete download
as the current value during startup of the block (Page 158).

Defining startup characteristics for the Average block


Bit = 0: At startup, averaging begins with the value that is currently at the input parameter
(Out = In, NumCycles = 1).
Bit = 1: When starting-up, the last Out and NumCycles values saved are used as the last
value for averaging (Out ≠ In).

Defining startup characteristics for the TimeTrig block


Bit 0 =0: Periodic trigger and single trigger can be shut off. The trigger pulse Trigger is reset.
Bit 0 =1: The activation of the periodic trigger and single trigger as well as the single trigger
point are retained.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


144 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

The InPerTrigOn, InSglTrigOn and InSglTrigDT inputs are applied for this. If you want to use
the reset for a complete download, you must read back the marked parameters in addition to
the operated and monitored parameters before a complete download.

See also
User-configured message classes (Page 41)

2.1.9.5 Applying the dynamically activated dead band during the PV settling time

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 30.

Dynamic deactivation of the dead band by the PV settling time


You can use this Feature bit to improve the PV settling time in the range of the dead band.
The deadband is deactivated until the PV settles more in the center than at the edges of the
dead band. The probability that the controlled variable is within the dead zone time is increased,
and further control actions are no longer necessary. This leads to reduced wear and less
energy consumption.
Bit = 0: Dead band width is constant
Bit = 1: The dead band is deactivated for the PV settling time. When the PV settling time is
over, the dead zone gets the value of the DeadBand parameter.

Note
If Feature.Bit30 = 1 is set, the ConPerMon block has to be connected with the controller.
The blocks PIDConL or PIDConR monitor this by checking the status signal of MeanMV.ST.
In case of Feature.Bit30 = 1 and MeanMV.ST = 16#78 the dynamic deactivation of
deadband is not possible and the output ErrorNum will be set to 52.

2.1.9.6 Evaluation of signal status

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 23

Evaluation of signal status


You can use the Feature bit to specify if the signal status of the inputs is to be checked for
the values 16#00 or 16#28. The signal status of the inputs itself remains unchanged here.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: No evaluation of the signal status for 16#00 or 16#28.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 145
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit = 1: the signal status is determined, an input with ST = 16#00 or 16#28 is forwarded with
value = 0. The "Negate signal" function at the input of the block has no influence on the reaction
in this case.

2.1.9.7 Evaluation of the signal status of the interlock signals


Feature / Feature2 bit
Number of the Feature / Feature2 bit: 5

Family
Family: Operate number of the Feature bit: 5
Family: Control, drives, dosage number of the Feature2 bit: 5

Evaluation of the signal status of the interlock signals


You can use the Feature / Feature2 bit to specify if the signal status of the interlock inputs
is to be checked for the values 16#00 or 16#28. The signal status of the inputs itself remains
unchanged here.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: the signal status is determined, an input with ST = 16#00 or 16#28 is forwarded with
value = 0.
Bit = 1: No evaluation of the signal status for 16#00 or 16#28.

2.1.9.8 Automatic post dosing for underdosing in automatic mode

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 12

Automatic post dosing for underdosing in automatic mode


Use this Feature bit to enable automatic post dosing for underdosing in automatic mode.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Disabled, no automatic post dosing is started for underdosing in automatic mode.
Bit = 1: Enabled, automatic post dosing is started for underdosing in automatic mode.

2.1.9.9 Block as summing unit or integrator

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 6

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


146 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Specifying the summing unit or integrator function mode


You can define the summing response of the block via this Feature bit.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: The block operates as a summing unit.
Bit = 1: The block operates as an integrator.

Note
Special note for the summing unit
Note that the characteristics of the block as a summing unit (Feature.Bit6 = 0) can be
further affected via the Feature.Bit7.
Refer to the section: Summing characteristics continuous or triggered (Page 177).

2.1.9.10 Switching operator controls for external setpoint to visible

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 21

Switching operator controls for external setpoint to visible


Use this Feature bit to switch all operator controls for the external setpoint to visible in the
faceplates for the OS operator. This is always required when the external setpoint should
actually be used, for example, for slave controllers in cascade and ration controlling.
The default setting is 0, which keeps the faceplate as clear as possible for simple applications.
Bit = 0: The operator controls for the external setpoint are not visible in the faceplate.
Bit = 1: The operator controls for the external setpoint are visible in the faceplate.

2.1.9.11 Limit output Out

Feature bit
Number of the Feature Bit: 5

Limit output Out


Use this Feature bit to define the limit for the output Out.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Beyond the end interpolation points, the Out output is extrapolated based on the first
two or last two interpolation points.
Bit = 1: The Out output is limited to the first and last interpolation point.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 147
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

See also
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133)

2.1.9.12 Activating calculation of the flow rate for dosing by scale

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 7

Calculation of the flow rate for dosing by scale


Use this Feature bit to activate calculation of the flow rate for dosing by scale.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Deactivated
Bit = 1: Calculation activated.
The flow is determined by the change to the dosing quantity per second.

2.1.9.13 Condition monitoring information at MOD_Blocks

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 10
Bit = 0: Not forwarded
Bit = 1: forwarded

2.1.9.14 Condition monitoring information at the channel blocks

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 10

Transferring condition monitoring information to the Maintenance Station


With this Feature bit, the data which is entered at the parameters MS_Ext and TextRef will
be transferred to the corresponding driver block and the same data will be displayed on the
asset faceplate of the Maintenance Station. For more information, refer to the Maintenance
Handbook.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Data will not be transferred.
Bit = 1: Data will be transferred.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


148 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.9.15 Disabling operating points

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 28

Disabling operating points


You can use this Feature bit to determine if the operating point function of a limit for disabling
the message (MsgLock = 1) should also be disabled.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Operating point is not suppressed
Bit = 1: Operating point is suppressed

2.1.9.16 Enabling direct changeover between forward and reverse

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 7

Direct changeover between forward and reverse


With this Feature bit, you can enable direct reversal of the direction of motors.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Direct reversal of the direction is disabled.
You can only change the direction of the motor by first stopping and starting the motor again
in the required direction. The motor can only be started again after the time set in the
IdleTime parameter has elapsed.
Bit = 1: Direct changeover is enabled.
You can reverse the motor direction directly. The motor block reverses the direction
automatically. The motor is stopped and is started in the other direction when the time set in
the IdleTime parameter has elapsed.

2.1.9.17 Specifying the dosing type

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 5

Specifying the dosing type


You can specify the dosing type to be used for the block using this Feature bit.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 149
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

The default setting is 0.


Bit = 0: Flow
Bit = 1: Scales

2.1.9.18 Flow setpoints in percent

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 15

Flow setpoints in percent


You can use this Feature bit to specify if the doser block should display the flow setpoints in
the faceplate as percentages.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Deactivated. The display of the flow setpoints is made in the unit specified with the
PV_Unit parameter.
Bit = 1: Activated: The display of the flow setpoints is made in the unit %.

2.1.9.19 Specifying the influence of the signal status on the dosing process

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 23

Specifying the influence of the signal status on the dosing process


You can use this Feature bit to specify how the doser should react dependent on the signal
status.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Dosing process does not stop with bad signal status of the process value PV.
Bit = 1: Dosing process stops with bad signal status of the process values PV. The doser is
also set to the "Off" state (see state diagram: DoseL functions (Page 1034)).
See also the following section:
● Forming and outputting signal status for blocks (Page 110)

2.1.9.20 Unit for the rate of change

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 8

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


150 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Specifying the unit for the rate of change


You can use this Feature bit to specify the unit for the rate of change:
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: unit for the rate of change in the unit of measurement to or from the field device
Bit = 1: unit for the rate of change as a percentage to or from the field device

2.1.9.21 Reading messages

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 28

Use of the input data


You can use this Feature bit to specify the format for reading messages.
Default setting is 0
Bit = 0: Messages are read as PV freely configurable
Bit = 1: Messages are read as MsgNamur

Note
This Feature bit is only used when "Message frame type 20" and the "PZD 6" parameter are
active.

2.1.9.22 Setting the scaling for the process values

Feature Bit
Number of the Feature Bit: 5

Calculation for the outputs CurrentLi, Power1Li, Power2Li, FreeLi


Feature.Bit5 defines whether the PZDINXScale is used for the calculation for the other
process values.
Bit = 0: xxxx.Value := (PZDXIn*(100/16384.0));
Bit = 1: xxxx.Value := (PZDXIn*(( PZDInXScale.HIGH- PZDInXScale.LOW)/16384.0))+
PZDInXScale.LOW;

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 151
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.9.23 Outputting a de-energized value for block-external simulation

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 30

Outputting a de-energized value for block-external simulation


Use this Feature bit for channel blocks to specify which value is to be output during the block-
external simulation (Simulating signals (Page 59)).
The default setting is 1.
Bit = 0: If process value input has the status 16#60, the output value will be set to the input
value.
Bit = 1: If process value input has the status 16#60, the output value will be set to “0”.

2.1.9.24 Switch to substitute value

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 8

Switch to substitute value


You can use this Feature bit to specify whether a substitute value should be applied or the
last valid value should be retained when certain conditions occur.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Retain last valid value
Bit = 1: Apply the substitute value

See also
Output invalid raw value (Page 178)
Outputting last valid value if raw value is invalid (Page 157)

2.1.9.25 Substitute value switch in the event of an error

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 6

Substitute value switch in the event of an error


You can specify the substitute value activation at errors using this Feature bit.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


152 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

The default setting is 0.


Bit = 0: No substitute value switch
Bit = 1: The substitute value SubV_In is output at Out for ErrorNum ≠

See also
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133)

2.1.9.26 Output substitute value if raw value is invalid

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 29

Output substitute value if raw value is invalid


Use this Feature bit to activate output of the substitute value (input parameter SubsPV_In)
for channel blocks if there is an invalid raw value or the device is in the initialization phase
(input parameter PV_ST 16#4C..4F).
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: If there is an invalid raw value or the device is in the initialization phase, the substitute
value is not output.
Bit = 1: If there is an invalid raw value or the device is in the initialization phase, the substitute
value is output. The signal status of the output value is set to "Manipulated value (for example,
substitute value, simulation, last valid value).
If there is an invalid raw value or the device is in the initialization phase, the output parameter
Bad = 1 is set automatically.

Prioritizing the Feature bits for channel blocks:


You need to assign parameters for three Feature bits for the response to an invalid raw value
for the channel blocks.
If more than one of these Feature bits are set (=1), the following priority applies:
● Output invalid raw value (Page 178) (Feature.Bit28 = highest priority)
● Output substitute value if raw value is invalid (Feature.Bit29)
● Outputting last valid value if raw value is invalid (Page 157) (Feature.Bit30 = lowest
priority)
The raw value is output of none of the Feature bits 28, 29 or 30 is set.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 153
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.9.27 Activating recording of the first signal

Feature Bit
Number of the Feature bit: 31

Activating recording of the first signal


Use this Feature bit to activate recording of the first signal with interlock blocks. Please also
refer to the section Recording the first signal for interlock blocks (Page 53).
Default setting is 0
Bit = 0: Recording of the first signal is deactivated.
Bit = 1: Recording of the first signal is activated.

2.1.9.28 External control deviation

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 14

External control deviation


You can use this Feature bit to specify whether the external control deviation is to be activated.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: The external control deviation is deactivated, the internal control deviation is active.
Bit = 1: The external control deviation is activated.

2.1.9.29 Activating error state for external process control error CSF

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 18

Activating error state for external process control error CSF


You can use this Feature bit to specify whether the block should switch to the error state at
an external process control error CSF =1.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: : Block does not go to error state with process control error CSF = 1.
Bit = 1: Activated: Block goes to error state with process control error CSF = 1.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


154 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.9.30 Frequency converter with separate device feed

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 15

Frequency converter with separate device feed


You can use this Feature bit to specify if a frequency converter with a separate device feed
or the inverter enable should be used.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Motor without device feed or without inverter enable
Bit = 1: Frequency converter with separate device feed or with inverter enable

2.1.9.31 Separate evaluation for excluded and simulated interlock signals

Feature bit
Number of the Feature2 bit: 2

Separate evaluation for excluded and simulated interlock signals


You can use this Feature bit to set the reaction of the block to an interlock signal of an interlock
block that is excluded or simulated.
The default setting is 0
Bit = 0: Switch-relevant excluded and simulated interlock signals are processed with the status
16#60 and are displayed as simulated or excluded, depending on the interlock status.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 155
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit = 1: Excluded and simulated interlock signals are evaluated separately. All excluded
interlock signals in a sequence of interlock blocks are displayed as excluded. Switch-relevant
simulated interlock signals are processed with the status 16#60 and displayed as simulated.

Note
If the Feature Bit is enabled, the signal cannot be inverted via CFC during interconnections
at the inputs, as, otherwise, the bypass display would not update.
The interlocking inputs of the following blocks are affected:
● Intlk02, Intlk04, Intlk08, Intlk16: In01, In02, …
● DoseL, MotL, MotSpdL, MotSpdCL, VlvL, Vlv2WayL, VlvAnL: Permit, Interlock,
Protect
● MotRevL: Permit, Interlock, Protect , PermRev, IntlRev, ProtRev
● VlvMotL, VlvPosL: Permit, Interlock, Protect , PermCls, IntlCls, ProtCls
● MotS, VlvS, OpDi01, OpDi03, PIDConL, PIDConR: Interlock
The inversion of the interlocking signals occurs via the InvIn01, InvIn02, … inputs on the
interlocking blocks.

See also
OpDi01 functions (Page 396)
OpDi03 functions (Page 410)
Intlk02 functions (Page 1608)
Intlk04 functions (Page 1620)
Intlk16 functions (Page 1650)
Intlk08 functions (Page 1634)
MotL functions (Page 1102)
MotS functions (Page 1135)
MotRevL functions (Page 1161)
MotSpdL functions (Page 1257)
Vlv2WayL functions (Page 1339)
VlvL functions (Page 1380)
VlvMotL functions (Page 1439)
VlvAnL functions (Page 1488)
MotSpdCL functions (Page 1203)
VlvS functions (Page 1411)
DoseL functions (Page 1034)
Influence of the signal status on the interlock (Page 105)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


156 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Forming the group status for interlock information (Page 106)


Forming and outputting the signal status for interlock blocks (Page 117)

2.1.9.32 Use an internal or external setpoint for the absolute fine dosing quantity

Feature Bit
Number of the Feature bit: 8

Use an internal and external setpoint for the absolute fine dosing quantity
Use this Feature bit to determine whether the doser processes the internal and external
setpoint for the fine dosing quantity in an absolute manner and is displayed or operated in an
absolute manner in the faceplate.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Deactivated. The internal and external I/Os as well as the display and operation of the
fine dosing quantity setpoint are processed in the % unit.
Bit = 1: Activated: The internal and external I/Os as well as the display and operation of the
fine dosing quantity setpoint are processed in the unit that was set using the parameter
DQ_Unit.

2.1.9.33 Activating the run time of feedback signals

Feature Bit
Number of the Feature bit: 11

Activating the run time of feedback signals


Use this Feature bit to activate the run time of feedback signals.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Deactivated: Tracking of feedback for simulation immediately after the trigger signal.
Bit = 1: Activated: Tracking of feedback for simulation after the trigger signal and expiration of
the monitoring time (MonTiDynamic). The feedback signals are generated after expiration of
the monitoring time.

2.1.9.34 Outputting last valid value if raw value is invalid

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 30

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 157
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Outputting last valid value if raw value is invalid


Use this Feature bit to activate output of the last valid value for channel blocks if there is an
invalid raw value or the device is in the initialization phase (input parameter PV_ST = 16#4C..
4F).
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: If there is an invalid raw value or the device is in the initialization phase, the last valid
value is not output.
Bit = 1: If there is an invalid raw value or the device is in the initialization phase, the last valid
value is output. The signal status of the output value is set to local "Manipulated value (for
example, substitute value, simulation, last valid value).
If there is an invalid raw value or the device is in the initialization phase, the output parameter
Bad = 1 is set.

Prioritizing the Feature bits for channel blocks:


You need to assign parameters for three Feature bits for the response to an invalid raw value
for the channel blocks.
If more than one of these Feature bits are set (=1), the following priority applies:
● Output invalid raw value (Page 178) (Feature.Bit28 = highest priority)
● Output substitute value if raw value is invalid (Page 153)(Feature.Bit29)
● Output the last valid value if raw value is invalid (Feature.Bit30, lowest priority)
The raw value is output of none of the Feature bits 28, 29 or 30 is set.

2.1.9.35 Use the last value following a complete download as the current value during startup of
the block

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 5

Use the last value during startup of the block after a complete download of the CPU
You can use this Feature bit to define the startup characteristics of the block as a function
of the Feature bit 0.
This Feature bit is used on the following parameters:
● Block TotalL: OldOut, OldCntOut
● Block CountScL: OldOut
● Block CountOh: OldDays, OldHours, OldMinutes, OldSeconds

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


158 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

For the settings on Feature.Bit0, refer to the section: Set startup characteristics
(Page 141).

Note
If you want to use this function, you must read back the marked parameters in addition to the
operated and monitored parameters before a complete download.

The default setting is 0.


Bit = 0: Define the startup characteristics as a function of Feature.Bit0:
● Feature.Bit0 = 0: The block is set to the default value (input parameter Preset) during
startup.
● Feature.Bit0 = 1: On startup, counting continues with the most recently stored value.
Bit = 1: During startup of the block after a complete download, the last value (Oldxxx) is
used as the current value regardless of Feature.Bit0 ( Set startup characteristics
(Page 141)).

2.1.9.36 Activate LowCutOff

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 5

Activate LowCutOff
You use this Feature bit to activate the use of LowCutOff bits.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Low signal cut-off - OFF (default)
Bit = 1: Low signal cut-off - ON

2.1.9.37 Selecting values associated with messages

Feature Bit
Number of the Feature bit: 27

Selecting values associated with messages


Use this Feature bit to select which values associated with messages are to be output.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: The signal status of the binary input is output as the value associated with messages.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 159
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit = 1: The associated analog value is output as the value associated with messages.

2.1.9.38 Reporting with BATCH parameters

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 8
Reporting with BATCH parameters
You can use this Feature bit to specify whether the block transfers the BATCH parameters
● BatchID: Batch ID
● BatchName: Batch name
● StepNo: Batch step number
Are transferred as associated values to the OS during messaging.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: The block does not transfer any BATCH parameters to the OS.
Bit = 1: The block transfers BATCH parameters to the OS.

Note
Information about the setting "Bit = 1:
The Event block can no longer transfer the In8.ST or AV8.Value as an associated value.
The EventTS block can no longer transfer the signal status of the signal In7 and In8 or
InTS7 and InTS8 as an associated value.

You will find more information in the following chapters:


● Event messaging (Page 1675)
● EventTs messaging (Page 1701)

2.1.9.39 Motor feedback is not available

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 12

Motor feedback is not available


You can use this Feature bit to specify whether or not motor feedback should be available.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Motor feedback is available.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


160 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit = 1: Motor feedback is not available. The motor feedback is derived from the control signals
internally in the block; this disables the monitoring of the motor feedback.

2.1.9.40 Display only input values that are interconnected in the faceplate

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 5

Display only input values that are interconnected in the faceplate


You can use this Feature bit to specify whether only interconnected input values In01 to
In16 (status not equal to 16#FF) should be displayed in the faceplate.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Display all input values.
Bit = 1: Display only interconnected input values (status not equal to 16#FF) and in case inputs
are not connected, the faceplate size should shrink to the last connected input.

2.1.9.41 Activate OS_Perm bits

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 5

Display only input values that are interconnected in the faceplate


You use this Feature bit to activate the use of additional OS_Perm bits in the faceplate.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: OS_Perm bits XXX inactive
Bit = 1: OS_Perm bits XXX active
With XXX:

Block OS_Perm.BitX
Intlk02 16-17
Intlk04 16-19
Intlk08 16-23
Intlk16 16-31

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 161
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

OS_Perm.Bit16 OS_Perm.Bit0 OS_Perm.Bit1 Operation exclu‐ Operation exclu‐


sion "Set" In01 sion "Reset" In01
0 0 0 No No
0 0 1 No Yes
0 1 0 Yes No
0 1 1 Yes Yes
1 X X Yes Yes

2.1.9.42 Disabling opening and closing

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 6

Disabling the Open and Close commands


Only applicable when no auxiliary valve is used (bit 5 = 0)
Bit = 0: Open and Close commands affect control valve
Bit = 1: Disable the Open and Close commands

2.1.9.43 Enabling local operator authorization

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 24

Enabling local operator authorization


You can use this Feature bit to enable local permission for a technologic block.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Disabled
Bit = 1: Enabled
For information on this operator permission, refer to the section Operator control permissions
(Page 265).

2.1.9.44 Enable configuration of the dribbling quantity


Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 27

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


162 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Enable configuration of the dribbling quantity


With this Feature bit, you can enable configuration of the dribbling quantity during dosing.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Disabled, the dribbling quantity can only be configured in the "End" state or with the
automatic determination of the dribbling quantity (DribbCor = 1).
Bit = 1: Enabled, the dribbling quantity can always be configured, but not in the "Dribbling"
state. The automatic determination of the dribbling quantity must be switched off (DribbCor
= 0).

2.1.9.45 Enabling program mode

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 19

Enabling program mode


You can use this Feature bit to specify whether or not the controller block should be used
for program mode.
Default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: The block is not intended for program mode.
Bit = 1: The block can be used for program mode. The operator control elements required for
this are then visible in the faceplate.

Note
This Feature bit only applies to the PIDConR block.

What is the program mode?


Program mode provides primary controller functions (external Advanced Control software
package), which run on an external PC as an OPC client, the option of using the control from
the controller function block and specifying the setpoint or manipulated variable from a remote
location.

2.1.9.46 Update acknowledgment and error status of the message call

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 22

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 163
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Update acknowledgment and error status of the message call


You can use the Feature bit to determine if the acknowledgment and error status of the
message call at the block output should be updated.
The default setting is 0.
● Bit = 0: The MsgErr, MsgStat and MsgAckn block outputs are set to the default settings
and not updated. The block will run faster with this setting.
● Bit = 1: The MsgErr, MsgStatand MsgAckn block outputs re updated based on the
feedback of the lower level message blocks. The lower level message blocks are called
every other cycle as long as an acknowledgment is expected or error information is pending.

2.1.9.47 Control zone with frozen I component

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 13

Freezing the I component for control with control zone


You can use this Feature bit to specify how the controller should react to control zone
operation. The I component must be enabled for this TI <> 0.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: The I component is set in such a way that the manipulated variable reacts bumplessly
when the error signal reoccurs in the control zone.
Bit = 1: If the error signal is outside the control zone, the I component is frozen internally. When
it enters the control zone, the controller starts with the value of the I component that was in
effect when it left the control zone.
The reaction depends on additional Feature bits and controller settings. See also the
following section:
● Using control zones (Page 203)

2.1.9.48 Control zone with specified I component

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 12

Specifying I component for control with control zone


You can use this Feature bit to specify how the controller should react to control zone
operation. The I component must be enabled for this TI <> 0.
The default setting is 0.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


164 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit = 0: The I component is set in such a way that the manipulated variable reacts bumplessly
when the error signal reoccurs in the control zone.
Bit = 1: If the error signal is outside the control zone, the I component is set internally as follows:
● I_Part := MV_Offset.
The reaction depends on additional Feature bits and controller settings. See also the
following section:
Using control zones (Page 203)

2.1.9.49 Resetting the commands for changing the mode

Feature Bit
Number of the Feature bit: 2

Resetting the commands for changing the mode


Using this Feature bit, you define how the block handles the incoming control commands:
● SP_IntLi and SP_ExtLi for controllers
● AutModLi and ManModLi for controllers, drives, and dosage block
● SaPo_Ext for KalFilt block
● OffLi, UpLi, and DnLi for TotalL block
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: The control commands are not reset by the block. If there are two pending control
commands for changing mode, the mode is not changed. In this case, the note text "Invalid
command" is displayed in the faceplate.
Bit = 1: The control commands are reset by the block. This, for example, ensures that if a
control command is sent from the SFC, the command is reset automatically after a step is
exited.

2.1.9.50 Enabling resetting of commands for the control settings

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 3

Enabling resetting of commands for the control settings


With this Feature bit, you select how the block handles commands for the control settings
(for example motor on) via the interconnected input parameters.
The default setting is 0.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 165
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit = 0: The control commands are not reset by the block. If there are two commands relating
to the control settings at the same time, the status of the control settings is retained. In this
case, the "Invalid signal" message is displayed in the standard view of the faceplate.
Bit = 1: The control commands are reset by the block. This, for example, ensures that if a
control command is sent from the SFC, the command is reset automatically after a step is
exited.

2.1.9.51 Resetting the dosing quantity when dosing starts

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 6

Resetting the dosing quantity when dosing starts


Use this Feature bit to enable resetting the dosing quantity when dosing starts.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Disabled, the dosing quantity is not reset when dosing starts
Bit = 1: Enabled, the dosing quantity is reset when dosing starts.

2.1.9.52 Process value with separate scale range

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 16

Process value with separate scale range


You can use this Feature bit to assign a separate scale range to the process value. The
default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Apply scale range from SP.
Bit = 1: PV has a separate scale range.

See also
Neutral position for motors, valves and controllers (Page 48)
Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect at startup (Page 169)
Use the last value following a complete download as the current value during startup of the
block (Page 158)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


166 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.9.53 Resetting via input signals in the event of interlocking (Protection) or errors

Feature Bit
Number of the Feature bit: 9

Resetting with automatic commands (e.g. OpenAut, CloseAut)


With this Feature bit, you define that an automatic control with its input commands (e.g.
OpenAut, CloseAut) also resets an interlock protection or an error.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: No resetting.
Bit = 1: Reset an interlock protection or an error with a 0-1 edge change in the inputs for
automatic commands (e.g. OpenAut, CloseAut).

2.1.9.54 Set reset depending on the operating mode or the LiOp parameter

Feature Bit
Number of the Feature Bit: 30

Set reset depending on the operating mode (motor, valve and dosing blocks)
When the "Protection" interlock, feedback error ("Status error", "Control error") or "Motor
protection" signal is present again, use this Feature bit to specify if a reset can be made
depending on the mode only by the operator in manual mode or only by the automatic I/Os in
automatic mode.
Resetting to manual mode is enabled with Feature Bit 31 (Activating reset of protection /
error in manual mode (Page 168)). Also refer to the Resetting the block in case of interlocks
or errors (Page 43) chapter.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Reset does not depend on the operating mode
Bit = 1: In manual mode, manual reset by the operator is only possible if Feature Bit 31 is
set, otherwise no reset is required in manual mode.
In automatic mode, reset can only be made with automatic I/Os, regardless of Feature Bit
31. This is performed either with a 0-1 edge transition at the RstLi input or, when Feature
Bit 9 is set, with a 0-1 edge transition at the automatic inputs, for example OpenAut,
CloseAut.

Note
Rapid stop is unlocked for all operating modes using the "Reset" button in the faceplate
(RstOp = 1); in CFC it is unlocked using the RstLi = 1 input parameter.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 167
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Note
The local operating mode does not depend on this Feature Bit and has a separate reset
mechanism.

Resetting the dosing mode depending on the operating mode (dosing blocks)
You can also use this Feature bit to set whether or not the reset of the dosing quantity is
dependent on the operating mode.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Reset does not depend on the operating mode
Bit = 1:In manual mode, only a manual reset by the operator is possible at the input
RstDQ_Op. In automatic mode, a reset is only possible by a 0-1 edge transition at the input
RstDQ_Li.

Note
The operating mode Local is independent of this Feature bit. The dosing quantity can be
reset by the operator at the input RstDQ_Op or via a 0-1 edge transition at the input
RstDQ_Li.

Set reset depending on the LiOp parameter (counter blocks)


You can use this Feature Bit to determine whether the setting or resetting to a default value
should be made dependent on the LiOp parameter.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Setting or resetting to a default value does not depend on the LiOp parameter.
Bit = 1: Setting or resetting to a default value depends on the LiOp parameter.
LiOp =0: Setting or resetting to a default value can only be made via the faceplate or at the
parameter for the faceplate.
LiOp =1: Setting or resetting to a default value can only be made at the parameter for
interconnections.

2.1.9.55 Activating reset of protection / error in manual mode

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 31

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


168 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Activating reset of protection / error in manual mode


Use this Feature bit to specify whether a reset is necessary once the "Protection" interlock
signal, feedback errors ("Runtime error", "Control deviation"), or "Motor protection" are present
again. See also the following section: Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors
(Page 43).
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: No reset required in manual mode.
Bit = 1: Reset required in manual mode. The reset is performed using the "Reset" button
(RstOp = 1) or, in CFC, using the input parameter RstLi.

Note
Rapid stop is unlocked for all operating modes using the "Reset" button in the faceplate
(RstOp = 1); in CFC it is unlocked using the RstLi = 1 input parameter.

Note
The local operating mode has a separate reset mechanism.

2.1.9.56 Reset even with locked state

Feature Bit
Number of the Feature bit: 19

Reset even with locked state


With this Feature bit, you specify if it is possible to perform a reset with an active "Protection"
or "Motor protection" type interlock. This can be used, for example, to reset hardware interlocks.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: No reset is possible with a "Protection" type interlock or with active motor protection.
Bit = 1: Reset is possible with a "Protection" type interlock or with active motor protection.

2.1.9.57 Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect at startup

Feature Bit
Number of the Feature bit: 16

Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect at startup


You can use this Feature bit to specify if the block should go to the neutral position at startup.
Default setting is 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 169
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit = 0: The block does not go to the neutral position at startup


With control valve VlvAnL, the main valve is closed and the auxiliary valve (if configured)
opened.
Bit = 1: The block goes to the neutral position at startup
With control valve VlvAnL, the main valve and auxiliary valve (if configured) go to the neutral
position.
You can find more information in Section Neutral position for motors, valves and controllers
(Page 48).
Note:
Feature.Bit16 is only effective when Feature.Bit0 = 0.

2.1.9.58 Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect with "out of service" operating mode

Feature Bit
Number of the Feature bit: 15

Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect with "out of service" operating mode
You can use this Feature bit to specify if the block should go to the neutral position when it
transitions to the "Out of service" operating mode.
Default position is "0".
Bit = 0: The block does not go to the neutral position at the transition to the "out of service"
operating mode.
Bit = 1: The block goes to the neutral position at the transition to the "out of service" operating
mode.
Refer to the Neutral position for motors, valves and controllers (Page 48) section for more
information.

2.1.9.59 Setting switch or button mode

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 4

Setting switch or button mode (input signal as pulse signal or as static signal)
You can use this Feature bit to determine whether a separate interconnectable 1-active
control input has to be used for every automatic command of the block or two automatic
commands are assigned to a control input.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


170 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

The Feature bit affects the following control inputs:


● starting and stopping a motor
● Opening and closing a valve
● switching modes (parameters AutModLi and ManModLi)
● Setpoint specification internal and external (parametersSP_ExtLi and SP_IntLi)
is given in the form of a pulse (pushbutton operation) or a static signal (switching mode).
You can find the commands for controlling the block in the relevant section on block operating
modes. They are always the parameters that are used for the automatic operation of a block.
Bit = 0: Button mode: Each automatic command is assigned to a control input. This has a
latching reaction and is 1-active.
Example with a motorMotRevL: In this case, use the interconnectable input parameters.
● FwdAut = 1 for the command "Start forward"
● RevAut = 1 for the command "Start backwards"
● StopAut = 1 for the stop command and
● AutModLi = 1 for setting "Automatic" operating mode
● ManModLi = 1 for setting "Manual" operating mode
Bit = 1: Switching mode: two static automatic commands are assigned to a control input.
Example with a motorMotRevL: In this case, use the interconnectable input parameters.
● FwdAut = 1 for the command "Start forward"
● RevAut = 1 for the command "Start backwards" and
● FwdAut = 0 and RevAut = 0 for the stop command
● AutModLi = 1 for setting "Automatic" operating mode
● AutModLi = 0 for setting "Manual" operating mode
The StopAut and ManModLi control inputs are irrelevant in this case.

2.1.9.60 Specifying switching mode

Feature Bit
Number of the Feature bit: 5

Specifying switching mode


Use this Feature bit to specify switching mode for the motor block.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Switching mode "On over speed 1" with the SwOverTi > 0 parameter

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 171
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit = 1: Switching mode "Off over speed 1" with the SwOverTi > 0 parameter

Note
This Feature bit is only used with the SwOverTi > 0 parameter. Refer also to the MotSpdL
functions (Page 1257) section for more on this.

2.1.9.61 Creep rate is always detected in the dosing quantity

Feature Bit
Number of the Feature bit: 13

Enable: Creep rate is always detected in the dosing quantity


Use the Feature bit to specify the response for detecting the creep rate in the dosing quantity.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Disabled, the creep rate is only detected in the dosing quantity over the limit
CR_AH_Lim (high alarm for creep rate). With CR_AH_En = 0, the creep rate has no effect on
the dosing quantity calculation.
Bit = 1: Enabled, the creep rate is always detected in the dosing quantity.

Note
Creep rate is the flow in the states "End", "Off", and "Pause".

2.1.9.62 Enabling rapid stop via faceplate

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 14

Enabling rapid stop via faceplate


You can use the Feature bit "Enable rapid stop via faceplate" to specify if the OS operator
can use rapid stop for the block via the standard view of the faceplate.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: The "Rapid stop" button is not visible in the faceplate.
Bit = 1: The OS operator can use the button for rapid stop.

2.1.9.63 Position feedback signals are active


Feature bit

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


172 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Number of the Feature bit: 12

Position feedback signals are active


You can use this Feature bit to activate the position feedback signals (FbkP1 and FbkP2)
and deactivate the separate valve feedback signals (FbkV0, FbkV1 and FbkV2). In the trend
view and preview, the position feedback signals and control signals Pos0Out, Pos1Out,
Pos2Out are used for display.
Default: 0
Bit = 0: The valve feedback signals FbkV0, FbkV1, FbkV2 are active. The position feedback
signals FbkP1, FbkP2 are deactivated.
Bit = 1: The position feedback signals FbkP1, FbkP2 are activate. The valve feedback signals
FbkV0, FbkV1, FbkV2 are deactivated.

Note
SafeV0, SafeV1, SafeV2 and DefPos1, DefPos2 are only used for configuring the icon
displays in the OS.

2.1.9.64 Separate monitoring time for stopping the motor

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 13

Separate monitoring time for stopping the motor


You can use this Feature bit to activate a separate monitoring time for stopping the motor.
The default setting is 0.
bit = 0: A monitoring time for starting and stopping the motor
Bit = 1: Separate monitoring time for stopping the motor

2.1.9.65 Separate interlock for each direction, position, or speed

Feature bit
Number of the Feature2 bit: 16

Separate interlock for each direction or position


You can use this Feature bit to enable the use of the "Separate interlock for each direction,
position, or speed" function.
Default setting is 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 173
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit = 0: One interlock for each direction, position, or speed.


Bit = 1: Separate interlock for each direction, position, or speed.

2.1.9.66 Separate delay times for each alarm

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 8

Separate delay times for each alarm


You can use this Feature bit to activate the alarm delay type Two time values for each
individual limit (Page 211).
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: The alarm delay type Two time values for each individual limit (Page 211) is deactivated.
Bit = 1: The alarm delay type Two time values for each individual limit (Page 211) is activated.

See also
User-configured message classes (Page 41)
Two time values per limit pair (Page 210)

2.1.9.67 Signaling limit violation

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 29

Signaling limit violation


With this Feature bit, you specify how limit violation should be sent to the respective limit
outputs.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Output value of the limit output = 1 (1 active)
Bit = 1: Output value of the limit output = 0 (0 active)

Note
To learn about the parameters with which you can influence this behavior, refer to the
description of the connections for the respective blocks.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


174 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.9.68 Alarm setpoint difference

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 5

Setpoint difference should be alarmed


Use this Feature bit to activate alarming when a setpoint difference occurs.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Disabled: The message for the ExtMsg2 and ExtMsg3 parameters are output.
Bit = 1: Enabled: The messages for the ER_H_Lim or ER_L_Lim parameter are output instead
of the message parameters ExtMsg2 and ExtMsg3.

2.1.9.69 Setpoint specification with separate display area and custom unit

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 16

Setpoint specification with separate display area and custom unit


You can use this Feature bit to specify the display area and the unit of the setpoint
specification.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Setpoint specification and readback value have the same display area (RbkOpScale,
RbkUnit)
Bit = 1: The setpoint specification has a separate display area and a custom unit
(SP_OpScale, SP_Unit)

2.1.9.70 Control via auxiliary valve

Feature Bit
Number of the Feature bit: 5

Control via a auxiliary valve


You can use this Feature bit to specify if control should be performed by a auxiliary valve.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Control without auxiliary valve / no auxiliary valve present
Bit = 1: Control via auxiliary valve

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 175
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.9.71 Enabling bumpless change to the proportional gain, derivative time and amplification of
the differentiator

Feature Bit
Number of the Feature bit: 20

Enabling bumpless change to the proportional gain, derivative time and amplification of the differentiator
Use this Feature bit to enable bumpless change to proportional gain Gain, derivative action
time TD and gain of the differentiator in automatic mode.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: The bumpless switchover is deactivated.
Bit = 1: The bumpless switchover is activated.

2.1.9.72 Enable bumpless switchover to "Automatic" mode for operator only

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 21

Enable bumpless switchover to automatic mode for operator only


You can use this Feature bit to specify whether bumpless switchover to automatic mode for
valves, motors and dosing unit should be enabled only if switching via the faceplate is in effect,
or whether switching using interconnectable inputs AutModLi and ManModLi (ModLiOp =
1) is also possible.
The default setting is 0
Bit = 0: The function "Bumpless switchover to automatic mode for valves, motors and dosers"
works when switching via the faceplate and switching using interconnectable inputs
AutModLi and ManModLi (ModLiOp = 1).
Bit = 1: The "Bumpless switchover in automatic mode for valves, motors and dosers" function
only works for switching via the faceplate. Bumping switchover can be activated via the inputs
AutModLi and ManModLi (ModLiOp = 1).

2.1.9.73 Disabling bumpless switchover to automatic mode for controllers

Feature Bit
Number of the Feature bit: 18

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


176 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Changeover with or without P step change when the internal setpoint is not in tracking mode
Use this Feature bit to specify if a changeover should occur with or without a P step change
when the internal setpoint (SP_TrkPv = 0) does not track the process value.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Changeover without P step change (bumpless)
Bit = 1: Changeover with P step change (not bumpless)
For more detailed information, refer to the description of Manual and automatic mode for control
blocks (Page 73).

2.1.9.74 Enabling bumpless switchover to automatic mode for valves, motors, and dosers

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 17

Bumpless switchover
You can use this Feature bit to enable the bumpless switchover from local/manual mode to
automatic mode.
Default setting is 0
Bit = 0: Bumpless switchover is disabled. You can switch from local/manual mode to automatic
mode at any time.
Bit = 1: Bumpless switchover from local/manual mode to automatic mode is enabled. A
switchover from local/manual mode to automatic mode is only possible if the control settings
of the local/manual mode and automatic modes match. If switchover occurs at a different point
in time, this is indicated in the faceplate with the text "Switchover error".
Refer to the Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76) section for
more on this.
A second feature bit is used to specify if bumpless switchover to automatic mode is only
possible via the faceplate or if switching is also possible via the interconnectable parameters
AutModLi and ManModLi (ModLiOp = 1).
Refer to the section Enable bumpless switchover to "Automatic" mode for operator only
(Page 176).

2.1.9.75 Summing characteristics continuous or triggered

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 7

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 177
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Define summing characteristics


You can use this Feature bit to define the summing characteristics of the block as a function
of the Feature.Bit6 = 0. If you have set the Feature.Bit6 = 1, this Feature bit has no
function.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Triggered summing characteristics.
Bit = 1: Continuous summing characteristics.

2.1.9.76 Suppression of all messages

Feature Bit
Number of the Feature bit: 25

Suppression of all messages


You can use this Feature bit to determine whether all messages of the block are to be
suppressed.
Bit = 0: Process messages are suppressed.
Bit = 1: All messages are suppressed.

2.1.9.77 Output invalid raw value

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 28

Output invalid raw value


Use this Feature bit to activate output of the invalid raw value for channel blocks.
Default setting is 1
Bit = 0: The invalid raw value is not output. Either the substitute value (Feature bit Output
substitute value if raw value is invalid (Page 153)) or the last valid value (Feature bit
Outputting last valid value if raw value is invalid (Page 157)) is output.
Bit = 1: The invalid raw value is output. The signal status of the output value is set to "Bad,
device related" or "Bad, process related".
If there is no valid raw value the output parameter Bad = 1 is set automatically.

Prioritizing the Feature bits for channel blocks:


You need to assign parameters for three Feature bits for the response to an invalid raw value
for the channel blocks.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


178 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

If more than one of these Feature bits are set (=1), the following priority applies:
● Output invalid raw value (Feature.Bit28 = highest priority)
● Output substitute value if raw value is invalid (Page 153)(Feature.Bit29)
● Outputting last valid value if raw value is invalid (Page 157) (Feature.Bit30 = lowest
priority)
The raw value is output of none of the Feature bits 28, 29 or 30 is set.

2.1.9.78 Transmission of status information of devices

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 29

Transmission of status information of devices


You can use this Feature bit to specify if status information of the device should be transferred
to the upstream diagnostics block.
The default setting is 1.
Bit = 0: No transfer of status information.
Bit = 1: Transfer status information of the device to the upstream diagnostics block.

2.1.9.79 Control priority in the event of an invalid input command


Feature2 Bit
Number of the Feature2 bit: 3

Control priority in the event of an invalid input command


You can use this function to define the control priority in the event of an invalid input command.
Default setting: 0
Bit = 0: In the event of an invalid input command, the control output is retained.
Bit = 1: In the event of an invalid input command, the control output switches to the "neutral
position".

2.1.9.80 Sealing the valve


Feature Bit
Number of the Feature bit: 8

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 179
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Sealing the valve


You can use this Feature to enable the valve sealing function. The torque shutoff is then also
evaluated when the valve is closed.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: "Seal valve" function is disabled.
Bit = 1: "Seal valve" function is enabled.

2.1.9.81 First-in detection response to deactivation

Feature Bit
Number of the Feature Bit: 21

First-in detection response to deactivation


You can use this Feature Bit to define the first-in detection response of the interlock blocks
depending on the FirstInEn = 0 input parameter.
The default setting is 0.
● Bit = 0: When first-in detection is deactivated via FirstInEn = 0, the output parameter
FirstIn is reset.
● Bit = 1: When first-in detection is deactivated via FirstInEn =0, the output parameter
FirstIn is maintained. When first-in detection is activated for the first time by an edge
change of FirstInEn 0->1, the output parameter FirstIn is reset.

2.1.9.82 Reaction of the switching points in the "Out of service" operating mode
Feature Bit
Number of the Feature bit: 26

Reaction of the switching points in the "Out of service" operating mode


You can use this Feature bit to specify the reaction of the switching points to the "Out of
service" operating mode.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Last state of the switching points before switching to the "Out of service" operating
mode is retained.
Bit = 1: The state of the switching points is reset to "Good".

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


180 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.9.83 Reaction to the out of service mode

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 1

Reaction to the out of service mode


You can use this Feature bit to define the reaction of the technologic block based on the
interconnectable input parameter OosLi = 1.
The default setting is 0.
● Bit = 0: The symbol for the "In progress" status (see below) appears in the block icon and
in the faceplate of the assigned technologic block. A 0-1 edge transition at the input
parameter OosLi has no further influence on the reaction of the technological block; the
previous status is retained. No switch to the "Out of service" mode is performed.
● Bit = 1: The mode switches to "Out of service" assuming that the block is "On" or "Manual"
mode. If this is not the case, the mode does not change. The symbol for the "In progress"
(see below) status also appears in the block icon and in the faceplate of the assigned
technologic block regardless of the mode change. No message is output to indicate whether
or not the mode change took place.
The status display for "In progress" appears as follows:

A 1-0 edge transition at the input parameter OosLi has no influence on the reaction of the
technologic block, the previous status is retained.
See also the section Release for maintenance (Page 65) for more on this.

2.1.9.84 Exiting local mode

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 10

Reaction to exiting local mode


Use this Feature bit to define how "Local mode" is be exited with LocalSetting = 1 or
LocalSetting = 2 and if the mode is not specified by AutModLi or ManModLi.
Default setting is 0
Bit = 0: Exiting local mode in manual mode (bumpless because the control signals are
continuously adjusted).
Bit = 1: When local mode is exited, the mode changes back to the last mode that was active
prior to local mode (not bumpless).
For more detailed information, refer to the description of Local mode (Page 80).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 181
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.9.85 Interlock display with LocalSetting 2 or 4

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 27

Interlock display with LocalSetting 2 or 4


Use this Feature bit to specify the display of interlocks with LocalSetting 2 or 4 at the
faceplate and at the block output LockAct .
The default setting is 0
Bit = 0: LocalSetting 2 and 4 crossed out locks are displayed in the standard view.
LockAct is not set with interlock.
Bit = 1: LocalSetting 2 and 4 locks are displayed in the standard view according to the
interlock. LockAct is set according to interlock. This setting is used for hardware interlock.

Note
A decreasing motor protection (Trip.Value=0) is displayed at the output parameter
LockAct, regardless of the Feature bit setting.
This Feature bit is also applicable for the LocalSetting 5 in VlvS.

2.1.9.86 Vibrate after torque monitoring

Feature2 bit
Number of the Feature2 bit: 6

Vibrate after torque monitoring


You can use this Feature2 bit to determine whether vibration should be started after a torque
monitoring error TorqOpen or TorqClose.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: No vibration.
Bit = 1: Vibration is started after a torque monitoring error.

2.1.9.87 With acknowledge overdosage

Feature2 bit
Number of the Feature2 bit: 24

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


182 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

With acknowledge overdosage


You can use this Feature2 bit to change the acknowledgment behavior of overdosage and
underdosage.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: After an overdosage is identified, the block changes directly to the “End” state.
Bit = 1: After an overdosage is identified, the block changes and continues to be in the “Off”
state. An acknowledgment is necessary to change the dosing state to “End”. In the standard
view, status display shows the state “Ack Dos End”.

2.1.9.88 Ramp rate calculation

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 6 (7 for VlvAnL)

Define ramp rate


You can use this Feature bit to define the ramp rate calculation based on the actual start
point and the actual ramp target value.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: New ramp rate will not be calculated after a change in the ramp target value.
Bit = 1: Ramp rate is calculated with the actual start point and the actual ramp target value.

2.1.9.89 SP following PV in open loop has no priority over SP_Ext and SP limits

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 23

SP following PV in open loop has no priority over SP_Ext and SP limits


You can use this Feature bit to specify whether the setpoint follows the process value in
"manual mode" with tracking (SP_TrkPV = 1). You can specify this function in case of setpoint
is external or limited.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Setpoint follows process value (SP = PV) irrespective of whether setpoint is external
or limited.
Bit = 1: If the setpoint is external, setpoint follows the external setpoint (SP = SP_Ext) and will
be limited to the external limits (SP_ExHiLim and SP_ExLoLim). If the setpoint is internal,
setpoint follows the process value (SP = PV) and will be limited to the internal limits
(SP_InHiLim and SP_InLoLim).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 183
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.9.90 With accelerated return of the integral action from the manipulated variable limit

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 17

With accelerated return of the integral action from the manipulated variable limit
When switching to the automatic mode (manually, by tracking, forced tracking, or program
mode with manipulated variable specification) or when the controller is initialized by the
InitPid input, the integral action (reset) is moved to preserve bumpless operation in case
of an impending control deviation. The greater the control deviation and the controller gain,
the greater is this shift. The result may be that the integral action is set far outside the
manipulated variable limits. If the control deviation decreases after switching to the automatic
mode, it may happen that in controllers with large TI values, the manipulated variable stays
within the limit for a longer duration.
You can use this Feature bit to accelerate the return of the integral action from the limit. In
case of a pending control deviation, the integral action is moved only in the direction of the
control range to the extent that the manipulated variable can remove itself quickly and
bumplessly from the manipulated variable limits (MV_HiLim/MV_LoLim).
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Without accelerated return of the integral action.
Bit = 1: With accelerated return of the integral action when the integral action and the
manipulated variable are outside or at the manipulated variable limits.

Note
In regular control mode, the integral action cannot move outside the manipulated variable limits
because the manipulated variable is limited first and then fed back to the reset memory (see
also anti-windup in PIDConR functions (Page 834)).

2.1.9.91 External/internal selection specification

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 6

External/internal selection specification


You can use this Feature bit to switch from the faceplate between internal and external
selection of the inputs In01 to In10 (SelInt or SelExt).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


184 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

The default setting is 0.


● Bit = 0:

LiOp = 0 Selection of In01 to In16 is internal; SelInt is active and can be used via faceplate.
LiOp = 1 Selection of In01 to In16 is external; SelExt is active and can be used via inter‐
connection.

● Bit = 1:

LiOp = 0 With the input parameter SelIntOp or SelExtOp, you can change the selection
between internal (SelInt) and external (SelExt) via faceplate.
LiOp = 1 With the input parameter SelIntLi or SelExtLi, you can change the selection
between internal (SelInt) and external (SelExt) via interconnection.

2.1.9.92 Setting switch or button mode for local commands

Feature2 bit
Number of the Feature2 bit: 4

Setting switch or button mode for local commands (input signal as pulse signal or as static signal)
You can use this Feature2 bit to determine whether a separate interconnectable 1-active
control input has to be used for every local command of the block or two local commands are
assigned to a control input.
The Feature2 bit affects the following control inputs for local mode in the form of a pulse
(pushbutton operation) or a static signal (switching mode):
● Starting and stopping a motor
● Opening and closing a valve
You can find the commands for controlling the block in the relevant section on block operating
modes. They are always the parameters that are used for the local operation of a block.
Bit = 0: Button mode: Each local command is assigned to a control input. This has a latching
reaction and is 1-active.
1. Example with a motor MotRevL: In this case, use the interconnectable input parameters.
● FwdLocal = 1 for the command "Start forward"
● RevLocal = 1 for the command "Start backwards"
● StopLocal = 1 for the stop command
Bit = 1: Switching mode: two static local commands are assigned to a control input.
2. Example with a motor MotRevL: In this case, use the interconnectable input parameters.
● FwdLocal = 1 for the command "Start forward"
● RevLocal = 1 for the command "Start backwards"
● FwdLocal = 0 and RevLocal = 0 for the stop command

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 185
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

The StopLocal control input is irrelevant in this case.


3. Example with motor MotSpdL: In this case, use the interconnectable input parameters.
● Spd1Local = 1 for the command Motor to run with Speed1
● Spd2Local = 1 for the command Motor to run with Speed2
● Spd1Local = 0 and Spd2Local = 0 for the stop Command
4. Example with motor MotSpdCL: In this case, use the interconnectable input parameters.
● FwdLocal = 1 for the command "Start forward"
● RevLocal = 1 for the command "Start backwards"
● FwdLocal = 0 and RevLocal = 0 for the stop command
5. Example with VlvPosL: In this case, use the interconnectable input parameters.
● OpenLocal = 1, Command for Valve to "Open”
● CloseLocal = 1, Command for Valve to "Close”
● OpenLocal = 0 and CloseLocal = 0 for the stop command
6. Example with Vlv2WayL: In this case, use the interconnectable input parameters.
● Pos1Local = 1, Command for Valve1 to "Open"
● Pos2Local = 1, Command for Valve2 to "Open"
● Pos1Local = 0 and Pos2Local = 0, Command for "Position 0" (neutral position),
7. Example with VlvL
● OpenLocal = 1, Command for Valve to "Open"
● OpenLocal = 0, Command for Valve to "Close"
With Feature2.Bit4 = 1, two static local commands are assigned to a control input.

2.1.9.93 Gradient limitation with time duration

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit:
● 11 for PIDConL, PIDConR, and PIDStepL
● 12 for MotSpdCL, VlvAnL, and OpAnL

Gradient limitation with time duration


You can use this Feature bit to ramp up or ramp down the setpoint SP respectively MV as a
function of time duration. With this Feature bit, the gradient limitation function can also work
with the time duration.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Gradient limitation works only with the gradient values: SP/MV_UpRaLim, SP/
MV_DnRaLim

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


186 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit = 1: Gradient limitation also works with the time duration with the following parameters: SP/
MV_RmpModTime, SP/MV_RmpTime.

2.1.9.94 Analog input 1 is reserved for the operator

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 7

Analog input 1 is reserved for the operator


You can use this Feature bit to reserve the analog input 1 (In01) for the operator.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Operator cannot use the analog input 1 (In01).
Bit = 1: Operator can change the value of analog input 1 (In01) if the input is not connected
and OS_Perm.Bit22 is set to 1.

2.1.9.95 Operator can change the setpoint via faceplate also in the "Local" mode

Feature2 bit
Number of the Feature2 bit: 6

Operator can change the setpoint via faceplate also in the "Local" mode
You can use this Feature2 bit to enable the input of a setpoint for the operator in the "Local"
mode.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Operator cannot change the setpoint in the "Local" mode.
Bit = 1: Operator can change the setpoint via faceplate in the "Local" mode.

2.1.9.96 Define the setpoint after stop and start of the motor

Feature2 bit
Number of the Feature2 bit: 7

Define the setpoint after stop and start of the motor


You can use this Feature2 bit to define the setpoint after stop and start of the motor.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: The setpoint is retained after the motor is stopped.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 187
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit = 1: After the motor is stopped, the setpoint will be set to SP_Off. If the motor is started
and the setpoint is in internal mode, the setpoint will be set to the low limitation SP_LoLim. Up
to this value, the internal setpoint can be changed. In case the setpoint is external after the
start of the motor, the setpoint will be changed directly to the external setpoint. The low
limitation will be limited downwards to SP_Off and will be written back if the limitation is
reached.

2.1.9.97 Retain last output value in case of bad input signal status

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 5

Retain last output value in case of bad input signal status


You can use this Feature bit to specify that the block holds its output value if the input signal
status is bad (16#00 or 16#28).
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Default state of the block.
Bit = 1: Retain last output value in case of bad input signal status.

2.1.9.98 Forcing operating modes in the "Local" mode

Feature2 bit
Number of the Feature2 bit: 8

Forcing operating modes in the "Local" mode


You can use this Feature2 bit to specify whether forcing operating modes is possible in the
"Local" mode.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: In the "Local" mode, forcing operating modes is not possible.
Bit = 1: In the "Local" mode, forcing operating modes is possible.

2.1.9.99 Motor stop in end position depends only on the corresponding feedback signal

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 15

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


188 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Motor stop in end position depends only on the corresponding feedback signal
With this Feature bit, you can specify whether the motor stop in end position depends only
on the corresponding feedback signal or on both feedback signals.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Motor stop in end position depends on two feedback signals (FbkOpen and
FbkClose). For example, motor stop in the end position "Open" depends on both feedback
signals "Opened" and "Closed". In this case, FbkOpen = 1 and FbkClose = 0 are
parameterized such that the drive output control of the motor "Open" is reset.
Bit = 1: Motor stop in end position depends only on the corresponding feedback signal. For
example, motor stop in the end position "Open" depends only on the feedback signal "Opened".
In this case, only FbkOpen = 1 is parameterized such that the drive output control of the motor
"Open" is reset.

2.1.9.100 Substitution value is active if the block is in bypass

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 9

Substitution value is active if the block is in bypass


You can use this Feature bit to specify whether the block uses the process value or a
substitution value in case of an active bypass.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Block will use the process value (PV/In/Out).
Bit = 1: Block will use the substitution value (BypPV/BypIn/BypOut).

2.1.9.101 Enable external message

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 9

Enable external message


You can use this Feature bit to specify if you want to use the quality code of Inx/InTSx or
the external values ExtValxx as the associated value.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Use quality code of Inx or InTSx as the associated value.
Bit = 1: Use external values ExtValxx as the associated value.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 189
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.9.102 Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values

Feature/Feature2 bit
Number of the Feature/Feature2 bit: 10

Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values


You can use this Feature/Feature2 bit to consider the bad signal status (16#00 or 16#28)
in the parameter for the automatic commands or external values to move the block into the
neutral position.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: A bad signal status will not be considered.
Bit = 1: A bad signal status (16#00 or 16#28) in the automatic commands or external values
will be considered from the block. The block goes to a defined neutral position.

2.1.9.103 Disable calculation of impulse control in LocalSetting 2 and 4

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 20

Disable calculation of impulse control in LocalSetting 2 and 4


You can use this Feature bit to disable the tracking of feedback signals in the "Local" mode
setting 2 and 4.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Calculation of impulse controls in LocalSetting 2 and 4.
Bit = 1: Disable calculation of Impulse controls in LocalSetting 2 and 4.

2.1.9.104 Inverter enable

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 8

Inverter enable
You can use this Feature bit to specify whether, after the activation of Feature bit 15
(Feature.Bit15 = 1), a frequency converter with a separate device infeed is to be used or
the inverter enable.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Frequency converter with separate device infeed

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


190 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit = 1: Inverter enable

2.1.9.105 Scale dosing can be started only if StandStill = 1

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 14

Scale dosing can be started only if StandStill = 1


You can use this Feature bit to specify the start of scale dosing.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Start scale dosing independent of standstill.
Bit = 1: Start scale dosing only with StandStill = 1

2.1.9.106 Delete history of MV and DV moves during restart

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 8

Delete history of MV and DV moves during restart


You can use this Feature bit to determine whether the history of MV and DV moves will be
deleted after CPU restart or block restart.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: The history of MV and DV will be deleted only after CPU restart if OB100 is running.
Bit = 1: The history of MV and DV will be deleted after CPU restart and also after a block restart
(Restart = 1), if user DBs/FCs will be loaded in controller.

2.1.9.107 Status output calculation

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 8

Status output calculation


You can use this Feature bit to define how the block calculates the status of output Out.
Bit = 0: The Status output is calculated with actual status input In.ST and the last status output
Out.ST. The block makes a worst status calculation like technological blocks over the whole

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 191
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

integration. With function "Tracking values" (OutTrkOn = 1) the status is reset to


OutTrk.ST.
Bit = 1: The Status output is equal to status input (Out.ST = In.ST).

2.1.9.108 Suppress MsgLock and “Out of service” mode for a connected message block

Feature/Feature2 bit
Number of the Feature2 bit: 11

Suppress MsgLock and “Out of service” mode for a connected message block
With this Feature/Feature2 bit, you can suppress the message lock with the parameter
MsgLock and the switchover to the “Out of service” mode for a connected message block
(EventTs, Event16Ts). Only the connected block over the parameter EventTsIn is
concerned. This allows generating messages also in the case of MsgLock = 1 or during a
switchover to the "Out of Service" mode in the main block. For example, if the main block goes
to the “Out of service” mode, the switchover can be messaged over a connection from the
main block output OosAct to an input Inx of EventTs/Event16Ts.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: No suppression.
Bit = 1: A message lock with the parameter MsgLock and a switchover to the “Out of service”
mode are supressed for connected message block over EventTsIn.

2.1.9.109 Variants of CPI calculation

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 8

Variants of CPI calculation


With this Feature bit, you can choose between the two variants of CPI calculation.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Approximate calculation with reduced computing power consumption.
Bit = 1: More precise calculation corresponding to mathematical definition of variance.

Note
If you change the variant of calculation, the limits CPI_AL_Lim and CPI_WL_Lim may have
to be adapted.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


192 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.9.110 Scalable measuring range

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 6

Scalable measuring range


With this Feature bit, the scalable measuring range is activated. This Feature bit is used
by the driver generator according to the information from the HW Config / STEP 7 attribute
and therefore this Feature bit is set by the driver wizard.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Scalable measuring range is not active.
Bit = 1: Scalable measuring range is active.

2.1.9.111 2 decimal points (scalable measuring range)

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 7

2 decimal points (scalable measuring range)


With this Feature bit, the measuring range resolution is set to 2 decimal points. This
Feature bit is used by the driver generator according to the information from the HW Config /
STEP 7 attribute and therefore this Feature bit is set by the driver wizard.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Measuring range resolution is not set to 2 decimal points.
Bit = 1: Measuring range resolution is set to 2 decimal points.

2.1.9.112 3 decimal points (scalable measuring range)

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 8

3 decimal points (scalable measuring range)


With this Feature bit, the measuring range resolution is set to 3 decimal points. This
Feature bit is used by the driver generator according to the information from the HW Config /
STEP 7 attribute and therefore this Feature bit is set by the driver wizard.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Measuring range resolution is not set to 3 decimal points.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 193
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit = 1: Measuring range resolution is set to 3 decimal points.

2.1.9.113 Output substitute values in case of communications error

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 29

Output substitute values in case of communications error


Use this Feature bit to specify if substitute values are to be outputted in case of
communication error.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Substitute values are not outputted in case of communication error.
Bit = 1: Substitute values are outputted in case of communications error

2.1.9.114 Output last values in case of communications error

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 29

Output last values in case of communications error


Use this Feature bit to specify if last values are to be outputted in case of communication
error.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Last values are not outputted in case of communication error.
Bit = 1: Last values are outputted in case of communications error.

2.1.9.115 Dosing controls are deactivated during scale is in taring mode

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 14

The dosing controls are deactivated during scale is in taring mode


You can specify the dosing controls Ctrl, P_Ctrl, Ctrl2, P_Ctrl2 after the start of scale
dosing using this Feature bit.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: After start of scale dosing the controls are active and independent of StandStill.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


194 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit = 1: After start of scale dosing the controls are deactivated during scale is in taring mode
(StandStill = 0).

Note
After start of scale dosing during taring mode (StandStill = 0) the display area in the
standard view shows "Taring".

2.1.9.116 Do not evaluate the first run of the diagnostic blocks

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 27

Do not evaluate the first run of the diagnostic blocks


Use this Feature bit to deactivate the evaluation of the first run detection in parameter
DXCHG1 for channel blocks in case of manually configuration of the parameter Mode.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Activates the evaluation of the first run detection in parameter DXCHG1.
Bit = 1: Deactivates the evaluation of the first run detection in parameter DXCHG1.

2.1.9.117 Selection of metadata and diagnostic blocks

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 9

Selection of metadata and diagnostic blocks


Use this Feature bit to specify how PCS 7 driver generator proceeds with the connected
hardware.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: PCS 7 driver generator uses PCS 7 Basis Library metadata and function blocks.
Bit = 1: PCS 7 driver generator uses metadata and function blocks from an additionally installed
AddOn Library.

2.1.9.118 Limits disabled in faceplate

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 23

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 195
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Blocks: CntOhSc, CountOh, CountScL, TotalL, MonAnL, MonAnS, MotL, MotRevL,


MotSpdCL, MotSpdL, VlvAnL, VlvMotL, and VlvPosL
Number of the Feature bit: 16
Blocks: DoseL
Number of the Feature bit: 31
Blocks: FmCont, FmTemp, PIDConL, PIDConR, PIDConS, PIDStepL, and ConPerMon

Limits disabled in faceplate


You can use this Feature bit to make the limits visible but disabled in faceplate when limits
are disabled.
The default setting is 0.

Bit = 0: Limits are invisible in faceplate when disabled from block.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


196 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit = 1: Limits are visible but disabled in faceplate when disabled from block.

2.1.9.119 Keep last valid raw value if input value is bad

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 31

Keep last valid raw value if input value is bad


Use this Feature bit to hold the raw output value if the input value is bad (16#00 or 16#28).
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Transfers the data. Status of input value is not bad.
Bit = 1: Does not transfer the data. Status of input value is bad.

2.1.9.120 With PID initialization if mode SP intern extern changes

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 14

With PID initialization if mode SP intern extern change


You can use this Feature bit to define the PID behavior after a change of mode SP intern/
extern (SP_ExtAct). This means MV makes a jump or not.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: No PID initialization after a change of mode SP intern/extern (SP_ExtAct). If the
setpoint intern is different to SP extern, MV makes a jump to reach the new setpoint faster.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 197
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit = 1: With PID initialization after a change of mode SP intern/extern (SP_ExtAct). MV


makes no jump, but the process needs more time to reach the new setpoint.

2.1.9.121 Changes signal status of outputs in OOS

Feature/Feature2 bit
Number of the Feature bit:
● 3 for SelA16In, SelAn16L
● 4 for CntOhSc, CountScL, CountOh, TotalL
● 5 for PIDConS, PIDConR, PIDConL, PIDStepL, FmTemp, FmCont, MPC 10x10, KalFit,
ModPreCon, TimeTrig, AV, MonAnL, MonAnS, MonDiL, MonDi08, MonDiS
Number of the Feature2 bit:
● 1 for MotL, MotS, MotRevL, MotSpdL, MotSpdCL, VlvS, VlvL, Vlv2WayL, VlvMotL, VlvAnL,
VlvPosL
● 6 for DoseL
Refer the section "Out of service mode" of the respective blocks to know about the applicable
outputs.

Changes signal status of outputs in OOS


This Feature bit changes the signal status of outputs in Out of service mode.
The default setting is 0.
Bit = 0: Default state of the block.
Bit = 1: Signal status of the respective output parameters changes to 16#60.

Note
Feature bit is different for various families of the blocks.

2.1.9.122 Behavior in the case of Bus failure

Feature bit
Number of the Feature bit: 7

Behavior in the case of Bus failure


With this Feature bit, you can set the signal status of all output signals to 16#68 in the case
of Bus failure (ModErr = 1).
The default setting is 0.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


198 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Bit = 0: The signal status of all output signals is set to 16#00 ("Bad, device related").
Bit = 1: The signal status of all output signals is set to 16#68 ("Uncertain, device related").

2.1.10 Functions for controllers

2.1.10.1 Delay alarm for control deviation at setpoint step changes

Alarm delay for blocks with the function "Delay alarm for control deviation at setpoint step changes"
This type of alarm delay is used when temporary violations of set alarm thresholds of the control
deviation are to be suppressed at setpoint step changes. The alarm delay is parameterized at
the following inputs:

Parameter for the delay Explanation


time
ER_AH_DFac Delay factor at positive setpoint step changes for incoming alarms at the
control deviation monitoring ER_AH_Lim
ER_AL_DFac Delay factor at negative setpoint step changes for incoming alarms at the
control deviation monitoring ER_AL_Lim

The effective delay time is calculated from the delay factor and the setpoint difference:
● Positive setpoint step change: ER_A_DCOut = Maximum
The maximum is formed from the parameters ER_A_DC as well as
ER_AH_DFac• Setpoint difference
● Negative setpoint step change: Maximum
The maximum is formed from the parameters ER_A_DC as well as
-1• ER_AL_DFac• Setpoint difference

The effective delay time is specified at the output parameter:

Parameter Explanation
ER_A_DCOut Effective delay time at setpoint step changes for incoming alarms during
control deviation monitoring

Before a setpoint change, the effective delay time amounts to


ER_A_DCOut = ER_A_DC.
For a setpoint step change, the effective delay time increases depending on the factors
ER_AH_DFac as well as ER_AL_DFac.
When the control loop has settled again, meaning that
(ER_AL_Lim + ER_Hyst) <= ER <= (ER_AH_Lim – ER_Hyst)
and that the delay time for outgoing alarms (ER_A_DG) has expired, the output is reset again to

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 199
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

ER_A_DC: ER_A_DCOut = ER_A_DC


.

Activating the alarm delay


The alarm delay factors have a default value of 0, meaning that the function is deactivated.
Specify a delay factor > 0 in order to use the function.

Pending alarms
Pending alarms are output at the output parameters ER_AL_Act and ER_AH_Act.

Calculation of the output parameter ER_A_DCOut


ER_A_DC is assigned by default to the output before a setpoint change.
ER_A_DCOut = ER_A_DC
In the case of a setpoint change in the positive direction during automatic mode, the output is
calculated as follows:
ER_A_DCOut = Maximum (ER_A_DC, ER_AH_DFac * Setpoint difference)
In the case of a setpoint change in the negative direction during automatic mode, the output
is calculated as follows:
ER_A_DCOut = Maximum (ER_A_DC, -1*ER_AL_DFac * Setpoint difference)
When the control circuit has stabilized again, meaning (ER_AL_Lim + ER_Hyst) <= ER <=
(ER_AH_Lim – ER_Hyst), and the delay time for outgoing alarms ER_A_DG has expired, the
output is reset again to ER_A_DC: ER_A_DCOut = ER_A_DC.

Activating and deactivating the function


The function is deactivated (default) when ER_AH_DFac = 0.0 and ER_AL_DFac = 0.0.

2.1.10.2 Inverting control direction

Inverting control direction


For some processes (for example cooling processes), negative control gain is necessary. This
is achieved by the inverting the control direction by means of the input parameter
NegGain = 1. The gain is always entered positively at the input parameter Gain . If there is
an inversion, this is indicated at the output parameter GainEff by a negative number.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


200 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.10.3 Error signal generation and dead band

Error signal generation and dead band


The signal error is formed from the effective setpoint SP and the process value
PV (ER = SP - PV_Out) (PIDConR ER =PV_Out - SP) and is available at the ER output.
In the case of activated error signal generation (only at block PIDConL, Feature.Bit14),
ER is formed by ER_Ext.
To suppress disturbances in the steady state, you can assign a dead band (Deadband):
● Deadband = 0: Dead band is disabled
● Deadband ≠ 0: Dead band is enabled
With a negative dead band (Deadband < 0.0), calculation is continued internally with this
value

(5

>'HDGEDQG@

6339B2XW(5B([W
>'HDGEDQG@

A dead zone in the controller can help reduce the movements of the actuator and thus reduce
the energy consumption and wear of the actuator. This applies especially to mechanical
actuators, such as valves and pumps. The dead zone may also required in order to avoid small,
stable, continuous oscillations (working movement), which are caused by the quantization of
the control actions in the control loop.

Note
Calming the control signals via dead band is only possible when no structure splitting is active,
i.e. when PropFacSP = 1 and DiffToFbk = 0. Controller actions in the feedback branch
directly process the measured actual value instead of the control deviation and are therefore
not affected by the dead band.

● Remaining control deviations smaller than the dead band are ignored by the controller, i.e.
it does nothing even it can. Therefore, steady states of the actual value can occur, the
average time of which significantly differs from the setpoint.
● When such steady states occur at the edges of the dead zone, it must be expected that
even the smallest problems will cause control intervention (i.e. actuator energy
consumption).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 201
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

● Large dead zones have a negative effect on the control response of the control loop for
setpoint changes. This is because the controller "stops work", for example, in the rising
phase of a positive step response when entering the dead band. This can lead to creeping
settling time, or cause the controller to be activated again when the actual value exceeds
the high limit of the dead band in the form of an overshoot.
● After a fault event that leads to exiting the dead band, the controller brings the actual value
back only to the edge of the dead band, which has the above-mentioned disadvantages.
By setting Feature.Bit30, you can activate dynamic adjustment of the dead band. This
allows you to benefit from the advantages of a dead band without having to tolerate the above-
mentioned disadvantages.
When large control deviations occur (i.e. the dead band is exited), it is temporarily deactivate
until the controller returns the actual value to the proximity of the setpoint. The controller also
demonstrates control response for setpoint changes without a dead band in this way.
There is then a wait until it can be assumed that the process has settled on operating point.
Only then is the dead band activated again. When it is reactivated, the manipulated variable
is set to the mean of a sliding time window. This ensures that the actual value to be controlled
settles more in the middle of the dead band than at the edges. This avoids unnecessary shifting
of the mean value of the controlled variable from the setpoint, and thus poor stationary control
performance. The probability that the controlled variable is within the dead zone time is
increased, and further control actions are no longer necessary. This leads to reduced wear
and less energy consumption.

Note
If Feature.Bit30 = 1 is set, the ConPerMon block has to be connected with the controller.
The blocks PIDConL or PIDConR monitor this by checking the status signal of MeanMV.ST.
In case of Feature.Bit30 = 1 and MeanMV.ST = 16#78 the dynamic deactivation of
deadband is not possible and the output ErrorNum will be set to 52.

Configuration and commissioning


● Use a process tag type that contains the ConPerMon function block for monitoring the
control performance in addition to the controller.
● Check whether the additional interconnections between the monitoring block and controller
are available:
– PIDConL.MV_Mean:= ConPerMon.MV_Mean
– PIDConL.SettliTime:= ConPerMon.SettliDeadBand
● Put the controller into operation as usual with the PID Tuner, and then initialize the
ConPerMon block.
● Perform a setpoint step with activated control performance monitoring and without dead
band (PIDConL.DeadBand:=0). Various characteristics of the step response can be
determined by the ConPerMon block in this way. Check if the determined settling time at
the ConPerMon.SettliTime output parameter appears plausible.
● Specify the width of the dead band at the PIDConL.DeadBand input parameter.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


202 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

● Check the actuating signal signal in the steady state of the control loop. Has the desired
calming of the signal form been achieved?
● Activate Feature.Bit30.
● Check the control response of the control loop. If the control loop has not sufficiently settled
as expected near the center of the dead band after a setpoint change, it may help to increase
the value of the PIDConL.SettliTime input parameter.

Notes on selecting the width of the dead band


The width of the dead band primarily depends on the desired precision of the control, in other
words, after the maximum, permanent, control deviations permissible by process engineering
and after the change of the manipulated variable based on a minimum possible change of the
manipulated variable (caused, for example, by a switching actuator). With regard to the
minimization of control interventions, the following adjustment rules help to select the dead
band wide enough that unavoidable variances of the control variables due to measurement
noise or quantization noise do not lead to permanent control movements:
● Assuming a normal distribution of the statistical control variables around the setpoint, two
to three times the standard deviation of the actual value in the steady state is used as the
width of the dead band. This information can be obtained from the control loop monitoring
block: PIDConL.DeadBand:= (2...3)*ConPerMon.RefStdDev.
● If working movements in the control loop are systematically caused by the manipulated
variable quantization, for example, due to a pulse width modulation with a defined minimum
pulse duration and pulse period, a step controller with defined minimum step size or an
electro-pneumatic positioner, the width of the dead band depends on the manipulated
variable quantization multiplied by the process gain.
Example: A control signal resolution of 5% for temperature regulation with the process gain
1.5°C/% means that only temperatures in a grid of 5%, 1.5°C/% = 7.5°C can be reached
exactly. The dead band must then be selected wide enough sp that at least one grid point
falls within the dead band in which the process can remain in a steady-state, i.e. DeadBand
> 3.8°C in this case.

2.1.10.4 Using control zones

Using control zones


The control zone function is mainly used for temperature processes in which the time lag is
small compared to the recovery time (no more than a tenth of the recovery time). This is
typically the case when the temperature controller accesses the actuator directly (e.g. heating,
steam valve), and typically not the case with master controllers of cascade interconnections
(e.g. control of the internal temperature of a reactor via the shell temperature).
The control zone can result in large overshoots in processes with an excessively large time
lag.
During commissioning with the PCS 7 PID-Tuner, you can check whether the process order
is smaller than 2 and the process type "VZ2 model" is displayed. An initial approach for
dimensioning the control zone: ConZone= MV_HiLim/Gain.
If ConZone > 0, the controller works with a control zone; if ConZone <= 0, the "control
zone" function is deactivated. With a negative control zone, an error ID is output at the

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 203
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

ErrorNum parameter. When the control zone is enabled, the controller operates according to
the following algorithm:
● If the process value PV exceeds the setpoint SP by more than ConZone, the value
MV_LoLim is output as the manipulated variable (controlled mode, in order to return to the
control zone as fast as possible).
● If the process value PV falls below the setpoint SP by more than ConZone, MV_HiLim is
output (controlled mode).
● (Only possible with PIDConL, not with FmTemp) In controlled mode of the control zone and
when the I component is enabled (TI<>0), the I component can be set in a variety of ways
when the control zone is entered, depending on three Feature bits:

Feature.Bit1 Feature.Bit1 Feature.Bit1 Response


2 3 8
0 0 0 I_Part := MV.Value -P_Part -FFwd ; The controller oper‐
ates bumplessly when entering automatic control mode. (This cor‐
responds to the reaction up to V8.0)
0 0 1 I_Part := MV.Value -FFwd ; A P jump of the manipulated
variable occurs when entering automatic control mode (use only in
exceptional cases)
1 x x I_Part := MV_Offset.Value; The controller starts with the default
value MV_Offset as I component when entering automatic control
mode
0 1 x I component is frozen. When it enters the control zone, the controller
starts with the value of the I component that was in effect when it
left the control zone. This can be useful for continuous processes,
where it can be assumed that the controller is at the same operating
point as it was when it left the control zone, nearly in a steady state.

x = any
The I component is always set to MV_Offset when the I component is disabled (TI=0). I.e.:
The control zone operates with the specified I_Part := MV_Offset with P or PD controlling.
Freezing of the I component with IntHoldPos or IntHoldNeg has no effect during
controlled mode due to the control zone.
● If the process value PV stays within the control zone (ConZone), the manipulated variable
assumes the value of the PID algorithm (automatic closed-loop mode).
Note
The change from controlled closed-loop mode to automatic closed-loop mode is based on
a hysteresis of 20% of the control zone. Make sure that the control zone has an adequate
width before you manually activate the control zone. An insufficient width of the control
zone leads to oscillation of the manipulated variable and of the process value.

Advantages of the control zone:


Once the control zone is entered, the manipulated variable is quickly reduced by the applied
D component. The control zone is therefore only useful if the derivative component is activated.
Without the derivative component, only the reducing proportional component would reduce
the manipulated variable to any significant degree. The control zone speeds up settling without

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


204 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

overshoot or undershoot if the value of the output minimum or maximum manipulated variable
is a long way from the stationary manipulated variable required for the new operating point.

2.1.10.5 Setpoint limiting for external setpoints

Setpoint limiting for external setpoints


With this function you can limit the external setpoint to a range by means of the parameters
SP_ExHiLim (high limit) and SP_ExLoLim (low limit). If the setpoint lies outside the range
defined by you, it is limited to the valid range.
If the external setpoint lies on or above the limit SP_ExHiLim, this is displayed at the output
SP_ExHiAct = 1.
If the external setpoint lies on or below the limit of SP_ExLoLim, this is displayed at the output
SP_ExLoAct = 1.
The external setpoint limits can be tracked internally via the interconnection of the output
parameters SP_InHiOut or SP_InLoOut following SP_ExHiLim or SP_ExLoLim. You can
control the two limit pairs from the faceplate.

2.1.10.6 Tracking setpoint in manual mode

Tracking setpoint in manual mode


To allow a bumpless transfer to automatic mode, the setpoint tracks the process value. When
tracking,(SP_TrkPV = 1) the internal setpoint SP_Int is tracked to the process value PV.
Additional information on setpoint tracking is available in Manual and automatic mode for
control blocks (Page 73).

2.1.10.7 Tracking and limiting a manipulated variable

Manipulated variable tracking


You adjust the manipulated value (tracking) in order to implement a Bumpless switchover of
controllers. A typical use case is cascade control: If the assigned secondary controller is no
longer in automatic mode with external setpoint, the primary controller must track it.
To adjust the manipulated variable (tracking), you have to set the parameter MV_TrkOn = 1.
Now the manipulated variable is taken from the interconnected tracking value MV_Trk and
passed to the output MV. The MV output is limited to the MV_HiLim and MV_LoLim parameters.
Manual mode takes priority over tracking to allow a plant operator to set the controller to manual
mode using the faceplate even when tracking the manipulated variable and therefore continue
to normal operation.
The text "Tracking" is also displayed in the standard view of the faceplate.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 205
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Activating forced tracking mode for the manipulated variable


Forced tracking is used to set the controller output of a higher-level controller to a value that
can be specified.
You can use forced tracking, for example, to implement a centralized emergency stop in the
plant. This can be put into effect regardless of the operating mode the controller is currently
in.
To force adjustment of the manipulated variable (tracking), you have to set the parameter
MV_ForOn = 1. Now the manipulated variable is taken from the interconnected tracking value
MV_Forced and passed to the output MV.
With forced tracking, it is not possible to limit the manipulated variable, nor can the plant
operator change to manual mode in the faceplate. The text "Forced tracking" is also displayed
in the standard view of the faceplate.

Note
This function is not available for the FmCont, FmTemp, and ModPreCon blocks.

Limiting the value of a manipulated variable in automatic mode


In automatic mode, the manipulated variable is set to its automatic manipulated variable limits
as specified by the input parameters MV_HiLim and MV_LoLim and output at the output
parameter MV. Reaching the limit is then displayed at the output parameter MV_HiAct = 1
for the high limit and MV_LoAct = 1 for the low limit.
Interconnecting the output parameter ManHiOut or ManLoOut to MV_HiLim or MV_LoLim
allows the automatic manipulated variable limits to tracked to manual manipulated variable
limits. You can keep both limit pairs in synch and control the manual manipulated variable
limits in the faceplate.

Limiting the value of a manipulated variable in manual mode


In manual mode, the manipulated variable is set to its manual manipulated variable limits as
specified by the input parameters ManHiLim and ManLoLim and output at the output
parameter MV.

See also
Forcing operating modes (Page 41)

2.1.10.8 Feedforwarding and limiting disturbance variables

Feedforward control and limitation


The feedforward control is used in order to compensate measurable disturbance variables,
such as temperature or pressure, that can have an effect on the process. In automatic mode,
the disturbance variable is added to the result of the PID algorithm.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


206 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

The disturbance variable is connected to the FFwd Parameter. It is limited to the FFwdHiLim
and FFwdLoLim limits. If the disturbance variable is outside or at the limits, this is indicated
by the FFwdHiAct = 1 or FFwdLoAct = 1 output parameters.

2.1.10.9 Structure segmentation at controllers

Structure segmentation at controllers


In order to avoid jumps at the manipulated value (controller output) during setpoint changes,
proportional and derivative actions can be switched into the feedback path. I.e.: The
proportional action (proportionally) and the derivative action are then only influenced by the
process value.

3URS)DF63

B 
 *DLQ 7,    3URFHVV
63  V   09 39

V 7' 'LII7R)EN *DLQ

 3URS)DF63


7' V 'LII7R)EN

Switching proportional action into the feedback path


A proportion of the P action can be placed in the feedback using the PropFacSP parameter.
Setpoint jumps then only affect the proportional action proportionally.
PropFacSP = 0: Proportional action is completely in the feedback path. Setpoint jumps do
not affect the proportional action.
PropFacSP = 1: Proportional action is not in the feedback path. Proportional action is
affected by setpoint and process variable (default setting).

Switching derivative action into the feedback path


The parameter DiffToFbk can be used to switch the D action into the feedback path. Setpoint
jumps then no longer affect the derivative action directly.
DiffToFbk = 0: Derivative action is not in the feedback path. Derivative action is affected
by setpoint and process variable (default setting).
DiffToFbk = 1: Derivative action is in the feedback path. Setpoint jumps do not affect the
derivative action.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 207
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Implementation of the structure segmentation


The implementation of the structure segmentation differs from the figure shown above such
that changing PropFacSP does not change MV. Control behavior corresponds to the figure.

2.1.11 Messaging

2.1.11.1 Area of application of the alarm delays

Area of application
A sensible area of application for setting alarm delays can, for example, be a motor. When it
is started, an elevated starting current can occur and this could be reported depending on the
configured limit. Since this usually settles down to a value below the set limit, the alarm would
not make sense. In this case, the alarm delay that is intended to bridge the duration of the
active alarm is used.

Note
Alarms that are really wanted are, naturally, also delayed when an alarm delay is used.
Therefore select the delay period prudently!

Alarm delays in the Advanced Process Library


There are three block types with a different application of the alarm delay for:
● One time value for all limits (Page 209)
● One time value per limit pair (Page 209)
● Two time values per limit pair (Page 210)
● Two time values for each individual limit (Page 211)

Note
An alarm delay is displayed with the following symbol in the limit view and in the faceplate
overview:

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


208 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.11.2 One time value for all limits

Blocks with one time value for the alarm delay


This form of alarm delay is used for blocks without a unit designation in the name, for example,
ConPerMon.
The alarm delay is used when brief violations of the set alarm thresholds are to be suppressed.
The duration of the time delay is parameterized at the input AlmDelay. Parameter assignment
is always carried out in seconds.

Activating the alarm delay


The alarm delay is disabled by default (AlmDelay = 0). To use the function, set a delay time
[s] with the AlmDelay parameter.

2.1.11.3 One time value per limit pair

Blocks with one time value for the alarm delay per limit pair
The alarm delay is used when brief violations of the set alarm thresholds are to be suppressed.

Note
The message classes Alarm, Warning and Tolerance are not valid for user-configured
message classes. Please take into consideration the validity of terms for user-configured
message classes (Page 41).

The alarm delay is configured at the following inputs:

Parameter for the delay time Explanation


XXX_A_DC Delay time for incoming events of the class
● Alarm
XXX_Alarm_DelayComing
XXX: Value to be monitored
XXX_W_DC Delay time for incoming events of the class
● Warning
XXX_Warning_DelayComing
XXX: Value to be monitored

Activating the alarm delay


By default, the alarm delay is disabled for each limit, meaning that each individual parameter
has 0 [s] pre-assigned.
To use the function, set a delay time [s] for each parameter.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 209
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Pending alarms
Pending alarms, warnings, or tolerances are output at the corresponding output parameters:
● XXX_AH_Act = 1: Alarm limit (high) reached or violated
● XXX_AL_Act = 1: Alarm limit (low) reached or violated
● XXX_WH_Act = 1: Warning limit (high) reached or violated
● XXX_WL_Act = 1: Warning limit (low) reached or violated
If a message is active at one of these outputs, this is indicated by a 1.

See also
User-configured message classes (Page 41)

2.1.11.4 Two time values per limit pair

Blocks with two time values for the alarm delay per limit pair
The alarm delay is used when brief violations of the set alarm thresholds are to be suppressed.

Note
The message classes Alarm, Warning and Tolerance are not valid for user-configured
message classes. Please take into consideration the validity of terms for user-configured
message classes (Page 41).

The alarm delay is configured at the following inputs:

Parameter for the delay time Explanation


XXX_A_DC Delay time for incoming events of the class
● Alarm
XXX_Alarm_DelayComing
XXX: Value to be monitored
XXX_A_DG Delay time for outgoing events of the class
● Alarm
XXX_Alarm_DelayGoing
XXX: Value to be monitored
XXX_W_DC Delay time for incoming events of the class
● Warning
XXX_Warning_DelayComing
XXX: Value to be monitored
XXX_W_DG Delay time for outgoing events of the class
● Warning
XXX_Warning_DelayGoing
XXX: Value to be monitored

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


210 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Parameter for the delay time Explanation


XXX_T_DC Delay time for incoming events of the class
● Tolerance
XXX_Tolerance_DelayComing
XXX: Value to be monitored
XXX_T_DG Delay time for outgoing events of the class
● Tolerance
XXX_Tolerance_DelayGoing
XXX: Value to be monitored

Activating the alarm delay


By default, the alarm delay is disabled for each individual pair, meaning that each individual
parameter has 0 [s] pre-assigned.
To use the function, set a delay time [s] for each parameter.

Pending alarms
Pending alarms, warnings, or tolerances are output at the corresponding output parameters:
● XXX_AH_Act = 1: Alarm limit (high) reached or violated
● XXX_AL_Act = 1: Alarm limit (low) reached or violated
● XXX_WH_Act = 1: Warning limit (high) reached or violated
● XXX_WL_Act = 1: Warning limit (low) reached or violated
● XXX_TH_Act = 1: Tolerance limit (high) reached or violated
● XXX_TL_Act = 1: Tolerance limit (low) reached or violated
If a message is active at one of these outputs, this is indicated by a 1.

See also
User-configured message classes (Page 41)

2.1.11.5 Two time values for each individual limit

Alarm delay for blocks with two time values for each individual limit
This form of alarm delay is used for the blocks PIDConL, PIDConR, and MonAnL.

Note
The message classes Alarm, Warning and Tolerance are not valid for user-configured
message classes. Please take into consideration the validity of terms for user-configured
message classes (Page 41).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 211
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

The alarm delay is used when brief violations of the set alarm thresholds are to be suppressed.
The alarm delay is configured at the following inputs:

Parameter for the delay time Explanation


XX_AH_DC Delay time for incoming events of the class
● Alarm (for high limit)
XX_AlarmHigh_DelayComing
XX: Value to be monitored
XX_AH_DG Delay time for outgoing events of the class
● Alarm (for high limit)
XX_AlarmHigh_DelayGoing
XX: Value to be monitored
XX_AL_DC 1)
Delay time for incoming events of the class
● Alarm (for low limit)
XX_AlarmLow_DelayComing
XX: Value to be monitored
XX_AL_DG1) Delay time for outgoing events of the class
● Alarm (for low limit)
XX_AlarmLow_DelayGoing
XX: Value to be monitored
XX_WH_DC Delay time for incoming events of the class
● Warning (for high limit)
XX_WarningHigh_DelayComing
XX: Value to be monitored
XX_WH_DG Delay time for outgoing events of the class
● Warning (for high limit)
XX_WarningHigh_DelayGoing
XX: Value to be monitored
XX_WL_DC1) Delay time for incoming events of the class
● Warning (for low limit)
XX_WarningLow_DelayComing
XX: Value to be monitored
XX_WL_DG 1)
Delay time for outgoing events of the class
● Warning (for low limit)
XX_WarningLow_DelayGoing
XX: Value to be monitored
XX_TH_DC Delay time for incoming events of the class
● Tolerance (for high limit)
XX_ToleranceHigh_DelayComing
XX: Value to be monitored
XX_TH_DG Delay time for outgoing events of the class
● Tolerance (for high limit)
XX_ToleranceHigh_DelayGoing
XX: Value to be monitored

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


212 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Parameter for the delay time Explanation


XX_TL_DC1) Delay time for incoming events of the class
● Tolerance (for low limit)
XX_ToleranceLow_DelayComing
XX: Value to be monitored
XX_TL_DG 1)
Delay time for outgoing events of the class
● Tolerance (for low limit)
XX_ToleranceLow_DelayGoing
XX: Value to be monitored
1)
In the "MonAnL" block, the inputs for a low delay time do not have the separate "L" letters
(e.g. XX_AL_DC: the input name is XX_A_DC).

Activating the alarm delay


By default, the alarm delay is disabled for each individual limit, meaning that each individual
parameter has 0 [s] pre-assigned.
To use the function, set a delay time [s] for each parameter.

Pending alarms
Pending alarms, warnings, or tolerances are output at the corresponding output parameters:
● XX_AL_Act = 1: Alarm limit (low) reached or violated
● XX_AH_Act = 1: Alarm limit (high) reached or violated
● XX_WL_Act = 1: Warning limit (low) reached or violated
● XX_WH_Act = 1: Warning limit (high) reached or violated
● XX_TL_Act = 1: Tolerance limit (low) reached or violated
● XX_TH_Act = 1: Tolerance limit (high) reached or violated
If a message is active at one of these outputs, this is indicated by a 1.

See also
User-configured message classes (Page 41)
Separate delay times for each alarm (Page 174)

2.1.11.6 Generating instance-specific messages

Generating instance-specific messages


You can generate instance-specific messages for a binary signal of every block.
The number of interconnectable input parameters that can be used freely varies with relation
to the blocks. The X in the parameter name designates the position.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 213
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

You can specify the following messages for these instance-specific messages:
● Message class
● Priority of the message
● Message text
● Message auxiliary value
● Acknowledge behavior
Additional information is available in the descriptions of the message functionality of the
individual blocks and in the PCS 7 Configuration Manual Operator Station under "How to
configure the user-specific messages".

See also
Time stamp (Page 214)

2.1.11.7 Suppressing messages using the MsgLock parameter


The MsgLock = 1 parameter is used to selectively suppress the following messages
depending on Feature.Bit25:
● All messages at the block
or
● All messages at the block, except for process control messages (for example, CSF, motor
protection, feedback error) and external messages.
Messages already queued received the "outgoing" status with MsgLock = 1 .
You can find additional information on Feature.Bit25 in the section Suppression of all
messages (Page 178)

Note
With the block OpAnL, this function is independent of Feature.Bit25.

2.1.11.8 Time stamp

Time stamp
The time stamp is the assignment of time information to the status change of a binary process
signal. The status change of the signal is signaled together with the time information.
Use the EventTS block to report time stamped signals.
For more information on time stamping and how to configure it, please refer to the "PCS 7 -
High-Precision Time Stamping Function Manual".

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


214 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Areas of application
Areas of application of the time stamp are for example:
● Accurately-timed detection of problems in process-related equipment. The time stamp
enables you to explicitly identify signals that indicate the cause of the failure of a process
unit.
● Analysis of system-wide interrelationships
● Detection and reporting of the sequence of time-critical signal changes

Forming the time information


The time information is generated by one of the following methods and is specified at the block
by means of the input parameter TimeStampOn:
● TimeStampOn = 0: Use time stamp of the CPU (default)
● TimeStampOn = 1: Use time stamp of the I/O

Time stamping in the EventTS block


Connect the binary output parameter of another block (e.g. Pcs7DiIn) with a message input
Inx (x = 1 ... 8) of the EventTS block.
When the EventTS block recognizes a change in the signal state at this message input, it uses
the current time of the CPU as the time stamp. Only the signal changes that are slower than
the cycle time of the block can be detected.

High-precision time stamp in the process I/O


You have configured the hardware of your system for high-precision time stamping as
explained in the "PCS 7 - High-Precision Time Stamping Function Manual". The signal changes
are recognized in the I/O devices and the time stamp assigned to them. This data is available
at the output parameter TS_Out of the Pcs7DiIT block.
The high-precision time stamp is independent of the cycle time of the blocks. The actual time
resolution for two different status changes depends on your plant configuration and the
hardware you are using.
Interconnect the output parameter TS_Out of Pcs7DiIT with a message input InTSx(x =
1 ... 8) of the EventTS block.

Error handling
The system block ImDrvTs recognizes when the time stamp function in the I/O devices is
defective and forwards this information to the Pcs7DiIT block. This then forms the time stamp
using the current CPU time and sets the signal status of TS_Out output parameter to "Bad,
due to device". The EventTS block then uses the current time of the CPU as the time stamp.
You can find additional information in the "PCS 7 - High-Precision Time Stamping Function
Manual".

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 215
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.11.9 Connection of the time-stamped messages from EventTs or Event16Ts


If the output parameter EventTsOut of the block EventTs or Event16Ts is connected to the
input parameter EventTsIn or EventTs2In of another block, the time-stamped messages
of the block EventTs or Event16Ts will be displayed at the connected block. The following
functionalities or parameters of the block are transferred to the connected message blocks:
● Maintenance release status (MS_Release)
● Operating mode "Out of service" (depends on Feature2.Bit11)
● Message lock with the parameter MsgLock (depends on Feature2.Bit11)
● Batch parameters (BatchEn, Occupied, BatchID, BatchName, and StepNo)
With Feature2.Bit11 Suppress MsgLock and “Out of service” mode for a connected
message block (Page 192), you can suppress the change to the “Out of service” mode and
the message lock over MsgLock.

2.1.12 Settings for operator control and monitoring

2.1.12.1 Display and operator input area for process values and setpoints

Display and operator input area for process values and setpoints
You specify the upper and lower area limits in the faceplate using interconnectable input
parameters for the following:
● Display areas (bar display)
● Operator input area (for example setpoint and manipulated value)
● Input area for the limit values
– Up to 7 numbers (including a decimal separator and a minus sign) are possible in the
faceplates
The interconnectable input parameter is a structured variable that contains two analog values.
Refer to the descriptions of the individual blocks for the relevant input parameters.

Using a structured variable for scaling


There are three possibilities with which you can influence the contents of the structured
variables, namely with:
● The corresponding channel function block, for example, the FbAnIn block
● A conversion block, for example, the StruScIn block
● Direct parameter assignment at the block input
Additional information on data types is available in the documentation of CFC and STEP 7.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


216 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.12.2 Opening additional faceplates

Opening additional faceplates


You can open standard views of other faceplates from various faceplate views. Here, you have
the following options:
● Two buttons that you can assign freely and that are used to call faceplates of other blocks.
● Two predefined buttons for calling faceplates with a fixed assignment to the controller
blocks.
● Buttons predefined for interlock functions

Note
"Small" blocks
With "Small" blocks, you can call up only one faceplate from the standard view.

Freely assignable buttons


From the standard view and from the preview, you can use a button to open the standard view
of a block that can be selected freely. In order to use this function, in the CFC you need to
interconnect the SelFp1 input parameter for the button in the standard view or SelFp2 for
the button in the preview to any given output parameter of the block whose faceplate is to be
opened. This makes the buttons in the faceplates visible.

Note
You can only configure the button in the standard view (SelFp1) with interlock blocks. There
are no buttons with the GainSched block.

Button label
You can change the button labels in the "OS additional text" attribute to "SelFp1"/"SelFp2".

Note
There is also an alternative solution for labeling the buttons:
● Open the process picture in WinCC GraphicsDesigner.
● Open the object properties of the block icon.
● Under Configurations, assign the desired text to the attribute UserButtonText1 or
UserButtonText2.
The main difference between this solution and the first solution is that the labels are only
specified when the faceplate above the block icon is opened. This solution is therefore
outdated.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 217
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Predefined buttons for controller blocks


You can open the standard view for the following blocks from a controller standard view or
parameter view (for example PIDConL):
● ConPerMon (can be called from the standard view)
– To do this, you need to interconnect the output parameter CPI of the ConPerMon block
to the input parameter CPI_In of the controller block.
● GainSched (can be called from the parameter view)
– To do this, you need to interconnect the output parameter Link2Gain of the GainSched
block to the input parameter Gain of the controller block.
The labels of the buttons cannot be changed here.

Predefined buttons for interlocks


You can open the following interlock blocks from the standard view of the technology blocks:
● Activation enable
● Interlock without reset (interlock)
● Interlock with reset (protection)
The buttons intended for this are visible when the relevant input parameter (Permit,
Intlock or Protect) is interconnected to an interlock block.
You can open the standard view for the following faceplates from the standard view of the
interlock blocks:
● The blocks interconnected to the input values.
● The block interconnected to the output value.
The buttons intended for this are visible when the input parameters (for example In01) or the
Out output parameter of the interlock block is interconnected to a block that has a faceplate.

Note
Interconnection of the Out output parameter to multiple blocks is not permitted. The reason
for this is that a direct relationship must be established between the button in the faceplate
and the faceplate to be opened by it.

2.1.12.3 Labeling of buttons and text

Labeling of buttons and text


You can change the text of buttons (such as start/stop) for each specific instance. For binary
OpDiXX faceplates, you can also change the static text for the "x command" for each specific
instance.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


218 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

To do this, you need to specify how the buttons are labeled yourself using the attributes "Text0"
and "Text1" in the object properties of the block. These texts are displayed in the standard
view and preview of the faceplate.

Block type Command button Block I/O for parameter assign‐


ment "Text 1"
FmCont Open OpenOp
Close CloseOp
Stop StopOp
FmTemp Open OpenOp
Close CloseOp
Stop StopOp
MonDiL Process value Out
MonDiS Process value Out
MotL Start StartMan
Stop StopMan
Rapid stop RapidStp
MotRevL Start - -> FwdMan
Start < - - RevMan
Stop StopMan
Rapid stop RapidStp
MotS Start StartMan
Stop StopMan
MotSpdCL Start |-> FwdMan
Start < -| RevMan
Stop StopMan
Rapid stop RapidStp
MotSpdL Start > Spd1Man
Start >> Spd2Man
Stop StopMan
Rapid stop RapidStp
PIDConL Automatic AutModOp
Manual ManModOp
Program AdvCoOn
Out of service OosOp
External SP_ExtOp
Internal SP_IntOp
PIDConR Automatic AutModOp
Manual ManModOp
Program AdvCoOn
Out of service OosOp
External SP_ExtOp
Internal SP_IntOp

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 219
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Block type Command button Block I/O for parameter assign‐


ment "Text 1"
PIDStepL Open OpenOp
Close CloseOp
Stop StopOp
VlvAnl Open OpenOp
Close CloseOp
VlvL Open OpenMan
Close CloseMan
Vlv2WayL Pos0 Pos0Man
Pos1 Pos1Man
Pos2 Pos2Man
VlvMotL Open OpenMan
Close CloseMan
Stop StopMan
Rapid stop RapidStp
VlvPosL Open OpenMan
Close CloseMan
Stop StopMan
Rapid stop RapidStp
VlvS Open OpenMan
Close CloseMan

The default text is shown if no text is configured.


If the text is longer than can be displayed with the default font size, the font size is automatically
reduced until the text is fully shown. The smallest font size is 7 point.
Refer to the function description of the faceplate to learn which parameters are affected by
this function.

2.1.12.4 Displaying auxiliary values

Displaying auxiliary values


Up to two auxiliary values can be displayed in the standard view of some faceplates. This
feature can be used, for example, with motors to indicate the motor current and winding
temperature.
To do so interconnect the value that you want to have displayed with the input parameters
UserAna1 or UserAna2.
In the object properties (I/Os > Identifier) of the block in CFC, you can specify the text to be
displayed for these parameters in the standard view of the faceplate.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


220 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

2.1.12.5 Selecting a unit of measure

Coded unit of measure


The parameter XXX_Unit is used to specify the unit of measure for the corresponding input
parameter (XXX stands for a specific parameter, for example, PV_Unit). Entry is carried out
in the form of a code. Exactly one unit of measure is assigned to each code and is displayed
on the faceplate.
You can interconnect the XXX_Unit input parameter of a technologic block with the
XXXUnit output parameter of an analog input channel block. At the analog input channel
block, enter the unit of measure at the XXXUnit input parameter (XXX stands for a specific
parameter, for example PV_InUnit, PVOutUnit).
If the parameter value of XXX_Unit is out of range (that is, the value is not defined), the
faceplate displays "!undef.!" in the place of unit.

Note
Special notes for channel blocks PCS7AnIn, PCS7AnOu, FbAnIn and FbAnOu
You can use the S7_enum attribute to display the unit in plain text in the CFC editor for these
blocks.

Note
In block icons, the update/refresh time of the units is 1 h. If the unit is changed from CFC, the
new unit will be visible in the block icon after 1 hour or if the process picture is reloaded. In
faceplates, the update/refresh time of the units is 5 seconds, so the new unit will be visible
after 5 s.

Customer-specific units
It is possible to use units which differ from the IEC 611582 standard. You can define your own
units in the range 1 to 199 in an XML file.
The name of the XML should be APLCustomerUnits.xml and should be placed in the project
path in the folder "GraCS" on both server and client.
Below is an example to describe the content of the XML file APLCustomerUnits.xml:

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>


<UserDefinedUnits> <!-- Root node start -->
<!-- Define the first unit for different languages -->
<Unit id="1"> <!-- first node with unit ID 1 start -->
<Name lcid="1031">German1</Name> <!-- unit value (e.g. German1) in German -->
<Name lcid="1033">English1</Name> <!-- unit value (e.g. English1) in English -->
<Name lcid="1034">Spanish1</Name> <!-- unit value (e.g. Spanish1) in Spanish -->
<Name lcid="1036">French1</Name> <!-- unit value (e.g. French1) in French -->
<Name lcid="1040">Italian1</Name> <!-- unit value (e.g. Italian1) in Italian -->
<Name lcid="1041">Japanese1</Name> <!-- unit value (e.g. Japanese1) in Japanese -->
<Name lcid="2052">Chinese1</Name> <!-- unit value (e.g. Chinese1) in Chinese -->

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 221
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

</Unit> <!-- first node with unit ID 1 end -->


<!-- Define the second unit for different languages -->
<Unit id="2">
<Name lcid="1031">German2</Name> <!-- lcid="1031" is for German -->
<Name lcid="1033">English2</Name> <!-- lcid="1033" is for English -->
<Name lcid="1034">Spanish2</Name> <!-- lcid="1034" is for Spanish -->
<Name lcid="1036">French2</Name> <!-- lcid="1036" is for French -->
<Name lcid="1040">Italian2</Name> <!-- lcid="1040" is for Italian -->
<Name lcid="1041">Japanese2</Name> <!-- lcid="1041" is for Japanese -->
<Name lcid="2052">Chinese2</Name> <!-- lcid="2052" is for Chinese -->
</Unit>
<!-- similarly define other units up to unit id = 199-->
</UserDefinedUnits> <!-- Root node end -->

The "Unit id" value should be given to XXX_Unit parameter in the function blocks.

Note
The XML is read-only once when WinCC runtime is activated. If any changes are done in the
XML later, you must deactivate, close, and activate the WinCC runtime again to reflect the
changes.

Using the unit of measure with controllers for the ConPerMon block
For controller blocks, the current unit of measure is output via output parameter
XX_UnitOut . If you use the ConPerMon block, you must switch this output parameter with
the corresponding input parameter XXX_Unit on the ConPerMon block.

Using the S7_unit attribute


If you set the xxx_Unit parameter to 0, the entry is displayed by the S7_Unit attribute in the
faceplate and in the block symbol.

Overview of the units of measure


The units of measure are listed in the following tables:
List of the most commonly used units of measure in accordance with IEC 61158

Note
Due to space constraints on the system, not all units referred to can be displayed in totality.
The display of the measurement units is left-aligned. If you want to abbreviate the unit of
measurement, use the function Customer-specific units.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


222 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Value Display Description


1000 K Kelvin
1001 °C Degrees Celsius
1002 °F Degrees Fahrenheit
1005 ° Degree
1006 ' Minute
1007 '' Second
1010 m Meter
1013 mm Millimeter
1018 ft Foot
1023 m2 Square meter
1038 L Liter
1041 hl Hectoliter
1054 s Second
1058 min Minute
1059 h Hour
1060 d Day
1061 m/s Meters per second
1077 Hz Hertz
1081 kHz Kilohertz
1082 1/s Per second
1083 1/min Per minute
1088 kg Kilogram
1092 t Metric ton
1100 g/cm 3
Grams per cubic centimeter
1105 g/L Grams per liter
1120 N Newton
1123 mN Millinewton
1130 Pa Pascal
1133 kPa Kilopascal
1137 bar Bar
1138 mbar Millibar
1149 mmH2O Millimeters of water1
1175 W·h Watt hour
1179 kW·h Kilowatt hour
1181 kcalth Kilocalories1
1190 kW Kilowatt
1209 A Ampere
1211 mA Milliampere
1221 A·h Ampere hour
1240 V Volt
1349 m /h 3
Cubic meters per hour
1353 L/h Liters per hour

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 223
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Value Display Description


1384 mol Mol
1422 pH pH value

List of all units of measure in accordance with IEC 61158

Value Display Description


1000 K Kelvin
1001 °C Degrees Celsius
1002 °F Degrees Fahrenheit
1003 °R Degree Rankine
1004 rad Radian
1005 ° Degree
1006 ' Minute
1007 '' Second
1008 gon Gon
1009 r Revolution
1010 m Meter
1011 km Kilometer
1012 cm Centimeter
1013 mm Millimeter
1014 μm Micrometer
1015 nm Nanometer
1016 pm Picometer
1017 Å Angstrom 2
1018 ft Foot
1019 in Inch
1020 yd Yard
1021 mile Mile
1022 nautical mile Nautical mile
1023 m 2
Square meter
1024 km2 Square kilometer
1025 cm 2
Square centimeter
1026 dm2 Square decimeter
1027 mm2 Square millimeter
1028 a Are
1029 ha Hectare
1030 in 2
Square inch
1031 ft2 Square foot
1032 yd 2
Square yard
1033 mile2 Square mile
1034 m 3
Cubic meter
1035 dm 3
Cubic decimeter

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


224 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Value Display Description


1036 cm3 Cubic centimeter
1037 mm3 Cubic millimeter
1038 L Liter
1039 cl Centiliter
1040 ml Milliliter
1041 hl Hectoliter
1042 in 3
Cubic inch
1043 ft 3
Cubic foot
1044 yd3 Cubic yard
1045 mile3 Cubic mile
1046 pint Pint
1047 quart Quart
1048 gal US gallon
1049 ImpGal Imperial gallon
1050 bushel Bushel
1051 bbl Barrel = 42 gallons
1052 bbl(liq) Liquid barrel = 31.5 gallons
1053 ft3 std. Standard cubic foot
1054 s Second
1055 ks Kilosecond
1056 ms Millisecond
1057 μs Microsecond
1058 min Minute
1059 h Hour
1060 d Day
1061 m/s Meters per second
1062 mm/s Millimeters per second
1063 m/h Meters per hour
1064 km/h Kilometers per hour
1065 knot Knot
1066 in/s Inches per second
1067 ft/s Feet per second
1068 yd/s Yards per second
1069 in/min Inches per minute
1070 ft/min Feet per minute
1071 yd/min Yards per minute
1072 in/h Inches per hour
1073 ft/h Feet per hour
1074 yd/h Yards per hour
1075 mi/h Miles per hour
1076 m/s 2
Meter/second squared
1077 Hz Hertz
1078 THz Terahertz

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 225
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Value Display Description


1079 GHz Gigahertz
1080 MHz Megahertz
1081 kHz Kilohertz
1082 1/s Per second
1083 1/min Per minute
1084 r/s Revolutions per second
1085 rpm Revolutions per minute
1086 rad/s Radians per second
1087 1/s2 Per second squared
1088 kg Kilogram
1089 g Gram
1090 mg Milligram
1091 Mg Megagram
1092 t Metric ton
1093 oz Ounce
1094 lb Pound
1095 STon US ton (short ton)
1096 LTon British ton (long ton)
1097 kg/m 3
Kilograms per cubic meter
1098 Mg/dm 3
Megagrams per cubic meter
1099 kg/dm3 Kilograms per cubic decimeter
1100 g/cm3 Grams per cubic centimeter
1101 g/m3 Grams per cubic meter
1102 t/m 3
Metric tons per cubic meter
1103 kg/L Kilogram per liter
1104 g/ml Grams per milliliter
1105 g/L Grams per liter
1106 lb/in3 Pounds per cubic inch
1107 lb/ft3 Pounds per cubic foot
1108 lb/gal Pounds per US gallon
1109 STon/yd 3
US tons per cubic yard
1110 °Twad Degree Twaddell
1111 °Baum (hv) Degree Baumé (heavy)
1112 °Baum (lt) Degree Baumé (light)
1113 °API Degrees API
1114 SGU Specific gravity units
1115 kg/m Kilograms per meter
1116 mg/m Milligrams per meter
1117 tex Tex
1118 kg·m2 Kilograms per square meter
1119 kg·m/s Kilograms per meter per second
1120 N Newton
1121 MN Meganewton

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


226 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Value Display Description


1122 kN Kilonewton
1123 mN Millinewton
1124 μN Micronewton
1125 kg·m2/s Kilograms per square meter per
second
1126 N·m Newton meter
1127 MN·m Meganewton meter
1128 kN·m Kilonewton meter
1129 mN·m Millinewton meter
1130 Pa Pascal
1131 GPa Gigapascal
1132 MPa Megapascal
1133 kPa Kilopascal
1134 mPa Millipascal
1135 μPa Micropascal
1136 hPa Hectopascal
1137 bar Bar
1138 mbar Millibar
1139 torr Torr
1140 atm Atmosphere
1141 psi Pounds per square inch
1142 psia Pounds per square inch (absolute)
1143 psig Pounds per square inch (gauge)
1144 g/cm 2
Grams per square centimeter
1145 kg/cm 2
Kilograms per square centimeter
1146 inH2O Inches of water
1147 inH2O (4°C) Inches of water at 4 degrees Cel‐
sius
1148 inH2O (68°F) Inches of water at 68 degrees Fah‐
renheit
1149 mmH2O Millimeters of water1
1150 mmH2O (4°C) Millimeters of water at 4 degrees
Celsius1
1151 mmH2O (68°F) Millimeters of water at 68 degrees
Fahrenheit1
1152 ftH2O Feet of water1
1153 ftH2O (4°C) Feet of water at 4 degrees Cel‐
sius1
1154 ftH2O (68°F) Feet of water at 68 degrees Fah‐
renheit1
1155 inHg Inches of mercury
1156 inHg (0°C) Inches of mercury at 0 degrees
Celsius
1157 mmHg Millimeters of mercury

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 227
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Value Display Description


1158 mmHg (0°C) Millimeters of mercury at 0 de‐
grees Celsius
1159 Pa·s Pascal second
1160 m2/s Square meters per second
1161 P Poise
1162 cP Centipoise
1163 St Stokes
1164 cSt Centistokes
1165 N/m Newtons per meter
1166 mN/m Millinewtons per meter
1167 J Joule
1168 EJ Exajoule
1169 PJ Petajoule
1170 TJ Terajoule
1171 GJ Gigajoule
1172 MJ Megajoule
1173 kJ Kilojoule
1174 mJ Millijoule
1175 W·h Watt hour
1176 TW·h Terawatt hour
1177 GW·h Gigawatt hour
1178 MW·h Megawatt hour
1179 kW·h Kilowatt hour
1180 calth Calorie (thermo chemical)1
1181 kcalth Kilocalorie (thermo chemical)1
1182 Mcalth Megacalorie (thermo chemical)1
1183 Btuth British thermal unit1
1184 datherm Decatherm
1185 ft·lbf Foot pound
1186 W Watt
1187 TW Terawatt
1188 GW Gigawatt
1189 MW Megawatt
1190 kW Kilowatt
1191 mW Milliwatt
1192 μW Microwatt
1193 nW Nanowatt
1194 pW Picowatt
1195 Mcalth/h Megacalorie per hour1
1196 MJ/h Megajoule per hour
1197 Btuth/h British thermal units per hour1
1198 hp Horsepower
1199 W/(m·K) Watts per meter kelvin

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


228 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Value Display Description


1200 W/(m2·K) Watts per (square meter kelvin)
1201 m ·K/W
2
Square meters kelvin per Watt
1202 J/K Joules per kelvin
1203 kJ/K Kilojoules per kelvin
1204 J/(kg·K) Joules per (kilogram kelvin)
1205 kJ/(kg·K) Kilojoules per (kilogram kelvin)
1206 J/kg Joules per kilogram
1207 MJ/kg Megajoules per kilogram
1208 kJ/kg Kilojoules per kilogramm
1209 A Ampere
1210 kA Kiloampere
1211 mA Milliampere
1212 μA Microampere
1213 nA Nanoampere
1214 pA Picoampere
1215 C Coulomb
1216 MC Megacoulomb
1217 kC Kilocoulomb
1218 μC Microcoulomb
1219 nC Nanocoulomb
1220 pC Picocoulomb
1221 A·h Ampere hour
1222 C/m3 Coulombs per cubic meter
1223 C/mm 3
Coulombs per cubic millimeter
1224 C/cm3 Coulombs per cubic centimeter
1225 kC/m 3
Kilocoulombs per cubic meter
1226 mC/m 3
Millicoulombs per cubic meter
1227 μC/m3 Microcoulombs per cubic meter
1228 C/m2 Coulombs per square meter
1229 C/mm2 Coulombs per square millimeter
1230 C/cm 2
Coulombs per square centimeter
1231 kC/m 2
Kilocoulombs per square meter
1232 mC/m2 Millicoulombs per square meter
1233 μC/m 2
Microcoulombs per square meter
1234 V/m Volts per meter
1235 MV/m Megavolts per meter
1236 kV/m Kilovolts per meter
1237 V/cm Volts per centimeter
1238 mV/m Millivolts per meter
1239 μV/m Microvolts per meter
1240 V Volt
1241 MV Megavolt
1242 kV Kilovolt

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 229
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Value Display Description


1243 mV Millivolt
1244 μV Microvolt
1245 F Farad
1246 mF Millifarad
1247 μF Microfarad
1248 nF Nanofarad
1249 pF Picofarad
1250 F/m Farad per meter
1251 μF/m Microfarad per meter
1252 nF/m Nanofarad per meter
1253 pF/m Picofarad per meter
1254 C·m Coulomb meter
1255 A/m2 Amperes per square meter
1256 MA/m2 Megaamperes per square meter
1257 A/cm 2
Amperes per square centimeter
1258 kA/m2 Kiloamperes per square meter
1259 A/m Amperes per meter
1260 kA/m Kiloamperes per meter
1261 A/cm Amperes per centimeter
1262 T Tesla
1263 mT Millitesla
1264 μT Microtesla
1265 nT Nanotesla
1266 Wb Weber
1267 mWb Milliweber
1268 Wb/m Webers per meter
1269 kWb/m Kilowebers per meter
1270 H Henry
1271 mH Millihenry
1272 μH Microhenry
1273 nH Nanohenry
1274 pH Picohenry
1275 H/m Henries per meter
1276 μH/m Microhenries per meter
1277 nH/m Nanohenries per meter
1278 A·m 2
Ampere square meters
1279 N·m2/A Newton meter squared per ampere
1280 Wb·m Weber meter
1281 Ω Ohm1
1282 GΩ Gigaohm1
1283 MΩ Megaohm1
1284 kΩ Kiloohm1
1285 mΩ Milliohm1

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


230 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Value Display Description


1286 μΩ Microohm1
1287 S Siemens
1288 kS Kilosiemens
1289 mS Millisiemens
1290 μS Microsiemens
1291 Ω·m Ohms times meters1
1292 GΩ·m Gigaohms times meters1
1293 MΩ·m Megaohms times meters1
1294 kΩ·m Kiloohms times meters1
1295 Ω·cm Ohms times centimeters1
1296 mΩ·m Milliohms times meters1
1297 μΩ·m Microohms times meters1
1298 nΩ·m Nanoohms times meters1
1299 S/m Siemens per meter
1300 MS/m Megasiemens per meter
1301 kS/m Kilosiemens per meter
1302 mS/cm Millisiemens per centimeter
1303 μS/mm Microsiemens per millimeter
1304 1/H Per henry
1305 sr Steradian
1306 W/sr Watts per steradian
1307 W/(sr·m ) 2
Watts per (steradian square meter)
1308 W/(m2) Watts per square meter
1309 lm Lumen
1310 lm·s Lumen second
1311 lm·h Lumen hour
1312 lm/m 2
Lumens per square meter
1313 lm/W Lumens per watt
1314 lx Lux
1315 lx·s Lux second
1316 cd Candela
1317 cd/m 2
Candela per square meter
1318 g/s Grams per second
1319 g/min Grams per minute
1320 g/h Grams per hour
1321 g/d Grams per day
1322 kg/s Kilograms per second
1323 kg/min Kilograms per minute
1324 kg/h Kilograms per hour
1325 kg/d Kilograms per day
1326 t/s Metric tons per second
1327 t/min Metric tons per minute
1328 t/h Metric tons per hour

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 231
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Value Display Description


1329 t/d Metric tons per day
1330 lb/s Pounds per second
1331 lb/min Pounds per minute
1332 lb/h Pounds per hour
1333 lb/d Pounds per day
1334 STon/s US tons per second
1335 STon/min US tons per minute
1336 STon/h US tons per hour
1337 STon/d US tons per day
1338 LTon/s British tons per second
1339 LTon/min British tons per minute
1340 LTon/h British tons per hour
1341 LTon/d British tons per day
1342 % Percent
1343 % sol/wt Percentage solids per weight unit
1344 % sol/vol Percentage solids per volume unit
1345 % stm qual Percentage steam quality
1346 °Plato Degree plato
1347 m /s
3
Cubic meters per second
1348 m /min
3
Cubic meters per minute
1349 m3/h Cubic meters per hour
1350 m /d
3
Cubic meters per day
1351 L/s Liters per second
1352 L/min Liters per minute
1353 L/h Liters per hour
1354 L/d Liters per day
1355 ML/d Megaliters per day
1356 ft3/s Cubic feet per second
1357 ft /m
3
Cubic feet per minute
1358 ft3/h Cubic feet per hour
1359 ft /d
3
Cubic feet per day
1360 ft /min std
3
Standard cubic feet per minute
1361 ft3/h std Standard cubic feet per hour
1362 gal/s US gallons per second
1363 gal/min US gallons per minute
1364 gal/h US gallons per hour
1365 gal/d US gallons per day
1366 Mgal/d Mega US gallons per day
1367 ImpGal/s Imperial gallons per second
1368 ImpGal/min Imperial gallons per minute
1369 ImpGal/h Imperial gallons per hour
1370 ImpGal/d Imperial gallons per day
1371 bbl/s Barrels per second

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


232 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Value Display Description


1372 bbl/min Barrels per minute
1373 bbl/h Barrels per hour
1374 bbl/d Barrels per day
1375 W/m2 Watts per square meter
1376 mW/m 2
Milliwatts per square meter
1377 μW/m2 Microwatts per square meter
1378 pW/m2 Picowatts per square meter
1379 Pa·s/m 3
Pascal seconds per cubic meter
1380 N·s/m Newton seconds per meter
1381 Pa·s/m Pascal seconds per meter
1382 B Bel
1383 dB Decibel
1384 mol Mol
1385 kmol Kilomole
1386 mmol Millimole
1387 μmol Micromole
1388 kg/mol Kilograms per mole
1389 g/mol Grams per mole
1390 m /mol
3
Cubic meters per mole
1391 dm /mol 3
Cubic decimeters per mole
1392 cm3/mol Cubic centimeters per mole
1393 L/mol Liters per mole
1394 J/mol Joules per mole
1395 kJ/mol Kilojoules per mole
1396 J/(mol·K) Joules per mole kelvin
1397 mol/m 3
Moles per cubic meter
1398 mol/dm 3
Moles per cubic decimeter
1399 mol/L Moles per liter
1400 mol/kg Moles per kilogram
1401 mmol/kg Millimoles per kilogram
1402 Bq Becquerel
1403 MBq Megabecquerel
1404 kBq Kilobecquerel
1405 Bq/kg Becquerels per kilogram
1406 kBq/kg Kilobecquerels per kilogram
1407 MBq/kg Megabecquerels per kilogram
1408 Gy Gray
1409 mGy Milligray
1410 rd Rad
1411 Sv Sievert
1412 mSv Millisievert
1413 rem Rem
1414 C/kg Coulombs per kilogram

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 233
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Value Display Description


1415 mC/kg Millicoulombs per kilogram
1416 R Röntgen
1417 1/Jm 3
Density of magnetic energy
1418 e/Vm3
1419 m3/C Cubic meters per coulomb
1420 V/K Volts per kelvin
1421 mV/K Millivolts per kelvin
1422 pH pH value
1423 ppm Parts per million
1424 ppb Parts per billion
1425 ppth Parts per trillion
1426 °Brix Degrees Brix
1427 °Ball Degrees Balling
1428 proof/vol Proof per volume
1429 proof/mass Proof per mass
1430 lb/ImpGal Pounds per Imperial gallon
1431 kcalth/s Kilocalories per second1
1432 kcalth/min Kilocalories per minute1
1433 kcalth/h Kilocalories per hour1
1434 kcalth/d Kilocalories per day1
1435 Mcalth/s Megacalories per second1
1436 Mcalth/min Megacalories per minute1
1437 Mcalth/d Megacalories per day1
1438 kJ/s Kilojoules per second
1439 kJ/min Kilojoules per minute
1440 kJ/h Kilojoule per hour
1441 kJ/d Kilojoules per day
1442 MJ/s Megajoules per second
1443 MJ/min Megajoules per minute
1444 MJ/d Megajoules per day
1445 Btuth/s British thermal units per second1
1446 Btuth/min British thermal units per minute1
1447 Btuth/d British thermal units per day1
1448 μgal/s Micro US gallons per second
1449 mgal/s Milli US gallons per second
1450 kgal/s Kilo US gallons per second
1451 Mgal/s Mega US gallons per second
1452 μgal/min Micro US gallons per minute
1453 mgal/min Milli US gallons per minute
1454 kgal/min Kilo US gallons per minute
1455 Mgal/min Mega US gallons per minute
1456 μgal/h Micro US gallons per hour
1457 mgal/h Milli US gallons per hour

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


234 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Value Display Description


1458 kgal/h Kilo US gallons per hour
1459 Mgal/h Mega US gallons per hour
1460 μgal/d Micro US gallons per day
1461 mgal/d Milli US gallons per day
1462 kgal/d Kilo US gallons per day
1463 μImpGal/s Micro Imperial gallons per second
1464 mImpGal/s Milli Imperial gallons per second
1465 kImpGal/s Kilo Imperial gallons per second
1466 MImpGal/s Mega Imperial gallons per second
1467 μImpGal/min Micro Imperial gallons per minute
1468 mImpGal/min Milli Imperial gallons per minute
1469 kImpGal/min Kilo Imperial gallons per minute
1470 MImpGal/min Mega Imperial gallons per minute
1471 μImpGal/h Micro Imperial gallons per hour
1472 mImpGal/h Milli Imperial gallons per hour
1473 kImpGal/h Kilo Imperial gallons per hour
1474 MImpGal/h Mega Imperial gallons per hour
1475 μImpgal/d Micro Imperial gallons per day
1476 mImpgal/d Milli Imperial gallons per day
1477 kImpgal/d Kilo Imperial gallons per day
1478 MImpgal/d Mega Imperial gallons per day
1479 μbbl/s Microbarrels per second
1480 mbbl/s Millibarrels per second
1481 kbbl/s Kilobarrels per second
1482 Mbbl/s Megabarrels per second
1483 μbbl/min Microbarrels per minute
1484 mbbl/min Millibarrels per minute
1485 kbbl/min Kilobarrels per minute
1486 Mbbl/min Megabarrels per minute
1487 μbbl/h Microbarrels per hour
1488 mbbl/h Millibarrels per hour
1489 kbbl/h Kilobarrels per hour
1490 Mbbl/h Megabarrels per hour
1491 μbbl/d Microbarrels per day
1492 mbbl/d Millibarrels per day
1493 kbbl/d Kilobarrels per day
1494 Mbbl/d Megabarrels per day
1495 μm /s
3
Cubic micrometers per second
1496 mm /s
3
Cubic millimeters per second
1497 km3/s Cubic kilometers per second
1498 Mm /s
3
Cubic megameters per second
1499 μm3/min Cubic micrometers per minute
1500 mm3/min Cubic millimeters per minute

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 235
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Value Display Description


1501 km3/min Cubic kilometers per minute
1502 mm3/min Cubic megameters per minute
1503 µm /h3
Cubic micrometers per minute
1504 mm3/h Cubic millimeters per minute
1505 km3/h Cubic kilometers per minute
1506 Mm3/h Cubic megameters per minute
1507 µm /d3
Cubic micrometers per day
1508 mm /d3
Cubic millimeters per day
1509 km3/d Cubic kilometers per day
1510 Mm /d3
Cubic megameters per day
1511 cm3/s Cubic centimeters per second
1512 cm /min
3
Cubic centimeters per minute
1513 cm3/h Cubic centimeters per hour
1514 cm /d3
Cubic centimeters per day
1515 kcalth/kg Kilocalories per kilogram1
1516 Btuth/lb British thermal units per pound1
1517 kL Kiloliter
1518 kL/min Kiloliters per minute
1519 kL/h Kiloliters per hour
1520 kL/d Kiloliters per day
1551 S/cm Siemens per centimeter
1552 µS/cm Microsiemens per centimeter
1553 mS/m Millisiemens per meter
1554 µS/m Microsiemens per meter
1555 MΩ · cm Megaohm centimeter1
1556 kΩ · cm Kiloohm centimeter1
1557 Weight% Weight percent
1558 mg/L Milligram per liter
1559 µg/L Microgram per liter
1560 %Sat -
1561 vpm -
1562 %vol Volume percent
1563 ml/min Milliliters per minute
1564 mg/dm 3
Milligrams per cubic centimeter
1565 mg/L Milligram per liter
1566 mg/m 3
Milligrams per cubic meter
1567 ct Carat (jewels) = 200.0·10-6 kg
1568 lb (tr) Pound (troy or apothecary) =
0.3732417216 kg
1569 oz (tr) Ounce (troy or apothecary) = 1/12
lb (tr)
1570 fl oz (U.S.) Ounce (U.S. fluid) = (1/128) gal
1571 cm3 Cubic centimeter = 10-6 m3

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


236 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Value Display Description


1572 af acre foot = 43560 ft3
1573 m normal
3
Cubic meter
1574 L normal Liter
1575 m3 std. Standard cubic meter
1576 L std. Standard liter
1577 ml/s Milliliters per second
1578 ml/h Milliliters per hour
1579 ml/d Milliliters per day
1580 af/s Acre foot per second
1581 af/min Acre foot per minute
1582 af/h Acre foot per hour
1583 af/d Acre foot per day
1584 fl oz (U.S.)/s Ounces per second
1585 fl oz (U.S.) /min Ounces per minute
1586 fl oz (U.S.)/h Ounces per hour
1587 fl oz (U.S.)/d Ounces per day
1588 m /s normal
3
Standard cubic meters per second
1589 m3/min normal Standard cubic meters per minute
1590 m3/h normal Standard cubic meters per hour
1591 m /d normal
3
Standard cubic meters per day
1592 L/s normal Standard liters per second
1593 L/min normal Standard liters per minute
1594 L/h normal Standard liters per hour
1595 L/d normal Standard liters per second
1596 m3/s std. Standard cubic meters per second
1597 m /min std.
3
Standard cubic meters per minute
1598 m /h std.
3
Standard cubic meters per hour
1599 m3/d std. Standard cubic meters per day
1600 L/s std. Standard liters per second
1601 L/min std. Standard liters per minute
1602 L/h std. Standard liters per hour
1603 L/d std. Standard liters per day
1604 ft3/s std. Standard cubic feet per second
1605 ft /d std.
3
Standard cubic feet per day
1606 oz/s Ounces per second
1607 oz/min Ounces per minute
1608 oz/h Ounces per hour
1609 oz/d Ounces per day
1610 Paa Pascal (absolute)
1611 Pag Pascal (gauge)
1612 GPaa Gigapasacal (absolute)
1613 GPag Gigapascal (gauge)
1614 MPaa Megapascal (absolute)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 237
Basics of APL
2.1 Functions of the blocks

Value Display Description


1615 MPag Megapascal (gauge)
1616 kPaa Kilopascal (absolute)
1617 kPag Kilopascal (gauge)
1618 mPaa Millipascal (absolute)
1619 mPag Millipascal (gauge)
1620 μPaa Micropascal (absolute)
1621 μPag Micropascal (gauge)
1622 hPaa Hectopascal (absolute)
1623 hPag Hectopascal (gauge)
1624 gf/cm a2

1625 gf/cm2g
1626 kgf/cm2a
1627 kgf/cm2g
1628 SD4°C Standard density at 4°C
1629 SD15°C Standard density at 15°C
1630 SD20°C Standard density at 20°C
1631 PS Metric horsepower
1632 ppt Parts per trillion = 1012
1633 hl/s Hectoliters per second
1634 hl/min Hectoliters per minute
1635 hl/h Hectoliters per hour
1636 hl/d Hectoliters per day
1637 bbl (liq)/s Barrels (US liquid) per second
1638 bbl (liq)/min Barrels (US liquid) per minute
1639 bbl (liq)/h Barrels (US liquid) per hour
1640 bbl (liq)/d Barrels (US liquid) per day
1641 bbl (fed) Barrel (U.S. federal) = 31 gallons
1642 bbl (fed)/s Barrels (US federal) per second
1643 bbl (fed)/min Barrels (US federal) per minute
1644 bbl (fed)/h Barrels (US federal) per hour
1645 bbl (fed)/d Barrels (US federal) per day
1998 Unknown unit To be used when the unit of meas‐
ure is not known during configura‐
tion
1999 Special Special units

1
A notation different to the PA profile must be used in order to represent this unit in conformity
with the system.
2
"m2" is used instead of "m3" in the Chinese and Japanese documentation.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


238 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.2 Functions of the block icons

2.2 Functions of the block icons

2.2.1 Block icon structure

Block icon structure


The new block icons are located in the template "@PCS7TypicalsAPLV8.pdl" and
"@TemplateAPLV8.PDL".
There are two types of block icons (V8.0), those with a display of the instance-specific name
and those without:

Block icon of MotL with instance-specific name

Block icon of PIDConL with instance-specific name

Block icon of MotL without instance-specific name The toolbar only shows the information
that is actually available.

Block icon of PIDConL without instance-specific name The toolbar only shows the infor‐
mation that is actually available.

The old block icons are located in the template "@PCS7TypicalsAPLV7.pdl" and
"@TemplateAPLV7.PDL".

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 239
Basics of APL
2.2 Functions of the block icons

There are two types of block icons (V7.1), those with a display of the instance-specific name
and those without:

Block icon of MotRevL with instance-specific name

Block icon of PIDConL with instance-specific name

Block icon of MotRevL without instance-specific name The toolbar only shows the infor‐
mation that is actually available.

Block icon of PIDConL without instance-specific name The toolbar only shows the infor‐
mation that is actually available.

You can select one of these block icons. See section Configuring the block icons (Page 246)
for more information.
A block icon has several display areas:
● CPU stop
● Instance-specific name
● Icon for the block
● Analog value display
● Status bar for the block status
NoteView documents
A subdirectory will be created inside GraCS folder with the name NoteView. All assigned MHT
files at the block icon level for NoteView should be placed inside this folder.
An engineer can configure up to 3 files at the block icon instance under the NoteView1,
NoteView2 and NoteView3 properties. A new section in the memo view appears and displays
the filenames.
The operator can select a file from combo box and open it using Open button in a separate
window.
The three new properties NoteView1, NoteView2 and NoteView3 under configuration are
available at the block icon instance for configuring files of format MHT to view in the NoteView
window.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


240 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.2 Functions of the block icons

While configuring the file at the block icon instance, complete name of the file along with
extension should be updated in the respective NoteView property available under the
configuration.

Note
1. Only three files can be configured at block instance.
2. File format must be only MHT.
3. Maximum file size should be 25 MB.
4. In case of Multi project all relevant files will be kept in the server project path.
(OS project Path >> GraCS >> NoteView >> (Files of format MHT))
5. If no files are configured at the block icon instance, both combo box and Open button will
be disabled i.e. grayed out.
6. Apart from MHT files, if other formats of files are configured, an error message as “Invalid
file format” is thrown in a message box, if an attempt is made to open that file.
7. Maximum allowed size limit of file is 25 MB, if file with size more than allowed limit is opened
in Noteview, an error is thrown as "File size exceeded".

Displaying CPU stop


With a CPU stop, boxes are unavailable and a yellow warning triangle is displayed in the group
display for blocks with messaging.

Instance-specific name
The name of the associated block is shown in the instance-specific name, for example for the
PIDConL block:

You can change this name in the object properties of the instance block.
There are block icons with or without display of the instance-specific name. Refer to the
individual block descriptions to learn about them.
You can reach the visible display for blocks without display of the instance-specific name in
two different ways:
● Displaying individual instance-specific names: Click on the block icon while holding down
the Shift key: The name remains visible as long as the process picture is displayed.
● Displaying all instance-specific names at once: All instance-specific names can be made
visible in a process picture at once by clicking a button. To do this, copy this button into the
process picture of the chart from the @TemplateAPLV8.PDL or insert this button in the
"button area" of WinCC. If you insert it into the button area, read the manual section "PCS
7 OS Process Control " > "Layout of the User Interface".
The instance-specific names are hidden once more by clicking the button again.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 241
Basics of APL
2.2 Functions of the block icons

Icon for the block


Block icons for technologic blocks have their own operable symbols (for example, for the
MotRevL block) and represent a status display of the block.

This symbol can be positioned at various locations, 0°, 90°, 180° and 270°. Refer to the
Configuring the block icons (Page 246) section for more on this. You can change the operating
mode of the block by right-clicking on the status display. Refer to the Operation via the block
icon (Page 248) section for more on this.

Note
Block icons for motors and valves are available in various mounting positions and forms of
representation. However, a general state icon is always displayed in the faceplates that does
not consider the mounting position and form of representation in the block icons.

Analog value display


For block icons with analog value displays (for example, for the PIDConL block), there are
basic settings that differ depending of the associated unit of measure:

Refer to the Configuring the block icons (Page 246) section for more on this.
These analog values can be controlled according to the Operator control permissions
(Page 265). See also the section Operation via the block icon (Page 248) for more on this.
As of V8.0 block icons, when the actual values are displayed with limit monitoring in the analog
value displays, the background and font colors for an alarm, warning or tolerance correspond
to the message colors.

Note
As of V8.0 block icons, when the actual values are displayed with limit monitoring in the analog
value displays, the background and font colors for an alarm, warning or tolerance, control
system fault or control system fault correspond to the message colors.
If the analoge value display shows *****, the display field is too small for the parameterized
format specification. In this case, adapt the format specification AnalogValueFormatx in the
block icon APL_BLOCK_ICON.

For specification of the format, refer to Format specification for the analog value display
(Page 256).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


242 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.2 Functions of the block icons

Status bar for the block status


The status bar of the block icon provides an overview of the overall status of the block (see
figure below).

The arrangement of icons in the following tables is prioritized from high to low.
The following elements can be displayed:

Alarms, warnings, tolerances, and messages


Refer to the Monitoring functions in the Advanced Process Library (Page 86) section for more
on this.

Icon Meaning
No messages are output.

A fault has occurred.

An alarm is triggered.

An alarm for the high alarm limit is triggered.

An alarm for the low alarm limit is triggered.

An warning is triggered.

A warning for the high warning limit is triggered.

A warning for the low warning limit is triggered.

A tolerance violation has occurred.

A tolerance violation for the high tolerance limit has been triggered.

A tolerance violation for the low tolerance limit has been triggered.

The block has an operator prompt.

There is a process status determination.

Note
The message classes Alarm, Warning and Tolerance are not valid for user-configured
message classes. Please take into consideration the validity of terms for user-configured
message classes (Page 41).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 243
Basics of APL
2.2 Functions of the block icons

Note
For user-configured message classes, the symbols for high/low alarm, warning and tolerance
limits are displayed only for limit violations which are triggered within the APL blocks with the
colors of the user-configured message classes.

Operating modes
Refer to the Overview of the modes (Page 70) section for more on this.

Icon Meaning
The block is in automatic mode.

The block is in the "On" operating mode.

The block is in manual mode.

A program is running.

The block is in local mode.

The block is in the "Out of service" operating mode.


In this operating mode, no other symbols are displayed and no values are shown in
the analog value display except for:
- Display for an active message in the memo view
- Display for the maintenance enable

Note
No symbol is displayed for the "On" operating mode (no green "O" displayed) if the block only
has the operating modes "On" and "Out of service".

Internal or external setpoint


Refer to the section Setpoint specification - internal/external (Page 130).

Icon Meaning
Setting the setpoint internally

External setpoint specification

SP/MV ramp active

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


244 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.2 Functions of the block icons

Signal status
Refer to the Forming and outputting signal status for blocks (Page 110) section for more on
this.

Icon Meaning
The block is in simulation.

Signal status is "Bad, device related".

Signal status is "Bad, process related".

Signal status is "Uncertain, device related".

Signal status is "Uncertain, process related".

A maintenance request is pending.

Block is released for maintenance

Tracking and forcing of values and bypasses


See sections Forcing operating modes (Page 41), Interlocks (Page 101) and Manual and
automatic mode for control blocks (Page 73).

Icon Meaning
At least one value has been forced

Value is tracked

There is a bypass of an interlock or a bypass condition of an upstream Intlock FB or


tag bypass is active.

Interlocks
Refer to the Interlocks (Page 101) section for more on this.

Icon Meaning
Block is not interlocked.

Block is interlocked.

Bypass protection.

Rapid stop is commanded.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 245
Basics of APL
2.2 Functions of the block icons

Memo display

Icon Meaning
A message is available in the memo view.

Customer-specific icons
In the block icons, the icons can be replaced with customer-specific icons. A subdirectory must
therefore be created in the OS project directory "GraCS" and the customer-specific icons must
be inserted there with the same name as before. The name of the subdirectory must be adapted
in the block icon in the "PictureDirectory" property ("Configurations" group). The icons in the
subdirectory are not changed by the OS project editor or a new version of APL faceplates.

Note
● The "PictureDirectory" property is an instance-specific property. This means that the
adaptations of block icons already configured in the process pictures are not changed by
an update of the block icons in the process picture.
● We recommend that you adapt this property in the process picture and not in the
"@PCS7TypicalsAPLVx.pdl" or "@TemplateAPLVx.PDL" pictures. The "@" pictures are
system pictures and are replaced by the new version of APL faceplates. Customer changes
will be lost.
● In the WinCC Graphics Designer, the PCS 7 "Export Objects" wizard can be used to
generate a list of adaptations of instance-specific properties in the block icons. The
"PictureDirectory" property can be changed in the exported list and collectively transferred
back into the block icons with the PCS 7 "Import Objects" wizard.
● It is possible to use several subdirectories. This can be useful to create different variants
of block icons in the process pictures.

See also
Motor protection function (Page 100)
Forming the group status for interlock information (Page 106)
User-configured message classes (Page 41)

2.2.2 Configuring the block icons

Configuring the block icons


There are two ways to configure your block icons:
● Automatically
● Manually

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


246 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.2 Functions of the block icons

The new block icons are located in the template "@PCS7TypicalsAPLV8.pdl" and
"@TemplateAPLV8.PDL".
The old block icons are located in the template "@PCS7TypicalsAPLV7.pdl" and
"@TemplateAPLV7.PDL".
If you still want to continue using the V7.1 block icons in the project, you need to delete the
V8.0 template or remove the "@" and deselect the update for the V8 template in the OS project
editor on the basic data tab.
The block icons V7.1 are to remain in status V7.1 and be set to care and maintenance. New
blocks are not to be integrated any longer.

Automatic configuration of block icons


There is a variety of block icons, which you can select for a block. You select a block icon by
entering the number of the block icon in the field "OCM possible" > "Create block icon" in the
object properties of the block instance:

2&0SRVVLEOH

2SHUDWLQJDQGPRQLWRULQJ

&UHDWHEORFNLFRQ

0(6UHOHYDQW

You can find the names (numerical entry) of the respective block icons in the description for
the blocks (Operator Control and Monitoring section).
If you do not enter a number for a block icon, the number 1 is always used for the block icon.
The template for automatically generated block icons is @PCS7TypicalsAPLV7.pdl/
@PCS7TypicalsAPLV8.pdl.

Additional information
● Manual Process Control System PCS 7; Engineering System

Manual configuration of block icons


You can configure block icons manually by copying them from the @TemplateAPLV7.PDL/
@TemplateAPLV8.PDL template and inserting them into plant pictures.
The connection to the process tag is established with the "Connect faceplate with process tag"
Wizard, see WinCC Information System, section "Making Process Pictures Dynamic" and
"Standard Dynamics".

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 247
Basics of APL
2.2 Functions of the block icons

You can find information on exporting/importing and updating these objects in the WinCC
Information System, section "Graphic Object Update Wizard". Use the
"TemplateControlAPL.cfg" configuration file for these wizards.

Note
The procedure for changing the tooltip text of the block icons is described in the APL Style
Guide. Otherwise, this property may not be changed.

2.2.3 Operation via the block icon

Operation via the block icon


The block icon can be used to operate elements directly if a relevant operator control
permission (OS_Perm) is available. This operator control permission can be configured in the
engineering system (ES).
The operation is performed by right-clicking on the element involved. The operable elements
in the block icon include:
● Switching the operating mode
● Internal and external setpoint specification
● Changing the process value, setpoint and manipulated variable
● Changing the operating state
The operation is then performed in the same way as in the faceplate. Refer to the section
Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) as well as Changing values
(Page 270).

2.2.4 Block icons for PID and FM controller

Block icons for PID and FM controller


A variety of block icons are available with the following functions:
● Process tag type
● Limits (high/low)
● Violation of alarm, warning, and tolerance limits (tolerance limits not with PIDConS) as well
as control system faults
● Operating modes
● Internal and external setpoint specification
● Signal status, release for maintenance
● Memo display

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


248 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.2 Functions of the block icons

● Process value (black, with and without decimal places, with and without color change at
limit violations)
● Setpoint (blue, with decimal places)
● Feedback value (red, with decimal points), not available for types 3 and 4
With FmCont and FmTemp as a step controller without feedback, there is no feedback value
● only PIDStepL: Position feedback value (green, with decimal points), not available for
types 3 and 4
● Interlock without reset (only for PIDConR and PIDConL)

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV8.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in the Special features


CFC
1

5 Block icon in the full display

6 Block icon in the full display

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV7.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon Special features


in CFC
1 Block icon in the full display

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 249
Basics of APL
2.2 Functions of the block icons

Icons Selection of the block icon Special features


in CFC
3

- Block icon in "Out of service"


mode (example with type 1 block
icon)

Special case for PIDStepL:


- In the case of the PIDStepL
block only, the green value
shows the position feedback (on‐
ly visible if WithRbk = 1 has
been assigned parameters).
With operation by means of the
block icon, however, the manip‐
ulated variable is operated.

Additional information on the block icon and the control options in the block icon is available
in the following sections:
● Configuring the block icons (Page 246)
● Block icon structure (Page 239)
● Operation via the block icon (Page 248)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


250 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.2 Functions of the block icons

2.2.5 Block icon for interlock blocks

Properties of the block icon for interlock blocks Intlk02, Intlk04, Intlk08, Intlk16
A variety of block icons are available with the following functions:
● Signal status
● Memo display
● Output signal

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV8.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Block icon for


1 Intlk02

1 Intlk04
1 Intlk08
1 Intlk16
2 Intlk02
2 Intlk04
2 Intlk08
2 Intlk16

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV7.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Block icon for


1 Intlk02

1 Intlk04

1 Intlk08

1 Intlk16

2 Intlk02

2 Intlk04

2 Intlk08

2 Intlk16

3 Intlk02

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 251
Basics of APL
2.2 Functions of the block icons

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Block icon for


3 Intlk04

3 Intlk08

3 Intlk16

Block icons (mini) without display of instance-specific names


These icons only show the output signal. They take the form of a small rectangle.

Display of the output signal


The display can show the following states for the output signal (priority from high to low):
● Gray: No inputs interconnected at the interlock block, the block is not used
● Blue: The output signal is 1, at least one input signal is bypassed. There is no gray state.
● Yellow: The signal status is 16#60; the output signal is simulated. There are no gray and
blue states.
● Red: The output signal is 0; there is an interlock. There are no gray, blue, and yellow states.
● Green: The output signal is 1; the block is in the good state. There are no gray, blue, yellow,
and red states.
Additional information on the block icon is available in the following chapters:
● Configuring the block icons (Page 246)
● Block icon structure (Page 239)
● Operation via the block icon (Page 248)

2.2.6 Block icons for SFC

Block icons for SFC


A variety of SFC block icons are available with the following functions:
● Alarm indicator
● Current active mode indicator ("Manual" or "Automatic" mode)
● Operator request icon
● Indicator for SFC operating status

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


252 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.2 Functions of the block icons

The block icons from template @PCS7TypicalsAPLV8.pdl:

Block icons Type 2 Type 3


SFC-Type

SFC-Plan

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 253
Basics of APL
2.2 Functions of the block icons

The following icons are dispayed in the SFC block icon:


1. Mode indicators:

Icon Bit number Tag name Description


7 .SFC_STATE The block is in "Automatic" mode.

7 .SFC_STATE The block is in "Manual" mode.

2. Status indicators:

Icon Bit number Tag name Description


0 1 2 3
0 0 0 0 .SFC_STATE IDLE

0 0 0 1 .SFC_STATE RUN

0 0 1 0 .SFC_STATE COMPLETED

0 0 1 1 .SFC_STATE HELD

0 1 0 0 .SFC_STATE ABORTED

0 1 0 1 .SFC_STATE STARTING

0 1 1 0 .SFC_STATE COMPLETING

0 1 1 1 .SFC_STATE ERROR_COMPLETING

1 0 0 0 .SFC_STATE HOLDING

1 0 0 1 .SFC_STATE RESUMING

1 0 1 0 .SFC_STATE ERROR

1 0 1 1 .SFC_STATE HELD_ERROR

1 1 0 0 .SFC_STATE RESU_ERROR

1 1 0 1 .SFC_STATE ABORTING

1 1 1 0 .SFC_STATE STOPPING

1 1 1 1 .SFC_STATE STOPPED

3. Acquired status indicators (for SFC type only):

Icon Bit number Tag name Description


14 .VSTATUS EM-SFC is acquired by a superordina‐
ted equipment phase (EPH)

15 .VSTATUS Acquiring of at least one subordinated


equipment module (EM) failed

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


254 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.2 Functions of the block icons

See also
Block icon structure (Page 239)
Configuring the block icons (Page 246)
Operation via the block icon (Page 248)

2.2.7 Adding block icons to static picture components

Static picture component for the block icons


The block icons for drives and valves contain no static picture components. However, you can
add static picture components to the block icons by copying them from the
@TemplateAPLV8.PDL/@TemplateAPLV7.PDL template and placing them over the block
icons.
The following static picture components are available:
● Static picture components for motor blocks:

● Static picture components for valve blocks:

Note
The static picture components for the valves are visible here above the valve icon.

Note that all the block icons of the APL are located on layer 0 of the process picture. Layer 1
is intended for the static picture component. This ensures that the static picture component is
always over the block icon. If you have changed this layer of the block icon, the static picture
component should always be placed in a higher layer.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 255
Basics of APL
2.2 Functions of the block icons

2.2.8 Format specification for the analog value display


The format specification for the analog value display can parameterize centrally in the block
icon at the attribute Configurations > AnalogValueFormat1...AnalogValueFormat5. If the
attribute is empty, the format specification will be taken directly from the faceplate PDL file.
The parameterization in the block icon takes effect in the standard view, limit view, and the
block icon. The following table shows the analog values for which format specification can be
parametrized in the block icon:

Blocks AnalogValue‐ AnalogValue‐ AnalogValue‐ AnalogValue‐ AnalogValue‐


Format1 Format2 Format3 Format4 Format5

Standard view, Standard view, Standard view, Standard view Limit view for
Limit view Limit view Limit view motors
MotL UserAna1 UserAna2 AV values
MotRevL UserAna1 UserAna2 AV values
MotSpdL UserAna1 UserAna2 AV values
MotSpdCL Rbk values SP values UserAna1 UserAna2 AV values
ER values
VlvL UserAna1 UserAna2 -
VlvMotL UserAna1 UserAna2 AV values
VlvPosL Rbk values UserAna1 UserAna2 AV values
MV value
VlvAnL Rbk values UserAna1 UserAna2 -
MV value
Vlv2WayL UserAna1 UserAna2 -
DoseL PV values SP values UserAna1 UserAna2 -
MonAnL PV values UserAna1 UserAna2 -
MonAnS PV values -
OpAnL PV values SP values -
OpAnS PV values SP values -
PIDConL PV values SP values MV values -
Rbk values
PIDConS PV values SP values MV values -
Rbk values
PIDConR PV values SP values MV values -
Rbk values
PIDStepL PV values SP values MV values -
Rbk values

Blocks AnalogValueFormat1...An‐ AnalogValueFormat5...An‐ AnalogValueFormat9


alogValueFormat4 alogValueFormat8
ModPreCon CV1...CV4, SP1...SP4 val‐ MV5...MV8 values DV values
ues

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


256 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.2 Functions of the block icons

Blocks AnalogValueFormat1...An‐ AnalogValueFor‐ AnalogValueFor‐


alogValueFormat10 mat11...AnalogValueFor‐ mat21...AnalogValueFor‐
mat20 mat24
MPC10x10 CV1...CV10, SP1...SP10 MV1...MV10 values DV1...DV5 values
values

Note
If the analoge value display shows *****, the display field is too small for the parameterized
format specification. In this case, adapt the format specification AnalogValueFormatx in the
block icon APL_BLOCK_ICON.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 257
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

2.3 Functions of the faceplates

2.3.1 Fast Operation for PID Controllers

Fast Operation for PID Controllers

The concerned blocks are:


● PIDConL
● PIDStepL
● PIDConR

Enabling Fast Operation


When internal tag "@APLFastOperationEnable" is set to 1, the above mini faceplate can be
opened from the block icon. You can right-click on the mode and the manipulated variable
fields on block icon will open this faceplate.
1. Changing modes
Only two modes - automatic and manual are available.You can click on the respective
buttons to change the mode.
2. Changing manipulated variable
Manipulated variable can be changed by either entering the value directly through slider or
by direct operation buttons. Both 2 and 3 step operation are available when changing
manipulated variable.
3. Pin
Faceplate is always pinned by default. Pin button is not operable and therefore faceplate
can not be unpinned.

2.3.2 Structure of the faceplate

General functions of the faceplates


This section provides general information that applies to all faceplates.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


258 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Recommended screen resolution


The faceplates are shown in full on the screen with a resolution of 1280 x 1024. The full-screen
mode (press the F11 key) must also be activated on the Web client.

Scaling the faceplates


You can scale the faceplates from 50% to 200%. The value to scale is given in the internal
variable "@APLFaceplateScaleFactor" which is of type unsigned 32-bit value. The default
value of the scale is 100. You can scale the faceplates from 101% to 200% by providing a
value in the range of 101 to 200 in the internal variable. Similarly, you can scale down the
faceplates from 50% to 99% by providing a value in the range of 50 to 99. The reference for
calculation is default size of the faceplates which is 100%. This means if the value given is
150, the faceplates will be scaled to 150% of the default size. Similarly, if the value given is
90, the faceplate will be scaled down to 90% of the default size.
The faceplates can also be scaled up or down using the following buttons in a process picture.
These buttons are contained in @TemplateAPLV8.PDL and should be configured for both OS-
server and OS-client.

Button Name Description


BtnIncreaseZoom Increase the zoom factor by 5%

BtnDecreaseZoom Decrease the zoom factor by 5%

BtnResetZoom Reset the zoom factor to 100%

ZoomValue Displays the current Zoom value

Note
You must reopen the faceplate after changing the scale value. Already opened faceplate will
not be scaled if the scale value is changed.

Displaying CPU stop


With a CPU stop, boxes are unavailable or hidden and a yellow warning triangle is displayed
in the group display for blocks with messaging. No operations are possible.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 259
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Opening the faceplate


Click on the block icon in WinCC to open the faceplate with the standard view; in this example
this is the standard view of PIDConL:

Note
Some of the illustrations of the faceplate views and block icons in the help for the PCS 7
Advanced Process Library are examples or offline representations. The representations on
runtime may vary.

The views differ depending on the block functions. All blocks that have faceplates provide a
status bar where you can see the most important information relating to the block status. There
are additional functions available that are described in the next sections.

Note
Display elements of block inputs with 16#FF as their status default, are only shown when their
block inputs are interconnected (status ≠ FF). Exception: The values for Gain, TI and TD are
always displayed for controller blocks.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


260 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Displays and operator controls

  

         


The faceplate provides the following display and operator controls:


(1) Group display
(2) Lock alarms
(3) Suppress messages / alarm delays with the icon
(4) Acknowledge alarms
(5) Worst signal status
(6) Batch display
(7) At least one delay time effective at the block
(8) Maintenance request and release
(9) Memo display
(10) Open views of the block
(11) Back to block icon
(12) Pin faceplate
(13) Instance name of the block
(14) Help button

(1) Group display


The group display shows the information that is transferred from ALARM_8P of the block
instance to WinCC.
● Alarms
● Warnings
● Tolerances
● Faults
● Operator prompts
● Process messages

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 261
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Note
The message classes Alarm, Warning and Tolerance are not valid for user-configured
message classes. For user-configured message classes, message types depend on the
project-specific setting. Please take into consideration the validity of terms for user-configured
message classes (Page 41).

(2) Lock/unlock alarms


You can use this button to lock or unlock block alarms.
The alarms are displayed again in the group view when you unlock the block's alarms. The
block instance then resumes sending new alarms. Alarms generated in the locked phase are
displayed when you enable the alarm function.
The operator authorization level for this button is set in the internal variable
@LockMessageAuthLevel. This variable is set by the OS project editor.
For reasons of optimization, the operator authorization level set in @LockMessageAuthLevel
also has to exist at an OperationLevelx of the block icon of the process tag (for example higher
process control). Otherwise, operator control of the button "Disable messages" is not possible.
You can hide this button from specific users / user groups using the permissions in PCS 7-OS.
Refer to the PCS 7-OS help system.

Note
Since as of V8.1 the disabling of block alarms must be confirmed via the PCS 7 system dialog,
the operator can also enter a reason for the disabling in this dialog.
The inputs are always confirmed with "OK", even in 2 step operation.

(3) Suppress messages


Message suppression indicates whether or not the "Suppress process messages" function in
the AS block is activated with the MsgLock parameter. If message suppression is activated,
all messages in this block instance – except for process control messages – are suppressed.

(4) Acknowledge alarms


You can acknowledge all alarms from the block instance using this button.
You can hide this button from specific users / user groups using the permissions in PCS 7-OS.
Refer to the Process Control System PCS 7; OS Process Control documentation for more on
this.

(5) Display for worst signal status


This display shows the worst signal status currently present. You will find more detailed
information in section Forming and outputting signal status for blocks (Page 110).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


262 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(6) Batch display


The batch display shows whether or not the block instance is in use by SIMATIC BATCH.
You will find more detailed information in section SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

(7) At least one delay time effective at the block

This display shows you the active delay time. You will find more detailed information in section Display of delay
times (Page 267).
The "dead band" function is temporarily deactivated.

(8) Maintenance request and release


This display shows you if a maintenance request or release has been made for this block.
You will find more detailed information in section Release for maintenance (Page 65).

(9) Memo display


This display shows you if a message has been left in the memo view for you. You will find more
detailed information in section Memo view (Page 315).

(10) Open views of a block


You can use this field to open the various views of a block. Refer to the block description to
learn of the available views. Left clicking shows the view in the same window. Right clicking
opens a new window.
You can select from the following typical views here:

Icon Identifier
Standard view

Message view

Limit view (several limit views within a block are possible)

Trend view

Ramp view

Parameter view (several parameter views within a block are possible)

Preview

Memo view

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 263
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Icon Identifier
Batch view

Setpoint view

Parameter view 1 (continues to parameter view 4, see line below)

Parameter view 4

Quantity view

Flow view

Views (additional views within a block are possible)

Note
The buttons are unavailable when views cannot be selected.

(11) Back to block icon


Use this button to return to the block icon in the process image of the corresponding faceplate.
You can use this function, for example, when you have pinned a block (12) and the process
picture has changed in the meantime.

(12) Pin faceplate


You can pin the faceplate on top of the user interface using this button. This allows you to
change to another picture or area without closing the faceplate.

Note
You can learn about additional operator controls in the descriptions of the individual blocks.

(13) Instance name of the block


This area displays the instance specific name of the block.

(14) Help button


Click this button to open the APL Operator Guide online help of the corresponding view of the
faceplate.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


264 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

2.3.3 Operator control permissions

Operator control permissions for blocks


The following conditions have an effect on operator control permissions:
● User management in the PCS 7 OS
● Local operating permission using the OpStations block
● Dependencies on operating modes in blocks
● Permissions via parameter assignment / interconnection of blocks
● Permissions via the OS_Perm input parameter at the block itself

User management in the PCS 7 OS


The following operator authorization levels from user management are used in the APL:
● Process control (for example, manual/automatic mode switchover, changing setpoints and
manipulated variables).
With this operator control permission, operations can be performed in the standard view of
all blocks and input can be made in the ramp and memo views. The "Out of service"
operating mode cannot be used with process controlling.
● Higher process controls (for example, changing limits, controller parameters and monitoring
times).
With this operator control permission, all operations in all views of all blocks are possible,
including the operations for "Out of service" operating mode. Exception: The operations
listed under "Highest process controlling".
● Highest process controls (simulate process values and release process tag for
maintenance).
With this operator control permission, simulation can be switched on and off in the
parameter view and the process tag for maintenance work can be released.
● Extended operation 1
Free project-specific operator authorization
● Extended operation 2
Free project-specific operator authorization

Note
Exceptions to the uses described above are listed in the descriptions of the individual views.

Each operation is assigned with an operator authorization level in the faceplates. This fixed
assignment can be changed for each instance at the "operator authorization level" property of
an I/O in the AS block (for example, SP_Int with PIDConL). The following assignment applies:

Operator authorization level in the user manage‐ Value "Operator authorization level" property
ment
Process controls 1
Higher process controls 2

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 265
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Operator authorization level in the user manage‐ Value "Operator authorization level" property
ment
Highest process controls 3
Extended operation 1 4
Extended operation 2 5

Note
● The free three assignments in the upper table can be changed in the block icon at the
properties "OperationLevel1_backup", "OperationLevel2_backup" and
"OperationLevel3_backup". Any operator authorization level from the user management
can be assigned the values 1 to 3. This type of instance-specific configuration is still
available only for reasons of downward compatibility and should no longer be used in new
projects.
● The controls for the message system (e.g. acknowledge messages) and trend display (e.g.
export) are fixed across the system and cannot be changed via the AS block.
The "Lock messages" control can be changed system-wide via the internal variable
"@LockMessageAuthLevel" with the value of the operator authorization level from the
user management (for example, value "6" for "Higher process controls").

Local operating permission using the OpStations block


Local operating permission is an upstream operator control permission which is determined
before the operator control permissions for user management and the release of the block,
and is realized via the OpStations (Page 423) block.
If local operating permission is missing, operation of a block instance on an OS is usually
blocked. Otherwise, when local operating permission is allowed, the operator control
permission is normally determined through user management and the block.
Local operating permission can be set for each specific instance; in other words, block
instances can be enabled or disabled for use on an operator station independently of one
another.
You can find additional information for the use of local operating permission in the section
Description of OpStations (Page 423).

Dependencies on operating modes in blocks


You can execute various functions depending on the block mode. These permissions are
stored in the block algorithm and are determined dynamically in online mode.

Permissions via parameter assignment / interconnection of blocks


The block is either controlled by the operator or by the controller, depending on parameter
settings or on the interconnection. An example for this is the switchover from manual to
automatic mode by a higher-level controller or by the operator. These permissions are stored
in the block algorithm and are determined dynamically in online mode.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


266 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Permissions via the OS_Perm input parameter at the block itself


Controllable blocks have the OS_Perm input parameter which allows you to implement
individual operator control strategies by setting the operator control permissions. A pressure
relief valve, for example, can only be opened by the master control system. The operator may
only close the valve. These authorizations are defined during configuration. These operator
control permissions are displayed in the preview view of the faceplate. For information about
setting the individual operator control permissions (OS_Perm) refer to the description of the
functions of the individual blocks.
The relevant operator controls are enabled if the operator has suitable permissions. The block
algorithm processes the input data.

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

See also
Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162)

2.3.4 Display of delay times

Display of delay times


As soon as the immediate command output is delayed due to an active delay time at the "Large"
blocks of the "Drives" family, this fact is signaled by a bit in the status word and a display in
the faceplate.
These times include:
● Pre-warning time
● On/Off delays
● Restart inhibit

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 267
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

2.3.5 Switching operating states and operating modes

Requirements
You can change the operating state, operating mode and other parameters if needed in
faceplates if you have the corresponding operator control permission (OS_Perm). This operator
control permission can be configured in the engineering system (ES).

  

(1) The mouse cursor changes when you place it over the following button:

The mouse pointer now looks as follows:

When you click on the button with the mouse pointer, the bottom of the faceplate expands.
You now see the field for changing the operating mode, for example.
(2) Field for changing the operating mode, operating state etc. This example describes
changing the operating mode.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


268 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

If the indicators for the operating state is currently located in this field and you have configured
text for specific instances, this text is also shown. You can find more information about this in
the section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218).
(3) The text on this button is gray. You cannot select this operating mode due to the following
reasons:
● This operator control permission for this operating mode cannot be configured in the
engineering system (ES).
or
● The operating mode is already selected at this time.
or
● Due to the technology, you cannot switch from the operating mode currently set and the
desired operating mode.
(4) The text on this button is black. You can switch to this operating mode.

How to change the operating mode (using the PIDConL block in standard view as an example)
1. Click one of the selectable buttons in the operating mode field.
2. Confirm your selection by clicking "OK".
3. If you do not want to apply your selection, click "Cancel".
After clicking the "OK" or "Cancel" button, the faceplate is reduced again to its original form.

(5) Multiple operation


If the operating window is not to close after the confirmation of a command, it can be "attached".
The following button is located below the operating window for this purpose:

Operating window is closed after the value is applied


Operating window remains open after the value is applied

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 269
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

2.3.6 Changing values

Requirements
You can change the values in faceplates and in the block icons if you have the corresponding
operator authorization (OS_Perm). This operator permission can be configured in the
engineering system (ES). The following example shows how values are changed via the
faceplate.

 

(1) The background color of the input box is white. You can change the value. The mouse
pointer changes when you place it over the input box:

(2) The background color of the input box is gray. You cannot change the value.
(3) If you click on the input box, the bottom of the faceplate expands. You now see the field
for changing values.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


270 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

How to change values in faceplates


You have three options for changing values:
● "Direct control": Click on a button such as "2.5" in the box (6). The value is immediately
changed and applied. It is no longer necessary to confirm this value.
● Changing values using the slide control (5): move the slide control until the desired value
is shown in the box. Then confirm the value using the Enter key or by clicking "OK". Read
the section "Setting the multiple step operation".
● Change the values in the input box (4): Click the input box and enter the new value. If the
new values are outside the limits, they are rejected and the old values are retained. Then
confirm the value using the Enter key and clicking "OK". Read the section "Setting the
multiple step operation".

Setting the multiple step operation


You can use the internal @APLCommandExecutionSteps tag in the Tag Management of the
WinCC Explorer to specify if values are to be changed in two or three steps.
Follow the steps outlined below:
1. Double-click on the internal @APLCommandExecutionSteps tag
2. Change the start value to 2 or 3 in the Limits/Reporting tab.
Start value = 2: It is no longer necessary to confirm the value in the faceplate by clicking
"OK"; values are applied immediately.
Start value = 3: Each value change in the faceplate (with the exception of those for direct
control) needs to be confirmed with "OK".

Changing the values for "Direct control"


Specify the percentage values for the two inner keys for direct control with the
DirectOperationValue property at the block icon. The outer two keys are automatically
determined with DirectOperationValue times the factor 5.
If DirectOperationValue is not an integer but the values in the faceplate are integers, then
DirectOperationValue is rounded up to the next integer.
If the rounded value is 0, 1 is used for DirectOperationValue.
The default value for DirectOperationValue is 0.5. With integer format, the "+/-1%" results
for the inner keys and "+/-5%" for the outer keys.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 271
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(7) Multiple operation


If the operating window is not to close after the confirmation of a command, it can be "pinned".
The following button is located below the operating window for this purpose:

Operating window unpinned.


When the value of a parameter is set using the "Direct control" button, the value is
applied to the parameter and the "Cancel" button is disabled. Click "OK" to close the
operating window.
Operating window pinned.
When the value of a parameter is applied using the "Direct control" button, the value
is applied to the parameter and the "OK" button is disabled. Click "Cancel" to close the
operating window.

(8) Suppress messages


You can enable / disable messages by setting the check mark.

2.3.7 FM controllers standard view (analog)

Standard view (analog) of FM controllers












Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


272 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(1) Display and switch the operating mode


This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
● Manual mode (Page 73)
● Automatic mode (Page 73)
● Program mode for controllers (Page 79)
● Out of service (Page 72)
Refer to chapter Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) for information
on switching the operating mode.

(2) Display and switch the setpoint specification


This area shows how to specify the setpoint. The setpoint can be specified as follows:
● By the application ("External", CFC/SFC)
● By the user directly in the faceplate ("Internal").
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) chapter for
information on switching the setpoint specification.
For more information on the setpoint specification, refer to the Setpoint specification - internal/
external (Page 130) chapter.
If text is configure for these commands, it is displayed as additional text and as button labels
for command selection. You can find more information about this in chapter Labeling of buttons
and text (Page 218)

(3) High and low scale range for the process value
These values provide information on the display range (PV_OpScale) for the bar graph of the
process value. The scale range is defined in the Engineering System.

(4) Display of the process value including signal status


This area provides information on the current process value (PV) with the corresponding signal
status.

(5) Display and change the setpoint including signal status


This area provides information on the current setpoint (SP) with the corresponding signal status.
Refer to the Changing values (Page 270) chapter for information on changing the setpoint.
The setpoint specification (2) also needs to be set to "Internal" for this block.

(6) High and low scale range for the setpoint


This area is already set and cannot be changed.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 273
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(7) Display and change the manipulated variable including signal status
This area shows the current "Manipulated variable" (MV) with the corresponding signal status.
Refer to chapter Changing values (Page 270) for information on changing the manipulated
variable. You can only make a change in manual mode.

(8) Display of the position feedback including signal status


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
This area provides information on the current readback value of the manipulated variable with
the corresponding signal status. This display is only available when the readback value in the
box is interconnected to the Rbk input parameter.

(9) Bar graph for the "Manipulated variable"


This area shows the current "Manipulated variable" in the form of a bar graph (MV_OpScale).
The visible area in the bar graph depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).

(10) Bar graph for position feedback


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
This area shows the current position feedback in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in
the bar graph depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).

(11) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of the ConPerMon block
Use this navigation button to reach the standard view of the ConPerMon block. The visibility
of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).
Refer also to chapter Opening additional faceplates (Page 217) for more on this.

(12) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
Use this navigation button to reach the standard view of a block configured in the Engineering
System. The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the Engineering
System (ES).
Refer also to chapter Opening additional faceplates (Page 217) for more on this.

(13) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Maintenance"
Additional information on this is available in chapter Release for maintenance (Page 65)
Display area for block states.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


274 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(14) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Simulation"
You can find additional information on this in chapter Simulating signals (Page 59).

(15) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Invalid signal"

(16) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block (from high to low
according to priority):
● "Fuzzy Optim." (FmCont only)
● "Tracking FB"
● "Tracking FM"
● "Safety mode FM"
● "Fuzzy control" (FmCont only)

(17) Limit display


These colored triangles indicate the configured limits in the respective bar graph:
● Red: Alarm
● Yellow: Warning
● Blue: Tolerance
Note
The symbols displayed are not valid for user-configured message classes. Please take into
consideration the validity of terms for User-configured message classes (Page 41).

(18) Bar graph for the "Process value"


This area shows the current "Process value" in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the
bar graph depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).

(19) Bar graph for the "Setpoint"


This area shows the current "Setpoint" in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the bar
graph depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 275
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(20) Display of external setpoint


This display [E] is only visible when you have selected "Internal" setpoint specification. It shows
the external setpoint that would apply if you were to change the setpoint specification to
"external".

(21) Display for the target setpoint of the setpoint ramp


This display [R] shows the target setpoint and is only visible if you have enabled ramp
generation in the Ramp view (Page 311).

(22) Limit display for the setpoint


These triangles show the SP_HiLim and SP_LoLim setpoint limits configured in the ES.

2.3.8 FM controllers standard view (pulse controller)

Standard view (pulse) of FM controllers






 
 

 
 




 


 
 

(1) Display and switch the operating mode


This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
● Manual mode (Page 73)
● Automatic mode (Page 73)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


276 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

● Program mode for controllers (Page 79)


● Out of service (Page 72)
Refer to chapter Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) for information
on switching the operating mode.

(2) Display and switch the setpoint specification


This area shows how to specify the setpoint. The setpoint can be specified as follows:
● By the application ("External", CFC/SFC)
● By the user directly in the faceplate ("Internal").
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) chapter for
information on switching the setpoint specification.
For more information on the setpoint specification, refer to the Setpoint specification - internal/
external (Page 130) chapter.

(3) High and low scale range for the process value
These values provide information on the display range (PV_OpScale) for the bar graph of the
process value. The scale range is defined in the Engineering System.

(4) Display of the process value including signal status


This area provides information on the current process value (PV) with the corresponding signal
status.

(5) Display and change the setpoint including signal status


This area provides information on the current setpoint (SP) with the corresponding signal status.
Refer to the Changing values (Page 270) chapter for information on changing the setpoint.
The setpoint specification (2) also needs to be set to "Internal" for this block.

(6) High and low scale range for the setpoint


This area is already set and cannot be changed.

(7) Display and change the manipulated variable including signal status
This area shows the current "Manipulated variable" (MV) with the corresponding signal status.
Refer to chapter Changing values (Page 270) for information on changing the manipulated
variable. You can only make a change in manual mode.

(8) Display of the position feedback including signal status


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is interconnected.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 277
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

This area shows the current feedback of the manipulated variable with the corresponding signal
status. This display is only available when the readback value in the box is interconnected to
the Rbk input parameter.

(9) Bar graph for the "Manipulated variable"


This area shows the current "Manipulated variable" in the form of a bar graph (MV_OpScale).
The visible area in the bar graph depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).

(10) Bar graph for position feedback


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is interconnected.
This area shows the current position feedback in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in
the bar graph depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).

(11) Button for switching to the standard view of the ConPerMon block
Use this button for the standard view of the ConPerMon block. The visibility of this button
depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).
Refer also to chapter Opening additional faceplates (Page 217) for more on this.

(12) Button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate


Use this button for the standard view of a block configured in the engineering system. The
visibility of this button depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).
Refer also to chapter Opening additional faceplates (Page 217) for more on this.

(13) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Maintenance"
Additional information on this is available in chapter Release for maintenance (Page 65)
Display area for block states.

(14) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Simulation"
You can find additional information on this in section Simulating signals (Page 59).

(15) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Invalid signal"

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


278 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(16) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block (from high to low
according to priority):
● "Fuzzy Optim." (FmCont only)
● "Tracking FB"
● "Tracking FM"
● "Safety mode FM"
● "Fuzzy control" (FmCont only)

(17) Bar graph for the "Process value"


This area shows the current "Process value" in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the
bar graph depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).

(18) Limit display


These colored triangles indicate the configured limits in the respective bar graph:
● Red: Alarm
● Yellow: Warning
● Blue: Tolerance
Note
The symbols displayed are not valid for user-configured message classes. Please take into
consideration the validity of terms for User-configured message classes (Page 41).

(19) Bar graph for the "Setpoint"


This area shows the current "Setpoint" in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the bar
graph depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).

(20) Display of external setpoint


This display [E] is only visible when you have selected "Internal" setpoint specification. It shows
the external setpoint that would apply if you were to change the setpoint specification to
"external".

(21) Display for the target setpoint of the setpoint ramp


This display [R] shows the target setpoint and is only visible if you have enabled ramp
generation in the Ramp view (Page 311).

(22) Limit display for the setpoint


These triangles show the SP_HiLim and SP_LoLim setpoint limits configured in the ES.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 279
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

See also
Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218)

2.3.9 FM controllers standard view (step controller with position feedback)

Standard view with position feedback of FM controllers






 
 

 
 




 


 
 

(1) Display and switch the operating mode


This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
● Manual mode (Page 73)
● Automatic mode (Page 73)
● Program mode for controllers (Page 79)
● Out of service (Page 72)
Refer to chapter Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) for information
on switching the operating mode.

(2) Display and switch the setpoint specification


This area shows how to specify the setpoint. The setpoint can be specified as follows:
● By the application ("External", CFC/SFC)
● By the user directly in the faceplate ("Internal").

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


280 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) chapter for
information on switching the setpoint specification.
For more information on the setpoint specification, refer to the Setpoint specification - internal/
external (Page 130) chapter.

(3) High and low scale range for the process value
These values provide information on the display range (PV_OpScale) for the bar graph of the
process value. The scale range is defined in the Engineering System.

(4) Display of the process value including signal status


This area provides information on the current process value (PV) with the corresponding signal
status.

(5) Display and change the setpoint including signal status


This area provides information on the current setpoint (SP) with the corresponding signal status.
Refer to the Changing values (Page 270) chapter for information on changing the setpoint.
The setpoint specification (2) also needs to be set to "Internal" for this block.

(6) High and low scale range for the setpoint


This area is already set and cannot be changed.

(7) Display and change the manipulated variable including signal status
This area shows the current "Manipulated variable" (MV) with the corresponding signal status.
Refer to chapter Changing values (Page 270) for information on changing the manipulated
variable. You can only make a change in manual mode.

(8) Display of the position feedback including signal status


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is interconnected.
This area shows the current feedback of the manipulated variable with the corresponding signal
status. This display is only available when the readback value in the box is interconnected to
the Rbk input parameter.

(9) Bar graph for the "Manipulated variable"


This area shows the current "Manipulated variable" in the form of a bar graph (MV_OpScale).
The visible area in the bar graph depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).

(10) Bar graph for position feedback


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is interconnected.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 281
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

This area shows the current position feedback in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in
the bar graph depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).

(11) Button for switching to the standard view of the ConPerMon block
Use this button for the standard view of the ConPerMon block. The visibility of this button
depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).
Refer also to chapter Opening additional faceplates (Page 217) for more on this.

(12) Button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate


Use this button for the standard view of a block configured in the Engineering System. The
visibility of this button depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).
Refer also to chapter Opening additional faceplates (Page 217) for more on this.

(13) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Maintenance"
Additional information on this is available in chapter Release for maintenance (Page 65)
Display area for block states.

(14) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Simulation"
You can find additional information on this in section Simulating signals (Page 59).

(15) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Invalid signal"

(16) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block (from high to low
according to priority):
● "Fuzzy Optim." (FmCont only)
● "Tracking FB"
● "Tracking FM"
● "Safety mode FM"
● "Fuzzy control" (FmCont only)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


282 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(17) Bar graph for the "Process value"


This area shows the current "Process value" in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the
bar graph depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).

(18) Limit display


These colored triangles indicate the configured limits in the respective bar graph:
● Red: Alarm
● Yellow: Warning
● Blue: Tolerance
Note
The symbols displayed are not valid for user-configured message classes. Please take into
consideration the validity of terms for User-configured message classes (Page 41).

(19) Bar graph for the "Setpoint"


This area shows the current "Setpoint" in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the bar
graph depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).

(20) Display of external setpoint


This display [E] is only visible when you have selected "Internal" setpoint specification. It shows
the external setpoint that would apply if you were to change the setpoint specification to
"external".

(21) Display for the target setpoint of the setpoint ramp


This display [R] shows the target setpoint and is only visible if you have enabled ramp
generation in the Ramp view (Page 311).

(22) Limit display for the setpoint


These triangles show the SP_HiLim and SP_LoLim setpoint limits configured in the ES.

See also
Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 283
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

2.3.10 FM controllers standard view (step controller without position feedback)

Standard view without position feedback of FM controllers






 


 











(1) Display and switch the operating mode


This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
● Manual mode (Page 73)
● Automatic mode (Page 73)
● Program mode for controllers (Page 79)
● Out of service (Page 72)
Refer to chapter Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) for information
on switching the operating mode.

(2) Display and switch the setpoint specification


This area shows how to specify the setpoint. The setpoint can be specified as follows:
● By the application ("External", CFC/SFC)
● By the user directly in the faceplate ("Internal").
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) chapter for
information on switching the setpoint specification.
For more information on the setpoint specification, refer to the Setpoint specification - internal/
external (Page 130) chapter.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


284 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(3) High and low scale range for the process value
These values provide information on the display range (PV_OpScale) for the bar graph of the
process value. The scale range is defined in the Engineering System.

(4) Display of the process value including signal status


This area provides information on the current process value (PV) with the corresponding signal
status.

(5) Display and change the setpoint including signal status


This area provides information on the current setpoint (SP) with the corresponding signal status.
Refer to the Changing values (Page 270) chapter for information on changing the setpoint.
The setpoint specification (2) also needs to be set to "Internal" for this block.

(6) Operating and displaying the actuating signal


This area shows the current feedback of the actuating signal.
● "Open"
● "Stop"
● "Close"
The button is shown next to the display in manual mode. You can influence the actuating signal
here. Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) chapter for
more on this.
If text is configured for these commands, it is displayed as status text and as button labels for
command selection. You can find more information about this in section Labeling of buttons
and text (Page 218)

(7) Display of the limit stop value including signal status


This area shows the limit stop signal with the corresponding signal status.
● "Open"
● "Closed"
If text is configured for these commands, it is displayed as status text and as button labels for
command selection. You can find more information about this in section Labeling of buttons
and text (Page 218)

(8) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Maintenance"
Additional information on this is available in chapter Release for maintenance (Page 65)
Display area for block states.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 285
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(9) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Simulation"
You can find additional information on this in section Simulating signals (Page 59).

(10) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Invalid signal"

(11) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block (from high to low
according to priority):
● "Fuzzy Optim." (FmCont only)
● "Tracking FB"
● "Tracking FM"
● "Safety mode FM"
● "Fuzzy control" (FmCont only)

(12) Limit display


These colored triangles indicate the configured limits in the respective bar graph:
● Red: Alarm
● Yellow: Warning
● Blue: Tolerance
Note
The symbols displayed are not valid for user-configured message classes. Please take into
consideration the validity of terms for User-configured message classes (Page 41).

(13) Bar graph for the "Process value"


This area shows the current "Process value" in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the
bar graph depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).

(14) Bar graph for the "Setpoint"


This area shows the current "Setpoint" in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the bar
graph depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


286 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(15) Display of external setpoint


This display [E] is only visible when you have selected "Internal" setpoint specification. It shows
the external setpoint that would apply if you were to change the setpoint specification to
"external".

(16) Display for the target setpoint of the setpoint ramp


This display [R] shows the target setpoint and is only visible if you have enabled ramp
generation in the Ramp view (Page 311).

(17) Limit display for the setpoint


These triangles show the SP_HiLim and SP_LoLim setpoint limits configured in the ES.

See also
Opening additional faceplates (Page 217)

2.3.11 Interlock blocks standard view

Interlock blocks standard view Intlk02, Intlk04, Intlk08, Intlk16


The number of the displayed input values depends on the interlock block you have selected.
The operation and functions are identical for all interlock blocks and do not depend on the
number of input values.
The Intlk16 interlock block has two additional buttons for switching between the input values
1 to 8 and 9 to 16.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 287
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates









 




 

(1), (9) Switching between the input values 1 to 8 and 9 to 16 (for Intlk16 only)
The buttons (1) or (9) are displayed depending on the view you are in. These buttons are only
available for the Intlk16 block.
The Intlk16 block provides two views:
● When you are in the first view, the input values 1 to 8 are available in the area (12). The
button (9) is displayed. You switch to the second view by clicking on the button (9).
● When you are in the second view, the input values 9 to 16 are available in the area (12).
The button (1) is displayed. You switch back to the first view by clicking on the button (1).

(2) Status of the output signal of the interlock block


This area (2) shows the status of the output signal of the interlock block (priority from high to
low). You can configure the logic in the engineering system (ES).

Logic
Color of the field AND OR
Gray Block is not used (only for display in the faceplate,
interlock logic still enabled), set using the
NotUsed = 1 parameter
Blue Excluded (bypass)
Yellow Simulated
Red Interlocked
Green Not interlocked

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


288 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(3) Exclude input values


You can use the button (3) to exclude input values from processing. Depending on the previous
settings, you can "Set" or "Reset" this property.
If the input value has been excluded, the following symbol appears in the field (8):

For more information on the operation, refer to the section Switching operating states and
operating modes (Page 268).

Note
This function can only be executed in the faceplate with "high-level operating permission".

Note
Operator permissions via OS_Perm do not depend on the Feature.Bit5 setting. You can find
additional information in section Activate OS_Perm bits (Page 161)

(4) "First in" status display


The following symbol is displayed next to an input value, if this input value has caused the last
output signal change from 1 to 0 (good state to locked):

You can reset the first-in (initial) signal with the button (10).

Note
This function can only be executed in the faceplate with "process control" operating permission.

You can find additional information on this in the section Recording the first signal for interlock
blocks (Page 53).
For more information on the operation, refer to the section Switching operating states and
operating modes (Page 268).

(5) Open faceplate of the output value


When you press the button (5), you can open the faceplate associated with the output value.
The function of this button depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES). See
also the section Opening additional faceplates (Page 217) for more on this.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 289
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(6) Status of the block output


The line color indicates the status of the block output:

Color of the line Output status


Green Output is enabled
White Output is disabled

(7) Display the status for further processing


The symbol shows the status for further processing of the input values:

Icon Further processing


The input value is processed further with value 1.

The input value is processed further with value 0.

The input value is excluded from further processing.

(8) Display of input values (BOOL) with signal status (in front of the field)
These fields show the interlock information associated with the analog value (13) with a signal
status:
● 1 = "Good" state
● 0 = "Locked"

Changing the display


You can change the displays for 0 and 1 in the CFC in the object properties of the Interlock
block:
● Navigate to the I/Os (object properties).
● Change the default for the input parameters (Inxx) in the Text 0 and Text 1 columns to
what you later want to see in runtime.

(9) Switching input values


Read point (1) for this.

(10) "Reset" the settings for further processing


When you press the button (10), you can "Reset" all input values:
● "Reset exclusions": the exclusions of the input values are reset.
● "Reset first-in": First-in detection / status display (4) is reset.
You can find additional information on this in the section Recording the first signal for interlock
blocks (Page 53).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


290 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(11) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
Use this navigation button to open the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system. The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the engineering
system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in the section Opening additional faceplates
(Page 217).

(12) Displaying analog input values


The interconnected analog input values (AVxx) are displayed in this area. Set a unit of measure
(AVxx_Unit as shown in the picture with [Unit]) for each input in the engineering system (ES).

Changing the display


You can change the displays in the CFC in the object properties of the Interlock block:
● Navigate to the I/Os (object properties).
● In the “OS additional text” column, change the default setting for the input parameter
(INxx) to what you want to see during runtime later.
● In the "Identifier" column, change the default setting for the input parameter (AVxx) to what
you want to see during runtime later.
● The text is used as a label and is therefore always displayed, in other words, it is
independent of the signal status of the corresponding AVxxx input.
● The font size is reduced during the runtime if the input text length is greater than the label
width.

Note
If a text is added to the "OS additional text" field of the input parameter (INxx), this text will
be displayed even if the "Identifier" text field of the input parameter (AVxx) is not empty. If the
"OS additional text" field of the input parameter (INxx) is empty, the "Identifier" text of the input
parameter (AVxx) is displayed.

The number of input values may vary depending on the selected interlock block:
● Intlk02: the input values 1 and 2 are available.
● Intlk04: the input values 1 to 4 are available.
● Intlk08: the input values 1 to 8 are available.
● Intlk16: the input values 1 to 8 are available. The input values 9 to 16 become available by
pressing the button (9). You can find additional information on this topic in the description
for (1) and (9).

(13) Open faceplate of the input value


When you press the button (13), you can open the faceplate associated with each input value.
The function of this button depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES). See
also the section Opening additional faceplates (Page 217) for more on this.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 291
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

The connected block is in bypass if the following small bypass symbol is displayed over the
arrow symbol:

This display can be used only if Feature2.Bit2 Separate evaluation for excluded and
simulated interlock signals (Page 155) is active. If additionally the input BypEn.Inx = 1, this
interlock input will be set in bypass.

2.3.12 Parameter view of PID controllers

Parameter view of PID controllers

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


292 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(1) "Enabled operation"


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Icons for enabled operation:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).

(2) "Settings"
You can activate the following functions for the controller in this area:
● "PID optimization": ☑ activate controller optimization
● "SP := PV in manual mode": ☑ Bumpless switchover from manual mode to automatic mode
● "SP := SP external": ☑ Bumpless switchover of the setpoint for setpoint switchover from
"external" to "internal". The internal setpoint is tracked to the external one.
– With the PIDConR block, this area is only visible if you have set the Feature bit
Switching operator controls for external setpoint to visible (Page 147) to 1.

(3) "Parameters"
In this area, you change parameters and therefore influence the controller. Refer to the
Changing values (Page 270) section for more on this.
You can influence the following parameters:
● "Gain": Proportional gain
● "P in feedback path" : Proportional action to the feedback path (0 to 1), 0 = Proportional
action is completely in the feedback path (only with PIDConL, PIDConR, and PIDStepL)
● "Integral time": Integral action time in [s]
● "Derivative time TD": Derivative action time in [s]
● "Derivative gain": Gain of the derivative action
● "D in feedback path": Derivative action is moved to the feedback path (only with PIDConL,
PIDConR, and PIDStepL)
● "Dead band": Width of dead band
Dead band is temporarily disabled
● "Control zone": Width of the control zone (only with PIDConL block)
● "Motor actuating time": Motor actuating time [s] (for PIDStepL block only)
● "Minimum pulse duration": Minimum pulse duration [s] (for PIDStepL block only)
● "Minimum break duration": Minimum break duration [s] (for PIDStepL block only)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 293
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(4) “Delay factor” (only for PIDConL and PIDConR)


In this area, you can change the following parameters:
● "ER H alarm": Delay factor at the positive setpoint step changes for incoming alarms at the
control deviation monitoring ER_AH_Lim.
● "ER L alarm": Delay factor at the negative setpoint step changes for incoming alarms at the
control deviation monitoring ER_AL_Lim.

(5) "Service"
You can select the following functions in this area:
● "Bypass" (only with PIDConL, PIDConR, and PIDStepL)
● "Simulation"
● "Release for maintenance" (with display for a maintenance request)
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for more on
this.
You can find information on this area in the section:
● Bypassing signals (Page 109) (for PIDConL, PIDConR, and PIDStepL)
● Simulating signals (Page 59)
● Release for maintenance (Page 65)

(6) Navigation button for the GainSched block


You can use this navigation button to reach the GainSched block configured in the engineering
system. The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the engineering
system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in the section Opening additional faceplates
(Page 217).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


294 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

2.3.13 Parameter view of FM controllers

Parameter view of FM controllers

(1) "Enabled operations"


This area shows all operations for which special operator control permissions are assigned.
They depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Symbols for enabled operations:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
control permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 295
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(2) "Settings"
You can activate the following functions for the controller in this area:
● "SP := PV in manual mode": ☑ Bumpless switchover from manual mode to automatic mode
● "SP := SP external": ☑ Bumpless switchover of the setpoint for setpoint switchover from
"external" to "internal" The internal setpoint is tracked to the external one.

(3) "Parameters"
In this area, you change parameters and therefore influence the controller. Refer to the
Changing values (Page 270) section for more on this.
You can influence the following parameters:
● "Gain": Proportional gain
● "Integral time" Integral action time in [s]
● "Derivative time TD": Derivative action time in [s]
● "Derivative gain": Gain of the derivative action
● "Dead band": Width of dead band
● "Control zone": Width of the control zone (for block FmTemp only)
● "Motor actuating time": Motor actuating time [s]
● "Minimum pulse duration": Minimum pulse duration [s]
● "Minimum break duration": Minimum break duration [s]

(4) "Service"
You can activate the following functions in this area:
● "Simulation"
● "Release for maintenance" (with display for a maintenance request)
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for more on
this.
You can find information on this area in the section:
● Simulating signals (Page 59)
● Release for maintenance (Page 65)

(5) Navigation button for the GainSched block


You can use this navigation button to reach the GainSched block configured in the engineering
system. The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the engineering
system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in the Opening additional faceplates (Page 217)
section.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


296 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

2.3.14 Parameter view for motors and valves

Parameter view for motors and valves


The following parameter view applies to the following bocks:
● MotL - Motor (Large) (Page 1097)
● MotRevL - Reversible motor (Page 1155)
● MotS - Motor (Small) (Page 1131)
● MotSpdL - Two-speed motor (Page 1251)
● VlvL - Valve (Large) (Page 1375)
● MotS - Motor (Small) (Page 1131)

Parameter view for MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdL and MotSpdCL with Feature.Bit13 = 0.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 297
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Parameter view for MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdL and MotSpdCL with Feature.Bit13 = 1.

(1) "Enabled operation"


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Icons for enabled operation:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).

(2) "Monitoring"
In this area, you change parameters and therefore influence the motor. Refer to the Changing
values (Page 270) section for more on this.
You can influence the following parameters:
● "Control": Monitoring time during startup and shutdown of the motor (dynamic)
● "Control stop": Monitoring time during shutdown of the motor (dynamic)
only for MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdL and MotSpdCL with Feature.Bit13 = 1
● "Control start": Monitoring time during startup of the motor (dynamic)
only for MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdL and MotSpdCL with Feature.Bit13 = 1
"End position": Monitoring time during permanent operation of the motor (static)
● "Status": Monitoring time during permanent operation of the motor (static)
The state is not displayed for small blocks.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


298 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Enabling "Monitoring"
You can enable monitoring by selecting the check box (☑)
You can find additional information on this in the section Monitoring the feedbacks (Page 98).

(3) "Service"
You can select the following functions in this area:
● "Simulation"
● "Release for maintenance" (with display for a maintenance request)
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for more on
this.
You can find information on this area in the section:
● Simulating signals (Page 59)
● Release for maintenance (Page 65)

See also
VlvS - Valve (small) (Page 1407)

2.3.15 Limit view of FM controllers

Limit view of FM controllers


Several values are set in this view by default:
● Process value limits
● Error signal limits
● Readback value limits
● Setpoint operation range
The toolbars of the faceplate and the block icon indicate when the limits are reached or violated.

Note
The symbols displayed are not valid for user-configured message classes. Take into
consideration the validity of terms for User-configured message classes (Page 41)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 299
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

 

(1) "Enabled operation"


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Icons for enabled operation:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


300 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(2) "Process value limits (PV)"


In this area, you can enter the limits for the process value. Refer to the Changing values
(Page 270) section for more on this.
You can change the following limits:
● "H alarm": Alarm high
● "H warning": Warning high
● "H tolerance": Tolerance high
● "Hysteresis"
● "L tolerance": Tolerance low
● "L warning": Warning low
● "L alarm": Alarm low

(3) "Error signal limits (ER)"


In this area, you can enter the limits for the control deviation. Refer to the Changing values
(Page 270) section for more on this.
You can change the following limits:
● "H alarm": Alarm high
● "Hysteresis"
● "L alarm": Alarm low

(4) "Readback value limits (RBK)"


In this area, you can enter the limits for the readback value. Refer to the Changing values
(Page 270) section for more on this.
You can change the following limits:
● "H warning": Warning high
● "Hysteresis"
● "L warning": Warning low

(5) "Setpoint operation range (SP)"


In this area, you can enter the limits for the setpoint operation range. Refer to the Changing
values (Page 270) section for more on this.
You can change the following limits:
● "H range": Range limit high
● "L range": Range limit low

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 301
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(6) "Manipulated variable operating range"


In this area, you can enter the limits for the manipulated variable operation range. Refer to the
Changing values (Page 270) section for more on this.
You can change the following limits:
● "H range": Range limit high
● "L range": Range limit low

(7) "Message suppression/delay"


Message suppression indicates whether or not the suppression of the associated message in
the AS block is activated with the xx_MsgEn parameter. The output of messages is not
suppressed when the block is installed (all xx_MsgEn parameters are preset to 1). Messages
can only be output if limit monitoring of the additional analog value has been enabled.
Alarm delays are also displayed in this position; for more on this see section Area of application
of the alarm delays (Page 208).

(8) Suppressing messages


You can enable / disable messages by setting the check mark.

2.3.16 Limit view of PID controllers

Limit view of PID controllers


Several values are set in this view by default:
● Process value limits
● Error signal limits
● Readback value limits
● Setpoint operation range
The toolbars of the faceplate and the block icon indicate when the limits are reached or violated.

Note
The symbols displayed are not valid for user-configured message classes. Take into
consideration the validity of terms for User-configured message classes (Page 41).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


302 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

 

(1) "Enabled operation"


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Icons for enabled operation:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 303
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(2) "Process value limits (PV)"


In this area, you can enter the limits for the process value. Refer to the Changing values
(Page 270) section for more on this.
You can change the following limits:
● "H alarm": Alarm high
● "H warning": Warning high
● "H tolerance": Tolerance high (not with PIDConS)
● "Hysteresis"
● "L tolerance": Tolerance low (not with PIDConS)
● "L warning": Warning low
● "L alarm": Alarm low

(3) "Error signal limits (ER)" (not with PIDConS)


In this area, you can enter the limits for the control deviation. Refer to the Changing values
(Page 270) section for more on this.
You can change the following limits:
● "H alarm": Alarm high
● "Hysteresis"
● "L alarm": Alarm low

(4) "Readback value limits (RBK)" (not with PIDConS)


In this area, you can enter the limits for the readback value. Refer to the Changing values
(Page 270) section for more on this.
You can change the following limits:
● "H warning": Warning high
● "Hysteresis"
● "L warning": Warning low

(5) Setpoint operation range (SP)


In this area, you can enter the limits for the setpoint operation range. Refer to the Changing
values (Page 270) section for more on this.
You can change the following limits:
● "H range": Range limit high
● "L range": Range limit low

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


304 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(6) Manipulated variable operating range


In this area, you can enter the limits for the manipulated variable operation range. Refer to the
Changing values (Page 270) section for more on this.
You can change the following limits:
● "H range": Range limit high
● "L range": Range limit low

(7) "Message suppression / delay"


Message suppression indicates whether or not the suppression of the associated message in
the AS block is activated with the xx_MsgEn parameter. The output of messages is not
suppressed when the block is installed (all xx_MsgEn parameters are preset to 1). Messages
can only be output if limit monitoring of the additional analog value has been enabled.
Alarm delays are also displayed in this position; for more on this see section Area of application
of the alarm delays (Page 208).

(8) Suppress messages


You can enable / disable messages by setting the check mark.

2.3.17 Limit view of motors

Limit view of motors


The limit view of motors is only available when an AV block has been interconnected to the
motor.
The toolbars of the faceplate and the block icon indicate when the limits are reached or violated.

Note
The symbols displayed are not valid for user-configured message classes. Take into
consideration the validity of terms for User-configured message classes (Page 41).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 305
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates




   

(1) High and low scale range for the additional value
These values provide information on the display range for the bar graph of the additional value.
The scale range is defined in the engineering system.

(2) Display of the additional value including signal status


This area shows the current additional value with the corresponding signal status.

(3) "Limits for the additional value"


In this area, you can enter the limits for the additional value. Refer to the Changing values
(Page 270) section for more on this.
You can change the following limits:
● "H alarm": Alarm high
● "H warning": Warning high
● "H tolerance": Tolerance high
● Hysteresis
● "L tolerance": Tolerance low
● "L warning": Warning low
● "L alarm": Alarm low

(4) Bar graph for the additional value


This area shows you the current additional value in the form of a bar graph. The visible area
in the bar graph depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


306 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(5) "Enabled operation"


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Icons for enabled operation:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)
The colored triangles indicate the specified limits (3) for the additional value.

(6) Message suppression / delay


Message suppression indicates whether or not the suppression of the associated message in
the AS block is activated with the xx_MsgEn parameter. The output of messages is not
suppressed when the block is installed (all xx_MsgEn parameters are preset to 1). Messages
can only be output if limit monitoring of the additional analog value has been enabled.
Alarm delays are also displayed in this position; for more on this see section Area of application
of the alarm delays (Page 208).

(7) Suppress messages


You can enable / disable messages by setting the check mark.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 307
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

2.3.18 Preview of FM controllers

Preview of FM controllers
The preview shows you the parameters that you, as an OS operator, can control in the entire
block. You cannot control anything in this view, however.

(1) Preview area


This area shows you a preview for the following values:
● "SP external": currently applicable external setpoint
● "SP internal": currently applicable internal setpoint
● "Control deviation": Current Control deviation
● "Program mode": Specified value for program mode
● "Disturbance variable": additive value for feedforward control
● "Tracking FM": track a manipulated variable in the FM module (value is 1)
● "Tracking FB": Track manipulated variable at the block (value is 1)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


308 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

● "Tracking value": Effective manipulated variable for "Track manipulated variable at block"
● "Safety mode": safety mode in the FM module (value is 1)
● "Safety value": effective manipulated variable for "Safety mode"

(2) "Enabled operations"


This area shows all operations for which special operator control permissions are assigned.
They depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Symbols for enabled operations:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
control permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)
The following enabled operations are shown here:
● "Close": You can select the manipulated variable "Close". If text is configured for this
command, it is also displayed in brackets. You can find more information about this in the
Section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218).
● "Open": You can select the manipulated variable "Open". If text is configured for this
command, it is also displayed in brackets. You can find more information about this in the
Section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218).
● "Stop": You can select the manipulated variable "Stop". If text is configured for this
command, it is also displayed in brackets. You can find more information about this in the
Section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218).
● "SP external": You can feedforward the external setpoint.
● "SP internal": You can feedforward the internal setpoint.
● "Change SP": You can change the setpoint.
● "Change MV": You can change the manipulated variable.
● "Program mode": You can switch to program mode.
● "Automatic": You can switch to automatic mode.
● "Manual": You can switch to manual mode.
● "Out of service": You can switch to "Out of service" operating mode.
● "Local operating permission": Use the ← button to switch to the standard view of the
"OpStations"" block. Additional information is available in the section Operator control
permissions (Page 265).

(3) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
Use this navigation button to reach the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system. The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the engineering
system (ES).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 309
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

See also the Opening additional faceplates (Page 217) section for more on this.

(4) Process value


This area displays the real process value (PV).

2.3.19 Preview of interlock blocks

Preview of interlock blocks

(1) Enabled operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator control permissions are assigned.
They depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


310 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Symbols for enabled operations:


● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
control permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).
The following enabled operations are shown here:
● "Local operating permission": Use the <-- button to switch to the standard view of the
OpStations block. Additional information is available in the section Operator control
permissions (Page 265).

2.3.20 Ramp view

Ramp view

(1) "Enabled operations"


This area shows all operations for which special operator control permissions are assigned.
They depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Symbols for enabled operations:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
control permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 311
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(2) Enable "gradient limit"


Use this check box to enable "gradient limit" for the setpoint. "Gradient limit" can be set
separately for positive or negative setpoint changes ("Gradient +" or "Gradient -"). Refer to the
Changing values (Page 270) section for more on this.
If there is a difference between target setpoint and currently effective setpoint, a blue "G" may
be displayed at the bar in standard view of FmCont, FmTemp, PIDConL, PIDConR, PIDStepL,
OpAnL and MotSpdCL with parameter assignment of SP_RateTarget (target setpoint for
gradient limit).

If there is a difference between the target manipulated variable and the currently effective
manipulated variable, an orange "G" may be displayed at the bar in the standard view of VlvAnl
with parameter assignment of MV_RateTarget (target manipulated variable for gradient
limit).

The gradient limitation includes the Ramp function (Page 125). You can set the ramp mode in
the following two ways:
● Gradient
● Duration [s]

(3) "Target setpoint"


In this area, you can set the type of ramp function for the setpoint.
You can set the time duration and the target setpoint. Refer to the Changing values
(Page 270) section for more on this.

(4) Enable "Ramp"


You can use this control to enable or disable the configured function in the ramp function for
the setpoint change.
You can only enable this when the setpoint specification is set to "Internal" in the standard
view of the block. The enable is only valid for one setpoint change and is subsequently disabled
again.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


312 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

2.3.21 Alarm view

Message view

(1) Toolbar
If the short-term archive list is selected, a new button appears in the toolbar:

You can use this button to toggle between the "History" and "Operator messages" views.
You must be registered with the "Higher process control" operating permission in order to
export and hide messages.
(2) Display area for alarms
For additional information about the alarm view, refer to the WinCC Information System Online
Help.
(3) "Hide messages" button
Messages can be displayed and/or hidden with this button. The view of this button changes
accordingly:

Show messages

Hide messages

"Higher process controlling" operating permission is required and manual hiding must be
active. You can find additional information in the manual "Process Control System PCS 7
Operator Station".

2.3.22 Batch view

Batch view
This area shows a display of the batch that is currently running (Batchview).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 313
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

You can use the internal tag "@APLBatchEnable" to enable/disable the "Batch" button in the
toolbar.

Value of @APLBatchEnable Operating the "Batch" button in Icon of the "Batch" button in the
the toolbar toolbar
0 Disabled

1 Enabled





(1) "Enabled"
This area shows you if the block is enabled for operation via SIMATIC BATCH
(BatchEn = 1).

(2) "Allocated"
This area shows if the block is currently in use by SIMATIC BATCH (Occupied = 1).

(3) "Batch name"


This area shows the name of the batch that is currently running (Batchname).

(4) "Batch ID"


This area shows the identification number of the batch that is currently running (BatchID).
The batch view is disabled if BatchID = 16#00000000.

(5) "Batch step"


This area shows the step number of the batch that is currently running (StepNo).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


314 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

2.3.23 Memo view

Memo view
You can leave temporary messages for other OS operators in this view. Messages are entered
in the text box, and saved and activated by selecting the check box in the lower right corner
of the faceplate.

 

(1) Text box for notes


(2) Check box for activating the note
(3) Combo box for list of files - A maximum of 3 files of (.mht) type are displayed here
(4) Open Button to display selected file - On clicking this button, a new window is opened
which displays the file selected from combo box
(5) Diplays error message. There are four possible error conditions that display error messages:
1. File not found: If the selected file is not avaialbe in the NoteView folder.
2. File size exceeded: If the selected file is greater than allowable limit (>25 MB).
3. Invalid file format: If configured file is other than mht format.
4. File name length exceeded: If length of the file name exceeds 32 characters excluding the
file extension (.mht).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 315
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Note
● Files that are configured for NoteVew should be saved with UTF-8 encoding. This is
applicable to all the intermediate files also, before they are converted to .MHT files.
● Jump instruction within the file in NoteView window will not work in the OS Client, Web
Server and Web Client.
● No permission levels are required for combo box and open button in the APL_Memo.PDL.

(1) Window Title: indicates the title of Window and name of the file opened as well.
(2) Indicates the loading status of the selected MHT document
(3) NoteView display area: displays content of the selected file.
Advised maximum size of the file is <= 25 MB for a smooth operation.

Note
● This window cannot be resized but it is movable.
● This window is not supported by the "screen composition" functionality.

All the .MHT files (NoteView documents) should be placed in the "OS project path\Gracs
\NoteView". In case of a Multi project, server holds all these files and these files are not
available in the client.
Error Handling
● If selected file is not found in the folder path, an error message is shown as “File not found”.
● If configured file format is other than MHT, an error message is shown as "Invalid file format".

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


316 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

● If selected file is more than 25 MB and if tried to open same, an error is shown as “File size
exceeds 25 MB”.
● If file name length exceeds 32 characters, an error is shown as "File name length exceeded
32 characters".
The next time the faceplate is opened or there is a process picture change, you can see in the
status bar of the block icon and the faceplate that there is a new message for you.
Clearing the check box deletes the indicators in the status bars.
The message is not deleted automatically.

Note
The content of the memo view is cleared when you perform a full compilation and download
of the OS.

2.3.24 Trend view

Trend view

 


 'RQH

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 317
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(1) Toolbar
(2) Display area for trends
(3) Status bar
(4) Button for switching between archive tags and online tags. The status bar shows if the trend
view is working with online data or archive data.
(5) Button for opening the "Scatter plot" window
The Export button is only visible and operable with the "Higher-level process control" operating
permission.
For additional information about the trend view, refer to the WinCC Information System Online
Help.

Configuration of the trend view


The trend view can be configured so that archive values are displayed immediately after
opening. A prerequisite for this is that archive variables exist. Proceed as follows:
● A "1" is attached at the block icon in the "TrendPictureName" property. A semicolon is used
as the separator to the name of the trend view.
Example: @pg_apl_trendPID_Statistic.pdl;1

Special considerations for controllers


You can select two different representations for the display area:

1. Detailed display (default setting):


Display area consisting of three coordinate systems:
● Setpoint trend, actual value trend;
● Manipulated variable, control performance index trend;
● Binary trend via automatic/manual, manipulated variable at high or low limit
Open the scatterplot diagram with the user button (number 2) in the toolbar. It shows a
coordinate system with the process value on the value axis and the manipulated variable or
position feedback on the X axis. A new value pair is entered into the coordinate system with
each cycle.
If you want to use the detail display, you need to enter the following in the block icon under
Trends in the WinCC Graphics Designer:
TrendPictureName = @pg_apl_trendPID_Statistic.pdl

2. Simple display:
Display area consisting of two coordinate systems:
● Setpoint trend, actual value trend;
● Manipulated variable;
If you want to use the simple display, you need to enter the following in the block icon under
Trends in the WinCC Graphics Designer:

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


318 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

TrendPictureName =@pg_apl_trendPID.pdl

Notes on step controllers with position feedback:


If you use a step controller with position feedback as the controller type, you need to enter the
following in the block icon under Trends in the WinCC Graphics Designer:
TrendConfiguration5 = *.MV#Value;...
TrendConfiguration6 = .RbkOut#Value;...

The following applies to all other controller types (default setting):


TrendConfiguration5 = .MV#Value;...
TrendConfiguration6 = *.RbkOut#Value;...

2.3.25 APL Operator Trend Control (AOTC)

Opening the AOTC window


Press and hold the Ctrl key and left-click the value on the block icon to open the AOTC window.
The first value is added to the Trend Control and the detailed information is displayed in the
first row of the overview area.

Adding values to the AOTC window


To add values to the AOTC window, press and hold the Ctrl key and left-click the value on the
block icon. The value is added to the Trend Control. You can add up to 8 values in the AOTC
window. The following colors are assigned to the trends in the sequence they are added:
1. Black (HTML code 000000)
2. Red (HTML code FF0000)
3. Green (HTML code 00FF00)
4. Blue (HTML code 0000FF)
5. Yellow (HTML code FFFF00)
6. Turkish (HTML code 00FFFF)
7. Pink (HTML code FF00FF)
8. Orange (HTML code FFA100)
If the value is an archived value, the value is displayed from the archive. If the value is not
archived, it is displayed as an online value. The default time range for the time axis is 1 minute.

Note
For the Web Navigator, when a new value is added, the Trend Control always displays only
the online value. You can switch to display the archived values through the buttons "Monday",
"Tuesday", and so on.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 319
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

For information on adding additional values to the AOTC window, refer to (10) Adding additional
values.

Adding digital values to the AOTC window


To add digital values to the AOTC window, press and hold the Ctrl key and left-click the value
on the block icon. You can add digital values from the following blocks:

Family Blocks
Drives MotL, MotRevL, MotSpdCL, MotSpdL, MotS, VlvL, VlvS, Vlv2WayL, VlvAnL, VlvMotL,
VlvPosL
Operate OpDi01, OpTrig, OpDi03
Monitor MonDiL, MonDiS, MonDi08

Example: If you perform Ctrl key + left-click operation on the MotL block icon, the AOTC window
opens showing its current status taken from the parameter FbkRunOut.Value. After opening
the AOTC window, if you perform Ctrl key + left-click operation on any other block then the
parameter corresponding to that block is added to the AOTC window.
For information on adding additional values to the AOTC window, refer to (10) Adding additional
values.

The AOTC window

 
       




 

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


320 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

1. Title
2. Trend group description
3. Tag row
4. Time range selection
5. WinCC online trend control
6. Value axis
7. Toolbar of the trend window
8. Enabling/disabling a trend
9. Opening a faceplate
10.Adding additional values
11.Enabling/disabling a value axis
12.Saving a trend group
13.Opening a separate message window
14.Printing screenshot of the AOTC window
15.Help button
16.Deleting a trend
17.Closing the AOTC window

(1) Title
The title displays the name of the AOTC. If the trend group is not saved, the default title "APL
Operator Trend Control" is displayed. If a saved trend group is opened, title displays the group
name.

(2) Trend group description


This field displays the description of the trend group if it is saved with a description otherwise
it is empty.

(3) Tag row


The tag row displays the following information about the trend added.
● Button to enable/disable the trend:
Click this button to enable or disable the trend. For more information, refer to the description
of (8) Enabling/disabling a trend.
● "Parameter name":
This field displays the name of the trend.
● Button to add additional values:
Click this button to add additional values to the corresponding parameter. For more
information, refer to the description of (10) Adding additional values.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 321
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

● "Value":
This field displays the current value of the trend.
● "Signal status":
This field displays the signal status of the trend. The corresponding icon is displayed in
case the quality is not good that is the quality code is not 0x80. In case of good quality
(quality code 0x80), the text "Good" is displayed.
● "Unit":
This field displays the unit of the trend. Units are calculated only while adding a trend to
the AOTC window. If the unit of a trend changes after it has been added to the AOTC
window, the new unit will not be updated in the AOTC window. For example, if PV_Unit
changes, the trend must be removed and added again.
● Button to enable/disable the value axis:
Click this button to enable or disable the value axis. For more information, refer to the
description of (11) Enabling/disabling a value axis.
● "Low limit":
This field displays the low limit of the trend. The low limit is taken from the tag
"XX_OpScale#Low". If the tag is not present, the value is taken automatically by the Trend
control and low limit field displays "Auto".
● "High limit":
This field displays the high limit of the trend. The high limit is taken from the tag
"XX_OpScale#High". If the tag is not present, the value is taken automatically by the Trend
Control and the high limit field displays "Auto".
● "Ruler value":
This field displays the ruler value of the trend where the ruler intersects with the trend in
the Trend Control.
● "Ruler time":
This field displays the ruler time of the trend where the ruler intersects with the trend in the
Trend Control.
● Button to delete the trend:
Click this button to delete the trend. For more information, refer to the description of (15)
Deleting a trend.

(4) Time range selection


This area provides the option to select the time range based on the weekdays for the archived
view and fixed time frame for the online view.
Press the buttons named "Monday" to "Sunday" to switch to the archive view for that day. For
example, if today is Tuesday and the "Tuesday" button is pressed, the archived values from
today will be displayed. If the "Sunday" button is pressed, the archived values from last Sunday
will be displayed. The time range is 24 hours. If the trend is not archived, no value will be
displayed.
Press the "Start/stop" button from the trend toolbar to switch back to the online view.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


322 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Use the drop-down list in the time range selection area to change the time range of the time
axis. The following preconfigured time ranges are available:
● Hour/minute based
– 1 min
– 2 min
– 5 min
– 10 min
– 15 min
– 30 min
– 1h
– 2h
– 3h
– 5h
– 12 h
– 24 h
The following figure shows the AOTC window when the time range is selected to "10 min" from
the drop-down list in "Time range" section:

7LPHUDQJHVHWWRPLQ

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 323
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(5) WinCC online trend control


The Trend Control displays the trends added to the AOTC window. Each trend added to the
AOTC window will appear in different color.
The following colors have been defined default for the 8 trends:
1. Black
2. Red
3. Green
4. Blue
5. Yellow
6. Turkish
7. Pink
8. Orange

(6) Value axis


Each trend is shown in a separate value axis, therefore there can be maximum of 8 value axis.
The value axis appears in the same color as the corresponding trend.

(7) Toolbar of the trend window


Use these button to operate the trend window.
For more information, refer to WinCC Information System Online Help.

(8) Enabling/disabling a trend


Press these buttons to disabled or enabled trends.
If a trend is enabled, the corresponding button will be displayed in the same color as the value
trend.
If a trend is disabled, the corresponding button will be displayed in Grey color.
By default the trend added to the AOTC is enabled, therefore the corresponding button is
visible and appears in the the same color as the value trend.
When the button is pressed the first time, the corresponding trend is hidden from the Trend
Control. The color of the button changes to Grey. The corresponding tag row in the overview
area is hidden except the "Parameter name".
On pressing the button again, the corresponding trend is visible again in the Trend Control.
The color of the button changes to the same color as the value trend. The corresponding row
of values is visible again.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


324 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(9) Opening a related faceplate


Click the parameter name in the tag row to open the corresponding faceplate.

(10) Adding additional values


This button is used to configure values of a particular function block which is already configured
in the parameter list of the AOTC window. This button is visible only for the parameters which
are configured in the AOTC window.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 325
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Perform the following steps to configure additional values to the AOTC window:
1. Click the [+] button which is available in the right corner of a configured parameter. The
"Additional Values" window opens which displays a list of parameters of the corresponding
function block.

2. Select a value from the list and click OK to configure the selected value in the AOTC window.

Note
● You can select only one value at a time. Multiple selections are disabled.
● Additional value buttons are visible only if the number of trends configured is less than the
maximum number of trends allowed (8 values).
● Additional value buttons will be disabled if the configured values in the AOTC reaches its
maximum allowed limit.

(11) Enabling/disabling a value axis


Click the button next to the I/O field of the unit to enable or disable the value axis. The value
itself will stay in the Trend Control, only the value axis will be hidden from the Trend Control.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


326 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

(12) Saving and reopening a trend group


Saving a trend group:
1. Click the "Save" button to save the trend group. The "Save Trend Group" window appears
to save the trend group:

2. Enter the following details in the "Save Trend Group" window:


– Trend group name (maximum of 32 characters)
– Trend group description (maximum of 64 characters)
– Select the checkbox if you want to save the trend group as private. If the checkbox is
not selected (default), the trend group will be saved as public.
Saving trend group as private:
Saving trend group as private allows only the originator to open the trend again. Private
trends cannot be opened by other users. Public trends can be opened and modified by
every operator.
3. Press the "OK" button to save the trend group.
You can abort the operation by pressing the "Cancel" button. The dialog will close without
saving the name or description.
The "OK" button is enabled only if the trend group name is entered and the Enter key is
pressed. The trend group descitption is optional.
Once the trend group is saved, further changes made in that trend group from the AOTC
window will be saved automatically.
The trend group name should be different from the previously saved trend groups. You cannot
save the trend group again with the same name.
The following special characters are not allowed in the trend group name:
' ' (space character), '.', ',', ';', ':', '/', '=', '\t', '\\', '"', '<', '>', '{', '}', '[', ']', '|', '?', '*'

Opening a trend group:


Click the "Trend system" standard button at the bottom of the WinCC runtime window to open
a saved trend.

Opening trend groups in "Full screen display":

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 327
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

The AOTC full screen display is used to display configured trend groups on a dedicated screen.
The AOTC full screen window has four quadrants which means you can display four different
trend groups at a time. This window is termed as “Quad trend window” or “Full screen display”.
Perform the following steps to display the trend groups in "Full screen display":
1. Click the AOTC full screen display button at the bottom of the WinCC runtime window.

The AOTC full screen display opens with four empty quadrants and with four buttons at
the bottom to select a saved trend group for each quadrant.

2. Click the "(open trend group)" button at the bottom of the AOTC full screen display for the
quadrant in which you want to display a particular trend group. A window opens with a list
of saved trend groups.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


328 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

3. Select a trend group from the list and click "Display" to load the trend group into the
corresponding quadrant.
4. Use all four buttons to load four different trend groups into the different quadrants of the
full screen display.

(13) Opening a separate message window


Press the "Messages" button to open a new message window which displays the messages
for the selected block types corresponding to the trends added in the AOTC window.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 329
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

In the online mode, only the actual messages (all active messages, acknowledged and
unacknowledged) will be displayed.
If you select a time range displaying values from the archive, the message window will display
all the messages within this time range.
Messages only from the enabled trend will be displayed. If a trend is enabled or disabled and
the message window is open, the corresponding messages will be displayed or not displayed
accordingly. Similarly if a trend is deleted, the corresponding messages will disappear from
the messages window.
If two or more trends of the same block type are added to the AOTC window, and one of them
is disabled, the corresponding messages will not be removed from message window. All the
trends should be disabled or deleted to remove the corresponding messages from the
message window.
Only one message window can be opened at a time. If one more AOTC window is opened
and you want to display the messages for the values in that window, the already opened
message view should be closed and opened again from the specific AOTC window.

(14) Printing screenshot of the AOTC window


Press the "Print" button to print the screenshot of the complete AOTC window. WinCC runtime
(also the Web Navigator) should be in full screen mode without scroll bar. As screenshot is
taken from the process picture visible in runtime, the AOTC window should be visible
completely in the runtime, otherwise the screenshot will show only the visible section of the
AOTC faceplate.

(15) Help button


Click this button to open the AOTC chapter in the APL Operator Guide online help. You will
find detailed information about the AOTC window and its functionalities in this online help.

(16) Deleting a trend


Click the "X" button at the end of the row in the overview area to delete existing values.
The corresponding trend is removed from the Trend Control. In the overview area, the rows
below the deleted row are moved up and an empty row is added at the end.
New values are added to the first empty row.

(17) Closing the AOTC window


Click the "Close" button in the title bar to close the AOTC window.

Operator permissions
The operator permissions are similar to the existing online trend function.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


330 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

The following fields are enabled only if the area authorization is available:
1. Delete buttons to delete trends.
2. Save button to open the pop-up window to save the trend group.
3. Field to enter the trend group name in the pop-up window.
4. Field to enter the trend group description in the pop-up window.
5. Checkbox to select private trend group.
6. The "OK" button to save the trend in the pop-up window.

Note
The functions for example, disable/enable trend, disable/enable value axis, delete trend, open
message window, print AOTC screenshot, select private trend group, need no operation area
or quitting function. The feature "Save Trend Group" needs an operation area where only 3
step operation is possible. It does not support 2 step operation.

2.3.26 Limit operation and display in the faceplate

Limit operation and display in the faceplate


The limit value view of the faceplate can be used to modify limits and the hysteresis if the
corresponding operating permission (higher process controlling) is available. The limits are
displayed graphically in the standard view of the faceplate.
If the limits are reached or exceeded, an alarm, warning or tolerance class message is
triggered. This is indicated graphically as follows:

Symbol Meaning
Alarm

Warning

Tolerance

Note
The symbols displayed are not valid for user-configured message classes. For user-configured
message classes, the colors and abbreviations depend on the project-specific setting. Please
take into consideration the validity of terms for user-configured message classes (Page 41).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 331
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

See also
User-configured message classes (Page 41)

2.3.27 Central color management

Central color management


As of version 8.1, the colors in the faceplates and block icons can be changed centrally via
the central color palette in WinCC. The central color palette is located in the "User interface
and design" tab of the project properties.
The following colors cannot be changed via the central color palette:
● The colors (except trend colors) of WinCC Alarm Control, WinCC Online Trend Control,
WinCC Ruler Control and WinCC Function Control.
● The window titles can only be changed by editing the Windows designs.
● The colors of check boxes cannot be changed.
● Alarm colors are changed via the PCS 7 message system.
● Trend colors are not automatically changed in the block icons in existing projects, because
these properties are changeable instance-specific and not in the update mechanisms for
the block icons.
The user can use the color range of 0-199; the APL color range begins with the color index
200.
Description of the APL color index:

Color index for block icons


The following color indexes can be created for block icons.

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color name Description Property(ies) [attribute Type block icons
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name]
cy
200 1 0 B6B6B6 Gray Background: Back‐ BackgroundColor Block icons with
ground color analog values
201 1 0 DADADA Very light Background: Fill pat‐ BackgroundFillPat‐ Block icons with
gray tern color ternColor analog values
202 1 0 B6B6B6 Gray Tag display: Back‐ TagBackColor All block icons with
ground color tag display
203 1 0 DADADA Very light Tag display: Fill pattern TagFillColor All block icons with
gray color tag display
204 1 0 919191 Dark gray Tag display: Border col‐ TagBorderColor All block icons with
or tag display
205 1 0 000000 Black Tag display: Font color TagFontColor All block icons with
tag display
206 1 0 00FFFA Pure cyan Tag highlight: Back‐ BlockIconHighlight‐ All block icons
ground color BackColor

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


332 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color name Description Property(ies) [attribute Type block icons
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name]
cy
207 1 0 5CC2BC Medium cy‐ Tag highlight: Fill pat‐ BlockIconHighlightFill‐ All block icons
an tern color Color
208 1 0 FFFFFF White Tag highlight: Font col‐ BlockIconHighlight‐ All block icons
or FontColor
209 1 0 B6B6B6 Gray Display of high limit: LimitObjectHighBack‐ Block icons with
Background color Color display of the high
limit
210 1 0 DADADA Very light Display of high limit: Fill LimitObjectHighFill‐ Block icons with
gray pattern color Color display of the high
limit
211 1 0 B6B6B6 Gray Display of the low limit: LimitObjectLowBack‐ Block icons with
Background color Color display of the low
limit
212 1 0 DADADA Very light Display of the low limit: LimitObjectLowFillCol‐ Block icons with
gray Fill pattern color or display of the low
limit
213 1 0 B6B6B6 Gray Empty rectangle: Back‐ EmptyRectBackCol‐ Block icons with
ground color or"1 status bar
214 1 0 DADADA Very light Empty rectangle: Fill EmptyRectFillColor1 Block icons with
gray pattern color status bar
215 1 0 808080 Dark gray Empty rectangle: Bor‐ EmptyRectBorderCol‐ Block icons with
der color or1 status bar
216 1 0 FFFFFF White Process value: Back‐ Value1BackColorVal‐ Block icons with
ground color ue10BackColor analog value
217 1 0 000000 Black Process value: Font col‐ Value1FontColorVal‐ Block icons with
or ue10FontColor analog value
218 1 100 C0C0C0 None Setpoint: Background Value2BackColor Block icons with
(transpar‐ color analog value
ent)
219 1 0 0000FF Pure blue Setpoint: Font color Value2FontColor Block icons with
analog value
220 2 100 C0C0C0 None Changed variable: Value3BackColor Block icons with
(transpar‐ Background color analog value
ent)
221 2 0 F24F00 Pure or‐ Changed variable: Font Value3FontColor Block icons with
ange color analog value
222 2 100 C0C0C0 None Read-back value: Back‐ Value3BackColor Val‐ Block icons with
(transpar‐ ground color ue4BackColor analog value
ent)
223 2 0 008080 Dark cyan Read-back value: Font Value3FontColor Val‐ Block icons with
color ue4FontColor analog value
224 2 100 B6B6B6 None Unit2, process value/ UnitBackColor, Block icons with
(transpar‐ setpoint: Background Unit1BackColor- analog value
ent) color Unit4BackColor
225 2 0 494949 Very dark Unit, process value/ UnitFontColor, Block icons with
gray setpoint: Font color Unit1FontColor- analog value
Unit4FontColor

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 333
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color name Description Property(ies) [attribute Type block icons
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name]
cy
226 2 100 B6B6B6 None Unit2, changed varia‐ Unit2BackColor Block icons with
(transpar‐ ble: Background color analog value
ent)
227 2 0 494949 Very dark Unit, changed variable: Unit2FontColor Block icons with
gray Font color analog value
228 2 100 B6B6B6 None Unit2, read-back value: Unit1BackColor, Block icons with
(transpar‐ Background color Unit2BackColor analog value
ent)
229 2 0 494949 Very dark Unit, read-back value: Unit1FontColor, Block icons with
gray Font color Unit2FontColor analog value
230 2 0 6D6D6D Very dark "Not used" state: back‐ BackColorOn1 Interlock
gray ground color
231 2 0 919191 Dark gray "Not used" state: fill pat‐ FillColorOn1 Interlock
tern color
232 2 0 0000FF Pure blue "Bypassed" state: back‐ BackColorOn2 Interlock
ground color
233 2 0 00A2E8 Pure blue "Bypassed" state: fill FillColorOn2 Interlock
pattern color
234 2 0 E4D400 Pure yellow "Simulation" state: BackColorOn3 Interlock
background color
235 2 0 FFFF00 Pure yellow "Simulation" state: fill FillColorOn3 Interlock
pattern color
236 2 0 00B500 Bright lime "Unlocked" state: back‐ BackColorOn4 Interlock
green ground color
237 2 0 00FF00 Pure lime "Unlocked" state: fill FillColorOn4 Interlock
green pattern color
238 2 0 E60000 Pure red "Locked" state: back‐ BackColorOn5 Interlock
ground color
239 2 0 FF0000 Pure red "Locked" state: fill pat‐ FillColorOn5 Interlock
tern color
240 3 0 00B500 Bright lime "On" state: Background BackColorOn, On‐ Family counter /
green color BackColor MonDi08/ MonDiL‐
MonDiS (type 1
and 4) / OpDi03 /
ShrdResS/ Time‐
Trig/ TotalL
241 3 0 00FF00 Pure lime "On" state: Fill pattern FillColorOn, OnFillCol‐
green color or
242 3 0 00FF00 Pure lime "On" state: Background Value2BackColor OpDi01, OpTrig
green color
243 3 0 000000 Black "On" state: Font color Value2FontColor OpDi01, OpTrig
244 3 0 FFFFFF White "On" state: Background Value2BackColor MonDiL-MonDiS
color (types 2, 3 and 5)
245 3 0 000000 Black "On" state: Font color Value2FontColor MonDiL-MonDiS
(types 2, 3 and 5)
246 3 0 FFFFFF White "On" state: Font color FontColorOn MonDiL-MonDiS
(type 4)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


334 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color name Description Property(ies) [attribute Type block icons
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name]
cy
247 3 0 B6B6B6 Gray "Off" state: Background BackColorOff, Back‐
color ColorOn
248 3 0 DADADA Very light "Off" state: Fill pattern FillColorOff, FillColor‐
gray color On
249 3 0 DADADA Very light "Off" state: Background BackColorOff Family counter,
gray color MonDi08, Time‐
Trig
250 3 0 FFFFFF White "Off" state: Fill pattern FillColorOff Family counter,
color MonDi08, Time‐
Trig
251 3 0 FFFFFF White "Off" state: Background Value1BackColor MonDiLMonDiS
color (types 2, 3 and 5)
252 3 0 000000 Black "Off" state: Font color Value1FontColor MonDiLMonDiS
(types 2, 3 and 5)
253 3 0 000000 Black "Off" state: Font color FontColorOff MonDiLMonDiS
(type 4)
254 3 0 B6B6B6 Gray "Not used" state: Back‐ BackColorNA MonDi08
ground color
255 3 0 000000 Black "No operation" state: ForeColorValue OpStations
Font color
256 3 0 C0C0C0 Light gray Display of the selected Value2BackColor SelA16In
analog value: Back‐
ground color
257 3 0 6D6D6D Very dark Display of the selected Value2FontColor SelA16In
gray analog value: Font color
258 3 0 494949 Very dark ISO/DIN symbols: Line BorderColor
gray color
1
New property
2
Note: The pattern in the block icon must be changed to "single color" for the color to take
effect.

Color indexes for faceplates


The following color indexes can be created for faceplates.

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color name Description Property(ies) [attribute Types views/
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name] objects
cy
259 3 0 AFAFAF Gray View: Background color BackColor Views in all face‐
plates
260 4 0 DEDEDE Very light View: Fill pattern color FillColor Views in all face‐
gray plates
261 4 0 62ACAA Dark cyan Operating area: Back‐ BackColor Total operating
ground color area
262 4 0 AACFCD Gray cyan Operating area: Fill pat‐ FillColor Total operating
tern color area

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 335
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color name Description Property(ies) [attribute Types views/
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name] objects
cy
263 4 0 000000 Black Title or label of operat‐ ForeColor All static texts in
ing area: Font color the operating area
264 4 0 C0C0C0 Light gray Slider operating area: BackColor, BackCo‐ Operating area
Background color lorTop, BackColorBot‐ "@PG_APL_OA_A
tom, ButtonColor, nalogwithli‐
HighLimitColor, LowLi‐ mits100.PDL"
mitColor
265 4 0 FFFFFF White Slider operating area: BorderBackColor Operating area
Border background col‐ "@PG_APL_OA_A
or nalogwithli‐
mits100.PDL"
266 4 0 000000 Black Slider operating area: BorderColor Operating area
Border color "@PG_APL_OA_A
nalogwithli‐
mits100.PDL"
267 4 0 DADADA Very light Block comment: Fill pat‐ FillColor Header in all face‐
gray tern color plates
268 4 0 808080 Dark gray Block comment: Border BorderColor Header in all face‐
color plates
269 4 0 000000 Black Block comment: Font FontColor Header in all face‐
color plates
270 4 0 B6B6B6 Gray Empty rectangle over‐ BackColor Header in all face‐
view: Background color plates
271 4 0 DADADA Very light Empty rectangle over‐ FillColor Header in all face‐
gray view: Fill pattern color plates
272 4 0 808080 Dark gray Empty rectangle over‐ BorderColor Header in all face‐
view: Border color plates
273 4 0 C0C0C0 Light gray Group display over‐ BackColor Header in all face‐
view: Background color plates [1]
274 4 0 C0C0C0 Light gray Toolbar button: Back‐ BackColor Header in all face‐
ground color plates
275 4 0 BABABA Gray Toolbar button: Fill pat‐ FillColor Header in all face‐
tern color plates
276 4 0 808080 Dark gray Toolbar button: Border BorderColor Header in all face‐
color plates
277 4 0 000000 Black Toolbar button: Font FontColor Header in all face‐
color plates [2]
278 4 0 C0C0C0 Light gray Header button[3]: Back‐ BackColor Header in all face‐
ground color plates
279 4 0 808080 Dark gray Toolbar button: Border BorderColor 8 Header in all face‐
color plates
280 5 0 000000 Black Title or label in views: TextFontColor, Font‐ Views with static
Font color Color, ForeColor, Left‐ text and APL ob‐
HandTextFontColor[4] jects with type
ID=17-20, 22-24,
27, 29, 64, 120,
130

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


336 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color name Description Property(ies) [attribute Types views/
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name] objects
cy
281 5 0 AFAFAF Gray Button in views/operat‐ BackColor Views with APL ob‐
ing areas: Background jects with type
color ID=30-34, 50-52
282 5 0 CECECE Light gray Button in views/operat‐ FillColor Views with APL ob‐
ing areas: Fill pattern jects with type
color ID=30-34, 50-52
283 5 0 808080 Dark gray Button in views/operat‐ BorderColor Views with APL ob‐
ing areas: Border color jects with type
ID=30-34, 50-52
284 5 0 FFFFFF White Button in views/operat‐ BorderColorTop Views with APL ob‐
ing areas: 3D border jects with type
color ID=30-34, 50-52
285 5 0 808080 Dark gray Button in views/operat‐ BorderColorBottom Views with APL ob‐
ing areas: 3D shadow jects with type
color ID=30-34, 50-52
286 5 0 000000 Black Button in views/operat‐ ForeColor Views with APL ob‐
ing areas: Font color jects with type
ID=30-34, 50-52
287 5 0 DADADA Very light Analog value enabled EnabledBackColor, Views with I/O
gray in views/operating BackColor, BackCol‐ fields (also exten‐
areas: Background col‐ or_OK ded) and APL ob‐
or jects with type
ID=20, 22-24, 27,
28-29, 130
288 5 0 FFFFFF White Analog value enabled EnabledFillColor, Fill‐ Views with I/O
in views/operating Color, FillColor_OK fields (also exten‐
areas: Fill pattern color ded) and APL ob‐
jects with type
ID=20, 22-24, 27,
28-29, 130
289 5 0 B6B6B6 Gray Analog value disabled DisabledBackColor, Views with I/O
in views/operating BackColor, BackCol‐ fields (also exten‐
areas: Background col‐ or_OK ded) and APL ob‐
or jects with type
ID=20, 22-24, 27,
28-29, 91¹³,92,130
290 5 0 DADADA Very light Analog value disabled DisabledFillColor, Fill‐ Views with I/O
gray in views/operating Color, FillColor_OK fields (also exten‐
areas: Fill pattern color ded) and APL ob‐
jects with type
ID=20, 22-24, 27,
28-29, 91¹³,92,130
291 5 0 000000 Black Analog value or unit in ValueFontColor, Fore‐ Views with I/O
views/operating areas: Color, ForeColor_OK fields (also exten‐
Font color ded) and APL ob‐
jects with type
ID=16, 20, 22-24,
27, 28-29, 91, 130

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 337
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color name Description Property(ies) [attribute Types views/
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name] objects
cy
292 5 0 00B500 Bright lime Analog process value: LineColor, BorderCol‐ Views with I/O
green Border color or fields (also exten‐
ded) and APL ob‐
jects with type
ID=20, 24
293 5 0 0000FF Pure blue Analog setpoint: Border LineColor, BorderCol‐ Views with I/O
color or fields (also exten‐
ded) and APL ob‐
jects with type
ID=20, 28
294 5 0 D27A00 Bright or‐ Changed analog varia‐ LineColor, BorderCol‐ Views with I/O
ange ble: Border color or fields (also exten‐
ded) and APL ob‐
jects with type
ID=20, 24, 28
295 5 0 008582 Dark cyan Analog read-back val‐ LineColor, BorderCol‐ Views with I/O
ue: Border color or fields (also exten‐
ded) and APL ob‐
jects with type
ID=20
296 5 0 808080 Dark gray Analog parameter/ LineColor, BorderCol‐ Views with I/O
range value: border col‐ or fields (also exten‐
or ded) and APL ob‐
jects with type
ID=20, 22-24, 27,
28, 90, 92, 130
297 5 0 000000 Black Analog limit (no alarm), LineColor, BorderCol‐ In
input value, offset, gra‐ or "@PG_CntOhSc_
dient: border color Limit.PDL",
"@PG_Mo‐
nAnL_Stand‐
ard.PDL",
"@PG_Ra‐
tio_Stand‐
ard.PDL",
"@PG_To‐
talL_Stand‐
ard.PDL" APL ob‐
jects with type
ID=20, 24, 28, 29
and HMIStaticText
298 5 0 808080 Dark gray Empty analog value dis‐ BorderColor Views with APL ob‐
plays jects with type
ID=21, 25, 26
299 5 0 00B500 Bright lime Binary value on: Back‐ OnBackColor, Views with APL ob‐
green ground color State1BackColor jects with type
ID=17,18¹³,120
300 6 0 00FF00 Pure lime Binary value on: Fill pat‐ OnFillColor, State1Fill‐ Views with APL ob‐
green tern color Color jects with type
ID=17,18¹³,120

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


338 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color name Description Property(ies) [attribute Types views/
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name] objects
cy
301 6 0 FFFFFF White Binary value on: Font OnFontColor, Views with APL ob‐
color State1FontColor jects with type
ID=17,18¹³,120
302 6 0 FFFFFF White Binary value off: Back‐ OffBackColor, Views with APL ob‐
ground color State2BackColor jects with type
ID=17,18¹³,120
303 6 0 DADADA Very light Binary value off: Fill pat‐ OffFillColor, State2Fill‐ Views with APL ob‐
gray tern color Color jects with type
ID=17,18¹³,120
304 6 0 000000 Black Binary value off: Font OffFontColor, Views with APL ob‐
color State2FontColor jects with type
ID=17,18¹³,120
305 6 0 808080 Dark gray Binary value: Border BorderColor Views with APL ob‐
color jects with type
ID=17,18¹³,120
306 6 0 B6B6B6 Gray Binary value preview: BackColor Preview, APL ob‐
Background color jects with type
ID=14
307 6 0 DADADA Very light Binary value preview: FillColor Preview, APL ob‐
gray Fill pattern color jects with type
ID=14
308 6 0 000000 Black Binary value preview: FontColor Preview, APL ob‐
Font color jects with type
ID=14
309 6 0 808080 Dark gray Binary value preview: BorderColor Preview, APL ob‐
Border color jects with type
ID=14
310 6 0 00B500 Bright lime Status display "On" State1BackColor… Standard view,
green mode: background col‐ State7BackColor APL objects with
or type ID=11
311 6 0 00FF00 Pure lime Status display "On" State1FillColor… Standard view,
green mode: fill pattern color State7FillColor APL objects with
type ID=11
312 6 0 FFFFFF White Status display "On" State1FontColor… Standard view,
mode: font color State7FontColor APL objects with
type ID=11
313 6 0 FFFFFF White Status display "Manual" State1BackColor… Standard view,
mode: background col‐ State7BackColor APL objects with
or type ID=11
314 6 0 CECECE Light gray Status display "Manual" State1FillColor… Standard view,
mode: fill pattern color State7FillColor APL objects with
type ID=11
315 6 0 000000 Black Status display "Manual" State1FontColor… Standard view,
mode: font color State7FontColor APL objects with
type ID=11
316 6 0 00FF00 Pure lime Status display "Auto‐ State1BackColor… Standard view,
green matic" mode: back‐ State7BackColor APL objects with
ground color type ID=11

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 339
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color name Description Property(ies) [attribute Types views/
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name] objects
cy
317 6 0 008500 Dark lime Status display "Auto‐ State1FillColor… Standard view,
green matic" mode: fill pattern State7FillColor APL objects with
color type ID=11
318 6 0 FFFFFF White Status display "Auto‐ State1FontColor… Standard view,
matic" mode: font color State7FontColor APL objects with
type ID=11
319 6 0 00CECA Bright cyan Status display "Local" State1BackColor… Standard view,
mode: background col‐ State7BackColor APL objects with
or type ID=11
320 7 0 00FFFA Pure cyan Status display "Local" State1FillColor… Standard view,
mode: fill pattern color State7FillColor APL objects with
type ID=11
321 7 0 000000 Black Status display "Local" State1FontColor… Standard view,
mode: font color State7FontColor APL objects with
type ID=11
322 7 0 0000FF Pure blue Status display "Pro‐ State1BackColor… Standard view,
gramm MV/SP" mode: State7BackColor APL objects with
background color type ID=11
323 7 0 98BDFF Very light Status display "Pro‐ State1FillColor… Standard view,
blue gramm MV/SP" mode: State7FillColor APL objects with
fill pattern color type ID=11
324 7 0 FFFFFF White Status display "Pro‐ State1FontColor… Standard view,
gramm MV/SP" mode: State7FontColor APL objects with
font color type ID=11
325 7 0 919191 Dark gray Status display "Out of State1BackColor… Standard view,
service" mode: back‐ State7BackColor APL objects with
ground color type ID=11
326 7 0 CECECE Light gray Status display "Out of State1FillColor… Standard view,
service" mode: fill pat‐ State7FillColor APL objects with
tern color type ID=11
327 7 0 000000 Black Status display "Out of State1FontColor… Standard view,
service" mode: font col‐ State7FontColor APL objects with
or type ID=11
328 7 0 808080 Dark gray Status display operat‐ BorderColor Standard view,
ing mode: Border color APL objects with
type ID=11
329 7 0 FFFFFF White Status display control State1BackColor… Mostly standard/
command State7BackColor parameter view/
"Stop"/"Close"/"Off"/"Pa preview, APL ob‐
use"/"Cancel"/"Reques‐ jects with type
ted"/"No": background ID=10, 11, 15
color
330 7 0 DADADA Very light Status display control State1FillColor… Mostly standard/
gray command State7FillColor parameter view/
"Stop"/"Close"/"Off"/"Pa preview, APL ob‐
use"/"Cancel"/"Reques‐ jects with type
ted"/"No": fill pattern ID=10, 11, 15
color

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


340 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color name Description Property(ies) [attribute Types views/
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name] objects
cy
331 7 0 000000 Black Status display control State1FontColor… Mostly standard/
command State7FontColor parameter view/
"Stop"/"Close"/"Off"/"Pa preview, APL ob‐
use"/"Cancel"/"Reques‐ jects with type
ted"/"No": font color ID=10, 11, 15
332 7 0 00B500 Bright lime Status display control State1BackColor… Mostly standard/
green command State7BackColor parameter view/
"Start"/"Open"/"On"/"Co preview, APL ob‐
ntinue"/"Ac‐ jects with type
tive"/"ready"/"Yes": ID=10, 11, 15, 19
background color
333 7 0 00FF00 Pure lime Status display control State1FillColor… Mostly standard/
green command State7FillColor parameter view/
"Start"/"Open"/"On"/"Co preview, APL ob‐
ntinue"/"Ac‐ jects with type
tive"/"ready"/"Yes": fill ID=10, 11, 15, 19
pattern color
334 7 0 FFFFFF White Status display control State1FontColor… Mostly standard/
command State7FontColor parameter view/
"Start"/"Open"/"On"/"Co preview, APL ob‐
ntinue"/"Ac‐ jects with type
tive"/"ready"/"Yes": font ID=10, 11, 15, 19
color
335 7 0 FF0000 Pure red Status display control State1BackColor… Standard view,
command "Rapid stop": State7BackColor APL objects with
background color type ID=10, 15
336 7 0 FF8296 Very light Status display control State1FillColor… Standard view,
red command "Rapid stop": State7FillColor APL objects with
fill pattern color type ID=10, 15
337 7 0 000000 Black Status display control State1FontColor… Standard view,
command "Rapid stop": State7FontColor APL objects with
font color type ID=10, 15
338 7 0 FFFFFF White Status display control State1BackColor… Standard view,
command "Internal": State7BackColor APL objects with
background color type ID=11
339 7 0 CECECE Light gray Status display control State1FillColor… Standard view,
command "Internal": fill State7FillColor APL objects with
pattern color type ID=11
340 8 0 000000 Black Status display control State1FontColor… Standard view,
command "Internal": State7FontColor APL objects with
font color type ID=11
341 8 0 0000FF Pure blue Status display control State1BackColor… Standard view,
command "External": State7BackColor APL objects with
background color type ID=10, 11, 15
342 8 0 98BDFF Very light Status display control State1FillColor… Standard view,
blue command "External": State7FillColor APL objects with
fill pattern color type ID=10, 11, 15
343 8 0 FFFFFF White Status display control State1FontColor… Standard view,
command "External": State7FontColor APL objects with
font color type ID=10, 11, 15

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 341
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color name Description Property(ies) [attribute Types views/
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name] objects
cy
344 8 0 808080 Dark gray Status display control BorderColor Standard view,
command: Border color APL objects with
type ID=10, 11, 15
345 8 0 000000 Black Status display error BackColor, Standard view,
("End position error", State1BackColor… mostly APL ob‐
"Control error", "Invalid State7BackColor jects with type
Signal", "Changeover ID=12
error", "Motor protec‐
tion", "Torque active",
"External error", "CPI in‐
valid", "Changeover er‐
ror", "Fluttering"): Back‐
ground color
346 8 0 919191 Dark gray Status display error FillColor, State1Fill‐ Standard view,
("End position error", Color… State7FillCol‐ mostly APL ob‐
"Control error", "Invalid or jects with type
Signal", "Changeover ID=12
error", "Motor protec‐
tion", "Torque active",
"External error", "CPI in‐
valid", "Changeover er‐
ror", "Fluttering"): Fill
pattern color
347 8 0 FFFF00 Pure yellow Status display error FontColor, Standard view,
("End position error", State1FontColor… mostly APL ob‐
"Control error", "Invalid State7FontColor jects with type
Signal", "Changeover ID=12
error", "Motor protec‐
tion", "Torque active",
"External error", "CPI in‐
valid", "Changeover er‐
ror", "Fluttering"): Font
color
348 8 0 919191 Dark gray Status display AS block BackColor, Standard view,
state ("Forced", "Re‐ State1BackColor… mostly APL ob‐
quest 0/1", "Tracking", State7BackColor jects with type
"Optimizing", "Output ID=12, 13
…"[5], "Fuzzy...", "Safe‐
ty mode", "End", "Tar‐
ing", "Dribbling",
"Paused", "Off"[6], "…
Trigger", "Disabled",
"SP/MV ramp active"):
Background color

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


342 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color name Description Property(ies) [attribute Types views/
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name] objects
cy
349 8 0 DADADA Very light Status display AS block FillColor, State1Fill‐ Standard view,
gray state ("Forced", "Re‐ Color… State7FillCol‐ mostly APL ob‐
quest 0/1", "Tracking", or jects with type
"Optimizing", "Output ID=12, 13
…"[7], "Fuzzy...", "Safe‐
ty mode", "End", "Tar‐
ing", "Dribbling",
"Paused", "Off"[8], "…
Trigger", "Disabled",
"SP/MV ramp active"):
Fill pattern color
350 8 0 000000 Black Status display AS block FontColor, Standard view,
state ("Forced", "Re‐ State1FontColor… mostly APL ob‐
quest 0/1", "Tracking", State7FontColor jects with type
"Optimizing", "Output ID=12, 13
…"[9], "Fuzzy...", "Safe‐
ty mode", "End", "Tar‐
ing", "Dribbling",
"Paused", "Off"[10], "…
Trigger", "Disabled",
"SP/MV ramp active"):
Font color
351 8 0 FF0000 Pure red Status display alarm BackColor, Standard view,
("Flow", "Underdosed", State1BackColor… mostly APL ob‐
"Overdosed"): Back‐ State7BackColor jects with type
ground color ID=12, 13
352 8 0 FFFFFF White Status display alarm FillColor, State1Fill‐ Standard view,
("Flow", "Underdosed", Color… State7FillCol‐ mostly APL ob‐
"Overdosed"): Fill pat‐ or jects with type
tern color ID=12, 13
353 8 0 000000 Black Status display alarm FontColor, Standard view,
("Flow", "Underdosed", State1FontColor… mostly APL ob‐
"Overdosed"): Font col‐ State7FontColor jects with type
or ID=12, 13
354 8 0 00B500 Dark lime Status display enabled BackColor, Standard view,
green ("On"[11],"Ena‐ State1BackColor… mostly APL ob‐
bled","… dosing"): State7BackColor jects with type
Background color ID=12, 13, 15
355 8 0 00FF00 Pure lime Status display enabled FillColor, State1Fill‐ Standard view,
green ("On"[12],"Ena‐ Color… State7FillCol‐ mostly APL ob‐
bled","… dosing"): Fill or jects with type
pattern color ID=12, 13, 15
356 8 0 FFFFFF White Status display enabled FontColor, Standard view,
("On"[13],"Ena‐ State1FontColor… mostly APL ob‐
bled","… dosing"): Font State7FontColor jects with type
color ID=12, 13, 15
357 8 0 DADADA Very light Status display disabled BackColor, Standard view,
gray ("Off"[14]): Background State1BackColor… mostly APL ob‐
color State7BackColor jects with type
ID=12, 13, 15

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 343
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color name Description Property(ies) [attribute Types views/
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name] objects
cy
358 8 0 FFFFFF White Status display disabled FillColor, State1Fill‐ Standard view,
("Off"): Fill pattern color Color… State7FillCol‐ mostly APL ob‐
or jects with type
ID=12, 13, 15
359 8 0 000000 Black Status display disabled FontColor, Standard view,
("Off"): Font color State1FontColor… mostly APL ob‐
State7FontColor jects with type
ID=12, 13, 15
360 9 0 FFFA00 Pure yellow Status display impor‐ BackColor, Standard/parame‐
tant AS block informa‐ State1BackColor… ter view, mostly
tion ("Simulation", State7BackColor APL objects with
"Process excitation", type ID=12, 13
"Time delay"): Back‐
ground color
361 9 0 FFFFFF White Status display impor‐ FillColor, State1Fill‐ Standard/parame‐
tant AS block informa‐ Color… State7FillCol‐ ter view, mostly
tion ("Simulation", or APL objects with
"Process excitation", type ID=12, 13
"Time delay"): Fill pat‐
tern color
362 9 0 000000 Black Status display impor‐ FontColor, Standard/parame‐
tant AS block informa‐ State1FontColor… ter view, mostly
tion ("Simulation", State7FontColor APL objects with
"Process excitation", type ID=12, 13
"Time delay"): Font col‐
or
363 9 0 0000FF Pure blue Status display mainte‐ BackColor, Standard view,
nance ("Maintenance"): State1BackColor… mostly APL ob‐
Background color State7BackColor jects with type
ID=12, 13
364 9 0 96BBFF Very light Status display mainte‐ FillColor, State1Fill‐ Standard view,
blue nance ("Maintenance"): Color… State7FillCol‐ mostly APL ob‐
Fill pattern color or jects with type
ID=12, 13
365 9 0 000000 Black Status display mainte‐ FontColor, Standard view,
nance ("Maintenance"): State1FontColor… mostly APL ob‐
Font color State7FontColor jects with type
ID=12, 13
366 9 0 808080 Dark gray Status display error, ..., BorderColor Standard view /
Maintenance: Border preview, mostly
color APL objects with
type ID=11-13, 15
367 9 0 DADADA Very light Interlock, display of in‐ BackColor Standard view in‐
gray put values (BOOL): terlock, APL ob‐
Background color jects with type
ID=100
368 9 0 CECECE Light gray Interlock, display of in‐ FillColor Standard view in‐
put values (BOOL): Fill terlock, APL ob‐
pattern color jects with type
ID=100

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


344 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color name Description Property(ies) [attribute Types views/
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name] objects
cy
369 9 0 000000 Black Interlock, display of in‐ FontColor Standard view in‐
put values (BOOL): terlock, APL ob‐
Font color jects with type
ID=100
370 9 0 808080 Dark gray Interlock, display of in‐ BorderColor Standard view in‐
put values (BOOL): Bor‐ terlock, APL ob‐
der color jects with type
ID=100
371 9 0 919191 Dark gray Interlock, display of in‐ SeparatorBackColor Standard view in‐
put values (BOOL): terlock, APL ob‐
Background color sepa‐ jects with type
rator ID=100
372 9 0 00FF00 Pure lime Interlock, status "1" for SetBackColor Standard view in‐
green further processing: terlock, APL ob‐
Background color jects with type
ID=101
373 9 0 00B500 Dark lime Interlock, status "1" for SetFillColor Standard view in‐
green further processing: Fill terlock, APL ob‐
pattern color jects with type
ID=101
374 9 0 FFFFFF White Interlock, status "0" for ResetBackColor Standard view in‐
further processing: terlock, APL ob‐
Background color jects with type
ID=101
375 9 0 B6B6B6 Gray Interlock, status "0" for ResetFillColor Standard view in‐
further processing: Fill terlock, APL ob‐
pattern color jects with type
ID=101
376 9 0 0000FF Pure blue Interlock, status "By‐ BypassBackColor Standard view in‐
passed" (excluded) for terlock, APL ob‐
further processing: jects with type
Background color ID=101
377 9 0 00A2E8 Pure blue Interlock, status "By‐ BypassFillColor Standard view in‐
passed" (excluded) for terlock, APL ob‐
further processing: Fill jects with type
pattern color ID=101
378 9 0 FFFFFF White Interlock, status for fur‐ ForeColor Standard view in‐
ther processing: Font terlock, APL ob‐
color jects with type
ID=101
379 9 0 6D6D6D Very dark Interlock, status for fur‐ BorderColor Standard view in‐
gray ther processing: Border terlock, APL ob‐
color jects with type
ID=101
380 10 0 B6B6B6 Gray Interlock, "Not used" Set5BackColor Standard view in‐
status of the output sig‐ terlock, APL ob‐
nal of the interlock jects with type
block: Background color ID=103

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 345
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color name Description Property(ies) [attribute Types views/
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name] objects
cy
381 10 0 DADADA Very light Interlock, "Not used" Set5FillColor Standard view in‐
gray status of the output sig‐ terlock, APL ob‐
nal of the interlock jects with type
block: Fill pattern color ID=103
382 10 0 0000FF Pure blue Interlock, "Not used" Set4BackColor Standard view in‐
status of the output sig‐ terlock, APL ob‐
nal of the interlock jects with type
block: Background color ID=103
383 10 0 00A2E8 Pure blue Interlock, "Not used" Set4FillColor Standard view in‐
status of the output sig‐ terlock, APL ob‐
nal of the interlock jects with type
block: Fill pattern color ID=103
384 10 0 E4D400 Pure yellow Interlock, "Simulation" Set2BackColor Standard view in‐
status of the output sig‐ terlock, APL ob‐
nal of the interlock jects with type
block: Background color ID=103
385 10 0 FFFF00 Pure yellow Interlock, "Simulation" Set2FillColor Standard view in‐
status of the output sig‐ terlock, APL ob‐
nal of the interlock jects with type
block: Fill pattern color ID=103
386 10 0 00B500 Bright lime Interlock, "Unlocked" Set1BackColor Standard view in‐
green status of the output sig‐ terlock, APL ob‐
nal of the interlock jects with type
block: Background color ID=103
387 10 0 00FF00 Pure lime Interlock, "Unlocked" Set1FillColor Standard view in‐
green status of the output sig‐ terlock, APL ob‐
nal of the interlock jects with type
block: Fill pattern color ID=103
388 10 0 E60000 Pure red Interlock, "Locked" sta‐ Set3BackColor Standard view in‐
tus of the output signal terlock, APL ob‐
of the interlock block: jects with type
Background color ID=103
389 10 0 FF0000 Pure red Interlock, "Locked" sta‐ Set3FillColor Standard view in‐
tus of the output signal terlock, APL ob‐
of the interlock block: jects with type
Fill pattern color ID=103
390 10 0 000000 Black Interlock, status of the ForeColor Standard view in‐
output signal of the in‐ terlock, APL ob‐
terlock block: Font color jects with type
ID=103
391 10 0 919191 Dark gray Interlock, status of the BorderColor Standard view in‐
output signal of the in‐ terlock, APL ob‐
terlock block: Border jects with type
color ID=103
392 10 0 850082 Dark ma‐ Interlock, "First signal" BackColor Standard view in‐
genta status display: Back‐ terlock, APL ob‐
ground color jects with type
ID=102

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


346 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color name Description Property(ies) [attribute Types views/
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name] objects
cy
393 10 0 CD51FF Light purple Interlock, "First signal" FillColor Standard view in‐
status display: Fill pat‐ terlock, APL ob‐
tern color jects with type
ID=102
394 10 0 808080 Dark gray Interlock, "First signal" BorderColor Standard view in‐
status display: Border terlock, APL ob‐
color jects with type
ID=102
395 10 0 00B500 Bright lime Interlock, "Unlocked" OnStateColor Standard view in‐
green status of the block out‐ terlock, APL ob‐
put: Line color jects with type
ID=104
396 10 0 FFFFFF White Interlock, "Locked" sta‐ OffStateColor Standard view in‐
tus of the block output: terlock, APL ob‐
Line color jects with type
ID=104
397 10 0 B6B6B6 Gray Interlock, block rectan‐ BackgroundColor Standard view in‐
gle: Background color terlock, HMIRec‐
tangle
398 10 0 DADADA Very light Interlock, block rectan‐ FillPatternColor Standard view in‐
gray gle: Fill pattern color terlock, HMIRec‐
tangle
399 10 0 919191 Dark gray Interlock, block rectan‐ BorderColor Standard view in‐
gle: Border color terlock, HMIRec‐
tangle
400 11 0 00B500 Bright lime Bar chart, analog proc‐ ValueColor Standard/setpoint
green ess value: Background view, APL objects
color with type ID=71
401 11 0 00FF00 Pure lime Bar chart, analog proc‐ ValueFillColor Standard/setpoint
green ess value: Fill pattern view, APL objects
color with type ID=71
402 11 0 0000FF Pure blue Bar chart, analog set‐ ValueColor, FontColor Standard/setpoint
point: Background col‐ view, APL objects
or, foreground color with type ID=70,
80, 81
403 11 0 98BDFF Very light Bar chart, analog set‐ ValueFillColor Standard/setpoint
blue point: Fill pattern color view, APL objects
with type ID=70
404 11 0 D27A00 Bright or‐ Bar chart, changed an‐ ValueColor, FontColor Standard view,
ange alog variable: Back‐ APL objects with
ground color, fore‐ type ID=72, 82, 83
ground color
405 11 0 FFC848 Light or‐ Bar chart, changed an‐ ValueFillColor Standard view,
ange alog variable: Fill pat‐ APL objects with
tern color type ID=72
406 11 0 008582 Dark cyan Bar chart, analog read- ValueColor Standard view,
back value: Back‐ APL objects with
ground color type ID=71, 73

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 347
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color name Description Property(ies) [attribute Types views/
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name] objects
cy
407 11 0 00CECA Bright cyan Bar chart, analog read- ValueFillColor Standard view,
back value: Fill pattern APL objects with
color type ID=71, 73
408 11 0 008582 Dark cyan Bar chart, predicted val‐ ValueColor Standard view,
ue: Background color APL objects with
type ID=75
409 11 0 00CECA Bright cyan Bar chart, predicted val‐ ValueFillColor Standard view,
ue: Fill pattern color APL objects with
type ID=75
410 11 0 000000 Black Bar chart, message gra‐ ValueColor, AlarmCol‐ Standard view,
dient value or limit (with‐ or, WarningColor APL objects with
out alarm): Background type ID=74 or
color 71[15]
411 11 0 6D6D6D Very dark Bar chart, gradient val‐ ValueFillColor Standard view,
gray ue: Fill pattern color APL objects with
type ID=74
412 11 0 808080 Dark gray Bar chart: Border color BorderColor Standard/setpoint
view, APL objects
with type ID=7075
413 11 0 62ACAA Mostly un‐ Selection rectangle op‐ BackgroundColor All views with oper‐
saturated eration: Background ation, HMIRectan‐
dark cyan color gle object name
"rect_selectionBor‐
der"
414 11 0 B1CFCD Gray cyan Selection rectangle op‐ FillColor All views with oper‐
eration: Fill pattern color ation, HMIRectan‐
gle object name
"rect_selectionBor‐
der"
415 11 0 808080 Dark gray Selection rectangle op‐ BorderColor All views with oper‐
eration: Border color ation, HMIRectan‐
gle object name
"rect_selectionBor‐
der"
416 11 0 808080 Dark gray Dividing line: Border BorderColor All views with divid‐
color ing line, HMILine

[1] Note: Also types without messages have an empty group display
[2] Note: Only important for the "Next" button
[3] "Lock"/"Acknowledgement"/"Attach"/"Back to process picture" buttons; "Attach" button in
the operating area
[4] In the standard view Ratio
[5] Used in type ID = 17, 18, 120
[6] In the standard view DoseL
[7] In the standard view Ratio
[8] In the standard view DoseL

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


348 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

[9] In the standard view Ratio


[10] In the standard view DoseL
[11] In the standard view OpDi01, OpDi03, display the confirmation of the command
[12] In the standard view OpDi01, OpDi03, display the confirmation of the command
[13] Not used, only in @PCS7ElementsAPL.pdl
[14] In the standard view OpDi01, OpDi03, display the confirmation of the command
[15] In @PG_CntOhSc_Standard.PDL

Color indexes for trends


The following color indexes can be created for trends:

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color name Description Property(ies) [attribute Type block icons
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name]
cy
417 11 0 00CE00 Bright lime Actual value TrendColor1 - Trend‐ Trend view
green Color12
418 11 0 0000FF Pure blue Setpoint TrendColor1 - Trend‐ Trend view
Color12
419 11 0 E69100 Pure or‐ Changed variable TrendColor1 - Trend‐ Trend view
ange Color12
420 12 0 008582 Dark cyan Read-back value TrendColor1 - 1Trend‐ Trend view
Color12
421 12 0 00CE00 Bright lime Controller, closed loop TrendColor8 Trend view control‐
green ler
422 12 0 000000 Black Controller, input for con‐ TrendColor7 Trend view control‐
trol performance index ler
(CPI)
423 12 0 000000 Black Controller, binary mes‐ TrendColor3, Trend‐ Trend view control‐
sage "violated"1 Color4, TrendColor9, ler
TrendColor10
424 12 0 B100B5 Bright ma‐ Controller, control per‐ TrendColor1 Trend view Con‐
genta formance index (CPI) PerMon
425 12 0 E69100 Pure or‐ Ratio, analog input "In" TrendColor1 Trend view Ratio
ange
426 12 0 00FF00 Pure lime Ratio, input for process TrendColor2 Trend view Ratio
green variable "InPV"
427 12 0 0000FF Pure blue Ratio, process value of TrendColor3 Trend view Ratio
the secondary compo‐
nent "SecComPV"
428 12 0 B100B5 Bright ma‐ Ratio, output "Out" TrendColor4 Trend view Ratio
genta
429 12 0 FF0000 Pure red Ratio, current ratio "Ra‐ TrendColor5 Trend view Ratio
tioPV"

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 349
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color name Description Property(ies) [attribute Type block icons
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name]
cy
430 12 0 6D6D6D Very dark Ratio, applied ratio (Ra‐ TrendColor6 Trend view Ratio
gray tioInt or RatioExt) "Ra‐
tioOut"
431 12 0 009D00 Dark lime Dosing, dosing amount TrendColor3 Trend view Dosing
green
432 12 0 FF0000 Pure red Monitoring, gradient TrendColor2 Trend view Mo‐
value nAnL
433 12 0 E69100 Pure or‐ Monitoring, output 1 TrendColor1 Trend view Mon‐
ange Di08, MonDiL,
MonDiS
434 12 0 00CE00 Bright lime Monitoring, output 2 TrendColor2 Trend view Mon‐
green Di08
435 12 0 0000FF Pure blue Monitoring, output 3 TrendColor3 Trend view Mon‐
Di08
436 12 0 B100B5 Bright ma‐ Monitoring, output 4 TrendColor4 Trend view Mon‐
genta Di08
437 12 0 FF0000 Pure red Monitoring, output 5 TrendColor5 Trend view Mon‐
Di08
438 12 0 494949 Very dark Monitoring, output 6 TrendColor6 Trend view Mon‐
gray Di08
439 12 0 543500 Very dark Monitoring, output 7 TrendColor7 Trend view Mon‐
orange Di08
440 13 0 005400 Very dark Monitoring, output 8 TrendColor8 Trend view Mon‐
lime green Di08
441 13 0 00CE00 Bright lime Monitoring, flutter value TrendColor2 Trend view Mon‐
green DiL
442 13 0 E69100 Pure or‐ Operation, binary out‐ TrendColor1 Operation, trend
ange put / binary output 1 view binary
443 13 0 494949 Very dark Operation, binary out‐ TrendColor2 Operation, trend
gray put 2 view binary
444 13 0 0000FF Pure blue Operation, binary out‐ TrendColor3 Operation, trend
put 3 view binary
445 13 0 B100B5 Bright ma‐ Operation, binary feed‐ TrendColor4 Operation, trend
genta back 1 view binary
446 13 0 FF0000 Pure red Operation, binary feed‐ TrendColor5 Operation, trend
back 2 view binary
447 13 0 00CE00 Bright lime Operation, binary feed‐ TrendColor2, Trend‐ Operation, trend
green back / binary feedback Color6 view binary
3
448 13 0 0000FF Pure blue Actuators, valve control TrendColor1 - Trend‐ Trend view Valve
output Color4, TrendColor6
449 13 0 000000 Black Actuators, valve feed‐ TrendColor1 Trend view Valve
back open
450 13 0 6D6D6D Very dark Actuators, valve feed‐ TrendColor2 Trend view Valve
gray back close

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


350 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color name Description Property(ies) [attribute Type block icons
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name]
cy
451 13 0 005400 Very dark Actuators, valve feed‐ TrendColor1, Trend‐ Trend view
lime green back Color3, TrendColor5, Vlv2WayL
TrendColor7
452 13 0 E69100 Pure or‐ Actuators, open valve TrendColor1 Trend view
ange output VlvMotL
453 13 0 00CE00 Bright lime Actuators, close valve TrendColor2 Trend view
green output VlvMotL
454 13 0 0000FF Pure blue Actuators, valve feed‐ TrendColor3 Trend view
back open VlvMotL
455 13 0 B100B5 Bright ma‐ Actuators, valve feed‐ TrendColor4 Trend view
genta back close VlvMotL
456 13 0 FF0000 Pure red Actuators, valve feed‐ TrendColor5 Trend view
back open VlvMotL
457 13 0 005400 Very dark Actuators, valve feed‐ TrendColor6 Trend view
lime green back close VlvMotL
458 13 0 E69100 Pure or‐ Actuators, motor start TrendColor1 Trend view
ange output MotL/MotS
459 13 0 00CE00 Bright lime Actuators, motor feed‐ TrendColor2 Trend view
green back MotL/MotS
460 14 0 E69100 Pure or‐ Drives, motor start TrendColor1 Trend view
ange Speed1 / forward MotSpdL/Mo‐
tRevL/
MotSpdCL
461 14 0 00CE00 Bright lime Drives, motor start TrendColor2 Trend view
green Speed2 / reverse MotSpdL/Mo‐
tRevL/
MotSpdCL
462 14 0 0000FF Pure blue Drives, feedback TrendColor3 Trend view
Speed1 / forward MotSpdL/MotRevL
463 14 0 B100B5 Bright ma‐ Drives, feedback TrendColor4 Trend view
genta Speed2 / reverse MotSpdL/MotRevL
464 14 0 00FFFA Pure cyan Drives, feedback for‐ TrendColor3 Trend view
ward MotSpdCL
465 14 0 B100B5 Bright ma‐ Drives, feedback re‐ TrendColor4 Trend view
genta verse MotSpdCL
466 14 0 E69100 Pure or‐ Count: Output TrendColor1 Trend view Coun‐
ange ter
467 14 0 E69100 Pure or‐ Count / time: Unit on TrendColor1 CountOh / Time‐
ange Trig
468 14 0 005400 Very dark Count / time: Count type TrendColor7 CountOh / Time‐
lime green Trig
469 14 0 E69100 Pure or‐ Count / time: Count type TrendColor1 Trend view
ange CntOhSc
470 14 0 00CE00 Bright lime Count / time: Unit on TrendColor2 Trend view
green CntOhSc
471 14 0 005400 Very dark Count: Service life TrendColor7 Trend view
lime green CntOhSc

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 351
Basics of APL
2.3 Functions of the faceplates

Color Sec‐ Trans‐ HTML code Color name Description Property(ies) [attribute Type block icons
index tion paren‐ (RGB) name]
cy
472 14 0 6D6D6D Very dark Count: Count TrendColor8 Trend view
gray CntOhSc
473 14 0 0000FF Pure blue Statusdisplay operation State1BackColor Mostly In Parame‐
command - Release for ter view APL ob‐
Maintenance” (“Yes”): jects with Type‐
background color ID=11
474 14 0 FFFFFF White Statusdisplay operation State1FillColor Mostly In Parame‐
command - Release for ter view APL ob‐
Maintenance” (“Yes”): jects with Type‐
filling pattern color ID=11
475 14 0 FFFFFF White Statusdisplay operation State1FontColor Mostly In Parame‐
command -Release for ter view APL ob‐
Maintenance (“Yes”): jects with Type‐
font color ID=11
476 14 0 919191 Dark gray Statusdisplay (“Not State1BackColor… Mostly In
Ready”, “None”, “No”): State7BackColor ShrdResS Stand‐
background color ard \Preview view
APL objects with
TypeID=11,19
477 14 0 DADADA Very light Statusdisplay (“Not State1FillColor… Mostly In
gray Ready”, “None”,”No”): State7FillColor ShrdResS Stand‐
filling pattern color ard \Preview view
APL objects with
TypeID=11,19
478 14 0 000000 Black Statusdisplay (“Not State1FontColor… Mostly In
Ready”, “None”,”No”): State7FontColor ShrdResS Stand‐
font color ard \Preview view
APL objects with
TypeID=11,19
1
For example, PIDConL "PV_ToleHi#Value", ".MV_HiAct#Value"
2
ModPreCon=@PG_APL_TrendMPC.PDL; MPC10x10=@PG_APL_TrendMPC_L.PDL

Note
If these colors were changed only via the OS project editor, the default values can be assigned
again.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


352 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.4 PCS 7 measuring point browser

2.4 PCS 7 measuring point browser

2.4.1 Overview of the "PCS 7 measuring point browser" window

Overview
The "PCS 7 measuring point browser" window displays all relevant status information of the
APL function blocks.

(1) "Selection of states"


This area displays all possible states of APL function blocks. All state icons are shown in their
respective status group frames. The group name is displayed in the tooltip when the mouse
pointer is hovered in the area between the state icon and the group frame. You can select/
deselect one or more states from any status group by clicking the icon. The status information
of the selected states is displayed in the status area.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 353
Basics of APL
2.4 PCS 7 measuring point browser

The following states are displayed in this area:

Icon State Status group


Out of service Operating mode

On mode

Manual mode

Automatic mode

Program mode

Local mode

Internal setpoint Setpoint

External setpoint

Ramp active

Manipulated value Signal status

Bad, device-related

Bad, process-related

Uncertain, device-related

Uncertain, process-related

Maintenance request

In progress

Tracking Tracking, Forcing and Bypass

Forcing

Bypass

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


354 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Basics of APL
2.4 PCS 7 measuring point browser

Icon State Status group


Interlock active Interlock

Interlock disabled

Rapid stop

Reset request

Active memo Memo

(2) "Selection of areas"


This area displays the top folders of the plant hierarchy. You can select/deselect one or more
areas. The status information from the selected areas is displayed in the status area.

(3) Status area


This area shows the list of blocks with their corresponding "Type", "State", and "Area"
depending on the "Selection of states" and "Selection of areas".

(4) Opening the faceplate


Double-click a row in the status area to open the corresponding faceplate.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 355
Basics of APL
2.4 PCS 7 measuring point browser

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


356 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks 3
3.1 Comparison of large & small blocks

3.1.1 OpAnL compared to OpAnS

Comparison of the OpAnL and OpAnS blocks


The following tables are intended to help you decide which block to use.

Memory and runtime savings of the small block compared to the large block
You save the following resources for each instance:
● Memory space: ~ 60%
● Runtime: ~ 30%

Block operating modes

OpAnL OpAnS
On (Page 72) X X
Out of service (Page 72) X X

Functions of the blocks

OpAnL OpAnS
Setpoint specification - internal/ X X
external (Page 130)
Setpoint limiting for external set‐ X
points (Page 205)
Using setpoint ramp (Page 125) X
Gradient limit of the setpoint X
(Page 126)
Forming and outputting the sig‐ X X
nal status for technologic blocks
(Page 110)
Selecting a unit of measure X X
(Page 221)
Simulating signals (Page 59) X X
Operator control permissions X X
(Page 265)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 357
Operator control blocks
3.1 Comparison of large & small blocks

OpAnL OpAnS
Display and operator input area X
for process values and setpoints
(Page 216)
Opening additional faceplates X X
(Page 217)
SIMATIC BATCH functionality X X
(Page 68)
Generating instance-specific X
messages (Page 213)
Suppressing messages using X
the MsgLock parameter
(Page 214)
Process value with separate X
scale range (Page 166)

Configurable functions using the Feature parameter

Bit Feature bit function OpAnL OpAnS


number
0 Set startup characteristics (Page 141) X X
1 Reaction to the out of service mode X X
(Page 181)
16 Process value with separate scale X
range (Page 166)
22 Update acknowledgment and error sta‐ X
tus of the message call (Page 163)
24 Enabling local operator authorization X X
(Page 162)
26 Reaction of the switching points in the X X
"Out of service" operating mode
(Page 180)

See also
Manual and automatic mode for control blocks (Page 73)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


358 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.2 OpAnL - Check and output analog signals (large)

3.2 OpAnL - Check and output analog signals (large)

3.2.1 Description of OpAnL

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1865
Family: Operate

Area of application for OpAnL


The block is used for the following applications:
● Checking and transferring analog input values

How it works
The block checks incoming, internal (entered in the faceplate) or external (CFC/SFC) analog
signals for their limits at the SP_Int or SP_Ext input and forwards them to the output SP,
depending on the setting of the SP_LiOp input parameter.

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38). The block is
also installed automatically in the startup OB (OB100).

Startup characteristics
Use the Feature Bit Set startup characteristics (Page 141) to define the startup characteristics
of this block.
The messages are suppressed after startup for the number of cycles set at RunUpCyc.

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


For a description of the individual parameters, see the section OpAnL I/Os (Page 366).

Status bit Parameter


0 Occupied
1 BatchEn
2 Not used
3 OosAct.Value
4 OosLi.Value
5 Invalid signal status
6 OnAct.Value
7 SP_UpRaAct, SP_DnRaAct limits enabled for gradient mode (SP_RateOn = 1)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 359
Operator control blocks
3.2 OpAnL - Check and output analog signals (large)

Status bit Parameter


8 SP_ExtAct.Value
9 SP_LoAct.Value
10 SP_HiAct.Value
11 - 13 Not used
14 SP_RmpOn
15 SP_RmpModTime
16 - 17 Not used
18 Feature.Bit16
19 - 21 Not used
22 1 = SP ramp active
23 - 31 Not used

See also
OpAnL functions (Page 361)
OpAnL messaging (Page 364)
OpAnL block diagram (Page 371)
OpAnL error handling (Page 364)
OpAnL modes (Page 360)

3.2.2 OpAnL modes

OpAnL modes
The block can be operated using the following modes:
● On (Page 72)
● Out of service (Page 72)

"On"
General information on the "On" mode is available in the section On (Page 72).

"Out of service"
You can find general information about the "Out of service" mode in the section Out of
service (Page 72).

See also
OpAnL I/Os (Page 366)
OpAnL messaging (Page 364)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


360 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.2 OpAnL - Check and output analog signals (large)

OpAnL error handling (Page 364)


Description of OpAnL (Page 359)
OpAnL functions (Page 361)
OpAnL block diagram (Page 371)

3.2.3 OpAnL functions

Functions of OpAnL
The functions for this block are listed below.

Suppressing messages using the MsgLock parameter


This block provides the standard function Suppressing messages using the MsgLock
parameter (Page 214)

Internal or external setpoint selection


This block provides the standard function Setpoint specification - internal/external (Page 130).

Setpoint limitation
Use the SP_HiLim and SP_LoLim input parameters to limit the setpoint to maximum and
minimum limits. If a limit is violated, the setpoint is limited to the limits you have set. If the limits
are infringed, the output parameters SP_HiAct and SP_LoAct display 1.

Using setpoint ramp


This block provides the standard function Using setpoint ramp (Page 125).

Gradient limit of the setpoint


This block provides the standard function Gradient limit of the setpoint (Page 126).

Forming the signal status for blocks


This block provides the standard function Forming and outputting the signal status for
technologic blocks (Page 110).
The worst signal status ST_Worst for the block is formed from the following parameters:
● SP_Out.ST
● PV_In.ST
● SP_Ext.ST (only if Feature.Bit10 = 1)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 361
Operator control blocks
3.2 OpAnL - Check and output analog signals (large)

The signal status of the SP_Out output parameter is always equivalent to the signal status of
input parameter SP_Ext or SP_Int, depending on how the setpoint is specified. If the internal
setpoint SP_Int is used, the signal status is always output as 16#80.
In case of Feature.Bit10 = 1, SP_Ext.ST influences ST_Worst independent of setpoint
specification.
If an external setpoint is used, the signal status 16#60 (external simulation) is suppressed
because the block acts as a sink with external simulation.

Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values


If the Feature bit Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values
(Page 190) is set to 1 and the parameter SP_Ext has bad signal status (16#00 or 16#28), the
block works with the last valid value of SP_Ext in the "On" mode.

Selecting a unit of measure


This block provides the standard function Selecting a unit of measure (Page 221).

Simulating signals
This block provides the standard function Simulating signals (Page 59).

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133) . The following functionality is
available for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
0 Set startup characteristics (Page 141)
1 Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 181)
6 Ramp rate calculation (Page 183)
10 Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values (Page 190)
12 Gradient limitation with time duration (Page 186)
16 Process value with separate scale range (Page 166)
22 Update acknowledgment and error status of the message call (Page 163)
24 Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162)

Operator permissions
This block provides the standard function Operator control permissions (Page 265).
The block has the following permissions for the OS_Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 Not used
1 1 = Operator can switch to "On" mode

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


362 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.2 OpAnL - Check and output analog signals (large)

Bit Function
2 Not used
3 1 = Operator can switch to "Out of service" mode
4-9 Not used
10 1 = Operator can switch to internal
11 1 = Operator can switch to external
12 1 = Operator can enable bumpless switchover
13 1 = Operator can change SP_Int
14 1 = Operator can enable SP_RateOn
15 1 = Operator can change SP_UpRaLim
16 1 = Operator can change SP_DnRaLim
17 1 = Operator can activate the setpoint ramp (SP_RmpOn)
18 1 = Operator can switch between specification of the duration (SP_RmpTime) and gradient
(SP_DnRaLim, SP_UpRaLim) for calculating the ramp slope
19 1 = Operator can change the time for the setpoint ramp (SP_RmpTime)
20 1 = Operator can change the target setpoint (SP_RmpTarget)
21 - 31 Not used

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Specifying the display area for process and setpoint values as well as operations
The block provides the standard function Display and operator input area for process values
and setpoints (Page 216).

Opening additional faceplates


The block provides the standard function Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


The block provides the standard function SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

See also
Description of OpAnL (Page 359)
OpAnL messaging (Page 364)
OpAnL I/Os (Page 366)
OpAnL block diagram (Page 371)
OpAnL error handling (Page 364)
OpAnL modes (Page 360)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 363
Operator control blocks
3.2 OpAnL - Check and output analog signals (large)

3.2.4 OpAnL error handling

Error handling of OpAnL


Refer to the section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum I/O can be used to output the following error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; the block is not processed.
0 There is no error.
51 Invalid signal
SP_LiOp = 1 and SP_ExtLi = 1 and SP_IntLi = 1

See also
OpAnL block diagram (Page 371)
OpAnL I/Os (Page 366)
OpAnL messaging (Page 364)
OpAnL functions (Page 361)
OpAnL modes (Page 360)
Description of OpAnL (Page 359)

3.2.5 OpAnL messaging

Messaging
The following messages can be generated for this block:
● Process messages

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


364 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.2 OpAnL - Check and output analog signals (large)

Process messages

Message in‐ Message identifier Message class Event


stance
MsgEvId SIG 1 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External message 1
SIG 2 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External message 2
SIG 3 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External message 3
SIG 4 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External message 4
SIG 5 Reserved $$BlockComment$$
Reserved
SIG 6 Reserved $$BlockComment$$
Reserved
SIG 7 Reserved $$BlockComment$$
Reserved
SIG 8 Reserved $$BlockComment$$
Reserved

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId

Associated value Block parameters


1 BatchName
2 StepNo
3 BatchID
4 ExtVa104
5 ExtVa105
6 ExtVa106
7 ExtVa107

The associated values 4 ... 7 are allocated to the parameters ExtVa104 ... ExtVa107 and
can be used. Additional information is available in the "Process Control System PCS 7 -
Engineering System" manual.

See also
OpAnL error handling (Page 364)
OpAnL modes (Page 360)
OpAnL block diagram (Page 371)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 365
Operator control blocks
3.2 OpAnL - Check and output analog signals (large)

3.2.6 OpAnL I/Os

OpAnL I/Os

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation BOOL 0
BatchID Batch ID DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name S7-String
EN 1 = Called block will be BOOL 1
processed
ExtMsg1 Binary input for freely STRUCT -
selectable message 1 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg2 Binary input for freely STRUCT -
selectable message 2 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg3 Binary input for freely STRUCT -
selectable message 3 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg4 Binary input for freely STRUCT -
selectable message 4 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtVa104 Associated value 4 for ANY
messages (MsgEvID1)
ExtVa105 Associated value 5 for ANY
messages (MsgEvID1)
ExtVa106 Associated value 6 for ANY
messages (MsgEvID1)
ExtVa107 Associated value 7 for ANY
messages (MsgEvID1)
Feature I/O for additional func‐ STRUCT -
tions (Page 361) ● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
MsgEvId Message number (as‐ DWORD 16#00000000
signed automatically)
Occupied 1 = Occupied by batch BOOL 0
control
OnOp* 1 = "On" mode via oper‐ BOOL 0
ator

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


366 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.2 OpAnL - Check and output analog signals (large)

Parameter Description Type Default


OosLi 1 = "Out of service", via STRUCT -
interconnection or SFC ● Value: BOOL ● 0
(0-1 edge transition)
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosOp* 1 = "Out of service", via BOOL 0
OS operator
OpSt_In Input parameter for lo‐ DWORD 16#00000000
cal operating permis‐
sion, connected with the
Out output parameter
of the upstream block,
OpStations (Page 423)
OS_Perm I/O for operating permis‐ STRUCT -
sions (Page 361) ● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● ... ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
PV_In Process value STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
PV_Unit Unit of measure for INT 1001
process value
PV_OpScale* OS display range for STRUCT -
process value ● High: REAL ● 100.0
● Low: REAL ● 0.0
RunUpCyc Number of cycles in INT 3
startup; messages are
suppressed during
these cycles
SampleTime Sampling time [s] (as‐ REAL 0.1
signed automatically)
SP_DnRaLim* Limit (low) for the gradi‐ REAL 100.0
ent of the setpoint
[Unit/Time unit]
Time unit depends on
TimeFactor
SP_Ext external setpoint - (to in‐ STRUCT -
terconnection) ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExtLi 1 = Select internal set‐ STRUCT -
point (via interconnec‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
tion)
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExtOp* 1 = Select external set‐ BOOL 0
point (via operator)
SP_HiLim Limit (high) of setpoint REAL 100.0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 367
Operator control blocks
3.2 OpAnL - Check and output analog signals (large)

Parameter Description Type Default


SP_LiDnRaLim Linkable limit (low) for REAL 100.0
the gradient of the set‐
point [Unit/(Time unit)]
Time unit depends on
TimeFactor
SP_LiRmpTime Linkable time REAL 0.0
[Time unit] for gradient
limitation in ramp mode
duration
Time unit depends on
TimeFactor
SP_LiUpRaLim Linkable gradient limit REAL 100.0
(high) for the setpoint
[Unit/(Time unit)]
Time unit depends on
TimeFactor
SP_LoLim Limit (low) of setpoint REAL 0.0
SP_Int* Internal setpoint for op‐ REAL 0.0
eration
SP_IntLi 1 = Select internal set‐ STRUCT -
point (via interconnec‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
tion)
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_IntOp* 1 = Select internal set‐ BOOL 1
point (via operator)
SP_LiOp Select internal/external STRUCT -
setpoint source: ● Value: BOOL ● 0
1 = Via interconnection ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
0 = Via operator
SP_OpScale OS display range for STRUCT -
setpoint ● High: REAL 100.0
● Low: REAL 0.0
SP_RateOn 1 = Activate limitation of BOOL 0
setpoint gradients
SP_RmpModTime 1 = Use time values BOOL 0
(SP_RmpTime,
SP_LiRmpTime)
0 = Use gradient limits
(SP_DnRaLim,
SP_LiDnRaLim,
SP_UpRaLim,
SP_LiUpRaLim)
SP_RmpOn* 1 = Activate setpoint BOOL 0
ramp to target setpoint
SP_RmpTarget
SP_RmpTarget* Target setpoint for set‐ REAL 0.0
point ramp

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


368 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.2 OpAnL - Check and output analog signals (large)

Parameter Description Type Default


SP_RmpTime* Time [Time unit] for set‐ REAL 0.0
point ramp from current
SP up to
SP_RmpTarget or time
[Time unit] for gradient
limitation in ramp mode
duration
Time unit depends on
TimeFactor
SP_TrkExt 1 = Bumpless switch‐ BOOL 0
over from external to in‐
ternal setpoint active
SP_Unit Unit of measure for set‐ INT 1001
point
SP_UpRaLim* Gradient limit (high) for REAL 100.0
the setpoint [Unit/
(Time unit)]
Time unit depends on
TimeFactor
SelFp1 Call a block saved in ANY -
this parameter as an ad‐
ditional faceplate
(Page 217) in the stand‐
ard view
SelFp2 Call a block saved in ANY -
this parameter as an ad‐
ditional faceplate
(Page 217) in the pre‐
view
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
TimeFactor Time unit: INT 0
0 = Seconds
1 = Minutes
2 = Hours
UserStatus Freely assignable bits BYTE 16#00
for use in PCS 7 OS

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 369
Operator control blocks
3.2 OpAnL - Check and output analog signals (large)

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


ENO 1 = Block algorithm comple‐ BOOL 0
ted without errors
ErrorNum Output of current error num‐ INT -1
ber. For error numbers that
can be output by this block,
see OpAnL error handling
(Page 364)
MsgAckn Message acknowledgment WORD 16#0000
status (output ACK_STATE of
ALARM_8P)
MsgErr 1 = Message error (output BOOL 0
ERROR of ALARM_8P)
MsgStat Message status (output WORD 16#0000
STATUS of ALARM_8P)
OnAct 1 = "On" mode enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosAct 1 = Block is "Out of service" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpSt_Out Value of the OpSt_In input DWORD 16#00000000
parameter, for feedforward‐
ing to other blocks. Bit 31 of
this parameter is used by
Feature.Bit24
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with set‐ DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
tings changed by the block al‐
gorithm
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
SP_Out Setpoint used by controller STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_DnRaAct 1 = Negative gradient limiting STRUCT -
of setpoint is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExtAct 1 = External setpoint is active STRUCT -
0 = Internal setpoint is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_HiAct High limit for SP_Ext or STRUCT -
SP_Int reached or exceeded ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


370 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.2 OpAnL - Check and output analog signals (large)

Parameter Description Type Default


SP_LoAct Low limit for SP_Ext or STRUCT -
SP_Int reached or under‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
shot
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_RateTarget Target setpoint for the gradi‐ REAL 0.0
ent limitation
SP_UpRaAct 1 = Positive gradient limiting STRUCT -
of setpoint is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_RemRT Remaining ramp time of the REAL 0.0
setpoint
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
Status1 Status word (Page 359) DWORD 16#00000000

See also
OpAnL messaging (Page 364)
OpAnL block diagram (Page 371)
OpAnL modes (Page 360)

3.2.7 OpAnL block diagram

OpAnL block diagram


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

See also
OpAnL I/Os (Page 366)
OpAnL error handling (Page 364)
OpAnL functions (Page 361)
Description of OpAnL (Page 359)
OpAnL modes (Page 360)
OpAnL messaging (Page 364)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 371
Operator control blocks
3.2 OpAnL - Check and output analog signals (large)

3.2.8 Operator control and monitoring

3.2.8.1 OpAnL views

Views of the OpAnL block


The block OpAnL provides the following views:
● OpAnL standard view (Page 372)
● Alarm view (Page 313)
● Trend view (Page 317)
● Ramp view (Page 311)
● OpAnL parameter view (Page 375)
● OpAnL preview (Page 377)
● Memo view (Page 315)
● Batch view (Page 313)
● Block icon for OpAnL (Page 378)
Refer to the sections Structure of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure
(Page 239) for general information on the faceplate and block icon.

3.2.8.2 OpAnL standard view

OpAnL standard view





 
 


 






Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


372 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.2 OpAnL - Check and output analog signals (large)

The view is switched depending on the Feature.Bit16 = 1 (process value with separate
scale range)





 
 


 
 
 




(1) Display and switch the operating mode


This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
● On (Page 72)
● Out of service (Page 72)
Refer to chapter Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) for information
on switching the operating mode.

(2) Display and switch the setpoint specification


This area shows how to specify the setpoint. The setpoint can be specified as follows:
● By the application ("External", CFC/SFC)
● By the user directly in the faceplate ("Internal").
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) chapter for
information on switching the setpoint specification.
You can find additional information on this in chapter Setpoint specification - internal/external
(Page 130).

(3) High and low scale range for the process value and setpoint
These values provide information on the display range for the bar graph of the process value.
The scale range is defined in the Engineering System.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 373
Operator control blocks
3.2 OpAnL - Check and output analog signals (large)

(4) Display of the process value including signal status


This area shows the current process value with the corresponding signal status.

(5) Display and change the setpoint including signal status


This area shows the current setpoint with the corresponding signal status.
Refer to the Changing values (Page 270) chapter for information on changing the setpoint.
The setpoint specification also needs to be set to "Internal" for this block.

(6) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
Use this navigation button to reach the standard view of a block configured in the Engineering
System (ES). The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the
Engineering System (ES).
Refer also to chapter Opening additional faceplates (Page 217) for more on this.

(7) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Invalid signal"

(8) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "SP ramp active"

(9) Bar graph for the process value


This area shows the current process value in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the
bar graph depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).

(10) Bar graph for the setpoint


This area shows the current setpoint in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the bar
graph depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).

(11) Display of external setpoint


This display [E] is only visible when you have selected "Internal" setpoint specification. It shows
the external setpoint that would apply if you were to change the setpoint specification to
"external".

(12) Display for the target setpoint of the setpoint ramp


This display [R] shows the target setpoint and is only visible if you have enabled ramp
generation in the Ramp view (Page 311).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


374 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.2 OpAnL - Check and output analog signals (large)

(13) Displaying the limits


These triangles show the SP_HiLim and SP_LoLim setpoint limits configured in the
Engineering System (ES).

3.2.8.3 OpAnL parameter view

Parameter view of OpAnL

(1) Enabled operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator control permissions are assigned.
They depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Symbols for enabled operations:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
control permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).

(2) Settings
You can select the following functions in this area:
● "SP := SP external": ☑ Bumpless switchover of setpoint from external to internal. The
internal setpoint is tracked to the external one.

3.2.8.4 OpAnL trend view

OpAnL trend view


You can find general information in section Trend view (Page 317).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 375
Operator control blocks
3.2 OpAnL - Check and output analog signals (large)

Depending on Feature.Bit16 (process value with separate scale range) either one or two
value axes are shown in the trend view.
● Process value with separate scale range

● Process value without separate scale range

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


376 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.2 OpAnL - Check and output analog signals (large)

Note
This function only has an effect when SP_Out is configured in "TrendConfiguration1" and
PV_In is configured in "TrendConfiguration2" in the block icon (default).

3.2.8.5 OpAnL preview

Preview of OpAnL




(1) Enable operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Icons for enabled operation:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)
The following enabled operations are shown here:
● "SP external": You can feedforward the external setpoint.
● "SP internal": You can feedforward the internal setpoint.
● "Change SP": You can change the setpoint.
● "On": You can switch to "On" operating mode.
● "Out of service": You can switch to "Out of service" operating mode.
● "Local operator permission": Use the ← button to switch to the standard view of the
OpStations block. You can find additional information on this in the section Operator control
permissions (Page 265).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 377
Operator control blocks
3.2 OpAnL - Check and output analog signals (large)

(2) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
Use this navigation button to open the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system (ES). The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the
engineering system (ES).
See also the section Opening additional faceplates (Page 217) for more on this.

(3) Remaining time to reach SP ramp


● "Rem. time SP ramp" : Remaining time to reach the ramp target value.

(4) SP external
Currently applicable external setpoint with the corresponding signal status.

3.2.8.6 Block icon for OpAnL

Block icons for OpAnL


A variety of block icons are available with the following functions:
● Process tag type
● Operating modes
● Internal and external setpoint specification
● Signal status, release for maintenance
● Memo display
● Process value (black, with and without decimal places)
● Setpoint (blue, with and without decimal places)
The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV8.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon Special features


in CFC
1

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


378 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.2 OpAnL - Check and output analog signals (large)

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV7.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon Special features


in CFC
1 Block icon in the full display

- Block icon in "Out of service" mode


(example with type 1 block icon)

Additional information on the block icon and the control options in the block icon is available
in the following sections:
● Configuring the block icons (Page 246)
● Block icon structure (Page 239)
● Operation via the block icon (Page 248)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 379
Operator control blocks
3.3 OpAnS - Check and output analog signals (small)

3.3 OpAnS - Check and output analog signals (small)

3.3.1 Description of OpAnS

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1915
Family: Operate

Area of application for OpAnS


The block is used for the following applications:
● Checking and transferring analog input values

How it works
The block forwards incoming, internal (entered in the faceplate) or external (CFC/SFC) analog
signals at the SP_Int or SP_Ext input to the SP output, depending on the setting for the
SP_LiOp input parameter.

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38). The block is
also installed automatically in the startup OB (OB100).

Startup characteristics
Use the Feature Bit Set startup characteristics (Page 141) to define the startup characteristics
of this block.

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


For a description of the individual parameters, see the chapter OpAnS I/Os (Page 385).

Status bit Parameter


0 Occupied
1 BatchEn
2 Not used
3 OosAct.Value
4 OosLi.Value
5 Invalid signal status
6 OnAct.Value
7 Not used

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


380 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.3 OpAnS - Check and output analog signals (small)

Status bit Parameter


8 SP_ExtAct.Value
9 - 31 Not used

See also
OpAnS functions (Page 382)
OpAnS messaging (Page 385)
OpAnS block diagram (Page 388)
OpAnS error handling (Page 384)
OpAnS modes (Page 381)

3.3.2 OpAnS modes

OpAnS operating modes


The block can be operated using the following modes:
● On (Page 72)
● Out of service (Page 72)

"On"
General information on the "On" mode is available in the chapter On (Page 72).

"Out of service"
You can find general information about the "Out of service" mode in the chapter Out of
service (Page 72).

See also
OpAnS I/Os (Page 385)
OpAnS messaging (Page 385)
OpAnS error handling (Page 384)
Description of OpAnS (Page 380)
OpAnS functions (Page 382)
OpAnS block diagram (Page 388)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 381
Operator control blocks
3.3 OpAnS - Check and output analog signals (small)

3.3.3 OpAnS functions

Functions of OpAnS
The functions for this block are listed below.

Internal or external setpoint selection


This block provides the standard function Setpoint specification - internal/external (Page 130).

Forming the signal status for blocks


This block provides the standard function Forming and outputting the signal status for
technologic blocks (Page 110).
The worst signal status ST_Worst for the block is formed from the following parameters:
● SP_Out.ST
● PV_In.ST
● SP_Ext.ST (only if Feature.Bit10 = 1)
The signal status of the SP_Out output parameter is always equivalent to the signal status of
input parameter SP_Ext or SP_Int, depending on how the setpoint is specified. If the internal
setpoint SP_Int is used, the signal status is always output as 16#80.
In case of Feature.Bit10 = 1, SP_Ext.ST influences ST_Worst independent of setpoint
specification.
If an external setpoint is used, the signal status 16#60 (external simulation) is suppressed
because the block acts as a sink with external simulation.

Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values


If the Feature bit Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values
(Page 190) is set to 1 and the parameter SP_Ext has bad signal status (16#00 or 16#28), the
block works with the last valid value of SP_Ext in the "On" mode.

Selecting a unit of measure


This block provides the standard function Selecting a unit of measure (Page 221).

Simulating signals
This block provides the standard function Simulating signals (Page 59).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


382 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.3 OpAnS - Check and output analog signals (small)

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133) . The following functionality is
available for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
0 Set startup characteristics (Page 141)
1 Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 181)
10 Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values (Page 190)
24 Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162)

Operator permissions
This block provides the standard function Operator control permissions (Page 265).
The block has the following permissions for the OS_Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 Not used
1 1 = Operator can switch to "On" mode
2 Not used
3 1 = Operator can switch to "Out of service" mode
4-9 Not used
10 1 = Operator can switch to internal
11 1 = Operator can switch to external
12 1 = Operator can enable bumpless switchover
13 1 = Operator can change SP_Int
14 - 31 Not used

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Specifying the display area for process and setpoint values as well as operations
The block provides the standard function Display and operator input area for process values
and setpoints (Page 216).

Opening additional faceplates


The block provides the standard function Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 383
Operator control blocks
3.3 OpAnS - Check and output analog signals (small)

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


The block provides the standard function SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

See also
Description of OpAnS (Page 380)
OpAnS messaging (Page 385)
OpAnS I/Os (Page 385)
OpAnS block diagram (Page 388)
OpAnS error handling (Page 384)
OpAnS modes (Page 381)
Using setpoint ramp (Page 125)
Gradient limit of the setpoint (Page 126)
Update acknowledgment and error status of the message call (Page 163)

3.3.4 OpAnS error handling

Error handling of OpAnS


Refer to the chapter Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum I/O can be used to output the following error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; the block is not processed.
0 There is no error.
51 Invalid signal
SP_LiOp = 1 and SP_ExtLi = 1 and SP_IntLi = 1

See also
OpAnS block diagram (Page 388)
OpAnS I/Os (Page 385)
OpAnS messaging (Page 385)
OpAnS functions (Page 382)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


384 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.3 OpAnS - Check and output analog signals (small)

OpAnS modes (Page 381)


Description of OpAnS (Page 380)

3.3.5 OpAnS messaging

Messaging
This block does not offer messaging.

See also
OpAnS error handling (Page 384)
OpAnS modes (Page 381)
OpAnS block diagram (Page 388)

3.3.6 OpAnS I/Os

I/Os of OpAnS

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation BOOL 0
BatchID Batch ID DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name S7-String
EN 1 = Called block will be pro‐ BOOL 1
cessed
Feature I/O for additional functions STRUCT -
(Page 382) ● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
Occupied 1 = Occupied by batch control BOOL 0
OnOp* 1 = "On" mode via operator BOOL 0
OosLi 1 = "Out of service", via inter‐ STRUCT -
connection or SFC (0-1 edge ● Value: BOOL ● 0
transition)
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosOp* 1 = "Out of service", via OS BOOL 0
operator

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 385
Operator control blocks
3.3 OpAnS - Check and output analog signals (small)

Parameter Description Type Default


OpSt_In Input parameter for local op‐ DWORD 16#00000000
erating permission, connec‐
ted with the Out output pa‐
rameter of the upstream
block, OpStations (Page 423)
OS_Perm I/O for operator control per‐ STRUCT -
missions (Page 382) ● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● ... ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
PV_In Process value STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
PV_Unit Unit of measure for process INT 1001
value
RunUpCyc Number of cycles in startup; INT 3
messages are suppressed
during these cycles
SampleTime Sampling time [s] (assigned REAL 0.1
automatically)
SP_Ext external setpoint - (to inter‐ STRUCT -
connection) ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExtLi 1 = Select internal setpoint STRUCT -
(via interconnection) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExtOp* 1 = Select external setpoint BOOL 0
(via operator)
SP_Int* Internal setpoint for operation REAL 0.0
SP_IntLi 1 = Select internal setpoint STRUCT -
(via interconnection) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_IntOp* 1 = Select internal setpoint BOOL 1
(via operator)
SP_LiOp Select internal/external set‐ STRUCT -
point source: ● Value: BOOL ● 0
1 = Via interconnection ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
0 = Via operator
SP_OpScale OS display range for setpoint STRUCT -
● High: REAL 100.0
● Low: REAL 0.0
SP_TrkExt 1 = Bumpless switchover BOOL 0
from external to internal set‐
point active
SP_Unit Unit of measure for setpoint INT 1001

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


386 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.3 OpAnS - Check and output analog signals (small)

Parameter Description Type Default


SelFp1 Call a block saved in this pa‐ ANY -
rameter as an additional face‐
plate (Page 217) in the stand‐
ard view
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use BYTE 16#00
in PCS 7 OS

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


ENO 1 = Block algorithm comple‐ BOOL 0
ted without errors
ErrorNum Output of current error num‐ INT -1
ber. For error numbers that
can be output by this block,
see OpAnS error handling
(Page 384)
OnAct 1 = "On" mode enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosAct 1 = Block is "Out of service" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpSt_Out Value of the OpSt_In input DWORD 16#00000000
parameter, for feedforward‐
ing to other blocks. Bit 31 of
this parameter is used by
Feature.Bit24
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with set‐ DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
tings changed by the block al‐
gorithm
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
SP_Out Setpoint used by controller STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
Status1 Status word (Page 380) DWORD 16#00000000

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 387
Operator control blocks
3.3 OpAnS - Check and output analog signals (small)

See also
OpAnS messaging (Page 385)
OpAnS block diagram (Page 388)
OpAnS modes (Page 381)

3.3.7 OpAnS block diagram

OpAnS block diagram


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

See also
OpAnS I/Os (Page 385)
OpAnS error handling (Page 384)
OpAnS functions (Page 382)
Description of OpAnS (Page 380)
OpAnS modes (Page 381)
OpAnS messaging (Page 385)

3.3.8 Operator control and monitoring

3.3.8.1 OpAnS views

Views of the OpAnS block


The block OpAnS provides the following views:
● OpAnS standard view (Page 389)
● Trend view (Page 317)
● OpAnS parameter view (Page 391)
● OpAnS preview (Page 391)
● Memo view (Page 315)
● Batch view (Page 313)
● OpAnS block icon (Page 392)
Refer to the chapters Structure of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure
(Page 239) for general information on the faceplate and block icon.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


388 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.3 OpAnS - Check and output analog signals (small)

See also
Ramp view (Page 311)
Alarm view (Page 313)

3.3.8.2 OpAnS standard view

OpAnS standard view














(1) Display and switch the operating mode


This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
● On (Page 72)
● Out of service (Page 72)
Refer to chapter Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) for information
on switching the operating mode.

(2) Display and switch the setpoint specification


This area shows how to specify the setpoint. The setpoint can be specified as follows:
● By the application ("External", CFC/SFC)
● By the user directly in the faceplate ("Internal").
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) chapter for
information on switching the setpoint specification.
You can find additional information on this in chapter Setpoint specification - internal/external
(Page 130).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 389
Operator control blocks
3.3 OpAnS - Check and output analog signals (small)

(3) High and low scale range for the process value
These values provide information on the display range for the bar graph of the process value.
The scale range is defined in the Engineering System.

(4) Display of the process value including signal status


This area shows the current process value with the corresponding signal status.

(5) Display and change the setpoint including signal status


This area shows the current setpoint with the corresponding signal status.
Refer to the Changing values (Page 270) chapter for information on changing the setpoint.
The setpoint specification also needs to be set to "Internal" for this block.

(6) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
Use this navigation button to reach the standard view of a block configured in the Engineering
System (ES). The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the
Engineering System (ES).
Refer also to chapter Opening additional faceplates (Page 217) for more on this.

(7) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Invalid signal"

(8) Bar graph for the process value


This area shows the current process value in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the
bar graph depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).

(9) Bar graph for the setpoint


This area shows the current setpoint in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the bar
graph depends on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES).

(10) Display of external setpoint


This display [E] is only visible when you have selected "Internal" setpoint specification. It shows
the external setpoint that would apply if you were to change the setpoint specification to
"external".

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


390 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.3 OpAnS - Check and output analog signals (small)

3.3.8.3 OpAnS parameter view

Parameter view of OpAnS

(1) Enabled operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator control permissions are assigned.
They depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Symbols for enabled operations:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
control permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).

(2) Settings
You can select the following functions in this area:
● "SP := SP external": ☑ Bumpless switchover of setpoint from external to internal. The
internal setpoint is tracked to the external one.

3.3.8.4 OpAnS preview

Preview of OpAnS

(1) Enabled operations


This area shows all operations for which special operating permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES) that applies to this block.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 391
Operator control blocks
3.3 OpAnS - Check and output analog signals (small)

Symbols for enabled operations:


● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at all due to the configured AS
operating permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)
The following enabled operations are shown here:
● "SP external": You can feedforward the external setpoint.
● "SP internal": You can feedforward the internal setpoint.
● "Change SP": You can change the setpoint.
● "On": You can switch to "On" operating mode.
● "Out of service": You can switch to "Out of service" operating mode.
● "Local operating permission": Use the ← button to switch to the standard view of the
OpStations block. You can find additional information on this in chapter Operator control
permissions (Page 265).

(2) SP external
Currently applicable external setpoint with the corresponding signal status.

See also
Opening additional faceplates (Page 217)

3.3.8.5 OpAnS block icon

Block icons for OpAnS


A variety of block icons are available with the following functions:
● Process tag type
● Operating modes
● Internal and external setpoint specification
● Signal status, release for maintenance
● Memo display
● Process value (black, with and without decimal places)
● Setpoint (blue, with and without decimal places)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


392 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.3 OpAnS - Check and output analog signals (small)

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV8.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon Special features


in CFC
1

5 Block icon in the full display

6 Block icon in the full display

Additional information on the block icon and the control options in the block icon is available
in the following chapters:
● Configuring the block icons (Page 246)
● Block icon structure (Page 239)
● Operation via the block icon (Page 248)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 393
Operator control blocks
3.4 OpDi01 - Manipulating a digital value (2 pushbuttons)

3.4 OpDi01 - Manipulating a digital value (2 pushbuttons)

3.4.1 Description of OpDi01

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1866
Family: Operate

Area of application for OpDi01


The block is used for the following applications:
● Manipulating a digital value

How it works
A digital value is manipulated by interconnection or via the faceplate.

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38).

Startup characteristics
If Feature.Bit0 = 0, the output parameter Out will reset to 0.

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


You can find a description for each parameter in section OpDi01 I/Os (Page 399).

Status bit Parameter


0 Occupied
1 BatchEn
2 Not used
3 OosAct.Value
4 OosLi.Value
5 Not used
6 OnAct.Value
7 Out.Value
8 LiOp
9 FbkIn.Value
10 - 13 Not used
14 1 = Invalid signal status

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


394 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.4 OpDi01 - Manipulating a digital value (2 pushbuttons)

Status bit Parameter


15 Not used
16 0: Open padlock in the block icon
1: Closed padlock in the block icon
17 Hidden bypass signal in interlock
18 Feature2.Bit2: Separate bypass signal
19 - 22 Not used
23 "Interlock" button is enabled
24 - 25 Not used
26 Bypass information from previous function block
27 - 31 Not used

See also
OpDi01 functions (Page 396)
OpDi01 messaging (Page 399)
OpDi01 block diagram (Page 402)
OpDi01 error handling (Page 398)
OpDi01 modes (Page 395)

3.4.2 OpDi01 modes

OpDi01 operating modes


The block can be operated using the following modes:
● On (Page 72)
● Out of service (Page 72)

"On"
General information on the "On" mode is available in the section On (Page 72).

"Out of service"
You can find general information about the "Out of service" mode in the section Out of
service (Page 72).

See also
OpDi01 block diagram (Page 402)
OpDi01 I/Os (Page 399)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 395
Operator control blocks
3.4 OpDi01 - Manipulating a digital value (2 pushbuttons)

OpDi01 messaging (Page 399)


OpDi01 error handling (Page 398)
OpDi01 functions (Page 396)
Description of OpDi01 (Page 394)

3.4.3 OpDi01 functions

Functions of OpDi01
The functions for this block are listed below.

Internal or external digital value


Use the LiOp input parameter to define whether the digital value is set (0 - 1, parameter
SetOp or SetLi) or is reset (1 - 0, parameter RstOp or RstLi) via the faceplate or an
interconnection.
LiOp = 0: Specification of digital value via faceplate (SetOp or RstOp)
LiOp = 1: Specification of digital value via interconnection (SetLi or RstLi)

Interlocks
Use the Intl_En = 1 and Intlock.ST ≠ 16#FF input parameters to activate the interlock
function on this block.
An active interlock condition brings the block to the neutral position (Intlock.Value = 0 or
Intlock.ST = 16#00 input). Output parameter Out is set to 0. When the interlocking condition
no longer applies, the digital value currently valid is output again.

Input parameter for feedback value


This block has a FbkIn input parameter for displaying a feedback value in the faceplate.

Opening additional faceplates


This block provides the standard function Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

Changing labels on buttons and text


This block provides the standard function Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218).
Instance-specific text can be configured for the following parameters:
● Out
● SetOp

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


396 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.4 OpDi01 - Manipulating a digital value (2 pushbuttons)

● RstOp
● FbkIn

Forming the signal status for blocks


The worst signal status ST_Worst for the block is formed from the following parameters:
● FbkIn.ST
● SetLi.ST (only if Feature.Bit10 = 1)
● RstLi.ST (only if Feature.Bit10 = 1)

Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values


If the Feature bit Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values
(Page 190) is set to 1 and one of the following parameters has bad signal status (16#00 or
16#28), the block goes to the neutral position (Out = 0) in the "On" mode:
● SetLi.ST
● RstLi.ST

Operator permissions
This block provides the standard function Operator control permissions (Page 265).
The block has the following permissions for the OS_Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 Not used
1 1 = Operator can switch to "On" mode
2 Not used
3 1 = Operator can switch to "Out of service" mode
4 1 = Operator can set the digital value
5 1 = Operator can reset the digital value
6 - 31 Not used

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 397
Operator control blocks
3.4 OpDi01 - Manipulating a digital value (2 pushbuttons)

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the section
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133). The following functionality is available
for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
0 Set startup characteristics (Page 141)
1 Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 181)
2 Separate evaluation for excluded and simulated interlock signals (Page 155)
5 Evaluation of the signal status of the interlock signals (Page 146)
10 Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values (Page 190)
24 Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162)

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


This block provides the standard function SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

See also
Description of OpDi01 (Page 394)
OpDi01 messaging (Page 399)
OpDi01 I/Os (Page 399)
OpDi01 block diagram (Page 402)
OpDi01 error handling (Page 398)
OpDi01 modes (Page 395)

3.4.4 OpDi01 error handling

Error handling of OpDi01


Refer to the section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions for the error handling
of all blocks.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


398 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.4 OpDi01 - Manipulating a digital value (2 pushbuttons)

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum I/O can be used to output the following error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; block is not processed
0 There is no error.
51 SetLi = 1 and RstLi = 1 and LiOp = 1

See also
OpDi01 block diagram (Page 402)
OpDi01 I/Os (Page 399)
OpDi01 messaging (Page 399)
OpDi01 functions (Page 396)
OpDi01 modes (Page 395)
Description of OpDi01 (Page 394)

3.4.5 OpDi01 messaging

Messaging
This block does not offer messaging.

See also
Description of OpDi01 (Page 394)
OpDi01 functions (Page 396)
OpDi01 I/Os (Page 399)
OpDi01 block diagram (Page 402)
OpDi01 error handling (Page 398)
OpDi01 modes (Page 395)

3.4.6 OpDi01 I/Os

I/Os of OpDi01

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 399
Operator control blocks
3.4 OpDi01 - Manipulating a digital value (2 pushbuttons)

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation BOOL 0
BatchID Batch ID DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name S7-String
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1
FbkIn Input for feedback STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 396) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
Intlock 0 = Interlocking without reset is active; STRUCT -
you can operate the block without reset ● Value: BOOL ● 1
once the interlocking condition has dis‐
appeared ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
1 = Interlock not activated ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
Intl_En 1 = Interlock without reset (interlock, pa‐ BOOL 1
rameter Intlock) can be used
LiOp Switchover of operating mode between: STRUCT -
1 = Interconnection ● Value: BOOL ● 0
0 = Operator ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Occupied 1 = Occupied by batch control BOOL 0
OnOp* 1 = "On" mode via operator BOOL 0
OosLi Edge transition (0-1) = "Out of service", STRUCT -
via interconnection or SFC ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosOp* 1 = "Out of service", via OS operator BOOL 0
OpSt_In Input parameter for local operating per‐ DWORD 16#00000000
mission, connected with the Out output
parameter of the upstream block, OpSta‐
tions (Page 423)
OS_Perm I/O for operator control permissions STRUCT -
(Page 396) ● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● ... ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
RstLi Reset via interconnection STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RstOp* Reset by the operator BOOL 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


400 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.4 OpDi01 - Manipulating a digital value (2 pushbuttons)

Parameter Description Type Default


SelFp1 Call a block saved in this parameter as ANY -
an additional faceplate (Page 217) in the
standard view
SelFp2 Call a block saved in this parameter as ANY -
an additional faceplate (Page 217) in the
preview
SetLi Connected digital input STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SetOp* Digital input for operator BOOL 0
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use in PCS 7 BYTE 16#00
OS

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without BOOL 0
errors
ErrorNum Output of current error number. For error INT -1
numbers that can be output by this block,
see OpDi01 error handling (Page 398)
LockAct 1 = Interlock (Intlock) is active STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OnAct 1 = "On" mode enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosAct 1 = Block is "Out of service" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpSt_Out Value of the OpSt_In input parameter, DWORD 16#00000000
for feedforwarding to other blocks. Bit 31
of this parameter is used by
Feature.Bit24
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with settings DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
changed by the block algorithm
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
Out Digital output value STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 401
Operator control blocks
3.4 OpDi01 - Manipulating a digital value (2 pushbuttons)

Parameter Description Type Default


ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
Status Status word (Page 394) DWORD 16#00000000

See also
OpDi01 messaging (Page 399)
OpDi01 block diagram (Page 402)
OpDi01 modes (Page 395)

3.4.7 OpDi01 block diagram

OpDi01 block diagram


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

See also
OpDi01 I/Os (Page 399)
OpDi01 messaging (Page 399)
OpDi01 error handling (Page 398)
OpDi01 functions (Page 396)
OpDi01 modes (Page 395)
Description of OpDi01 (Page 394)

3.4.8 Operator control and monitoring

3.4.8.1 OpDi01 views

Views of the OpDi01 block


The block OpDi01 provides the following views:
● OpDi01 standard view (Page 403)
● Trend view (Page 317)
● OpDi01 preview (Page 404)
● Memo view (Page 315)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


402 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.4 OpDi01 - Manipulating a digital value (2 pushbuttons)

● Batch view (Page 313)


● Block icon for OpDi01 (Page 406)
Refer to the sections Structure of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure
(Page 239) for general information on the faceplate and block icon.

3.4.8.2 OpDi01 standard view

OpDi01 standard view






(1) Display and switch the operating mode


This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
● On (Page 72)
● Out of service (Page 72)
You can find additional information on this in section Switching operating states and operating
modes (Page 268).

(2) Displaying and switching the command


This area shows you the current selection. You can output a continuous signal as follows:
● "On": Continuous signal is output
● "Off"
You can find additional information on this in section Switching operating states and operating
modes (Page 268).
You can rename the display text as you please, as described in the section Labeling of buttons
and text (Page 218).
Do this with the following parameters:
● Text for "Command": Parameter SetOp#string_1
● Text for "On/Off": Parameter Out#string_0 / Out#string_1

(3) Operating range for the interlock functions of the block


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is interconnected.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 403
Operator control blocks
3.4 OpDi01 - Manipulating a digital value (2 pushbuttons)

You can use this button to control the interlock functions of the block. You can find additional
information on this in section OpDi01 functions (Page 396).
● Bypass information (see Forming the group status for interlock information (Page 106)):

(4) Button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate


Use this button for the standard view of a block configured in the engineering system. The
visibility of this button depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in section Opening additional faceplates
(Page 217).

(5) Displaying the feedback of the command


This area shows you the currently valid command. The following commands can be shown
here:
● "On"
● "Off"
● "Invalid signal"
You can rename the display text as you please, as described in the section Labeling of buttons
and text (Page 218).
Do this with the following parameter:
● Text for "On/Off": Parameter FbkIn#string_0 / FbkIn#string_1

3.4.8.3 OpDi01 preview

Preview of OpDi01

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


404 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.4 OpDi01 - Manipulating a digital value (2 pushbuttons)

(1) Enabled operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator control permissions are assigned.
They depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Symbols for enabled operations:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
control permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)
The following enabled operations are shown here:
● "On": You can set the digital value (0 - 1 edge).
You can rename the display text as you please, as described in the section Labeling of
buttons and text (Page 218).
Do this with the following parameters:
– Text for "On": Parameter .Out#Value#string_1
● "Off": You can set the digital value (1 - 0 edge).
You can rename the display text as you please, as described in the section Labeling of
buttons and text (Page 218).
Do this with the following parameters:
– Text for "Off": Parameter .Out#Value#string_0
● "On": You can switch to "On" operating mode.
● "Out of service": You can switch to "Out of service" operating mode.
● "Local operating permission": Use the ← button to switch to the standard view of the
OpStations block. Additional information is available in the section Operator control
permissions (Page 265).

(2) Display of current inputs and outputs


This area shows the most important parameters for this block with the current selection:
● "Interlock":
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Interlocking without reset is active; you can operate the block without reset once the
interlocking condition has disappeared
– 1 = "Good" state
● "Output": 1 = Digital output value set
● "Feedback": 1 = Feedback set
● "Linked On": 1 = Linked input on
● "Linked Off": 1 = Linked input off

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 405
Operator control blocks
3.4 OpDi01 - Manipulating a digital value (2 pushbuttons)

(3) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
Use this navigation button to reach the standard view of a block configured in the Engineering
System (ES). The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the
engineering system (ES).
Refer also to the Opening additional faceplates (Page 217) section for more on this.

3.4.8.4 Block icon for OpDi01

Block icons for OpDi01


A variety of block icons are available with the following functions:
● Process tag type
● Operating modes
● Signal status, release for maintenance
● Bypass
● Interlocks
● Output signal
● Memo display

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV8.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special features


1

3 Block icon in the full display

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV7.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special features


1 Block icon in the full display

3
4
- Block icon in "Out of service"
mode (example with type 1 block
icon)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


406 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.4 OpDi01 - Manipulating a digital value (2 pushbuttons)

Additional information on the block icon and the control options in the block icon is available
in the following chapters:
● Configuring the block icons (Page 246)
● Block icon structure (Page 239)
● Operation via the block icon (Page 248).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 407
Operator control blocks
3.5 OpDi03 - Manipulating a digital value (3 pushbuttons)

3.5 OpDi03 - Manipulating a digital value (3 pushbuttons)

3.5.1 Description of OpDi03

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1867
Family: Operate

Area of application for OpDi03


The block is used for the following applications:
● Manipulating a digital value (3 pushbuttons)

How it works
A digital value is manipulated at three possible outputs by interconnection or via the faceplate.
If two or three input parameters are set for an interconnection (parameter SetLix), the input
parameter with the highest index will be set to the corresponding output parameter. For
example, if the SetLi1 and SetLi2 input parameters are set (= 1), then Out2 will be set (=
1).

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38).

Startup characteristics
If Feature.Bit0 = 0, the output parameters Out1 to Out3 will reset to 0.

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


You can find a description for each parameter in section OpDi03 I/Os (Page 414).

Status bit Parameter


0 Occupied
1 BatchEn
2 Not used
3 OosAct.Value
4 OosLi.Value
5 Not used
6 OnAct.Value
7 Out1.Value

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


408 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.5 OpDi03 - Manipulating a digital value (3 pushbuttons)

Status bit Parameter


8 Out2.Value
9 Out3.Value
10 LiOp.Value
11 Fbk1In.Value
12 Fbk2In.Value
13 Fbk3In.Value
14 1 = Invalid signal status
15 Not used
16 0: Open padlock in the block icon
1: Closed padlock in the block icon
17 Hidden bypass signal in interlock
18 Feature2.Bit2: Separate bypass signal
19 - 22 Not used
23 "Interlock" button is enabled
24 - 25 Not used
26 Bypass information from previous function block
27 - 31 Not used

See also
OpDi03 functions (Page 410)
OpDi03 messaging (Page 414)
OpDi03 block diagram (Page 417)
OpDi03 error handling (Page 413)
OpDi03 modes (Page 409)

3.5.2 OpDi03 modes

OpDi03 operating modes


The block can be operated using the following modes
● On (Page 72)
● Out of service (Page 72)

"On"
You can find general information about the "On" mode in the On (Page 72) section.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 409
Operator control blocks
3.5 OpDi03 - Manipulating a digital value (3 pushbuttons)

"Out of service"
You can find general information about the "Out of service" mode in the section Out of
service (Page 72).

See also
OpDi03 block diagram (Page 417)
OpDi03 I/Os (Page 414)
OpDi03 messaging (Page 414)
OpDi03 error handling (Page 413)
OpDi03 functions (Page 410)
Description of OpDi03 (Page 408)

3.5.3 OpDi03 functions

Functions of OpDi03
The functions for this block are listed below.

Internal or external digital value


Use the LiOp input parameter to define whether it is through the faceplate or an interconnection
using a 1 out of 3 that the selection of the digital value is set (0 - 1) or reset (1 - 0, input
parameter RstOut).
● LiOp = 0: Specification of digital value via faceplate. One of the input parameters SetOp1,
SetOp2 or SetOp3 is now routed to the relevant output Out1, Out2 or Out3. For example,
if SetOp2 = 1 , then Out2 = 1.
● LiOp = 1: Specification of digital value via interconnection. One of the input parameters
SetLi1, SetLi2 or SetLi3 is now routed to the relevant output Out1, Out2 or Out3. For
example, if SetLi2 = 1 , then Out2 = 1.
The reset (1 - 0) is always undertaken using the RstOut input parameter.

Interlocks
Use the Intl_En = 1 and Intlock.ST ≠ 16#FF input parameters to activate the interlock
function on this block.
An active interlock condition brings the block to the neutral position (Intlock.Value = 0 or
Intlock.ST = 16#00 input). Output parameter Out is set to 0. When the interlocking condition
no longer applies, the digital value currently valid is output again.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


410 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.5 OpDi03 - Manipulating a digital value (3 pushbuttons)

Input parameter for feedback value


This block has three input parameters Fbk1In, Fbk2In and Fbk3In for displaying three
feedback values in the faceplate.

Resetting all output values


Reset all output parameters (Out1 ... Out3) by setting all interconnected input parameters for
setting (SetLi1 ... SetLi3) or enabled input parameters for setting (SetOp1 ... SetOp3) to
0.
A 0 - 1 edge at the RstOut parameter then resets the three output parameters Out1 ...
Out3.

Opening additional faceplates


This block provides the standard function Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

Changing labels on buttons and text


This block provides the standard function Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218).
Instance-specific text can be configured for the following parameters:
● OutX
● SetOpX
● FbkXIn
X = (1 ... 3)

Forming the signal status for blocks


This block provides the standard function Forming and outputting the signal status for
technologic blocks (Page 110).
The worst signal status ST_Worst for the block is formed from the following parameters:
● Fbk1In.ST
● Fbk2In.ST
● Fbk3In.ST
● SetLi1.ST (only if Feature.Bit10 = 1)
● SetLi2.ST (only if Feature.Bit10 = 1)
● SetLi3.ST (only if Feature.Bit10 = 1)
● RstOut.ST (only if Feature.Bit10 = 1)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 411
Operator control blocks
3.5 OpDi03 - Manipulating a digital value (3 pushbuttons)

Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values


If the Feature bit Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values
(Page 190) is set to 1 and one of the following parameters has bad signal status (16#00 or
16#28), the block goes to the neutral position (Out1 = 0, Out2 = 0, and Out3 = 0) in the "On"
mode:
● SetLi1.ST
● SetLi2.ST
● SetLi3.ST
● RstOut.ST

Operator permissions
This block provides the standard function Operator control permissions (Page 265).
The block has the following permissions for the OS_Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 Not used
1 1 = Operator can switch to "On" mode
2 Not used
3 1 = Operator can switch to "Out of service" mode
4 1 = Operator can set the digital value SetOp1
5 1 = Operator can set the digital value SetOp2
6 1 = Operator can set the digital value SetOp3
7 - 31 Not used

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the section
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133). The following functionality is available
for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
0 Set startup characteristics (Page 141)
1 Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 181)
2 Separate evaluation for excluded and simulated interlock signals (Page 155)
5 Evaluation of the signal status of the interlock signals (Page 146)
10 Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values (Page 190)
24 Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


412 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.5 OpDi03 - Manipulating a digital value (3 pushbuttons)

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


This block provides the standard function SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

See also
Description of OpDi03 (Page 408)
OpDi03 messaging (Page 414)
OpDi03 I/Os (Page 414)
OpDi03 block diagram (Page 417)
OpDi03 error handling (Page 413)
OpDi03 modes (Page 409)

3.5.4 OpDi03 error handling

Error handling of OpDi03


Refer to the section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions for the error handling
of all blocks.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum I/O can be used to output the following error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; block is not processed
0 There is no error.
51 The value 1 is set at two or more inputs
(SetLi1 = 1 AND SetLi2 = 1) or (SetLi2 = 1 AND SetLi3 = 1) or (SetLi1 =
1 AND SetLi3 = 1) and LiOp = 1

See also
OpDi03 block diagram (Page 417)
OpDi03 I/Os (Page 414)
OpDi03 messaging (Page 414)
OpDi03 functions (Page 410)
OpDi03 modes (Page 409)
Description of OpDi03 (Page 408)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 413
Operator control blocks
3.5 OpDi03 - Manipulating a digital value (3 pushbuttons)

3.5.5 OpDi03 messaging

Messaging
This block does not offer messaging.

See also
Description of OpDi03 (Page 408)
OpDi03 functions (Page 410)
OpDi03 I/Os (Page 414)
OpDi03 block diagram (Page 417)
OpDi03 error handling (Page 413)
OpDi03 modes (Page 409)

3.5.6 OpDi03 I/Os

I/Os of OpDi03

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation BOOL 0
BatchID Batch ID DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name S7-String
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1
Fbk1In Feedback for input In1 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Fbk2In Feedback for input In2 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Fbk3In Feedback for input In3 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


414 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.5 OpDi03 - Manipulating a digital value (3 pushbuttons)

Parameter Description Type Default


Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 410) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
Intlock 0 = Interlocking without reset is active; STRUCT -
you can operate the block without reset ● Value: BOOL ● 1
once the interlocking condition has dis‐
appeared ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
1 = Interlock not activated ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
Intl_En 1 = Interlock without reset (interlock, pa‐ BOOL 1
rameter Intlock) can be used
LiOp Switchover of operating mode between: STRUCT -
1 = Interconnection ● Value: BOOL ● 0
0 = Operator ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Occupied 1 = Occupied by batch control BOOL 0
OnOp* 1 = "On" mode via operator BOOL 0
OosLi 1 = "Out of service", via interconnection STRUCT -
or SFC ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosOp* 1 = "Out of service", via OS operator BOOL 0
OpSt_In Input parameter for local operating per‐ DWORD 16#00000000
mission, connected with the Out output
parameter of the upstream block, OpSta‐
tions (Page 423)
OS_Perm I/O for operator control permissions STRUCT -
(Page 410) ● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● ... ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
RstOut Reset by the operator STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SelFp1 Call a block saved in this parameter as ANY -
an additional faceplate (Page 217) in the
standard view
SelFp2 Call a block saved in this parameter as ANY -
an additional faceplate (Page 217) in the
preview
SetLi1 Connected digital input 1 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 415
Operator control blocks
3.5 OpDi03 - Manipulating a digital value (3 pushbuttons)

Parameter Description Type Default


SetLi2 Connected digital input 2 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SetLi3 Connected digital input 3 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SetOp1* Digital input 1 for operator BOOL 0
SetOp2* Digital input 2 for operator BOOL 0
SetOp3* Digital input 3 for operator BOOL 0
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use in PCS 7 BYTE 16#00
OS

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without BOOL 0
errors
ErrorNum Output of current error number. For error INT -1
numbers that can be output by this block,
see OpDi03 error handling (Page 413)
LockAct 1 = Interlock (Intlock) is active STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosAct 1 = Block is "Out of service" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OnAct 1 = "On" mode enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpSt_Out Value of the OpSt_In input parameter, DWORD 16#00000000
for feedforwarding to other blocks. Bit 31
of this parameter is used by
Feature.Bit24
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with settings DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
changed by the block algorithm
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
Out1 Digital output value 1 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


416 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.5 OpDi03 - Manipulating a digital value (3 pushbuttons)

Parameter Description Type Default


Out2 Digital output value 2 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Out3 Digital output value 3 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
Status Status word (Page 408) DWORD 16#00000000

See also
OpDi03 messaging (Page 414)
OpDi03 block diagram (Page 417)
OpDi03 modes (Page 409)

3.5.7 OpDi03 block diagram

OpDi03 block diagram


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

See also
OpDi03 I/Os (Page 414)
OpDi03 messaging (Page 414)
OpDi03 error handling (Page 413)
OpDi03 functions (Page 410)
OpDi03 modes (Page 409)
Description of OpDi03 (Page 408)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 417
Operator control blocks
3.5 OpDi03 - Manipulating a digital value (3 pushbuttons)

3.5.8 Operator control and monitoring

3.5.8.1 OpDi03 view

Views of the OpDi03 block


The block OpDi03 provides the following views:
● OpDi03 standard view (Page 418)
● Trend view (Page 317)
● OpDi03 preview (Page 420)
● Memo view (Page 315)
● Batch view (Page 313)
● Block icon for OpDi03 (Page 421)
Refer to the sections Structure of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure
(Page 239) for general information on the faceplate and block icon.

3.5.8.2 OpDi03 standard view

OpDi03 standard view







(1) Display and switch the operating mode


This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
● On (Page 72)
● Out of service (Page 72)
You can find additional information on this in section Switching operating states and operating
modes (Page 268).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


418 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.5 OpDi03 - Manipulating a digital value (3 pushbuttons)

(2) Displaying and switching the command 1 to 3


This area shows you the current selection. You can output a continuous signal at the outputs
Out1 to Out3 as follows:
● "On": Continuous signal is output
● "Off"
You can find additional information on this in section Switching operating states and operating
modes (Page 268).
You can rename the display text as you please, as described in the section Labeling of buttons
and text (Page 218).
Do this with the following parameters:
● Text for "Command 1/Command 2/Command 3": Parameter SetOpX#string_1, (X = 1 ...
3)
● Text for "On/Off": Parameter OutX#string_0, OutX#string_1, (X = 1 ... 3)

(3) Operating range for the interlock functions of the block


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is interconnected.
You can use this button to control the interlock functions of the block. You can find additional
information on this in section OpDi03 functions (Page 410).
● Bypass information (see Forming the group status for interlock information (Page 106)):

(4) Button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate


Use this button for the standard view of a block configured in the engineering system. The
visibility of this button depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in section Opening additional faceplates
(Page 217).

(5) Displaying the feedback of the command 1 to 3


This area shows you the current valid selection from Out1 to Out3.
● "On"
● "Off"
● "Invalid signal"
You can rename the display text as you please, as described in the section Labeling of buttons
and text (Page 218).
Do this with the following parameters:
● Text for "On/Off": Parameter FbkInX#string_1, FbkInX#string_0, (X = 1 ... 3)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 419
Operator control blocks
3.5 OpDi03 - Manipulating a digital value (3 pushbuttons)

3.5.8.3 OpDi03 preview

Preview of OpDi03

(1) Enabled operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator control permissions are assigned.
They depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Symbols for enabled operations:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
control permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)
The following enabled operations are shown here:
● "On 1 to 3": You can now set the digital value (0 - 1 edge).
You can rename the display text as you please, as described in the section Labeling of
buttons and text (Page 218).
Do this with the following parameters:
– Text for "Command X": Parameter OutX#string_1, (X = 1 ... 3)
● "On": You can switch to "On" operating mode.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


420 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.5 OpDi03 - Manipulating a digital value (3 pushbuttons)

● "Out of service": You can switch to "Out of service" operating mode.


● "Local operating permission": Use the ← button to switch to the standard view of the
OpStations block. Additional information is available in the section Operator control
permissions (Page 265).

(2) Display of current inputs and outputs


This area shows the most important parameters for this block with the current selection:
● "Interlock":
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Interlocking without reset is active; you can operate the block without reset once the
interlocking condition has disappeared
– 1 = "Good" state
● "Output 1 to 3": 1 = Digital output value set
● "Feedback 1 to 3": 1 = Feedback set
● "Linked On 1 to 3": 1 = Linked input on
● "Linked Off": 1 = Linked input off

(3) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
Use this navigation button to reach the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system. The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the engineering
system (ES).
Refer also to the Opening additional faceplates (Page 217) section for more on this.

3.5.8.4 Block icon for OpDi03

Block icons for OpDi03


A variety of block icons are available with the following functions:
● Process tag type
● Operating modes
● Signal status, release for maintenance
● Bypass
● Interlocks
● Output signal
● Memo display

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 421
Operator control blocks
3.5 OpDi03 - Manipulating a digital value (3 pushbuttons)

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV8.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special features


1

3 Block icon in the full display

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV7.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special features


1 Block icon in the full display

- Block icon in "Out of service"


mode (example with type 1 block
icon)

Additional information on the block icon and the control options in the block icon is available
in the following chapters:
● Configuring the block icons (Page 246)
● Block icon structure (Page 239)
● Operation via the block icon (Page 248).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


422 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.6 OpStations - Configuration of the local operator authorization

3.6 OpStations - Configuration of the local operator authorization

3.6.1 Description of OpStations

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1901
Family: Operate

Area of application for OpStations


The block is used for the following applications:
● Configuration of the local operatorcontrol permission

How it works
The block converts the enabled operations or locks for up to 16 individual permissions in the
bit-coded Out output.
Refer also to OpStations block diagram (Page 430).

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38). The OpStations
block and the technologic block must be installed into the same cyclic interrupt OB.

Note
Install the blocks in a slower cyclic interrupt OB.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 423
Operator control blocks
3.6 OpStations - Configuration of the local operator authorization

With the default, the local operatorcontrol permission for all block instances on the faceplate
is disabled (= 0) and is configured as follows:
1. Assign each operator station a bit-coded ID (1, 2, 4, 8, 16, …), which you set in the internal
APLOpStation variables as a start value. You can set up to 16 different operator stations.
The variable is automatically created using the OS project editor and is located in the Split
Screen Manager group.
Note
A redundant server pair can only be represented as an operator station, which also affects
referenced client or single stations in the engineering station (ES). If a distinguishable
operator station is needed, different groups of referenced clients or single stations must be
created

2. Place the OpStations block in the chart.


Note
If you use the Opening additional faceplates (Page 217) function in multiple technologic
blocks, you need to use one OpStations block for every technologic block. Otherwise, the
call of the technologic block from the OpStations block is only possible for a technologic
block.

3. Enable the function at the technologic block via Feature.Bit24(Enabling local operator
authorization (Page 162)).
4. Interconnect the OpSt_In input parameter of the technologic block to the Out output
parameter of the OpStations block.
5. Select the operator stations on which the technologic block will usually be used. You can
select several at once. The selection is sent bit-coded to the Out output of the OpStations
block.
6. Specify a list for the texts for the standard view in the OpStations faceplate in the shared
declarations under the name APLOpStations in the SIMATIC Manager. Refer also to the
section OpStations standard view (Page 432) for more information.
Once these configuration steps are completed, the local operatorcontrol permission is enabled.
The enable for a technologic block is made when the bit-by-bit comparison between the
OpSt_Out parameter and the operator station ID "APLOpStation" does not equal 0.

Note
The local operatorcontrol permission is not visualized in the "Enabled operation" icons of the
block I/Os.

Startup characteristics
This block does not have any startup characteristics.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


424 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.6 OpStations - Configuration of the local operator authorization

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


You can find a description for each parameter in section OpStations I/Os (Page 428).

Status bit Parameter


0 In0
1 In1
2 In2
3 In3
4 In4
5 In5
6 In6
7 In7
8 In8
9 In9
10 In10
11 In11
12 In12
13 In13
14 In14
15 In15
16 - 29 Not used
30 Occupied
31 BatchEn

See also
OpStations operating modes (Page 425)
OpStations functions (Page 426)
OpStations error handling (Page 427)
OpStations messaging (Page 427)

3.6.2 OpStations operating modes

OpStations operating modes


This block does not have any modes.

See also
Description of OpStations (Page 423)
OpStations functions (Page 426)
OpStations error handling (Page 427)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 425
Operator control blocks
3.6 OpStations - Configuration of the local operator authorization

OpStations messaging (Page 427)


OpStations I/Os (Page 428)
OpStations block diagram (Page 430)

3.6.3 OpStations functions

Functions of OpStations
The functions for this block are listed below.

Operator control permissions


This block provides the standard function Operator control permissions (Page 265).
The block has the following permissions for the OS_Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 1 = Operator can enable In0
1 1 = Operator can enable In1
2 1 = Operator can enable In2
3 1 = Operator can enable In3
4 1 = Operator can enable In4
5 1 = Operator can enable In5
6 1 = Operator can enable In6
7 1 = Operator can enable In7
8 1 = Operator can enable In8
9 1 = Operator can enable In9
10 1 = Operator can enable In10
11 1 = Operator can enable In11
12 1 = Operator can enable In12
13 1 = Operator can enable In13
14 1 = Operator can enable In14
15 1 = Operator can enable In15
16 - 31 Not used

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


426 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.6 OpStations - Configuration of the local operator authorization

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


This block provides the standard function SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

See also
Description of OpStations (Page 423)
OpStations operating modes (Page 425)
OpStations error handling (Page 427)
OpStations messaging (Page 427)
OpStations I/Os (Page 428)
OpStations block diagram (Page 430)

3.6.4 OpStations error handling

OpStations error handling


This block does not have any error handling.

See also
Description of OpStations (Page 423)
OpStations operating modes (Page 425)
OpStations functions (Page 426)
OpStations messaging (Page 427)
OpStations I/Os (Page 428)
OpStations block diagram (Page 430)

3.6.5 OpStations messaging

OpStations messaging
This block does not offer messaging.

See also
Description of OpStations (Page 423)
OpStations operating modes (Page 425)
OpStations functions (Page 426)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 427
Operator control blocks
3.6 OpStations - Configuration of the local operator authorization

OpStations error handling (Page 427)


OpStations I/Os (Page 428)
OpStations block diagram (Page 430)

3.6.6 OpStations I/Os

OpStations I/Os

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation BOOL 0
BatchID Batch ID DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name S7-String
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1
Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 426) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
In0 1 = Enable for operator station 1 BOOL 0
In1 1 = Enable for operator station 2 BOOL 0
In2 1 = Enable for operator station 3 BOOL 0
In3 1 = Enable for operator station 4 BOOL 0
In4 1 = Enable for operator station 5 BOOL 0
In5 1 = Enable for operator station 6 BOOL 0
In6 1 = Enable for operator station 7 BOOL 0
In7 1 = Enable for operator station 8 BOOL 0
In8 1 = Enable for operator station 9 BOOL 0
In9 1 = Enable for operator station 10 BOOL 0
In10 1 = Enable for operator station 11 BOOL 0
In11 1 = Enable for operator station 12 BOOL 0
In12 1 = Enable for operator station 13 BOOL 0
In13 1 = Enable for operator station 14 BOOL 0
In14 1 = Enable for operator station 15 BOOL 0
In15 1 = Enable for operator station 16 BOOL 0
Occupied 1 = Occupied by batch control BOOL 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


428 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.6 OpStations - Configuration of the local operator authorization

Parameter Description Type Default


OS_Perm I/O for operator control permissions STRUCT -
(Page 426) ● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● ... ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use in PCS 7 BYTE 16#00
OS

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without BOOL 0
errors
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with settings DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
changed by the block algorithm
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
Out Output value: for additional interconnec‐ DWORD 16#00000000
tions to the OpSt_In input of a techno‐
logic block
Status Status word (Page 423) DWORD 16#00000000

See also
OpStations operating modes (Page 425)
OpStations error handling (Page 427)
OpStations messaging (Page 427)
OpStations block diagram (Page 430)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 429
Operator control blocks
3.6 OpStations - Configuration of the local operator authorization

3.6.7 OpStations block diagram

OpStations block diagram

,QWHUQH9DULDEOH
$3/2S6WDWLRQV 

26
8QVLJQHGELWYDOXH

'HIDXOWYLHZ2S6WDWLRQV

3UHYLHZ
2SHUDWRUVWDWLRQ 7HFKQRORJLFDOEORFN

2SHUDWRUVWDWLRQ &RPSDUH
ELWE\ELWIRU
 XSVWUHDP
RSHUDWRUFRQWURO
2SHUDWRUVWDWLRQ SHUPLVVLRQ
)DFHSODWH
)DFHSODWH

; %ORFNLFRQ

$3/2S6WDWLRQV
(QXP
2SHUDWRUVWDWLRQ

$6
2SHUDWRUVWDWLRQ

2SHUDWRUVWDWLRQ

2S6WDWLRQV

7HFKQRORJLFDOEORFN
,Q
,Q 

,Q
)HDWXUH%LW

2S6WB2XW

%LW
2XW 2S6WB,Q ,I/RFDORSHUDWLRQ
IXQFWLRQLVHQDEOHG
YLD)HDWXUH%LW

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


430 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.6 OpStations - Configuration of the local operator authorization

See also
Description of OpStations (Page 423)
OpStations operating modes (Page 425)
OpStations functions (Page 426)
OpStations error handling (Page 427)
OpStations messaging (Page 427)
OpStations I/Os (Page 428)

3.6.8 Operator control and monitoring

3.6.8.1 OpStations views

Views of the OpStations block


The OpStations block provides the following views:
● OpStations standard view (Page 432)
● Memo view (Page 315)
● Block icon of OpStations (Page 434)
Refer to the sections Structure of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure
(Page 239) for general information on the faceplate and block icon.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 431
Operator control blocks
3.6 OpStations - Configuration of the local operator authorization

3.6.8.2 OpStations standard view

OpStations standard view



 

(1) Configurable display text under the settings


You yourself can define the text for operator station 1 to operator station 15 instead of the
default text. Follow the steps outlined below:
● Create a list with the name "APLOpStations" in the SIMATIC Manager in the shared
declarations. To learn more on this, refer to "How to save shared declarations" in the
Process Control System PCS 7 Engineering System Configuration Manual.
Only values from 0 to 15 are permitted, other values will not be saved in the list.
The display names of the values are changed with the names of the operator stations. The
display name corresponds to the value 0 of the display for the check box In0 in the standard
view etc.
If the text is not configured, the entire line is not displayed.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


432 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.6 OpStations - Configuration of the local operator authorization

(2) Disabling or enabling operation for operator stations


In this area, you can disable the operation for an operator station or enable the operator station
for the connected technologic block. In this case, the upper check box corresponds to the
In0 I/O and the lower check box to the In15 I/O. Operation is only possible with the highest-
level operator control permission (same as simulation) .

(3) Display for the current operator station


The value of the current operator station is displayed as a gray dot in the corresponding line.

(4) Display for operability


Display of the operability of the technologic block on the current operator station.

(5) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of the technologic block
Use this navigation button to reach the standard view of the technologic block. The visibility of
this navigation button depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).
Additional information is available in the section Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

(6) Enabled operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator control permissions are assigned.
They depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Symbols for enabled operations:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
control permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 433
Operator control blocks
3.6 OpStations - Configuration of the local operator authorization

3.6.8.3 Block icon of OpStations

Block icons for OpStations


A variety of block icons are available with the following functions:
● Opening the faceplate

Icons Selection of the block icon in Special features


CFC
Without icon 1 Default no block icon
2 The block icon is transparent, if
operation on the operator sta‐
tion is possible

Note
The block icon is the size of a field in the status bar of a technologic block icon and can be
used as an add-on to the status bar. The layer of the block icon here should always be
higher than the layer of the technologic block icon, otherwise the block icon may be hidden
after an update.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


434 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.7 OpTrig - Manipulating a digital value (1 pushbutton)

3.7 OpTrig - Manipulating a digital value (1 pushbutton)

3.7.1 Description of OpTrig

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1868
Family: Operate

Area of application for OpTrig


The block is used for the following applications:
● Generation of a pulse signal (trigger)

How it works
Operator control block is used to implement single pushbutton control (comparable with
RESET pushbutton).

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38).

Startup characteristics
The block does not have any startup characteristics.

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


You can find a description for each parameter in section OpTrig I/Os (Page 439).

Status bit Parameter


0 Occupied
1 BatchEn
2 Not used
3 OosAct.Value
4 OosLi.Value
5 Not used
6 OnAct.Value
7 Out.Value
8 LiOpAct.Value
9 FbkIn.Value
10 - 31 Not used

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 435
Operator control blocks
3.7 OpTrig - Manipulating a digital value (1 pushbutton)

See also
OpTrig functions (Page 436)
OpTrig messaging (Page 439)
OpTrig block diagram (Page 441)
OpTrig error handling (Page 438)
OpTrig modes (Page 436)

3.7.2 OpTrig modes

OpTrig operating modes


The block can be operated using the following modes:
● On (Page 72)
● Out of service (Page 72)

"On"
General information on the "On" mode is available in the section On (Page 72).

"Out of service"
You can find general information about the "Out of service" mode in the section Out of
service (Page 72).

See also
OpTrig block diagram (Page 441)
OpTrig I/Os (Page 439)
OpTrig messaging (Page 439)
OpTrig functions (Page 436)
OpTrig error handling (Page 438)
Description of OpTrig (Page 435)

3.7.3 OpTrig functions

Functions of OpTrig
The functions for this block are listed below.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


436 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.7 OpTrig - Manipulating a digital value (1 pushbutton)

Issuing trigger signal internally or externally


Use the parameter LiOp to define whether the trigger signal is to be output by interconnection
or by the OS operator:
LiOp = 0: Trigger signal by OS operator (input parameter InOp)
LiOp = 1: Trigger signal via interconnection (input parameter InLi)

Input parameter for feedback value


This block has a FbkIn input parameter for displaying a feedback value in the faceplate.

Opening additional faceplates


This block provides the standard function Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

Forming the signal status for blocks


This block provides the standard function Forming and outputting the signal status for
technologic blocks (Page 110).
The worst signal status ST_Worst for the block is formed from the following parameter:
● FbkIn.ST
● InLi.ST (only if Feature.Bit10 = 1)

Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values


If the Feature bit Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values
(Page 190) is set to 1 and the parameter InLi.ST has bad signal status (16#00 or 16#28),
the block goes to the neutral position (Out = 0) in the "On" mode.

Operator control permissions


This block provides the standard function Operator control permissions (Page 265).
The block has the following permissions for the OS_Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 Not used
1 1 = Operator can switch to "On" mode
2 Not used
3 1 = Operator can switch to "Out of service" mode
4 1 = Operator can set the input parameter In
5 - 31 Not used

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 437
Operator control blocks
3.7 OpTrig - Manipulating a digital value (1 pushbutton)

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Simulating signals
This block provides the standard function Simulating signals (Page 59).

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the section
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133). The following functionality is available
for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
1 Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 181)
10 Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values (Page 190)
24 Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162)

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


This block provides the standard function SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

See also
Description of OpTrig (Page 435)
OpTrig messaging (Page 439)
OpTrig I/Os (Page 439)
OpTrig block diagram (Page 441)
OpTrig error handling (Page 438)
OpTrig modes (Page 436)

3.7.4 OpTrig error handling

OpTrig error handling


The block does not report any errors.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


438 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.7 OpTrig - Manipulating a digital value (1 pushbutton)

See also
OpTrig block diagram (Page 441)
OpTrig I/Os (Page 439)
OpTrig messaging (Page 439)
OpTrig functions (Page 436)
OpTrig modes (Page 436)
Description of OpTrig (Page 435)

3.7.5 OpTrig messaging

Messaging
This block does not offer messaging.

See also
Description of OpTrig (Page 435)
OpTrig functions (Page 436)
OpTrig I/Os (Page 439)
OpTrig block diagram (Page 441)
OpTrig error handling (Page 438)
OpTrig modes (Page 436)

3.7.6 OpTrig I/Os

OpTrig I/Os

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation BOOL 0
BatchID Batch ID DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name S7-String
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 439
Operator control blocks
3.7 OpTrig - Manipulating a digital value (1 pushbutton)

Parameter Description Type Default


FbkIn Input for feedback STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 436) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
InLi Interconnectable binary input STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
InOp* Binary input for operator BOOL 0
LiOp Switchover of operating mode between: STRUCT -
1 = Interconnection ● Value: BOOL ● 0
0 = Operator ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Occupied 1 = Occupied by batch control BOOL 0
OnOp* 1 = "On" mode via operator BOOL 0
OosLi 1 = "Out of service", via interconnection STRUCT -
or SFC ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosOp* 1 = "Out of service", via OS operator BOOL 0
OpSt_In Input parameter for local operating per‐ DWORD 16#00000000
mission, connected with the Out output
parameter of the upstream block, OpSta‐
tions (Page 423)
OS_Perm I/O for operator control permissions STRUCT -
(Page 436) ● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● ... ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
SelFp1 Call a block saved in this parameter as ANY -
additional faceplate (Page 217) in stand‐
ard view
SelFp2 Call a block saved in this parameter as ANY -
additional faceplate (Page 217) in the
preview
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use in PCS 7 BYTE 16#00
OS

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


440 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.7 OpTrig - Manipulating a digital value (1 pushbutton)

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without BOOL 0
errors
ErrorNum Reserved INT -1
LiOpAct Operator/interconnection is active STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosAct 1 = Block is "Out of service" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OnAct 1 = "On" mode enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpSt_Out Value of the OpSt_In input parameter, DWORD 16#00000000
for feedforwarding to other blocks. Bit 31
of this parameter is used by
Feature.Bit24
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with settings DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
changed by the block algorithm
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
Out Output STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
Status Status word (Page 435) DWORD 16#00000000

See also
OpTrig messaging (Page 439)
OpTrig block diagram (Page 441)
OpTrig error handling (Page 438)
OpTrig modes (Page 436)

3.7.7 OpTrig block diagram

OpTrig block diagram


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 441
Operator control blocks
3.7 OpTrig - Manipulating a digital value (1 pushbutton)

See also
OpTrig I/Os (Page 439)
OpTrig messaging (Page 439)
OpTrig functions (Page 436)
OpTrig error handling (Page 438)
OpTrig modes (Page 436)
Description of OpTrig (Page 435)

3.7.8 Operator control and monitoring

3.7.8.1 OpTrig views

Views of the OpTrig block


The block OpTrig provides the following views:
● OpTrig standard view (Page 442)
● OpTrig preview (Page 443)
● Memo view (Page 315)
● Batch view (Page 313)
● Block icon for OpTrig (Page 444)
Refer to the sections Structure of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure
(Page 239) for general information on the faceplate and block icon.

3.7.8.2 OpTrig standard view

OpTrig standard view

 

(1) Displaying and switching the operating mode


This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
● On (Page 72)
● Out of service (Page 72)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


442 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.7 OpTrig - Manipulating a digital value (1 pushbutton)

You can find additional information on this in the Switching operating states and operating
modes (Page 268) section.

(2) Set
Clicking "Set", outputs a pulse signal with the length of the cycle time at the Out output.

(3) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
Use this navigation button to reach the standard view of a block configured in the Engineering
System (ES). The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the
engineering system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in the Opening additional faceplates (Page 217)
section.

3.7.8.3 OpTrig preview

Preview of OpTrig

(1) Enabled operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator control permissions are assigned.
They depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Symbols for enabled operations:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter.
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process.
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
control permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 443
Operator control blocks
3.7 OpTrig - Manipulating a digital value (1 pushbutton)

The following enabled operations are shown here:


● "Set input": You can set the input.
● "On": You can switch to "On" operating mode.
● "Out of service": You can switch to "Out of service" operating mode.
● "Local operating permission": Use the ← button to switch to the standard view of the
OpStations block. Additional information is available in the section Operator control
permissions (Page 265).

(2) Display of current inputs and outputs


This area shows the most important parameters for this block with the current selection:
● "Output": 1 = Digital output value set
● "Feedback": 1 = Feedback set
● "Linked On": 1 = Linked input on

(3) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
Use this navigation button to reach the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system. The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the engineering
system (ES).
Refer also to the Opening additional faceplates (Page 217) section for more on this.

3.7.8.4 Block icon for OpTrig

Block icons for OpTrig


A variety of block icons are available with the following functions:
● Process tag type
● Operating modes
● Signal status, release for maintenance
● Memo display

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV8.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special features


1

2 Block icon in the full display

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


444 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Operator control blocks
3.7 OpTrig - Manipulating a digital value (1 pushbutton)

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV7.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special features


1 Block icon in the full display

- Block icon in "Out of service"


mode (example with type 1 block
icon)

Additional information on the block icon and the control options in the block icon is available
in the following chapters:
● Configuring the block icons (Page 246)
● Block icon structure (Page 239)
● Operation via the block icon (Page 248)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 445
Operator control blocks
3.7 OpTrig - Manipulating a digital value (1 pushbutton)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


446 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks 4
4.1 Comparison of large & small blocks

4.1.1 MonAnL compared to MonAnS

Comparison of the MonAnL and MonAnS blocks


The following tables are intended to help you decide which block to use.

Memory and runtime savings of the small block compared to the large block
You save the following resources for each instance:
● Memory space: ~ 45%
● Runtime: ~ 30%

Operating modes of the blocks

MonAnL MonAnS
On (Page 72) X X
Out of service (Page 72) X X

Functions of the blocks

MonAnL MonAnS
Alarm delays with two time val‐ X
ues per limit pair (Page 210)
Alarm delays with one time value X
per limit pair (Page 209)
Limit monitoring (Page 87) X X
Suppressing messages using X X
the MsgLock parameter
(Page 214)
Gradient monitoring (Page 465) X
Displaying auxiliary values X
(Page 220)
Forming and outputting the sig‐ X X
nal status for technologic blocks
(Page 110)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 447
Monitoring blocks
4.1 Comparison of large & small blocks

MonAnL MonAnS
Dead band (Page 62) X X
Release for maintenance X X
(Page 65)
Simulating signals (Page 59) X X
Selecting a unit of measure X X
(Page 221)
Operator control permissions X X
(Page 265)
Generating instance-specific X X
messages (Page 213)
Display and operator input area X X
for process values and setpoints
(Page 216)
Opening additional faceplates X X
(Page 217)
Time stamp (Page 1698) X
SIMATIC BATCH functionality X X
(Page 68)
Providing PV limit at the output x
(Page 465)

Configurable functions using the Feature parameter

Bit number Feature bit function MonAnL MonAnS


0 Set startup characteristics X X
(Page 141)
1 Reaction to the out of service mode X X
(Page 181)
22 Update acknowledgment and error X
status of the message call
(Page 163)
24 Enabling local operator authoriza‐ X X
tion (Page 162)
25 Suppression of all messages X X
(Page 178)
26 Reaction of the switching points in X X
the "Out of service" operating mode
(Page 180)
28 Disabling operating points X
(Page 149)
29 Signaling limit violation (Page 174) X

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


448 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.1 Comparison of large & small blocks

4.1.2 MonDiL compared to MonDiS

Comparison of the MonDiL and MonDiS blocks


The following tables are intended to help you decide which block to use.

Memory and runtime savings of the small block compared to the large block
You save the following resources for each instance:
● Memory space: ~ 55%
● Runtime: ~ 12%

Operating modes of the blocks

MonDiL MonDiS
On (Page 72) x x
Out of service (Page 72) x x

Functions of the blocks

MonDiL MonDiS
Suppression and and reporting x
of signal flutter (Page 516)
Delaying the on and off function x
(Page 516)
Delaying the on function x
(Page 541)
Specifying the status display for x x
the block icon (Page 516)
Displaying auxiliary values x
(Page 220)
Labeling of buttons and text x x
(Page 218)
Generating instance-specific x x
messages (Page 213)
Suppressing messages using x x
the MsgLock parameter
(Page 214)
Forming and outputting the sig‐ x x
nal status for technologic blocks
(Page 110)
Release for maintenance x x
(Page 65)
Simulating signals (Page 59) x x

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 449
Monitoring blocks
4.1 Comparison of large & small blocks

MonDiL MonDiS
Operator control permissions x x
(Page 265)
Opening additional faceplates x x
(Page 217)
Time stamp (Page 1698) x
SIMATIC BATCH functionality x x
(Page 68)
Group display for limit monitor‐ x x
ing, CSF and ExtMsgx (Page 86)

Configurable functions using the Feature parameter

Bit num‐ Feature bit function MonDiL MonDiS


ber
0 Set startup characteristics (Page 141) x x
1 Reaction to the out of service mode x x
(Page 181)
22 Update acknowledgment and error x
status of the message call (Page 163)
24 Enabling local operator authorization x x
(Page 162)
25 Suppression of all messages x x
(Page 178)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


450 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.2 AV - Displaying and monitoring additional value

4.2 AV - Displaying and monitoring additional value

4.2.1 Description of AV

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1903
Family: Monitor

Area of application for AV


The block is used for the following applications:
● Monitoring an additional analog value at a technologic block (motors or valves with motor).

How it works
The block must be connected to a channel block and monitors an additional analog value. The
messages of the AV block appear in the alarm view of the technologic block connected to it.
Monitoring limits are configured and controlled at the technologic block.

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38). The block is
also installed automatically in the startup OB (OB100). The AV block and the technologic block
must be installed in the same cyclic interrupt OB.
Interconnect the AV_Tech output parameter of the AV block to the input parameter AV of the
technologic block in the CFC.

Note
Interconnection of the block to multiple technologic blocks is not permitted.

For the AV block, the Advanced Process Library contains process tag type templates; these
serve as examples by providing various application scenarios for this block.
Examples of process tag types:
● Motor with an additional analog value and time-stamped signals (Motor_AV_EventTs)
(Page 2429)

Startup characteristics
Use the Feature Bit Set startup characteristics (Page 141) to define the startup characteristics
of this block.
The messages are suppressed after startup for the number of cycles set at RunUpCyc.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 451
Monitoring blocks
4.2 AV - Displaying and monitoring additional value

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


You can find a description for each parameter in section AV I/Os (Page 457).

Status bit Parameter


0 Occupied
1 BatchEn
2 SimOn
3 MsgLock
4 AV_AH_Act.Value
5 AV_WH_Act.Value
6 AV_TH_Act.Value
7 AV_TL_Act.Value
8 AV_WL_Act.Value
9 AV_AL_Act.Value
10 AV_AH_En
11 AV_WH_En
12 AV_TH_En
13 AV_TL_En
14 AV_WL_En
15 AV_AL_En
16 AV_AH_MsgEn
17 AV_WH_MsgEn
18 AV_TH_MsgEn
19 AV_TL_MsgEn
20 AV_WL_MsgEn
21 AV_AL_MsgEn
22 - 31 Not used

See also
AV modes (Page 452)
AV functions (Page 453)
AV error handling (Page 455)
AV messaging (Page 456)
AV block diagram (Page 460)

4.2.2 AV modes

AV operating modes
The block does not have any of its own operating modes.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


452 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.2 AV - Displaying and monitoring additional value

If the interconnected technologic block is set to the "Out of service" operating mode, the AV
block is also set to the "Out of service" mode. In this case AV_Out = AV.
With Feature.Bit5 =1 the following output parameter become the status of simulation
16#60, if mode is changed to "Out of service".
With Feature.Bit5 =0 the following output parameter become the status of 16#80, if mode
is changed to "Out of service".
● AV_Tech.ST
● AV_AH_Act.ST
● AV_WH_Act.ST
● AV_TH_Act.ST
● AV_TL_Act.ST
● AV_WL_Act.ST
● AV_Out.ST
● AV_AL_Act.ST

See also
Description of AV (Page 451)
AV functions (Page 453)
AV error handling (Page 455)
AV messaging (Page 456)
AV I/Os (Page 457)
AV block diagram (Page 460)

4.2.3 AV functions

Functions of AV
The functions for this block are listed below.

Alarm delays with two time values per limit pair


This block includes the standard function alarm delay for Two time values per limit pair
(Page 210).

Limit monitoring of an additional analog value


This block provides the standard function Limit monitoring of an additional analog value
(Page 92).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 453
Monitoring blocks
4.2 AV - Displaying and monitoring additional value

Limit monitoring with hysteresis


This block provides the standard function Limit monitoring with hysteresis (Page 98). It is
performed via the input parameter AV_Hyst.

Group display SumMsgAct for limit monitoring, CSF and ExtMsgx


The block provides the standard function Group display for limit monitoring, CSF and
ExtMsgx (Page 86).

Forming the signal status for blocks


The worst signal status ST_Worst for the block is formed from the following parameter:
● AV_Out.ST

Simulating signals
This block provides the standard function Simulating signals (Page 59).
The simulation in the block AV is activated at the technological block (SimOn = 1). The
simulation value SimAV for the block AV is also specified there. If internal simulation of the
technological block is switched on, the output AV_Out has the value of SimAV and the status
16#60.

Release for maintenance


The release for maintenance in the AV block is activated at the technological block
(MS_Release = 1).

Selecting a unit of measure


This block provides the standard function Selecting a unit of measure (Page 221).

Generating instance-specific messages


This block provides the standard function Generating instance-specific messages (Page 213).

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133) chapter. The following functionality
is available for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
0 Set startup characteristics (Page 141)
5 Changes signal status of outputs in OOS (Page 198)
22 Update acknowledgment and error status of the message call (Page 163)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


454 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.2 AV - Displaying and monitoring additional value

Bit Function
26 Reaction of the switching points in the "Out of service" operating mode (Page 180) (trans‐
ferred to AV via AV_Tech.Mode.Bit)
29 Signaling limit violation (Page 174) (transferred to AV via AV_Tech.Mode.Bit)

See also
AV modes (Page 452)
AV error handling (Page 455)
AV messaging (Page 456)
AV I/Os (Page 457)
AV block diagram (Page 460)
Description of AV (Page 451)

4.2.4 AV error handling

Error handling of AV
Refer to the section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions for the error handling
of all blocks.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers
● Mode switchover error

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum I/O can be used to output various error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; block is not processed
0 There is no error.
30 The value of AV can no longer be displayed in the REAL number field.

Mode switchover error


This error can be output by the block, see the section Error handling (Page 121).

See also
Description of AV (Page 451)
AV modes (Page 452)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 455
Monitoring blocks
4.2 AV - Displaying and monitoring additional value

AV functions (Page 453)


AV messaging (Page 456)
AV I/Os (Page 457)
AV block diagram (Page 460)

4.2.5 AV messaging

Messaging
The following messages can be generated for this block:
● Process messages

Process messages

Message Message iden‐ Message class Event


instance tifier
MsgEvId1 SIG 1 Alarm - high $$BlockComment$$
AV - high alarm limit violated
SIG 2 Warning - high $$BlockComment$$
AV - high warning limit violated
SIG 3 Tolerance - high $$BlockComment$$
AV - high tolerance limit violated
SIG 4 Tolerance - low $$BlockComment$$
AV - low tolerance limit violated
SIG 5 Warning - low $$BlockComment$$
AV - Low warning limit violated
SIG 6 Alarm - low $$BlockComment$$
AV - low alarm limit violated

Explanation
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId1

Associated value Block parameters


1 Reserved
2 Reserved
3 Reserved
4 AV_Out
5 ExtVa105
6 ExtVa106
7 ExtVa107

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


456 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.2 AV - Displaying and monitoring additional value

Associated value Block parameters


8 Reserved
9 Reserved
10 Reserved

The associated values 5 ... 7 are allocated to the parameters ExtVa105 ... ExtVa107 and
can be used. Additional information is available in the "Process Control System PCS 7 -
Engineering System" manual.

See also
Description of AV (Page 451)
AV modes (Page 452)
AV functions (Page 453)
AV error handling (Page 455)
AV I/Os (Page 457)
AV block diagram (Page 460)

4.2.6 AV I/Os

I/Os of AV

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AV Analog value STRUCT -
● Value:REAL ● 0.0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
AV_Unit Unit of measure for the analog value INT 1001
AV_A_DC* Delay time for incoming alarms [s] REAL 0.0
AV_A_DG* Delay time for outgoing alarms [s] REAL 0.0
AV_AH_En 1 = Enable high alarm BOOL 1
AV_AH_MsgEn 1 = Enable high alarm message BOOL 1
AV_AL_En 1 = Enable low alarm BOOL 1
AV_AL_MsgEn 1 = Enable low alarm message BOOL 1
AV_OpScale Limit for scale in bar graph of faceplate STRUCT -
for the analog value ● High:REAL ● 100.0
● Low:REAL ● 0.0
AV_T_DC* Delay time for incoming tolerances [s] REAL 0.0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 457
Monitoring blocks
4.2 AV - Displaying and monitoring additional value

Parameter Description Type Default


AV_T_DG* Delay time for outgoing tolerances [s] REAL 0.0
AV_TH_En 1 = Enable high tolerance BOOL 0
AV_TH_MsgEn 1 = Enable high tolerance message BOOL 1
AV_TL_En 1 = Enable low tolerance BOOL 0
AV_TL_MsgEn 1 = Enable low tolerance message BOOL 1
AV_W_DC* Delay time for incoming warnings [s] REAL 0.0
AV_W_DG* Delay time for outgoing warnings [s] REAL 0.0
AV_WH_En 1 = Enable high warning BOOL 1
AV_WH_MsgEn 1 = Enable high warning message BOOL 1
AV_WL_En 1 = Enable low warning BOOL 1
AV_WL_MsgEn 1 = Enable low warning message BOOL 1
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1
ExtVa105 Associated value 5 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa106 Associated value 6 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa107 Associated value 7 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 453) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
MsgEvId1 Message number (assigned automati‐ DWORD 16#00000000
cally)
RunUpCyc Number of cycles in startup; messages INT 3
are suppressed during these cycles
SampleTime Sampling time [s] (assigned automatical‐ REAL 0.1
ly)

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


458 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.2 AV - Displaying and monitoring additional value

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AV_AH_Act 1 = High alarm active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐
olation (Page 174)).
AV_AL_Act 1 = Low alarm active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐
olation (Page 174)).
AV_Out Analog value output STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AV_Tech Output parameter with which the input STRUCT -
parameter AV of the technologic block ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
has to be connected. This includes tags
which are passed on to the technologic ● ST: BYTE ● 16#00
block for additional processing.
AV_TH_Act 1 = High tolerance active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐
olation (Page 174)).
AV_TL_Act 1 = Low tolerance active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐
olation (Page 174)).
AV_WH_Act 1 = High warning active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐
olation (Page 174)).
AV_WL_Act 1 = Low warning active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐
olation (Page 174)).
ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without BOOL 0
errors

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 459
Monitoring blocks
4.2 AV - Displaying and monitoring additional value

Parameter Description Type Default


ErrorNum Output of current error number. For error INT -1
numbers that can be output by this block,
see AV error handling (Page 455)
MS_Release Release for maintenance: STRUCT -
1 = Release for OS operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MsgAckn1 Message acknowledgement status 1 WORD 16#0000
(output ACK_STATE of first ALARM_8P)
MsgErr1 Alarm error 1 (output ERROR of first BOOL 0
ALARM_8P)
MsgStat1 Message status 1 (output STATUS of first WORD 16#0000
ALARM_8P)
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
Status1 Status word 1 (Page 451) DWORD 16#00000000

See also
AV modes (Page 452)
AV messaging (Page 456)
AV block diagram (Page 460)

4.2.7 AV block diagram

AV block diagram
A block diagram is not provided for this block.

See also
Description of AV (Page 451)
AV modes (Page 452)
AV functions (Page 453)
AV error handling (Page 455)
AV messaging (Page 456)
AV I/Os (Page 457)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


460 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.3 MonAnL - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Large)

4.3 MonAnL - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Large)

4.3.1 Description of MonAnL

Object name (type+number) and family


Type + number: FB 1845
Family: Monitor

Area of application for MonAnL


The block is used for the following fields of applications:
● Monitoring an analog process value
● Monitoring of the gradient of an analog process value

Note
This block is also available as a small block. A comparison of the MonAnL and MonAnS blocks
is available in the section: MonAnL compared to MonAnS (Page 447)

How it works
The MonAnL block is used to monitor an analog process tag and the corresponding limits. It
also monitors the gradient of these signals. The block generates and outputs corresponding
messages if limits are violated or if a signal gradient does not meet requirements.

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38). The block is
also installed automatically in the startup OB (OB100).
For the MonAnL block, the Advanced Process Library contains templates for process tag types
as examples with various application scenarios for this block.
Examples of process tag types:
● Monitoring an analog process tag (AnalogMonitoring) (Page 2420)
● Monitoring of an analog process tag for PA/FF devices (AnalogMonitoring_Fb)
(Page 2421)

Startup characteristics
Use the Feature Bit Set startup characteristics (Page 141) to define the startup characteristics
of this block.
The messages are suppressed after startup for the number of cycles set at RunUpCyc.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 461
Monitoring blocks
4.3 MonAnL - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Large)

The output parameters PV_HysOut, PV_AH_Out, PV_WH_Out, PV_TH_Out, PV_AL_Out,


PV_WL_Out and PV_TL_Out are written by the corresponding input parameters PV_Hys,
PV_AH_Lim, PV_WH_Lim, PV_TH_Lim, PV_AL_Lim, PV_WL_Lim and PV_TL_Lim.

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


You can find a description for each parameter in section MonAnL I/Os (Page 475).

Status bit Parameter


0 Occupied
1 BatchEn
2 SimOn
3 OosAct.Value
4 OosLi.Value
5 Not used
6 OnAct.Value
7 BypassAct.Value
8 Display of BypassAct.Value in faceplate (display and operator controls) and block
icon
9 Not used
10 SimLiOp.Value
11 Delay of the PV_AH_Lim message
12 Delay of the PV_WH_Lim message
13 Delay of the PV_TH_Lim message
14 Delay of the PV_TL_Lim message
15 Delay of the PV_WL_Lim message
16 Delay of the PV_AL_Lim message
17 Collection of message delays
18 - 29 Not used
30 Auxiliary value 1 visible
31 Auxiliary value 2 visible

Status word allocation for Status2 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 MsgLock
1 PV_AH_Act.Value
2 PV_WH_Act.Value
3 PV_TH_Act.Value
4 PV_TL_Act.Value
5 PV_WL_Act.Value
6 PV_AL_Act.Value
7 PV_AH_En OR Feature.Bit23
8 PV_WH_En OR Feature.Bit23

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


462 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.3 MonAnL - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Large)

Status bit Parameter


9 PV_TH_En OR Feature.Bit23
10 PV_TL_En OR Feature.Bit23
11 PV_WL_En OR Feature.Bit23
12 PV_AL_En OR Feature.Bit23
13 PV_AH_MsgEn
14 PV_WH_MsgEn
15 PV_TH_MsgEn
16 PV_TL_MsgEn
17 PV_WL_MsgEn
18 PV_AL_MsgEn
19 GradHUpAct.Value
20 GradHDnAct.Value
21 GradLAct.Value
22 GradHUpEn
23 GradHDnEn
24 GradLEn
25 GradHUpMsgEn
26 GradHDnMsgEn
27 GradLMsgEn
28 0 = falling measured value
1 = rising measured value
29 Not used
30 Not used
31 MS_RelOp

Status word allocation for Status3 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 Effective signal 1 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
1 Effective signal 2 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
2 Effective signal 3 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
3 Effective signal 4 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
4 Effective signal 5 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
5 Effective signal 6 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
6 Effective signal 7 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
7 Effective signal 8 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
8 - 23 Effective signal 9..16 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
24 - 31 Not used

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 463
Monitoring blocks
4.3 MonAnL - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Large)

See also
MonAnL functions (Page 465)
MonAnL messaging (Page 473)
MonAnL block diagram (Page 483)
MonAnL error handling (Page 472)
MonAnL modes (Page 464)

4.3.2 MonAnL modes

MonAnL operating modes


The block can be operated using the following modes:
● On (Page 72)
● Out of service (Page 72)

"On"
You can find general information about the "On" mode in the On (Page 72) section.

"Out of service"
You can find general information about the "Out of service" mode in the Out of service
(Page 72) section.
With Feature.Bit5 =1 the following output parameter become the status of simulation
16#60, if mode is changed to "Out of service".
With Feature.Bit5 =0 the following output parameter become the status of 16#80, if mode
is changed to "Out of service".
● PV_Out.ST
● PV_Grad.ST
● PV_GradPP.ST
● PV_GradNP.ST
● PV_AH_Act.ST
● PV_WH_Act.ST
● PV_TH_Act.ST
● PV_TL_Act.ST
● PV_WL_Act.ST
● PV_AL_Act.ST
● GradHUpAct.ST

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


464 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.3 MonAnL - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Large)

● GradHDnAct.ST
● GradLAct.ST

See also
MonAnL block diagram (Page 483)
MonAnL I/Os (Page 475)
MonAnL messaging (Page 473)
MonAnL error handling (Page 472)
MonAnL functions (Page 465)
Description of MonAnL (Page 461)

4.3.3 MonAnL functions

Functions of MonAnL
The functions for this block are listed below.

Alarm delays with two time values


With the Separate delay times for each alarm (Page 174) function (Feature.Bit8), separate
input parameters can be set for the alarm delay on the high and low limits.
Feature.Bit8 = 0
This block includes the standard function alarm delay for Two time values per limit pair
(Page 210).
Feature.Bit8 = 1
This block includes the standard function alarm delay for Two time values for each individual
limit (Page 211).

Limit monitoring of the process value


This block provides the standard function Limit monitoring of the process value (Page 87).

Group display SumMsgAct for limit monitoring, CSF and ExtMsgx


The block provides the standard function Group display for limit monitoring, CSF and
ExtMsgx (Page 86).

Suppressing messages using the MsgLock parameter


This block provides the standard function Suppressing messages using the MsgLock
parameter (Page 214).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 465
Monitoring blocks
4.3 MonAnL - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Large)

Gradient monitoring
The PV_Grad gradient is calculated with a delay function, LagTime. This setting smoothes
the jumps of the PV input value with gradient calculation.
The gradient peak values are output at the output parameters PV_GradNP (negative slope)
and PV_GradPP (positive slope). They are reset as soon as the operator issues the reset
command.
The slope of the PV_Grad gradient can be monitored for the following limits:
● Limit (high) for positive gradients (GradHUpLim)
● Limit (high) for negative gradients (GradHDnLim)
● Limit (low) for absolute gradients (GradLLim)
The individual monitoring functions are activated at the corresponding "Enable" parameters,
e.g. GradHUpEn for activating the high gradient limit for positive gradients (GradHUpLim).
When the values you have defined are reached or exceeded, this is indicated at the
corresponding "Active" output parameters, e.g. with GradHUpAct = 1 for the limit (high) for
positive gradients.
Messages can be output for these alarms. You activate these as follows:
● Message for alarms (high) for positive gradients: GradHUpMsgEn = 1
● Message for alarms (high) for negative gradients: GradHDnMsgEn = 1
● Message for alarms (low) for absolute gradients: GradLMsgEn = 1

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


466 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.3 MonAnL - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Large)

Example of generating alarms for gradient monitoring


The following example shows how alarms for gradient monitoring are generated.

39B2XW

    

Number Description
1 Absolute gradient difference ≥ GradHDnLim
2 Absolute gradient difference ≤ GradLLim
3 Gradient difference ≥ GradHUpLim
4 Sampling time (SampleTime)
5 Alarm (low) for absolute gradients
6 Alarm (high) for negative gradients
7 No alarm
8 Alarm (high) for positive gradients

Displaying auxiliary values


This block provides the standard function Displaying auxiliary values (Page 220).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 467
Monitoring blocks
4.3 MonAnL - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Large)

Providing PV limit at the output


The following input parameters are also available at the output for making additional
interconnections to other blocks:

● PV_HysOut := PV_Hyst
● PV_AH_Out := PV_AH_Lim
● PV_WH_Out := PV_WH_Lim
● PV_TH_Out := PV_TH_Lim
● PV_TL_Out := PV_TL_Lim
● PV_WL_Out := PV_WL_Lim
● PV_AL_Out := PV_AL_Lim

Forming the signal status for blocks


This block provides the standard function Forming and outputting the signal status for
technologic blocks (Page 110).
The worst signal status ST_Worst for the block is formed from the following parameters:
● PV_Out.ST

Dead band
To suppress values that fluctuate around the zero point, this block has the standard function
Dead band (Page 62).

Smoothing PV
The block smoothes the input value PV using a first order time delay. This delay time can be
configured with the parameter SmoothTi. The input of SmoothTi is limited to 0 to 999999
sec. The block writes back the limits if the input value is outside the limits.
The block works according to the following formula:
PV_Out(n) = PV(n) + ( PV_Out(n-1) - PV(n) )*e(-SampleTime/SmoothTi)
Where:
● PV_Out = Output value
● SmoothTi = Smooth time
● SampleTime = Sampling time
● PV = Input value
The formula is valid only if SmoothTi > 0. If SmoothTi = 0, the input is passed directly to the
output. If the input value is outside the REAL range limits, the calculation is stopped. If the
input value is inside the range limits again, the calculation is resumed automatically.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


468 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.3 MonAnL - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Large)

39


39B2XW



6PRRWK7L>V@ W

Release for maintenance


This block provides the standard function Release for maintenance (Page 65).

Simulating signals
This block provides the standard function Simulating signals (Page 59).
You can simulate the following values:
● Process value (SimPV, SimPV_Li)

Bypass function
This block provides the standard function Bypassing signals (Page 109).

Selecting a unit of measure


This block provides the standard function Selecting a unit of measure (Page 221).

Disabling of limits
The block provides the standard function AUTOHOTSPOT

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133) . The following functionality is
available for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
0 Set startup characteristics (Page 141)
1 Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 181)
5 Changes signal status of outputs in OOS (Page 198)
8 Separate delay times for each alarm (Page 174)
9 Substitution value is active if the block is in bypass (Page 189)
11 Suppress MsgLock and “Out of service” mode for a connected message block (Page 192)
22 Update acknowledgment and error status of the message call (Page 163)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 469
Monitoring blocks
4.3 MonAnL - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Large)

Bit Function
23 Limits disabled in faceplate (Page 195)
24 Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162)
25 Suppression of all messages (Page 178)
26 Reaction of the switching points in the "Out of service" operating mode (Page 180)
28 Disabling operating points (Page 149)
29 Signaling limit violation (Page 174)

Operator permissions
This block provides the standard function Operator control permissions (Page 265).
The block has the following permissions for the OS_Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 Not used
1 1 = Operator can switch to "On" mode
2 Not used
3 1 = Operator can switch to "Out of service" mode
4 1 = Operator can activate bypass functionality
5 1 = Operator can deactivate bypass functionality
6 1 = Operator can change the simulation value SimPV
7 1 = Operator can reset the maximum values
8 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via GradHUpMsgEn
9 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via GradHDnMsgEn
10 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via GradLMsgEn
11 1 = Operator can activate the Simulation function
12 1 = Operator can activate the Release for maintenance function
13 1 = Operator can change the limit (PV) for high alarm
14 1 = Operator can change the limit (PV) for high warning
15 1 = Operator can change the limit (PV) for high tolerance
16 1 = Operator can change the limit (PV) for hysteresis
17 1 = Operator can change the limit (PV) for low alarm
18 1 = Operator can change the limit (PV) for low warning
19 1 = Operator can change the limit (PV) for low tolerance
20 1 = Operator can change the value for the high gradient limit for positive slopes
(GradHUpLim)
21 1 = Operator can change the value for high gradient limit for negative slopes
(GradHDnLim)
22 1 = Operator can change the value for the low gradient limit for positive and negative slopes
(GradLLim)
23 1 = Operator can change the dead band parameter DeadBand
24 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_AH_MsgEn
25 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_WH_MsgEn
26 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_TH_MsgEn

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


470 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.3 MonAnL - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Large)

Bit Function
27 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_TL_MsgEn
28 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_WL_MsgEn
29 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_AL_MsgEn
30 1 = Operator can enter SmoothTi
31 Reserved

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Generating instance-specific messages


This block provides the standard function Generating instance-specific messages (Page 213).

Specifying the display area for process and setpoint values as well as operations
This block provides the standard function Display and operator input area for process values
and setpoints (Page 216).

Opening additional faceplates


This block provides the standard function Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

Connection of the time-stamped messages from EventTs or Event16Ts


This block provides the standard function Connection of the time-stamped messages from
EventTs or Event16Ts (Page 216).

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


This block provides the standard function SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

See also
Description of MonAnL (Page 461)
MonAnL messaging (Page 473)
MonAnL I/Os (Page 475)
MonAnL block diagram (Page 483)
MonAnL error handling (Page 472)
MonAnL modes (Page 464)
EventTs functions (Page 1698)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 471
Monitoring blocks
4.3 MonAnL - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Large)

Error handling (Page 121)


Sealing the valve (Page 179)

4.3.4 MonAnL error handling

Error handling of MonAnL


Refer to the section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions for the error handling
of all blocks.
The following error message can be generated at this block:
● Error numbers
● Control system fault (CSF)

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum I/O can be used to output various error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; the block is not executed.
0 There is no error.
11 SmoothTi < 0 or SmoothTi > 999999:
Due to the internal limitation to 0 or 999999 by the block, the error number has the
value 11 only for one cycle. If SmoothTi is connected and is written in every cycle,
the value 11 will be retained.
30 The value of PV can no longer be displayed in the REAL number field.
43 TimeFactor < 0 or TimeFactor > 2

Control system fault (CSF)


An external signal can be activated via the CSF input. If this signal changes to = 1, a control
system fault is triggered. Refer to the Error handling (Page 121) section for more on this.

See also
MonAnL block diagram (Page 483)
MonAnL I/Os (Page 475)
MonAnL messaging (Page 473)
MonAnL functions (Page 465)
MonAnL modes (Page 464)
Description of MonAnL (Page 461)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


472 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.3 MonAnL - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Large)

4.3.5 MonAnL messaging

Messaging
The following messages can be generated for this block:
● Process control fault
● Process messages
● Instance-specific messages

Process control fault


You can interconnect an external fault (signal) to input parameter CSF. If it changes to CSF = 1,
a process control fault is triggered (MsgEvId2, SIG 2).

Process messages

Message in‐ Message identifier Message class Event


stance
MsgEvId1 SIG 1 Alarm - high $$BlockComment$$
PV - high alarm limit violated
SIG 2 Warning - high $$BlockComment$$
PV - high warning limit violated
SIG 3 Tolerance - high $$BlockComment$$
PV - high tolerance limit violated
SIG 4 Tolerance - low $$BlockComment$$
PV - low tolerance limit violated
SIG 5 Warning - low $$BlockComment$$
PV - low warning limit violated
SIG 6 Alarm - low $$BlockComment$$
PV - low alarm limit violated
SIG 7 Alarm - high $$BlockComment$$
Limit (high) for positive gradients vio‐
lated
SIG 8 Alarm - high $$BlockComment$$
Limit (high) for negative gradients vio‐
lated

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 473
Monitoring blocks
4.3 MonAnL - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Large)

Instance-specific messages
You can use up to three instance-specific messages with this block.

Message in‐ Message identifier Message class Event


stance
MsgEvId2 SIG 1 Alarm - low $$BlockComment$$
Limit (low) for absolute gradients violated
SIG 2 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External error has occurred
SIG 3 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 1
SIG 4 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 2
SIG 5 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 3

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId1

Associated value Block parameters


1 BatchName
2 StepNo
3 BatchID
4 ExtVa104
5 ExtVa105
6 ExtVa106
7 ExtVa107
8 ExtVa108
9 PV_Out.Value
10 Reserved

The associated values 4 to 9 are allocated to the parameters ExtVa104...ExtVa108,


PV_Out.Value and can be used.
Additional information is available in the "Process Control System PCS 7 - Engineering
System" manual.

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId2

Associated value Block parameters


1 BatchName
2 StepNo
3 BatchID
4 ExtVa204

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


474 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.3 MonAnL - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Large)

Associated value Block parameters


5 ExtVa205
6 ExtVa206
7 ExtVa207
8 ExtVa208
9 PV_Out.Value
10 Reserved

The associated values 4 to 9 are allocated to the parameters ExtVa204...ExtVa208,


PV_Out.Value and can be used.
Additional information is available in the "Process Control System PCS 7 - Engineering
System" manual.

See also
Description of MonAnL (Page 461)
MonAnL functions (Page 465)
MonAnL I/Os (Page 475)
MonAnL block diagram (Page 483)
MonAnL error handling (Page 472)
MonAnL modes (Page 464)

4.3.6 MonAnL I/Os


MonAnL I/Os

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation BOOL 0
BatchID Batch ID DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name S7-String
BypLiOp 1 = Bypass commands via interconnection STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
BypLock 1 = Bypass activation or deactivation is locked STRUCT -
for operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
BypPV Substitution value if block is in bypass REAL 0.0
BypPVLi 1 = Select bypass PV (via interconnection) STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 475
Monitoring blocks
4.3 MonAnL - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


BypPVOp 1 = Select bypass PV (via operator) BOOL 0
CSF 1 = External error (control system fault) Error STRUCT -
handling (Page 121) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
DeadBand Width of dead band REAL 0.0
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1
EventTsIn For interconnecting data between a technology ANY
block and the message blocks EventTs,
Event16Ts.
The EventTsIn input parameter serves to in‐
terconnect the EventTsOut output parameter
of the EventTs, Event16Ts block. When this
interconnection is configured, the messages of
the EventTs, Event16Ts block are displayed
on the OS in the alarm view of the technology
block and can also be acknowledged there.
ExtMsg1 Binary input for freely selectable message 1 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg2 Binary input for freely selectable message 2 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg3 Binary input for freely selectable message 3 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtVa104 Associated value 4 for messages (MsgEvID1) ANY
ExtVa105 Associated value 5 for messages (MsgEvID1) ANY
ExtVa106 Associated value 6 for messages (MsgEvID1) ANY
ExtVa107 Associated value 7 for messages (MsgEvID1) ANY
ExtVa108 Associated value 8 for messages (MsgEvID1) ANY
ExtVa204 Associated value 4 for messages (MsgEvID2) ANY
ExtVa205 Associated value 5 for messages (MsgEvID2) ANY
ExtVa206 Associated value 6 for messages (MsgEvID2) ANY
ExtVa207 Associated value 7 for messages (MsgEvID2) ANY
ExtVa208 Associated value 8 for messages (MsgEvID2) ANY
Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 465) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
GradHUpLim Gradient monitoring: Limit (high) for positive REAL 10.0
gradients
GradHDnLim Gradient monitoring: Limit (high) for negative REAL 10.0
gradients

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


476 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.3 MonAnL - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


GradLLim Gradient monitoring: Limit (low) for absolute REAL 1.0
gradients
GradHUpEn 1 = Activate gradient monitoring (high) for posi‐ BOOL 1
tive changes
GradHDnEn 1 = Activate gradient monitoring (high) for neg‐ BOOL 1
ative changes
GradLEn 1 = Activate gradient monitoring (low) BOOL 0
GradHUpMsgEn 1 = Activate gradient (high) message for posi‐ BOOL 1
tive changes
GradHDnMsgEn 1 = Activate gradient (high) message for nega‐ BOOL 1
tive changes
GradLMsgEn 1 = Activate gradient (low) message BOOL 1
LagTime Delay time [s] REAL 1.0
MS_RelOp* 1 = Release for maintenance by OS operator BOOL 0
MsgEvId1 Message number (assigned automatically) DWORD 16#00000000
MsgEvId2 Message number (assigned automatically) DWORD 16#00000000
MsgLock 1 = Suppress process messages. STRUCT -
See also the section Suppressing messages ● Value: BOOL ● 0
using the MsgLock parameter (Page 214) for ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
more on this.
Occupied 1 = Occupied by batch control BOOL 0
OnOp* 1 = "On" mode via operator BOOL 0
OosLi 1 = "Out of service", via interconnection or SFC STRUCT -
(0-1 edge transition) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosOp* 1 = "Out of service", via OS operator BOOL 0
OpSt_In Input parameter for local operator authorization, DWORD 16#00000000
connected with the Out output parameter of the
upstream block, OpStations (Page 423)
OS_Perm I/O for operator permissions (Page 465) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● Bit 10: BOOL ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
PV* Process value STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
PV_A_DC* Delay time for incoming PV alarms for over‐ REAL 0.0
shoot/undershoot or only for undershot process
values [s]
PV_A_DG* Delay time for outgoing PV alarms for overshoot/ REAL 0.0
undershoot or only for undershot process val‐
ues [s]
PV_AH_DC* Delay time for incoming alarms for overshot REAL 0.0
process values [s]

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 477
Monitoring blocks
4.3 MonAnL - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


PV_AH_DG* Delay time for outgoing alarms for overshot REAL 0.0
process values [s]
PV_AH_En 1 = Enable PV alarm limit (high) BOOL 1
PV_AH_Lim Limit PV alarm (high) REAL 95.0
PV_AH_MsgEn 1 = Enable PV alarm (high) message BOOL 1
PV_AL_En 1 = Enable PV alarm limit (low) BOOL 1
PV_AL_Lim PV alarm limit (low) REAL 5.0
PV_AL_MsgEn 1 = Enable PV alarm (low) message BOOL 1
PV_Hyst* Hysteresis for PV alarm, warning and tolerance REAL 0.0
limits
PV_OpScale Limit for scale in PV bar graph of faceplate STRUCT -
● High: REAL ● 100.0
● Low: REAL ● 0.0
PV_T_DC* Delay time for incoming PV tolerance messages REAL 0.0
for overshoot/undershoot or only for undershot
process values [s]
PV_T_DG* Delay time for outgoing PV tolerance messages REAL 0.0
for overshoot/undershoot or only for undershot
process values [s]
PV_TH_DC* Delay time for incoming tolerance messages for REAL 0.0
overshot process values [s]
PV_TH_DG* Delay time for outgoing tolerance messages for REAL 0.0
overshot process values [s]
PV_TH_En 1 = Enable PV tolerance limit (high) BOOL 0
PV_TH_Lim Limit PV tolerance message (high) REAL 85.0
PV_TH_MsgEn 1 = Enable message for PV tolerance message BOOL 1
(high)
PV_TL_En 1 = Enable PV tolerance limit (low) BOOL 0
PV_TL_Lim Limit PV tolerance message (low) REAL 15.0
PV_TL_MsgEn 1 = Activate message for PV tolerance message BOOL 1
(low)
PV_Unit Unit of measure for process value INT 1001
PV_W_DC* Delay time for incoming PV warnings for over‐ REAL 0.0
shoot/undershoot or only for undershot process
values [s]
PV_W_DG* Delay time for outgoing PV warnings for over‐ REAL 0.0
shoot/undershoot or only for undershot process
values [s]
PV_WH_DC* Delay time for incoming warnings for overshot REAL 0.0
process values [s]
PV_WH_DG* Delay time for outgoing warnings for overshot REAL 0.0
process values [s]
PV_WH_En 1 = Enable PV warning limit (high) BOOL 1
PV_WH_Lim Limit PV warning (high) REAL 90.0
PV_WH_MsgEn 1 = Enable PV warning (high) message BOOL 1

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


478 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.3 MonAnL - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


PV_WL_En 1 = Enable PV warning limit (low) BOOL 1
PV_WL_Lim Limit PV warning (low) REAL 10.0
PV_WL_MsgEn 1 = Enable PV warning (low) message BOOL 1
RstBypLi 1 = Reset bypass PV (via interconnection) STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RstBypOp 1 = Reset bypass PV (via operator) BOOL 0
RstOp* 1 = Operator reset of the gradient's peak values BOOL 0
RunUpCyc Number of cycles in startup; messages are sup‐ INT 3
pressed during these cycles
SampleTime Sampling time [s] (assigned automatically) REAL 0.1
SelFp1 1 = Call a block saved in this parameter as an ANY -
additional faceplate (Page 217) in the standard
view
SelFp2 1 = Call a block saved in this parameter as an ANY -
additional faceplate (Page 217) in the preview
SimLiOp Activation/deactivation of the simulation by: STRUCT -
0 = Operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
1 = Interconnection or SFC ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SimOnLi 1 = Simulation via interconnection or SFC (con‐ STRUCT -
trolled by SimLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SimOn* 1 = Simulation on BOOL 0
SimPV* Process value that is used for SimOn = 1 REAL 0.0
SimPV_Li Process value that is used for STRUCT -
SimOnLi.Value = 1 (SimLiOp.Value = 1) ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
SmoothTi* Smooth time [s] (limited to 0 to 999999) REAL 0.0
TimeFactor Time unit: INT 0
0 = Seconds
1 = Minutes
2 = Hours
UA1unit Unit of measure for analog auxiliary value 1 INT 0
UA2unit Unit of measure for analog auxiliary value 2 INT 0
UserAna1 Analog auxiliary value 1 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
UserAna2 Analog auxiliary value 2 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use in PCS 7 OS BYTE 16#00

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 479
Monitoring blocks
4.3 MonAnL - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Large)

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


BypassAct 1 = Bypass is activated in this block STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without errors BOOL 0
ErrorNum Output of pending error number. For error num‐ INT -1
bers that can be output by this block, see Mo‐
nAnL error handling (Page 472)
GradHUpAct 1 = Gradient alarm (high) for positive changes. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this parameter ● Value: BOOL ● 0
with Feature.Bit28 (Disabling operating ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
points (Page 149)) and with Feature.Bit29
(Signaling limit violation (Page 174)). ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
GradHDnAct 1 = Gradient alarm (high) for negative changes. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this parameter ● Value: BOOL ● 0
with Feature.Bit28 (Disabling operating ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
points (Page 149)) and with Feature.Bit29
(Signaling limit violation (Page 174)). ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
GradLAct 1 = Low gradient alarm. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this parameter ● Value: BOOL ● 0
with Feature.Bit28 (Disabling operating ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
points (Page 149)) and with Feature.Bit29
(Signaling limit violation (Page 174)). ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
MS_Release Release for maintenance: STRUCT -
1 = Release for OS operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MsgAckn1 Message acknowledgement status 1 (output WORD 16#0000
ACK_STATE of first ALARM_8P)
MsgAckn2 Message acknowledgement status 2 (output WORD 16#0000
ACK_STATE of second ALARM_8P)
MsgErr1 1 = Alarm error 1 (output ERROR of the first BOOL 0
ALARM_8P)
MsgErr2 1 = Alarm error 2 (output ERROR of the second BOOL 0
ALARM_8P)
MsgStat1 Message status 1 (output STATUS of first WORD 16#0000
ALARM_8P)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


480 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.3 MonAnL - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


MsgStat2 Message status 2 (output STATUS of second WORD 16#0000
ALARM_8P)
OnAct 1 = "On" mode enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosAct 1 = Block is "Out of service" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpSt_Out Value of the OpSt_In input parameter, for feed‐ DWORD 16#00000000
forwarding to other blocks. Bit 31 of this param‐
eter is used by Feature.Bit24
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with settings changed by DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
the block algorithm
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
PV_AH_Act 1 = PV alarm (high) active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this parameter ● Value: BOOL ● 0
with Feature.Bit28 (Disabling operating ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
points (Page 149)) and with Feature.Bit29 (Sig‐
naling limit violation (Page 174)). ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
PV_AH_Out PV - alarm limit (high) output REAL 0.0
PV_AL_Act 1 = PV alarm (low) active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this parameter ● Value: BOOL ● 0
with Feature.Bit28 (Disabling operating ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
points (Page 149)) and with Feature.Bit29
(Signaling limit violation (Page 174)). ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
PV_AL_Out PV - alarm limit (low) output REAL 0.0
PV_Grad Gradient value. STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
PV_GradPP Gradient maximum peak value STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
PV_GradNP Gradient minimum peak value STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
PV_HysOut Hysteresis for PV alarm, output REAL 0.0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 481
Monitoring blocks
4.3 MonAnL - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


PV_Out Output for process value STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
● Bit 1: BOOL of internal ● 0
fill byte
(Bypass information
bit)
PV_TH_Act 1 = PV tolerance message (high) active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this parameter ● Value: BOOL ● 0
with Feature.Bit28 (Disabling operating ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
points (Page 149)) and with Feature.Bit29
(Signaling limit violation (Page 174)). ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
PV_TH_Out PV tolerance limit (high) output REAL 0.0
PV_TL_Act 1 = PV tolerance message (low) active. You can STRUCT -
change the reaction for this parameter with ● Value: BOOL ● 0
Feature.Bit28 (Disabling operating points
(Page 149)) and with Feature.Bit29 (Signal‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ing limit violation (Page 174)). ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
PV_TL_Out PV tolerance limit (low) output REAL 0.0
PV_WH_Act 1 = PV warning (high) active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this parameter ● Value: BOOL ● 0
with Feature.Bit28 (Disabling operating ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
points (Page 149)) and with Feature.Bit29
(Signaling limit violation (Page 174)). ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
PV_WH_Out Limit PV warning (high) output REAL 0.0
PV_WL_Act 1 = PV warning (low) active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this parameter ● Value: BOOL ● 0
with Feature.Bit28 (Disabling operating ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
points (Page 149)) and with Feature.Bit29
(Signaling limit violation (Page 174)). ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
PV_WL_Out Limit PV warning (low) output REAL 0.0
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
Status1 Status word 1 (Page 461) DWORD 16#00000000
Status2 Status word 2 (Page 461) DWORD 16#00000000
Status3 Status word 3 (Page 461) DWORD 16#00000000
SumMsgAct 1 = Group message is active STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


482 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.3 MonAnL - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Large)

See also
MonAnL messaging (Page 473)
MonAnL block diagram (Page 483)
MonAnL modes (Page 464)

4.3.7 MonAnL block diagram

MonAnL block diagram


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

See also
MonAnL I/Os (Page 475)
MonAnL messaging (Page 473)
MonAnL error handling (Page 472)
MonAnL functions (Page 465)
MonAnL modes (Page 464)
Description of MonAnL (Page 461)

4.3.8 Operator control and monitoring

4.3.8.1 MonAnL views

Views of the MonAnL block


The block MonAnL provides the following views:
● MonAnL standard view (Page 484)
● Alarm view (Page 313)
● MonAnL limit view (Page 487)
● Trend view (Page 317)
● MonAnL parameter view (Page 489)
● MonAnL preview (Page 490)
● Memo view (Page 315)
● Batch view (Page 313)
● Block icon for MonAnL (Page 491)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 483
Monitoring blocks
4.3 MonAnL - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Large)

Refer to the sections Structure of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure
(Page 239) for general information on the faceplate and block icon.

4.3.8.2 MonAnL standard view

MonAnL standard view

 







 




 




(1) Displaying and switching the operating mode


This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
● On (Page 72)
● Out of service (Page 72)
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for information
on switching the operating mode.

(2) High and low scale range for the process value
These values provide information on the display range for the bar graph of the process value.
The scale range is defined in the engineering system.

(3) Display of the process value including signal status


This area shows the current process value with the corresponding signal status.
If text is configured for this command, it is displayed as additional text and button label for
command selection. Additional information is available in the section Labeling of buttons and
text (Page 218).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


484 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.3 MonAnL - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Large)

You can change the text for the process value with the PV_Out parameter.

(4) High and low scale range for the gradient value
These values provide information on the display range for the bar graph of the gradient. The
scale range corresponds to 10% of the scale range for the process value: For example, once
you have specified a process value scale range of 0 to 100, the scale range of the gradient
will be automatically set to a value between -10 and 10.
The current gradient value is displayed when one of the following monitoring functions is
activated:
● Gradient monitoring for positive changes (GradHUpEn = 1)
● Gradient monitoring for negative changes (GradHDnEn = 1)
● Gradient monitoring (GradLEn = 1)

(5) Display of the gradient


This area shows the current, minimum and maximum gradient value and the rise and fall of
the value. This display of the minimum and maximum gradient value functions like a min/max
pointer.
The current gradient value is displayed when one of the following monitoring functions is
activated:
● Gradient monitoring for positive changes (GradHUpEn = 1)
● Gradient monitoring for negative changes (GradHDnEn = 1)
● Gradient monitoring (GradLEn = 1)
The maximum peak gradient value is displayed when the gradient monitoring is activated for
positive changes (GradHUpEn = 1)
The minimum peak gradient value is displayed when the gradient monitoring is activated for
negative changes (GradHDnEn = 1)

(6) Resetting the peak values of the gradient


You can use this button to reset the maximum or minimum peak value of the gradient
(PV_GradPP and PV_GradNP output parameters).
The button is displayed when gradient monitoring is activated for positive
(GradHUpEn = 1) or negative changes (GradHDnEn = 1).

(7) Display of auxiliary values


You can use this area to display two auxiliary values that have been configured in the
engineering system. You can find additional information on this in the Displaying auxiliary
values (Page 220) section.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 485
Monitoring blocks
4.3 MonAnL - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Large)

(8) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
Use this navigation button to reach the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system. The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the engineering
system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in the Opening additional faceplates (Page 217)
section.

(9) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Maintenance"

(10) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Simulation"

(11) Bar graph for the "process value"


This area shows the current "Process value" in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the
bar graph depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).

(12) Bar graph for the gradient


This area shows the current gradient value in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the
bar graph depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).
The bar graph is displayed when gradient monitoring is activated for positive
(GradHUpEn = 1) or negative changes (GradHDnEn = 1).

(13) Display of the gradient


This display indicates the movement of the gradient up (↑) or down (↓).
Gradient monitoring is displayed when the gradient value PV_Grad ≠ 0 and one of the following
monitoring functions is activated:
● Gradient monitoring for positive changes (GradHUpEn = 1)
● Gradient monitoring for negative changes (GradHDnEn = 1)
● Gradient monitoring (GradLEn = 1)

(14) Display of limits in the bar graph


This area shows you the specified limits. Refer to the MonAnL limit view (Page 487) section
for more on this.
The display only appears when the bar for the gradients is also displayed.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


486 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.3 MonAnL - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Large)

(15) Limit display


These colored triangles show you the specified limits in the respective bar graph.

4.3.8.3 MonAnL limit view

Limit view of MonAnL


Several values are set in this view by default:
● Process value limits
● Gradient limits
The toolbars of the faceplate and the block icon indicate when the limits are reached or violated.

 

(1) Process value limits


In this area, you can enter the limits for the process value. Refer to the Changing values
(Page 270) section for more on this.
You can change the following limits:
● "H alarm": Alarm high
● "H warning": Warning high
● "H tolerance": Tolerance high
● "Hysteresis"
● "L tolerance": Tolerance low
● "L warning": Warning low
● "L alarm": Alarm low

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 487
Monitoring blocks
4.3 MonAnL - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Large)

(2) Gradient limits


You can enter the gradient limits in this area. Refer to the Changing values (Page 270) section
for more on this.
You can change the following limits:
● "H alarm ⇑": Gradient for the high slope for positive changes
● "H alarm ⇓": Gradient for the high slope for negative changes
● "L alarm ⇑⇓": Gradient for the low slope (absolute)

(3) Enabled operation


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Icons for enabled operation:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)

(4) Message suppression / delays


Message suppression indicates whether or not the suppression of the associated message in
the AS block is activated with the xx_MsgEn parameter. The output of messages is not
suppressed when the block is installed (all xx_MsgEn parameters are preset to 1). Messages
can only be output if limit monitoring of the additional analog value has been enabled.
Alarm delays are also displayed in this position; for more on this see section Area of application
for alarm delays (Page 208).

(5) Suppress messages


You can enable / disable messages by setting the check mark.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


488 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.3 MonAnL - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Large)

4.3.8.4 MonAnL parameter view

Parameter view of MonAnL

(1) Enabled operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator control permissions are assigned.
They depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Symbols for enabled operations:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
control permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).

(2) Parameter
You can change the following parameter in this area:
● "Dead band"
● "Smooth time"
You can find more information about this in the section Changing values (Page 270).

(3) Service
You can select the following functions in this area:
● "Bypass"
● "Simulation"
● "Release for maintenance"
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for more on
this.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 489
Monitoring blocks
4.3 MonAnL - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Large)

You can find information on this area in the section:


● Bypassing signals (Page 109)
● Simulating signals (Page 59)
● Release for maintenance (Page 65)

4.3.8.5 MonAnL preview

Preview of MonAnL




(1) Enable operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Icons for enabled operation:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)
The following enabled operations are shown here:
● Reset: You can reset the peak value of the gradient.
● "On": You can switch to "On" operating mode.
● "Out of service": You can switch to "Out of service" operating mode.
● "Local operator permission": Use the ← button to switch to the standard view of the
OpStations block. You can find additional information on this in the section Operator control
permissions (Page 265) .

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


490 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.3 MonAnL - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Large)

(2) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
Use this navigation button to open the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system (ES). The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the
engineering system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in the section Opening additional faceplates
(Page 217) .

(3) Process value


This area displays the real process value (PV).

(4) Bypass value


This area displays the bypass value (BypPV).

4.3.8.6 Block icon for MonAnL

Block symbols for MonAnL


A variety of block symbols are available with the following functions:
● Process tag type
● Limits (high/low)
● Violation of alarm, warning, and tolerance limits as well as control system faults
● Operating modes
● Signal status, release for maintenance
● Memo display
● Process value

The block symbols from template @TemplateAPLV8.PDL:

Symbols Selection of the block symbol in Special features


CFC
1

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 491
Monitoring blocks
4.3 MonAnL - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Large)

The block symbols from template @TemplateAPLV7.PDL:

Symbols Selection of the block symbol in Special features


CFC
1 Block symbol in the full display

- Block symbol in "Out of service"


mode (example with block sym‐
bol type 1)

Additional information on the block symbol and the control options in the block symbol is
available in the following chapters:
● Configuring the block icons (Page 246)
● Block icon structure (Page 239)
● Operation via the block icon (Page 248).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


492 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.4 MonAnS - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Small)

4.4 MonAnS - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Small)

4.4.1 Description of MonAnS

Object name (type + number)


Type + number: FB 1912
Family: Monitor

Area of application for MonAnS


The block is used for the following fields of application
● Monitoring an analog process value

Note
This block is also available as a large block. A comparison of the MonAnL and MonAnS blocks
is available in the section: MonAnL compared to MonAnS (Page 447)

How it works
The MonAnS block is used to monitor an analog process tag and the corresponding limits. The
block generates and outputs messages if any violation of limits is detected.

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38). The block is
also installed automatically in the startup OB (OB100).

Startup characteristics
Use the Feature Bit Set startup characteristics (Page 141) to define the startup characteristics
of this block.
The messages are suppressed after startup for the number of cycles set at RunUpCyc.

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


You can find a description for each parameter in section MonAnS I/Os (Page 501).

Status bit Parameter


0 Occupied
1 BatchEn
2 SimOn

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 493
Monitoring blocks
4.4 MonAnS - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Small)

Status bit Parameter


3 OosAct.Value
4 OosLi.Value
5 Not used
6 OnAct.Value
7 - 10 Not used
11 Delay of the PV_AH_Lim message
12 Delay of the PV_WH_Lim message
13 - 14 Not used
15 Delay of the PV_WL_Lim message
16 Delay of the PV_AL_Lim message
17 Collection of message delays
18 - 31 Not used

Status word allocation for Status2 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 MsgLock
1 PV_AH_Act.Value
2 PV_WH_Act.Value
3-4 Not used
5 PV_WL_Act.Value
6 PV_AL_Act.Value
7 PV_AH_En OR Feature.Bit23
8 PV_WH_En OR Feature.Bit23
9 - 10 Not used
11 PV_WL_En OR Feature.Bit23
12 PV_AL_En OR Feature.Bit23
13 PV_AH_MsgEn
14 PV_WH_MsgEn
15 - 16 Not used
17 PV_WL_MsgEn
18 PV_AL_MsgEn
19 - 30 Not used
31 MS_RelOp

See also
MonAnS operating modes (Page 495)
MonAnS functions (Page 496)
MonAnS error handling (Page 498)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


494 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.4 MonAnS - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Small)

MonAnS messaging (Page 499)


MonAnS block diagram (Page 504)

4.4.2 MonAnS operating modes

MonAnS operating modes


The block can be operated using the following modes:
● On (Page 72)
● Out of service (Page 72)

"On"
General information on the "On" mode is available in the section On (Page 72).

"Out of service"
You can find general information about the "Out of service" mode in the section Out of
service (Page 72).
With Feature.Bit5 =1 the following output parameter become the status of simulation
16#60, if mode is changed to "Out of service".
With Feature.Bit5 =0 the following output parameter become the status of 16#80, if mode
is changed to "Out of service".
● PV_Out.ST
● PV_AH_Act.ST
● PV_WH_Act.ST
● PV_WL_Act.ST
● PV_AL_Act.ST

See also
Description of MonAnS (Page 493)
MonAnS functions (Page 496)
MonAnS error handling (Page 498)
MonAnS messaging (Page 499)
MonAnS I/Os (Page 501)
MonAnS block diagram (Page 504)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 495
Monitoring blocks
4.4 MonAnS - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Small)

4.4.3 MonAnS functions

Functions of MonAnS
The functions for this block are listed below.

Alarm delays with one time value per limit pair


This block includes the standard function alarm delay for One time value per limit pair
(Page 209).

Limit monitoring of the process value


This block provides the standard function Limit monitoring of the process value (Page 87).

Suppressing messages using the MsgLock parameter


This block provides the standard function Suppressing messages using the MsgLock
parameter (Page 214).

Group display SumMsgAct for limit monitoring, CSF and ExtMsgx


The block has the standard function Group display for limit monitoring, CSF and ExtMsgx
(Page 86).

Forming the signal status for blocks


This block provides the standard function Forming and outputting the signal status for
technologic blocks (Page 110).
The worst signal status ST_Worst for the block is formed from the following parameters:
● PV_Out.ST

Dead band
To suppress values that fluctuate around the zero point, this block has the standard function
Dead band (Page 62).

Release for maintenance


This block provides the standard function Release for maintenance (Page 65).

Simulating signals
This block provides the standard function Simulating signals (Page 59).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


496 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.4 MonAnS - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Small)

Selecting a unit of measure


This block provides the standard function Selecting a unit of measure (Page 221).

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133) . The following functionality is
available for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
0 Set startup characteristics (Page 141)
1 Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 181)
5 Changes signal status of outputs in OOS (Page 198)
23 Limits disabled in faceplate (Page 195)
24 Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162)
25 Suppression of all messages (Page 178)
26 Reaction of the switching points in the "Out of service" operating mode (Page 180)

Operator permissions
This block provides the standard function Operator control permissions (Page 265).
The block has the following permissions for the OS_Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 Not used
1 1 = Operator can switch to "On" mode
2 Not used
3 1 = Operator can switch to "Out of service" mode
4-9 Not used
10 1 = Operator can change the simulation value SimPV
11 1 = Operator can activate the Simulation function
12 1 = Operator can activate the Release for maintenance function
13 1 = Operator can change the limit (PV) for high alarm
14 1 = Operator can change the limit (PV) for high warning
15 Not used
16 1 = Operator can change the limit (PV) for hysteresis
17 1 = Operator can change the limit (PV) for low alarm
18 1 = Operator can change the limit (PV) for low warning
19 - 22 Not used
23 1 = Operator can change the dead band parameter DeadBand
24 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_AH_MsgEn
25 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_AL_MsgEn
26 -27 Not used
28 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_WH_MsgEn

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 497
Monitoring blocks
4.4 MonAnS - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Small)

Bit Function
29 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_WL_MsgEn
30 - 31 Not used

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Generating instance-specific messages


This block provides the standard function Generating instance-specific messages (Page 213).

Specifying the display area for process and setpoint values as well as operations
This block provides the standard function Display and operator input area for process values
and setpoints (Page 216).

Opening additional faceplates


This block provides the standard function Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


This block provides the standard function SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

See also
Description of MonAnS (Page 493)
MonAnS operating modes (Page 495)
MonAnS error handling (Page 498)
MonAnS messaging (Page 499)
MonAnS I/Os (Page 501)
MonAnS block diagram (Page 504)

4.4.4 MonAnS error handling

Error handling of MonAnS


Refer to the section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions for the error handling
of all blocks.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


498 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.4 MonAnS - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Small)

The following error message can be generated at this block:


● Error numbers
● Control system fault (CSF)

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum I/O can be used to output various error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; the block is not executed.
0 There is no error.
30 The value of PV can no longer be displayed in the REAL number field.

Control system fault (CSF)


An external signal can be activated via the CSF input. If this signal changes to = 1, a control
system fault is triggered. Refer to the Error handling (Page 121) section for more on this.

See also
Description of MonAnS (Page 493)
MonAnS operating modes (Page 495)
MonAnS functions (Page 496)
MonAnS messaging (Page 499)
MonAnS I/Os (Page 501)
MonAnS block diagram (Page 504)

4.4.5 MonAnS messaging

Messaging
The following messages can be generated for this block:
● Process control fault
● Process messages
● Instance-specific messages

Process control fault


You can interconnect an external fault (signal) to input parameter CSF. If it changes to CSF = 1,
a process control fault is triggered (MsgEvId1, SIG 5).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 499
Monitoring blocks
4.4 MonAnS - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Small)

Process messages

Message in‐ Message identifier Message class Event


stance
MsgEvId1 SIG 1 Alarm - high $$BlockComment$$
PV - high alarm limit violated
SIG 2 Warning - high $$BlockComment$$
PV - high warning limit violated
SIG 3 Warning - low $$BlockComment$$
PV - low warning limit violated
SIG 4 Alarm - low $$BlockComment$$
PV - low alarm limit violated
SIG 5 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External error has occurred

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment

Instance-specific messages
You have the option to use two instance-specific messages for this block.

Message in‐ Message identifier Message class Event


stance
MsgEvId1 SIG 6 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 1
SIG 7 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 2

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId1

Associated value Block parameters


1 BatchName
2 StepNo
3 BatchID
4 ExtVa104
5 ExtVa105
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
8 Reserved
9 Reserved
10 Reserved

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


500 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.4 MonAnS - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Small)

The associated values 4 ... 5 are allocated to the parameters ExtVa104 ... ExtVa105 and
can be used. Additional information is available in the "Process Control System PCS 7 -
Engineering System" manual.

See also
Description of MonAnS (Page 493)
MonAnS operating modes (Page 495)
MonAnS functions (Page 496)
MonAnS error handling (Page 498)
MonAnS I/Os (Page 501)
MonAnS block diagram (Page 504)

4.4.6 MonAnS I/Os


MonAnS I/Os

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation BOOL 0
BatchID Batch ID DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name S7-String
CSF 1 = External error (control system fault) STRUCT -
Error handling (Page 121) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
DeadBand Width of dead band REAL 0.0
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1
ExtMsg1 Binary input for freely selectable message 1 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg2 Binary input for freely selectable message 2 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtVa104 Associated value 4 for messages (MsgEvID1) ANY
ExtVa105 Associated value 5 for messages (MsgEvID1) ANY
Feature I/O for additional MonAnS functions (Page 496) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
MS_RelOp* 1 = Release for maintenance by OS operator BOOL 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 501
Monitoring blocks
4.4 MonAnS - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Small)

Parameter Description Type Default


MsgEvId1 Message number (assigned automatically) DWORD 16#00000000
MsgLock 1 = Suppress process messages. STRUCT -
See also the section Suppressing messages ● Value: BOOL ● 0
using the MsgLock parameter (Page 214) for ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
more on this.
Occupied 1 = Occupied by batch control BOOL 0
OnOp* 1 = "On" mode via operator BOOL 0
OosLi 1 = "Out of service", via interconnection or SFC STRUCT -
(0-1 edge transition) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosOp* 1 = "Out of service", via OS operator BOOL 0
OpSt_In Input parameter for local operator authorization, DWORD 16#00000000
connected with the Out output parameter of the
upstream block, Description of OpStations
(Page 423)
OS_Perm I/O for MonAnS functions (Page 496) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● Bit 10: BOOL ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
PV* Process value STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
PV_A_DC* Delay time for incoming PV alarms [s] REAL 0.0
PV_AH_En 1 = Enable PV alarm limit (high) BOOL 1
PV_AH_Lim Limit PV alarm (high) REAL 95.0
PV_AH_MsgEn 1 = Enable PV alarm (high) message BOOL 1
PV_AL_En 1 = Enable PV alarm limit (low) BOOL 1
PV_AL_Lim PV alarm limit (low) REAL 5.0
PV_AL_MsgEn 1 = Enable PV alarm (low) message BOOL 1
PV_Hyst* Hysteresis for PV alarm, warning and tolerance REAL 0.0
limits
PV_OpScale Limit for scale in PV bar graph of faceplate STRUCT -
● High: REAL ● 100.0
● Low: REAL ● 0.0
PV_Unit Unit of measure for process value INT 1001
PV_W_DC* Delay time for incoming PV warnings [s] REAL 0.0
PV_WH_En 1 = Enable PV warning limit (high) BOOL 1
PV_WH_Lim Limit PV warning (high) REAL 90.0
PV_WH_MsgEn 1 = Enable PV warning (high) message BOOL 1
PV_WL_En 1 = Enable PV warning limit (low) BOOL 1
PV_WL_Lim Limit PV warning (low) REAL 10.0
PV_WL_MsgEn 1 = Enable PV warning (low) message BOOL 1

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


502 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.4 MonAnS - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Small)

Parameter Description Type Default


RunUpCyc Number of cycles in startup; messages are sup‐ INT 3
pressed during these cycles
SampleTime Sampling time [s] (assigned automatically) REAL 0.1
SelFp1 1 = Call a block saved in this parameter as an ANY -
Opening additional faceplates (Page 217) in the
standard view
SimOn 1 = Simulation on BOOL 0
SimPV* Process value used for SimOn = 1 REAL 0.0
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use in PCS 7 OS BYTE 16#00

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without errors BOOL 0
ErrorNum Output of pending error number. For error num‐ INT -1
bers that can be output by this block, see Mo‐
nAnS error handling (Page 498)
MS_Release Release for maintenance: STRUCT -
1 = Release for OS operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OnAct 1 = "On" mode enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosAct 1 = Block is "Out of service" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpSt_Out Value of the OpSt_In input parameter, for feed‐ DWORD 16#00000000
forwarding to other blocks. Bit 31 of this param‐
eter is used by Feature.Bit24
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with settings changed by DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
the block algorithm
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
PV_AH_Act 1 = PV alarm (high) active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this parameter ● Value: BOOL ● 0
with Feature.Bit28 (Disabling operating ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
points (Page 149)) and with Feature.Bit29
(Signaling limit violation (Page 174)).
PV_AL_Act 1 = PV alarm (low) active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this parameter ● Value: BOOL ● 0
with Feature.Bit28 (Disabling operating ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
points (Page 149)) and with Feature.Bit29
(Signaling limit violation (Page 174)).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 503
Monitoring blocks
4.4 MonAnS - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Small)

Parameter Description Type Default


PV_Out Output for process value STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
PV_WH_Act 1 = PV warning (high) active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this parameter ● Value: BOOL ● 0
with Feature.Bit28 (Disabling operating ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
points (Page 149)) and with Feature.Bit29
(Signaling limit violation (Page 174)).
PV_WL_Act 1 = PV warning (low) active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this parameter ● Value: BOOL ● 0
with Feature.Bit28 (Disabling operating ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
points (Page 149)) and with Feature.Bit29
(Signaling limit violation (Page 174)).
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
Status1 Description of MonAnS (Page 493) DWORD 16#00000000
Status2 Description of MonAnS (Page 493) DWORD 16#00000000
SumMsgAct 1 = Group message is active STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

See also
MonAnS operating modes (Page 495)
MonAnS messaging (Page 499)
MonAnS block diagram (Page 504)

4.4.7 MonAnS block diagram

MonAnS block diagram


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

See also
Description of MonAnS (Page 493)
MonAnS operating modes (Page 495)
MonAnS functions (Page 496)
MonAnS error handling (Page 498)
MonAnS messaging (Page 499)
MonAnS I/Os (Page 501)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


504 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.4 MonAnS - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Small)

4.4.8 Operator control and monitoring

4.4.8.1 MonAnS views

Views of the MonAnS block


The block MonAnS provides the following views:
● MonAnS standard view (Page 505)
● Alarm view (Page 313)
● MonAnS limit view (Page 507)
● Trend view (Page 317)
● MonAnS parameter view (Page 508)
● MonAnS preview (Page 509)
● Memo view (Page 315)
● Batch view (Page 313)
● Block icon for MonAnS (Page 510)
Refer to the sections Structure of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure
(Page 239) for general information on the faceplate and block icon.

4.4.8.2 MonAnS standard view

MonAnS standard view

 









Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 505
Monitoring blocks
4.4 MonAnS - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Small)

(1) Displaying and switching the operating mode


This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
● On (Page 72)
● Out of service (Page 72)
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for information
on switching the operating mode.

(2) High and low scale range for the process value
These values provide information on the display range for the bar graph of the process value.
The scale range is defined in the engineering system.

(3) Display of the process value including signal status


This area shows the current process value with the corresponding signal status.
If text is configured for this command, it is displayed as additional text and button label for
command selection. You can find more information about this in the section Labeling of buttons
and text (Page 218).
You can change the text for the process value with the PV_Out parameter.

(4) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
Use this navigation button to reach the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system. The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the engineering
system (ES).
Additional information is available in the section Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

(5) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Maintenance"

(6) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Simulation"

(7) Bar graph for the "process value"


This area shows the current "Process value" in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the
bar graph depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


506 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.4 MonAnS - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Small)

(8) Limit display


These colored triangles show you the configured limits in the respective bar graph.

See also
Displaying auxiliary values (Page 220)

4.4.8.3 MonAnS limit view

Limit view of MonAnS


You can specify the process value limits in this view:
The toolbars of the faceplate and the block icon indicate when the limits are reached or violated.

 

(1) Process value limits


In this area, you can enter the limits for the process value. Refer to the Changing values
(Page 270) section for more on this.
You can change the following limits:
● "H alarm": Alarm high
● "H warning": Warning high
● "Hysteresis"
● "L warning": Warning low
● "L alarm": Alarm low

(2) Enabled operation


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 507
Monitoring blocks
4.4 MonAnS - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Small)

Icons for enabled operation:


● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)

(3) Message suppression / delay


Message suppression indicates whether or not the suppression of the associated message in
the AS block is activated with the xx_MsgEn parameter. The output of messages is not
suppressed when the block is installed (all xx_MsgEn parameters are preset to 1). Messages
can only be output if limit monitoring of the additional analog value has been enabled.
Alarm delays are also displayed in this position; for more on this see section Area of application
for alarm delays (Page 208).

(4) Suppress messages


You can enable / disable messages by setting the check mark.

4.4.8.4 MonAnS parameter view

Parameter view of MonAnS

(1) Enabled operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator control permissions are assigned.
They depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Symbols for enabled operations:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
control permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


508 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.4 MonAnS - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Small)

(2)Parameter
You can change parameters in this area. Refer to the section Changing values (Page 270).
You can influence the following parameters:
● "Dead band": Width of dead band

(3)Service
You can select the following functions in this area:
● "Simulation"
● "Release for maintenance"
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for more on
this.
You can find information on this area in the section:
● Simulating signals (Page 59)
● Release for maintenance (Page 65)

4.4.8.5 MonAnS preview

Preview of MonAnS

Process value
This area displays the real process value (PV).

Enabled operations
This area shows all operations for which special operator control permissions are assigned.
They depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 509
Monitoring blocks
4.4 MonAnS - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Small)

Symbols for enabled operations:


● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
control permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)
The following enabled operations are shown here:
● "On": You can switch to "On" operating mode.
● "Out of service": You can switch to "Out of service" operating mode.
● "Local operating permission": Use the ← button to switch to the standard view of the
OpStations block. Additional information is available in the section Operator control
permissions (Page 265).

4.4.8.6 Block icon for MonAnS

Block symbols for MonAnS


A variety of block symbols are available with the following functions:
● Process tag type
● Limits (high/low)
● Violation of alarm, warning, and tolerance limits as well as control system faults
● Operating modes
● Signal status, release for maintenance
● Memo display
● Process value

The block symbols from template @TemplateAPLV8.PDL:

Symbols Selection of the block symbol in Special features


CFC
1

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


510 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.4 MonAnS - Monitoring of an analog process tag (Small)

The block symbols from template @TemplateAPLV7.PDL:

Symbols Selection of the block symbol in Special features


CFC
1 Block symbol in the full display

- Block symbol in "Out of service"


mode (example with type 1 block
symbol)

Additional information on the block symbol and the control options in the block symbol is
available in the following chapters:
● Configuring the block icons (Page 246)
● Block icon structure (Page 239)
● Operation via the block icon (Page 248).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 511
Monitoring blocks
4.5 MonDiL - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Large)

4.5 MonDiL - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Large)

4.5.1 Description of MonDiL

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1848
Family: Monitor

Area of application for MonDiL


The block is used for the following applications:
● Monitoring a digital process tag

Note
This block is also available as a small block. A comparison of the MonDiL and MonDiS blocks
is available in the section: MonDiL compared to MonDiS (Page 449)

How it works
The MonDiL block is used to monitor a digital process tag with flutter suppression. The block
reports excess flutter signals which are generated within a defined period.
The digital value to be monitored is interconnected to the In input parameter. Every time there
is a signal change (1 - 0 or 0 - 1) the configurable timer (FlutTmIn) for flutter suppression is
started as shown in the figure below.
When the time you have specified expires and no single change occurs, the input signal is
written to the Out output parameter.
Set the time in the timer (FlutTmIn) to 0 seconds; the input signal is written directly to the
output.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


512 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.5 MonDiL - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Large)

,Q

)OXW7P,Q )OXW7P,Q )OXW7P,Q )OXW7P,Q


W

2XW

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38). The block is
also installed automatically in the startup OB (OB100).
For the MonDiL block, the Advanced Process Library contains templates for process tag types
as examples with various application scenarios for this block.
Examples of process tag types:
● Monitoring of a digital process tag (DigitalMonitoring) (Page 2417)
● Monitoring a digital process tag for PA/FF devices (DigitalMonitoring_Fb) (Page 2418)

Startup characteristics
Use the Feature Bit Set startup characteristics (Page 141) to define the startup characteristics
of this block. The Out and FlutAct parameters are affected.
The messages are suppressed after startup for the number of cycles set at RunUpCyc.

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


You can find a description for each parameter in section MonDiL I/Os (Page 523).

Status bit Parameter


0 Occupied
1 BatchEn
2 SimOn
3 OosAct.Value
4 OosLi.Value
5 BypassAct.Value

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 513
Monitoring blocks
4.5 MonDiL - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Large)

Status bit Parameter


6 OnAct.Value
7 Out.Value
8 AlmMsgEn
9 Display of BypassAct.Value in faceplate (display and operator controls) and block
icon
10 SimLiOp.Value
11 - 29 Not used
30 Auxiliary value 1 is visible
31 Auxiliary value 2 is visible

Status word allocation for Status2 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 MsgLock.Value
1 FlutAct.Value
2 FlutEn
3 FlutMsgEn
4 - 30 Not used
31 MS_RelOp

Status word allocation for Status3 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 Effective signal 1 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
1 Effective signal 2 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
2 Effective signal 3 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
3 Effective signal 4 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
4 Effective signal 5 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
5 Effective signal 6 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
6 Effective signal 7 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
7 Effective signal 8 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
8 - 13 Not used
14 Color = 11 (Background color is derived directly from EventState, without mes‐
sage classes process message and operator prompt), only for block icon type 5
15 Color = 10 (Background color of the message instance MsgEvId1 - Message iden‐
tifier SIG1)
16-19 Not used
20 Color = 6 (Violet, operator prompt) and Out = 1
21 Not used
22 Color = 5 (Pastel green, process) and Out = 1
23 - 24 Not used
25 Color = 4 (Black, control system) and Out = 1
26 Color = 9 (UCMC 6) and Out = 1

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


514 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.5 MonDiL - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Large)

Status bit Parameter


27 Color = 3 (Blue, tolerance / UCMC 5) and Out = 1
28 Color = 8 (UCMC 4) and Out = 1
29 Color = 2 (Yellow, warning UCMC 3) and Out = 1
30 Color = 7 (UCMC 2) and Out = 1
31 Color = 1 (Red, alarm / UCMC 1) and Out = 1

Explanation:
UCMC = user-configured messages classes

Note
The user-configured message classes 5, 3 and 1 are displayed in the existing status bits 27,
29 and 31.

Status word allocation for Status4 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 - 15 Effective signal 9..16 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
16 - 31 Not used

See also
MonDiL functions (Page 516)
MonDiL messaging (Page 522)
MonDiL block diagram (Page 528)
MonDiL error handling (Page 521)
MonDiL modes (Page 515)

4.5.2 MonDiL modes

MonDiL operating modes


This block provides the following modes.
● On (Page 72)
● Out of service (Page 72)

"On"
You can find general information about the "On" mode in the On (Page 72) section.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 515
Monitoring blocks
4.5 MonDiL - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Large)

Out of service
You can find general information about the "Out of service" mode in the Out of service
(Page 72) section.
With Feature.Bit5 =1 the following output parameter become the status of simulation
16#60, if mode is changed to "Out of service".
With Feature.Bit5 =0 the following output parameter become the status of 16#80, if mode
is changed to "Out of service".
● Out.ST

See also
MonDiL block diagram (Page 528)
MonDiL I/Os (Page 523)
MonDiL messaging (Page 522)
MonDiL error handling (Page 521)
MonDiL functions (Page 516)
Description of MonDiL (Page 512)

4.5.3 MonDiL functions

Functions of MonDiL
The functions for this block are listed below.

Suppression and reporting of signal flutter


The block is operated as "flutter filter". The block receives digital signals at the In input
parameter and ideally these do not develop any flutter. The block monitors this if you activate
the function via the FlutEn = 1 input parameter.
Use the FlutTmIn input parameter to set how long a continuous signal should last in order
to be transferred to the process without flutter.
The preprocessed signal is sent to the process via the Out output parameter.
The block can be set up to report signal flutter. To do this, set parameter FlutMsgEn = 1.
Monitoring starts at the next 0 - 1 - 0 edge transition at the input signal In.
Use the FlutFactor input parameter to specify the maximum number of signals to be filtered
per minute by the block. If this maximum value is exceeded, this is indicated at the output
parameter FlutAct by a 1. The message (FlutAct = 0). is cleared after the maximum value
has dropped again by more than half.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


516 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.5 MonDiL - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Large)

Example of the flutter suppression


You can use the FlutFactor input parameter to limit flutter signals to 3 per minute.

,Q PLQ PLQ

2XW

)OXW$FW PLQ PLQ


:LWK)OXW)DFWRU 

W
$ % $ %

Case A:
Four flutter signals have occurred within a minute. FlutFactor is set to three, in other words,
a maximum of three flutter signal per minute are allowed, the FlutAct output is set to one.
Case B:
Only one flutter signal has occurred within a minute, which corresponds to less than half the
FlutFactor. The FlutAct output is reset.

Delaying the on and off switching functions


You set delay times for setting the output using the input parameter Out_DC or Out_DG:
● Out_DC: delay time [s] for rising edges (0 - 1 edge)
● Out_DG: delay time [s] for falling edge (1 - 0 edge)
The Out output parameter is after expiration of the delay time.
You disable this function if you set the value of the respective parameter to 0 seconds.

Adapting the color representation in the configured message class


You can set the background color of instance-specific texts for the block icons 3 to 6 and
thereby adapt them to the configured message class. This background color is displayed when
the output parameter Out = 1.
You set the color coding with the Color parameter:

Value Color Color


0 Old reaction
1 Red (alarm)
2 Yellow (warning)
3 Blue (tolerance)
4 Black (control system)
5 Pastel green (process)
6 Violet (operator prompt)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 517
Monitoring blocks
4.5 MonDiL - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Large)

Value Color Color


7...9 Old reaction
10 Background color of the message instance MsgEvId1 - Message identifier SIG1
11 For block icon type 5 only, background color is derived directly from EventState
without message classes process message and operator prompt 1
1
This also takes into consideration the CSF input
The following colors are shown for user-configured message classes

Value Color Color


0 Old reaction
1 User-configured message classes 1
2 User-configured message classes 3
3 User-configured message classes 5
4 Black (control system)
5 Pastel green (process)
6 Violet (operator prompt)
7 User-configured message classes 2
8 User-configured message classes 4
9 User-configured message classes 6
10 Background color of the message instance MsgEvId1 - Message identifier SIG1
11 For block icon type 5 only, background color is derived directly from EventState
without message classes process message and operator prompt 1
1
This also takes into consideration the CSF input

Displaying auxiliary values


This block provides the standard function Displaying auxiliary values (Page 220).

Changing labels on buttons and text


This block provides the standard function Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218).
You can change the label for "Process value" for this block as you please. The change is made
with the FlutTmIn parameter.

Generating instance-specific messages


This block provides the standard function Generating instance-specific messages (Page 213).

Group display SumMsgAct for limit monitoring, CSF and ExtMsgx


The block provides the standard function Group display for limit monitoring, CSF and
ExtMsgx (Page 86).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


518 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.5 MonDiL - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Large)

Suppressing messages using the MsgLock parameter


This block provides the standard function Suppressing messages using the MsgLock
parameter (Page 214).

Forming the signal status for blocks


This block provides the standard function Forming and outputting the signal status for
technologic blocks (Page 110).
The worst signal status ST_Worst for the block is formed from the following parameters:
● In.ST

Release for maintenance


This block provides the standard function Release for maintenance (Page 65).

Simulating signals
This block provides the standard function Simulating signals (Page 59).
You can simulate the following values:
● Value (SimIn, SimInLi)

Bypass function
This block provides the standard function Bypassing signals (Page 109).

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133) . The following functionality is
available for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
0 Set startup characteristics (Page 141)
1 Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 181)
5 Changes signal status of outputs in OOS (Page 198)
9 Substitution value is active if the block is in bypass (Page 189)
11 Suppress MsgLock and “Out of service” mode for a connected message block (Page 192)
22 Update acknowledgment and error status of the message call (Page 163)
24 Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162)
25 Suppression of all messages (Page 178)

Operator permissions
This block provides the standard function Operator control permissions (Page 265).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 519
Monitoring blocks
4.5 MonDiL - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Large)

The block has the following permissions for the OS_Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 Not used
1 1 = Operator can switch to "On" mode
2 Not used
3 1 = Operator can switch to "Out of service" mode
4 1 = Operator can change the delay time for rising edges (Out_DC)
5 1 = Operator can change the delay time for falling edges (Out_DG)
6-7 Not used
8 1 = Operator can activate bypass functionality
9 1 = Operator can deactivate bypass functionality
10 1 =Operator can change the simulation value SimIn
11 1 = Operator can activate the Simulation function
12 1 = Operator can activate the Release for maintenance function
13 Not used
14 1 = The user can input the duration for flutter suppression.
15 1 = The user can specify the number of flutter signals that should be suppressed.
16 - 31 Not used

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Opening additional faceplates


This block provides the standard function Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

Connection of the time-stamped messages from EventTs or Event16Ts


This block provides the standard function Connection of the time-stamped messages from
EventTs or Event16Ts (Page 216).

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


This block provides the standard function SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

See also
Description of MonDiL (Page 512)
MonDiL messaging (Page 522)
MonDiL I/Os (Page 523)
MonDiL block diagram (Page 528)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


520 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.5 MonDiL - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Large)

MonDiL error handling (Page 521)


MonDiL modes (Page 515)
EventTs functions (Page 1698)
Reaction of the switching points in the "Out of service" operating mode (Page 180)
User-configured message classes (Page 41)

4.5.4 MonDiL error handling

Error handling of MonDiL


Refer to the section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions for the error handling
of all blocks.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers
● Control system fault (CSF)
● Flutter alarm

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum I/O can be used to output various error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; the block is not executed.
0 There is no error.
11 FlutTmIn < 0
16 FlutFactor is -ve or > 100

Control system fault (CSF)


An external signal can be activated via the CSF input. If this signal changes to = 1, a control
system fault is triggered. Refer to the Error handling (Page 121) section for more on this.

Flutter alarm
An alarm is output at output FlutAct with 1 if signal flutter is detected. Refer to the functions
of the block > Error handling (Page 121).

See also
MonDiL block diagram (Page 528)
MonDiL I/Os (Page 523)
MonDiL messaging (Page 522)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 521
Monitoring blocks
4.5 MonDiL - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Large)

MonDiL functions (Page 516)


MonDiL modes (Page 515)
Description of MonDiL (Page 512)

4.5.5 MonDiL messaging

Messaging
The following messages can be generated for this block:
● Process control fault
● Process messages
● Instance-specific messages

Process control fault


You can interconnect an external fault (signal) to input parameter CSF. If it changes to CSF = 1,
a process control fault is triggered (MsgEvId1, SIG 3).

Process messages
You can use up to four instance-specific messages with this block.

Message Message iden‐ Message class Event


instance tifier
MsgEvId SIG 1 Alarm - high $$BlockComment$$
1 Out - Binary value set
SIG 2 Warning - high $$BlockComment$$
Flutter limits violated
SIG 3 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External error has occurred
SIG 4 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External message 1
SIG 5 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External message 2
SIG 6 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External message 3

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


522 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.5 MonDiL - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Large)

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId1

Associated value Block parameters


1 BatchName
2 StepNo
3 BatchID
4 ExtVa104
5 ExtVa105
6 ExtVa106
7 ExtVa107
8 ExtVa108
9 Reserved
10 Reserved

The associated values 4 ... 8 are allocated to the parameters ExtVa104 ... ExtVa108 and
can be used. Additional information is available in the "Process Control System PCS7 -
Engineering System" manual.

See also
Description of MonDiL (Page 512)
MonDiL functions (Page 516)
MonDiL I/Os (Page 523)
MonDiL block diagram (Page 528)
MonDiL error handling (Page 521)
MonDiL modes (Page 515)
Time stamp (Page 214)

4.5.6 MonDiL I/Os


I/Os of MonDiL

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AlmMsgEn 1 = Alarms are output BOOL 1
BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation BOOL 0
BatchID Batch ID DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name S7-String
BypLiOp 1 = Bypass commands via interconnection STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 523
Monitoring blocks
4.5 MonDiL - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


BypLock 1 = Bypass activation or deactivation is locked for op‐ STRUCT -
erator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
BypIn Substitution value if block is in bypass REAL 0.0
BypInLi 1 = Select bypass In (via interconnection) STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
BypInOp 1 = Select bypass In (via operator) BOOL 0
CSF 1 = External error (control system fault) STRUCT -
Error handling (Page 121) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Color Display for status display in the block icon: BYTE 16#00
0 = Default setting
1 = Red (alarm)
2 = Yellow (warning)
3 = Blue (tolerance)
4 = Black (control system message)
5 = Pastel green (process message)
6 = Violet (operator prompt)
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1
EventTsIn For interconnecting data between a technology block ANY
and the message blocks EventTs, Event16Ts.
The EventTsIn input parameter serves to intercon‐
nect the EventTsOut output parameter of the
EventTs, Event16Ts block. When this interconnec‐
tion is configured, the messages of the EventTs,
Event16Ts block are displayed on the OS in the alarm
view of the technology block and can also be acknowl‐
edged there.
ExtMsg1 Binary input for freely selectable message 1 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg2 Binary input for freely selectable message 2 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg3 Binary input for freely selectable message 3 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtVa104 Associated value 4 for messages (MsgEvID1) ANY
ExtVa105 Associated value 5 for messages (MsgEvID1) ANY
ExtVa106 Associated value 6 for messages (MsgEvID1) ANY
ExtVa107 Associated value 7 for messages (MsgEvID1) ANY
ExtVa108 Associated value 8 for messages (MsgEvID1) ANY

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


524 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.5 MonDiL - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 516) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
FlutEn 1 = Flutter suppression on BOOL 1
FlutFactor Number of flutter signals that can be suppressed INT 2
FlutMsgEn 1 = Signal flutter is reported if the period of the signal BOOL 1
flutter is < FlutTmIn.
FlutTmIn Period during which signal flutter is suppressed. REAL 0.0
In Digital input value STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MS_RelOp* 1 = Release for maintenance by OS operator BOOL 0
MsgEvId1 Message number (assigned automatically) DWORD 16#00000000
MsgLock 1 = Suppress process messages. STRUCT -
See also the section Suppressing messages using the ● Value: BOOL ● 0
MsgLock parameter (Page 214) for more on this. ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Occupied 1 = Occupied by batch control BOOL 0
OosLi 1 = "Out of service", via interconnection or SFC (0-1 STRUCT -
edge transition) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OnOp* 1 = "On" mode via operator BOOL 0
OosOp* 1 = "Out of service", via OS operator BOOL 0
OpSt_In Input parameter for local operator authorization, con‐ DWORD 16#00000000
nected with the Out output parameter of the upstream
block, OpStations (Page 423)
OS_Perm I/O for operator permissions (Page 516) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● Bit 10: BOOL ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
Out_DC Delay time for setting the output parameter Out for ris‐ REAL 0.0
ing edges
Out_DG Delay time for setting the output parameter Out for fall‐ REAL 0.0
ing edges
RstBypLi 1 = Reset bypass In (via interconnection) STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RstBypOp 1 = Reset bypass In (via operator) BOOL 0
RunUpCyc Number of cycles in startup; messages are suppressed INT 3
during these cycles
SampleTime Sampling time [s] (assigned automatically) REAL 0.1
SelFp1 1 = Call a block saved in this parameter as an additional ANY -
faceplate (Page 217) in the standard view

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 525
Monitoring blocks
4.5 MonDiL - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


SelFp2 1 = Call a block saved in this parameter as an additional ANY -
faceplate (Page 217) in the preview
SimLiOp Activation/deactivation of the simulation by: STRUCT -
0 = Operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
1 = Interconnection or SFC ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SimOnLi 1 = Simulation via interconnection or SFC (controlled STRUCT -
by SimLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SimOn* 1 = Simulation on BOOL 0
SimIn* Value used for SimOn = 1 BOOL 0
SimInLi Value that is used for SimOnLi.Value = 1 STRUCT -
(SimLiOp.Value = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
UserAna1 Analog auxiliary value 1 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
UA1unit Unit of measure for analog auxiliary value 1 INT 0
UserAna2 Analog auxiliary value 2 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
UA2unit Unit of measure for analog auxiliary value 2 INT 0
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use in PCS 7 OS BYTE 16#00

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


BypassAct 1 = Bypass is activated in this block STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without errors BOOL 0
ErrorNum Output of pending error number. For error num‐ INT -1
bers that can be output by this block, see Mon‐
DiL error handling (Page 521)
FlutAct 1 = Suppresses flutter signal STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MS_Release Release for maintenance: STRUCT -
1 = Release for OS operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


526 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.5 MonDiL - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


MsgAckn1 Message acknowledgement status 1 (output WORD 16#0000
ACK_STATE of first ALARM_8P)
MsgErr1 1 = Alarm error 1 (output ERROR of the first BOOL 0
ALARM_8P)
MsgStat1 Message status 1 (output STATUS of first WORD 16#0000
ALARM_8P)
OnAct 1 = "On" mode enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosAct 1 = Block is "Out of service" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpSt_Out Value of the OpSt_In input parameter, for feed‐ DWORD 16#00000000
forwarding to other blocks. Bit 31 of this param‐
eter is used by Feature.Bit24
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with settings changed by DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
the block algorithm
Out Output STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
Status1 Status word 1 (Page 512) DWORD 16#00000000
Status2 Status word 2 (Page 512) DWORD 16#00000000
Status3 Status word 3 (Page 512) DWORD 16#00000000
SumMsgAct 1 = Group message is active STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

See also
MonDiL messaging (Page 522)
MonDiL block diagram (Page 528)
MonDiL modes (Page 515)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 527
Monitoring blocks
4.5 MonDiL - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Large)

4.5.7 MonDiL block diagram

MonDiL block diagram


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

See also
MonDiL I/Os (Page 523)
MonDiL messaging (Page 522)
MonDiL error handling (Page 521)
MonDiL functions (Page 516)
MonDiL modes (Page 515)
Description of MonDiL (Page 512)

4.5.8 Operator control and monitoring

4.5.8.1 MonDiL views

Views of the MonDiL block


The block MonDiL provides the following views:
● MonDiL standard view (Page 529)
● Alarm view (Page 313)
● Trend view (Page 317)
● MonDiL parameter view (Page 531)
● MonDiL preview (Page 532)
● Memo view (Page 315)
● Batch view (Page 313)
● Block icon for MonDiL (Page 533)
Refer to the sections Structure of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure
(Page 239) for general information on the faceplate and block icon.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


528 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.5 MonDiL - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Large)

4.5.8.2 MonDiL standard view

MonDiL standard view



 





(1) Display and switch the operating mode


This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
● On (Page 72)
● Out of service (Page 72)
Refer to chapter Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) for information
on switching the operating mode.

(2) Display of process value enabled/disabled


This area shows you the status of the individual connected parameters.
The identifier can be changed using Text 0 / Text 1 at the output parameter Out.
If the block is in simulation, you can enable or disable the process value. To do this, click on
the display to open the operator input area.
If text is configure for these commands, it is displayed as additional text and as button labels
for command selection. You can find additional information on this in chapter Labeling of
buttons and text (Page 218).
You can change the text for the process value with the FlutTmIn parameter.
The background color of the display can be changed using the "Color" parameter; see MonDiL
functions (Page 516) under "Adapting the color representation in the configured message
class".

(3) Display of auxiliary values


You can use this area to display two auxiliary values that have been configured in the
Engineering System. You can find additional information on this in chapter Displaying auxiliary
values (Page 220).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 529
Monitoring blocks
4.5 MonDiL - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Large)

(4) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
Use this navigation button to reach the standard view of a block configured in the Engineering
System (ES). The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the
Engineering System (ES).
You can find additional information on this in chapter Opening additional faceplates
(Page 217).

(5) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Maintenance"

(6) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Simulation"

(7) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Fluttering"

(8) Displaying input values


Changing the display:
Follow these steps to change the displays:
1. In the CFC, right-click the MonDiL block and select "Object Properties" from the context
menu.
2. Select "I/Os" tab in the properties window.
3. In the “OS additional text” column, change the default setting for the input parameter
(FlutTmIn) to what you want to see during runtime later.
4. In the "Identifier" column, change the default setting for the input parameter (FlutTmIn)
to what you want to see during runtime later.
5. If both “OS additional text” and “Identifier” columns are empty, the default value is displayed
in the runtime.
6. The text is used as a label and is therefore always displayed, which means it is independent
of the signal status of the corresponding input (FlutTmInx).
7. The font size is reduced during the runtime if the input text length is greater than the label
width.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


530 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.5 MonDiL - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Large)

Note
If a text is added to the "OS additional text" field of the input parameter (FlutTmIn), this text
is displayed even if the "Identifier" text field of the same input parameter is not empty. If the
"OS additional text" field of the input parameter (FlutTmIn) is empty, the "Identifier" text of
the same input parameter is displayed.

4.5.8.3 MonDiL parameter view

Parameter view of MonDiL




(1) Enabled operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator control permissions are assigned.
They depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Symbols for enabled operations:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
control permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).

(2) Suppression time


Enter the time period during which signal flutter is suppressed. You can find additional
information on this in the Changing values (Page 270) section.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 531
Monitoring blocks
4.5 MonDiL - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Large)

(3) Factor
Enter the number of flutter signals that can be suppressed. You can find additional information
on this in the Changing values (Page 270) section.

(4) Delay time


Enter here the delay time by which the output should be set. Enter delay times here for positive
("incoming", 0 - 1 edge) and negative edges ("outgoing", 1 - 0 edge). You can find additional
information on this in the Changing values (Page 270) section.

(5) Service
You can select the following functions in this area:
● "Bypass"
● "Simulation"
● "Release for maintenance"
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for more on
this.
You can find information on this area in the section:
● Bypassing signals (Page 109)
● Simulating signals (Page 59)
● Release for maintenance (Page 65)

4.5.8.4 MonDiL preview

Preview of MonDiL




(1) Enabled operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator control permissions are assigned.
They depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


532 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.5 MonDiL - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Large)

Symbols for enabled operations:


● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
control permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)
The following enabled operations are shown here:
● "On": You can switch to "On" operating mode.
● "Out of service": You can switch to "Out of service" operating mode.
● "Local operating permission": Use the ← button to switch to the standard view of the
OpStations block. Additional information is available in the section Operator control
permissions (Page 265).

(2) Settings
● "Signal transition":
– Activated: A message is generated with a "0 → 1" signal transition at the monitored input.
– Deactivated: No message is generated.

(3) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
Use this navigation button to reach the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system. The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the engineering
system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in the Opening additional faceplates (Page 217)
section.

(4) Bypass value


This area displays the bypass value (BypIn).

4.5.8.5 Block icon for MonDiL

Block icons for MonDiL


A variety of block icons are available with the following functions:
● Process tag type
● Limits (high/low)
● Violation of alarm, warning, and tolerance limits as well as control system faults
● Operating modes
● Signal status, release for maintenance

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 533
Monitoring blocks
4.5 MonDiL - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Large)

● Memo display
● Display of the output signal
● Display configured instance-specific text for the process value (only for block icons 3 to
6). The instance-specific text for the process value can be changed using Text 0 / Text 1
at the output parameter Out.

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV8.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special features


1

2 The text background color for


output Out = 1 depends on the
parameter assignment of the in‐
put "Color".
3 See 2

4 The text background color for


output Out = 1 depends on the
parameter assignment of the in‐
put "Color".
Text in block icon can be config‐
ured via Text 1 at the Out output
parameter, a maximum of two
characters are supported.
5 The text background color for
output Out = 1 depends on the
parameter assignment of the in‐
put "Color".
For Color = 11, the text back‐
ground color is directly derived
from EventState (but without the
message classes process mes‐
sage and operator prompt)
which also takes into considera‐
tion the CSF input. Color = 11
is only supported by type 5.
6

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


534 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.5 MonDiL - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Large)

Note
Text 1 is also used in the standard view of the faceplate in the display process value active/
inactive. Long static texts must therefore be displayed on the "Process value" text using the
"FlutTmIn" parameter (see MonDiL standard view (Page 529))

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV7.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special features


1 Block icon in the full display

3 The text background color for


output Out = 1 depends on the
parameter assignment of the in‐
put "Color".
4 See 3

5 See 3

6 See 3

- Block icon in "Out of service"


mode (example with type 1 block
icon)

Additional information on the block icon and the control options in the block icon is available
in the following sections:
● Configuring the block icons (Page 246)
● Block icon structure (Page 239)
● Operation via the block icon (Page 248).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 535
Monitoring blocks
4.5 MonDiL - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Large)

MonDiL6 block icon state display


The MonDiL6 block icon states are shown here:

Symbol Meaning
Active

Inactive

Out of service

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


536 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.6 MonDiS - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Small)

4.6 MonDiS - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Small)

4.6.1 Description of MonDiS

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1913
Family: Monitor

Area of application for MonDiS


The block is used for the following applications:
● Monitoring a digital process tag

Note
This block is also available as a large block. A comparison of the MonDiL and MonDiS blocks
is available in the section: MonDiL compared to MonDiS (Page 449)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 537
Monitoring blocks
4.6 MonDiS - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Small)

How it works
The MonDiS is used to monitor a digital process tag. The digital value to be monitored is
interconnected to the In input parameter. The input signal is written directly to the Out output
parameter.

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38). The block is
also installed automatically in the startup OB (OB100).

Startup characteristics
Use the Feature Bit Set startup characteristics (Page 141) to define the startup characteristics
of this block. The Out parameter is affected.
The messages are suppressed after startup for the number of cycles set at RunUpCyc.

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


You can find a description for each parameter in section MonDiS I/Os (Page 546).

Status bit Parameter


0 Occupied
1 BatchEn

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


538 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.6 MonDiS - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Small)

Status bit Parameter


2 SimOn
3 OosAct.Value
4 OosLi.Value
5 Not used
6 OnAct.Value
7 Out.Value
8 AlmMsgEn
9 - 31 Not used

Status word allocation for Status2 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 MsgLock.Value
1 - 30 Not used
31 MS_RelOp

Status word allocation for Status3 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 - 13 Not used
14 Color = 11 (Background color is derived directly from EventState, without message
classes process message and operator prompt), only for block icon type 5
15 Color = 10 (Background color of the message instance MsgEvId1 - Message iden‐
tifier SIG1)
16-19 Not used
20 Color = 6 (Violet, operator prompt) and Out = 1
21 Not used
22 Color = 5 (Pastel green, process) and Out = 1
23 - 24 Not used
25 Color = 4 (Black, control system) and Out = 1
26 Color = 9 (UCMC 6) and Out = 1
27 Color = 3 (Blue, tolerance / UCMC 5) and Out = 1
28 Color = 8 (UCMC 4) and Out = 1
29 Color = 2 (Yellow, warning / UCMC 3) and Out = 1
30 Color = 7 (UCMC 2) and Out = 1
31 Color = 1 (Red, alarm / UCMC 1) and Out = 1

Explanation:
UCMC = user-configured messages classes

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 539
Monitoring blocks
4.6 MonDiS - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Small)

Note
The user-configured message classes 5, 3 and 1 are displayed in the existing status bits 27,
29 and 31.

See also
MonDiS operating modes (Page 540)
MonDiS functions (Page 541)
MonDiS error handling (Page 544)
MonDiS messaging (Page 545)
MonDiS block diagram (Page 549)

4.6.2 MonDiS operating modes

MonDiS operating modes


This block provides the following modes.
● On (Page 72)
● Out of service (Page 72)

"On"
General information on the "On" mode is available in the section On (Page 72).

Out of service
You can find general information about the "Out of service" mode in the section Out of
service (Page 72).
With Feature.Bit5 =1 the following output parameter become the status of simulation
16#60, if mode is changed to "Out of service".
With Feature.Bit5 =0 the following output parameter become the status of 16#80, if mode
is changed to "Out of service".
● Out.ST

See also
Description of MonDiS (Page 537)
MonDiS functions (Page 541)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


540 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.6 MonDiS - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Small)

MonDiS error handling (Page 544)


MonDiS messaging (Page 545)
MonDiS I/Os (Page 546)
MonDiS block diagram (Page 549)

4.6.3 MonDiS functions

Functions of MonDiS
The functions for this block are listed below.

Delaying the on function


You set delay times for setting the output using the input parameter Out_DC:
● Out_DC: delay time [s] for rising edges (0 - 1 edge)
The Out output parameter is after expiration of the delay time.
You disable this function if you set the value of the respective parameter to 0 seconds.

Adapting the color representation in the configured message class


You can set the background color of instance-specific texts for the block icons 2 and 3 and
thereby adapt them to the configured message class. This background color is displayed when
the output parameter Out = 1.
You set the color coding with the Color parameter:

Value Color Color


0 Old reaction
1 Red (alarm)
2 Yellow (warning)
3 Blue (tolerance)
4 Black (control system)
5 Pastel green (process)
6 Violet (operator prompt)
7...9 Old reaction
10 Background color of the configured message class SIG1 ("Out - setting binary
output values")
11 For block icon type 5 only, background color is derived directly from EventState
without message classes process message and operator prompt 1
1
This also takes into consideration the CSF input

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 541
Monitoring blocks
4.6 MonDiS - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Small)

The following colors are shown for user-configured message classes

Value Color Color


0 Old reaction
1 User-configured message classes 1
2 User-configured message classes 3
3 User-configured message classes 5
4 Black (control system)
5 Pastel green (process)
6 Violet (operator prompt)
7 User-configured message classes 2
8 User-configured message classes 4
9 User-configured message classes 6
10 Background color of the configured message class SIG1 ("Out - setting binary
output values")
11 For block icon type 5 only, background color is derived directly from EventState
without message classes process message and operator prompt 1
1
This also takes into consideration the CSF input

Changing labels on buttons and text


This block provides the standard function Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218).
You can change the label for "Process value" for this block as you please. The change is made
with the OnOp parameter.

Generating instance-specific messages


This block provides the standard function Generating instance-specific messages (Page 213).

Group display SumMsgAct for limit monitoring, CSF and ExtMsgx


The block provides the standard function Group display for limit monitoring, CSF and
ExtMsgx (Page 86).

Suppressing messages using the MsgLock parameter


This block provides the standard function Suppressing messages using the MsgLock
parameter (Page 214).

Forming the signal status for blocks


This block provides the standard function Forming and outputting the signal status for
technologic blocks (Page 110).
The worst signal status ST_Worst for the block is formed from the following parameters:
● In.ST

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


542 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.6 MonDiS - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Small)

Release for maintenance


This block provides the standard function Release for maintenance (Page 65).

Simulating signals
This block provides the standard function Simulating signals (Page 59).

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133) . The following functionality is
available for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
0 Set startup characteristics (Page 141)
1 Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 181)
5 Changes signal status of outputs in OOS (Page 198)
24 Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162)
25 Suppression of all messages (Page 178)

Operator permissions
This block provides the standard function Operator control permissions (Page 265).
The block has the following permissions for the OS_Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 Not used
1 1 = Operator can switch to "On" mode
2 Not used
3 1 = Operator can switch to "Out of service" mode
4 1 = Operator can change the delay time for rising edges (Out_DC)
5-9 Not used
10 1 =Operator can change the simulation value SimIn
11 1 = Operator can activate the Simulation function
12 1 = Operator can activate the Release for maintenance function
13 - 31 Not used

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Opening additional faceplates


This block provides the standard function Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 543
Monitoring blocks
4.6 MonDiS - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Small)

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


This block provides the standard function SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

See also
Description of MonDiS (Page 537)
MonDiS operating modes (Page 540)
MonDiS error handling (Page 544)
MonDiS messaging (Page 545)
MonDiS I/Os (Page 546)
MonDiS block diagram (Page 549)
User-configured message classes (Page 41)

4.6.4 MonDiS error handling

Error handling of MonDiS


Refer to the section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions for the error handling
of all blocks.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers
● Control system fault (CSF)

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum I/O can be used to output various error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; the block is not executed.
0 There is no error.

Control system fault (CSF)


An external signal can be activated via the CSF input. If this signal changes to = 1, a control
system fault is triggered. Refer to the Error handling (Page 121) section for more on this.

See also
Description of MonDiS (Page 537)
MonDiS operating modes (Page 540)
MonDiS functions (Page 541)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


544 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.6 MonDiS - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Small)

MonDiS messaging (Page 545)


MonDiS I/Os (Page 546)
MonDiS block diagram (Page 549)

4.6.5 MonDiS messaging

Messaging
The following messages can be generated for this block:
● Process control fault
● Process messages
● Instance-specific messages

Process control fault


You can interconnect an external fault (signal) to input parameter CSF. If it changes to CSF = 1,
a process control fault is triggered (MsgEvId1, SIG 3).

Process messages
You can use up to four instance-specific messages with this block.

Message Message iden‐ Message class Event


instance tifier
MsgEvId SIG 1 Alarm - high $$BlockComment$$
1 Out - Binary value set
SIG 2 Not used
SIG 3 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External error has occurred
SIG 4 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External message 1
SIG 5 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External message 2

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId1

Associated value Block parameters


1 BatchName
2 StepNo

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 545
Monitoring blocks
4.6 MonDiS - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Small)

Associated value Block parameters


3 BatchID
4 ExtVa104
5 ExtVa105
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
8 Reserved
9 Reserved
10 Reserved

The associated values 4 and 5 are allocated to the parameters ExtVa104 and ExtVa105 and
can be used. Additional information is available in the "Process Control System PCS 7 -
Engineering System" manual.

See also
Description of MonDiS (Page 537)
MonDiS operating modes (Page 540)
MonDiS functions (Page 541)
MonDiS error handling (Page 544)
MonDiS block diagram (Page 549)

4.6.6 MonDiS I/Os


I/Os of MonDiS

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AlmMsgEn 1 = Alarms are output BOOL 1
BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation BOOL 0
BatchID Batch ID DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name S7-String
CSF 1 = External error (control system fault) STRUCT -
Error handling (Page 544) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


546 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.6 MonDiS - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Small)

Parameter Description Type Default


Color Color for status display in the block icon: BYTE 16#00
0 = Default setting
1 = Red (alarm)
2 = Yellow (warning)
3 = Blue (tolerance)
4 = Black (control system message)
5 = Pastel green (process message)
6 = Violet (operator prompt)
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1
ExtMsg1 Binary input for freely selectable message 1 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg2 Binary input for freely selectable message 2 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtVa104 Associated value 4 for messages (MsgEvID1) ANY
ExtVa105 Associated value 5 for messages (MsgEvID1) ANY
Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 541) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
In Digital input value STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MS_RelOp* 1 = Release for maintenance by OS operator BOOL 0
MsgEvId1 Message number (assigned automatically) DWORD 16#00000000
MsgLock 1 = Suppress process messages. STRUCT -
See also the section Suppressing messages using the ● Value: BOOL ● 0
MsgLock parameter (Page 214) for more on this. ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Occupied 1 = Occupied by batch control BOOL 0
OosLi 1 = "Out of service", via interconnection or SFC (0-1 STRUCT -
edge transition) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OnOp* 1 = "On" mode via operator BOOL 0
OosOp* 1 = "Out of service", via OS operator BOOL 0
OpSt_In Input parameter for local operator authorization, con‐ DWORD 16#00000000
nected with the Out output parameter of the upstream
block, OpStations (Page 423)
OS_Perm I/O for operator permissions (Page 541) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● Bit 10: BOOL ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 547
Monitoring blocks
4.6 MonDiS - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Small)

Parameter Description Type Default


Out_DC Delay time for setting the output parameter Out for ris‐ REAL 0.0
ing edges
RunUpCyc Number of cycles in startup; messages are suppressed INT 3
during these cycles
SampleTime Sampling time [s] (assigned automatically) REAL 0.1
SelFp1 1 = Call a block saved in this parameter as an additional ANY -
faceplate (Page 217) in the standard view
SimOn 1 = Simulation on BOOL 0
SimIn* Value used for SimOn = 1 BOOL 0
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use in PCS 7 OS BYTE 16#00

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without errors BOOL 0
ErrorNum Output of pending error number. For error num‐ INT -1
bers that can be output by this block, see Mon‐
DiS error handling (Page 544)
MS_Release Release for maintenance: STRUCT -
1 = Release for OS operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OnAct 1 = "On" mode enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosAct 1 = Block is "Out of service" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpSt_Out Value of the OpSt_In input parameter, for feed‐ DWORD 16#00000000
forwarding to other blocks. Bit 31 of this param‐
eter is used by Feature.Bit24
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with settings changed by DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
the block algorithm
Out Output STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
Status1 Status word 1 (Page 537) DWORD 16#00000000
Status2 Status word 2 (Page 537) DWORD 16#00000000

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


548 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.6 MonDiS - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Small)

Parameter Description Type Default


Status3 Status word 3 (Page 537) DWORD 16#00000000
SumMsgAct 1 = Group message is active STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

See also
MonDiS operating modes (Page 540)
MonDiS block diagram (Page 549)
Error handling (Page 121)

4.6.7 MonDiS block diagram

MonDiS block diagram


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

See also
Description of MonDiS (Page 537)
MonDiS operating modes (Page 540)
MonDiS functions (Page 541)
MonDiS messaging (Page 545)
MonDiS I/Os (Page 546)
MonDiS error handling (Page 544)

4.6.8 Operator control and monitoring

4.6.8.1 MonDiS views

Views of the MonDiS block


The block MonDiS provides the following views:
● MonDiS standard view (Page 550)
● Alarm view (Page 313)
● Trend view (Page 317)
● MonDiS parameter view (Page 551)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 549
Monitoring blocks
4.6 MonDiS - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Small)

● MonDiS preview (Page 552)


● Memo view (Page 315)
● Batch view (Page 313)
● Block icon for MonDiS (Page 553)
Refer to the sections Structure of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure
(Page 239) for general information on the faceplate and block icon.

4.6.8.2 MonDiS standard view

MonDiS standard view






(1) Displaying and switching the operating mode


This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
● On (Page 72)
● Out of service (Page 72)
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for information
on switching the operating mode.

(2) Display of process value enabled/disabled


This area shows you the status of the individual connected parameters.
The identifier can be changed using Text 0 / Text 1 at the output parameter Out.
If the block is in simulation, you can enable or disable the process value. To do this, click on
the display to open the operator input area.
If text is configure for these commands, it is displayed as additional text and as button labels
for command selection. Additional information is available in the section Labeling of buttons
and text (Page 218).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


550 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.6 MonDiS - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Small)

(3) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
Use this navigation button to reach the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system. The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the engineering
system (ES).
Additional information is available in the section Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

(4) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Maintenance"

(5) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Simulation"

See also
Displaying auxiliary values (Page 220)

4.6.8.3 MonDiS parameter view

Parameter view of MonDiS

(1) Enabled operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator control permissions are assigned.
They depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Symbols for enabled operations:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
control permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 551
Monitoring blocks
4.6 MonDiS - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Small)

(2) Delay time


Enter here the delay time by which the output should be set. Enter delay times here for positive
("incoming", 0 - 1 edge) edges. Additional information is available in the section Switching
operating states and operating modes (Page 268).

(3) Service
You can select the following functions in this area:
● "Simulation"
● "Release for maintenance"
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for more on
this.
You can find information on this area in the section:
● Simulating signals (Page 59)
● Release for maintenance (Page 65)

See also
Changing values (Page 270)

4.6.8.4 MonDiS preview

Preview of MonDiS

(1) Enabled operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator control permissions are assigned.
They depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


552 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.6 MonDiS - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Small)

Symbols for enabled operations:


● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
control permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)
The following enabled operations are shown here:
● "On": You can switch to "On" operating mode.
● "Out of service": You can switch to "Out of service" operating mode.
● "Local operating permission": Use the ← button to switch to the standard view of the
OpStations block. Additional information is available in the section Operator control
permissions (Page 265).

(2) Settings
● "Signal transition":
– Activated: A message is generated with a "0 → 1" signal transition at the monitored input.
– Deactivated: No message is generated.

4.6.8.5 Block icon for MonDiS

Block icons for MonDiS


A variety of block icons are available with the following functions:
● Process tag type
● Limits (high/low)
● Violation of alarm, warning, and tolerance limits as well as control system faults
● Operating modes
● Signal status, release for maintenance
● Memo display
● Display of the output signal
● Display configured instance-specific text for the process value (only for block icons 2 and
3). The instance-specific text for the process value can be changed using Text 0 / Text 1
at the output parameter Out.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 553
Monitoring blocks
4.6 MonDiS - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Small)

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV8.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special features


1

2 The text background color for


output Out = 1 depends on the
parameter assignment of the in‐
put "Color".
3 See 2

4 The text background color for


output Out = 1 depends on the
parameter assignment of the in‐
put "Color".
Text in block icon can be config‐
ured via Text 1 at the Out output
parameter, a maximum of two
characters are supported.
5 The text background color for
output Out = 1 depends on the
parameter assignment of the in‐
put "Color". For Color = 11, the
text background color is directly
derived from EventState (but
without the message classes
process message and operator
prompt) which also takes into
consideration the CSF in‐
put.Color = 11 is only suppor‐
ted by type 5.

Note
Text 1 is also used in the standard view of the faceplate in the display process value active/
inactive. Long static texts must therefore be displayed on the "Process value" text using the
"FlutTmIn" parameter (see MonDiS standard view (Page 550))

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV7.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special features


1

2 The text background color for


output Out = 1 depends on the
parameter assignment of the in‐
put "Color".

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


554 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.6 MonDiS - Monitoring of a digital process tag (Small)

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special features


3 See 2

- Block icon in "Out of service"


mode (example with type 1 block
icon)

Additional information on the block icon and the control options in the block icon is available
in the following sections:
● Configuring the block icons (Page 246)
● Block icon structure (Page 239)
● Operation via the block icon (Page 248).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 555
Monitoring blocks
4.7 MonDi08 - Monitoring 8 digital process tags

4.7 MonDi08 - Monitoring 8 digital process tags

4.7.1 Description of MonDi08

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1847
Family: Monitor

Area of application for MonDi08


The block is used for the following applications:
● Monitoring of up to eight digital process tags

How it works
The MonDi08 block is used to monitor up to eight digital process tags with flutter suppression.

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38). The block is
also installed automatically in the startup OB (OB100).
For the MonDi08 block, the Advanced Process Library contains templates for process tag types
as examples with various application scenarios for this block.
Examples of process tag types:
● Monitoring eight digital process tags (Digital8Monitoring) (Page 2419)

Startup characteristics
Use the Feature Bit Set startup characteristics (Page 141) to define the startup characteristics
of this block.
The messages are suppressed after startup for the number of cycles set at RunUpCyc.

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


You can find a description for each parameter in section MonDi08 I/Os (Page 564).

Status bit Parameter


0-2 Not used
3 OosAct.Value
4 OosLi.Value
5 Not used
6 OnAct.Value

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


556 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.7 MonDi08 - Monitoring 8 digital process tags

Status bit Parameter


7 Out1.Value
8 Out2.Value
9 Out3.Value
10 Out4.Value
11 Out5.Value
12 Out6.Value
13 Out7.Value
14 Out8.Value
15 - 19 Not used
20 In1 is used
21 In2 is used
22 In3 is used
23 In4 is used
24 In5 is used
25 In6 is used
26 In7 is used
27 In8 is used
28 - 31 Not used

Status word allocation for Status2 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 MsgLock.Value
1 Alm1MsgEn
2 Alm2MsgEn
3 Alm3MsgEn
4 Alm4MsgEn
5 Alm5MsgEn
6 Alm6MsgEn
7 Alm7MsgEn
8 Alm8MsgEn
9 - 30 Not used
31 MS_RelOp

Status word allocation for Status3 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 Effective signal 1 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
1 Effective signal 2 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
2 Effective signal 3 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
3 Effective signal 4 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
4 Effective signal 5 of the message block connected via EventTsIn

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 557
Monitoring blocks
4.7 MonDi08 - Monitoring 8 digital process tags

Status bit Parameter


5 Effective signal 6 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
6 Effective signal 7 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
7 Effective signal 8 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
8 - 23 Effective signal 9..16 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
24 - 31 Not used

See also
MonDi08 messaging (Page 562)
MonDi08 functions (Page 559)
MonDi08 block diagram (Page 568)
MonDi08 error handling (Page 562)
MonDi08 modes (Page 558)

4.7.2 MonDi08 modes

MonDi08 operating modes


This block provides the following modes.
● On (Page 72)
● Out of service (Page 72)

"On"
You can find general information about the "On" mode in the On (Page 72) section.

Out of service
You can find general information about the "Out of service" mode in the Out of service
(Page 72) section.
With Feature.Bit5 =1 the following output parameter become the status of simulation
16#60, if mode is changed to "Out of service".
With Feature.Bit5 =0 the following output parameter become the status of 16#80, if mode
is changed to "Out of service".
● Out1.ST
● Out2.ST
● Out3.ST
● Out4.ST
● Out5.ST

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


558 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.7 MonDi08 - Monitoring 8 digital process tags

● Out6.ST
● Out7.ST
● Out8.ST

See also
MonDi08 block diagram (Page 568)
MonDi08 I/Os (Page 564)
MonDi08 messaging (Page 562)
MonDi08 error handling (Page 562)
MonDi08 functions (Page 559)
Description of MonDi08 (Page 556)

4.7.3 MonDi08 functions

Functions of MonDi08
The functions for this block are listed below.

Monitoring and output of digital signals


The block is operated as "flutter filter". The block receives digital signals at the input Inx (x =
1 ... 8) which ideally do not develop any flutter. The block monitors these signals. Use the
FlutTmInx (x = 1 ... 8) input to determine the duration of a continuous signal in order to
transfer it to the process without flutter.
The preprocessed signal is sent to the process via the Outx (x = 1 ... 8) output.

Suppressing messages using the MsgLock parameter


This block provides the standard function Suppressing messages using the MsgLock
parameter (Page 214).

Forming the signal status for blocks


This block provides the standard function Forming and outputting the signal status for
technologic blocks (Page 110).
The worst signal status ST_Worst for the block is formed from the following parameters:
● In1.ST
● In2.ST
● In3.ST
● In4.ST

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 559
Monitoring blocks
4.7 MonDi08 - Monitoring 8 digital process tags

● In5.ST
● In6.ST
● In7.ST
● In8.ST

Release for maintenance


This block provides the standard function Release for maintenance (Page 65).

Simulating signals
This block provides the standard function Simulating signals (Page 59).

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133) section. The following functionality is
available for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
0 Set startup characteristics (Page 141)
1 Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 181)
5 Changes signal status of outputs in OOS (Page 198)
11 Suppress MsgLock and “Out of service” mode for a connected message block (Page 192)
22 Update acknowledgment and error status of the message call (Page 163)
24 Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162)
25 Suppression of all messages (Page 178)

Operator control permissions


This block provides the standard function Operator control permissions (Page 265).
The block has the following permissions for the OS_Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 Not used
1 1 = Operator can switch to "On" mode
2 Not used
3 1 = Operator can switch to "Out of service" mode
4 - 11 Not used
12 1 = Operator can activate the Release for maintenance function
13 1 = Operator can change the time for flutter suppression at the In1 input
14 1 = Operator can change the time for flutter suppression at the In2 input
15 1 = Operator can change the time for flutter suppression at the In3 input
16 1 = Operator can change the time for flutter suppression at the In4 input

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


560 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.7 MonDi08 - Monitoring 8 digital process tags

Bit Function
17 1 = Operator can change the time for flutter suppression at the In5 input
18 1 = Operator can change the time for flutter suppression at the In6 input
19 1 = Operator can change the time for flutter suppression at the In7 input
20 1 = Operator can change the time for flutter suppression at the In8 input
21 - 31 Not used

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Opening additional faceplates


This block provides the standard function Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

Changing labels on buttons and text


This block provides the standard function Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218).
You can change the label for "Process value" for this block as you please. The change is made
with the FlutXTmIn parameter.

Connection of the time-stamped messages from EventTs or Event16Ts


This block provides the standard function Connection of the time-stamped messages from
EventTs or Event16Ts (Page 216).

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


This block provides the standard function SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

See also
MonDi08 messaging (Page 562)
MonDi08 I/Os (Page 564)
Description of MonDi08 (Page 556)
MonDi08 block diagram (Page 568)
MonDi08 error handling (Page 562)
MonDi08 modes (Page 558)
EventTs functions (Page 1698)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 561
Monitoring blocks
4.7 MonDi08 - Monitoring 8 digital process tags

4.7.4 MonDi08 error handling

Error handling of MonDi08


Refer to the section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions for the error handling
of all blocks.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers
● Flutter alarm

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum I/O can be used to output various error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; the block is not processed.
0 There is no error.
11 Fluttering time < 0

Flutter alarm
An alarm is output at output FlutAct with 1 if signal flutter is detected. Refer to the functions
of the block > Monitoring and reporting flutter signals (Page 559).

See also
MonDi08 block diagram (Page 568)
MonDi08 I/Os (Page 564)
MonDi08 messaging (Page 562)
MonDi08 modes (Page 558)
Description of MonDi08 (Page 556)

4.7.5 MonDi08 messaging

Messaging
The following messages can be generated for this block:
● Process messages
● Instance-specific messages

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


562 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.7 MonDi08 - Monitoring 8 digital process tags

Process messages

Message Message iden‐ Message class Event


instance tifier
MsgEvId SIG 1 Alarm - high $$BlockComment$$
1 Signal change Signal 1 has oc‐
curred
SIG 2 Alarm - high $$BlockComment$$
Signal change Signal 2 has oc‐
curred
SIG 3 Alarm - high $$BlockComment$$
Signal change Signal 3 has oc‐
curred
SIG 4 Alarm - high $$BlockComment$$
Signal change Signal 4 has oc‐
curred
SIG 5 Alarm - high $$BlockComment$$
Signal change Signal 5 has oc‐
curred
SIG 6 Alarm - high $$BlockComment$$
Signal change Signal 6 has oc‐
curred
SIG 7 Alarm - high $$BlockComment$$
Signal change Signal 7 has oc‐
curred
SIG 8 Alarm - high $$BlockComment$$
Signal change Signal 8 has oc‐
curred

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId1

Associated value Block parameters


1 BatchName
2 StepNo
3 BatchID
4 ExtVa104
5 ExtVa105
6 ExtVa106
7 ExtVa107
8 ExtVa108
9 Reserved
10 Reserved

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 563
Monitoring blocks
4.7 MonDi08 - Monitoring 8 digital process tags

The associated values 4 ... 8 are allocated to the parameters ExtVa104 ... ExtVa108 and
can be used. Additional information is available in the "Process Control System PCS7 -
Engineering System" manual.

See also
Description of MonDi08 (Page 556)
MonDi08 functions (Page 559)
MonDi08 I/Os (Page 564)
MonDi08 block diagram (Page 568)
MonDi08 error handling (Page 562)
MonDi08 modes (Page 558)
Time stamp (Page 214)

4.7.6 MonDi08 I/Os


I/Os of MonDi08

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


Alm1MsgEn 1 = Activate error message BOOL 1
Alm2MsgEn 1 = Activate error message BOOL 1
Alm3MsgEn 1 = Activate error message BOOL 1
Alm4MsgEn 1 = Activate error message BOOL 1
Alm5MsgEn 1 = Activate error message BOOL 1
Alm6MsgEn 1 = Activate error message BOOL 1
Alm7MsgEn 1 = Activate error message BOOL 1
Alm8MsgEn 1 = Activate error message BOOL 1
BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation BOOL 0
BatchID Batch ID DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name S7-String
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1
EventTsIn For interconnecting data between a technology ANY
block and the message blocks EventTs,
Event16Ts.
The EventTsIn input parameter serves to intercon‐
nect the EventTsOut output parameter of the
EventTs, Event16Ts block. When this intercon‐
nection is configured, the messages of the
EventTs, Event16Ts block are displayed on the
OS in the alarm view of the technology block and can
also be acknowledged there.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


564 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.7 MonDi08 - Monitoring 8 digital process tags

Parameter Description Type Default


ExtVa104 Associated value 4 for messages (MsgEvID1) ANY
ExtVa105 Associated value 5 for messages (MsgEvID1) ANY
ExtVa106 Associated value 6 for messages (MsgEvID1) ANY
ExtVa107 Associated value 7 for messages (MsgEvID1) ANY
ExtVa108 Associated value 8 for messages (MsgEvID1) ANY
Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 559) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
Flut1TmIn Flutter time [s] REAL 0.0
Flut2TmIn Flutter time [s] REAL 0.0
Flut3TmIn Flutter time [s] REAL 0.0
Flut4TmIn Flutter time [s] REAL 0.0
Flut5TmIn Flutter time [s] REAL 0.0
Flut6TmIn Flutter time [s] REAL 0.0
Flut7TmIn Flutter time [s] REAL 0.0
Flut8TmIn Flutter time [s] REAL 0.0
In1 Binary input In1 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
In2 Binary input In2 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
In3 Binary input In3 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
In4 Binary input In4 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
In5 Binary input In5 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
In6 Binary input In6 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
In7 Binary input In7 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
In8 Binary input In8 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 565
Monitoring blocks
4.7 MonDi08 - Monitoring 8 digital process tags

Parameter Description Type Default


MS_RelOp* 1 = Release for maintenance by OS operator BOOL 0
MsgEvId1 Message number (assigned automatically) DWORD 16#00000000
MsgLock 1 = Suppress process messages. STRUCT -
See also the section Suppressing messages using ● Value: BOOL ● 0
the MsgLock parameter (Page 214) for more on this. ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Occupied 1 = Occupied by batch control BOOL 0
OnOp* 1 = "On" mode via operator BOOL 0
OosLi 1 = "Out of service", via interconnection or SFC (0-1 STRUCT -
edge transition) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosOp* 1 = "Out of service", via OS operator BOOL 0
OpSt_In Input parameter for local operator authorization, con‐ DWORD 16#00000000
nected with the Out output parameter of the up‐
stream block, OpStations (Page 423)
OS_Perm I/O for operator permissions (Page 559) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● ... ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
RunUpCyc Number of cycles in startup; messages are sup‐ INT 3
pressed during these cycles
SampleTime Sampling time [s] (assigned automatically) REAL 0.1
SelFp1 1 = Call a block saved in this parameter as an addi‐ ANY -
tional faceplate (Page 217) in the standard view
SelFp2 1 = Call a block saved in this parameter as an addi‐ ANY -
tional faceplate (Page 217) in the preview
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use in PCS 7 OS BYTE 16#00

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without errors BOOL 0
ErrorNum Output of pending error number. For error numbers INT -1
that can be output by this block, see MonDi08 error
handling (Page 562)
MS_Release Release for maintenance: STRUCT -
1 = Release for OS operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MsgAckn1 Message acknowledgement status 1 (output WORD 16#0000
ACK_STATE of first ALARM_8P)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


566 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.7 MonDi08 - Monitoring 8 digital process tags

Parameter Description Type Default


MsgErr1 1 = Alarm error 1 (output ERROR of the first BOOL 0
ALARM_8P)
MsgStat1 Message status 1 (output STATUS of first WORD 16#0000
ALARM_8P)
OnAct 1 = "On" mode enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosAct 1 = Block is "Out of service" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpSt_Out Value of the OpSt_In input parameter, for feedfor‐ DWORD 16#00000000
warding to other blocks. Bit 31 of this parameter is
used by Feature.Bit24
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with settings changed by the DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
block algorithm
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
Out1 Output STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Out2 Output STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Out3 Output STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Out4 Output STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Out5 Output STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Out6 Output STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Out7 Output STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Out8 Output STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
Status1 Status word 1 (Page 556) DWORD 16#00000000

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 567
Monitoring blocks
4.7 MonDi08 - Monitoring 8 digital process tags

Parameter Description Type Default


Status2 Status word 2 (Page 556) DWORD 16#00000000
Status3 Status word 3 (Page 556) DWORD 16#00000000

See also
MonDi08 messaging (Page 562)
MonDi08 block diagram (Page 568)
MonDi08 modes (Page 558)

4.7.7 MonDi08 block diagram

MonDi08 block diagram


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

See also
MonDi08 I/Os (Page 564)
MonDi08 messaging (Page 562)
MonDi08 error handling (Page 562)
MonDi08 functions (Page 559)
MonDi08 modes (Page 558)
Description of MonDi08 (Page 556)

4.7.8 Operator control and monitoring

4.7.8.1 MonDi08 views

Views of the MonDi08 block


The block MonDi08 provides the following views:
● MonDi08 standard view (Page 569)
● Alarm view (Page 313)
● Trend view (Page 317)
● MonDi08 parameter view (Page 571)
● MonDi08 preview (Page 572)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


568 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.7 MonDi08 - Monitoring 8 digital process tags

● Memo view (Page 315)


● Batch view (Page 313)
● Block icon for MonDi08 (Page 573)
Refer to the sections Structure of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure
(Page 239) for general information on the faceplate and block icon.

4.7.8.2 MonDi08 standard view

MonDi08 standard view

 




(1) Displaying and switching the operating mode


This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
● On (Page 72)
● Out of service (Page 72)
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for information
on switching the operating mode.

(2) Display of the status for each parameter


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
This area shows you the status of the individual parameters available.
You can determine the names for the connected parameters using the S7_String attribute
at the corresponding input parameter. A default text is displayed if you enter nothing here.
You can change the text for value 1 ... 8 with the FlutXTmIn parameter.
Additional information is available in the section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 569
Monitoring blocks
4.7 MonDi08 - Monitoring 8 digital process tags

(3) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
Use this navigation button to reach the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system. The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the engineering
system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in the Opening additional faceplates (Page 217)
section.

(4) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Maintenance"

(5) Displaying input values


Changing the display:
Follow these steps to change the displays:
1. In the CFC, right-click the MonDi08 block and select "Object Properties" from the context
menu.
2. Select "I/Os" tab in the properties window.
3. In the “OS additional text” column, change the default setting for the input parameter
(FlutXTmIn, where x = 1...8) to what you want to see during runtime later.
4. In the "Identifier" column, change the default setting for the input parameter (FlutXTmIn,
where x = 1...8) to what you want to see during runtime later.
5. If both “OS additional text” and “Identifier” columns are empty, the default value is displayed
in the runtime.
6. The text is used as a label and is therefore always displayed, which means it is independent
of the signal status of the corresponding input (FlutXTmIn, where x = 1...8).
7. The font size is reduced during the runtime if the input text length is greater than the label
width.

Note
If a text is added to the "OS additional text" field of the input parameter (FlutXTmIn, where
x = 1...8), this text is displayed even if the "Identifier" text field of the same input parameter is
not empty. If the "OS additional text" field of the input parameter (FlutXTmIn, where x = 1...8)
is empty, the "Identifier" text of the same input parameter is displayed.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


570 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.7 MonDi08 - Monitoring 8 digital process tags

4.7.8.3 MonDi08 parameter view

Parameter view of MonDi08

(1) Enabled operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator control permissions are assigned.
They depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Symbols for enabled operations:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
control permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).

(2) Area for entering the flutter time


Use this area to set the time period to determine how long a continuous signal should last in
order for it to be transferred to the process without flutter.
Refer to the Changing values (Page 270) section for more on this.
You can determine the names for the connected parameters using the S7_String attribute
at the corresponding input parameter. A default text is displayed if you enter nothing here.
You can change the text for value 1 ... 8 with the FlutXTmIn parameter.
Additional information is available in the section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 571
Monitoring blocks
4.7 MonDi08 - Monitoring 8 digital process tags

(3) Service
You can select the following function in this area:
● "Release for maintenance"
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for more on
this.
You can find information on this area in the Release for maintenance (Page 65) section.

4.7.8.4 MonDi08 preview

Preview of MonDi08

(1) Enabled operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator control permissions are assigned.
They depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Symbols for enabled operations:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
control permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)
The following enabled operations are shown here:
● "On": You can switch to "On" operating mode.
● "Out of service": You can switch to "Out of service" operating mode.
● "Local operating permission": Use the ← button to switch to the standard view of the
OpStations block. Additional information is available in the section Operator control
permissions (Page 265).

(2) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
Use this navigation button to reach the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system. The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the engineering
system (ES).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


572 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Monitoring blocks
4.7 MonDi08 - Monitoring 8 digital process tags

You can find additional information on this in the Opening additional faceplates (Page 217)
section.

4.7.8.5 Block icon for MonDi08

Block symbols for MonDi08


A variety of block symbols are available with the following functions:
● Process tag type
● Limits (high/low)
● Violation of alarm, warning, and tolerance limits as well as control system faults
● Operating modes
● Signal status, release for maintenance
● Memo display
● Display of the output signal

The block symbols from template @TemplateAPLV8.PDL:

Symbols Selection of the block symbol in Special features


CFC
1

The block symbols from template @TemplateAPLV7.PDL:

Symbols Selection of the block symbol in Special features


CFC
1 Block symbol in the full display

- Block symbol in "Out of service"


mode (example with type 1 block
symbol)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 573
Monitoring blocks
4.7 MonDi08 - Monitoring 8 digital process tags

Additional information on the block symbol and the control options in the block symbol is
available in the following chapters:
● Configuring the block icons (Page 246)
● Block icon structure (Page 239)
● Operation via the block icon (Page 248).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


574 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks 5
5.1 Comparison of large & small blocks

5.1.1 PIDConL compared to PIDConS

Comparison of the PIDConL and PIDConS blocks


The following tables are intended to help you decide which block to use.

Memory and runtime savings of the small block compared to the large block
You save the following resources for each instance:
● Memory space: ~ 45%
● Runtime: ~ 40%

Block operating modes

PIDConL PIDConS
Manual mode (Page 73) X X
Automatic mode (Page 73) X X
Program mode for controllers X
(Page 79)
Out of service (Page 72) X X

Functions of the blocks

PIDConL PIDConS
Generating and limiting the ma‐ X X
nipulated variable
Tracking and limiting a manipu‐ X X
lated variable (Page 205)
Tracking and limiting a manipu‐ X X
lated variable (Page 205)
Neutral position for motors, X X
valves and controllers (Page 48)
Outputting group errors X X
(Page 124)
Outputting a signal for start read‐ X X
iness (Page 54)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 575
Controller blocks
5.1 Comparison of large & small blocks

PIDConL PIDConS
"Actuator active" information X X
Limit monitoring of the feedback X
(Page 95)
Setpoint specification - internal/ X X
external (Page 130)
Setpoint limiting for external set‐ X X
points (Page 205)
Gradient limit of the setpoint X
(Page 126)
Using setpoint ramp (Page 125) X
Tracking setpoint in manual X X
mode (Page 205)
Simulating signals (Page 59) X X
Limit monitoring of the process X X
value (Page 87)
Alarm delays with two time val‐
ues per limit pair
Alarm delay with one time value X X
per limit pair
Error signal generation and dead X X
band (Page 201)
Delay alarm for control deviation X
at setpoint step changes
(Page 199)
Limit monitoring of error signal X
Inverting control direction X
(Page 200)
Physical standardization of set‐ X
point, manipulated variable and
process value
Selecting a unit of measure X X
(Page 221)
PID algorithm X X
Structure segmentation at con‐ X
trollers (Page 207)
Anti-windup (Page 759) X X
Feedforwarding and limiting dis‐ X
turbance variables (Page 206)
Using control zones (Page 203) X
Forming and outputting the sig‐ X X
nal status for technologic blocks
(Page 110)
Operator control permissions X X
(Page 265)
Release for maintenance X X
(Page 65)
Generating instance-specific X X
messages (Page 213)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


576 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.1 Comparison of large & small blocks

PIDConL PIDConS
Suppressing messages using X X
the MsgLock parameter
(Page 214)
Display and operator input area X X
for process values and setpoints
(Page 216)
Opening additional faceplates X X
(Page 217)
SIMATIC BATCH functionality X X
(Page 68)
Time stamp X
Dead band is temporarily disa‐ X
bled (Page 145)
Labeling of buttons and text X
(Page 218)
Displaying current control sig‐ X X
nals from output channel block
Interlocks (Page 101) X
Disabling interlocks (Page 104) X

Configurable functions using the Feature parameter

Bit Feature bit function PIDConL PIDConS


number
0 Set startup characteristics (Page 141) X X
1 Reaction to the out of service mode X X
(Page 181)
2 Resetting the commands for changing X X
the mode (Page 165)
4 Setting switch or button mode X
(Page 170)
12 Control zone with specified I compo‐ X
nent (Page 164)
13 Control zone with frozen I component X
(Page 164)
14 External control deviation (Page 154) X
15 Neutral position manipulated variable X X
takes effect with "out of service" operat‐
ing mode (Page 170)
16 Neutral position manipulated variable X X
takes effect at startup (Page 169)
18 Disabling bumpless switchover to auto‐ X
matic mode for controllers (Page 176)
22 Update acknowledgment and error sta‐ X
tus of the message call (Page 163)
24 Enabling local operator authorization X X
(Page 162)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 577
Controller blocks
5.1 Comparison of large & small blocks

Bit Feature bit function PIDConL PIDConS


number
25 Suppression of all messages X X
(Page 178)
26 Reaction of the switching points in the X X
"Out of service" operating mode
(Page 180)
28 Disabling operating points (Page 149) X
29 Signaling limit violation (Page 174) X
30 Dead band is temporarily disabled X
(Page 145)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


578 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.2 ConPerMon - Monitoring of the control performance of control loops

5.2 ConPerMon - Monitoring of the control performance of control loops

5.2.1 Description of ConPerMon

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1805
Family: Control

Area of application for ConPerMon


The block is used for the following applications:
● Permanent monitoring of control performance of control loops for early detection of
problems as they develop
The block calculates:
● Stochastic characteristics of the control performance with the process in a steady state
– Mean value, variance and standard deviation of controlled variable
– Mean value of the manipulated variable and control deviation
– Control performance index
– Estimated steady state process gain
● Deterministic characteristics of the control performance with step changes in the setpoint
– Response time and settling time and the settling ratio
– Overshoot absolute and relative to the step height
Other statistical and graphic evaluations of the signals in the control loop over longer, freely
selectable periods are available in the faceplate of the ConPerMon block.
In an overview representation of a plant or unit, you can obtain a clear picture of the status of
all control loops based on ConPerMon block icons (indicator light function).
The aim is to detect problems as they develop and to focus the attention of the user on the
control loops in a plant that are no longer operating correctly.

How it works
The ConPerMon block evaluates the setpoint and process value signals and the manipulated
variable of the PID controller in a sliding time window. The mode of the controller is also taken
into account.
With the process in a steady state, the detected stochastic characteristics are compared with
the reference values obtained during commissioning. If there is a step change in the setpoint,
the stochastic characteristics are by definition irrelevant and are temporarily frozen. Instead,
the monitoring of the deterministic characteristics is automatically activated.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 579
Controller blocks
5.2 ConPerMon - Monitoring of the control performance of control loops

If the control performance falls below a defined limit a message is generated. This is also the
case when a defined limit for overshoot is exceeded when there is a step change in the
setpoint.

Configuration
Each PID controller has a ConPerMon block assigned to it that is installed in the same CFC
chart and interconnected with the controller. This already takes place with the corresponding
process tag types.
You can open the standard view for the ConPerMon block from the standard view of a controller
(for example PIDConL). Additional information on this topic is available in the section Opening
additional faceplates (Page 217).
After successful commissioning and optimization of the PID controller to be monitored, the
ConPerMon block is initialized while the process is in a steady state and it stores the
corresponding characteristic values as reference values.
Follow the steps outlined below:
● Change the PID controller you want to monitor to automatic mode and set the setpoint to
the typical operating point. This operating status is intended to represent the normal
operation of the process; in other words, the entire plant/unit should be running under
production conditions. Monitor the process with a trend writer (CFC trend in the Engineering-
System or WinCC Online-Trend-Control on the Operator Station) and wait until the process
has settled
● To specify the length TimeWindow of the sliding time window, monitor the PV_Variance
block output of the ConPerMonblock in a trend. The time window should be long enough
to keep the variance fairly constant in the relevant decimal places. If the selected time
window is too short in relation to the time constants in the control loop and the disturbance
signal spectrum, the variance will have too much noise and no useful information.
If the selected time window is too long, it takes longer before any deterioration of the control
performance is detected by the ConPerMon block. It also takes longer following a step
change in the setpoint before the monitoring of the stochastic characteristics can be
resumed. A good starting value for the TimeWindow parameter is 10 times as long as the
longest process time constant or 20 times as long as the reset time of the PID controller.
● If the controller
– is set perfectly,
– has achieved a steady state,
– the time window has been defined and filled with values from the steady state,
the ConPerMon block can be initialized. You do this by clicking the "Initialize" button in the
parameter view of the ConPerMon faceplate or by setting the InitRefVar = 1 parameter
in the CFC block. This saves the PV_Variance parameter in the current time window as
a reference value for calculating the control performance in the block along with reference
values for manipulated variable and process variable.
The Control Performance Index CPI should now be approximately at 100% and therefore
indicate that the control loop is operating correctly. Due to stochastic fluctuations, the CPI can
also temporarily exceed the 100% mark. If, however, the CPI drops by a significant amount
over a longer period, this indicates deterioration of the control performance.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


580 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.2 ConPerMon - Monitoring of the control performance of control loops

For more detailed information on interpreting the calculation results of the block, refer to the
section ConPerMon functions (Page 583).

Note
If the length of the time window is changed during runtime, the CPI will temporarily deviate
considerably from its old value and then gradually settle to the new steady value. It is advisable
to reinitialize the ConPerMon block after the CPI value has settled to a constant level.

The ConPerMon faceplate is opened from the faceplate of the assigned PID controller so that
the ConPerMonicon pictures do not need to be installed separately in each OS picture. It is,
in fact, advisable to group all ConPerMon block icons of a plant or unit in one overview picture
at the appropriate hierarchy level.
You can expand this overview picture with the trend display of the control performance of all
control loops over a longer time to allow you to recognize gradual deterioration (for example
reflecting wear and tear). You can also display a further view of the message archive (WinCC
AlarmLogging Control) as a hit list sorted according to the frequency in which they occur. In
this list, the control loops that caused the most alarms will be shown at the top.
For the ConPerMon block, the Advanced Process Library contains templates for process tag
types as examples with various application scenarios for this block.
Examples of process tag types:
● PID controller with dynamic feedforward control (FfwdDisturbCompensat) (Page 2393)
● PID - control with operating-point-oriented parameter control (GainScheduling)
(Page 2391)
● PID controller with safety logic and control loop monitoring (PIDConL_ConPerMon)
(Page 2388)
● PIDConR with safety logic and control loop monitoring (PIDConR_ConPerMon)
(Page 2389)
● Ratio control with control loop monitoring through ConPerMon (RatioControl) (Page 2402)
● Ratio control with PIDConR (RatioR) (Page 2405)
● PID controller with Smith predictor (SmithPredictorControl) (Page 2396)
● Step controller with direct access to the actuator and without position feedback
(StepControlDirect) (Page 2397)

Startup characteristics
When the CPU starts up, the block is reinitialized but the stored reference values are retained.
The messages are suppressed after startup for the number of cycles set at RunUpCyc.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 581
Controller blocks
5.2 ConPerMon - Monitoring of the control performance of control loops

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


You can find a description for each parameter in section ConPerMon I/Os (Page 597)

Status bit Parameter


0 Occupied
1 BatchEn
2 Not used
3 OosAct.Value
4 OosLi.Value
5 PID_AutAct.Value
6 OnAct.Value
7 - 14 Not used
15 CPI_Suppress
16 - 31 Not used

Status word allocation for Status2 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 MsgLock
1 OvsAH_Act.Value
2 OvsWH_Act.Value
3-4 Not used
5 CPI_WL_Act.Value
6 CPI_AL_Act.Value
7 OvsAH_En OR Feature.Bit31
8 OvsWH_En OR Feature.Bit31
9 - 10 Not used
11 CPI_WL_En OR Feature.Bit31
12 CPI_AL_En OR Feature.Bit31
13 OvsAH_MsgEn
14 OvsWH_MsgEn
15 - 16 Not used
17 CPI_WL_MsgEn
18 CPI_AL_MsgEn
19 Delay of the CPI_WL_Lim message
20 Delay of the CPI_AL_Lim message
21 Collection of message delays
22 - 31 Not used

See also
ConPerMon messaging (Page 595)
ConPerMon block diagram (Page 603)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


582 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.2 ConPerMon - Monitoring of the control performance of control loops

ConPerMon error handling (Page 595)


ConPerMon modes (Page 583)

5.2.2 ConPerMon modes

ConPerMon operating modes


The block can be operated using the following modes
● On (Page 72)
● Out of service (Page 72)

"On"
You can find general information about the "On" mode in the On (Page 72) section.

"Out of service"
You can find general information about the "Out of service" mode in the Out of service
(Page 72) section.

See also
ConPerMon block diagram (Page 603)
ConPerMon I/Os (Page 597)
ConPerMon messaging (Page 595)
ConPerMon error handling (Page 595)
ConPerMon functions (Page 583)
Description of ConPerMon (Page 579)

5.2.3 ConPerMon functions

Functions of ConPerMon
The functions for this block are listed below.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 583
Controller blocks
5.2 ConPerMon - Monitoring of the control performance of control loops

Monitoring of stochastic characteristics of the control performance


The mean value of a variable relating to an ergodic stochastic process (Page 2452) can be
determined from a sliding time window with the length n = TimeWindow / SampleTime, for
example, for the controlled variable y = PV:

1 n
y= ∑ y (i )
n i =1
A recursive formulation of this calculation is included in the MeanTime block that is called by
the ConPerMonblock. Most steady-state time series can be considered as being ergodic so
that the expected value can be estimated by averaging over a window of finite length.
The mean control deviation is ER_Mean = SP - PV_Mean. A mean steady-state control deviation
≠ 0 at a constant setpoint is an indication of problems in the control loop if the controller has I
component. You should then check the following potential causes:
● The actuator does not have sufficient capacity. As a result, the controller's actuating signal
constantly approaches its limit. This can be caused by unsuitably dimensioned actuators
or may simply by wear and tear.
● The manipulated variable demanded by the controller does not take effect in the process,
for example because the actuator is defective.
If a steady-state reference operating point (MV_Ref, PV_Ref) is known, this can be used to
estimate the current mean steady state gain of a linear process model if it is assumed that only
disturbances without mean value have an effect:

PVMean − PVRe f
StatGain =
MVMean − MVRe f

Normally the reference operating point is obtained during the initialization of the ConPerMon
block. Estimation of the steady state gain is then, however, impossible precisely at this
operating point. As an alternative, you can also enter the reference values PV_Ref and
MV_Ref manually at the appropriate block inputs. Typical steady-state operating points are
often known in advance, for example
● Flow control: PV = 0 for MV = 0, in other words, valve closed,
● Temperature control: PV = PV_Ambient for MV = 0, in other words, ambient temperature
If the steady state gain changes gradually as time progresses, this is an indication of wear
phenomena in the process, such as deposits on heat exchangers, valves or shutters, failing
efficiency of process plant, etc.
If, for example, a temperature regulation circuit is closed by a heat exchanger and a deposit
forms on the exchanger surfaces, the heat transfer coefficient, and consequently the process
gain, is reduced. Within certain limits, this can be compensated by a closed control loop (so
that the controller initially disregards the problem). Although the original control loop dynamics
can be restored (to a certain extent) by suitable increase of the controller gain as the pollution
increases, it is advisable to eliminate the cause of the problem; in other words, to clean the
heat exchanger.
If the estimated steady state gain changes suddenly and temporarily, this tends to point to an
external disturbance. This may be a normal occurrence in the operation of the process. If,
however, these occurrences become more frequent, it is worth finding out the cause.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


584 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.2 ConPerMon - Monitoring of the control performance of control loops

Due to the approach, the variance PV_Variance as second moment requires the calculation
of differences of each current measured value from (constant !) mean value:
● Feature.Bit8 = 0 (default), approximate calculation with reduced computing power
consumption:

● Feature.Bit8 = 1, more exact calculation corresponding to mathematical definition of


variance:

The standard deviation

PV _ StdDev = σ y = σ 2y

as the square root of the variance is easier to interpret because it has the same physical unit
as the measured value.
The control performance index CPI (Control Performance Index) in the unit [%] describes the
current variance of the controlled variable relative to a reference variance (benchmark). It is
defined as

σ 2ref
ς= 100%
σ 2y

The CPI moves in the 0 < ς ≤ 100% range. If the current variance corresponds to the
benchmark, the index reaches the value 100. If, by contrast, the current variance becomes
larger, the control performance index decreases accordingly. Ideally, the benchmark is
obtained in a defined good state of the control loop and stored when the ConPerMon block is
initialized. It does not matter if the CPI temporarily reaches values somewhat higher than 100%.
A CPI > 100% only means that the variance of the controlled variable is currently somewhat
lower than in the reference state. Other alternatives for determining the benchmark will be
explained in a separate .
If you consider the calculated CPI signal to be too strongly affected by noise, you can smooth
it using the integrated low pass filter (parameter CPI_FiltFactor) with the filter time constant
TimeWindow · CPI_FiltFactor.
The disadvantage of these stochastic characteristics is that they assume an ergodic
(Page 2452) or steady state in the process - at least in a statistical sense. Each step change
in the standpoint in a controller is an elementary violation of this requirement and leads
temporarily to incorrect statements of the stochastic characteristics, for example variances
increasing too much. The basic principle of the combined approach implemented in the
ConPerMonblock is to use both stochastic and deterministic characteristics for the control
performance and to select the suitable characteristics automatically depending on the
operating state.
If a step change in the setpoint is detected in a control loop, the ConPerMon block freezes the
CPIvalue and automatically suppresses all messages relating to this. As a user, you can also

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 585
Controller blocks
5.2 ConPerMon - Monitoring of the control performance of control loops

force the suppression of the messages manually via the ManSupprCPI = 1 binary input. This
setting is useful to avoid false alarms when known disturbances occur, for example at a load
change in a Conti process (Page 2453) or a dosing procedure in a Batch process
(Page 2447). In such cases the variance of the controlled variable usually rises momentarily.
This should not be interpreted as a worsening of the control performance.

Monitoring of deterministic characteristics of the control performance


Assessment of the control performance based on the response to a step change in the setpoint
is relatively simple. In the sense of automatic monitoring, the ConPerMon block is capable of
determining the essential characteristics of the control performance directly from the signal
changes so that when necessary a message or an alarm can be generated automatically by
the system.
The first thing to look for is always the overshoot if it is present and clearly distinct from the
noise level. For a positive step response,
OverAbso = max(PV) - SP > 0
is output where is for a negative step response (step response down), and negative values
OverAbso = min(PV) - SP < 0
are also output. For normalization, the absolute overshoot is related to the height of the step
change in the setpoint and is therefore always positive. The relative overshoot (Overshoot)
as a percentage is a measure of the damping of the control loop. If this is more than 20 or
30%, the loop gain (gain of the controller multiplied by the gain of the control system) is
generally too high either because the controller was badly set from the beginning or because
the properties of the control system have changed over the course of time. If overshoot is
significantly too high, the control loop is generating weakly damped oscillations in the plant.
The block sends a message to this effect if the relative overshoot is above a specified limit.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


586 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.2 ConPerMon - Monitoring of the control performance of control loops


2YHU$EVR

7ROH+L39

7ROH/R39



6WHS+HLJKW


.H\
39

63


         

5LVH7LPH

6HWWOL7LPH

In every control loop, there is a general correlation between overshoot and phase reserve: The
higher the overshoot, the lower the phase reserve. If the response of the closed control loop
can be described approximately by a 2nd order transfer function

PV(s) 1
g cl (s) = =
SP(s) 1 2 δ
2
s + 2 s +1
ω0 ω0

the following relationships are known:


● If δ ≥ 1 , the overshoot is equal to zero and the settling response is asymptotic.
● If δ < 1 , overshoot and oscillations occur.
The damping of the closed loop can be determined approximately from the overshoot:

 Overshoot 
− ln  
δ=  100% 
 Overshoot  2
ln 2  +π
 100% 

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 587
Controller blocks
5.2 ConPerMon - Monitoring of the control performance of control loops







'DPSLQJ 








          

2YHUVKRRW

An optimum controller setting typically aims for overshoot between 5 and 25%, which means
damping between 0.7 and 0.4.
If overshoot is too high, it is often helpful to reduce the gain of the controller.
While overshoot primarily serves to check controller gain, there is a further characteristic that
provides information on the setting of the I component: If the setting of the reset time is
unsuitable, the process value will creep towards the new setpoint following a step change in
the setpoint. The ratio to the RiseTime is relevant, and not the absolute value of the
SettliTime. If the settling ratio, in other words the quotient of the rise time and settling time,
is less than approximately 25%, it can generally be assumed that the reset time of the controller
is too slow. To determine the rise time and settling time, a 3σ tolerance band is placed around
the setpoint and is also displayed in the faceplate of the ConPerMon block. The absolute values
of the settling time and rise time can be assessed in terms of the concrete requirements of the
process control for a specific application.
During a step change in the setpoint, larger mathematical variances of the controlled variable
are bound to occur compared with the steady state so that generating alarms due to the
variance limits being exceeded needs to be suppressed until the settling process has neared
completion following the step change in the setpoint. The calculated deterministic
characteristics are then output and the stochastic evaluation is reactivated.

Group display SumMsgAct for limit monitoring, CSF and ExtMsgx


The block provides the standard function Group display for limit monitoring, CSF and
ExtMsgx (Page 86).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


588 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.2 ConPerMon - Monitoring of the control performance of control loops

Alternatives for determining the benchmark


During planned commissioning of a plant with integrated ConPerMon, following controller
optimization, the ConPerMon block is initialized for every control loop and the calculated
variance stored as the benchmark for calculating the CPI.
As an alternative, a benchmark can be set via the RefVarExt input parameter by setting the
RefVarExtOn = 1 input parameter. There are various ways of obtaining numeric values for
the benchmark:
● Take the lowest variance that was ever measured in this control loop since the initialization
of the ConPerMon block. This is displayed at the PV_VarMin output parameter. This value
is only useful when the control loop has been in a stable and desirable operating state for
a longer period of time at least once since the initialization of the ConPerMon block.
● Take the variance of the control loop with a theoretical minimum variance controller as can
be obtained based on archived data using another supplier's CPM application. This
depends only on the process dead time and the disturbance model. This form of CPI is
known as the Harris index and represents a lower barrier that can generally not be reached
by a PID controller which is why CPI seldom reaches the value 100% even by well tuned
controllers. Low CPI values provide the first indication that the controller settings could be
improved. You should, however, bear in mind that the minimum variance is only a
theoretically achievable value and that the minimum variance controller has characteristics
that are not desired in the real application, for example extremely high manipulated variable
amplitudes. With minimum variance-based CPI, therefore, it is not worth making every effort
to bring this as close as possible to 100%

Cascade control
In a cascade control, you should only use the ConPerMon block for the primary controller and
not for the secondary controller. The ConPerMon block cannot make any useful statements
about the control performance of the secondary controller because
● the variance of the process value in the secondary control loop depends directly on the
variance of the setpoint that is set as the manipulated variable by the primary controller,
● there are neither operating phases with a constant setpoint nor defined step changes in
the setpoint.
Apart from this, from the perspective of process control, the primary control loop is, of course,
the one whose control performance should be monitored while the control performance of the
secondary loop is of secondary importance. It is nevertheless advisable to set the secondary
controller carefully before optimization and monitoring of the primary controller is started
because a poor response by the secondary controller cannot be compensated by the primary
controller.
For additional information, read about the process tag template Cascade control with control
loop monitoring through ConPerMon (CascadeControl) (Page 2406).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 589
Controller blocks
5.2 ConPerMon - Monitoring of the control performance of control loops

Split-range control
The split-range function block contains two separate (static) characteristics for both actuators.
Any significant difference between the two actuators in terms of performance (in other words,
different steady state gains for heating and cooling) can be compensated by setting different
gradients for the characteristics, so that the controller is presented with a linear process
response (regardless of the sign) as far as possible. It this does not work, the control
performance will differ slightly in the two areas. The initialization of the ConPerMon block
should then be performed in the worse area to avoid error alarms.
For additional information, read about the process tag template Split-range controller with
control loop monitoring through ConPerMon (SplitrangeControl) (Page 2399).

PID controller with gain scheduler


The aim of gain scheduling is to achieve consistent control performance over the entire
operating range. If this does not work perfectly, the initialization of the ConPerMon block should
be performed in an operating point with worse control performance to avoid error alarms. We
recommend that you expand the alarm limits somewhat at the ConPerMon block: permit lower
CPIs and higher overshoot.
For additional information, read about the process tag template PID - control with operating-
point-oriented parameter control (GainScheduling) (Page 2391).

Override control
For change-over control, different controllers are active depending on the process state; their
control performances differ, of course. We recommend using control loop monitoring only for
the primary controller, and to suppress it using the ManSuprCPI input parameter if limit
controlling is activated.
For additional information, read about the process tag template Override control (Page 2412).

Feedforward control
The task of feedforward control is to avoid or at least to reduce degradation of the control
performance caused by a measurable disturbance variable. Control loop monitoring therefore
can basically be used as it is used for simple control loop. When the disturbance variable is
quiet for a time and then acts up for a brief period, the resulting fluctuations of the control
performance cannot be ruled out. The reason behind it is that feedforward control represents
a model-based intervention, and a model is never a perfect reflection of reality.
For additional information, read about the process tag template PID controller with dynamic
feedforward control (FfwdDisturbCompensat) (Page 2393).

Smith predictor
The Smith predictor enables higher control performance than a simple PI controller in control
loops with dead time. Control loop monitoring therefore can basically be used as it is used for
simple control loop. If the dead time changes during ongoing operation, control performance
will most likely go down.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


590 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.2 ConPerMon - Monitoring of the control performance of control loops

For additional information, read about the process tag template PID controller with Smith
predictor (SmithPredictorControl) (Page 2396).

Ratio control
With ratio controlling, the control loop monitoring should only be used in the primary control
loop if the setpoints are to be determined for combined components from the actual value of
the primary component. In this case, you can expect continuous setpoint changes in the control
loops for the combined components - similar to sequential control loop of a cascade. If the
setpoints for combined components are to be determined from the setpoint of the primary
component, the lower-level control loops can be monitored as well.
For additional information, read about the process tag template Ratio control with control loop
monitoring through ConPerMon (RatioControl) (Page 2402).

Multivariable controller
The mathematical concept of the ConPerMon block is intended for monovariable control loops.
If the variance in a control loop is found to be too high, the block cannot determine whether
the actual cause is within the control loop or whether influences are being brought in due to
interactions from the outside. If, therefore, you notice strong interactions between various
control loops in your plant or even use multivariable controllers, the information provided by
the ConPerMon block should be treated with caution.
It can nevertheless make sense to equip a multivariable controller such as the ModPreCon
block with control loop monitoring to establish whether the control performance achieved
during commissioning of the controller is also retained in runtime. In this case, each controller
channel of the multivariable controller has a separate ConPerMon block. Several additional
logic functions need to be configured upstream from the ManSuprCPI input parameter as
shown in the corresponding sample project Predictive control of a 2x2 multi-variable controlled
system (ModPreConSim) (Page 2445):
● If one or more other channels for the multivariable controller is in a non-steady state (for
example, step change in the setpoint) indicated by the CPI_SupRoot = 1 output parameter,
the temporarily increased variance cannot be avoided in this controller channel and should
not cause a CPI message.
● If one or more other channels of the multivariable controller have higher variances (poor
control performance) indicated by the corresponding output CPI_WrnAct = 1, due to the
interaction, these variances also cause a higher variance in this controller channel that
cannot be avoided and should not lead to a CPI warning. It is possible to find the actual
cause of a disturbance in a multivariable system as follows: The channel that first detects
higher variances, set the alarm while subsequent alarms in adjacent channels are
suppressed.
Note
In the case of multivariables, the estimated steady state gains from the monovariable
observation are irrelevant. By setting the input parameter StGainValid = 0, this status is
also displayed in the faceplate as "Uncertain, process related".

If a PID controllers is remotely controlled in program mode (Page 79), it should be treated
similar to a secondary controller for a cascade connection in regard to control performance
monitoring, i.e. monitoring is usually impractical in this case.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 591
Controller blocks
5.2 ConPerMon - Monitoring of the control performance of control loops

If program mode is the typical operating mode of the controller involved, the corresponding
ConPerMon block can be completely removed. If the controller involved is often used in
automatic mode, however, monitoring can be temporarily disabled during program mode by
connecting the output parameter AdvCoAct of the PIDConL block to the input parameter
ManSupprCPI of the ConPerMon block.

Selecting a unit of measure


The block provides the standard function Selecting a unit of measure (Page 221).

Forming the signal status for blocks


The block provides the standard function Forming and outputting the signal status for
technologic blocks (Page 110).
The worst signal status for the block is formed from the following parameters:
● SP_Mon.ST
● PV_Mon.ST
● MV_Mon.ST
● ER_Mean.ST
● In addition, the ConPerMon block has the following special functions for determining status
values:
● If you use a step controller without position feedback, there is no manipulated variable that
you could interconnect with the input parameter MV_Mon. Unlike most other input
parameters MV_Mondoes not have the preset signal status "Uncertain, process related"
(16#78). If there is no interconnected value, this status is transferred to the calculated output
parameters MV_Mean and StatGain.
● StGainValid: Set this input to 0 if you use a multivariable controller or observe strong
interactions between neighboring control loops. This gives the calculated output parameter
StatGain the signal status "Uncertain, process related". If known disturbances affect your
process, for example dosing procedures in a batch process, you can also set this input
temporarily using the recipe control.
● Under normal circumstances the output parameter StatGain accepts the worse signal
status of PV_Mon and MV_Mon. Other possible causes of uncertain status for StatGain
are:
– the process is currently very close to the reference operating point, or
– the process is currently in transition, e.g. step change in the setpoint.
● The signal status of the CPI output parameter is dependent on output parameter
CPI_Suppress: If CPI_Suppress = 1, the control performance index CPI is uncertain.
Apart from this, the CPI can also become uncertain in occasional situations when there are
numeric problems in the calculation of the variance. Under normal circumstances the CPI
signal status is the same as the PV_Mon signal status.
● The signal status of the OverAbso output parameter is set to invalid when step changes
in the setpoint are evaluated whose step change height is too low in relation to the noise
level.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


592 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.2 ConPerMon - Monitoring of the control performance of control loops

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133) . The following functionality is
available for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
1 Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 181)
8 Variants of CPI calculation (Page 192)
22 Update acknowledgment and error status of the message call (Page 163)
24 Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162)
25 Suppression of all messages (Page 178)
26 Reaction of the switching points in the "Out of service" operating mode (Page 180)
28 Disabling operating points (Page 149)
29 Signaling limit violation (Page 174)
31 Limits disabled in faceplate (Page 195)

Operator permissions
The block provides the standard function Operator control permissions (Page 265).
The block has the following permissions for the OS_Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0-1 Not used
2 1 = Operator can switch to "Out of service" mode
3 - 27 Not used
28 1 = Operator can initialize the block
29 1 = Operator may input a value for the time window, the reference value for the controlled
variable and the reference value of the manipulated variable
30 1 = Operator can abort the evaluation of the step response
31 Not used

The block has the following permissions for the OS1Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 1 = Operator can change the limit (overshoot) for high alarm
1 1 = Operator can change the limit (process value) for the high warning
2 Not used
3 1 = Operator may change a value for the CPI hysteresis.
4 Not used
5 1 = Operator can change the limit (control performance index CPI) for the low warning
6 1 = Operator can change the limit (control performance index CPI) for the low alarm
7 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via CPI_WL_MsgEn
8 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via CPI_AL_MsgEn
9 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via OvsAH_MsgEn

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 593
Controller blocks
5.2 ConPerMon - Monitoring of the control performance of control loops

Bit Function
10 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via OvsWH_MsgEn
7 - 31 Not used

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Alarm delays with a time value for all limits


The block provides the standard function One time value for all limits (Page 209).
This function is used only for monitoring the control performance index CPI.

Limit operation and display in the faceplate


This block provides the standard function Limit operation and display in the faceplate
(Page 331).

Generating instance-specific messages


The block provides the standard function Generating instance-specific messages (Page 213)
without the time stamp function in the I/O.

Suppressing messages using the MsgLock parameter


This block provides the standard function Suppressing messages using the MsgLock
parameter (Page 214).

Opening additional faceplates


This block provides the standard function Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


This block provides the standard function SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

See also
Description of ConPerMon (Page 579)
ConPerMon messaging (Page 595)
ConPerMon I/Os (Page 597)
ConPerMon block diagram (Page 603)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


594 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.2 ConPerMon - Monitoring of the control performance of control loops

ConPerMon error handling (Page 595)


ConPerMon modes (Page 583)

5.2.4 ConPerMon error handling

Error handling of ConPerMon


Refer to the section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions for the error handling
of all blocks.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum I/O can be used to output the following error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; the block is not processed.
0 There is no error.
2 SampleTime < 0.001
10 TimeWindow < 20 · SampleTime

See also
ConPerMon block diagram (Page 603)
ConPerMon I/Os (Page 597)
ConPerMon messaging (Page 595)
ConPerMon functions (Page 583)
ConPerMon modes (Page 583)
Description of ConPerMon (Page 579)

5.2.5 ConPerMon messaging

Messaging
If the control performance falls below a defined limit a message is generated. This is also the
case when a defined limit for overshoot is exceeded when there is a step change in the
setpoint.
If the CPI temporarily falls below the configured warning and alarm limits, it is not necessary
to trigger an alarm immediately. The main aim of the control loop monitoring is to signal the

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 595
Controller blocks
5.2 ConPerMon - Monitoring of the control performance of control loops

need for maintenance or optimization measures in individual control loops. With the alarm
delay, you can make sure that an alarm is triggered only after the cause exists for longer than
a configured period AlmDelay.
The following messages can be generated for this block:
● Process messages
● Instance-specific messages

Process messages

Message in‐ Message identi‐ Message class Event


stance fier
MsgEvID SIG 1 Alarm - high $$BlockComment$$
Overshoot - high alarm limit violated
SIG 2 Warning - high $$BlockComment$$
Overshoot - high warning limit viola‐
ted
SIG 3 Warning - low $$BlockComment$$
CPI - low warning limit violated
SIG 4 Alarm - low $$BlockComment$$
CPI - low alarm limit violated

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment

Instance-specific messages
You can use up to three instance-specific messages with this block.

Message in‐ Message identi‐ Message class Event


stance fier
MsgEvID SIG 5 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External message 1
Status 16#@5%x@
SIG 6 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External message 2
Status 16#@6%x@
SIG 7 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External message 3
Status 16#@7%x@

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


596 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.2 ConPerMon - Monitoring of the control performance of control loops

Associated values for message instance MsgEvID

Associated value Block parameters


1 BatchName
2 StepNo
3 BatchID
4 CPI(control performance index)
5 ExtMsg1.ST
6 ExtMsg2.ST
7 ExtMsg3.ST
8 ExtVa108
9 ExtVa109
10 Reserved

The associated values 8 ... 9 are allocated to the parameters ExtVa108 ... ExtVa109 and
can be used. Additional information is available in the "Process Control System PCS 7 -
Engineering System" manual.

See also
Description of ConPerMon (Page 579)
ConPerMon functions (Page 583)
ConPerMon I/Os (Page 597)
ConPerMon block diagram (Page 603)
ConPerMon error handling (Page 595)
ConPerMon modes (Page 583)

5.2.6 ConPerMon I/Os


I/Os of ConPerMon

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AlmDelay Alarm delay time [s] for monitoring the REAL 0.0
control performance index CPI
0 = Alarm delay deactivated
BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation for batch control BOOL 0
BatchID Current batch ID DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Current batch designation S7-String
BreakSuppress 1 = Manually cancel suppression of the BOOL 0
control performance alarm during a step
response

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 597
Controller blocks
5.2 ConPerMon - Monitoring of the control performance of control loops

Parameter Description Type Default


CPI_AlmHyst Alarm hysteresis of the control perform‐ REAL 5.0
ance index [%]
CPI_AL_En 1 = Activate alarm (low) for monitoring of BOOL 1
control performance
CPI_AL_Lim Low alarm limit for control performance REAL 30.0
[%]
CPI_FiltFactor Low pass filter for CPI, filter time con‐ REAL 10.0
stant = TimeWindow ·
CPI_FiltFactor
CPI_WL_En 1 = Activate warning (low) for monitoring BOOL 1
of control performance
CPI_WL_Lim Low warning limit for control perform‐ REAL 50.0
ance [%]
CPI_AL_MsgEn 1 = Activate alarm message for: BOOL 0
Low limit for control performance
CPI_WL_MsgEn 1 = Activate warning message for: BOOL 0
Low limit for control performance
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1
ExtMsg1 Binary input for freely selectable mes‐ STRUCT -
sage 1 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg2 Binary input for freely selectable mes‐ STRUCT -
sage 2 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg3 Binary input for freely selectable mes‐ STRUCT -
sage 3 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtVa108 Associated value 8 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID)
ExtVa109 Associated value 9 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID)
Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 583) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
InitRefVar 1 = Initialization of the block. BOOL 0
The benchmark of the controlled varia‐
ble variance and the reference values of
the controlled variable and manipulated
variable are measured in the steady
state.
LoopClosed 1 = Control loop is closed STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


598 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.2 ConPerMon - Monitoring of the control performance of control loops

Parameter Description Type Default


ManSupprCPI 1 = Manual suppression of the CPI cal‐ STRUCT -
culation and message, e.g. during ● Value: BOOL ● 0
known disturbances
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MsgEvID Message number (assigned automatical‐ DWORD 16#00000000
ly)
MsgLock 1 = Suppress process messages. STRUCT -
See also the section Suppressing mes‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
sages using the MsgLock parameter ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
(Page 214) for more on this.
MV_Mon Manipulated variable of the controller for STRUCT -
monitoring ● Value: REAL ● 1.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#78
MV_Ref Reference value of the manipulated var‐ REAL 0.0
iable
MV_Unit Unit of measure for manipulated variable INT 1342
Occupied 1 = Occupied by batch control BOOL 0
OnOp* 1 = "On" mode via operator BOOL 1
OosLi 1 = Edge transition (0-1) = "Out of serv‐ STRUCT -
ice", via interconnection or SFC ● Value: BOOL 0
● ST: BYTE 16#80
OosOp* 1 = "Out of service", via OS operator BOOL 0
OpSt_In Input parameter for local operator au‐ DWORD 16#00000000
thorization, connected with the Out out‐
put parameter of the upstream block,
OpStations (Page 423)
OS_Perm I/O for operator permissions (Page 583) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● ... ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
OS1Perm I/O for operator permissions (Page 583) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● ... ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
OvsAH_En 1 = Activate alarm (high) for overshoot BOOL 1
OvsAH_Lim Overshoot alarm limit [%] REAL 25.0
OvsAH_MsgEn 1 = Enable alarm message for overshoot BOOL 0
OvsWH_En 1 = Activate warning (high) for overshoot BOOL 1
OvsWH_Lim Overshoot warning limit [%] REAL 20.0
OvsWH_MsgEn 1 = Enable warning message for over‐ BOOL 0
shoot
PV_Mon Controlled variable for monitoring STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 599
Controller blocks
5.2 ConPerMon - Monitoring of the control performance of control loops

Parameter Description Type Default


PV_Ref Reference value for controlled variable REAL 0.0
PV_Unit Unit of measure for process value INT 1001
RefVarExt Reference value for PV_Variance in REAL 0.0
control loop "good" status
ReVaExOn 1 = Use the external reference value of BOOL 0
RefVarExt
RefVariance Variance of controlled variable in control REAL 100.0
loop "good" status
RunUpCyc Number of start cycles in which messag‐ INT 32000
es are suppressed
SampleTime Sampling time [s] (assigned automatical‐ REAL 0.1
ly)
SelFp1 1 = Call a block saved in this parameter ANY -
as an additional faceplate (Page 217) in
the standard view
SelFp2 1 = Call a block saved in this parameter ANY -
as an additional faceplate (Page 217) in
the preview
SettlingTimer Settling time for the adjustment of the STRUCT -
dead band ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_Mon Setpoint of the corresponding controller STRUCT -
for monitoring ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
StGainValid 0 = Output parameter StatGain sys‐ BOOL 1
tematically invalid, e.g. for multi-variable
processes
TimeWindow Width of the sliding time window [s] for REAL 120.0
statistical evaluations
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use in PCS 7 BYTE 16#00
OS

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


600 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.2 ConPerMon - Monitoring of the control performance of control loops

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


CPI Control performance index STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CPI_AL_Act 1 = Alarm due to control performance is STRUCT -
active. ● Value: BOOL ● 0
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐
olation (Page 174)).
CPI_Suppress 1 = Message for the control performance BOOL 1
index is suppressed; retain last valid
CPI value
CPI_SuRoot 1= CPI message suppression was trig‐ STRUCT -
gered in this control loop ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CPI_WL_Act 1 = Warning due to control performance STRUCT -
is active. ● Value: BOOL ● 0
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐
olation (Page 174)).
ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without BOOL 0
errors
ER_Mean Mean value of the error signal in the time STRUCT -
window [PV_Unit] ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ErrorNum Output of pending error number. For er‐ INT -1
ror numbers that can be output by this
block, see ConPerMon error handling
(Page 595)
MsgAckn Message acknowledgment status (out‐ WORD 16#0000
put ACK_STATE of ALARM_8P)
MsgErr 1 = Message error (output ERROR of BOOL 0
ALARM_8P)
MsgStatus Message status (output STATUS of WORD 16#0000
ALARM_8P)
MV_Mean Mean value of the manipulated variable STRUCT -
in the time window [MV_Unit] ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
O_MS_Ext Reserved DWORD 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 601
Controller blocks
5.2 ConPerMon - Monitoring of the control performance of control loops

Parameter Description Type Default


OnAct 1 = "On" mode enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosAct 1 = Block is "Out of service" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpSt_Out Value of the OpSt_In input parameter, DWORD 16#00000000
for feedforwarding to other blocks. Bit 31
of this parameter is used by
Feature.Bit24
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with settings DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
changed by the block algorithm
OS1PermOut Display of OS1Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS1PermLog Display of OS1Perm with settings DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
changed by the block algorithm
OverAbso Absolute overshoot of the step response STRUCT -
[PV_Unit] ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Overshoot Relative overshoot of the step response STRUCT -
with respect to the step change height ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
[%]
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OvsAH_Act 1 = Alarm due to overshoot is active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐
olation (Page 174)).
OvsWH_Act 1 = Warning due to overshoot is active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐
olation (Page 174)).
PV_Mean Mean value of the controlled variable in STRUCT -
the time window [PV_Unit] ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
PV_StdDev Standard deviation of the controlled var‐ STRUCT -
iable ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
PV_ToleHi Limit (high) of the 3σ band around the REAL 0.0
setpoint
PV_ToleLo Limit (low) of the 3σ band around the REAL 0.0
setpoint

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


602 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.2 ConPerMon - Monitoring of the control performance of control loops

Parameter Description Type Default


PV_Variance Variance of the controlled variable STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
PV_VarMin Minimum observed value of the process REAL 10000.0
variance (slave pointer)
RefStdDev Standard deviation of controlled variable STRUCT -
in control loop "good" status ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RiseTime Rise time of the step response [s] REAL 0.0
SettliDeadBand Settling time for the adjustment of the STRUCT -
dead band ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SettlRatio Ratio = Rise time/settling time · 100% REAL 0.0
SettliTime Settling time of the step response [s] REAL 0.0
StatGain Steady-state process gain [PV_Unit / STRUCT -
MV_Unit] ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
Status1 Status word 1 (Page 579) DWORD 16#00000000
Status2 Status word 2 (Page 579) DWORD 16#00000000
StepPhase Phase of the step response: INT 0
0 = Waiting
1 = Rising
2 = Overshoot
3 = Settled

See also
ConPerMon messaging (Page 595)
ConPerMon block diagram (Page 603)
ConPerMon modes (Page 583)

5.2.7 ConPerMon block diagram

ConPerMon block diagram


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 603
Controller blocks
5.2 ConPerMon - Monitoring of the control performance of control loops

See also
ConPerMon I/Os (Page 597)
ConPerMon messaging (Page 595)
ConPerMon error handling (Page 595)
ConPerMon functions (Page 583)
ConPerMon modes (Page 583)
Description of ConPerMon (Page 579)

5.2.8 Operator control and monitoring

5.2.8.1 ConPerMon views

Views of the ConPerMon block


The block ConPerMon provides the following views:
● ConPerMon standard view (Page 605)
● Alarm view (Page 313)
● ConPerMon limit view (Page 606)
● Trend view (Page 317)
● ConPerMon parameter view (Page 608)
● ConPerMon preview (Page 609)
● Memo view (Page 315)
● Batch view (Page 313)
● ConPerMon setpoint view (Page 610)
● Block icon for ConPerMon (Page 611)
Refer to the sections Structure of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure
(Page 239) for general information on the faceplate and block icon.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


604 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.2 ConPerMon - Monitoring of the control performance of control loops

5.2.8.2 ConPerMon standard view

ConPerMon standard view










(1) Displaying and switching the operating mode


This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
● On (Page 72)
● Out of service (Page 72)
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for information
on switching the operating mode.

(2) Display area for control performance


This area shows the current control performance index.

(3) Display area for the overshoot


This area shows you the relative overshoot based on a step change [%].

(4) Display area for the static evaluation of the current time window (TimeWindow)
This area shows you the statistical evaluation of the current time window. The following values
are evaluated:
● "PV standard dev.": Standard deviation of the controlled variable
● "ER mean value": Mean value of the control deviation
● "MV mean value": Mean value of the manipulated variable
● "Steady state gain": Steady-state process gain

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 605
Controller blocks
5.2 ConPerMon - Monitoring of the control performance of control loops

(5) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
Use this navigation button to reach the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system. The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the engineering
system (ES).
See also the Opening additional faceplates (Page 217) section for more on this.

(6) Display for CPI valid / CPI invalid


This area shows you if the control performance index is valid or invalid:
● "CPI invalid": Control performance is invalid
You set the limits for the control performance index in the limits views, depending on the
configuration in the engineering system (ES).

(7) Limit display


These colored triangles show you the configured limits in the respective bar graph.

(8) Bar graph for control performance index


This area shows you the current CPI control performance index in the form of a bar graph. The
visible area in the bar graph depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).

5.2.8.3 ConPerMon limit view

Limit view of ConPerMon

  

(1) CPI limits


In this area, you can enter the limits for the CPI control performance index. Refer to the
Changing values (Page 270) section for more on this.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


606 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.2 ConPerMon - Monitoring of the control performance of control loops

You can change the following limits:


● "Hysteresis"
● "L warning": Warning low
● "L alarm": Alarm low

(2) Overshoot limits


In this area, you can enter the limits for the overshoot. Refer to the Changing values
(Page 270) section for more on this.
You can change the following limits:
● "H warning": Warning high
● "H alarm": Alarm high

(3) Enabled operation


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Icons for enabled operation:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)

(4) "Message suppression/delay"


Message suppression indicates whether or not the suppression of the associated message in
the AS block is activated with the xx_MsgEn parameter. The output of messages is not
suppressed when the block is installed (all xx_MsgEn parameters are preset to 1). Messages
can only be output if limit monitoring of the additional analog value has been enabled.
Alarm delays are also displayed in this position; for more on this see section Area of application
of the alarm delays (Page 208).

(5) Suppress messages


You can enable / disable messages by setting the check mark.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 607
Controller blocks
5.2 ConPerMon - Monitoring of the control performance of control loops

5.2.8.4 ConPerMon parameter view

Parameter view of ConPerMon

(1) Parameter
In this area, you change parameters and therefore influence the controller. Refer to the
Changing values (Page 270) section for more on this.
You can influence the following parameters:
● "Time window": Set the time window here, in which the statical evaluation for the following
values is to be performed:
– Standard deviation of the controlled variable
– Mean value of the control deviation
– Mean value of the manipulated variable
– Steady-state process gain
● "PV reference": Reference value for controlled variable
● "MV reference": Reference value of the manipulated variable

(2) Initialize button


Clicking this button initializes the block. The benchmark of the controlled variable variance and
the reference values of the controlled variable and manipulated variable are measured in the
steady state.

(3) Enabled operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator control permissions are assigned.
They depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


608 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.2 ConPerMon - Monitoring of the control performance of control loops

Symbols for enabled operations:


● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
control permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)

5.2.8.5 ConPerMon preview

Preview of ConPerMon

(1) Enabled operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator control permissions are assigned.
They depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Symbols for enabled operations:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
control permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)
The following enabled operations are shown here:
● "On": You can switch to "On" operating mode.
● "Out of service": You can switch to "Out of service" operating mode.
● "Local operating permission": Use the ← button to switch to the standard view of the
OpStations block. You can find more information about this in the section titled: Operator
control permissions (Page 265)

(2) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
Use this navigation button to reach the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system. The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the engineering
system (ES).
Additional information is available in the section Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 609
Controller blocks
5.2 ConPerMon - Monitoring of the control performance of control loops

5.2.8.6 ConPerMon setpoint view

Setpoint view of ConPerMon

 6WHSHYDOXDWLRQ $EVROXWHRYHUVKRRW  r& 

 2YHUVKRRW   

 6HWWOLQJWLPH  V 

6HWWOLQJUDWLR   


 'RQH &DQFHOHYDOXDWLRQ 

(1) Absolute overshoot


The absolute overshoot is given in the physical unit of the actual value.

(2) Overshoot
Output of the relative overshoot base on a step change.

(3) Settling time


Settling time of the step response in seconds.

(4) Settling time ratio


The settling time ratio is formed from the ramp time by the settling time.

(5) Cancel evaluation button


You can use the button to show the evaluation of the step response.

Note
The "Cancel evaluation" button is operable when all of the following conditions are met:
● Operator permission level = 2 (Higher-level process control)
● Parameter OS_Perm.Bit30 = 1 (Operator can abort the evaluation of the step response)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


610 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.2 ConPerMon - Monitoring of the control performance of control loops

(6), (7), (8), (9) and (10): Status of the step response
The following states are shown here:
● (6) Textual display of the states
● (7) "Idle": steady state
● (8) "Steady-state": i.e. the actual value is located within the tolerance band of the setpoint
● (9) "Rising phase": from the initial state to the first time the setpoint is reached
● (10) "Overshoot"

(11) Display: Evaluation of the step response in progress:


● "Step evaluation"
● "Constant PV"

See also
ConPerMon standard view (Page 605)
ConPerMon limit view (Page 606)
ConPerMon parameter view (Page 608)

5.2.8.7 Block icon for ConPerMon

Block icons for ConPerMon


A variety of block icons are available with the following functions:
● Process tag type
● Limits (high/low)
● Violation of alarm, warning, and tolerance limits
● Operating modes
● Signal status, release for maintenance
● Memo display
● Process value (black, with and without decimal places)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 611
Controller blocks
5.2 ConPerMon - Monitoring of the control performance of control loops

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV8.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special features


1

3 Block icon in the full display

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV7.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special features


1 Block icon in the full display

- Block icon in "Out of service"


mode (example with type 1 block
icon)

Additional information on the block icon and the control options in the block icon is available
in the following chapters:
● Configuring the block icons (Page 246)
● Block icon structure (Page 239)
● Operation via the block icon (Page 248)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


612 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.3 FmCont - Interface to module FM 355

5.3 FmCont - Interface to module FM 355

5.3.1 Description of FmCont

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1818
Family: Control

Area of application for FmCont


The block is used for the following applications:
● Fixed setpoint control
● Cascade control
● Ratio control
● Split-range control

How it works
Block FmCont is used to interface the FM 355 controller modules.
FmCont can be used for the C (continuous controllers) and S (step and pulse controllers)
module types. It contains the algorithms of the setpoint ramp, the setpoint rise limitation, and
the limit monitoring of the process value, the control deviation, and the position feedback. Limit
monitoring is not used on the module. The control function itself (e.g. PID algorithm) is
processed on the module.
You can use the FmCont block to monitor all relevant process values and to change all relevant
controller parameters.
Application examples of the FM 355 and detailed descriptions of the associated input and
output parameters can be found in the manual for the FM 355. controller module.
Process values such as temperatures, levels and flows can be controlled. However, pressure
processes which are not excessively fast are also possible.

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38). The block is
also installed automatically in the startup OB (OB100). Set the input parameter LogAddr to
the module address from HW Config and the input parameter Channel to the desired controller
channel (1 ... 4).
When the CFC function "Generate module drivers" is used, the following occurs automatically:
● The parameter CoordNo is set
● The in/out parameter Mode is interconnected to the corresponding OMODE_xx output
parameter of the MOD block.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 613
Controller blocks
5.3 FmCont - Interface to module FM 355

● The parameter FM 355 is set in accordance with the module type C/S
● The in/out parameter EnCoord is interconnected to the output EN_CO_x of the FM_CO
block of the Basis Library (x = number of the rack)
● The output parameter EnCoNum is interconnected to the input ENCOx_yy of the FmCont
block (x = number of the rack, yy = coordination number).
For the control loop monitoring to work as planned in the trend view of the controller faceplates,
the
S7_xarchive:='Value,shortterm;'
attributes in the process tag types for control loops at the controller function block must be set
for the following tags:
● Input parameters:
– CPI_In
● Output parameters
– MV
– MV_HiAct
– MV_LoAct
– LoopClosed
– SP
– PV_Out
– PV_ToleHi
– PV_ToleLo

Startup characteristics
Use the Feature startup characteristics (Page 141) to define the startup characteristics of
this block.
The messages are suppressed after startup for the number of cycles set at RunUpCyc.

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


For a description of the individual parameters, see the section I/Os of FmCont (Page 634)

Status bit Parameter


0 Occupied
1 BatchEn
2 SimOn
3 OosAct.Value
4 OosLi.Value
5 AutAct.Value
6 Invalid signal status
7 ManAct.Value

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


614 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.3 FmCont - Interface to module FM 355

Status bit Parameter


8 SP_ExtAct.Value
9 MV_SafeOn.Value AND NOT OosAct.Value
10 MV_TrkOn.Value AND NOT (ManAct.Value OR OosAct.Value OR
MV_SafeAct.Value)
11 MV.Value > ManLoLim for continuous or pulse controller
NOT FbkClosed.Value for step controller with/without position feedback
12 Open.Value
13 Close.Value
14 Stop.Value
15 FbkOpnOut.Value
16 FbkClsOut.Value
17 SimOn AND ManAct
18 MV_SafeOn.Value
19 AdvCoAct.Value
20 1 = Input parameter Rbk is not interconnected (RbkOut.ST = 16#FF)
21 NegGain.Value
22 MV_FmTrkAct.Value AND NOT (OosAct.Value OR MV_SafeAct.Value)
23 - 24 Not used
25 MV_TrkOn.Value
26 MV_FmTrkOn.Value
27 AdvCoModSP
28 1 = Analog controller (FM 355 = 1)
29 1 = Pulse controller (FM 355 = 0 AND StepCon = 0)
30 1 = Step controller with position feedback
(FM 355 = 0 AND StepCon = 1 AND WithRbk = 1)
31 1=Step controller without position feedback
(FM 355 = 0 AND StepCon = 1 AND WithRbk = 0)

Status word allocation for Status2 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 MsgLock
1 PV_AH_Act.Value
2 PV_WH_Act.Value
3 PV_TH_Act.Value
4 PV_TL_Act.Value
5 PV_WL_Act.Value
6 PV_AL_Act.Value
7 PV_AH_En OR Feature.Bit31
8 PV_WH_En OR Feature.Bit31
9 PV_TH_En OR Feature.Bit31
10 PV_TL_En OR Feature.Bit31
11 PV_WL_En OR Feature.Bit31

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 615
Controller blocks
5.3 FmCont - Interface to module FM 355

Status bit Parameter


12 PV_AL_En OR Feature.Bit31
13 PV_AH_MsgEn
14 PV_WH_MsgEn
15 PV_TH_MsgEn
16 PV_TL_MsgEn
17 PV_WL_MsgEn
18 PV_AL_MsgEn
19 ER_AH_Act.Value
20 ER_AL_Act.Value
21 ER_AH_En OR Feature.Bit31
22 ER_AL_En OR Feature.Bit31
23 ER_AH_MsgEn
24 ER_AL_MsgEn
25 RbkWH_Act.Value
26 RbkWL_Act.Value
27 RbkWH_En OR Feature.Bit31
28 RbkWL_En OR Feature.Bit31
29 RbkWH_MsgEn
30 RbkWL_MsgEn
31 MS_RelOp

Status word allocation for Status3 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 Effective signal 1 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
1 Effective signal 2 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
2 Effective signal 3 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
3 Effective signal 4 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
4 Effective signal 5 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
5 Effective signal 6 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
6 Effective signal 7 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
7 Effective signal 8 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
8 Delay of the PV_AH_Lim message
9 Delay of the PV_WH_Lim message
10 Delay of the PV_TH_Lim message
11 Delay of the PV_TL_Lim message
12 Delay of the PV_WL_Lim message
13 Delay of the PV_AL_Lim message
14 Delay of the ER_AH_Lim message
15 Delay of the ER_AL_Lim message
16 Collection of message delays
17 - 26 Not used

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


616 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.3 FmCont - Interface to module FM 355

Status bit Parameter


27 SP_UpRaAct, SP_DnRaAct limits enabled for gradient mode (SP_RateOn = 1)
28 GrpErr.Value
29 RdyToStart.Value
30 SimLiOp.Value
31 Not used

Status word allocation for Status4 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0-7 Effective signal 9..16 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
8 - 31 Not used

See also
FmCont messaging (Page 631)
FmCont block diagram (Page 649)
FmCont modes (Page 617)
FmCont error handling (Page 629)
FmCont functions (Page 619)

5.3.2 FmCont modes

FmCont operating modes


The block can be operated using the following modes:
● Automatic mode (Page 73)
● Manual mode (Page 73)
● Program mode for controllers (Page 79)
● Out of service (Page 72)
The next section provides additional block-specific information relating to the general
descriptions.

"Automatic mode"
You can find general information on "Automatic mode", switching modes and bumpless
switchover in the Manual and automatic mode for control blocks (Page 73) section.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 617
Controller blocks
5.3 FmCont - Interface to module FM 355

"Manual mode"
You can find general information on "Manual mode", switching modes and bumpless
switchover in the Manual and automatic mode for control blocks (Page 73) section.

"Program mode for controllers"


General information on "Program mode for controllers" is available in the section Program
mode for controllers (Page 79).

"Out of service"
You can find general information about the "Out of service" mode in the section Out of
service (Page 72).
With Feature.Bit5 =1 the following output parameter become the status of simulation
16#60, if mode is changed to "Out of service".
With Feature.Bit5 =0 the following output parameter become the status of 16#80, if mode
is changed to "Out of service".
● RbkOut.ST
● RbkWH_Act.ST
● RbkWL_Act.ST
● FbkOpnOut.ST
● FbkClsOut.ST
● SP_ExtAct.ST
● SP.ST
● SP_ExtOut.ST
● PV.ST
● PV_Out.ST
● PV_AH_Act.ST
● PV_WH_Act.ST
● PV_TH_Act.ST
● PV_TL_Act.ST
● PV_WL_Act.ST
● PV_AL_Act.ST
● PV_ToleHi.ST
● PV_ToleLo.ST
● ER.ST
● ER_AH_Act.ST
● ER_AL_Act.ST

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


618 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.3 FmCont - Interface to module FM 355

See also
FmCont block diagram (Page 649)
FmCont I/Os (Page 634)
Description of FmCont (Page 613)
FmCont functions (Page 619)
FmCont error handling (Page 629)
FmCont messaging (Page 631)

5.3.3 FmCont functions

Functions of FmCont
The functions for this block are listed below.

Module types
FmCont can be used for the C (continuous controllers) and S (step controllers with and without
position feedback and pulse controllers) module types. You can use the following parameters
to identify which module type and controller type has been set:

FM 355 StepCon WithRbk Module type, controller type


1 or C - - FM 355 C: Continuous controller
0 or S 1 1 FM 355 S: Step controller with position feedback
0 or S 1 0 FM 355 S: Step controller without position feedback
0 or S 0 - FM 355 S: Pulse controller

You must set input parameter StepCon if you want to set the step controller with/without
position feedback as the controller type.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 619
Controller blocks
5.3 FmCont - Interface to module FM 355

Generating manipulated variables for continuous controllers, step controllers with position feedback, or
pulse controllers
The manipulated variable MV and the actuating signals Open, Close and Stop are generated
as follows

MV_Safe‐ MV_FmTrk ManAct MV_TrkOn AdvCoAct MV = Manipu‐ State Open,


On On AND NOT lated varia‐ Close, Stop
AdvCo‐ ble limit
ModSP
1 - - - - MV_Safe MV_HiLim Tracking to Cont. con‐
MV_LoLim safety value troller:
Open,
0 1 - - - Prepared MV_HiLim Tracking to
Close,
FM analog an FM ana‐
MV_LoLim Stop = 0
input log input
Step con‐
0 0 1 - - Man ManHiLim Manual troller with
ManLoLim mode, set position
by the oper‐ feedback:
ator
Depending
0 0 0 1 - MV_Trk MV_HiLim Tracking to on Rbk and
MV_LoLim block input MV, the out‐
MV_Trk put signals
0 0 0 0 1 AdvCoMV MV_HiLim Higher-lev‐ Open,
MV_LoLim el program Close and
mode Stop are
0 0 0 0 0 P_Part + MV_HiLim Automatic generated
I_Part + MV_LoLim mode (PID using the al‐
D_Part + algorithm) gorithm of a
FFwd positioner.
Pulse con‐
troller: De‐
pending on
MV, the out‐
put signals
Open and
Close are
generated
using the al‐
gorithm of a
pulse con‐
troller
(Stop = 0).

Generating actuating signals for step controllers without position feedback (WithRbk = 0)
The manipulated variable signals Open, Close and Stop can be generated as follows:

ManAct Open, Close, Stop State


1 The output signals are generated using input signals OpenOp/ Manual mode, set by the operator
Li, CloseOp/Li or StopOp/Li
0 The output signals are generated using PID output variables Automatic mode (PID algorithm)
P_Part, I_Part, D_Part and FFwd

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


620 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.3 FmCont - Interface to module FM 355

Tracking and limiting a manipulated variable (cont. controller, step controller with position feedback and
pulse controller)
The block provides the standard function Tracking and limiting a manipulated variable
(Page 205).

Neutral position
The controller modules have their own mechanism for feedforwarding a safety value (see
manual for Temperature Controller FM 355-2 or manual for Controller Module FM 355).

Group error
This block provides the standard function Outputting group errors (Page 124).
The following parameters are taken into consideration when forming the group error:
● CSF
● ModErr
● ParFM_Err
● PerACCErr

Outputting a signal for start readiness


This block provides the standard function Outputting a signal for start readiness (Page 54).

"Actuator active" information


For continuous and pulse controllers: If the manipulated variable MV is greater than the
minimum manual limit ManLoLim, this is recognized as actuator active.
For step controllers: If the parameter FbkClosed = 0 , this is recognized as "Actuator active".
This status can be used to indicate a customized symbol in the process image, for example,
and is saved in the status word (see Status word section in Description of FmCont
(Page 613)).

Limit monitoring of position feedback (cont. controller, step controller with position feedback and pulse
controller)
The block provides the standard function Limit monitoring of the feedback (Page 95).

Group display SumMsgAct for limit monitoring, CSF and ExtMsgx


The block provides the standard function Group display for limit monitoring, CSF and
ExtMsgx (Page 86).

External/internal setpoint specification


The block provides the standard function Setpoint specification - internal/external (Page 130).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 621
Controller blocks
5.3 FmCont - Interface to module FM 355

Setpoint limiting for external setpoints


The block provides the standard function Setpoint limiting for external setpoints (Page 205).

Gradient limit of the setpoint


The block provides the standard function Gradient limit of the setpoint (Page 126).

Using setpoint ramp


The block provides the standard function Using setpoint ramp (Page 125).

Tracking setpoint in manual mode


The block provides the standard function Tracking setpoint in manual mode (Page 205).

Simulating signals
The block provides the standard function Simulating signals (Page 59).
You can simulate the following values:
● Process value (SimPV, SimPV_Li)
● Position feedback (SimRbk, SimRbkLi)
Note
The simulated process value SimPV only affects alarm processing and not the PID
algorithm in the control module.

Limit monitoring of the process value


The block provides the standard function Limit monitoring of the process value (Page 87).

Error signal generation and dead band


The block provides the standard function Error signal generation and dead band (Page 201).

Limit monitoring of error signal


The block provides the standard function Limit monitoring of setpoint, manipulated variable
and control deviation (Page 96).

Inverting control direction


The block provides the standard function Inverting control direction (Page 200).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


622 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.3 FmCont - Interface to module FM 355

Physical standardization of setpoint, manipulated variable and process value


Controller gain Gain is entered either using a physical variable or as standardized value.
● Gain as a physical variable:
The standardized variables retain their default values:
– NormPV.High = 100 and NormPV.Low = 0
– NormMV.High = 100 and NormMV.Low = 0
For step controllers with/without position feedback and pulse controllers, the values of
NormMV.High and NormMV.Low are not taken into account. The algorithm uses default
values 0 and 100 for internal calculations.
The effective gain is: GainEff = Gain
● Entering a standardized Gain (dimensionless):
Change the standardized variables to the actual range of the process values and
manipulated variables.
– Internal and external setpoints; the process value and corresponding parameters are
entered according to the physical measuring range of the process value.
Continuous controller, pulse controller:
– The manual value, the tracking value of the manipulated variable, feedforward control
and the corresponding parameters are set according to the physical measuring range
of the manipulated variable.
Step controller with position feedback:
– The manual parameter, the tracking value of the manipulated variable, feedforward
control and the corresponding parameters are entered as a percentage 0 ... 100.
Step controller without position feedback:
– No physical measuring range available.
The effective gain is:
– Step controller with/without position feedback:
GainEff = 100.0 / (NormPV.High - NormPV.Low) · Gain
– Continuous controller, pulse controller:
GainEff = (NormMV.High - NormMV.Low) / (NormPV.High - NormPV.Low) · Gain

Selecting a unit of measure


The block provides the standard function Selecting a unit of measure (Page 221).

PID algorithm
The manipulated variable is generated in automatic mode according to the following algorithm:
MV = GainEff · (1 + 1 / (TI · s) + (TD · s) / (1 + TD / DiffGain · s)) · ER
Where: s = Complex number
The following step response occurs:

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 623
Controller blocks
5.3 FmCont - Interface to module FM 355

09
09B+L/LP

*DLQ(II 7'
7LPH/DJ6DPSOH7LPH
*DLQ(II
(5 W *DLQ(II
*DLQ(II

W
7,

09B/R/LP

,QSXWVWHS(5 W  ` LIW
LIW!

Note
This formula describes a standard application where the P, I and D components are activated
and the P and D components are not in the feedback circuit (PropSel = 1, TI ≠ 0, D_InSel
= 0 and P_FbkSel = 0).

The D component delay is derived from TD / DiffGain.


● The P component can be shut down by PropSel = 0 .
● The I component can be shut down by TI = 0 .
● The D component can be shut down by TD = 0 .

Structure segmentation at controllers


The PID controller algorithm of FM 355 features structure segmentation. It is activated via the
P_FbkSel and D_InSel parameters. The precise functionality is described in the FM 355
manual.

Anti-windup
The PID control algorithm of FM 355 has an anti-windup function. The I component is frozen
or tracked after the manipulated variable has reached its limits (MV_HiLim or MV_LoLim).

Feedforwarding and limiting disturbance variables


The block provides a function for activating the disturbance variable feedforward. The precise
functionality is described in the FM 355 manual.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


624 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.3 FmCont - Interface to module FM 355

Forming the signal status for blocks


The block provides the standard function Forming and outputting the signal status for
technologic blocks (Page 110).
● Signal status for the setpoint value SP:
The signal status of the SP output parameter is always equivalent to the signal status of
input parameter SP_Ext or SP_Int, depending on how the setpoint is specified. If the
internal setpoint SP_Int is used, the signal status is always output as 16#80.
● Signal status for PV_Out, RbkOut, Open, Close, Stop:
The signal status is always 16#60 when simulation is activated.
When the ModErr.Value, ChFM_Err, ParFM_Err module error occurs, the signal
status of PV_Out is always 16#0. RbkOut is always 16#0 for step controllers with position
feedback
Otherwise, the following applies:
PV_Out.ST: 16#80
Step controller: RbkOut.ST: = 16#80
Continuous controller or pulse controller: RbkOut.ST: = Rbk.ST
Open.ST := 16#80;
Close.ST := 16#80;
Stop.ST := 16#80;
● Signal status of the error signal ER:
The signal status of output parameter ER is obtained from the worst signal status of the two
output parameters PV_Out and SP and is output. The signal status 16#60 (external
simulation) is suppressed because the block acts as a sink with external simulation.
Signal status for FbkOpnOut, FbkClsOut:
FbkOpnOut.ST := FbkOpened.ST;
FbkClsOut.ST := FbkClosed.ST;
● Signal status for the manipulated variable MV:
The status signal from the output parameter MV is always set to 16#80 in "manual mode"
and for step controllers without position feedback.
In "automatic mode", the signal status for continuous controllers or pulse controllers is
formed from the following parameters:
RbkOut.STFFwdOut.STER.STWith step controllers, the
FbkOpnOut.STFbkClsOut.STparameters are also included. The signal status 16#60
(external simulation) is suppressed because the block acts as a sink with external
simulation.
● Worst signal status:
The worst signal status ST_Worst for the block is formed from:
– PV_Out.ST;
– SP:ST;
– FFwdOut.ST;
– RbkOut.ST;
With step controllers (FM355 = 0, StepCon = 1), the following are also included:
– FbkOpnOut.ST;
– FbkClsOut.ST;

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 625
Controller blocks
5.3 FmCont - Interface to module FM 355

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133) . The following functionality is
available for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
0 Set startup characteristics (Page 141)
1 Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 181)
2 Resetting the commands for changing the mode (Page 165)
4 Setting switch or button mode (Page 170)
5 Changes signal status of outputs in OOS (Page 198)
6 Ramp rate calculation (Page 183)
10 Condition monitoring information at the channel blocks (Page 148)
22 Update acknowledgment and error status of the message call (Page 163)
23 SP following PV in open loop has no priority over SP_Ext and SP limits (Page 183)
24 Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162)
25 Suppression of all messages (Page 178)
26 Reaction of the switching points in the "Out of service" operating mode (Page 180)
28 Disabling operating points (Page 149)
29 Signaling limit violation (Page 174)
31 Limits disabled in faceplate (Page 195)

Configurable reactions using the Feature2 parameter

Bit Function
11 Suppress MsgLock and “Out of service” mode for a connected message block (Page 192)

Operator permissions
The block provides the standard function Operator control permissions (Page 265).
The block has the following permissions for the OS_Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 1 = Operator can switch to "automatic mode" AutModOp
1 1 = Operator can switch to "manual mode" ManModOp
2 1 = Operator can switch to "Out of service" mode OosOp
3 1 = Operator can switch to "program mode" AdvCoEn
4 1 = Operator can switch the setpoint to "external" SP_ExtOp
5 1 = Operator can switch the setpoint to "internal" SP_IntOp
6 1 = Operator can change the internal setpoint SP_Int
7 Continuous controllers, pulse controllers or step controllers with position feedback:
1 = Operator can change the manual parameter Man
Step controller without position feedback:
1 = Operator can change the manual operation signals OpenOp, StopOp, CloseOp

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


626 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.3 FmCont - Interface to module FM 355

Bit Function
8 1 = Operator can change operation high limit of the setpoint SP_InHiLim
9 1 = Operator can change operation low limit of the setpoint SP_InLoLim
10 1 = Operator can change the operation high limit of the manipulated variable ManHiLim
11 1 = Operator can change the operation low limit of the manipulated variable ManLoLim
12 1 = Operator can enable the setpoint's gradient limitation function SP_RateOn
13 1 = Operator can change the setpoint's high limit for the ramp SP_UpRaLim
14 1 = Operator can change the setpoint's low limit for the ramp SP_DnRaLim
15 1 = Operator can switch between the time value or the value for the ramp SP_RmpModTime
16 1 = Operator can change the ramp time SP_RmpTime
17 1 = Operator can change the target setpoint SP_RmpTarget for the setpoint ramp
18 1 = Operator can enable the setpoint ramp function SP_RmpOn
19 Not used
20 1 = Operator can enable the track setpoint in manual mode function SP_TrkPV
21 1 = Operator can enable the bumpless switchover from external to internal SP_TrkExt
22 1 = Operator can change the gain parameter Gain
23 1 = Operator can change the integral time parameter TI
24 1 = Operator can change the derivative time parameter TD
25 1 = Operator can change the derivative gain parameter DiffGain
26 1 = Operator can change the dead band parameter DeadBand
27 Not used
28 1 = Operator can change the integral time parameter MotorTime
29 1 = Operator can change the integral time parameter PulseTime
30 1 = Operator can change the integral time parameter BreakTime
31 Not used

The block has the following permissions for the OS1Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 1 = Operator can change the limit (process value) PV_AH_Lim for the high alarm
1 1 = Operator can change the limit (process value) PV_WH_Lim for the high warning
2 1 = Operator can change the limit (process value) PV_TH_Lim for the high tolerance
3 1 = Operator can change the hysteresis (process value) PV_Hyst
4 1 = Operator can change the limit (process value) PV_TL_Lim for the low tolerance
5 1 = Operator can change the limit (process value) PV_WL_Lim for the low warning
6 1 = Operator can change the limit (process value) PV_AL_Lim for the low alarm
7 1 = Operator can change the limit (error signal) ER_AH_Lim for the high alarm
8 1 = Operator can change the hysteresis (error signal) ER_Hyst
9 1 = Operator can change the limit (error signal) ER_AL_Lim for the low alarm
10 1 = Operator can change the limit (position feedback) RbkWH_Lim for the high warning
11 1 = Operator can change the hysteresis (position feedback) RbkHyst
12 1 = Operator can change the limit (position feedback) RbkWL_Lim for the low warning
13 1 = Operator can open the valve
14 1 = Operator can close the valve

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 627
Controller blocks
5.3 FmCont - Interface to module FM 355

Bit Function
15 1 = Operator can stop the valve
16 1 = Operator can activate the Simulation function SimOn
17 1 = Operator can activate the Release for maintenance function MS_RelOp
18 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_AH_MsgEn
19 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_WH_MsgEn
20 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_TH_MsgEn
21 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_TL_MsgEn
22 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_WL_MsgEn
23 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_AL_MsgEn
24 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via ER_AH_MsgEn
25 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via ER_AL_MsgEn
26 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via RbkWH_MsgEn
27 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via RbkWL_MsgEn
28 1 = Operator can change the simulation value SimPV
29 1 = Operator can change the simulation value SimRbk
30 - 31 Not used

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Release for maintenance


The block provides the standard function Release for maintenance (Page 65).

Generating instance-specific messages


The block provides the standard function Generating instance-specific messages (Page 213)
without the time stamp function in the I/O.

Suppressing messages using the MsgLock parameter


This block provides the standard function Suppressing messages using the MsgLock
parameter (Page 214).

Specifying the display area for process and setpoint values as well as operations
This block provides the standard function Display and operator input area for process values
and setpoints (Page 216).

Opening additional faceplates


This block provides the standard function Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


628 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.3 FmCont - Interface to module FM 355

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


This block provides the standard function SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

Button labels
This block provides the standard function Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218)
Instance-specific text can be configured for the following parameters:
● OpenOp
● StopOp
● CloseOp

Connection of the time-stamped messages from EventTs or Event16Ts


This block provides the standard function Connection of the time-stamped messages from
EventTs or Event16Ts (Page 216).

See also
FmCont messaging (Page 631)
FmCont I/Os (Page 634)
FmCont block diagram (Page 649)
FmCont modes (Page 617)
FmCont error handling (Page 629)
EventTs functions (Page 1698)

5.3.4 FmCont error handling

Error handling of FmCont


Refer to section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions for the error handling of all
blocks.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers
● Control system fault (CSF)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 629
Controller blocks
5.3 FmCont - Interface to module FM 355

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum I/O can be used to output various error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; the block is not executed
0 There is no error.
30 The value of PV can no longer be displayed in the REAL number field.
31 The value of SP_Ext can no longer be displayed in the REAL number field.
33 The value of MV_Trk can no longer be displayed in the REAL number field.
35 The value of Rbk can no longer be displayed in the REAL number field.
36 The value of MV can no longer be displayed in the REAL number field.
50 The controller cannot be switched to program mode, because program mode with
default setpoint (AdvCoModSP = 0) is not possible for step controllers without posi‐
tion feedback (WithRbk = 0).
51 AutModLi = 1 and ManModLi = 1
SP_LiOp = 1 and SP_IntLi = 1 and SP_ExtLi = 1
OpenLi = 1 and StopLi = 1
CloseLi = 1 and StopLi = 1
OpenLi = 1 and CloseLi = 1
59 = 1, "Gain is negative"
60 |TI| < SampleTime / 2
61 |TD| < SampleTime
62 DiffGain < 1 or DiffGain > 10
63 TD / DiffGain < SampleTime / 2
64 PropFacSP < 0 or PropFacSP > 1
66 NormPV_High = NormPV_Low
67 MotorTime < SampleTime
68 PulseTime < SampleTime
69 BreakTime < SampleTime
70 Channel < 1 or Channel > 4
71 (D_InSel < 0 or D_InSel > 4) and D_InSel ≠ 17

Control system fault (CSF)


An external signal can be activated via the CSF input. A control system fault is triggered if this
signal changes to 1. Refer to the Error handling (Page 121) section for more on this.

See also
FmCont block diagram (Page 649)
FmCont I/Os (Page 634)
Description of FmCont (Page 613)
FmCont modes (Page 617)
FmCont functions (Page 619)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


630 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.3 FmCont - Interface to module FM 355

FmCont messaging (Page 631)


Setting switch or button mode (Page 170)

5.3.5 FmCont messaging

Messaging
The following messages can be generated for this block:
● Process control fault
● Process messages
● Instance-specific messages

Process control fault


The following control system error messages can be output:

Message in‐ Message identi‐ Message class Event


stance fier
MsgEvId2 SIG 6 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External error has occurred

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment
You can interconnect an external fault (signal) to input parameter CSF. If it changes to CSF =
1, a process control fault is triggered (MsgEvId2, SIG 6).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 631
Controller blocks
5.3 FmCont - Interface to module FM 355

Process messages

Message in‐ Message identifier Message class Event


stance
MsgEvId1 SIG 1 Alarm - high $$BlockComment$$
PV - high alarm limit violated
SIG 2 Warning - high $$BlockComment$$
PV - high warning limit violated
SIG 3 Tolerance - high $$BlockComment$$
PV - high tolerance limit violated
SIG 4 Tolerance - low $$BlockComment$$
PV - low tolerance limit violated
SIG 5 Warning - low $$BlockComment$$
PV - low warning limit violated
SIG 6 Alarm - low $$BlockComment$$
PV - low alarm limit violated
SIG 7 Alarm - high $$BlockComment$$
ER - high alarm limit violated
SIG 8 Alarm - low $$BlockComment$$
ER - low alarm limit violated
MsgEvId2 SIG 7 Warning - high $$BlockComment$$
Rbk - high warning limit violated
SIG 8 Warning - low $$BlockComment$$
Rbk - low warning limit violated

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment

Instance-specific messages
You can use up to four instance-specific messages with this block.

Message in‐ Message identifier Message class Event


stance
MsgEvId2 SIG 1 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 1
Status 16#@5%x@
SIG 2 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 2
Status 16#@6%x@
SIG 3 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 3
Status 16#@7%x@
SIG 4 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 4
Status 16#@8%x@

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


632 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.3 FmCont - Interface to module FM 355

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId1

Associated value Block parameters


1 BatchName
2 StepNo
3 BatchID
4 Process value PV_Out
5 Control deviation ER
6 ExtVa106
7 ExtVa107
8 Not allocated
9 Not allocated
10 Not allocated

The associated values 6 ... 7 are allocated to the parameters ExtVa106 ... ExtVa107 and
can be used. Additional information is available in the "Process Control System PCS 7 -
Engineering System" manual.

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId2

Associated value Block parameters


1 BatchName
2 StepNo
3 BatchID
4 Position feedback RbkOut
5 Signal status ExtMsg1
6 Signal status ExtMsg2
7 Signal status ExtMsg3
8 Signal status ExtMsg4
9 ExtVa209
10 ExtVa210

The associated values 9 ... 10 are allocated to the parameters ExtVa209 ... ExtVa210 and
can be used. Additional information is available in the "Process Control System PCS 7 -
Engineering System" manual.

See also
FmCont block diagram (Page 649)
FmCont modes (Page 617)
FmCont error handling (Page 629)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 633
Controller blocks
5.3 FmCont - Interface to module FM 355

5.3.6 FmCont I/Os


I/Os of FmCont

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AccMode* 1 = Transfer of operating parameters BOOL 1
SubN1_ID, SubN2_ID, RackNo,
SlotNo and Channel to internal pro‐
cessing
AdvCoEn 1 = Enable "program mode" via intercon‐ STRUCT -
nection ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AdvCoModSP Type of "program mode": BOOL 1
1 = Setpoint specification
0 = Manipulated variable specification
AdvCoMstrOn Activate (0-1) or deactivate (1-0) "pro‐ STRUCT -
gram mode" via edge transition ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AdvCoMV Specified value from the external pro‐ REAL 0.0
gram
AdvCoOn* 1 = Enable "program mode" via faceplate BOOL 0
AutModLi* 1 = "Automatic mode" via interconnec‐ STRUCT -
tion or SFC (controlled by ModLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AutModOp* 1 = "Automatic mode" via operator (con‐ BOOL 0
trolled by ModLiOp = 0)
BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation for batch control BOOL 0
BatchID Batch ID DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name S7-String
BreakTime* Minimum break duration [s] REAL 1.0
Channel Controller channel number (1..4) INT 1
CloseLi* 1 = Close via interconnection or CFC STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CloseOp* 1 = Close via operator BOOL 0
CoordNo Coordination number INT 0
CPI_In Input for control performance index, STRUCT -
which is calculated by the assigned Con‐ ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
PerMon block
● ST: BYTE ● 16#78
CSF 1 = External error (control system fault) STRUCT -
Error handling (Page 121) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


634 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.3 FmCont - Interface to module FM 355

Parameter Description Type Default


D_InSel* Input for differentiator: INT 0
0 = Error signal
1..4 = Channel 1..4
17 = Actual value to feedback
DeadBand* Width of dead band REAL 0.0
DiffGain* Gain of differentiator [1...10] DiffGain STRUCT -
= TD/(delay time of D component) ● Value: REAL ● 5.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1
ER_A_DC* Delay for incoming alarms during error REAL 0.0
signal monitoring
ER_A_DG* Delay for outgoing alarms during error REAL 0.0
signal monitoring
ER_AH_En 1 = Activate alarm (high) for error signal BOOL 1
monitoring
ER_AH_Lim Alarm limit (high) for error signal moni‐ REAL 100.0
toring
ER_AH_MsgEn 1 = Activate messages for alarm (high) BOOL 1
for error signal monitoring
ER_AL_En 1 = Activate alarm (low) for error signal BOOL 1
monitoring
ER_AL_Lim Alarm limit (low) for error signal monitor‐ REAL -100.0
ing
ER_AL_MsgEn 1 = Activate messages for alarm (low) for BOOL 1
error signal monitoring
ER_Hyst Alarm hysteresis for error signal REAL 1.0
EventTsIn For interconnecting data between a tech‐ ANY
nology block and the message blocks
EventTs, Event16Ts.
The EventTsIn input parameter serves
to interconnect the EventTsOut output
parameter of the EventTs, Event16Ts
block. When this interconnection is con‐
figured, the messages of the EventTs,
Event16Ts block are displayed on the
OS in the alarm view of the technology
block and can also be acknowledged
there.
ExtMsg1 Binary input for freely selectable mes‐ STRUCT -
sage 1 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg2 Binary input for freely selectable mes‐ STRUCT -
sage 2 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 635
Controller blocks
5.3 FmCont - Interface to module FM 355

Parameter Description Type Default


ExtMsg3 Binary input for freely selectable mes‐ STRUCT -
sage 3 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg4 Binary input for freely selectable mes‐ STRUCT -
sage 4 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtVa106 Associated value 6 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa107 Associated value 7 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa209 Associated value 9 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID2)
ExtVa210 Associated value 10 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID2)
FbkClosed Low limit stop signal of position feedback STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL 0
● ST: BYTE 16#80
FbkOpened High limit stop signal of position feedback STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 619) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
FM355 Module type: BOOL 0
0: FM 355 S; 1: FM 355 C
FuzOptOn* Fuzzy optimization BOOL 0
Gain* Proportional gain STRUCT -
Gain.ST = 16#FF: Enabled in faceplate ● Value: REAL ● 1.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
LogAddr Logical address FM 355 INT 0
Man* Manual specification for the manipulated REAL 0.0
variable
ManHiLim* Limit (high) for manual parameter Man REAL 100.0
ManLoLim* Limit (low) for manual parameter Man REAL 0.0
ManModLi* 1 = "Manual mode" via interconnection STRUCT -
or SFC (controlled by ModLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManModOp* 1 = "Manual mode" via OS operator (con‐ BOOL 1
trolled by ModLiOp = 0)
Mode Operating mode DWORD 16#00000000

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


636 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.3 FmCont - Interface to module FM 355

Parameter Description Type Default


ModLiOp Operating mode switchover between: STRUCT -
0 = Operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
1 = Interconnection or SFC ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MotorTime* Motor actuating time [s] REAL 30.0
MS Maintenance status DWORD 0
MS_Release Release for maintenance (interconnec‐ STRUCT -
ted with MS_Release of the technology ● Value: BOOL ● 0
block)
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Ms_Ext External maintenance status DWORD 0
MS_RelOp* 1 = Release for maintenance by OS op‐ BOOL 0
erator
MsgEvID1 Message number (assigned automatical‐ DWORD 16#00000000
ly)
MsgEvID2 Message number (assigned automatical‐ DWORD 16#00000000
ly)
MsgLock 1 = Suppress process messages. STRUCT -
See also the section Suppressing mes‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
sages using the MsgLock parameter ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
(Page 214) for more on this.
MV_FmTrkOn 1 = Manipulated variable tracking in the STRUCT -
FM ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_HiLim* Limit (high) for manipulated variable MV STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 100.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_LoLim* Limit (low) for manipulated variable MV STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_OpScale OS display range for manipulated varia‐ STRUCT -
ble MV ● High: REAL ● 100.0
● Low: REAL ● 0.0
MV_Safe* Neutral position manipulated variable REAL 0.0
MV_SafeOn 1 = Neutral position manipulated varia‐ STRUCT -
ble MV_Safe at output MV ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_Trk* Tracking value for the manipulated vari‐ STRUCT -
able MV ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_TrkOn 1 = Tracking of manipulated variable MV STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_Unit Unit of measure for manipulated variable INT 1342

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 637
Controller blocks
5.3 FmCont - Interface to module FM 355

Parameter Description Type Default


NegGain* 0 = Effective proportional gain GainEff STRUCT -
is positive ● Value: BOOL ● 0
1 = Effective proportional gain GainEff ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
is negative
NormMV Manipulated variable range (MV) for STRUCT -
standardizing the proportional gain ● High: REAL ● 100.0
(GAIN)
● Low: REAL ● 0.0
NormPV Process value range (PV) for standardiz‐ STRUCT -
ing the proportional gain (GAIN) ● High: REAL ● 100.0
● Low: REAL ● 0.0
Occupied Occupied by batch control BOOL 0
OosLi Edge transition (0-1) = "Out of service", STRUCT -
via interconnection or SFC ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosOp* 1 = "Out of service", via OS operator BOOL 0
OP_Sel* Operation via OP BOOL 0
0 = "Off" (P bus)
1 = "On" (K bus)
OpenLi* 1 = Open via interconnection or CFC STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpenOp* 1 = Open via operator BOOL 0
OptimEn 1 = Enable optimization of PID parame‐ BOOL 0
ters by PID tuner
OptimOcc 1 = Optimization running BOOL 0
OpSt_In Input parameter for local operator au‐ DWORD 16#00000000
thorization, connected with the Out out‐
put parameter of the upstream block,
OpStations (Page 423)
OS_Perm I/O for operator permissions (Page 619) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● ... ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
OS1Perm I/O for operator permissions (Page 619) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● Bit 18: BOOL ● 1
● Bit 19: BOOL ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
P_FbkSel* 1 = P component in feedback BOOL 0
PropSel* 1 = Activate P component BOOL 1
PulseTime* Minimum pulse duration [s] REAL 1.0
PV_A_DC* Delay time for incoming PV alarms [s] REAL 0.0
PV_A_DG* Delay time for outgoing PV alarms [s] REAL 0.0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


638 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.3 FmCont - Interface to module FM 355

Parameter Description Type Default


PV_AH_En 1 = Enable PV alarm limit (high) BOOL 1
PV_AH_Lim Limit PV alarm (high) REAL 95.0
PV_AH_MsgEn 1 = Enable PV alarm (high) message BOOL 1
PV_AL_En 1 = Enable PV alarm limit (low) BOOL 1
PV_AL_Lim PV alarm limit (low) REAL 5.0
PV_AL_MsgEn 1 = Enable PV alarm (low) message BOOL 1
PV_Hyst Hysteresis for PV alarm, warning and tol‐ REAL 1.0
erance limits
PV_OpScale Limit for scale in PV bar graph of face‐ STRUCT -
plate ● High: REAL ● 100.0
● Low: REAL ● 0.0
PV_T_DC* Delay time for incoming PV tolerance REAL 0.0
messages [s]
PV_T_DG* Delay time for outgoing PV tolerance REAL 0.0
messages [s]
PV_TH_En 1 = Enable PV tolerance limit (high) BOOL 0
PV_TH_Lim Limit PV tolerance message (high) REAL 85.0
PV_TH_MsgEn 1 = Enable message for PV tolerance BOOL 1
message (high)
PV_TL_En 1 = Enable PV tolerance limit (low) BOOL 0
PV_TL_Lim Limit PV tolerance message (low) REAL 15.0
PV_TL_MsgEn 1 = Activate message for PV tolerance BOOL 1
message (low)
PV_Unit Unit of measure for process value INT 1001
PV_W_DC* Delay time for incoming PV warnings [s] REAL 0.0
PV_W_DG* Delay time for outgoing PV warnings [s] REAL 0.0
PV_WH_En 1 = Enable PV warning limit (high) BOOL 1
PV_WH_Lim Limit PV warning (high) REAL 90.0
PV_WH_MsgEn 1 = Enable PV warning (high) message BOOL 1
PV_WL_En 1 = Enable PV warning limit (low) BOOL 1
PV_WL_Lim Limit PV warning (low) REAL 10.0
PV_WL_MsgEn 1 = Enable PV warning (low) message BOOL 1
RackNo Rack number BYTE 16#FF
Rbk* Position feedback for display on OS STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
RbkHyst Alarm hysteresis for position feedback REAL 1.0
RbkWH_En 1 = Enable warning (high) for position BOOL 1
feedback
RbkWH_Lim Limit for position feedback of warning REAL 100.0
(high)
RbkWH_MsgEn 1 = Enable messages for warning (high) BOOL 1
for position feedback

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 639
Controller blocks
5.3 FmCont - Interface to module FM 355

Parameter Description Type Default


RbkWL_En 1 = Enable warning (low) for position BOOL 1
feedback
RbkWL_Lim Limit for position feedback of warning REAL 0.0
(low)
RbkWL_MsgEn 1 = Enable messages for warning (low) BOOL 1
for position feedback
RefStdDevIn Reference value of PV standard devia‐ STRUCT -
tion (sigma) in defined "good" state of ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
control loop
● ST: BYTE ● 16#78
RunUpCyc Number of cycles in startup; messages INT 3
are suppressed during these cycles
S_RbkOnPIDTun Simulation of position feedback on; BOOL 0
For PCS 7 PID tuner only
S_RbkPIDTun Simulated position feedback REAL 50.0
SampleTime Sampling time [s] (assigned automatical‐ REAL 0.1
ly)
SelFp1 Call a block saved in this parameter as ANY -
an additional faceplate (Page 217) in the
standard view
SelFp2 Call a block saved in this parameter as ANY -
an additional faceplate (Page 217) in the
preview
SimLiOp Activation/deactivation of the simulation STRUCT -
by: ● Value: BOOL ● 0
0 = Operator ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
1 = Interconnection or SFC
SimOnLi 1 = Simulation via interconnection or STRUCT -
SFC (controlled by SimLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SimOn* 1 = Simulation on BOOL 0
SimPV* Process value used for SimOn = 1 REAL 0.0
SimPV_Li Process value that is used for STRUCT -
SimOnLi.Value = 1 ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
(SimLiOp.Value = 1)
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SimRbk* Position feedback used for SimOn = 1 REAL 0.0
SimRbkLi Position feedback used for STRUCT -
SimOnLi.Value = 1 ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
(SimLiOp.Value = 1)
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SlotNo Slot number BYTE 16#FF
SP_DnRaLim Limit (low) for the gradient of the setpoint REAL 100.0
[SP_Unit/s]
SP_ExHiLim* Limit (high) for external setpoint STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 100.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


640 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.3 FmCont - Interface to module FM 355

Parameter Description Type Default


SP_ExLoLim* Limit (low) for external setpoint STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_Ext* External setpoint of - (to interconnection) STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExtLi* 1 = Select external setpoint (via intercon‐ STRUCT -
nection) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExtOp* 1 = Select external setpoint (via operator) BOOL 0
SP_InHiLim* Limit (high) of internal setpoint REAL 100.0
SP_InLoLim* Limit (low) of internal setpoint REAL 0.0
SP_Int* Internal setpoint for operation REAL 0.0
SP_IntLi* 1 = Select internal setpoint (via intercon‐ STRUCT -
nection) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_IntOp* 1 = Select internal setpoint (via operator) BOOL 0
SP_LiOp Select setpoint source (internal/exter‐ STRUCT -
nal): ● Value: BOOL ● 0
1 = Via interconnection ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
0 = Via operator
SP_RateOn* 1 = Activate limitation of setpoint gradi‐ BOOL 0
ents
SP_RmpModTime 1 = Use time (SP_RmpTime) for setpoint BOOL 0
ramp,
0 = Use gradient
SP_RmpOn* 1 = Activate setpoint ramp to target set‐ BOOL 0
point SP_RmpTarget
SP_RmpTarget* Target setpoint for setpoint ramp REAL 0.0
SP_RmpTime* Time for setpoint ramp [s] from current REAL 0.0
SP up to SP_RmpTarget
SP_TrkExt 1 = Bumpless switchover from external BOOL 1
to internal setpoint active
SP_TrkPV 1 = Setpoint follows PV in "manual mode" BOOL 0
and with tracking
SP_UpRaLim Gradient limit (high) for the setpoint REAL 100.0
[SP_Unit/s]
StepCon Controller type in the FM 355 S: BOOL 0
0 = Pulse controller
1 = Step controller
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 641
Controller blocks
5.3 FmCont - Interface to module FM 355

Parameter Description Type Default


StopLi* 1 = Stop via interconnection or CFC STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
StopOp* 1 = Stop via operator BOOL 0
SubN1_ID ID of the primary DP master system BYTE 16#FF
SubN2_ID ID of the redundant DP master system BYTE 16#FF
TD* Derivative time [s] STRUCT -
TD.ST = 16#FF: Enabled in faceplate ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
TextRef Text reference WORD 0
TI* Integral time [s] STRUCT -
TI.ST = 16#FF: Enabled in faceplate ● Value: REAL ● 100.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
TimeFactor Time unit: INT 0
0 = Seconds
1 = Minutes
2 = Hours
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use in PCS 7 BYTE 16#00
OS

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

In/out parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


DataXchg Internal data exchange channel to the DWORD 16#00000000
diagnostics block
DataXchg1 Internal data exchange channel to the DWORD 16#00000000
diagnostics block
EnCoord Current coordination number STRUCT -
● CO_ACT : INT ● 0
MS_Xchg Exchange of the maintenance status DWORD 16#00000000

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AdvCoAct 1 = "Program mode" enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AdvCoRdy 1 = "Program mode" available STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


642 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.3 FmCont - Interface to module FM 355

Parameter Description Type Default


AutAct 1 = "Automatic mode" enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ChFM_Err 1 = Channel error on the module BOOL 0
Close Control output: STRUCT -
1 = Closed is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
EnCoNum Coordination number BYTE 16#00
ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without BOOL 0
errors
ER Error signal STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ER_AH_Act 1 = Alarm limit (high) for control deviation STRUCT -
violated. ● Value: BOOL ● 0
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐
olation (Page 174)).
ER_AL_Act 1 = Alarm limit (low) for control deviation STRUCT -
violated. ● Value: BOOL ● 0
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit
violation (Page 174)).
ErrorNum Output of pending error number; for error INT -1
numbers that can be output by this block,
see FmCont error handling (Page 629)
FbkClsOut 1 = Low limit stop of the position feed‐ STRUCT -
back reached ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FbkOpnOut 1 = High limit stop of the position feed‐ STRUCT -
back reached ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FFwdOut Disturbance variable generated in the STRUCT -
FM Value: REAL 0.0
ST: BYTE 16#80
FuzCon Controller type: BOOL 0
0 = PID controller
1 = Fuzzy controller
FuzOptAct 1 = Optimization of fuzzy controller active BOOL 0
FuzSP_PV_Act Fuzzy controller display: BOOL 0
Setpoint < actual value

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 643
Controller blocks
5.3 FmCont - Interface to module FM 355

Parameter Description Type Default


GainEff Effective proportional gain depends on REAL 1.0
NegGain, Gain, NormPV, and NormMV
GrpErr 1 = Group error pending STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
LoopClosed 1 = Control loop closed STRUCT -
0 = Control loop open ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManAct 1 = "Manual mode" enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManARW_Act 1 = Tracking mode or anti-reset windup STRUCT -
by secondary controller ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManHiOut Limit (high) for "manual mode", corre‐ STRUCT -
sponds to input parameter ManHiLim ● Value: REAL ● 100.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManLoOut Limit (low) for "manual mode", corre‐ STRUCT -
sponds to input parameter ManLoLim ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ModErr 1 = Module error STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MS_Dev Maintenance state DWORD 16#00000000
MS_Release Release for maintenance: STRUCT -
1 = Release for OS operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MS_Req 1 = Maintenance request from the diag‐ STRUCT -
nostic area ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MsgAckn1 Message acknowledgement status 1 WORD 16#0000
(output ACK_STATE of first ALARM_8P)
MsgAckn2 Message acknowledgement status 2 WORD 16#0000
(output ACK_STATE of second
ALARM_8P)
MsgErr1 Alarm error 1 (output ERROR of first BOOL 0
ALARM_8P)
MsgErr2 Alarm error 2 (output ERROR of second BOOL 0
ALARM_8P)
MsgStat1 Message status 1 (output STATUS of first WORD 16#0000
ALARM_8P)
MsgStat2 Message status 2 (output STATUS of WORD 16#0000
second ALARM_8P)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


644 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.3 FmCont - Interface to module FM 355

Parameter Description Type Default


MV Manipulated variable STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_FmTrkAct 1 = Track manipulated variable in the FM STRUCT -
enabled ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_HiAct 1 = Limit (high) of manipulated variable STRUCT -
violated ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_LoAct 1 = Limit (low) of manipulated variable STRUCT -
violated ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_SafeAct 1 = Neutral position manipulated varia‐ STRUCT -
ble of the FM enabled ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_SpliA Manipulated variable A of split-range STRUCT -
function ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_SpliB Manipulated variable B of split-range STRUCT -
function ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_UnitOut Unit of measure for manipulated varia‐ INT 0
ble, for interconnecting to the MV_Unit
input parameter of the ConPerMon block
MV_Visible 1 = MV display visible BOOL 0
Evaluated by block icon
OosAct 1 = Block is "Out of service" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Open Control output: STRUCT -
1 = Open is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpSt_Out Value of the OpSt_In input parameter, DWORD 16#00000000
for feedforwarding to other blocks. Bit 31
of this parameter is used by
Feature.Bit24
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with settings DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
changed by the block algorithm
OS1PermOut Display of OS_Perm1 DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS1PermLog Display of OS1Perm with settings DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
changed by the block algorithm

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 645
Controller blocks
5.3 FmCont - Interface to module FM 355

Parameter Description Type Default


ParFM_Err 1 = Direct parameter-assignment error BOOL 0
of the FM or input Channel configured
incorrectly
PerAccErr 1 = I/O access error BOOL 0
PV Process value of the module STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
PV_AH_Act 1 = PV alarm (high) active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐
olation (Page 174)).
PV_AL_Act 1 = PV alarm (low) active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐
olation (Page 174)).
PV_Out Output for process value STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
PV_TH_Act 1 = PV tolerance message (high) active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐
olation (Page 174)).
PV_TL_Act 1 = PV tolerance message (low) active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐
olation (Page 174)).
PV_ToleHi Limit (high) of 3-sigma band around the STRUCT -
setpoint is calculated when a ConPer‐ ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
Mon block is connected
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
PV_ToleLo Limit (low) of 3-sigma band around the STRUCT -
setpoint is calculated when a ConPer‐ ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
Mon block is connected
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
PV_UnitOut Unit of measure for process value, for INT 0
interconnecting to the PV_Unit input
parameter of the ConPerMon block

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


646 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.3 FmCont - Interface to module FM 355

Parameter Description Type Default


PV_WH_Act 1 = PV warning (high) active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐
olation (Page 174)).
PV_WL_Act 1 = PV warning (low) active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐
olation (Page 174)).
RbkOut Output for position feedback STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RbkVisible 1 = Rbk display visible BOOL 0
Evaluated by block icon
RbkWH_Act 1 = Warning (high) for position feedback STRUCT -
active. ● Value: BOOL ● 0
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐
olation (Page 174)).
RbkWL_Act 1 = Warning (low) for position feedback STRUCT -
active. ● Value: BOOL ● 0
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐
olation (Page 174)).
RdyToStart 1 = Active start readiness STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RetValue Return value of WRREC / RDREC WORD 16#0000
SP Setpoint used by controller STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_DnRaAct 1 = Negative gradient limiting of setpoint STRUCT -
is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExHiAct 1 = Limit (high) for external setpoint has STRUCT -
been reached ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 647
Controller blocks
5.3 FmCont - Interface to module FM 355

Parameter Description Type Default


SP_ExLoAct 1 = Limit (low) for external setpoint has STRUCT -
been reached ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExtAct 1 = External setpoint is active STRUCT -
0 = Internal setpoint is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExtOut External setpoint, corresponds to input STRUCT -
parameter SP_Ext ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_InHiOut Limit (high) for SP_Int corresponds to STRUCT -
input parameter SP_InHiLim ● Value: REAL ● 100.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_InLoOut Limit (low) for SP_Int corresponds to STRUCT -
input parameter SP_InLoLim ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_RateTarget Target setpoint for the gradient limitation REAL 0.0
SP_UpRaAct Positive gradient limiting of setpoint is STRUCT -
active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
SplitRange 1 = Split-range function has been activa‐ BOOL 0
ted
Status1 Status word 1 (Page 613) DWORD 16#00000000
Status2 Status word 2 (Page 613) DWORD 16#00000000
Status3 Status word 2 (Page 613) DWORD 16#00000000
Stop Control output: STRUCT -
1 =Stopped is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SumMsgAct 1 = Active hardware interrupt STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
WithRbk Controller type: BOOL 0
0 = Step controller without position feed‐
back
1 = Step controller with position feedback

See also
FmCont messaging (Page 631)
FmCont block diagram (Page 649)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


648 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.3 FmCont - Interface to module FM 355

FmCont modes (Page 617)


Neutral position for motors, valves and controllers (Page 48)

5.3.7 FmCont block diagram

FmCont block diagram

63B([+L$FW 63B([W/L 6SB([W,QW


/LPLW
63B([W 63B([/R$FW 63B,QW/L /LQN
63B([W$FW
63B([W2S 2SHUDWRU
63B([W2XW
63B,QW2S /RJLF 63B7UN39$1' 09B)RU2Q
63B/L2S 63B5DWH2Q 250DQ$FW2509B7UN2Q
63B([+L/LP
63B([/R/LP
63B5PS2Q 63B5DWH7DUJHW
5HMHFW
5DPS
63B5PS7DUJHW   39
 *UDGLHQW

63B,Q+L/LP    
63B,Q/R/LP 63B5PS0RG7LPH
63B5PS7LPH
63B8S5D/LP 63B8S5D$FW
63B8S5D/LP
/LPLW 63B'Q5D/LP 63B'Q5D$FW
63B'Q5D/LP
$GY&R09
$GY&R$FW$1'
$GY&R0RG63
63B,Q+L/LP
63B,Q/R/LP $GY&R2Q

$GY&R(Q $GY&R0VWU2Q
$
5HMHFW  09B7UN2Q 1
63B,QW ' /LQN
09B)RU2Q $
LVOLPLWHG 2SHUDWRU
$GY&R0RG63 1
DQGWUDFNHG 2 $GY&R$FW
' /RJLF
$GY&R0RG63 $ 5
63B,Q+L/LP 63B,Q+L2XW 1
63B,Q/R/LP 63B,Q/R2XW 0DQ$FW $GY&R5G\
'

5HMHFW

0DQ

0DQ+L/LP 0DQ+L2XW
0DQ/R/LP 0DQ/R2XW 0DQ$FW

09B7UN2Q 

09B7UN 

0DQ$FW
2
09B7UN2Q 5
$GY&R$FW
$GY&R0RG63 $1'   

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 649
Controller blocks
5.3 FmCont - Interface to module FM 355

39B287
6LP2Q 39B$+B$FW
 39B:+B$FW
6LP39 $ODUP
39B7+B$FW
:ULWH39B287WR
39B7/B$FW
6LP39LI6LP2Q  
   39B:/B$FW
39B$/B$FW
39B[+B/LP39B[/B/LP39B+\VW
39B[+B(Q39B[/B(Q
39B[+B0VJ(Q39B[+B0VJ(Q
39B[B'&39B[B'*
)0 [ $:7
2SHUDWLQJ 2XWSXW
$XW0RG/L 0DQ$FW SDUDPHWHUV SDUDPHWHUV
/LQN $ODUP
0DQ0RG/L (5B$+B$FW
2SHUDWRU 127 63B5( 63 63
$XW0RG2S $XW$FW
/RJLF /01B5( 39 (5B$/B$FW
0DQ0RG2S
/01B5(21 (5
7UN2Q)0 /0175.21 ',69 ))ZG2XW
2SHQ/L (5B$+B/LP(5B$/B/LP(5B+\VW
2SHQ 09B6DIH2Q 6$)(B21 /01 09 (5B$+B(Q(5B$/B(Q
&ORVH/L 6[2SHQ
&ORVH 5EN2SHQHG /015+65( (5B$+B0VJ(Q(5B$/B0VJ(Q
6WRS/L 6WRS 6[&ORVH 5EN&ORVHG /015/65( 4/0183 (5B$B'&(5B$B'*
2SHQ2S
/RJLF /0162321 4/01'1 2SHQ
&ORVH2S
6WRS2S /0183B23 &ORVH
/01'1B23 /01B$ $ 6WRS
0RG/L2S 09B6SOL% 1
6B5EN2Q3,'7XQ /0156B21 /01B%
)8=,'B21 '
)X]2SW2Q
63B([W$FW 3DU)0B(UU
43$5B) 
 4&+B) &K)0B(UU 09B6SOL$
63B([+L/LP &RQWUROOHU  5EN2XW
63B,Q+L/LP SDUDPHWHUV 4,' )X]2SW$FW 
 4)8==< )X]&RQ
 $ODUP
63B([/R/LP 3URS6HO 3B6(/ 5EN:+B$FW
463/(39 )X]63B39B$FW
63B,Q/R/LP 3B)GE6HO 3)'%B6(/ 5EN:/B$FW
   5EN
'B,Q6HO 'B(/B6(/
63B+/0 4/016$)( 09B6DI$FW
63B//0 4/0175. 09B7UN$FW 5EN:+B/LP
'HDG%DQG '($'%B: 4/01B5( 09B([W$FW 5EN:/B/LP

*DLQ(II *$,1 5EN+\VW
*DLQ
SK\V 7, 7, 4/015B+6 5EN2SQ2XW 5EN:+B(Q
7' 7' 4/015B/6 5EN&OV2XW
5EN:/B(Q
1HJ*DLQ 7''LII*DLQ 70B/$* :LWK5EN 5EN:+B0VJ(Q
1RUP39 09B6DIH /01B6$)( 4/015B21 5EN:/B0VJ(Q
/01B+/0 4635 6SOLW5DQJH
$XW$FW
/01B//0
 0RWRU7LPH 075B70 40$1B)& 0DQ$5:B$FW )0 $
09B+L/LP
3XOVH7LPH 38/6(B70 6WHS&RQ 1
0DQ+L/LP '
%UHDN7LPH %5($.B70

09B/R/LP
0DQ/R/LP 23B6HO 23B6(/

09B7UN2Q
$
2 2
09B)P7UN$FW 1 127 /RRS&ORVHG
5 5
09B6DIH2Q '

:LWK5EN
0DQ$FW

See also
FmCont I/Os (Page 634)
FmCont messaging (Page 631)
FmCont error handling (Page 629)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


650 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.3 FmCont - Interface to module FM 355

FmCont functions (Page 619)


FmCont modes (Page 617)
Description of FmCont (Page 613)

5.3.8 Operator control and monitoring

5.3.8.1 FmCont views

Views of the FmCont block


The block FmCont provides the following views:
● FM controllers standard view (analog) (Page 272)
● FM controllers standard view (pulse controller) (Page 276)
● FM controllers standard view (step controller with position feedback) (Page 280)
● FM controllers standard view (step controller without position feedback) (Page 284)
● Alarm view (Page 313)
● Limit view of FM controllers (Page 299)
● Trend view (Page 317)
● Ramp view (Page 311)
● Parameter view of FM controllers (Page 295)
● Preview of FM controllers (Page 308)
● Memo view (Page 315)
● Batch view (Page 313)
● Block icons for PID and FM controller (Page 248)
Refer to the Structure of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure (Page 239) sections
for general information about the faceplate and block icon.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 651
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

5.4.1 Description of FmTemp

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1819
Family: Control

Area of application for FmTemp


The block is used for the following applications:
● Fixed setpoint control
● Cascade control
● Ratio control
● Split-range control

How it works
Block FmTemp is used to interface the FM 355-2 temperature controller modules.
FmTemp can be used for the C (continuous controllers) and S (step and pulse controllers)
module types. It contains the algorithms of the setpoint ramp, the setpoint rise limitation, and
the limit monitoring of the process value, the control deviation, and the position feedback. Limit
monitoring is not used on the module.
The control function itself (e.g. PID algorithm) is processed on the module. You can use the
FmTemp block to monitor all relevant process values and to change all relevant controller
parameters.
Application examples of the FM 355-2 and detailed descriptions of the associated input and
output parameters can be found in the manual of the FM 355-2. temperature controller.
It is primarily used for controlling temperature processes, but can also control level and flow
processes which are not excessively fast, for example.
Module FM 355-2 features online optimization of the PID parameters. You can set the
corresponding parameters for performing online optimization in the CFC chart at block
FmTemp .

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38). The block is
also installed automatically in the startup OB (OB100). Set the input LogAddr to the module
address from HW Config and the input Channel to the desired controller channel (0 ... 3)..

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


652 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

When the CFC function "Generate module drivers" is used, the following occurs automatically:
● The parameter CoordNo is set
● The in/out parameter Mode is interconnected to the corresponding OMODE_xx output
parameter of the MOD block.
● The parameter FM 355_2 is set in accordance with the module type C/S
● The in/out parameter EnCoord is interconnected to the output EN_CO_x of the FM_CO
block of the Basis Library (x = number of the rack)
● The output EnCoNum is interconnected to the input ENCOx_yy of the FM_CO block (x =
number of the rack, yy = coordination number).
For the control loop monitoring to work as planned in the trend view of the controller faceplates,
the
S7_xarchive:='Value, shortterm;'
attributes in the process tag types for control loops at the controller function block must be set
for the following tags:
● Input parameters:
– CPI_In
● Output parameters
– MV
– MV_HiAct
– MV_LoAct
– LoopClosed
– SP
– PV_Out
– PV_ToleHi
– PV_ToleLo

Startup characteristics
Use the Feature Set startup characteristics (Page 141) to define the startup characteristics
of this block.
The messages are suppressed after startup for the number of cycles set at RunUpCyc.

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


You can find a description for each parameter in section FmTemp I/Os (Page 674).

Status bit Parameter


0 Occupied
1 BatchEn
2 SimOn

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 653
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

Status bit Parameter


3 OosAct.Value
4 OosLi.Value
5 AutAct.Value
6 Invalid signal status
7 ManAct.Value
8 SP_ExtAct.Value
9 MV_SafeOn.Value
10 MV_TrkOn.Value
11 MV.Value > ManLoLim for continuous or pulse controller
NOT FbkClosed.Value for step controller with/without position feedback
12 Open.Value
13 Close.Value
14 Stop.Value
15 FbkOpened.Value
16 FbkClosed.Value
17 SimOn AND ManAct
18 SimOn AND ManAct
19 AdvCoAct
20 1 = Input parameter Rbk is not interconnected (RbkOut.ST = 16#FF)
21 NegGain
22 - 27 Not used
28 1 = Analog controller (FM 355_2 = 1)
29 1 = Pulse controller (FM 355_2 = 0 AND StepCon = 0)
30 1 = Step controller with position feedback
(FM 355_2 = 0 AND StepCon = 1 AND WithRbk = 1 )
31 1 = Step controller without position feedback
(FM 355_2 = 0 AND StepCon = 1 AND WithRbk = 0 )

Status word allocation for Status2 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 MsgLock
1 PV_AH_Act.Value
2 PV_WH_Act.Value
3 PV_TH_Act.Value
4 PV_TL_Act.Value
5 PV_WL_Act.Value
6 PV_AL_Act.Value
7 PV_AH_En OR Feature.Bit31
8 PV_WH_En OR Feature.Bit31
9 PV_TH_En OR Feature.Bit31
10 PV_TL_En OR Feature.Bit31

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


654 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

Status bit Parameter


11 PV_WL_En OR Feature.Bit31
12 PV_AL_En OR Feature.Bit31
13 PV_AH_MsgEn
14 PV_WH_MsgEn
15 PV_TH_MsgEn
16 PV_TL_MsgEn
17 PV_WL_MsgEn
18 PV_AL_MsgEn
19 ER_AH_Act.Value
20 ER_AL_Act.Value
21 ER_AH_En OR Feature.Bit31
22 ER_AL_En OR Feature.Bit31
23 ER_AH_MsgEn
24 ER_AL_MsgEn
25 RbkWH_Act.Value
26 RbkWL_Act.Value
27 RbkWH_En OR Feature.Bit31
28 RbkWL_En OR Feature.Bit31
29 RbkWH_MsgEn
30 RbkWL_MsgEn
31 MS_RelOp

Status word allocation for Status3 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 Effective signal 1 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
1 Effective signal 2 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
2 Effective signal 3 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
3 Effective signal 4 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
4 Effective signal 5 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
5 Effective signal 6 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
6 Effective signal 7 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
7 Effective signal 8 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
8 Delay of the PV_AH_Lim message
9 Delay of the PV_WH_Lim message
10 Delay of the PV_TH_Lim message
11 Delay of the PV_TL_Lim message
12 Delay of the PV_WL_Lim message
13 Delay of the PV_AL_Lim message
14 Delay of the ER_AH_Lim message
15 Delay of the ER_AL_Lim message
16 Collection of message delays

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 655
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

Status bit Parameter


17 - 26 Not used
27 SP_UpRaAct, SP_DnRaAct limits enabled for gradient mode (SP_RateOn = 1)
28 GrpErr.Value
29 RdyToStart.Value
30 SimLiOp.Value
31 Not used

Status word allocation for Status4 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0-7 Effective signal 9..16 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
8 - 31 Not used

See also
FmTemp functions (Page 658)
FmTemp messaging (Page 671)
FmTemp modes (Page 656)
FmTemp error handling (Page 670)
FmTemp block diagram (Page 691)

5.4.2 FmTemp modes

FmTemp operating modes


The block can be operated using the following modes:
● Automatic mode (Page 73)
● Manual mode (Page 73)
● Program mode for controllers (Page 79)
● Out of service (Page 72)
The next section provides additional block-specific information relating to the general
descriptions.

"Automatic mode"
You can find general information on "Automatic mode", switching modes and bumpless
switchover in the Manual and automatic mode for control blocks (Page 73) section.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


656 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

"Manual mode"
You can find general information on "Manual mode", switching modes and bumpless
switchover in the Manual and automatic mode for control blocks (Page 73) section.

"Program mode for controllers"


General information on "Program mode for controllers" is available in the section Program
mode for controllers (Page 79).

"Out of service"
You can find general information about the "Out of service" mode in the section Out of
service (Page 72).
With Feature.Bit5 =1 the following output parameter become the status of simulation
16#60, if mode is changed to "Out of service".
With Feature.Bit5 =0 the following output parameter become the status of 16#80, if mode
is changed to "Out of service".
● RbkOut.ST
● RbkWH_Act.ST
● RbkWL_Act.ST
● FbkOpnOut.ST
● FbkClsOut.ST
● SP_ExtAct.ST
● SP.ST
● SP_ExtOut.ST
● PV.ST
● PV_Out.ST
● PV_AH_Act.ST
● PV_WH_Act.ST
● PV_TH_Act.ST
● PV_TL_Act.ST
● PV_WL_Act.ST
● PV_AL_Act.ST
● PV_ToleHi.ST
● PV_ToleLo.ST
● ER.ST
● ER_AH_Act.ST
● ER_AL_Act.ST

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 657
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

See also
Description of FmTemp (Page 652)
FmTemp functions (Page 658)
FmTemp error handling (Page 670)
FmTemp messaging (Page 671)
FmTemp I/Os (Page 674)
FmTemp block diagram (Page 691)

5.4.3 FmTemp functions

Functions of FmTemp
The functions for this block are listed below.

Module types
FmTemp can be used for the C (continuous controllers) and S (step controllers with and without
position feedback and pulse controllers) module types. You can use the following parameters
to identify which module type and controller type has been set:

FM 355 StepCon WithRbk Module type, controller type


1 or C - - FM 355-2 C: Continuous controller
0 or S 1 1 FM 355-2 S: Step controller with posi‐
tion feedback
0 or S 1 0 FM 355-2 S: Step controller without po‐
sition feedback
0 or S 0 - FM 355-2 S: Pulse controller

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


658 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

Generating manipulated variables for continuous controllers, step controllers with position feedback, or
pulse controllers
The manipulated variable MV and the actuating signals Open, Close and Stop are generated
as follows:

MV_Safe‐ MV_FMTrk ManAct MV_TrkOn AdvCoAct MV = Manipu‐ State Open,


On On AND NOT lated varia‐ Close,
AdvCo‐ ble limit Stop
ModSP
1 - - - - MV_Safe MV_HiLim Tracking to Cont. con‐
MV_LoLim safety value trol‐
ler:Open,
0 1 - - - Prepared MV_HiLim Tracking to
Close,
FM analog an FM ana‐
MV_LoLim Stop = 0
input log input
Step con‐
0 0 1 - - Man ManHiLim Manual troller with
ManLoLim mode, set position
by the oper‐ feedback:
ator
Depending
0 0 0 1 - MV_Trk MV_HiLim Tracking to on Rbk and
MV_LoLim block input MV, the out‐
MV_Trk put signals
0 0 0 0 1 AdvCoMV MV_HiLim Higher-lev‐ Open,
MV_LoLim el program Close and
mode Stop are
0 0 0 0 0 P_Part + MV_HiLim Automatic generated
I_Part + MV_LoLim mode (PID using the al‐
D_Part + algorithm) gorithm of a
FFwd positioner.
Pulse con‐
troller:De‐
pending on
MV, the out‐
put signals
Open and
Close are
generated
using the al‐
gorithm of a
pulse con‐
troller
(Stop = 0).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 659
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

Generating actuating signals for step controllers without position feedback (WithRbk = 0)
The manipulated variable signals Open, Close and Stop can be generated as follows:

ManAct Open, Close, Stop State ManAct


1 The output signals are generated using in‐ Manual mode, set by the operator 1
put signals OpenOp/Li, CloseOp/Li or
StopOp/Li
0 The output signals are generated using Automatic mode (PID algorithm) 0
PID output variables P_Part, I_Part,
D_Part and FFwd

Tracking and limiting a manipulated variable (cont. controller, step controller with position feedback and
pulse controller)
The block provides the standard function Tracking and limiting a manipulated variable
(Page 205).

Neutral position
The controller modules have their own mechanism for feedforwarding a safety value (see
manual for Temperature Controller FM 355-2).

Group error
This block provides the standard function Outputting group errors (Page 124).
The following parameters are taken into consideration when forming the group error:
● CSF
● ModErr
● ParFM_Err
● PerAccErr

Outputting a signal for start readiness


This block provides the standard function Outputting a signal for start readiness (Page 54).

"Actuator active" information


For continuous and pulse controllers: If the manipulated variable MV is greater than the
minimum manual limit ManLoLim, this is recognized as actuator active.
For step controllers: If the parameter FbkClosed = 0 , this is recognized as "Actuator active".
This status can be used to indicate a customized symbol in the process image, for example,
and is saved in the status word (see Status word section in Description of FmTemp
(Page 652)).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


660 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

Limit monitoring of position feedback (cont. controller, step controller with position feedback and pulse
controller)
The block provides the standard function Limit monitoring of the feedback (Page 95).

Group display SumMsgAct for limit monitoring, CSF and ExtMsgx


The block provides the standard function Group display for limit monitoring, CSF and
ExtMsgx (Page 86).

External/internal setpoint specification


The block provides the standard function Setpoint specification - internal/external (Page 130).

Setpoint limiting for external setpoints


The block provides the standard function Setpoint limiting for external setpoints (Page 205).

Limitation of rate of change of setpoint


The block provides the standard function Gradient limit of the setpoint (Page 126).

Using setpoint ramp


The block provides the standard function Using setpoint ramp (Page 125).

Tracking setpoint in manual mode


The block provides the standard function Tracking setpoint in manual mode (Page 205).

Simulating signals
The block provides the standard function Simulating signals (Page 59).
You can simulate the following values:
● Process value (SimPV, SimPV_Li)
● Position feedback (SimRbk, SimRbkLi)
Note
The simulated process value SimPV only affects alarm processing and not the PID
algorithm in the control module.

Limit monitoring of the process value


The block provides the standard function Limit monitoring of the process value (Page 87).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 661
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

Error signal generation and dead band


The block provides the standard function Error signal generation and dead band (Page 201).

Limit monitoring of error signal


The block provides the standard function Limit monitoring of setpoint, manipulated variable
and control deviation (Page 96).

Inverting control direction


The block provides the standard function Inverting control direction (Page 200).

Physical standardization of setpoint, manipulated variable and process value


Controller gain Gain is entered either using a physical variable or as standardized value.
● Gain as a physical variable:
The standardized variables retain their default values:
– NormPV.High = 100 and NormPV.Low = 0
– NormMV.High = 100 and NormMV.Low = 0
For step controllers with/without position feedback and pulse controllers, the values of
NormMV.High and NormMV.Low are not taken into account. The algorithm uses default
values 0 and 100 for internal calculations.
The effective gain is: GainEff = Gain
● Entering a standardized Gain (dimensionless):
Change the standardized variables to the actual range of the process values and
manipulated variables.
– Internal and external setpoints; the process value and corresponding parameters are
entered according to the physical measuring range of the process value.
Continuous controller, pulse controller:
– The manual value, the tracking value of the manipulated variable, disturbance variable
feedforward and the corresponding parameters are set according to the physical
measuring range of the manipulated variable.
Step controller with position feedback:
– The manual parameter, the tracking value of the manipulated variable, disturbance
variable feedforward and the corresponding parameters are entered as a percentage
0 ... 100.
Step controller without position feedback:
– No physical measuring range available.
The effective gain is:
– Step controller with/without position feedback:
GainEff = 100.0 / (NormPV.High - NormPV.Low) · Gain
– Continuous controller, pulse controller:
GainEff = (NormMV.High - NormMV.Low) / (NormPV.High - NormPV.Low) · Gain

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


662 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

Selecting a unit of measure


The block provides the standard function Selecting a unit of measure (Page 221).

PID algorithm
The manipulated variable is generated in automatic mode according to the following algorithm:
MV = GainEff · (1 + 1 / (TI · s) + (TD · s) / (1 + TD / DiffGain · s)) · ER
Where: s = Complex number
The following step response occurs:

09
09B+L/LP

*DLQ(II 7'
7LPH/DJ6DPSOH7LPH
*DLQ(II
(5 W *DLQ(II
*DLQ(II

W
7,

09B/R/LP

,QSXWVWHS(5 W  ` LIW
LIW!

Note
This formula describes a standard application where P, I and D components are activated and
the P and D components are not in the feedback circuit (PropSel = 1, TI ≠ 0, D_InSel = 0
and PropFacSP = 1).

The D component delay is derived from TD / DiffGain.


● The P component can be shut down by PropSel = 0 .
● The I component can be shut down by TI = 0 .
● The D component can be shut down by TD = 0 .

Structure segmentation at controllers


The PID controller algorithm of FM 355 features structure segmentation. It is activated via the
PropFacSel and D_InSel parameters. The precise functionality is described in the FM 355
manual.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 663
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

Online optimization of the PID controller parameters


● Optimization sequence
The optimization sequence is as follows:
– Create a steady state
– Set PID_On = 1 (if PID parameters are required)
– Assign parameters of TunD_MV / TunC_MVLMN
– Set TunOn = 1 (phase 1, preparing for optimization)
– Start the optimization using a step change in the setpoint or by setting TunStart
If you have not made any configuration errors, the controller optimization is now in phase
2 and StatusH is 0.
– When the point of inflection has been reached (PHASE ≥ 3) evaluate the diagnostics
display at the StatusH parameter. Phase 0 is reached in a few cycles for process type
I and the optimization is completed in full. For process types II and III, the optimization
goes to phase 7 (checking the process type). If StatusH > 20000 , an estimation error
has occurred or the point of inflection has not been reached. In this case, repeat the
procedure.
● Result
– Once optimization is complete, the parameters PropFacSP, GAIN, TI, TD, DiffGain,
ConZone are updated (both for the module and at FmTemp). Furthermore, the PI or
PID parameter sets are saved on the FM 355-2.
– The precise procedure is described in the FM 355-2 manual of the temperature controller
module.
● Permanent backup of optimized controller parameters
– Save, compile and download the hardware configuration; the optimized controller
parameters are now in the system data block (SDB).
– Transfer the modified parameters to the offline data management of the CFC via Chart
> Readback.

Anti-windup
The PID control algorithm of FM 355 has an anti-windup function. The I component is frozen
or tracked after the manipulated variable has reached its limits (MV_HiLim or MV_LoLim).

Feedforwarding and limiting disturbance variables


The block provides a function for activating the disturbance variable feedforward. The precise
functionality is described in the FM 355-2 manual.

Control zone
The block provides the standard function Using control zones (Page 203).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


664 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

Forming the signal status for blocks


The block provides the standard function Forming and outputting the signal status for
technologic blocks (Page 110).
● Signal status for the setpoint value SP:
The signal status of the SP output parameter is always equivalent to the signal status of
input parameter SP_Ext or SP_Int, depending on how the setpoint is specified. If the
internal setpoint SP_Int is used, the signal status is always output as 16#80.
● Signal status for PV_Out, RbkOut, Open, Close, Stop:
When the manipulated value (for example, substitute value, simulation, last valid value) is
activated, the signal status is always 16#60.
When the ModErr.Value, ChFM_Err, ParFM_Err module error occurs, the signal
status of PV_Out is always 16#0. RbkOut is always 16#0 for step controllers with position
feedback
Otherwise, the following applies:
PV_Out.ST: 16#80
Step controller: RbkOut.ST: = 16#80
Continuous controller or pulse controller: RbkOut.ST: = Rbk.ST
Open.ST := 16#80;
Close.ST := 16#80;
Stop.ST := 16#80;
● Signal status of the error signal ER:
The signal status of output parameter ER is obtained from the worst signal status of the two
output parameters PV_Out and SP and is output. The signal status 16#60 (external
manipulated value - for example, substitute value, simulation, last valid value) is suppressed
because the block acts as a sink with external simulation.
Signal status for FbkOpnOut, FbkClsOut:
FbkOpnOut.ST := FbkOpened.ST;
FbkClsOut.ST := FbkClosed.ST;

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 665
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

● Signal status for the manipulated variable MV:


The status signal from the output parameter MV is always set to 16#80 in "manual mode"
and for step controllers without position feedback.
In "automatic mode", the signal status for continuous controllers or pulse controllers is
formed from the following parameters:
RbkOut.STFFwdOut.STER.STWith step controllers, the
FbkOpnOut.STFbkClsOut.STparameters are also included. The signal status 16#60
(external manipulated value - for example, substitute value, simulation, last valid value) is
suppressed because the block acts as a sink with an external manipulated value (for
example, substitute value, simulation, last valid value).
● Worst signal status:
The worst signal status ST_Worst for the block is formed from:
– PV_Out.ST;
– SP:ST;
– FFwdOut.ST;
– RbkOut.ST;
With step controllers (FM355-2 = 0, StepCon = 1), the following are also included:
– FbkOpnOut.ST;
– FbkClsOut.ST;

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133) . The following functionality is
available for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
0 Set startup characteristics (Page 141)
1 Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 181)
2 Resetting the commands for changing the mode (Page 165)
4 Setting switch or button mode (Page 170)
5 Changes signal status of outputs in OOS (Page 198)
6 Ramp rate calculation (Page 183)
10 Condition monitoring information at the channel blocks (Page 148)
22 Update acknowledgment and error status of the message call (Page 163)
23 SP following PV in open loop has no priority over SP_Ext and SP limits (Page 183)
24 Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162)
25 Suppression of all messages (Page 178)
26 Reaction of the switching points in the "Out of service" operating mode (Page 180)
28 Disabling operating points (Page 149)
29 Signaling limit violation (Page 174)
31 Limits disabled in faceplate (Page 195)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


666 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

Configurable reactions using the Feature2 parameter

Bit Function
11 Suppress MsgLock and “Out of service” mode for a connected message block (Page 192)

Operator permissions
The block provides the standard function Operator control permissions (Page 265).
The block has the following permissions for the OS_Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 1 = Operator can switch to "automatic mode" AutModOp
1 1 = Operator can switch to "manual mode" ManModOp
2 1 = Operator can switch to "Out of service" mode OosOp
3 1 = Operator can switch to "program mode" AdvCoEn
4 1 = Operator can switch the setpoint to "external" SP_ExtOp
5 1 = Operator can switch the setpoint to "internal" SP_IntOp
6 1 = Operator can change the internal setpoint SP_Int
7 Continuous controllers, pulse controllers or step controllers with position feedback:
1 = Operator can change the manual parameter Man
Step controller without position feedback:
1 = Operator can change the manual operation signals OpenOp, StopOp, CloseOp
8 1 = Operator can change operation high limit of the setpoint SP_InHiLim
9 1 = Operator can change operation low limit of the setpoint SP_InLoLim
10 1 = Operator can change the operation high limit of the manipulated variable ManHiLim
11 1 = Operator can change the operation low limit of the manipulated variable ManLoLim
12 1 = Operator can enable the setpoint's gradient limitation function SP_RateOn
13 1 = Operator can change the setpoint's high limit for the ramp SP_UpRaLim
14 1 = Operator can change the setpoint's low limit for the ramp SP_DnRaLim
15 1 = Operator can switch between the time value or the value for the ramp SP_RmpModTime
16 1 = Operator can change the ramp time SP_RmpTime
17 1 = Operator can change the target setpoint SP_RmpTarget for the setpoint ramp
18 1 = Operator can enable the setpoint ramp function SP_RmpOn
19 Not used
20 1 = Operator can enable the track setpoint in manual mode function SP_TrkPV
21 1 = Operator can enable the bumpless switchover from external to internal SP_TrkExt
22 1 = Operator can change the gain parameter Gain
23 1 = Operator can change the integral time parameter TI
24 1 = Operator can change the derivative time parameter TD
25 1 = Operator can change the derivative gain parameter DiffGain
26 1 = Operator can change the dead band parameter DeadBand
27 1 = Operator can change the control zone parameter ConZone
28 1 = Operator can change the integral time parameter MotorTime
29 1 = Operator can change the integral time parameter PulseTime

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 667
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

Bit Function
30 1 = Operator can change the integral time parameter BreakTime
31 Not used

The block has the following permissions for the OS1Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 1 = Operator can change the limit (process value) PV_AH_Lim for the high alarm
1 1 = Operator can change the limit (process value) PV_WH_Lim for the high warning
2 1 = Operator can change the limit (process value) PV_TH_Lim for the high tolerance
3 1 = Operator can change the hysteresis (process value) PV_Hyst
4 1 = Operator can change the limit (process value) PV_TL_Lim for the low tolerance
5 1 = Operator can change the limit (process value) PV_WL_Lim for the low warning
6 1 = Operator can change the limit (process value) PV_AL_Lim for the low alarm
7 1 = Operator can change the limit (error signal) ER_AH_Lim for the high alarm
8 1 = Operator can change the hysteresis (error signal) ER_Hyst
9 1 = Operator can change the limit (error signal) ER_AL_Lim for the low alarm
10 1 = Operator can change the limit (position feedback) RbkWH_Lim for the high warning
11 1 = Operator can change the hysteresis (position feedback) RbkHyst
12 1 = Operator can change the limit (position feedback) RbkWL_Lim for the low warning
13 1 = Operator can open the valve
14 1 = Operator can close the valve
15 1 = Operator can stop the valve
16 1 = Operator can activate the Simulation function SimOn
17 1 = Operator can activate the Release for maintenance function MS_RelOp
18 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_AH_MsgEn
19 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_WH_MsgEn
20 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_TH_MsgEn
21 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_TL_MsgEn
22 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_WL_MsgEn
23 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_AL_MsgEn
24 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via ER_AH_MsgEn
25 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via ER_AL_MsgEn
26 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via RbkWH_MsgEn
27 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via RbkWL_MsgEn
28 1 = Operator can change the simulation value SimPV
29 1 = Operator can change the simulation value SimRbk
30 - 31 Not used

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


668 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

Release for maintenance


The block provides the standard function Release for maintenance (Page 65).

Generating instance-specific messages


The block provides the standard function Generating instance-specific messages (Page 213)
without the time stamp function in the I/O.

Suppressing messages using the MsgLock parameter


This block provides the standard function Suppressing messages using the MsgLock
parameter (Page 214).

Specifying the display area for process and setpoint values as well as operations
This block provides the standard function Display and operator input area for process values
and setpoints (Page 216).

Opening additional faceplates


This block provides the standard function Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


This block provides the standard function SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

Button labels
This block provides the standard function Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218)
Instance-specific text can be configured for the following parameters:
● OpenOp
● StopOp
● CloseOp

Connection of the time-stamped messages from EventTs or Event16Ts


This block provides the standard function Connection of the time-stamped messages from
EventTs or Event16Ts (Page 216).

See also
FmTemp messaging (Page 671)
FmTemp I/Os (Page 674)
FmTemp modes (Page 656)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 669
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

FmTemp block diagram (Page 691)


FmTemp error handling (Page 670)
EventTs functions (Page 1698)

5.4.4 FmTemp error handling

Error handling of FmTemp


Refer to section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions for the error handling of all
blocks.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers
● Control system fault (CSF)

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum output parameter can be used to output the following error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; the block is not executed
0 There is no error.
30 The value of PV can no longer be displayed in the REAL number field.
31 The value of SP_Ext can no longer be displayed in the REAL number field.
33 The value of MV_Trk can no longer be displayed in the REAL number field.
35 The value of Rbk can no longer be displayed in the REAL number field.
36 The value of MV can no longer be displayed in the REAL number field.
50 The controller cannot be switched to program mode, because program mode with
default setpoint (AdvCoModSP = 0) is not possible for step controllers without posi‐
tion feedback (WithRbk = 0).
51 AutModLi = 1 and ManModLi = 1
SP_LiOp = 1 and SP_IntLi = 1 and SP_ExtLi = 1
OpenLi = 1 and StopLi = 1
CloseLi = 1 and StopLi = 1
OpenLi = 1 and CloseLi = 1
59 = 1, "Gain is negative"
60 |TI| < SampleTime / 2
61 |TD| < SampleTime
62 DiffGain < 1 or DiffGain > 10
63 TD / DiffGain < SampleTime / 2
64 PropFacSP < 0 or PropFacSP > 1
66 NormPV_High = NormPV_Low
67 MotorTime < SampleTime

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


670 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

Error number Meaning of the error number


68 PulseTime < SampleTime
69 BreakTime < SampleTime
70 Channel < 0 or Channel > 3
71 (D_InSel < 0 or D_InSel > 4) and D_InSel ≠ 17
74 ConZone < 0.0
FM 355-2 sets the output ParFM_Err = 1

Control system fault (CSF)


An external signal can be activated via the CSF input. A control system fault is triggered if this
signal changes to 1. Refer to the Error handling (Page 121) section for more on this.

See also
Description of FmTemp (Page 652)
FmTemp modes (Page 656)
FmTemp functions (Page 658)
FmTemp messaging (Page 671)
FmTemp I/Os (Page 674)
FmTemp block diagram (Page 691)
Setting switch or button mode (Page 170)

5.4.5 FmTemp messaging

Messaging
The following messages can be generated for this block:
● Process control fault
● Process messages
● Instance-specific messages

Process control fault


The following control system error messages can be output:

Message in‐ Message identi‐ Message class Event


stance fier
MsgEvId2 SIG 6 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External error has occurred

Explanation:

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 671
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment


You can interconnect an external fault (signal) to input parameter CSF. If it changes to CSF =
1, a process control fault is triggered (MsgEvId2, SIG 6).

Process messages

Message in‐ Message identifier Message class Event


stance
MsgEvId1 SIG 1 Alarm - high $$BlockComment$$
PV - high alarm limit violated
SIG 2 Warning - high $$BlockComment$$
PV - high warning limit violated
SIG 3 Tolerance - high $$BlockComment$$
PV - high tolerance limit violated
SIG 4 Tolerance - low $$BlockComment$$
PV - low tolerance limit violated
SIG 5 Warning - low $$BlockComment$$
PV - low warning limit violated
SIG 6 Alarm - low $$BlockComment$$
PV - low alarm limit violated
SIG 7 Alarm - high $$BlockComment$$
ER - high alarm limit violated
SIG 8 Alarm - low $$BlockComment$$
ER - low alarm limit violated
MsgEvId2 SIG 7 Warning - high $$BlockComment$$
Rbk - high warning limit violated
SIG 8 Warning - low $$BlockComment$$
Rbk - low warning limit violated

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


672 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

Instance-specific messages
You can use up to four instance-specific messages with this block.

Message in‐ Message identifier Message class Event


stance
MsgEvId2 SIG 1 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 1
Status 16#@5%x@
SIG 2 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 2
Status 16#@6%x@
SIG 3 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 3
Status 16#@7%x@
SIG 4 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 4
Status 16#@8%x@

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId1

Associated value Block parameters


1 BatchName
2 StepNo
3 BatchID
4 Process value PV_Out
5 Control deviation ER
6 ExtVa106
7 ExtVa107
8 Not allocated
9 Not allocated
10 Not allocated

The associated values 6 ... 7 are allocated to the parameters ExtVa106 ... ExtVa107 and
can be used. Additional information is available in the "Process Control System PCS 7 -
Engineering System" manual.

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId2

Associated value Block parameters


1 BatchName
2 StepNo
3 BatchID

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 673
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

Associated value Block parameters


4 Position feedback RbkOut
5 Signal status ExtMsg1
6 Signal status ExtMsg2
7 Signal status ExtMsg3
8 Signal status ExtMsg4
9 ExtVa209
10 ExtVa210

The associated values 9 ... 10 are allocated to the parameters ExtVa209 ... ExtVa210 and
can be used. Additional information is available in the "Process Control System PCS 7 -
Engineering System" manual.

See also
Description of FmTemp (Page 652)
FmTemp functions (Page 658)
FmTemp I/Os (Page 674)
FmTemp modes (Page 656)
FmTemp error handling (Page 670)
FmTemp block diagram (Page 691)

5.4.6 FmTemp I/Os


I/Os of FmTemp

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AccMode* 1 = Transfer of operating parameters BOOL 1
SubN1_ID, SubN2_ID, RackNo,
SlotNo and Channel to internal pro‐
cessing
AdvCoEn 1 = Enable "program mode" via intercon‐ STRUCT -
nection ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AdvCoModSP Type of "program mode": BOOL 1
1 = Setpoint specification
0 = Manipulated variable specification
AdvCoMstrOn Activate (0-1) or deactivate (1-0) "pro‐ STRUCT -
gram mode" via edge transition ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


674 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

Parameter Description Type Default


AdvCoMV Specified value from the external pro‐ REAL 0.0
gram
AdvCoOn* 1 = Enable "program mode" via faceplate BOOL 0
AutModLi* 1 = "Automatic mode" via interconnec‐ STRUCT -
tion or SFC (controlled by ModLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AutModOp* 1 = "Automatic mode" via operator (con‐ BOOL 0
trolled by ModLiOp = 0)
BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation for batch control BOOL 0
BatchID Batch ID DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name S7-String
BreakTime* Minimum break duration [s] REAL 1.0
Channel Controller channel number (0..3) INT 0
CloseLi* 1 = Close via interconnection or CFC STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CloseOp* 1 = Close via operator BOOL 0
ConZone* Control zone REAL 0.0
CoordNo Coordination number INT 0
CPI_In Input for control performance index, STRUCT -
which is calculated by the assigned ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
ConPerMon block
● ST: BYTE ● 16#78
CSF 1 = External error (control system fault) STRUCT -
Error handling (Page 121) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
D_InSel* Input for differentiator: INT 0
0 = Error signal
1..4 = Channel 0..3
17 = Actual value to feedback
DeadBand* Width of dead band REAL 0.0
DiffGain* Gain of differentiator [1..10] DiffGain STRUCT -
= TD / (delay time of D component) ● Value: REAL ● 5.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1
ER_A_DC* Delay for incoming alarms during error REAL 0.0
signal monitoring
ER_A_DG* Delay for outgoing alarms during error REAL 0.0
signal monitoring
ER_AH_En 1 = Activate alarm (high) for error signal BOOL 1
monitoring
ER_AH_Lim Alarm limit (high) for error signal moni‐ REAL 100.0
toring

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 675
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

Parameter Description Type Default


ER_AH_MsgEn 1 = Activate messages for alarm (high) BOOL 1
for error signal monitoring
ER_AL_En 1 = Activate alarm (low) for error signal BOOL 1
monitoring
ER_AL_Lim Alarm limit (low) for error signal monitor‐ REAL -100.0
ing
ER_AL_MsgEn 1 = Activate messages for alarm (low) for BOOL 1
error signal monitoring
ER_Hyst Alarm hysteresis for error signal REAL 1.0
EventTsIn For interconnecting data between a tech‐ ANY
nology block and the message blocks
EventTs, Event16Ts.
The EventTsIn input parameter serves
to interconnect the EventTsOut output
parameter of the EventTs, Event16Ts
block. When this interconnection is con‐
figured, the messages of the EventTs,
Event16Ts block are displayed on the
OS in the alarm view of the technology
block and can also be acknowledged
there.
ExtMsg1 Binary input for freely selectable mes‐ STRUCT -
sage 1 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg2 Binary input for freely selectable mes‐ STRUCT -
sage 2 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg3 Binary input for freely selectable mes‐ STRUCT -
sage 3 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg4 Binary input for freely selectable mes‐ STRUCT -
sage 4 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtVa106 Associated value 6 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa107 Associated value 7 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa209 Associated value 9 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID2)
ExtVa210 Associated value 10 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID2)
FbkClosed Low limit stop signal of position feedback STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


676 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

Parameter Description Type Default


FbkOpened High limit stop signal of position feedback STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 658) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
FM355_2 Module type: BOOL 0
0: FM 355-2 S;
1: FM 355-2 C
Gain* Proportional gain STRUCT -
Gain.ST = 16#FF: Enabled in faceplate ● Value: REAL ● 1.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
LoadPID* Load optimized PI/PID parameters BOOL 0
LogAddr Logical address FM 355 INT 0
Man* Manual specification for the manipulated REAL 0.0
variable
ManHiLim* Limit (high) for manual parameter Man REAL 100.0
ManLoLim* Limit (low) for manual parameter Man REAL 0.0
ManModLi* 1 = "Manual mode" via interconnection STRUCT -
or SFC (controlled by ModLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManModOp* 1 = "Manual mode" via OS operator (con‐ BOOL 1
trolled by ModLiOp = 0)
Mode Operating mode DWORD 16#00000000
ModLiOp Operating mode switchover between: STRUCT -
0 = Operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
1 = Interconnection or SFC ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MotorTime* Motor actuating time [s] REAL 30.0
MS_RelOp* 1 = Release for maintenance by OS op‐ BOOL 0
erator
MS Maintenance status DWORD 0
MS_Release Release for maintenance (interconnec‐ STRUCT -
ted with MS_Release of the technology ● Value: BOOL ● 0
block)
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Ms_Ext External maintenance status DWORD 0
MsgEvID1 Message number (assigned automatical‐ DWORD 16#00000000
ly)
MsgEvID2 Message number (assigned automatical‐ DWORD 16#00000000
ly)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 677
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

Parameter Description Type Default


MsgLock 1 = Suppress process messages. STRUCT -
See also the section Suppressing mes‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
sages using the MsgLock parameter ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
(Page 214) for more on this.
MV_FmTrkOn 1 = Manipulated variable tracking in the STRUCT -
FM ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_HiLim* Limit (high) for manipulated variable MV STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 100.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_LoLim* Limit (low) for manipulated variable MV STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_OpScale OS display range for manipulated varia‐ STRUCT -
ble MV ● High: REAL ● 100.0
● Low: REAL ● 0.0
MV_Safe* Neutral position manipulated variable REAL 0.0
MV_SafeOn 1 = Neutral position manipulated varia‐ STRUCT -
ble MV_Safe at output MV ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_Trk* Tracking value for the manipulated vari‐ STRUCT -
able MV ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_TrkOn 1 = Tracking of manipulated variable MV STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_Unit Unit of measure for manipulated variable INT 1342
NegGain* 0 = Effective proportional gain GainEff STRUCT -
is positive ● Value: BOOL ● 0
1 = Effective proportional gain GainEff ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
is negative
NormMV Manipulated variable range (MV) for STRUCT -
standardizing the proportional gain ● High: REAL ● 100.0
(GAIN)
● Low: REAL ● 0.0
NormPV Process value range (PV) for standardiz‐ STRUCT -
ing the proportional gain (GAIN) ● High: REAL ● 100.0
● Low: REAL ● 0.0
Occupied Occupied by batch control BOOL 0
OosLi Edge transition (0-1) = "Out of service", STRUCT -
via interconnection or SFC ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosOp* 1 = "Out of service", via OS operator BOOL 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


678 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

Parameter Description Type Default


OpenLi* 1 = Open via interconnection or CFC STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpenOp* 1 = Open via operator BOOL 0
OpSt_In Input parameter for local operator author‐ DWORD 16#00000000
ization, connected with the Out output
parameter of the upstream block, OpSta‐
tions (Page 423)
OS_Perm I/O for operator permissions (Page 658) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● ... ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
OS1Perm I/O for operator permissions (Page 658) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● Bit 18: BOOL ● 1
● Bit 19: BOOL ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
PID_On* 1 = PID mode on BOOL 0
PropFacSP* Applying the P component to the feed‐ REAL 1.0
back [0..1].
0 = P component fully in feedback
PropSel* 1 = Activate P component BOOL 1
PulseTime* Minimum pulse duration [s] REAL 1.0
PV_A_DC* Delay time for incoming PV alarms [s] REAL 0.0
PV_A_DG* Delay time for outgoing PV alarms [s] REAL 0.0
PV_AH_En 1 = Enable PV alarm limit (high) BOOL 1
PV_AH_Lim Limit PV alarm (high) REAL 95.0
PV_AH_MsgEn 1 = Enable PV alarm (high) message BOOL 1
PV_AL_En 1 = Enable PV alarm limit (low) BOOL 1
PV_AL_Lim PV alarm limit (low) REAL 5.0
PV_AL_MsgEn 1 = Enable PV alarm (low) message BOOL 1
PV_Hyst Hysteresis for PV alarm, warning and tol‐ REAL 1.0
erance limits
PV_OpScale Limit for scale in PV bar graph of face‐ STRUCT -
plate ● High: REAL ● 100.0
● Low: REAL ● 0.0
PV_T_DC* Delay time for incoming PV tolerance REAL 0.0
messages [s]
PV_T_DG* Delay time for outgoing PV tolerance REAL 0.0
messages [s]
PV_TH_En 1 = Enable PV tolerance limit (high) BOOL 0
PV_TH_Lim Limit PV tolerance message (high) REAL 85.0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 679
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

Parameter Description Type Default


PV_TH_MsgEn 1 = Enable message for PV tolerance BOOL 1
message (high)
PV_TL_En 1 = Enable PV tolerance limit (low) BOOL 0
PV_TL_Lim Limit PV tolerance message (low) REAL 15.0
PV_TL_MsgEn 1 = Activate message for PV tolerance BOOL 1
message (low)
PV_Unit Unit of measure for process value INT 1001
PV_W_DC* Delay time for incoming PV warnings [s] REAL 0.0
PV_W_DG* Delay time for outgoing PV warnings [s] REAL 0.0
PV_WH_En 1 = Enable PV warning limit (high) BOOL 1
PV_WH_Lim Limit PV warning (high) REAL 90.0
PV_WH_MsgEn 1 = Enable PV warning (high) message BOOL 1
PV_WL_En 1 = Enable PV warning limit (low) BOOL 1
PV_WL_Lim Limit PV warning (low) REAL 10.0
PV_WL_MsgEn 1 = Enable PV warning (low) message BOOL 1
RackNo Rack number BYTE 16#FF
RatioFac* Ratio factor REAL 0.0
Rbk* Position feedback for display on OS STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
RbkHyst Alarm hysteresis for position feedback REAL 1.0
RbkWH_En 1 = Enable warning (high) for position BOOL 1
feedback
RbkWH_Lim Limit for position feedback of warning REAL 100.0
(high)
RbkWH_MsgEn 1 = Enable messages for warning (high) BOOL 1
for position feedback
RbkWL_En 1 = Enable warning (low) for position BOOL 1
feedback
RbkWL_Lim Limit for position feedback of warning REAL 0.0
(low)
RbkWL_MsgEn 1 = Enable messages for warning (low) BOOL 1
for position feedback
RefStdDevIn Reference value of PV standard devia‐ STRUCT -
tion (sigma) in defined "good" state of ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
control loop
● ST: BYTE ● 16#78
RunUpCyc Number of cycles in startup; messages INT 3
are suppressed during these cycles
SampleTime Sampling time [s] (assigned automatical‐ REAL 0.1
ly)
SavePar* 1 = Save PID controller parameters BOOL 0
SelFp1 Call a block saved in this parameter as ANY -
an additional faceplate (Page 217) in the
standard view

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


680 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

Parameter Description Type Default


SelFp2 Call a block saved in this parameter as ANY -
an additional faceplate (Page 217) in the
preview
SimLiOp Activation/deactivation of the simulation STRUCT -
by: ● Value: BOOL ● 0
0 = Operator ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
1 = Interconnection or SFC
SimOnLi 1 = Simulation via interconnection or STRUCT -
SFC (controlled by SimLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SimOn* 1 = Simulation on BOOL 0
SimPV* Process value used for SimOn = 1 REAL 0.0
SimPV_Li Process value that is used for STRUCT -
SimOnLi.Value = 1 ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
(SimLiOp.Value = 1)
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SimRbk* Position feedback used for SimOn = 1 REAL 0.0
SimRbkLi Position feedback used for STRUCT -
SimOnLi.Value = 1 ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
(SimLiOp.Value = 1)
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SlotNo Slot number BYTE 16#FF
SP_DnRaLim Limit (low) for the gradient of the setpoint REAL 100.0
[SP_Unit/s]
SP_ExHiLim* Limit (high) for external setpoint STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 100.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExLoLim* Limit (low) for external setpoint STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_Ext* External setpoint of - (to interconnection) STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExtLi* 1 = Select external setpoint (via intercon‐ STRUCT -
nection) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExtOp* 1 = Select external setpoint (via operator) BOOL 0
SP_InHiLim* Limit (high) of internal setpoint REAL 100.0
SP_InLoLim* Limit (low) of internal setpoint REAL 0.0
SP_Int* Internal setpoint for operation REAL 0.0
SP_IntLi* 1 = Select internal setpoint (via intercon‐ STRUCT -
nection) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_IntOp* 1 = Select internal setpoint (via operator) BOOL 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 681
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

Parameter Description Type Default


SP_LiOp Select setpoint source (internal/exter‐ STRUCT -
nal): ● Value: BOOL ● 0
1 = Via interconnection ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
0 = Via operator
SP_RateOn* 1 = Activate limitation of setpoint gradi‐ BOOL 0
ents
SP_RmpModTime 1 = Use time (SP_RmpTime) for setpoint BOOL 0
ramp,
0 = Use gradient
SP_RmpOn* 1 = Activate setpoint ramp to target set‐ BOOL 0
point SP_RmpTarget
SP_RmpTarget* Target setpoint for setpoint ramp REAL 0.0
SP_RmpTime* Time for setpoint ramp [s] from current REAL 0.0
SP up to SP_RmpTarget
SP_TrkExt 1 = Bumpless switchover from external BOOL 1
to internal setpoint active
SP_TrkPV 1 = Setpoint follows PV in "manual mode" BOOL 0
and with tracking
SP_UpRaLim Gradient limit (high) for the setpoint REAL 100.0
[SP_Unit/s]
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
StopLi* 1 = Stop via interconnection or CFC STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
StopOp* 1 = Stop via operator BOOL 0
SubN1_ID ID of the primary DP master system BYTE 16#FF
SubN2_ID ID of the redundant DP master system BYTE 16#FF
TD* Derivative time [s] STRUCT -
TD.ST = 16#FF: Enabled in faceplate ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
TextRef Text reference WORD 0
TI* Integral time [s] STRUCT -
TI.ST = 16#FF: Enabled in faceplate ● Value: REAL ● 100.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
TimeFactor Time unit: INT 0
0 = Seconds
1 = Minutes
2 = Hours
TunC_MV* Delta manipulated variable for cooling REAL -20.0
optimization
TunC_Start* Start cooling optimization BOOL 0
TunD_MV* Delta manipulated variable for process REAL 20.0
trigger
TunOn* Enable controller optimization BOOL 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


682 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

Parameter Description Type Default


TunStart* Start controller optimization BOOL 0
UndoPar* Undo controller parameter changes BOOL 0
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use in PCS 7 BYTE 16#00
OS

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

In/out parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


DataXchg Internal data exchange chan‐ DWORD 16#00000000
nel to the diagnostics block
DataXchg1 Internal data exchange chan‐ DWORD 16#00000000
nel to the diagnostics block
EnCoord Current coordination number STRUCT -
● CO_ACT : INT ● 0
MS_Xchg Exchange of the mainte‐ DWORD 16#00000000
nance status

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AdvCoAct 1 = "Program mode" enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AdvCoRdy 1 = "Program mode" available STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AutAct 1 = "Automatic mode" ena‐ STRUCT -
bled ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ChFM_Err 1 = Channel error on the mod‐ BOOL 0
ule
Close Control output: STRUCT -
1 = Closed is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
EnCoNum Coordination number BYTE 16#00
ENO 1 = Block algorithm comple‐ BOOL 0
ted without errors
ER Error signal STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 683
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

Parameter Description Type Default


ER_AH_Act 1 = Alarm limit (high) for con‐ STRUCT -
trol deviation violated. ● Value: BOOL ● 0
You can change the reaction ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
for this parameter with
Feature.Bit28 (Disabling
operating points (Page 149))
and with Feature.Bit29
(Signaling limit violation
(Page 174)).
ER_AL_Act 1 = Alarm limit (low) for con‐ STRUCT -
trol deviation violated. ● Value: BOOL ● 0
You can change the reaction ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
for this parameter with
Feature.Bit28 (Disabling
operating points (Page 149))
and with Feature.Bit29
(Signaling limit violation
(Page 174)).
ErrorNum Output of pending error num‐ INT -1
ber, for error numbers that
can be output by this block,
see FmTemp error handling
(Page 670)
FFwdOut Disturbance variable gener‐ STRUCT -
ated in the FM ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FbkClsOut 1 = Low limit stop of the posi‐ STRUCT -
tion feedback reached ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FbkOpnOut 1 = High limit stop of the posi‐ STRUCT -
tion feedback reached ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
GainEff Effective proportional gain de‐ REAL 1.0
pends on NegGain, Gain,
NormPV, and NormMV
GrpErr 1 = Group error pending STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
LoopClosed 1 = Control loop closed STRUCT -
0 = Control loop open ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManAct 1 = "Manual mode" enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


684 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

Parameter Description Type Default


ManARW_Act 1 = Tracking mode or anti-re‐ STRUCT -
set windup by secondary con‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
troller
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManHiOut Limit (high) for "manual STRUCT -
mode", corresponds to input ● Value: REAL ● 100.0
parameter ManHiLim
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManLoOut Limit (low) for "manual STRUCT -
mode", corresponds to input ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
parameter ManLoLim
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ModErr 1 = Module error STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MS_Dev Maintenance state DWORD 16#00000000
MS_Release Release for maintenance: STRUCT -
1 = Release for OS operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MS_Req 1 = Maintenance request STRUCT -
from the diagnostic area ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MS_Xchg Exchange of the mainte‐ DWORD 0
nance status
MsgAckn1 Message acknowledgement WORD 16#0000
status 1 (output ACK_STATE
of first ALARM_8P)
MsgAckn2 Message acknowledgement WORD 16#0000
status 2 (output ACK_STATE
of second ALARM_8P)
MsgErr1 Alarm error 1 (output ERROR BOOL 0
of first ALARM_8P)
MsgErr2 Alarm error 2 (output ERROR BOOL 0
of second ALARM_8P)
MsgStat1 Message status 1 (output WORD 16#0000
STATUS of first ALARM_8P)
MsgStat2 Message status 2 (output WORD 16#0000
STATUS of second
ALARM_8P)
MV Manipulated variable STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_FmTrkAct 1 = Track manipulated varia‐ STRUCT -
ble in the FM enabled ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 685
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

Parameter Description Type Default


MV_HiAct 1 = Limit (high) of manipu‐ STRUCT -
lated variable violated ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_LoAct 1 = Limit (low) of manipulated STRUCT -
variable violated ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_SafeAct 1 = Neutral position manipu‐ STRUCT -
lated variable of the FM ena‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
bled
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_SpliA Manipulated variable A of STRUCT -
split-range function ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_SpliB Manipulated variable B of STRUCT -
split-range function ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_UnitOut Unit of measure for manipu‐ INT 0
lated variable, for intercon‐
necting to the MV_Unit input
parameter of the
ConPerMon block
MV_Visible 1 = MV display visible BOOL 0
Is evaluated by the block icon
OosAct 1 = Block is "Out of service" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Open Control output STRUCT -
1 = Open is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpSt_Out Value of the OpSt_In input DWORD 16#00000000
parameter, for feedforward‐
ing to other blocks. Bit 31 of
this parameter is used by
Feature.Bit24
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with set‐ DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
tings changed by the block al‐
gorithm
OS1PermLog Display of OS1Perm with set‐ DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
tings changed by the block al‐
gorithm
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS1PermOut Display of OS_Perm1 DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
ParFM_Err 1 = Direct parameter-assign‐ BOOL 0
ment error of the FM or input
Channel configured incor‐
rectly

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


686 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

Parameter Description Type Default


PerAccErr 1 = I/O access error BOOL 0
Phase Phase of auto-tuning [0..7] INT 0
PV Process value of the module STRUCT -
● Value: REAL 0.0
● ST: BYTE 16#80
PV_AH_Act 1 = PV alarm (high) active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction ● Value: BOOL 0
for this parameter with 16#80
● ST: BYTE
Feature.Bit28 (Disabling
operating points (Page 149))
and with Feature.Bit29
(Signaling limit violation
(Page 174)).
PV_AL_Act 1 = PV alarm (low) active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction ● Value: BOOL ● 0
for this parameter with ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Feature.Bit28 (Disabling
operating points (Page 149))
and with Feature.Bit29
(Signaling limit violation
(Page 174)).
PV_Out Output for process value STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
PV_TH_Act 1 = PV tolerance message STRUCT -
(high) active. ● Value: BOOL ● 0
You can change the reaction ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
for this parameter with
Feature.Bit28 (Disabling
operating points (Page 149))
and with Feature.Bit29
(Signaling limit violation
(Page 174)).
PV_TL_Act 1 = PV tolerance message STRUCT -
(low) active. ● Value: BOOL ● 0
You can change the reaction ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
for this parameter with
Feature.Bit28 (Disabling
operating points (Page 149))
and with Feature.Bit29
(Signaling limit violation
(Page 174)).
PV_ToleHi Limit (high) of 3-sigma band STRUCT -
around the setpoint is calcu‐ ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
lated when a ConPerMon
block is connected ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
PV_ToleLo Limit (low) of 3-sigma band STRUCT -
around the setpoint is calcu‐ ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
lated when a ConPerMon
block is connected ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 687
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

Parameter Description Type Default


PV_UnitOut Unit of measure for process INT 0
value, for interconnecting to
the PV_Unit input parame‐
ter of the ConPerMon block
PV_WH_Act 1 = PV warning (high) active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction ● Value: BOOL ● 0
for this parameter with ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Feature.Bit28 (Disabling
operating points (Page 149))
and with
Feature.Bit29(Signaling
limit violation (Page 174)).
PV_WL_Act 1 = PV warning (low) active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction ● Value: BOOL ● 0
for this parameter with ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Feature.Bit28 (Disabling
operating points (Page 149))
and with Feature.Bit29
(Signaling limit violation
(Page 174)).
RbkOut Output for position feedback STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RbkWH_Act 1 = Warning (high) for posi‐ STRUCT -
tion feedback active. ● Value: BOOL ● 0
You can change the reaction ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
for this parameter with
Feature.Bit28 (Disabling
operating points (Page 149))
and with Feature.Bit29
(Signaling limit violation
(Page 174)).
RbkWL_Act 1 = Warning (low) for position STRUCT -
feedback active. ● Value: BOOL ● 0
You can change the reaction ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
for this parameter with
Feature.Bit28 (Disabling
operating points (Page 149))
and with Feature.Bit29
(Signaling limit violation
(Page 174)).
RetValue Return value of WRREC / WORD 16#0000
RDREC
RbkVisible 1 = Rbk display visible BOOL 0
Is evaluated by the block icon
RdyToStart 1 = Active start readiness STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


688 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

Parameter Description Type Default


SP Setpoint used by controller STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_DnRaAct 1 = Negative gradient limiting STRUCT -
of setpoint is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExHiAct 1 = Limit (high) for external STRUCT -
setpoint has been reached ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExLoAct 1 = Limit (low) for external set‐ STRUCT -
point has been reached ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExtAct 1 = External setpoint is active STRUCT -
0 = Internal setpoint is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExtOut External setpoint, corre‐ STRUCT -
sponds to input parameter ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
SP_Ext
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_InHiOut Limit (high) for SP_Int corre‐ STRUCT -
sponds to input parameter ● Value: REAL ● 100.0
SP_InHiLim
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_InLoOut Limit (low) for SP_Int corre‐ STRUCT -
sponds to input parameter ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
SP_InLoLim
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_RateTarget Target setpoint for the gradi‐ REAL 0.0
ent limitation
SP_UpRaAct Positive gradient limiting of STRUCT -
setpoint is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SplitRange 1 = Split-range function has BOOL 0
been activated
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
Status1 Status word 1 (Page 652) DWORD 16#00000000
Status2 Status word 2 (Page 652) DWORD 16#00000000
Status3 Status word 2 (Page 652) DWORD 16#00000000
StatusC Status of cooling optimization INT 0
StatusD Status of controller design INT 0
StatusH Status of heating optimization INT 0
StepCon 1 = Step controller BOOL 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 689
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

Parameter Description Type Default


Stop Control output: STRUCT -
1 =Stopped is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SumMsgAct 1 = Active hardware interrupt STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
TunAct 1 = Optimization running BOOL 0
WithRbk Controller type: BOOL 0
0 = Step controller without po‐
sition feedback
1 = Step controller with posi‐
tion feedback
ZoneTun Controller channels grouped WORD 16#0000
in one zone for parallel opti‐
mization

See also
FmTemp messaging (Page 671)
FmTemp modes (Page 656)
FmTemp block diagram (Page 691)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


690 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

5.4.7 FmTemp block diagram

FmTemp block diagram

63B([+L$FW 63B([W/L 6SB([W,QW


/LPLW
63B([W 63B([/R$FW 63B,QW/L /LQN
63B([W$FW
63B([W2S 2SHUDWRU
63B([W2XW
63B,QW2S /RJLF 63B7UN39$1' 09B)RU2Q
63B/L2S 63B5DWH2Q 250DQ$FW2509B7UN2Q
63B([+L/LP
63B([/R/LP
63B5PS2Q 63B5DWH7DUJHW
5HMHFW
5DPS
63B5PS7DUJHW   39
 *UDGLHQW

63B,Q+L/LP    
63B,Q/R/LP 63B5PS0RG7LPH
63B5PS7LPH
63B8S5D/LP 63B8S5D$FW
63B8S5D/LP
/LPLW 63B'Q5D/LP 63B'Q5D$FW
63B'Q5D/LP
$GY&R09
$GY&R$FW$1'
$GY&R0RG63
63B,Q+L/LP
63B,Q/R/LP $GY&R2Q

$GY&R(Q $GY&R0VWU2Q
$
5HMHFW  09B7UN2Q 1
63B,QW ' /LQN
09B)RU2Q $
LVOLPLWHG 2SHUDWRU
$GY&R0RG63 1
DQGWUDFNHG 2 $GY&R$FW
' /RJLF
$GY&R0RG63 $ 5
63B,Q+L/LP 63B,Q+L2XW 1
63B,Q/R/LP 63B,Q/R2XW 0DQ$FW $GY&R5G\
'

5HMHFW

0DQ

0DQ+L/LP 0DQ+L2XW
0DQ/R/LP 0DQ/R2XW 0DQ$FW

09B7UN2Q 

09B7UN 

0DQ$FW
2
09B7UN2Q 5
$GY&R$FW
$GY&R0RG63 $1'   

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 691
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

39B287
6LP2Q 39B$+B$FW
 39B:+B$FW
6LP39 $ODUP
39B7+B$FW
:ULWH39B287WR
39B7/B$FW
   6LP39LI6LP2Q  
39B:/B$FW
39B$/B$FW
39B[+B/LP39B[/B/LP39B+\VW
39B[+B(Q39B[/B(Q
39B[+B0VJ(Q39B[+B0VJ(Q
)0 39B[B'&39B[B'*
[ $:7
2SHUDWLQJ 2XWSXW
$XW0RG/L 0DQ$FW SDUDPHWHUV SDUDPHWHUV
/LQN
0DQ0RG/L $ODUP
2SHUDWRU 127 63 (5B$+B$FW
63B5( 63
$XW0RG2S $XW$FW
/RJLF /01B5( 39
0DQ0RG2S (5B$/B$FW
/01B5(21 (5
7UN2Q)0 /0175.21 ',69 ))ZG2XW
2SHQ/L 2SHQ 09B6DIH2Q 09 (5B$+B/LP(5B$/B/LP(5B+\VW
6$)(B21 /01
&ORVH/L 6[2SHQ (5B$+B(Q(5B$/B(Q
&ORVH 5EN2SHQHG /015+65(
6WRS/L 6WRS (5B$+B0VJ(Q(5B$/B0VJ(Q
6[&ORVH 5EN&ORVHG /015/65( 4/0183 (5B$B'&(5B$B'*
2SHQ2S
/RJLF /0162321 4/01'1 2SHQ
&ORVH2S
/0183B23 &ORVH
6WRS2S
/01'1B23 /01B$ $ 6WRS
0RG/L2S 09B6SOL%
6B5EN2Q3,'7XQ /0156B21 /01B% 1
)X]2SW2Q )8=,'B21 '
63B([W$FW 3DU)0B(UU
43$5B) 
 4&+B) &K)0B(UU
09B6SOL$
63B([+L/LP &RQWUROOHU   5EN2XW
63B,Q+L/LP SDUDPHWHUV 4,' )X]2SW$FW
 4)8==< )X]&RQ 
63B([/R/LP 3URS6HO 3B6(/ $ODUP 5EN:+B$FW
463/(39 )X]63B39B$FW
63B,Q/R/LP 3B)GE6HO 3)'%B6(/
 'B(/B6(/  5EN 5EN:/B$FW
'B,Q6HO 
63B+/0 4/016$)( 09B6DI$FW
63B//0 4/0175. 09B7UN$FW
09B([W$FW 5EN:+B/LP
'HDG%DQG '($'%B: 4/01B5(
 5EN:/B/LP
*DLQ(II *$,1
*DLQ 5EN+\VW
7, 7, 4/015B+6 5EN2SQ2XW
SK\V 5EN:+B(Q
7' 7' 4/015B/6 5EN&OV2XW
5EN:/B(Q
1HJ*DLQ 7''LII*DLQ 70B/$* :LWK5EN
5EN:+B0VJ(Q
1RUP39 09B6DIH /01B6$)( 4/015B21
5EN:/B0VJ(Q
/01B+/0 4635 6SOLW5DQJH
$XW$FW
/01B//0
 0RWRU7LPH 075B70 40$1B)& 0DQ$5:B$FW
09B+L/LP
3XOVH7LPH 38/6(B70
0DQ+L/LP
%UHDN7LPH %5($.B70
 )0B $
09B/R/LP 1
6WHS&RQ
0DQ/R/LP 23B6HO 23B6(/ '

09B7UN2Q
$
2 2
09B)P7UN$FW 1 127 /RRS&ORVHG
5 5
09B6DIH2Q '

:LWK5EN
0DQ$FW

See also
Description of FmTemp (Page 652)
FmTemp modes (Page 656)
FmTemp functions (Page 658)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


692 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.4 FmTemp - Interface to temperature controller modules FM 355-2

FmTemp error handling (Page 670)


FmTemp messaging (Page 671)
FmTemp I/Os (Page 674)

5.4.8 Operator control and monitoring

5.4.8.1 FmTemp views

Views of the FmTemp block


The block FmTemp provides the following views:
● FM controllers standard view (analog) (Page 272)
● FM controllers standard view (pulse controller) (Page 276)
● FM controllers standard view (step controller with position feedback) (Page 280)
● FM controllers standard view (step controller without position feedback) (Page 284)
● Alarm view (Page 313)
● Limit view of FM controllers (Page 299)
● Trend view (Page 317)
● Parameter view of FM controllers (Page 295)
● Preview of FM controllers (Page 308)
● Memo view (Page 315)
● Batch view (Page 313)
● Block icons for PID and FM controller (Page 248)
Refer to the Structure of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure (Page 239) sections
for general information about the faceplate and block icon.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 693
Controller blocks
5.5 GainSched - Adapting parameter values for a PID controller

5.5 GainSched - Adapting parameter values for a PID controller

5.5.1 Description of GainSched

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1820
Family: Control

Area of application for GainSched


The block is used for the following applications:
● Continuous adaptation of the parameter values of a PID controller to the current operating
point of a non-linear process
● Controller gain
● Integral action time
● Derivative action time

How it works
If your process requires different PID controller parameters due to its non-linear response at
different operating points, you can store optimum parameter sets for up to three different
operating points in theGainSched block in the form of a table ("timetable"). The current
operating point is represented by a continuously measurable variable X, typically by the actual
value of the controller itself. The block ensures that the suitable optimum parameters Gain(j),
TI(j) and TD(j) are made available to the controller for each operating point X(j).
If the process is between two operating points, the parameters are calculated by linear
interpolation between the optimum values of the two nearest operating points. This allows a
bumpless, continuous adaptation of the controller parameters while the process moves from
one operating point to another.
The block should be considered a supplementary function for a PID controller to improve the
control performance of the PID controller in non-linear processes. The GainSched faceplate
is called from the parameter view of the corresponding PID controller using the "Gain
scheduler" button.
In contrast to all other function blocks, the GainSched block is implemented as a CFC chart
and is generated with the "Compile chart as block type" function. The source chart
"FbGainSchedLim" is supplied with the library so that you have more options open to you:
● You can use the precompiled function block GainSched from the library if the standard
functionality is adequate for your needs.
● If you require special additional functions for gain scheduling in your application (for
example more than three operating points, additional logic functions for selecting the
parameters), you will need to modify the CFC source chart and compile it as a block type
with a different FB number.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


694 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.5 GainSched - Adapting parameter values for a PID controller

If the current value of input parameter X is below the lowest value X1 in the table or above the
highest value X3, precisely the controller parameters which are specified at the relevant
boundary point X1 or X3 in the table are output.

Configuration
The GainSched block is placed in the same CFC chart as the assigned controller and
interconnected with it as shown in the corresponding template: The output parameters
Link2Gain, Link2TI and Link2TD are connected to the inputs Gain, TI and TD of the PID
controller. The input X of GainSched is supplied with the measured value for the operating
point, typically with the same value as PV of the controller.
You can open the standard view for the GainSched block from the parameter view of a
controller (for example PIDConL). Additional information on this topic is available in the section
Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).
To specify the parameters for gain scheduling, run separate controller optimizations at each
of the intended operating points, for example with a tool such as the PID tuner. Use amplitudes
as small as possible to excite the process to capture the approximately linear response in the
area of the operating point under investigation. The optimum parameter values calculated by
the PID tuner are entered in the relevant row belonging to the operating point in the table of
the GainSched block. The table is clearly displayed in the standard view of the faceplate. Make
sure that the numeric values are also permanently stored in the data management of the
engineering system by reading back the numeric values of the parameters from AS to the ES
or entering them manually at the inputs of the CFC block.
For the GainSched block, the Advanced Process Library contains a template for process tag
types as an example with an application scenario for this block.
Example of process tag types:
● PID - control with operating-point-oriented parameter control (GainScheduling)
(Page 2391)

Gain scheduling for batch processes


A typical area of application for gain scheduling is in batch processes that, in contrast to
continuous processes, cannot be linearized around a fixed operating point because they need
to be moved backwards and forwards between different operating points during the course of
the batch. Here, there are three application scenarios:
● The controller parameters depend on a single continuously measurable variable that is
representative of the operating point, for example, the reactor temperature. This is the
normal use case for the GainSched block: The management of the controller parameters
is handled in the block and is independent of batch recipes.
● The controller parameters depend on a continuously measurable variable that is
representative of the operating point, but there is also a dependency on the materials used
in the reaction. Suitable parameter sets for gain scheduling can then be anchored in the
recipe and transferred by SIMATIC BATCH to the GainSched block.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 695
Controller blocks
5.5 GainSched - Adapting parameter values for a PID controller

● The controller parameters depend only the current phase of the batch. They can then be
written directly from the Batch package to the PID controller and no gain scheduling block
is necessary. The disadvantage of this is that there is bump in the controller parameters at
the transfer from one phase to the next. The controller should be put into manual mode
temporarily at the time of the transfer to avoid a bump in the manipulated variable.
● The recipe only specifies which of the controller parameter sets 1 ... 3 is currently required
from the GainSched block. The numerical values of the parameter, however, are not
anchored in the recipe. In this case input variable X of the GainSched block can then be
used as the number of the required data record and assigned by the recipe instead of being
linked with a measurable process variable. In this case, there are only three discrete values
for X and the precautions against a change of controller parameters with bump outlined
above must be taken because the interpolation abilities of the GainSched block are not
used.
In general, it is not necessary to manage the batch parameters (batch number, batch name,
etc.) in the GainSched block because the block does not generate any separate messages
and there is always a 1-to-1 relationship with a controller block that knows the batch
parameters.

Startup characteristics
The block does not have any startup characteristics.

Status word allocation for Status parameter


This block does not have the Status parameter.

See also
GainSched functions (Page 697)
GainSched messaging (Page 698)
GainSched I/Os (Page 699)
GainSched block diagram (Page 701)
GainSched error handling (Page 698)
GainSched modes (Page 696)

5.5.2 GainSched modes

GainSched modes
The block can be operated using the following modes:
● Automatic mode (Page 73)
● Manual mode (Page 73)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


696 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.5 GainSched - Adapting parameter values for a PID controller

"Automatic mode"
In "automatic mode" (ManParOn = 0) the controller parameters are determined through a
polygon in accordance with the settings in the "automatic" area of the parameter view.
You can find general information on "Automatic mode", switching modes and Bumpless
switchover in the Manual and automatic mode for control blocks (Page 73) section.

"Manual mode"
In "manual mode" (ManParOn = 1) the controller parameters correspond to the settings in the
"manual" area.
You can find general information on "Manual mode", switching modes and bumpless
switchover in the section Manual and automatic mode for control blocks (Page 73).

See also
GainSched block diagram (Page 701)
GainSched I/Os (Page 699)
GainSched messaging (Page 698)
GainSched error handling (Page 698)
GainSched functions (Page 697)
Description of GainSched (Page 694)

5.5.3 GainSched functions

Functions of GainSched
The functions for this block are listed below.

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133) section. The following functionality is
available for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
24 Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162)

Selecting a unit of measure


This block provides the standard function Selecting a unit of measure (Page 221).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 697
Controller blocks
5.5 GainSched - Adapting parameter values for a PID controller

See also
Description of GainSched (Page 694)
GainSched messaging (Page 698)
GainSched I/Os (Page 699)
GainSched block diagram (Page 701)
GainSched error handling (Page 698)
GainSched modes (Page 696)
GainSched standard view (Page 702)

5.5.4 GainSched error handling

GainSched error handling


The block does not report any errors.

See also
GainSched block diagram (Page 701)
GainSched I/Os (Page 699)
GainSched messaging (Page 698)
GainSched functions (Page 697)
GainSched modes (Page 696)
Description of GainSched (Page 694)

5.5.5 GainSched messaging

Messaging
This block does not offer messaging.

See also
Description of GainSched (Page 694)
GainSched functions (Page 697)
GainSched I/Os (Page 699)
GainSched block diagram (Page 701)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


698 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.5 GainSched - Adapting parameter values for a PID controller

GainSched error handling (Page 698)


GainSched modes (Page 696)

5.5.6 GainSched I/Os

GainSched I/Os

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1
Gain1 PID gain for operating point 1 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Gain2 PID gain for operating point 2 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Gain3 PID gain for operating point 3 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
GainOp PID gain: Input for "manual mode" STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 697) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
ManParOn 1 = input of PID parameters in "manual STRUCT -
mode" ● Value: BOOL ● 0
0 = use the planned controller parame‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ters from the table
OpSt_In Input parameter for local operating per‐ DWORD 16#00000000
mission, connected with the Out output
parameter of the upstream block, OpSta‐
tions (Page 423)
TD_Op PID derivative action time [s]: Manual in‐ STRUCT -
put for the operator ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 699
Controller blocks
5.5 GainSched - Adapting parameter values for a PID controller

Parameter Description Type Default


TD1 PID derivative action time [s] for operat‐ STRUCT -
ing point 1 ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
TD2 PID derivative action time [s] for operat‐ STRUCT -
ing point 2 ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
TD3 PID derivative action time [s] for operat‐ STRUCT -
ing point 3 ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
TI_Op PID integral action time [s]: Manual input STRUCT -
for the operator ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
TI1 PID integral action time [s] for operating STRUCT -
point 1 ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
TI2 PID integral action time [s] for operating STRUCT -
point 2 ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
TI3 PID integral action time [s] for operating STRUCT -
point 3 ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
X Process value that defines the operating STRUCT -
point ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
X1 Operating point 1 (support point) for X STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
X2 Operating point 2 (support point) for X STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
X3 Operating point 3 (support point) for X STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
X_Unit Unit of measure for the operating point INT 1001

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


700 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.5 GainSched - Adapting parameter values for a PID controller

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without BOOL 0
errors
Link2Gain Calculated controller gain STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Link2TD Calculated integral action time STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Link2TI Calculated derivative action time STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpSt_Out Value of the OpSt_In input parameter, DWORD 16#00000000
for feedforwarding to other blocks. Bit 31
of this parameter is used by
Feature.Bit24
OS_PermLog Parameter used to hide operator con‐ DWORD 16#00000000
trols in the faceplate

See also
Description of GainSched (Page 694)
GainSched messaging (Page 698)
GainSched block diagram (Page 701)
GainSched modes (Page 696)

5.5.7 GainSched block diagram

GainSched block diagram


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

See also
GainSched I/Os (Page 699)
GainSched messaging (Page 698)
GainSched error handling (Page 698)
GainSched functions (Page 697)
GainSched modes (Page 696)
Description of GainSched (Page 694)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 701
Controller blocks
5.5 GainSched - Adapting parameter values for a PID controller

5.5.8 Operator control and monitoring

5.5.8.1 GainSched views

Views of the GainSched block


The GainSched block provides the following views:
● GainSched standard view (Page 702)
● GainSched parameter view (Page 703)
● GainSched preview (Page 704)
● Memo view (Page 315)
Refer to the sections Structure of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure
(Page 239) for general information on the faceplate and block icon.

5.5.8.2 GainSched standard view

GainSched standard view





(1) Displaying and switching the operating mode


This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
● Manual mode (Page 73)
● Automatic mode (Page 73)
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for information
on switching the operating mode.
In "manual mode", you can specify the values on the OS in the parameter view of this block;
they are then output directly via the corresponding output parameters.
In "automatic mode", an interpolation is performed through the interpolation points, which can
also be specified in the parameter view.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


702 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.5 GainSched - Adapting parameter values for a PID controller

(2) Displaying the operating point (X)


Currently used operating point.

(3) Displaying the gain


The controller gain currently output at the Link2Gain output parameter.

(4) Displaying the integration time TI


Integration time currently output at the Link2TI output parameter.

(5) Displaying and changing the derivative time TD


Derivative time currently output at the Link2TD output parameter.

(6) Navigation button to GainSched block


Use this navigation button to reach the standard view of a controller block configured in the
engineering system. The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the
engineering system (ES).
Additional information is available in the section Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

5.5.8.3 GainSched parameter view

Parameter view of GainSched

(1) Displaying and changing the values for the controller parameters in "manual mode"
This is where you enter the values for the parameters to be used in "manual mode" at the
corresponding output parameters of the block:
● "Gain": Input parameter GainOp
● "TI": Integration time, input parameter TI_Op
● "TD": Derivative time, input parameter TD_Op

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 703
Controller blocks
5.5 GainSched - Adapting parameter values for a PID controller

Refer to the section titled Changing values (Page 270) for information on changing the values.

(2) Displaying and changing the values for the controller parameters in "automatic mode"
This is where you enter the values for the parameters to be used in "automatic mode" for the
interpolation (max. 3 values):
● "X1": Operating point 1, input parameter X1
● "X2": Operating point 2, input parameter X2
● "X3": Operating point 3, input parameter X3
● "Gain": Input parameter Gain1 ... Gain3
● "TI": Integration time, input parameter TI1 ... TI3
● "TD": Derivative time, input parameter TD1 ... TD3
Refer to the section titled Changing values (Page 270) for information on changing the values.

5.5.8.4 GainSched preview

Preview of GainSched

(1) Enabled operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator control permissions are assigned.
They depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Symbols for enabled operations:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
control permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).
The following enabled operations are shown here:
● "Local operating permission": Use the ← button to switch to the standard view of the
OpStations block. Additional information is available in the section Operator control
permissions (Page 265).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


704 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

5.6.1 Description of ModPreCon

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1843
Family: Control

Area of application for ModPreCon


The block is used in much the same way as a PIDConL block for the following applications:
● Fixed setpoint control
● Cascade control
● Ratio control
● Split-range control
In contrast to the PID controllers, this is a multivariable controller.
Compared to Advanced Process Library V7.1.4, the new version provides the following
functional enhancements:
● Integrated static operating point optimization,
● Prediction without control response and display of the prediction of the free motion,
● Automatic process trigger for model identification,
● Verification of the sampling time.

Method of operation and area of application


The block is used for multivariable control (Page 2454) of dynamic processes. It can handle
up to four dependent manipulated and controlled variables as well as a measurable
disturbance.
In special situations, the ModPreCon block can also be used for particularly difficult dynamic,
single-variable controls. It is better than a PID controller, for example, in systems with non-
minimum phase (Page 2455) or a strongly oscillating response.
The ModPreCon algorithm only works for stable processes with a step response that settles
to a fixed value in a finite time. If the process is unstable in one of the main transfer functions
or includes an integrator (level control, for example), the corresponding partial transfer function
must be stabilized with a secondary controller.
A simple P controller (proportional component only) is sufficient as a subordinate controller for
integrating processes. It is inserted between the manipulated variable output from ModPreCon
and the input of the unstable process section, and receives the output of the integrating process
section as a manipulated variable. (Unstable data links are stabilized with this approach.)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 705
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

You can find an explanation of "multivariable controls" and "non-phase-minimum response" in


the Help on the Advanced Process Library > Definitions.

Note on the area of application of the controller: Longer run times


Due to the principle on which they work, the runtime for multivariable controllers is significantly
longer than that for PID controllers, because the matrix calculations in the algorithm are much
more complex. The runtime is also determined by the number of the process and manipulated
variables in the control algorithm. This is why the multivariable controller is unsuited for rapid
control and is usually used for slow, complex control tasks.
The computation time required on the CPU is compensated for by the fact that very slow sample
times of > 20s are used for the typical ModPreCon applications (see Advanced control
templates). The ModPreCon is then typically in OB30 and can be interrupted by faster OBs.
Optimization is called within the ModPreCon block in the program section in which OB1 is
executed. In cyclic operation (OB3x), this avoids the additional computing time required by the
optimizer, the acyclic time, i.e. which is only relevant for changes to the optimizer inputs. The
calculation time load caused by the ModPreCon block is hardy more with optimization than it
is for ModPreCon without optimization.

Operating principle
The ModPreCon block is a model-based predictive multivariable controller. It uses a
mathematical model of the process dynamics including all interactions as part of the controller.
This model allows the process response to be predicted over a defined period in the future,
also known as the prediction horizon.
Based on this prediction, a performance index

r rT rr rT r
J = (w - y) ⋅ R ⋅ (w-y) + ∆u ⋅ Q ∆u
is optimized (minimized) where the following applies:
● w contains the time series of the future setpoints,
● y contains the vector of the controlled variables in the future,
● Δu contains the future changes to the manipulated variable.
If you increase the weighting in the Q diagonal matrix, the controller moves its manipulated
variables more cautiously resulting in a slower but more robust control response. Using the
weighting factors in the R diagonal matrix, you specify the relative significance of the individual
controlled variables. A higher weighting (priority) for a controlled variable means that this CV
moves more quickly towards the setpoint and remains more accurately at the setpoint in steady
state if it is not possible to achieve all setpoints precisely.
The algorithm is a variant of the DMC procedure (Dynamic Matrix Control) in which the
optimization problem is solved in the design phase ignoring the constraints. The function block
itself contains the analytical solution of the optimization problem. Manipulated variable
limitations, both absolute and relating to the gradients, are treated in the algorithm of the
function block as hard constraints that must not be violated. This means that precise setpoints
or target zones for the controlled variables are taken into account during optimization as well
as possible. The target zones for the controlled variables are therefore soft limits, which are

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


706 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

maintained as well as possible although they cannot be guaranteed. Using a reference variable
filter for future setpoint settings, the control response of the controller can be fine-tuned during
operation.
You can achieve significant improvements in control performance when individual
disturbances can be measured, for example variations in throughput. In this case, it is a good
idea to take into account a model of the influence of this disturbance on the controlled variables
when predicting the controlled variables so that the controller can react preemptively to such
disturbances.

Operating point optimization


The integrated static operating point optimization can be used when at least one controlled
variable provides certain degrees of freedom. No exact setpoint is specified for such controlled
variables. Instead there is a tolerance band, e.g.
SP2OptHiLim…SP2OptLoLim
within which the process value, CV2, must remain. These areas can be defined for any subset
of the relevant controlled variables. From an economic perspective, different values within the
tolerance range can be more or less favorable. With the help of the optimization function, the
optimal economic point can be found within the tolerance range. This is done by defining a
target function (performance criterion), which depends on the manipulated variable and
controlled variable of the predictive controller. This can be, for example, the economic yield of
plant operation per time unit or it may involve specific costs or energy consumption.

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38). The block is
also installed automatically in the startup OB (OB100).
After installation in CFC, follow the steps outlined below:
1. Excite the process with the controller in manual mode by applying a series of manipulated
variable step changes.
2. Record the measured data with the CFC trend display and export it to an archive file.
3. Select the ModPreCon instance in the CFC. Start the MPC Configurator with the command
Edit > MPC Configurator. The working steps process identification, controller design and
simulation of the closed control loop are executed in the MPC Configurator. You can find
a detailed description of this procedure in the MPC Configurator help. You can find the help
with a button in the MPC Configurator or directly under …\Program Files (x86)\SIEMENS
\STEP7\S7JMPC\s7jmpctb.chm. (the last letter is the language code).
4. Using the Configurator, create an SCL source code for the user data block (DB). It contains
the models and matrices required for a ModPreCon instance.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 707
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

5. Compile the SCL source code in the engineering system and download it to the AS.
6. Enter the number of the data block at the DB_No input parameter of the ModPreCon block.
The values are adopted in the controller by restarting the block using the Restart input
parameter.
Note
During controller design in the MPC Configurator, a controller cycle time and an OB
sampling time are calculated, displayed, and stored in the user data block. You yourself
are responsible for the ModPreCon block being called in the cyclic interrupt level suitable
for the OB sampling time. This is checked in the current ModPreCon version during
initialization. If the SampleTime parameter of the function block does not match the
OB_SampleTime parameter of the user data block, a parameter assignment error
(ErrorNum=3) is displayed. For controller cycle times greater than 5 s, specify the
ModPreCon block in the OB30 and specify the appropriate cycle time for the OB30 in the
hardware configuration of the Simatic CPU. Controller cycle times slower than 20 s cannot
be set in the hardware configuration. The block would then be called every 20s and the
slower sampling time automatically realized by an internal cycle reduction ratio in the block.

For the ModPreCon block, the Advanced Process Library contains a template for a process
tag type as examples and there is an example project (where APL_Example_xx, xx designates
the language variant) containing various application cases for this block. Several application
cases are simulated in the example project and serve to explain how the block works.
Example of a process tag type:
● Model-based predictive control (you can find additional information on this in the Help on
Advanced Process Library > PCS 7 Advanced Process Control Templates > Process tag
types > Model-based predictive control (ModPreCon))
Application cases in example project:
● Predictive control of a 2x2 multi-variable controlled system (you can find additional
information on this in the Help on Advanced Process Library > PCS 7 Advanced Process
Control Templates > Example project APL_Example_xx > Predictive control of a 2x2 multi-
variable controlled system)
● Predictive control of a non-linear process (you can find additional information on this in the
Help on Advanced Process Library > PCS 7 Advanced Process Control Templates >
Example project APL_Example_xx > Predictive control of a non-linear process)

Startup characteristics
When the CPU starts up, the block always starts in manual mode. It is only possible to change
to automatic mode when a user data block is loaded and the internal measured value memory
in ModPreCon is filled with data.
Use the Feature Bit Set startup characteristics (Page 141) to define the startup characteristics
of this block.
You can find additional information on the Feature bit "Set startup characteristics" in the Help
on Advanced Process Library > Basics of APL > Selectable block response> Set startup
characteristics.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


708 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


You can find a description for each parameter in section ModPreCon I/Os (Page 726)

Status bit Parameter


0 Occupied
1 BatchEn
2 SimOn
3 OosAct.Value
4 OosLi.Value
5 AutAct.Value
6 Invalid signal status
7 ManAct.Value
8-9 Not used
10 MV1TrkOn.Value AND NOT (ManAct.Value OR OosAct.Value)
11 MV2TrkOn.Value AND NOT (ManAct.Value OR OosAct.Value)
12 MV3TrkOn.Value AND NOT (ManAct.Value OR OosAct.Value)
13 MV4TrkOn.Value AND NOT (ManAct.Value OR OosAct.Value)
14 Not used
15 DB_Loaded
16 DV_Model Available
17 OptimAct
18 NOT(OptimAct)
19 SimOn AND ManAct
20 J_Mini
21 NOT(J_Mini)
22 ExciteOn AND ManAct.Value
23-30 Not allocated
31 Feature.Bit31: Display of the predictions in the faceplate

Status word allocation for Status2 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 - 30 Not used
31 MS_RelOp

See also
ModPreCon functions (Page 711)
ModPreCon messaging (Page 726)
ModPreCon block diagram (Page 737)
ModPreCon error handling (Page 724)
ModPreCon modes (Page 710)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 709
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

Model-based predictive control (ModPreCon) (Page 2415)


Predictive control of a 2x2 multi-variable controlled system (ModPreConSim) (Page 2445)
Predictive control of a non-linear process (ModPreConNonLinSim) (Page 2445)

5.6.2 ModPreCon modes

Operating modes of ModPreCon


The block can be operated using the following modes:
● Automatic mode (Page 73)
● Manual mode (Page 73)
● Out of service (Page 72)
The next section provides additional block-specific information relating to the general
descriptions.
The aforementioned operating modes are valid for the block with all control channels
(MV1 ... MV4). Moreover, individual control channels can be tracked; see chapter ModPreCon
functions (Page 711) for more information.

"Automatic mode"
You can find general information on "Automatic mode", switching modes and bumpless
switchover in the Manual and automatic mode for control blocks (Page 73) section.

Note
In contrast to PID controllers, it is permitted to run the ModPreCon block in "automatic mode"
without its actuating signals affecting the process because there is no risk of integrator windup.

"Manual mode"
You can find general information on "Manual mode", switching modes and bumpless
switchover in the Manual and automatic mode for control blocks (Page 73) section.

"Out of service"
You can find general information about the "Out of service" mode in the Out of service
(Page 72) section.
With Feature.Bit5 =1 the following output parameter become the status of simulation
16#60, if mode is changed to "Out of service".

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


710 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

With Feature.Bit5 =0 the following output parameter become the status of 16#80, if mode
is changed to "Out of service".
● SP1Out.ST
● SP2Out.ST
● SP3Out.ST
● SP4Out.ST
● SP1OpOut.ST
● SP2OpOut.ST
● SP3OpOut.ST
● SP4OpOut.ST
● CV1Out.ST
● CV2Out.ST
● CV3Out.ST
● CV4Out.ST

See also
ModPreCon block diagram (Page 737)
ModPreCon I/Os (Page 726)
ModPreCon messaging (Page 726)
ModPreCon error handling (Page 724)
Description of ModPreCon (Page 705)

5.6.3 ModPreCon functions

Functions of ModPreCon
The functions for this block are listed below.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 711
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

Generating and limiting the manipulated variable


The manipulated variable MV1 ... MV4 (hereinafter referred to as MVx, x = 1 ... 4) can be
generated as follows:

ManAct MVxTrkOn MVx Limit monitoring State


1 - Manx ManxHiLim "Manual mode", set by the operator
ManxLoLim
0 1 MVxTrk MVxHiLim Tracking with limitation
MVxLoLim
0 0 Automatic manipu‐ MVxHiLim "Automatic mode": Predictive controller al‐
lated variable MVxLoLim gorithm

Remark
If the controller is in "Out of service" mode, the output parameters MV1 ... MV4, depending on
the Feature Bit (Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect at startup (Page 169)),
are set to the last valid value in manual mode or the corresponding neutral position manipulated
variable (SafePos1 ... SafePos4). Refer to the Out of service (Page 72) section for more on
this.
The limited operating range (between MVxHiLim and MVxLoLim) is typically smaller in
automatic mode than in manual mode. With regard to the limited range of validity of a linear
process model for approximating a non-linear process response, this allows the stability of the
closed control loop to be guaranteed within the control range in automatic mode.
The gradients of the manipulated variable (changes per second) are limited to MV1RaLim to
MV4RaLim in "automatic mode". Gradient limitation applies both to the positive and negative
directions.

Tracking and limiting a manipulated variable


The block provides the standard function Tracking and limiting a manipulated variable
(Page 205).
In contrast to PID controllers, tracking the manipulated variables (MV1 ... MV4) is enabled for
specific channels via one of the input parameters MV1TrkOn ... MV4TrkOn. The corresponding
manipulated variable is then tracked by the interconnectable input parameters MV1Trk ...
MV4Trk.

Setting the setpoint internally


With this block, the setpoint must always be set internally at the I/Os SP1 ... SP4. These are
normally operated in the faceplate. In special situations, you can interconnect the setpoints
but they can then no longer be changed using the faceplate.

Setpoint tracking in manual mode


In this situation (SP_TrackCV = 1), the internal setpoints SP1 ... SP4 are tracked to the
assigned process values CV1 ... CV4 in "manual mode". This function allows a bumpless
transfer to "automatic mode". After the transfer, the setpoints can be changed by the operator
again.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


712 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

Setpoint filters
The setpoint filter is the only way of changing the action of the predictive controller without
having to create a new user data block with the MPC Configurator and reinitialize the controller.
The specified time constant PreFilt1 ... PreFilt4 of the setpoint filter can be interpreted
as the required settling time of this CV channel following a setpoint step change. As the time
constant setting increases, the controller works more slowly and less aggressively. In
particular, this reduces the influence of a setpoint step change in one control channel on
neighboring control channels.
Internally, the ModPreCon block works with sets of future setpoints that are compared with the
predicted movements of the controlled variables. Without the setpoint filter, it is assumed that
the current setpoint will continue to remain valid in the future within the prediction horizon. If
there is a setpoint step change, this means that the full value of the new setpoint will be required
in the near future although the process cannot achieve this (according to the prediction). With
the setpoint filter, an asymptotic setpoint trajectory (first order) is calculated from the current
process value to the required setpoint so that the required setpoint is reached in the specified
time.

Note
The setpoint filter also comes into effect without a setpoint step if the process value deviates
significantly from the setpoint due to disturbances. This means that the filter not only slows
down the control response but indirectly also the response to disturbances.

The control response can only be slowed down by the setpoint filter and not accelerated; when
the value is 0, the prefilter is deactivated. It is therefore advisable to set the basic controller
action in the MPC Configurator with the "Manipulated variable change penalty" parameter and
then to optimize this in the software using the function for simulation of the closed control loop.
The setpoint filter should then only be used for fine tuning of the action in the operational
system.

Note
Do not select an excessively long filter time constant. Values that are greater than the control
horizon of the predictive controller (s. ModPreCon user DB, header comment of the SCL
source: "control horizon" times "controller sample time" in seconds) can have undesirable
effects when the dead band is used at the same time. If you wish to dramatically slow down
the reaction of the controller, it is better to use the penalty of the manipulated variable changes
in the MPC Configurator.

Simulating signals
The block provides the standard function Simulating signals (Page 59).
You can simulate the following values:
● Controlled variable (SimCVx , SimCVxLi)

Selecting a unit of measure


The block provides the standard function Selecting a unit of measure (Page 221).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 713
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

Error signal generation and dead band


The block provides the standard function Error signal generation and dead band (Page 201).
In the predictive controller, the error signal is generated over the entire prediction horizon for
each control channel as the deviation between the predicted movement of the process (starting
at the current process value CV1 ... CV4) and future setpoint settings (ending at SP1 ... SP4)
and used to calculate the manipulated variable.
In principle, the effect of the dead bands SP1DeadBand to SP4Deadband is the same as in
a PID controller, but extends over the entire future prediction horizon. In other words, if, for
example, the predicted controlled variable CV1 in the entire prediction horizon is within the
band SP1 ± SP1DeadBand, the controller sees no reason whatsoever to change any
manipulated variable. These are therefore also known as CV bands. In contrast to the
manipulated variable limits, these are not hard constraints that need to be adhered to at all
costs.
In multivariable controllers, it is advisable to make use of the fact that from the perspective of
the application only some of the controlled variables need to move to a specified setpoint
exactly while others only need to remain within a defined range.
A typical example would be quality characteristics for which a tolerance band is specified.
While a dead band in a PID controller tends to put stability at risk, CV bands in individual
controller channels generally relieve the multivariable controller overall.
Using CV bands, the action of a soft override control can be achieved.

Use case for error signal generation with dead band


As long as the pressure in a reactor remains within the set safety limits, the controller is
interested only in product quality. However, as soon as the pressure threatens to leave the
permitted range (in other words, in the prediction it moves towards an illegal value in the future),
the pressure control cuts in. By weighting the controlled variables in the performance index
(see MPC Configurator), the user can specify that predicted violations of the pressure limits
are given a particularly high weighting.

Predictive controller algorithm


The ModPreCon block is derived from the familiar DMC algorithm (Dynamic Matrix Control) .
Future changes to the manipulated variable within the control horizon are calculated according
to the formula:

r r r
∆u = C ⋅ (w − f )

Where:
● w contains the time series of the future setpoints
● f contains the predicted free movement of the controlled variables (with constant
manipulated variables) in the future
● C is the constant controller matrix calculated by the MPC Configurator. C includes both the
process model and the weighting of the manipulated variable changes and the controlled
variables from the performance index of the optimization.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


714 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

Based on the principle of the receding horizon, only the first value is taken from the vector of
the optimum manipulated variable changes over the entire control horizon and applied to the
process. In the next step, the newly arrived process values are taken into account and the
calculation repeated over the entire prediction horizon.
With predictive controllers, the manipulated variable changes are based on the control
deviations predicted in the future, while with a PID controller, they are based on error signal
of the past (possibly also integrated). This can be interpreted as a "looking ahead" strategy.

Anti-windup
When manipulated variable limits are active, anti-windup measures are taken automatically
within the controller. The prediction equations use the real limited values of the manipulated
variable instead of theoretically calculated values.

Model-based disturbance compensation


Model-based disturbance compensation can and should be used when a known disturbance
has a strong influence on the process and its cause can be measured.

The effects of a measurable disturbance (DV1 I/O) on all controlled variables CV1 ... CV4 can
be estimated when the controller is taken into manual mode. This means that no movements
of the controlled variables whatsoever result from changes to the manipulated variable and all
movements result from the disturbance. If the disturbance can be measured but cannot be
actively adjusted, it may be necessary to search through a data archive to find the time
segments in which the disturbance changed.
The identification of the transfer functions from the disturbance variable DV1 to all controlled
variables CV1 ... CV4 (disturbance model, in the graphic above G(1.d) and G(2.d)) is performed
with the MPC Configurator and is analogous to the identification of the main transfer functions
(G(1.1) to G(2.2)). The measured disturbance variable is then switched to the DV1 input of the
ModPreCon block and disturbance compensation is activated with DV_On = 1. As a result, the
effect of the measurable disturbance is taken into account in the prediction and the controller
can start counter measures in advance before the disturbance can have a massive influence
on the controlled variables.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 715
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

Such disturbance compensation is especially effective when the disturbance is constant in


sections and changes from time to time. If a disturbance changes constantly or oscillates,
however, the feedforward control is not enabled during operation of the controller to avoid
constant oscillation of the manipulated variables, although it should be taken into account in
the MPC Configurator when creating the process model.
If there is no disturbance model in the user data block, the DV1 input is ignored.
Typical examples of measurable disturbances are inlet volumes in distillation columns or
throughput of continuous reactors.

Predictive controller with more than one measurable disturbance


If you want to plan for more than one measurable disturbance in an application, but do not
need all four disturbances from the ModPreCon block, you can dedicate the first of the
previously unused control channels for disturbance variable feedforwarding.
Example: You only have two control actions available, so only use MV1 and MV2. Then connect
the additional measurable disturbance variable DV2 to the MV3Trk input parameter and set
MV3TrkOn = 1. For recording training data for the predictive controller, declare MV3Trk as the
third disturbance and also use the CFC trend recorder to record the effect of changes to DV2
on all controlled variables.
Use the MPC Configurator to then determine a process model that describes the effects of
DV2. However, if the DV2 in "automatic mode" of the controller changes due to external
influences, the effect of such change is taken into consideration for predicting future process
reactions through MV3Trk, and predictive methods can be used to compensate. The
performance of the disturbance compensation is exactly the same as that for regular
feedforward control via the input parameters DV and DV_On = 1.
If you want to disable this disturbance compensation in runtime with the unused MV3
manipulated variable, you need to insert a MV3Trk a selector block in front of the SelA02In
input. This allows you to set a constant zero for MV3Trk instead of the measured value DV2,
which stops the effect of MV3 on prediction. (Due to this reassignment, MV3TrkOn must always
remain 1 to prevent the controller from changing the value of MV3.)
This way, up to four measurable disturbances can be selected. However, the sum of the
manipulated variables and disturbances may not exceed a total number of five.

Control of square and non-square systems


In multivariable controllers, the number of manipulated variables should ideally be the same
as the number of controlled variables. This is known as a "square system". As long as
constraints do not influence operation, the controller can, in principle, track all controlled
variables exactly to the selected setpoints.
If there are less manipulated variables than controlled variables, or individual manipulated
variables have reached their limits, there is no freedom in the control problem. This means
that it is not possible for all setpoints to be reached exactly.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


716 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

The ModPreCon algorithm then finds a compromise that can be influenced by the selection of
controlled variable weights (priorities) in the MPC Configurator: Controlled variables with higher
priority will have lower control deviations.

Note
Since the ModPreCon block is a lean predictive controller algorithm without online optimization,
there can be no general guarantee that the compromise found is optimum in a mathematical
sense; in other words, it is the minimum of the fit function taking into account the manipulated
variable limits. In most practical situations, however, the controller finds sensible compromises.
The static operating point optimization it not a dynamic online optimization in this sense, i.e. it
does not change anything in the above-mentioned restriction.

If there are more manipulated variables than controlled variables or if some of the controlled
variables are already within their setpoint bands, there is surplus freedom in the control
problem. A lean predictive controller algorithm, however, cannot recognize this situation
explicitly and use the free manipulated variables for optimization. The ModPreCon block
therefore moves all manipulated variables to values that meet the aims in terms of controlled
variables and then leaves them there. In some situations, however, it can be useful to provide
the controller with more manipulated variables than controlled variables, for example when the
effect of individual manipulated variables is too restricted.
Another approach is to define the excess manipulated variables as pseudo controlled variables
at the same time. You do this by assigning a setpoint with low priority to the pseudo controlled
variables. The controller then attempts to achieve the important control aims as first priority
and, at the same time, attempts to reach certain ideal values for the individual manipulated
variables.

Control of linear and non-linear systems


The ModPreCon algorithm is based on a linear, time invariant process model. As a result, in
much the same way as a PID controller, it is suitable above all for controlling non-linear systems
around a fixed operating point.
Again analogous to the PID controller, there are, however, several possibilities with which the
area of application can be extended with non-linear systems:

Compensation functions between controller and controlled system:


It is, for example, possible to compensate the effect of a non-linear valve characteristic curve
using a polygon block between the MV output and the control input of the valve block. Care
must be taken when implementing the manipulated variable limits. In the same way, the effect
of a non-linearity at the output of the controlled system (for example a sensor characteristic
curve) can be compensated by a polygon block before the CV input of the controller. Remember
that the corresponding SP must also be transformed accordingly. In both cases, the
compensation functions become part of the controlled system from the perspective of the
controller. The aim is always to keep the overall response of the controlled system consisting
of process and compensation elements as linear as possible.

Multimodel control:
This approach is related to the basic idea of operating-point-based parameter control with PID
controllers. Since the model parameter of the ModPreCon block cannot be modified in runtime,

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 717
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

however, the control strategy for selecting the suitable parameter set becomes a control
strategy for selecting the suitable model.
Several ModPreCon instances with different models for different operating points run at the
same time. The local optimal models are determined by starting the process at the various
operating points with small amplitudes, so that only the reaction of the non-linear process in
the ambience of this operating point is registered.
The final manipulated variable for each manipulated variable is formed as a weighted mean
value of the manipulated variables proposed by the controller instances. (It is recommended
that experiments for starting the process for the MPC Configurator are only performed after
implementing the functions for adding the manipulated variables, in order to ensure that the
same conditions applicable when the model is in operation actually take effect.)

:HLJKWLQJ
IDFWRU:L

: : :


&9

; ; ;

The weighting factors 0 ... 1 are formed in the same way as the membership functions known
from fuzzy logic so that the sum of all weights is always one and each controller has the highest
weighting at its own operating point. A polygon with 4 or 5 interpolation points is used to
calculate each individual weighting factor. The weighting factors are calculated based on a
specific measurable PV variable of the process, which is representative for the operating point
of the process. This can be one of the CVx controlled variables, although it does not have to
be. The abscissa of the interpolation points of all polygons is selected in such a way that they
cover the entire value range of PV in order to avoid extrapolation errors.
One should note in this regard that the only non-linear effects in the full multi-variable control
loop that can be modeled are those that correlate exactly to a representative PV variable. This
approach is therefore not suitable for cases in which individual partial transfer functions
demonstrate non-linear effects that depend on various, totally independent variables.
To ensure the stability of the overall control loop, all subcontrollers must be at least stable at
all operating points. In contrast to PID controllers however, an MPC is not affected by windup
problems if it temporarily runs in "automatic mode" but cannot intervene in the real process
(weighting factor zero).
One of the controller instances is defined as the main controller and shown in the operator
faceplate on the OS. All others are connected in such a way that they adopt the operating

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


718 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

mode ("manual"/"automatic mode") and the setpoints from the main controller. The manual
manipulated variables are passed to the secondary controller via the tracking inputs. This
means that no operator intervention is required on secondary controllers.

Note
The manipulated variables of the main controller can be used when switching from automatic
to manual mode. If the process was in the operating range of a secondary controller
beforehand, the current manipulated variables in the process can deviate significantly. In this
case, you should apply the actual manipulated values in effect by manual input in the faceplate
of the primary controller.

You can find an example for multi-model controlling in the example project of Advanced
Process Library under Predictive control of a non-linear process (ModPreConNonLinSim)
(Page 2445).

Trajectory control:
This approach neatly combines the advantages of an open loop controller (Feedforward
Control) with those of a closed loop controller with process value feedback (Closed Loop
Control). The controller follows a previously optimized trajectory of setpoints and manipulated
variables; in other words, it only needs to compensate small deviations between the stored
trajectory and the current plant state. A trajectory is an optimum series of manipulated variables
over time and the process values that match them. The required manipulated variables are
read via the inputs MV1Traj ... MV4Traj into the ModPreCon block and added to the values
of the manipulated variable calculated by the algorithm (in automatic mode only). Among other
things, the advantage of this is that the effective manipulated variable acting on the process
can be configured and is limited to the sum of the trajectory and controller action. The process
values from the trajectory are switched to the corresponding setpoint specifications SP1 ...
SP4 of the controller. As long as the process reacts exactly as planned in the trajectory, it will
respond to the series of manipulated variables from the trajectory with the corresponding series
of process values and the control deviation is zero. It is generally known that a non-linear
dynamic process can linearized around a fixed operating point or a steady state of the system.
It is also possible to linearize it around a trajectory.

Forming the signal status for blocks


The block provides the standard function Forming and outputting the signal status for
technologic blocks (Page 110).
The worst signal status ST_Worst for the block is formed from the following parameters:
● DV1.ST
● CV1.ST
● CV2.ST
● CV3.ST
● CV4.ST

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 719
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133) . The following functionality is
available for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
1 Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 181)
2 Resetting the commands for changing the mode (Page 165)
4 Setting switch or button mode (Page 170)
5 Changes signal status of outputs in OOS (Page 198)
8 Delete history of MV and DV moves during restart (Page 191)
15 Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect with "out of service" operating mode
(Page 170)
16 Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect at startup (Page 169)
24 Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162)

Operator permissions
The block provides the standard function Operator control permissions (Page 265).
The block has the following permissions for the OS_Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 1 = Operator can switch to "automatic mode"
1 Not used
2 1 = Operator can switch to "Out of service" mode
3 Not used
4 Not used
5 1 = Operator can change the setpoint 1
6 1 = Operator can change the manipulated variables of all channels
7 1 = Operator can change operating high limits of the setpoints for all channels
8 1 = Operator can change operating low limits of the setpoints for all channels
9 1 = Operator can change the setpoint 2
10 1 = Operator can change the setpoint 3
11 1 = Operator can change the setpoint 4
12 1 = Operator can change the setpoint filter of all channels
13 - 16 Not used
17 1 = Operator can enable the track setpoint in "manual mode" function
18 1 = Operator can activate the model-based disturbance compensation function
19 1 = Operator can enable the function "Prediction without control response"
20 - 22 Not used
23 1 = Operator can change the dead band parameter of all channels
24 1 = Operator can change the tuning parameters
25 1 = Operator can change the simulation value SimPV1..4
26 1 = Operator can activate the Simulation function

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


720 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

Bit Function
27 1 = Operator can activate the Release for maintenance function
28 1 = Operator can change the manipulated variable limits of all channels
29 1 = Operator can change the gradient limits of manipulated variables of all channels
30 0 = Operator can set the integrated static operating point optimization
31 1 = Operator can set the integrated static operating point optimization

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Release for maintenance


The block provides the standard function Release for maintenance (Page 65).

Specifying the display area for process and setpoint values as well as operations
This block provides the standard function Display and operator input area for process values
and setpoints (Page 216).
In contrast to PID controllers, there are no separate parameters for bar limits. The setpoints
limits are used for all setpoint and actual value bars; manual limits are used as bar limits for
all manipulated variable bars.

Opening additional faceplates


This block provides the standard function Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


This block provides the standard function SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

Integrated static operating point optimization


The integrated static operating point optimization can be used if no exact SPi setpoint is
specified for at least one controlled variable (index i =1...4), but rather the CVi process value
must remain within a tolerance range SPiOptHiLim…SPiOptLoLim. The tolerance range must,
of course, be within the valid setpoint limits SPiHiLim…SPiLoLim for this control channel. The
tolerance range SPiOptHiLim…SPiOptLoLim is not coupled to the operator-controlled setpoint
SPi. If the setpoint is changed, the tolerance range is not automatically shifted. If you want to
do this nevertheless, interconnect the SPiOpOut output parameters via two adders to the
width of the tolerance range at the inputs SPiOptHiLim and SPiOptLoLim.
From an economic perspective, different values within the tolerance range can be more or less
favorable. With the help of the optimization function, the optimal economic point can be found
within the tolerance range.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 721
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

This is done by defining a target function (performance criterion), which depends on the
manipulated variable and controlled variable of the predictive controller. This can be, for
example, the economic yield of plant operation per time unit or it may involve specific costs or
energy consumption.
J= GradMV1*MV1 +GradMV2*MV2 +GradMV3*MV3 +GradMV4*MV4
+GradCV1*CV1 +GradCV2*CV2 +GradCV3*CV3 +GradCV4*CV4
+J0
You specify the individual GradXVi coefficients of the gradient vector as input variables at the
ModPreCon function block in the CFC or in the parameter view of the faceplate. If individual
coefficients vary with time, e.g. they are dependent on current market prices, you can also
interconnect these input variables. If individual manipulated or controlled variables have no
influence on the performance criterion, leave the corresponding coefficients at the default
value, zero.
You can use the binary J_Mini input parameter to specify whether the target function is to be
maximized or minimized, based on whether this involves yields or costs (J_Mini = 1 :
minimization).
The term J0 combines all contributions to the target function that do not depend on
manipulated variables and controlled variables. These contributions have no effect on the
optimum values in the decision variables, but are applied for calculating the current value of
employed performance criterion similar to the above-mentioned formula.
Within the controller, the terms of the target function that depend on manipulated variables are
converted to make their dependence on the controlled variables visible. To do this, the inverse
stationary process model from the MPC Configurator is used. This requires that the number
of manipulated variables matches the number of controlled variables. If the number of
manipulated variables does not match the number of controlled variables, the largest possible
square submodel in the matrix of the transfer functions is truncated from the top left. If there
are more manipulated variables than controlled variables, for example, only the first
manipulated variables are used, in accordance with the number of controlled variables.
Constraints for the controlled variables take the form of the above-mentioned tolerance ranges
for setpoints. The controller takes care of adhering to the manipulated variable limits, in any
case; they do not have to separately specified as constraints for the optimization.
Enable the optimization using the binary input variable OptimizeOn in the controller faceplate.
The optimizer then returns setpoints within the tolerance ranges that are optimal for the
performance criterion. These setpoints are then sent to the control algorithm, which handles
them in the same way as conventionally specified setpoints (with or without dead band). The
operable SP1...SP4 setpoints are not tracked to the optimized setpoints; when optimization
is disabled, the old setpoints from the faceplate take effect once again. When selecting
variables for archiving and graphic plotter, ensure you use the SP1Out...SP4Out setpoint
actually in effect and not the SP1...SP4. input variables.
The current value of the performance criterion is displayed at the J_Actual output variables.
You can find additional information about the topic of static operating point optimization in the
online help for the MPC configuration editor.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


722 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

Display of the prediction of free movement


The prediction of free motion is a forecast for the future behavior of the process within the
overall prediction horizon, under the assumption that all manipulated variables are frozen at
their current values. The time length of the prediction horizon is indicated in the output
parameter PrediHorizon in the [s] unit.
The prediction of free motion is recalculated in each sampling step within the control algorithm.
If the manipulated variables is to a constant value in manual mode, the prediction of the free
movement is actually a realistic prediction for the future process response. It can therefore be
represented graphically in the faceplate at least in terms of quality. For this purpose, five
equidistant interpolation values are copied from the prediction horizon, and displayed in the
standard view of the faceplate as a vertical bar next to the current process value.
Example: The prediction horizon is 1800s=30min and the current time is labeled with the index
k. The prediction for k+6min, and next to it k+12min, up to k+30min then appears on the right
next to the bar of the current process value. If the upper border of the bar is conceptually
connected with a line (red in the picture red), you can imaging the curve created by the future
course of the process value over the next half hour.
In automatic mode (tracking function is switched off), the value of the manipulated variables
changes with each sampling step. The prediction of free movement is then only a fictional
mathematical formulation within the algorithm, and not a realistic prediction for the future
process response. This is why the prediction is only displayed in manual mode or in automatic
mode with active tracking function. The display can be generally suppressed using
Feature.Bit31.

Prediction without control response


In this special "operating mode" (comparable to the block-internal simulation), the controller
only monitors the process and indicates what it would like to do in the next sampling step
without actively intervening in the process. This allows you as the user to build trust before
"switching active" the controller the first time, i.e. actively intervening in the process.
"Prediction Mode" is activated via the binary input variable PredictMode or in "Parameters" in
the faceplate view. Setpoints and process values are read as in normal automatic mode. The
prediction of the free movement and manipulated variable change for the next sampling step
are calculated as in normal automatic mode. The starting point for the prediction of the
manipulated variable for the next sampling step, however, is the current process value of the
follow-up control loop at the MV1Trk…MV4Trk tracking inputs. The predicted manipulated
variables are not output at the normal outputs MV1...4, but rather at the MV1Pred...MV4Pred
outputs, which were especially introduced for this purpose, and are displayed in the standard
view of the faceplate on the left next to MV1...4, as long as "Prediction Mode" is active.
● When the controller is in automatic mode, in "Prediction Mode" all MVi (i=1..4) are set to
match the assigned MViTrk input parameters, similar to tracking mode.
● When the controller in manual mode, all MVi are set to the desired manual values regardless
of "Prediction Mode".
● When "Prediction Mode" is disabled, all MViPred always equal the assigned MVi.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 723
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

Automatic process trigger for model identification


In order to determine the process model for the model predictive controller, the process must
be artificially triggered in order to observe its dynamic response and record it in the form of
training data. This trigger can be specified manually in manual mode of the controller.
Alternatively, a suitable trigger signal can be generated automatically in the form a defined,
symmetrical sequence of manipulated variable jumps. The trigger signals are calculated by
an auxiliary function block, "AutoExcitation", which is built into the process tag type and
interconnected with ModPreCon .
Additional MV1Excite…MV4Excite input variables are required for this on the controller.
Process triggering performed in manual mode of the controller, because automatic mode
cannot be activated before modeling. The new process trigger "operating mode" can only be
controlled via the ExciteOn input bit on the Engineering System, and not on the operator station,
since the CFC is needed for data recording in any case. However, process triggering must
be displayed on the OS in standard view at the lower left.
Manual intervention per faceplate remains possible even during the triggering. The values of
the MV1Excite...MV4Excite input parameters are therefore only written to the
MV1Man...MV4Man manual values event-based, but only if they change.
You can find additional details on automatic process triggering in the online help for the MPC
configuration editor.

See also
Description of ModPreCon (Page 705)
ModPreCon messaging (Page 726)
ModPreCon I/Os (Page 726)
ModPreCon block diagram (Page 737)
ModPreCon error handling (Page 724)
ModPreCon modes (Page 710)

5.6.4 ModPreCon error handling

Error handling of ModPreCon


Refer to section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions for the error handling of all
blocks.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


724 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum output parameter can be used to output the following error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Default value when the block is installed; this message is irrelevant.
0 There is no error.
3 Configuration error: Block is inserted in the wrong OB, cycle time of the OB is not
suited for controller configuration.
32 The value of CV1 can no longer be displayed in the real number field or is not a
number.
33 The value of CV2 can no longer be displayed in the real number field or is not a
number.
34 The value of CV3 can no longer be displayed in the real number field or is not a
number.
35 The value of CV4 can no longer be displayed in the real number field or is not a
number.
36 The MV_Trk1 value can no longer be displayed in the real number field or is not a
number.
37 The MV_Trk2 value can no longer be displayed in the real number field or is not a
number.
38 The MV_Trk3 value can no longer be displayed in the real number field or is not a
number.
39 The MV_Trk4 value can no longer be displayed in the real number field or is not a
number.
51 AutModLi = 1 and ManModLi = 1
90 The controller matrix could not be loaded from the user data block.

The ErrorOpt output parameter is used to output the status of the lower-level LPOptim block.
See ModPreCon I/Os (Page 726) for more.

See also
ModPreCon block diagram (Page 737)
ModPreCon messaging (Page 726)
ModPreCon functions (Page 711)
ModPreCon modes (Page 710)
Description of ModPreCon (Page 705)
Description of LPOptim (Page 953)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 725
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

5.6.5 ModPreCon messaging

Messaging
This block does not offer messaging.

See also
Description of ModPreCon (Page 705)
ModPreCon functions (Page 711)
ModPreCon I/Os (Page 726)
ModPreCon block diagram (Page 737)
ModPreCon error handling (Page 724)
ModPreCon modes (Page 710)

5.6.6 ModPreCon I/Os


I/Os of ModPreCon

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AutModLi* 1 = Automatic mode via interconnection or STRUCT -
SFC (controlled by ModLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AutModOp* 1 = Automatic mode via operator (controlled BOOL 0
by ModLiOp = 0)
BatchEn 1 = Enabled for allocation by batch control BOOL 0
BatchID Batch ID DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name STRING[32] ''
CV1 Control variable 1 (process value) STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CV1_Unit Unit of measure for control variable 1 (proc‐ INT 1001
ess value)
CV2 Manipulated variable 2 (process value) STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CV2_Unit Unit of measure for manipulated variable 2 INT 1001
(process value)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


726 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

Parameter Description Type Default


CV3 Manipulated variable 3 (process value) STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CV3_Unit Unit of measure for manipulated variable 3 INT 1001
(process value)
CV4 manipulated variable 4 (process value) STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CV4_Unit Unit of measure for manipulated variable 4 INT 1001
(process value)
DB_No Number of the data block in which the con‐ INT 0
troller data is saved.
DV_On 1 = Activate the feedforward control from BOOL 1
DV1
DV1 Disturbance variable STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1
ExciteOn 1 = Automatic process trigger; MViExcite BOOL 0
input parameters are written to the MVi out‐
puts
Feature I/O for additional ModPreCon functions STRUCT -
(Page 711) ● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
GradCV1 Gradient vector for performance criterion, STRUCT -
element (factor) for CV1 ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
GradCV2 Gradient vector for performance criterion, STRUCT -
element (factor) for CV2 ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
GradCV3 Gradient vector for performance criterion, STRUCT -
element (factor) for CV3 ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
GradCV3 Gradient vector for performance criterion, STRUCT -
element (factor) for CV3 ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
GradCV4 Gradient vector for performance criterion, STRUCT -
element (factor) for CV4 ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 727
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

Parameter Description Type Default


GradMV1 Gradient vector for performance criterion, STRUCT -
element (factor) for MV1 ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
GradMV2 Gradient vector for performance criterion, STRUCT -
element (factor) for MV2 ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
GradMV3 Gradient vector for performance criterion, STRUCT -
element (factor) for MV3 ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
GradMV4 Gradient vector for performance criterion, STRUCT -
element (factor) for MV4 ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
J_Actual_Unit Physical unit of performance J_Actual INT 0
J_Mini 1 = Minimize, 0 = maximize BOOL 0
J0 Value of the performance criterion in the REAL 0
operating point
ManModLi* 1 = Manual mode via interconnection or STRUCT -
SFC (controlled by ModLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManModOp* 1 = Manual mode via OS operator (control‐ BOOL 0
led by ModLiOp = 0)
ModLiOp Operating mode switchover by: STRUCT -
● 0 = Operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● 1 = Interconnection or SFC ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MS_RelOp* 1 = Release for maintenance by OS opera‐ BOOL 0
tor
MV1_Unit Unit of measure for manipulated variable 1 INT 1342
MV1Excite MV1 for automatic process trigger STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV1HiLim High limit of manipulated variable MV1 REAL 100.0
MV1LoLim Low limit of manipulated variable MV1 REAL ● 0.0
MV1Man* Manual value: Operator input for setting the REAL 0.0
manipulated variable MV1 in manual mode
MV1ManHiLim High limit of manipulated variable MV1 in REAL 100.0
manual mode
MV1ManLoLim Low limit of manipulated variable MV1 in REAL 0.0
manual mode
MV1RaLim Gradient limit of the manipulated variable REAL 100.0
MV1 per sampling step
MV1Traj Trajectory value that is added to the manip‐ REAL 0.0
ulated variable MV1

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


728 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

Parameter Description Type Default


MV1Trk Tracking value for the manipulated variable STRUCT -
MV1 ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV1TrkOn 1 = Tracking of manipulated variable MV1 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV2_Unit Unit of measure for manipulated variable 2 INT 1342
MV2Excite MV2 for automatic process trigger STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV2HiLim High limit of manipulated variable MV2 REAL 100.0
MV2LoLim Low limit of manipulated variable MV2 REAL 0.0
MV2Man* Manual value: Operator input for setting the REAL 0.0
manipulated variable MV2 in manual mode
MV2ManHiLim High limit of manipulated variable MV2 in REAL 100.0
manual mode
MV2ManLoLim Low limit of manipulated variable MV2 in REAL 0.0
manual mode
MV2RaLim Gradient limit of the manipulated variable REAL 100.0
MV2 per sampling step
MV2Traj Trajectory value that is added to the manip‐ REAL 0.0
ulated variable MV2
MV2Trk Tracking value for the manipulated variable STRUCT -
MV2 ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV2TrkOn 1 = Tracking of manipulated variable MV2 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV3_Unit Unit of measure for manipulated variable 3 INT 1342
MV3Excite MV3 for automatic process trigger STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV3HiLim High limit of manipulated variable MV3 REAL 100.0
MV3LoLim Low limit of manipulated variable MV3 REAL 0.0
MV3Man* Manual value: Operator input for setting the REAL 0.0
manipulated variable MV3 in manual mode
MV3ManHiLim High limit of manipulated variable MV3 in REAL 100.0
manual mode
MV3ManLoLim Low limit of manipulated variable MV3 in REAL 0.0
manual mode
MV3RaLim Gradient limit of the manipulated variable REAL 100.0
MV3 per sampling step
MV3Traj Trajectory value that is added to the manip‐ REAL 0.0
ulated variable MV3

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 729
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

Parameter Description Type Default


MV3Trk Tracking value for the manipulated variable STRUCT -
MV3 ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV3TrkOn 1 = Tracking of manipulated variable MV3 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV4_Unit Unit of measure for manipulated variable 4 INT 1342
MV4Excite MV4 for automatic process trigger STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV4HiLim High limit of manipulated variable MV4 REAL 100.0
MV4LoLim Low limit of manipulated variable MV4 REAL 0.0
MV4Man* Manual value: Operator input for setting the REAL 0.0
manipulated variable MV4 in manual mode
MV4ManHiLim High limit of manipulated variable MV4 in REAL 100.0
manual mode
MV4ManLoLim Low limit of manipulated variable MV4 in REAL 0.0
manual mode
MV4RaLim Gradient limit of the manipulated variable REAL 100.0
MV4 per sampling step
MV4Traj Trajectory value that is added to the manip‐ REAL 0.0
ulated variable MV4
MV4Trk Tracking value for the manipulated variable STRUCT -
MV4 ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV4TrkOn 1 = Tracking of manipulated variable MV4 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Occupied 1 = Allocated by SIMATIC BATCH BOOL 0
OosLi 1 = Out of service, via interconnection or STRUCT -
SFC (0-1 edge transition) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosOp* 1 = Out of service, via OS operator BOOL 0
OpSt_In Input parameter for local operator authori‐ DWORD 16#00000000
zation, connected with the Out output pa‐
rameter of the upstream block, OpStations
OptimOffOp 1 = Disable optimization, normal setpoints BOOL 0
SP1...SP4 in effect
OptimOnOp 1 = Enable optimization, optimized set‐ BOOL 0
points SP1Out ... SP4Out in effect

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


730 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

Parameter Description Type Default


OS_Perm I/O for operator permissions STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● Bit 25: BOOL ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
PredictMode 1 = "Prediction mode" enabled, prediction BOOL 0
only, no intervention in the process
PreFilt1 Settling time [s] of the setpoint filter for set‐ REAL 0.0
point SP1
PreFilt2 Time constant [s] of the setpoint filter for REAL 0.0
setpoint SP2
PreFilt3 Time constant [s] of the setpoint filter for REAL 0.0
setpoint SP3
PreFilt4 Time constant [s] of the setpoint filter for REAL 0.0
setpoint SP4
Restart* 1 = Restart of the block and adoption of the BOOL 1
data from the user block that is entered at
the input parameter DB_No
SafePos1 Neutral position for MV1 BOOL 0
SafePos2 Neutral position for MV2 BOOL 0
SafePos3 Neutral position for MV3 BOOL 0
SafePos4 Neutral position for MV4 BOOL 0
SampleTime Sampling time [s] (assigned automatically) REAL 1.0
SelFp1 1 = Call a block saved in this parameter as ANY -
an additional faceplate in the standard view
SelFp2 1 = Call a block saved in this parameter as ANY -
an additional faceplate in the preview
SimCV1* Controlled variable CV1 (process value) REAL 0.0
which is used with SimOn = 1
SimCV2* Controlled variable CV2 (process value) REAL 0.0
which is used with SimOn = 1
SimCV3* Controlled variable CV3 (process value) REAL 0.0
which is used with SimOn = 1
SimCV4 Controlled variable CV4 (process value) REAL 0.0
which is used with SimOn = 1
SimCV1Li Controlled variable CV1 (process value) STRUCT -
that is used for SimOnLi.Value = 1 ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
(SimLiOp.Value =1)
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
SimCV2Li Controlled variable CV2 (process value) STRUCT -
that is used for SimOnLi.Value = 1 ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
(SimLiOp.Value = 1)
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
SimCV3Li Controlled variable CV3 (process value) STRUCT -
that is used for SimOnLi.Value = 1 ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
(SimLiOp.Value = 1)
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 731
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

Parameter Description Type Default


SimCV4Li Controlled variable CV4 (process value) STRUCT -
that is used for SimOnLi.Value = 1 ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
(SimLiOp.Value = 1)
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
SimLiOp Activation/deactivation of the simulation by: STRUCT -
0 = Operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
1 = Interconnection or SFC ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SimOnLi 1 = Simulation via interconnection or SFC STRUCT -
(controlled by SimLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SimOn* 1 = Simulation on BOOL 0
SP_TrkCV 1 = Setpoints follow the CVs in manual BOOL 0
mode and in tracking
SP1* Setpoint 1 STRUCT -
SP1.ST=FF: Operable in faceplate ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
SP1DeadBand Width of the dead band control of CV1 REAL 0.0
SP1HiLim High limit for setpoint 1 REAL 100.0
SP1LoLim Low limit for setpoint 1 REAL 0.0
SP1OptHiLim High limit for optimization of setpoint 1 REAL 100.0
SP1OptLoLim Low limit for optimization of setpoint 1 REAL 0.0
SP2* Setpoint 2 STRUCT -
SP2.ST=FF: Operable in faceplate ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
SP2DeadBand Width of the dead band control of CV2 REAL 0.0
SP2HiLim High limit for setpoint 2 REAL 100.0
SP2LoLim Low limit for setpoint 2 REAL 0.0
SP2OptHiLim High limit for optimization of setpoint 2 REAL 100.0
SP2OptLoLim Low limit for optimization of setpoint 2 REAL 0.0
SP3* Setpoint 3 STRUCT -
SP3.ST=FF: Operable in faceplate ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
SP3DeadBand Width of the dead band control of CV3 REAL 0.0
SP3HiLim High limit for setpoint 3 REAL 100.0
SP3LoLim Low limit for setpoint 3 REAL 0.0
SP3OptHiLim High limit for optimization of setpoint 3 REAL 100.0
SP3OptLoLim Low limit for optimization of setpoint 3 REAL 0.0
SP4* Setpoint 4 STRUCT -
SP4.ST=FF: Operable in faceplate ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
SP4DeadBand Width of the dead band control of CV4 REAL 0.0
SP4HiLim High limit for setpoint 4 REAL 100.0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


732 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

Parameter Description Type Default


SP4LoLim Low limit for setpoint 4 REAL 0.0
SP4OptHiLim High limit for optimization of setpoint 4 REAL 100.0
SP4OptLoLim Low limit for optimization of setpoint 4 REAL 0.0
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use in PCS 7 OS BYTE 16#00

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AutAct 1 = Automatic mode is active STRUCT -
0 = Manual mode is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CV1Out Output of manipulated variable 1 (process STRUCT -
value) ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CV2Out Output of manipulated variable 2 (process STRUCT -
value) ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CV3Out Output of manipulated variable 3 (process STRUCT -
value) ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CV4Out Output of manipulated variable 4 (process STRUCT -
value) ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without errors BOOL 0
ErrorNum Output of pending error number. You can find INT -1
information via the error numbers that are
output by this block at ModPreCon error han‐
dling (Page 724)
ErrorOpt Error number of the integrated optimization INT 0
function, see the description of function block
LPOptim
Fut1_y1... Fut1_y5 Prediction of free movement of CV1 for five REAL 0
future points in time within the prediction ho‐
rizon
Fut2_y1... Fut2_y5 Prediction of free movement of CV2 for five REAL 0
future points in time within the prediction ho‐
rizon
Fut3_y1... Fut3_y5 Prediction of free movement of CV3 for five REAL 0
future points in time within the prediction ho‐
rizon

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 733
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

Parameter Description Type Default


Fut4_y1... Fut4_y5 Prediction of free movement of CV4 for five REAL 0
future points in time within the prediction ho‐
rizon
J_Actual Current value of the performance criterion REAL 0
Loop1Closed 1 = Control loop for CV1 closed STRUCT -
0 = Control loop for CV1 open ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Loop2Closed 1 = Control loop for CV2 closed STRUCT -
0 = Control loop for CV2 open ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Loop3Closed 1 = Control loop for CV3 closed STRUCT -
0 = Control loop for CV3 open ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Loop4Closed 1 = Control loop for CV4 closed STRUCT -
0 = Control loop for CV4 open ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManAct 1 = Manual mode active STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MS_Release Release for maintenance: STRUCT -
1 = Release by OS operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV1 Control variable 1 (control signal) STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV1HiAct 1 = High limit of manipulated variable 1 STRUCT -
reached or exceeded ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV1LoAct 1 = Low limit of manipulated variable 1 STRUCT -
reached or exceeded ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV1Pred One-step prediction for MV1 in the "Predic‐ REAL 0
tion without control response" mode
MV2 Manipulated variable 2 (control signal) STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV2HiAct 1 = High limit of manipulated variable 2 STRUCT -
reached or exceeded ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV2LoAct 1 = Low limit of manipulated variable 2 STRUCT -
reached or exceeded ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


734 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

Parameter Description Type Default


MV2Pred One-step prediction for MV2 in the "Predic‐ REAL 0
tion without control response" mode
MV3 Manipulated variable 3 (control signal) STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV3HiAct 1 = High limit of manipulated variable 3 STRUCT -
reached or exceeded ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV3LoAct 1 = Low limit of manipulated variable 3 STRUCT -
reached or exceeded ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV3Pred One-step prediction for MV3 in the "Predic‐ REAL 0
tion without control response" mode
MV4 Manipulated variable 4 (control signal) STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV4HiAct 1 = High limit of manipulated variable 4 STRUCT -
reached or exceeded ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV4LoAct 1 = Low limit of manipulated variable 4 STRUCT -
reached or exceeded ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV4Pred One-step prediction for MV4 in the "Predic‐ REAL 0
tion without control response" mode
NumberCVs Number of controlled variables (process val‐ INT 0
ues) used
NumberDVs Number of disturbances used INT 0
NumberMVs Number of manipulated variables used INT 4
OosAct 1 = Block is "out of service" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpSt_Out Value of the OpSt_In input parameter, for DWORD 16#00000000
feedforwarding to other blocks. Bit 31 of this
parameter is used by Feature.Bit24
OptimAct 1 = Optimization is active BOOL 0
OptimAvailable 1 = Optimization available, 0 = Optimization BOOL 0
not available, because old user data block is
loaded
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with settings changed by DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
the block algorithm
PrediHorizon Prediction horizon [s] REAL 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 735
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

Parameter Description Type Default


SP1OpOut Copy of the operable setpoint 1 for step-ena‐ STRUCT -
bling ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP2OpOut Copy of the operable setpoint 2 for step-ena‐ STRUCT -
bling ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP3OpOut Copy of the operable setpoint 3 for step-ena‐ STRUCT -
bling ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP4OpOut Copy of the operable setpoint 4 for step-ena‐ STRUCT -
bling ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP1Out Setpoint 1 used by controller STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP2Out Setpoint 2 used by controller STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP3Out Setpoint 3 used by controller STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP4Out Setpoint 4 used by controller STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
Status1 Status word 1 DWORD 16#00
Status2 Status word 2 DWORD 16#00

See also
Description of ModPreCon (Page 705)
ModPreCon messaging (Page 726)
ModPreCon block diagram (Page 737)
ModPreCon modes (Page 710)
Neutral position for motors, valves and controllers (Page 48)
Opening additional faceplates (Page 217)
Description of OpStations (Page 423)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


736 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

5.6.7 ModPreCon block diagram

ModPreCon block diagram


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

See also
ModPreCon I/Os (Page 726)
ModPreCon messaging (Page 726)
ModPreCon error handling (Page 724)
ModPreCon functions (Page 711)
ModPreCon modes (Page 710)
Description of ModPreCon (Page 705)

5.6.8 Operator control and monitoring

5.6.8.1 ModPreCon views

Views of the ModPreCon block


The block ModPreCon provides the following views:
● ModPreCon standard view (Page 738)
● ModPreCon trend view (Page 748)
● ModPreCon parameter view (Page 743)
● ModPreCon parameter view channel 1 to 4 (Page 745)
● ModPreCon preview (Page 746)
● Memo view (Page 315)
● Batch view (Page 313)
● Block icon for ModPreCon (Page 749)
Refer to the sections Structure of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure
(Page 239) for general information on the faceplate and block icon.

See also
Trend view (Page 317)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 737
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

5.6.8.2 ModPreCon standard view

ModPreCon standard view


 
 
  






 




Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


738 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller













The standard view has an upper half and a lower half. You can change between the two halves
with the arrow keys. The upper half shows all available controlled variable channels with their
setpoints, while the lower half shows all available manipulated variable channels.

Upper screen half (controlled variables)

(1) Displaying and switching the operating mode


This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
● Manual mode (Page 73)
● Automatic mode (Page 73)
● Out of service (Page 72)
Refer to section Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) for information
on switching the operating mode.

(2), (3), (4) and (5) Displaying and switching for values for channels 1 to 4
This area always has the same layout for channels 1 to 4:
(6) High and low scale range for the process value

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 739
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

These values provide information on the display range for the bar graph of the process value.
The scale range is defined in the engineering system.
(7) Displaying and changing the process value including signal status
This area shows the current process value with the corresponding signal status.
In the object properties (I/Os PVx_Out > Identifier) of the block in CFC, you can specify the
text to be displayed for these parameters.
(8) Displaying and changing the setpoint including signal status
This area shows the current setpoint with the corresponding signal status. Refer to the
Changing values (Page 270) section for information on changing the setpoint.

(11) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
Use this navigation button to open the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system. The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the engineering
system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in the section Opening additional faceplates
(Page 217).

(12) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Maintenance"
Additional information on this is available in section Release for maintenance (Page 65) Display
area for block states.

(13) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Simulation"
● "Process excitation"
The automatic process trigger is fed forward using the upstream block AutoExcitation for
recording learning data for the MPC configurator. The manipulated variable step changes
are added to the manipulated values 1 to 4 according to schedule. Avoid external
disturbances to the process while the process trigger is running. The manipulated variables
can be changed manually while the process trigger is running.
You can find additional information on this in the section Simulating signals (Page 59).

(14) Display area for block states


● "Invalid signal"

(15) Display area for block states


● "Tracking on"

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


740 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

(16) Bar graph for the process value 1


There is a bar graph for the process value for every channel 1 to 4.
This area shows the current process value in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the
bar graph depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).

(17) Bar graph for the setpoint 1


There is a bar graph for the setpoint for every channel 1 to 4.
This area shows the current setpoint in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the bar
graph depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).

(18) Prediction of free movement


This area shows you the prediction of free movement in the form of a bar graph. For each
channel from 1 to 4, there is a bar graph for the prediction of free movement, that is, for the
future behavior of the process within the overall prediction horizon, under the assumption that
all manipulated variables are frozen at their current values.
This is why the prediction of free movement is only displayed in manual mode or in automatic
mode with active tracking function.
The value range of the bar graph matches the value range of the assigned setpoint and current
value bar.
ModPreCon functions (Page 711)

(19) Displaying the limits


These triangles show the SP_HiLim and SP_LoLim setpoint limits configured in the
engineering system (ES).

(20) Static operating point optimization


Activate the optimization using the button at bottom right. Activation means that the optimized
setpoints SP1Out...SP4Out are actually used instead of the SP1...SP4 setpoints specified in
the faceplate for the closed-loop control. (The actual calculation of the optimum setpoints
depends on this, and is only performed if one of the input variables for the optimization has
changed.) The current value the economic performance criterion J appears in the display field
below.
When optimization is enabled, the optimum setpoints are displayed on the setpoint bar as
small, horizontal lines and highlighted with the abbreviation "opt.". The numerical values of the
optimum setpoints are then displayed left of the input fields for the setpoints.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 741
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

Lower screen half (manipulated variables)

(9) Displaying and changing the manipulated variable including signal status
This area shows the current manipulated variable with the corresponding signal status. Refer
to the Changing values (Page 270) section for information on changing the manipulated
variable. You can only make a change in manual mode.
In the object properties (I/Os MVx > Identifier) of the block in CFC, you can specify the text to
be displayed for these parameters.

(10) Bar graph for the manipulated variable with limit display
This area shows the current manipulated variable in the form of a bar graph. The visible area
in the bar graph depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES):
● Limits: MVxHiLim and MVxLoLim
● Display area: MVxManHiLim and MVxManLoLim

(14) Display for block states


There is a display for the states of the block for every channel 1 to 4:
● "Tracking"

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


742 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

5.6.8.3 ModPreCon parameter view

Parameter view of ModPreCon

(1) Settings
You can activate the following functions for the controller in this area:
● "SP := CV in manual mode": ☑ Bumpless switchover from "manual mode" to "automatic
mode"
● "Prediction only" activate this special "operating mode" by selecting the check box. The
controller then only listens in on the process and indicates what it would like to do in the
next sampling step without actively intervening in the process
● "Disturbance compensation": ☑ Select disturbance feedforward
● "Disturbance variable"
You cannot change the disturbance variable, it can only be displayed.
In the object properties (I/Os DV1 > Identifier) of the block in CFC, you can specify the text to
be displayed for this parameter.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 743
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

(2) Service
You can select the following functions in this area:
● "Simulation"
● "Release for maintenance"
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for more on
this.
You can find information on this area in the section:
● Simulating signals (Page 59)
● Release for maintenance (Page 65)

(3) Enabled operation


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Icons for enabled operation:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).

(4) Optimization
Direction of the optimization (minimize or maximize)
By default, the optimizer seeks to maximize the performance function, in the assumption that
it is dealing with economic yield. If you want to search a minimum, however, because you are
dealing with costs or consumption values, click this button.
Specification of performance criterion for the operating point optimization
The performance criterion consists of a weighted sum of all manipulated and controlled
variables. For each manipulated variable and controlled variable, enter the appropriate
weighting factor, i.e. the coefficient of the gradient vector. Zero means that the value of the
corresponding manipulated variable or controlled variable no direct influence on the economic
yield. If the controller has less than four manipulated variables or controlled variables, the
irrelevant variables are hidden automatically.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


744 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

5.6.8.4 ModPreCon parameter view channel 1 to 4

Parameter view channel 1 to 4 for ModPreCon


The layout of the parameter view for channels 1 to 4 is always identical:

(1) Displaying and changing the limit parameters for the setpoint
You can change the following parameters for the setpoint in this area:
● "H range": High limit for setpoint operation
● "H range optimization": High limit for optimizing the setpoint
● "Operator input": Display of the setpoint entered in the standard view, cannot be operated
here.
● "Dead band": Dead band (Page 62), Error signal generation and dead band section
● "Optimal setpoint": Calculated by the optimization, cannot be operated
● "L range optimization": Low limit for optimizing the setpoint
● "L range": Low limit for setpoint operation
● "Prefilter": ModPreCon functions (Page 711), Setpoint filter section

You can find additional information on this in the section Changing values (Page 270) .

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 745
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

(2) Displaying and changing the limit parameters for the manipulated variable
You can change the following parameters for the manipulated variable in this area:
● "H range": Upper limit of the manipulated variable for automatic mode
● "L range": Low limit of manipulated variable for automatic mode
● "Gradient limit": Maximum (absolute) change in the manipulated variable per sampling step

(3) Enabled operation


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Icons for enabled operation:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).

5.6.8.5 ModPreCon preview

Preview for ModPreCon

(1) Process value


This area displays the real process values (PVx) and the prediction horizon.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


746 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

In the object properties (I/Os PVxOut > Identifier) of the block in CFC, you can specify the text
to be displayed for these parameters.
Prediction horizon
The prediction horizon specifies how far the controller looks into the furutre of its calculation.

(2) Enabled operation


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Icons for enabled operation:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).
The following enabled operations for parameters are shown here:
● "Automatic": You can switch to "automatic mode".
● "Out of service": You can switch to "Out of service" operating mode.
● " "Local operating permission": Use the ← button to switch to the standard view of the
OpStations block. You can find additional information on this in the section Operator control
permissions (Page 265) .
● "Change SP1": You can change the setpoint 1
● "Change SP2": You can change the setpoint 2
● "Change SP3": You can change the setpoint 3
● "Change SP4": You can change the setpoint 4
● "Change MVs": You can change the manipulated variables
Note
The OS operator must always be able to switch to "manual mode". That is why the switch
to "manual mode" is not shown here in the faceplate.

(3) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
Use this navigation button to open the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system (ES). The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the
engineering system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in the section Opening additional faceplates
(Page 217) .

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 747
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

5.6.8.6 ModPreCon trend view

ModPreCon trend view


There is a block-specific trend view for ModPreCon which is supplied as file
@PG_APL_TrendMPC.pdl and which you can modify if necessary.

(1) Toolbar
(2) Display area for trends
(3) Status bar
(4) Button for switching between archive tags and online tags. The status bar shows if the trend
view is working with online data or archive data.
The Export button is only visible and operable with the "Higher-level process control" operating
permission.
For additional information about the trend view, refer to the WinCC Information System Online
Help.
The trend view is divided into two screen halves.
The upper screen half shows all controlled variables with their associated setpoints. The
setpoint is shown in the same color as the associated process value to allow the assignment
to be identified straight away. Setpoints are dashed lines, process values are bold lines. If a
controlled variable is exactly on the setpoint, it hides the setpoint.
The lower screen half shows all manipulated variables.
Both screen halves use the same color sequence for the individual channels. The sequence
starts at channel 1 with green (standard color for the process value with the PID controller)
and then goes through the color spectrum from top to bottom as far as gray and black. Each
channel has its own y-axis in the corresponding color.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


748 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

See also
ModPreCon views (Page 737)

5.6.8.7 Block icon for ModPreCon

Block icons for ModPreCon


A variety of block icons are available with the following functions:
● Process tag type
● Operating modes
● Signal status, release for maintenance
● Tracking
● Memo display
● Process value (black, with and without decimal places)

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV8.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special features


1

3 Block icon in the full display

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 749
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV7.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special features


1 Block icon in the full display

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


750 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.6 ModPreCon - Model predictive controller

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special features


8

- Block icon in "Out of service"


mode (example with type 1 block
icon)

Additional information on the block icon and the control options in the block icon is available
in the following chapters:
● Configuring the block icons (Page 246)
● Block icon structure (Page 239)
● Operation via the block icon (Page 248).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 751
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

5.7.1 Description of PIDConL

Object name (type + number) and family


Type and number: FB 1874
Family: Control

Area of application for PIDConL


The block is used for the following applications:
● Fixed setpoint control
● Cascade control
● Ratio control
● Split-range control
● Smith predictor closed-loop control
● Override control (override)

How it works
The block is a PID controller with continuous output signal (manipulated variable). It is used
to activate a final controlling element with continuous action input.
The block functions following the PID algorithm with a delayed D component and an integrator
with double precision.
The block is suitable for controlling sluggish control loops, for example, for temperatures and
filling levels, and high-speed control loops, for example, for flow rates and speed. For a given
CPU, a compromise has to be made between the number of controllers and the frequency
with which the individual controllers have to be processed. The faster the modulated control
loops are, i.e. the more frequently the manipulated variables have to be calculated per time
unit, the lower the number of controllers that can be installed.

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38). The block is
also installed automatically in the startup OB (OB100).
For the control loop monitoring to work as planned in the trend view of the controller faceplates,
the
S7_xarchive:='Value, shortterm;'

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


752 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

attributes in the process tag types for control loops at the controller function block must be set
for the following tags:
● Input parameters:
– CPI_In
● Output parameters
– MV
– MV_HiAct
– MV_LoAct
– LoopClosed
– SP
– PV_Out
– PV_ToleHi
– PV_ToleLo
For the PIDConL block, the Advanced Process Library contains templates for process tag
types as examples and there is a example project (APL_Example_xx, xx designates the
language variant) containing different application cases for this block. Several application
cases are simulated in the example project and serve to explain how the block works.
Examples of process tag types:
● PID controller with safety logic and control loop monitoring (PIDConL_ConPerMon)
(Page 2388)
● Split-range controller with control loop monitoring through ConPerMon (SplitrangeControl)
(Page 2399)
● Ratio control with control loop monitoring through ConPerMon (RatioControl) (Page 2402)
● Cascade control with control loop monitoring through ConPerMon (CascadeControl)
(Page 2406)
● PID - control with operating-point-oriented parameter control (GainScheduling)
(Page 2391)
● PID controller with dynamic feedforward control (FfwdDisturbCompensat) (Page 2393)
● Override control (Page 2412)
● PID controller with Smith predictor (SmithPredictorControl) (Page 2396)
● PID controller for PA/FF devices (PIDControl_Lean_Fb) (Page 2387)
Application cases in example project:
● Process simulation including noise generator (ProcSimC; ProcSimS) (Page 2437)
● Cascade control of temperature by using the heat flow (CascadeSim) (Page 2439)
● Control loop monitoring for simulation with colored noise (ConPerMonSim) (Page 2441)
● Feedforward control to compensate a measurable disturbance variable
(DisturbCompSim) (Page 2441)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 753
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

● Operating point-oriented adaptation of parameters (gain scheduling) for non-linear


processes (GainSchedSim) (Page 2442)
● Override control on a pipeline (OverrideSim) (Page 2443)
● Smith predictor for a dead time system (SmithPredictorSim) (Page 2443)
● Filtering of noisy measured values in a control loop (SigSmoothSim) (Page 2444)

Startup characteristics
Use the Feature bit Set startup characteristics (Page 141) to define the startup characteristics
of this block.
The messages are suppressed after startup for the number of cycles set at RunUpCyc.
The following output parameters are written with the corresponding input parameters:
● PV_HysOut
● PV_AH_Out
● PV_WH_Out
● PV_TH_Out
● PV_AL_Out
● PV_WL_Out
● PV_TL_Out

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


You can find a description for each parameter in section PIDConL I/Os (Page 773).

Status bit Parameter


0 Occupied
1 BatchEn
2 SimOn
3 OosAct.Value
4 OosLi.Value
5 AutAct.Value
6 Invalid signal status
7 ManAct.Value
8 SP_ExtAct.Value
9 MV_ForOn.Value
10 MV_TrkOn.Value AND NOT (ManAct.Value OR OosAct.Value OR
MV_ForOn.Value)
11 MV.Value > ManLoLim
12 SimLiOp.Value
13 "Interlock" button is enabled OR Intlock.ST ≠ 16#FF
14 0 = Open padlock in the block icon
1 = Closed padlock in block icon

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


754 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

Status bit Parameter


15 - 17 Not used
18 SimOn AND ManAct
19 AdvCoAct
20 1 = Input parameter Rbk is not interconnected (RbkOut.ST = 16#FF)
21 NegGain
22 1 = SP ramp active
23 OptimEn
24 OptimOcc
25 Not used
26 Display of BypassAct.Value in faceplate (display and operator controls) and block
icon
27 - 28 Not used
29 BypProt
30 Dead band is temporarily disabled
31 Not used

Status word allocation for Status2 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 MsgLock
1 PV_AH_Act.Value
2 PV_WH_Act.Value
3 PV_TH_Act.Value
4 PV_TL_Act.Value
5 PV_WL_Act.Value
6 PV_AL_Act.Value
7 PV_AH_En OR Feature.Bit31
8 PV_WH_En OR Feature.Bit31
9 PV_TH_En OR Feature.Bit31
10 PV_TL_En OR Feature.Bit31
11 PV_WL_En OR Feature.Bit31
12 PV_AL_En OR Feature.Bit31
13 PV_AH_MsgEn
14 PV_WH_MsgEn
15 PV_TH_MsgEn
16 PV_TL_MsgEn
17 PV_WL_MsgEn
18 PV_AL_MsgEn
19 ER_AH_Act.Value
20 ER_AL_Act.Value
21 ER_AH_En OR Feature.Bit31
22 ER_AL_En OR Feature.Bit31

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 755
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

Status bit Parameter


23 ER_AH_MsgEn
24 ER_AL_MsgEn
25 RbkWH_Act.Value
26 RbkWL_Act.Value
27 RbkWH_En OR Feature.Bit31
28 RbkWL_En OR Feature.Bit31
29 RbkWH_MsgEn
30 RbkWL_MsgEn
31 MS_RelOp

Status word allocation for Status3 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 Effective signal 1 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
1 Effective signal 2 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
2 Effective signal 3 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
3 Effective signal 4 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
4 Effective signal 5 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
5 Effective signal 6 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
6 Effective signal 7 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
7 Effective signal 8 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
8 Delay of the PV_AH_Lim message
9 Delay of the PV_WH_Lim message
10 Delay of the PV_TH_Lim message
11 Delay of the PV_TL_Lim message
12 Delay of the PV_WL_Lim message
13 Delay of the PV_AL_Lim message
14 Delay of the ER_AH_Lim message
15 Delay of the ER_AL_Lim message
16 Collection of message delays
17 BypassAct.Value
18 - 23 Not used
24 Feature2.Bit2: Separate bypass signal
25 Hidden bypass signal in Intlock
26 LockAct.Value
27 SP_UpRaAct, SP_DnRaAct limits enabled for gradient mode (SP_RateOn = 1)
28 GrpErr.Value
29 RdyToStart.Value
30 1 = Input parameter MV_ChnST is interconnected
31 Not used

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


756 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

Status word allocation for Status4 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0-7 Effective signal 9..16 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
8 - 31 Not used

See also
PIDConL functions (Page 759)
PIDConL messaging (Page 770)
PIDConL block diagram (Page 790)
PIDConL error handling (Page 769)
PIDConL modes (Page 757)

5.7.2 PIDConL modes

PIDConL operating modes


The block can be operated using the following modes:
● Automatic mode (Page 73)
● Manual mode (Page 73)
● Program mode for controllers (Page 79)
● Out of service (Page 72)
The next section provides additional block-specific information relating to the general
descriptions.

"Automatic mode"
You can find general information on "Automatic mode", switching modes and bumpless
switchover in the Manual and automatic mode for control blocks (Page 73) section.

"Manual mode"
You can find general information on "Manual mode", switching modes and bumpless
switchover in the Manual and automatic mode for control blocks (Page 73) section.

"Program mode for controllers"


General information on "Program mode for controllers" is available in the section Program
mode for controllers (Page 79).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 757
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

"Out of service"
You can find general information about the "Out of service" mode in the Out of service
(Page 72) section.
With Feature.Bit5 =1 the following output parameter become the status of simulation
16#60, if mode is changed to "Out of service".
With Feature.Bit5 =0 the following output parameter become the status of 16#80, if mode
is changed to "Out of service".

● RbkOut.ST
● RbkWH_Act.ST
● RbkWL_Act.ST
● SP_ExtAct.ST
● SP.ST
● SP_ExtOut.ST
● PV_Out.ST
● PV_AH_Act.ST
● PV_WH_Act.ST
● PV_TH_Act.ST
● PV_TL_Act.ST
● PV_WL_Act.ST
● PV_AL_Act.ST
● PV_ToleHi.ST
● PV_ToleLo.ST
● ER.ST
● ER_AH_Act.ST
● ER_AL_Act.ST

See also
PIDConL block diagram (Page 790)
PIDConL I/Os (Page 773)
PIDConL messaging (Page 770)
PIDConL error handling (Page 769)
PIDConL functions (Page 759)
Description of PIDConL (Page 752)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


758 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

5.7.3 PIDConL functions

Functions of PIDConL
The functions for this block are listed below.

Generation of manipulated variables


The manipulated variable MV can be generated as follows:

MV_For‐ Intlock ManAct MV_Trk AdvCoAct MV = Limit monitoring State


On On AND NOT
AdvCoModSP
1 - - - - MV_Force none Forced tracking through con‐
d straint without limitation
0 1 - - - Neutral none Interlock state
position:
depends
on
SafePos,
SafePos2
0 0 1 - - Man ManHiLim Manual mode, set by the oper‐
ManLoLim ator
0 0 0 1 - MV_Trk MV_HiLim Tracking with limitation
MV_LoLim
0 0 0 0 1 AdvCoMV MV_HiLim Higher-level program mode
MV_LoLim
0 0 0 0 0 P_Part + MV_HiLim Automatic mode (PID algo‐
I_Part + MV_LoLim rithm)
D_Part +
FFwd

If the controller is in "out of service" mode, the output parameter MV is set to the last valid value
in manual mode or the neutral position manipulated variable depending on the Feature Bit
(Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect at startup (Page 169)). Refer to the Out of
service (Page 72) section for more on this.

Tracking and limiting a manipulated variable


The block provides the standard function Tracking and limiting a manipulated variable
(Page 205).

Neutral position
The block provides the standard function Neutral position for motors, valves and controllers
(Page 48).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 759
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

Group error
This block provides the standard function Outputting group errors (Page 124).
The following parameters are taken into consideration when forming the group error:
● CSF

Outputting a signal for start readiness


This block provides the standard function Outputting a signal for start readiness (Page 54).

"Actuator active" information


If the manipulated variable MV is greater than the minimum manual limit ManLoLim, this is
recognized as actuator active. This status can be used to indicate a customized symbol in the
process image, for example, and is saved in the status word (see Status word section in
Description of PIDConL (Page 752)).

Limit monitoring of position feedback


The block provides the standard function Limit monitoring of the feedback (Page 95).

Group display SumMsgAct for limit monitoring, CSF and ExtMsgx


The block provides the standard function Group display for limit monitoring, CSF and
ExtMsgx (Page 86).

External/internal setpoint specification


The block provides the standard function Setpoint specification - internal/external (Page 130).

Setpoint limiting for external setpoints


The block provides the standard function Setpoint limiting for external setpoints (Page 205).

Gradient limit of the setpoint


The block provides the standard function Gradient limit of the setpoint (Page 126).

Using setpoint ramp


The block provides the standard function Using setpoint ramp (Page 125).

Tracking setpoint in manual mode


The block provides the standard function Tracking setpoint in manual mode (Page 205).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


760 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

Simulating signals
The block provides the standard function Simulating signals (Page 59).
You can simulate the following values:
● Process value (SimPV, SimPV_Li)
● Position feedback (SimRbk, SimRbkLi)

Bypass function
This block provides the standard function Bypassing signals (Page 109).

Limit monitoring of the process value


The block provides the standard function Limit monitoring of the process value (Page 87) with
the alarm delay type Two time values per limit pair (Page 210). With the Feature Bit Separate
delay times for each alarm (Page 174), the alarm delay type Two time values for each individual
limit (Page 211) can be activated.

Providing PV limit at the output


For further connections to the other blocks, the following input parameters are also displayed
with the corresponding output parameters:
● PV_HysOut := PV_Hyst
● PV_AH_Out := PV_AH_Lim
● PV_WH_Out := PV_WH_Lim
● PV_TH_Out := PV_TH_Lim
● PV_TL_Out := PV_TL_Lim
● PV_WL_Out := PV_WL_Lim
● PV_AL_Out := PV_AL_Lim

Error signal generation and dead band


The block provides the standard function Error signal generation and dead band (Page 201).
The Feature.Bit14 can be used to feedforward an external error signal ER_Ext. When the
external error signal is activated, ER_Ext affects both the dead band and the error signal alarm
generation.

Delay alarm for control deviation at setpoint step changes


The block provides the standard function Delay alarm for control deviation at setpoint step
changes (Page 199).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 761
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

Limit monitoring of error signal


The block provides the standard function Limit monitoring of setpoint, manipulated variable
and control deviation (Page 96). The monitoring of error signal works with the alarm delay type
Two time values per limit pair (Page 210). With the Feature Bit Separate delay times for each
alarm (Page 174), the alarm delay type Two time values for each individual limit (Page 211)
can be activated.

Inverting control direction


The block provides the standard function Inverting control direction (Page 200).

Physical standardization of setpoint, manipulated variable and process value


Controller gain Gain is entered either using a physical variable or as standardized value.
Gain as a physical variable:
The standardized variables retain their default values:
● NormPV.High = 100 and NormPV.Low = 0
● NormMV.High = 100 and NormMV.Low = 0
The effective gain is:
GainEff = Gain
Entering a standardized Gain (dimensionless):
Change the standardized variables to the actual range of the process values and manipulated
variables.
● Internal and external setpoints; the process value and corresponding parameters are
entered according to the physical measuring range of the process value.
● The manual value, the tracking value of the manipulated variable, feedforward control and
the corresponding parameters are set according to the physical measuring range of the
manipulated variable.
The effective gain is:
GainEff = (NormMV.High - NormMV.Low) / (NormPV.High - NormPV.Low) · Gain

Selecting a unit of measure


The block provides the standard function Selecting a unit of measure (Page 221).

PID algorithm
The manipulated variable is generated in automatic mode according to the following algorithm:
MV = GainEff · (1 + 1 / (TI · s) + (TD · s) / (1 + TD / DiffGain · s)) · ER
Where:
s = Complex number
The following step response occurs:

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


762 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

09
09B+L/LP

*DLQ(II 7'
7LPH/DJ6DPSOH7LPH
*DLQ(II
(5 W *DLQ(II
*DLQ(II

W
7,

09B/R/LP

,QSXWVWHS(5 W  ` LIW
LIW!

Note
The formula describes a standard application where P, I and D components are activated and
the P and D components are not in the feedback circuit (PropSel = 1, TI <> 0 and IntSel
= 1, TD <> 0 and DIffSel = 1, DiffToFbk = 0 and PropFacSP = 1).

The D component delay is derived from TD / DiffGain.


● The P component is displayed at the P_Part I/O and can be deactivated using PropSel
=0.
● The I component is displayed at the I_Part I/O and can be deactivated using TI = 0 or
IntSel = 0. In deactivated state, I_Part is specified by MV_Offset and added to the
manipulated variable. Make a selection for this value so that the remaining control deviation
equals zero at the control loop's typical operating point, at least. IntSel is used for
temporary deactivation of the I component. The I component is not reactivated until TI <>
0 and IntSel = 1. After the I component is activated, the integrator continues working
starting from MV_Offset.
● The D component is displayed at the D_Part I/O and can be deactivated using TD = 0 or
DiffSel = 0.

Structure segmentation at controllers


The block provides the standard function Structure segmentation at controllers (Page 207).

Anti-windup
The controller has an anti-windup function. The I component is frozen after the manipulated
variable has reached limits (MV_HiLim or MV_LoLim).

Feedforwarding and limiting disturbance variables


The block provides the standard function Feedforwarding and limiting disturbance variables
(Page 206).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 763
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

Control zone
The block provides the standard function Using control zones (Page 203).

Forming the signal status for blocks


The block provides the standard function Forming and outputting the signal status for
technologic blocks (Page 110).
● Signal status for the process value PV_Out:
The signal status of the output parameter PV_Out always corresponds to the signal status
of input parameter PV or, if the block is in simulation mode, 16#60.
● Signal status for the setpoint value SP:
The signal status of the SP output parameter is always equivalent to the signal status of
input parameter SP_Ext or SP_Int, depending on how the setpoint is specified. If the
internal setpoint SP_Int is used, the signal status is always output as 16#80.
● Signal status of the error signal ER:
The signal status of output parameter ER is obtained from the worst signal status of the two
output parameters PV_Out and SP and is output.
The signal status 16#60 (external simulation) is suppressed because the block acts as a
sink with external simulation.
If the external error signal is activated (Feature.Bit14 = 1), the signal status of
ER_Ext.ST is applied.
● Signal status for the manipulated variable MV:
The signal status of output parameter MV is obtained in "automatic mode" or in "program
mode" with default setpoint from the worst signal status of the two parameters FFwd and
ER and is output. In "manual mode", the signal status is output as good. The signal status
16#60 (external simulation) is suppressed because the block acts as a sink with external
simulation. In "manual mode", the signal status is output as good.
● Signal status for position feedback RbkOut:
The signal status of RbkOut always corresponds to the signal status of input parameter
Rbk or, if the block is in simulation mode, 16#60.
● Worst signal status:
The worst signal status ST_Worst for the block is formed from the following parameters:
Feature.Bit14 = 1 (external error signal)
– ER_Ext.ST;
– FFwd.ST;
– RbkOut.ST;
– MV_ChnST.ST;
Feature.Bit14 = 0 (external error signal)
– SP.ST;
– PV_Out.ST;
– FFwd.ST;
– RbkOut.ST;
– MV_ChnST.ST;

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


764 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133) . The following functionality is
available for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
0 Set startup characteristics (Page 141)
1 Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 181)
2 Resetting the commands for changing the mode (Page 165)
4 Setting switch or button mode (Page 170)
5 Changes signal status of outputs in OOS (Page 198)
6 Ramp rate calculation (Page 183)
8 Separate delay times for each alarm (Page 174)
9 Substitution value is active if the block is in bypass (Page 189)
11 Gradient limitation with time duration (Page 186)
12 Control zone with specified I component (Page 164)
13 Control zone with frozen I component (Page 164)
14 External control deviation (Page 154)
15 Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect with "out of service" operating mode
(Page 170)
16 Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect at startup (Page 169)
18 Disabling bumpless switchover to automatic mode for controllers (Page 176)
22 Update acknowledgment and error status of the message call (Page 163)
23 SP following PV in open loop has no priority over SP_Ext and SP limits (Page 183)
24 Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162)
25 Suppression of all messages (Page 178)
26 Reaction of the switching points in the "Out of service" operating mode (Page 180)
28 Disabling operating points (Page 149)
29 Signaling limit violation (Page 174)
30 Dead band is temporarily disabled (Page 145)
31 Limits disabled in faceplate (Page 195)

Configurable reactions using the Feature2 parameter

Bit Function
2 Separate evaluation for excluded and simulated interlock signals (Page 155)
11 Suppress MsgLock and “Out of service” mode for a connected message block (Page 192)

Operator permissions
The block provides the standard function Operator control permissions (Page 265).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 765
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

The block has the following permissions for the OS_Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 1 = Operator can switch to "automatic mode" AutModOp
1 1 = Operator can switch to "manual mode" ManModOp
2 1 = Operator can switch to "Out of service" mode OosOp
3 1 = Operator can switch to "program mode" AdvCoEn
4 1 = Operator can switch the setpoint to "external" SP_ExtOp
5 1 = Operator can switch the setpoint to "internal" SP_IntOp
6 1 = Operator can change the internal setpoint SP_Int
7 1 = Operator can change the manual parameter Man
8 1 = Operator can change operation high limit of the setpoint SP_InHiLim
9 1 = Operator can change operation low limit of the setpoint SP_InLoLim
10 1 = Operator can change the operation high limit of the manipulated variable ManHiLim
11 1 = Operator can change the operation low limit of the manipulated variable ManLoLim
12 1 = Operator can enable the setpoint's gradient limitation function SP_RateOn
13 1 = Operator can change the setpoint's high limit for the ramp SP_UpRaLim
14 1 = Operator can change the setpoint's low limit for the ramp SP_DnRaLim
15 1 = Operator can switch between the time value or the value for the ramp SP_RmpModTime
16 1 = Operator can change the ramp time SP_RmpTime
17 1 = Operator can change the target setpoint SP_RmpTarget for the setpoint ramp
18 1 = Operator can enable the setpoint ramp function SP_RmpOn
19 1 = Operator can permit the PID optimization function OptimEn
20 1 = Operator can enable the track setpoint in "manual mode" function SP_TrkPV
21 1 = Operator can enable the bumpless switchover from external to internal SP_TrkExt
22 1 = Operator can change the gain parameter Gain
23 1 = Operator can change the integral time parameter TI
24 1 = Operator can change the derivative time parameter TD
25 1 = Operator can change the derivative gain parameter DiffGain
26 1 = Operator can change the dead band parameter DeadBand
27 1 = Operator can change the control zone parameter ConZone
28 1 = Operator can change the derivative gain parameter ER_AH_DFac
29 1 = Operator can change the derivative gain parameter ER_AL_DFac
30 Not used
31 Not used

The block has the following permissions for the OS1Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 1 = Operator can change the limit (process value) PV_AH_Lim for the high alarm
1 1 = Operator can change the limit (process value) PV_WH_Lim for the high warning
2 1 = Operator can change the limit (process value) PV_TH_Lim for the high tolerance
3 1 = Operator can change the hysteresis (process value) PV_Hyst
4 1 = Operator can change the limit (process value) PV_TL_Lim for the low tolerance
5 1 = Operator can change the limit (process value) PV_WL_Lim for the low warning

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


766 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

Bit Function
6 1 = Operator can change the limit (process value) PV_AL_Lim for the low alarm
7 1 = Operator can change the limit (error signal) ER_AH_Lim for the high alarm
8 1 = Operator can change the hysteresis (error signal) ER_Hyst
9 1 = Operator can change the limit (error signal) ER_AL_Lim for the low alarm
10 1 = Operator can change the limit (position feedback) RbkWH_Lim for the high warning
11 1 = Operator can change the hysteresis (position feedback) RbkHyst
12 1 = Operator can change the limit (position feedback) RbkWL_Lim for the low warning
13 "Interlock" button is disabled
14 1 = Operator can activate bypass functionality
15 1 = Operator can deactivate bypass functionality
16 1 = Operator can activate the Simulation function SimOn
17 1 = Operator can activate the Release for maintenance function MS_RelOp
18 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_AH_MsgEn
19 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_WH_MsgEn
20 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_TH_MsgEn
21 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_TL_MsgEn
22 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_WL_MsgEn
23 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_AL_MsgEn
24 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via ER_AH_MsgEn
25 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via ER_AL_MsgEn
26 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via RbkWH_MsgEn
27 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via RbkWL_MsgEn
28 1 = Operator can change the simulation value SimPV
29 1 = Operator can change the simulation value SimRbk
30 1 = Operator can activate the derivative action to the feedback path DiffToFbk
31 1 = Operator can change the proportional action to the feedback path PropFacSP

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Interlocks
This block provides the following interlocks:
● Interlock without reset ("Interlock")
If interlock is active without forcing (MV_ForOn =0) the manipulated value MV.Value is set to
the neutral position value ( Neutral position for motors, valves and controllers (Page 48) ).
You can find additional information on this in the section Interlocks (Page 101).

Disabling interlocks
This block provides the standard function Disabling interlocks (Page 104).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 767
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

Release for maintenance


The block provides the standard function Release for maintenance (Page 65)

Generating instance-specific messages


The block provides the standard function Generating instance-specific messages (Page 213)
without the time stamp function in the I/O.

Suppressing messages using the MsgLock parameter


This block provides the standard function Suppressing messages using the MsgLock
parameter (Page 214).

Button labels
This block provides the standard function Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218).
Instance-specific text can be configured for the following parameters:
● AutModOp
● ManModOp
● AdvCoOn
● OosOp
● SP_ExtOp
● SP_IntOp

Specifying the display area for process and setpoint values as well as operations
This block provides the standard function Display and operator input area for process values
and setpoints (Page 216).

Opening additional faceplates


This block provides the standard function Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


This block provides the standard function SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

Connection of the time-stamped messages from EventTs or Event16Ts


This block provides the standard function Connection of the time-stamped messages from
EventTs or Event16Ts (Page 216).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


768 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

See also
PIDConL I/Os (Page 773)
PIDConL block diagram (Page 790)
PIDConL error handling (Page 769)
PIDConL modes (Page 757)
EventTs functions (Page 1698)

5.7.4 PIDConL error handling

Error handling of PIDConL


Refer to section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions for the error handling of all
blocks.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers
● Control system fault (CSF)

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum output parameter can be used to output the following error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; the block is not executed
0 There is no error.
30 The value of PV can no longer be displayed in the REAL number field.
31 The value of SP_Ext can no longer be displayed in the REAL number field.
32 The value of FFwd can no longer be displayed in the REAL number field.
33 The value of MV_Trk can no longer be displayed in the REAL number field.
34 The value of MV_Forced can no longer be displayed in the REAL number field.
35 The value of Rbk can no longer be displayed in the REAL number field.
36 The value of MV can no longer be displayed in the REAL number field.
51 AutModLi = 1 and ManModLi = 1
SP_LiOp = 1 and SP_IntLi = 1 and SP_ExtLi = 1
52 Feature.Bit30 = 1 and MeanMV.ST = 16#78
59 = 1, "Gain is negative"
60 |TI| < SampleTime / 2
61 |TD| < SampleTime
62 DiffGain < 1 or DiffGain > 10
63 TD / DiffGain < SampleTime / 2
64 PropFacSP < 0 or PropFacSP > 1

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 769
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

Error number Meaning of the error number


66 NormPV_High = NormPV_Low
74 ConZone = < 0.0

Control system fault (CSF)


An external signal can be activated via the CSF input. A control system fault is triggered if this
signal changes to 1. Refer to the Error handling (Page 121) section for more on this.

See also
PIDConL block diagram (Page 790)
PIDConL I/Os (Page 773)
PIDConL messaging (Page 770)
PIDConL functions (Page 759)
PIDConL modes (Page 757)
Description of PIDConL (Page 752)
Setting switch or button mode (Page 170)

5.7.5 PIDConL messaging

Messaging
The following messages can be generated for this block:
● Process control fault
● Process messages
● Instance-specific messages

Process control fault


The following control system error messages can be output:

Message in‐ Message identi‐ Message class Event


stance fier
MsgEvId2 SIG 6 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External error has occurred

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment
You can interconnect an external fault (signal) to input parameter CSF. If it changes to CSF =
1, a process control fault is triggered (MsgEvId2, SIG 6).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


770 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

Process messages

Message in‐ Message identifier Message class Event


stance
MsgEvId1 SIG 1 Alarm - high $$BlockComment$$
PV - high alarm limit violated
SIG 2 Warning - high $$BlockComment$$
PV - high warning limit violated
SIG 3 Tolerance - high $$BlockComment$$
PV - high tolerance limit violated
SIG 4 Tolerance - low $$BlockComment$$
PV - low tolerance limit violated
SIG 5 Warning - low $$BlockComment$$
PV - low warning limit violated
SIG 6 Alarm - low $$BlockComment$$
PV - low alarm limit violated
SIG 7 Alarm - high $$BlockComment$$
ER - high alarm limit violated
SIG 8 Alarm - low $$BlockComment$$
ER - low alarm limit violated
MsgEvId2 SIG 7 Warning - high $$BlockComment$$
Rbk - high warning limit violated
SIG 8 Warning - low $$BlockComment$$
Rbk - low warning limit violated

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment

Instance-specific messages
You can use up to four instance-specific messages with this block.

Message in‐ Message identifier Message class Event


stance
MsgEvId2 SIG 1 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 1
Status 16#@5%x@
SIG 2 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 2
Status 16#@6%x@
SIG 3 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 3
Status 16#@7%x@
SIG 4 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 4
Status 16#@8%x@

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 771
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId1

Associated value Block parameters


1 BatchName
2 StepNo
3 BatchID
4 Process value PV_Out
5 Control deviation ER
6 ExtVa106
7 ExtVa107
8 Not allocated
9 Not allocated
10 Not allocated

The associated values 6 ... 7 are allocated to the parameters ExtVa106 ... ExtVa107 and
can be used. Additional information is available in the "Process Control System PCS 7 -
Engineering System" manual.

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId2

Associated value Block parameters


1 BatchName
2 StepNo
3 BatchID
4 Position feedback RbkOut
5 Signal status ExtMsg1
6 Signal status ExtMsg2
7 Signal status ExtMsg3
8 Signal status ExtMsg4
9 ExtVa209
10 ExtVa210

The associated values 9 ... 10 are allocated to the parameters ExtVa209 ... ExtVa210 and
can be used. Additional information is available in the "Process Control System PCS 7 -
Engineering System" manual.

See also
Description of PIDConL (Page 752)
PIDConL functions (Page 759)
PIDConL I/Os (Page 773)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


772 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

PIDConL block diagram (Page 790)


PIDConL error handling (Page 769)
PIDConL modes (Page 757)

5.7.6 PIDConL I/Os


I/Os of PIDConL

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AdvCoEn 1 = Enable "program mode" via intercon‐ STRUCT -
nection ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AdvCoOn* 1 = Enable "program mode" via faceplate BOOL 0
AdvCoModSP Type of "program mode": BOOL 1
1 = Setpoint specification
0 = Manipulated variable specification
AdvCoMstrOn Activate (0-1) or deactivate (1-0) "pro‐ STRUCT -
gram mode" via edge transition ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AdvCoMV Specified value from the external pro‐ REAL 0.0
gram
AutModLi* 1 = "Automatic mode" via interconnec‐ STRUCT -
tion or SFC (controlled by ModLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AutModOp* 1 = "Automatic mode" via operator (con‐ BOOL 0
trolled by ModLiOp = 0)
BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation for batch control BOOL 0
BatchID Batch ID DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name S7-String
BypProt 1 = Interlock bypass during simulation BOOL 0
BypLiOp 1 = Bypass commands via interconnec‐ STRUCT -
tion ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
BypLock 1 = Bypass activation or deactivation is STRUCT -
locked for operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
BypPV Substitution value if block is in bypass REAL 0.0
BypPVLi 1 = Select bypass PV (via interconnec‐ STRUCT -
tion) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 773
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


BypPVOp 1 = Select bypass PV (via operator) BOOL 0
ConZone Width of control zone REAL 0.0
CPI_In Input for control performance index, STRUCT -
which is calculated by the assigned ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
ConPerMon block
● ST: BYTE ● 16#78
CSF 1 = External error (control system fault) STRUCT -
Error handling (Page 121) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
DeadBand Width of dead band REAL 0.0
DiffGain Gain of differentiator [1..10] DiffGain STRUCT -
= TD / (delay time of D component) ● Value: REAL ● 5.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
DiffSel 1 = D component activated BOOL 1
DiffToFbk 1 = D component is placed in the feed‐ BOOL 0
back
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1
ER_A_DC* Delay time for incoming ER high/low or REAL 0.0
only low alarms [s]
ER_AH_DC* Delay time for incoming ER high alarms REAL 0.0
[s]
ER_A_DG* Delay time for outgoing ER high/low or REAL 0.0
only low alarms [s]
ER_AH_DG* Delay time for outgoing ER high alarms REAL 0.0
[s]
ER_AH_En 1 = Activate alarm (high) for error signal BOOL 1
monitoring
ER_AH_DFac* Delay factor at positive setpoint step REAL 0.0
changes for incoming alarms at the error
signal monitoring ER_AH_Lim
ER_AH_Lim Alarm limit (high) for error signal moni‐ REAL 100.0
toring
ER_AH_MsgEn 1 = Activate messages for alarm (high) BOOL 1
for error signal monitoring
ER_AL_DFac* Delay factor at negative setpoint step REAL 0.0
changes for incoming alarms at the error
signal monitoring ER_AL_Lim
ER_AL_En 1 = Activate alarm (low) for error signal BOOL 1
monitoring
ER_AL_Lim Alarm limit (low) for error signal monitor‐ REAL -100.0
ing
ER_AL_MsgEn 1 = Activate messages for alarm (low) BOOL 1
for error signal monitoring
ER_Ext External error signal STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


774 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


ER_Hyst Alarm hysteresis for error signal REAL 1.0
EventTsIn For interconnecting data between a ANY
technology block and the message
blocks EventTs, Event16Ts.
The EventTsIn input parameter
serves to interconnect the
EventTsOut output parameter of the
EventTs, Event16Ts block. When this
interconnection is configured, the mes‐
sages of the EventTs, Event16Ts
block are displayed on the OS in the
alarm view of the technology block and
can also be acknowledged there.
ExtMsg1 1 = Binary input for freely selectable STRUCT -
message 1 is used ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg2 1 = Binary input for freely selectable STRUCT -
message 2 is used ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg3 1 = Binary input for freely selectable STRUCT -
message 3 is used ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg4 1 = Binary input for freely selectable STRUCT -
message 4 is used ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtVa106 Associated value 6 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa107 Associated value 7 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa209 Associated value 9 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID2)
ExtVa210 Associated value 10 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID2)
Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 759) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
Feature2 I/O for additional functions (Page 759) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
FFwd* Input for additive disturbance variable STRUCT -
activation ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 775
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


FFwdHiLim Limit (high) for additive disturbance var‐ STRUCT -
iable activation ● Value: REAL ● 100.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FFwdLoLim Limit (low) for additive disturbance vari‐ STRUCT -
able activation ● Value: REAL ● -100.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Gain Proportional gain STRUCT -
Gain.ST = 16#FF: Enabled in faceplate ● Value: REAL ● 1.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
Intl_En 1 = Interlock without reset (interlock, BOOL 1
Intlock parameter) is in effect
IntHoldNeg 1 = Integrator cannot run in negative di‐ STRUCT -
rection ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
IntHoldPos 1 = Integrator cannot run in positive di‐ STRUCT -
rection ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Intlock 0 = Interlock without reset is in effect STRUCT -
Once the interlock condition has ● Value: BOOL ● 1
cleared, the block can be operated with‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
out reset
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
1 = Interlock not activated
(Bypass information bit)
IntSel 1 = I component activated BOOL 1
Man* Manual specification for the manipu‐ REAL 0.0
lated variable
ManHiLim Limit (high) for manual parameter Man REAL 100.0
ManLoLim Limit (low) for manual parameter Man REAL 0.0
ManModLi* 1 = "Manual mode" via interconnection STRUCT -
or SFC (controlled by ModLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManModOp* 1 = "Manual mode" via OS operator (con‐ BOOL 1
trolled by ModLiOp = 0)
ModLiOp Operating mode switchover between: STRUCT -
0 = Operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
1 = Interconnection or SFC ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MS_RelOp* 1 = Release for maintenance by OS op‐ BOOL 0
erator
MsgEvID1 Message number (assigned automati‐ DWORD 16#00000000
cally)
MsgEvID2 Message number (assigned automati‐ DWORD 16#00000000
cally)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


776 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


MsgLock 1 = Suppress process messages. STRUCT -
See also the section Hotspot-Text ● Value: BOOL ● 0
(Page 214) for more on this. ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_ChnST Signal status of output channel for MV STRUCT -
Should be connected to an output chan‐ ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
nel block ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
MV_Forced* Forced manipulated variable that is not STRUCT -
limited and assumes top priority ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_ForOn 1 = Output forced manipulated variable STRUCT -
MV_Forced unlimited at output MV ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_HiLim Limit (high) for manipulated variable MV STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 100.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_LoLim Limit (low) for manipulated variable MV STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_Mean Mean value of the MV in the time window STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#78
MV_Offset Manipulated variable for ER=0, operat‐ REAL 0.0
ing point for controller with deactivated I
component
MV_OpScale OS display range for manipulated varia‐ STRUCT -
ble MV ● High: REAL ● 100.0
● Low: REAL ● 0.0
MV_SafePos Manipulated variable neutral position STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_Trk* Tracking value for the manipulated vari‐ STRUCT -
able MV ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_TrkOn 1 = Tracking of manipulated variable MV STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_Unit Unit of measure for manipulated variable INT 1342
NegGain 0 = Effective proportional gain STRUCT -
GainEff is positive ● Value: BOOL ● 0
1 = Effective proportional gain ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
GainEff is negative

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 777
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


NormMV Manipulated variable range (MV) for STRUCT -
standardizing the proportional gain ● High: REAL ● 100.0
(GAIN)
● Low: REAL ● 0.0
NormPV Process value range (PV) for standard‐ STRUCT -
izing the proportional gain (GAIN) ● High: REAL ● 100.0
● Low: REAL ● 0.0
Occupied 1 = Occupied by batch control BOOL 0
OosLi 1 = "Out of service", via interconnection STRUCT -
or SFC (0-1 edge transition) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosOp* 1 = "Out of service", via OS operator BOOL 0
OptimEn* 1 = Enable optimization of PID parame‐ BOOL 0
ters by PID tuner
OptimOcc* 1 = Optimization running BOOL 0
OpSt_In Input parameter for local operator au‐ DWORD 16#00000000
thorization, connected with the Out out‐
put parameter of the upstream block,
OpStations (Page 423)
OS_Perm I/O for operator permissions (Page 759) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● ... ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
OS1Perm I/O for operator permissions (Page 759) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● Bit 18: BOOL ● 1
● Bit 19: BOOL ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
PropFacSP Applying the P component to the feed‐ REAL 1.0
back [0..1].
0 = P component fully in feedback
PropSel 1 = Activate P component BOOL 1
PV* Process value (controlled variable) STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
PV_A_DC* Delay time for incoming PV high/low or REAL 0.0
only low alarms [s]
PV_AH_DC* Delay time for incoming PV high alarms REAL 0.0
[s]
PV_A_DG* Delay time for outgoing PV high/low or REAL 0.0
only low alarms [s]
PV_AH_DG* Delay time for outgoing PV high alarms REAL 0.0
[s]
PV_AH_En 1 = Enable PV alarm limit (high) BOOL 1

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


778 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


PV_AH_Lim Limit PV alarm (high) REAL 95.0
PV_AH_MsgEn 1 = Enable PV alarm (high) message BOOL 1
PV_AL_En 1 = Enable PV alarm limit (low) BOOL 1
PV_AL_Lim PV alarm limit (low) REAL 5.0
PV_AL_MsgEn 1 = Enable PV alarm (low) message BOOL 1
PV_Hyst Hysteresis for PV alarm, warning and tol‐ REAL 1.0
erance limits
PV_OpScale Limit for scale in PV bar graph of face‐ STRUCT -
plate ● High: REAL ● 100.0
● Low: REAL ● 0.0
PV_T_DC* Delay time for incoming PV high/low or REAL 0.0
only low tolerance messages [s]
PV_TH_DC* Delay time for incoming PV high toler‐ REAL 0.0
ance messages [s]
PV_T_DG* Delay time for outgoing PV high/low or REAL 0.0
only low tolerance messages [s]
PV_TH_DG* Delay time for outgoing PV high toler‐ REAL 0.0
ance messages [s]
PV_TH_En 1 = Enable PV tolerance limit (high) BOOL 0
PV_TH_Lim Limit PV tolerance message (high) REAL 85.0
PV_TH_MsgEn 1 = Enable message for PV tolerance BOOL 1
message (high)
PV_TL_En 1 = Enable PV tolerance limit (low) BOOL 0
PV_TL_Lim Limit PV tolerance message (low) REAL 15.0
PV_TL_MsgEn 1 = Enable message for tolerance mes‐ BOOL 1
sage (low)
PV_Unit Unit of measure for process value INT 1001
PV_W_DC* Delay time for incoming PV high/low or REAL 0.0
only low warnings [s]
PV_WH_DC* Delay time for incoming PV high warn‐ REAL 0.0
ings [s]
PV_W_DG* Delay time for outgoing PV high/low or REAL 0.0
only low warnings [s]
PV_WH_DG* Delay time for outgoing PV high warn‐ REAL 0.0
ings [s]
PV_WH_En 1 = Enable PV warning limit (high) BOOL 1
PV_WH_Lim Limit PV warning (high) REAL 90.0
PV_WH_MsgEn 1 = Enable PV warning (high) message BOOL 1
PV_WL_En 1 = Enable PV warning limit (low) BOOL 1
PV_WL_Lim Limit PV warning (low) REAL 10.0
PV_WL_MsgEn 1 = Enable PV warning (low) message BOOL 1
Rbk* Position feedback for display on OS STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 779
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


RbkHyst Alarm hysteresis for position feedback REAL 1.0
RbkWH_En 1 = Enable warning (high) for position BOOL 1
feedback
RbkWH_Lim Limit for position feedback of warning REAL 100.0
(high)
RbkWH_MsgEn 1 = Enable messages for warning (high) BOOL 1
for position feedback
RbkWL_En 1 = Enable warning (low) for position BOOL 1
feedback
RbkWL_Lim Limit for position feedback of warning REAL 0.0
(low)
RbkWL_MsgEn 1 = Enable messages for warning (low) BOOL 1
for position feedback
RefStdDevIn Reference value of PV standard devia‐ STRUCT -
tion (sigma) in defined "good" state of ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
control loop
● ST: BYTE ● 16#78
RstBypLi 1 = Reset bypass PV (via interconnec‐ STRUCT -
tion) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RstBypOp 1 = Reset bypass PV (via operator) BOOL 0
RunUpCyc Number of cycles in startup; messages INT 3
are suppressed during these cycles
SafePos 1 = Neutral position (Page 48) for con‐ BOOL 0
troller manipulated variable is
ManHiLim
0 = Neutral position for controller manip‐
ulated variable is ManLoLim
SafePos2 Neutral position for controller manipu‐ INT 0
lated variable:
0 = SafePos is valid
1 = Neutral position is MV_SafePos
2 = Neutral position is last manipulated
variable (stop)
SampleTime Sampling time [s] (assigned automatical‐ REAL 0.1
ly)
SelFp1 1 = Call a block saved in this parameter ANY -
as an additional faceplate (Page 217) in
the standard view
SelFp2 1 = Call a block saved in this parameter ANY -
as an additional faceplate (Page 217) in
the preview
SettliTime Settling time [s] of the control loop deter‐ STRUCT -
mined by the ConPerMon block ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#78
SettliFactor Factor to increase the settling time to REAL 2.0
adjust the dead band

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


780 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


SimLiOp Activation/deactivation of the simulation STRUCT -
by: ● Vale: BOOL ● 0
0 = Operator ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
1 = Interconnection or SFC
SimOnLi 1 = Simulation via interconnection or STRUCT -
SFC (controlled by SimLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SimOn* 1 = Simulation on BOOL 0
SimPV* Process value used for SimOn = 1 REAL 0.0
SimPV_Li Process value that is used for STRUCT -
SimOnLi.Value = 1 ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
(SimLiOp.Value = 1)
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SimRbk* Position feedback used for SimOn = 1 REAL 0.0
SimRbkLi Position feedback used for STRUCT -
SimOnLi.Value = 1 ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
(SimLiOp.Value = 1)
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_DnRaLim* Limit (low) for the gradient of the setpoint REAL 100.0
[Unit/(Time unit)]
Time unit depends on TimeFactor
SP_ExHiLim Limit (high) for external setpoint STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 100.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExLoLim Limit (low) for external setpoint STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_Ext* external setpoint - (to interconnection) STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExtLi* 1 = Select external setpoint (via inter‐ STRUCT -
connection) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExtOp* 1 = Select external setpoint (via opera‐ BOOL 0
tor)
SP_InHiLim Limit (high) of internal setpoint REAL 100.0
SP_InLoLim Limit (low) of internal setpoint REAL 0.0
SP_Int* Internal setpoint for operation REAL 0.0
SP_IntLi* 1 = Select internal setpoint (via intercon‐ STRUCT -
nection) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_IntOp* 1 = Select internal setpoint (via operator) BOOL 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 781
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


SP_LiDnRaLim Linkable limit (low) for the gradient of the REAL 100.0
setpoint [Unit/(Time unit)]
Time unit depends on TimeFactor
SP_LiOp Select setpoint source (internal/exter‐ STRUCT -
nal): ● Value: BOOL ● 0
1 = Via interconnection ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
0 = Via operator
SP_LiRmpTime Linkable time [Time unit] for gradient lim‐ REAL 0.0
itation in ramp mode duration
Time unit depends on TimeFactor
SP_LiUpRaLim Linkable gradient limit (high) for the set‐ REAL 100.0
point [Unit/(Time unit)]
Time unit depends on TimeFactor
SP_RateOn* 1 = Activate limitation of setpoint gradi‐ BOOL 0
ents
SP_RmpModTime 1 = Use time values (SP_RmpTime, BOOL 0
SP_LiRmpTime)
0 = Use gradient limits (SP_DnRaLim,
SP_LiDnRaLim, SP_UpRaLim,
SP_LiUpRaLim)
SP_RmpOn* 1 = Activate setpoint ramp to target set‐ BOOL 0
point SP_RmpTarget
SP_RmpTarget* Target setpoint for setpoint ramp REAL 0.0
SP_RmpTime* Time [Time unit] for setpoint ramp from REAL 0.0
current SP up to SP_RmpTarget or time
[Time unit] for gradient limitation in ramp
mode duration.
Time unit depends on TimeFactor
SP_TrkExt 1 = Bumpless switchover from external BOOL 1
to internal setpoint active
SP_TrkPV 1 = Setpoint follows PV in "manual BOOL 0
mode" and with tracking
SP_UpRaLim* Gradient limit (high) for the setpoint REAL 100.0
[Unit/(Time unit)]
Time unit depends on TimeFactor
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
TD Derivative time [s] STRUCT -
TD.ST = 16#FF: Enabled in faceplate ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
TI Integral time [s] STRUCT -
TI.ST = 16#FF: Enabled in faceplate ● Value: REAL ● 100.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


782 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


TimeFactor Time unit: INT 0
0 = Seconds
1 = Minutes
2 = Hours
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use in PCS 7 BYTE 16#00
OS

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AdvCoAct 1 = "Program mode" enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AdvCoRdy 1 = "Program mode" available STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AutAct 1 = "Automatic mode" enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
BypassAct 1 = Bypass is activated in this block STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CascaCut Cascade connection: STRUCT -
1 = Control chain from primary to secon‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
dary controller is interrupted ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
DynDeadBand Dynamic dead band REAL 0.0
D_Part D component of PID algorithm REAL 0.0
ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without BOOL 0
errors
ER Error signal STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ER_A_DCOut Effective delay time [s] for incoming REAL 0.0
alarms at the error signal monitoring
ER_AH_Act 1 = Alarm limit (high) for control deviation STRUCT -
violated. ● Value: BOOL ● 0
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐
bling operating points (Page 149)) and ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐ (Bypass information
olation (Page 174)). bit)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 783
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


ER_AL_Act 1 = Alarm limit (low) for control deviation STRUCT -
violated. ● Value: BOOL ● 0
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐
bling operating points (Page 149)) and ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐ (Bypass information
olation (Page 174)). bit)
ErrorNum Output of pending error number. For er‐ INT -1
ror numbers that can be output by this
block, see PIDConL error handling
(Page 769)
FFwdHiAct 1 = Limit (high) for additive disturbance STRUCT -
variable activation violated ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FFwdLoAct 1 = Limit (low) for additive disturbance STRUCT -
variable activation violated ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
GainEff Effective proportional gain depends on REAL 1.0
NegGain, Gain, NormPV, and NormMV
GrpErr 1 = Group error pending STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
I_Part I component of PID algorithm REAL 0.0
LockAct 1 = Interlock is in effect STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
LoopClosed 1 = Control loop closed STRUCT -
0 = Control loop open ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManAct 1 = "Manual mode" enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManHiOut Limit (high) for "manual mode", corre‐ STRUCT -
sponds to input parameter ManHiLim ● Value: REAL ● 100.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManLoOut Limit (low) for "manual mode", corre‐ STRUCT -
sponds to input parameter ManLoLim ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MS_Release Release for maintenance: STRUCT -
1 = Release for OS operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MsgAckn1 Message acknowledgement status 1 WORD 16#0000
(output ACK_STATE of first ALARM_8P)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


784 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


MsgAckn2 Message acknowledgement status 2 WORD 16#0000
(output ACK_STATE of second
ALARM_8P)
MsgErr1 1 = Alarm error 1 (output ERROR of the BOOL 0
first ALARM_8P)
MsgErr2 1 = Alarm error 2 (output ERROR of the BOOL 0
second ALARM_8P)
MsgStat1 Message status 1 (output STATUS of first WORD 16#0000
ALARM_8P)
MsgStat2 Message status 2 (output STATUS of WORD 16#0000
second ALARM_8P)
MV Manipulated variable STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_HiAct 1 = Limit (high) of manipulated variable STRUCT -
violated ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_LoAct 1 = Limit (low) of manipulated variable STRUCT -
violated ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_UnitOut Unit of measure for manipulated varia‐ INT 0
ble, for interconnecting to the MV_Unit
input parameter of the ConPerMon block
OosAct 1 = Block is "Out of service" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpSt_Out Value of the OpSt_In input parameter, DWORD 16#00000000
for feedforwarding to other blocks. Bit 31
of this parameter is used by
Feature.Bit24
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with settings DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
changed by the block algorithm
OS1PermOut Display of OS1Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS1PermLog Display of OS1Perm with settings DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
changed by the block algorithm
PhaseDeadBand Phase for the dynamic adjustment of the INT 0
dead band
0: Dead band enabled
1: Dead band disabled
2: Settling time
P_Part P component of PID algorithm REAL 0.0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 785
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


PV_AH_Act 1 = PV alarm (high) active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐ ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
olation (Page 174)). (Bypass information
bit)
PV_AH_Out PV - High alarm limit output REAL 0.0
PV_AL_Act 1 = PV alarm (low) active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐ ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
olation (Page 174)). (Bypass information
bit)
PV_AL_Out PV - Low alarm limit output REAL 0.0
PV_HysOut PV - Alarm hysteresis output REAL 0.0
PV_Out Output for process value STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
● Bit 1: BOOL of internal ● 0
fill byte
(Bypass information
bit)
PV_TH_Act 1 = PV tolerance message (high) active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐ ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
olation (Page 174)). (Bypass information
bit)
PV_TH_Out PV - High tolerance limit output REAL 0.0
PV_TL_Act 1 = PV tolerance message (low) active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐ ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
olation (Page 174)). (Bypass information
bit)
PV_TL_Out PV - Low tolerance limit output REAL 0.0
PV_ToleHi Limit (high) of 3-sigma band around the STRUCT -
setpoint is calculated when a ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
ConPerMon block is connected
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
PV_ToleLo Limit (low) of 3-sigma band around the STRUCT -
setpoint is calculated when a ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
ConPerMon block is connected
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


786 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


PV_WH_Act 1 = PV warning (high) active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐ ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
olation (Page 174)). (Bypass information
bit)
PV_WH_Out PV - High warning limit output REAL 0.0
PV_WL_Act 1 = PV warning (low) active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐ ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
olation (Page 174)). (Bypass information
bit)
PV_WL_Out PV - Low warning limit output REAL 0.0
PV_UnitOut Unit of measure for process value, for INT 0
interconnecting to the PV_Unit input
parameter of the ConPerMon block
RbkOut Output for position feedback STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RbkWH_Act 1 = Warning (high) for position feedback STRUCT -
active. ● Value: BOOL ● 0
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐
olation (Page 174)).
RbkWL_Act 1 = Warning (low) for position feedback STRUCT -
active. ● Value: BOOL ● 0
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐
olation (Page 174)).
RdyToStart 1 = Active start readiness STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SettlingTimer Settling time for a closed control loop REAL 0.0
SP Setpoint used by controller STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_DnRaAct 1 = Negative gradient limiting of setpoint STRUCT -
is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 787
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


SP_ExHiAct 1 = Limit (high) for external setpoint has STRUCT -
been reached ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExLoAct 1 = Limit (low) for external setpoint has STRUCT -
been reached ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExtAct 1 = External setpoint is active STRUCT -
0 = Internal setpoint is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExtOut External setpoint, corresponds to input STRUCT -
parameter SP_Ext ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_InHiOut Limit (high) for SP_Int corresponds to STRUCT -
input parameter SP_InHiLim ● Value: REAL ● 100.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_InLoOut Limit (low) for SP_Int corresponds to STRUCT -
input parameter SP_InLoLim ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_RateTarget Target setpoint for the gradient limitation REAL 0.0
SP_UpRaAct 1 = Positive gradient limiting of setpoint STRUCT -
is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_RemRT Remaining ramp time of the setpoint REAL 0.0
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
Status1 Status word 1 (Page 752) DWORD 16#00000000
Status2 Status word 2 (Page 752) DWORD 16#00000000
Status3 Status word 2 (Page 752) DWORD 16#00000000
SumMsgAct 1 = Active hardware interrupt STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Calculation of the output parameter ER_A_DCOut


ER_A_DC is assigned by default to the output before a setpoint change.
ER_A_DCOut = ER_A_DC

In the case of a setpoint change in the positive direction during automatic mode, the output is
calculated as follows:
ER_A_DCOut = Maximum (ER_A_DC, ER_AH_DFac * Setpoint difference)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


788 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

In the case of a setpoint change in the negative direction during automatic mode, the output
is calculated as follows:
ER_A_DCOut = Maximum (ER_A_DC, -1*ER_AH_DFac * Setpoint difference)

When the control circuit has stabilized again, meaning


(ER_AL_Lim + ER_Hyst) <= ER <= (ER_AH_Lim – ER_Hyst)
and the delay time for outgoing alarms ER_A_DG has expired, the output is reset again to
ER_A_DC: ER_A_DCOut = ER_A_DC

Activating and deactivating the function:


The function is deactivated (default) when the following applies: ER_AH_DFac = 0.0 and
ER_AL_DFac = 0.0

See also
PIDConL messaging (Page 770)
PIDConL block diagram (Page 790)
PIDConL modes (Page 757)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 789
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

5.7.7 PIDConL block diagram

PIDConL block diagram

63B([W/L 6SB([W,QW
63B,QW/L /LQN
63B([W$FW
63B([W2S 2SHUDWRU
63B,QW2S /RJLF
63B/L2S 63B5DWH2Q
63B([+L$FW 63B7UN39$1'
/LPLW
63B([/R$FW 09B)RU2Q25
63B([W 63B5DWH7DUJHW 0DQ$FW2509B7UN2Q
63B([W2XW

 
63B([+L/LP *UDGLHQW 39
63B([/R/LP 63B5PS2Q 63
  
5HMHFW 5DPS

63B5PS7DU  63B8S5D/LP 63B8S5D$FW


63B'Q5D/LP 63B'Q5D$FW
 63B5PS0RG7LPH
/LPLW 63B,Q+L/LP
63B5PS0RG7LPH 63B5PS7LPH
63B,Q/R/LP
$GY&R09 63B5PS7LPH
63B8S5D/LP
63B'Q5D/LP
63B,Q+L/LP
63B,Q/R/LP $GY&R$FW$1'
$GY&R0RG63

63B,QW 5HMHFW 
,VOLPLWHGDQG
3URS6HO
WUDFNHG 
$ODUP

(5 (5B$+B$FW I 
63B,Q+L/LP 63B,Q+L2XW
63B,Q/R/LP 63B,Q/R2XW (5B$/B$FW 3URS)DF63 

(5B$+B/LP(5B$/B/LP(5B+\VW
)HDWXUH%LW (5B$+B(1(5B$/B(Q(5B$B'& 'LII7R)EN
(5B([W (5B$B'*



39 
'HDG%DQG 7''LII6HO

*DLQ 'LII*DLQ
6LP *DLQ(II
 SK\V
6LP39 
I 
39 39B287 1RUP391RUP09
 3URS)DF63

39B$+B$FW 7,
:ULWH39B287WR $ODUP 39B:+B$FW ,QW+ROG3RV
6LP39LI6LP  39B7+B$FW ,QW+ROG1HJ
39B7/B$FW 09B2IIVHW
39B:/B$FW
39B$/B$FW 25
39B$+B/LP39B:+B/LP39B7+B/LP39B$/B/LP39B:/B/LP 7, 
39B7/B/LP39B+\VW39B$+B(Q39B:+B(Q39B7+B(Q39B$/B(Q
,QW6HO 
39B:/B(Q39B7/B(Q39B$B'&39B:B'&39B7B'&39B$B'*
39B:'*39B7B'*
1

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


790 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

127 $XW$FW

$XW0RG/L 0DQ$FW
/LQN /RRS&ORVHG
0DQ0RG/L
2SHUDWRU 2
$XW0RG2S 09B7UN2Q
/RJLF 5
0DQ0RG2S 09B)RU2Q
09B7UN2Q
0RG/L2S
09B7UN
09B)RU2Q

/LPLW 09B+L$FW
(5 09B)RUFH
09B/R$FW
 

09
&RQ=RQH 09B+L/LP
09B+L/LP  
09B/R/LP
09B/R/LP ,QWHUORFN
5HMHFW
0DQ 09B+L/LP
/LPLW 09B/R/L
09B6DIH3RV
))ZG ))ZG+L$FW 09
0DQ+L/LP 0DQ+L2XW
))ZG/R$FW 0DQ/R/LP 0DQ/R2XW 6DIH3RV
6DIH3RV
))ZG+L/LP
))ZG/R/LP
$ODUP
5EN:+B$FW
5EN
5EN:/B$FW

5EN:+B/LP
5EN:/B/LP
5EN+\VW
5EN:+B(Q
5EN:/B(1

See also
PIDConL I/Os (Page 773)
PIDConL messaging (Page 770)
PIDConL error handling (Page 769)
PIDConL functions (Page 759)
PIDConL modes (Page 757)
Description of PIDConL (Page 752)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 791
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

5.7.8 Operator control and monitoring

5.7.8.1 PIDConL views

Views of the PIDConL block


The block PIDConL provides the following views:
● PIDConL, PIDConS and PIDConR standard views (Page 793)
● Alarm view (Page 313)
● Limit view of PID controllers (Page 302)
● Trend view (Page 317)
● Ramp view (Page 311)
● Parameter view of PID controllers (Page 292)
● PIDConL, PIDConS and PIDConR previews (Page 798)
● Memo view (Page 315)
● Batch view (Page 313)
● Block icons for PID and FM controller (Page 248)
Refer to the Structure of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure (Page 239) sections
for general information about the faceplate and block icon.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


792 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

5.7.8.2 PIDConL, PIDConS and PIDConR standard views

PIDConL standard view


 
 
 
 




 
 
 

 







 

 

 

 


 




(1) Displaying and switching the operating mode


This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
● Manual mode (Page 73)
● Automatic mode (Page 73)
● Program mode for controllers (Page 79) (not with PIDConS)
● Out of service (Page 72)
Refer to section Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) for information
on switching the operating mode.

(2) Displaying and switching the setpoint


This area shows how to specify the setpoint. The setpoint can be specified as follows:
● By the application ("External", CFC/SFC)
● By the user directly in the faceplate ("Internal").
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for information
on switching the setpoint specification.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 793
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

You can find additional information on this in the section Setpoint specification - internal/
external (Page 130).

Note
With the PIDConR block, this area is only visible if you have set the Feature Bit Switching
operator controls for external setpoint to visible (Page 147) to 1.

(3) High and low scale range for the process value
These values provide information on the display range for the bar graph of the process value.
The scale range is defined in the engineering system.

(4) Display of the process value including signal status


This area shows the current process value with the corresponding signal status.

(5) Displaying and changing the setpoint including signal status


This area shows the current setpoint with the corresponding signal status.
Refer to the Changing values (Page 270) section for information on changing the setpoint. The
setpoint specification also needs to be set to "Internal" for this block.

(6) High and low scale range for the setpoint


This area is already set and cannot be changed.

(7) Displaying and changing the manipulated variable including signal status
This area shows the current manipulated variable with the corresponding signal status.
Refer to the Changing values (Page 270) section for information on changing the manipulated
variable. You can only make a change in manual mode.

(8) Display of the position feedback including signal status


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
This area shows the current feedback of the manipulated variable with the corresponding signal
status.

(9) Bar graph for the manipulated variable


This area shows the current manipulated variable in the form of a bar graph. The visible area
in the bar graph depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


794 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

(10) Bar graph for position feedback


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
This area shows the current position feedback in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in
the bar graph depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).

(10)Bar graph for position feedback


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
This area shows the current position feedback in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in
the bar graph depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).

(11)Operator control and display area for interlock functions of the block (not with PIDConS)
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
You can use this button to control the interlock functions of the block. You can find additional
information on this in the sectionInterlocking functions (Page 101).
The following is displayed in addition to the buttons:
● Interlock status (seeForming the group status for interlock information (Page 106)), e.g.:

● Signal status (seeForming and outputting the signal status for technologic blocks
(Page 110)), e.g.:

● Bypass information (seeForming the group status for interlock information (Page 106)):

(12)Navigation button for the standard view of theConPerMonblock


Use this navigation button to open the standard view of theConPerMonblock. The visibility of
this navigation button depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).
See also the sectionOpening additional faceplates (Page 217)for more on this.

(13)Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate


Use this navigation button to open the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system (ES). The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the
engineering system (ES).
See also the sectionOpening additional faceplates (Page 217)for more on this.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 795
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

(14)Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Maintenance"
Additional information on this is available in sectionRelease for maintenance (Page 65)Display
area for block states.

(15) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Simulation"
You can find additional information on this in the section Simulating signals (Page 59).

(16) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Invalid signal"

(17) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block (from high to low
according to priority):
● "Optimizing"
● "Tracking"
● "Forced tracking"
● "Load SP"
● "SP ramp active"

(18) Limit display


These colored triangles indicate the configured limits in the respective bar graph:
● Red: Alarm
● Yellow: Warning
● Blue: Tolerance

(19) Bar graph for the process value


This area shows the current process value in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the
bar graph depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


796 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

(20) Bar graph for the setpoint


This area shows the current setpoint in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the bar
graph depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).

(21) Display of external setpoint


This display [E] is only visible when you have selected "Internal" setpoint specification. It shows
the external setpoint that would apply if you were to change the setpoint specification to
"external".

(22) Display for the target setpoint of the setpoint ramp


This display [R] shows the target setpoint and is only visible if you have enabled ramp
generation in the Ramp view (Page 311).

(23) Limit display for the setpoint


These triangles show the SP_HiLim and SP_LoLim setpoint limits configured in the
engineering system (ES).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 797
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

5.7.8.3 PIDConL, PIDConS and PIDConR previews

Preview of PIDConL
The preview shows you the parameters that you, as an OS operator, can control. You cannot
control anything in this view, however.

(1) Preview area


This area shows you a preview for the following values:
● "SP external": currently applicable external setpoint
– With the PIDConR block, this area is only visible if you have set the Feature Bit
Switching operator controls for external setpoint to visible (Page 147) to 1
● "SP internal": currently applicable internal setpoint
● "Rem. time SP ramp" : Remaining time to reach the ramp target value (not with PIDConS).
● "Error signal": Current control deviation
● "Program value": Default value for program mode (not with PIDConS)
● "Disturbance variable": Additive value for feedforward control (not with PIDConS)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


798 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

● "Track MV": Track manipulated variable (value is 1)


● "Tracking value": effective manipulated variable for "Track manipulated variable"
● "Channel MV": Display of the manipulated variable by the output channel block

(2) Enable operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Icons for enabled operation:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: The OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS
operator permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).
The following enabled operations are shown here:
● "SP external": You can feedforward the external setpoint.
● "SP internal": You can feedforward the internal setpoint.
● "Change SP": You can change the setpoint.
● "Change MV": You can change the manipulated variable.
● "Program mode": You can switch to "program mode". (not with PIDConS)
● "Automatic": You can switch to "automatic mode".
● "Manual": You can switch to "manual mode".
● "Out of service": You can switch to "Out of service" operating mode.
● "Local operator permission": Use the ← button to switch to the standard view of the
OpStations block. You can find additional information on this in the section Operator control
permissions (Page 265).

(3) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
Use this navigation button to open the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system. The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the engineering
system (ES).
See also the section Opening additional faceplates (Page 217) for more on this.

(4) Process value


This area displays the real process value (PV).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 799
Controller blocks
5.7 PIDConL - Continuous PID controller (Large)

(5) Inputs and outputs


This area shows the following parameters:
● "Interlock" (not with PIDConS):
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Interlocking without reset is active; you can operate the block without reset once the
interlocking condition has disappeared
– 1 = "Good" state
● "Interlock deact." (not with PIDConS):
– 0 = Bypass disabled
– 1 = Bypassing interlock in "local mode" and in "simulation"

(6) Bypass value


This area displays the bypass value (BypPV).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


800 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.8 PIDConS - Continuous PID controller (Small)

5.8 PIDConS - Continuous PID controller (Small)

5.8.1 Description of PIDConS

Object name (type + number) and family


Type and number: FB 1830
Family: Control

Area of application for PIDConS


The block is used for the following applications:
● Fixed setpoint control

How it works
The block is a PID controller with continuous output signal (manipulated variable). It is used
to activate a final controlling element with continuous action input.
The block functions following the PID algorithm with a delayed D component and an integrator
with double precision.
The block is suitable for controlling sluggish control loops, for example, for temperatures and
filling levels, and high-speed control loops, for example, for flow rates and speed. For a given
CPU, a compromise has to be made between the number of controllers and the frequency
with which the individual controllers have to be processed. The faster the modulated control
loops are, i.e. the more frequently the manipulated variables have to be calculated per time
unit, the lower the number of controllers that can be installed.

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38). The block is
also installed automatically in the startup OB (OB100).
For the control loop monitoring to work as planned in the trend view of the controller faceplates,
the
S7_xarchive:='Value, shortterm;'

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 801
Controller blocks
5.8 PIDConS - Continuous PID controller (Small)

attributes in the process tag types for control loops at the controller function block must be set
for the following tags:
● Input parameters:
– CPI_In
● Output parameters
– MV
– MV_HiAct
– MV_LoAct
– LoopClosed
– SP
– PV_Out
– PV_ToleHi
– PV_ToleLo
There are no templates for the PIDConS block for process tag types or simulated use cases
in the example project (APL_Example_xx, xx represents the language variant). However, you
can replace PIDConL with PIDConS in the following process tag types and use cases.
Examples of process tag types:
● PID controller with safety logic and control loop monitoring (PIDConL_ConPerMon)
(Page 2388)
Application cases in example project:
● Process simulation including noise generator (ProcSimC; ProcSimS) (Page 2437)
● Control loop monitoring for simulation with colored noise (ConPerMonSim) (Page 2441)
● Operating point-oriented adaptation of parameters (gain scheduling) for non-linear
processes (GainSchedSim) (Page 2442)
● Filtering of noisy measured values in a control loop (SigSmoothSim) (Page 2444)

Startup characteristics
Use the Feature bit Set startup characteristics (Page 141) to define the startup characteristics
of this block.
The messages are suppressed after startup for the number of cycles set at RunUpCyc.

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


You can find a description for each parameter in section PIDConS I/Os (Page 814).

Status bit Parameter


0 Occupied
1 BatchEn
2 SimOn

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


802 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.8 PIDConS - Continuous PID controller (Small)

Status bit Parameter


3 OosAct.Value
4 OosLi.Value
5 AutAct.Value
6 Invalid signal status
7 ManAct.Value
8 SP_ExtAct.Value
9 1 = Input parameter MV_ChnST is interconnected
10 MV_TrkOn.Value AND NOT (ManAct.Value OR OosAct.Value)
11 MV.Value > MV_LoLim.Value
12 - 17 Not used
18 SimOn AND ManAct
19 Not used
20 1 = Input parameter Rbk is not interconnected (Rbk.ST = 16#FF)
21-22 Not used
23 OptimEn
24 OptimOcc
25 - 31 Not used

Status word allocation for Status2 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 MsgLock
1 PV_AH_Act.Value
2 PV_WH_Act.Value
3-4 Not used
5 PV_WL_Act.Value
6 PV_AL_Act.Value
7 PV_AH_En OR Feature.Bit31
8 PV_WH_En OR Feature.Bit31
9-10 Not used
11 PV_WL_En OR Feature.Bit31
12 PV_AL_En OR Feature.Bit31
13 PV_AH_MsgEn
14 PV_WH_MsgEn
15-16 Not used
17 PV_WL_MsgEn
18 PV_AL_MsgEn
19 Delay of the PV_AH_Lim message
20 Delay of the PV_WH_Lim message
21 Delay of the PV_WL_Lim message
22 Delay of the PV_AL_Lim message
23 Collection of message delays

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 803
Controller blocks
5.8 PIDConS - Continuous PID controller (Small)

Status bit Parameter


24-28 Not used
29 GrpErr.Value
30 RdyToStart.Value
31 MS_RelOp

See also
PIDConS modes (Page 804)
PIDConS functions (Page 805)
PIDConS error handling (Page 811)
PIDConS messaging (Page 812)
PIDConS block diagram (Page 822)

5.8.2 PIDConS modes

PIDConS operating modes


The block can be operated using the following modes:
● Automatic mode (Page 73)
● Manual mode (Page 73)
● Out of service (Page 72)
The next section provides additional block-specific information relating to the general
descriptions.

"Automatic mode"
You can find general information on "Automatic mode", switching modes and bumpless
switchover in the Manual and automatic mode for control blocks (Page 73) chapter.

"Manual mode"
You can find general information on "Manual mode", switching modes and bumpless
switchover in the Manual and automatic mode for control blocks (Page 73) chapter.

"Out of service"
You can find general information about the "Out of service" mode in the Out of service
(Page 72) chapter.
With Feature.Bit5 =1 the following output parameter become the status of simulation
16#60, if mode is changed to "Out of service".

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


804 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.8 PIDConS - Continuous PID controller (Small)

With Feature.Bit5 =0 the following output parameter become the status of 16#80, if mode
is changed to "Out of service".
● SP_ExtAct.ST
● SP.ST
● PV_Out.ST
● PV_AH_Act.ST
● PV_WH_Act.ST
● PV_WL_Act.ST
● PV_AL_Act.ST
● PV_ToleHi.ST
● PV_ToleLo.ST
● ER.ST

See also
Program mode for controllers (Page 79)
PIDConS block diagram (Page 822)
Description of PIDConS (Page 801)
PIDConS functions (Page 805)
PIDConS error handling (Page 811)
PIDConS messaging (Page 812)
PIDConS I/Os (Page 814)

5.8.3 PIDConS functions

Functions of PIDConS
The functions for this block are listed below.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 805
Controller blocks
5.8 PIDConS - Continuous PID controller (Small)

Generation of manipulated variables


The manipulated variable MV can be generated as follows:

ManAct MV_TrkOn AdvCoAct MV = Limit monitoring State


AND NOT
AdvCo‐
ModSP
1 - - Man MV_HiLim Manual mode, set by the operator
MV_LoLim
0 1 - MV_Trk MV_HiLim Tracking with limitation
MV_LoLim
0 0 0 P_Part + MV_HiLim Automatic mode (PID algorithm)
I_Part + MV_LoLim
D_Part

If the controller is in "out of service" mode, the output parameter MV is set to the last valid value
in manual mode or the neutral position manipulated variable depending on the Feature Bit
(Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect at startup (Page 169)). Refer to the Out of
service (Page 72) section for more on this.

Tracking and limiting a manipulated variable


The block provides the standard function Tracking and limiting a manipulated variable
(Page 205).

Neutral position
The block provides the standard function Neutral position for motors, valves and controllers
(Page 48).

Group error
This block provides the standard function Outputting group errors (Page 124).
The following parameters are taken into consideration when forming the group error:
● CSF

Outputting a signal for start readiness


This block provides the standard function Outputting a signal for start readiness (Page 54).

"Actuator active" information


If the manipulated variable MV is greater than the minimum manual limit MV_LoLim.Value,
this is recognized as actuator active. This status can be used to indicate a customized symbol
in the process image, for example, and is saved in the status word (see Status word section
in Description of PIDConS (Page 801)).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


806 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.8 PIDConS - Continuous PID controller (Small)

External/internal setpoint specification


The block provides the standard function Setpoint specification - internal/external (Page 130).

Setpoint limitation
With this function, you can limit the setpoint to a range by means of the parameters
SP_HiLim (high limit) and SP_LoLim (low limit). If the setpoint lies outside the range defined
by you, it is limited to the valid range.
If the setpoint is at or above the limit SP_HiLim, this is displayed at the output SP_HiAct =
1.
If the setpoint is at or below the limit SP_LoLim, this is displayed at the output SP_LoAct =
1

Tracking setpoint in manual mode


The block provides the standard function Tracking setpoint in manual mode (Page 205).

Simulating signals
The block provides the standard function Simulating signals (Page 59).
You can simulate the following values:
● Process value (SimPV)

Limit monitoring of the process value


The block provides the standard function Limit monitoring of the process value (Page 87).

Error signal generation and dead band


The block provides the standard function Error signal generation and dead band (Page 201).

Selecting a unit of measure


The block provides the standard function Selecting a unit of measure (Page 221).

PID algorithm
The manipulated variable is generated in automatic mode according to the following algorithm:
MV = GainEff · (1 + (1 / (TI · s) + (TD · s) / (1 + TD / DiffGain · s)) · ER
Where:
s = Complex number
The following step response occurs:

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 807
Controller blocks
5.8 PIDConS - Continuous PID controller (Small)

09
09B+L/LP

*DLQ(II 7'
7LPH/DJ6DPSOH7LPH
*DLQ(II
(5 W *DLQ(II
*DLQ(II

W
7,

09B/R/LP

,QSXWVWHS(5 W  ` LIW
LIW!

Note
The formula describes a standard application where P, I and D components are activated and
the P and D components are not in the feedback circuit (PropSel = 1, TI <> 0,
DiffToFbk = 0 and PropFacSP = 1).

The D component delay is derived from TD / DiffGain.


● The P component is displayed at the P_Part I/O and can be deactivated using PropSel
=0.
● The I component is displayed at the I_Part I/O and can be deactivated using TI = 0 .
● The D component is displayed at the D_Part I/O and can be deactivated using TD = 0 .

Anti-windup
The controller has an anti-windup function. The I component is frozen after the manipulated
variable has reached limits (MV_HiLim or MV_LoLim).

Forming the signal status for blocks


The block provides the standard function Forming and outputting the signal status for
technologic blocks (Page 110).
● Signal status for the process value PV_Out:
The signal status of the output parameter PV_Out always corresponds to the signal status
of input parameter PV or, if the block is in simulation mode, 16#60.
● Signal status for the setpoint value SP:
The signal status of the SP output parameter is always equivalent to the signal status of
the input parameter SP_Ext or SP_Int, depending on how the setpoint is specified. If the
internal setpoint SP_Int is used, the signal status is always outputted as 16#80.
● Signal status of the error signal ER:
The signal status of output parameter ER is obtained from the worst signal status of the two
output parameters PV_Out and SP, and is outputted.
The signal status 16#60 (external simulation) is suppressed because the block acts as a
sink with external simulation.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


808 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.8 PIDConS - Continuous PID controller (Small)

● Signal status for the manipulated variable MV:


The signal status of output parameter MV is formed in "Automatic mode" from the error
signal ER and output. In "manual mode", the signal status is output as good. The signal
status 16#60 (external simulation) is suppressed because the block acts as a sink with
external simulation. In "manual mode", the signal status is output as good.
● Worst signal status:
The worst signal status ST_Worst for the block is formed from SP, PV_Out, MV_ChnST
and Rbk .

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133) . The following functionality is
available for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
0 Set startup characteristics (Page 141)
1 Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 181)
2 Resetting the commands for changing the mode (Page 165)
4 Not used.
5 Changes signal status of outputs in OOS (Page 198)
6-14 Not used.
15 Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect with "out of service" operating mode
(Page 170)
16 Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect at startup (Page 169)
17 - 22 Not used.
23 SP following PV in open loop has no priority over SP_Ext and SP limits (Page 183)
24 Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162)
25 Suppression of all messages (Page 178)
26 Reaction of the switching points in the "Out of service" operating mode (Page 180)
27 - 30 Not used.
31 Limits disabled in faceplate (Page 195)

Operator permissions
The block provides the standard function Operator control permissions (Page 265).
The block has the following permissions for the OS_Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 1 = Operator can switch to "automatic mode" AutModOp
1 1 = Operator can switch to "manual mode" ManModOp
2 1 = Operator can switch to "Out of service" mode OosOp
3 1 = Operator can switch the setpoint to "external" SP_ExtOp
4 1 = Operator can switch the setpoint to "internal" SP_IntOp
5 1 = Operator can change the internal setpoint SP_Int
6 1 = Operator can change the manual parameter Man

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 809
Controller blocks
5.8 PIDConS - Continuous PID controller (Small)

Bit Function
7 1 = Operator can change the high operation limit of the setpoint SP_HiLim
8 1 = Operator can change the low operation limit of the setpoint SP_LoLim
9 1 = Operator can change the operation high limit of the manipulated variable ManHiLim
10 1 = Operator can change the operation low limit of the manipulated variable ManLoLim
11 1 = Operator can permit the PID optimization function OptimEn
12 1 = Operator can enable the track setpoint in "manual mode" function SP_TrkPV
13 1 = Operator can enable the bumpless switchover from external to internal SP_TrkExt
14 1 = Operator can change the gain parameter Gain
15 1 = Operator can change the integral time parameter TI
16 1 = Operator can change the derivative time parameter TD
17 1 = Operator can change the derivative gain parameter DiffGain
18 1 = Operator can change the dead band parameter DeadBand
19 1 = Operator can change the limit (process value) PV_AH_Lim for the high alarm
20 1 = Operator can change the limit (process value) PV_WH_Lim for the high warning
21 1 = Operator can change the hysteresis (process value) PV_Hyst
22 1 = Operator can change the limit (process value) PV_WL_Lim for the low warning
23 1 = Operator can change the limit (process value) PV_AL_Lim for the low alarm
24 1 = Operator can activate the Simulation function SimOn
25 1 = Operator can activate the Release for maintenance function MS_RelOp
26 1 = Operator can change the simulation value SimPV
27 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_AH_MsgEn
28 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_WH_MsgEn
29 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_WL_MsgEn
30 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_AL_MsgEn
31 Not used

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Release for maintenance


The block provides the standard function Release for maintenance (Page 65)

Generating instance-specific messages


The block provides the standard function Generating instance-specific messages (Page 213)
without the time stamp function in the I/O.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


810 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.8 PIDConS - Continuous PID controller (Small)

Suppressing messages using the MsgLock parameter


This block provides the standard function Suppressing messages using the MsgLock
parameter (Page 214).

Specifying the display area for process and setpoint values as well as operations
This block provides the standard function Display and operator input area for process values
and setpoints (Page 216).

Opening additional faceplates


This block provides the standard function Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


This block provides the standard function SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

See also
Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218)
EventTs functions (Page 1698)
PIDConS modes (Page 804)
PIDConS error handling (Page 811)
PIDConS messaging (Page 812)
PIDConS I/Os (Page 814)
PIDConS block diagram (Page 822)

5.8.4 PIDConS error handling

Error handling of PIDConS


Refer to section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions for the error handling of all
blocks.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers
● Control system fault (CSF)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 811
Controller blocks
5.8 PIDConS - Continuous PID controller (Small)

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum output parameter can be used to output the following error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; the block is not executed
0 There is no error.
30 The value of PV can no longer be displayed in the REAL number field.
31 The value of SP_Ext can no longer be displayed in the REAL number field.
33 The value of MV_Trk can no longer be displayed in the REAL number field.
35 The value of Rbk can no longer be displayed in the REAL number field.
36 The value of MV can no longer be displayed in the REAL number field.
51 AutModLi = 1 and ManModLi = 1
SP_LiOp = 1 and SP_IntLi = 1 and SP_ExtLi = 1
60 |TI| < SampleTime / 2
61 |TD| < SampleTime
62 DiffGain < 1 or DiffGain > 10
63 TD / DiffGain < SampleTime / 2

Control system fault (CSF)


An external signal can be activated via the CSF input. A control system fault is triggered if this
signal changes to 1. Refer to the section Error handling (Page 121).

See also
Description of PIDConS (Page 801)
PIDConS modes (Page 804)
PIDConS functions (Page 805)
PIDConS messaging (Page 812)
PIDConS I/Os (Page 814)
PIDConS block diagram (Page 822)

5.8.5 PIDConS messaging

Messaging
The following messages can be generated for this block:
● Process control fault
● Process messages
● Instance-specific messages

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


812 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.8 PIDConS - Continuous PID controller (Small)

Process control fault


The following control system fault messages can be output:

Message in‐ Message identi‐ Message class Event


stance fier
MsgEvId1 SIG 5 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External error has occurred

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment
You can interconnect an external fault (signal) to input parameter CSF. If it changes to CSF =
1, a process control fault is triggered (MsgEvId1, SIG 5).

Process messages

Message in‐ Message identifier Message class Event


stance
MsgEvId1 SIG 1 Alarm - high $$BlockComment$$
PV - high alarm limit violated
SIG 2 Warning - high $$BlockComment$$
PV - high warning limit violated
SIG 3 Warning - low $$BlockComment$$
PV - low warning limit violated
SIG 4 Alarm - low $$BlockComment$$
PV - low alarm limit violated

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment

Instance-specific messages
You have the option of using one or two instance-specific messages for this block.

Message in‐ Message identifier Message class Event


stance
MsgEvId1 SIG 6 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 1
Status 16#@8%x@
SIG 7 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 2
Status 16#@9%x@

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 813
Controller blocks
5.8 PIDConS - Continuous PID controller (Small)

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId1

Associated value Block parameters


1 BatchName
2 StepNo
3 BatchID
4 Process value PV_Out
5 Control deviation ER
6 Signal status ExtMsg1
7 Signal status ExtMsg2
8 ExtVa108
9 ExtVa109
10 Not allocated

The associated values 8 ... 9 are allocated to the parameters ExtVa108 ... ExtVa109 and
can be used. Additional information is available in the "Process Control System PCS 7 -
Engineering System" manual.

See also
Description of PIDConS (Page 801)
PIDConS modes (Page 804)
PIDConS functions (Page 805)
PIDConS error handling (Page 811)
PIDConS I/Os (Page 814)
PIDConS block diagram (Page 822)

5.8.6 PIDConS I/Os


I/Os of PIDConS

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AutModLi* 1 = "Automatic mode" via interconnection or STRUCT -
SFC (controlled by ModLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AutModOp* 1 = "Automatic mode" via operator (controlled BOOL 0
by ModLiOp = 0)
BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation for batch control BOOL 0
BatchID Batch ID DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name S7-String

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


814 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.8 PIDConS - Continuous PID controller (Small)

Parameter Description Type Default


CPI_In Input for control performance index, which is STRUCT -
calculated by the assigned ConPerMon block ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#78
CSF 1 = External error (control system fault) STRUCT -
Error handling (Page 121) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
DeadBand Width of dead band REAL 0.0
DiffGain Gain of differentiator [1..10] DiffGain = TD / STRUCT -
(delay time of D component) ● Value: REAL ● 5.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1
ExtMsg1 1 = Binary input for freely selectable message STRUCT -
1 is used ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg2 1 = Binary input for freely selectable message STRUCT -
2 is used ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtVa108 Associated value 8 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa109 Associated value 9 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
Feature I/O for additional PIDConS functions STRUCT -
(Page 805) ● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
Gain Proportional gain STRUCT -
Gain.ST = 16#FF: Enabled in faceplate ● Value: REAL ● 1.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
IntHoldNeg 1 = Integrator cannot run in negative direction STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
IntHoldPos 1 = Integrator cannot run in positive direction STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Man* Manual specification for the manipulated var‐ REAL 0.0
iable
ManModLi* 1 = "Manual mode" via interconnection or STRUCT -
SFC (controlled by ModLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManModOp* 1 = "Manual mode" via OS operator (control‐ BOOL 1
led by ModLiOp = 0)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 815
Controller blocks
5.8 PIDConS - Continuous PID controller (Small)

Parameter Description Type Default


ModLiOp Operating mode switchover between: STRUCT -
0 = Operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
1 = Interconnection or SFC ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MS_RelOp* 1 = Release for maintenance by OS operator BOOL 0
MsgEvID1 Message number (assigned automatically) DWORD 16#00000000
MsgLock 1 = Suppress process messages. STRUCT -
See also the section Suppressing messages ● Value: BOOL ● 0
using the MsgLock parameter (Page 214) for ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
more on this.
MV_ChnST Signal status of output channel for MV STRUCT -
Should be connected to an output channel ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
block ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
MV_HiLim Limit (high) for manipulated variable MV STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 100.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_LoLim Limit (low) for manipulated variable MV STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_Offset Manipulated variable for ER=0, operating REAL 0.0
point for controller with deactivated I compo‐
nent
MV_OpScale OS display range for manipulated variable MV STRUCT -
● High: REAL ● 100.0
● Low: REAL ● 0.0
MV_SafePos Manipulated variable neutral position STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_Trk* Tracking value for the manipulated variable STRUCT -
MV ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_TrkOn 1 = Tracking of manipulated variable MV STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_Unit Unit of measure for manipulated variable INT 1342
Occupied 1 = Occupied by batch control BOOL 0
OosLi 1 = "Out of service", via interconnection or STRUCT -
SFC (0-1 edge transition) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosOp* 1 = "Out of service", via OS operator BOOL 0
OptimEn* 1 = Enable optimization of PID parameters by BOOL 0
PID tuner
OptimOcc* 1 = Optimization running BOOL 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


816 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.8 PIDConS - Continuous PID controller (Small)

Parameter Description Type Default


OpSt_In Input parameter for local operator authoriza‐ DWORD 16#00000000
tion, connected with the Out output parame‐
ter of the upstream block, OpStations
(Page 423)
OS_Perm I/O for operator permission (Page 805) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● ... ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
PropSel 1 = Activate P component BOOL 1
PV* Process value (controlled variable) STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
PV_A_DC* Delay time for incoming PV alarms [s] REAL 0.0
PV_AH_En 1 = Enable PV alarm limit (high) BOOL 1
PV_AH_Lim Limit PV alarm (high) REAL 95.0
PV_AH_MsgEn 1 = Enable PV alarm (high) message BOOL 1
PV_AL_En 1 = Enable PV alarm limit (low) BOOL 1
PV_AL_Lim PV alarm limit (low) REAL 5.0
PV_AL_MsgEn 1 = Enable PV alarm (low) message BOOL 1
PV_Hyst Hysteresis for PV alarm, warning and toler‐ REAL 1.0
ance limits
PV_OpScale Limit for scale in PV bar graph of faceplate STRUCT -
● High: REAL ● 100.0
● Low: REAL ● 0.0
PV_Unit Unit of measure for process value INT 1001
PV_W_DC* Delay time for incoming PV warnings [s] REAL 0.0
PV_WH_En 1 = Enable PV warning limit (high) BOOL 1
PV_WH_Lim Limit PV warning (high) REAL 90.0
PV_WH_MsgEn 1 = Enable PV warning (high) message BOOL 1
PV_WL_En 1 = Enable PV warning limit (low) BOOL 1
PV_WL_Lim Limit PV warning (low) REAL 10.0
PV_WL_MsgEn 1 = Enable PV warning (low) message BOOL 1
Rbk* Position feedback for display on OS STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
RunUpCyc Number of cycles in startup; messages are INT 3
suppressed during these cycles
SafePos 1 = Neutral position (Page 48) for controller BOOL 0
manipulated variable is MV_HiLim
0 = Neutral position for controller manipulated
variable is MV_LoLim

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 817
Controller blocks
5.8 PIDConS - Continuous PID controller (Small)

Parameter Description Type Default


SafePos2 Neutral position for control valve: INT 0
0 = SafePos is valid
1 = Neutral position is MV_SafePos
2 = Neutral position is last manipulated varia‐
ble (stop)
SampleTime Sampling time [s] (assigned automatically) REAL 0.1
SelFp1 1 = Call a block saved in this parameter as an ANY -
additional faceplate (Page 217) in the stand‐
ard view
SimOn* 1 = Simulation on BOOL 0
SimPV* Process value used for SimOn = 1 REAL 0.0
SP_Ext* external setpoint - (to interconnection) STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExtLi* 1 = Select external setpoint (via interconnec‐ STRUCT -
tion) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExtOp* 1 = Select external setpoint (via operator) BOOL 0
SP_HiLim Limit (high) of internal SP STRUCT
● Value: BOOL ● 100.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_Int* Internal setpoint for operation REAL 0.0
SP_IntLi* 1 = Select internal setpoint (via interconnec‐ STRUCT -
tion) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_IntOp* 1 = Select internal setpoint (via operator) BOOL 0
SP_LiOp Select setpoint source (internal/external): STRUCT -
1 = Via interconnection ● Value: BOOL ● 0
0 = Via operator ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_LoLim Limit (low) of internal SP STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_TrkPV 1 = Setpoint follows PV in "manual mode" and BOOL 0
with tracking
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
TD Derivative time [s] STRUCT -
TD.ST = 16#FF: Enabled in faceplate ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
TI Integral time [s] STRUCT -
TI.ST = 16#FF: Enabled in faceplate ● Value: REAL ● 100.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use in PCS 7 OS BYTE 16#00

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


818 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.8 PIDConS - Continuous PID controller (Small)

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AutAct 1 = "Automatic mode" enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
D_Part D component of PID algorithm REAL 0.0
ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without BOOL 0
errors
ER Error signal STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ErrorNum Output of pending error number. For er‐ INT -1
ror numbers that can be output by this
block, see PIDConS error handling
(Page 811)
GrpErr 1 = Group error pending STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
I_Part I component of PID algorithm REAL 0.0
LoopClosed 1 = Control loop closed STRUCT -
0 = Control loop open ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManAct 1 = "Manual mode" enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MS_Release Release for maintenance: STRUCT -
1 = Release for OS operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV Manipulated variable STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_HiAct 1 = Limit (high) of manipulated variable STRUCT -
violated ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_LoAct 1 = Limit (low) of manipulated variable STRUCT -
violated ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_UnitOut Unit of measure for manipulated varia‐ INT 0
ble, for interconnecting to the MV_Unit
input parameter of the ConPerMon block

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 819
Controller blocks
5.8 PIDConS - Continuous PID controller (Small)

Parameter Description Type Default


OosAct 1 = Block is "Out of service" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpSt_Out Value of the OpSt_In input parameter, DWORD 16#00000000
for feedforwarding to other blocks. Bit 31
of this parameter is used by
Feature.Bit24
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with settings DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
changed by the block algorithm
P_Part P component of PID algorithm REAL 0.0
PV_AH_Act 1 = PV alarm (high) active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐
olation (Page 174)).
PV_AL_Act 1 = PV alarm (low) active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐
olation (Page 174)).
PV_Out Output for process value STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
PV_ToleHi Limit (high) of 3-sigma band around the STRUCT -
setpoint is calculated when a ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
ConPerMon block is connected
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
PV_ToleLo Limit (low) of 3-sigma band around the STRUCT -
setpoint is calculated when a ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
ConPerMon block is connected
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
PV_WH_Act 1 = PV warning (high) active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐
olation (Page 174)).
PV_WL_Act 1 = PV warning (low) active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐
olation (Page 174)).
PV_UnitOut Unit of measure for process value, for INT 0
interconnecting to the PV_Unit input
parameter of the ConPerMon block

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


820 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.8 PIDConS - Continuous PID controller (Small)

Parameter Description Type Default


RdyToStart 1 = Active start readiness STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP Setpoint used by controller STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExtAct 1 = External setpoint is active STRUCT -
0 = Internal setpoint is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_HiOut Limit (high) for SP corresponds to input STRUCT -
parameter SP_HiLim ● Value: REAL ● 100.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_LoOut Limit (low) for SP corresponds to input STRUCT -
parameter SP_LoLim ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
Status1 Status word 1 (Page 801) DWORD 16#00000000
Status2 Status word 2 (Page 801) DWORD 16#00000000
SumMsgAct 1 = Active hardware interrupt STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

See also
PIDConS modes (Page 804)
PIDConS messaging (Page 812)
PIDConS block diagram (Page 822)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 821
Controller blocks
5.8 PIDConS - Continuous PID controller (Small)

5.8.7 PIDConS block diagram

PIDConS block diagram

63B([W/L 6SB([W,QW
63B,QW/L /LQN
63B([W$FW
63B([W2S 2SHUDWRU
63B,QW2S /RJLF
63B/L2S
63B7UN39$1'
0DQ$FW2509B7UN2Q


63B([W /LPLW 39
63
 

63B+L/LP 63B+L$FW
63B/R/LP 63B/R$FW

63B,QW 5HMHFW

63B+L/LP
63B/R/LP

3URS6HO





'HDG%DQG *DLQ 7''LII*DLQ

6LP

6LP39 

39 39B287
 
7,
:ULWH39B287WR $ODUP 39B$+B$FW ,QW+ROG3RV
6LP39LI6LP  ,QW+ROG1HJ
39B:+B$FW
39B:/B$FW 09B2IIVHW
39B$/B$FW
7, 
39B$+B/LP39B:+B/LP39B$/B/LP39B:/B/LP39B+\VW
39B$+B(Q39B:+B(Q39B$/B(Q39B:/B(Q39B$B'&39B:B'&

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


822 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.8 PIDConS - Continuous PID controller (Small)

127 $XW$FW

$XW0RG/L 0DQ$FW
/LQN
0DQ0RG/L
2SHUDWRU 2
$XW0RG2S 09B7UN2Q /RRS&ORVHG
/RJLF 5
0DQ0RG2S
0RG/L2S
09B7UN2Q
09B7UN

 09B+L$FW
/LPLW 09B/R$FW
 09


5HMHFW 09B+L/LP
09B/R/LP
0DQ

09B+L/LP
09B/R/LP

See also
PIDConS I/Os (Page 814)
PIDConS messaging (Page 812)
PIDConS error handling (Page 811)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 823
Controller blocks
5.8 PIDConS - Continuous PID controller (Small)

PIDConS functions (Page 805)


PIDConS modes (Page 804)
Description of PIDConS (Page 801)

5.8.8 Operator control and monitoring

5.8.8.1 PIDConS views

Views of the PIDConS block


The block PIDConS provides the following views:
● PIDConL, PIDConS and PIDConR standard views (Page 793)
● Alarm view (Page 313)
● Limit view of PID controllers (Page 302)
● Trend view (Page 317)
● Parameter view of PID controllers (Page 292)
● PIDConL, PIDConS and PIDConR previews (Page 798)
● Memo view (Page 315)
● Batch view (Page 313)
● Block icons for PID and FM controller (Page 248)
Refer to the Structure of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure (Page 239) chapters
for general information about the faceplate and block icon.

See also
Ramp view (Page 311)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


824 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

5.9.1 Description of PIDConR

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1875
Family: Control

Area of application for PIDConR


The block is used for the following applications:
● Fixed setpoint control
● Cascade control
● Ratio control
● Split-range control
● Smith predictor closed-loop control
● Override control (override)
Unlike PIDConL, the PIDConR permits an external reset and satisfies the special requirements
of the US market.

How it works
The block is a PID controller with continuous output signal (manipulated variable). It is used
to activate a final controlling element with continuous action input.
The block functions following the PID algorithm with a delayed D component and an integrator
with double precision. Its particular feature is that it is an incremental control algorithm with a
serial-interactive structure. Incremental means that the current manipulated variable is
calculated from the old manipulated variable of the last sampling step. In place of the old
manipulated variable, an output point for the manipulated variable calculation (external reset)
can be specified externally by interconnection. The difference between the parallel controller
structure of the PIDConL and the serial-interactive structure of the PIDConR is shown in the
next two diagrams.
PIDConL

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 825
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset


63   09

*DLQ
7,V
 
39
7' V

7'
V
'LII*DLQ

PIDConR


63    09
*DLQ
  
39
7'V
7'
V
'LII*DLQ

([W5HVHW

 5HVHW
7,V

The block is suitable for controlling sluggish control loops, for example, for temperatures and
filling levels, and high-speed control loops, for example, for flow rates and speed. For a given
CPU, a compromise has to be made between the number of controllers and the frequency
with which the individual controllers have to be processed. The faster the modulated control
loops are, i.e. the more frequently the manipulated variables have to be calculated per time
unit, the lower the number of controllers that can be installed.

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38). The block is
also installed automatically in the startup OB (OB100).
For the control loop monitoring to work as planned in the trend view of the controller faceplates,
the
S7_xarchive:='Value, shortterm;'

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


826 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

attributes in the process tag types for control loops at the controller function block must be set
for the following tags:
● Input parameters:
– CPI_In
● Output parameters
– MV
– MV_HiAct
– MV_LoAct
– LoopClosed
– SP
– PV_Out
– PV_ToleHi
– PV_ToleLo
For the PIDConR block, the Advanced Process Library contains templates for process tag
types as examples with various application scenarios for this block.
Examples of process tag types:
● Cascade control with PIDConR (CascadeR) (Page 2409)
● Override control with PIDConR (OverrideR) (Page 2414)
● PIDConR with safety logic and control loop monitoring (PIDConR_ConPerMon)
(Page 2389)
● Ratio control with PIDConR (RatioR) (Page 2405)
Note
The meaning of the controller parameters of both structures is different for all controller
parameter settings with a D component. If you want to transfer parameter values from one
structure to another, they have to be converted according to the formula in the PIDConR
function .

Startup characteristics
Use the Feature Bit Set startup characteristics (Page 141) to define the startup characteristics
of this block.
The messages are suppressed after startup for the number of cycles set at RunUpCyc.
The following output parameters are written with the corresponding input parameters:
● PV_HysOut
● PV_AH_Out
● PV_WH_Out
● PV_TH_Out
● PV_AL_Out

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 827
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

● PV_WL_Out
● PV_TL_Out

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


You can find a description for each parameter in section PIDConR I/Os (Page 851).

Status bit Parameter


0 Occupied
1 BatchEn
2 SimOn
3 OosAct.Value
4 OosLi.Value
5 AutAct.Value
6 Invalid signal status
7 ManAct.Value
8 SP_ExtAct.Value
9 MV_ForOn.Value
10 MV_TrkOn.Value AND NOT (ManAct.Value OR OosAct.Value OR
MV_ForOn.Value)
11 MV.Value > ManLoLim
12 SimLiOp.Value
13 "Interlock" button is enabled OR Intlock.ST ≠ 16#FF
14 0 = Open padlock in the block icon
1 = Closed padlock in block icon
15 SP_LoadOn.Value
16 SP_LoadOn.Value AND NOT (MV_TrkOn.Value OR OosAct.Value OR
MV_ForOn.Value)
17 Feature.Bit19
18 Feature.Bit21
19 AdvCoAct
20 1 = Input parameter Rbk is not interconnected (RbkOut.ST = 16#FF)
21 NegGain
22 1 = SP ramp active
23 OptimEn
24 OptimOcc
25 Not used
26 Display of BypassAct.Value in faceplate (display and operator controls) and block
icon
27 Not used
28 SimOn AND ManAct
29 BypProt
30 Dead band is temporarily disabled
31 Not used

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


828 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

Status word allocation for Status2 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 MsgLock
1 PV_AH_Act.Value
2 PV_WH_Act.Value
3 PV_TH_Act.Value
4 PV_TL_Act.Value
5 PV_WL_Act.Value
6 PV_AL_Act.Value
7 PV_AH_En OR Feature.Bit31
8 PV_WH_En OR Feature.Bit31
9 PV_TH_En OR Feature.Bit31
10 PV_TL_En OR Feature.Bit31
11 PV_WL_En OR Feature.Bit31
12 PV_AL_En OR Feature.Bit31
13 PV_AH_MsgEn
14 PV_WH_MsgEn
15 PV_TH_MsgEn
16 PV_TL_MsgEn
17 PV_WL_MsgEn
18 PV_AL_MsgEn
19 ER_AH_Act.Value
20 ER_AL_Act.Value
21 ER_AH_En OR Feature.Bit31
22 ER_AL_En OR Feature.Bit31
23 ER_AH_MsgEn
24 ER_AL_MsgEn
25 RbkWH_Act.Value
26 RbkWL_Act.Value
27 RbkWH_En OR Feature.Bit31
28 RbkWL_En OR Feature.Bit31
29 RbkWH_MsgEn
30 RbkWL_MsgEn
31 MS_RelOp

Status word allocation for Status3 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 Effective signal 1 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
1 Effective signal 2 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
2 Effective signal 3 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
3 Effective signal 4 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
4 Effective signal 5 of the message block connected via EventTsIn

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 829
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

Status bit Parameter


5 Effective signal 6 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
6 Effective signal 7 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
7 Effective signal 8 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
8 Delay of the PV_AH_Lim message
9 Delay of the PV_WH_Lim message
10 Delay of the PV_TH_Lim message
11 Delay of the PV_TL_Lim message
12 Delay of the PV_WL_Lim message
13 Delay of the PV_AL_Lim message
14 Delay of the ER_AH_Lim message
15 Delay of the ER_AL_Lim message
16 Collection of message delays
17 BypassAct.Value
18 - 23 Not used
24 Feature2.Bit2: Separate bypass signal
25 Hidden bypass signal in Intlock
26 LockAct.Value
27 SP_UpRaAct, SP_DnRaAct limits enabled for gradient mode (SP_RateOn = 1)
28 GrpErr.Value
29 RdyToStart.Value
30 1 = Input parameter MV_ChnST is interconnected
31 Not used

Status word allocation for Status4 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0-7 Effective signal 9..16 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
8 - 31 Not used

See also
PIDConR block diagram (Page 868)
PIDConR messaging (Page 849)
PIDConR error handling (Page 847)
PIDConR functions (Page 834)
PIDConR modes (Page 831)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


830 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

5.9.2 PIDConR modes

Operating modes of PIDConR


The block can be operated using the following modes:
● Automatic mode (Page 73)
● Manual mode (Page 73)
● Program mode for controllers (Page 79)
● Out of service (Page 72)
In "manual mode", the control settings for the device are made manually by the operator. The
operator decides how to change the block's manipulated variable (output signal).
In "automatic mode", the controller's manipulated variable is calculated automatically by the
block algorithm.

Changing between operating modes


The switchover between manual and automatic modes takes place as shown in the following
schematic:
Switchover by using faceplates: The switchover between operating modes is carried out in the
standard view of the faceplate. In the function block, the parameters ManModOp for "manual
mode" and AutModOp for "automatic mode" are used.
Switchover via interconnection (CFC or SFC instance): The switchover between the operating
modes is carried out by means of interconnection on the function block.

Note
You can access the variable parameters AutModOp and ManModOp from a normal SFC (in
contrast to the instance of an SFC type). The SFC can thus change the operating mode without
revoking the access rights of the operator.

Points to note for this block


With PIDConR the switchover between operating modes via interconnectable input parameters
follows a different logic than that used for other controller blocks. This logic is oriented towards
the special requirements of the US market. The basic approach is to issue the controller with
certain commands by interconnection using an individual input parameter. The commands
issued by interconnection take priority over the entries in the faceplate, i.e. if such a command
input is made, the associated operator controls are locked in the faceplate:
● If the interconnectable AutExtSet = 1 input parameter is set, the controller goes into
"automatic mode" with an external setpoint. This is also known as the "cascade" operating
mode.
● If the interconnectable AutIntSet = 1 input parameter is set, the controller goes into
"automatic" mode with internal setpoint. AutIntSet has higher priority thanAutExtSet.
For more information about the internal and external setpoint, refer to section PIDConR
functions (Page 834).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 831
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

● If the interconnectable input parameter ManSet = 1 is set, the controller goes into "manual"
mode. This command has higher priority than AutIntSet and AutExtSet.
● If one of the interconnectable input parameters MV_Close or MV_Open is set, the controller
also goes into "manual" operating mode and performs the corresponding command.
The ModLiOp, ManModLi and AutModLi input parameters are not therefore present in
PIDConR.

Switchover from automatic mode to manual mode


When changing over from "automatic mode" to "manual mode", the last valid control settings
(Manipiulated Value MV) for the controller set in "automatic mode" remain valid until you change
the control settings manually.

Switchover from manual mode to automatic mode


The switchover from manual to automatic mode can take place with or without the internal
setpoint tracking the process value. You specify this behavior on the SP_TrkPV I/O, which
can also be operated from the faceplate in the parameter view (Option "SP : = PV in Manual").

Switchover with tracked internal setpoint


(SP_TrkPV = 1) means that in "manual" mode the setpoint (SP) tracks the process variable
(PV). This results in bumpless switchover, which means the manipulated variable remains
constant after switching back to "automatic mode" until the setpoint (SP) is changed or the
process value (PV) changes.

Switchover without tracked internal setpoint


(SP_TrkPV = 0) means that the setpoint does not track the actual value in manual mode and
that the block immediately recalculates the manipulated variable based on the setpoint and
process value (PV) when the mode is changed. PIDConR only offers switchover without P
step: During switchover, the I action (reset) of the controller is set in such a way that the
switchover is carried out without a P step (virtually bumpless referring to the manipulated
variable). In case of a large control deviation, when switching from the manual mode to the
automatic mode, it may happen that the integral action is set far outside the manipulated
variable limits. See Feature bit With accelerated return of the integral action from the
manipulated variable limit (Page 184).

Reaction of signals when operating mode is changed


Using the Feature Bit Resetting the commands for changing the mode (Page 165), you can
specify whether the block automatically resets the signal for changing the operating mode.

"Program mode for controllers"


You can find general information about the "Program mode for controller" in the section
Program mode for controllers (Page 79).
In case of a large control deviation, when switching from the program mode with manipulated
variable specification to the automatic mode, it may happen that the integral action is set far

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


832 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

outside the manipulated variable limits. See Feature bit With accelerated return of the integral
action from the manipulated variable limit (Page 184).

"Out of service"
You can find general information about the "Out of service" mode in the section Out of
service (Page 72).
With Feature.Bit5 =1 the following output parameter become the status of simulation
16#60, if mode is changed to "Out of service".
With Feature.Bit5 =0 the following output parameter become the status of 16#80, if mode
is changed to "Out of service".
● RbkOut.ST
● RbkWH_Act.ST
● RbkWL_Act.ST
● SP_ExtAct.ST
● SP.ST
● SP_ExtOut.ST
● PV_Out.ST
● PV_AH_Act.ST
● PV_WH_Act.ST
● PV_TH_Act.ST
● PV_TL_Act.ST
● PV_WL_Act.ST
● PV_AL_Act.ST
● PV_ToleHi.ST
● PV_ToleLo.ST
● ER.ST
● ER_AH_Act.ST
● ER_AL_Act.ST

See also
PIDConR block diagram (Page 868)
PIDConR I/Os (Page 851)
PIDConR messaging (Page 849)
PIDConR error handling (Page 847)
Description of PIDConR (Page 825)
Disabling bumpless switchover to automatic mode for controllers (Page 176)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 833
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

5.9.3 PIDConR functions

Functions of PIDConR
The functions for this block are listed below.

Generation of manipulated variables


The manipulated variable MV can be generated as follows:

MV_For MV_Bum MV_Cl MV_O Man‐ MV_Tr Adv‐ MV = Limit monitor‐ State
On pOn ose pen Act kOn CoAct ing
AND
NOT
AdvCo‐
ModSP
1 - - - - - - MV_For none Forced tracking through
ced constraint without limita‐
tion
0 1 - - - - - MV_Bum Manual mode: Sudden manipulation of
p ManHiLim the manipulated variable
ManLoLim
Automatic
mode:
MV_HiLim
MV_LoLim
0 0 1 - - - - ManLoL ManHiLim Close by interconnection
im ManLoLim
0 0 0 1 - - - ManHiL ManHiLim Open by interconnection
im ManLoLim
0 0 0 0 1 - - Man ManHiLim Manual mode, set by the
ManLoLim OS operator or via the
ManSet = 1 command
0 0 0 0 0 1 - MV_Trk MV_HiLim Tracking with limitation
MV_LoLim
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 AdvCoM MV_HiLim Higher-level program
V MV_LoLim mode
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PID.OU MV_HiLim Automatic mode (PID al‐
T + FFwd MV_LoLim gorithm)

If the controller is in "out of service" mode, the output parameter MV is set to the last valid value
in manual mode or the neutral position manipulated variable depending on the Feature Bit
Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect at startup (Page 169). Refer to the Out of
service (Page 72) section for more on this.
The PIDConR offers the following special ways of influencing the generation of manipulated
variables via interconnectable input parameters. The commands issued by interconnection
take priority over the entries in the faceplate, i.e. if such a command input is made, the
associated operator controls are locked in the faceplate.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


834 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

MV_BumpOn is used for sudden manipulation of the manipulated variable and has a similar
effect to MV_ForOn, the difference being that the appropriate limits are applied. If
MV_BumpOn = 1 is set in "automatic mode", the MV_Bump manipulated variable is written in a
limited manner between MV_HiLim and MV_LoLim to output MV. If MV_BumpOn = 1 is set in
"manual mode", the MV_Bump manipulated variable is written in a limited manner between
ManHiLim and ManLoLim to output MV. If MV_BumpOn is reset to 0, the controller returns to
its previous mode.
MV_Close is used to close the adjustment valve. MV_Close = 1 switches the controller to
"manual mode" with manipulated variable MV = ManLoLim. If MV_Close is reset to 0, the
controller remains in "manual mode".
MV_Open is used to open the adjustment valve. MV_Open = 1 switches the controller to
"manual mode" with manipulated variable MV = ManHiLim. If MV_Open is reset to 0, the
controller remains in "manual mode".
These commands have higher priority than "automatic mode", but lower priority than forced
tracking by MV_ForOn.
For meshed controller structures, such as a cascade control and closed-loop control with the
PIDConR block, the ExtReset input parameter is used with ExtRstOn = 1 rather than
MV_Trk with MV_TrkOn = 1 (also refer to the process tag types Cascade control with PIDConR
(CascadeR) (Page 2409) and Override control with PIDConR (OverrideR) (Page 2414)).

Displaying additional information relating to the manipulated variable on the output


The manual manipulated variable limitations ManLoLim and ManHiLim are copied to the
ManLoOut and ManHiOut output parameters so that they can be further interconnected to
the secondary controller as setpoint limits SP_ExtLoLim and SP_ExtHiLim. If you want to
use the same limit pairs for "manual" and "automatic" mode, you can interconnect output
parameters ManLoOut and ManHiOut to input parameters MV_LoLim and MV_HiLim of the
same block and thereby control the limits for manipulated variable limitation in the faceplate.
In most cases, a valve's complete control range can be passed through in "manual" mode.
You can then further interconnect the ManLoOut and ManHiOut output parameters to the
LoScale and HiScale input parameters of the assigned analog output channel block.
Caution: If the valves have an open neutral position (SafePos = 1), this interconnection must
be crossed over: LoScale = ManHiOut and HiScale = ManLoOut. On the controller, 0% is
always interpreted as the valve being closed and 100% as the valve being open, but the
channel block then issues a control signal of 0% for a 100% controller manipulated variable.

Tracking and limiting a manipulated variable


The block provides the standard function Tracking and limiting a manipulated variable
(Page 205).
In case of a large control deviation, when disabling the tracking or forced tracking function and
switching to the automatic mode, it may happen that the integral action is set far outside the
manipulated variable limits. See Feature bit With accelerated return of the integral action
from the manipulated variable limit (Page 184).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 835
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

Neutral position
The block provides the standard function Neutral position for motors, valves and controllers
(Page 48).

Group error
This block provides the standard function Outputting group errors (Page 124).
The following parameters are taken into consideration when forming the group error:
● CSF

Outputting a signal for start readiness


This block provides the standard function Outputting a signal for start readiness (Page 54).

"Actuator active" information


If the manipulated variable MV is greater than the minimum manual limit ManLoLim, this is
recognized as actuator active. This status can be used to display a custom symbol in the
process image, for example, and is stored in the status word (you can find additional
information under "Status word" in the Description of PIDConR (Page 825) section).

Limit monitoring of position feedback


The block provides the standard function Limit monitoring of the feedback (Page 95).

Group display SumMsgAct for limit monitoring, CSF and ExtMsgx


The block provides the standard function Group display for limit monitoring, CSF and
ExtMsgx (Page 86).

External/internal setpoint specification


This input of setpoints is carried out either using a CFC/SFC program or using the faceplate
(operator). The operator can specify an internal setpoint value (SP_Int) or a higher-level open-
loop control will specify an external setpoint value (SP_Ext).

Setpoint specification internally and externally using faceplate


With PIDConR, the setpoint signal source is selected via the faceplate at the SP_IntOp = 1
parameter for the internal setpoint specification SP_ExtOp = 1 for external setpoint
specification, just as it is with other controllers.

Note
In contrast to the other controllers, with PIDConR you can only switch to external setpoint
specification via SP_ExtOp = 1 in automatic mode or in the program SP mode.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


836 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

Setpoint specification internally and externally using interconnection


With PIDConR the switchover between internal and external setpoint via interconnectable input
parameters follows a different logic than that used for other controller blocks. This logic is
oriented towards the special requirements of the US market.
The setpoint signal source (internal/external) can be selected by interconnection along with
selection of the operating mode using the AutIntSet input parameter for automatic with an
internal setpoint and AutExtSet for automatic with an external setpoint (additional information
is available in the PIDConR modes (Page 831) section). The commands issued by
interconnection take priority over the entries in the faceplate, i.e. if such a command input is
made, the associated operator controls are locked in the faceplate. Input parameters SP_LiOp,
SP_ExtLi and SP_IntLi on PIDConR are not therefore needed.
The PIDConR also offers a special way of influencing the setpoint specification via
interconnectable input parameters. Loading setpoints. If the SP_LoadOn = 1 input parameter
is set, the controller goes into "automatic" mode. The value of the SP_Load input parameter
is limited according to an internal setpoint and used for control purposes. If the parameter
SP_LoadOn changes back from 1 to 0, the controller remains in "automatic" mode and sets
the default setpoint back to the internal setpoint.
Loading a setpoint via SP_LoadOn takes priority over all other forms of setpoint specification.

Bumpless switchover from external to internal setpoint


The parameter SP_TrkExt = 1 is used so that the internal setpoint tracks the external setpoint
to achieve a bumpless switchover from the external to the internal setpoint. This allows
unwanted jumps at the output parameter to be avoided.

Bumpless switchover between internal and external setpoint with PID initialization
With Feature.Bit14 With PID initialization if mode SP intern extern changes (Page 197)you
can make a bumpless switchover between internal and external setpoint. During switchover
the PID algorithm will be initialized.

Setpoint limiting for external setpoints


The block provides the standard function Setpoint limiting for external setpoints (Page 205).

Gradient limit of the setpoint


The block provides the standard function Gradient limit of the setpoint (Page 126).

Using setpoint ramp


The block provides the standard function Using setpoint ramp (Page 125).

Tracking setpoint in manual mode


The block provides the standard function Tracking setpoint in manual mode (Page 205).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 837
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

Simulating signals
The block provides the standard function Simulating signals (Page 59).
You can simulate the following values:
● Process value (SimPV, SimPV_Li)
● Position feedback (SimRbk, SimRbkLi)

Bypass function
This block provides the standard function Bypassing signals (Page 109).

Limit monitoring of the process value


The block provides the standard function Limit monitoring of the process value (Page 87) with
the alarm delay type Two time values for each individual limit (Page 211).
The PIDConR is the only block to have separate input parameters for the alarm delay at the
high and low limits. Delay alarm for control deviation at setpoint step changes (Page 199)

Providing PV limit at the output


For further connections to the other blocks, the following input parameters are also displayed
with the corresponding output parameters:
● PV_HysOut := PV_Hyst
● PV_AH_Out := PV_AH_Lim
● PV_WH_Out := PV_WH_Lim
● PV_TH_Out := PV_TH_Lim
● PV_TL_Out := PV_TL_Lim
● PV_WL_Out := PV_WL_Lim
● PV_AL_Out := PV_AL_Lim

Error signal generation and dead band


The block provides the standard function Error signal generation and dead band (Page 201).

Delay alarm for control deviation at setpoint step changes


The block provides the standard function Delay alarm for control deviation at setpoint step
changes (Page 199)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


838 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

Limit monitoring of error signal


The block provides the standard function Limit monitoring of setpoint, manipulated variable
and control deviation (Page 96). The monitoring of error signal works with the alarm delay type
Two time values per limit pair (Page 210). With the Feature Bit Separate delay times for each
alarm (Page 174), the alarm delay type Two time values for each individual limit (Page 211)
can be activated.

Inverting control direction


The block provides the standard function Inverting control direction (Page 200).

Physical standardization of setpoint, manipulated variable and process value


Controller gain Gain is entered either using a physical variable or as standardized value.
Gain as a physical variable [MV_Unit / PV_Unit]:
The standardized variables retain their default values:
● NormPV.High = 100 and NormPV.Low = 0
● NormMV.High = 100 and NormMV.Low = 0
The effective gain is:
GainEff = Gain
Entering a standardized Gain (dimensionless):
Change the standardized variables to the actual range of the process values and manipulated
variables.
● Internal and external setpoints; the process value and corresponding parameters are
entered according to the physical measuring range of the process value.
● The manual value, the tracking value of the manipulated variable, disturbance variable
feedforward and the corresponding parameters are set according to the physical measuring
range of the manipulated variable.
The effective gain is:
GainEff = (NormMV.High - NormMV.Low) / (NormPV.High - NormPV.Low) · Gain

Selecting a unit of measure


The block provides the standard function Selecting a unit of measure (Page 221).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 839
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

PID algorithm
The manipulated variable is generated in automatic mode according to the following algorithm:

 
 

MV = = GainEff 1 +
TD s  ( PV − SP) + Reset  1 
 TD   TI s + 1 
 D s + 1
 iffGain 
Where:
s = complex number of the Laplace transformation
This formula describes a standard application where P, I and D component is activated
Unlike with PIDConL, the Gain gain factor is not applied to the I component.
The D component delay is derived from TD / DiffGain.
● The P component can be deactivated by PropSel = 0 .
● The I component can be deactivated by IntSel = 0 . The MV_Offset input parameter
can then be used to add a constant value to the manipulated variable. Select this value
such that the remaining control deviation equals zero at least at the control loop's typical
operating point.
● The D component can be deactivated by TD = 0 or DiffSel = 1.

Note
The formula describes a standard application where P, I and D components are activated and
the D component is in the feedback circuit, while the P component is formed by the error signal
(PropSel = 1, TI <> 0 and IntSel = 1, TD <> 0 and DiffSel = 1, DiffToFbk = 1, and
PropFacSP = 1).

If you set the Feature Bit Enabling bumpless change to the proportional gain, derivative time
and amplification of the differentiator (Page 176) to 1, changes in the proportional gain Gain
are carried out in a bumpless manner in "automatic" mode by converting the internal reset.
If a GainSched block is linked to the controller, you have to make the parameter settings for
the Feature Bit Enabling bumpless change to the proportional gain, derivative time and
amplification of the differentiator (Page 176) with 0.
The PID core algorithm is implemented in the PIDKernR function block which in turn calls a
series of auxiliary functions for the 64-bit arithmetic. Every edge transition on the InitPid
input parameter forces initialization equations to be carried out by PIDKernR. In so doing, the
internal reset is calculated such that the MV output does not suffer a P step.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


840 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

During initialization in the automatic mode with a large control deviation, it may happen that
the integral action is set far outside the manipulated variable limits. See Feature bit With
accelerated return of the integral action from the manipulated variable limit (Page 184).

Note
The meaning of the controller parameters with PIDConR is different to that with the other PID
controllers for all controller parameter settings with a D component. If you want to transfer
parameter values from one kind of controller to another, they have to be converted using the
following formulas. The calculation is based on an ideal transfer function without a delay in the
D component, and all three control channels are applied to the ER = PV - SP control deviation.

Parallel controller structure (for example, PIDConL):

 1 
MV = GainEff  1 + + TD s  ER
 TI s 
The parameters of the serial-interactive controller structure (PIDConR):

 

MV = GainEff (1 + TD′ s ) 1 + 1  ER
 TI′ s 
These parameters are marked using a speech mark. Both controllers calculate the same
manipulated variable if the parameter values of the serial-interactive structure are determined
by the following substitution:

1

GainEff = α GainEff , TI′ = α TI , TD′ = TD
α
where α is the conversion factor:

1 1 TD
α= ± −
2 4 TI

The argument of the square root is negative and the conversion is impossible if:

TD 1
>
TI 4

In such cases, the output of PIDConL cannot be exactly replicated by PIDConR. In all other
cases, there are two solutions for α and therefore two parameter sets that will generate the
same control action of the ideal controller structures. The conversion in the other direction,
from serial-interactive to parallel controller structure is always possible by:

TI′
α=
TI′ + TD′

You can see that the conversion factor only equals one if TD = 0.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 841
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

In PID-Tuner, the conversion for ideal controller structures is performed automatically before
downloading of parameters to the PIDConR function block. The first of the two possible
solutions (plus square root) is used. If the argument of the square root is negative, it will be
set to zero, which implies that PIDConR control performance may deteriorate slightly.

Structure segmentation at controllers


The block provides the standard function Structure segmentation at controllers (Page 207).

Use output point for the manipulated variable calculation (external reset)
For the ExtResOn = 0 input parameter (default setting), the starting point for the manipulated
variable calculation within the block is taken from manipulated variable MV. In other words, this
is the manipulated variable of the last sampling step. If ExtResOn = 1, the ExtReset start
parameter is used. This is used in particular for networked control structures, such as cascade
or transfer control.

Anti-windup
A controller with incremental algorithm (external reset) inherently has an anti-windup reaction
because the starting point for the manipulated variable calculation (external reset value) is
limited provided it is taken internally from manipulated variable MV or is taken from another
signal source with limitation. If the starting point for the manipulated variable calculation
(external reset value) is at the limit (MV_HiLim or MV_LoLim), the I component is automatically
frozen.

Feedforwarding and limiting disturbance variables


The block provides the standard function Feedforwarding and limiting disturbance variables
(Page 206).

Forming the signal status for blocks


The block provides the standard function Forming and outputting the signal status for
technologic blocks (Page 110).
● Signal status for the process value PV_Out:
The signal status of the output parameter PV_Out always corresponds to the signal status
of input parameter PV or, if the block is in simulation mode, 16#60.
● Signal status for the setpoint value SP:
The signal status of the SP output parameter is always equivalent to the signal status of
input parameter SP_Ext or SP_Int, depending on how the setpoint is specified. If the
internal setpoint SP_Int is used, the signal status is always output as 16#80.
● Signal status of the error signal ER:
The signal status of output parameter ER is obtained from the worst signal status of the two
output parameters PV_Out and SP and is output. The signal status 16#60 (external
simulation) is suppressed because the block acts as a sink with external simulation.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


842 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

● Signal status for the manipulated variable MV:


The signal status of output parameter MV is obtained in "automatic mode" or in "program
mode" with default setpoint from the worst signal status of the two parameters FFwd and
ER and is output. In "manual mode", the signal status is output as good. The signal status
16#60 (external simulation) is suppressed because the block acts as a sink with external
simulation. In "manual mode", the signal status is output as good.
● Signal status for position feedback RbkOut:
The signal status of RbkOut always corresponds to the signal status of input parameter
Rbk or, if the block is in simulation mode, 16#60.
● Worst signal status:
The worst signal status ST_Worst for the block is formed from the following parameters:
– SP.ST;
– PV_Out.ST;
– FFwd.ST;
– RbkOut.ST;
– MV_ChnST.ST;

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133) . The following functionality is
available for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
0 Set startup characteristics (Page 141)
1 Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 181)
2 Resetting the commands for changing the mode (Page 165)
5 Changes signal status of outputs in OOS (Page 198)
6 Ramp rate calculation (Page 183)
8 Separate delay times for each alarm (Page 174)
9 Substitution value is active if the block is in bypass (Page 189)
11 Gradient limitation with time duration (Page 186)
14 With PID initialization if mode SP intern extern changes (Page 197)
15 Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect with "out of service" operating mode
(Page 170)
16 Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect at startup (Page 169)
17 With accelerated return of the integral action from the manipulated variable limit
(Page 184)
19 Enabling program mode (Page 163)
20 Enabling bumpless change to the proportional gain, derivative time and amplification of the
differentiator (Page 176)
21 Switching operator controls for external setpoint to visible (Page 147)
22 Update acknowledgment and error status of the message call (Page 163)
23 SP following PV in open loop has no priority over SP_Ext and SP limits (Page 183)
24 Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 843
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

Bit Function
25 Suppression of all messages (Page 178)
26 Reaction of the switching points in the "Out of service" operating mode (Page 180)
28 Disabling operating points (Page 149)
29 Signaling limit violation (Page 174)
30 Dead band is temporarily disabled (Page 145)
31 Limits disabled in faceplate (Page 195)

Configurable reactions using the Feature2 parameter

Bit Function
2 Separate evaluation for excluded and simulated interlock signals (Page 155)
11 Suppress MsgLock and “Out of service” mode for a connected message block (Page 192)

Operator permissions
The block provides the standard function Operator control permissions (Page 265).
The block has the following permissions for the OS_Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 1 = Operator can switch to "automatic mode" AutModOp
1 1 = Operator can switch to "manual mode" ManModOp
2 1 = Operator can switch to "Out of service" mode OosOp
3 1 = Operator can switch to "program mode" AdvCoOn
4 1 = Operator can switch the setpoint to "external" SP_ExtOp
5 1 = Operator can switch the setpoint to "internal" SP_IntOp
6 1 = Operator can change the internal setpoint SP_Int
7 1 = Operator can change the manual parameter Man
8 1 = Operator can change operation high limit of the setpoint SP_InHiLim
9 1 = Operator can change operation low limit of the setpoint SP_InLoLim
10 1 = Operator can change the operation high limit of the manipulated variable ManHiLim
11 1 = Operator can change the operation low limit of the manipulated variable ManLoLim
12 1 = Operator can enable the setpoint's gradient limitation function SP_RateOn
13 1 = Operator can raise the gradient limit SP_UpRaLim of the setpoint
14 1 = Operator can lower the gradient limit SP_DnRaLim of the setpoint
15 1 = Operator can switch between the time value or the gradient value for specifying the
ramp SP_RmpModTime
16 1 = Operator can change the ramp time SP_RmpTime
17 1 = Operator can change the target setpoint SP_RmpTarget for the setpoint ramp
18 1 = Operator can enable the setpoint ramp function SP_RmpOn
19 1 = Operator can permit the PID optimization function OptimEn
20 1 = Operator can enable the track setpoint in manual mode function SP_TrkPV

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


844 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

Bit Function
21 1 = Operator can enable the bumpless switchover from external to internal SP_TrkExt
22 1 = Operator can change the gain parameter Gain
23 1 = Operator can change the integral time parameter TI
24 1 = Operator can change the derivative time parameter TD
25 1 = Operator can change the derivative gain parameter DiffGain
26 1 = Operator can change the dead band parameter DeadBand
27 Not used
28 1 = Operator can change the derivative gain parameter ER_AH_DF
29 1 = Operator can change the derivative gain parameter ER_AL_DF
30 - 31 Not used

The block has the following permissions for the OS1Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 1 = Operator can change the limit (process value) PV_AH_Lim for the high alarm
1 1 = Operator can change the limit (process value) PV_WH_Lim for the high warning
2 1 = Operator can change the limit (process value) PV_TH_Lim for the high tolerance
3 1 = Operator can change the hysteresis (process value) PV_Hyst
4 1 = Operator can change the limit (process value) PV_TL_Lim for the low tolerance
5 1 = Operator can change the limit (process value) PV_WL_Lim for the low warning
6 1 = Operator can change the limit (process value) PV_AL_Lim for the low alarm
7 1 = Operator can change the limit (error signal) ER_AH_Lim for the high alarm
8 1 = Operator can change the hysteresis (error signal) ER_Hyst
9 1 = Operator can change the limit (error signal) ER_AL_Lim for the low alarm
10 1 = Operator can change the limit (position feedback) RbkWH_Lim for the high warning
11 1 = Operator can change the hysteresis (position feedback) RbkHyst
12 1 = Operator can change the limit (position feedback) RbkWL_Lim for the low warning
13 "Interlock" button is enabled
14 1 = Operator can activate bypass functionality
15 1 = Operator can deactivate bypass functionality
16 1 = Operator can activate the Simulation function SimOn
17 1 = Operator can activate the Release for maintenance function MS_RelOp
18 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_AH_MsgEn
19 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_WH_MsgEn
20 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_TH_MsgEn
21 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_TL_MsgEn
22 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_WL_MsgEn
23 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_AL_MsgEn
24 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via ER_AH_MsgEn
25 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via ER_AL_MsgEn
26 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via RbkWH_MsgEn
27 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via RbkWL_MsgEn
28 1 = Operator can change the simulation value SimPV

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 845
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

Bit Function
29 1 = Operator can change the simulation value SimRbk
30 1 = Operator can activate the derivative action to the feedback path DiffToFbk
31 1 = Operator can change the proportional action to the feedback path PropFacSP

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Interlocks
This block provides the following interlocks:
● Interlock without reset ("Interlock")
You can find additional information on this in the section Interlocks (Page 101).

Disabling interlocks
This block provides the standard function Disabling interlocks (Page 104).

Release for maintenance


The block provides the standard function Release for maintenance (Page 65).

Generating instance-specific messages


The block provides the standard function Generating instance-specific messages (Page 213)
without the time stamp function in the I/O.

Suppressing messages using the MsgLock parameter


This block provides the standard function Suppressing messages using the MsgLock
parameter (Page 214).

Button labels
This block provides the standard function Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218).
Instance-specific text can be configured for the following parameters:
● AutModOp
● ManModOp
● AdvCoOn
● OosOp

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


846 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

● SP_ExtOp
● SP_IntOp

Specifying the display area for process and setpoint values as well as operations
This block provides the standard function Display and operator input area for process values
and setpoints (Page 216).

Opening additional faceplates


This block provides the standard function Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


This block provides the standard function SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

Connection of the time-stamped messages from EventTs or Event16Ts


This block provides the standard function Connection of the time-stamped messages from
EventTs or Event16Ts (Page 216).

See also
PIDConR I/Os (Page 851)
PIDConR messaging (Page 849)
PIDConR error handling (Page 847)
Program mode for controllers (Page 79)
EventTs functions (Page 1698)

5.9.4 PIDConR error handling

Error handling of PIDConR


Refer to section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions for the error handling of all
blocks.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers
● Control system fault (CSF)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 847
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum output parameter can be used to output the following error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; the block is not executed
0 There is no error.
30 The value of PV can no longer be displayed in the REAL number field.
31 The value of SP_Ext can no longer be displayed in the REAL number field.
32 The value of FFwd can no longer be displayed in the REAL number field.
33 The value of MV_Trk can no longer be displayed in the REAL number field.
34 The value of MV_Forced can no longer be displayed in the REAL number field.
35 The value of Rbk can no longer be displayed in the REAL number field.
36 The value of MV can no longer be displayed in the REAL number field.
52 Feature.Bit30 = 1 and MeanMV.ST = 16#78
59 = 1 "Gain is negative"
60 |TI| < SampleTime / 2
61 |TD| < SampleTime
62 DiffGain < 1 or DiffGain > 10
63 TD / DiffGain < SampleTime / 2
64 PropFacSP < 0 or PropFacSP > 1
66 NormPV_High = NormPV_Low

Control system fault (CSF)


An external signal can be activated via the CSF input. A control system fault is triggered if this
signal changes to 1. Refer to the Error handling (Page 121) section for more on this.

See also
PIDConR block diagram (Page 868)
PIDConR I/Os (Page 851)
PIDConR messaging (Page 849)
PIDConR functions (Page 834)
PIDConR modes (Page 831)
Description of PIDConR (Page 825)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


848 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

5.9.5 PIDConR messaging

Messaging
The following messages can be generated for this block:
● Process control fault
● Process messages
● Instance-specific messages

Process control fault


The following control system error messages can be output:

Message in‐ Message identi‐ Message class Event


stance fier
MsgEvId2 SIG 6 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External error has occurred

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment
You can interconnect an external fault (signal) to input parameter CSF. If it changes to CSF =
1, a process control fault is triggered (MsgEvId2, SIG 6).

Process messages

Message in‐ Message identifier Message class Event


stance
MsgEvId1 SIG 1 Alarm - high $$BlockComment$$
PV - high alarm limit violated
SIG 2 Warning - high $$BlockComment$$
PV - high warning limit violated
SIG 3 Tolerance - high $$BlockComment$$
PV - high tolerance limit violated
SIG 4 Tolerance - low $$BlockComment$$
PV - low tolerance limit violated
SIG 5 Warning - low $$BlockComment$$
PV - low warning limit violated
SIG 6 Alarm - low $$BlockComment$$
PV - low alarm limit violated
SIG 7 Alarm - high $$BlockComment$$
ER - high alarm limit violated
SIG 8 Alarm - low $$BlockComment$$
ER - low alarm limit violated

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 849
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

Message in‐ Message identifier Message class Event


stance
MsgEvId2 SIG 7 Warning - high $$BlockComment$$
Rbk - high warning limit violated
SIG 8 Warning - low $$BlockComment$$
Rbk - low warning limit violated

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment

Instance-specific messages
You can use up to four instance-specific messages with this block.

Message in‐ Message identifier Message class Event


stance
MsgEvId2 SIG 1 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 1
Status 16#@5%x@
SIG 2 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 2
Status 16#@6%x@
SIG 3 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 3
Status 16#@7%x@
SIG 4 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 4
Status 16#@8%x@

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId1

Associated value Block parameters


1 BatchName
2 StepNo
3 BatchID
4 Process value PV_Out
5 Control deviation ER
6 ExtVa106
7 ExtVa107
8 Not allocated
9 Not allocated
10 Not allocated

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


850 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

The associated values 6 ... 7 are allocated to the parameters ExtVa106 ... ExtVa107 and
can be used. Additional information is available in the "Process Control System PCS 7 -
Engineering System" manual.

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId2

Associated value Block parameters


1 BatchName
2 StepNo
3 BatchID
4 Position feedback RbkOut
5 Signal status ExtMsg1
6 Signal status ExtMsg2
7 Signal status ExtMsg3
8 Signal status ExtMsg4
9 ExtVa209
10 ExtVa210

The associated values 9 ... 10 are allocated to the parameters ExtVa209 ... ExtVa210 and
can be used. Additional information is available in the "Process Control System PCS 7 -
Engineering System" manual.

See also
PIDConR block diagram (Page 868)
PIDConR I/Os (Page 851)
PIDConR error handling (Page 847)
PIDConR functions (Page 834)
PIDConR modes (Page 831)
Description of PIDConR (Page 825)

5.9.6 PIDConR I/Os


I/Os of PIDConR

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AdvCoEn 1 = Enable "program mode" via intercon‐ STRUCT -
nection ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AdvCoOn* 1 = Enable "program mode" via faceplate BOOL 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 851
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

Parameter Description Type Default


AdvCoModSP Type of "program mode": BOOL 1
1 = Setpoint specification
0 = Manipulated variable specification
AdvCoMstrOn 1 = Enable (0-1) or disable (1-0) "pro‐ STRUCT -
gram mode" via edge transition ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AdvCoMV Specified value from the external pro‐ REAL 0.0
gram
AutExtSet* 1 = Activate "automatic" mode with ex‐ STRUCT -
ternal setpoint by interconnection (SP = ● Value: BOOL ● 0
SP_Ext)
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AutIntSet* 1 = Activate "automatic" mode with inter‐ STRUCT -
nal setpoint by interconnection (SP = ● Value: BOOL ● 0
SP_Op).
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AutIntSet has higher priority
thanAutExtSet.
AutModOp* 1 = "Automatic" mode via operator BOOL 0
BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation for batch control BOOL 0
BatchID Batch ID DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name S7-String
BypProt 1 = Interlock bypass during simulation BOOL 0
BypLiOp 1 = Bypass commands via interconnec‐ STRUCT -
tion ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
BypLock 1 = Bypass activation or deactivation is STRUCT -
locked for operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
BypPV Substitution value if block is in bypass REAL 0.0
BypPVLi 1 = Select bypass PV (via interconnec‐ STRUCT -
tion) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
BypPVOp 1 = Select bypass PV (via operator) BOOL 0
CPI_In Input for control performance index, STRUCT -
which is calculated by the assigned Con‐ ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
PerMon block
● ST: BYTE ● 16#78
CSF 1 = External error (control system fault) STRUCT -
Error handling (Page 121) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
DeadBand Width of dead band REAL 0.0
DiffGain Gain of differentiator [1..10] DiffGain STRUCT -
= TD / (delay time of D component) ● Value: REAL ● 5.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


852 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

Parameter Description Type Default


DiffSel 1 = D component activated BOOL 1
DiffToFbk* 1 = D component is placed in the feed‐ BOOL 1
back
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1
ER_A_DC* Delay time for incoming ER high/low or REAL 0.0
only low alarms [s]
ER_AH_DC* Delay time for incoming ER high alarms REAL 0.0
[s]
ER_AH_DFac* Delay factor at positive setpoint step REAL 0.0
changes for incoming alarms at the error
signal monitoring ER_AH_Lim
ER_A_DG* Delay time for outgoing ER high/low or REAL 0.0
only low alarms [s]
ER_AH_DG* Delay time for outgoing ER high alarms REAL 0.0
[s]
ER_AH_En 1 = Activate alarm (high) for error signal BOOL 1
monitoring
ER_AH_Lim Alarm limit (high) for error signal moni‐ REAL 100.0
toring
ER_AH_MsgEn 1 = Activate messages for alarm (high) BOOL 1
for error signal monitoring
ER_AL_DFac* Delay factor at negative setpoint step REAL 0.0
changes for incoming alarms at the error
signal monitoring ER_AL_Lim
ER_AL_En 1 = Activate alarm (low) for error signal BOOL 1
monitoring
ER_AL_Lim Alarm limit (low) for error signal monitor‐ REAL -100.0
ing
ER_AL_MsgEn 1 = Activate messages for alarm (low) for BOOL 1
error signal monitoring
ER_Hyst Alarm hysteresis for error signal REAL 1.0
EventTsIn For interconnecting data between a tech‐ ANY
nology block and the message blocks
EventTs, Event16Ts.
The EventTsIn input parameter serves
to interconnect the EventTsOut output
parameter of the EventTs, Event16Ts
block. When this interconnection is con‐
figured, the messages of the EventTs,
Event16Ts block are displayed on the
OS in the alarm view of the technology
block and can also be acknowledged
there.
ExtMsg1 1 = Binary input for freely selectable STRUCT -
message 1 is used ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 853
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

Parameter Description Type Default


ExtMsg2 1 = Binary input for freely selectable STRUCT -
message 2 is used ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg3 1 = Binary input for freely selectable STRUCT -
message 3 is used ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg4 1 = Binary input for freely selectable STRUCT -
message 4 is used ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtReset Value to which a reset is made if STRUCT -
ExtRstOn = 1. ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtRstOn 1 = Reset externally STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtVa106 Associated value 6 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa107 Associated value 7 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa209 Associated value 9 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID2)
ExtVa210 Associated value 10 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID2)
Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 834) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 20: BOOL ● 1
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
Feature2 I/O for additional functions (Page 834) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
FFwd* Input for additive disturbance variable STRUCT -
activation ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FFwdHiLim Limit (high) for additive disturbance vari‐ STRUCT -
able activation ● Value: REAL ● 100.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FFwdLoLim Limit (low) for additive disturbance vari‐ STRUCT -
able activation ● Value: REAL ● -100.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


854 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

Parameter Description Type Default


Gain Proportional gain STRUCT -
Gain.ST = 16#FF: Enabled in faceplate ● Value: REAL ● 1.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
InitPid* InitPid edge transitions result in the STRUCT -
PID algorithm's initialization equations ● Value: BOOL ● 0
being carried out. Is used, for example,
for SP changes without MV jumps ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Intl_En 1 = Interlock without reset (interlock, Int‐ BOOL 1


lock parameter) is in effect
Intlock 0 = Interlock without reset is in effect STRUCT -
Once the interlock condition has cleared, ● Value: BOOL ● 1
the block can be operated without reset ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
1 = Interlock not activated
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
IntSel 1 = I component activated BOOL 1
Man* Manual specification for the manipulated REAL 0.0
variable
ManHiLim Limit (high) for manual parameter Man REAL 100.0
ManLoLim Limit (low) for manual parameter Man REAL 0.0
ManModOp* 1 = "Manual" mode via OS operator BOOL 1
ManSet* 1 = Activate "manual" mode via intercon‐ STRUCT -
nection. ● Value: BOOL ● 0
ManSet has higher priority ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
thanAutIntSet.
MS_RelOp* 1 = Release for maintenance by OS op‐ BOOL 0
erator
MsgEvID1 Message number (assigned automatical‐ DWORD 16#00000000
ly)
MsgEvID2 Message number (assigned automatical‐ DWORD 16#00000000
ly)
MsgLock 1 = Suppress process messages. STRUCT -
See also the section Suppressing mes‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
sages using the MsgLock parameter ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
(Page 214) for more on this.
MV_Bump* Default value for controller output MV if STRUCT -
MV_BumpOn = 1 ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_BumpOn 1 = Set controller output MV:= MV_Bump STRUCT -
without (!) taking the controller into "man‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
ual" mode.
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_ChnST Signal status of output channel for MV STRUCT -
Should be connected to an output chan‐ ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
nel block ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 855
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

Parameter Description Type Default


MV_Close 1 = Close adjustment valve by intercon‐ STRUCT -
nection, i.e. MV:= MV_LoLim ● Value: BOOL ● 0
MV_Close has higher priority than ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_Open
MV_Forced* Forced manipulated variable that is not STRUCT -
limited and assumes top priority ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_ForOn 1 = Output forced manipulated variable STRUCT -
MV_Forced unlimited at output MV ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_HiLim Limit (high) for manipulated variable MV STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 100.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_Mean Mean value of the MV in the time window STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#78
MV_LoLim Limit (low) for manipulated variable MV STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_Offset Manipulated variable for ER=0, operat‐ REAL 0.0
ing point for controller with deactivated I
component
MV_Open 1 = Open adjustment valve by intercon‐ STRUCT -
nection, i.e. MV:= MV_HiLim ● Value: BOOL ● 0
MV_Open has higher priority than ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_TrkOn
MV_OpScale OS display range for manipulated varia‐ STRUCT -
ble MV ● High: REAL ● 100.0
● Low: REAL ● 0.0
MV_SafePos Manipulated variable neutral position STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_Trk* Tracking value for the manipulated vari‐ STRUCT -
able MV ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_TrkOn 1 = Tracking of manipulated variable MV STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_Unit Unit of measure for manipulated variable INT 1342
NegGain 0 = Effective proportional gain GainEff STRUCT -
is positive ● Value: BOOL ● 0
1 = Effective proportional gain GainEff ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
is negative

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


856 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

Parameter Description Type Default


NormMV Manipulated variable range (MV) for STRUCT -
standardizing the proportional gain ● High: REAL ● 100.0
(GAIN)
● Low: REAL ● 0.0
NormPV* Process value range (PV) for standardiz‐ STRUCT -
ing the proportional gain (GAIN) ● High: REAL ● 100.0
● Low: REAL ● 0.0
Occupied Occupied by batch control BOOL 0
OosLi 1 = "Out of service", via interconnection STRUCT -
or SFC (0-1 edge transition) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosOp* 1 = "Out of service", via OS operator BOOL 0
OptimEn* 1 = Enable optimization of PID parame‐ BOOL 0
ters by PID tuner
OptimOcc* 1 = Optimization running BOOL 0
OpSt_In Input parameter for local operator au‐ DWORD 16#00000000
thorization, connected with the Out out‐
put parameter of the upstream block,
OpStations (Page 423)
OS_Perm I/O for operator permissions (Page 834) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● ... ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
OS1Perm I/O for operator permissions (Page 834) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● Bit 18: BOOL ● 1
● Bit 19:BOOL ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
PropFacSP Applying the P component to the feed‐ REAL 1.0
back [0..1].
0 = P component fully in feedback
PropSel* 1 = Activate P component BOOL 1
PV* Process value (controlled variable) STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
PV_Unit Unit of measure for process value INT 1001
PV_AH_DC* Delay time for incoming PV high alarms REAL 0.0
[s]
PV_AH_DG* Delay time for outgoing PV high alarms REAL 0.0
[s]
PV_AH_En 1 = Enable PV alarm limit (high) BOOL 1
PV_AH_Lim Limit PV alarm (high) REAL 95.0
PV_AH_MsgEn 1 = Enable PV alarm (high) message BOOL 1
PV_AL_En 1 = Enable PV alarm limit (low) BOOL 1

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 857
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

Parameter Description Type Default


PV_AL_Lim PV alarm limit (low) REAL 5.0
PV_AL_MsgEn 1 = Enable PV alarm (low) message BOOL 1
PV_AL_DC* Delay time for incoming PVlow alarms [s] REAL 0.0
PV_AL_DG* Delay time for outgoing PV low alarms [s] REAL 0.0
PV_Hyst Hysteresis for PV alarm, warning and tol‐ REAL 1.0
erance limits
PV_OpScale Limit for scale in PV bar graph of face‐ STRUCT -
plate ● High: REAL ● 100.0
● Low: REAL ● 0.0
PV_TH_DC* Delay time for incoming PV high toler‐ REAL 0.0
ance messages [s]
PV_TH_DG* Delay time for outgoing PV high toler‐ REAL 0.0
ance messages [s]
PV_TH_En 1 = Enable PV tolerance limit (high) BOOL 0
PV_TH_Lim Limit PV tolerance message (high) REAL 85.0
PV_TH_MsgEn 1 = Enable message for PV tolerance BOOL 1
message (high)
PV_TL_DC* Delay time for incoming PV low tolerance REAL 0.0
messages [s]
PV_TL_DG* Delay time for outgoing PV low tolerance REAL 0.0
messages [s]
PV_TL_En 1 = Enable PV tolerance limit (low) BOOL 0
PV_TL_Lim Limit PV tolerance message (low) REAL 15.0
PV_TL_MsgEn 1 = Activate message for PV tolerance BOOL 1
message (low)
PV_WH_DC* Delay time for incoming PV high warn‐ REAL 0.0
ings [s]
PV_WH_DG* Delay time for outgoing PV high warn‐ REAL 0.0
ings [s]
PV_WH_En 1 = Enable PV warning limit (high) BOOL 1
PV_WH_Lim Limit PV warning (high) REAL 90.0
PV_WH_MsgEn 1 = Enable PV warning (high) message BOOL 1
PV_WL_DC* Delay time for incoming PV low warnings REAL 0.0
[s]
PV_WL_DG* Delay time for outgoing PV low warnings REAL 0.0
[s]
PV_WL_En 1 = Enable PV warning limit (low) BOOL 1
PV_WL_Lim Limit PV warning (low) REAL 10.0
PV_WL_MsgEn 1 = Enable PV warning (low) message BOOL 1
Rbk* Position feedback for display on OS STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
RbkHyst Alarm hysteresis for position feedback REAL 1.0
RbkW_DC* Delay time for incoming Rbk warnings [s] REAL 0.0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


858 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

Parameter Description Type Default


RbkW_DG* Delay time for outgoing Rbk warnings [s] REAL 0.0
RbkWH_En 1 = Enable warning (high) for position BOOL 1
feedback
RbkWH_Lim Limit for position feedback of warning REAL 100.0
(high)
RbkWH_MsgEn 1 = Enable messages for warning (high) BOOL 1
for position feedback
RbkWL_En 1 = Enable warning (low) for position BOOL 1
feedback
RbkWL_Lim Limit for position feedback of warning REAL 0.0
(low)
RbkWL_MsgEn 1 = Enable messages for warning (low) BOOL 1
for position feedback
RefStdDevIn Reference value of PV standard devia‐ STRUCT -
tion (sigma) in defined "good" state of ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
control loop
● ST: BYTE ● 16#78
RstBypLi 1 = Reset bypass PV (via interconnec‐ STRUCT -
tion) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RstBypOp 1 = Reset bypass PV (via operator) BOOL 0
RunUpCyc Number of cycles in startup; messages INT 3
are suppressed during these cycles
SafePos 1 = Neutral position (Page 48) for con‐ BOOL 0
troller manipulated variable is ManHiLim
0 = Neutral position for controller manip‐
ulated variable is ManLoLim
SafePos2 Neutral position for controller manipu‐ INT 0
lated variable:
0 = SafePos is valid
1 = Neutral position is MV_SafePos
2 = Neutral position is last manipulated
variable (stop)
SampleTime Sampling time [s] (assigned automatical‐ REAL 0.1
ly)
SelFp1 Call a block saved in this parameter as ANY -
an additional faceplate (Page 217) in the
standard view
SelFp2 Call a block saved in this parameter as ANY -
an additional faceplate (Page 217) in the
preview
SettliFactor Factor to increase the settling time to ad‐ REAL 2.0
just the dead band
SettliTime Settling time [s] of the control loop deter‐ STRUCT -
mined by the ConPerMon block ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#78

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 859
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

Parameter Description Type Default


SimLiOp Activation/deactivation of the simulation STRUCT -
by: ● Value: BOOL ● 0
0 = Operator ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
1 = Interconnection or SFC
SimOnLi 1 = Simulation via interconnection or STRUCT -
SFC (controlled by SimLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SimOn* 1 = Simulation on BOOL 0
SimPV* Process value used for SimOn = 1 REAL 0.0
SimPV_Li Process value that is used for STRUCT -
SimOnLi.Value = 1 ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
(SimLiOp.Value = 1)
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SimRbk* Position feedback used for SimOn = 1 REAL 0.0
SimRbkLi Position feedback used for STRUCT -
SimOnLi.Value = 1 ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
(SimLiOp.Value = 1)
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_DnRaLim* Limit (low) for the gradient of the setpoint REAL 100.0
[Unit/(Time unit)]
Time unit depends on TimeFactor
SP_ExHiLim Limit (high) for external setpoint STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 100.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExLoLim Limit (low) for external setpoint STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_Ext* external setpoint - (to interconnection) STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExtOp* 1 = Select external setpoint (via operator) BOOL 0
SP_InHiLim Limit (high) of internal setpoint REAL 100.0
SP_InLoLim Limit (low) of internal setpoint REAL 0.0
SP_Int* Internal setpoint for operation REAL 0.0
SP_IntOp* 1 = Select internal setpoint (via operator) BOOL 0
SP_LiDnRaLim Linkable limit (low) for the gradient of the REAL 100.0
setpoint [Unit/(Time unit)]
Time unit depends on TimeFactor
SP_LiRmpTime Linkable time [Time unit] for gradient REAL 0.0
limitation in ramp mode duration
Time unit depends on TimeFactor
SP_LiUpRaLim Linkable gradient limit (high) for the set‐ REAL 100.0
point [Unit/(Time unit)]
Time unit depends on TimeFactor

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


860 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

Parameter Description Type Default


SP_Load* Defined setpoint, if SP_LoadOn = 1 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_LoadOn* 1 = Take controller into "automatic STRUCT -
mode" with internal setpoint and set set‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
point at SP:= SP_Load.
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
This kind of setpoint specification has
maximum priority.
SP_RateOn* 1 = Activate limitation of setpoint gradi‐ BOOL 0
ents
SP_RmpModTime 1 = Use time values (SP_RmpTime, BOOL 0
SP_LiRmpTime)
0 = Use gradient limits (SP_DnRaLim,
SP_LiDnRaLim, SP_UpRaLim,
SP_LiUpRaLim)
SP_RmpOn* 1 = Activate setpoint ramp to target set‐ BOOL 0
point SP_RmpTarget
SP_RmpTarget* Target setpoint for setpoint ramp REAL 0.0
SP_RmpTime* Time [Time unit] for setpoint ramp from REAL 0.0
current SP up to SP_RmpTarget or time
[Time unit] for gradient limitation in ramp
mode duration
Time unit depends on TimeFactor
SP_TrkExt 1 = Bumpless switchover from external BOOL 1
to internal setpoint active
SP_TrkPV 1 = Setpoint follows PV in "manual mode" BOOL 0
and with tracking
SP_UpRaLim* Gradient limit (high) for the setpoint REAL 100.0
[Unit/(Time unit)]Time unit depends on
TimeFactor
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
TD Derivative time [s] STRUCT -
TD.ST = 16#FF: Enabled in faceplate ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
TI Integral time [s] STRUCT -
TI.ST = 16#FF: Enabled in faceplate ● Value: REAL ● 100.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
TimeFactor Time unit: INT 0
0 = Seconds
1 = Minutes
2 = Hours
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use in PCS 7 BYTE 16#00
OS

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 861
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AdvCoAct 1 = "Program mode" enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AdvCoRdy 1 = "Program mode" available STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AutAct 1 = "Automatic mode" enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
BypassAct 1 = Bypass is activated in this block STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CascaCut Cascade connection: STRUCT -
1 = Control chain from primary to secon‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
dary controller is interrupted ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
DynDeadBand Dynamic dead band REAL 0.0
PhaseDeadBand Phase for the dynamic adjustment of the INT 0
dead band
0: Dead band enabled
1: Dead band disabled
2: Settling time
ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without BOOL 0
errors
ER Error signal STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ER_A_DCOut Effective delay time [s] for incoming REAL 0.0
alarms at the error signal monitoring
ER_AH_Act 1 = Alarm limit (high) for control deviation STRUCT -
violated. ● Value: BOOL ● 0
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐
bling operating points (Page 149)) and ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐ (Bypass information
olation (Page 174)). bit)
ER_AL_Act 1 = Alarm limit (low) for control deviation STRUCT -
violated. ● Value: BOOL ● 0
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐
bling operating points (Page 149)) and ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐ (Bypass information
olation (Page 174)). bit)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


862 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

Parameter Description Type Default


ErrorNum* Output of pending error number. INT -1
For error numbers that can be output by
this block, see PIDConR error handling
(Page 847)
FFwdHiAct 1 = Limit (high) for additive disturbance STRUCT -
variable activation violated ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FFwdLoAct 1 = Limit (low) for additive disturbance STRUCT -
variable activation violated ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
GainEff Effective proportional gain depends on REAL 1.0
NegGain, Gain, NormPV, and NormMV
GrpErr 1 = Group error pending STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
LockAct 1 = Interlock is in effect STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
LoopClosed 1 = Control loop closed STRUCT -
0 = Control loop open ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManAct 1 = "Manual mode" enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManHiOut Limit (high) for "manual mode", corre‐ STRUCT -
sponds to input parameter ManHiLim ● Value: REAL ● 100.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManLoOut Limit (low) for "manual mode", corre‐ STRUCT -
sponds to input parameter ManLoLim ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MS_Release Release for maintenance: 1 = Release STRUCT -
for OS operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MsgAckn1 Message acknowledgement status 1 WORD 16#0000
(output ACK_STATE of first ALARM_8P)
MsgAckn2 Message acknowledgement status 2 WORD 16#0000
(output ACK_STATE of second
ALARM_8P)
MsgErr1 Alarm error 1 (output ERROR of first BOOL 0
ALARM_8P)
MsgErr2 Alarm error 2 (output ERROR of second BOOL 0
ALARM_8P)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 863
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

Parameter Description Type Default


MsgStat1 Message status 1 (output STATUS of first WORD 16#0000
ALARM_8P)
MsgStat2 Message status 2 (output STATUS of WORD 16#0000
second ALARM_8P)
MV Manipulated variable STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_HiAct 1 = Limit (high) of manipulated variable STRUCT -
violated ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_LoAct 1 = Limit (low) of manipulated variable STRUCT -
violated ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_UnitOut Unit of measure for manipulated varia‐ INT 0
ble, for interconnecting to the MV_Unit
input parameter of the ConPerMon block
OosAct 1 = Block is "out of service" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpSt_Out Value of the OpSt_In input parameter, DWORD 16#00000000
for feedforwarding to other blocks. Bit 31
of this parameter is used by
Feature.Bit24
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with settings DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
changed by the block algorithm
OS1PermOut Display of OS1Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS1PermLog Display of OS1Perm with settings DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
changed by the block algorithm
PV_AH_Act 1 = PV alarm (high) active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐ ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
olation (Page 174)). (Bypass information
bit)
PV_AH_Out PV - High alarm limit output REAL 0.0
PV_AL_Act 1 = PV alarm (low) active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐ ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
olation (Page 174)). (Bypass information
bit)
PV_AL_Out PV - Low alarm limit output REAL 0.0
PV_HysOut PV - Alarm hysteresis output REAL 0.0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


864 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

Parameter Description Type Default


PV_Out Output for process value STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
● Bit 1: BOOL of internal ● 0
fill byte
(Bypass information
bit)
PV_TH_Act 1 = PV tolerance message (high) active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐ ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
olation (Page 174)). (Bypass information
bit)
PV_TH_Out PV - High tolerance limit output REAL 0.0
PV_TL_Act 1 = PV tolerance message (low) active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐ ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
olation (Page 174)). (Bypass information
bit)
PV_TL_Out PV - Low tolerance limit output REAL 0.0
PV_ToleHi Limit (high) of 3-sigma band around the STRUCT -
setpoint is calculated when a ConPer‐ ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
Mon block is connected
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
PV_ToleLo Limit (low) of 3-sigma band around the STRUCT -
setpoint is calculated when a ConPer‐ ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
Mon block is connected
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
PV_UnitOut Unit of measure for process value, for INT 0
interconnecting to the PV_Unit input
parameter of the ConPerMon block
PV_WH_Act 1 = PV warning (high) active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐ ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
olation (Page 174)). (Bypass information
bit)
PV_WH_Out PV - High warning limit output REAL 0.0
PV_WL_Act 1 = PV warning (low) active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐ ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
olation (Page 174)). (Bypass information
bit)
PV_WL_Out PV - Low warning limit output REAL 0.0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 865
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

Parameter Description Type Default


RbkOut Output for position feedback STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RbkWH_Act 1 = Warning (high) for position feedback STRUCT -
active. ● Value: BOOL ● 0
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐
olation (Page 174)).
RbkWL_Act 1 = Warning (low) for position feedback STRUCT -
active. ● Value: BOOL ● 0
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐
olation (Page 174)).
RdyToStart 1 = Active start readiness STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SettlingTimer Settling time for a closed control loop REAL 0.0
SP Setpoint used by controller STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_DnRaAct 1 = Negative gradient limiting of setpoint STRUCT -
is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExHiAct 1 = Limit (high) for external setpoint has STRUCT -
been reached ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExLoAct 1 = Limit (low) for external setpoint has STRUCT -
been reached ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExtAct 1 = External setpoint is active STRUCT -
0 = Internal setpoint is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExtOut External setpoint, corresponds to input STRUCT -
parameter SP_Ext ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_InHiOut Limit (high) for SP_Int corresponds to STRUCT -
input parameter SP_InHiLim ● Value: REAL ● 100.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


866 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

Parameter Description Type Default


SP_InLoOut Limit (low) for SP_Int corresponds to STRUCT -
input parameter SP_InLoLim ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_RateTarget Target setpoint for the gradient limitation REAL 0.0
SP_UpRaAct Positive gradient limiting of setpoint is STRUCT -
active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_RemRT Remaining ramp time of the setpoint REAL 0.0
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
Status1 Status word 1 (Page 825) DWORD 16#00000000
Status2 Status word 2 (Page 825) DWORD 16#00000000
Status3 Status word 2 (Page 825) DWORD 16#00000000
SumMsgAct 1 = Active hardware interrupt STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Calculation of the output parameter ER_A_DCOut


ER_A_DC is assigned by default to the output before a setpoint change.
ER_A_DCOut = ER_A_DC

In the case of a setpoint change in the positive direction during automatic mode, the output is
calculated as follows:
ER_A_DCOut = Maximum (ER_A_DC, ER_AH_DFac * Setpoint difference)

In the case of a setpoint change in the negative direction during automatic mode, the output
is calculated as follows:
ER_A_DCOut = Maximum (ER_A_DC, -1*ER_AH_DFac * Setpoint difference)

When the control circuit has stabilized again, meaning


(ER_AL_Lim + ER_Hyst) <= ER <= (ER_AH_Lim – ER_Hyst)
and the delay time for outgoing alarms ER_A_DG has expired, the output is reset again to
ER_A_DC: ER_A_DCOut = ER_A_DC

Activating and deactivating the function:


The function is deactivated (default) when the following applies: ER_AH_DFac = 0.0 and
ER_AL_DFac = 0.0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 867
Controller blocks
5.9 PIDConR - Continuous PID controller with external reset

See also
PIDConR block diagram (Page 868)
PIDConR messaging (Page 849)
PIDConR modes (Page 831)

5.9.7 PIDConR block diagram

PIDConRblock diagram
A block diagram is not provided for this block.

See also
PIDConR I/Os (Page 851)
PIDConR messaging (Page 849)
PIDConR error handling (Page 847)
PIDConR functions (Page 834)
PIDConR modes (Page 831)
Description of PIDConR (Page 825)

5.9.8 Operator control and monitoring

5.9.8.1 PIDConR views

Views of the PIDConR block


This block has the same views as the PIDConL block. Refer to the section Operator control
and monitoring (Page 792) of the PIDConL block.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


868 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

5.10.1 Description of PIDStepL

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1878
Family: Control

Area of application for PIDStepL


The block is used for the following applications:
● Fixed setpoint control
● Cascade control
● Ratio control
● Split-range control
● Smith predictor closed-loop control
● Override control (override)
Note on restricting the area of application: The block is not intended for pulse-duration
modulation. Examples of applications: Temperature control with electric heater, which can
switched on an off via a (semiconductor) relay. The heating power required by the controller,
for example 80%, is output in the form of binary pulses, whereby the duration of the on pulses
in this case is four times as long as the pause duration. Such control is built with a combination
of a continuous controller (such as PIDConL) and the pulse generator module PULSEGEN
from the CFC library ELEM_400.

How it works
The block is a PID step controller with binary output signals (manipulated variable signals). It
is used to control integral action actuators (e.g. valves driven by motors).
The block functions following the PID algorithm with a delayed D component and an integrator
with double precision.
The step controller can function both with and without a position feedback for the valve position.
The block is suitable for controlling sluggish control loops, for example, for temperatures and
filling levels, and high-speed control loops, for example, for flow rates and speed. For a given
CPU, a compromise has to be made between the number of controllers and the frequency
with which the individual controllers have to be processed. The faster the modulated control
loops are, i.e. the more frequently the manipulated variables have to be calculated per time
unit, the lower the number of controllers that can be installed.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 869
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38). The block is
also installed automatically in the startup OB (OB100).
For the control loop monitoring to work as planned in the trend view of the controller faceplates,
the
S7_xarchive:='Value, shortterm;'
attributes in the process tag types for control loops at the controller function block must be set
for the following tags:
● Input parameters:
– CPI_In
● Output parameters
– MV
– MV_HiAct
– MV_LoAct
– LoopClosed
– SP
– PV_Out
– PV_ToleHi
– PV_ToleLo
For the PIDStepL block, the Advanced Process Library contains templates for process tag
types as examples and there is a example project (APL_Example_xx, xx designates the
language variant) containing different application cases for this block.
Several process tag types are simulated in the example project and serve to explain the block
function.
Examples of process tag types:
● Step controller with direct access to the actuator and without position feedback
(StepControlDirect) (Page 2397)
● Step controller with assigned actuator block and position feedback (StepControlActor)
(Page 2398)

Startup characteristics
Use the Feature Set startup characteristics (Page 141) to define the startup characteristics of
this block.
The messages are suppressed after startup for the number of cycles set at RunUpCyc.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


870 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


You can find a description for each parameter in section PIDStepL I/Os (Page 890).

Status bit Parameter


0 Occupied
1 BatchEn
2 SimOn
3 OosAct.Value
4 OosLi.Value
5 AutAct.Value
6 Invalid signal status
7 ManAct.Value
8 SP_ExtAct.Value
9 MV_ForOn.Value
10 MV_TrkOn.Value
11 NOT RbkClosed.Value
12 Open.Value
13 Close.Value
14 Stop.Value
15 FbkOpened.Value
16 FbkClosed.Value
17 SimLiOp.Value
18 SimOn AND ManAct
19 AdvCoAct
20 1 = Input parameter Rbk is not interconnected (RbkOut.ST = 16#FF)
21 NegGain
22 1 = SP ramp active
23 OptimEn
24 OptimOcc
25 Not used
26 Display of BypassAct.Value in faceplate (display and operator controls) and block
icon
27 Not used
28 1 = Input parameter OpenChnST is interconnected
29 1 = Input parameter CloseChnST is interconnected
30 1 = Input parameter StopChnST is interconnected
31 WithRbk = 1 (Step controller with position feedback)

Status word allocation for Status2 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 MsgLock
1 PV_AH_Act.Value
2 PV_WH_Act.Value

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 871
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

Status bit Parameter


3 PV_TH_Act.Value
4 PV_TL_Act.Value
5 PV_WL_Act.Value
6 PV_AL_Act.Value
7 PV_AH_En OR Feature.Bit31
8 PV_WH_En OR Feature.Bit31
9 PV_TH_En OR Feature.Bit31
10 PV_TL_En OR Feature.Bit31
11 PV_WL_En OR Feature.Bit31
12 PV_AL_En OR Feature.Bit31
13 PV_AH_MsgEn
14 PV_WH_MsgEn
15 PV_TH_MsgEn
16 PV_TL_MsgEn
17 PV_WL_MsgEn
18 PV_AL_MsgEn
19 ER_AH_Act.Value
20 ER_AL_Act.Value
21 ER_AH_En OR Feature.Bit31
22 ER_AL_En OR Feature.Bit31
23 ER_AH_MsgEn
24 ER_AL_MsgEn
25 RbkWH_Act.Value
26 RbkWL_Act.Value
27 RbkWH_En OR Feature.Bit31
28 RbkWL_En OR Feature.Bit31
29 RbkWH_MsgEn
30 RbkWL_MsgEn
31 MS_RelOp

Status word allocation for Status3 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 Effective signal 1 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
1 Effective signal 2 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
2 Effective signal 3 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
3 Effective signal 4 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
4 Effective signal 5 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
5 Effective signal 6 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
6 Effective signal 7 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
7 Effective signal 8 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
8 Delay of the PV_AH_Lim message

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


872 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

Status bit Parameter


9 Delay of the PV_WH_Lim message
10 Delay of the PV_TH_Lim message
11 Delay of the PV_TL_Lim message
12 Delay of the PV_WL_Lim message
13 Delay of the PV_AL_Lim message
14 Delay of the ER_AH_Lim message
15 Delay of the ER_AL_Lim message
16 Collection of message delays
17 BypassAct.Value
18 - 26 Not used
27 SP_UpRaAct, SP_DnRaAct limits enabled for gradient mode (SP_RateOn = 1)
28 GrpErr.Value
29 RdyToStart.Value
30 - 31 Not used

Status word allocation for Status4 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0-7 Effective signal 9..16 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
8 - 31 Not used

See also
PIDStepL functions (Page 875)
PIDStepL messaging (Page 888)
PIDStepL modes (Page 873)
PIDStepL error handling (Page 886)
PIDStepL block diagram (Page 905)

5.10.2 PIDStepL modes

PIDStepL modes
The block can be operated using the following modes:
● Automatic mode (Page 73)
● Manual mode (Page 73)
● Program mode for controllers (Page 79)
● Out of service (Page 72)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 873
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

The next section provides additional block-specific information relating to the general
descriptions.

"Automatic mode"
You can find general information on "Automatic mode", switching modes and bumpless
switchover in the section Manual and automatic mode for control blocks (Page 73).

"Manual mode"
You can find general information on "Manual mode", switching modes and bumpless
switchover in the section Manual and automatic mode for control blocks (Page 73).

"Program mode for controllers"


You can find general information about the "Program mode for controller" in the section
Program mode for controllers (Page 79).

"Out of service"
You can find general information about the "Out of service" mode in the section Out of
service (Page 72).
With Feature.Bit5 =1 the following output parameter become the status of simulation
16#60, if mode is changed to "Out of service".
With Feature.Bit5 =0 the following output parameter become the status of 16#80, if mode
is changed to "Out of service".
● Open.ST
● Close.ST
● Stop.ST
● RbkOut.ST
● RbkWH_Act.ST
● RbkWL_Act.ST
● SP_ExtAct.ST
● SP.ST
● SP_ExtOut.ST
● PV_Out.ST
● PV_AH_Act.ST
● PV_WH_Act.ST
● PV_TH_Act.ST
● PV_TL_Act.ST
● PV_WL_Act.ST

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


874 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

● PV_AL_Act.ST
● PV_ToleHi.ST
● PV_ToleLo.ST
● ER.ST
● ER_AH_Act.ST
● ER_AL_Act.ST

See also
Description of PIDStepL (Page 869)
PIDStepL functions (Page 875)
PIDStepL error handling (Page 886)
PIDStepL messaging (Page 888)
PIDStepL I/Os (Page 890)
PIDStepL block diagram (Page 905)

5.10.3 PIDStepL functions

Functions of PIDStepL
The functions for this block are listed below.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 875
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

Generation of manipulated variables with position feedback (WithRbk = 1)


The manipulated variable MV and therefore the actuating signals Open, Close and Stop can
be generated as follows:

MV_For Man‐ MV_Tr Adv‐ MV = Limit monitoring State Open, Close, Stop
On Act kOn CoAct
AND
NOT
AdvCo‐
ModSP
1 - - - MV_For none Forced tracking through Depending on Rbk and
ced constraint without limita‐ MV, the output signals
tion Open, Close and Stop
0 1 - - Man ManHiLim Manual mode, set by the are generated using the
operator algorithm of a positioner.
ManLoLim
0 0 1 - MV_Trk MV_HiLim Tracking with limitation
MV_LoLim
0 0 0 1 AdvCoM MV_HiLim Higher-level program
V MV_LoLim mode
0 0 0 0 P_Part MV_HiLim Automatic mode (PID al‐
+ MV_LoLim gorithm)
I_Part
+
D_Part
+ FFwd

If the controller is in "out of service" mode, the output parameter MV is set to the last valid value
in manual mode or the neutral position manipulated variable depending on the Feature Bit
(Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect at startup (Page 169)). Refer to the Out of
service (Page 72) section for more on this.

Generation of actuating signal without position feedback (WithRbk = 0)


The manipulated variable MV can be generated as follows:

ManAct Open, Close, Stop State


1 The output signals are generated using input signals OpenOp/Li, Manual mode, set by the operator
CloseOp/Li or StopOp/Li
0 The output signals are generated using PD output variables Automatic mode (PID algorithm)
P_Part, D_Part and FFwd

If the controller is in "out of service" mode, the output parameter MV is set to the last valid value
in manual mode or the neutral position manipulated variable depending on the Feature Bit
(Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect at startup (Page 169)). Refer to the Out of
service (Page 72) section for more on this.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


876 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

Three-position element with hysteresis and pulse generation

2SHQ


$GDSWLYHUHVSRQVHWKUHVKROG

&ORVH
0LQLPXPUHVSRQVHWKUHVKROG

2IIWKUHVKROG

The difference (MV – Rbk) for a step controller with position feedback forms the input for the
three-position element. The difference for step controllers without position feedback is formed
from the output of the PD block and an internal feedback, which is weighted by the common
integration of the position signal Open/Close MotorTime and the I-component weighted by
TI (see block diagram).
You can calculate the response threshold of the three position element as follows:
● Minimum response threshold: 100.0 * Max(PulseTime, SampleTime) /
MotorTime
● Off threshold: 0.5 * 110.0 / MotorTime * SampleTime;
Using "ThrAdaOn" you can turn on an adaption of the response threshold to reduce the
switching frequency. This only affects the closed control loop (automatic operation without
tracking) and is limited to:
● Down: Minimum response threshold
● Up: 10
The currently effective response threshold can be read at the output "ThesOn".
The pulse generation after the three position element ensures that PulseTime and
BreakTime are maintained during pulse generation.

Tracking and limiting a manipulated variable


The block provides the standard function Tracking and limiting a manipulated variable
(Page 205).

Note
This function is only available to you if position feedback is enabled for the controller
(WithRbk = 1).

Neutral position
The block provides the standard function Neutral position for motors, valves and controllers
(Page 48).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 877
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

Group error
This block provides the standard function Outputting group errors (Page 124).
The following parameters are taken into consideration when forming group errors:
● CSF

Outputting a signal for start readiness


This block provides the standard function Outputting a signal for start readiness (Page 54).

"Actuator active" information


If the parameter FbkClosed = 0, this is recognized as "Actuator active". This status can be
used to indicate a customized symbol in the process image, for example, and is saved in the
status word (see Status word section in Description of PIDStepL (Page 869)).

Limit monitoring of position feedback


The block provides the standard function Limit monitoring of the feedback (Page 95).

Note
This function is only available to you if position feedback is enabled for the controller
(WithRbk = 1).

Group display SumMsgAct for limit monitoring, CSF and ExtMsgx


The block provides the standard function Group display for limit monitoring, CSF and
ExtMsgx (Page 86).

External/internal setpoint specification


The block provides the standard function Setpoint specification - internal/external (Page 130).

Setpoint limiting for external setpoints


The block provides the standard function Setpoint limiting for external setpoints (Page 205).

Gradient limit of the setpoint


The block provides the standard function Gradient limit of the setpoint (Page 126).

Using setpoint ramp


The block provides the standard function Using setpoint ramp (Page 125).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


878 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

Tracking setpoint in manual mode


The block provides the standard function Tracking setpoint in manual mode (Page 205).

Simulating signals
The block provides the standard function Simulating signals (Page 59).
You can simulate the following values:
● Process value (SimPV, SimPV_Li)
● Position feedback (SimRbk, SimRbkLi)

Bypass function
This block provides the standard function Bypassing signals (Page 109).

Limit monitoring of the process value


The block provides the standard function Limit monitoring of the process value (Page 87).

Error signal generation and dead band


The block provides the standard function Error signal generation and dead band (Page 201).

Limit monitoring of error signal


The block provides the standard function Limit monitoring of setpoint, manipulated variable
and control deviation (Page 96).

Inverting control direction


The block provides the standard function Inverting control direction (Page 200).

Physical standardization of setpoint, manipulated variable and process value


Controller gain Gain is entered either using a physical variable or as standardized value.
Gain as a physical variable:
The standardized variables retain their default values:
● NormPV.High = 100 and NormPV.Low = 0
The effective gain is:
GainEff = Gain
Entering a standardized Gain (dimensionless):

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 879
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

Change the standardized variables to the actual range of the process values and manipulated
variables.
● Internal and external setpoints; the process value and corresponding parameters are
entered according to the physical measuring range of the process value.
● The manual parameter, the tracking value of the manipulated variable, feedforward control
and the corresponding parameters are entered as a percentage 0...100.
The effective gain is:
GainEff = 100.0 / (NormPV.High - NormPV.Low) · Gain

Selecting a unit of measure


The block provides the standard function Selecting a unit of measure (Page 221).

PID algorithm
The manipulated variable is generated in automatic mode according to the following algorithm:
MV = GainEff · (1 + 1 / (TI · s) + (TD · s) / (1 + TD / DiffGain · s)) · ER
Where:
s = Complex number
The following step response occurs:

09
09B+L/LP

*DLQ(II 7'
7LPH/DJ6DPSOH7LPH
*DLQ(II
(5 W *DLQ(II
*DLQ(II

W
7,

09B/R/LP

,QSXWVWHS(5 W  ` LIW
LIW!

Note
The formula describes a standard application where P, I and D components are activated and
the P and D components are not in the feedback circuit (PropSel = 1, TI <> 0, DiffToFbk
= 0 and IntSel = 1, DiffToFbk = 0 and PropFacSP = 1).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


880 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

The D component delay is derived from TD / DiffGain.


● The P component is at the P_Part I/O and can be deactivated using PropSel = 0 .
● The I component is displayed at the I_Part I/O and can be deactivated using TI = 0 or
IntSel = 0. In deactivated state, I_Part is specified by MV_Offset and added to the
manipulated variable. Make a selection for this value so that the remaining control deviation
equals zero at the control loop's typical operating point, at least. IntSel is used for
temporary deactivation of the I component. The I component is not reactivated until TI <>
0 and IntSel = 1. After the I component is activated, the integrator continues working
starting from MV_Offset.
● The D component is displayed at the D_Part I/O and can be deactivated using TD = 0 or
DiffSel = 0.

Structure segmentation at controllers


The block provides the standard function Structure segmentation at controllers (Page 207).

Anti-windup
The controller has an anti-windup function. The I component is frozen after the manipulated
variable has reached limits (MV_HiLim or MV_LoLim).

Feedforwarding and limiting disturbance variables


The block provides the standard function Feedforwarding and limiting disturbance variables
(Page 206).

Forming the signal status for blocks


The block provides the standard function Forming and outputting the signal status for
technologic blocks (Page 110).
● Signal status for the process value PV_Out:
The signal status of the output parameter PV_Out always corresponds to the signal status
of input parameter PV or, if the block is in simulation mode, 16#60.
● Signal status for the setpoint value SP:
The signal status of the SP output parameter is always equivalent to the signal status of
input parameter SP_Ext or SP_Int, depending on how the setpoint is specified. If the
internal setpoint SP_Int is used, the signal status is always output as 16#80.
● Signal status of the error signal ER:
The signal status of output parameter ER is obtained from the worst signal status of the two
output parameters PV_Out and SP and is output.
The signal status 16#60 (external simulation) is suppressed because the block acts as a
sink with external simulation.
● Signal status for position feedback RbkOut:
The signal status of RbkOut always corresponds to the signal status of input parameter
Rbk or, if the block is in simulation mode, 16#60. RbkOut is always 16#80 for step
controllers without position feedback.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 881
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

● Signal status for the manipulated variable MV:


The signal status of output parameter MV is obtained in "automatic mode" from the worst
signal status of the following parameters and is output:
ER.STFFwd.STFbkOpened.STFbkClosed.STRbkOut.STThe signal status 16#60
(external simulation) is suppressed because the block acts as a sink with external
simulation. In "manual mode" and for step controllers without position feedback, the signal
status is always output as good.
● Signal status for Open, Close, Stop:
The signal status is 16#60 when simulation is activated; otherwise, it is always 16#80.
● Worst signal status:
The worst signal status ST_Worst for the block is formed from the following parameters:
– SP.ST;
– PV_Out.ST;
– FFwd.ST;
– FbkOpened.ST;
– FbkClosed.ST;
– RbkOut.ST;
– OpenChnST.ST;
– CloseChnST.ST;
– StopChnST.ST;

Note
The RbkOut.ST parameter is always 16#80for a step controller without position feedback
(WithFbk = 0) .

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133) . The following functionality is
available for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
0 Set startup characteristics (Page 141)
1 Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 181)
2 Resetting the commands for changing the mode (Page 165)
4 Setting switch or button mode (Page 170)
5 Changes signal status of outputs in OOS (Page 198)
6 Ramp rate calculation (Page 183)
9 Substitution value is active if the block is in bypass (Page 189)
11 Gradient limitation with time duration (Page 186)
15 Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect with "out of service" operating mode
(Page 170)
16 Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect at startup (Page 169)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


882 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

Bit Function
18 Disabling bumpless switchover to automatic mode for controllers (Page 176)
22 Update acknowledgment and error status of the message call (Page 163)
23 SP following PV in open loop has no priority over SP_Ext and SP limits (Page 183)
24 Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162)
25 Suppression of all messages (Page 178)
26 Reaction of the switching points in the "Out of service" operating mode (Page 180)
28 Disabling operating points (Page 149)
29 Signaling limit violation (Page 174)
31 Limits disabled in faceplate (Page 195)

Configurable reactions using the Feature2 parameter

Bit Function
11 Suppress MsgLock and “Out of service” mode for a connected message block (Page 192)

Operator permissions
The block provides the standard function Operator control permissions (Page 265).
The block has the following permissions for the OS_Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 1 = Operator can switch to "automatic mode" AutModOp
1 1 = Operator can switch to "manual mode" ManModOp
2 1 = Operator can switch to "Out of service" mode OosOp
3 1 = Operator can switch to "program mode" AdvCoEn
4 1 = Operator can switch the setpoint to "external" SP_ExtOp
5 1 = Operator can switch the setpoint to "internal" SP_IntOp
6 1 = Operator can change the internal setpoint SP_Int
7 1 = Operator can change the manual parameter Man (WithRbk = 1)
8 1 = Operator can change operation high limit of the setpoint SP_InHiLim
9 1 = Operator can change operation low limit of the setpoint SP_InLoLim
10 1 = Operator can change the operation high limit of the manipulated variable ManHiLim
11 1 = Operator can change the operation low limit of the manipulated variable ManLoLim
12 1 = Operator can enable the setpoint's gradient limitation function SP_RateOn
13 1 = Operator can change the setpoint's high limit for the ramp SP_UpRaLim
14 1 = Operator can change the setpoint's low limit for the ramp SP_DnRaLim
15 1 = Operator can switch between the time value or the value for the ramp SP_RmpModTime
16 1 = Operator can change the ramp time SP_RmpTime
17 1 = Operator can change the target setpoint SP_RmpTarget for the setpoint ramp
18 1 = Operator can enable the setpoint ramp function SP_RmpOn
19 1 = Operator can permit the PID optimization function OptimEn
20 1 = Operator can enable the track setpoint in "manual mode" function SP_TrkPV

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 883
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

Bit Function
21 1 = Operator can enable the bumpless switchover from external to internal SP_TrkExt
22 1 = Operator can change the gain parameter Gain
23 1 = Operator can change the integral time parameter TI
24 1 = Operator can change the derivative time parameter TD
25 1 = Operator can change the derivative gain parameter DiffGain
26 1 = Operator can change the dead band parameter DeadBand
27 1 = Operator can activate bypass functionality
28 1 = Operator can change the integral time parameter MotorTime
29 1 = Operator can change the integral time parameter PulseTime
30 1 = Operator can change the integral time parameter BreakTime
31 1 = Operator can deactivate bypass functionality

The block has the following permissions for the OS1Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 1 = Operator can change the limit (process value) PV_AH_Lim for the high alarm
1 1 = Operator can change the limit (process value) PV_WH_Lim for the high warning
2 1 = Operator can change the limit (process value) PV_TH_Lim for the high tolerance
3 1 = Operator can change the hysteresis (process value) PV_Hyst
4 1 = Operator can change the limit (process value) PV_TL_Lim for the low tolerance
5 1 = Operator can change the limit (process value) PV_WL_Lim for the low warning
6 1 = Operator can change the limit (process value) PV_AL_Lim for the low alarm
7 1 = Operator can change the limit (error signal) ER_AH_Lim for the high alarm
8 1 = Operator can change the hysteresis (error signal) ER_Hyst
9 1 = Operator can change the limit (error signal) ER_AL_Lim for the low alarm
10 1 = Operator can change the limit (position feedback) RbkWH_Lim for the high warning
11 1 = Operator can change the hysteresis (position feedback) RbkHyst
12 1 = Operator can change the limit (position feedback) RbkWL_Lim for the low warning
13 1 = Operator can open the valve: OpenOp (WithRbk = 0)
14 1 = Operator can close the valve: CloseOp (WithRbk = 0)
15 1 = Operator can stop the valve: StopOp (WithRbk = 0)
16 1 = Operator can activate the Simulation function SimOn
17 1 = Operator can activate the Release for maintenance function MS_RelOp
18 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_AH_MsgEn
19 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_WH_MsgEn
20 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_TH_MsgEn
21 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_TL_MsgEn
22 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_WL_MsgEn
23 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_AL_MsgEn
24 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via ER_AH_MsgEn
25 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via ER_AL_MsgEn
26 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via RbkWH_MsgEn
27 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via RbkWL_MsgEn

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


884 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

Bit Function
28 1 = Operator can change the simulation value SimPV
29 1 = Operator can change the simulation value SimRbk
18 - 29 Not used
30 1 = Operator can activate the derivative action to the feedback path DiffToFbk
31 1 = Operator can change the proportional action to the feedback path PropFacSP

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Release for maintenance


The block provides the standard function Release for maintenance (Page 65).

Generating instance-specific messages


The block provides the standard function Generating instance-specific messages (Page 213)
without the time stamp function in the I/O.

Suppressing messages using the MsgLock parameter


This block provides the standard function Suppressing messages using the MsgLock
parameter (Page 214).

Specifying the display area for process and setpoint values as well as operations
This block provides the standard function Display and operator input area for process values
and setpoints (Page 216).

Opening additional faceplates


This block provides the standard function Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


This block provides the standard function SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

Button labels
This block provides the standard function Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 885
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

Instance-specific text can be configured for the following parameters:


● OpenOp
● StopOp
● CloseOp

Connection of the time-stamped messages from EventTs or Event16Ts


This block provides the standard function Connection of the time-stamped messages from
EventTs or Event16Ts (Page 216).

See also
PIDStepL messaging (Page 888)
PIDStepL I/Os (Page 890)
PIDStepL error handling (Page 886)
PIDStepL modes (Page 873)
PIDStepL block diagram (Page 905)
Evaluation of the signal status of the interlock signals (Page 146)

5.10.4 PIDStepL error handling

Error handling of PIDStepL


Refer to section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions for the error handling of all
blocks.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers
● Control system fault (CSF)

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum output parameter can be used to output the following error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; the block is not executed
0 There is no error.
30 The value of PV can no longer be displayed in the REAL number field.
31 The value of SP_Ext can no longer be displayed in the REAL number field.
32 The value of FFwd can no longer be displayed in the REAL number field.
33 The value of MV_Trk can no longer be displayed in the REAL number field.
34 The value of MV_Forced can no longer be displayed in the REAL number field.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


886 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

Error number Meaning of the error number


35 The value of Rbk can no longer be displayed in the REAL number field.
36 The value of MV can no longer be displayed in the REAL number field.
50 The controller cannot be switched to program mode, because program mode with
default setpoint (AdvCoModSP = 0) is not possible for step controllers without posi‐
tion feedback (WithRbk = 0).
51 AutModLi = 1 and ManModLi = 1
SP_LiOp = 1 and SP_IntLi = 1 and SP_ExtLi = 1
OpenLi = 1 and StopLi = 1
CloseLi = 1 and StopLi = 1
OpenLi = 1 and CloseLi = 1
59 = 1 "Gain is negative"
60 |TI| < SampleTime / 2
61 |TD| < SampleTime
62 DiffGain < 1 or DiffGain > 10
63 TD / DiffGain < SampleTime / 2
64 PropFacSP < 0 or PropFacSP > 1
66 NormPV_High = NormPV_Low
67 MotorTime < SampleTime
68 PulseTime < SampleTime
69 BreakTime < SampleTime

Control system fault (CSF)


An external signal can be activated via the CSF input. A control system fault is triggered if this
signal changes to 1. Refer to the Error handling (Page 121) section for more on this.

See also
PIDStepL functions (Page 875)
Description of PIDStepL (Page 869)
PIDStepL modes (Page 873)
PIDStepL messaging (Page 888)
PIDStepL I/Os (Page 890)
PIDStepL block diagram (Page 905)
Setting switch or button mode (Page 170)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 887
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

5.10.5 PIDStepL messaging

Messaging
The following messages can be generated for this block:
● Process control fault
● Process messages
● Instance-specific messages

Process control fault


The following control system error messages can be output:

Message in‐ Message identi‐ Message class Event


stance fier
MsgEvId2 SIG 6 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External error has occurred

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment
You can interconnect an external fault (signal) to input parameter CSF. If it changes to CSF =
1, a process control fault is triggered (MsgEvId2, SIG 6).

Process messages

Message in‐ Message identifier Message class Event


stance
MsgEvId1 SIG 1 Alarm - high $$BlockComment$$
PV - high alarm limit violated
SIG 2 Warning - high $$BlockComment$$
PV - high warning limit violated
SIG 3 Tolerance - high $$BlockComment$$
PV - high tolerance limit violated
SIG 4 Tolerance - low $$BlockComment$$
PV - low tolerance limit violated
SIG 5 Warning - low $$BlockComment$$
PV - low warning limit violated
SIG 6 Alarm - low $$BlockComment$$
PV - low alarm limit violated
SIG 7 Alarm - high $$BlockComment$$
ER - high alarm limit violated
SIG 8 Alarm - low $$BlockComment$$
ER - low alarm limit violated

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


888 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

Message in‐ Message identifier Message class Event


stance
MsgEvId2 SIG 7 Warning - high $$BlockComment$$
Rbk - high warning limit violated
SIG 8 Warning - low $$BlockComment$$
Rbk - low warning limit violated

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment

Instance-specific messages
You can use up to four instance-specific messages with this block.

Message in‐ Message identifier Message class Event


stance
MsgEvId2 SIG 1 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 1
Status 16#@5%x@
SIG 2 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 2
Status 16#@6%x@
SIG 3 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 3
Status 16#@7%x@
SIG 4 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 4
Status 16#@8%x@

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId1

Associated value Block parameters


1 BatchName
2 StepNo
3 BatchID
4 Process value PV_Out
5 Control deviation ER
6 ExtVa106
7 ExtVa107
8 Not allocated
9 Not allocated
10 Not allocated

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 889
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

The associated values 6 ... 7 are allocated to the parameters ExtVa106 ... ExtVa107 and
can be used. Additional information is available in the "Process Control System PCS 7 -
Engineering System" manual.

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId2

Associated value Block parameters


1 BatchName
2 StepNo
3 BatchID
4 Position feedback RbkOut
5 Signal status ExtMsg1
6 Signal status ExtMsg2
7 Signal status ExtMsg3
8 Signal status ExtMsg4
9 ExtVa209
10 ExtVa210

The associated values 9 ... 10 are allocated to the parameters ExtVa209 ... ExtVa210 and
can be used. Additional information is available in the "Process Control System PCS 7 -
Engineering System" manual.

See also
Description of PIDStepL (Page 869)
PIDStepL functions (Page 875)
PIDStepL I/Os (Page 890)
PIDStepL modes (Page 873)
PIDStepL error handling (Page 886)
PIDStepL block diagram (Page 905)

5.10.6 PIDStepL I/Os


I/Os of PIDStepL

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AdvCoEn 1 = Enable "program mode" via interconnec‐ STRUCT -
tion ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AdvCoOn* 1 = Enable "program mode" via faceplate BOOL 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


890 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

Parameter Description Type Default


AdvCoModSP Type of "program mode": BOOL 1
1 = Setpoint specification
0 = Manipulated variable specification
AdvCoMstrO Activate (0-1) or deactivate (1-0) "program STRUCT -
n mode" via edge transition ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AdvCoMV Specified value from the external program REAL 0.0
AutModLi* 1 = "Automatic mode" via interconnection or STRUCT -
SFC (controlled by ModLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AutModOp* 1 = "Automatic mode" via operator (controlled BOOL 0
by ModLiOp = 0)
BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation for batch control BOOL 0
BatchID Batch ID DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name S7-String
BreakTime Minimum break duration [s] REAL 1.0
BypLiOp 1 = Bypass commands via interconnection STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
BypLock 1 = Bypass activation or deactivation is locked STRUCT -
for operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
BypPV Substitution value if block is in bypass REAL 0.0
BypPVLi 1 = Select bypass PV (via interconnection) STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
BypPVOp 1 = Select bypass PV (via operator) BOOL 0
CloseChnST Output channel state of Close STRUCT -
Should be connected to an output channel ● Value: BOOL ● 0
block ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
CloseLi* 1 = Close via interconnection or CFC STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CloseOp* 1 = Close via operator BOOL 0
CPI_In Input for control performance index, which is STRUCT -
calculated by the assigned ConPerMon block ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#78
CSF 1 = External error (control system fault) STRUCT -
Error handling (Page 121) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
DeadBand Width of dead band REAL 0.0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 891
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

Parameter Description Type Default


DiffGain Gain of differentiator [1..10] DiffGain = TD / STRUCT -
(delay time of D component) ● Value: REAL ● 5.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
DiffSel 1 = D component activated BOOL 1
DiffToFbk 1 = D component is placed in the feedback BOOL 0
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1
ER_A_DC* Delay for incoming alarms during error signal REAL 0.0
monitoring
ER_A_DG* Delay for outgoing alarms during error signal REAL 0.0
monitoring
ER_AH_En 1 = Activate alarm (high) for error signal mon‐ BOOL 1
itoring
ER_AH_Lim Alarm limit (high) for error signal monitoring REAL 100.0
ER_AH_MsgE 1 = Activate messages for alarm (high) for er‐ BOOL 1
n ror signal monitoring
ER_AL_En 1 = Activate alarm (low) for error signal moni‐ BOOL 1
toring
ER_AL_Lim Alarm limit (low) for error signal monitoring REAL -100.0
ER_AL_MsgE 1 = Activate messages for alarm (low) for error BOOL 1
n signal monitoring
ER_Hyst Alarm hysteresis for error signal REAL 1.0
EventTsIn For interconnecting data between a technolo‐ ANY
gy block and the message blocks EventTs,
Event16Ts.
The EventTsIn input parameter serves to
interconnect the EventTsOut output param‐
eter of the EventTs, Event16Ts block.
When this interconnection is configured, the
messages of the EventTs, Event16Ts
block are displayed on the OS in the alarm
view of the technology block and can also be
acknowledged there.
ExtMsg1 1 = Binary input for freely selectable message STRUCT -
1 is used ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg2 1 = Binary input for freely selectable message STRUCT -
2 is used ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg3 1 = Binary input for freely selectable message STRUCT -
3 is used ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg4 1 = Binary input for freely selectable message STRUCT -
4 is used ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


892 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

Parameter Description Type Default


ExtVa106 Associated value 6 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa107 Associated value 7 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa209 Associated value 9 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID2)
ExtVa210 Associated value 10 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID2)
FbkClosed Low limit stop signal of position feedback STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL 0
● ST: BYTE 16#80
FbkOpened High limit stop signal of position feedback STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 875) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
FFwd* Input for additive disturbance variable activa‐ STRUCT -
tion ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FFwdHiLim Limit (high) for additive disturbance variable STRUCT -
activation ● Value: REAL ● 100.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FFwdLoLim Limit (low) for additive disturbance variable STRUCT -
activation ● Value: REAL ● -100.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Gain Proportional gain STRUCT -
Gain.ST = 16#FF: Enabled in faceplate ● Value: REAL ● 1.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
IntHoldNeg 1 = Integrator cannot run in negative direction STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
IntHoldPos 1 = Integrator cannot run in positive direction STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
IntSel 1 = I component activated BOOL 1
Man* Manual specification for the manipulated var‐ REAL 0.0
iable
ManHiLim Limit (high) for manual parameter Man REAL 100.0
ManLoLim Limit (low) for manual parameter Man REAL 0.0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 893
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

Parameter Description Type Default


ManModLi* 1 = "Manual mode" via interconnection or STRUCT -
SFC (controlled by ModLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManModOp* 1 = "Manual mode" via OS operator (control‐ BOOL 1
led by ModLiOp = 0)
ModLiOp Operating mode switchover between: STRUCT -
0 = Operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
1 = Interconnection or SFC ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MotorTime Motor actuating time [s] REAL 30.0
MS_RelOp* 1 = Release for maintenance by OS operator BOOL 0
MsgEvID1 Message number (assigned automatically) DWORD 16#00000000
MsgEvID2 Message number (assigned automatically) DWORD 16#00000000
MsgLock 1 = Suppress process messages. STRUCT -
See also the section Suppressing messages ● Value: BOOL ● 0
using the MsgLock parameter (Page 214) for ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
more on this.
MV_Forced* Forced manipulated variable that is not limited STRUCT -
and assumes top priority ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_ForOn 1 = Output forced manipulated variable STRUCT -
MV_Forced unlimited at output MV ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_HiLim Limit (high) for manipulated variable MV STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 100.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_LoLim Limit (low) for manipulated variable MV STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_Offset Manipulated variable for ER = 0, operating REAL 0.0
point for controller with deactivated I compo‐
nent
MV_Trk* Tracking value for the manipulated variable STRUCT -
MV ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_TrkOn 1 = Tracking of manipulated variable MV STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
NegGain 0 = Effective proportional gain GainEff is STRUCT -
positive ● Value: BOOL ● 0
1 = Effective proportional gain GainEff is ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
negative

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


894 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

Parameter Description Type Default


NormPV Process value range (PV) for standardizing STRUCT -
the proportional gain (GAIN) ● High: REAL ● 100.0
● Low: REAL ● 0.0
Occupied 1 = Occupied by batch control BOOL 0
OosLi 1 = "Out of service", via interconnection or STRUCT -
SFC (0-1 edge transition) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosOp* 1 = "Out of service", via OS operator BOOL 0
OpenChnST Output channel state of Open STRUCT -
Should be connected to an output channel ● Value: BOOL ● 0
block ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
OpenLi* 1 = Open via interconnection or CFC STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpenOp* 1 = Open via operator BOOL 0
OptimEn* 1 = Enable optimization of PID parameters by BOOL 0
PID tuner
OptimOcc* 1 = Optimization running BOOL 0
OpSt_In Input parameter for local operator authoriza‐ DWORD 16#00000000
tion, connected with the Out output parame‐
ter of the upstream block, OpStations
(Page 423)
OS_Perm I/O for operator permissions (Page 875) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● ... ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
OS1Perm I/O for operator permissions (Page 875) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● Bit 18: BOOL ● 1
● Bit 19: BOOL ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
PropFacSP Applying the P component to the feedback REAL 1.0
[0..1]. 0 = P component fully in feedback
PropSel 1 = Activate P component BOOL 1
PulseTime Minimum pulse duration [s] REAL 1.0
PV* Process value (controlled variable) STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
PV_Unit Unit of measure for process value INT 1001
PV_A_DC* Delay time for incoming PV alarms [s] REAL 0.0
PV_A_DG* Delay time for outgoing PV alarms [s] REAL 0.0
PV_AH_En 1 = Enable PV alarm limit (high) BOOL 1

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 895
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

Parameter Description Type Default


PV_AH_Lim Limit PV alarm (high) REAL 95.0
PV_AH_MsgE 1 = Enable PV alarm (high) message BOOL 1
n
PV_AL_En 1 = Enable PV alarm limit (low) BOOL 1
PV_AL_Lim PV alarm limit (low) REAL 5.0
PV_AL_MsgE 1 = Enable PV alarm (low) message BOOL 1
n
PV_Hyst Hysteresis for PV alarm, warning and toler‐ REAL 1.0
ance limits
PV_OpScale Limit for scale in PV bar graph of faceplate STRUCT -
● High: REAL ● 100.0
● Low: REAL ● 0.0
PV_T_DC* Delay time for incoming PV tolerance messag‐ REAL 0.0
es [s]
PV_T_DG* Delay time for outgoing PV tolerance messag‐ REAL 0.0
es [s]
PV_TH_En 1 = Enable PV tolerance limit (high) BOOL 0
PV_TH_Lim Limit PV tolerance message (high) REAL 85.0
PV_TH_MsgE 1 = Enable message for PV tolerance mes‐ BOOL 1
n sage (high)
PV_TL_En 1 = Enable PV tolerance limit (low) BOOL 0
PV_TL_Lim Limit PV tolerance message (low) REAL 15.0
PV_TL_MsgE 1 = Activate message for PV tolerance mes‐ BOOL 1
n sage (low)
PV_Unit Unit of measure for process value INT 1001; OC
PV_W_DC* Delay time for incoming PV warnings [s] REAL 0.0
PV_W_DG* Delay time for outgoing PV warnings [s] REAL 0.0
PV_WH_En 1 = Enable PV warning limit (high) BOOL 1
PV_WH_Lim Limit PV warning (high) REAL 90.0
PV_WH_MsgE 1 = Enable PV warning (high) message BOOL 1
n
PV_WL_En 1 = Enable PV warning limit (low) BOOL 1
PV_WL_Lim Limit PV warning (low) REAL 10.0
PV_WL_MsgE 1 = Enable PV warning (low) message BOOL 1
n
Rbk* Position feedback STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
RbkHyst Alarm hysteresis for position feedback REAL 1.0
RbkWH_En 1 = Enable warning (high) for position feed‐ BOOL 1
back
RbkWH_Lim Limit for position feedback of warning (high) REAL 100.0
RbkWH_MsgE 1 = Enable messages for warning (high) for BOOL 1
n position feedback

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


896 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

Parameter Description Type Default


RbkWL_En 1 = Enable warning (low) for position feed‐ BOOL 1
back
RbkWL_Lim Limit for position feedback of warning (low) REAL 0.0
RbkWL_MsgE 1 = Enable messages for warning (low) for BOOL 1
n position feedback
RefStdDevI Reference value of PV standard deviation (sig‐ STRUCT -
n ma) in defined "good" state of control loop ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#78
RstBypLi 1 = Reset bypass PV (via interconnection) STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RstBypOp 1 = Reset bypass PV (via operator) BOOL 0
RunUpCyc Number of cycles in startup; messages are INT 3
suppressed during these cycles
S_RbkOnPID Simulation of position feedback on; BOOL 0
Tun For PCS 7 PID tuner only
S_RbkPIDTu Simulated position feedback REAL 50.0
n*
SafePos Neutral position (Page 48) for step controller INT 0
actuating signals:
0 = Close
1 = Open
2 = Stop
SampleTime Sampling time [s] (assigned automatically) REAL 0.1
SelFp1 1 = Call a block saved in this parameter as an ANY -
additional faceplate (Page 217) in the stand‐
ard view
SelFp2 1 = Call a block saved in this parameter as an ANY -
additional faceplate (Page 217) in the preview
SimLiOp Activation/deactivation of the simulation by: STRUCT -
0 = Operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
1 = Interconnection or SFC ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SimOnLi 1 = Simulation via interconnection or SFC STRUCT -
(controlled by SimLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SimOn* 1 = Simulation on BOOL 0
SimPV* Process value used for SimOn = 1 REAL 0.0
SimPV_Li Process value that is used for STRUCT -
SimOnLi.Value = 1 (SimLiOp.Value = 1) ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SimRbk* Position feedback used for SimOn = 1 REAL 0.0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 897
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

Parameter Description Type Default


SimRbkLi Position feedback used for STRUCT -
SimOnLi.Value = 1 (SimLiOp.Value = 1) ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_DnRaLim Limit (low) for the gradient of the setpoint REAL 100.0
* [Unit/(Time unit)]
Time unit depends on TimeFactor
SP_ExHiLim Limit (high) for external setpoint STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 100.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExLoLim Limit (low) for external setpoint STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_Ext* External setpoint of - (to interconnection) STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExtLi* 1 = Select external setpoint (via interconnec‐ STRUCT -
tion) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExtOp* 1 = Select external setpoint (via operator) BOOL 0
SP_InHiLim Limit (high) of internal setpoint REAL 100.0
SP_InLoLim Limit (low) of internal setpoint REAL 0.0
SP_Int* Internal setpoint for operation REAL 0.0
SP_IntLi* 1 = Select internal setpoint (via interconnec‐ STRUCT -
tion) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_IntOp* 1 = Select internal setpoint (via operator) BOOL 0
SP_LiDnRaL Linkable limit (low) for the gradient of the set‐ REAL 100.0
im point [Unit/(Time unit)]
Time unit depends on TimeFactor
SP_LiOp Select setpoint source (internal/external): STRUCT -
1 = Via interconnection ● Value: BOOL ● 0
0 = Via operator ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_LiRmpTi Linkable time [Time unit] for gradient limitation REAL 0.0
me in ramp mode duration
Time unit depends on TimeFactor
SP_LiUpRaL Linkable gradient limit (high) for the setpoint REAL 100.0
im [Unit/(Time unit)]
Time unit depends on TimeFactor
SP_RateOn* 1 = Activate limitation of setpoint gradients BOOL 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


898 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

Parameter Description Type Default


SP_RmpModT 1 = Use time values (SP_RmpTime, BOOL 0
ime SP_LiRmpTime)
0 = Use gradient limits (SP_DnRaLim,
SP_LiDnRaLim, SP_UpRaLim,
SP_LiUpRaLim)
SP_RmpOn* 1 = Activate setpoint ramp to target setpoint BOOL 0
SP_RmpTarget
SP_RmpTarg Target setpoint for setpoint ramp REAL 0.0
et*
SP_RmpTime Time [Time unit] for setpoint ramp from cur‐ REAL 0.0
* rent SP up to SP_RmpTarget or time
[Time unit] for gradient limitation in ramp
mode duration
Time unit depends on TimeFactor
SP_TrkExt 1 = Bumpless switchover from external to in‐ BOOL 1
ternal setpoint active
SP_TrkPV 1 = Setpoint follows PV in "manual mode" and BOOL 0
with tracking
SP_UpRaLim Gradient limit (high) for the setpoint [Unit/ REAL 100.0
* (Time unit)]
Time unit depends on TimeFactor
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
StopChnST Output channel state of Stop STRUCT -
Should be connected to an output channel ● Value: BOOL ● 0
block ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
StopLi* 1 = Stop via interconnection or CFC STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
StopOp* 1 = Stop via operator BOOL 0
TD Derivative time in [s] STRUCT -
TD.ST = 16#FF: Enabled in faceplate ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
ThrAdaOn Adaptation of threshold BOOL 1
0 = Hold constant
TI Integral time [s] STRUCT -
TI.ST = 16#FF: Enabled in faceplate ● Value: REAL ● 100.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
TimeFactor Time unit: INT 0
0 = Seconds
1 = Minutes
2 = Hours
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use in PCS 7 OS BYTE 16#00
WithRbk 1 = Feedback value available for the manipu‐ BOOL 0
lated variable

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 899
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AdvCoAct 1 = "Program mode" enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AdvCoRdy 1 = "Program mode" available STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AutAct 1 = "Automatic mode" enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
BypassAct 1 = Bypass is activated in this block STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CascaCut Cascade connection: STRUCT -
1 = Control chain from primary to secondary ● Value: BOOL ● 0
controller is interrupted ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Close Control output: STRUCT -
1 = Closed is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
D_Part D component of PID algorithm REAL 0.0
ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without errors BOOL 0
ER Error signal STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ER_AH_Act 1 = Alarm limit (high) for control deviation vio‐ STRUCT -
lated. ● Value: BOOL ● 0
You can change the reaction for this parame‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ter with Feature.Bit28 (Disabling operating
points (Page 149)) and with ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit violation (Bypass information bit)
(Page 174)).
ER_AL_Act 1 = Alarm limit (low) for control deviation viola‐ STRUCT -
ted. ● Value: BOOL ● 0
You can change the reaction for this parame‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ter with Feature.Bit28 (Disabling operating
points (Page 149)) and with ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit violation (Bypass information bit)
(Page 174)).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


900 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

Parameter Description Type Default


ErrorNum Output of pending error number. For error INT -1
numbers that can be output by this block, see
PIDStepL error handling (Page 886)
FFwdHiAct 1 = Limit (high) for additive disturbance varia‐ STRUCT -
ble activation violated ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FFwdLoAct 1 = Limit (low) for additive disturbance variable STRUCT -
activation violated ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
GainEff Effective proportional gain depends on REAL 1.0
NegGain, Gain, NormPV, and NormMV
GrpErr 1 = Group error pending STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
I_Part I component of PID algorithm REAL 0.0
LoopClosed 1 = Control loop closed STRUCT -
0 = Control loop open ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManAct 1 = "Manual mode" enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManHiOut Limit (high) for "manual mode", corresponds STRUCT -
to input parameter ManHiLim ● Value: REAL ● 100.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManLoOut Limit (low) for "manual mode", corresponds to STRUCT -
input parameter ManLoLim ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MS_Release Release for maintenance: 1 = Release for OS STRUCT -
operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MsgAckn1 Message acknowledgement status 1 (output WORD 16#0000
ACK_STATE of first ALARM_8P)
MsgAckn2 Message acknowledgement status 2 (output WORD 16#0000
ACK_STATE of second ALARM_8P)
MsgErr1 1 = Alarm error 1 (output ERROR of the first BOOL 0
ALARM_8P)
MsgErr2 1 = Alarm error 2 (output ERROR of the second BOOL 0
ALARM_8P)
MsgStat1 Message status 1 (output STATUS of first WORD 16#0000
ALARM_8P)
MsgStat2 Message status 2 (output STATUS of second WORD 16#0000
ALARM_8P)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 901
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

Parameter Description Type Default


MV Manipulated variable STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_HiAct 1 = Limit (high) of manipulated variable viola‐ STRUCT -
ted ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_LoAct 1 = Limit (low) of manipulated variable violated STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosAct 1 = Block is "out of service" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Open Control output: STRUCT -
1 = Open is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpSt_Out Value of the OpSt_In input parameter, for DWORD 16#00000000
feedforwarding to other blocks. Bit 31 of this
parameter is used by Feature.Bit24
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with settings changed by DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
the block algorithm
OS1PermOut Display of OS1Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS1PermLog Display of OS1Perm with settings changed by DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
the block algorithm
P_Part P component of PID algorithm REAL 0.0
PV_AH_Act 1 = PV alarm (high) active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this parame‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
ter with Feature.Bit28 (Disabling operating ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
points (Page 149)) and with
Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit violation ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Page 174)). (Bypass information bit)
PV_AL_Act 1 = PV alarm (low) active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this parame‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
ter with Feature.Bit28 (Disabling operating ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
points (Page 149)) and with
Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit violation ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Page 174)). (Bypass information bit)
PV_Out Output for process value STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
● Bit 1: BOOL of internal fill byte ● 0
(Bypass information bit)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


902 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

Parameter Description Type Default


PV_TH_Act 1 = PV tolerance message (high) active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this parame‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
ter with Feature.Bit28 (Disabling operating ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
points (Page 149)) and with
Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit violation ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Page 174)). (Bypass information bit)
PV_TL_Act 1 = PV tolerance message (low) active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this parame‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
ter with Feature.Bit28 (Disabling operating ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
points (Page 149)) and with
Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit violation ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Page 174)). (Bypass information bit)
PV_ToleHi Limit (high) of 3-sigma band around the set‐ STRUCT -
point is calculated when a ConPerMon block ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
is connected
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
PV_ToleLo Limit (low) of 3-sigma band around the set‐ STRUCT -
point is calculated when a ConPerMon block ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
is connected
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
PV_UnitOut Unit of measure for process value, for inter‐ INT 0
connecting to the PV_Unit input parameter of
the ConPerMon block
PV_WH_Act 1 = PV warning (high) active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this parame‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
ter with Feature.Bit28 (Disabling operating ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
points (Page 149)) and with
Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit violation ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Page 174)). (Bypass information bit)
PV_WL_Act 1 = PV warning (low) active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this parame‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
ter with Feature.Bit28 (Disabling operating ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
points (Page 149)) and with
Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit violation ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Page 174)). (Bypass information bit)
RbkOut Output for position feedback STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RbkWH_Act 1 = Warning (high) for position feedback ac‐ STRUCT -
tive. ● Value: BOOL ● 0
You can change the reaction for this parame‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ter with Feature.Bit28 (Disabling operating
points (Page 149)) and with
Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit violation
(Page 174)).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 903
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

Parameter Description Type Default


RbkWL_Act 1 = Warning (low) for position feedback active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this parame‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
ter with Feature.Bit28 (Disabling operating ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
points (Page 149)) and with
Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit violation
(Page 174)).
RdyToStart 1 = Active start readiness STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP Setpoint used by controller STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_DnRaAct 1 = Negative gradient limiting of setpoint is ac‐ STRUCT -
tive ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExHiAct 1 = Limit (high) for external setpoint has been STRUCT -
reached ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExLoAct 1 = Limit (low) for external setpoint has been STRUCT -
reached ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExtAct 1 = External setpoint is active STRUCT -
0 = Internal setpoint is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExtOut External setpoint, corresponds to input param‐ STRUCT -
eter SP_Ext ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_InHiOut Limit (high) for SP_Int corresponds to input STRUCT -
parameter SP_InHiLim ● Value: REAL ● 100.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_InLoOut Limit (low) for SP_Int corresponds to input STRUCT -
parameter SP_InLoLim ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_RateTar Target setpoint for the gradient limitation REAL 0.0
get
SP_UpRaAct Positive gradient limiting of setpoint is active STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_RemRT Remaining ramp time of the setpoint REAL 0.0
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
Status1 Status word 1 (Page 869) DWORD 16#00000000
Status2 Status word 2 (Page 869) DWORD 16#00000000

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


904 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

Parameter Description Type Default


Status3 Status word 2 (Page 869) DWORD 16#00000000
Stop Control output: STRUCT -
1 =Stopped is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SumMsgAct 1 = Active hardware interrupt STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Threson Adaptive threshold [%] REAL 0.0

See also
PIDStepL messaging (Page 888)
PIDStepL modes (Page 873)
PIDStepL block diagram (Page 905)

5.10.7 PIDStepL block diagram

PIDStepL block diagram


There are two block diagrams for this block: the step controller with and without position
feedback.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 905
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

Step controller with position feedback


6WHSFRQWUROOHUZLWK
63B([W/L 6SB([W,QW
SRVLWLRQIHHGEDFNDQG
63B,QW/L /LQN WUDFNHG
63B([W$FW
63B([W2S 2SHUDWRU
63B,QW2S /RJLN
63B/L2S 63B5DWH2Q
63B([+L$FW 63B7UN39$1'
/LPLW
63B([/R$FW 09B)RU2Q25
63B([W 63B5DWH7DUJHW 0DQ$FW2509B7UN2Q
63B([W2XW

 
63B([+L/LP *UDGLHQW 39
63B([/R/LP 63B5PS2Q 63
  
5HMHFW 5DPS

63B5PS7DU  63B8S5D/LP 63B8S5D$FW


63B'Q5D/LP 63B'Q5D$FW
63B,Q+L/LP 
/LPLW 63B5PS0RG7LPH
63B,Q/R/LP
$GY&R09 63B5PS7LPH
63B8S5D/LP
63B'Q5D/LP
63B,Q+L/LP
63B,Q/R/LP $GY&R$FW$1'
$GY&R0RG63

63B,QW 5HMHFW 
,VOLPLWHGDQG
3URS6HO
WUDFNHG 
$ODUP

(5 (5B$+B$FW I 
63B,Q+L/LP 63B,Q+L2XW
63B,Q/R/LP 63B,Q/R2XW (5B$/B$FW 3URS)DF63 

(5B$+B/LP(5B$/B/LP(5B+\VW
(5B$+B(Q(5B$/B(Q 'LII7R)EN
(5B$+B0VJ(Q(5B$/B0VJ(Q
(5B$B'&(5B$B'* 


39 
'HDG%DQG 7''LII6HO

*DLQ 'LII*DLQ
6LP2Q *DLQ(II
 SK\V
6LP39 
I 
39 39B287 1HJ*DLQ
 1RUP39 3URS)DF63

: 39B$+B$FW 7,
:ULWH39B287WR $ODUP 39B:+B$FW ,QW+ROG3RV
6LP39LI6LP  39B7+B$FW ,QW+ROG1HJ
39B7/B$FW 09B2IIVHW
39B:/B$FW
25
39B$/B$FW
39B[+B/LP39B[/B/LP39B+\VW 7, 
39B[+B(Q39B[/B(Q ,QW6HO 
39B[+B0VJ(Q39B[+B0VJ(Q
39B[B'&39B[B'*
[ $:7 1

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


906 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

127 $XW$FW

$XW0RG/L 0DQ$FW
$GY&R$FW /LQN
$1'127 0DQ0RG/L
$GY&R0RG63 2SHUDWRU 2 /RRS&ORVHG
$XW0RG2S 09B7UN2Q 5
/RJLF
0DQ0RG2S 09B)RU2Q
09B7UN2Q
0RG/L2S
$GY&R09 09B7UN
09B)RU2Q
 
/LPLW 09B+L$FW
(5 09B)RUFH
09B/R$FW
 
 
09
&RQ=RQH 09B+L/LP
09B+L/LP  
09B/R/LP
09B/R/LP

5HMHFW

/LPLW 0DQ
LVOLPLWHG
))ZG ))ZG+L$FW
DQGWUDFNHG
))ZG/R$FW 0DQ+L2XW
0DQ+L/LP
))ZG+L/LP 0DQ/R/LP 0DQ/R2XW
))ZG/R/LP

$ODUP
5EN:+B$FW
5EN
5EN:/B$FW $1' 2SHQ
&ORVH
5EN:+B/LP  $1' 6WRS
5EN:/B/LP
5EN+\VW 7KU$GD2Q 3XOVH7LPH
5EN:+B(Q 5EN 0RWRU7LPH %UHDN7LPH
5EN:/B(Q
5EN2SHQHG
5EN:+B0VJ(Q
5EN:/B0VJ(Q 5EN&ORVHG

$GY&R(Q $
09B7UN2Q 1
$GY&R2Q
09B)RU2Q ' /LQN
$ $GY&R0VWU2Q
1 2SHUDWRU $GY&R$FW
$GY&R0RG63 2
' /RJLF
$GY&R0RG63 $ 5
1
0DQ$FW ' $GY&R5G\

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 907
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

Step controller without position feedback


6WHSFRQWUROOHUZLWKRXW
63B([W/L 6SB([W,QW
SRVLWLRQIHHGEDFNDQG
63B,QW/L /LQN
63B([W$FW WUDFNHG
63B([W2S 2SHUDWRU
/RJLN
63B,QW2S
63B/L2S 63B5DWH2Q
63B([+L$FW 63B7UN39$1'
/LPLW
63B([/R$FW 09B)RU2Q25
63B([W 0DQ$FW2509B7UN2Q
63B([W2XW

 
63B([+L/LP *UDGLHQW 39
63B([/R/LP 63B5PS2Q 63
  
5HMHFW 5DPS

63B5PS7DU  63B8S5D/LP 63B8S5D$FW


63B'Q5D/LP 63B'Q5D$FW

/LPLW 63B,Q+L/LP 63B5PS0RG7LPH
$GY&R09 63B,Q/R/LP 63B5PS7LPH
63B8S5D/LP
63B'Q5D/LP
63B,Q+L/LP
63B,Q/R/LP $GY&R$FW$1'
$GY&R0RG63

63B,QW 5HMHFW 
LVOLPLWHGDQG
3URS6HO
WUDFNHG 
$ODUP

(5 (5B$+B$FW I 
63B,Q+L/LP 63B,Q+L2XW
63B,Q/R/LP 63B,Q/R2XW (5B$/B$FW 3URS)DF63 

(5B$+B/LP(5B$/B/LP(5B+\VW
(5B$+B(Q(5B$/B(Q 'LII7R)EN
(5B$+B0VJ(Q(5B$/B0VJ(Q
(5B$B'&(5B$B'* 

 
39 
'HDG%DQG 7''LII*DLQ

6LP2Q *DLQ
 *DLQ(II
SK\V 
6LP39

39 39B287 1HJ*DLQ
 1RUP39 
39B$+B$FW
7,
:ULWH39B287WR $ODUP 39B:+B$FW
6LP39LI6LP  39B7+B$FW
39B7/B$FW 09B2IIVHW
39B:/B$FW
39B$/B$FW
39B[+B/LP39B[/B/LP39B+\VW 25
39B[+B(Q39B[/B(Q 7, 
39B[+B0VJ(Q39B[+B0VJ(Q ,QW6HO 
39B[B'&39B[B'*
[ $:7  

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


908 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

 

$XW0RG/L 0DQ$FW
/LQN
0DQ0RG/L 127 $XW$FW
2SHUDWRU
$XW0RG2S
/RJLF
0DQ0RG2S
/RRS&ORVHG
2SHQ/L 2SHQ
&ORVH/L &ORVH 6[2SHQ
/LPLW 6WRS/L 6WRS
))ZG+L$FW 6[&ORVH
2SHQ2S
))ZG ))ZG/R$FW /RJLF
&ORVH2S
6WRS2S

))ZG+L/LP 0RG/L2S
))ZG/R/LP

$1' 2SHQ

&ORVH
  $1' 6WRS
7KU$GD2Q 3XOVH7LPH

0RWRU7LPH %UHDN7LPH
0RWRU7LPH
5EN2SHQHG 
5EN&ORVHG 



 




$GY&R2Q
$GY&R0VWU2Q
/LQN
$GY&R(Q $
1 2SHUDWRU $GY&R$FW
0DQ$FW ' /RJLF

$GY&R5G\

See also
Description of PIDStepL (Page 869)
PIDStepL modes (Page 873)
PIDStepL functions (Page 875)
PIDStepL error handling (Page 886)
PIDStepL messaging (Page 888)
PIDStepL I/Os (Page 890)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 909
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

5.10.8 Operator control and monitoring

5.10.8.1 PIDStepL views

Views of the PIDStepL block


The block PIDStepL provides the following views:
● PIDStepL standard view without position feedback (Page 911)
● PIDStepL standard view with position feedback (Page 914)
● Alarm view (Page 313)
● Limit view of PID controllers (Page 302)
● Trend view (Page 317)
● Ramp view (Page 311)
● Parameter view of PID controllers (Page 292)
● PIDStepL preview (Page 918)
● Memo view (Page 315)
● Batch view (Page 313)
● Block icons for PID and FM controller (Page 248)
Refer to the Structure of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure (Page 239) sections
for general information about the faceplate and block icon.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


910 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

5.10.8.2 PIDStepL standard view without position feedback

PIDStepL standard view without position feedback






 


 










 

(1) Displaying and switching the operating mode


This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
● Manual mode (Page 73)
● Automatic mode (Page 73)
● Program mode for controllers (Page 79)
● Out of service (Page 72)
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for information
on switching the operating mode.

(2) Displaying and switching the setpoint


This area shows how to specify the setpoint. The setpoint can specified as follows:
● By the application ("External", CFC/SFC)
● By the user directly in the faceplate ("Internal").
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for information
on switching the setpoint specification.
You can find additional information on this in the Setpoint specification - internal/external
(Page 130) section.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 911
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

(3) High and low scale range for the process value
These values provide information on the display range for the bar graph of the process value.
The scale range is defined in the Engineering System (ES).

(4) Display of the process value including signal status


This area shows the current process value with the corresponding signal status.

(5) Displaying and changing the setpoint including signal status


This area shows the current setpoint with the corresponding signal status.
Refer to the Changing values (Page 270) section for information on changing the setpoint. The
setpoint specification also needs to be set to "Internal" for this block.

(6) Displaying and changing manipulated variables


This area shows you the currently valid manipulated variable. Refer to the Switching operating
states and operating modes (Page 268) section for information on changing the manipulated
variable.
The following manipulated variables can be selected:
● "Open"
● "Stop"
● "Close"
If text is configured for these commands, it is displayed as status text and as button labels for
command selection. You can find more information about this in the Section Labeling of buttons
and text (Page 218).

(7) Displaying the feedback


The following feedback can be displayed:
● "Open"
● "Closed"
If text is configured for these commands, it is displayed as status text and as button labels for
command selection. You can find more information about this in the Section Labeling of buttons
and text (Page 218).

(8) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of the ConPerMon block
Use this navigation button to reach the standard view of the ConPerMon block. The visibility
of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).
See also the Opening additional faceplates (Page 217) section for more on this.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


912 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

(9) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
Use this navigation button to reach the standard view of a block configured in the Engineering
System (ES). The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the
engineering system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in the Opening additional faceplates (Page 217)
section.

(10) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Maintenance"
Additional information on the display area for states of the block is available in section Release
for maintenance (Page 65).

(11) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Simulation"
You can find additional information on this in the Simulating signals (Page 59) section.

(12) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Invalid signal"

(13) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block (from high to low
according to priority):
● "Optimization"
● "Tracking"
● "Forced tracking"
● "SP ramp active"

(14) Limit display


These colored triangles show you the configured limits in the respective bar graph.

(15) Bar graph for the process value


This area shows the current process value in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the
bar graph depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 913
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

(16) Bar graph for the setpoint


This area shows the current setpoint in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the bar
graph depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).

(17) Display of external setpoint


This display [E] is only visible when you have selected "Internal" setpoint specification. It shows
the external setpoint that would apply if you were to change the setpoint specification to
"external".

(18) Display for the target setpoint of the setpoint ramp


This display [R] shows you the target setpoint and is only visible if you have enabled ramp
generation in the Ramp view (Page 311).

(19) Displaying the limits


These triangles show the SP_HiLim and SP_LoLim setpoint limits configured in the
Engineering System (ES).

5.10.8.3 PIDStepL standard view with position feedback

PIDStepL standard view with position feedback

 
 

 
 

 

 




 


 
 

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


914 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

(1) Display and switch the operating mode


This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
● Manual mode (Page 73)
● Automatic mode (Page 73)
● Program mode for controllers (Page 79)
● Out of service (Page 72)
Refer to chapter Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) for information
on switching the operating mode.

(2) Display and switch the setpoint specification


This area shows how to specify the setpoint. The setpoint can be specified as follows:
● By the application ("External", CFC/SFC)
● By the user directly in the faceplate ("Internal").
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) chapter for
information on switching the setpoint specification.
You can find additional information on this in section Setpoint specification - internal/external
(Page 130).

(3) High and low scale range for the process value
These values provide information on the display range for the bar graph of the process value.
The scale range is defined in the Engineering System (ES).

(4) Display of the process value including signal status


This area shows the current process value with the corresponding signal status.

(5) Display and change the setpoint including signal status


This area shows the current setpoint with the corresponding signal status.
Refer to the Changing values (Page 270) chapter for information on changing the setpoint.
The setpoint specification also needs to be set to "Internal" for this block.

(6) High and low limits of the manipulated variable


You can only display and change a manipulated variable in "manual mode".

(7) Displaying and changing the manipulated variable


You can only display and change a manipulated variable in "manual mode".

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 915
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

(8) Displaying the feedback


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is interconnected.
The following feedback can be displayed:
● "Open"
● "Closed"

(9) Bar graph for the manipulated variable


The bar graph for the manipulated variable is only available in manual mode.

(10) Bar graph for the readback value


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is interconnected.
The bar graph for the readback value is only available in manual mode.

(11) Button for switching to the standard view of the ConPerMon block
Use this button for the standard view of the ConPerMon block. The visibility of this button
depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).
Refer also to chapter Opening additional faceplates (Page 217) for more on this.

(12) Button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate


Use this button for the standard view of a block configured in the Engineering System (ES).
The visibility of this button depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in section Opening additional faceplates
(Page 217).

(13) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Maintenance"
Additional information on this is available in chapter Release for maintenance (Page 65)
Display area for block states.

(14) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Simulation"
You can find additional information on this in section Simulating signals (Page 59).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


916 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

(15) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Invalid signal"

(16) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block (from high to low
according to priority):
● "Optimization"
● "Tracking"
● "Forced tracking"
● "SP ramp active"

(17) Limit display


These colored triangles show you the configured limits in the respective bar graph.

(18) Bar graph for the process value


This area shows the current process value in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the
bar graph depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).

(19)Display of external setpoint


This display [E] is only visible when you have selected "Internal" setpoint specification. It shows
the external setpoint that would apply if you were to change the setpoint specification to
"external".

(20) Display for the target setpoint of the setpoint ramp


This display [R] shows the target setpoint and is only visible if you have enabled ramp
generation in the Ramp view (Page 311).

(21) Bar graph for the setpoint


This area shows the current setpoint in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the bar
graph depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).

(22) Displaying the limits


These triangles show the SP_HiLim and SP_LoLim setpoint limits configured in the
Engineering System (ES).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 917
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

See also
Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218)

5.10.8.4 PIDStepL preview

Preview of PIDStepL

(1) Preview area


This area shows you a preview for the following values:
● "SP external": currently applicable external setpoint
● "SP internal": currently applicable internal setpoint
● "Rem. time SP ramp": Remaining time to reach the ramp target value.
● "Error signal": Current control deviation

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


918 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

● "Program value": specified value for program mode


● "Disturbance variable": additive value for feedforward control
● "Track MV": Track manipulated variable (value is 1)
● "Tracking value": effective manipulated variable for "Track manipulated variable"

(2) Enable operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Icons for enabled operation:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)
The following enabled operations are shown here:
● "Close": You can select the manipulated variable "Close". If text is configured for this
command, it is also displayed in brackets. You can find additional information on this in the
section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218) .
● "Open": You can select the manipulated variable "Open". If text is configured for this
command, it is also displayed in brackets. You can find additional information on this in the
section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218) .
● "Stop": You can select the manipulated variable "Stop". If text is configured for this
command, it is also displayed in brackets. You can find additional information on this in the
section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218) .
● "SP external": You can feedforward the external setpoint.
● "SP internal": You can feedforward the internal setpoint.
● "Change SP": You can change the setpoint.
● "Change MV": You can change the manipulated variable.
● "Program mode": You can switch to "program mode".
● "Automatic": You can switch to "automatic mode".
● "Manual": You can switch to "manual mode".
● "Out of service": You can switch to "Out of service" operating mode.
● "Local operator permission": Use the ← button to switch to the standard view of the
OpStations block. You can find additional information on this in the section Operator control
permissions (Page 265) .

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 919
Controller blocks
5.10 PIDStepL - Step controller

(3) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
Use this navigation button to open the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system. The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the engineering
system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in the section Opening additional faceplates
(Page 217) .

(4) Process value


This area displays the real process value (PV).

(5) Display of the current control signal


This area shows the most important parameters for this block with the current selection
● "Channel Open": Signal from the output channel block for "Open"
● "Channel Close": Signal from the output channel block for "Close"
● "Channel Stop": Signal from the output channel block for "Stop"

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


920 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.11 Ratio - Ratio controlling

5.11 Ratio - Ratio controlling

5.11.1 Description of Ratio

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1883
Family: Control

Area of application for Ratio


The block is used for the following applications:
● Forming a ratio

How it works
The block is used to create a ratio, for example, in a ratio control. It is also used to set elements
(for example, synchronization control loop), or to influence the reference variable of a cascade.
The block operates according to the equation: Out = In · RatioOut + Offset
Where:
● RatioOut is either the value from RatioInt or RatioExt
● Offset is the offset value that should be added to the output value
In is based on the interconnection whereas RatioOut is selected based on the internal/
external selection.

5DWLR

,Q 5DWLR 2XW

6HWSRLQW

39 2XW
3,'

3ULPDU\FXUUHQW
,Q39

6HFRQGDU\FXUUHQW
6HF&RP39

Also refer to the Ratio control with control loop monitoring through ConPerMon
(RatioControl) (Page 2402) section for information on calculating the current ratio.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 921
Controller blocks
5.11 Ratio - Ratio controlling

Configuring OBs
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38). The block is
also installed automatically in the startup OB (OB100).

Startup characteristics
Use the Feature Bit Set startup characteristics (Page 141) to define the startup characteristics
of this block.

Status word allocation for Status parameter


The description for each parameter can be found in the Ratio I/Os (Page 927) section.

Status bit Parameter


0 Occupied
1 BatchEn
2 SimOn
3 OosAct.Value
4 OosLi.Value
5 Not used
6 OnAct.Value
7 Not used
8 RatExtAct.Value
9 RatLoAct.Value
10 RatHiAct.Value
11 OutLoAct.Value
12 OutHiAct.Value
13 RatTrkExt
14 SimLiOp.Value
15 - 31 Not used

See also
Ratio functions (Page 923)
Ratio messaging (Page 927)
Ratio block diagram (Page 931)
Ratio error handling (Page 926)
Ratio modes (Page 923)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


922 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.11 Ratio - Ratio controlling

5.11.2 Ratio modes

Ratio operating modes


The block can be operated using the following modes:
● On (Page 72)
● Out of service (Page 72)

"On"
General information on the "On" mode is available in the section On (Page 72).

"Out of service"
You can find general information about the "Out of service" mode in the Out of service
(Page 72) section.
The last valid value is provided at the Out output in this operating mode. The OutHiAct,
OutLoAct, RatHiActand RatLoActoutput parameters are reset.

See also
Ratio block diagram (Page 931)
Ratio I/Os (Page 927)
Ratio messaging (Page 927)
Ratio error handling (Page 926)
Ratio functions (Page 923)
Description of Ratio (Page 921)

5.11.3 Ratio functions

Functions of Ratio
The functions for this block are listed below.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 923
Controller blocks
5.11 Ratio - Ratio controlling

Internal or external ratio


You can use the RatLiOp parameter to specify if the ratio should be specified internally or
externally:
● RatLiOp = 0: The ratio (RatioInt) is specified by the operator. The operator can decide
if the specification should be made internally (RatIntOp = 1) or externally (RatExtOp = 1) .
● RatLiOp = 1: The ratio (RatioExt) is specified by an interconnection. The interconnection
is used to determine if the specification should be made internally (RatIntLi = 1) or
externally (RatExtLi = 1) .

Bumpless switchover from external to internal ratio


The parameter RatTrkExt = 1 is used so that the internal ratio tracks the external setpoint
to achieve a bumpless switchover from the external to the internal ratio. This allows unwanted
jumps at the output parameter to be avoided.

Limiting the ratio


The ratio is limited by the RatHiLim parameter (high) or RatLoLim parameter (low).
The external ratio RatioExt is limited to the value you have specified if a limit is violated. This
is then also used to form the output value Out. If these limits are reached or violated
RatioHiAct or RatioLoAct are also set to 1.
The internal ratio RatioInt is checked against the value you have specified. If a value is
outside the specified limit, it is reset to the most recent valid value.

Limiting the output value


The output value is limited by the OutHiLim parameter (high) or OutLoLim parameter (low).
The OutHiAct or OutLoAct output parameter is set to 1 as soon as the output value has
reached or exceeded the limits

Simulating signals
This block provides the standard function Simulating signals (Page 59).
You can simulate the following values:
● Analog input value (SimIn, SimInLi)

Display and operator input area for process values and setpoints
This block provides the standard function Display and operator input area for process values
and setpoints (Page 216).

Selecting a unit of measure


The block provides the standard function Selecting a unit of measure (Page 221).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


924 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.11 Ratio - Ratio controlling

Opening additional faceplates


This block provides the standard function Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

Operator permissions
This block provides the standard function Operator control permissions (Page 265).
The block has the following permissions for the OS_Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 Not used
1 1 = Operator can switch to "On" mode
2 Not used
3 1 = Operator can switch to "Out of service" mode
4 1 = Operator can switch to external
5 1 = Operator can switch to internal
6 1 = Operator can specify the internal ratio
7-9 Not used
10 1 =Operator can change the simulation value SimIn
11 1 = Operator can switch to "Simulation" mode
12 1 = Operator can enable bumpless switchover
13 Not used
14 1 = Operator can change RatHiLim
15 1 = Operator can change RatLoLim
16 1 = Operator can change OutHiLim
17 1 = Operator can change OutLoLim
18 - 31 Not used

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Forming and outputting signal status for blocks


This block provides the standard function Forming and outputting the signal status for
technologic blocks (Page 110).
The worst signal status ST_Worst is formed from the following parameters:
● Out.ST
● SecComPV.ST
● InPV.ST
● RatioExt.ST
● Offset.ST

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 925
Controller blocks
5.11 Ratio - Ratio controlling

The signal status of the Out output parameter corresponds to the input parameter In.
The signal status of the current ratio calculation corresponds to the status of the input
parameter SecComPV.

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the Configurable
functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133) . The following functionality is available for this
block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
0 Set startup characteristics (Page 141)
1 Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 181)
24 Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162)

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


This block provides the standard function SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

See also
Description of Ratio (Page 921)
Ratio messaging (Page 927)
Ratio I/Os (Page 927)
Ratio block diagram (Page 931)
Ratio error handling (Page 926)
Ratio modes (Page 923)

5.11.4 Ratio error handling

Ratio error handling


Refer to section Error handling (Page 121) for basic instructions on how to troubleshoot all
blocks.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


926 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.11 Ratio - Ratio controlling

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum I/O can be used to output the following error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when implementing the block; block will not be processed.
0 No active fault
30 The input value of In can no longer be displayed in the REAL number field.
51 RatLiOp = 1 and RatExtLi = 1 and RatInLi = 1

See also
Ratio block diagram (Page 931)
Ratio I/Os (Page 927)
Ratio messaging (Page 927)
Ratio functions (Page 923)
Ratio modes (Page 923)
Description of Ratio (Page 921)

5.11.5 Ratio messaging

Messaging
This block does not offer messaging.

See also
Description of Ratio (Page 921)
Ratio functions (Page 923)
Ratio I/Os (Page 927)
Ratio block diagram (Page 931)
Ratio error handling (Page 926)
Ratio modes (Page 923)

5.11.6 Ratio I/Os

I/Os of Ratio

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 927
Controller blocks
5.11 Ratio - Ratio controlling

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation BOOL 0
BatchID Batch ID DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name S7-String
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1
Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 923) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
In Analog input STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
InPV Input for process variable STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
InUnit Unit of measure for input parameter In INT 1001
Offset Offset STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OnOp* 1 = "On" mode via operator BOOL 0
OosLi 1 = "Out of service", via interconnection or STRUCT -
SFC (0-1 edge transition) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosOp* 1 = "Out of service", via OS operator BOOL 0
OpSt_In Input parameter for local operating permis‐ DWORD 16#00000000
sion, connected with the Out output parame‐
ter of the upstream block, OpStations
(Page 423)
OS_Perm I/O for operator control permissions STRUCT -
(Page 923) ● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● ... ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
Occupied 1 = Occupied by batch control BOOL 0
OutHiLim High limit for output value REAL 100.0
OutLoLim Low limit for output value REAL 0.0
RatExtLi 1 = Select external ratio (via interconnection) STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RatExtOp* 1 = Select external ratio (via operator) BOOL 0
RatHiLim High limit REAL 100.0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


928 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.11 Ratio - Ratio controlling

Parameter Description Type Default


RatIntLi 1 = Select internal ratio (via interconnection) STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RatIntOp* 1 = Select internal ratio (via operator) BOOL 1
RatioExt External ratio STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 1.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RatioInt* Internal ratio REAL 1.0
RatioUnit Unit of measure for the RationInt, INT 0
RatioExt input parameter or RatioPV (out‐
put parameter)
RatLiOp Select ratio source (internal/external): STRUCT -
1 = Via interconnection ● Value: BOOL ● 0
0 = Via operator ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RatLoLim Low limit REAL 0.0
RatOpScale Limit for scale in bar graph of faceplate STRUCT -
● High: REAL ● 100.0
● Low: REAL ● 0.0
RatTrkExt 1 = Bumpless switchover from external to in‐ BOOL 0
ternal ratio active
SecComPV* Process value of secondary component STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SecComUnit Unit of measure for input parameter INT 1001
SecComPV
SelFp1 1 = Call a block saved in this parameter as an ANY -
additional faceplate (Page 217) in the stand‐
ard view
SelFp2 1 = Call a block saved in this parameter as an ANY -
additional faceplate (Page 217) in the preview
SimIn* Analog input value used for SimOn = 1 REAL 0.0
SimInLi Value that is used for SimOnLi.Value = 1 STRUCT -
(SimLiOp.Value = 1) ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SimLiOp Activation/deactivation of the simulation by: STRUCT -
0 = Operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
1 = Interconnection or SFC ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SimOnLi 1 = Simulation via interconnection or SFC STRUCT -
(controlled by SimLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SimOn* 1 = Simulation on BOOL 0
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use in PCS 7 OS BYTE 16#00

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 929
Controller blocks
5.11 Ratio - Ratio controlling

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without errors BOOL 0
ErrorNum Output of current error number. For error INT -1
numbers that can be output by this block, see
Ratio error handling (Page 926)
OnAct 1 = "On" mode enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosAct 1 = Block is "Out of service" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpSt_Out Value of the OpSt_In input parameter, for DWORD 16#00000000
feedforwarding to other blocks. Bit 31 of this
parameter is used by Feature.Bit24
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with settings changed by DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
the block algorithm
Out Output STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OutHiAct 1 = High limit overshoot STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OutHiLmOut Output of high limit STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OutLoAct 1 = Low limit overshoot STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OutLoLmOut Output of low limit STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RatExtAct 1 = External ratio used STRUCT -
0 = Internal ratio used ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RatHiAct 1 = Limit (high) for ratio active STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


930 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.11 Ratio - Ratio controlling

Parameter Description Type Default


RatioPV Current ratio STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RatioOut Applied ratio (RatioInt or RatioExt) STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RatLoAct 1 = Limit (low) for ratio active STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
Status Status word (Page 921) DWORD 16#00000000

See also
Ratio messaging (Page 927)
Ratio block diagram (Page 931)
Ratio modes (Page 923)

5.11.7 Ratio block diagram

Ratio block diagram


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

See also
Ratio I/Os (Page 927)
Ratio messaging (Page 927)
Ratio error handling (Page 926)
Ratio functions (Page 923)
Ratio modes (Page 923)
Description of Ratio (Page 921)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 931
Controller blocks
5.11 Ratio - Ratio controlling

5.11.8 Operator control and monitoring

5.11.8.1 Ratio views

Views of the Ratio block


The block Ratio provides the following views:
● Ratio standard view (Page 932)
● Trend view (Page 317)
● Ratio parameter view (Page 935)
● Ratio preview (Page 936)
● Memo view (Page 315)
● Batch view (Page 313)
● Block icon for Ratio (Page 937)
Refer to the sections Structure of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure
(Page 239) for general information on the faceplate and block icon.

5.11.8.2 Ratio standard view

Ratio standard view





 

 





 



Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


932 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.11 Ratio - Ratio controlling

(1) Displaying and switching the operating mode


This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
● On (Page 72)
● Out of service (Page 72)
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for information
on switching the operating mode.

(2) Displaying and switching the ratio source


This area shows you the currently valid signal source for the ratio setpoint. The following signal
sources can be shown here:
● "External"
● "Internal"
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for information
on switching the signal source.

(3) Displaying the input value


The faceplate is a schematic representation of the function of the Ratio block as a signal flow
chart:
Output = Input · Ratio + Offset
The input is typically the flow setpoint or actual value of the primary component of a ratio
controller.

(4) High and low scale range for the ratio


The scale range is based on the bar graph for the ratio specification.

(5) Displaying and switching the default ratio


This area shows you the currently valid specification for the ratio.
The ratio source (2) needs to be set to "internal" in order to change this value.
Refer to the Changing values (Page 270) section for information on changing this value.

(6) Displaying the ratio PV


This area shows you the current ratio actual value with the corresponding signal status, i.e.
the ratio of the actually measured PV from the active controller. The task of the ratio controller
is to set the flow of all components so that the actual ratio approximates the specified ratio as
closely as possible.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 933
Controller blocks
5.11 Ratio - Ratio controlling

(7) Display of the Offset


This area shows the current Offset.

(8) Displaying the output value


This area shows the current output value Out, which typically serves as the setpoint for the
flow of the secondary component.

(9) Bar graph for the output


This display graphically represents the output value with the limits set in the Engineering
System (ES) (orange triangles, output parameters OutHiLmOut and OutLoLmOut).

(10) Displaying the limit


This status display is based on the limit of the output value Out.

(11) Display area for block states


This area shows if the output value has violated the range limits:
● "Output ≥ HL"
● "Output ≤ LL"
You can set the range limits in the parameter view (Page 935) of the block.

(12) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● Simulation
You can find additional information on this in the Simulating signals (Page 59) section.

(13) Display of the limits for the ratio


This blue triangle shows the configured range limits for the ratio.

(14) Bar graph for the default ratio


This area shows you the currently valid specification for the ratio in the form of a bar graph.
The visible area in the bar graph depends on the configuration of the ratio in the engineering
system (ES).

(15) Display of external setpoint


This display [E] is only visible when you have selected "Internal" setpoint specification. It shows
the external setpoint that would apply if you were to change the setpoint specification to
"external".

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


934 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.11 Ratio - Ratio controlling

5.11.8.3 Ratio parameter view

Parameter view of Ratio




(1) Settings Ratio := external ratio


When the check box is selected ☑, the ratio is bumplessly switched from external to internal.
The internal ratio value is tracked to the external one.

(2) Operating range ratio


This is where you specify the operating range for the ratio (input parameters RatHiLim or
RatLoLim). The range is indicated by a blue triangle in the standard view of the bar graph.

(3) Range for output value


This is where you specify the operating range for the output value (input parameters
OutHiLmOut or OutLoLmOut).

(4) Service
You can select the following functions in this area:
● "Simulation"
You can find information about this in the following chapters:
● Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268)
● Simulating signals (Page 59)
● Release for maintenance (Page 65).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 935
Controller blocks
5.11 Ratio - Ratio controlling

(5) Enabled operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator control permissions are assigned.
They depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Symbols for enabled operations:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
control permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).

5.11.8.4 Ratio preview

Preview of Ratio

(1) Preview area


This area shows you a preview for the following values:
● "External ratio": currently applicable external ratio
● "Internal ratio": currently applicable internal ratio

(2) Enabled operations


This area shows all operations for which special operating permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the Engineering System (ES) that applies to this block.
Symbols for enabled operations:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at all due to the configured AS
operating permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


936 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.11 Ratio - Ratio controlling

The following enabled operations are shown here:


● "Ratio external": You can change the external ratio.
● "Ratio internal": You can change the internal ratio.
● "Change ratio": You can change the ratio.
● "On": You can switch to "On" operating mode.
● "Out of service": You can switch to "Out of service" operating mode.
● "Local operating permission": Use the ← button to switch to the standard view of the
OpStations block. You can find additional information on this in chapter Operator control
permissions (Page 265).

(3) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
Use this navigation button to reach the standard view of a block configured in the Engineering
System (ES). The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the
Engineering System (ES).
You can find additional information on this in chapter Opening additional faceplates
(Page 217).

5.11.8.5 Block icon for Ratio

Block icons for Ratio


A variety of block icons are available with the following functions:
● Process tag type
● Display of the ratio
● Limits (high/low)
● Violation of alarm, warning, and tolerance limits
● Operating modes
● Internal and external setpoint specification
● Signal status, release for maintenance
● Displays for bypassing interlocks
● Interlocks
● Memo display

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 937
Controller blocks
5.11 Ratio - Ratio controlling

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV8.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special features


1

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV7.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special features


1 Block icon in the full display

- Block icon in "Out of service"


mode (example with type 1 block
icon)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


938 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.11 Ratio - Ratio controlling

Additional information on the block icon and the control options in the block icon is available
in the following chapters:
● Configuring the block icons (Page 246)
● Block icon structure (Page 239)
● Operation via the block icon (Page 248).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 939
Controller blocks
5.12 SplRange - Signal splitter

5.12 SplRange - Signal splitter

5.12.1 Description of SplRange

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FC 372
Family: Control

Area of application for SplRange


The block is used for the following applications:
● Splitting the output signal of a PID controller

How it works
The block is used to split signals output coming from a PID controller. You can use this
controller to control two valves, for example.

6SO5DQJH

09
3,'
63 &RQWUROOHUV

2XW 39 2XW

The output parameters are calculated as follows:


Out1 = Out1Scale.Low + ((NeutPos - DeadBand - In) / (NeutPos - DeadBand -
InScale.Low)) · (Out1Scale.High - Out1Scale.Low)
Out2 = Out2Scale.Low + ((NeutPos + DeadBand - In) / (NeutPos + DeadBand -
InScale.High)) · (Out2Scale.High - Out2Scale.Low)
The neutral position (NeutPos) forms the reference point for selecting the individual splitter
profiles. For details, refer to the SplRange functions (Page 942) section.
Refer to SplRange I/Os (Page 946) to learn the meaning of the parameters.
The block is installed in the run sequence downstream of the controller block. The manipulated
variable output (MV) of the controller block is interconnected to the input In of the SplRange
block.
The neutral position (NeutPos) and the dead band zone (DeadBand) can be set by means of
the corresponding parameters. DeadBand must be configured to be less than NeutPos.
Out1 and Out2 are adapted to the physical variable by configuring the high/low limits of
Out1 and Out2.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


940 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.12 SplRange - Signal splitter

The Out1Act or Out2Act output parameter indicates (= 1) that the corresponding Out1 or
Out2 output parameter is enabled if the In input value is less than (for Out1) the neutral
position (NeutPos) or the In input value is greater than the neutral position (NeutPos)
depending on the dead band (Deadband).

Configuration
Use CFC editor to install the block in the OB in which the controller block runs whose
manipulated variable is being processed.
There are templates (Templates) for the SplRange block for process tag types in the Advanced
Process Library, one example (APL_Example_xx, xx refers to the language variant) with an
application scenario for this block being:
● Split-range controller with control loop monitoring through ConPerMon (SplitrangeControl)
(Page 2399)

Startup characteristics
The block does not have any startup characteristics.

Status word allocation for Status parameter


This block does not have the Status parameter.

See also
SplRange messaging (Page 945)
SplRange block diagram (Page 947)
SplRange error handling (Page 945)
SplRange modes (Page 941)

5.12.2 SplRange modes

SplRange operating modes


This block does not have any modes.

See also
SplRange I/Os (Page 946)
SplRange messaging (Page 945)
SplRange error handling (Page 945)
SplRange functions (Page 942)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 941
Controller blocks
5.12 SplRange - Signal splitter

Description of SplRange (Page 940)


SplRange block diagram (Page 947)

5.12.3 SplRange functions

Functions of SplRange
The functions for this block are listed below.

Splitting of the output signal of a controller


The In block input can be used to split the output signal of a controller.
The table below shows the six types of signal splitting that are available:

Case Signal splitting Setting the I/Os


1 Out1Scale.Low = 0.0 and Out1Scale.High = 100.0
Out2Scale.Low = 0.0 und Out2Scale.High = 100.0
DeadBand = 0.0 and NeutPos = 50.0
2XWSXW

2XW 2XW

1HXWUDOSRVLWLRQ ,QSXW

2 Out1Scale.Low = 100.0 and Out1Scale.High = 0.0


Out2Scale.Low = 100.0 and Out2Scale.High = 0.0
DeadBand = 0.0 and NeutPos = 50.0
2XWSXW

2XW 2XW

1HXWUDOSRVLWLRQ ,QSXW

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


942 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.12 SplRange - Signal splitter

Case Signal splitting Setting the I/Os


3 Out1Scale.Low = 100.0 and Out1Scale.High = 0.0
Out2Scale.Low = 0.0 and Out2Scale.High =
100.0
2XWSXW DeadBand = 0.0 and NeutPos = 50.0
2XW 2XW

1HXWUDOSRVLWLRQ ,QSXW

4 Out1Scale.Low = 0.0 and Out1Scale.High = 100.0


Out2Scale.Low = 100.0 and Out2Scale.High = 0.0
DeadBand = 0.0 and NeutPos = 50.0
2XWSXW

2XW 2XW

1HXWUDOSRVLWLRQ ,QSXW

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 943
Controller blocks
5.12 SplRange - Signal splitter

Case Signal splitting Setting the I/Os


5 Out1Scale.Low = 0.0 and Out1Scale.High = 100.0
Out2Scale.Low = 0.0 and Out2Scale.High = 100.0
DeadBand = -10.0 and NeutPos = 50.0
2XWSXW

2XW 2XW

1HXWUDOSRVLWLRQ ,QSXW

6 Out1Scale.Low = 0.0 and Out1Scale.High = 100.0


Out2Scale.Low = 0.0 and Out2Scale.High = 100.0
DeadBand = 10.0 and NeutPos = 50.0
2XWSXW

2XW 2XW

1HXWUDOSRVLWLRQ ,QSXW

See also
Description of SplRange (Page 940)
SplRange messaging (Page 945)
SplRange I/Os (Page 946)
SplRange block diagram (Page 947)
SplRange error handling (Page 945)
SplRange modes (Page 941)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


944 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.12 SplRange - Signal splitter

5.12.4 SplRange error handling

Error handling of SplRange


Refer to the section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions for the error handling
of all blocks.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum I/O can be used to output the following error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; the block is not processed.
0 There is no error.
30 The value of In can no longer be displayed in the REAL number field.

See also
SplRange block diagram (Page 947)
SplRange I/Os (Page 946)
SplRange messaging (Page 945)
SplRange functions (Page 942)
SplRange modes (Page 941)
Description of SplRange (Page 940)

5.12.5 SplRange messaging

Messaging
This block does not offer messaging.

See also
Description of SplRange (Page 940)
SplRange functions (Page 942)
SplRange I/Os (Page 946)
SplRange block diagram (Page 947)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 945
Controller blocks
5.12 SplRange - Signal splitter

SplRange error handling (Page 945)


SplRange modes (Page 941)

5.12.6 SplRange I/Os

I/Os of SplRange

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


DeadBand Width of dead band REAL 0.0
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1
In Input value STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
InScale Limit range for the input signal STRUCT -
● High: REAL ● 100.0
● Low: REAL ● 0.0
NeutPos Neutral position REAL 50.0
Out1Scale Limit range of output 1 STRUCT -
● High: REAL ● 100.0
● Low: REAL ● 0.0
Out2Scale Limit range of output 2 STRUCT -
● High: REAL ● 100.0
● Low: REAL ● 0.0

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without errors BOOL 0
ErrorNum Output of current error number. For error INT -1
numbers that can be output by this block, see
SplRange error handling (Page 945).
Out1 Output value 1 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Out1Act 1 = Output 1 is active STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


946 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.12 SplRange - Signal splitter

Parameter Description Type Default


Out2 Output value 2 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Out2Act 1 = Output 2 is active STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

See also
Description of SplRange (Page 940)
SplRange functions (Page 942)
SplRange messaging (Page 945)
SplRange block diagram (Page 947)
SplRange modes (Page 941)

5.12.7 SplRange block diagram

SplRange block diagram


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

See also
SplRange I/Os (Page 946)
SplRange messaging (Page 945)
SplRange error handling (Page 945)
SplRange functions (Page 942)
Description of SplRange (Page 940)
SplRange modes (Page 941)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 947
Controller blocks
5.13 AutoExcitation - Process trigger for predictive controller

5.13 AutoExcitation - Process trigger for predictive controller

5.13.1 Description of AutoExcitation

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1842
Family: Control

Area of application of AutoExcitation


This block is used to generate suitable excitation signals for the identification of dynamic multi-
variable process models for the model-based predictive controllers ModPreCon and the large
predictive controller MPC10x10. It is interconnected with aModPreCon or MPC10x10 block
for this purpose.

How it works
The AutoExcitation block generates a sequence of abrupt trigger signals for the selected
manipulated variables, MV1, MV2 to NumberMVs. A jump is initially made up, down, and then
back to the starting point for each manipulated variable, so that the signals is symmetrical to
the operating point.
The operating point taken from assigned controller via the MV1Actual...MV10Actual inputs.
You set the jump height for each manipulated variable with the StepSiz1... StepSiz10
parameter and the jump duration via the Duratio1...Duratio10 parameter.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


948 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.13 AutoExcitation - Process trigger for predictive controller

Configuration
The AutoExcitation block is part of the new process tag type, ModPreCon and MPC10x10.
Only the new controller version has the necessary additional inputs for automatic triggering.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 949
Controller blocks
5.13 AutoExcitation - Process trigger for predictive controller

If the block retro-installed in an existing CFC, make sure that AutoExcitation andModPreCon
or MPC10x10 are in the same OB cycle.
● Supply the AutoExcitation.MV1Actual...MV10Actual input variables with the appropriate
ModPreCon.MV1...MV4 or MPC10x10.MV1...MV10 values from the controller.
● Specify the input parameter AutoExcitation.NumberMVs according to the number of
manipulated variables you want to use in your MPC application. Exception: If you do not
want to automatically trigger all manipulated variables of the controller, specify the number
of manipulated variables to be directly triggered at the AutoExcitation.NumberMVs input
parameter .
● Connect the AutoExcitation.MV1Excite...MV10Excite output variables to the appropriate
ModPreCon.MV1Excite... MV4Excite or MPC10x10.MV1Excite…MV10Exciteinput
variables
on the controller.
● Connect the AutoExcitation.ExciteAct output variable to the ModPreCon.ExciteOn or
MPC10x10.ExciteOn input variables of the controller.

5.13.2 AutoExcitation modes

Operating modes of AutoExcitation


This block does not have any modes.

5.13.3 AutoExcitation functions

Using AutoExcitation
Start triggering by setting the StartExcite binary input variable to the value 1 .
If you cancel triggering during ongoing operation via StartExcite =0 , the manipulated variables
are reset to the original operating point.
When the Next binary input parameter = 1 , you can start the next jump manually before the
planned time has expired.
The StepPhase output variable shows the current phase of the attempted jump:
0: Constant
1: Jump up
2: Jump down
3: Jump back to the operating point
The StepTime output variable indicates the remaining time in [s] until the next jump.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


950 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.13 AutoExcitation - Process trigger for predictive controller

5.13.4 AutoExcitation error handling

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum output parameter can be used to output the following error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Default value when the block is installed, the block is not executed
0 There is no error.
60 One of the input parameters, Duratio1,2,3,4...10 < SampleTime or SampleTime <
0.001
61 The trigger signals are not adopted correctly by the assigned controller.

5.13.5 AutoExcitation messaging

Messaging of AutoExcitation
This block does not offer messaging.

5.13.6 AutoExcitation I/Os

I/Os of AutExcite

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


Duration1...Duration10 Duration for jump in MV1...MV10 in s REAL 20
MV1Actual...MV10Actual Current value of MV1...MV10 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Next* 1 = Manual start of the next trigger change BOOL 0
SampleTime Sampling time in s REAL 1
StartExcite* 1 = Start of automatic triggering; 0= Cancel BOOL 1
automatic triggering
StepSize1...StepSize10 Step height of MV1...MV10 REAL 10

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 951
Controller blocks
5.13 AutoExcitation - Process trigger for predictive controller

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


ErrorNum Output of pending error number INT 0
ExciteAct 1 = Automatic triggering is active BOOL 0
MV1Excitation...MV10Ex‐ Value of the trigger for MV1...MV10 STRUCT -
citation ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
StepPhase Phase of the jump; 0 = Constant, 1= Jump INT 0
up, 2 = Jump down, 3 = Return
StepTime Time remaining until the next jump phase in REAL 0
s

5.13.7 AutoExcitation block diagram

Block diagram of AutoExcitation


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


952 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.14 LPOptim - Optimization after traversing the linear programming

5.14 LPOptim - Optimization after traversing the linear programming

5.14.1 Description of LPOptim

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB1844
Family: Control or system

Area of application of LPOptim


Optimization of a linear performance function taking into account constraints after traversing
the linear programming.
The LPOptim block is used by the ModPreCon block for static operating point optimization
(Page 711). However, it can also be used separately.

Operating principle
The performance function has a linear relationship to up to four decision variables, x1...x4,
with corresponding weighting factors, g1...g4 .
J = g1*x1 + g2*x2 + g3*x3 + g4*x4
The performance function is a hyper-level in a five dimensional space whose gradient direction
is described by the gradient vector, Gradient = [ g1, g2, g3, g4].
The block can determine both the maximum as well as the minimum of the J performance
function. A minimization problem is transformed into an equivalent maximization problem by
inverting the gradient vector.
The decision variables are positive and limited by a system of up to eight linear non-
equivalence constraints .
The first constraint is, for example
a11*x1+a12*x2+a13*x3+a14*x4 <= b1
All four elements of the first line from the A matrix are combined in the A1n data structure. All
eight elements of the B vector are combined in the Begrenzungen data structure.

How it works
The block operates according to the simplex procedure, i.e. based on an iterative algorithm.
Due to the linear performance criterion, the solution always lies at an intersection of multiple
restrictions.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 953
Controller blocks
5.14 LPOptim - Optimization after traversing the linear programming

Configuration
The block can be installed in OB1 because no time-critical calculations are performed. If the
block is called by ModPreCon , the user does not have to set parameters directly at LPOptim
block.

5.14.2 LPOptim modes

Operating modes of LPOptim


This block does not have any modes.

5.14.3 LPOptim functions

Use of LPOptim
The algorithm is started with a positive edge at the Start parameter or if there is a change in
one of the input variables (gradient vector and limitations), and displays the optimum variable
found at the XOpt1...XOpt4 output parameters when execution is completed.
If no solution is found (non-plausible coefficient), execution is aborted with an error code.

5.14.4 LPOptim error handling

Overview of error numbers


The Status output parameter can be used to display the following states:

Status Meaning
0 There is no error.
10 Unrestricted target function
15 No XOpt found
20 Infinite number of solutions
35 Unlimited permissible range
40 Configuration error

5.14.5 LPOptim messaging

Messaging
This block does not offer messaging.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


954 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.14 LPOptim - Optimization after traversing the linear programming

5.14.6 LPOptim I/Os

I/Os of LPOptim

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


J_Mini 1= Search minimum BOOL 0
0= Search maximum
Start* 1= Start optimization calculation immediate‐ BOOL 0
ly
0= Start optimization calculation only if one
of the input variables has changed
X1 Decision variable 1 for calculation of J_Act REAL 0
X2 Decision variable 2 for calculation of J_Act REAL 0
X3 Decision variable 3 for calculation of J_Act REAL 0
X4 Decision variable 4 for calculation of J_Act REAL 0
J_0 Constant part of the performance criterion, REAL 0
irrespective of the decision variables
N_X Number of decision variables, INT 4
N_X <= 4
N_b Number of constraints, INT 8
N_b <= 8
Gradient.g1* Gradient vector with up to 4 REAL elements STRUCT [ 1, 1, 1, 1]
...
Gradient.g4*
Constraints.b1 Vector B of the limits with up to 8 REAL el‐ STRUCT [ 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0]
... ements
Constraints.b8
A1n.a11 1. Line of the A matrix contains factors for STRUCT [ 0, 0, 0, 0]
A1n.a12 the elements of vector X in the first con‐
straint
A1n.a13
A1n.a14
A2n.a21 2. Line of the A matrix contains factors for STRUCT [ 0, 0, 0, 0]
A2n.a22 the elements of vector X in the second con‐
straint
A2n.a23
A2n.a24
A3n.a31 3. Line of the A matrix contains factors for STRUCT [ 0, 0, 0, 0]
A3n.a32 the elements of vector X in the third con‐
straint
A3n.a33
A3n.a34

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 955
Controller blocks
5.14 LPOptim - Optimization after traversing the linear programming

Parameter Description Type Default


A4n.a41 4. Line of the A matrix contains factors for STRUCT [ 0, 0, 0, 0]
A4n.a42 the elements of vector X in the fourth con‐
straint
A4n.a43
A4n.a44
A5n.a51 5. Line of the A matrix contains factors for STRUCT [ 0, 0, 0, 0]
A5n.a52 the elements of vector X in the fifth con‐
straint
A5n.a53
A5n.a54
A6n.a61 6. Line of the A matrix contains factors for STRUCT [ 0, 0, 0, 0]
A6n.a62 the elements of vector X in the sixth con‐
straint
A6n.a63
A6n.a64
A7n.a71 7. Line of the A matrix contains factors for STRUCT [ 0, 0, 0, 0]
A7n.a72 the elements of vector X in the seventh con‐
straint
A7n.a73
A7n.a74
A8n.a81 8. Line of the A matrix contains factors for STRUCT [ 0, 0, 0, 0]
A8n.a82 the elements of vector X in the eighth con‐
straint
A8n.a83
A8n.a84

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


Bad 1= Status bad, optimization has failed BOOL 0
ErrorNum Output of current error number. For error INT 0
numbers that can be output by this block,
see the error handling of LPOptim.
J_Opt Value of the performance criterion at the op‐ REAL 0
timum
J_Act Value of the performance criterion for the REAL 0
current assignment of the decision varia‐
bles in accordance with input parameters
X1...X4
X1Opt Optimum value of the 1st decision variable REAL 0
X2Opt Optimum value of the 2nd decision variable REAL 0
X3Opt Optimum value of the 3rd decision variable REAL 0
X4Opt Optimum value of the 4th decision variable REAL 0

See also
LPOptim error handling (Page 954)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


956 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.14 LPOptim - Optimization after traversing the linear programming

5.14.7 LPOptim block diagram

LPOptim block diagram


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 957
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

5.15.1 Description of MPC10x10

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1920
Family: Control

Area of application for MPC10x10


The block is used for multivariable control, similar to the ModPreCon, typically as master
controller in cascade structures.
Compared to the lean multivariable controller ModPreCon, the MPC10x10 has the following
functional expansions:
● Greater capacity: up to 10x10 interacting manipulated and controlled variables (compared
with ModPreCon: 4x4), up to 4 measurable disturbances for a dynamic disturbance
compensation (feedforward) (ModPreCon: 1). Unused MV channels can be rededicated to
disturbance variables, whereby the total number of manipulated variables and disturbances
is limited to 14 (ModPreCon: 5).
● Dynamic online optimization considering constraints in each sampling step. The
optimization problem is resolved without constraints with ModPreCon and the manipulated
variables are limited afterward. This may result in solutions that are less than optimal if
several constraints are active simultaneously in automatic mode.
● Processing of (low-priority) target values for the manipulated variables, which is mainly of
interest for control tasks in which there are more manipulated variables than controlled
variables or in which some controlled variables do not have to be kept at an exact setpoint.
● Integrated steady state operating point optimization even for control tasks in which the
number of manipulated variables does not match the number of controlled variables.

Method of operation and area of application


The block is used for Multivariable controller (Page 2454) dynamic processes. It can handle
up to ten interacting manipulated and controlled variables as well as up to four measurable
disturbances.
The MPC10x10 algorithm only works for stable processes with a step response that settles to
a fixed value in a finite time. If the process is unstable in one of the main transfer functions or
includes an integrator (level control, for example), the corresponding partial transfer function
must be stabilized with a secondary controller.
A simple P controller (proportional component only) is sufficient as a slave controller for
integrating processes. It is inserted between the manipulated variable output of MPC10x10
and the input of the unstable process section, and receives the output of the integrating process
section as a manipulated variable. (Unstable data links are stabilized with this approach.)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


958 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

You can find an explanation of "multivariable controls" and "non-phase-minimum response" in


the Help on the Advanced Process Library > Definitions.

Note on the area of application of the controller: Longer run times


Due to the principle on which it works, the runtime of MPC10x10 is significantly longer than
that of ModPreCon and obviously much longer than that for PID controllers, because very large
matrices have to be multiplied in the algorithm. The runtime is also determined by the number
of the process and manipulated variables in the control algorithm. This is why the MPC10x10
is unsuitable for high-speed controls and is usually used for slow, complex control tasks in
which controller sample times of more than 4 s are permitted.
The computing time required on the CPU is compensated for by the fact that very slow sample
times of > 20 s are used for the typical MPC10x10 applications (see Advanced control
templates). The MPC10x10 is then typically located in OB30 and can be interrupted by faster
OBs. Some parts of the MPC10x10 algorithm have been outsourced to auxiliary blocks due
to the limitations of the address space for SIMATIC function blocks and data blocks. The
MPC10x10 uses two outsourced optimization methods:
● MPC_LP_OptiFB for operating point optimization which, in turn, needs an auxiliary block
MPC_LPOptiFC .
● MPC_ActSetFB
as well as auxiliary blocks for matrices that are created by the MPC Configurator and can all
be identified by the prefix MPC_* in their name.
There are different forms of implementation for the matrices:
● User DBs that are filled with data by one or more FCs during initialization because large
matrices cannot be pre-assigned with values in the source code for the DB:
● Data block MPC_g with initialization FCs MPC_g_FC, MPC_gb…ge;
● Data blocks MPC_ESP, MPC_Hu_FB, MPC_Hinv_FB, MPC_Omega_FB and MPC_M_FB
each with a dedicated initialization function MPC_Esp_FC... as well as
● a data block MPC_RgMVi (i=1..10) for each MV with initialization FCs MPC_RgMVia_FC
and MPC_RgMVib_FC.
● User DBs filled with data by the MPC10x10 during runtime: MPC_Nn, MPC_Ms,
MPC_MsOld.
As user, you only have to interconnect the main function block in the CFC and need not worry
about the auxiliary blocks.
The static operating point optimization is called within the MPC10x10 block in the program
section in which OB1 is executed. In cyclic operation OB3x, this avoids the additional
computing time required by the optimizer, the acyclic time, i.e. which is only relevant for
changes to the optimizer inputs.

Operating principle

The MPC10x10 block is a model-based predictive multivariable controller. It uses a


mathematical model of the process dynamics including all interactions as part of the controller.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 959
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

This model allows the process response to be predicted over a defined period in the future,
also known as the prediction horizon.
Based on this prediction, a performance index

r r T r T
J = ( w − y ) R ( w − y ) + ∆u T Q∆ u + ( usoll − u ) S ( usoll − u )
r r r r r r r

is optimized (minimized) where the following applies:


● w contains the time series of the future setpoints within the prediction horizon,
● y contains the vector of the controlled variables in the future,
● Δu contains the future changes of the manipulated variables within the control horizon,
● usoll contains the target values for the manipulated variables u
The control horizon is generally significantly shorter than the prediction horizon. Changes of
future manipulated variables are only planned within the control horizon.
If you increase the weighting in the Q diagonal matrix, the controller moves its manipulated
variables more cautiously resulting in a slower but more robust control response. Using the
weighting factors in the R diagonal matrix, you specify the relative significance of the individual
controlled variables. A higher weighting (priority) for a controlled variable means that this CV
moves more quickly towards the setpoint and remains more accurately at the setpoint in steady
state if it is not possible to achieve all setpoints precisely.
The weightings for the target values of the manipulated variables in the S matrix are typically
set much lower than the weightings of the controlled variables in the R matrix so that the
controller must only handle the manipulated variable target values once it has reached all
primary control aims regarding the controlled variables.
The algorithm is a variant of the DMC method (Dynamic Matrix Control), comparable to the
control algorithms in so-called "full-blown" MPC software packages that were previously linked
to the process control system by external PCs.
The optimization problem is solved in ongoing automatic mode in each sampling step of the
controller by initially neglecting the constraints. If a constraint violation is detected within the
control horizon, an iterative optimization with the so-called "active set" method takes place.
Only the currently active limitations are taken into consideration during each iteration step of
the optimization. Manipulated variable limitations, both absolute and relating to the gradients,
are treated in the algorithm of the function block as hard constraints that must not be violated.
Precise setpoints or target zones for the controlled variables are taken into account during
optimization as well as possible. The target zones for the controlled variables are therefore
soft constraints, which are maintained as well as possible although they cannot be guaranteed.
Using a reference variable filter for future setpoint trajectories, the control response of the
controller can be fine-tuned during operation.

You can achieve significant improvements in control performance when individual


disturbances can be measured, for example, variations in throughput. In this case, it is a good
idea to take into account a model of the influence of this disturbance on the controlled variables
when predicting the controlled variables so that the controller can react preemptively to such
disturbances.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


960 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

Operating point optimization


The integrated steady state operating point optimization can be used when at least one
controlled variable provides certain degrees of freedom. No exact setpoint is specified for such
controlled variables. Instead there is a tolerance band, e.g.
● SP2OptHiLim…SP2OptLoLim
within which the process value, CV2, must remain. These areas can be defined for any subset
of the relevant controlled variables. From an economic perspective, different values within the
tolerance band can be more or less favorable. With the help of the optimization function, the
optimal economic point can be found within the tolerance range. This is done by defining a
target function (performance criterion), which depends on the manipulated variable and
controlled variable of the predictive controller. This can be, for example, the economic yield of
plant operation per time unit or it may involve specific costs or energy consumption.

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38). The block is
also installed automatically in the startup OB (OB100) and in OB 1.
MPC10x10 and all its auxiliary blocks are provided in the block folder "MPC10x10 blocks" of
the Advanced Process Library. After you have placed the block in the CFC, you still need to
copy the fixed addressed global data blocks DB1 to DB22 into the project. This will make all
auxiliary blocks of MPC10x10 available in the project, thereby making it executable and
allowing the SCL source of the MPC configurator to be later compiled.
In contrast to the ModPreCon, only one instance of the MPC10x10 can be configured per
SIMATIC CPU. The addresses of the MPC auxiliary blocks are determined during compilation
of the main block by the SCL Compiler and cannot be modified afterwards. The addresses for
the auxiliary blocks (DBs and FCs) used by the MPC10x10 are defined in the following symbol
table. If you already have other blocks in the project assigned to the specified addresses, you
need to move them.

Icon Address Data type Comment


MPC10x10 FB 1920 FB 1920 Model Predictive Controller with online optim.
MPC_LP_OptiFB FB 1922 FB 1922 Linear Optimization
MPC_ActSetFB FB 1923 FB 1923 Modified Simplex Optimization with Active Set
Problem Reduction for ModPreConL
MPC_LPOptiFC FC 400 FC 400 Linear Optimization
MPC_g_FC FC 401 FC 401 MPC Configurator
MPC_gb_FC FC 402 FC 402 MPC Configurator
MPC_gc_FC FC 403 FC 403 MPC Configurator
MPC_gd_FC FC 404 FC 404 MPC Configurator
MPC_ge_FC FC 405 FC 405 MPC Configurator
MPC_gz_FC FC 406 FC 406 MPC Configurator
MPC_Hu_FC FC 407 FC 407 MPC Configurator
MPC_Hinv_FC FC 408 FC 408 MPC Configurator
MPC_Omega_FC FC 409 FC 409 MPC Configurator
MPC_M_FC FC 410 FC 410 MPC Configurator

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 961
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

MPC_RgMV1a_FC FC 411 FC 411 MPC Configurator


MPC_RgMV1b_FC FC 412 FC 412 MPC Configurator
MPC_RgMV2a_FC FC 413 FC 413 MPC Configurator
MPC_RgMV2b_FC FC 414 FC 414 MPC Configurator
MPC_RgMV3a_FC FC 415 FC 415 MPC Configurator
MPC_RgMV3b_FC FC 416 FC 416 MPC Configurator
MPC_RgMV4a_FC FC 417 FC 417 MPC Configurator
MPC_RgMV4b_FC FC 418 FC 418 MPC Configurator
MPC_RgMV5a_FC FC 419 FC 419 MPC Configurator
MPC_RgMV5b_FC FC 420 FC 420 MPC Configurator
MPC_RgMV6a_FC FC 421 FC 421 MPC Configurator
MPC_RgMV6b_FC FC 422 FC 422 MPC Configurator
MPC_RgMV7a_FC FC 423 FC 423 MPC Configurator
MPC_RgMV7b_FC FC 424 FC 424 MPC Configurator
MPC_RgMV8a_FC FC 425 FC 425 MPC Configurator
MPC_RgMV8b_FC FC 426 FC 426 MPC Configurator
MPC_RgMV9a_FC FC 427 FC 427 MPC Configurator
MPC_RgMV9b_FC FC 428 FC 428 MPC Configurator
MPC_RgMV10a_FC FC 429 FC 429 MPC Configurator
MPC_RgMV10b_FC FC 430 FC 430 MPC Configurator
MPC_Esp_FC FC 432 FC 432 MPC Configurator
MPC_Ms DB 1 DB 1 MPC Configurator
MPC_Nn DB 2 DB 2 MPC Configurator
MPC_MsOld DB 3 DB 3 MPC Configurator
MPC_g DB 4 DB 4 MPC Configurator
MPC_gz DB 5 DB 5 MPC Configurator
MPC_Hu DB 6 DB 6 MPC Configurator
MPC_Hinv DB 7 DB 7 MPC Configurator
MPC_Om DB 8 DB 8 MPC Configurator
MPC_M DB 9 DB 9 MPC Configurator
MPC_RgMV1 DB 10 DB 10 MPC Configurator
MPC_RgMV2 DB 11 DB 11 MPC Configurator
MPC_RgMV3 DB 12 DB 12 MPC Configurator
MPC_RgMV4 DB 13 DB 13 MPC Configurator
MPC_RgMV5 DB 14 DB 14 MPC Configurator
MPC_RgMV6 DB 15 DB 15 MPC Configurator
MPC_RgMV7 DB 16 DB 16 MPC Configurator
MPC_RgMV8 DB 17 DB 17 MPC Configurator
MPC_RgMV9 DB 18 DB 18 MPC Configurator
MPC_RgMV10 DB 19 DB 19 MPC Configurator
MPC_Esp DB 20 DB 20 MPC Configurator
MPC_LP_Opti DB 21 FB 1922 Instance DB FB 1922
MPC_ActSet DB 22 FB 1923 Instance DB FB 1923

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


962 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

After installation in CFC, follow the steps outlined below:


1. Excite the process with the controller in manual mode by applying a series of manipulated
variable step changes. We recommend using the auxiliary function block, AutoExcitation,
to generate excitation signals.
2. Record the measured data with the CFC trend display and export it to an archive file. You
can also use a WinCC TagLogging TrendControl to record the data and to export the *.csv
file. If the total number of manipulated and controlled variables exceeds the maximum
number of trends in the CFC, you will have to use the WinCC TrendControl anyway.
3. Select the MPC10x10 instance in the CFC. Start the MPC Configurator under Edit > MPC
Configurator.
The working steps process identification, controller design and simulation of the closed
control loop are executed in the MPC Configurator. You can find a detailed description of
this procedure in the MPC Configurator help. You can find the help with a button in the MPC
Configurator or directly under …\Program Files (x86)\SIEMENS\STEP7\S7JMPC
\s7jmpctb.chm.
4. Using the Configurator, create an SCL source code for the user data blocks (DBs) and
other auxiliary blocks (FCs). The source contains all models and matrices required for an
MPC10x10 instance.
5. Compile the SCL source with the S7-SCL compiler and archive the SCL source with the
controller data.
Load the changes to the AS (with the option: Include user data blocks)
The values in the auxiliary blocks are applied in the controller by restarting the block by means
of the input variable Restart:= true at the CFC block instance.

Note
During controller design in the MPC Configurator, a controller cycle time and an OB sampling
time are calculated, displayed, and stored in the user data block. You yourself are responsible
for ensuring that the MPC10x10 block is called in the cyclic interrupt level suitable for the OB
sampling time. This is checked in the current MPC10x10 version during initialization. If the
SampleTime parameter of the function block does not match the OB_SampleTime parameter
of the user data block, a parameter assignment error (ErrorNum=3) is displayed. For controller
cycle times greater than 5s, insert the MPC10x10 block in the OB30 and specify the appropriate
cycle time for the OB30 in the hardware configuration of the SIMATIC CPU. Controller cycle
times slower than 20 s cannot be set in the hardware configuration. The block would then be
called every 20s and the slower sampling time automatically realized by an internal cycle
reduction ratio in the block.

There are no templates for the MPC10x10 block for a process tag type in the Advanced Process
Library because the controller is typically configured individually as master controller for
several slave controllers.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 963
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

Startup characteristics
When the CPU starts up, the block always starts in manual mode. It is only possible to change
to automatic mode when a user data block is loaded and the internal measured value memory
in MPC10x10 is filled with data.

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


You can find a description for each parameter in section I/Os of MPC10x10 I/Os (Page 979)

Status bit Parameter


0 Occupied
1 BatchEn
2 SimOn
3 OosAct.Value
4 OosLi.Value
5 AutAct.Value
6 Invalid signal status
7 ManAct.Value
8-9 Not used
10 MV1TrkOn.Value AND NOT (ManAct.Value OR OosAct.Value)
11 MV2TrkOn.Value AND NOT (ManAct.Value OR OosAct.Value)
12 MV3TrkOn.Value AND NOT (ManAct.Value OR OosAct.Value)
13 MV4TrkOn.Value AND NOT (ManAct.Value OR OosAct.Value)
14 Not used
15 DB_Loaded
16 DV_Model Available
17 OptimAct
18 NOT(OptimAct)
19 Not used
20 J_Mini
21 NOT(J_Mini)
22 ExciteOn AND ManAct.Value
23 MV5TrkOn.Value AND NOT (ManAct.Value OR OosAct.Value)
24 MV6TrkOn.Value AND NOT (ManAct.Value OR OosAct.Value)
25 MV7TrkOn.Value AND NOT (ManAct.Value OR OosAct.Value)
26 MV8TrkOn.Value AND NOT (ManAct.Value OR OosAct.Value)
27 MV9TrkOn.Value AND NOT (ManAct.Value OR OosAct.Value)
28 MV10TrkOn.Value AND NOT (ManAct.Value OR OosAct.Value)
29 Tracking mode; i.e. at least one of the original manipulated variables (without pseudo
MVs, which are used as DVs) is tracked.
30 Not allocated
31 Feature.Bit31: Display of the predictions in the faceplate

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


964 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

Status word allocation for Status2 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 - 30 Not used
31 MS_RelOp

5.15.2 MPC10x10 modes

Operating modes of MPC10x10


The block can be operated using the following modes:
● Automatic mode (Page 73)
● Manual mode (Page 73)
● Out of service (Page 72)
The next section provides additional block-specific information relating to the general
descriptions.
The aforementioned operating modes are valid for the block with all control channels
(MV1 ... MV10). Moreover, individual control channels can be tracked; see section MPC10x10
functions (Page 967) for more information.

"Automatic mode"
You can find general information on "Automatic mode", switching modes and bumpless
switchover in the section Manual and automatic mode for control blocks (Page 73) .

Note
In contrast to PID controllers, it is permitted to run the MPC10x10 block in "automatic mode"
without its actuating signals affecting the process because there is no risk of integrator windup.

"Manual mode"
You can find general information on "Manual mode", switching modes and bumpless
switchover in the section Manual and automatic mode for control blocks (Page 73) .

"Out of service"
You can find general information about the "Out of service" mode in the Out of service
(Page 72) .
With Feature.Bit5 =1 the following output parameter become the status of simulation
16#60, if mode is changed to "Out of service".

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 965
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

With Feature.Bit5 =0 the following output parameter become the status of 16#80, if mode
is changed to "Out of service".
● SP1Out.ST
● SP2Out.ST
● SP3Out.ST
● SP4Out.ST
● SP5Out.ST
● SP6Out.ST
● SP7Out.ST
● SP8Out.ST
● SP9Out.ST
● SP10Out.ST
● SP1OpOut.ST
● SP2OpOut.ST
● SP3OpOut.ST
● SP4OpOut.ST
● SP5OpOut.ST
● SP6OpOut.ST
● SP7OpOut.ST
● SP8OpOut.ST
● SP9OpOut.ST
● SP10OpOut.ST
● CV1Out.ST
● CV2Out.ST
● CV3Out.ST
● CV4Out.ST
● CV5Out.ST
● CV6Out.ST
● CV7Out.ST
● CV8Out.ST
● CV9Out.ST
● CV10Out.ST

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


966 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

5.15.3 MPC10x10 functions

Functions of MPC10x10
The functions for this block are listed below.

Generating and limiting the manipulated variable


The manipulated variable MV1 ... MV4 (hereinafter referred to as MVx, x = 1 ... 10) can be
generated as follows:

ManAct MVxTrkOn MVx Limit monitoring State


1 - Manx ManxHiLim "Manual mode", set by the operator
ManxLoLim
0 1 MVxTrk MVxHiLim Tracking with limitation
MVxLoLim
0 0 Automatic manipu‐ MVxHiLim "Automatic mode": Predictive controller al‐
lated variable MVxLoLim gorithm

Remark
If the controller is in "Out of service" mode, the output parameters MV1 ... MV10, depending on
the Feature Bit (Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect at startup (Page 169)),
are set to the last valid value in manual mode or the corresponding neutral position manipulated
variable (SafePos1 ... SafePos10). Refer to the Out of service (Page 72) section for more
on this.
The limited operating range (between MVxHiLim and MVxLoLim) is typically smaller in
automatic mode than in manual mode. With regard to the limited range of validity of a linear
process model for approximating a non-linear process response, this allows the stability of the
closed control loop to be guaranteed within the control range in automatic mode.
The gradients of the manipulated variable (changes per second) are limited to MV1RaLim to
MV10RaLim in "automatic mode". Gradient limitation applies both to the positive and negative
directions.

Tracking and limiting a manipulated variable


The block provides the standard function Tracking and limiting a manipulated variable
(Page 205).
In contrast to PID controllers, tracking the manipulated variables (MV1 ... MV10) is enabled for
specific channels via one of the input parameters MV1TrkOn ... MV10TrkOn. The
corresponding manipulated variable is then tracked by the interconnectable input parameters
MV1Trk ... MV10Trk.

Setting the setpoint internally


With this block, the setpoint must always be set internally at the I/Os SP1 ... SP10. These are
normally operated in the faceplate. In special situations, you can interconnect the setpoints
but they can then no longer be changed using the faceplate.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 967
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

Setpoint tracking in manual mode


In this situation (SP_TrackCV = 1), the internal setpoints SP1 ... SP10 are tracked to the
assigned process values CV1 ... CV10 in "manual mode". This function allows a bumpless
transfer to "automatic mode". After the transfer, the setpoints can be changed by the operator
again.

Setpoint filters
The setpoint filter is the only way of changing the action of the predictive controller without
having to create a new user data block with the MPC Configurator and reinitialize the controller.
The specified time constant PreFilt1 ... PreFilt10 of the setpoint filter can be interpreted
as the required settling time of this CV channel following a setpoint step change. As the time
constant setting increases, the controller works more slowly and less aggressively. In
particular, this reduces the influence of a setpoint step change in one control channel on
neighboring control channels.
Internally, the MPC10x10 block works with trajectories of future setpoints that are compared
with the predicted movements of the controlled variables. Without the setpoint filter, it is
assumed that the current setpoint will continue to remain valid in the future within the prediction
horizon. If there is a setpoint step change, this means that the full value of the new setpoint
will be required in the near future although the process cannot achieve this (according to the
prediction). With the setpoint filter, an asymptotic setpoint trajectory (first order) is calculated
from the current process value to the required setpoint so that the required setpoint is reached
in the specified time.

Note
The setpoint filter also comes into effect without a setpoint step if the process value deviates
significantly from the setpoint due to disturbances. This means that the filter not only slows
down the control response but indirectly also the response to disturbances.

The control response can only be slowed down by the setpoint filter and not accelerated; when
the value is 0, the prefilter is deactivated. It is therefore advisable to set the basic controller
tuning in the MPC Configurator with the "Manipulated variable move penalty" parameter and
then to optimize this inside the software using the function for simulation of the closed control
loop. The setpoint filter should then only be used for fine tuning of the controller action in the
real-world process.

Simulating signals
The block provides the standard function Simulating signals (Page 59).
You can simulate the following values:
● Controlled variable (SimCVx , SimCVxLi)

Selecting a unit of measure


The block provides the standard function Selecting a unit of measure (Page 221).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


968 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

Error signal generation and dead band


The block provides the standard function Error signal generation and dead band (Page 201).
In the predictive controller, the error signal is generated over the entire prediction horizon for
each control channel as the deviation between the predicted movement of the process (starting
at the current process value CV1 ... CV4) and future setpoint settings (ending at SP1 ... SP10)
and used to calculate the manipulated variable.
In principle, the effect of the dead bands SP1DeadBand to SP10Deadband is the same as in
a PID controller, but extends over the entire future prediction horizon. In other words, if, for
example, the predicted controlled variable CV1 in the entire prediction horizon is within the
band SP1 ± SP1DeadBand, the controller sees no reason whatsoever to change any
manipulated variable. These are therefore also known as CV bands. In contrast to the
manipulated variable limits, these are not hard constraints that need to be adhered to at all
costs.
In multivariable controllers, it is advisable to make use of the fact that from the perspective of
the application only some of the controlled variables need to move to a specified setpoint
exactly while others only need to remain within a defined range.
A typical example would be product quality characteristics for which a tolerance band is
specified. While a dead band in a PID controller tends to put stability at risk, CV bands in
individual controller channels generally relieve the multivariable controller overall.
Using CV bands, the action of a soft override control can be achieved.

Use case for error signal generation with dead band


As long as the pressure in a reactor remains within the specified safety limits, the controller is
interested only in product quality. However, as soon as the pressure threatens to leave the
permitted range (in other words, inside the prediction horizon it moves towards an illegal value
in the future), the pressure control cuts in. By weighting the controlled variables in the
performance index (see MPC Configurator), the user can specify that predicted violations of
the pressure limits are given a particularly high weighting.

Predictive controller algorithm


The MPC10x10 block is derived from the familiar DMC algorithm (Dynamic Matrix Control) .
Future changes to the manipulated variable within the control horizon are calculated from future
predictive control deviations. To accomplish this, first the ideal solution is determined in each
sampling step using an analytical formula without consideration of constraints. If the ideal
solution comes into conflict with a constraint, an iterative optimization process is used to find
a solution of the dynamic quadratic optimization problem with constraints.
Based on the principle of the receding horizon, only the first value is taken from the calculated
vector of the optimum manipulated variable moves over the entire control horizon and applied
to the process. In the next step, the newly arrived process values are taken into account and
the calculation repeated over the entire prediction horizon.
With predictive controllers, the manipulated variable moves are based on the control deviations
predicted in the future, while with a PID controller, they are based on (typically integrated) error
signals of the past. This can be interpreted as a "looking ahead" strategy.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 969
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

Anti-windup
When manipulated variable limits are active, anti-windup measures are taken automatically
within the controller. The prediction equations use the real limited values of the manipulated
variables instead of theoretically calculated values.

Model-based disturbance compensation


Model-based disturbance compensation can and should be used if one or more known
disturbances have a strong influence on the process and their causes can be measured.

The effects of a measurable disturbance (DV1..4 I/O) on all controlled variables CV1 ...
CV10 can be estimated when the controller is taken into manual mode. This means that no
movements of the controlled variables whatsoever result from changes to the manipulated
variables and all movements result from the disturbance. If the disturbance (e.g. ambient
temperature) can be measured but cannot be actively adjusted, it may be necessary to search
through a data archive to find the time segments in which the disturbance changed.
The identification of the transfer functions from disturbances DV1…DV4 to all controlled
variables CV1 ... CV10 (disturbance models G(1,d) and G(2,d) in the graphic above) is
performed with the MPC Configurator and is analogous to the identification of the main transfer
functions (G(1,1) to G(2,2)). The measured disturbances are then linked to the DV1…DV4 inputs
of the MPC10x10 block and disturbance compensation is activated with DV_On = 1. As a
result, the effect of the measurable disturbances is taken into account in the prediction and
the controller can start counter measures in advance before the disturbance has a massive
influence on the controlled variables.
Such disturbance compensation is especially effective when the disturbance is constant at
times and changes from time to time. If a disturbance fluctuates constantly or oscillates,
however, the feedforward control should not be enabled during operation of the controller to
avoid constant oscillation of the manipulated variables, although it should be taken into account
in the MPC Configurator when creating the process model.
If there is no disturbance model in the user data block, the signals at the DV1...DV4 input
are ignored.
Typical examples of measurable disturbances are inlet flows in distillation columns or
throughput of continuous reactors.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


970 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

Predictive controller with more than four measurable disturbances


If you want to plan for more than four measurable disturbances in an application, but do not
need all ten manipulated variable channels of the MPC10x10 block, you can dedicate the first
of the previously unused MV channels for disturbance feedforwarding.
Example: You only have two control actions available, so only use MV1 and MV2. Then connect
the additional measurable disturbance DV5 to the MV3Trk input parameter and set
MV3TrkOn = 1. For recording of training data for the predictive controller, declare MV3Trk as
the third disturbance and also use the CFC trend recorder to record the effect of changes to
DV5 on all controlled variables.
Use the MPC Configurator to then determine a process model that describes the effects of
DV5. However, if the disturbance variable DV5 in "automatic mode" of the controller fluctuates
due to external influences, the effect of such changes is taken into consideration for predicting
future process reactions through MV3Trk and predictive methods can be used to compensate
this disturbance. The performance of the disturbance compensation is exactly the same as
that for regular feedforward control via the input parameters DV1...DV4 and DV_On = 1.
If you want to disable this disturbance compensation in runtime with the unused MV5
manipulated variable, you need to insert a SelA02In selector block in front of the MV3Trk
input. This allows you to set a constant zero for MV3Trk instead of the measured value DV5,
which stops the effect of MV3 on prediction. (Due to this reassignment, MV3TrkOn must always
remain 1 to prevent the controller from changing the value of MV3.)
This way, additional measurable disturbances can be selected. However, the sum of the
manipulated variables and disturbances may not exceed a total number of 14.
At the output variables NumberOrigMVs, the number of original manipulated variables is
displayed that can actively be influenced by the controller. The other manipulated variables
(in the above example MV3) are only used for disturbance feedforward and are therefore always
in tracking mode. They are referred to as pseudo MVs.

Control of square and non-square systems


In multivariable controllers, the number of manipulated variables should ideally be the same
as the number of controlled variables. This is known as a "square system". As long as
constraints do not influence operation, the controller can, in principle, track all controlled
variables exactly to the selected setpoints.
If there are less manipulated variables than controlled variables or if individual manipulated
variables have reached their limits, degrees of freedom are lacking in the control problem. This
means that it is not possible for all setpoints to be reached exactly.
The MPC10x10 algorithm then finds a compromise that can be influenced by the selection of
controlled variable weightings (priorities) in the MPC Configurator: Controlled variables with
higher priority will have lower control deviations.
If there are more manipulated variables than controlled variables or if some of the controlled
variables are already within their setpoint bands, there are surplus degrees of freedom in the
control problem.
The MPC10x10 algorithm can use these degrees of freedom to move the manipulated variable
in the direction of the specified target value, whereby the weighting of the manipulated variable
target value in the performance index is typically substantially less than the weighting of
setpoints for the controlled variables. If the manipulated variables result in costs (e.g. mass
flows of steam or other forms of energy consumption), the manipulated variable target values

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 971
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

can be set somewhat lower than the values previously observed at the operating point. The
controller then attempts to reduce the manipulated variables (the costs) in the direction of the
target values as long as the achievement of the primary control target provides some degree
of freedom. In general, the advantages of the dynamic online optimization in the MPC10x10
are especially attractive for non-quadratic systems, because the restrictions of the lean
algorithm of ModPreCon are overcome.

Control of linear and non-linear systems


The MPC10x10 algorithm is based on a linear, time invariant process model. As a result, in
much the same way as a PID controller, it is suitable above all for controlling non-linear systems
around a fixed operating point.
Again analogous to the PID controller, there are, however, several possibilities with which the
area of application can be extended in context of non-linear systems:

Compensation functions between controller and controlled system:


It is, for example, possible to compensate the effect of a non-linear valve characteristic curve
using a polygon block between the MV output and the control input of the valve block. Care
must be taken when implementing the manipulated variable limits. In the same way, the effect
of a non-linearity at the output of the controlled system (for example a sensor characteristic
curve) can be compensated by a polygon block before the CV input of the controller. Remember
that the corresponding SP must also be equivalently transformed. In both cases, the
compensation functions become part of the controlled system from the perspective of the
controller. The aim is always to keep the overall response of the controlled system consisting
of process and compensation elements as linear as possible.

Trajectory control:
This approach neatly combines the advantages of an open loop controller (Feedforward
Control) with those of a closed loop controller with process value feedback (Closed Loop
Control). The controller follows a previously optimized trajectory of setpoints and manipulated
variables; in other words, it only needs to compensate small deviations between the stored
trajectory and the current plant state. A trajectory is an optimum series of manipulated variables
over time and the process values that match them. The required manipulated variables are
read by means of the MV10Traj inputs into the MPC10x10 block and added to the values of
the manipulated variable calculated by the algorithm (in automatic mode only). Among other
things, the advantage of this is that the effective manipulated variable acting on the process
as the sum of the trajectory and controller action is limited correctly as configured. The process
values from the trajectory are linked to the corresponding setpoint specifications SP1 ...
SP10 of the controller. As long as the process reacts exactly as planned in the trajectory, it will
respond to the series of manipulated variables from the trajectory with the corresponding series
of process values and the control deviation is zero. It is generally known that a non-linear
dynamic process can linearized around a fixed operating point or a steady state of the system.
It is also possible to linearize it around a trajectory.

Forming the signal status for blocks


The block provides the standard function Forming and outputting the signal status for
technologic blocks (Page 110).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


972 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

The worst signal status ST_Worst for the block is formed from the following parameters:
● DV1.ST
● DV4.ST
● CV1.ST
● CV2.ST
● ...
● CV10.ST

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


An overview of all the reactions that are provided by the Feature parameter is available in
the section Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133). The following functionality
is available for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
1 Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 181)
2 Resetting the commands for changing the mode (Page 165)
4 Setting switch or button mode (Page 170)
5 Changes signal status of outputs in OOS (Page 198)
8 Delete history of MV and DV moves during restart (Page 191)
15 Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect with "out of service" operating mode
(Page 170)
16 Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect at startup (Page 169)
24 Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162)

Operator permissions
The block provides the standard function Operator control permissions (Page 265).
The block has the following permissions for the OS_Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 1 = Operator can switch to "automatic mode"
1 Not used
2 1 = Operator can switch to "Out of service" mode
3 Not used
4 Not used
5 1 = Operator can change the setpoint 1
6 1 = Operator can change the manipulated variables of all channels
7 1 = Operator can change operating high limits of the setpoints for all channels
8 1 = Operator can change operating low limits of the setpoints for all channels
9 1 = Operator can change the setpoint 2
10 1 = Operator can change the setpoint 3
11 1 = Operator can change the setpoint 4

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 973
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

Bit Function
12 1 = Operator can change the setpoint filter of all channels
13 - 16 1 = Operator can change the setpoint 5…8
17 1 = Operator can enable the track setpoint in "manual mode" function
18 1 = Operator can activate the model-based disturbance compensation function
19 1 = Operator can change the setpoint 9
20 1 = Operator can change the setpoint 10
21 1 = Operator can only activate the "Prediction Mode" function
22 1 = Operator can change the target values of all channels
23 1 = Operator can change the dead band parameter of all channels
24 1 = Operator can change all parameters of the operating point optimization
25 1 = Operator can change the simulation value SimCV1..10
26 1 = Operator can activate the Simulation function
27 1 = Operator can activate the Release for maintenance function
28 1 = Operator can change the manipulated variable limits of all channels
29 1 = Operator can change the gradient limits of manipulated variables of all channels
30 1 = Operator can activate the operating point optimization
31 1 = Operator can deactivate the operating point optimization

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Release for maintenance


The block provides the standard function Release for maintenance (Page 65).

Specifying the display area for process and setpoint values as well as operations
This block provides the standard function Display and operator input area for process values
and setpoints (Page 216).
In contrast to PID controllers, there are no separate parameters for bar limits. The setpoints
limits are used for all setpoint and actual value bars; manual limits are used as bar limits for
all manipulated variable bars.

Opening additional faceplates


This block provides the standard function Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


This block provides the standard function SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


974 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

Integrated static operating point optimization


The integrated steady state operating point optimization can be used if no exact SPi setpoint
is specified for at least one controlled variable (index i =1...10), but rather the CVi process
value must remain within a tolerance range SPiOptHiLim…SPiOptLoLim. The tolerance
range must, of course, be within the valid setpoint limits SPiHiLim…SPiLoLim for this control
channel. The tolerance range SPiOptHiLim…SPiOptLoLim is not coupled to the operator-
controlled setpoint SPi. If the setpoint is changed, the tolerance range is not automatically
shifted. If you want to do this nevertheless, interconnect the SPiOpOut output parameters via
two adders using the width of the tolerance range to the inputs SPiOptHiLim and
SPiOptLoLim.
From an economic perspective, different values within the tolerance range can be more or less
favorable. With the help of the optimization function, the optimal economic point can be found
within the tolerance range.
This is done by defining a target function (performance criterion), which depends on the
manipulated variable and controlled variable of the predictive controller. This can be, for
example, the economic yield of plant operation per time unit or it may involve specific costs or
energy consumption.
J= GradMV1*MV1 +GradMV2*MV2 +… +GradMV10*MV10
+GradCV1*CV1 +GradCV2*CV2 +…+GradCV10*CV10
+J0
You specify the individual GradXVi coefficients of the gradient vector as input variables at the
MPC10x10 function block in the CFC or in the parameter view of the faceplate. If individual
coefficients vary with time, e.g. they are dependent on current market prices, you can also
interconnect these input variables. If individual manipulated or controlled variables have no
influence on the performance criterion, leave the corresponding coefficients at the default
value, zero.
You can use the binary J_Mini input parameter to specify whether the target function is to be
maximized or minimized, based on whether this involves yields or costs (J_Mini = 1 :
minimization).
The term J0 combines all contributions to the target function that do not depend on
manipulated variables and controlled variables. These contributions have no effect on the
optimum values of the decision variables, but are applied for calculating the current value of
specified performance index according to the above-mentioned formula.
Within the controller, the terms of the target function that depend on controlled variables are
converted to make their dependence on the manipulated variables visible. To do this, the
steady state process model from the MPC Configurator is used.
Constraints for the controlled variables take the form of the above-mentioned tolerance ranges
for setpoints. The controller takes care of adhering to the manipulated variable constraints, in
any case; they do not have to be separately specified as constraints for the optimization.
Enable the optimization using the binary input variable OptimizeOn in the controller
faceplate. The optimizer then returns setpoints within the tolerance ranges that are optimal
with respect to the performance index. These setpoints are then sent to the control algorithm,
which handles them in the same way as conventionally specified setpoints (with or without
dead band). The operable SP1...SP10 setpoints are not tracked to the optimized setpoints;
when optimization is disabled, the old setpoints from the faceplate take effect once again.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 975
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

When selecting variables for archiving and graphic plotter, ensure you use the
SP1Out...SP10Out setpoint actually in effect and not the SP1...SP10 input variables.
The current value of the performance index is displayed at the J_Actual output variable.
You can find additional information about the topic of steady state operating point optimization
in the online help for the MPC configurator.

Display of the prediction of free movement


The prediction of free motion ("future without control") is a forecast for the future behavior of
the process within the overall prediction horizon, under the assumption that all manipulated
variables are frozen at their current values. The time length of the prediction horizon is indicated
in the output parameter PrediHorizon in the [s] unit.
The prediction of free motion is recalculated in each sampling step within the control algorithm.
If the manipulated variables are at constant values in manual mode, the prediction of the free
movement is actually a realistic prediction for the future process response. It can therefore be
represented graphically in the faceplate at least in terms of quality. For this purpose, five
equidistant interpolation values are copied from the prediction horizon, and displayed in the
standard view of the faceplate as a vertical bar next to the current process value.
Example: The prediction horizon is 1800s=30min and the current time is labeled with the index
k. The prediction for k+6min, and next to it k+12min, up to k+30min then appears on the right
next to the bar of the current process value. If the upper borders of each bar are virtually
connected with a line (red in the picture), you can imaging the curve created by the future
course of the process value over the next half hour.
In automatic mode (tracking function is switched off), the value of the manipulated variables
fluctuates with each sampling step. The prediction of free movement is then only a fictional
mathematical formulation within the algorithm, and not a realistic prediction for the future
process response. This is why the prediction is only displayed in manual mode or in automatic
mode with active tracking function. The display can be generally suppressed using
Feature.Bit31.

Prediction without control response


In this special "operating mode" (comparable to the block-internal simulation), the controller
only monitors the process and indicates what it would like to do in the next sampling step
without actively intervening in the process. This allows you as the user to build trust before
"switching active" the controller the first time, i.e. actively intervening in the process.
"Prediction Mode" is activated via the binary input variable PredictMode or in "Parameters"
in the faceplate view. Setpoints and process values are read as in normal automatic mode.
The prediction of the free movement and manipulated variable change for the next sampling
step are calculated as in normal automatic mode. The starting point for the prediction of the
manipulated variable for the next sampling step, however, is the current process value of the
follow-up control loop at the MV1Trk…MV10Trk tracking inputs. The predicted manipulated
variables are not output at the normal outputs MV1...10 but rather at the
MV1Pred...MV10Pred outputs, which were especially introduced for this purpose, and are

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


976 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

displayed in the standard view of the faceplate on the left next to MV1...10 as long as
"Prediction Mode" is active.
● When the controller is in automatic mode, in "Prediction Mode" all MVi (i=1..10) are
set to match the assigned MViTrk input parameters, similar to tracking mode.
● When the controller is in manual mode, all MVi are set to the desired manual values
regardless of "Prediction Mode".
● When "Prediction Mode" is disabled, all MViPred always equal the respective MVi.

Automatic process excitation for model identification


In order to determine the process model for the model predictive controller, the process must
be artificially excited in order to observe its dynamic response and record it in the form of
training data. This excitation signal can be specified manually in manual mode of the controller.
Alternatively, a suitable signal can be generated automatically in the form a defined,
symmetrical sequence of manipulated variable steps. The trigger signals are calculated by an
auxiliary function block, "AutoExcitation", which is built into the process tag type and
interconnected to MPC10x10 .
Additional MV1Excite…MV10Excite input variables are required for this on the controller
function block. Process excitation is performed in manual mode of the controller, because
automatic mode cannot be activated before modeling. The new "Operating mode" process
excitation can only be controlled via the ExciteOn input bit on the engineering system, and
not on the operator station, because the CFC is needed for configuration of the AutoExcitation
block. However, process excitation must be displayed on the OS in standard view at the lower
left.
Manual intervention via faceplate remains possible even during process excitation. The values
of the MV1Excite...MV10Excite input parameters are therefore only written event-based
to the MV1Man...MV10Man values that is only if they change.
You can find additional details on automatic process excitation in the online help for the MPC
configurator.

See also
Predictive control of a non-linear process (ModPreConNonLinSim) (Page 2445)

5.15.4 MPC10x10 error handling

Error handling of MPC10x10


Refer to section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions for the error handling of all
blocks.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 977
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum output parameter can be used to output the following error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Default value when the block is installed; this message is irrelevant.
0 There is no error.
3 Configuration error: Block is inserted in the wrong OB, cycle time of the OB is not
suited for controller configuration.
31 The value of CV1 can no longer be displayed in the real number field or is not a
number.
32 The value of CV2 can no longer be displayed in the real number field or is not a
number.
... ..
40 The value of CV10 can no longer be displayed in the real number field or is not a
number.
41 The MV_Trk1 value can no longer be displayed in the real number field or is not a
number.
42 The MV_Trk2 value can no longer be displayed in the real number field or is not a
number.
... ...
50 The MV_Trk10 value can no longer be displayed in the real number field or is not
a number.
51 AutModLi = 1 and ManModLi = 1
90 The controller matrix could not be loaded from the user data block.

The ErrorOpt output parameter is used to output the status of the lower-level LPOptim block.

5.15.5 MPC10x10 messaging

Messaging
This block does not offer messaging.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


978 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

5.15.6 MPC10x10 I/Os

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AutModLi 1 = Automatic mode via interconnection or SFC STRUCT -
(controlled by ModLiOp = 1) ● Value: ● 0
BOOL ● 16#80
● ST: BYTE
AutModOp 1 = Automatic mode via operator (controlled by BOOL 0
ModLiOp = 0)
BatchEn 1 = Enabled for allocation by batch control BOOL 0
BatchID Batch number DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name S7-String
CV1...CV10 Controlled variable 1...10 (process value) STRUCT -
● Value: ● 0.0
REAL ● 16#80
● ST: BYTE
CV1_Unit...CV Unit of measure for controlled variable 1...10 INT 1001
10_Unit
DV_On 1 = Activate the disturbance variable feedforward BOOL 1
using DV
DV1...DV4 Disturbance variable 1...4 STRUCT -
● Value: ● 0.0
REAL ● 16#80
● ST: BYTE
DV1_Unit...DV Unit of measure for DV1...DV4 INT 1342
4_Unit
DV1DeadBand.. Dead band for DV1...DV4 REAL 1.0
.DV4DeadBand
DynOptOn 1 = Activate dynamic optimization with constraints. BOOL 1
0 = Ignore constraints for optimization.
ExciteOn 1 = Automatic process trigger; MViExite input BOOL 0
parameters are written to the MVi outputs
Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 967) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: ● 0
BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 1
● Bit 31:
BOOL

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 979
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

Parameter Description Type Default


GradCV1… Gradient vector for performance criterion, ele‐ STRUCT -
GradCV10 ment (factor) for CV1 ● Value: ● 0.0
REAL ● 16#80
● ST: BYTE
GradMV1… Gradient vector for performance criterion, ele‐ STRUCT -
GradMV10 ment (factor) for MV1 ● Value: ● 0.0
REAL ● 16#80
● ST: BYTE
J_Actual_Unit Physical unit of performance J_Actual INT 0
J_Mini 1 = minimize J, BOOL 0
0= maximize J
J0 Value of the performance criterion in the operating REAL 0.0
point
ManModLi 1 = Manual mode via interconnection or SFC (ef‐ STRUCT -
fective if ModLiOp = 1) ● Value: ● 0
BOOL ● 16#80
● ST: BYTE
ManModOp 1 = Manual mode via OS operator (effective if BOOL 0
ModLiOp = 0)
ModLiOp Operating mode switchover by: STRUCT -
1 = Interconnection or SFC ● Value: ● 0
0 = Operator BOOL ● 16#80
● ST: BYTE
MS_RelOp Operator input for release for maintenance BOOL 0
1 = MS release requested
MV1_Unit...MV Unit of measure for manipulated variable 1...10 INT 1342
10_Unit
MV1Excite...MV Default value for MV1..10 during the automatic STRUCT -
10Excite process trigger for model generation ● Value: ● 0.0
REAL ● 16#80
● ST: BYTE
MV1HiLi High limit of manipulated variable MV1 REAL 100.0
MV1LoLi Low limit of manipulated variable MV1 REAL 0.0
MV1Man Manual value: Operator input for setting the ma‐ REAL 0.0
nipulated variable MV1 in manual mode
MV1ManHiLim High limit of manipulated variable MV1 in manual REAL 100.0
mode
MV1ManLoLim Low limit of manipulated variable MV1 in manual REAL 0.0
mode
MV1RaLim Gradient limiting of the manipulated variable MV1 REAL 100.0
[MV1_Unit/ second]
MV1Target...M Target value (optimum value) for manipulated var‐ REAL 0.0
V10Target iable MV1...MV10

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


980 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

Parameter Description Type Default


MV1Trk Tracking value for the manipulated variable MV1 STRUCT -
● Value: ● 0.0
REAL ● 16#80
● ST: BYTE
MV1Traj Trajectory value that is added to the manipulated REAL 0.0
variable MV1
MV1TrkOn...MV 1 = Tracking of manipulated variable STRUCT -
10TrkOn MV1...MV10 ● Value: ● 0
BOOL ● 16#80
● ST: BYTE
Occupied 1 = Allocated by SIMATIC BATCH BOOL 0
OosLi 1 = Out of service, via interconnection or SFC (0-1 STRUCT -
edge transition) ● Value: ● 0
BOOL ● 16#80
● ST: BYTE
OosOp 1 = Out of service, via OS operator BOOL 0
OpSt_In Input parameter for local operator authorization, DWORD 16#00000000
to be connected with the Out output parameter of
the upstream block OpStations
OptimOffOp 1 = Disable operating point optimization, normal BOOL 0
setpoints SP1...SP10 in effect
OptimOnOp 1 = Enable operating point optimization, optimized BOOL 0
setpoints SP1Out...SP10Out in effect
OS_Perm I/O for operating permissions (Page 967) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: ● 1
BOOL ● 1
● ... ● 1
● Bit 31:
BOOL
PredictMode 1 = "Prediction only mode" enabled, prediction BOOL 0
only, no intervention in the process
PreFilt1...Pr Settling time [s] of the setpoint filter for setpoint REAL 0.0
eFilt10 SP1...SP10
Restart 1 = Restart of the block and adoption of the data BOOL 0
from the user block of the MPC Configurator
SafePos1...Sa 1 = Safety setting for MV1...MV10 is BOOL 0
fePos10 Man1HiLim...Man10HiLim,
0 = Safety setting for MV1...MV10 is
Man1LoLim...Man1LoLim,
SampleTime Sampling time [s] (assigned automatically) REAL 1.0
SelFp1 1 = Call a block saved in this parameter as an ANY
additional faceplate in the standard view
SelFp2 1 = Call a block saved in this parameter as an ANY
additional faceplate in the preview

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 981
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

Parameter Description Type Default


SimCV1… Simulation value for control variable REAL 0.0
SimCV10 CV1...CV10, which is used for SimOn = 1
SimCV1Li… Simulation value for control variable STRUCT -
SimCV10Li CV1...CV10, which is used for ● Value: ● 0.0
SimOnLi.Value = 1 (and SimLiOp.Value = REAL ● 16#80
1)
● ST: BYTE
SimLiOp Activation/deactivation of the simulation by: STRUCT -
1 = Interconnection or SFC ● Value: ● 0
0 = Operator BOOL ● 16#80
● ST: BYTE
SimOn 1 = Enable simulation BOOL 0
SimOnLi 1 = Enable simulation via interconnection or SFC STRUCT -
(if SimLiOp = 1)) ● Value: ● 0
BOOL ● 16#80
● ST: BYTE
SP_TrkCV 1 = Setpoints follow the CVs in manual mode and BOOL 0
in tracking
SP1...SP10 Setpoint 1...10 STRUCT -
● Value: ● 0.0
REAL ● 16#FF
● ST: BYTE
SP1DeadBand.. Width (radius) of the dead band control of REAL 0.0
.SP10DeadBand CV1...CV10
SP1HiLim...SP Setpoint high limit 1...10 REAL 100.0
10HiLim
SP1LoLim...SP Setpoint low limit 1...10 REAL 0.0
10LoLim
SP1OptHiLim.. High limit for optimization of setpoint 1...10 REAL 0.0
.SP10OptHiLim
SP1OptLoLim.. Low limit for optimization of setpoint 1...10 REAL 0.0
.SP10OptLoLim
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use in PCS 7 OS BYTE 16#00

Output parameters

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


982 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

Parameter Description Type Default


AutAct 1 = Automatic mode is active STRUCT -
0 = Manual mode is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
(applies to all manipulated variable channels) ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CV1Out...CV1 Copy CV1...CV10, preferably as output param‐ STRUCT -
0Out eter ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
ErrorEndless Error: infinite iteration loop in the dynamic opti‐ BOOL 0
mization
ErrorNum Output of pending error number. You can find INT -1
information about the error numbers that are out‐
put by this block at MPC10x10 error handling
(Page 977)
ErrorOpt Error number of the integrated operating point INT 0
optimization function, see MPC10x10 error han‐
dling (Page 977)
Fut1_y1… Prediction of free movement of CV1...CV10 for REAL 0.0
Fut10_y5 five future points in time within the prediction ho‐
rizon
J_Actual Current value of the performance criterion REAL 0.0
Loop1Closed… 1 = MV1 is used by the algorithm for closed loop STRUCT -
Loop10Closed control, i.e. AutAct AND NOT MV1TrkOn ● Value: BOOL ● 0
0 = Control loop for MV1 open ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManAct 1 = Manual mode enabled, for all control chan‐ STRUCT -
nels ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MS_Release Release for maintenance: STRUCT -
1 = Release by OS operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV1...MV10 Manipulated variable 1..10 (controller output sig‐ STRUCT -
nal) ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
MV1HiAct 1 = High limit of manipulated variable 1 reached STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV1LoAct 1 = Low limit of manipulated variable 1 reached STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV1Pred One-step prediction for MV1 in the "Prediction REAL 0.0
without control response" mode
MV1TargOut.. Target value output (optimum value) for manipu‐ REAL 0.0
.MV10TargOut lated variable MV1...MV10
NumberCVs Number of control variables used INT 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 983
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

Parameter Description Type Default


NumberDVs Number of disturbances used INT 0
NumberMVs Number of manipulated variables used INT 10
NumberOrigMV Number of original manipulated variables that INT 0
s are actively influenced by the controller (without
pseudo MVs that are used as DVs
OosAct 1 = Block is "out of service" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpSt_Out Value of the OpSt_In input parameter, for feed‐ DWORD 16#00000000
forwarding to other blocks. Bit 31 of this param‐
eter is used by Feature.Bit24
OptimAct 1 = Operating point optimization enabled, set‐ BOOL 0
points calculated by the optimization are used
0 = Optimization off
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with settings changed by the DWORD 16#FFFFFFF
block algorithm F
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFF
F
PrediHorizon Prediction horizon [s] REAL 0.0
SP1OpOut...S Copy of the operable setpoint 1 for step-enabling STRUCT -
P10OpOut ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
SP1Out...SP1 Setpoint 1 actually used by controller STRUCT -
0Out ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
Status1 Status word 1 (Page 958) DWORD 16#00000000
Status2 Status word 2 (Page 958) DWORD 16#00000000

5.15.7 MPC10x10 block diagram

MPC10x10 block diagram


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


984 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

5.15.8 Operator control and monitoring

5.15.8.1 MPC10x10 views

Views of the MPC10x10 block


The block MPC10x10 provides the following views:
● MPC10x10 standard view (Page 985)
● Trend view (Page 317)
● MPC10x10 parameter view (Page 991)
● MPC10x10 CV parameter view (Page 993)
● MPC10x10 MV parameter view (Page 994)
● MPC10x10 preview (Page 995)
● Memo view (Page 315)
● Batch view (Page 313)
● Block icon for MPC10x10 (Page 998)
Refer to the sections Structure of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure
(Page 239) for general information on the faceplate and block icon.

See also
MPC10x10 trend view (Page 997)

5.15.8.2 MPC10x10 standard view

Standard view of MPC10x10


The standard view has an upper half and a lower half. You can change between the two halves
with the arrow keys. The upper half shows all available controlled variable channels with their
setpoints, while the lower half shows all available manipulated variable channels.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 985
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

Upper screen half (controlled variables)


 




 





 



Lower screen half (manipulated variables)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


986 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller



 






 






 






 






 





(1) Displaying and switching the operating mode


This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
● Manual mode (Page 73)
● Automatic mode (Page 73)
● Out of service (Page 72)
For information on switching the operating mode, refer to the section
Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268).

(2), (3), (4) and (5) Displaying and switching for values for channels 1 to 10
This area always has the same layout for channels 1 to 10:
(6) High and low scale range for the process value
These values provide information on the display range for the bar graph of the process value.
The scale range is defined in the engineering system.
(7) Displaying and changing the process value including signal status
This area shows the current process value with the corresponding signal status.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 987
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

The process value is normally displayed and cannot be operated. Process values in the
faceplate can only be changed within the context of internal block simulation.
In the object properties (I/Os PVx_Out > Identifier) of the block in CFC, you can specify the
text to be displayed for these parameters.
(8) Displaying and changing the setpoint including signal status
This area shows the current setpoint with the corresponding signal status. Refer to the
Changing values (Page 270) section for information on changing the setpoint.

(11) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
Use this navigation button to open the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system. The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the engineering
system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in the section Opening additional faceplates
(Page 217) .

(12) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Maintenance"
Additional information on the display area for states of the block is available in the Release for
maintenance (Page 65) .

(13) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Simulation"
● "Process excitation"
The automatic process trigger is fed forward using the upstream block AutoExcitation for
recording learning data for the MPC configurator. The manipulated variable step changes
are added to the manipulated values 1 to 4 according to schedule. Avoid external
disturbances to the process while the process trigger is running. The manipulated variables
can be changed manually while the process trigger is running.
You can find additional information on this in the section Simulating signals (Page 59).

(14) Display area for block states


● "Invalid signal"

(15) Display area for block states


● "Tracking on"

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


988 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

(16) Bar graph for the process value 1


There is a bar graph for the process value for every channel 1 to 10.
This area shows the current process value in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the
bar graph depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).

(17) Bar graph for the setpoint 1


There is a bar graph for the setpoint for every channel 1 to 10.
This area shows the current setpoint in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the bar
graph depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).

(18) Prediction of free movement


This area shows you the prediction of free movement in the form of a bar graph. For each
channel from 1 to 10, there is a bar graph for the prediction of free movement, that is, for the
future behavior of the process within the overall prediction horizon, under the assumption that
all manipulated variables are frozen at their current values.
This is why the prediction of free movement is only displayed in manual mode or in automatic
mode with active tracking function.
The value range of the bar graph matches the value range of the respective setpoint and
current value bar.
Functions of MPC10x10 (Page 967)

(19) Displaying the limits


These triangles show the SP_HiLim and SP_LoLim setpoint limits configured in the
engineering system (ES).

(20) Steady state operating point optimization


Activate the optimization using the button at bottom right. Activation means that the optimized
setpoints SP1Out...SP4Out are actually used instead of the SP1...SP4 setpoints specified in
the faceplate for closed-loop control. (The actual calculation of the optimum setpoints is not
depending on this, and is only performed if one of the input variables for the optimization has
changed.) The current value the economic performance index J appears in the display field
below.
When optimization is enabled, the optimum setpoints are displayed on the setpoint bar as
small, horizontal lines and highlighted with the abbreviation "opt.". The numerical values of the
optimum setpoints are then displayed left of the input fields for the setpoints.

Lower screen half (manipulated variables)

(9) Displaying and changing the manipulated variable including signal status

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 989
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

This area shows the current manipulated variable with the corresponding signal status. Refer
to the Changing values (Page 270) section for information on changing the manipulated
variable. You can only make a change in manual mode.
In the object properties (I/Os MVx > Identifier) of the block in CFC, you can specify the text to
be displayed for these parameters.
(10) Bar graph for the manipulated variable with limit display
This area shows the current manipulated variable in the form of a bar graph. The visible area
in the bar graph depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES):
● Limits: MVxHiLim and MVxLoLim
● Display area: MVxManHiLim and MVxManLoLim

(14) Display for states of the manipulated channel


There is a display for the state of the manipulated channel for channels 1 to 10: the status
display only appears if the respective channel is tracked:
● "Tracking"

(20) Displaying and changing the target value for the manipulated variable
This area shows the current target value for the manipulated variable. Refer to the section
Changing values (Page 270) for more information on changing the target value. You can make
a change only in the "Automatic" mode and also only if OptimAct = 0. This field is not displayed
in "Manual" mode.

See also
MPC10x10 preview (Page 995)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


990 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

5.15.8.3 MPC10x10 parameter view

Parameter view of MPC10x10

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 991
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

(1) Settings
You can activate the following functions for the controller in this area:
● "SP := CV in manual mode": ☑ Bumpless switchover from "manual mode" to "automatic
mode"
● "Prediction only" activate this special "operating mode" by selecting the check box. The
controller then only listens to the process and indicates what it would like to do in the next
sampling step (i.e. which manipulated variables it would output in the next sampling step)
without actively intervening in the process
● "Disturbance compensation": ☑ Select feedforward disturbance compensation
● "Disturbance" DV1…DV4 depending on the number of configured measurable disturbances
You cannot change the disturbance values, they can only be displayed.
In the object properties (I/Os DVx > Identifier) of the block in CFC, you can specify the text to
be displayed for this parameter.

(2) Service
You can select the following functions in this area:
● "Simulation"
● "Release for maintenance"
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for more on
this.
You can find information on this area in the section:
● Simulating signals (Page 59)
● Release for maintenance (Page 65)

(3) Enabled operation


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Icons for enabled operation:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).

(4) Optimization
Direction of the optimization (minimize or maximize)
By default, the optimizer seeks to maximize the performance function, in the assumption that
it is dealing with economic yield. If you want to search a minimum, however, because you are
dealing with costs or consumption values, click this button.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


992 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

Specification of performance index for the operating point optimization


The performance index consists of a weighted sum of all manipulated and controlled variables.
For each manipulated variable and controlled variable, enter the appropriate weighting factor,
i.e. the coefficient of the gradient vector. Zero means that the value of the corresponding
manipulated variable or controlled variable has no direct influence on the economic yield. If
the controller has less than 10 manipulated variables or controlled variables, the irrelevant
variables are hidden automatically.
J0 is the part of the performance index which does not depend on the controlled and
manipulated variables of the MPC, e.g. fixed costs or costs calculated otherwise. Although this
part of costs cannot be influenced during controller internal optimization, including it in the
summation allows realistic numerical values to be displayed for the total costs.

See also
MPC10x10 views (Page 985)
MPC10x10 standard view (Page 985)
MPC10x10 trend view (Page 997)
MPC10x10 preview (Page 995)

5.15.8.4 MPC10x10 CV parameter view

CV parameter view for MPC10x10


The CV parameter view is a table which contains a row for each control channel:

The channel number is at the far left. The physical unit applies to all values of this control
channel except for the prefilter. The time constant of the prefilter is specified for all channels
in seconds.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 993
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

(1) Displaying and changing the limit parameters for the setpoint
You can change the following setpoint parameters for the relevant control channel in each row:
● "H range": High limit for setpoint operation
● "H range optimization": High limit for optimizing the setpoint
● "Operator specification": Display of the setpoint specified in the standard view, cannot be
operated here.
● "Dead band": Error signal generation and dead band (Page 201), Error signal generation
and dead band section
● "Optimal setpoint": Calculated by the optimization, cannot be operated
● "L range optimization": Low limit for optimizing the setpoint
● "L range": Low limit for setpoint operation
● "Prefilter": TimeTrig functions (Page 1832), Setpoint filter section
The numerical values for limits are arranged from left to right in descending order. The three
values per channel relevant for the optimization are highlighted in blue.
You can find additional information on this in the section Changing values (Page 270) .
The enabled operations for the setpoint parameters are displayed in the preview.

5.15.8.5 MPC10x10 MV parameter view

MV parameter view for MPC10x10


The MV parameter view is a table which contains a row for each manipulated variable channel:

The channel number is at the far left. The physical unit applies to the high and low limit of the
respective channel. The gradient is limited in the respective manipulated variable unit per
second.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


994 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

(1) Displaying and changing the limit parameters for the manipulated variable
You can change the following parameters for the manipulated variable in this area:
● "H range": Upper limit of the manipulated variable for automatic mode
● "L range": Low limit of manipulated variable for automatic mode
● "Gradient limit": Maximum (absolute) change in the manipulated variable per second
The enabled operations for the setpoint parameters are displayed in the preview.

5.15.8.6 MPC10x10 preview

Preview for MPC10x10

(1) Enabled operation


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block. The
lower screen half shows operator permissions which apply to all manipulated and control
channels.
The upper screen half shows operator permissions which are not channel-based on the left,
and channel-specific operator permissions for the individual setpoints on the right.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 995
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

Icons for enabled operation:


● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).
The following enabled operations for parameters are shown here:
● "Automatic": You can switch to "automatic mode".
● "Out of service": You can switch to "Out of service" operating mode.
● "Optimization on": You can switch on the optimization.
● "Optimization off": You can switch off the optimization.
● "Local operator permission": Use the ← button to switch to the standard view of the
OpStations block. You can find additional information on this in the section Operator
permissions (Page 265) .
● "Change SP1..10": You can change the setpoint 1..10
● "Change MVs": You can change the manipulated variables
Note
The OS operator must always be able to switch to "manual mode". For this reason, there
is no special operator permission for switching to "manual mode" in the faceplate.

The following operator permissions apply to all manipulated channels.


● "Change MVs": You can change the manipulated variables in manual mode
● "MV limits": You can change the high and low limits for all manipulated variables.
● "MV gradient limits": You can change the gradient limits for all manipulated variables.
The following operator permissions apply to all control channels.
– "SP high limits": You can change the high limits for all setpoints.
– "Dead bands": You can change the dead bands for all controlled variables.
– "SP low limits": You can change the low limits for all setpoints.
– "Prefilter": You can change the time constants of the prefilter for all setpoints.
● "Change target values for MVs": You can change the target values for all manipulated
variables.

(2) Prediction horizon


The prediction horizon specifies how far the controller looks into the future in its calculations.
The value is set in the MPC Configurator and displayed in the faceplate for informational
purposes.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


996 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

(3) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
Use this navigation button to open the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system (ES). The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the
engineering system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in the section Opening additional faceplates
(Page 217) .

5.15.8.7 MPC10x10 trend view

MPC10x10 trend view


There is a block-specific trend view for MPC10x10 which is supplied as file
@PG_APL_TrendMPC_L.pdl and which you can modify if necessary.

 

(1) Toolbar
(2) Display area for trends
(3) Status bar
(4) Button for switching between archive tags and online tags. The status bar shows if the trend
view is working with online data or archive data.
The Export button is only visible and operable with the "Higher-level process control" operating
permission.
For additional information about the trend view, refer to the WinCC Information System Online
Help.
The trend view is divided into two screen halves.
The upper screen half shows all controlled variables with their associated setpoints. The
setpoint is shown in the same color as the associated process value to allow the assignment

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 997
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

to be identified straight away. Setpoints are dashed lines, process values are bold lines. If a
controlled variable is exactly on the setpoint, it hides the setpoint.
The lower screen half shows all manipulated variables.
Both screen halves use the same color sequence for the individual channels. The sequence
starts at channel 1 with green (standard color for the process value with the PID controller)
and then goes through the color spectrum from top to bottom as far as gray and black. From
channel 7 (red), the rest of the spectrum is run through from top to bottom. Each channel has
its own y-axis in the corresponding color.

5.15.8.8 Block icon for MPC10x10

Block icons for MPC10x10


A variety of block icons are available with the following functions:
● Process tag type
● Operating modes
● Signal status, release for maintenance
● Tracking
● Memo display
● Process value (black, with and without decimal places)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


998 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.15 MPC10x10 - Large predictive controller

The display of the tag name can be activated centrally for all block instances with the WinCC
variable @APLShowTag:

Icons Selection of the block Special features


icon in CFC
1

2 Narrow, without units

3 Block icon in the full display

Additional information on the block icon and the control options in the block icon is available
in the following sections:
● Configuring the block icons (Page 246)
● Operation via the block icon (Page 248)
● Block icon structure (Page 239).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 999
Controller blocks
5.16 KalFilt - State observer

5.16 KalFilt - State observer

5.16.1 Description of KalFilt

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1925
Family: Control

Area of application for KalFilt


The Kalman filter is a non-linear stochastic state observer. It forms a framework for parallel
simulation of a dynamic process model, whose states are compared with real data in each
cycle. During runtime, all internal state variables may be read from the model and used as a
substitute for real measured values.
The state observer thus allows to determine the physical values of a process unit, which are
not accessible or only measurable with high effort from other easily available measurements,
for example, temperatures and mass flows.
It can therefore be used as a soft sensor, that is a piece of software that estimates values
which are not measured.
In addition to its use as a state observer, it is also used as a model-based filter. The measured
variables calculated from the estimated states are not subject to measurement noise and
therefore generally run smoother than noisy measurements.

How it works
The extended Kalman filter
The block operates as a state observer, in which the algorithm of the extended Kalman filter
is implemented, and the online calculation of the internal states of non-linear dynamic systems
is performed. Both, the mathematical structure of the underlying dynamic system and the
properties of the stochastic disturbances must be known.
The term "filter" indicates that the algorithm is able to reduce measurement noise and other
disturbances of stochastic data.
The Kalman filter is an approach to solve the general problem of estimating the states of a
time-discrete process, which is described by linear stochastic differential equations and is a
generalization of the classical state observer (Luenberger observer) in this respect. The
estimation problem is extended to non-linear processes that result from a non-linear state
space model:

x k+1 f x k  uk  wk

yk h xk  vk

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1000 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.16 KalFilt - State observer

Symbols Meaning
xk Vector of the (inner) state variables at the time tk

uk Vector of the input variables at the time tk

yk Vector of the measurable output variables at the time tk

Φk Dynamic matrix (Jakobi matrix), refer to FB KalMod

Hk Output matrix (Jakobi matrix), refer to FB KalMod

Pk Estimation error covariance at the time tk

Kk Kalman gain at the time tk

Qk Covariance of the process noise at the time tk

Rk Covariance of the measurement noise at the time tk

wk  v k Stochastic disturbances

For the Kalman algorithm, a priori knowledge about the process to be observed must be
provided to the block. This includes the covariance of the process noise Q k , the covariance of
the observation noise R k , and the initial values (initialization) for the a priori state estimate
x 0. The a priori estimation error covariance P 0 is initialized with 0.
For more details on the configuration of the filter, refer to the Kalman Configurator User
Documentation. The configuration, identification, simulation, and validation of the filter are
performed in the Kalman Configurator.

,QLWLDOL]DWLRQ
x0  P0

&DOFXODWH.DOPDQJDLQ $FWXDOPHDVXUHGYDOXHV
-1 y  y  y 
K k = P k H Tk H k P k H Tk  R k 0 1 2

∂hi x
3UHGLFWLRQ Hk ( )
∂x j k i,j 8SGDWHYDOXHRIWKHHVWLPDWHGVWDWH
x k+1 f x k  uk
x0 x0  Kk yk  h xk
&RYDULDQFHRIWKHSUHGLFWLRQ ∂fi
Φk x k  uk
P k+1 Φ k P k Φ Tk  Q k ∂x j i,j

&RYDULDQFHRIWKHQHZHVWLPDWHGVWDWH
(VWLPDWHGYDOXHV
Pk P k  K k Hk P k x 0  x 1  x 2 
Figure 5-1 Implemented sequence of the extended Kalman filter

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1001
Controller blocks
5.16 KalFilt - State observer

The sequence of the extended Kalman filter (EKF) corresponds to the linear filter: via the
Kalman Gain K k the predicted (a priori) state estimate x k is corrected using the actual
measured values y k , which results in the corrected (a posteriori) state estimate x k . Only two
additional intermediate steps for calculating the Jacobi matrices H k and Φ k are necessary for
local linearization of non-linear models. The Jacobi matrices are calculated in the FB KalMod.
Consideration of sporadic laboratory measurements
If sporadic laboratory samples of relevant state variables are extracted from a process, the
integration of these laboratory measurements in the extended Kalman filter can lead to
significant improvements in estimation accuracy, since the unknown state variables can be
compared with the laboratory results. The sample is taken sporadically. Once laboratory results
are received, the laboratory values are provided to the EKF. The algorithm takes into account
that the laboratory result is associated with a previous process state, which belongs to the past
time instant where the sample was taken. For the usage of laboratory measurements, particular
engineering steps are necessary. These steps are described in the section "Additional
configuration tasks for inclusion of the laboratory measurements" under "Configuration".

Operating principle
The corrected states x k (X1...X15) are used for application as a state observer. These can be
used for visualization, interconnections to further calculations, or feedback for control loops.
The output variables y k h x k (Y1Filt…Y7Filt) calculated from the corrected states are
used for application as a model-based filter.
The advantage compared to a simple low-pass filter is that the influences of the inputs are
provided without additional delay to the output variables via the model. The signal status of
the filtered output values YiFilt are based on the worst signal status of the states.
To assess the quality of the Kalman filter, the following deviations can be used:
● The deviations of the predicted output values from the measured variables:
ek y k  h x k (EY1...EY7)

● The deviations of the predicted state variables from the laboratory measurements:
e nk y nk  hn x k (EYn1...EYn5)
The deviations are usually caused by modeling inaccuracies and unknown disturbances (i.e.
disturbances not considered in the model).
In many applications, there are not measurable outputs that can be calculated using algebraic
equations from state and input variables, and which are relevant for the practical use of the
Kalman filter, for example, heat flow generated by exothermic chemical reactions or specific
conversion rates in organic fermenters. These variables can be defined as non-measurable
process output variables (Z1Out...Z5Out) in the Kalman configurator, for which there is a
respective output equation, but no measured values.
For application of the filter block as a process simulator, the input variables Ui are
interconnected to the actual input values to simulate the behavior of the process and get
simulated measured values at the output variables YjFilt. Since there are no measurements
for the process output variables Yj, the corresponding inputs at the block are connected to
the output variables. The elements of the Q matrix are all set to zero, that is no model
uncertainty is assumed for the simulation.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1002 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.16 KalFilt - State observer

Kalman Configurator
Using the Kalman Configurator, you can conveniently configure the process model and specify
all model-specific settings for the Kalman filter. As a result, the tool generates the source code
of the FB KalMod. Once you have compiled the block, you can download it to the automation
system. For more details, refer to the Kalman Configurator User Documentation.

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38). The block is
also installed automatically in the startup OB (OB100).
Perform the following configuration tasks:
● Interconnect the input and output variables U1...U7 and Y1...Y7
● Interconnect UiLimScale, UiUnit (i = 1…NumberU) and YiLimScale, YiUnit (i = 1…
NumberY) and specify input limits (UiLimScale.High/.Low) and the measurement limits
(YiLimScale.High/.Low)
● Specify self-explaining variable names for all configured inputs, measurable and non-
measurable outputs, and state variables at the text attributes (identifiers)
● Select the associated process model in FB KalMod through ModelNo (1…5)
● Interconnect the initial values for the configured state variables. This connection is only
necessary if the initial values are not constant, but time-varying, and a signal source for the
actual values is available.
● Record measured data and configure the Kalman filter through the Kalman Configurator
(refer to the Kalman Configurator User Documentation)
To compile the SCL sources generated by the configurator, the following user-defined data
types are needed, which have to be copied from APL to the function block folder of the user
project:
● UDT 43: Vector15
● UDT 44: Matrix15
● UDT 45: Kal_DB
● UDT 46: StcVector15
● UDT 47: StcMatrix15
● UDT 48: StcKalDB
The data types which you have declared must not be within this number range.
● In the "Component view" of SIMATIC Manager, right-click on the folder "Sources", select
"Insert new object" and then select "External source".
● Double-click the SCL source to open/edit the code and click "Compile and load" to upload
it to the CPU.
● Set the input variable LoadParam = 1 at the KalFilt instance in the CFC to load the model
in the filter.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1003
Controller blocks
5.16 KalFilt - State observer

Additional configuration tasks for inclusion of the laboratory measurements:


● Enable bit for lab measurements (SampleEn = 1)
● The number of lab data (NumberYn) is already determined in the configurator.
Laboratory data can be inserted using the faceplate or can be provided by interconnection.
Therefore, the respective signal selectors ***_LiOp have to be set, whereby ***_LiOp = 1
means that the link is relevant, and ***_LiOp = 0 means that the operation in the faceplate
is relevant. Both the cases are described separately as follows:
● Inserting laboratory data in the faceplate:
– Select the signal selectors (SaPo_LiOp = 0, SaRe_LiOp = 0)
– The operation of the faceplate to insert laboratory data is described in section KalFilt
standard view (Page 1017).
● Providing laboratory data by interconnection:
– Select the signal selectors (SaPo_LiOp = 1, SaRe_LiOp = 1)
– At the time of taking the lab sample, set the input variable SaPo_Ext = 1. This command
is detected via rising edge of SaPo_Ext and is acknowledged by setting the binary
output variable SampExtracted = 1.
– After laboratory analysis, provide the results to the input variables
Yn1_Ext...Yn5_Ext and set the input variable SaRe_Ext = 1. This command is
detected via rising edge of SaRe_Ext and is acknowledged by setting the binary output
variable LabResIncluded = 1.
– Feature.Bit2 defines if the binary input variables are reset by the function block itself.
If they should not be reset automatically, they have to be reset by interconnection, after
the respective order was acknowledged by setting the respective binary output variable.
Diagonal elements of the covariance matrix of the measurement noise Rn11...Rn55 are
defined in the model FB from the Kalman Configurator.
Determining the monitoring time TimeMon:
● When this time has expired, waiting for the laboratory test results is terminated. It takes at
least one cycle of the process model between the period when the lab sample is taken and
the laboratory results are received.
The library contains the following blocks:

Icon Address Data type Comment


KalFilt FB 1925 FB 1925 State observer based on the algorithm of the ex‐
tended Kalman filter.
KalFunct FB 1926 FB 1926 Multiplexer for calling the correct model
KalMod1…Kal‐ FB 471…FB FB 471…FB Process model including Jacobi matrices and filter
Mod5 475 475 parameters, created in the configurator
MxAdd FC 466 FC 466 Adds two matrices (used internally)
MxCBnd FC 467 FC 467 Merging by column (columnbind) of two matrices
(used internally)
MxInv FC 468 FC 468 Returns an inverse of a matrix (used internally)
MxMul FC 469 FC 469 Multiplies two matrices (used internally)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1004 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.16 KalFilt - State observer

Icon Address Data type Comment


MxRBnd FC 470 FC 470 Merging by row (rowbind) of two matrices (used
internally)
MxSub FC 471 FC 471 Subtracts two matrices (used internally)
MxTrans FC 472 FC 472 Returns a transpose of a matrix (used internally)
MxUnity FC 473 FC 473 Generates an identity matrix (used internally)
MxZero FC 474 FC 474 Generates a zero matrix (used internally)
Vector15 UDT 43 UDT 43 Data type for vector calculations
Matrix15 UDT 44 UDT 44 Data type for matrix calculations
Kal_DB UDT 45 UDT 45 Data type for user data
StcVector15 UDT 46 UDT 46 Structure to deliver arrays of type Vektor15
StcMatrix15 UDT 47 UDT 47 Structure to deliver arrays of type Matrix15
StcKal_DB UDT 48 UDT 48 Structure to deliver arrays of type Kal_DB

Startup characteristics
At the start of a run or a batch, the algorithm must be initialized and all states must be set to
their initial values. This initialization is triggered by the binary input variable Reset, which is
automatically reset after executing the initialization and is also accessible in the faceplate.
If the initial values are read from the model FB generated by the Kalman Configurator during
initialization, the binary input variable LoadParam should be used instead, which is also
automatically reset after a successful read operation, but is not accessible in the faceplate.
The current values set at the corresponding input variables or in the faceplate are overwritten
(for example, initial values of the states) when the parameters are loaded from the FB.
When the CPU starts up, the block is reinitialized and the parameters are loaded from the FB
(in accordance with LoadParam).

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


You can find description of each parameter in the section KalFilt I/Os (Page 1012).

Status bit Parameter


0 Occupied
1 BatchEn
2 SimOn
3 OosAct
4 OosLi
5 Not used
6 OnAct
7 SampleEn, enable for introducing the laboratory values
8 SamplePoint, laboratory sample taken from process
9 SampleResult, lab results incorporated
10 Laboratory results are bad → lab results are ignored
11 Waiting period for laboratory results has expired
12 Laboratory results adapted to limits

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1005
Controller blocks
5.16 KalFilt - State observer

Status bit Parameter


13 SaPo_ExtAct, external lab sampling
14 SaRe_ExtAct, external lab measurement
15 Not used
16 - 25 UserAna1 to UserAna10 interconnected
26 - 31 Not used

See also
KalFilt modes (Page 1006)
KalFilt functions (Page 1008)
KalFilt error handling (Page 1010)
KalFilt messaging (Page 1016)
KalFilt block diagram (Page 1016)

5.16.2 KalFilt modes

Operating modes of KalFilt


The block can be operated using the following modes:
● On (Page 72)
● Out of service (Page 72)

"On"
You can find general information about the "On" mode in the section On (Page 72).

"Out of service"
You can find general information about the "Out of service" mode in the section Out of
service (Page 72).
With Feature.Bit5 =1 the following output parameter become the status of simulation
16#60, if mode is changed to "Out of service".
With Feature.Bit5 =0 the following output parameter become the status of 16#80, if mode
is changed to "Out of service".
● X1.ST
● X2.ST
● X3.ST
● X4.ST
● X5.ST

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1006 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.16 KalFilt - State observer

● X6.ST
● X7.ST
● X8.ST
● X9.ST
● X10.ST
● X11.ST
● X12.ST
● X13.ST
● X14.ST
● X15.ST
● U1Out.ST
● U2Out.ST
● U3Out.ST
● U4Out.ST
● U5Out.ST
● U6Out.ST
● U7Out.ST
● Y1Out.ST
● Y2Out.ST
● Y3Out.ST
● Y4Out.ST
● Y5Out.ST
● Y6Out.ST
● Y7Out.ST
● Yn1Out.ST
● Yn2Out.ST
● Yn3Out.ST
● Yn4Out.ST
● Yn5Out.ST
● Y1Filt.ST
● Y2Filt.ST
● Y3Filt.ST
● Y4Filt.ST
● Y5Filt.ST
● Y6Filt.ST

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1007
Controller blocks
5.16 KalFilt - State observer

● Y7Filt.ST
● Z1Out.ST
● Z2Out.ST
● Z3Out.ST
● Z4Out.ST
● Z5Out.ST
● SaPo_ExtAct.ST
● SaRe_ExtAct.ST

See also
Description of KalFilt (Page 1000)
KalFilt functions (Page 1008)
KalFilt error handling (Page 1010)
KalFilt I/Os (Page 1012)
KalFilt messaging (Page 1016)
KalFilt block diagram (Page 1016)

5.16.3 KalFilt functions

Functions of KalFilt
The functions for this block are listed below.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1008 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.16 KalFilt - State observer

Forming the signal status for blocks


The block provides the standard function Forming and outputting the signal status for
technologic blocks (Page 110).
● Signal status for the estimated states values X1...X15:
– When limited (to the high or low limit), the signal status 16#78 (uncertain, process-
related) is set at the relevant state estimate.
– If the REAL value of the input or output variables is "infinity" (+#INF and -#INF) or "not
a number" (+#NAN and -#NAN), the signal status 16#28 (Bad) is assigned to all state
variables.
– If a signal status of the input variables (U) is bad, all state variables obtain the signal
status ST_Worst.
– If a signal status of the output variables (Y) is bad, the associated covariance element
of the measurement noise R is set to 1.0e+10 and all state variables obtain the signal
status 16#68 (uncertain, device related).
– If a signal status of the lab measured values (Yn) is bad or the lab value cannot be shown
in the REAL number field, all lab values are ignored. The signal status of the lab
measured values has no affect on the signal status ST_Worst.
– In all other cases, the state estimated values have the signal status 16#80 (Good).
● The worst signal status ST_Worst for the block is formed from the parameters (U1.ST to
U7.ST).

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


An overview of all the reactions that are provided by the Feature parameter is available in
the section Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133). The following functionality
is available for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
0 Set startup characteristics (Page 141)
1 AUTOHOTSPOT
2 Resetting the commands for changing the mode (Page 165)
5 Changes signal status of outputs in OOS (Page 198)
24 Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162)

Operator permissions
The block provides the standard function Operator control permissions (Page 265).
The block has the following permissions for the OS_Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 Not used
1 1 = Operator can switch the block to "On" mode
2 Not used
3 1 = Operator can switch the block to "Out of service" mode

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1009
Controller blocks
5.16 KalFilt - State observer

Bit Function
4 Not used
5 1 = Operator can perform a block restart
6 1 = Operator can change SimUi simulation values
7 1 = Operator can change SimYi simulation values
8 1 = Operator can enter the initial values XiStart for state variables X1...X15
9 1 = Operator can change the high limit XiHiLim for state variables X1...X15
10 1 = Operator can change the low limits XiLoLim for state variables X1...X15
11 1 = Operator can enable the simulation function
12 Not used
13 1 = Operator can enter lab values and operate SaPo and SaRe
14 1 = Operator can specify the maximum duration for lab data and limits for errors in lab
values
15 1 = Operator can change the scaling of the bar graph display for the estimation error in the
standard view of the faceplate
16 - 31 Not used

See also
Description of KalFilt (Page 1000)
KalFilt modes (Page 1006)
KalFilt error handling (Page 1010)
KalFilt I/Os (Page 1012)
KalFilt messaging (Page 1016)
KalFilt block diagram (Page 1016)

5.16.4 KalFilt error handling

Error handling of KalFilt


Refer to section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions for the error handling of all
blocks.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers in ErrorNum
● Output bit ErrorPara = 1
The occurrence of an error is depicted at the faceplate using the symbol as function
block status.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1010 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.16 KalFilt - State observer

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum output parameter can be used to output the following error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


–1 Predefined value when the block is inserted; the block is not executed.
0 There is no error.
2 SampleTime < 0.001 or required sampling time for Kalman filter is less than the
cycle time of the cyclic interrupt OB in which the block is integrated.
3 FB KalFunct called internally returns an error, for example, if ModelNo > 5
4 Parameter assignment error NumberU/NumberY/NumberX/NumberYn/NumberZ,
for example, number larger than possible
6 Error loading model FB from the Kalman Configurator. The following sources of error
are possible:
● FB is not available
● FB is not Kalman Configurator FB
● Required matrix dimensions are not supported
7 Only during startup:
Initial values of the state variables are out of range
21 - 27 Signal status of the input variable U1...U7 is bad
30 The value of an input variable Y1...Y7 or U1…U7 cannot be displayed in the REAL
number field
31 Matrix inversion inside the Kalman filter algorithm fails. In this case, the internal filter
states will not be updated according to current measurement data, but remain at
their a priori values. If at the next sample step, with new measurement values, the
matrix-inversion works correctly again, the ErrorNum is set back to zero.

See also
Description of KalFilt (Page 1000)
KalFilt modes (Page 1006)
KalFilt functions (Page 1008)
KalFilt I/Os (Page 1012)
KalFilt messaging (Page 1016)
KalFilt block diagram (Page 1016)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1011
Controller blocks
5.16 KalFilt - State observer

5.16.5 KalFilt I/Os

Input parameters

Parameters Description Type Default


BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation for Batch control BOOL 0
BatchID Current batch ID DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Current batch designation STRING[32] ''
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1
EYn1Lim...EYn5Lim Limits for the difference between lab results and associated REAL 0.0
state values
EYPScale Scaling of the bar graph display of the estimation error in the REAL 100.0
faceplate
Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 1008) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
LoadParam 1 = Restart KalFilt with loading of the parameters (including BOOL Normal oper.
the initial values for the states) from the FB
ModelNo Process model number (assignment of the appropriate proc‐ INT 1
ess model in KalFunc)
Occupied 1 = Occupied by batch control BOOL 0
OnOp 1=On Mode: On Mode by Operator BOOL 0
OosLi 1 = "Out of service", via interconnection or SFC (0-1 edge STRUCT -
transition) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosOp 1 = "Out of service", via OS operator BOOL 0
OS_Perm I/O for operator permissions (Page 1008) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● ... ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
Q11…Q1515 Diagonal elements of the covariance matrix Q, related to un‐ REAL 0.0
certainty of the differential equation for respective states
X1…X15
Reset 1 = Reset the states X1...X15 to their initial values defined BOOL Normal oper.
at the input parameters
R11…R77 Diagonal elements of covariance matrix R, related to meas‐ REAL 0.0
urement noise of output variables Y1…Y7
Rn11…Rn55 Diagonal elements of covariance matrix Rn, related to meas‐ REAL 0.0
urement noise of lab results Yn1…Yn5
SampleEn Enable for sporadic laboratory measurements BOOL 0
SampleTime Sample time in seconds (assigned automatically) REAL 0.1

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1012 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.16 KalFilt - State observer

Parameters Description Type Default


SaPo_LiOp Select lab sampling (internal/external): BOOL 0
1 = Via interconnection (external)
0 = Via operator (internal)
SaPo_Int 1 = Lab sampling internal (via operator) BOOL 0
SaPo_Ext 1 = Lab sampling external (via interconnection) BOOL 0
SaRe_LiOp Select lab result (internal/external): BOOL 0
1 = Via interconnection (external)
0 = Via operator (internal)
SaRe_Int 1 = Lab result internal (input by operator) BOOL 0
SaRe_Ext 1 = Lab result external (values comes via interconnection) BOOL 0
SelFp1 1 = Call a block saved in this parameter as an additional ANY  
faceplate in the standard view
SelFp2 1 = Call a block saved in this parameter as an additional ANY  
faceplate in the preview
SimOn Switch on/off of the simulation BOOL 0
SimU1...SimU7 Simulation values for U1…U7 REAL 0.0
SimY1 Simulation values for Y1...Y7 REAL 0.0
...
SimY7
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
TimeMon Monitoring time for sampling in minutes INT 60
U1...U7 Input variables STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
U1Unit...U7Unit Unit for input variables U1...U7 INT 1342
U1LimScale...U7Li Limit of the value range and scaling for faceplate STRUCT -
mScale ● High: REAL ● 100.0
● Low: REAL ● 0.0
UserAna1...UserAn Arbitrary analog values for display in the block icon STRUCT -
a10 ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
UA1Unit...UA10Uni Unit for UserAna1...UserAna10 INT 1001
t
UserStatus Freely assignable user area for status word (bits 24-31) BYTE 16#00
X1LimScale...X15L High and low limit for X1...X15 STRUCT -
imScale ● High: REAL ● 100.0
● Low: REAL ● 0.0

X1Start...X15Star Initial value for the state variables X1...X15 REAL 0.0
t
X1Unit...X15Unit Unit for the state variables X1...X15 INT 1001 (°K)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1013
Controller blocks
5.16 KalFilt - State observer

Parameters Description Type Default


Y1...Y7 Measurable output variables STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Y1LimScale...Y7Li Limitation of the value range of Y1...Y7 and scaling for face‐ STRUCT -
mScale plate ● High: REAL ● 100.0
● Low: REAL ● 0.0
Y1Unit...Y7Unit Unit for the output variables Y1...Y7 INT 1001
Yn1_Ext...Yn5_Ext External lab result (input for interconnection) STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Yn1_Int...Yn5_Int Internal lab result Yn1_Int...Yn5_Int (input by operator) REAL 0.0
Yn1Unit...Yn5Unit Unit for the lab result Yn1...Yn5 INT 1342 (%)
Yn1LimScale...Yn5 Limitation of the value range of Yn1...Yn5 and scaling for STRUCT -
LimScale faceplate ● High: REAL ● 100.0
● Low: REAL ● 0.0
Z1Unit...Z5Unit Unit of measurement for Z1...Z5 INT 1001

Output parameters

Parameters Description Type Default


DTimeMon Time since extraction of lab sample in minutes REAL 0.0
ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without errors BOOL 0
ErrorNum Output of pending error number. For definition of error num‐ INT -1
bers by this block, see KalFilt error handling (Page 1010).
ErrorPara 1= Parameter assignment error BOOL 0
EY1...EY7 Deviation between measured values (Y1...Y7) and predic‐ REAL 0.0
tion of the Kalman filter
EYn1...EYn5 Deviation between lab results and prediction of the Kalman REAL 0.0
filter
EY1P_k1...EY1P_k5 Percent deviation between measured value Y1 and predic‐ REAL 0.0
tion of the Kalman filter for 1 to 5 latest samples
EY2P_k1...EY2P_k5 Percent deviation between measured value Y2 and predic‐ REAL 0.0
tion of the Kalman filter for 1 to 5 latest samples
EY3P_k1...EY3P_k5 Percent deviation between measured value Y3 and predic‐ REAL 0.0
tion of the Kalman filter for 1 to 5 latest samples
EY4P_k1...EY4P_k5 Percent deviation between measured value Y4 and predic‐ REAL 0.0
tion of the Kalman filter for 1 to 5 latest samples
EY5P_k1...EY5P_k5 Percent deviation between measured value Y5 and predic‐ REAL 0.0
tion of the Kalman filter for 1 to 5 latest samples
EY6P_k1...EY6P_k5 Percent deviation between measured value Y6 and predic‐ REAL 0.0
tion of the Kalman filter for 1 to 5 latest samples

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1014 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.16 KalFilt - State observer

Parameters Description Type Default


EY7P_k1...EY7P_k5 Percent deviation between measured value Y7 and predic‐ REAL 0.0
tion of the Kalman filter for 1 to 5 latest samples
EYPScaleOut Calculated scaling of the bar representation of estimation STRUCT -
error in the standard view of the faceplate ● High: REAL ● 100.0
● Low: REAL ● 0.0 
LabResIncluded Laboratory results included BOOL 0
NumberU Number of input variables U INT 7
NumberX Number of state variables X INT 15
NumberY Number of output variables Y INT 7
NumberYn Number of lab sample variables Yn INT 1
NumberZ Number of non-measurable output variables Z INT 0
OnAct 1 = "On" mode enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with the settings changed by the block DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
algorithm
OosAct 1 = Block is "Out of service" STRUCT - 
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
P11…P1515 Diagonal elements of covariance matrix P, related to uncer‐ REAL 0.0
tainty of differential equation for respective states X1…X15
SampExtracted Laboratory sample extracted BOOL 0
SaPo_ExtAct 1 = External lab sampling is active STRUCT -
0 = Internal lab sampling is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SaRe_ExtAct 1 = External lab results active STRUCT -
0 = Internal lab results active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Status1 Status word 1 DWORD 16#00000000
Status2 Status word 2 (not used) DWORD 16#00000000
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
X1...X15 Corrected state estimation value STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
U1Out...U7Out Input variables set at the block input (copy of U1...U7) STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Y1Filt...Y7Filt Process output variables calculated based on the corrected STRUCT -
states X1…X15 ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1015
Controller blocks
5.16 KalFilt - State observer

Parameters Description Type Default


Y1Out...Y7Out Process output variables set at the block input (copy of STRUCT -
Y1...Y7) ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Yn1Out...Yn5Out Lab results set at the block input STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Z1Out...Z5Out Additional non-measurable output variables STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

See also
Description of KalFilt (Page 1000)
KalFilt modes (Page 1006)
KalFilt messaging (Page 1016)
KalFilt block diagram (Page 1016)

5.16.6 KalFilt messaging

Messaging
This block does not offer messaging.

See also
Description of KalFilt (Page 1000)
KalFilt modes (Page 1006)
KalFilt functions (Page 1008)
KalFilt error handling (Page 1010)
KalFilt I/Os (Page 1012)
KalFilt block diagram (Page 1016)

5.16.7 KalFilt block diagram

KalFilt block diagram


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1016 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.16 KalFilt - State observer

See also
Description of KalFilt (Page 1000)
KalFilt modes (Page 1006)
KalFilt functions (Page 1008)
KalFilt error handling (Page 1010)
KalFilt I/Os (Page 1012)
KalFilt messaging (Page 1016)

5.16.8 Operator control and monitoring

5.16.8.1 KalFilt views

Views of the KalFilt block


The block KalFilt provides the following views:
● KalFilt standard view (Page 1017)
● KalFilt parameter view (Page 1021)
● KalFilt parameter view 2 (Page 1022)
● KalFilt preview (Page 1023)
● KalFilt measurements view (Page 1024)
● KalFilt trend view (Page 1025)
● Batch view (Page 313)
● Memo view (Page 315)
● Block icon for KalFilt (Page 1026)
Refer to the sections Structure of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure
(Page 239) for general information on the faceplate and block icon.

5.16.8.2 KalFilt standard view

Standard view of KalFilt


The standard view has two parts; view 1 and view 2. You can change between the two views
with the arrow keys.
View 1

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1017
Controller blocks
5.16 KalFilt - State observer










View 2

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1018 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.16 KalFilt - State observer

 

(1) Displaying and switching the operating mode


This area provides information on the currently active operating mode. The following operating
mode can be shown here:
● On (Page 72)
● Out of service (Page 72)
Refer to chapter Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) for information
on switching the operating mode.

(2) Restarting the block


Click "Restart" to restart the Kalman filter block.
The initial values specified at the block inputs (X1Start...X15Start) can be set with Reset.

(3) Display of the estimation error in process outputs


In this area, the percentage estimation errors in the existing measurement channels are
displayed. These are based on the particular value range and are calculated for 5 consecutive
sampling instants in the recent past. The estimation error at the current time is displayed on
the far right and the most distant error in the past (5 sampling steps ago) can be seen at the
far left. You can change the scaling of the bar in the parameter view (Page 1021) of the
faceplate.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1019
Controller blocks
5.16 KalFilt - State observer

(4) Sample Point


You can mark the time of extracting lab sample using "Sample Point" button (only if
SaPo_LiOp = 0).

(5) Sample Result


Click this button to confirm the laboratory results entered in the "TextLabDatai" fields. Refer
to (7) Laboratory results.

(6) Duration of Analysis


This field displays the elapsed time since the extraction of lab sample. If this is greater than
the specified limit (TimeMon, can be changed in the parameter view), which is displayed at
the upper right field, the result of the laboratory measurement is no longer used.

(7) Laboratory results


You can enter the laboratory results (Yni_Int) directly in the "TextLabDatai" fields. Once they
are all fully entered, the entry must be confirmed with the "Sample Result" button. The counter
stops and the laboratory data are considered in the calculations of the Kalman filter. If a sample
is extracted but no meaningful result can be given, a new sample extraction can be started in
the faceplate. If the laboratory data is given via interconnection, the description for engineering
and operation can be found in the section Additional configuration tasks for inclusion of the
laboratory measurements (Page 1000).

(8) Additional output variables


If you have output variables which cannot be measured and are calculated from a posteriori
state estimates, you can define and enter the calculation algorithm for a maximum of 5
additional output variables (Z1Out…Z5Out) in the Kalman Configurator.

(9) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
Use this navigation button to open the standard view of another function block, which is
configured in the engineering system (ES).
The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the engineering system
(ES).
For more information, refer to the section Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

(10) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Simulation"
You will find more detailed information on this in the sections Simulating signals (Page 59).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1020 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.16 KalFilt - State observer

(11) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Sample extracted"
● "Lab results included"
● "Error in lab results"
● "Time out in analysis"
● "Lab results limited"

(12) State variables


This area shows the current values of the estimated state variables.

(13) Initial values


You can specify intial values for the state variables, which are used for Reset.

5.16.8.3 KalFilt parameter view

Parameter view of KalFilt

(1) Display of estimation error in standard view


You can set the scale of the bar diagram in the "Bar maximum" (EYPScale) field. The bar
diagram is displayed in the KalFilt standard view (Page 1017).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1021
Controller blocks
5.16 KalFilt - State observer

(2) Estimation error limits in lab data


You can change the maximum permissible deviation of the laboratory results from the
estimated state variables in the "TextLabData1" field (EYniLim).
If the actual error is above this value, the lab results are regarded as implausible and not used
for the Kalman filter.

(3) Duration limits in lab data


You can adjust the maximum duration for a laboratory measurement in the "Monitoring time"
field.

(4) Service
You can enable and disable simulation of the block using the "Simulation" button.

5.16.8.4 KalFilt parameter view 2

Parameter view 2 of KalFilt

 

(1) Lower limit of state variables


You can specify the lower limit of the state variables.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1022 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.16 KalFilt - State observer

(2) Upper limit of state variables


You can specify the upper limit of the state variables.

5.16.8.5 KalFilt preview

Preview of Kalfilt

(1) Estimation error in process variables


This area shows the estimation error in the output variables. The values of the estimation error
are shown in physical units in preview and as percentage in the standard view (Page 1017).

(2) Estimation error in laboratory data


This area shows the estimation error in the laboratory results. The values of the estimation
error are shown in physical units in preview and as percentage in the standard view
(Page 1017).

(3) Enable operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1023
Controller blocks
5.16 KalFilt - State observer

Icons for enabled operation:


● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).
The following enabled operation is shown here:
● "Local operating permission": Use the ← button to switch to the standard view of the
OpStations block. You can find additional information on this in the section Operator control
permissions (Page 265).

(4) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
Use this navigation button to open the standard view of another function block, which is
configured in the engineering system (ES).
The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the engineering system
(ES).
For more information, refer to the section Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

5.16.8.6 KalFilt measurements view

Measurements view of KalFilt

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1024 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Controller blocks
5.16 KalFilt - State observer

(1) Process outputs


This area displays current values of the process outputs.

(2) Process inputs


This area displays current values of the process inputs.

5.16.8.7 KalFilt trend view

Trend view of KalFilt

 

(1) Toolbar
(2) Display area for trends
(3) Status bar
(4) Button for switching between archive tags and online tags. The status bar shows if the trend
view is working with online data or archive data.
For additional information about the trend view, refer to the WinCC Information System Online
Help.
The trend view is divided into three areas. The top area shows the state variables, the middle
area shows the input and output variables, and the lower area shows the estimation errors.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1025
Controller blocks
5.16 KalFilt - State observer

5.16.8.8 Block icon for KalFilt

Block icons for KalFilt


A single block icon is available with the following functions:
● Process tag type
● Operating modes
● Signal status, release for maintenance
● Memo display
● User analog values 1 to 10, typically a subset of the estimated states and additional output
variables (black, with and without decimal places)
The display of the tag name can be activated centrally for all block instances with the WinCC
variable @APLShowTag:

Icons Selection of the block Special features


icon in CFC
1 Block icon with full display for 10
freely assignable measured val‐
ues:
UserAna1...UserAna10

Additional information on the block icon and the control options in the block icon is available
in the following sections:
● Configuring the block icons (Page 246)
● Operation via the block icon (Page 248)
● Block icon structure (Page 239)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1026 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Dosing blocks 6
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

6.1.1 Description of DoseL

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1809
Family: Dosage

Area of application for DoseL


The block is used for the following applications:
● Single-component dosing using flow measurement
● Weighing of fill/removal volume using dosing scales

How it works
Processing is performed discretely via a coarse/fine flow control with flow monitoring and
setpoint specification. The dosing flow can be determined via a maximum of 16 cycles.
A dribbling phase and post dosing can be implemented for both processes. The input value
can also be supplied from a pulse module via the PV1CycLi output of the Pcs7Cntx (x=1...3)
channel block.

Note
When using a pulse module, the counted pulses per cycle must be normalized via the I/Os
"Gain" and "Ti" at DoseL .
Example:
A pulse of 35 Kg per hour means that I/O "Gain" must be configured to 35 and I/O "Ti" to 3600.

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38). The block is
also installed automatically in the startup OB (OB100).
For the DoseL block, the Advanced Process Library contains templates for process tag types
as examples with various application scenarios for this block.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1027
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

Examples of process tag types:


● Dosing (Dose_Lean) (Page 2422)
● Dosing with PA/FF devices (Dose_Lean_Fb) (Page 2423)

Startup characteristics
Use the Feature Bit Set startup characteristics (Page 141) to define the startup characteristics
of this block.
The messages are suppressed after startup for the number of cycles set at RunUpCyc.

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


You can find a description for each parameter in section DoseL I/Os (Page 1054).

Status bit Parameter


0 Occupied
1 BatchEn
2 SimOn
3 OosAct.Value
4 OosLi.Value
5 AutoAct.Value
6 LocalAct.Value
7 0: Open padlock in the block icon
1: Closed padlock in the block icon
8 SP_ExtAct
9 Ctrl
10 Ctrl2
11 1 = Dosing by scale
12 0 = Dosing by scale for filling
1 = Dosing by scale for removal
13 BypProt active
14 Invalid signal status
15 Mode switchover error
16 1 = Intlock is active
17 1 = Permit is active
18 1 = Protect is active
19 DosOn
20 DosRelax
21 DosEnd
22 DosOff
23 DosPause
24 DosStart
25 1 = Post dosing
26 "Start" command

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1028 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

Status bit Parameter


27 "Pause" command
28 "Continue" command
29 "Cancel" command
30 UserAna1 interconnected
31 UserAna2 interconnected

Status word allocation for Status2 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 MsgLock
1 DQ_AH_Act xx_Act taking into account Feature.Bit29
2 DQ_AL_Act xx_Act taking into account Feature.Bit29
3 DQ_AH_En OR Feature.Bit16
4 DQ_AL_En OR Feature.Bit16
5 DQ_AH_MsgEn
6 DQ_AL_MsgEn
7 PV_AH_Act xx_Act taking into account Feature.Bit29
8 PV_AL_Act xx_Act taking into account Feature.Bit29
9 PV_AH_En and Feature.Bit7 = 1 or PV_AH_En and flow mode OR
Feature.Bit16
10 PV_AL_En and Feature.Bit7 = 1 or PV_AL_En and flow mode OR
Feature.Bit16
11 PV_AH_MsgEn
12 PV_AL_MsgEn
13 PV_AH2_Act xx_Act taking into account Feature.Bit29
14 PV_AL2_Act xx_Act taking into account Feature.Bit29
15 PV_AH2_En and Feature.Bit7 = 1 or PV_AH2_En and flow mode OR
Feature.Bit16
16 PV_AL2_En and Feature.Bit7 = 1 or PV_AL2_En and flow mode OR
Feature.Bit16
17 PV_AH2_MsgEn
18 PV_AL2_MsgEn
19 CR_AH_Act xx_Act taking into account Feature.Bit29
20 CR_AH_En and Feature.Bit7 = 1 or CR_AH_En and flow mode OR
Feature.Bit16
21 CR_AH_MsgEn
22 Display for interlocks in block icon
23 1 = Scales tared
24 Automatic preview 1 = Dosing "On"
25 Automatic preview 1 = Dosing "Dribbling"
26 Automatic preview 1 = Dosing "End"
27 Automatic preview 1 = Dosing "Off"
28 Automatic preview 1 = Dosing "Pause"

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1029
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

Status bit Parameter


29 Forcen active
30 Bypass information from previous function block
31 MS_RelOp

Status word allocation for Status3 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 "Interlock" button is enabled
1 "Permission" button is enabled
2 "Protection" button is enabled
3 DosCancelMsgEn
4 Feature.Bit7 = 1 (Calculation of the flow rate for dosing by scale)
5 Feature.Bit7 = 1 or flow mode
6 Display flow setpoint in percent
7 Display flow setpoint bar
8 Reset request in automatic mode
9 Feature.Bit8 = 1 (Fine dosing quantity setpoint absolute)
10 SimLiOp.Value
11 External error generated by FaultExt or external control system fault CSF with set
Feature bit 18 Activating error state for external process control error CSF
(Page 154)
12 0 = Button text "Ack underdose" is visible
1 = Button text "Ack overdose" is visible
13 Display "Ack Dos End" block state in the standard view
14 - 18 Not used
19 Display "Forced start"
20 Display "Force abort"
21 Display "Forced pause"
22 Display "Forced continue"
23 - 27 Not used
28 GrpErr.Value
29 RdyToStart.Value
30 1 = Input parameter CtrlChnST is interconnected
31 1 = Input parameter Ctrl2ChnST is interconnected

Status word allocation for Status4 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 Effective signal 1 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
1 Effective signal 2 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
2 Effective signal 3 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
3 Effective signal 4 of the message block connected via EventTsIn

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1030 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

Status bit Parameter


4 Effective signal 5 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
5 Effective signal 6 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
6 Effective signal 7 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
7 Effective signal 8 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
8 Delay of the DQ_AH_Tol message
9 Delay of the DQ_AL_Tol message
10 Delay of the PV_AH_Lim message
11 Delay of the PV_AL_Lim message
12 Delay of the PV_AH2_Lim message
13 Delay of the PV_AL2_Lim message
14 Delay of the CR_AH_Lim message
15 Collection of message delays
16 - 22 Not used
23 Hidden bypass signal in Permit
24 Hidden bypass signal in interlock
25 Hidden bypass signal in Protect
26 Feature2.Bit2: Separate bypass signal
27 - 31 Not used

Status word allocation for Status5 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0-7 Effective signal 9..16 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
8 - 31 Not used

See also
DoseL functions (Page 1034)
DoseL messaging (Page 1051)
DoseL modes (Page 1031)
DoseL error handling (Page 1049)
DoseL block diagram (Page 1068)

6.1.2 DoseL modes

DoseL operating modes


The block can be operated using the following modes:
● Local mode (Page 80)
● Automatic mode (Page 76)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1031
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

● Manual mode (Page 76)


● Out of service (Page 72)
The next section provides additional block-specific information relating to the general
descriptions.

"Local mode"
You can find general information on "Local mode", switching modes and Bumpless switchover
in the Local mode (Page 80) section.
Dosing actions you can control in "local mode":
● "Start" (positive edge StartLocal)
● "Cancel" (CancelLocal = 1)
● "Pause" (PauseLocal = 1)
● "Continue" (ContLocal = 1)
If you operate the block in "local mode", control will only take place via "local" signals (input
parameters StartLocal = 1, CancelLocal = 1, PauseLocal = 1 and ContLocal = 1).

Note
Unlike the general description, at the LocalSetting parameter only the values 0, 1 and 3
can be set, i.e. tracking in "local" mode is not possible with DoseL.

"Automatic mode"
You can find general information on "Automatic mode", switching modes and Bumpless
switchover in the Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76) section.
Dosing actions you can control in "automatic mode":
● "Start" (positive edge StartAut)
● "Cancel" (CancelAut = 1)
● "Pause" (PauseAut = 1)
● "Continue" (ContAut = 1)

"Manual mode"
You can find general information on "Manual mode", switching modes and bumpless
switchover in the section Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers
(Page 76).
Dosing actions you can control in "manual mode":
● "Start" (StartMan = 1)
● "Cancel" (CancelMan = 1)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1032 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

● "Pause" (PauseMan = 1)
● "Continue" (ContMan = 1)

"Out of service"
You can find general information about the "Out of service" mode in the section Out of
service (Page 72).
With Feature2.Bit6 =1 the following output parameter become the status of simulation
16#60, if mode is changed to "Out of service".
With Feature2.Bit6 =0 the following output parameter become the status of 16#80, if mode
is changed to "Out of service".
● DosStart.ST
● DosEnd.ST
● DosOn.ST
● DosRelax.ST
● DosOff.ST
● DosPause.ST
● SP_ExtAct.ST
● DQ_SP.ST
● DQ1_SP.ST
● DQ2_SP.ST
● DQ_SP_Tol.ST
● DQ_ExtOut.ST
● DQ2_ExtOut.ST
● DQ_Out.ST
● DQ_AH_Act.ST
● DQ_AL_Act.ST
● SP.ST
● SP1.ST
● SP2.ST
● SP_ExtOut.ST
● SP2_ExtOut.ST
● SP_ExHiAct.ST
● SP_ExLoAct.ST
● SP2_ExHiAct.ST
● SP2_ExLoAct.ST
● PV_Out.ST

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1033
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

● PV_AH_Act.ST
● PV_AL_Act.ST
● PV_AH2_Act.ST
● PV_AL2_Act.ST
● CR_AH_Act.ST

See also
Description of DoseL (Page 1027)
DoseL functions (Page 1034)
DoseL error handling (Page 1049)
DoseL messaging (Page 1051)
DoseL I/Os (Page 1054)
DoseL block diagram (Page 1068)

6.1.3 DoseL functions

Functions of DoseL
The functions for this block are listed below.

Status diagram
The block provides the following states:
● "End"
If an underdosage or overdosage is identified, the status display shows the state "Ack Dos
End" in the standard view.
● "On"
● "Dribbling"
● "Off"
● "Pause"
The following commands can initiate a state change:
● "Start"
● "Cancel"

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1034 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

● "Pause"
● "Continue"
6WDUW5HVXPH SRVWGRVLQJ

 &DQFHO

&DQFHO
'ULEEOH



(QG 2Q

&DQFHO
2II

&RQWLQXH 

3DXVH
&DQFHO
3DXVH

&RQWLQXH

Dosing can only be started if the dosing setpoint is greater than the current dosing quantity
(DQ_Out) or if Feature.Bit6 is set and no interlock is pending.

Note
After a start of scale dosing with Feature.Bit14 = 1 the controls are deactivated during the
scale is in taring mode (StandStill = 0).

However, the following status changes are also performed automatically:

Number in graph‐ Function


ic (top)
1 When the dosing quantity is reached, dosing terminates (DQ_Out ≥ DQ_SP).
2 If the dosing quantity reaches the dribbling quantity (relative to dosing setpoint
DQ_Out ≥ DQ_SP – DribbOut) the dribbling status becomes active.
3 Automatic post dosing in automatic mode via the Feature.Bit12, if an under‐
dosage was identified after the dribbling time (RelaxTime).
4 ● Flow alarm (see input parameter Feature.Bit11) or
● Interlock.
● The dosing process of the DoseL block is set to the "Off" state with a process
value status "Bad, device-related" or "Bad, process-related". The response can
be set using Feature bit parameter assignment.
5 ● The flow alarm is acknowledged (also provided via the "Continue" command if
Feature.Bit9 = 1) or
● The interlock is acknowledged (also provided via the "Continue" command if
Feature.Bit9 = 1).
● "Continue" command after underdosing.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1035
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

Number in graph‐ Function


ic (top)
6 Underdosage identified after the dribbling time (RelaxTime).
Overdosage identified after the dribbling time (only with Feature2.Bit24 = 1).
7 Interlock
8 Dribbling time (RelaxTime) has expired and dosing quantity is above the low tol‐
erance limit (DQ_Out ≥ DQ_SP_Tol - DQ_AL_Tol)
9 The underdosage is acknowledged or the dosing quantity has been reached
(DQ_Out ≥ DQ_SP) via creep flow, for example
10 Dosing quantity has been reached (DQ_Out ≥ DQ_SP) via creep flow, for example

Control outputs
The coarse flow (Ctrl) or fine flow (Ctrl2) control outputs are issued in the "On" status.
The coarse flow control output is active if:
● DQ_Out < DQ_SP – DQ2_SP
The fine flow control output is active if:
● DQ_Out ≥ DQ_SP – DQ2_SP
● Where DQ_Out: Dosing quantity actual value
● DQ_SP: Dosing quantity setpoint
● DQ2_SP: fine dosing quantity setpoint ("calculated")

Output signal as a pulse signal or static signal


This block provides the standard function Output signal as a static signal or pulse signal
(Page 52).
In addition to the static control outputs Ctrl, Ctrl2, the block also has pulse outputs P_Ctrl,
P_Ctrl2, which are dependent on the static control outputs.

Determining the dosing quantity when using flow dosing


You can activate flow dosing using Feature.Bit5 = 0 (Specifying the dosing type
(Page 149).)
When using flow dosing, the dosing quantity is determined using the following equation:

SampleTime ( PV _ Outalt + PV _ Out )


DQ _ Out = DQ _ Out + g
TI 2
Where:
● DQ_Out: Dosing quantity actual value
● SampleTime: Sampling time [s]

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1036 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

● TI: dimensionless conversion factor for the time basis of the measured value acquisition
in the time basis 1 s
● PV_Outalt: Last value PV_OUT
The output parameter PV_OUT is determined using an average calculation:

PV _ Out( t ) + PV _ Out( t −1 ) + ... + PV _ Out( t −( n −1 ))


PV _ Out :=
NumSample( N )

Where:
● PV_Out(t) = PV · Gain
The average calculation is only active if NumSample > 1 and NumSample ≤ 16 and serves to
smooth systematically pulsating measuring signals.

Note
Integration of the flow for the dosing quantity
The integration of the flow for the dosing quantity is implemented using the trapezoid rule.
Compared to the summation of rectangles rule, in which the values are simply added up, the
procedural error in the case of the trapezoid rule is smaller for the determination of the
numerical integral value.

The dosing quantity is determined in the "On" and "Dribbling" state. In the "End", "Off" and
"Pause" states, the flow (creep flow) is determined depending on the Feature.Bit13 (Creep
rate is always detected in the dosing quantity (Page 172)) and the value CR_AH_Lim. Creep
flow monitoring is disabled with CR_AH_En = 0 .

Determining the dosing quantity when dosing using scales


You can activate scale dosing via the Feature.Bit5 = 1 (Specifying the dosing type
(Page 149).)
The dosing quantity is determined for a scale dosing in the "Start" state following a positive
edge at the input parameter StandStill. The StandStill input parameter is a feedback
signal of the scale.
The process of determining the dosing quantity stops after the dosing quantity is reset in the
"End" state.
If the signal is no longer available, you need to configure StandStill with 1 permanently;
the dosing quantity will then be determined right at the start of the dosing.
When weighing the fill volume (MeterType = 0), the dosing quantity is determined using the
following equations:

DQ _ Out = PV _ Out − DQ _ Tare


When weighing the removal volume (MeterType = 1):

DQ _ Out = DQ _ Tare − PV _ Out

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1037
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

with PV_Out = PV · Gain


In the "Start" state, the DQ_Tare tare memory is set with PV_Out with the first positive edge
of StandStill. With Feature.Bit14 = 1 the dosing controls Ctrl, P_Ctrl, Ctrl2,
P_Ctrl2 are deactivated until the tare memory is set.
If you have permanently configured StandStill with 1, the tare memory is set right at the
start of dosing.

Note
The DQ_Out output parameter is the dosing quantity and not the actual scale value. In the
"End" state (= following resetting of the dosing quantity), nothing further is displayed, since the
dosing procedure is complete. When dosing starts, the actual scale value is transferred to the
tare memory, and therefore the dosing quantity always remains 0 after the start of dosing.
Therefore, the actual scale value is not displayed in the "End" state.

Calculation of the flow rate for dosing by scale


You can activate the calculation of the flow rate via the Feature.Bit7 = 1
(Activating calculation of the flow rate for dosing by scale (Page 148)).
The flow rate for scale dosing is determined by the following equations:

GainEff
PV _ Out = ( avPV ( t ) − avPV ( t −1 ))g
SampleTime
with

PV ( t ) + PV ( t − 1 ) + ... + PV ( t − ( N + 1 ))
avPV ( t ) =
NumSample( N )
where avPV(t) = internal variable for the mean dosing quantity

Dribbling
The "Dribbling" status is entered automatically in accordance with
● DQ_Out ≥ DQ_SP – DribbOut
Where:
● DQ_Out: Dosing quantity actual value
● DQ_SP: Dosing quantity setpoint
● DribbOut: Dribbling quantity
The dribbling quantity is specified with the input DribbIn.
DribCor = 1 can be used to automatically determine the dribbling quantity from previous
dosing actions:
● DribbOut = DribbOut - (DQ_SP - DQ_Out) · DCF / 100

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1038 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

DCF represents the weighting factor of the last dosing action as a percentage and cannot be
set to below 0 or above 100. DribbOut is calculated at the end of dosing or the first time an
underdosage occurs, and is limited to DribbMax. Post dosing is not taken into account.
The "Dribbling" status is active for the period RelaxTime.

Note
Also with DribbOut = 0 the "Dribbling" status is active. If you want to deactivate the "Dribbling"
status, you have to set additionally RelaxTime = 0.

When the "Enable configuration of the dribbling quantity (Page 162)" function is enabled
(Feature.Bit27 = 1) and automatic determination of the dribbling quantity is disabled
(DribCor = 0), the quantity can also be configured during dosing, but not in the "Dribbling" state.

Overdosing/underdosing
Once the "Dribbling" state has expired, the dosing quantity is checked for overdosages or
underdosages. In the "End" status, no check is performed for over- or underdosages.
An overdosage has occurred if:
● DQ_Out > DQ_SP_Tol + DQ_AH_Tol
An underdosage has occurred if:
● DQ_Out < DQ_SP_Tol - DQ_AL_Tol
● Where DQ_Out: Dosing quantity actual value
● DQ_SP_Tol: Dosing quantity setpoint for forming tolerance. This is the same as the dosing
quantity setpoint (DQ_SP) before and after the check that determines overdosing/
underdosing.
● DQ_AH_Tol: High tolerance limit
● DQ_AL_Tol: Low tolerance limit
If an underdosage is identified after the "Dribbling" state, the "Off" state is entered. The
underdosage can be acknowledged in "Off" state (U_AckOp = 1 or positive edge U_AckLi)
and the dosing action completed, or post dosing can be started with the "Continue" command.
The dosing end state display in the standard view shows "Ack Dos End".
With Feature2.Bit24 = 0:
If an overdosage is identified after the "Dribbling“ state, the dosing "End" state is entered at
once. A message for overdosage comes and goes in next cycle.
With Feature2.Bit24 = 1:
If an overdosage is identified after the "Dribbling“ state, the "Off“ state is entered. The
overdosage can be acknowledged in the "Off“ state (U_AckOp = 1 or positive edge U_AckLi)
and the dosing action is completed.
Generally, dosages which enter the "Off" state with overdosage, have to be acknowledged.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1039
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

Post dosing
If an underdosage is detected after dribbling, post dosing can be performed using the
"Continue" command. In automatic mode, Feature.Bit12 can be used to start post dosing
automatically. Post dosing is active for the period P_DoseTime. The block then enters the
"Dribbling" state or, if that state is deactivated, the "End" state. If the conditions for the
"Dribbling" or "End" states are met within the period P_DoseTime, the block switches to these
states immediately.
Post dosing can also be carried out in the "End" state by increasing the dosing quantity setpoint
and issuing the "Continue" command. Once the dosing quantity has been reset, post dosing
can no longer be carried out by means of increasing the setpoint.
If the dribbling correction quantity is smaller than the dribbling quantity, dosing is started for
time P_DoseTime. If no parameter assignment has been made for P_DoseTime, the coarse
flow (Ctrl) or fine flow (Ctrl2) control outputs are set for one cycle.
If no parameter assignment has been made for the dribbling quantity, or the dribbling correction
quantity is larger than the dribbling quantity, the dosing procedure is continued without taking
time P_DoseTime into account.
Information on post dosing via setpoint increase:
● After the setpoint has been increased, the tolerance limits are only updated when the
"Continue" command is issued. This ensures the overdosage/underdosage display remains
consistent.
● Post dosing can only be carried out after a dosing procedure has been aborted if the setpoint
for the dosing quantity has been increased and an actual-value quantity is present.
● In "Automatic" and "Local" modes, the "Continue" command must be issued on a positive
edge to prevent unwanted dosing procedures from taking place after a setpoint increase.
With Feature2.Bit24 = 0:
If an overdosage is identified during or after a post dosing, the dosage enters in the "End" state.
With Feature2.Bit24 = 1:
If an overdosage is identified after a post dosing or a drain, the dosage continues to be in the
"Off” state. Only with acknowledge overdosage, the block enters to the "End“ state with the
status display "Ack Dos End" in the standard view.

Resetting the dosing quantity


The dosing quantity can only be reset in the "End" state using RstDQ_Op = 1 or positive edge
RstDQ_Li.
The state display "Ack Dos End" is also resetted to "End".
Feature.Bit6 can be used to reset the dosing quantity automatically when dosing starts.

External/internal setpoint specification


This block provides the standard function Setpoint specification - internal/external (Page 130).
The block always requires the setpoint for the dosing quantity (dosing setpoint). All I/Os for
the dosing setpoint start with DQ_.... The dosing setpoint is comprised of the coarse and fine
setpoints for the coarse/fine flow control. All I/Os for the fine setpoint start with DQ2_... . The

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1040 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

coarse setpoint is generated internally from the dosing and fine setpoints and is displayed at
the output with DQ1_SP. If no fine setpoint is available, the coarse setpoint is equal to the
dosing setpoint.
Flow setpoints can be specified for the coarse/fine flow setpoint specification. All I/Os for the
coarse flow start with SP_..., and all I/Os for the fine flow with SP2_.... The setpoint for
coarse or fine flow is displayed at the output SP in the "On" status, depending on the coarse/
fine flow control.

Setpoint limitation
The setpoints are limited in the block using shared parameters:
● Coarse metering volume: DQ_HiLim, DQ_LoLim
● Fine metering volume: DQ2_HiLim, DQ2_LoLim
● Coarse flow rate: SP_HiLim, SP_LoLim
● Fine flow rate: SP2_HiLim, SP2_LoLim
If the setpoint limit is violated, external setpoints are limited to the limit you specified. If there
are internal setpoints, the last valid value is output.

Bumpless switchover from external to internal setpoint


The parameter SP_TrkExt = 1 is used so that the internal setpoint tracks the external setpoint
to achieve a bumpless switchover from the external to the internal setpoint. This allows
unwanted jumps at the output parameter to be avoided.

Limit monitoring of the process value


This block provides the standard function Limit monitoring of the process value (Page 87). The
calculated flow PV_Out is monitored in terms of the limit pairs PV_AH_Lim / PV_AL_Lim
(coarse flow) or PV_AH2_Lim / PV_AL2_Lim (fine flow), depending on the coarse/fine flow
control. Monitoring is only active in the "On" status.
The calculated flow PV_Out is monitored in terms of the limit pairs PV_AH_Lim /
PV_AL_Lim (coarse flow) or PV_AH2_Lim / PV_AL2_Lim (fine flow), depending on the coarse/
fine flow control. Monitoring is only active in the "On" status.

Group display SumMsgAct for limit monitoring, CSF and ExtMsgx


The block provides the standard function Group display for limit monitoring, CSF and
ExtMsgx (Page 86).

Suppressing messages using the MsgLock parameter


This block provides the standard function Suppressing messages using the MsgLock
parameter (Page 214).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1041
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

Forcing operating modes


This block provides the standard function Forcing operating modes (Page 41). The inputs
StartForce, CancelForce, PauseForce and ContForce force the block into the states
"On", "End" or "Pause".
The "Pause" status can only be forced if the block is in the "On" status.
The "On" state can only be forced from the states
● "Off"
● "Pause"
● "End" if the quantity actual valve is less than the quantity setpoint.

Simulating signals
This block provides the standard function Simulating signals (Page 59).
The flow is simulated with SimPV. This input is not active in scale mode, even when the flow
is formed by changing quantities (Feature.Bit7 = 1)
You can simulate the following values:
● Flow dosing: The flow (PV) is specified in the setpoint view with the input (SimPV,
SimPV_Li).
● Dosing using scales: The dosing quantity (DQ_Out) is specified in the standard view with
the input (SimDQ, SimDQ_Li).

Interlocks
This block provides the following interlocks:
● Activation enable
● Interlock without reset ("Interlock")
● Interlock with reset ("Protection")
Refer to the section Interlocks (Page 101).
Dosing can only be started if no interlock is present. The interlock function is not active in the
"Dribbling" status; nor is the activation enable active in the "On" status. An interlock in the "On"
or "Pause" states will cause the block to enter the "Off" status.

Disabling interlocks
This block provides the standard function Disabling interlocks (Page 104).

Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors


This block provides the standard function Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors
(Page 43).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1042 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

External error (FaultExt), external control system fault (CSF)


This block provides the possibility to pass an external error via the FaultExt parameter or
an external control system fault via the CSF parameter. See DoseL error handling
(Page 1049)

Group error
This block provides the standard function Outputting group errors (Page 124).
The following parameters are taken into consideration when forming the group error:
● CSF
● FaultExt

Outputting a signal for start readiness


This block provides the standard function Outputting a signal for start readiness (Page 54).

Forming the group status for interlocks


This block provides the standard function Forming the group status for interlock information
(Page 106).

Forming the signal status for blocks


This block provides the standard function Forming and outputting the signal status for
technologic blocks (Page 110).
The worst signal status ST_Worst for the block is formed from the following parameters:
● PV_Out.ST
● DQ_Out.ST
● DQ_SP.ST
● SP.ST
● Standstill.ST
● LocalLi.ST
● StartLocal.ST
● CancelLocal.ST
● PauseLocal.ST
● ContLocal.ST
● CtrlChnST
● Ctrl2ChnST
● StartAut.ST (only if Feature2.Bit10 = 1)
● CancelAut.ST (only if Feature2.Bit10 = 1)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1043
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

● PauseAut.ST (only if Feature2.Bit10 = 1)


● ContAut.ST (only if Feature2.Bit10 = 1)
● SP_Ext.ST (only if Feature2.Bit10 = 1)
The following signal status is formed by:

Signal status Used status


DQ_Out.ST Formed by the signal status PV_Out.ST. The last DQ_Out.St signal status is also
included for flow dosing and the DQ_Tare.ST signal status is included for scale
dosing. The worst signal status is applied. The signal status is reset with reset of the
dosing quantity.
DQ_SP.ST With an external setpoint DQ_Ext.ST (for DQ_HiLim.ST or DQ_LoLim.ST limit),
otherwise good status
SP.ST With an external setpoint SP_Ext.ST (coarse flow) / SP2_Ext.ST (fine flow) (with
SP_HiLim.ST / SP_LoLim.ST or SP2_HiLim.ST / SP2_LoLim.ST limit), other‐
wise good status

Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values


If the Feature2 bit Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values
(Page 190) is set to 1 and one of the following parameters has bad signal status (16#00 or
16#28), the block goes to the neutral position in the "Automatic" mode:
● StartAut.ST
● CancelAut.ST
● PauseAut.ST
● ContAut.ST
● SP_Ext.ST

Release for maintenance


This block provides the standard function Release for maintenance (Page 65).

Alarm delays with two time values per limit pair


This block includes the standard function alarm delay for Two time values per limit pair
(Page 210).

Display and operator input area for process values and setpoints
This block provides the standard function Display and operator input area for process values
and setpoints (Page 216).

Selecting a unit of measure


This block provides the standard function Selecting a unit of measure (Page 221).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1044 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

Opening additional faceplates


This block provides the standard function Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

Generating instance-specific messages


This block provides the standard function Generating instance-specific messages (Page 213).

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133) . The following functionality is
available for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
0 Set startup characteristics (Page 141)
1 Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 181)
2 Resetting the commands for changing the mode (Page 165)
3 Enabling resetting of commands for the control settings (Page 165)
4 Setting switch or button mode (Page 170)
5 Specifying the dosing type (Page 149)
6 Resetting the dosing quantity when dosing starts (Page 166)
7 Activating calculation of the flow rate for dosing by scale (Page 148)
8 Use an internal or external setpoint for the absolute fine dosing quantity (Page 157)
9 Resetting via input signals in the event of interlocking (Protection) or errors (Page 167)
10 Exiting local mode (Page 181)
11 Stopping dosing at a flow alarm (Page 141)
12 Automatic post dosing for underdosing in automatic mode (Page 146)
13 Creep rate is always detected in the dosing quantity (Page 172)
14 Dosing controls are deactivated during scale is in taring mode (Page 194)
15 Flow setpoints in percent (Page 150)
16 Limits disabled in faceplate (Page 195)
17 Enabling bumpless switchover to automatic mode for valves, motors, and dosers (Page 177)
18 Activating error state for external process control error CSF (Page 154)
21 Enable bumpless switchover to "Automatic" mode for operator only (Page 176)
22 Update acknowledgment and error status of the message call (Page 163)
23 Specifying the influence of the signal status on the dosing process (Page 150)
24 Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162)
25 Suppression of all messages (Page 178)
26 Reaction of the switching points in the "Out of service" operating mode (Page 180)
27 Enable configuration of the dribbling quantity (Page 162)
28 Disabling operating points (Page 149)
29 Signaling limit violation (Page 174)
30 Set reset depending on the operating mode or the LiOp parameter (Page 167)
31 Activating reset of protection / error in manual mode (Page 168)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1045
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

Comments on table:

Feature Bit 4:
● Button mode (Feature.Bit4 = 0): The automatic commands in automatic mode are pulse
signals, in other words StartAut, CancelAut, PauseAut, ContAut can be reset to 0
after switchover to the selected status. In "manual" and "local" modes, however, the
automatic commands are static signals, the block state is tracked in the absence of
automatic commands.
● Switch mode (Feature.Bit4 = 1): The conditions are selected via the inputs StartAut
(0: Cancel, 1: Start) and PauseAut (0: Continue, 1: Pause) with static signals.

Feature Bit 23:

Note
When there is a bad signal status and Feature.Bit23 = 1 , the flow is no longer recorded
in the dosing quantity in any state. The configure creep rate alarm is output.

Configurable reactions using the Feature2 parameter

Bit Function
2 Separate evaluation for excluded and simulated interlock signals (Page 155)
3 Control priority in the event of an invalid input command (Page 179)
5 Evaluation of the signal status of the interlock signals (Page 146)
6 Changes signal status of outputs in OOS (Page 198)
8 Forcing operating modes in the "Local" mode (Page 188)
10 Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values (Page 190)
11 Suppress MsgLock and “Out of service” mode for a connected message block (Page 192)
24 With acknowledge overdosage (Page 182)

Operator permissions
This block provides the standard function Operator control permissions (Page 265).
The block has the following permissions for the OS_Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 1 = Operator can switch to "automatic mode"
1 1 = Operator can switch to "manual mode"
2 1 = Operator can switch to "local mode"
3 1 = Operator can switch to "Out of service" mode
4 1 = Operator can start dosing
5 1 = Operator can pause dosing
6 1 = Operator can continue dosing
7 1 = Operator can cancel dosing

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1046 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

Bit Function
8 1 = Operator can reset interlock and flow alarms
9 1 = Operator can reset dosing quantity
10 1 = Operator can acknowledge overdosage and underdosage
11 1 = Operator can select external setpoints
12 1 = Operator can select internal setpoints
13 1 = Operator can enter dosing setpoint
14 1 = Operator can enter dosing setpoint factor for fine dosing
15 1 = Operator can enter flow setpoint for coarse flow
16 1 = Operator can enter flow setpoint factor for fine flow
17 1 = Operator can activate external/internal bumpless switchover
18 1 = Operator can enable simulation function
19 1 = Operator can activate the Release for maintenance function
20 Not used
21 1 = Operator can enter dribbling quantity
22 1 = Operator can enter maximum dribbling quantity
23 1 = Operator can activate/deactivate automatic generation of dribbling quantity
24 1 = Operator can enter weighting factor for generation of dribbling quantity
25 1 = Operator can change the simulation value SimPV
26 1 = Operator can change the simulation value SimDQ
27 - 31 Not used

The block has the following operator permissions for the OS1Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 1 = Operator can change the limit for the high alarm for PV_OUT (coarse flow)
1 1 = Operator can change the limit for the low alarm for PV_OUT (coarse flow)
2 1 = Operator can change the limit for the hysteresis PV_OUT (coarse flow)
3 1 = Operator can change the limit for the high alarm for PV_OUT (fine flow)
4 1 = Operator can change the limit for the low alarm for PV_OUT (fine flow)
5 1 = Operator can change the limit for the hysteresis PV_OUT (fine flow)
6 1 = Operator can change the operation high limit of the dosing setpoint
7 1 = Operator can change the operation low limit of the dosing setpoint
8 1 = Operator can change operation high limit of the dosing setpoint factor for fine dosing
9 1 = Operator can change operation low limit of the dosing setpoint factor for fine dosing
10 1 = Operator can change the tolerance value for overdosage
11 1 = Operator can change the tolerance value for overdosage
12 1 = Operator can change operation high limit of the flow setpoint for coarse flow
13 1 = Operator can change operation low limit of the flow setpoint for coarse flow
14 1 = Operator can change operation high limit of the flow setpoint for fine flow
15 1 = Operator can change operation low limit of the flow setpoint for fine flow
16 1 = Operator can change the dribbling time
17 1 = Operator can change the post dosing
18 1 = Operator can change the limit for the high alarm for PV_OUT (creep flow)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1047
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

Bit Function
19 1 = Operator can change the limit for the hysteresis for PV_OUT (creep flow)
20 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via DQ_AH_MsgEn
21 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via DQ_AL_MsgEn
22 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_AH_MsgEn
23 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_AL_MsgEn
24 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_AH2_MsgEn
25 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via PV_AL2_MsgEn
26 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via CR_AH_MsgEn
27 - 31 Not used

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Displaying auxiliary values


This block provides the standard function Displaying auxiliary values (Page 220).

Connection of the time-stamped messages from EventTs or Event16Ts


This block provides the standard function Connection of the time-stamped messages from
EventTs or Event16Ts (Page 216).

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


This block provides the standard function SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

See also
Description of DoseL (Page 1027)
DoseL messaging (Page 1051)
DoseL I/Os (Page 1054)
DoseL modes (Page 1031)
DoseL block diagram (Page 1068)
EventTs functions (Page 1698)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1048 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

6.1.4 DoseL error handling

Error handling of DoseL


Refer to section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions for the error handling of all
blocks.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers
● Mode switchover error
● Control system fault (CSF)

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum I/O can be used to output the following error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; the block is not executed
0 There is no error.
11 Configuration error TI ≤ 0
12 Configuration error:
PV_AH_Lim < PV_AL_Lim
PV_AH2_Lim ≤ PV_AL2_Lim
DQ_HiLim.Value ≤ DQ_LoLim.Value
DQ2_HiLim.Value ≤ DQ2_LoLim.Value
SP_HiLim.Value ≤ SP_LoLim.Value
SP2_HiLim.Value ≤ SP2_LoLim.Value
30 PV is not a valid number
31 PV_Out is not a valid number
32 DQ_Out is not a valid number
41 The value for the LocalSetting I/O is not within the approved limit of 0, 1 or 3.
42 LocalSetting = 0 and LocalLi = 1
48 SP_LiOp = 1 and SP_IntLi = 1 and SP_ExtLi = 1
51 AutModLi = 1 and ManModLi = 1 and Feature Bit Setting switch or button mode
(Page 170) = 0
or two I/Os are set at the same time:
● in "local mode" StartLocal (pos. edge), CancelLocal, PauseLocal,
ContLocalwhen forcing states: StartForce, CancelForce, PauseForce,
ContForcein "automatic mode" with pushbutton operation: StartAut (pos.
edge), CancelAut, PauseAut, ContAut
● in "manual mode": StartMan, CancelMan, PauseMan, ContMan

Mode switchover error


This error can be output by the block, see the section Error handling (Page 121).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1049
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

Control system fault (CSF)


An external signal can be activated via the CSF input. A control system fault is triggered if this
signal changes to 1. Refer to the Error handling (Page 121) section for more on this.

Invalid input signal


These errors can be output by the block, see the section Error handling (Page 121).
For the following invalid input signals, the control output can be kept or switched to the neutral
position. This depends on the function Control priority in the event of an invalid input
command (Page 179).

Operating mode Invalid input signal Control reaction with


Feature2.Bit3 = 1
Local: StartLocal = 1 (pos. edge) and Dosing canceled
Localsetting = 1 CancelLocal = 1
or Localsetting = 3 ContLocal = 1 and PauseLocal = 1 Dosing paused
Local: StartForce = 1 and CancelForce = 1 Dosing canceled
Localsetting = 1 ContForce = 1 and PauseForce = 1 Dosing paused
or Localsetting =
3 and forcing
Forcing and no "local StartForce = 1 and CancelForce = 1 Dosing canceled
mode" ContForce = 1 and PauseForce = 1 Dosing paused
"Automatic mode" and Pushbutton operation (Feature.Bit4 = 0): Dosing canceled
no forcing StartAut =1 (pos. edge) and CancelAut
=1
Pushbutton operation (Feature.Bit4 = 0): Dosing paused
ContAut = 1 and PauseAut = 1
Pushbutton operation (Feature.Bit4 = 0): Dosing paused
StartAut = 1 (pos. edge) and PauseAut
=1
"Manual mode" and StartMan = 1 and CancelMan = 1 Dosing canceled
no forcing ContMan = 1 and PauseMan = 1 Dosing paused

See also
Description of DoseL (Page 1027)
DoseL modes (Page 1031)
DoseL functions (Page 1034)
DoseL messaging (Page 1051)
DoseL I/Os (Page 1054)
DoseL block diagram (Page 1068)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1050 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

6.1.5 DoseL messaging

Messaging
The following messages can be generated for this block:
● Process control fault
● Process messages
● Instance-specific messages

Process control fault


The following control system fault messages can be output:

Message in‐ Message identi‐ Message class Event


stance fier
MsgEvId2 SIG 1 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External error has occurred

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment
You can interconnect an external fault (signal) to input parameter CSF. If it changes to CSF = 1,
a control system fault is triggered (MsgEvId02, SIG 1).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1051
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

Process messages

Message in‐ Message identi‐ Message class Event


stance fier
MsgEvId1 SIG 1 Alarm - high $$BlockComment$$
Overdosage
SIG 2 Alarm - low $$BlockComment$$
Underdosage
SIG 3 Alarm - high $$BlockComment$$
PV - High alarm limit for coarse flow
violated
SIG4 Alarm - low $$BlockComment$$
PV - Low alarm limit for coarse flow
violated
SIG 5 Alarm - high $$BlockComment$$
PV - High alarm limit for coarse flow
violated
SIG 6 Alarm - low $$BlockComment$$
PV - Low alarm limit for fine flow vio‐
lated
SIG 7 Alarm - high $$BlockComment$$
PV – Creep flow too great
SIG 8 Process message - with acknowledgment $$BlockComment$$
Dosing canceled

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment

Instance-specific messages
You can use up to three instance-specific messages with this block.

Message in‐ Message identi‐ Message class Event


stance fier
MsgEvId2 SIG 2 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External message 1
SIG 3 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External message 2
SIG 4 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External message 3

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1052 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId1

Associated value Block parameters


1 BatchName
2 StepNo
3 BatchID
4 DQ_OUT
5 PV_OUT
6 ExtVal06
7 ExtVa107
8 ExtVa108
9 Reserved
10 Reserved

The associated values 6 ... 8 are allocated to the parameters ExtVa106 ... ExtVa108 and
can be used. Additional information is available in the "Process Control System PCS 7 -
Engineering System" manual.

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId2

Associated value Block parameters


1 BatchName
2 StepNo
3 BatchID
4 ExtVa204
5 ExtVa205
6 ExtVa206
7 ExtVa207
8 ExtVa208
9 Reserved
10 Reserved

The associated values 4 ... 8 are allocated to the parameters ExtVa204 ... ExtVa208 and
can be used. Additional information is available in the "Process Control System PCS 7 -
Engineering System" manual.

See also
Description of DoseL (Page 1027)
DoseL functions (Page 1034)
DoseL I/Os (Page 1054)
DoseL modes (Page 1031)
DoseL error handling (Page 1049)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1053
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

DoseL block diagram (Page 1068)


Time stamp (Page 214)

6.1.6 DoseL I/Os


I/Os of DoseL

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AutModLi* 1= "Automatic mode" via interconnection STRUCT -
or SFC (controlled by ModLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AutModOp* 1 = "Automatic mode" via operator (con‐ BOOL 0
trolled by ModLiOp = 0)
BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation BOOL 0
BatchID Batch ID DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name S7-String
BypProt 1 = Bypassing interlock in "local mode" BOOL 0
and in "simulation"
CancelAut* 1 = Select Cancel in "automatic mode" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CancelForce 1 = Force cancel STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CancelLocal 1 = Select Cancel in "local mode" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CancelMan* 1 = Select Cancel in "manual mode" BOOL 0
ContAut* 1 = Select Continue in "automatic mode" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ContForce 1 = Force continue STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ContLocal 1 = Select Continue in "local mode" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ContMan* 1 = Select Continue in "manual mode" BOOL 0
CR_A_DC* Creep flow: Delay time for incoming REAL 3.0
alarms [s]

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1054 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

Parameter Description Type Default


CR_A_DG* Creep flow: Delay time for outgoing REAL 3.0
alarms [s]
CR_AH_En Creep flow: BOOL 1
1 = Enable high alarm
CR_AH_Lim Creep flow: Limit high alarm REAL 0.0
CR_AH_MsgEn Creep flow: BOOL 1
1 = Enable high alarm message
CR_Hyst* Creep flow: Hysteresis for alarm limit REAL 0.0
CSF 1 = External error (control system fault) STRUCT -
Error handling (Page 121) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CtrlChnST Signal status of output channel Ctrl STRUCT -
Should be connected to an output chan‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
nel block. ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
Ctrl2ChnST Signal status of output channel Ctrl2 STRUCT -
Should be connected to an output chan‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
nel block. ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
DCF Dribbling correction [%] REAL 25.0
DosCancelMsgEn 1 = Cancel dosing message BOOL 1
DQ_A_DC* Overdosage/underdosage: Delay time REAL 0.0
for incoming alarms [s]
DQ_A_DG* Overdosage/underdosage: Delay time REAL 0.0
for outgoing alarms [s]
DQ_AH_En Overdosage: BOOL 1
1 = Enable high alarm
DQ_AH_MsgEn Overdosage: BOOL 1
1 = Enable high alarm message
DQ_AH_Tol Overdosage: Limit high alarm (relative to REAL 0.0
dosing setpoint)
DQ_AL_En Underdosage: BOOL 1
1 = Enable low alarm
DQ_AL_MsgEn Underdosage: BOOL 1
1 = Enable low alarm message
DQ_AL_Tol* Underdosage: Limit low alarm (relative REAL 0.0
to dosing setpoint)
DQ_Ext Dosing quantity: External setpoint STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
DQ_HiLim Dosing quantity: High setpoint limitation STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 100.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
DQ_Int* Dosing quantity: Internal setpoint REAL 0.0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1055
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

Parameter Description Type Default


DQ_LoLim Dosing quantity: Low setpoint limitation STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
DQ_OpScale Dosing quantity: Limit for scale in bar STRUCT -
graph of faceplate ● High: REAL ● 100.0
● Low: REAL ● 0.0
DQ_Unit Unit of measure for dosing quantity INT 1088
DQ2_Ext Dosing quantity: External setpoint factor STRUCT -
for fine dosing ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
DQ2_HiLim* Dosing quantity: High limitation of set‐ STRUCT -
point factor for fine dosing ● Value: REAL ● 100.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
DQ2_Int* Dosing quantity: Internal setpoint factor REAL 0.0
for fine dosing
DQ2_LoLim* Dosing quantity: Low limitation of set‐ STRUCT -
point factor for fine dosing ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
DribbIn Dribbling quantity REAL 0.0
DribbMax Maximum value of automatic determina‐ REAL 100.0
tion of dribbling quantity
DribbCor 1 = Automatic determination of dribbling BOOL 0
quantity
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1
EventTsIn For interconnecting data between a tech‐ ANY
nology block and the message blocks
EventTs, Event16Ts.
The EventTsIn input parameter serves
to interconnect the EventTsOut output
parameter of the EventTs,
Event16Ts block. When this intercon‐
nection is configured, the messages of
the EventTs, Event16Ts block are dis‐
played on the OS in the alarm view of the
technology block and can also be ac‐
knowledged there.
ExtMsg1 Binary input for freely selectable mes‐ STRUCT -
sage 1 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg2 Binary input for freely selectable mes‐ STRUCT -
sage 2 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1056 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

Parameter Description Type Default


ExtMsg3 Binary input for freely selectable mes‐ STRUCT -
sage 3 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtVa106 Associated value 6 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa107 Associated value 7 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa108 Associated value 8 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa204 Associated value 4 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID2)
ExtVa205 Associated value 5 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID2)
ExtVa206 Associated value 6 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID2)
ExtVa207 Associated value 7 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID2)
ExtVa208 Associated value 8 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID2)
FaultExt 1 = External error STRUCT -
Error handling (Page 121) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 1034) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
Feature2 I/O for additional functions (Page 1034) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
Gain Gain factor STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 1.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Intlock 0 = Interlocking without reset is active; STRUCT -
you can operate the block without reset ● Value: BOOL ● 1
once the interlocking condition has dis‐
appeared ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
1 = Interlock not activated ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
Intl_En 1 = Interlock without reset (interlock, BOOL 1
Intlock parameter) is active
LocalLi 1 = Activate "local mode" via plant signals STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1057
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

Parameter Description Type Default


LocalOp* 1 = "Local mode" via operator BOOL 0
LocalSetting Properties for the Local mode (Page 80) INT 0
ManModLi* 1 = "Manual mode" via interconnection STRUCT -
or SFC (controlled by ModLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManModOp* 1 = "Manual mode" via OS operator (con‐ BOOL 1
trolled by ModLiOp = 0)
MeterType Dosing using scales: 0=Up BOOL 0
1=Down
ModLiOp Switchover of operating mode between: STRUCT -
0 = Operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
1 = Interconnection or SFC ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MS_RelOp* 1= Release for maintenance via OS op‐ BOOL 0
erator
MsgEvId1 Message number (assigned automatical‐ DWORD 16#00000000
ly)
MsgEvId2 Message number (assigned automatical‐ DWORD 16#00000000
ly)
MsgLock 1 = Suppress process messages. STRUCT -
See also the section Suppressing mes‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
sages using the MsgLock parameter ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
(Page 214) for more on this.
NumSample Number of values for average calculation INT 0
U_AckLi 1 = Acknowledgement of overdosage or STRUCT -
underdosage via interconnection ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
U_AckOp* 1 = Acknowledgement of overdosage or BOOL 0
underdosage via operator
Occupied 1 = In use by a batch BOOL 0
OosLi 1 = "Out of service", via interconnection STRUCT -
or SFC ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosOp* 1 = "Out of service", via OS operator BOOL 0
OpSt_In Input parameter for local operator au‐ DWORD 16#00000000
thorization, connected with the Out out‐
put parameter of the upstream block,
OpStations (Page 423)
OS_Perm I/O for operator permissions STRUCT -
(Page 1034) ● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● Bit 25: BOOL ● 1
● Bitt 26: BOOL ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1058 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

Parameter Description Type Default


OS1Perm I/O for operator permissions STRUCT -
(Page 1034) ● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● ... ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
P_DoseTime* Duration of post dosing [s] REAL 0.0
PauseAut* 1 = Select Pause in "automatic mode" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
PauseForce 1 = Force pause STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
PauseLocal 1 = Select Pause in "local mode" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
PauseMan* 1 = Select Pause in "manual mode" BOOL 0
Perm_En 1 = Activation enable (enable, Permit BOOL 1
parameter) is active
Permit 1 = Enable for opening / closing from STRUCT -
neutral position ● Value: BOOL ● 1
0 = Valve activation not enabled on OS ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
Prot_En 1 = Protective interlock (protection, BOOL 1
Protect parameter) is active
Protect 0 = Protective interlocking is effective; STRUCT -
once the interlocking condition has dis‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 1
appeared, you will have to reset the block
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
1 = Protective interlocking not activated
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
PulseWidth* Pulse width of control signal [s] REAL 3.0
PV Process value STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
PV_A_DC* Delay time for incoming PV alarms [s] REAL 3.0
when using flow dosing (coarse dosing
phase)
PV_A_DG* Delay time for outgoing PV alarms [s] REAL 3.0
when using flow dosing (coarse dosing
phase)
PV_A2_DC* Delay time for incoming PV alarms [s] REAL 3.0
when using flow dosing (fine dosing
phase)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1059
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

Parameter Description Type Default


PV_A2_DG* Delay time for outgoing PV alarms [s] REAL 3.0
when using flow dosing (fine dosing
phase)
PV_AH_En 1 = Enable PV alarm (high) limit when BOOL 1
using flow dosing (coarse dosing phase)
PV_AH_Lim Limit PV alarm (high) when using flow REAL 100.0
dosing (coarse dosing phase)
PV_AH_MsgEn 1 = Enable PV alarm (high) message BOOL 1
when using flow dosing (coarse dosing
phase)
PV_AH2_En 1 = Enable PV alarm (high) when using BOOL 1
flow dosing (fine dosing phase)
PV_AH2_Lim Limit PV alarm (high) when using flow REAL 100.0
dosing (fine dosing phase)
PV_AH2_MsgEn 1 = Enable PV alarm (high) message BOOL 1
when using flow dosing (fine dosing
phase)
PV_AL_En 1 = Enable PV alarm limit (low) when us‐ BOOL 1
ing flow dosing (coarse dosing phase)
PV_AL_Lim Limit PV alarm (low) when using flow REAL 0.0
dosing (coarse dosing phase)
PV_AL_MsgEn 1 = Enable PV alarm (low) message BOOL 1
when using flow dosing (coarse dosing
phase)
PV_AL2_En 1 = Enable PV alarm (low) when using BOOL 1
flow dosing (fine dosing phase)
PV_AL2_Lim Limit PV alarm (low) when using flow REAL 0.0
dosing (fine dosing phase)
PV_AL2_MsgEn 1 = Enable PV alarm (low) message BOOL 1
when using flow dosing (fine dosing
phase)
PV_Hyst* Hysteresis for PV alarm limits when us‐ REAL 1.0
ing flow dosing (coarse dosing phase)
PV_Hyst2 Hysteresis for PV alarm limits when us‐ REAL 1.0
ing flow dosing (fine dosing phase)
PV_OpScale Limit for scale in PV bar graph of face‐ STRUCT -
plate ● High: REAL ● 100.0
● Low: REAL ● 0.0
PV_Unit Unit of measure for process value INT 1349
RelaxTime* Duration of dribbling phase [s] REAL 3.0
RstDQ_Li 1 = Reset dosing quantity via intercon‐ STRUCT -
nection ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RstDQ_Op* 1 = Reset dosing quantity via operator BOOL 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1060 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

Parameter Description Type Default


RstLi* 1 = Reset interlock/flow monitoring via STRUCT -
interconnection ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RstOp* 1 = Reset interlock/flow monitoring via BOOL 0
operator
RunUpCyc Number of cycles in startup; messages INT 3
are suppressed during these cycles
SampleTime Sampling time [s] (assigned automatical‐ REAL 0.1
ly)
SelFp1 Call a block saved in this parameter as ANY -
an additional faceplate (Page 217) in the
standard view
SelFp2 Call a block saved in this parameter as ANY -
an additional faceplate (Page 217) in the
preview
SimDQ* Dosing quantity: Value used in scale REAL 0.0
mode for SimOn = 1
SimDQ_Li Linkable simulation value DQ STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SimLiOp Activation/deactivation of the simulation STRUCT -
by: ● Value: BOOL ● 0
0 = Operator ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
1 = Interconnection or SFC
SimOnLi 1 = Simulation via interconnection or STRUCT -
SFC (controlled by SimLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SimOn* 1 = Simulation on BOOL 0
SimPV* Process value used in flow mode for REAL 0.0
SimOn = 1
SimPV_Li Process value that is used for STRUCT -
SimOnLi.Value = 1 ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
(SimLiOp.Value = 1)
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_Ext External flow setpoint - coarse dosing STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExtLi 1 = Select external setpoints via inter‐ STRUCT -
connection ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExtOp* 1 = Select external setpoints via operator BOOL 0
SP_HiLim High limit for flow setpoint - coarse dos‐ STRUCT -
ing ● Value: REAL ● 100.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_Int* Internal flow setpoint - coarse dosing REAL 0.0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1061
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

Parameter Description Type Default


SP_IntLi 1 = Select internal setpoints via intercon‐ STRUCT -
nection ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_IntOp* 1 = Select internal setpoints via operator BOOL 0
SP_LiOp Select setpoint source (internal/exter‐ STRUCT -
nal): ● Value: BOOL ● 0
1 = Via interconnection ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
0 = Via operator
SP_LoLim Low limit for flow setpoint - coarse dosing STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_TrkExt 1 = Bumpless switchover from external BOOL 1
to internal setpoint active
SP2_Ext External flow setpoint - fine dosing STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP2_HiLim High limit for flow setpoint - fine dosing STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 100.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP2_Int* Internal flow setpoint - fine dosing REAL 0.0
SP2_LoLim Low limit for flow setpoint - fine dosing STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
StandStill 1 = Scales at a standstill, dosing device STRUCT -
infeedback ● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
StartAut* 1 = Select Start in "automatic mode" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
StartForce 1 = Forced start STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
StartLocal 1 = Select Start in "local mode" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
StartMan* 1 = Select Start in "manual mode" BOOL 0
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
TI Integral time [s] STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 1.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1062 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

Parameter Description Type Default


U_AckLi 1 = Acknowledgment of underdosage via STRUCT -
interconnection ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
U_AckOp* 1 = Acknowledgment of underdosage via BOOL 0
operator
UA1unit Unit of measure for analog auxiliary val‐ INT 0
ue 1
UA2unit Unit of measure for analog auxiliary val‐ INT 0
ue 1
UserAna1 Analog auxiliary value 1 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
UserAna2 Analog auxiliary value 2 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use in PCS 7 BYTE 16#00
OS

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AutAct 1 = "Automatic mode" enabled STRUCT -
0 = "Manual mode" is enabled ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AutoST 1 = Worst signal status of automatic com‐ BYTE 16#80
mands
CR_AH_Act Creep flow: 1 = High alarm active. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐
olation (Page 174)).
Ctrl Control output for coarse dosing STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Ctrl2 Control output for fine dosing STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
DosEnd 1 = End of dosing STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1063
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

Parameter Description Type Default


DosOff 1 = Dosing off STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
DosOn 1 = Dosing on STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
DosPause 1 = Dosing pause STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
DosRelax 1 = Dosing dribbling STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
DosStart 1 = Dosing started STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
DQ_AH_Act 1 = Overdosing STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐
olation (Page 174)).
DQ_AL_Act 1 = Underdosing STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐
olation (Page 174)).
DQ_ExHiAct Dosing quantity: STRUCT -
1 = High limit for external setpoint has ● Value: BOOL ● 0
been reached ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
DQ_ExLoAct Dosing quantity: STRUCT -
1 = Low limit for external setpoint has ● Value: BOOL ● 0
been reached ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
DQ_ExtOut Dosing quantity: External setpoint, cor‐ STRUCT -
responds to input parameter DQ_Ext ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
DQ_Out Dosing quantity STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
DQ_SP Dosing quantity setpoint used by block STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1064 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

Parameter Description Type Default


DQ_SP_Tol Setpoint for determining tolerance limits STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
DQ_Tare Tare memory when dosing using scales STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
DQ1_SP Coarse dosing quantity setpoint used by STRUCT -
block ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
DQ2_ExHiAct Dosing quantity: STRUCT -
1 = High limit for external setpoint factor ● Value: BOOL ● 0
for fine dosing has been reached ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
DQ2_ExLoAct Dosing quantity: STRUCT -
1 = Low limit for external setpoint factor ● Value: BOOL ● 0
for fine dosing has been reached ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
DQ2_ExtOut Dosing quantity: External setpoint factor STRUCT -
for fine dosing [%], corresponds to input ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
parameter DQ2_Ext
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
DQ2_SP Fine dosing quantity setpoint used by STRUCT -
block ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
DribbOut Dribbling quantity STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without BOOL 0
errors
ErrorNum Output of pending error number. For er‐ INT -1
ror numbers that can be output by this
block, see DoseL error handling
(Page 1049)
GrpErr 1 = Group error pending STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
LocalAct 1 = "Local mode" enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
LockAct 1 = Interlock (Intlock, Permit or STRUCT -
Protect) is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManAct 1 = "Manual mode" enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1065
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

Parameter Description Type Default


MS_Release Release for maintenance: STRUCT -
1 = Release for OS operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MsgAckn1 Message acknowledgement status 1 WORD 16#0000
(output ACK_STATE of first ALARM_8P)
MsgAckn2 Message acknowledgement status 2 WORD 16#0000
(output ACK_STATE of second
ALARM_8P)
MsgErr1 Alarm error 1 (output ERROR of first BOOL 0
ALARM_8P)
MsgErr2 Alarm error 2 (output ERROR of second BOOL 0
ALARM_8P)
MsgStat1 Message status 1 (output STATUS of first WORD 16#0000
ALARM_8P)
MsgStat2 Message status 2 (output STATUS of WORD 16#0000
second ALARM_8P)
OosAct 1 = Block is "Out of service" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpSt_Out Value of the OpSt_In input parameter, DWORD 16#00000000
for feedforwarding to other blocks. Bit 31
of this parameter is used by
Feature.Bit24
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with settings DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
changed by the block algorithm
OS_PermOut Displays of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS1PermLog Display of OS1Perm with settings DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
changed by the block algorithm
OS1PermOut Display of OS1Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
P_Ctrl 1 = Pulse output for coarse dosing STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
P_Ctrl2 1 = Pulse output for fine dosing STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
P_Rst 1= Pulse output for reset STRUCT -
The parameter persists for one cycle af‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
ter a reset. ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
PV_AH_Act 1 = PV high alarm enabled (coarse dos‐ STRUCT -
ing phase). ● Value: BOOL ● 0
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐
olation (Page 174)).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1066 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

Parameter Description Type Default


PV_AH2_Act 1 = PV high alarm enabled (fine dosing STRUCT -
phase). ● Value: BOOL ● 0
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐
olation (Page 174)).
PV_AL_Act 1 = PV low alarm enabled (coarse dosing STRUCT -
phase). ● Value: BOOL ● 0
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐
olation (Page 174)).
PV_AL2_Act 1 = PV low alarm enabled (fine dosing STRUCT -
phase). ● Value: BOOL ● 0
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐
olation (Page 174)).
PV_Out Output for process value STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RdyToReset 1 = Ready for reset via RstLi input or STRUCT -
commands in "automatic mode" ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RdyToStart 1 = Active start readiness STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP Active flow setpoint STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExHiAct Flow for coarse dosing: STRUCT -
1 = High limit for external setpoint has ● Value: BOOL ● 0
been reached ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExLoAct Flow for coarse dosing: STRUCT -
1 = Low limit for external setpoint has ● Value: BOOL ● 0
been reached ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExtAct 1 = External setpoint is active STRUCT -
0 = Internal setpoint is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExtOut Flow for coarse dosing: External set‐ STRUCT -
point, corresponds to input parameter ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
SP_Ext
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1067
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

Parameter Description Type Default


SP1 Coarse dosing flow setpoint used by STRUCT -
block ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP2 Fine dosing flow setpoint used by block STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP2_ExHiAct Flow for fine dosing: STRUCT -
1 = High limit for external setpoint has ● Value: BOOL ● 0
been reached ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP2_ExLoAct Flow for fine dosing: STRUCT -
1 = Low limit for external setpoint has ● Value: BOOL ● 0
been reached ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP2_ExtOut Flow for fine dosing: External setpoint, STRUCT -
corresponds to input parameter ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
SP2_Ext
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
Status1 Status word 1 (Page 1027) DWORD 16#00000000
Status2 Status word 2 (Page 1027) DWORD 16#00000000
Status3 Status word 3 (Page 1027) DWORD 16#00000000
Status4 Status word 4 (Page 1027) DWORD 16#00000000

See also
DoseL messaging (Page 1051)
DoseL modes (Page 1031)
DoseL block diagram (Page 1068)
Error handling (Page 121)

6.1.7 DoseL block diagram

DoseL block diagram


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

See also
Description of DoseL (Page 1027)
DoseL modes (Page 1031)
DoseL functions (Page 1034)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1068 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

DoseL error handling (Page 1049)


DoseL messaging (Page 1051)
DoseL I/Os (Page 1054)

6.1.8 Operator control and monitoring

6.1.8.1 DoseL views

Views of the DoseL block


The block DoseL provides the following views:
● DoseL standard view (Page 1070)
● Alarm view (Page 313)
● DoseL limit view (Page 1074)
● Trend view (Page 317)
● DoseL parameter view (Page 1076)
● DoseL flow setpoint view (Page 1078)
● DoseL quantity setpoint view (Page 1081)
● DoseL preview (Page 1083)
● Memo view (Page 315)
● Batch view (Page 313)
● Block icon for DoseL (Page 1085)
Refer to the sections Structure of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure
(Page 239) for general information on the faceplate and block icon.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1069
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

6.1.8.2 DoseL standard view

DoseL standard view




 



 




 

 





 
 


(1) Display and switch the operating mode


This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
● Manual mode (Page 76)
● Automatic mode (Page 76)
● Local mode (Page 80)
● Out of service (Page 72)
Refer to chapter Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) for information
on switching the operating mode.

(2) Displaying and changing the setpoint


The following states can be shown and changed here:
● "Internal"
● "External"
You can find additional information on this in section Manual and automatic mode for motors,
valves and dosers (Page 76).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1070 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

(3) Displaying and changing: Start, continue, pause and cancel


This area shows you the default operating state for the doser. The following states can be
shown and changed here:
● "Start"
● "Continue"
● "Pause"
● "Cancel"
You can find additional information on this in section Switching operating states and operating
modes (Page 268).

(4) Resetting the block


Click "Reset" for interlocks or errors. You can find additional information on this in section
Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors (Page 43).

(5) Operating range for the interlock functions of the block


You can use this button to control the interlock functions of the block. You can find additional
information on this in section Interlocks (Page 101).
● Bypass information (see Forming the group status for interlock information (Page 106)):

(6) High and low scale range for the setpoint


This area is already set and cannot be changed.

(7) Displaying and changing the quantity


You can find additional information on this in section Changing values (Page 270).

(8) Displaying and changing the setpoint


You can find additional information on this in section Changing values (Page 270).

(9) Button: Reset dose quantity


The dosing quantity can only be reset in the "End" or "Ack Dos End“ state.
With resetting dose quantity also the display "Ack Dos End" is resetted to "End".

(10) Button: Acknowledge overdosing and underdosing


Acknowledgment of overdosing and underdosing can only be made in the "Off" state.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1071
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

Additional with Feature2.Bit24 = 1:


● an acknowledgement of overdosing is possible.
● generally, overdosing or underdosing has to be acknowledged.

(11) and (12) Display of auxiliary values


You can use this area to display two auxiliary values that have been configured in the
Engineering System (ES). You can find additional information on this in section Opening
additional faceplates (Page 217).

(13) Button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate


Use this button for the standard view of a block configured in the Engineering System (ES).
The visibility of this button depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in section Opening additional faceplates
(Page 217).

(14) and (15) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Simulation"
● "Maintenance"
You can find additional information on this in section Simulating signals (Page 59).

(16) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Invalid signal"
● "Changeover error"
● "Flow"

(17) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Forced start"
● "Force continue"
● "Force pause"
● "Forced stop"
● "Request 0/1": A reset to "automatic mode" is expected.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1072 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

(18) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Underdosed"
● "Overdosed"

(19) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Coarse dosing"
● "Fine dosing"
● "Relax"
● "Pause"
● "Off"
● "End"
If an underdosage or overdosage is identified, the status display shows the state "Ack Dos
End" in the standard view.
● "Taring"

(20) Limit display for the setpoint


These triangles show the SP_HiLim and SP_LoLim setpoint limits configured in the ES.

(21) Bar graph for the setpoint


This area shows the current setpoint in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the bar
graph depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).

(22) Limit display


These colored triangles indicate the configured limits in the respective bar graph:
● Red: Alarm
● Yellow: Warning
● Blue: Tolerance

(23) Display of external setpoint


This display [E] is only visible when you have selected "Internal" setpoint specification. It shows
the external setpoint that would apply if you were to change the setpoint specification to
"external".

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1073
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

(24) Bar graph for the quantity


This area shows you the current quantity in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the bar
graph depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).

6.1.8.3 DoseL limit view

Limit view of DoseL

 

Note
In scale mode with Feature.Bit7 = 0, the displays (2), (3) and (4) are hidden.

(1) Displaying and changing the dosing limits


You can change the dosing limits in this area:
● "Overdosing"
● "Underdosing"
You can find additional information on this in the section Changing values (Page 270).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1074 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

(2) Displaying and changing the flow limits (coarse)


You can change the flow limits (coarse) in this area:
● "H alarm"
● "L alarm"
● "Hysteresis"
You can find additional information on this in the section Changing values (Page 270).

(3) Displaying and changing the flow limits (fine)


You can change the flow limits (fine) in this area:
● "H alarm"
● "L alarm"
● "Hysteresis"
You can find additional information on this in the section Changing values (Page 270).

(4) Displaying and changing the limit for the creep flow
You can change the limit for the creep rate in this area:
● "H alarm"
● "Hysteresis"
You can find additional information on this in the section Changing values (Page 270).

(5) Enabled operation


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Icons for enabled operation:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)

(6) "Message suppression/delay"


Message suppression indicates whether or not the suppression of the associated message in
the AS block is activated with the xx_MsgEn parameter. The output of messages is not
suppressed when the block is installed (all xx_MsgEn parameters are preset to 1). Messages
can only be output if limit monitoring of the additional analog value has been enabled.
Alarm delays are also displayed in this position; for more on this see section Area of application
of the alarm delays (Page 208).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1075
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

(7) Suppress messages


You can enable / disable messages by setting the check mark.

6.1.8.4 DoseL parameter view

Parameter view of DoseL

 

(1) Settings
You can select the following functions in this area:
● "SP:=SP external": ☑ Bumpless switchover of setpoint from external to internal. The internal
setpoint is tracked to the external one.

(2) Parameter
In this area, you change parameters and therefore influence the doser. Refer also to the
Changing values (Page 270) section for more on this.
You can influence the following parameters:
● "Relax time"
● "Dribble time"
● "Dribble value"

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1076 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

(3) Automatic dribbling quantity


In this area, you change the automatic dribbling quantity parameters, which affects the doser.
Refer also to the Changing values (Page 270) section for more on this.
You can change the parameters when the "On" check box is selected ☑.
You can influence the following parameters:
● "Weighting factor"
● "Maximum"
● "Calc. value"

(4) Service
You can select the following functions in this area:
● "Simulation"
● "Release for maintenance"
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for more on
this.
You can find information on this area in the section:
● Simulating signals (Page 59)
● Release for maintenance (Page 65)

(5) Enabled operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator control permissions are assigned.
They depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Symbols for enabled operations:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
control permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1077
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

6.1.8.5 DoseL flow setpoint view

Flow setpoint view for DoseL






 






Note
1.) This view cannot be selected in scale mode with Feature.Bit7 = 0 .
2.) In scale mode with Feature.Bit7 = 1 the displays (3), (4), (5), (6) and (8) are hidden.
3.) If Feature.Bit15 = 1, the display of this setpoint view changes. For further information,
refer to the description below.

(1) High and low scale range for the process value
These values provide information on the display range for the bar graph (7) of the process
value. The scale range is defined in the engineering system.

(2) Display of the process value including signal status


This area shows the current process value with the corresponding signal status.

(3) Displaying and changing the SP active value


You can find additional information on this in the Changing values (Page 270) section.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1078 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

(4) Additional setpoint parameters


You can change the following setpoint parameters in this area:
● "SP coarse"
● "SP fine"
You can find additional information on this in the Changing values (Page 270) section.

(5) Displaying and changing the limits


You can change the limits in this area:
● "H coarse"
● "L coarse"
● "H fine"
● "L fine"
You can find additional information on this in the Changing values (Page 270) section.

(6) Enabled operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator control permissions are assigned.
They depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Symbols for enabled operations:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
control permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).

(7) Bar graph for the process value


This area shows the current process value in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the
bar graph depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).

(8) Bar graph for the SP active setpoint


This area shows the current setpoint "SP active" in the form of a bar graph. The visible area
in the bar graph depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).

Note
If Feature.Bit15 = 1, there are no (8) or (10) displays. For further information, refer to the
description below.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1079
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

(9) Limit display


These triangles show limits for the flow limits. The flow limits are set in the limit value view.

(10) Limit display for the setpoint


These triangles show the SP_HiLim and SP_LoLim setpoint limits configured in the
Engineering System (ES).

Flow setpoint view for Feature.Bit15 = 1


If Feature.Bit15 = 1 , the setpoint view changes in the following ways:
● Displays (8) and (10) are omitted.
● The "SP active" value (3) is displayed above the area (4).
● The values in the (3), (4) and (5) areas contain the unit "%".











Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1080 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

6.1.8.6 DoseL quantity setpoint view

Quantity setpoint view for DoseL




(1) Displaying and changing the DQ SP total setpoint


You can change the "DQ SP total" setpoint in this area.
Additional information is available in the section Changing values (Page 270).

(2) Displaying and changing additional setpoints


You can change the limits in this area:
● "DQ SP coarse"
● "DQ SP fine"
● "DQ SP fine factor"
Additional information is available in the section Changing values (Page 270).

Note
Special note for Feature Bit 8 = 1
If you set this Feature Bit with 1, DQ SP fine is no longer displayed in the faceplate. In addition,
the display of the unit for DQ SP fine factor is omitted. The input is now performed in an absolute
manner.

(3) Displaying and changing the limits


You can change the limits in this area:
● "H total"
● "L total"

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1081
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

● "H fine"
● "L fine"
Additional information is available in the section Changing values (Page 270).

Note
Special note for Feature Bit 8 = 1
If you set this Feature Bit to 1, the display of the unit for H fine and L fine is switched to the
unit configured at DQ_Unit . The input is now performed in an absolute manner.

(4) Enabled operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator control permissions are assigned.
They depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Symbols for enabled operations:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: The OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS
operator control permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1082 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

6.1.8.7 DoseL preview

Preview of DoseL

(1) Automatic preview


This area shows you the block status after it has switched from "manual" to "automatic" mode.
If the block is in "automatic mode", the current block state is displayed.
This area also displays the worst signal status of the following automatic commands:
● StartAut
● CancelAut
● PauseAut
● ContAut
● SP_Ext

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1083
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

(2) Enable operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Icons for enabled operation:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).
The following enabled operations are shown here:
● "Start": You can start the dosing procedure
● "Pause": You can pause the dosing procedure
● "Continue": You can continue the dosing procedure after a pause or an abort.
● "Cancel": You can abort the dosing procedure
● "Automatic": You can switch to "automatic mode".
● "Manual": You can switch to "manual mode".
● "Local": You can switch to "local mode".
● "Out of service": You can switch to "Out of service" operating mode.
● "SP external": You can use the external setpoint
● "SP internal": You can use the internal setpoint
● "Change SP": You can change the setpoint
● "Reset dose quantity": You can reset the dosing quantity
● "Reset": You can reset the block after interlocks or errors
● "Acknowledge underdosing": You can acknowledge underdosing
● "Local operator permission": Use the ← button to switch to the standard view of the
OpStations block. You can find additional information on this in the section Operator control
permissions (Page 265).

(3) Displaying current control signals


This area shows the most important parameters for this block with the current selection:
● "Permission":
– 0 = No OS release for energizing motor
– 1 = Enable for "starting"/"stopping" from the neutral position
● "Protection":
– 0 = Protective interlocking is effective; once the interlocking condition has disappeared,
you will have to reset the block
– 1 = "Good" state

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1084 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

● "Interlock":
– 0 = Interlocking without reset is active; you can operate the block without reset once the
interlocking condition has disappeared
– 1 = "Good" state
● "Local correct": 1 = Control signal for "Local mode" (LocalLi) is active
● "Local start": 1 = Block is started in "local mode"
● "Local pause": 1= Dosing paused in "local mode"
● "Local continue": 1 = Dosing is continued in "local mode"
● "Local cancel": 1= Dosing is canceled in "local mode"
● "Coarse dosing": 1 = Coarse dosing is performed
● "Fine dosing": 1 = Fine dosing is performed
● "Relax phase": 1 = Dosing procedure is in the relax phase
● "Dose pause": 1 = Dosing pause
● "Dose off": 1 = No dosing taking place
● "Dose end": 1 = Dosing is stopped
● "Channel Coarse Dosing": Signal from the output channel block for "Coarse dosing"
● "Channel Fine Dosing": Signal from the output channel block for "Fine dosing"

(4) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
Use this navigation button to open the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system. The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the engineering
system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in the section Opening additional faceplates
(Page 217).

(5) Process value


This area displays the real process value (PV).

6.1.8.8 Block icon for DoseL

Block symbols for DoseL


A variety of block icons are available with the following functions:
● Process tag type
● Limits (high/low)
● Violation of alarm, warning, and tolerance limits as well as control system faults

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1085
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

● Operating modes
● Internal and external setpoint specification
● Signal status, release for maintenance
● Track, force, and bypass
● Interlocks
● Memo display
● Process value (black, with and without decimal places)
● Setpoint (blue, with and without decimal places)

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV8.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special features


1

3 Block icon in the full display

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV7.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special features


1 Block icon in the full display

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1086 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special features


5

- Block icon in "Out of service"


mode (example with type 1 block
icon)

Additional information on the block icon and the control options in the block icon is available
in the following chapters:
● Configuring the block icons (Page 246)
● Block icon structure (Page 239)
● Operation via the block icon (Page 248).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1087
Dosing blocks
6.1 DoseL - Dosing device

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1088 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks 7
7.1 Comparison of large & small blocks

7.1.1 MotL compared to MotS

Comparison of the MotL and MotS blocks


The following tables are intended to help you decide which block to use.

Memory and runtime savings of the small block compared to the large block
You save the following resources for each instance:
● Memory space: ~ 40%
● Runtime: ~ 25%

Block operating modes

MotL MotS
Local mode (Page 80) X X
Manual mode (Page 76) X X
Automatic mode (Page 76) X X
Out of service (Page 72) X X

Functions of the blocks

MotL MotS
Opening additional faceplates X X
(Page 217)
Operator control permissions X X
(Page 265)
Limit monitoring of an additional X
analog value (Page 92)
Limit monitoring with hysteresis X
(Page 98)
Suppressing messages using X X
the MsgLock parameter
(Page 214)
Interlocks (Page 101) X X

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1089
Motor and valve blocks
7.1 Comparison of large & small blocks

MotL MotS
Motor protection function X X
(Page 100)
Disabling interlocks (Page 104) X X
Rapid stop for motors X
(Page 108)
Resetting the block in case of in‐ X X
terlocks or errors (Page 43)
Outputting group errors X X
(Page 124)
Outputting a signal for start read‐ X X
iness (Page 54)
Restart lock after switching off X
the motor (Page 1102)
Forming the group status for in‐ X X
terlock information (Page 106)
Forming and outputting the sig‐ X X
nal status for technologic blocks
(Page 110)
Forcing operating modes X
(Page 41)
Monitoring the feedbacks X X
(Page 98)
Release for maintenance X X
(Page 65)
Specifying warning times for con‐ X
trol functions at motors and
valves (Page 51)
Simulating signals (Page 59) X X
Selecting a unit of measure X
(Page 221)
Neutral position for motors, X X
valves and controllers (Page 48)
Output signal as a static signal X X
or pulse signal (Page 52)
Generating instance-specific X X
messages (Page 213)
Displaying auxiliary values X
(Page 220)
Time stamp X
SIMATIC BATCH functionality X
(Page 68)
Labeling of buttons and text X X
(Page 218)
Displaying current control sig‐ X X
nals from output channel block
Display active monitoring time X X

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1090 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.1 Comparison of large & small blocks

MotL MotS
Control priority in the event of an X X
invalid input command
(Page 179)
Separate monitoring time for X X
stopping the motor (Page 173)

Configurable functions using the Feature parameter

Bit Feature bit function MotL MotS


number
0 Set startup characteristics (Page 141) X X
1 Reaction to the out of service mode X X
(Page 181)
2 Resetting the commands for changing X X
the mode (Page 165)
3 Enabling resetting of commands for the X X
control settings (Page 165)
4 Setting switch or button mode X
(Page 170)
9 Resetting via input signals in the event X X
of interlocking (Protection) or errors
(Page 167)
10 Exiting local mode (Page 181) X X
11 Activating the run time of feedback sig‐ X X
nals (Page 157)
13 Separate monitoring time for stopping X
the motor (Page 173)
14 Enabling rapid stop via faceplate X
(Page 172)
17 Enabling bumpless switchover to auto‐ X
matic mode for valves, motors, and dos‐
ers (Page 177)
19 Reset even with locked state X X
(Page 169)
21 Enable bumpless switchover to "Auto‐ X
matic" mode for operator only
(Page 176)
22 Update acknowledgment and error sta‐ X
tus of the message call (Page 163)
24 Enabling local operator authorization X X
(Page 162)
25 Suppression of all messages X X
(Page 178)
26 Reaction of the switching points in the X
"Out of service" operating mode
(Page 180)
27 Interlock display with LocalSetting 2 or X X
4 (Page 182)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1091
Motor and valve blocks
7.1 Comparison of large & small blocks

Bit Feature bit function MotL MotS


number
28 Disabling operating points (Page 149) X
29 Signaling limit violation (Page 174) X
30 Set reset depending on the operating X X
mode or the LiOp parameter (Page 167)
31 Activating reset of protection / error in X X
manual mode (Page 168)

Configurable functions using the Feature2 parameter

Bit Feature2 bit function MotL MotS


number
3 Control priority in the event of an invalid X X
input command (Page 179)
5 Evaluation of the signal status of the in‐ X X
terlock signals (Page 146)

7.1.2 VlvL compared to VlvS

Comparison of the VlvL and VlvS blocks


The following tables are intended to help you decide which block to use.

Memory and runtime savings of the small block compared to the large block
You save the following resources for each instance:
● Memory space: ~ 25%
● Runtime: ~ 20%

Modes

VlvL VlvS
Local mode (Page 80) X X
Manual mode (Page 76) X X
Automatic mode (Page 76) X X
Out of service (Page 72) X X

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1092 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.1 Comparison of large & small blocks

Functions

VlvL VlvS
Opening additional faceplates X X
(Page 217)
Operator control permissions X X
(Page 265)
Interlocks (Page 101) X X
Disabling interlocks (Page 104) X X
Resetting the block in case of in‐ X X
terlocks or errors (Page 43)
Outputting group errors X X
(Page 124)
Outputting a signal for start read‐ X X
iness (Page 54)
Forming the group status for in‐ X X
terlock information (Page 106)
Forming and outputting the sig‐ X X
nal status for technologic blocks
(Page 110)
Forcing operating modes X
(Page 41)
Monitoring the feedbacks X X
(Page 98)
Disabling feedback for valves X
(Page 100)
Suppressing messages using X X
the MsgLock parameter
(Page 214)
Release for maintenance X X
(Page 65)
Specifying warning times for con‐ X
trol functions at motors and
valves (Page 51)
Simulating signals (Page 59) X X
Selecting a unit of measure X
(Page 221)
Neutral position for motors, X X
valves and controllers (Page 48)
Generating instance-specific X X
messages (Page 213)
Displaying auxiliary values X
(Page 220)
SIMATIC BATCH functionality X X
(Page 68)
Output signal as a static signal X
or pulse signal (Page 52)
Time stamp (Page 1698) X

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1093
Motor and valve blocks
7.1 Comparison of large & small blocks

VlvL VlvS
Labeling of buttons and text X X
(Page 218)
Displaying current control sig‐ X X
nals from output channel block

Configurable functions using the Feature parameter

Bit num‐ Feature bit function VlvL VlvS


ber
0 Set startup characteristics (Page 141) X X
1 Reaction to the out of service mode X X
(Page 181)
2 Resetting the commands for changing X X
the mode (Page 165)
3 Enabling resetting of commands for X X
the control settings (Page 165)
4 Setting switch or button mode X
(Page 170)
9 Resetting via input signals in the event X X
of interlocking (Protection) or errors
(Page 167)
10 Exiting local mode (Page 181) X X
11 Activating the run time of feedback sig‐ X X
nals (Page 157)
17 Enabling bumpless switchover to au‐ X
tomatic mode for valves, motors, and
dosers (Page 177)
21 Enable bumpless switchover to "Auto‐ X
matic" mode for operator only
(Page 176)
22 Update acknowledgment and error X
status of the message call (Page 163)
24 Enabling local operator authorization X X
(Page 162)
25 Suppression of all messages X X
(Page 178)
27 Interlock display with LocalSetting 2 or X X
4 (Page 182)
30 Set reset depending on the operating X X
mode or the LiOp parameter
(Page 167)
31 Activating reset of protection / error in X X
manual mode (Page 168)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1094 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.1 Comparison of large & small blocks

Configurable functions using the Feature2 parameter

Bit num‐ Feature2 bit function VlvL VlvS


ber
3 Control priority in the event of an inva‐ X X
lid input command (Page 179)
5 Evaluation of the signal status of the X X
interlock signals (Page 146)

7.1.3 ShrdResL compared to ShrdResS

Comparison of the ShrdResL and ShrdResS blocks


The following tables are intended to help you decide which block to use.

Memory and runtime savings of the small block compared to the large block
You save the following resources for each instance:
● Memory space: ~ 50%
● Runtime: ~ 25%

Parameters for channel

ShrdResL ShrdResS
Control commands for channel 12 6
External setpoints for channel 8 2
Additional strings for channel 2 -

Functions

ShrdResL ShrdResS
Opening additional faceplates (Page 217) x x
Operator control permissions (Page 265) x
Readiness signal (Page 1293) x x
Channel management (Page 1315) x
Channel management with parameterized priority parameter x
and strategy mode (Page 1293)
Allocate/enable channel (Page 1293) x x
Enable/disable channel (Page 1293) x x
Channel prioritization (Page 1293) x x
Cascading (Page 1315) x
SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68) x x

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1095
Motor and valve blocks
7.1 Comparison of large & small blocks

Configurable functions using the Feature parameter

Bit number Feature bit function ShrdResL ShrdResS


0 Set startup characteristics (Page 141) x x

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1096 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.2 MotL - Motor (Large)

7.2 MotL - Motor (Large)

7.2.1 Description of MotL

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1850
Family: Drives

Area of application for MotL


The block is used for the following applications:
● Control of motors with one control signal

Note
This block is also available as a small block. A comparison of the MotL and MotS blocks is
available in the section: MotL compared to MotS (Page 1089)

How it works
The block is used to control motors. Various inputs are available for controlling the motor.

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38). The block is
also installed automatically in the startup OB (OB100).

Startup characteristics
Use the Feature Bit Set startup characteristics (Page 141) to define the startup characteristics
of this block.
The messages are suppressed after startup for the number of cycles set at RunUpCyc.

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


You can find a description for each parameter in section MotL I/Os (Page 1112).

Status bit Parameter


0 Occupied
1 BatchEn
2 SimOn
3 OosAct.Value

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1097
Motor and valve blocks
7.2 MotL - Motor (Large)

Status bit Parameter


4 OosLi.Value
5 0 = ManAct.Value
1 = AutoAct.Value
6 LocalAct.Value
7 0: Open padlock in the block icon
1: Closed padlock in the block icon
8 Start.Value
9 Stop.Value
10 MonDynStopErr.Value
11 MonStaErr.Value
12 MonDynErr.Value
13 BypProt
14 Invalid signal status
15 Mode switchover error
16 1 = Intlock is active
17 1 = Permit is active
18 1 = Protect is active
19 Trip.Value
20 Display „Forced start“
21 Display „Forced stop“
22 Not used
23 "Interlock" button is enabled
24 Reset request in automatic preview
25 WarnAct.Value or
Idle Time is active
26 Bypass information from previous function block
27 Automatic preview for "starting"
28 Automatic preview for "stopping"
29 External error generated by FaultExt or external control system fault CSF with set
Feature.Bit18 Activating error state for external process control error CSF
(Page 154)
30 "Permission" button is enabled
31 "Protection" button is enabled

Status word allocation for Status2 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 MsgLock
1 AV_AH_Act.Value
2 AV_WH_Act.Value
3 AV_TH_Act.Value
4 AV_TL_Act.Value
5 AV_WL_Act.Value

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1098 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.2 MotL - Motor (Large)

Status bit Parameter


6 AV_AL_Act.Value
7 AV_AH_En OR Feature.Bit23
8 AV_WH_En OR Feature.Bit23
9 AV_TH_En OR Feature.Bit23
10 AV_TL_En OR Feature.Bit23
11 AV_WL_En OR Feature.Bit23
12 AV_AL_En OR Feature.Bit23
13 AV_AH_MsgEn
14 AV_WH_MsgEn
15 AV_TH_MsgEn
16 AV_TL_MsgEn
17 AV_WL_MsgEn
18 AV_AL_MsgEn
19 1 = No impact of input signals on "local mode" with LocalSetting = 2 and
LocalSetting = 4
20 Motor is stopped
21 Motor is stopping
22 Motor is starting
23 Motor is running
24 Error in motor
25 1 = Input parameter StartChnST is interconnected
26 - 29 Not used
30 Display for interlocks in block icon
31 MS_RelOp

Status word allocation for Status3 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 Delay of the AV_AH_Lim message
1 Delay of the AV_WH_Lim message
2 Delay of the AV_TH_Lim message
3 Delay of the AV_TL_Lim message
4 Delay of the AV_WL_Lim message
5 Delay of the AV_AL_Lim message
6 Collection of message delays
7 - 10 Not used
11 Hidden bypass signal in Permit
12 Hidden bypass signal in interlock
13 Hidden bypass signal in Protect
14 Feature2.Bit2: Separate bypass signal
15 - 17 Current monitoring time is visible
18 SimLiOp.Value

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1099
Motor and valve blocks
7.2 MotL - Motor (Large)

Status bit Parameter


19 1 = Enable for rapid stop (Feature Bit Enabling rapid stop via faceplate
(Page 172))
20 - 22 Not used
23 Command for rapid stop
24 Output command for starting the motor
25 Output command for stopping the motor
26 Show automatic preview in the standard view
27 Not used
28 GrpErr.Value
29 RdyToStart.Value
30 Auxiliary value 1 visible
31 Auxiliary value 2 visible

Status word allocation for Status4 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 Effective signal 1 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
1 Effective signal 2 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
2 Effective signal 3 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
3 Effective signal 4 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
4 Effective signal 5 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
5 Effective signal 6 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
6 Effective signal 7 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
7 Effective signal 8 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
8 AV not connected
9 Motor protection display (Trip.Status ≠ 16#FF)
10 1 = Input parameter FbkRun is connected
11 - 15 Not used
16 - 23 Effective signal 9..16 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
24 - 30 Not used
31 Separate monitoring of shutdown of the motor (Feature.Bit13)

Status word allocation for Status5 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 - 15 Effective signal 1...16 of the message block connected via EventTs2In
16 - 31 Not used

See also
MotL functions (Page 1102)
MotL messaging (Page 1111)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1100 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.2 MotL - Motor (Large)

MotL block diagram (Page 1120)


MotL error handling (Page 1109)
MotL modes (Page 1101)

7.2.2 MotL modes

MotL operating modes


The block can be operated using the following modes:
● Local mode (Page 80)
● Automatic mode (Page 76)
● Manual mode (Page 76)
● Out of service (Page 72)
The next section provides additional block-specific information relating to the general
descriptions.

"Local mode"
You can find general information on "Local mode", switching modes and Bumpless switchover
in the Local mode (Page 80) section.
Motor actions you can control in local mode:
● "Start" (StartLocal = 1)
● "Stop" (StopLocal = 1)
A motor operated in "local mode" is controlled either by "local" signals or by the feedback
signals (e.g the FbkStart = 1 input parameter). Configuration takes place via the input
parameter LocalSetting.

"Automatic mode"
You can find general information on "Automatic mode", switching modes and Bumpless
switchover in the Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76) section.
Motor actions you can control in auto mode:
● "Start" (StartAut = 1)
● "Stop" (StopAut = 1)

"Manual mode"
You can find general information on "Manual mode", switching modes and bumpless
switchover in the section Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers
(Page 76).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1101
Motor and valve blocks
7.2 MotL - Motor (Large)

Motor actions you can control in manual mode:


● "Start" (StartMan = 1)
● "Stop" (StopMan = 1)

"Out of service"
You can find general information about the "Out of service" mode in the Out of service
(Page 72) section.
With Feature2.Bit1 =1 the following output parameter become the status of simulation
16#60, if mode is changed to "Out of service".
With Feature2.Bit1 =0 the following output parameter become the status of 16#80, if mode
is changed to "Out of service".
● FbkRunOut.ST
● Run.ST
● Stop.ST
● AV_Out.ST

See also
MotL block diagram (Page 1120)
MotL I/Os (Page 1112)
MotL messaging (Page 1111)
MotL error handling (Page 1109)
MotL functions (Page 1102)
Description of MotL (Page 1097)

7.2.3 MotL functions

Functions of MotL
The functions for this block are listed below.

Opening additional faceplates


This block provides the standard function Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

Operator permissions
This block provides the standard function Operator control permissions (Page 265).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1102 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.2 MotL - Motor (Large)

The block has the following permissions for the OS_Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 1 = Operator can switch to "automatic mode"
1 1 = Operator can switch to "manual mode"
2 1 = Operator can switch to "local mode"
3 1 = Operator can switch to "Out of service" mode
4 1 = Operator can stop the motor
5 1 = Operator can start the motor
6 Not used
7 1 = Operator can reset the motor
8 1 = Operator can define or change the monitoring time for startup
9 1 = Operator can define the monitoring time for the status
10 1 = Operator can enable the monitoring time function (Bit 8 - 9)
11 1 = Operator can activate the Simulation function
12 1 = Operator can activate the Release for maintenance function
13 1 = Operator can change the high limit (AV) for the alarm
14 1 = Operator can change the high limit (AV) for the warning
15 1 = Operator can change the high limit (AV) for the tolerance
16 1 = Operator can change the limit (AV) for hysteresis
17 1 = Operator can lower the limit (AV) for the alarm
18 1 = Operator can lower the limit (AV) for the warning
19 1 = Operator can lower the limit (AV) for the tolerance
20 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via AV_AH_MsgEn
21 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via AV_WH_MsgEn
22 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via AV_TH_MsgEn
23 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via AV_TL_MsgEn
24 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via AV_WL_MsgEn
25 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via AV_AL_MsgEn
26 1 = Operator can change the simulation value SimAV
27- 29 Not used
30 1 = Operator can define the monitoring time for stopping
31 Not used

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Limit monitoring of an additional analog value


This block provides the standard function Limit monitoring of an additional analog value
(Page 92).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1103
Motor and valve blocks
7.2 MotL - Motor (Large)

Limit monitoring with hysteresis


This block provides the standard function Limit monitoring with hysteresis (Page 98).

Suppressing messages using the MsgLock parameter


This block provides the standard function Suppressing messages using the MsgLock
parameter (Page 214).

Interlocks
This block provides the following interlocks:
● Activation enable
● Interlock without reset ("Interlock")
● Interlock with reset ("Protection")
Refer to the section Interlocks (Page 101) as well as Influence of the signal status on the
interlock (Page 105).

Motor protection function


This block provides the standard function Motor protection function (Page 100).

Disabling interlocks
This block provides the standard function Disabling interlocks (Page 104).

Rapid stop for motors


This block provides the standard function Rapid stop for motors (Page 108).

Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors


This block provides the standard function Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors
(Page 43).

External error (FaultExt), external control system fault (CSF)


This block provides the possibility to pass an external error via the FaultExt parameter or
an external control system fault via the CSF parameter. See MotL error handling (Page 1109)

Group error
This block provides the standard function Outputting group errors (Page 124).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1104 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.2 MotL - Motor (Large)

The following parameters are taken into consideration when forming the group error:
● CSF
● Trip
● MonDynErr
● MonStaErr
● FaultExt

Outputting a signal for start readiness


This block provides the standard function Outputting a signal for start readiness (Page 54).

Restart lock after switching off the motor


After switching off or stopping the motor, it can only be restarted after the time set with the
IdleTime input parameter.
When the "Stop" command is given, the motor goes immediately into "Stop" mode, and
IdleTimestarts after the feedback (FbkRun = 0) is given. The motor cannot be started again
until the IdleTime has expired.
The IdleTime parameter can be set independently of the MonTiDynamic parameter.

Forming the group status for interlocks


This block provides the standard function Forming the group status for interlock information
(Page 106).

Forming the signal status for blocks


This block provides the standard function Forming and outputting the signal status for
technologic blocks (Page 110).
The worst signal status ST_Worst for the block is formed from the following parameters:
● LocalLi.ST
● StartLocal.ST
● StopLocal.ST
● Trip.ST
● FbkRunOut.ST
● AV_Out.ST
● StartChn.ST
● StartAut.ST (only if Feature2.Bit10 = 1)
● StopAut.ST (only if Feature2.Bit10 = 1)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1105
Motor and valve blocks
7.2 MotL - Motor (Large)

Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values


If the Feature2 bit Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values
(Page 190) is set to 1 and one of the following parameters has bad signal status (16#00 or
16#28), the block goes to the neutral position (motor stop) in the "Automatic" mode:
● StartAut.ST
● StopAut.ST

Forcing operating modes


This block provides the standard function Forcing operating modes (Page 41).
The following states can be enforced:
● "Start" (StartForce)
● "Stop" (StopForce)

Feedback monitoring
This block provides the standard function Monitoring the feedbacks (Page 98).

Release for maintenance


This block provides the standard function Release for maintenance (Page 65).

Specify warning times for control functions


This block provides the standard function Specifying warning times for control functions at
motors and valves (Page 51).
You can generate warning signals when, for example, motors are started. Warning signals can
be generated in the following modes:
● Manual mode (Page 76) (WarnTiMan input parameter)
● Automatic mode (Page 76) (WarnTiAut input parameter)
You specify the warning times in seconds using the input parameters WarnTiMan and
WarnTiAut. If, for example, a motor is started, then this is displayed at the output parameter
with WarnAct = 1. The motor then starts after the set warning time has expired and
WarnAct then goes back to 0.
A corresponding warning is not output if the warning times (WarnTiMan or WarnTiAut) are
specified with a smaller value than the SampleTime parameter.

Simulating signals
This block provides the standard function Simulating signals (Page 59).
You can simulate the following values:
● Additional value (SimAV, SimAV_Li)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1106 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.2 MotL - Motor (Large)

Selecting a unit of measure


This block provides the standard function Selecting a unit of measure (Page 221).

Neutral position
This block provides the standard function Neutral position for motors, valves and controllers
(Page 48).

Output signal as a pulse signal or static signal


This block provides the standard function Output signal as a static signal or pulse signal
(Page 52).

Generating instance-specific messages


This block provides the standard function Generating instance-specific messages (Page 213).

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the section
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133). The following functionality is available
for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
0 Set startup characteristics (Page 141)
1 Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 181)
2 Resetting the commands for changing the mode (Page 165)
3 Enabling resetting of commands for the control settings (Page 165)
4 Setting switch or button mode (Page 170)
9 Resetting via input signals in the event of interlocking (Protection) or errors (Page 167)
10 Exiting local mode (Page 181)
11 Activating the run time of feedback signals (Page 157)
14 Enabling rapid stop via faceplate (Page 172)
13 Separate monitoring time for stopping the motor (Page 173)
17 Enabling bumpless switchover to automatic mode for valves, motors, and dosers (Page 177)
18 Activating error state for external process control error CSF (Page 154)
19 Reset even with locked state (Page 169)
20 Disable calculation of impulse control in LocalSetting 2 and 4 (Page 190)
21 Enable bumpless switchover to "Automatic" mode for operator only (Page 176)
22 Update acknowledgment and error status of the message call (Page 163)
23 Limits disabled in faceplate (Page 195)
24 Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162)
25 Suppression of all messages (Page 178)
26 Reaction of the switching points in the "Out of service" operating mode (Page 180)
27 Interlock display with LocalSetting 2 or 4 (Page 182)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1107
Motor and valve blocks
7.2 MotL - Motor (Large)

Bit Function
28 Disabling operating points (Page 149)
29 Signaling limit violation (Page 174)
30 Set reset depending on the operating mode or the LiOp parameter (Page 167)
31 Activating reset of protection / error in manual mode (Page 168)

In pushbutton operation (Bit 4 = 0) the automatic commands in "automatic" mode are latching,
in other words StartAut, StopAut can be reset to 0 after changing the control. In "manual"
and "local" modes, however, the automatic commands are not saved and in the absence of
automatic commands the automatic control is tracked.
In switching mode (Bit 4 = 1), the control is selected with the static signal StartAut. If
StartAut input is not set the motor is stopped. Control via StopAut is not needed. If the
"Activate command reset for control" function (Bit 3 = 1) is also activated, the StartAut input
is reset to the neutral position after evaluation in the block.

Configurable reactions using the Feature2 parameter

Bit Function
1 Changes signal status of outputs in OOS (Page 198)
2 Separate evaluation for excluded and simulated interlock signals (Page 155)
3 Control priority in the event of an invalid input command (Page 179)
4 Setting switch or button mode for local commands (Page 185)
5 Evaluation of the signal status of the interlock signals (Page 146)
8 Forcing operating modes in the "Local" mode (Page 188)
10 Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values (Page 190)
11 Suppress MsgLock and “Out of service” mode for a connected message block (Page 192)

Displaying auxiliary values


This block provides the standard function Displaying auxiliary values (Page 220).

Connection of the time-stamped messages from EventTs or Event16Ts


This block provides the standard function Connection of the time-stamped messages from
EventTs or Event16Ts (Page 216).

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


This block provides the standard function SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

Button labels
This block provides the standard function Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1108 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.2 MotL - Motor (Large)

Instance-specific text can be configured for the following parameters:


● StartMan
● StopMan
● RapidStp

See also
MotL messaging (Page 1111)
MotL I/Os (Page 1112)
MotL block diagram (Page 1120)
MotL modes (Page 1101)
Description of MotL (Page 1097)

7.2.4 MotL error handling

Error handling of MotL


Refer to section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions for the error handling of all
blocks.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers
● Mode switchover error
● Control system fault (CSF)
● Invalid input signals

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum I/O can be used to output the following error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; the block is not executed.
0 There is no error.
41 The value for the LocalSetting I/O is not within the approved limit of 0 to 4.
42 LocalSetting = 0 or LocalSetting = 3 or LocalSetting = 4 and
LocalLi = 1
51 StartLocal = 1 and StopLocal = 1
StartAut = 1 and StopAut = 1
AutModLi = 1 and ManModLi = 1
StartForce = 1 and StopForce = 1
52 LocalAct = 1 and LocalSetting = 2 or 4 and SimOn = 1

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1109
Motor and valve blocks
7.2 MotL - Motor (Large)

Mode switchover error


This error can be output by the block, see the section Error handling (Page 121).

Invalid input signals


This error can be output by the block, see the section Error handling (Page 121).
For the following invalid input signals, the control output can be kept or switched to the neutral
position. This depends on the function Control priority in the event of an invalid input
command (Page 179).

Operating mode Invalid input signal Control reaction with


Feature2.Bit3 = 1
Local: Localsetting = 1 or Pushbutton operation for local Motor is stopped
Localsetting = 3 mode (Feature2.Bit4 = 0):
StartLocal = 1 and
StopLocal = 1
Local: Localsetting = 1 or StartForce = 1 and
Localsetting = 3 and forcing StopForce = 1
Forcing and no "local mode" StartForce = 1 and
StopForce = 1
"Automatic mode" and no forcing Pushbutton operation
(Feature.Bit4 = 0):
StartAut = 1 and StopAut = 1
"Manual mode" and no forcing StopMan = 1 and StartMan = 1

Control system fault (CSF)


An external signal can be activated via the CSF input. A control system fault is triggered if this
signal changes to 1. Refer to the Error handling (Page 121) section for more on this.

See also
MotL block diagram (Page 1120)
MotL I/Os (Page 1112)
MotL messaging (Page 1111)
MotL functions (Page 1102)
MotL modes (Page 1101)
Description of MotL (Page 1097)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1110 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.2 MotL - Motor (Large)

7.2.5 MotL messaging

Messaging
The following messages can be generated for this block:
● Process control fault
● Instance-specific messages

Process control fault


The following control system error messages can be output:

Message in‐ Message identi‐ Message class Event


stance fier
MsgEvId1 SIG 1 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
Motor feedback error
SIG 2 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
Motor protection triggered
SIG 3 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External error has occurred

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment
You can interconnect an external fault (signal) to input parameter CSF. If it changes to CSF =
1, a process control fault is triggered (MsgEvId1, SIG 3).

Instance-specific messages
You can use up to three instance-specific messages with this block.

Message in‐ Message identifier Message class Event


stance
MsgEvId1 SIG 4 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 1
SIG 5 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 2
SIG 6 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 3

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1111
Motor and valve blocks
7.2 MotL - Motor (Large)

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId1

Associated value Block parameters


1 BatchName
2 StepNo
3 BatchID
4 ExtVa104
5 ExtVa105
6 ExtVa106
7 ExtVa107
8 ExtVa108
9 Reserved
10 Reserved

The associated values 4 ... 8 are allocated to the parameters ExtVa104 ... ExtVa108 , and
can be used. Additional information is available in the "Process Control System PCS 7 -
Engineering System" manual.

See also
Description of MotL (Page 1097)
MotL functions (Page 1102)
MotL I/Os (Page 1112)
MotL block diagram (Page 1120)
MotL error handling (Page 1109)
MotL modes (Page 1101)

7.2.6 MotL I/Os


I/Os of MotL

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AutModLi* 1 = "Automatic mode" via interconnec‐ STRUCT -
tion or SFC (controlled by ModLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AutModOp* 1 = "Automatic mode" via operator (con‐ BOOL 0
trolled by ModLiOp = 0)
AV Input additional analog value, to be con‐ ANY
nected to AV_Tech of the AV block
AV_AH_Lim Limit high alarm REAL 95.0
AV_AL_Lim Limit low alarm REAL 5.0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1112 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.2 MotL - Motor (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


AV_Hyst Hysteresis for alarm, warning and toler‐ REAL 1.0
ance limits
AV_TH_Lim Limit high tolerance REAL 85.0
AV_TL_Lim Limit low tolerance REAL 15.0
AV_WH_Lim Limit high warning REAL 90.0
AV_WL_Lim Limit low warning REAL 10.0
BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation BOOL 0
BatchID Batch ID DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name S7-String
BypProt 1 = Bypassing interlock in "local mode" BOOL 0
and in "simulation"
CSF 1 = External error (control system fault) STRUCT -
Error handling (Page 121) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1
EventTsIn For interconnecting data between a tech‐ ANY
nology block and the message blocks
EventTs, Event16Ts.
The EventTsIn input parameter serves
to interconnect the EventTsOut output
parameter of the
EventTs,Event16Ts block. When this
interconnection is configured, the mes‐
sages of the EventTs, Event16Ts
block are displayed on the OS in the
alarm view of the technology block and
can also be acknowledged there.
EventTs2In For interconnecting data between a tech‐ ANY
nology block and the message blocks
EventTs, Event16Ts.
The EventTs2In input parameter
serves to interconnect the
EventTsOut output parameter of the
EventTs,Event16Ts block. When this
interconnection is configured, the mes‐
sages of the EventTs, Event16Ts
block are displayed on the OS in the
alarm view of the technology block and
can also be acknowledged there.
ExtMsg1 Binary input for freely selectable mes‐ STRUCT -
sage 1 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg2 Binary input for freely selectable mes‐ STRUCT -
sage 2 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1113
Motor and valve blocks
7.2 MotL - Motor (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


ExtMsg3 Binary input for freely selectable mes‐ STRUCT -
sage 3 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtVa104 Associated value 4 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa105 Associated value 5 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa106 Associated value 6 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa107 Associated value 7 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa108 Associated value 8 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
FaultExt 1 = External error STRUCT -
Error handling (Page 121) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FbkRun Feedback for starting is present: STRUCT -
1 = Start ● Value: BOOL ● 0
0 = Stop ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 1102) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
Separate monitoring time for stopping ● Bit 13: BOOL ● 0
the motor
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0

Feature2 I/O for additional functions (Page 1102) STRUCT -


● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
IdleTime* Wait time for restart in [s] REAL 5.0
Intlock 0 = Interlocking without reset is active; STRUCT -
you can operate the block without reset ● Value: BOOL ● 1
once the interlocking condition has dis‐
appeared ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
1 = Interlock not activated ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
Intl_En 1 = Interlock without reset (interlock, BOOL 1
Intlock parameter) is active
LocalLi 1 = Activate "local mode" via plant signal STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
LocalOp* 1 = "Local mode" via operator BOOL 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1114 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.2 MotL - Motor (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


LocalSetting Properties for the Local mode (Page 80) INT 0
ManModLi* 1 = "Manual mode" via interconnection STRUCT -
or SFC (controlled by ModLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManModOp* 1 = "Manual mode" via OS operator (con‐ BOOL 1
trolled by ModLiOp = 0)
ModLiOp Switchover of operating mode between: STRUCT -
0 = Operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
1 = Interconnection or SFC ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Monitor 1 = Feedback monitoring BOOL 1
MonTiDynamic* Monitoring time for feedback errors or REAL 3.0
feedback start error after successful op‐
eration in [s]
MonTiDyStop* Monitoring time for feedback stop errors REAL 3.0
after successful operation in [s]
MonTiStatic* Monitoring time for feedback errors with‐ REAL 3.0
out operation in [s]
MS_RelOp* 1= Release for maintenance via OS op‐ BOOL 0
erator
MsgEvId1 Message number (assigned automati‐ DWORD 16#00000000
cally)
MsgLock 1 = Suppress process messages. STRUCT -
See also the section Suppressing mes‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
sages using the MsgLock parameter ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
(Page 214) for more on this.
Occupied 1 = In use by a batch BOOL 0
OosLi 1 = "Out of service", via interconnection STRUCT -
or SFC (0-1 edge transition) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosOp* 1 = "Out of service", via OS operator BOOL 0
OpSt_In Input parameter for local operator au‐ DWORD 16#00000000
thorization, connected with the Out out‐
put parameter of the upstream block,
OpStations (Page 423)
OS_Perm I/O for operator permissions STRUCT -
(Page 1102) ● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● Bit 8: BOOL ● 1
1 = Operator can set or change the mon‐
itoring time for "Control: Start"
● Bit 20: BOOL ● 1
● Bit 30: BOOL ● 1
1 = Operator can set or change the mon‐
itoring time for "Control: Stop"

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1115
Motor and valve blocks
7.2 MotL - Motor (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


Permit 1 = OS activation enable for motor STRUCT -
0 = No OS release for energizing motor ● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
Perm_En 1 = Activation enable (enable, Permit BOOL 1
parameter) is active
Protect 0 = Protective interlocking is effective; STRUCT -
once the interlocking condition has dis‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 1
appeared, you will have to reset the block
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
1 = Protective interlocking not activated
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
Prot_En 1 = Protective interlock (protection, BOOL 1
Protect parameter) is active
PulseWidth* Pulse width of control signal [s] REAL 3.0
RapidStp* Rapid stop for the motor: BOOL 0
0 = Motor On
1 = Motor Off
RstLi* 1 = Reset via interconnection STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RstOp* 1 = Reset via operator BOOL 0
RunUpCyc Number of cycles in startup; messages INT 3
are suppressed during these cycles
SampleTime Sampling time [s] (assigned automatical‐ REAL 0.1
ly)
SimAV* Additional value used for SimOn = 1 REAL 0.0
SimAV_Li Additional analog value that is used for STRUCT -
SimOnLi.Value = 1 ● Value: REAL ● 0
(SimLiOp.Value = 1)
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SimLiOp Activation/deactivation of the simulation STRUCT -
0 = Operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
1 = Interconnection or SFC ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SimOnLi 1 = Simulation via interconnection or STRUCT -
SFC (controlled by SimLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SimOn* 1 = Simulation on BOOL 0
SelFp1 Call a block saved in this parameter as ANY -
an additional faceplate (Page 217) in the
standard view

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1116 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.2 MotL - Motor (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


SelFp2 Call a block saved in this parameter as ANY -
an additional faceplate (Page 217) in the
preview
StartAut* 1 = Starting the motor in "automatic STRUCT -
mode" ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
StartChnST Signal status of output channel Start STRUCT -
Should be connected to an output chan‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
nel block ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
StartForce 1 = Force motor start STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
StartLocal 1 = Starting the motor in "local mode" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
StartMan* 1 = Starting the motor in "manual mode" BOOL 0
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
StopAut* 1 = Stopping the motor in "automatic STRUCT -
mode" ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
StopForce 1 = Force motor stop STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
StopLocal 1 = Stopping the motor in "local mode" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
StopMan* 1 = Stopping the motor in "manual mode" BOOL 0
Trip 1 = Motor is in "good" state STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
UserAna1 Analog auxiliary value 1 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
UA1unit Unit of measure for analog auxiliary val‐ INT 0
ue 1
UserAna2 Analog auxiliary value 2 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
UA2unit Unit of measure for analog auxiliary val‐ INT 0
ue 2
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use in PCS 7 BYTE 16#00
OS

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1117
Motor and valve blocks
7.2 MotL - Motor (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


WarnTiAut Prewarning of motor start in "automatic REAL 0.0
mode" in [s]
WarnTiMan Prewarning of motor start in "manual REAL 0.0
mode" in [s]

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AutAct 1 = "Automatic mode" enabled STRUCT -
0 = "Manual mode" is enabled ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AutoST 1 = Worst signal status of automatic com‐ BYTE 16#80
mands
AV_OpScale Limit for scale in AV bar graph of face‐ STRUCT -
plate ● High: REAL ● 100.0
● Low: REAL ● 0.0
AV_Out Output additional analog value STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AV_Unit Unit of measure for additional analog val‐ INT 0
ue
CurrMon Remaining monitoring time [s] DINT 0
ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without BOOL 0
errors
ErrorNum Output of pending error number. For er‐ INT -1
ror numbers that can be output by this
block, see MotL error handling
(Page 1109)
FbkRunOut Feedback for starting is present: STRUCT -
1 = Start ● Value: BOOL ● 0
0 = Stop ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
GrpErr 1 = Group error pending STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
LocalAct 1 = "Local mode" enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
LockAct 1 = Interlock (Intlock, Permit, STRUCT -
Protect) or Trip is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1118 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.2 MotL - Motor (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


ManAct 1 = "Manual mode" enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MonDynErr 1 = Feedback error or feedback start er‐ STRUCT -
ror due to control change ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MonDynStopErr 1 = Feedback stop error due to control STRUCT -
change ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MonStaErr 1 = Feedback error due to unexpected STRUCT -
feedback change ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MS_Release Release for maintenance: STRUCT -
1 = Release for OS operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MsgAckn1 Message acknowledgement status 1 WORD 16#0000
(output ACK_STATE of first ALARM_8P)
MsgErr1 Alarm error 1 (output ERROR of first BOOL 0
ALARM_8P)
MsgStat1 Message status 1 (output STATUS of first WORD 16#0000
ALARM_8P)
OosAct 1 = Block is "Out of service" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpSt_Out Value of the OpSt_In input parameter, DWORD 16#00000000
for feedforwarding to other blocks. Bit 31
of this parameter is used by
Feature.Bit24
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with settings DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
changed by the block algorithm
P_Rst 1= Pulse output for reset STRUCT -
The parameter persists for one cycle af‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
ter a reset. ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
P_Stop 0 = Pulse signal for stopping the motor STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
P_Start 1 = Pulse signal for starting the motor STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
R_StpAct 1 = Rapid stop of the motor is active STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1119
Motor and valve blocks
7.2 MotL - Motor (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


RdyToReset 1 = Ready for reset via RstLi input or STRUCT -
commands in "local", "automatic", or ● Value: BOOL ● 0
"manual mode"
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RdyToStart 1 = Active start readiness STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Run 1 = Motor is running STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
Start 1 = Control of motor: started STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Status1 Status word 1 (Page 1097) DWORD 16#00000000
Status2 Status word 2 (Page 1097) DWORD 16#00000000
Status3 Status word 3 (Page 1097) DWORD 16#00000000
Status4 Status word 4 (Page 1097) DWORD 16#00000000
Stop 1 = Motor stopped STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
WarnAct 1 = Prewarning for motor start active (pa‐ STRUCT -
rameters WarnTiAut and WarnTiMan) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

See also
MotL modes (Page 1101)
MotL block diagram (Page 1120)
MotL messaging (Page 1111)

7.2.7 MotL block diagram

MotL block diagram


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

See also
MotL I/Os (Page 1112)
MotL messaging (Page 1111)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1120 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.2 MotL - Motor (Large)

MotL error handling (Page 1109)


MotL functions (Page 1102)
MotL modes (Page 1101)
Description of MotL (Page 1097)

7.2.8 Operator control and monitoring

7.2.8.1 MotL views

Views of the MotL block


The MotL block provides the following views:
● MotL standard view (Page 1122)
● Alarm view (Page 313)
● Limit view of motors (Page 305)
● Trend view (Page 317)
● Parameter view for motors and valves (Page 297)
● MotL preview (Page 1125)
● Memo view (Page 315)
● Batch view (Page 313)
● Block icon for MotL (Page 1128)
Refer to the sections Structure of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure
(Page 239) for general information on the faceplate and block icon.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1121
Motor and valve blocks
7.2 MotL - Motor (Large)

7.2.8.2 MotL standard view

MotLstandard view


 

 


 





(1) Displaying and switching the operating mode


This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
● Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76)
● Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76)
● Local mode (Page 80)
● Out of service (Page 72)
Refer to section Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) for information
on switching the operating mode.

(2) Starting and stopping the motor


This area shows you the default operating state for the motor. The following states can be
shown and executed here:
● "Start"
● "Stop"
● "Rapid stop"
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for information
on changing the state.
If text is configured for these commands, it is displayed as status text and as button labels for
command selection. You can find more information about this in section Labeling of buttons
and text (Page 218)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1122 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.2 MotL - Motor (Large)

(3) Resetting the block


Click "Reset" for interlocks or errors. You can find additional information on this in the section
Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors (Page 43).

(4) Operator control and display area for interlock functions of the block
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
You can use this button to control the interlock functions of the block. You can find additional
information on this in the section Interlocking functions (Page 101).
The following is displayed in addition to the buttons:
● Interlock status (see Forming the group status for interlock information (Page 106)), e.g.:

● Signal status (see Forming and outputting the signal status for technologic blocks
(Page 110)), e.g.:

● Bypass information (see Forming the group status for interlock information (Page 106)):

(5) Display of auxiliary values


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
You can use this area to display two auxiliary values that have been configured in the
engineering system (ES). You can find additional information on this in the section Displaying
auxiliary values (Page 220).

(6) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
Use this navigation button to open the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system (ES). The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the
engineering system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in the section Opening additional faceplates
(Page 217).

(7) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Maintenance"
Additional information on this is available in section Release for maintenance (Page 65) Display
area for block states.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1123
Motor and valve blocks
7.2 MotL - Motor (Large)

(8) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Simulation"
● "Delay"
You will find more detailed information on this in the sections Simulating signals (Page 59) and
Display of delay times (Page 267).

(9) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block (from high to low
according to priority):
● "Motor protection"
● "External error"
● "Status error"
● "Control error"
● "Invalid signal"
● "Changeover error"
Additional information on these errors is available in the sections Monitoring the feedbacks
(Page 98) , Error handling (Page 121) (section "Invalid input signals" and "Mode switchover
error") and Motor protection function (Page 100).

(10) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Forced start"
● "Forced stop"
● "Request 0/1": A reset to "automatic mode" is expected.
You can find additional information on this in the section Forcing operating modes (Page 41).

(11) Automatic preview


This display is only visible in "manual mode", in "local mode", or with a reset request in
"automatic mode", when the current output signals are not identical to the control in "automatic
mode".
The display shows what state the motor would assume if you switched from "manual" or "local"
mode to "automatic mode", or performed a reset to "automatic mode".

(12) Status display of the motor


The current status of the motor is graphically displayed here.
You can find more information about this in section Block icon for MotL (Page 1128)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1124 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.2 MotL - Motor (Large)

7.2.8.3 MotL preview

Preview of MotL

Display of the current monitoring time is visible.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1125
Motor and valve blocks
7.2 MotL - Motor (Large)

Display of the remaining monitoring time is not visible.

(1) Automatic preview


This area shows you the block status after it has switched from the "Manual" mode or "Local"
mode to the "Automatic" mode.
If the block is in "Automatic" mode, the current block state is displayed.
This area also displays the worst signal status of the following automatic commands:
● StartAut
● StopAut

(2) Monitoring time


The remaining "Monitoring time" is displayed in this area.

(3) Enable operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1126 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.2 MotL - Motor (Large)

Icons for enabled operation:


● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)
The following enabled operations are shown here:
● "Stop": You can stop the motor.
If text is configured for this command, it is also displayed in brackets. You can find additional
information on this in the section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218).
● "Start": You can start the motor.
If text is configured for this command, it is also displayed in brackets. You can find additional
information on this in the section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218).
● "Reset": You can reset the motor after interlocks or errors.
● "Automatic": You can switch to "automatic mode".
● "Manual": You can switch to "manual mode".
● "Local": You can switch to "local mode".
● "Out of service": You can switch to "Out of service" operating mode.
● "Local operator permission": Use the ← button to switch to the standard view of the
OpStations block. You can find additional information on this in the section Operator control
permissions (Page 265).
● "Monitoring time": Display of the remaining monitoring time.

(4) Displaying current control signals


This area shows the most important parameters for this block with the current selection:
● "Permission":
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = No OS release for energizing motor
– 1 = Enable for "starting"/"stopping" from the neutral position
● "Protection":
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Protective interlocking is effective; once the interlocking condition has disappeared,
you will have to reset the block
– 1 = "Good" state
● "Interlock":
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Interlocking without reset is active; you can operate the block without reset once the
interlocking condition has disappeared
– 1 = "Good" state

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1127
Motor and valve blocks
7.2 MotL - Motor (Large)

● "Local correct": 1 = Control signal for "Local mode" (LocalLi) is active


● "Motor protection": 1 = Motor is in "good" state
● "Interlock deact.":
– 0 = Bypass disabled
– 1 = Bypassing interlock in "local mode" and in "simulation"
● "Local stop": 1 = Stopping the motor in "local mode"
● "Local start": 1 = Starting the motor in "local mode"
● "Feedback →": 1 = Motor has started and is running
● "Stop": 1 = Stop motor
● "Start": 1 = Start motor
● "Channel Start": Signal from the output channel block "Start"

(5) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
Use this navigation button to open the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system. The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the engineering
system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in the section Opening additional faceplates
(Page 217).

7.2.8.4 Block icon for MotL

Block symbols for MotL


A variety of block symbols are available with the following functions:
● Process tag type
● Limits (high/low)
● Violation of alarm, warning, and tolerance limits as well as control system faults
● Operating modes
● Signal status, release for maintenance
● Displays for bypassing interlocks
● Interlocks
● Memo display
● Motor state display

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1128 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.2 MotL - Motor (Large)

The block symbols from template @TemplateAPLV8.PDL:

Symbols Selection of the block symbol in Special features


CFC
1

The block symbols from template @TemplateAPLV7.PDL:

Symbols Selection of the block symbol in Special features


CFC
1 Block symbol in the full display

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1129
Motor and valve blocks
7.2 MotL - Motor (Large)

Symbols Selection of the block symbol in Special features


CFC
9

10

- Block symbol in "Out of service"


mode (example with type 1 block
symbol)

Additional information on the block symbol and the control options in the block symbol is
available in the following chapters:
● Configuring the block icons (Page 246)
● Block icon structure (Page 239)
● Operation via the block icon (Page 248)

Motor state display


The following motor states are shown here:

Symbol Meaning
Motor started (motor symbol changes)

The motor is running

Motor stopped (motor symbol changes)

Motor idle

Error at motor (monitoring error, motor protection)

Motor out of service

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1130 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.3 MotS - Motor (Small)

7.3 MotS - Motor (Small)

7.3.1 Description of MotS

Object name (type + number)


Type + number: FB 1910
Family: Drives

Area of application for MotS


The block is used for the following applications:
● Controlling motors

Note
This block is also available as a large block. A comparison of the MotL and MotS blocks is
available in the section: MotL compared to MotS (Page 1089)

How it works
The block is used to control motors. Various inputs are available for controlling the motor.

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38). The block is
also installed automatically in the startup OB (OB100).

Startup characteristics
Use the Feature Bit Set startup characteristics (Page 141) to define the startup characteristics
of this block.
The messages are suppressed after startup for the number of cycles set at RunUpCyc.

Status word allocation


For a description of the individual parameters, see the section MotS I/Os (Page 1142).

Status bit Parameter


0 Occupied
1 BatchEn
2 SimOn
3 OosAct.Value

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1131
Motor and valve blocks
7.3 MotS - Motor (Small)

Status bit Parameter


4 OosLi.Value
5 0 = ManAct.Value
1 = AutoAct.Value
6 LocalAct.Value
7 LockAct.Value
8 Start.Value
9 Motor is stopped
10 Not used
11 MonStaErr.Value
12 MonDynErr.Value
13 BypProt
14 Invalid signal status
15 Not used
16 1 = Intlock is active
17 - 18 Not used
19 Trip
20 - 22 Not used
23 "Interlock" button is enabled
24 Reset request in automatic preview
25 Not used
26 Bypass information from previous function block
27 Automatic preview for "starting"
28 Automatic preview for "stopping"
29 External error generated by FaultExt or external control system fault CSF with set
Feature.Bit18 Activating error state for external process control error CSF
(Page 154)
30 - 31 Not used

Status word allocation for Status2 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 MsgLock
1 - 18 Not used
19 1 = No impact of input signals on "local mode" when LocalSetting = 2
20 Motor is stopped
21 Motor is stopping
22 Motor is starting
23 Motor is running
24 Error in motor
25 1 = Input parameter StartChnST is interconnected
26 - 29 Not used
30 Display for interlocks in block icon
31 MS_RelOp

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1132 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.3 MotS - Motor (Small)

Status word allocation for Status3 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 - 11 Not used
12 Hidden bypass signal in interlock
13 Not used
14 Feature2.Bit2: Separate bypass signal
15 - 23 Not used
24 Output command for "starting" the motor
25 Output command for "stopping" the motor
26 Show automatic preview in the standard view
27 Not used
28 GrpErr.Value
29 Enable for "starting" the motor
30 Not used
31 Not used

Status word allocation for Status4 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0-8 Not used
9 Trip not connected
10 Do not connect FbkOutRun
11 - 31 Not used

See also
MotS messaging (Page 1141)
MotS block diagram (Page 1147)
MotS functions (Page 1135)
MotS error handling (Page 1140)
MotS modes (Page 1133)

7.3.2 MotS modes

MotS operating modes


The block can be operated using the following modes:
● Local mode (Page 80)
● Automatic mode (Page 76)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1133
Motor and valve blocks
7.3 MotS - Motor (Small)

● Manual mode (Page 76)


● Out of service (Page 72)
The next section provides additional block-specific information relating to the general
descriptions.

"Local mode"
You can find general information on "Local mode", switching modes and Bumpless switchover
in the Local mode (Page 80) section.

Note
"Local mode" for the block MotS
In contrast to the "Large" blocks, it is only possible to perform settings in this block
LocalSetting with 0 or 2. A "local operation" is accordingly possible only via the internal
tracking of the feedback value.

"Automatic mode"
You can find general information on "Automatic mode", switching modes and Bumpless
switchover in the Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76) section.
Motor actions you can control in auto mode:
● "Start" (StartAut = 1)
● "Stop" (StopAut = 1)

Note
Information about the "Small" block
This "Small" block works with pushbutton operation. The automatic commands are therefore
latching, in other words, OpenAut, CloseAut can be reset to 0 after the control is changed.
In "manual" and "local" modes, however, the automatic commands are not saved and in the
absence of automatic commands the automatic control is tracked.

"Manual mode"
You can find general information on "Manual mode", switching modes and bumpless
switchover in the section Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers
(Page 76).
Motor actions you can control in "manual mode":
● "Start" (StartMan = 1)
● "Stop" (StopMan = 1)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1134 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.3 MotS - Motor (Small)

"Out of service"
You can find general information about the "Out of service" mode in the section Out of
service (Page 72).
With Feature2.Bit1 =1 the following output parameter become the status of simulation
16#60, if mode is changed to "Out of service".
With Feature2.Bit1 =0 the following output parameter become the status of 16#80, if mode
is changed to "Out of service".
● FbkRunOut.ST
● Run.ST
● Stop.ST

See also
Description of MotS (Page 1131)
MotS functions (Page 1135)
MotS error handling (Page 1140)
MotS messaging (Page 1141)
MotS I/Os (Page 1142)
MotS block diagram (Page 1147)

7.3.3 MotS functions

Functions of MotS
The functions for this block are listed below.

Opening additional faceplates


This block provides the standard function Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

Operator permissions
This block provides the standard function Operator control permissions (Page 265).
The block has the following permissions for the OS_Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 1 = Operator can switch to "automatic mode"
1 1 = Operator can switch to "manual mode"
2 Not used
3 1 = Operator can switch to "Out of service" mode
4 1 = Operator can stop the motor

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1135
Motor and valve blocks
7.3 MotS - Motor (Small)

Bit Function
5 1 = Operator can start the motor
6 Not used
7 1 = Operator can reset the motor
8 1 = Operator can define the monitoring time for startup
9 Not used
10 1 = Operator can activate the monitoring time function (Bit 8)
12 1 = Operator can activate the Release for maintenance function
13 - 31 Not used

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Button labels
This block provides the standard function Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218).
Instance-specific text can be configured for the following parameters:
● StartMan
● StopMan

Interlocks
This block provides the following interlocks:
● Interlock without reset (interlock)
Refer to the section Interlocks (Page 101) as well as Influence of the signal status on the
interlock (Page 105).

Suppressing messages using the MsgLock parameter


This block provides the standard function Suppressing messages using the MsgLock
parameter (Page 214).

Motor protection function


This block provides the standard function Motor protection function (Page 100).

Disabling interlocks
This block provides the standard function Disabling interlocks (Page 104).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1136 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.3 MotS - Motor (Small)

Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors


This block provides the standard function Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors
(Page 43).

External error (FaultExt), external control system fault (CSF)


This block provides the possibility to pass an external error via the FaultExt parameter or
an external control system fault via the CSF parameter. See MotS error handling (Page 1140).

Group error
This block provides the standard function Outputting group errors (Page 124).
The following parameters are taken into consideration when forming the group error:
● CSF
● Trip
● MonDynErr
● MonStaErr
● FaultExt

Forming the group status for interlocks


This block provides the standard function Forming the group status for interlock information
(Page 106).

Forming the signal status for blocks


This block provides the standard function Forming and outputting the signal status for
technologic blocks (Page 110).
The worst signal status ST_Worst for the block is formed from the following parameters:
● LocalLi.ST
● Trip.ST
● FbkRunOut.ST
● StartChn.ST
● StartAut.ST (only if Feature2.Bit10 = 1)
● StopAut.ST (only if Feature2.Bit10 = 1)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1137
Motor and valve blocks
7.3 MotS - Motor (Small)

Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values


If the Feature2 bit Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values
(Page 190) is set to 1 and one of the following parameters has bad signal status (16#00 or
16#28), the block goes to the neutral position (motor stop) in the "Automatic" mode:
● StartAut.ST
● StopAut.ST

Outputting a signal for start readiness


This block provides the standard function Outputting a signal for start readiness (Page 54).

Feedback monitoring
This block provides the standard function Monitoring the feedbacks (Page 98).

Simulating signals
This block provides the standard function Simulating signals (Page 59).

Neutral position
This block provides the standard function Neutral position for motors, valves and controllers
(Page 48).

Output signal as a static signal


This block provides the standard function Output signal as a static signal or pulse signal
(Page 52).

Generating instance-specific messages


This block provides the standard function Generating instance-specific messages (Page 213).

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the section
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133). The following functionality is available
for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
0 Set startup characteristics (Page 141)
1 Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 181)
2 Resetting the commands for changing the mode (Page 165)
3 Enabling resetting of commands for the control settings (Page 165)
9 Resetting via input signals in the event of interlocking (Protection) or errors (Page 167)
10 Exiting local mode (Page 181)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1138 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.3 MotS - Motor (Small)

Bit Function
11 Activating the run time of feedback signals (Page 157)
18 Activating error state for external process control error CSF (Page 154)
19 Reset even with locked state (Page 169)
24 Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162)
25 Suppression of all messages (Page 178)
27 Interlock display with LocalSetting 2 or 4 (Page 182)
30 Set reset depending on the operating mode or the LiOp parameter (Page 167)
31 Activating reset of protection / error in manual mode (Page 168)

Configurable reactions using the Feature2 parameter

Bit Function
1 Changes signal status of outputs in OOS (Page 198)
2 Separate evaluation for excluded and simulated interlock signals (Page 155)
3 Control priority in the event of an invalid input command (Page 179)
5 Evaluation of the signal status of the interlock signals (Page 146)
10 Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values (Page 190)

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


This block provides the standard function SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

Release for maintenance


This block provides the standard function Release for maintenance (Page 65).

See also
Description of MotS (Page 1131)
MotS messaging (Page 1141)
MotS I/Os (Page 1142)
MotS block diagram (Page 1147)
MotS modes (Page 1133)
Selecting a unit of measure (Page 221)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1139
Motor and valve blocks
7.3 MotS - Motor (Small)

7.3.4 MotS error handling

Error handling of MotS


Refer to section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions for the error handling of all
blocks.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers
● Mode switchover error
● Control system fault (CSF)
● Invalid input signals

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum I/O can be used to output the following error numbers.

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; the block is not executed.
0 There is no error.
41 The value for the LocalSetting I/O is not 0 or 2
42 LocalSetting = 0 and LocalLi = 1
51 StartAut = 1 and StopAut = 1, AutModLi = 1 and ManModLi = 1
52 LocalAct = 1 and LocalSetting = 2 and SimOn = 1

Mode switchover error


This error can be output by the block, see the section Error handling (Page 121).

Invalid input signals


This error can be output by the block, see the section Error handling (Page 121).
For the following invalid input signals, the control output can be kept or switched to the neutral
position. This depends on the function Control priority in the event of an invalid input
command (Page 179).

Operating mode Invalid input signals Control reaction with Feature2


bit 3 =1
"Automatic mode" StartAut = 1 and StopAut = 1 Motor is stopping
"Manual mode" StopMan = 1 and StartMan = 1

Control system fault (CSF)


An external signal can be activated via the CSF input. A control system fault is triggered if this
signal changes to 1. Refer to the Error handling (Page 121) section for more on this.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1140 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.3 MotS - Motor (Small)

See also
MotS functions (Page 1135)
MotS messaging (Page 1141)
MotS I/Os (Page 1142)
Description of MotS (Page 1131)
MotS modes (Page 1133)
MotS block diagram (Page 1147)

7.3.5 MotS messaging

Messaging
The following messages can be generated for this block:
● Process control fault
● Instance-specific messages

Process control fault


The following control system error messages can be output:

Message in‐ Message identi‐ Message class Event


stance fier
MsgEvId1 SIG 1 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
Motor feedback error
SIG 2 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
Motor protection triggered
SIG 3 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External error has occurred

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment
You can interconnect an external fault (signal) to input parameter CSF. If it changes to CSF =
1, a process control fault is triggered (MsgEvId1, SIG 3).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1141
Motor and valve blocks
7.3 MotS - Motor (Small)

Instance-specific messages
You have the option to use two instance-specific messages for this block.

Message in‐ Message identifier Message class Event


stance
MsgEvId1 SIG 4 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 1
SIG 5 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 2

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment.

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId1

Associated value Block parameters


1 BatchName
2 StepNo
3 BatchID
4 ExtVa104
5 ExtVa105
6 - 10 Reserved

The associated values 4 ... 5 are allocated to the parameters ExtVa104 ... ExtVa105 and
can be used. Additional information is available in the "Process Control System PCS 7 -
Engineering System" manual.

See also
Description of MotS (Page 1131)
MotS functions (Page 1135)
MotS error handling (Page 1140)
MotS block diagram (Page 1147)
MotS I/Os (Page 1142)
MotS modes (Page 1133)

7.3.6 MotS I/Os


I/Os of MotS

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1142 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.3 MotS - Motor (Small)

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AutModLi* 1 = "Automatic mode" via interconnec‐ STRUCT -
tion or SFC (controlled by ModLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AutModOp* 1 = "Automatic mode" via operator (con‐ BOOL 0
trolled by ModLiOp = 0)
BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation BOOL 0
BatchID Batch ID DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name S7-String
BypProt 1 = Bypassing interlock in "local mode" BOOL 0
and in "simulation"
CSF 1 = External error (control system fault) STRUCT -
Error handling (Page 121) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1
ExtMsg1 Binary input for freely selectable mes‐ STRUCT -
sage 1 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg2 Binary input for freely selectable mes‐ STRUCT -
sage 2 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtVa104 Associated value 4 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa105 Associated value 5 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
FaultExt 1 = External error STRUCT -
Error handling (Page 121) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FbkRun Feedback for starting is present: STRUCT -
1 = Start ● Value: BOOL ● 0
0 = Stop ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 1135) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
Feature2 I/O for additional functions (Page 1135) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1143
Motor and valve blocks
7.3 MotS - Motor (Small)

Parameter Description Type Default


Intlock 0 = Interlocking without reset is active; STRUCT -
you can operate the block without reset ● Value: BOOL ● 1
once the interlocking condition has dis‐
appeared ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
1 = Interlock not activated ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
Intl_En 1 = Interlock without reset (interlock, BOOL 1
Intlock parameter) is active
LocalLi 1 = Activate "local mode" via plant signal STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
LocalSetting Properties for the Local mode (Page 80) INT 0
ManModLi* 1 = "Manual mode" via interconnection STRUCT -
or SFC (controlled by ModLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManModOp* 1 = "Manual mode" via OS operator (con‐ BOOL 1
trolled by ModLiOp = 0)
ModLiOp Switchover of operating mode between: STRUCT -
0 = Operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
1 = Interconnection or SFC ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Monitor 1 = Feedback monitoring BOOL 1
MonTiDynamic* Monitoring time for feedback errors after REAL 3.0
operation in [s]
MS_RelOp* 1= Release for maintenance via OS op‐ BOOL 0
erator
MsgEvId1 Message number (assigned automati‐ DWORD 16#00000000
cally)
MsgLock 1 = Suppress process messages. STRUCT -
See also the section Suppressing mes‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
sages using the MsgLock parameter ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
(Page 214) for more on this.
Occupied 1 = In use by a batch BOOL 0
OosLi 1 = "Out of service", via interconnection STRUCT -
or SFC (0-1 edge transition) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosOp* 1 = "Out of service", via OS operator BOOL 0
OpSt_In Input parameter for local operator au‐ DWORD 16#00000000
thorization, connected with the Out out‐
put parameter of the upstream block,
OpStations (Page 423)
OS_Perm I/O for operator permissions STRUCT -
(Page 1135) ● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● ... ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1144 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.3 MotS - Motor (Small)

Parameter Description Type Default


RstLi* 1 = Reset via interconnection STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RstOp* 1 = Reset via operator BOOL 0
RunUpCyc Number of cycles in startup; messages INT 3
are suppressed during these cycles
SampleTime Sampling time [s] (assigned automatical‐ REAL 0.1
ly)
SimOn 1 = Simulation on BOOL 0
SelFp1 Call a block saved in this parameter as ANY -
an additional faceplate (Page 217) in the
standard view
StartAut* 1 = Starting the motor in "automatic STRUCT -
mode" ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
StartChnST Signal status of output channel Start STRUCT -
Should be connected to an output chan‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
nel block ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
StartMan* 1 = Starting the motor in "manual mode" BOOL 0
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
StopAut* 1 = Stopping the motor in "automatic STRUCT -
mode" ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
StopMan* 1 = Stopping the motor in "manual mode" BOOL 0
Trip 1 = Motor is in "good" state STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use in PCS 7 BYTE 16#00
OS

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AutAct 1 = "Automatic mode" enabled STRUCT -
0 = "Manual mode" is enabled ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AutoST 1 = Worst signal status of automatic com‐ BYTE 16#80
mands
ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without BOOL 0
errors

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1145
Motor and valve blocks
7.3 MotS - Motor (Small)

Parameter Description Type Default


ErrorNum Output of pending error number. For er‐ INT -1
ror numbers that can be output by this
block, see MotS error handling
(Page 1140)
FbkRunOut Feedback for starting is present: STRUCT -
1 = Start ● Value: BOOL ● 0
0 = Stop ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
GrpErr 1 = Group error pending STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
LocalAct 1 = "Local mode" enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
LockAct 1 = Interlock or Trip is active STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManAct 1 = "Manual mode" enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MonDynErr 1 = Feedback error due to control change STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MonStaErr 1 = Feedback error due to unexpected STRUCT -
feedback change ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MS_Release Release for maintenance: STRUCT -
1 = Release for OS operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
P_Rst 1= Pulse output for reset STRUCT -
The parameter persists for one cycle af‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
ter a reset. ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosAct 1 = Block is "Out of service" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpSt_Out Value of the OpSt_In input parameter, DWORD 16#00000000
for feedforwarding to other blocks. Bit 31
of this parameter is used by
Feature.Bit24
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with settings DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
changed by the block algorithm

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1146 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.3 MotS - Motor (Small)

Parameter Description Type Default


RdyToReset 1 = Ready for reset via RstLi input or STRUCT -
commands in "local", "automatic", or ● Value: BOOL ● 0
"manual mode"
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RdyToStart 1 = Active start readiness STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Run 1 = Motor is running STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
Start 1 = Control of motor: started STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Status1 Status word 1 (Page 1131) DWORD 16#00000000
Status2 Status word 2 (Page 1131) DWORD 16#00000000
Status3 Status word 3 (Page 1131) DWORD 16#00000000
Status4 Status word 4 (Page 1131) DWORD 16#00000000
Stop 1 = Motor stopped STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

See also
MotS messaging (Page 1141)
MotS block diagram (Page 1147)
MotS modes (Page 1133)
Error handling (Page 121)

7.3.7 MotS block diagram

MotS block diagram


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

See also
Description of MotS (Page 1131)
MotS functions (Page 1135)
MotS messaging (Page 1141)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1147
Motor and valve blocks
7.3 MotS - Motor (Small)

MotS I/Os (Page 1142)


MotS modes (Page 1133)
MotS error handling (Page 1140)

7.3.8 Operator control and monitoring

7.3.8.1 MotS views

Views of the MotS block


The block MotS provides the following views:
● MotS standard view (Page 1148)
● Alarm view (Page 313)
● Trend view (Page 317)
● Parameter view for motors and valves (Page 297)
● MotS preview (Page 1151)
● Memo view (Page 315)
● Batch view (Page 313)
● Block icon for MotS (Page 1153)
Refer to the sections Structure of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure
(Page 239) for general information on the faceplate and block icon.

7.3.8.2 MotS standard view

MotSstandard view


 

 

 





Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1148 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.3 MotS - Motor (Small)

(1) Displaying and switching the operating mode


This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
● Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76)
● Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76)
● Local mode (Page 80)
● Out of service (Page 72)
Refer to section Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) for information
on switching the operating mode.

(2) Starting and stopping the motor


This area shows you the default operating state for the motor. The following states can be
shown and executed here:
● "Start"
● "Stop"
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for information
on changing the state.
If text is configured for these commands, it is displayed as status text and as button labels for
command selection. You can find more information about this in section Labeling of buttons
and text (Page 218)

(3) Resetting the block


Click "Reset" for errors. You can find additional information on this in the section Resetting the
block in case of interlocks or errors (Page 43).

(4) Operator control and display area for the interlock function of the block
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
You can use this button to control the interlock function of the block. You can find additional
information on this in the section Interlocks (Page 101).
The following is displayed in addition to the button:
● Interlock status (see Forming the group status for interlock information (Page 106)), e.g.:

● Signal status (see Forming and outputting the signal status for technologic blocks
(Page 110)), e.g.:

● Bypass information (see Forming the group status for interlock information (Page 106)):

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1149
Motor and valve blocks
7.3 MotS - Motor (Small)

(5) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
Use this navigation button to open the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system. The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the engineering
system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in the section Opening additional faceplates
(Page 217).

(6) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Maintenance"
Additional information on this is available in section Release for maintenance (Page 65) Display
area for block states.

(7) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Simulation"
You can find additional information on this in the section Simulating signals (Page 59).

(8) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block (from high to low
according to priority):
● "Motor protection"
● "External error"
● "Status error"
● "Control error"
● "Invalid signal"
Additional information on these errors is available in the sections Monitoring the feedbacks
(Page 98) , Error handling (Page 121) (subsection "Invalid input signals") and Motor protection
function (Page 100).

(9) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Request 0/1": A reset to "automatic mode" is expected.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1150 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.3 MotS - Motor (Small)

(10) Automatic preview


This display is only visible in "manual mode", in "local mode", or with a reset request in
"automatic mode", when the current output signals are not identical to the control in "automatic
mode".
The display shows what state the motor would assume if you switched from "manual" or "local"
mode to "automatic mode", or performed a reset to "automatic mode".

(11) Status display of the motor


The current status of the motor is graphically displayed here:
● Green: Motor is running
● Gray: Motor idle
● Red: A fault has occurred
You can find additional information on this in the section Block icon for MotS (Page 1153).

7.3.8.3 MotS preview

Preview of MotS

(1) Automatic preview


This area shows you the block status after it has switched from the "Manual" mode or "Local"
mode to the "Automatic" mode.
If the block is in "Automatic" mode, the current block state is displayed.
This area also displays the worst signal status of the following automatic commands:
● StartAut
● StopAut

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1151
Motor and valve blocks
7.3 MotS - Motor (Small)

(2) Enable operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Icons for enabled operation:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)
The following enabled operations are shown here:
● "Stop": You can stop the motor.
If text is configured for this command, it is also displayed in brackets. You can find additional
information on this in the section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218).
● "Start": You can start the motor.
If text is configured for this command, it is also displayed in brackets. You can find additional
information on this in the section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218).
● "Reset": You can reset the motor after interlocks or errors.
● "Automatic": You can switch to "automatic mode".
● "Manual": You can switch to "manual mode".
● "Out of service": You can switch to "Out of service" operating mode.
● "Local operator permission": Use the ← button to switch to the standard view of the
OpStations block. You can find additional information on this in the section sedtion Operator
control permissions (Page 265).

(3) Displaying current control signals


This area shows the most important parameters for this block with the current selection:
● "Interlock":
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Interlocking without reset is active; you can operate the block without reset once the
interlocking condition has disappeared
– 1 = "Good" state
● "Local correct": 1 = Control signal for "Local mode" (LocalLi) is active
● "Motor protection": 1 = Motor is in "good" state
● "Interlock deact.":
– 0 = Bypass disabled
– 1 = Bypassing interlock in "local mode" and in "simulation"
● "Feedback →": 1 = Motor has started and is running
● "Stop": 1 = Stop motor

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1152 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.3 MotS - Motor (Small)

● "Start": 1 = Start motor


● "Channel Start": Signal from the output channel block for "Start"

7.3.8.4 Block icon for MotS

Block symbols for MotS


A variety of block symbols are available with the following functions:
● Process tag type
● Violation of alarm, warning, and tolerance limits as well as control system faults
● Operating modes
● Signal status, release for maintenance
● Displays for bypassing interlocks
● Interlocks
● Memo display
● Motor state display

The block symbols from template @TemplateAPLV8.PDL:

Symbols Selection of the block symbol in Special features


CFC
1

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1153
Motor and valve blocks
7.3 MotS - Motor (Small)

The block symbols from template @TemplateAPLV7.PDL:

Symbols Selection of the block symbol in Special features


CFC
1 Block symbol in the full display

- Block symbol in "Out of service"


mode (example with type 1 block
symbol)

Additional information on the block symbol and the control options in the block symbol is
available in the following chapters:
● Configuring the block icons (Page 246)
● Block icon structure (Page 239)
● Operation via the block icon (Page 248)

Motor state display


The following motor states are shown here:

Symbol Meaning
Motor started (motor symbol changes)
The motor is running
Motor stopped (motor symbol changes)
Motor idle
Error at motor (monitoring error, motor protection)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1154 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

7.4.1 Description of MotRevL

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1851
Family: Drives

Area of application for MotRevL


The block is used for the following applications:
● Control of reversible motors

How it works
The block is used to control reversible motors. Various inputs are available for controlling the
motor.

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38). The block is
also installed automatically in the startup OB (OB100).
For the MotRevL block, the Advanced Process Library contains a template for process tag
types as an example with an application scenario for this block.
Example of process tag types:
● Reversing motor (MotorReversible) (Page 2427)

Startup characteristics
Use the Feature Bit Set startup characteristics (Page 141) to define the startup characteristics
of this block.
The messages are suppressed after startup for the number of cycles set at RunUpCyc.

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


You can find a description for each parameter in section MotRevL I/Os (Page 1173).

Status bit Parameter


0 Occupied
1 BatchEn
2 SimOn
3 OosAct.Value

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1155
Motor and valve blocks
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

Status bit Parameter


4 OosLi.Value
5 0 = ManAct.Value
1 = AutoAct.Value
6 LocalAct.Value
7 0: Open padlock in the block icon
1: Closed padlock in the block icon
8 Fwd.Value
9 Motor is stopped
10 Rev.Value
11 MonStaErr.Value
12 MonDynErr.Value
13 BypProt
14 Invalid signal status
15 Mode switchover error
16 1 = Intlock is active
17 1 = Permit is active
18 1 = Protect is active
19 Trip.Value
20 Display „Forced forward“
21 Display „Forced stop“
22 Display „Forced reverse“
23 "Interlock" button is enabled
24 Reset request in automatic preview
25 WarnAct.Value or
IdleTime active
26 Bypass information from previous function block
27 Automatic preview for forward mode
28 Automatic preview for "stopping"
29 Automatic preview for reverse mode
30 "Permission" button is enabled
31 "Protection" button is enabled

Status word allocation for Status2 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 MsgLock
1 AV_AH_Act.Value
2 AV_WH_Act.Value
3 AV_TH_Act.Value
4 AV_TL_Act.Value
5 AV_WL_Act.Value
6 AV_AL_Act.Value

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1156 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

Status bit Parameter


7 AV_AH_En OR Feature.Bit23
8 AV_WH_En OR Feature.Bit23
9 AV_TH_En OR Feature.Bit23
10 AV_TL_En OR Feature.Bit23
11 AV_WL_En OR Feature.Bit23
12 AV_AL_En OR Feature.Bit23
13 AV_AH_MsgEn
14 AV_WH_MsgEn
15 AV_TH_MsgEn
16 AV_TL_MsgEn
17 AV_WL_MsgEn
18 AV_AL_MsgEn
19 1 = No impact of input signals on "local mode" with LocalSetting = 2 and
LocalSetting = 4
20 Motor is stopped
21 Motor stops in forward mode
22 Motor stops in reverse mode
23 Motor starts in forward mode
24 Motor runs in forward mode
25 Motor starts in reverse mode
26 Motor runs in reverse mode
27 Error when stopping motor
28 Error in forward mode of motor
29 Error in reverse mode of motor
30 Display for interlocks in block icon
31 MS_RelOp

Status word allocation for Status3 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 Delay of the AV_AH_Lim message
1 Delay of the AV_WH_Lim message
2 Delay of the AV_TH_Lim message
3 Delay of the AV_TL_Lim message
4 Delay of the AV_WL_Lim message
5 Delay of the AV_AL_Lim message
6 Collection of message delays
7 - 14 Not used
15 Current monitoring time is visible
16 MonDynStopErr.Value
17 - 18 SimLiOp.Value
19 1 = Enable for rapid stop (Feature Bit Enabling rapid stop via faceplate
(Page 172))

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1157
Motor and valve blocks
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

Status bit Parameter


20 1 = Input parameter FwdChnST is interconnected
21 1 = Input parameter RevChnST is interconnected
22 Not used
23 Command for rapid stop
24 Command for starting → the motor
25 Command for starting ← the motor
26 Show automatic preview in the standard view
27 Not used
28 GrpErr.Value
29 RdyToStart.Value
30 Auxiliary value 1 visible
31 Auxiliary value 2 visible

Status word allocation for Status4 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 Effective signal 1 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
1 Effective signal 2 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
2 Effective signal 3 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
3 Effective signal 4 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
4 Effective signal 5 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
5 Effective signal 6 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
6 Effective signal 7 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
7 Effective signal 8 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
8 AV not connected
9 Motor protection display (Trip.Status ≠ 16#FF)
10 1 = Input parameter FbkFwd is connected
11 1 = Input parameter FbkRev is connected
12 - 19 Effective signal 1...8 of the message block connected via EventTs2In
20 - 21 Not used
22 External error generated by FaultExt or external control system fault from CSF with
set Feature.Bit18 Activating error state for external process control error CSF
(Page 154)
23 Hidden bypass signal in Permit
24 Hidden bypass signal in interlock
25 Hidden bypass signal in Protect
26 Feature2.Bit2: Separate bypass signal
27 Feature2.Bit16: Separate interlock for each direction or position
28 Hidden bypass signal in Permit Reverse
29 Hidden bypass signal in Interlock Reverse
30 Hidden bypass signal in Protect Reverse
31 Separate monitoring of shutdown of the motor (Feature.Bit13)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1158 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

Status word allocation for Status5 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0-7 Effective signal 9...16 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
8 - 15 Effective signal 9...16 of the message block connected via EventTs2In
16 The permission button for "Forward" is enabled
17 The permission button for "Reverse" is enabled
18 The interlock button for "Forward" is enabled
19 The Interlock button for "Reverse" is enabled
20 The protection button "Forward" is enabled
21 The protection button "Reverse" is enabled
22 1 = Permission button "Reverse" is active
23 1 = Interlock button "Reverse" is active
24 1 = Protection button "Reverse" is active
25 - 31 Not used

See also
MotRevL functions (Page 1161)
MotRevL messaging (Page 1171)
MotRevL block diagram (Page 1182)
MotRevL error handling (Page 1168)
MotRevL modes (Page 1159)

7.4.2 MotRevL modes

MotRevL operating modes


The block can be operated using the following modes:
● Local mode (Page 80)
● Automatic mode (Page 76)
● Manual mode (Page 76)
● Out of service (Page 72)
The next section provides additional block-specific information relating to the general
descriptions.

"Local mode"
You can find general information on "Local mode", switching modes and Bumpless switchover
in the Local mode (Page 80) section.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1159
Motor and valve blocks
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

Motor actions you can control in local mode:


● "Starting in forward" (FwdLocal = 1)
● "Starting in reverse" (RevLocal = 1)
● "Stopping" (StopLocal = 1)
A motor operated in "local mode" is controlled either by "local" signals or by the feedback
signals (input parameters FbkFwd = 1 and FbkRev = 1) . Configuration takes place via the
input parameter LocalSetting.

"Automatic mode"
You can find general information on "Automatic mode", switching modes and Bumpless
switchover in the Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76) section.
Motor actions you can control in auto mode:
● "Starting in forward" (FwdAut = 1)
● "Starting in reverse" (RevAut = 1)
● "Stopping" (StopAut = 1)

"Manual mode"
You can find general information on "Manual mode", switching modes and bumpless
switchover in the section Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers
(Page 76).
Motor actions you can control in "manual mode":
● "Starting in forward" (FwdMan = 1)
● "Starting in reverse" (RevMan = 1)
● "Stopping" (StopMan = 1)

"Out of service"
You can find general information about the "Out of service" mode in the section Out of
service (Page 72).
With Feature2.Bit1 =1 the following output parameter become the status of simulation
16#60, if mode is changed to "Out of service".
With Feature2.Bit1 =0 the following output parameter become the status of 16#80, if mode
is changed to "Out of service".
● FbkFwdOut.ST
● FbkRevOut.ST
● RunFwd.ST
● RunRev.ST
● Stop.ST
● AV_Out.ST

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1160 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

See also
MotRevL block diagram (Page 1182)
MotRevL I/Os (Page 1173)
MotRevL messaging (Page 1171)
MotRevL error handling (Page 1168)
MotRevL functions (Page 1161)
Description of MotRevL (Page 1155)

7.4.3 MotRevL functions

Functions of MotRevL
The functions for this block are listed below.

Opening additional faceplates


This block provides the standard function Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

Operator permissions
This block provides the standard function Operator control permissions (Page 265).
The block has the following permissions for the OS_Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 1 = Operator can switch to "automatic mode"
1 1 = Operator can switch to "manual mode"
2 1 = Operator can switch to "local mode"
3 1 = Operator can switch to "Out of service" mode
4 1 = Operator can stop the motor
5 1 = Operator can start the motor in forward
6 1 = Operator can start the motor in reverse
7 1 = Operator can reset the motor
8 1 = Operator can define or change the monitoring time for startup
9 1 = Operator can define the monitoring time for the status
10 1 = Operator can enable the monitoring time function (Bit 8 - 9)
11 1 = Operator can activate the Simulation function
12 1 = Operator can activate the Release for maintenance function
13 1 = Operator can change the high limit (AV) for the alarm
14 1 = Operator can change the high limit (AV) for the warning
15 1 = Operator can change the high limit (AV) for the tolerance
16 1 = Operator can change the limit (AV) for hysteresis

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1161
Motor and valve blocks
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

Bit Function
17 1 = Operator can lower the limit (AV) for the alarm
18 1 = Operator can lower the limit (AV) for the warning
19 1 = Operator can lower the limit (AV) for the tolerance
20 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via AV_AH_MsgEn
21 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via AV_WH_MsgEn
22 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via AV_TH_MsgEn
23 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via AV_TL_MsgEn
24 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via AV_WL_MsgEn
25 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via AV_AL_MsgEn
26 1 =Operator can change the simulation value SimAV
27 - 29 Not used
30 1 = Operator can define the monitoring time for stopping
31 Not used

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Restart lock after changing direction of rotation or switching off the motor
Use the input parameter IdleTime to enter a restart lock for changing the direction of rotation
or restarting the motor. Use the Feature Bit Enabling direct changeover between forward and
reverse (Page 149) to define how the change is to take place. When the "Stop" command is
given, the motor goes immediately into "Stop" mode, and IdleTime starts after the feedback
(FbkFwd and FbkRev = 0) is given. The motor cannot be started again until the IdleTime
has expired.
The IdleTime parameter can be set independently of the MonTiDynamic parameter.

Limit monitoring of an additional analog value


This block provides the standard function Limit monitoring of an additional analog value
(Page 92).

Limit monitoring with hysteresis


This block provides the standard function Limit monitoring with hysteresis (Page 98). It is
performed via the input parameter AV_Hyst.

Suppressing messages using the MsgLock parameter


This block provides the standard function Suppressing messages using the MsgLock
parameter (Page 214).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1162 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

Interlocks
This block provides the following interlocks:

Feature 2 bit 16 = 0:
● Activation enable
● Interlock without reset ("Interlock")
● Interlock with reset ("Protection")

Feature 2 bit 16 = 1:
● Activation enable forward
● Activation enable reverse
● Interlock forward without reset ("Interlock forward")
● Interlock reverse without reset ("Interlock reverse")
● Interlock forward with reset ("Protection interlock forward")
● Interlock reverse with reset ("Protection interlock reverse")

Refer to the section Interlocks (Page 101) as well as Influence of the signal status on the
interlock (Page 105).

Motor protection function


This block provides the standard function Motor protection function (Page 100).

Rapid stop for motors


This block provides the standard function Rapid stop for motors (Page 108).

Disabling interlocks
This block provides the standard function Disabling interlocks (Page 104).

Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors


This block provides the standard function Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors
(Page 43).

External error (FaultExt), external control system fault (CSF)


This block provides the possibility to pass an external error via the FaultExt parameter or
an external control system fault via the CSF parameter. See MotRevL error handling
(Page 1168).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1163
Motor and valve blocks
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

Group error
This block provides the standard function Outputting group errors (Page 124).
The following parameters are taken into consideration when forming the group error:
● CSF
● Trip
● MonDynErr
● MonStaErr
● FaultExt

Outputting a signal for start readiness


This block provides the standard function Outputting a signal for start readiness (Page 54).

Forming the group status for interlocks


This block provides the standard function Forming the group status for interlock information
(Page 106).

Forming the signal status for blocks


This block provides the standard function Forming and outputting the signal status for
technologic blocks (Page 110).
The worst signal status ST_Worst for the block is formed from the following parameters:
● FbkFwdOut.ST
● FbkRevOut.ST
● LocalLi.ST
● FwdLocal.ST
● StopLocal.ST
● RevLocal.ST
● Trip.ST
● AV_Out.ST
● FwdChn.ST
● RevChn.ST
● FwdAut.ST (only if Feature2.Bit10 = 1)
● RevAut.ST (only if Feature2.Bit10 = 1)
● StopAut.ST (only if Feature2.Bit10 = 1)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1164 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values


If the Feature2 bit Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values
(Page 190) is set to 1 and one of the following parameters has bad signal status (16#00 or
16#28), the block goes to the neutral position (motor stop) in the "Automatic" mode:
● FwdAut.ST
● RevAut.ST
● StopAut.ST

Forcing operating modes


This block provides the standard function Forcing operating modes (Page 41).
The following states can be enforced:
● "Start in forward" (FwdForce)
● "Start in reverse" (RevForce)
● "Stop" (StopForce)
Note
The Feature Bit Enabling direct changeover between forward and reverse (Page 149) for
this block has no function with forced operating states. The motor can always be reversed
directly.

Feedback monitoring
This block provides the standard function Monitoring the feedbacks (Page 98).

Release for maintenance


This block provides the standard function Release for maintenance (Page 65).

Specify warning times for control functions


This block provides the standard function Specifying warning times for control functions at
motors and valves (Page 51).
You can generate warning signals when, for example, motors are started. Warning signals can
be generated in the following modes:
● Manual mode (Page 76) (WarnTiMan input parameter)
● Automatic mode (Page 76) (WarnTiAut input parameter)
You specify the warning times in seconds using the input parameters WarnTiMan and
WarnTiAut. If, for example, a motor is started, then this is displayed at the output parameter
with WarnAct = 1. The motor then starts after the set warning time has expired and
WarnAct then goes back to 0.
A corresponding warning is not output if the warning times (WarnTiMan or WarnTiAut) are
specified with a smaller value than the SampleTime parameter.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1165
Motor and valve blocks
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

Simulating signals
This block provides the standard function Simulating signals (Page 59).
You can simulate the following values:
● Additional value (SimAV, SimAV_Li)

Selecting a unit of measure


This block provides the standard function Selecting a unit of measure (Page 221).

Neutral position
This block provides the standard function Neutral position for motors, valves and controllers
(Page 48).

Output signal as a pulse signal or static signal


This block provides the standard function Output signal as a static signal or pulse signal
(Page 52).

Generating instance-specific messages


This block provides the standard function Generating instance-specific messages (Page 213).

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the section
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133). The following functionality is available
for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
0 Set startup characteristics (Page 141)
1 Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 181)
2 Resetting the commands for changing the mode (Page 165)
3 Enabling resetting of commands for the control settings (Page 165)
4 Setting switch or button mode (Page 170)
7 Enabling direct changeover between forward and reverse (Page 149)
9 Resetting via input signals in the event of interlocking (Protection) or errors (Page 167)
10 Exiting local mode (Page 181)
11 Activating the run time of feedback signals (Page 157)
13 Separate monitoring time for stopping the motor (Page 173)
14 Enabling rapid stop via faceplate (Page 172)
17 Enabling bumpless switchover to automatic mode for valves, motors, and dosers (Page 177)
18 Activating error state for external process control error CSF (Page 154)
19 Reset even with locked state (Page 169)
20 Disable calculation of impulse control in LocalSetting 2 and 4 (Page 190)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1166 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

Bit Function
21 Enable bumpless switchover to "Automatic" mode for operator only (Page 176)
22 Update acknowledgment and error status of the message call (Page 163)
23 Limits disabled in faceplate (Page 195)
24 Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162)
25 Suppression of all messages (Page 178)
26 Reaction of the switching points in the "Out of service" operating mode (Page 180)
27 Interlock display with LocalSetting 2 or 4 (Page 182)
28 Disabling operating points (Page 149)
29 Signaling limit violation (Page 174)
30 Set reset depending on the operating mode or the LiOp parameter (Page 167)
31 Activating reset of protection / error in manual mode (Page 168)

In pushbutton operation (Bit 4 = 0) the automatic commands in "automatic" mode are latching;
in other words, FwdAut, RevAut, StopAut can be reset to 0 after changing the control. In
"manual" and "local" modes, however, the automatic commands are not saved and in the
absence of automatic commands the automatic control is tracked.
In switching mode (Bit 4 = 1), control is selected with the static signals FwdAut, RevAut. If
FwdAut, RevAut inputs are not set, the motor is stopped. Control via StopAut is not needed.
If the "Activate command reset for control" function (Bit 3 = 1) is also enabled, the inputs
FwdAut, RevAut are reset to the neutral position after evaluation in the block.

Configurable reactions using the Feature2 parameter

Bit Function
1 Changes signal status of outputs in OOS (Page 198)
2 Separate evaluation for excluded and simulated interlock signals (Page 155)
3 Control priority in the event of an invalid input command (Page 179)
4 Setting switch or button mode for local commands (Page 185)
5 Evaluation of the signal status of the interlock signals (Page 146)
8 Forcing operating modes in the "Local" mode (Page 188)
10 Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values (Page 190)
11 Suppress MsgLock and “Out of service” mode for a connected message block (Page 192)
16 Separate interlock for each direction, position, or speed (Page 173)

Displaying auxiliary values


This block provides the standard function Displaying auxiliary values (Page 220).

Connection of the time-stamped messages from EventTs or Event16Ts


This block provides the standard function Connection of the time-stamped messages from
EventTs or Event16Ts (Page 216).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1167
Motor and valve blocks
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


This block provides the standard function SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

Button labels
This block provides the standard function Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218)
Instance-specific text can be configured for the following parameters:
● FwdMan
● RevMan
● StopMan
● RapidStp

See also
Description of MotRevL (Page 1155)
MotRevL messaging (Page 1171)
MotRevL I/Os (Page 1173)
MotRevL block diagram (Page 1182)
MotRevL modes (Page 1159)
EventTs functions (Page 1698)

7.4.4 MotRevL error handling

Error handling of MotRevL


Refer to section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions for the error handling of all
blocks.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers
● Mode switchover error
● Invalid input signals
● Control system fault (CSF)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1168 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum I/O can be used to output the following error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; the block is not executed
0 There is no error.
41 The value for the LocalSetting I/O is not within the approved limit of 0 to 4.
42 LocalSetting = 0 or LocalSetting = 3 or LocalSetting = 4 and LocalLi = 1
51 FwdLocal = 1 and StopLocal = 1
RevLocal = 1 and StopLocal = 1
FwdLocal = 1 and RevLocal = 1
FwdAut = 1 and StopAut = 1
RevAut = 1 and StopAut = 1
FwdAut = 1 and RevAut = 1
AutModLi = 1 and ManModLi = 1
FwdForce = 1 and StopForce = 1
RevForce = 1 and StopForce = 1
FwdForce = 1 and RevForce = 1
52 LocalAct = 1 and LocalSetting = 2 or 4 and SimOn = 1

Mode switchover error


This error can be output by the block, see the section Error handling (Page 121).

Invalid input signals


This error can be output by the block, see the section Error handling (Page 121).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1169
Motor and valve blocks
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

For the following invalid input signals, the control output can be kept or switched to the neutral
position. This depends on the function Control priority in the event of an invalid input
command (Page 179).

Operating mode Invalid input signals Control reaction with


Feature2.Bit3 =1
Local: Localsetting = 1 or Pushbutton operation for local Motor is stopped
Localsetting = 3 mode (Feature2.Bit4 = 0):
FwdLocal = 1 and RevLocal =
1 or
FwdLocal = 1 and StopLocal
= 1 or
StopLocal = 1 and RevLocal
=1
Switching mode
(Feature2.Bit4 = 1):
FwdLocal = 1 and RevLocal =
1
Local: Localsetting = 1 or FwdForce = 1 and RevForce =
Localsetting = 3 and forcing 1 or
FwdForce = 1 and StopForce
= 1 or
StopForce = 1 and RevForce
=1
Forcing and no "local mode" FwdForce = 1 and RevForce =
1 or
FwdForce = 1 and StopForce
= 1 or
StopForce = 1 and RevForce
=1
"Automatic mode" and no forcing Pushbutton operation
(Feature.Bit4 = 0):
FwdAut = 1 and RevAut = 1 or
FwdAut = 1 and StopAut = 1 or
StopAut = 1 and RevAut = 1
Switching mode
(Feature.Bit4 = 1):
FwdAut = 1 and RevAut = 1
"Manual mode" and no forcing FwdMan = 1 and RevMan = 1 or
FwdMan = 1 and StopMan = 1 or
StopMan = 1 and RevMan = 1

Control system fault (CSF)


An external signal can be activated via the CSF input. A control system fault is triggered if this
signal changes to 1. Refer to the Error handling (Page 121) section for more on this.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1170 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

See also
MotRevL block diagram (Page 1182)
MotRevL I/Os (Page 1173)
MotRevL messaging (Page 1171)
Description of MotRevL (Page 1155)
MotRevL modes (Page 1159)
MotRevL functions (Page 1161)

7.4.5 MotRevL messaging

Messaging
The following messages can be generated for this block:
● Process control fault
● Instance-specific messages

Process control fault


The following control system error messages can be output:

Message in‐ Message identi‐ Message class Event


stance fier
MsgEvId1 SIG 1 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
Motor feedback error
SIG 2 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
Motor protection triggered
SIG 3 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External error has occurred

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment
You can interconnect an external fault (signal) to input parameter CSF. If it changes to CSF =
1, a process control fault is triggered (MsgEvId1, SIG 3).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1171
Motor and valve blocks
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

Instance-specific messages
You can use up to three instance-specific messages with this block.

Message in‐ Message identi‐ Message class Event


stance fier
MsgEvId1 SIG 4 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External message 1
SIG 5 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External message 2
SIG 6 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External message 3

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId1

Associated value Block parameters


1 BatchName
2 StepNo
3 BatchID
4 ExtVa104
5 ExtVa105
6 ExtVa106
7 ExtVa107
8 ExtVa108
9 Reserved
10 Reserved

The associated values 4 ... 8 are allocated to the parameters ExtVa104 ... ExtVa108 and
can be used. Additional information is available in the "Process Control System PCS 7 -
Engineering System" manual.

See also
Description of MotRevL (Page 1155)
MotRevL functions (Page 1161)
MotRevL I/Os (Page 1173)
MotRevL block diagram (Page 1182)
MotRevL error handling (Page 1168)
MotRevL modes (Page 1159)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1172 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

7.4.6 MotRevL I/Os


I/Os of MotRevL

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AutModLi* 1 = "Automatic mode" via interconnec‐ STRUCT -
tion or SFC (controlled by ModLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AutModOp* 1 = "Automatic mode" via operator (con‐ BOOL 0
trolled by ModLiOp = 0)
AV Input additional analog value, to be con‐ ANY
nected to AV_Out of the AV block
AV_AH_Lim Limit high alarm REAL 95.0
AV_AL_Lim Limit low alarm REAL 5.0
AV_Hyst Hysteresis for alarm, warning and toler‐ REAL 1.0
ance limits
AV_TH_Lim Limit high tolerance REAL 85.0
AV_TL_Lim Limit low tolerance REAL 15.0
AV_WH_Lim Limit high warning REAL 90.0
AV_WL_Lim Limit low warning REAL 10.0
BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation BOOL 0
BatchID Batch ID DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name S7-String
BypProt 1 = Bypassing interlock in "local mode" BOOL 0
and in "simulation"
CSF 1 = External error (control system fault) STRUCT -
Error handling (Page 121) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1
EventTsIn For interconnecting data between a tech‐ ANY
nology block and the message blocks
EventTs, Event16Ts.
The EventTsIn input parameter serves
to interconnect the EventTsOut output
parameter of the EventTs,
Event16Ts block. When this intercon‐
nection is configured, the messages of
the EventTs, Event16Ts block are
displayed on the OS in the alarm view of
the technology block and can also be ac‐
knowledged there.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1173
Motor and valve blocks
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

Parameter Description Type Default


EventTs2In For interconnecting data between a tech‐ ANY
nology block and the message blocks
EventTs, Event16Ts.
The EventTs2In input parameter
serves to interconnect the EventTsOut
output parameter of the
EventTs,Event16Ts block. When this
interconnection is configured, the mes‐
sages of the EventTs, Event16Ts
block are displayed on the OS in the
alarm view of the technology block and
can also be acknowledged there.
ExtMsg1 Binary input for freely selectable mes‐ STRUCT -
sage 1 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg2 Binary input for freely selectable mes‐ STRUCT -
sage 2 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg3 Binary input for freely selectable mes‐ STRUCT -
sage 3 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtVa104 Associated value 4 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa105 Associated value 5 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa106 Associated value 6 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa107 Associated value 7 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa108 Associated value 8 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
FaultExt 1 = External error STRUCT -
Error handling (Page 121) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FbkFwd 1 = Feedback for forward mode is present STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
FbkRev 1 = Feedback for reverse mode is present STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1174 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

Parameter Description Type Default


Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 1161) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
1 = Separate monitoring time for stop‐ ● Bit 13: BOOL ● 0
ping the motor
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
Feature2 I/O for additional functions (Page 1161) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
FwdAut* 1 = Activating forward mode of motor in STRUCT -
automatic mode ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FwdChnST Signal status of output channel Fwd STRUCT -
Should be connected to an output chan‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
nel block ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
FwdForce 1 = Forcing activation of motor forward STRUCT -
mode ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FwdLocal 1 = Activation of forward motor operation STRUCT -
in "local mode" ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FwdMan* 1 = Activation of forward motor operation BOOL 0
in "manual mode"
IdleTime* Wait time for change of direction or re‐ REAL 5.0
start in [s]
Intlock 0 = Interlock / interlock Motor Forward is STRUCT -
activated Once the interlock condition ● Value: BOOL ● 1
has cleared, the block can be operated
without reset. ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
1 = Interlock / interlock Motor Forward is ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
deactivated. (Bypass information
bit)
Intl_En 1 = Interlock / Interlock Motor Forward BOOL 1
(interlock, Intlock parameter) is activated
IntlRev 0 = Interlock Motor Reverse is activated. STRUCT -
Once the interlock condition has cleared, ● Value: BOOL ● 1
the block can be operated without reset.
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
1 = Interlock Motor Reverse is deactiva‐
ted. ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
IntlRevEn 1 = Interlock Motor Reverse (interlock, BOOL 1
IntlRev parameter) is activated

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1175
Motor and valve blocks
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

Parameter Description Type Default


LocalLi 1 = Activate "local mode" via plant signal STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
LocalOp* 1 = "Local mode" via operator BOOL 0
LocalSetting Characteristics of Local mode (Page 80) INT 0
ManModLi* 1 = "Manual mode" via interconnection STRUCT -
or SFC (controlled by ModLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManModOp* 1 = "Manual mode" via OS operator (con‐ BOOL 1
trolled by ModLiOp = 0)
ModLiOp Switchover of operating mode between: STRUCT -
0 = Operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
1 = Interconnection or SFC ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Monitor 1 = Feedback monitoring BOOL 1
MonTiDynamic* Monitoring time for feedback errors or REAL 3.0
feedback start error after successful op‐
eration in [s]
MonTiDyStop* Monitoring time for feedback stop errors REAL 3.0
after successful operation in [s]
MonTiStatic* Monitoring time for feedback errors with‐ REAL 3.0
out operation in [s]
MsgEvId1 Message number (assigned automatical‐ DWORD 16#00000000
ly)
MsgLock 1 = Suppress process messages. STRUCT -
See also the section Suppressing mes‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
sages using the MsgLock parameter ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
(Page 214) for more on this.
MS_RelOp* 1 = Release for maintenance via OS op‐ BOOL 0
erator
Occupied 1 = In use by a batch BOOL 0
OosLi 1 = "Out of service", via interconnection STRUCT -
or SFC (0-1 edge transition) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosOp* 1 = "Out of service", via OS operator BOOL 0
OpSt_In Input parameter for local operator author‐ DWORD 16#00000000
ization, connected with the Out output
parameter of the upstream block, OpSta‐
tions (Page 423)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1176 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

Parameter Description Type Default


OS_Perm I/O for operator permissions STRUCT -
(Page 1161) ● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● Bit 8: BOOL ● 1
1 = Operator can set or change the mon‐
itoring time for "Control: Start"

● Bit 20: BOOL ● 1


1 = Operator can set or change the mon‐
● Bit 30: BOOL ● 1
itoring time for "Control: Stop"
Permit 1 = Activation enable / Activation enable STRUCT -
Motor Forward ● Value: BOOL ● 1
0 = No activation enable for motor/Motor ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
Forward
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
Perm_En 1 = Activation enable / (activation enable BOOL 1
Motor Forward (enable, Permit parame‐
ter)is activated
PermRev 1 = Activation enable Motor Reverse STRUCT -
0 = No activation enable Motor Reverse ● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
PermRevEn 1 = Activation enable Motor Reverse(en‐ BOOL 1
able, PermRev parameter) is activated
Protect 0 = Protective interlock / protective inter‐ STRUCT -
lock Motor Forward is activated. Once ● Value: BOOL ● 1
the interlock condition has cleared, the
block must be reset ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
1 = Protective interlock / protective inter‐ ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
lock Motor Forward is deactivated. (Bypass information
bit)
Prot_En 1 = Protective interlock / protective inter‐ BOOL 1
lock Motor Forward (protection, Protect
parameter) is activated
ProtRev 0 = Protective interlock Motor Reverse is STRUCT -
activated. Once the interlock condition ● Value: BOOL ● 1
has cleared, the block must be reset
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
1 = Protective interlock Motor Reverse is
deactivated. ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
ProtRevEN 1 = Protective interlock Motor Reverse BOOL 1
(protection, ProtRev parameter) is acti‐
vated
PulseWidth* Pulse width of control signal [s] REAL 3.0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1177
Motor and valve blocks
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

Parameter Description Type Default


RapidStp* Rapid stop for the motor: BOOL 0
0 = Motor On
1 = Motor Off
RevAut* 1 = Activation of reverse motor operation STRUCT -
in "automatic mode" ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RevChnST Signal status of output channel Rev STRUCT -
Should be connected to an output chan‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
nel block ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
RevForce 1 = Force activation of reverse motor op‐ STRUCT -
eration ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RevLocal 1 = Activation of reverse motor operation STRUCT -
in "local mode" ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RevMan* 1 = Activation of reverse motor operation BOOL 0
in "manual mode"
RstLi* 1 = Reset via interconnection STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RstOp* 1 = Reset via operator BOOL 0
RunUpCyc Number of cycles in startup; messages INT 3
are suppressed during these cycles
SampleTime Sampling time [s] (assigned automatical‐ REAL 0.1
ly)
SimAV* Additional value used for SimOn = 1 REAL 0.0
SimAV_Li Additional analog value that is used for STRUCT -
SimOnLi.Value = 1 ● Value: REAL ● 0
(SimLiOp.Value = 1)
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SimLiOp Activation/deactivation of the simulation STRUCT -
by: ● Value: BOOL ● 0
0 = Operator ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
1 = Interconnection or SFC
SimOnLi 1 = Simulation via interconnection or STRUCT -
SFC (controlled by SimLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SimOn* 1 = Simulation on BOOL 0
SelFp1 Call a block saved in this parameter as ANY -
an additional faceplate (Page 217) in the
standard view
SelFp2 Call a block saved in this parameter as ANY -
an additional faceplate (Page 217) in the
preview

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1178 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

Parameter Description Type Default


StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
StopAut* 1 = Stop the motor in automatic mode STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
StopForce 1 = Force motor stop STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
StopLocal 1 = Stopping the motor in "local mode" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
StopMan* 1 = Stopping the motor in "manual mode" BOOL 0
Trip 1 = Motor is in "good" state STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
UserAna1 Analog auxiliary value 1 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
UA1unit Unit of measure for analog auxiliary val‐ INT 0
ue 1
UserAna2 Analog auxiliary value 2 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
UA2unit Unit of measure for analog auxiliary val‐ INT 0
ue 2
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use in PCS 7 BYTE 16#00
OS
WarnTiAut* Prewarning of motor start in automatic REAL 0.0
mode in [s]
WarnTiMan* Prewarning of motor start in manual REAL 0.0
mode in [s]

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AutAct 1 = "Automatic mode" enabled STRUCT -
0 = "Manual mode" is enabled ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AutoST 1 = Worst signal status of automatic com‐ BYTE 16#80
mands
AV_OpScale Limit for scale in AV bar graph of face‐ STRUCT -
plate ● High: REAL ● 100.0
● Low: REAL ● 0.0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1179
Motor and valve blocks
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

Parameter Description Type Default


AV_Out Output additional analog value STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AV_Unit Unit of measure for additional analog val‐ INT 0
ue
CurrMon Remaining monitoring time [s] DINT 0
ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without BOOL 0
errors
ErrorNum Output of pending error number. For er‐ INT -1
ror numbers that can be output by this
block, see MotRevL error handling
(Page 1168)
FbkFwdOut Feedback: STRUCT -
1 = Forward operation active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FbkRevOut Feedback: STRUCT -
1 = Reverse operation active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Fwd 1 = Control of motor forward STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
GrpErr 1 = Group error pending STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
LocalAct 1 = "Local mode" enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
LockAct 1 = Interlock (Intlock, Permit, STRUCT -
Protect) or Trip is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManAct 1 = "Manual mode" enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MonDynErr 1 = Feedback error or feedback start er‐ STRUCT -
ror due to control change ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MonDynStopErr 1 = Feedback stop error due to control STRUCT -
change ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MonStaErr 1 = Feedback error due to unexpected STRUCT -
feedback change ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1180 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

Parameter Description Type Default


MS_Release Release for maintenance: STRUCT -
1 = Release for OS operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MsgAckn1 Message acknowledgement status 1 WORD 16#0000
(output ACK_STATE of first ALARM_8P)
MsgErr1 Alarm error 1 (output ERROR of first BOOL 0
ALARM_8P)
MsgStat1 Message status 1 (output STATUS of first WORD 16#0000
ALARM_8P)
OosAct 1 = Block is "Out of service" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpSt_Out Value of the OpSt_In input parameter, DWORD 16#00000000
for feedforwarding to other blocks. Bit 31
of this parameter is used by
Feature.Bit24
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with settings DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
changed by the block algorithm
P_Fwd 1 = Pulse signal for starting the motor in STRUCT -
forward ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
P_Rev 1 = Pulse signal for starting the motor in STRUCT -
reverse ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
P_Rst 1= Pulse output for reset STRUCT -
The parameter persists for one cycle af‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
ter a reset. ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
P_Stop 0 = Pulse signal for stopping the motor STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
R_StpAct 1 = Rapid stop of the motor is active STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
RdyToReset 1 = Ready for reset via RstLi input or STRUCT -
commands in "local", "automatic", or ● Value: BOOL ● 0
"manual mode"
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RdyToStart 1 = Active start readiness STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1181
Motor and valve blocks
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

Parameter Description Type Default


Rev 1 = Control of motor: Reverse STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RunFwd 1 = Motor is running forwards STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RunRev 1 = Motor is running in reverse STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Status1 Status word 1 (Page 1155) DWORD 16#00000000
Status2 Status word 2 (Page 1155) DWORD 16#00000000
Status3 Status word 3 (Page 1155) DWORD 16#00000000
Status4 Status word 4 (Page 1155) DWORD 16#00000000
Status5 Status word 5 (Page 1155) DWORD 16#00000000
Stop 1 = Motor stopped STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
WarnAct 1 = Prewarning for motor start active (pa‐ STRUCT -
rameters WarnTiAut and WarnTiMan) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

See also
MotRevL messaging (Page 1171)
MotRevL block diagram (Page 1182)
MotRevL modes (Page 1159)
Error handling (Page 121)

7.4.7 MotRevL block diagram

MotRevL block diagram


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

See also
MotRevL I/Os (Page 1173)
MotRevL messaging (Page 1171)
MotRevL error handling (Page 1168)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1182 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

MotRevL functions (Page 1161)


MotRevL modes (Page 1159)
Description of MotRevL (Page 1155)

7.4.8 Operator control and monitoring

7.4.8.1 MotRevL views

Views of the MotRevL block


The block MotRevL provides the following views:
● MotRevL standard view (Page 1184)
● Alarm view (Page 313)
● Limit view of motors (Page 305)
● Trend view (Page 317)
● Parameter view for motors and valves (Page 297)
● MotRevL preview (Page 1188)
● Memo view (Page 315)
● Batch view (Page 313)
● Block icon for MotRevL (Page 1193)
Refer to the sections Structure of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure
(Page 239) for general information on the faceplate and block icon.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1183
Motor and valve blocks
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

7.4.8.2 MotRevL standard view

MotRevL standard view


 
 

 






Feature2.Bit16 =0


 
 









Feature2.Bit16 =1

(1) Displaying and switching the operating mode


This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
● Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76)
● Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76)
● Local mode (Page 80)
● Out of service (Page 72)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1184 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

See also the section Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) for
information on switching the operating mode.

(2) Starting and stopping the motor


This area shows you the default operating state for the motor. The following states can be
shown and executed here:
● "Start→ "
● "Start ←"
● "Stop"
● "Rapid stop"
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for information
on changing the state.
If text is configured for these commands, it is displayed as status text and as button labels for
command selection. You can find more information about this in section Labeling of buttons
and text (Page 218)

(3) Resetting the block


Click "Reset" for interlocks or errors. You can find additional information on this in the section
Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors (Page 43).

(4) Operating range for the interlock functions of the block


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
You can use this button to control the interlock functions of the block. You can find additional
information on this in the section Interlocking functions (Page 101).
The following is displayed in addition to the buttons:
● Interlock status (see Forming the group status for interlock information (Page 106)), e.g.:

● Signal status (see Forming and outputting the signal status for technologic blocks
(Page 110)), e.g.:

● Bypass information (see Forming the group status for interlock information (Page 106)):

(5) Display of auxiliary values


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1185
Motor and valve blocks
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

You can use this area to display two auxiliary values that have been configured in the
engineering system (ES). You can find additional information on this in the section Displaying
auxiliary values (Page 220).

(6) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
Use this navigation button to open the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system (ES). The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the
engineering system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in the section Opening additional faceplates
(Page 217).

(7) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Maintenance"
Additional information on this is available in section Release for maintenance (Page 65) Display
area for block states.

(8) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Simulation"
● "Delay"
You will find more detailed information on this in the sections Simulating signals (Page 59) and
Display of delay times (Page 267).

(9) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Motor protection"
● "External error"
● "Status error"
● "Control error"
● "Invalid signal"
● "Changeover error"
Additional information on these errors is available in the sections Monitoring the feedbacks
(Page 98) , Error handling (Page 121) (section "Invalid input signals" and "Mode switchover
error") and Motor protection function (Page 100).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1186 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

(10) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Forced stop"
● "Forced start →"
● "Forced start ←"
● "Request 0/1": A reset to "automatic mode" is expected.
You can find additional information on this in the section Forcing operating modes (Page 41).

(11) Automatic preview


This display is only visible in "manual mode", in "local mode", or with a reset request in
"automatic mode", when the current output signals are not identical to the control in "automatic
mode".
The display shows what state the motor would assume if you switched from "manual" or "local"
mode to "automatic mode", or performed a reset to "automatic mode".

(12) Status display of the motor


The current status of the motor is graphically displayed here.
You can find more information about this in section Block icon for MotRevL (Page 1193)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1187
Motor and valve blocks
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

7.4.8.3 MotRevL preview

Preview of MotRevL

Display of the current monitoring time is visible.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1188 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

Display of the current monitoring time is not visible.

(1) Automatic preview


This area shows you the block status after it has switched from the "Manual" mode or "Local"
mode to the "Automatic" mode.
If the block is in "Automatic" mode, the current block state is displayed.
This area also displays the worst signal status of the following automatic commands:
● FwdAut
● RevAut
● StopAut

(2) Enable operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1189
Motor and valve blocks
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

Icons for enabled operation:


● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)
The following enabled operations are shown here:
● "Stop": You can stop the motor.
If text is configured for this command, it is also displayed in brackets. You can find additional
information on this in the section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218).
● "Start →": You can start the motor.
If text is configured for this command, it is also displayed in brackets. You can find additional
information on this in the section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218).
● "Start ←": You can start the motor.
If text is configured for this command, it is also displayed in brackets. You can find additional
information on this in the section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218).
● "Reset": You can reset the motor after interlocks or errors.
● "Automatic": You can switch to "automatic mode".
● "Manual": You can switch to "manual mode".
● "Local": You can switch to "local mode".
● "Out of service": You can switch to "Out of service" operating mode.
● "Local operator permission": Use the ← button to switch to the standard view of the
OpStations block. You can find additional information on this in the section Operator control
permissions (Page 265) .
● "Monitoring time": Display of the remaining monitoring time.

(3) Displaying current control signals


This area shows the most important parameters for this block with the current selection:
● "Permission":
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = No OS release for energizing motor
– 1 = Enable for "starting"/"stopping" from the neutral position
● "Enable" (Feature 2 bit 16 =0):
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = No OS release for energizing motor
– 1 = Enable for "Start" from the neutral position

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1190 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

● "Enable Fwd" (Feature 2 bit 16 =1):


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = No OS release for energizing motor
– 1 = Enable for "Start forward" from the neutral position
● "Enable Rev" (Feature 2 bit 16 =1):
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = No OS release for energizing motor
– 1 = Enable for "Start reverse" from the neutral position
● "Protection":
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Protective interlocking is effective; once the interlocking condition has disappeared,
you will have to reset the block
– 1 = "Good" state
● "Protection" (Feature 2 bit 16 =0):
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Protective interlocking is effective; once the interlocking condition has disappeared,
you will have to reset the block
– 1 = "Good" state
● "Protection Fwd" (Feature 2 bit 16 =1):
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Protective interlocking is effective; once the interlocking condition has disappeared,
you will have to reset the block
– 1 = "Good" state
● "Protection Rev" (Feature 2 bit 16 =1):
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Protective interlocking is effective; once the interlocking condition has disappeared,
you will have to reset the block
– 1 = "Good" state
● "Interlock":
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Interlocking without reset is active; you can operate the block without reset once the
interlocking condition has disappeared
– 1 = "Good" state
● "Interlock" (Feature 2 bit 16 =0):
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Interlocking without reset is active; you can operate the block without reset once the
interlocking condition has disappeared
– 1 = "Good" state

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1191
Motor and valve blocks
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

● "Interlock Fwd" (Feature 2 bit 16 =1):


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Interlocking without reset is active; you can operate the block without reset once the
interlocking condition has disappeared
– 1 = "Good" state
● "Interlock Rev" (Feature 2 bit 16 =1):
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Interlocking without reset is active; you can operate the block without reset once the
interlocking condition has disappeared
– 1 = "Good" state
● "Local correct": 1 = Control signal for "Local mode" (LocalLi) is active
● "Motor protection": 1 = Motor is in "good" state
● "Interlock deact.":
– 0 = Bypass disabled
– 1 = Bypassing interlock in "local mode" and in "simulation"
● "Local stop": 1 = Stopping the motor in "local mode"
● "Local start →": 1 = Starting the motor in "local mode"
● "Local start ←": 1 = Starting the motor in "local mode"
● "Feedback →": 1 = Motor has started and is running
● "Feedback ←": 1 = Motor has started and is running
● "Stop": 1 = Stop motor
● "Start →": 1 = Start motor
● "Start ←": 1 = Start motor
● "Channel Start →": Signal from the output channel block for "Start"
● "Channel Start ←": Signal from the output channel block for "Start"

(4) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
Use this navigation button to open the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system (ES). The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the
engineering system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in the section Opening additional faceplates
(Page 217) .

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1192 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

7.4.8.4 Block icon for MotRevL

Block icons for MotRevL


A variety of block icons are available with the following functions:
● Process tag type
● Limits (high/low)
● Violation of alarm, warning, and tolerance limits as well as control system faults
● Operating modes
● Signal status, release for maintenance
● Displays for bypassing interlocks
● Interlocks
● Memo display
● Motor state display

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV8.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special features


1

3 Direction display inverted to sym‐


bol 1

4 Direction display inverted to sym‐


bol 2

5 "M" symbol with small direction


display

6 "M" symbol with small direction


display

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1193
Motor and valve blocks
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV7.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special features


1 Block icon in the full display

10

- Block icon in "Out of service"


mode (example with type 1 block
icon)

Additional information on the block icon and the control options in the block icon is available
in the following chapters:
● Configuring the block icons (Page 246)
● Block icon structure (Page 239)
● Operation via the block icon (Page 248)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1194 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.4 MotRevL - Reversible motor

Motor state display


The following motor states are shown here:

Icon Meaning
Motor started (motor symbol changes)

The motor is running

Motor stopped (motor symbol changes)

Motor idle

Error at motor (monitoring error, motor protection)

Motor out of service

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1195
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

7.5.1 Description of MotSpdCL

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1854
Family: Drives

Area of application for MotSpdCL


The block is used for the following applications:
● Control of motors with two directions of rotation and different speeds
● Control of a device feed (optionally configurable via feature bit)

How it works
The block is used to control reversible motors for different speeds. Various inputs are available
for controlling the motor.

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38). The block is
also installed automatically in the startup OB (OB100).
For the MotSpdCL block, the Advanced Process Library contains a template for process tag
types as an example with an application scenario for this block.
Example of process tag types:
● Reversible motor with controllable speed (MotorSpeedControlled) (Page 2428)

Startup characteristics
Use the Feature Bit Set startup characteristics (Page 141) to define the startup characteristics
of this block.

Note
At a warm restart with the Feature Bit set to 0, the block is switched to manual mode and the
setpoint is set to internal and to 0.

The messages are suppressed after startup for the number of cycles set at RunUpCyc.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1196 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


For a description of the individual parameters, see the section MotSpdCL I/Os (Page 1220).

Status bit Parameter


0 Occupied
1 BatchEn
2 SimOn
3 OosAct.Value
4 OosLi.Value
5 0 = ManAct.Value
1 = AutoAct.Value
6 LocalAct.Value
7 0: Open padlock in the block icon
1: Closed padlock in the block icon
8 Fwd.Value
9 SimLiOp.Value
10 Rev.Value
11 MonStaErr.Value
12 MonDynErr.Value
13 BypProt
14 Invalid signal status
15 Mode switchover error
16 1 = Intlock is active
17 1 = Permit is active
18 1 = Protect is active
19 Trip
20 Display „Forced forward“
21 Display „Forced stop“
22 Display „Forced reverse“
23 "Interlock" button is enabled
24 Reset request in automatic preview
25 WarnAct.Value or
IdleTime active
26 Bypass information from previous function block
27 Automatic preview for forward mode
28 Automatic preview for "stopping"
29 Automatic preview for reverse mode
30 "Permission" button is enabled
31 "Protection" button is enabled

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1197
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

Status word allocation for Status2 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 MsgLock
1 AV_AH_Act.Value
2 AV_WH_Act.Value
3 AV_TH_Act.Value
4 AV_TL_Act.Value
5 AV_WL_Act.Value
6 AV_AL_Act.Value
7 AV_AH_En OR Feature.Bit23
8 AV_WH_En OR Feature.Bit23
9 AV_TH_En OR Feature.Bit23
10 AV_TL_En OR Feature.Bit23
11 AV_WL_En OR Feature.Bit23
12 AV_AL_En OR Feature.Bit23
13 AV_AH_MsgEn
14 AV_WH_MsgEn
15 AV_TH_MsgEn
16 AV_TL_MsgEn
17 AV_WL_MsgEn
18 AV_AL_MsgEn
19 1 = No impact of input signals on "local mode" with LocalSetting = 2 and
LocalSetting = 4
20 Motor is stopped
21 Motor stops in forward mode
22 Motor stops in reverse mode
23 Motor starts in forward mode
24 Motor runs in forward mode
25 Motor starts in reverse mode
26 Motor runs in reverse mode
27 Error when "stopping" the motor
28 Error in forward mode of motor
29 Error in reverse mode of motor
30 SP_ExtAct.Value
31 Display for interlocks in block icon

Status word allocation for Status3 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 1 = SP ramp active
1 RbkWH_Act.Value
2 Delay of the AV_AH_Lim message
3 Delay of the AV_WH_Lim message

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1198 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

Status bit Parameter


4 RbkWL_Act.Value
5 Delay of the AV_TH_Lim message
6 Delay of the AV_TL_Lim message
7 RbkWH_En OR Feature.Bit23
8 Delay of the AV_WL_Lim message
9 Delay of the AV_AL_Lim message
10 RbkWL_En OR Feature.Bit23
11 Delay of the RbkWH_Lim message
12 Delay of the RbkWL_Lim message
13 Collection of message delays
14 RbkWH_MsgEn
15 Current monitoring time is visible
16 MonDynStopErr.Value
17 RbkWL_MsgEn
18 Motor is stopped
19 1 = Enable for rapid stop (Feature Bit Enabling rapid stop via faceplate
(Page 172))
20 SP_RmpModTime
21 SP_RmpOn
22 SP_UpRaAct, SP_DnRaAct limits enabled for gradient mode (SP_RateOn = 1)
23 Command for "rapid stop" of the motor
24 Command for "starting" → the motor
25 Command for "starting" ← the motor
26 Show automatic preview in the standard view
27 RdyToStart.Value
28 GrpErr.Value
29 MS_RelOp
30 Auxiliary value 1 visible
31 Auxiliary value 2 visible

Status word allocation for Status4 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 Effective signal 1 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
1 Effective signal 2 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
2 Effective signal 3 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
3 Effective signal 4 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
4 Effective signal 5 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
5 Effective signal 6 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
6 Effective signal 7 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
7 Effective signal 8 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
8 AV not connected

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1199
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

Status bit Parameter


9 Motor protection display (Trip.Status ≠ 16#FF)
10 1 = Input parameter FbkFwd is connected
11 1 = Input parameter FbkRev is connected
12 1 = Setpoint difference high limit violated (ER_AH_Act.Value)
13 1 = Setpoint difference low limit violated (ER_AL_Act.Value)
14 ER_AH_En OR Feature.Bit23
15 ER_AL_En OR Feature.Bit23
16 1 = Report setpoint difference high limit violation (ER_AH_MsgEn)
17 1 = Report setpoint difference low limit violation (ER_AL_MsgEn)
18 1 = Monitoring of setpoint difference "SP - Rbk" activated
19 DvFdAct.Value Device feed ON
20 NOT DvFdAct.Value Device feed OFF
21 Feature.Bit15 Frequency converter with separate device feed (Page 155)
22 External error generated by FaultExt or external control system fault from CSF with
set Feature.Bit18 Activating error state for external process control error CSF
(Page 154)
23 Hidden bypass signal in Permit
24 Hidden bypass signal in interlock
25 Hidden bypass signal in Protect
26 Feature2.Bit2: Separate bypass signal
27 Feature.Bit16: Setpoint specification with separate display area and custom
unit (Page 175)
28 1 = Input parameter FwdChnST is interconnected
29 1 = Input parameter RevChnST is interconnected
30 1 = Input parameter SP_OutChnS is interconnected
31 Separate monitoring of shutdown of the motor (Feature.Bit13)

Status word allocation for Status5 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0-7 Effective signal 9..16 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
8 Delay of the ER_AH_Lim message
9 Delay of the ER_AL_Lim message
10 - 15 Not used
16 - 31 Effective signal 1...16 of the message block connected via EventTs2In

See also
MotSpdCL block diagram (Page 1233)
MotSpdCL messaging (Page 1218)
MotSpdCL error handling (Page 1215)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1200 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

MotSpdCL functions (Page 1203)


MotSpdCL modes (Page 1201)

7.5.2 MotSpdCL modes

MotSpdCL operating modes


The block can be operated using the following modes:
● Local mode (Page 80)
● Automatic mode (Page 76)
● Manual mode (Page 76)
● Out of service (Page 72)
The next section provides additional block-specific information relating to the general
descriptions.

"Local mode"
You can find general information on "Local mode", switching modes and Bumpless switchover
in the Local mode (Page 80) .
Motor actions you can control in local mode:
● "Starting in forward" (FwdLocal = 1)
● "Starting in reverse" (RevLocal = 1)
● "Stopping" (StopLocal = 1)
A motor operated in "local mode" is controlled either by "local" signals or by the feedback
signals (input parameters FbkFwd = 1and FbkRev = 1). Configuration takes place via the input
parameter LocalSetting.

"Automatic mode"
You can find general information on "Automatic mode", switching modes and Bumpless
switchover in the Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76) .
Motor actions you can control in auto mode:
● "Starting in forward" (FwdAut = 1)
● "Starting in reverse" (RevAut = 1)
● "Stopping" (StopAut = 1)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1201
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

"Manual mode"
You can find general information on "Manual mode", switching modes and bumpless
switchover in the section Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers
(Page 76).
Motor actions you can control in "manual mode":
● "Starting in forward" (FwdMan = 1)
● "Starting in reverse" (RevMan = 1)
● "Stopping" (StopMan = 1)

"Out of service"
You can find general information about the "Out of service" mode in the section Out of
service (Page 72).
With Feature2.Bit1 =1 the following output parameter become the status of simulation
16#60, if mode is changed to "Out of service".
With Feature2.Bit1 =0 the following output parameter become the status of 16#80, if mode
is changed to "Out of service".
● DvFdAct.ST
● FbkFwdOut.ST
● FbkRevOut.ST
● RunFwd.ST
● RunRev.ST
● Stop.ST
● Starting.ST
● Stoping.ST
● SP_Out.ST
● SP_Out2.ST
● SP_ExtAct.ST
● RbkOut.ST
● RbkWH_Act.ST
● RbkWL_Act.ST
● ER.ST
● ER_AH_Act.ST
● ER_AL_Act.ST
● AV_Out.ST

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1202 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

Note
In case of external setpoint value specification, the block switches to internal setpoint value
specification.

See also
MotSpdCL block diagram (Page 1233)
MotSpdCL I/Os (Page 1220)
MotSpdCL messaging (Page 1218)
MotSpdCL error handling (Page 1215)
MotSpdCL functions (Page 1203)
Description of MotSpdCL (Page 1196)

7.5.3 MotSpdCL functions

Functions of MotSpdCL
The functions for this block are listed below.

Alarm delays with two time values per limit pair


This block has the standard alarm delay function for Two time values per limit pair (Page 210)
limit monitoring of the feedback.

Opening additional faceplates


This block provides the standard function Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

Operator permissions
This block provides the standard function Operator control permissions (Page 265).
The block has the following permissions for the OS_Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 1 = Operator can switch to "automatic mode"
1 1 = Operator can switch to "manual mode"
2 1 = Operator can switch to "local mode"
3 1 = Operator can switch to "Out of service" mode
4 1 = Operator can stop the motor
5 1 = Operator can start the motor in forward

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1203
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

Bit Function
6 1 = Operator can start the motor in reverse
7 1 = Operator can reset the motor
8 1 = Operator can define or change the monitoring time for startup
9 1 = Operator can define the monitoring time for the status
10 1 = Operator can activate the monitoring time
11 1 = Operator can activate the Simulation function
12 1 = Operator can activate the Release for maintenance function
13 1 = Operator can change the limit (AV) for high alarm
14 1 = Operator can change the limit (AV) for high warning
15 1 = Operator can change the limit (AV) for high tolerance
16 1 = Operator can change the limit (AV) for hysteresis
17 1 = Operator can change the limit (AV) for low alarm
18 1 = Operator can change the limit (AV) for low warning
19 1 = Operator can change the limit (AV) for low tolerance
20 1 = Operator can enable the bumpless switchover from external to internal SP_TrkExt
21 1 = Operator can change the internal setpoint SP_Int
22 1 = Operator can switch the setpoint to "external" SP_ExtOp
23 1 = Operator can switch the setpoint to "internal" SP_IntOp
24 1 = Operator can enable the setpoint's gradient limitation function SP_RateOn
25 1 = Operator can change the setpoint's high limit for the ramp SP_UpRaLim
26 1 = Operator can change the setpoint's low limit for the ramp SP_DnRaLim
27 1 = Operator can enable the setpoint ramp function SP_RmpOn
28 1 = Operator can switch between the time value or the value for the ramp SP_RmpModTime
29 1 = Operator can change the ramp time SP_RmpTime
30 1 = Operator can change the target setpoint SP_RmpTarget for the setpoint ramp
31 1 = Operator can enable rapid stop

The block has the following permissions for the OS1Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 Not used
1 1 = Operator can change the limit (Rbk) for high warning
2 Not used
3 1 = Operator can change the limit (Rbk) for hysteresis
4 Not used
5 1 = Operator can change the limit (Rbk) for low warning
6 1 = Operator can change the limit (setpoint difference) ER_AH_Lim for the high alarm
7 1 = Operator can change the hysteresis (setpoint difference) ER_Hyst
8 1 = Operator can change the limit (setpoint difference) ER_AL_Lim for the low alarm
9 1 = Operator can change the simulation value SimRbk
10 1 = Operator can activate the device infeed DvFdOnMan
11 1 = Operator can deactivate the device infeed DvFdOffMan
12 1 =Operator can change the simulation value SimAV

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1204 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

Bit Function
13 1 = Operator can change the derivative gain parameter ER_AH_DFac
14 1 = Operator can change the derivative gain parameter ER_AL_DFac
15 - 19 Not used
20 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via AV_AH_MsgEn
21 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via AV_WH_MsgEn
22 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via AV_TH_MsgEn
23 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via AV_TL_MsgEn
24 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via AV_WL_MsgEn
25 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via AV_AL_MsgEn
26 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via RbkWH_MsgEn
27 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via RbkWL_MsgEn
28 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via ER_AH_MsgEn
29 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via ER_AL_MsgEn
30 1 = Operator can define the monitoring time for stopping
31 Not used

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Restart lock after changing direction of rotation or switching off the motor
Use the input parameter IdleTime to enter a restart lock for changing the direction of rotation
or restarting the motor. Use the Feature Bit Enabling direct changeover between forward and
reverse (Page 149) to define how the change is to take place. When the "Stop" command is
given, the motor goes immediately into Stop mode and IdleTime starts after the feedback
(FbkFwd and FbkRev = 0) is given. The motor cannot be started again until the IdleTime
has expired.
The IdleTime parameter can be set independently of the MonTiDynamic parameter.

Limit monitoring of an additional analog value


This block provides the standard function Limit monitoring of an additional analog value
(Page 92).

Limit monitoring of the feedback


The block provides the standard function Limit monitoring of the feedback (Page 95). This limit
monitoring is only active when the motor has started.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1205
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

Limit monitoring with hysteresis


This block provides the standard function Limit monitoring with hysteresis (Page 98). It is
performed via the input parameter AV_Hyst.

Group display SumMsgAct for limit monitoring, CSF and ExtMsgx


The block provides the standard function Group display for limit monitoring, CSF and
ExtMsgx (Page 86).

Suppressing messages using the MsgLock parameter


This block provides the standard function Suppressing messages using the MsgLock
parameter (Page 214).

External/internal setpoint specification


The block provides the standard function Setpoint specification - internal/external (Page 130).

Setpoint adaption in motor stop and starting


With Feature2.Bit7 = 1; Define the setpoint after stop and start of the motor (Page 187),
the setpoint can be set to a stop value and after start of the motor, the setpoint can be set to
a minimal value (SP_LoLim).

Setpoint limitation
Limit the setpoint using the parameters:
● SP_HiLim (top)
● SP_LoLim (bottom)
Limit violations are displayed at the SP_HiAct and SP_LoAct output parameters with a 1.
With Feature2.Bit7 = 1; Define the setpoint after stop and start of the motor (Page 187),
the lower limit value of the setpoint SP_LoLim will be limited to SP_Off and in case of violation,
SP_LoLim will be written back to SP_Off.

Gradient limit of the setpoint


The block provides the standard function Gradient limit of the setpoint (Page 126).

Using setpoint ramp


The block provides the standard function Using setpoint ramp (Page 125).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1206 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

Gear reduction or setpoint adaptation with factor


With the parameter FactGR, a factor can be entered for gear reduction. It affects the outputs
SP_Out, SP_Out2, and RbkOut:
● SP_Out = FactGR * SP_Ext if the setpoint is external (SP_ExtAct = 1)
● SP_Out2 parameter:
– If FactGR <> 0.0 then SP_Out2 = SP_Out / FactGR
– If FactGR = 0.0 then SP_Out2 = SP_Out
As a result, the readback value will also be adjusted:
RbkOut = FactGR * Rbk
Below is an example for the gear reduction from motor speed to machine speed in the ratio
10:1.

Machine speed SP_Int


SP_Out Machine speed
Setpoint
generation
Motor speed SP_Ext X

Gear reduction factor = 0.1


div SP_Out2 Motor speed
if the speed ratio from FactGR
motor to machine is 10:1

Motor speed Rkb X RkbOut Machine speed

The factor FactGR can also be used for adapting the range in percentage.

Formation of the setpoint difference


The block always forms the setpoint difference:
ER.Value = SP_Out - RbkOut.Value.

Limit monitoring of the setpoint difference


The block provides the standard function Limit monitoring of setpoint, manipulated variable
and control deviation (Page 96).
To transmit the messages, you need to enable Feature.Bit5 Alarm setpoint difference
(Page 175).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1207
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

When the function activated, the message configuration should be adapted as follows:

Message in‐ Message identi‐ Message class Event


stance fier
MsgEvId1 SIG 7 Alarm - high $$BlockComment$$
ER - high alarm limit SP - Rbk viola‐
ted
SIG 8 Alarm - low $$BlockComment$$
ER - low alarm limit SP - Rbk violated

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment

Interlocks
This block provides the following interlocks:
● Activation enable
● Interlock without reset ("Interlock")
● Interlock with reset ("Protection")
Refer to the section Interlocks (Page 101) as well as Influence of the signal status on the
interlock (Page 105).

Motor protection function


This block provides the standard function Motor protection function (Page 100).

Rapid stop for motors


This block provides the standard function Rapid stop for motors (Page 108).

Disabling interlocks
This block provides the standard function Disabling interlocks (Page 104).

Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors


This block provides the standard function Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors
(Page 43).

External error (FaultExt), external control system fault (CSF)


This block provides the possibility to pass an external error via the FaultExt parameter or
an external control system fault via the CSF parameter. See MotSpdCL error handling
(Page 1215).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1208 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

Group error
This block provides the standard function Outputting group errors (Page 124).
The following parameters are taken into consideration when forming the group error:
● CSF
● Trip
● MonDynErr
● MonStaErr
● FaultExt

Outputting a signal for start readiness


This block provides the standard function Outputting a signal for start readiness (Page 54).

Forming the group status for interlocks


This block provides the standard function Forming the group status for interlock information
(Page 106).

Forming the signal status for blocks


This block provides the standard function Forming and outputting the signal status for
technologic blocks (Page 110).
The worst signal status ST_Worst for the block is formed from the following parameters:
● FbkFwdOut.ST
● FbkRevOut.ST
● LocalLi.ST
● FwdLocal.ST
● StopLocal.ST
● RevLocal.ST
● Trip.ST
● AV_Out.ST
● RbkOut.ST
● SP_Out.ST
● FwdChn.ST
● RevChn.ST
● SP_OutChn.ST
● FwdAut.ST (only if Feature2.Bit10 = 1)
● RevAut.ST (only if Feature2.Bit10 = 1)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1209
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

● StopAut.ST (only if Feature2.Bit10 = 1)


● SP_Ext.ST (only if Feature2.Bit10 = 1)
The signal status of the SP_Out output parameter is always equivalent to the signal status of
input parameter SP_Ext or SP_Int, depending on how the setpoint is specified. If the internal
setpoint SP_Int is used, the signal status is always output as 16#80.
In case of Feature.Bit10 = 1, SP_Ext.ST influences ST_Worst independent of setpoint
specification.

Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values


If the Feature2 bit Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values
(Page 190) is set to 1 and one of the following parameters has bad signal status (16#00 or
16#28), the block goes to the neutral position (motor stop) in the "Automatic" mode:
● FwdAut.ST
● RevAut.ST
● StopAut.ST
● SP_Ext.ST

Forcing operating modes


This block provides the standard function Forcing operating modes (Page 41).
The following states can be enforced:
● "Start in forward" (FwdForce)
● "Start in reverse" (RevForce)
● "Stop" (StopForce)
Note
The Feature bit Enabling direct changeover between forward and reverse (Page 149) for
this block has no function with forced operating states. The motor can always be reversed
directly.

Feedback monitoring
This block provides the standard function Monitoring the feedbacks (Page 98).

Release for maintenance


This block provides the standard function Release for maintenance (Page 65).

Specify warning times for control functions


This block provides the standard function Specifying warning times for control functions at
motors and valves (Page 51).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1210 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

You can generate warning signals when, for example, motors are started. Warning signals can
be generated in the following modes:
● Manual mode (Page 76) (WarnTiMan input parameter)Automatic mode (Page 76)
(WarnTiAut input parameter)
You specify the warning times in seconds using the input parameters WarnTiMan and
WarnTiAut. If, for example, a motor is started, then this is displayed at the output parameter
with WarnAct = 1. The motor then starts after the set warning time has expired and
WarnAct then goes back to 0 .
A corresponding warning is not output if the warning times (WarnTiMan or WarnTiAut) are
specified with a smaller value than the SampleTime parameter.

Simulating signals
This block provides the standard function Simulating signals (Page 59).
You can simulate the following values:
● Additional value (SimAV, SimAV_Li)
● Position feedback (SimRbk, SimRbkLi)

Selecting a unit of measure


This block provides the standard function Selecting a unit of measure (Page 221).

Specifying the display and operator input area for process values and setpoints during operation
This block features the standard function Display and control fields for process values and
setpoints (Page 216).

Neutral position
This block provides the standard function Neutral position for motors, valves and controllers
(Page 48).

Output signal as a pulse signal or static signal


This block provides the standard function Output signal as a static signal or pulse signal
(Page 52).

Generating instance-specific messages


This block provides the standard function Generating instance-specific messages (Page 213).

Delay alarm for control deviation at setpoint step changes


The block provides the standard function Delay alarm for control deviation at setpoint step
changes (Page 199).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1211
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

Disabling of limits
The block provides the standard function AUTOHOTSPOT.

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133) . The following functionality is
available for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
0 Set startup characteristics (Page 141)
1 Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 181)
2 Resetting the commands for changing the mode (Page 165)
3 Enabling resetting of commands for the control settings (Page 165)
4 Setting switch or button mode (Page 170)
5 Alarm setpoint difference (Page 175)
6 Ramp rate calculation (Page 183)
7 Enabling direct changeover between forward and reverse (Page 149)
8 Inverter enable (Page 190)
9 Resetting via input signals in the event of interlocking (Protection) or errors (Page 167)
10 Exiting local mode (Page 181)
11 Activating the run time of feedback signals (Page 157)
12 Gradient limitation with time duration (Page 186)
13 Separate monitoring time for stopping the motor (Page 173)
14 Enabling rapid stop via faceplate (Page 172)
15 Frequency converter with separate device feed (Page 155)
16 Setpoint specification with separate display area and custom unit (Page 175)
17 Enabling bumpless switchover to automatic mode for valves, motors, and dosers (Page 177)
18 Activating error state for external process control error CSF (Page 154)
19 Reset even with locked state (Page 169)
20 Disable calculation of impulse control in LocalSetting 2 and 4 (Page 190)
21 Enable bumpless switchover to "Automatic" mode for operator only (Page 176)
22 Update acknowledgment and error status of the message call (Page 163)
23 Limits disabled in faceplate (Page 195)
24 Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162)
25 Suppression of all messages (Page 178)
26 Reaction of the switching points in the "Out of service" operating mode (Page 180)
27 Interlock display with LocalSetting 2 or 4 (Page 182)
28 Disabling operating points (Page 149)
29 Signaling limit violation (Page 174)
30 Set reset depending on the operating mode or the LiOp parameter (Page 167)
31 Activating reset of protection / error in manual mode (Page 168)

In pushbutton operation (Bit 4 = 0) , the automatic commands in "automatic" mode are latching;
in other words, FwdAut, RevAut, StopAut can be reset to 0 after changing the control. In

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1212 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

"manual" and "local" modes, however, the automatic commands are not saved and in the
absence of automatic commands the automatic control is tracked.
In switching mode (Bit 4 = 1), control is selected with the static signals FwdAut, RevAut. If
FwdAut, RevAut inputs are not set, the motor is stopped. Control via StopAut is not needed.
If the "Activate command reset for control" function (Bit 3 = 1) is also enabled, the inputs
FwdAut, RevAut are reset to the neutral position after evaluation in the block.

Configurable reactions using the Feature2 parameter

Bit Function
1 Changes signal status of outputs in OOS (Page 198)
2 Separate evaluation for excluded and simulated interlock signals (Page 155)
3 Control priority in the event of an invalid input command (Page 179)
4 Setting switch or button mode for local commands (Page 185)
5 Evaluation of the signal status of the interlock signals (Page 146)
6 Operator can change the setpoint via faceplate also in the "Local" mode (Page 187)
7 Define the setpoint after stop and start of the motor (Page 187)
8 Forcing operating modes in the "Local" mode (Page 188)
10 Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values (Page 190)
11 Suppress MsgLock and “Out of service” mode for a connected message block (Page 192)

Displaying auxiliary values


This block provides the standard function Displaying auxiliary values (Page 220).

Connection of the time-stamped messages from EventTs or Event16Ts


This block provides the standard function Connection of the time-stamped messages from
EventTs or Event16Ts (Page 216).

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


This block provides the standard function SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

Button labels
This block provides the standard function Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218)
Instance-specific text can be configured for the following parameters:
● FwdMan
● RevMan
● StopMan
● RapidStp

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1213
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

Controlling a device infeed or an inverter enable


The function is activated via Feature.Bit15 Frequency converter with separate device
feed (Page 155) and specified via Feature.Bit8 Inverter enable (Page 190).
When the function is activated, the motor can be started in two steps:
● Switch on device infeed or inverter enable first, then start the motor
When the function is activated, the motor can also be started directly:
● The device infeed or the inverter enable is also activated when starting in forward or reverse.
The frequency converter itself ensures the correct order.
The motor can now be stopped and restarted without having to switch off the device infeed or
the inverter enable.
The activation of the device infeed or the inverter enable by starting the motor can be performed
in the automatic, manual and local operating modes with local setting 1 or 3, or by forcing.
With local setting 2 or 4, the controls are tracked based on feedback signals regardless of the
status of the device infeed or the inverter enable.
With motors without device infeed or inverter enable (Feature.Bit15 = 0 default), the
DvFdAct.Value control is always zero.
Separate activation/deactivation of the device infeed or the inverter enable is performed in
manual mode using DvFdOnMan and DvFdOffMan via the standard view of the faceplate. In
automatic mode, activation/deactivation is performed via the input signals DvFdOnAut or
DvFdOffAut. The Feature.Bit3 (activate reset of commands for control) and 4 (set switch
or pushbutton operation) are also based on the automatic inputs DvFdOnAut and
DvFdOffAut.
The following table shows the effects on MotSpdCL block when parameterizing device infeed
and inverter enable:

MotSpdCL specification Effect on MotSpdCL block when Effect on MotSpdCL block when
parameterizing device infeed parameterizing inverter enable
Featur.Bit8 = 0 Feature.Bit8 = 1
Motor start - dependent (Fwd = Device infeed is activated Inverter enable remains un‐
1 or Rev = 1) (DvFdAct = 1) changed
Motor stop (Fwd = 0 and Rev = Device infeed remains un‐ Inverter enable remains un‐
0) changed changed
Activate device infeed or inverter Motor control remains un‐ Motor control remains un‐
enable (DvFdAct = 1) changed changed
Deactivate device infeed or in‐ Motor control is reset (Fwd = 0, Motor control remains un‐
verter enable (DvFdAct = 0) Rev = 0) changed
Monitoring the feedback signals Feedback signals are monitored Feedback signals are monitored
(FbkFwd, FbkRev) for motor controls (Fwd, Rev) for motor controls and the inver‐
ter enable:
(Fwd and DvFdAct), (Rev and
DvFdAct)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1214 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

MotSpdCL specification Effect on MotSpdCL block when Effect on MotSpdCL block when
parameterizing device infeed parameterizing inverter enable
Featur.Bit8 = 0 Feature.Bit8 = 1
Monitoring fault, external fault, Motor control is reset (Fwd = 0, Motor control is reset (Fwd = 0,
motor protection, or interlock Rev = 0) Rev = 0)
Device infeed remains un‐ Inverter enable remains un‐
changed changed
Limit value monitoring of the Only active when: Only active if the inverter enable
feedback Fwd = 1 or Rev = 1 is also activated:
Limit value monitoring of the set‐ Fwd = 1 or Rev = 1;
point difference And DvFdAct = 1

Commands for starting the motor have higher priority than commands for a device infeed or
the inverter enable.

DANGER
Separate switching on/off of the device infeed
With switch mode (Feature.Bit4 = 1) and deactivated control reset (Feature.Bit3 = 0),
the DvFdOnAut input is also set for controlling the device infeed or the inverter enable when
starting in forward or in reverse in automatic mode.

See also
MotSpdCL block diagram (Page 1233)
MotSpdCL I/Os (Page 1220)
MotSpdCL messaging (Page 1218)
MotSpdCL modes (Page 1201)
Description of MotSpdCL (Page 1196)
EventTs functions (Page 1698)

7.5.4 MotSpdCL error handling

Error handling of MotSpdCL


Refer to section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions for the error handling of all
blocks.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers
● Mode switchover error
● Control system fault (CSF)
● Invalid input signals

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1215
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum I/O can be used to output the following error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; the block is not executed
0 There is no error.
41 The value for the LocalSetting I/O is not within the approved limit of 0 to 4.
42 LocalSetting = 0 or LocalSetting = 3 or LocalSetting = 4 and LocalLi = 1
51 FwdLocal = 1 and StopLocal = 1
RevLocal = 1 and StopLocal = 1
FwdLocal = 1 and RevLocal = 1
FwdAut = 1 and StopAut = 1
RevAut = 1 and StopAut = 1
FwdAut = 1 and RevAut = 1
AutModLi = 1 and ManModLi = 1
FwdForce = 1 and StopForce = 1
RevForce = 1 and StopForce = 1
FwdForce = 1 and RevForce = 1
SP_LiOp = 1 and SP_IntLi = 1 and SP_ExtLi = 1
DvFdOnMan and DvFdOffMan and Feature.Bit15
DvFdOnAut and DvFdOffAut and Feature.Bit15
52 LocalAct = 1 and LocalSetting = 2 or 4 and SimOn = 1

Note
The relationship of the pushbutton/switch mode Feature.Bit4 is not taken into account

Mode switchover error


This error can be output by the block, see the section Error handling (Page 121).

Invalid input signals


This error can be output by the block, see the section Error handling (Page 121).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1216 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

For the following invalid input signals, the control output can be kept or switched to the neutral
position. This depends on the function Control priority in the event of an invalid input
command (Page 179).

Operating mode Invalid input signals Control reaction with


Feature2.Bit3 = 1
Local: Localsetting = 1 or Pushbutton operation for local Motor is stopped
Localsetting = 3 mode (Feature2.Bit4 = 0):
FwdLocal = 1 and RevLocal =
1 or
FwdLocal = 1 and StopLocal
= 1 or
StopLocal = 1 and RevLocal
=1
Switching mode
(Feature2.Bit4 = 1):
FwdLocal = 1 and RevLocal =
1
Local: Localsetting = 1 or FwdForce = 1 and RevForce =
Localsetting = 3 and forcing 1 or
FwdForce = 1 and StopForce
= 1 or
StopForce = 1 and RevForce
=1
Forcing and no "local mode" FwdForce = 1 and RevForce =
1 or
FwdForce = 1 and StopForce
= 1 or
StopForce = 1 and RevForce
=1
"Automatic mode" and no forcing Pushbutton operation
(Feature.Bit4 = 0):
FwdAut = 1 and RevAut = 1 or
FwdAut = 1 and StopAut = 1 or
StopAut = 1 and RevAut = 1
Switching mode
(Feature.Bit4 = 1):
FwdAut = 1 and RevAut = 1
"Manual mode" and no forcing FwdMan = 1 and RevMan = 1 or
FwdMan = 1 and StopMan = 1 or
StopMan = 1 and RevMan = 1

Control system fault (CSF)


An external signal can be activated via the CSF input. A control system fault is triggered if this
signal changes to 1. Refer to the Error handling (Page 121) section for more on this.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1217
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

See also
MotSpdCL block diagram (Page 1233)
MotSpdCL I/Os (Page 1220)
MotSpdCL messaging (Page 1218)
MotSpdCL functions (Page 1203)
MotSpdCL modes (Page 1201)
Description of MotSpdCL (Page 1196)

7.5.5 MotSpdCL messaging

Messaging
The following messages can be generated for this block:
● Process control fault
● Instance-specific messages

Process control fault


The following control system error messages can be output:

Message in‐ Message identifier Message class Event


stance
MsgEvId1 SIG 1 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
Motor feedback error
SIG 2 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
Motor protection triggered
SIG 3 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External error has occurred
SIG 4 Warning - high $$BlockComment$$
Rbk - high warning limit violated
SIG 5 Warning - low $$BlockComment$$
Rbk - low warning limit violated

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment
You can interconnect an external fault (signal) to input parameter CSF. If it changes to CSF =
1,, a process control fault is triggered (MsgEvId1, SIG 3).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1218 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

Instance-specific messages
You can use up to three instance-specific messages with this block.

Message in‐ Message identifier Message class Event


stance
MsgEvId1 SIG 6 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External message 1
SIG 7 Alarm - high $$BlockComment$$
ER - high alarm limit violated
SIG 8 Alarm - low $$BlockComment$$
ER - low alarm limit violated

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId1

Associated value Block parameters


1 BatchName
2 StepNo
3 BatchID
4 ExtVa104
5 ExtVa105
6 ExtVa106
7 ExtVa107
8 ExtVa108
9 Reserved
10 Reserved

The associated values 4 ... 8 are allocated to the parameters ExtVa104 ... ExtVa108 , and
can be used. Additional information is available in the "Process Control System PCS 7 -
Engineering System" manual.

See also
MotSpdCL block diagram (Page 1233)
MotSpdCL I/Os (Page 1220)
MotSpdCL error handling (Page 1215)
MotSpdCL functions (Page 1203)
MotSpdCL modes (Page 1201)
Description of MotSpdCL (Page 1196)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1219
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

7.5.6 MotSpdCL I/Os


I/Os of MotSpdCL

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AutModLi* 1 = "Automatic mode" via interconnec‐ STRUCT -
tion or SFC (controlled by ModLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AutModOp* 1 = "Automatic mode" via operator (con‐ BOOL 0
trolled by ModLiOp = 0)
AV Input additional analog value, to be con‐ ANY
nected to AV_Tech of the AV block
AV_AH_Lim Limit high alarm REAL 95.0
AV_AL_Lim Limit low alarm REAL 5.0
AV_Hyst Hysteresis for alarm, warning and toler‐ REAL 1.0
ance limits
AV_TH_Lim Limit high tolerance REAL 85.0
AV_TL_Lim Limit low tolerance REAL 15.0
AV_WH_Lim Limit high warning REAL 90.0
AV_WL_Lim Limit low warning REAL 10.0
BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation BOOL 0
BatchID Batch ID DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name S7-String
BypProt 1 = Bypassing interlock in "local mode" BOOL 0
and in "simulation"
CSF 1 = External error (control system fault) STRUCT -
Error handling (Page 121) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
DvFdOnAut* 1 = Activation of device infeed in "auto‐ STRUCT -
matic mode" ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
DvFdOffAut* 1 = Deactivation of device infeed in "au‐ STRUCT -
tomatic mode" ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
DvFdOnMan* 1 = Activation of device infeed in "man‐ BOOL 0
ual mode"
DvFdOffMan* 1 = Deactivation of device infeed in BOOL 0
"manual mode"
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1
ER_A_DC* Reserved REAL 0.0
ER_A_DG* Reserved REAL 0.0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1220 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

Parameter Description Type Default


ER_AH_En 1 = Activate alarm (high) for setpoint dif‐ BOOL 1
ference monitoring
ER_AH_DFac* Delay factor at the positive setpoint step REAL 0.0
changes for incoming alarms at the error
signal monitoring ER_AH_Lim
ER_AH_Lim Alarm limit (high) for setpoint difference REAL 100.0
monitoring
ER_AH_MsgEn 1 = Activate messages for alarm (high) BOOL 1
for setpoint difference monitoring Mes‐
sages are only output if you have also
enabled the Feature.Bit5 Alarm set‐
point difference (Page 175).
ER_AL_DFac* Delay factor at the negative setpoint step REAL 0.0
changes for incoming alarms at the error
signal monitoring ER_AL_Lim
ER_AL_En 1 = Activate alarm (low) for setpoint dif‐ BOOL 1
ference monitoring
ER_AL_Lim Alarm limit (low) for setpoint difference REAL -100.0
monitoring
ER_AL_MsgEn 1 = Activate messages for alarm (low) BOOL 1
for setpoint difference monitoring Mes‐
sages are only output if you have also
enabled the Feature.Bit5 Alarm set‐
point difference (Page 175).
ER_Hyst Alarm hysteresis for error signal REAL 1.0
EventTsIn For interconnecting data between a tech‐ ANY
nology block and the message blocks
EventTs, Event16Ts.
The EventTsIn input parameter serves
to interconnect the EventTsOut output
parameter of the EventTs,
Event16Ts block. When this intercon‐
nection is configured, the messages of
the EventTs, Event16Ts block are
displayed on the OS in the alarm view of
the technology block and can also be ac‐
knowledged there.
EventTs2In For interconnecting data between a tech‐ ANY
nology block and the message blocks
EventTs, Event16Ts.
The EventTs2In input parameter
serves to interconnect the
EventTsOut output parameter of the
EventTs,Event16Ts block. When this
interconnection is configured, the mes‐
sages of the EventTs, Event16Ts
block are displayed on the OS in the
alarm view of the technology block and
can also be acknowledged there.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1221
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

Parameter Description Type Default


ExtMsg1 Binary input for freely selectable mes‐ STRUCT -
sage 1 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg2 Binary input for freely selectable mes‐ STRUCT -
sage 2 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg3 Binary input for freely selectable mes‐ STRUCT -
sage 3 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtVa104 Associated value 4 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa105 Associated value 5 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa106 Associated value 6 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa107 Associated value 7 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa108 Associated value 8 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
FactGR Gear reducing factor STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 1.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FaultExt 1 = External error STRUCT -
Error handling (Page 121) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FbkFwd 1 = Feedback for forward mode is STRUCT -
present ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
FbkRev 1 = Feedback for reverse mode is STRUCT -
present ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 1203) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
1 = Separate monitoring time for stop‐ ● Bit 13: BOOL ● 0
ping the motor
● Bit 16: BOOL ● 0
1 = Setpoint with own scale and unit of
the parameter ● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
Feature2 I/O for additional functions (Page 1203) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1222 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

Parameter Description Type Default


FwdAut* 1 = Activation of forward motor operation STRUCT -
in "automatic mode" ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FwdChnST Signal status of output channel for Fwd STRUCT -
Should be connected to an output chan‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
nel block ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
FwdForce 1 = Forcing activation of motor forward STRUCT -
mode ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FwdLocal 1 = Activation of forward motor operation STRUCT -
in "local mode" ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FwdMan* 1 = Activation of forward motor operation BOOL 0
in "manual mode"
IdleTime* Wait time for change of direction or re‐ REAL 5.0
start in [s]
Intlock 0 = Interlocking without reset is active; STRUCT -
you can operate the block without reset ● Value: BOOL ● 1
once the interlocking condition has dis‐
appeared ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
1 = Interlock not activated ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
Intl_En 1 = Interlock without reset (interlock, BOOL 1
Intlock parameter) is active
LocalLi 1 = Activate "local mode" via plant signal STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
LocalOp* 1 = "Local mode" via operator BOOL 0
LocalSetting Characteristics of Local mode (Page 80) INT 0
ManModLi* 1 = "Manual mode" via interconnection STRUCT -
or SFC (controlled by ModLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManModOp* 1 = "Manual mode" via OS operator (con‐ BOOL 1
trolled by ModLiOp = 0)
ModLiOp Switchover of operating mode between: STRUCT -
0 = Operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
1 = Interconnection or SFC ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Monitor 1 = Feedback monitoring BOOL 1
MonTiDynamic* Monitoring time for feedback errors or REAL 3.0
feedback start error after successful op‐
eration in [s]
MonTiDyStop* Monitoring time for feedback stop errors REAL 3.0
after successful operation in [s]

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1223
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

Parameter Description Type Default


MonTiStatic* Monitoring time for feedback errors with‐ REAL 3.0
out operation in [s]
MS_RelOp* 1= Release for maintenance via OS op‐ BOOL 0
erator
MsgEvId1 Message number (assigned automati‐ DWORD 16#00000000
cally)
MsgLock 1 = Suppress process messages. STRUCT -
See also the section Suppressing mes‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
sages using the MsgLock parameter ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
(Page 214) for more on this.
Occupied 1 = In use by a batch BOOL 0
OosLi 1 = "Out of service", via interconnection STRUCT -
or SFC (0-1 edge transition) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosOp* 1 = "Out of service", via OS operator BOOL 0
OpSt_In Input parameter for local operator au‐ DWORD 16#00000000
thorization, connected with the Out out‐
put parameter of the upstream block,
OpStations (Page 423)
OS_Perm I/O for operator permissions STRUCT -
(Page 1203) ● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● Bit8: BOOL ● 1
1 = Operator can set or change the mon‐
itoring time for "Control: Start"
● Bit 10: BOOL ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
OS1Perm I/O for operator permissions STRUCT -
(Page 1203) ● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● Bit 9: BOOL ● 1
● Bit 30: BOOL ● 1
1 = Operator can set or change the mon‐
itoring time for "Control: Stop" ● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1

Permit 1 = OS activation enable for motor STRUCT -


0 = No OS release for energizing motor ● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
Perm_En 1 = Activation enable (enable, Permit BOOL 1
parameter) is active
Protect 0 = Protective interlocking is effective; STRUCT -
once the interlocking condition has dis‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 1
appeared, you will have to reset the block
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
1 = Protective interlocking not activated
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1224 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

Parameter Description Type Default


Prot_En 1 = Protective interlock (protection, BOOL 1
Protect parameter) is active
PulseWidth* Pulse width of control signal [s] REAL 3.0
RapidStp* Rapid stop for the motor: BOOL 0
0 = Motor On
1 = Motor Off
Rbk Position feedback for display on OS STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RbkW_DC* Delay time for incoming warnings [s] REAL 0.0
RbkW_DG* Delay time for outgoing warnings [s] REAL 0.0
RbkHyst Hysteresis for warning limits REAL 1.0
RbkOpScale Limit for scale in bar graph of faceplate STRUCT -
● High: REAL ● 100.0
● Low: REAL ● 0.0
RbkUnit Unit of measure for additional analog INT 0
value
RbkWH_En 1 = Enable high warning BOOL 1
RbkWH_Lim Limit high warning REAL 90.0
RbkWH_MsgEn 1 = Enable high warning message BOOL 1
RbkWL_En 1 = Enable low warning BOOL 1
RbkWL_Lim Limit low warning REAL 10.0
RbkWL_MsgEn 1 = Enable low warning message BOOL 1
RevAut* 1 = Activation of reverse motor operation STRUCT -
in "automatic mode" ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RevChnST Signal status of output channel for Rev STRUCT -
Should be connected to an output chan‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
nel block ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
RevForce 1 = Force activation of reverse motor op‐ STRUCT -
eration ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RevLocal 1 = Activation of reverse motor operation STRUCT -
in "local mode" ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RevMan* 1 = Activation of reverse motor operation BOOL 0
in "manual mode"
RstLi* 1 = Reset via interconnection STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RstOp* 1 = Reset via operator BOOL 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1225
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

Parameter Description Type Default


RunUpCyc Number of cycles in startup; messages INT 3
are suppressed during these cycles
SampleTime Sampling time [s] (assigned automatical‐ REAL 0.1
ly)
SelFp1 Call a block saved in this parameter as ANY
an additional faceplate (Page 217) in the
standard view
SelFp2 Call a block saved in this parameter as ANY
an additional faceplate (Page 217) in the
preview
SimAV* Additional value used for SimOn = 1 REAL 0.0
SimAV_Li Additional analog value that is used for STRUCT -
SimOnLi.Value = 1 ● Value: REAL ● 0
(SimLiOp.Value = 1)
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SimOn* 1 = Simulation on BOOL 0
SimLiOp Activation/deactivation of the simulation STRUCT -
by: ● Value: BOOL ● 0
0 = Operator ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
1 = Interconnection or SFC
SimOnLi 1 = Simulation via interconnection or STRUCT -
SFC (controlled by SimLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SimRbk* Position feedback used for SimOn = 1 REAL 0.0
SimRbkLi Position feedback used for STRUCT -
SimOnLi.Value = 1 ● Value: REAL ● 0
(SimLiOp.Value = 1)
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_DnRaLim* Limit (low) for the gradient of the setpoint REAL 100.0
[Unit/(Time unit)]
Time unit depends on TimeFactor
SP_Ext external setpoint - (to interconnection) STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExtLi 1 = Select external setpoint (via intercon‐ STRUCT -
nection) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExtOp* 1 = Select external setpoint (via operator) BOOL 0
SP_HiLim Limit (high) of setpoint REAL 100.0
SP_LoLim* Limit (low) of setpoint; if REAL 0.0
Feature2.Bit7 = 1 then SP_LoLim is
limited and written back to SP_Off.
SP_Int* Internal setpoint for operation REAL 1.0
SP_IntLi 1 = Select internal setpoint (via intercon‐ STRUCT -
nection) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1226 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

Parameter Description Type Default


SP_IntOp* 1 = Select internal setpoint (via operator) BOOL 1
SP_LiDnRaLim Linkable limit (low) for the gradient of the REAL 100.0
setpoint [Unit/(Time unit)]
Time unit depends on TimeFactor
SP_LiOp Select setpoint source (internal/exter‐ STRUCT -
nal): ● Value: BOOL ● 0
1 = Via interconnection ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
0 = Via operator
SP_LiRmpTime Linkable time [Time unit] for gradient lim‐ REAL 0.0
itation in ramp mode duration
Time unit depends on TimeFactor
SP_LiUpRaLim Linkable gradient limit (high) for the set‐ REAL 100.0
point [Unit/(Time unit)]
Time unit depends on TimeFactor
SP_Off Setpoint if the motor is off REAL 0.0
SP_OpScale SP bar limit display for OS ScaVal
SP_OutChnST Signal status of output channel SP_Out STRUCT -
Should be connected to an output chan‐ ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
nel block ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
SP_RateOn* 1 = Activate limitation of setpoint gradi‐ BOOL 0
ents
SP_RmpModTime 1 = Use time values (SP_RmpTime, BOOL 0
SP_LiRmpTime)
0 = Use gradient limits (SP_DnRaLim,
SP_LiDnRaLim, SP_UpRaLim,
SP_LiUpRaLim)
SP_RmpOn* 1 = Activate setpoint ramp to target set‐ BOOL 0
point SP_RmpTarget
SP_RmpTarget* Target setpoint for setpoint ramp REAL 0.0
SP_RmpTime* Time [Time unit] for setpoint ramp from REAL 0.0
current SP up to SP_RmpTarget or time
[Time unit] for gradient limitation in ramp
mode duration
Time unit depends on TimeFactor
SP_TrkExt 1 = Bumpless switchover from external BOOL 0
to internal setpoint active
SP_Unit Operator inputs INT 0
SP_UpRaLim* Gradient limit (high) for the setpoint REAL 100.0
[Unit/(Time unit)] Time unit depends on
TimeFactor
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
StopAut* 1 = Stopping the motor in "automatic STRUCT -
mode" ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1227
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

Parameter Description Type Default


StopForce 1 = Force motor stop STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
StopLocal 1 = Stopping the motor in "local mode" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
StopMan* 1 = Stopping the motor in "manual mode" BOOL 0
TimeFactor Time unit: INT 0
0 = Seconds
1 = Minutes
2 = Hours
Trip 1 = Motor is in "good" state STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
UserAna1 Analog auxiliary value 1 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
UA1unit Unit of measure for analog auxiliary val‐ INT 0
ue 1
UserAna2 Analog auxiliary value 2 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
UA2unit Unit of measure for analog auxiliary val‐ INT 0
ue 2
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use in PCS 7 BYTE 16#00
OS
WarnTiAut* Prewarning of motor start in "automatic REAL 0.0
mode" in [s]
WarnTiMan* Prewarning of motor start in "manual REAL 0.0
mode" in [s]

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AutAct 1 = "Automatic mode" enabled STRUCT -
0 = "Manual mode" is enabled ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AutoST 1 = Worst signal status of automatic com‐ BYTE 16#80
mands

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1228 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

Parameter Description Type Default


AV_OpScale Limit for scale in AV bar graph of face‐ STRUCT -
plate ● High: REAL ● 100.0
● Low: REAL ● 0.0
AV_Out Output additional analog value STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AV_Unit Unit of measure for additional analog val‐ INT 0
ue
DvFdAct 1 = Device infeed enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CurrMon Remaining monitoring time [s] DINT 0
ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without BOOL 0
errors
ER Error signal STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ER_A_DCOut Effective delay time [s] for incoming REAL 0.0
alarms at the error signal monitoring
ER_AH_Act 1 = Alarm limit (high) for control deviation STRUCT -
violated. ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ER_AL_Act 1 = Alarm limit (low) for control deviation STRUCT -
violated. ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ErrorNum Output of pending error number. For er‐ INT -1
ror numbers that can be output by this
block, see MotSpdCL error handling
(Page 1215)
FbkFwdOut Feedback: STRUCT -
1 = Forward operation active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FbkRevOut Feedback: STRUCT -
1 = Reverse operation active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Fwd 1 = Control of motor forward STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
GrpErr 1 = Group error pending STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1229
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

Parameter Description Type Default


LocalAct 1 = "Local mode" enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
LockAct 1 = Interlock (Intlock, Permit, STRUCT -
Protect) or Trip is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManAct 1 = "Manual mode" enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MonDynErr 1 = Feedback error or feedback start er‐ STRUCT -
ror due to control change ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MonDynStopErr 1 = Feedback stop error due to control STRUCT -
change ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MonStaErr 1 = Feedback error due to unexpected STRUCT -
feedback change ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MS_Release Release for maintenance: STRUCT -
1 = Release for OS operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MsgAckn1 Message acknowledgement status 1 WORD 16#0000
(output ACK_STATE of first ALARM_8P)
MsgErr1 Alarm error 1 (output ERROR of first BOOL 0
ALARM_8P)
MsgStat1 Message status 1 (output STATUS of first WORD 16#0000
ALARM_8P)
OosAct 1 = Block is "out of service" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpSt_Out Value of the OpSt_In input parameter, DWORD 16#00000000
for feedforwarding to other blocks. Bit 31
of this parameter is used by
Feature.Bit24
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with settings DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
changed by the block algorithm
OS1PermOut Display of OS1Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS1PermLog Display of OS1Perm with settings DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
changed by the block algorithm
P_Fwd 1 = Pulse signal for starting the motor in STRUCT -
forward ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1230 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

Parameter Description Type Default


P_Rev 1 = Pulse signal for starting the motor in STRUCT -
reverse ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
P_Rst 1= Pulse output for reset STRUCT -
The parameter persists for one cycle af‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
ter a reset. ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
P_Stop 0 = Pulse signal for stopping the motor STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
R_StpAct 1 = Rapid stop of the motor is active STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RbkOut Output of readback value STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RbkWH_Act 1 = Warning (high) enabled. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐
olation (Page 174)).
RbkWL_Act 1 = Warning (low) enabled. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐
olation (Page 174)).
RdyToReset 1 = Ready for reset via RstLi input or STRUCT -
commands in "local", "automatic", or ● Value: BOOL ● 0
"manual mode"
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RdyToStart 1 = Active start readiness STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Rev 1 = Control of motor: Reverse STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RunFwd 1 = Motor is running forwards STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RunRev 1 = Motor is running in reverse STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1231
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

Parameter Description Type Default


SP_DnRaAct 1 = Negative gradient limiting of setpoint STRUCT -
is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExtAct 1 = External setpoint is active STRUCT -
0 = Internal setpoint is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_HiAct 1 = Limit (high) for setpoint has been STRUCT -
reached ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_LoAct 1 = Limit (low) for setpoint has been STRUCT -
reached ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_Out Setpoint used by controller STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_Out2 Additional setpoint, without gear reduc‐ STRUCT -
ing factor ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_RateTarget Target setpoint for the gradient limitation REAL 0.0
SP_UpRaAct 1 = Positive gradient limiting of setpoint STRUCT -
is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_RemRT Remaining ramp time of the setpoint REAL 0.0
Starting 1 = Motor will start STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Status1 Status word 1 (Page 1196) DWORD 16#00000000
Status2 Status word 2 (Page 1196) DWORD 16#00000000
Status3 Status word 3 (Page 1196) DWORD 16#00000000
Status4 Status word 4 (Page 1196) DWORD 16#00000000
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
Stop 1 = Motor is stopping STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Stopping 1 = Motor will stop STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
WarnAct 1 = Prewarning for motor start active (pa‐ STRUCT -
rameters WarnTiAut and WarnTiMan) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1232 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

See also
MotSpdCL block diagram (Page 1233)
MotSpdCL messaging (Page 1218)
MotSpdCL modes (Page 1201)
Setpoint specification with separate display area and custom unit (Page 175)
Error handling (Page 121)

7.5.7 MotSpdCL block diagram

MotSpdCL block diagram


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

See also
MotSpdCL I/Os (Page 1220)
MotSpdCL messaging (Page 1218)
MotSpdCL error handling (Page 1215)
MotSpdCL functions (Page 1203)
MotSpdCL modes (Page 1201)
Description of MotSpdCL (Page 1196)

7.5.8 Operator control and monitoring

7.5.8.1 MotSpdCL views

Views of the MotSpdCL block


The block MotSpdCL provides the following views:
● MotSpdCL standard view (Page 1234)
● Alarm view (Page 313)
● Limit view of motors (Page 305)
● MotSpdCL limit view for readback values (Page 1243)
● Trend view (Page 317)
● Ramp view (Page 311)
● MotSpdCL parameter view (Page 1245)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1233
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

● MotSpdCL preview (Page 1240)


● Memo view (Page 315)
● Batch view (Page 313)
● Block icon for MotSpdCL (Page 1248)
Refer to the sections Structure of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure
(Page 239) for general information on the faceplate and block icon.

7.5.8.2 MotSpdCL standard view

MotSpdCL standard view


 

 
 
 











 
 
 


Feature.Bit16 = 0: Setpoint and readback value have the same area of the readback value

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1234 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor


 
 
 
 

  


 



 

 
 
 


Feature.Bit16 = 1: Setpoint and readback value have separate areas

(1) Displaying and switching the operating mode


This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
● Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76)
● Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76)
● Local mode (Page 80)
● Out of service (Page 72)
See also the section Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) for
information on switching the operating mode.

(2) Separate switching on/off of the device infeed or the inverter enable
This area shows you the default operating state for the device infeed or the inverter enable.
The following states can be shown and executed here:
● "On"
● "Off"
If the inverter enable is parameterized (Feature.Bit15 = 1 and Feature.Bit8 = 1), the
text "Device infeed" is replaced by "Inverter enable".
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for information
on changing the state.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1235
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

If text is configured for these commands, it is displayed as status text and as button labels for
command selection. You can find additional information on this in the section Labeling of
buttons and text (Page 218).

(3) Starting and stopping the motor


This area shows you the default operating state for the variable motor. The following states
can be shown and executed here:
● "Start |→"
● "Start ←|"
● "Stop"
● "Rapid stop"
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for information
on changing the state.
If text is configured for these commands, it is displayed as status text and as button labels for
command selection. You can find more information about this in section Labeling of buttons
and text (Page 218)

(4) Switching the setpoint internal/external


This area shows how to specify the setpoint. The setpoint can be specified as follows:
● By the application ("External", CFC/SFC)
● By the user directly in the faceplate ("Internal").
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for information
on switching the setpoint specification.
You can find additional information on this in the section Setpoint specification - internal/
external (Page 130).

(5) Resetting the block


Click "Reset" for interlocks or errors. You can find additional information on this in the section
Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors (Page 43).

(6) Operating range for the interlock functions of the block


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
You can use this button to control the interlock functions of the block. You can find additional
information on this in the section Interlocking functions (Page 101).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1236 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

The following is displayed in addition to the buttons:


● Interlock status (see Forming the group status for interlock information (Page 106)), e.g.:

● Signal status (see Forming and outputting the signal status for technologic blocks
(Page 110)), e.g.:

● Bypass information (see Forming the group status for interlock information (Page 106)):

(7) High and low scale range for the setpoint


This area is already set and cannot be changed.

(8) Display and change the setpoint including signal status


This area shows the current setpoint with the corresponding signal status.
Refer to the Changing values (Page 270) section for information on changing the setpoint. The
setpoint specification also needs to be set to "Internal" for this block.

(9) Displaying the readback value


This area shows you the current readback value with the corresponding signal status.

(10) and (11) Display of auxiliary values


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
You can use this area to display two auxiliary values that have been configured in the
engineering system (ES). You can find additional information on this in the section Displaying
auxiliary values (Page 220).

(12) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
Use this navigation button to open the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system (ES). The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the
engineering system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in the section Opening additional faceplates
(Page 217).

(13) Displaying the limits


These triangles show the SP_HiLim and SP_LoLim setpoint limits configured in the
engineering system (ES).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1237
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

(14) Bar graph for the readback value


This area shows you the current readback value in the form of a bar graph. The visible area
in the bar graph depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).

(15) Bar graph for the setpoint


This area shows the current setpoint in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in the bar
graph depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).

(16) Display of external setpoint


This display [E] is only visible when you have selected "Internal" setpoint specification. It shows
the external setpoint that would apply if you were to change the setpoint specification to
"external".

(17) Display for the target setpoint of the setpoint ramp


This display [R] shows the target setpoint and is only visible if you have enabled ramp
generation in the Ramp view (Page 311).

(18) Limit display


These colored triangles show you the configured limits in the respective bar graph.

(19) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Maintenance"
Additional information on this topic is available in sections Release for maintenance
(Page 65) Display area for block states.

(20) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Simulation"
● "Delay"
You will find more detailed information on this in the sections Simulating signals (Page 59) and
Display of delay times (Page 267).

(21) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Motor protection"
● "External error"

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1238 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

● "Status error"
● "Control error"
● "Invalid signal"
● "Changeover error"
Additional information on these errors is available in the sections Monitoring the feedbacks
(Page 98) , Error handling (Page 121) (section "Invalid input signals" and "Mode switchover
error") and Motor protection function (Page 100).

(22) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Forced stop"
● "Forced start |→"
● "Forced start ←|"
● "Request 0/1": A reset to "automatic mode" is expected.
● "SP ramp active"
You can find additional information on this in the section Forcing operating modes (Page 41).

(23) Automatic preview


This display is only visible in "manual mode", in "local mode", or with a reset request in
"automatic mode", when the current output signals are not identical to the control in "automatic
mode".
The display shows what state the motor would assume if you switched from "manual" or "local"
mode to "automatic mode", or performed a reset to "automatic mode".

(24) Status display of the motor


The current status of the motor is graphically displayed here.
You can find more information about this in section Block icon for MotSpdCL (Page 1248)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1239
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

7.5.8.3 MotSpdCL preview

Preview of MotSpdCL

(1) Automatic preview


This area shows you the block status after it has switched from the "Manual" mode or "Local"
mode to the "Automatic" mode.
If the block is in "Automatic" mode, the current block state is displayed.
This area also displays the worst signal status of the following automatic commands:
● FwdAut
● RevAut
● StopAut
● SP_Ext

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1240 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

(2) Preview area


This area shows you a preview of the following values:
● "Rem. time SP ramp" : Remaining time to reach the ramp target value.
● "Channel Setpoint": Setpoint from the output channel block.
● "Monitoring time": Display of the remaining monitoring time.

(3) Enable operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Icons for enabled operation:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)
The following enabled operations are shown here:
● "Stop": You can stop the motor.
If text is configured for this command, it is also displayed in brackets. You can find additional
information on this in the section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218)
● "Start |→ ": You can start the motor.
If text is configured for this command, it is also displayed in brackets. You can find additional
information on this in the section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218) .
● "Start ←|": You can start the motor.
If text is configured for this command, it is also displayed in brackets. You can find additional
information on this in the section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218) .
● "Reset": You can reset the motor after interlocks or errors.
● "SP external": You can feedforward the external setpoint.
● "SP internal": You can feedforward the internal setpoint.
● "Change SP": You can change the setpoint.
● "Automatic": You can switch to "automatic mode".
● "Manual": You can switch to "manual mode".
● "Local": You can switch to "local mode".
● "Out of service": You can switch to "Out of service" operating mode.
● "Local operator permission": Use the ← button to switch to the standard view of the
OpStations block. You can find additional information on this in the section Operator control
permissions (Page 265) .
● "Device infeed On": You can activate the device infeed
● "Device infeed Off": You can deactivate the device infeed

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1241
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

(4) Displaying current control signals


This area shows the most important parameters for this block with the current selection:
● "Permission":
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = No OS release for energizing motor
– 1 = Enable for "opening"/"closing" from the neutral position
● "Protection":
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Protective interlocking is effective; once the interlocking condition has disappeared,
you will have to reset the block
– 1 = "Good" state
● "Interlock":
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Interlocking without reset is active; you can operate the block without reset once the
interlocking condition has disappeared
– 1 = "Good" state
● "Local correct": 1 = Control signal for "Local mode" (LocalLi) is active
● "Motor protection": 1 = Motor is in "good" state
● "Interlock deact.":
– 0 = Bypass disabled
– 1 = Bypassing interlock in "local mode" and in "simulation"
● "Local stop": 1= Block is operated in "local mode"
● "Local start |→": 1= Block is operated in a controlled manner in "local mode"
● "Local start ←|": 1= Block is operated in a controlled manner in "local mode"
● "Feedback |→": 1 = Motor has started and is running
● Feedback←|: 1 = Motor has started and is running
● "Stop": 1 = Stop motor
● "Start | →" 1 = Start motor
● "Start ←|": 1 = Start motor
● "Device infeed": 1 = Enable device infeed
● "Channel Start →":Signal from the output channel block for "Start"
● "Channel Start ←":Signal from the output channel block for "Start"

(5) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1242 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

Use this navigation button to open the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system. The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the engineering
system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in the section Opening additional faceplates
(Page 217) .

7.5.8.4 MotSpdCL limit view for readback values

Limit view for readback values of MotSpdCL


Several values are set in this view by default:
● Readback value limits
The toolbars of the faceplate and the block icon indicate when the limits are reached or violated.

 

(1) Displaying and changing the limits for the readback value
In this area, you can enter the limits for the readback value. Refer to the Changing values
(Page 270) section for more on this.
You can change the following limits:
● "H warning": Warning high
● "Hysteresis"
● "L warning": Warning low

(2) Displaying and changing the limits for the setpoint difference
In this area, you can enter the limits for the setpoint difference. Refer to the Changing values
(Page 270) section for more on this.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1243
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

You can change the following limits:


● "H alarm": Alarm high
● "Hysteresis"
● "L alarm": Alarm low

(3) Enabled operation


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Icons for enabled operation:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)

(4) "Message suppression/delay"


Message suppression indicates whether or not the suppression of the associated message in
the AS block is activated with the xx_MsgEn parameter. The output of messages is not
suppressed when the block is installed (all xx_MsgEn parameters are preset to 1). Messages
can only be output if limit monitoring of the additional analog value has been enabled.
Alarm delays are also displayed in this position; for more on this see section Area of application
of the alarm delays (Page 208).

(5) Suppress messages


You can enable / disable messages by setting the check mark.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1244 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

7.5.8.5 MotSpdCL parameter view

Parameter view of MotSpdCL

Parameter view of MotSpdCL with Feature.Bit13 = 0

Parameter view of MotSpdCL with Feature.Bit13 = 1

(1) Monitoring
In this area, you change parameters and therefore influence the motor. Refer to the Changing
values (Page 270) section for more on this.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1245
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

You can influence the following parameters:


● Feature bit 13 = 0
– "Control": Monitoring time during startup and shutdown of the motor (dynamic)
● Feature bit 13 = 1
– "Control stop": Monitoring time during shutdown of the motor (dynamic)
– "Control start": Monitoring time during startup of the motor (dynamic)
"Status" monitoring
You can monitor time during permanent operation of the motor (static).

Enable monitoring
You can enable monitoring by selecting the check box (☑)
You can find additional information on this in the section Monitoring the feedbacks (Page 98).

Activating bumpless switchover


"SP := SP external": ☑ Bumpless switchover of setpoint from external to internal. The internal
setpoint is tracked to the external one.

(2) Service
You can select the following functions in this area:
● Simulation
● Release for maintenance
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for more on
this.
You can find information on this area in the section:
● Simulating signals (Page 59)
● Release for maintenance (Page 65)

(3) Enabled operation


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Icons for enabled operation:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1246 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

(4) Delay factor


In this area, you can change the following parameters:
● "ER H alarm": Delay factor at the positive setpoint step changes for incoming alarms at the
control deviation monitoring ER_AH_Lim.
● "ER L alarm": Delay factor at the negative setpoint step changes for incoming alarms at the
control deviation monitoring ER_AL_Lim.

7.5.8.6 MotSpdCL trend view

Trend view of MotSpdCL


You can find general information in section Trend view (Page 317).
Depending on Feature.Bit16 (process value with separate scale range) either one or two
value axes are shown in the trend view.

● Process value with separate scale range

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1247
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

● Process value without separate scale range

Note
This function only has an effect when SP_Out is configured in "TrendConfiguration1" and
PV_In is configured in "TrendConfiguration2" in the block icon (default).

7.5.8.7 Block icon for MotSpdCL

Block icons for MotSpdCL


A variety of block icons are available with the following functions:
● Process tag type
● Limits (high/low)
● Violation of alarm, warning, and tolerance limits as well as control system faults
● Operating modes
● Internal and external setpoint specification
● Signal status, release for maintenance
● Displays for bypassing interlocks
● Interlocks
● Memo display
● Motor state display

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1248 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

● Setpoint (blue, with decimal places)


● Feedback value (green, with decimal places)

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV8.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special features


1

3 Direction display inverted to sym‐


bol 1

4 Direction display inverted to sym‐


bol 2

5 "M" symbol with small direction


display

6 "M" symbol with small direction


display

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV7.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special features


1 Block icon in the full display

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1249
Motor and valve blocks
7.5 MotSpdCL - Controllable reversible motor

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special features


5

- Block icon in "Out of service"


mode (example with type 1 block
icon)

Additional information on the block icon and the control options in the block icon is available
in the following chapters:
● Configuring the block icons (Page 246)
● Block icon structure (Page 239)
● Operation via the block icon (Page 248)

Motor state display


The following motor states are shown here:

Icon Meaning
Motor started (motor symbol changes)

The motor is running

Motor stopped (motor symbol changes)

Motor idle

Error at motor (monitoring error, Motor protection)

Motor out of service

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1250 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.6 MotSpdL - Two-speed motor

7.6 MotSpdL - Two-speed motor

7.6.1 Description of MotSpdL

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1856
Family: Drives

Area of application for MotSpdL


The block is used for the following applications:
● Control of two-speed motors

How it works
The block is used to control motors with two speeds. Various inputs are available for controlling
the motor. You can add monitoring of a maximum of two feedbacks produced by the contactor
relay and a switching mode with which the speed change can be performed.

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB3x). The block is also installed
automatically in the startup OB (OB100).
Further addressing is not required.
For the MotSpdL block, the Advanced Process Library contains a template for process tag
types as an example with an application scenario for this block.
Example of process tag types:
● Two-speed motor (Motor2Speed) (Page 2426)

Startup characteristics
Use the Feature Bit Set startup characteristics (Page 141) to define the startup characteristics
of this block.
The messages are suppressed after startup for the number of cycles set at RunUpCyc.

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


You can find a description for each parameter in section MotSpdL I/Os (Page 1268).

Status bit Parameter


0 Occupied
1 BatchEn

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1251
Motor and valve blocks
7.6 MotSpdL - Two-speed motor

Status bit Parameter


2 SimOn
3 OosAct.Value
4 OosLi.Value
5 0 = ManAct.Value
1 = AutoAct.Value
6 LocalAct.Value
7 0: Open padlock in the block icon
1: Closed padlock in the block icon

In case of Feature2.Bit16 = 1 then a closed padlock is displayed if Interlock


Open OR Interlock Close is active.
8 Spd1.Value
9 Motor is stopped
10 Spd2.Value
11 MonStaErr.Value
12 MonDynErr.Value
13 BypProt
14 Invalid signal status
15 Mode switchover error
16 1 = Intlock is active
17 1 = Permit is active
18 1 = Protect is active
19 Trip.Value
20 Display „Forced speed1“
21 Display „Forced stop“
22 Display „Forced speed2“
23 "Interlock" button is enabled
24 Reset request in automatic preview
25 WarnAct:Value,
IdleTime or
SwOverTi active
26 Bypass information
27 Automatic preview for (Speed1)
28 Automatic preview for (Stop)
29 Automatic preview for (Speed2)
30 "Permission" button is enabled
31 "Protection" button is enabled

Status word allocation for Status2 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 MsgLock
1 AV_AH_Act.Value

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1252 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.6 MotSpdL - Two-speed motor

Status bit Parameter


2 AV_WH_Act.Value
3 AV_TH_Act.Value
4 AV_TL_Act.Value
5 AV_WL_Act.Value
6 AV_AL_Act.Value
7 AV_AH_En OR Feature.Bit23
8 AV_WH_En OR Feature.Bit23
9 AV_TH_En OR Feature.Bit23
10 AV_TL_En OR Feature.Bit23
11 AV_WL_En OR Feature.Bit23
12 AV_AL_En OR Feature.Bit23
13 AV_AH_MsgEn
14 AV_WH_MsgEn
15 AV_TH_MsgEn
16 AV_TL_MsgEn
17 AV_WL_MsgEn
18 AV_AL_MsgEn
19 1 = No impact of input signals on "local mode" with LocalSetting = 2 and
LocalSetting = 4
20 Motor is stopped
21 Motor stops at speed 1
22 Motor stops at speed 2
23 Motor starts at speed 1
24 Motor running at speed 1
25 Motor starts at speed 2
26 Motor running at speed 2
27 Error when stopping motor
28 Error with motor speed 1
29 Error with motor speed 2
30 Display for interlocks in block icon
31 MS_RelOp

Status word allocation for Status3 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 Delay of the AV_AH_Lim message
1 Delay of the AV_WH_Lim message
2 Delay of the AV_TH_Lim message
3 Delay of the AV_TL_Lim message
4 Delay of the AV_WL_Lim message
5 Delay of the AV_AL_Lim message
6 Collection of message delays

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1253
Motor and valve blocks
7.6 MotSpdL - Two-speed motor

Status bit Parameter


7 - 14 Not used
15 Current monitoring time is visible
16 MonDynStopErr.Value
17 Not used
18 SimLiOp.Value
19 1 = Enable for rapid stop (Feature Bit Enabling rapid stop via faceplate
(Page 172))
20 1 = Input parameter Spd1ChnST is interconnected
21 1 = Input parameter Spd2ChnST is interconnected
22 Not used
23 Command for rapid stop
24 Command for starting > the motor
25 Command for starting >> the motor
26 Show automatic preview in the standard view
27 Not used
28 GrpErr.Value
29 RdyToStart.Value
30 Auxiliary value 1 visible
31 Auxiliary value 2 visible

Status word allocation for Status4 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 Effective signal 1 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
1 Effective signal 2 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
2 Effective signal 3 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
3 Effective signal 4 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
4 Effective signal 5 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
5 Effective signal 6 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
6 Effective signal 7 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
7 Effective signal 8 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
8 AV not connected
9 Motor protection display (Trip.Status ≠ 16#FF)
10 1 = Input parameter FbkSpd1 is connected
11 1 = Input parameter FbkSpd2 is connected
12 - 21 Not used
22 External error generated by FaultExt or external control system fault CSF with set
Feature.Bit18 Activating error state for external process control error CSF
(Page 154)
23 Hidden bypass signal in Permit
24 Hidden bypass signal in interlock
25 Hidden bypass signal in Protect
26 Feature2.Bit2: Separate bypass signal

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1254 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.6 MotSpdL - Two-speed motor

Status bit Parameter


27 Feature2.Bit16: Separate interlock for each direction, speed or position
28 Hidden bypass signal in Permit Close
29 Hidden bypass signal in Interlock Close
30 Hidden bypass signal in Protect Close
31 Separate monitoring of shutdown of the motor (Feature.Bit13)

Status word allocation for Status5 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0-7 Effective signal 9..16 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
8 - 15 Not used
16 "Permission Open" button is enabled
17 "Permission Close" button is enabled
18 "Interlock Open" button is enabled
19 "Interlock Close" button is enabled
20 "Protect Open" button is enabled
21 "Protect Close" button is enabled
22 1 = Permission Close is active
23 1 = Intlock Close is active
24 1 = Protect Close is active
25-31 Not used

See also
MotSpdL functions (Page 1257)
MotSpdL messaging (Page 1267)
MotSpdL block diagram (Page 1277)
MotSpdL error handling (Page 1265)
MotSpdL modes (Page 1255)

7.6.2 MotSpdL modes

MotSpdL modes
The block can be operated using the following modes:
● Local mode (Page 80)
● Automatic mode (Page 76)
● Manual mode (Page 76)
● Out of service (Page 72)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1255
Motor and valve blocks
7.6 MotSpdL - Two-speed motor

The next section provides additional block-specific information relating to the general
descriptions. This includes, for example, the parameters for mode changes.

"Local mode"
You can find general information on "Local mode", switching modes and Bumpless switchover
in the Local mode (Page 80) section.
Motor actions you can control in local mode:
● starting with speed 1 (Spd1Local = 1)
● starting with speed 2 (Spd2Local = 1)
● stopping (StopLocal = 1).
A motor operated in "local" mode is controlled either by "local" signals (input parameters
Spd1Local = 1, Spd2Local = 1 and StopLocal = 1) or feedback signals (input parameters
FbkSpd1 = 1 and FbkSpd2 = 1). Configuration takes place via the input parameter
LocalSetting.

"Automatic mode"
You can find general information on "Automatic mode", switching modes and Bumpless
switchover in the Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76) section.
Motor actions you can control in auto mode:
● starting with speed 1 (Spd1Aut = 1)
● starting with speed 2 (Spd2Aut = 1)
● stopping (StopAut = 1).

"Manual mode"
You can find general information on "Manual mode", switching modes and bumpless
switchover in the section Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers
(Page 76).
Motor actions you can control in "manual mode":
● starting with speed 1 (Spd1Man = 1)
● starting with speed 2 (Spd2Man = 1)
● stopping (StopMan = 1).

"Out of service"
You can find general information about the "Out of service" mode in the section Out of
service (Page 72).
With Feature2.Bit1 =1 the following output parameter become the status of simulation
16#60, if mode is changed to "Out of service".

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1256 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.6 MotSpdL - Two-speed motor

With Feature2.Bit1 =0 the following output parameter become the status of 16#80, if mode
is changed to "Out of service".
● FbkSpd1Out.ST
● FbkSpd2Out.ST
● RunSpd1.ST
● RunSpd2.ST
● Stop.ST
● Starting.ST
● Stoping.ST
● AV_Out.ST

See also
MotSpdL block diagram (Page 1277)
MotSpdL I/Os (Page 1268)
MotSpdL messaging (Page 1267)
MotSpdL error handling (Page 1265)
MotSpdL functions (Page 1257)
Description of MotSpdL (Page 1251)

7.6.3 MotSpdL functions

Functions of MotSpdL
The functions for this block are listed below.

Opening additional faceplates


This block provides the standard function Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

Operator permissions
This block provides the standard function Operator control permissions (Page 265).
The block has the following permissions for the OS_Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 1 = Operator can switch to "automatic mode"
1 1 = Operator can switch to "manual mode"
2 1 = Operator can switch to "local mode"
3 1 = Operator can switch to "Out of service" mode

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1257
Motor and valve blocks
7.6 MotSpdL - Two-speed motor

Bit Function
4 1 = Operator can stop the motor
5 1 = Operator can start the motor at speed 1
6 1 = Operator can start the motor at speed 2
7 1 = Operator can reset the motor
8 1 = Operator can define or change the monitoring time for startup
9 1 = Operator can define the monitoring time for the status
10 1 = Operator can activate the monitoring time function (Bit 8 - 9)
11 1 = Operator can activate the Simulation function
12 1 = Operator can activate the Release for maintenance function
13 1 = Operator can change the limit (AV) for high alarm
14 1 = Operator can change the limit (AV) for high warning
15 1 = Operator can change the limit (AV) for high tolerance
16 1 = Operator can change the limit (AV) for hysteresis
17 1 = Operator can change the limit (AV) for low alarm
18 1 = Operator can change the limit (AV) for low warning
19 1 = Operator can change the limit (AV) for low tolerance
20 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via AV_AH_MsgEn
21 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via AV_WH_MsgEn
22 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via AV_TH_MsgEn
23 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via AV_TL_MsgEn
24 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via AV_WL_MsgEn
25 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via AV_AL_MsgEn
26 1 = Operator can change the simulation value SimAV
27 - 29 Not used
30 1 = Operator can define the monitoring time for stopping
31 1 = Operator can execute the rapid stop

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Restart lock after switching off the motor


After switching off or stopping the motor, it can only be restarted after the time set with the
IdleTime input parameter. When the "Stop" command is given, the motor goes immediately
into "Stop" mode, and IdleTime starts after the feedback (FbkSpd1 and FbkSpd2 = 0) is
given. The motor cannot be started again until the IdleTime has expired.
The IdleTime parameter can be set independently of the MonTiDynamic parameter.

Limit monitoring of an additional analog value


This block provides the standard function Limit monitoring of an additional analog value
(Page 92).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1258 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.6 MotSpdL - Two-speed motor

Limit monitoring with hysteresis


This block provides the standard function Limit monitoring with hysteresis (Page 98).

Suppressing messages using the MsgLock parameter


This block provides the standard function Suppressing messages using the MsgLock
parameter (Page 214).

Interlocks
This block provides the following interlocks:
Feature2.Bit16 = 0:
● Activation enable
● Interlock without reset ("Interlock")
● Interlock with reset ("Protection")
Feature2.Bit16 = 1:
● Activation enable speed1
● Activation enable speed2
● Interlock speed1 without reset ("Interlock speed1")
● Interlock speed2 without reset ("Interlock speed2")
● Interlock open with reset ("Protection interlock speed1")
● Interlock close with reset ("Protection interlock speed2")

Refer to the section Interlocks (Page 101) as well as Influence of the signal status on the
interlock (Page 105).

Motor protection function


This block provides the standard function Motor protection function (Page 100).

Rapid stop for motors


This block provides the standard function Rapid stop for motors (Page 108).

Disabling interlocks
This block provides the standard function Disabling interlocks (Page 104).

Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors


This block provides the standard function Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors
(Page 43).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1259
Motor and valve blocks
7.6 MotSpdL - Two-speed motor

External error (FaultExt), external control system fault (CSF)


This block provides the possibility to pass an external error via the FaultExt parameter or
an external control system fault via the CSF parameter. See MotSpdL error handling
(Page 1265).

Group error
This block provides the standard function Outputting group errors (Page 124).
The following parameters are taken into consideration when forming the group error:
● CSF
● Trip
● MonDynErr
● MonStaErr
● FaultExt

Outputting a signal for start readiness


This block provides the standard function Outputting a signal for start readiness (Page 54).

Forming the group status for interlocks


This block provides the standard function Forming the group status for interlock information
(Page 106).

Forming the signal status for blocks


This block provides the standard function Forming and outputting the signal status for
technologic blocks (Page 110).
The worst signal status ST_Worst for the block is formed from the following parameters:
● FbkSpd1Out.ST
● FbkSpd2Out.ST
● LocalLi.ST
● Spd1Local.ST
● StopLocal.ST
● Spd2Local.ST
● Trip.ST
● AV_Out.ST
● Spd1Chn.ST
● Spd2Chn.ST
● Spd1Aut.ST (only if Feature2.Bit10 = 1)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1260 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.6 MotSpdL - Two-speed motor

● Spd2Aut.ST (only if Feature2.Bit10 = 1)


● StopAut.ST (only if Feature2.Bit10 = 1)

Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values


If the Feature2 bit Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values
(Page 190) is set to 1 and one of the following parameters has bad signal status (16#00 or
16#28), the block goes to the neutral position (motor stop) in the "Automatic" mode:
● Spd1Aut.ST
● Spd2Aut.ST
● StopAut.ST

Forcing operating modes


This block provides the standard function Forcing operating modes (Page 41).
The following states can be enforced:
● Speed 1 (Spd1Force)
● Speed 2 (Spd2Force)
● Stop (StopForce)

Feedback monitoring
This block provides the standard function Monitoring the feedbacks (Page 98).

Release for maintenance


This block provides the standard function Release for maintenance (Page 65).

Specify warning times for control functions


This block provides the standard function Specifying warning times for control functions at
motors and valves (Page 51).
You can generate warning signals when, for example, motors are started. Warning signals can
be generated in the following modes:
● Manual mode (Page 76) (WarnTiMan input parameter)
● Automatic mode (Page 76) (WarnTiAut input parameter)
You specify the warning times in seconds using the input parameters WarnTiMan and
WarnTiAut. If, for example, a motor is started, then this is displayed at the output parameter
with WarnAct = 1. The motor then starts after the set warning time has expired and
WarnAct then goes back to 0.
A corresponding warning is not output if the warning times (WarnTiMan or WarnTiAut) are
specified with a smaller value than the SampleTime parameter.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1261
Motor and valve blocks
7.6 MotSpdL - Two-speed motor

Step control mode for the speed change


Use the input parameter SwiOverTi and the Feature.Bit5 (Specifying switching mode
(Page 171)) to specify how the motor is to carry out the speed change.
In so doing use the input parameter SwiOverTi to adjust the switching time. You have the
following options:
● Switching on and off occurs immediately
● Switching on via speed 1
● Switching off via speed 1
Switching on and off occurs immediately: This setting enables you to switch directly from the
"Off" state to speed 2 or from speed 2 (Spd2) to "Off".
Switching on via speed 1: The speed change from the "Off" condition to speed 2 (Spd2) is
accomplished via speed 1 (Spd1) and after expiration of the time at the parameter
SwiOverTi.
Switching off via speed 1: The speed change from speed 2 (Spd2) to the "Off" state is
accomplished via speed 1 (Spd1) and after expiration of the time at parameter SwiOverTi.

Step control mode SwiOverTi Feature.Bit5


Switching on and off occurs immediately = 0.0 0/1
Switching on only via speed 1 > 0.0 0
Switching on and off via speed 1 > 0.0 1

Simulating signals
This block provides the standard function Simulating signals (Page 59).
You can simulate the following values:
● Additional value (SimAV, SimAV_Li)

Selecting a unit of measure


This block provides the standard function Selecting a unit of measure (Page 221).

Neutral position
This block provides the standard function Neutral position for motors, valves and controllers
(Page 48).

Output signal as a pulse signal or static signal


This block provides the standard function Output signal as a static signal or pulse signal
(Page 52).

Generating instance-specific messages


This block provides the standard function Generating instance-specific messages (Page 213).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1262 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.6 MotSpdL - Two-speed motor

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the section
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133). The following functionality is available
for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
0 Set startup characteristics (Page 141)
1 Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 181)
2 Resetting the commands for changing the mode (Page 165)
3 Enabling resetting of commands for the control settings (Page 165)
4 Setting switch or button mode (Page 170)
5 Specifying switching mode (Page 171)
9 Resetting via input signals in the event of interlocking (Protection) or errors (Page 167)
10 Exiting local mode (Page 181)
11 Activating the run time of feedback signals (Page 157)
13 Separate monitoring time for stopping the motor (Page 173)
14 Enabling rapid stop via faceplate (Page 172)
17 Enabling bumpless switchover to automatic mode for valves, motors, and dosers (Page 177)
18 Activating error state for external process control error CSF (Page 154)
19 Reset even with locked state (Page 169)
20 Disable calculation of impulse control in LocalSetting 2 and 4 (Page 190)
21 Enable bumpless switchover to "Automatic" mode for operator only (Page 176)
22 Update acknowledgment and error status of the message call (Page 163)
23 Limits disabled in faceplate (Page 195)
24 Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162)
25 Suppression of all messages (Page 178)
26 Reaction of the switching points in the "Out of service" operating mode (Page 180)
27 Interlock display with LocalSetting 2 or 4 (Page 182)
28 Disabling operating points (Page 149)
29 Signaling limit violation (Page 174)
30 Set reset depending on the operating mode or the LiOp parameter (Page 167)
31 Activating reset of protection / error in manual mode (Page 168)

In pushbutton operation (Bit 4 = 0) the automatic commands in "automatic" mode are latching,
in other words Spd1Aut, Spd2Aut, StopAut can be reset to 0 after changing the control. In
"manual" and "local" modes, however, the automatic commands are not saved and in the
absence of automatic commands the automatic control is tracked.
In switching mode (Bit 4 = 1), control is selected with the static signals Spd1Aut, Spd2Aut.
If Spd1Aut, Spd2Aut inputs are not set, the motor is stopped. Control via StopAut is not
needed. If the "Activate command reset for control" function (Bit 3 = 1) is also enabled, the
inputs Spd1Aut, Spd2Aut are reset to the neutral position after evaluation in the block.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1263
Motor and valve blocks
7.6 MotSpdL - Two-speed motor

Configurable reactions using the Feature2 parameter

Bit Function
1 Changes signal status of outputs in OOS (Page 198)
2 Separate evaluation for excluded and simulated interlock signals (Page 155)
3 Control priority in the event of an invalid input command (Page 179)
4 Setting switch or button mode for local commands (Page 185)
5 Evaluation of the signal status of the interlock signals (Page 146)
8 Forcing operating modes in the "Local" mode (Page 188)
10 Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values (Page 190)
11 Suppress MsgLock and “Out of service” mode for a connected message block (Page 192)
16 Separate interlock for each direction, position, or speed (Page 173)

Displaying auxiliary values


This block provides the standard function Displaying auxiliary values (Page 220).

Connection of the time-stamped messages from EventTs or Event16Ts


This block provides the standard function Connection of the time-stamped messages from
EventTs or Event16Ts (Page 216).

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


This block provides the standard function SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

Button labels
This block provides the standard function Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218)
Instance-specific text can be configured for the following parameters:
● Spd1Man
● Spd2Man
● StopMan
● RapidStp

See also
MotSpdL block diagram (Page 1277)
MotSpdL modes (Page 1255)
EventTs functions (Page 1698)
MotSpdL I/Os (Page 1268)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1264 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.6 MotSpdL - Two-speed motor

7.6.4 MotSpdL error handling

Error handling of MotSpdL


Refer to section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions for the error handling of all
blocks.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers
● Mode switchover error
● Invalid input signals
● Control system fault (CSF)

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum I/O can be used to output the following error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; the block is not executed
0 There is no error.
41 The value for the LocalSetting I/O is not within the approved limit of 0 to 4.
42 LocalSetting = 0 or LocalSetting = 3 or LocalSetting = 4 and
LocalLi = 1
51 Spd1Local = 1 and StopLocal = 1
Spd2Local = 1 and StopLocal = 1
Spd1Local = 1 and Spd2Local = 1
Spd1Aut = 1 and StopAut = 1
Spd2Aut = 1 and StopAut = 1
Spd1Aut = 1 and Spd2Aut = 1
AutModLi = 1 and ManModLi = 1
Spd1Force = 1 and StopForce = 1
Spd2Force = 1 and StopForce = 1
Spd1Force = 1 and Spd2Force = 1
52 LocalAct = 1 and LocalSetting = 2 or 4 and SimOn = 1

Mode switchover error


This error can be output by the block, see the section Error handling (Page 121).

Invalid input signals


This error can be output by the block, see the section Error handling (Page 121).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1265
Motor and valve blocks
7.6 MotSpdL - Two-speed motor

For the following invalid input signals, the control output can be kept or switched to the neutral
position. This depends on the function Control priority in the event of an invalid input
command (Page 179).

Operating mode Invalid input signals Control reaction with


Feature2.Bit3 =1
Local: Localsetting = 1 or Pushbutton operation for local mode Motor is stopped
Localsetting = 3 (Feature2.Bit4 = 0):
Spd1Local = 1 and Spd2Local = 1 or
Spd1Local = 1 and StopLocal = 1 or
StopLocal = 1 and Spd2Local = 1
Switching mode (Feature2.Bit4 = 1):
Spd1Local = 1 and Spd2Local = 1
Local: Localsetting = 1 or Spd1Force = 1 and Spd2Force = 1 or
Localsetting = 3 and forc‐ Spd1Force = 1 and StopForce = 1 or
ing
StopForce = 1 and Spd2Force = 1
Forcing and no "local mode" Spd1Force = 1 and Spd2Force = 1 or
Spd1Force = 1 and StopForce = 1 or
StopForce = 1 and Spd2Force = 1
"Automatic mode" and no Pushbutton operation (Feature.Bit4 = 0):
forcing Spd1Aut = 1 and Spd2Aut = 1 or
Spd1Aut = 1 and StopAut = 1 or
StopAut = 1 and Spd2Aut = 1
Switching mode (Feature.Bit4 = 1):
Spd1Aut = 1 and Spd2Aut = 1
"Manual mode" and no forcing Spd1Man = 1 and Spd2Man = 1 or
Spd1Man = 1 and StopMan = 1 or
StopMan = 1 and Spd2Man = 1

Control system fault (CSF)


An external signal can be activated via the CSF input. A control system fault is triggered if this
signal changes to 1. Refer to the Error handling (Page 121) section for more on this.

See also
MotSpdL block diagram (Page 1277)
MotSpdL I/Os (Page 1268)
MotSpdL functions (Page 1257)
MotSpdL modes (Page 1255)
Description of MotSpdL (Page 1251)
MotSpdL messaging (Page 1267)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1266 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.6 MotSpdL - Two-speed motor

7.6.5 MotSpdL messaging

Messaging
The following messages can be generated for this block:
● Process control fault
● Instance-specific messages

Process control fault


The following control system error messages can be output:

Message in‐ Message identi‐ Message class Event


stance fier
MsgEvId1 SIG 1 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
Motor feedback error
SIG 2 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
Motor protection triggered
SIG 3 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External error has occurred

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment
You can interconnect an external fault (signal) to input parameter CSF. If it changes to CSF =
1, a process control fault is triggered (MsgEvId1, SIG 3).

Instance-specific messages
You can use up to three instance-specific messages with this block.

Message in‐ Message identifier Message class Event


stance
MsgEvId1 SIG 4 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 1
SIG 5 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 2
SIG 6 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 3

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1267
Motor and valve blocks
7.6 MotSpdL - Two-speed motor

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId1

Associated value Block parameters


1 BatchName
2 StepNo
3 BatchID
4 ExtVa104
5 ExtVa105
6 ExtVa106
7 ExtVa107
8 ExtVa108
9 Reserved
10 Reserved

The associated values 4 ... 8 are allocated to the parameters ExtVa104 ... ExtVa108 and
can be used. Additional information is available in the "Process Control System PCS 7 -
Engineering System" manual.

See also
MotSpdL block diagram (Page 1277)
MotSpdL modes (Page 1255)
MotSpdL error handling (Page 1265)

7.6.6 MotSpdL I/Os


I/Os of MotSpdL

Input parameters

Table 7-1

Parameter Description Type Default


AutModLi* 1 = "Automatic mode" via interconnec‐ STRUCT -
tion or SFC (controlled by ModLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AutModOp* 1 = "Automatic mode" via operator (con‐ BOOL 0
trolled by ModLiOp = 0)
AV Input additional analog value, to be con‐ ANY
nected to AV_Tech of the AV block
AV_AH_Lim Limit high alarm REAL 95.0
AV_AL_Lim Limit low alarm REAL 5.0
AV_Hyst Hysteresis for alarm, warning and toler‐ REAL 1.0
ance limits

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1268 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.6 MotSpdL - Two-speed motor

Parameter Description Type Default


AV_TH_Lim Limit high tolerance REAL 85.0
AV_TL_Lim Limit low tolerance REAL 15.0
AV_WH_Lim Limit high warning REAL 90.0
AV_WL_Lim Limit low warning REAL 10.0
BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation BOOL 0
BatchID Batch ID DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name S7-String
BypProt 1 = Bypassing interlock in "local mode" BOOL 0
and in "simulation"
CSF 1 = External error (control system STRUCT -
faultError handling (Page 121)) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1
EventTsIn For interconnecting data between a tech‐ ANY
nology block and the message blocks
EventTs, Event16Ts.
The EventTsIn input parameter serves
to interconnect the EventTsOut output
parameter of the EventTs,
Event16Ts block. When this intercon‐
nection is configured, the messages of
the EventTs, Event16Ts block are dis‐
played on the OS in the alarm view of
the technology block and can also be ac‐
knowledged there.
ExtMsg1 Binary input for freely selectable mes‐ STRUCT -
sage 1 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg2 Binary input for freely selectable mes‐ STRUCT -
sage 2 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg3 Binary input for freely selectable mes‐ STRUCT -
sage 3 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtVa104 Associated value 4 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa105 Associated value 5 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa106 Associated value 6 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa107 Associated value 7 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa108 Associated value 8 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1269
Motor and valve blocks
7.6 MotSpdL - Two-speed motor

Parameter Description Type Default


FaultExt 1 = External error STRUCT -
Error handling (Page 121) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FbkSpd1 1 = Feedback for speed 1 is present STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
FbkSpd2 1 = Feedback for speed 2 is present STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 1257) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
1 = Separate monitoring time for stop‐ ● Bit 13: BOOL ● 0
ping the motor
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
Feature2 I/O for additional functions (Page 1257) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
IdleTime* Wait time for restart of motor in [s] REAL 5.0
Intlock 0 = Interlock / Interlock open is activated. STRUCT -
Once the interlock condition has ● Value: BOOL ● 1
cleared, the block can be operated with‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
out reset.
1 = Interlock / Interlock open is deactiva‐
ted.
Intl_En 1 = Parameter Intlock is enabled. BOOL 1
IntlSp2 0 = Interlock close is activated. BOOL 1
Once the interlock condition has
cleared, the block can be operated with‐
out reset.
1 = Interlock close is deactivated.
IntlSp2En 1 = Parameter IntlSp2 is enabled. BOOL 1
LocalLi 1 = Activate "local mode" via plant signal STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
LocalOp* 1 = "Local mode" via operator BOOL 0
LocalSetting Properties for the Local mode (Page 80) INT 0
ManModLi* 1 = "Manual mode" via interconnection STRUCT -
or SFC (controlled by ModLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManModOp* 1 = "Manual mode" via OS operator (con‐ BOOL 1
trolled by ModLiOp = 0)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1270 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.6 MotSpdL - Two-speed motor

Parameter Description Type Default


ModLiOp Switchover of operating mode between: STRUCT -
0 = Operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
1 = Interconnection or SFC ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Monitor 1 = Feedback monitoring BOOL 1
MonTiDynamic* Monitoring time for feedback errors or REAL 3.0
feedback start error after successful op‐
eration in [s]
MonTiDyStop* Monitoring time for feedback stop errors REAL 3.0
after successful operation in [s]
MonTiStatic* Monitoring time for feedback errors with‐ REAL 3.0
out operation in [s]
MS_RelOp 1= Release for maintenance via OS op‐ BOOL 0
erator
MsgEvId1 Message number (assigned automati‐ DWORD 16#00000000
cally)
MsgLock 1 = Suppress process messages. STRUCT -
See also the section Suppressing mes‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
sages using the MsgLock parameter ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
(Page 214) for more on this.
MS_RelOp* 1 = Release for maintenance via OS op‐ BOOL 0
erator
Occupied 1 = In use by a batch BOOL 0
OosLi 1 = "Out of service", via interconnection STRUCT -
or SFC (0-1 edge transition) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosOp* 1 = "Out of service", via OS operator BOOL 0
OpSt_In Input parameter for local operator au‐ DWORD 16#00000000
thorization, connected with the Out out‐
put parameter of the upstream block,
OpStations (Page 423)
OS_Perm I/O for operator permissions STRUCT -
(Page 1257) ● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● Bit 8: BOOL ● 1
1 = Operator can set or change the mon‐
itoring time for "Control: Start"
● Bit 20: BOOL ● 1
1 = Operator can set the monitoring time
for "Control:Stop" ● Bit 30: BOOL ● 1
Permit 1 = Activation enable / Activation open STRUCT -
enable. ● Value: BOOL ● 1
0 = No activation enable / No activation ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
open enable.
Perm_En 1 = Parameter Permit enable BOOL 1
PermSp2 1 = Activation Close enable STRUCT -
0 = No activation Close enable ● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1271
Motor and valve blocks
7.6 MotSpdL - Two-speed motor

Parameter Description Type Default


PermSp2En 1 = Parameter PermSp2 is enabled BOOL 1
Protect 0 = Protective interlock / Protective inter‐ STRUCT -
lock open is activated. ● Value: BOOL ● 1
Once the interlock condition has ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
cleared, the block must be reset.
1 = Protective interlock / Protective inter‐
lock open is deactivated.
Prot_En 1 = Parameter Protect enable BOOL 1
ProtSp2 0 = Protective interlock close is activa‐ STRUCT -
ted. ● Value: BOOL ● 1
Once the interlock condition has ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
cleared, the block must be reset.
1 = Protective interlock close is deacti‐
vated.
ProtSp2En 1 = Parameter ProtSp2 enable BOOL 1
PulseWidth* Pulse width of control signal [s] REAL 3.0
RapidStp* Rapid stop for the motor: BOOL 0
0 = Motor On
1 = Motor Off
Spd1Aut* 1 = Activation of motor speed 1 in "auto‐ STRUCT -
matic mode" ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Spd2Aut* 1 = Activation of motor speed 2 in "auto‐ STRUCT -
matic mode" ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Spd1ChnST Signal status of output channel for Fwd STRUCT -
Should be connected to an output chan‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
nel block ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
Spd2ChnST Signal status of output channel for Rev STRUCT -
Should be connected to an output chan‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
nel block ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
Spd1Force 1 = Force activation of motor speed 1 in STRUCT -
"manual mode" or in "automatic mode" ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Spd2Force 1 = Force activation of motor speed 2 in STRUCT -
"manual mode" or in "automatic mode" ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Spd1Local 1 = Activation of motor speed 1 in "local STRUCT -
mode" ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Spd2Local 1 = Activation of motor speed 2 in "local STRUCT -
mode" ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1272 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.6 MotSpdL - Two-speed motor

Parameter Description Type Default


Spd1Man* 1 = Activation of motor speed 1 in "man‐ BOOL 0
ual mode"
Spd2Man* 1 = Activation of motor speed 2 in "man‐ BOOL 0
ual mode"
RstLi* 1 = Reset via interconnection STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RstOp* 1 = Reset via operator BOOL 0
RunUpCyc Number of cycles in startup; messages INT 3
are suppressed during these cycles
SampleTime Sampling time [s] (assigned automatical‐ REAL 0.1
ly)
SimAV* Additional value used for SimOn = 1 REAL 0.0
SimAV_Li Additional analog value that is used for STRUCT -
SimOnLi.Value = 1 ● Value: REAL ● 0
(SimLiOp.Value = 1)
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SimLiOp Activation/deactivation of the simulation STRUCT -
by: ● Value: BOOL ● 0
0 = Operator ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
1 = Interconnection or SFC
SimOnLi 1 = Simulation via interconnection or STRUCT -
SFC (controlled by SimLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SimOn* 1 = Simulation on BOOL 0
SelFp1 Call a block saved in this parameter as ANY
an additional faceplate (Page 217) in the
standard view
SelFp2 Call a block saved in this parameter as ANY
an additional faceplate (Page 217) in the
preview
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
StopAut* 1 = Stopping the motor in "automatic STRUCT -
mode" ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
StopForce 1 = Force motor stop STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
StopLocal 1 = Stopping the motor in "local mode" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
StopMan* 1 = Stopping the motor in "manual mode" BOOL 0
SwOverTi* Time for speed change REAL 0.0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1273
Motor and valve blocks
7.6 MotSpdL - Two-speed motor

Parameter Description Type Default


Trip 1 = Motor is in "good" state STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
UserAna1 Analog auxiliary value 1 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
UA1unit Unit of measure for analog auxiliary val‐ INT 0
ue 1
UserAna2 Analog auxiliary value 2 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
UA1unit Unit of measure for analog auxiliary val‐ INT 0
ue 1
UA2unit Unit of measure for analog auxiliary val‐ INT 0
ue 2
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use in PCS 7 BYTE 16#00
OS
WarnTiAut* Prewarning of motor start in "automatic REAL 0.0
mode" in [s]
WarnTiMan* Prewarning of motor start in "manual REAL 0.0
mode" in [s]

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AutAct 1 = "Automatic mode" enabled STRUCT -
0 = "Manual mode" is enabled ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AutoST 1 = Worst signal status of automatic com‐ BYTE 16#80
mands
AV_OpScale Limit for scale in AV bar graph of face‐ STRUCT -
plate ● High: REAL ● 100.0
● Low: REAL ● 0.0
AV_Out Output additional analog value STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AV_Unit Unit of measure for additional analog val‐ INT 0
ue
CurrMon Remaining monitoring time [s] DINT 0
ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without BOOL 0
errors

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1274 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.6 MotSpdL - Two-speed motor

Parameter Description Type Default


ErrorNum Output of pending error number. For er‐ INT -1
ror numbers that can be output by this
block, see MotSpdL error handling
(Page 1265)
FbkSpd1Out Feedback: STRUCT -
1 = Speed 1 active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FbkSpd2Out Feedback: STRUCT -
1 = Speed 2 active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
GrpErr 1 = Group error pending STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
LocalAct 1 = "Local mode" enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
LockAct 1 = Interlock (Intlock, Permit, STRUCT -
Protect) or Trip is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManAct 1 = "Manual mode" enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MonDynErr 1 = Feedback error or feedback start er‐ STRUCT -
ror due to control change ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MonDynStopErr 1 = Feedback stop error due to control STRUCT -
change ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MonStaErr 1 = Feedback error due to unexpected STRUCT -
feedback change ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MS_Release Release for maintenance: STRUCT -
1 = Release for OS operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MsgAckn1 Message acknowledgement status 1 WORD 16#0000
(output ACK_STATE of first ALARM_8P)
MsgErr1 Alarm error 1 (output ERROR of first BOOL 0
ALARM_8P)
MsgStat1 Message status 1 (output STATUS of first WORD 16#0000
ALARM_8P)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1275
Motor and valve blocks
7.6 MotSpdL - Two-speed motor

Parameter Description Type Default


OosAct 1 = Block is "Out of service" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpSt_Out Value of the OpSt_In input parameter, DWORD 16#00000000
for feedforwarding to other blocks. Bit 31
of this parameter is used by
Feature.Bit24
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with settings DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
changed by the block algorithm
P_Rst 1= Pulse output for reset STRUCT -
The parameter persists for one cycle af‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
ter a reset. ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
P_Spd1 1 = Pulse signal for starting the motor STRUCT -
with speed 1 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
P_Spd2 1 = Pulse signal for starting the motor STRUCT -
with speed 2 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
P_Stop 0 = Pulse signal for stopping the motor STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
R_StpAct 1 = Rapid stop of the motor is active STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RdyToReset 1 = Ready for reset via RstLi input or STRUCT -
commands in "local", "automatic", or ● Value: BOOL ● 0
"manual mode"
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RdyToStart 1 = Active start readiness STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RunSpd1 1 = Motor running at speed 1 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RunSpd2 1 = Motor running at speed 2 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
Spd1 1 = Control of motor: Speed 1 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1276 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.6 MotSpdL - Two-speed motor

Parameter Description Type Default


Spd2 1 = Control of motor: Speed 2 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Starting 1 = Motor will start STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Status1 Status word 1 (Page 1251) DWORD 16#00000000
Status2 Status word 2 (Page 1251) DWORD 16#00000000
Status3 Status word 3 (Page 1251) DWORD 16#00000000
Status4 Status word 4 (Page 1251) DWORD 16#00000000
Status5 Status word 5 (Page 1251) DWORD 16#00000000
Stop 1 = Motor is stopping STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Stoping 1 = Motor will stop STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
WarnAct 1 = Prewarning for motor start active (pa‐ STRUCT -
rameters WarnTiAut and WarnTiMan) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

See also
MotSpdL messaging (Page 1267)
MotSpdL block diagram (Page 1277)
MotSpdL modes (Page 1255)
Error handling (Page 121)

7.6.7 MotSpdL block diagram

MotSpdL block diagram


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

See also
MotSpdL I/Os (Page 1268)
MotSpdL messaging (Page 1267)
MotSpdL error handling (Page 1265)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1277
Motor and valve blocks
7.6 MotSpdL - Two-speed motor

MotSpdL functions (Page 1257)


MotSpdL modes (Page 1255)
Description of MotSpdL (Page 1251)

7.6.8 Operator control and monitoring

7.6.8.1 MotSpdL views

Views of the MotSpdL block


The block MotSpdL provides the following views:
● MotSpdL standard view (Page 1278)
● Alarm view (Page 313)
● Limit view of motors (Page 305)
● Trend view (Page 317)
● Parameter view for motors and valves (Page 297)
● MotSpdL preview (Page 1282)
● Memo view (Page 315)
● Batch view (Page 313)
● Block icon for MotSpdL (Page 1286)
Refer to the sections Structure of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure
(Page 239) for general information on the faceplate and block icon.

7.6.8.2 MotSpdL standard view

MotSpdL standard view


 

 


 





Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1278 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.6 MotSpdL - Two-speed motor

Feature2.Bit16 = 0


 

 



 





Feature2.Bit16 = 1

(1) Displaying and switching the operating mode


This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
● Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76)
● Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76)
● Local mode (Page 80)
● Out of service (Page 72)
Refer to section Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) for information
on switching the operating mode.

(2) Starting and stopping the motor


This area shows you the default operating state for the motor. The following states can be
shown and executed here:
● "Start >"
● "Start >>"
● "Stop"
● "Rapid stop"
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for information
on changing the state.
If text is configured for these commands, it is displayed as status text and as button labels for
command selection. You can find more information about this in section Labeling of buttons
and text (Page 218)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1279
Motor and valve blocks
7.6 MotSpdL - Two-speed motor

(3) Resetting the block


Click "Reset" for interlocks or errors. You can find additional information on this in the section
Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors (Page 43).

(4) Operating range for the interlock functions of the block


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
You can use this button to control the interlock functions of the block. You can find additional
information on this in the section Interlocking functions (Page 101).
The following is displayed in addition to the buttons:
● Interlock status (see Forming the group status for interlock information (Page 106)), e.g.:

● Signal status (see Forming and outputting the signal status for technologic blocks
(Page 110)), e.g.:

● Bypass information (see Forming the group status for interlock information (Page 106)):

(5) Display of auxiliary values


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
You can use this area to display two auxiliary values that have been configured in the
engineering system (ES). You can find additional information on this in the section Displaying
auxiliary values (Page 220).

(6) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
Use this navigation button to open the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system (ES). The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the
engineering system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in the section Opening additional faceplates
(Page 217).

(7) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Maintenance"
Additional information on this is available in section Release for maintenance (Page 65) Display
area for block states.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1280 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.6 MotSpdL - Two-speed motor

(8) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Simulation"
● "Delay"
You will find more detailed information on this in the sections Simulating signals (Page 59) and
Display of delay times (Page 267).

(9) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Motor protection"
● "External error"
● "Status error"
● "Control error"
● "Invalid signal"
● "Changeover error"
Additional information on these errors is available in the sections Monitoring the feedbacks
(Page 98) , Error handling (Page 121) (section "Invalid input signals" and "Mode switchover
error") and Motor protection function (Page 100).

(10) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Forced stop"
● "Forced start >"
● "Forced start >>"
● "Request 0/1": A reset to "automatic mode" is expected.
You can find additional information on this in the section Forcing operating modes (Page 41).

(11) Automatic preview


This display is only visible in "manual mode", in "local mode", or with a reset request in
"automatic mode", when the current output signals are not identical to the control in "automatic
mode".
The display shows what state the motor would assume if you switched from "manual" or "local"
mode to "automatic mode", or performed a reset to "automatic mode".

(12) Status display of the motor


The current status of the motor is graphically displayed here.
You can find more information about this in section Block icon for MotSpdL (Page 1286)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1281
Motor and valve blocks
7.6 MotSpdL - Two-speed motor

See also
Functions of the blocks (Page 41)

7.6.8.3 MotSpdL preview

Preview of MotSpdL

Display of the current monitoring time is visible.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1282 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.6 MotSpdL - Two-speed motor

Display of the current monitoring time is not visible.

(1) Automatic preview


This area shows you the block status after it has switched from the "Manual" mode or "Local"
mode to the "Automatic" mode.
If the block is in "Automatic" mode, the current block state is displayed.
This area also displays the worst signal status of the following automatic commands:
● Spd1Aut
● Spd2Aut
● StopAut

(2) Enable operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1283
Motor and valve blocks
7.6 MotSpdL - Two-speed motor

Icons for enabled operation:


● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)
The following enabled operations are shown here:
● "Stop": You can stop the motor.
If text is configured for this command, it is also displayed in brackets. You can find additional
information on this in the section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218).
● "Slow": You can start the motor in the "slow" state.
If text is configured for this command, it is also displayed in brackets. You can find additional
information on this in the section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218).
● "Fast": You can start the motor in the "fast" state.
If text is configured for this command, it is also displayed in brackets. You can find additional
information on this in the section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218).
● "Reset": You can reset the motor after interlocks or errors.
● "Automatic": You can switch to "automatic mode".
● "Manual": You can switch to "manual mode".
● "Local": You can switch to "local mode".
● "Out of service": You can switch to "Out of service" operating mode.
● "Local operator permission": Use the ← button to switch to the standard view of the
OpStations block. You can find additional information on this in the section Operator control
permissions (Page 265) .
● "Monitoring time": Display of the remaining monitoring time.

(3) Displaying current control signals


This area shows the most important parameters for this block with the current selection:
● "Permission" (Feature 2 bit 16 = 0):
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Motor valve activation not enabled on OS
– 1 = Enable for "slow"/"fast" from the neutral position
● "Permission slow" (Feature 2 bit 16 = 1):
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Motor valve activation not enabled on OS
– 1 = Enable for "slow" from the neutral position

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1284 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.6 MotSpdL - Two-speed motor

● "Permission fast" (Feature 2 bit 16 = 1):


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Motor valve activation not enabled on OS
– 1 = Enable for "fast" from the neutral position
● "Protection" (Feature 2 bit 16 = 0):
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Protective interlocking is effective; once the interlocking condition has disappeared,
you will have to reset the block
– 1 = "Good" state
● "Protection slow" (Feature 2 bit 16 = 1):
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Protective interlocking is effective; once the interlocking condition has disappeared,
you will have to reset the block
– 1 = "Good" state
● "Protection fast" (Feature 2 bit 16 = 1):
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Protective interlocking is effective; once the interlocking condition has disappeared,
you will have to reset the block
– 1 = "Good" state
● "Interlock" (Feature 2 bit 16 = 0):
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Interlocking without reset is active; you can operate the block without reset once the
interlocking condition has disappeared
– 1 = "Good" state
● "Interlock slow" (Feature 2 bit 16 = 1):
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Interlocking without reset is active; you can operate the block without reset once the
interlocking condition has disappeared
– 1 = "Good" state
● "Interlock fast" (Feature 2 bit 16 = 1):
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Interlocking without reset is active; you can operate the block without reset once the
interlocking condition has disappeared
– 1 = "Good" state
● "Local correct": 1 = Control signal for "Local mode" (LocalLi) is active
● "Motor protection": 1 = Motor is in "good" state
● "Interlock deact.":
– 0 = Bypass disabled
– 1 = Bypassing interlock in "local mode" and in "simulation"

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1285
Motor and valve blocks
7.6 MotSpdL - Two-speed motor

● "Local stop": 1 = Stopping the motor in "local mode"


● "Local slow": 1 = Starting the motor in "local mode", slow
● "Local fast": 1 = Starting the motor in "local mode", fast
● "Feedback slow": 1 = Motor has started and is running slow
● "Feedback fast": 1 = Motor has started and is running fast
● "Stop": 1 = Stop motor
● "Slow": 1 = Motor is running slow
● "Fast": 1 = Motor is running fast
● "Channel Slow": Signal from the output channel block for "Slow"
● "Channel Fast": Signal from the output channel block for "Fast"

(4) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
Use this navigation button to open the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system. The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the engineering
system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in the section Opening additional faceplates
(Page 217) .

7.6.8.4 Block icon for MotSpdL

Properties of the MotSpdLblock icon


A variety of block icons are available with the following functions:
● Process tag type
● Limits (high/low)
● Violation of alarm, warning, and tolerance limits as well as control system faults
● Operating modes
● Signal status, release for maintenance
● Displays for bypassing interlocks
● Interlocks
● Memo display
● Motor state display

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1286 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.6 MotSpdL - Two-speed motor

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV8.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special features


1

5 "M" symbol with small speed dis‐


play

6 "M" symbol with small speed dis‐


play

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV7.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special features


1 Block icon in the full display

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1287
Motor and valve blocks
7.6 MotSpdL - Two-speed motor

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special features


10

- Block icon in "Out of service"


mode (example with type 1 block
icon)

Additional information on the block icon and the control options in the block icon is available
in the following chapters:
● Configuring the block icons (Page 246)
● Block icon structure (Page 239)
● Operation via the block icon (Page 248)

Motor state display


The following motor states are shown here:

Symbol Meaning
Motor started (motor symbol changes)

The motor is running

Motor stopped (motor symbol changes)

Motor idle

Error at motor (monitoring error, motor protection)

Motor out of service

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1288 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.7 ShrdResL - Multiplexer for shared resources (Large)

7.7 ShrdResL - Multiplexer for shared resources (Large)

7.7.1 Description of ShrdResL

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1917
Family: Drives

Area of application for ShrdResL


The block is used for the following application:
● Organize individual requests for downstream block from upstream applications.

How it works
The block coordinates the access from up to eight SFC step sequencers to a technological
block of the families "Drives" or "Dose".These blocks include:
● Motors
● Valves
● Dosers
The block has eight channels, each with a standardized command interface.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1289
Motor and valve blocks
7.7 ShrdResL - Multiplexer for shared resources (Large)

3URFHVV $XWRPDWLRQVWUXFWXUH

6)&GUDLQ7 6)&GUDLQ7

7 7
&RPPDQGLQWHUIDFH &RPPDQGLQWHUIDFH

               

9 9

'UDLQYDOYH9 'UDLQYDOYH9
9,Y/ 9,Y/

       
3

6KDUHG5HV0DQDJHPHQW6KUG5HV/

'UDLQSXPS30RW/

In case of multiple allocation requests, the channel to be allocated depends on the priority of
each channel and a strategy mode which coordinates the sequence of the allocated channels.
As soon as a channel is allocated, its command interface is aligned in accordance with the
command interface at the output.

Note
A cascading of channels is not possible.

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38). The block is
also installed automatically in the startup OB (OB100).

Startup characteristics
Use the Feature Bit Set startup characteristics (Page 141) to define the startup characteristics
of this block.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1290 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.7 ShrdResL - Multiplexer for shared resources (Large)

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


You can find a description for each parameter in the section ShrdResL I/Os (Page 1300).

Status bit Parameter


0 ReadyIn, Readiness signal of the interconnected technological block
1 ChnEn_1
2 ChnEn_2
3 ChnEn_3
4 ChnEn_4
5 Ready, Channel allocation is possible
6 ActChnNo = 1, 1 = Channel 1 is enabled
7 ActChnNo = 2, 1 = Channel 2 is enabled
8 ActChnNo = 3, 1 = Channel 3 is enabled
9 ActChnNo = 4, 1 = Channel 4 is enabled
10 MultiOcc, 1 = Request for more than one channel
11 Not used
12 BatchEn
13 Occupied
14 - 16 Not used
17 NxtChnNo = 1, 1 = Channel 1 is the next allocated channel
18 NxtChnNo = 2, 1 = Channel 2 is the next allocated channel
19 NxtChnNo = 3, 1 = Channel 3 is the next allocated channel
20 NxtChnNo = 4, 1 = Channel 4 is the next allocated channel
21 BaEn_1
22 BaEn_2
23 BaEn_3
24 BaEn_4
25 Occ_1
26 Occ_2
27 Occ_3
28 Occ_4
29 - 31 Not used

Status word allocation for Status2 parameter


You can find a description for each parameter in the section ShrdResL I/Os (Page 1300).

Status bit Parameter


0 Not used
1 ChnEn_5
2 ChnEn_6
3 ChnEn_7
4 ChnEn_8
5 Not used

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1291
Motor and valve blocks
7.7 ShrdResL - Multiplexer for shared resources (Large)

Status bit Parameter


6 ActChnNo = 5, 1 = Channel 5 is enabled
7 ActChnNo = 6, 1 = Channel 6 is enabled
8 ActChnNo = 7, 1 = Channel 7 is enabled
9 ActChnNo = 8, 1 = Channel 8 is enabled
10 - 16 Not used
17 NxtChnNo = 5, 1 = Channel 5 is the next allocated channel
18 NxtChnNo = 6, 1 = Channel 6 is the next allocated channel
19 NxtChnNo = 7, 1 = Channel 7 is the next allocated channel
20 NxtChnNo = 8, 1 = Channel 8 is the next allocated channel
21 BaEn_5
22 BaEn_6
23 BaEn_7
24 BaEn_8
25 Occ_5
26 Occ_6
27 Occ_7
28 Occ_8
29 - 31 Not used

See also
ShrdResL modes (Page 1292)
ShrdResL functions (Page 1293)
ShrdResL error handling (Page 1299)
ShrdResL messaging (Page 1299)
ShrdResL block diagram (Page 1305)

7.7.2 ShrdResL modes

ShrdResL operating modes


This block does not have any modes.

See also
Description of ShrdResL (Page 1289)
ShrdResL functions (Page 1293)
ShrdResL error handling (Page 1299)
ShrdResL messaging (Page 1299)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1292 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.7 ShrdResL - Multiplexer for shared resources (Large)

ShrdResL I/Os (Page 1300)


ShrdResL block diagram (Page 1305)

7.7.3 ShrdResL functions

Functions of ShrdResL
The functions for this block are listed below.

Opening additional faceplates


This block provides the standard function Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

Operator permissions
This block provides the standard function Operator control permissions (Page 265).
The block has the following permissions for the OS_Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0-5 Not used
6 1 = Operator can change the priority of channel 1
7 1 = Operator can change the priority of channel 2
8 1 = Operator can change the priority of channel 3
9 1 = Operator can change the priority of channel 4
10 1 = Operator can change the priority of channel 5
11 1 = Operator can change the priority of channel 6
12 1 = Operator can change the priority of channel 7
13 1 = Operator can change the priority of channel 8
14 - 31 Not used

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the section
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133). The following functionality is available
for this block at the relevant bit:

Bit Function
0 Set startup characteristics (Page 141)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1293
Motor and valve blocks
7.7 ShrdResL - Multiplexer for shared resources (Large)

Readiness signal
In order to assign one of the channels, the ready signal must be ReadyIn = 1 and at least one
channel enable must be ChnEn_x = 1 (x = 1 to 8). The ready signal is output at the Ready
output.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1294 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.7 ShrdResL - Multiplexer for shared resources (Large)

Channel management
Overview of the channel management:

5HDG\,Q 5HDG\

&KQ(QB
&KQ(QB
2FFB $OORFDWLRQUHTXHVWFKDQQHO
&KQ(QB
&KQ(QB
2FFB $OORFDWLRQUHTXHVWFKDQQHO &KDQQHO
&KQ(QB DOORFDWLRQ

&KQ(QB 2FFB $OORFDWLRQUHTXHVWFKDQQHO
&KQ(QB

&KQ(QB 2FFB $OORFDWLRQUHTXHVWFKDQQHO


2FFB $OORFDWLRQUHTXHVWFKDQQHO


2FFB $OORFDWLRQUHTXHVWFKDQQHO


2FFB $OORFDWLRQUHTXHVWFKDQQHO

2FFB
$OORFDWLRQUHTXHVWFKDQQHO

3ULRB
3ULRB
3ULRB
3ULRB
3ULRB
3ULRB
3ULRB
3ULRB
6WJ\0RGH

VWFKDQQHO
2FFB
QGFKDQQHO
2FFB
 UGFKDQQHO
2FFB
WKFKDQQHO
2FFB 2XWSXW
 WKFKDQQHO FRPPDQGV
2FFB
 WKFKDQQHO
2FFB
WKFKDQQHO
2FFB
WKFKDQQHO
2FFB

&KDQQHOVHOHFWLRQ

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1295
Motor and valve blocks
7.7 ShrdResL - Multiplexer for shared resources (Large)

Allocate/enable channel
A channel can only be allocated if the readiness signal (ReadyIn = 1) and the respective
channel enabling is available for the allocation ChnEn_x = 1.
With ChnEn_x = 0, the channel x is disabled and cannot be allocated.
The allocation request of a channel by the upstream application is accomplished via the input
Occ_x. In case of multiple requests, the channel allocation function stores the requests in a
buffer and calculates the allocated channel number with the help of the channel priorities
Prio_x (x = 1 to 8) and the strategy mode StgyMode.
Each channel has its own priority. It can be parameterized at the inputs Prio_x (x = 1 to 8).
The strategy mode defines the order of storing the requests in the buffer.

Strategy 1 Strategy 2 Parameter value of StgyMode


First In First Out Order 0
First In First Out Maximum Priority; in case equal request Order is used 1
First In First Out Minimum Priority; in case equal request Order is used 2
Last In First Out Order 3
Last In First Out Maximum Priority; in case equal request Order is used 4
Last In First Out Minimum Priority; in case equal request Order is used 5
Maximum Priority Order 6
Maximum Priority First In First Out 7
Maximum Priority Last In First Out 8
Minimum Priority Order 9
Minimum Priority First In First Out 10
Minimum Priority Last In First Out 11

The allocation request will be evaluated with Strategy 1. If after the first evaluation, there are
equal requests, the Strategy 2 will be evaluated. This happens in the following cases:
● Two or more requests are in the same cycle and Strategy 1 is “First In First Out” or “Last
In First Out”.
● Two or more requests have the same priority and Strategy 1 is “Maximum Priority” or
“Minimum Priority”.
The parameterization “Order” in Strategy 2 means that the priority of the request depends on
the channel number:
● Channel 1 has the highest priority
● Channel 8 has the lowest priority
If Strategy 2 is “Maximum Priority” or “Minimum Priority” and if after the evaluation, there are
equal requests, the channel allocation is calculated with “Order”.
The applied commands are aligned in accordance with the output command interface.
The number of the allocated channel is displayed at the output ActChnNo (INT format). If no
channel is allocated, the output is 0.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1296 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.7 ShrdResL - Multiplexer for shared resources (Large)

Enable/disable channel
If the allocated channel disabling via Occ_x = 0 or via ChnEn_x = 0, the next channel in the
allocation request buffer is automatically switched to the command outputs. If there is no other
allocation request (every Occ_x = 0), the commands of the output interface are resetted to
the default values.

Channel prioritization
Channel 1 has the highest priority, channel 4 has the lowest. If the input Occ_x is set at multiple
enabled channels, the channel with the highest priority is allocated and the output
MultiOcc = 1 is set.

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


This block provides the standard function SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

Example for "First In First Out" Strategy mode (StgyMode = 0, 1, or 2)


The requirement which is issued for the longest duration will be released first.
The requirements that are coming in the same cycle will be evaluated after Strategy 2.

5HTXLUHPHQW
5HTXLUHPHQW 5HTXLUHPHQW
ILQLVKHG

5HTXLUHPHQW
LVZDLWLQJ
5HTXLUHPHQW 5HTXLUHPHQW 5HTXLUHPHQW
LVZDLWLQJ LVZDLWLQJ LVZDLWLQJ
5HTXLUHPHQW 5HTXLUHPHQW 5HTXLUHPHQW 5HTXLUHPHQW
LQZRUN LQZRUN LQZRUN LQZRUN

Example for "Last In First Out" Strategy mode (StgyMode = 3, 4, or 5)


The requirement which is issued for the shortest duration will be released first.
The requirements that are coming in the same cycle will be evaluated after Strategy 2.

5HTXLUHPHQW
5HTXLUHPHQW 5HTXLUHPHQW
ILQLVKHG

5HTXLUHPHQW
LVZDLWLQJ
5HTXLUHPHQW 5HTXLUHPHQW 5HTXLUHPHQW
LVZDLWLQJ LVZDLWLQJ LVZDLWLQJ
5HTXLUHPHQW 5HTXLUHPHQW 5HTXLUHPHQW 5HTXLUHPHQW
LQZRUN LQZRUN LQZRUN LQZRUN

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1297
Motor and valve blocks
7.7 ShrdResL - Multiplexer for shared resources (Large)

Example for "Maximum Priority" Strategy mode (StgyMode = 6, 7, or 8)


The requirement with the highest priority will be released first.
The requirements that are coming in the same cycle will be evaluated after Strategy 2.

5HTXLUHPHQW 5HTXLUHPHQW
5HTXLUHPHQW
ILQLVKHG ILQLVKHG

5HTXLUHPHQW
SULRULW\
LQZDLWLQJ
5HTXLUHPHQW 5HTXLUHPHQW 5HTXLUHPHQW
SULRULW\ SULRULW\ SULRULW\
LQZDLWLQJ LQZDLWLQJ LQZDLWLQJ
5HTXLUHPHQW 5HTXLUHPHQW 5HTXLUHPHQW 5HTXLUHPHQW
SULRULW\ SULRULW\ SULRULW\ SULRULW\
LQZRUN LQZRUN LQZRUN LQZRUN

Example for "Minimum Priority" Strategy mode (StgyMode = 9, 10, or 11)


The requirement with the lowest priority will be released first.
The requirements that are coming in the same cycle will be evaluated after Strategy 2.

5HTXLUHPHQW 5HTXLUHPHQW
5HTXLUHPHQW
ILQLVKHG ILQLVKHG

5HTXLUHPHQW
SULRULW\
LQZDLWLQJ
5HTXLUHPHQW 5HTXLUHPHQW 5HTXLUHPHQW
SULRULW\ SULRULW\ SULRULW\
LQZDLWLQJ LQZDLWLQJ LQZDLWLQJ
5HTXLUHPHQW 5HTXLUHPHQW 5HTXLUHPHQW 5HTXLUHPHQW
SULRULW\ SULRULW\ SULRULW\ SULRULW\
LQZRUN LQZRUN LQZRUN LQZRUN

See also
Description of ShrdResL (Page 1289)
ShrdResL modes (Page 1292)
ShrdResL error handling (Page 1299)
ShrdResL messaging (Page 1299)
ShrdResL I/Os (Page 1300)
ShrdResL block diagram (Page 1305)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1298 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.7 ShrdResL - Multiplexer for shared resources (Large)

7.7.4 ShrdResL error handling

ShrdResL error handling


Please refer to the section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions.
The following error can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum parameter can be used to output the following error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; block is not processed.
0 There is no error.
49 Wrong strategy mode number:
StgyMode < 0 or StgyMode > 11

See also
Description of ShrdResL (Page 1289)
ShrdResL modes (Page 1292)
ShrdResL functions (Page 1293)
ShrdResL messaging (Page 1299)
ShrdResL I/Os (Page 1300)
ShrdResL block diagram (Page 1305)

7.7.5 ShrdResL messaging

Messaging
This block does not offer messaging.

See also
Description of ShrdResL (Page 1289)
ShrdResL modes (Page 1292)
ShrdResL functions (Page 1293)
ShrdResL error handling (Page 1299)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1299
Motor and valve blocks
7.7 ShrdResL - Multiplexer for shared resources (Large)

ShrdResL I/Os (Page 1300)


ShrdResL block diagram (Page 1305)

7.7.6 ShrdResL I/Os

I/Os of ShrdResL

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AutMod_1* 1 = "Automatic mode" via interconnection STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
... ... ... ...
AutMod_8* 1 = "Automatic mode" via interconnection STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
BaEn_1 1 = Enable allocation for channel 1 BOOL 0
... ... ... ...
BaEn_8 1 = Enable allocation for channel 8 BOOL 0
BaID_1 Batch number for channel 1 DWORD 16#00000000
... ... ... ...
BaID_8 Batch number for channel 8 DWORD 16#00000000
BaName_1 Batch designation for channel 1 S7-String
... ... ... ...
BaName_8 Batch designation for channel 8 S7-String
ChnEn_1 1 = Channel 1 is enabled and can be allocated STRUCT -
0 = Channel 1 is blocked and cannot be allocated ● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
... ... ... ...
ChnEn_8* 1 = Channel 8 is enabled and can be allocated STRUCT -
0 = Channel 8 is blocked and cannot be allocated ● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
ChnCmd_1 Channel input 1 (reserved) STRUCT
... ... ... ...
ChnCmd_8 Channel input 8 (reserved) STRUCT
Ctrl01_1* Control command 1 for channel 1 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1300 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.7 ShrdResL - Multiplexer for shared resources (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


... ... ... ...
Ctrl12_8* Control command 12 for channel 8 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CtrlW1_1* Available user control word 1 for channel 1 DWORD 16#00000000
... ... ... ...
CtrlW1_8* Available user control word 1 for channel 8 DWORD 16#00000000
CtrlW2_1* Available user control word 2 for channel 1 DWORD 16#00000000
... ... ... ...
CtrlW2_8* Available user control word 2 for channel 8 DWORD 16#00000000
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1
Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 1293) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
ManMod_1* 1 = "Manual mode" via interconnection for channel 1 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
... ... ... ...
ManMod_8* 1 = "Manual mode" via interconnection for channel 8 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ModLi_1* 1 = Control via interconnection or SFC for channel 1 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
... ... ... ...
ModLi_8* 1 = Control via interconnection or SFC for channel 8 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Occ_1* 1 = Occupied BOOL 0
It is also used as a control signal for the channel allocation for channel
1
... ..0 ... ...
Occ_8* 1 = Occupied BOOL 0
It is also used as a control signal for the channel allocation for channel
8
Prio_1 Priority for channel 1 INT 1
... ... ... ...
Prio_8 Priority for channel 8 INT 8
ReadyIn Readiness signal: STRUCT -
1 = Signal for channel enabling active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1301
Motor and valve blocks
7.7 ShrdResL - Multiplexer for shared resources (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


RstLi_1* 1 = Resetting via interconnection for channel 1 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
... ... ... ...
RstLi_8* 1 = Resetting via interconnection for channel 8 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SelFpRes Selection for faceplate resource ANY
SP_Ex_1 1 = Select external setpoint (via interconnection) for channel 1 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
... ... ... ...
SP_Ex_8 1 = Select external setpoint (via interconnection) for channel 8 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_In_1* 1 = Select internal setpoint (via interconnection) for channel 1 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
... ... ... ...
SP_In_8* 1 = Select internal setpoint (via interconnection) for channel 8 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP1Ext_1* External setpoint 1 for channel 1 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
... ... ... ...
SP8Ext_8* External setpoint 8 for channel 8 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
StepNo_1 Step number for channel 1 DWORD 16#00000000
... ... ... ...
StepNo_8 Step number for channel 8 DWORD 16#00000000
StgyMode Strategy mode (0 to 11) INT 0
Strng1_1 Additional string 1 for channel 1 S7-String  
Strng2_1 Additional string 2 for channel 1 S7-String  
... ... ... ...
Strng1_8 Additional string 1 for channel 8 S7-String  
Strng2_8 Additional string 2 for channel 8 S7-String  
OpSt_In Input parameter for local operator authorization, connected with the DWORD 16#00000000
Out output parameter of the upstream block, OpStations (Page 423)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1302 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.7 ShrdResL - Multiplexer for shared resources (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


OS_Perm I/O for operator permissions (Page 1293) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● ... ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
UserStatu Freely assignable bits for use in PCS7 OS BYTE 16#00
s

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


ActChnNo Displays the allocated channel INT 0
AutMod 1= "Automatic mode" via interconnection STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation BOOL 0
BatchID Batch ID DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name S7-String
Ctrl01 Control command 1 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
... ... ... ...
Ctrl12 Control command 12 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CtrlW1 Available user control word 1 DWORD 16#00000000
CtrlW2 Available user control word 2 DWORD 16#00000000
ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without errors BOOL 0
ErrorNum Output of the current error number. For error numbers that can be out‐ INT -1
putted by this block, see ShrdResL error handling (Page 1299)
NxtChnNo Next occupied channel number INT 0
ManMod 1 = "Manual mode" via interconnection STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ModLi 1 = Control via interconnection or SFC STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MultiOcc 1 = More than one channel request is present BOOL 0
Occupied 1 = Occupied BOOL 0
Is also used as a control signal for the channel allocation.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1303
Motor and valve blocks
7.7 ShrdResL - Multiplexer for shared resources (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


Ready 1 = Active readiness STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RstLi 1 = Reset via interconnection STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExtLi 1 = Select external setpoint (via interconnection) STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_IntLi 1 = Select internal setpoint (via interconnection) STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP1Ext External setpoint 1 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
... ... ... ...
SP8Ext External setpoint 8 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Status1 Status word 1 (Page 1289) DWORD 16#00000000
Status2 Status word 2 (Page 1289) DWORD 16#00000000
StepNo Step number DWORD 16#00000000
Strng1 Additional string 1 S7-String  
Strng2 Additional string 2 S7-String  
OpSt_Out Value of the OpSt_In input parameter, for feedforwarding to other DWORD 16#00000000
blocks. Bit 31 of this parameter is used by Feature.Bit24
OS_PermLo Display of OS_Perm with settings changed by the block algorithm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
g
OS_PermOu Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
t

See also
ShrdResL modes (Page 1292)
ShrdResL messaging (Page 1299)
ShrdResL block diagram (Page 1305)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1304 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.7 ShrdResL - Multiplexer for shared resources (Large)

7.7.7 ShrdResL block diagram

ShrdResL block diagram


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

See also
Description of ShrdResL (Page 1289)
ShrdResL modes (Page 1292)
ShrdResL functions (Page 1293)
ShrdResL error handling (Page 1299)
ShrdResL messaging (Page 1299)
ShrdResL I/Os (Page 1300)

7.7.8 Operator control and monitoring

7.7.8.1 ShrdResL views

Views of the ShrdResL block


The block ShrdResL provides the following views:
● ShrdResL standard view (Page 1306)
● ShrdResL general preview (Page 1308)
● ShrdResL preview (Page 1308)
● ShrdResL parameter view (Page 1309)
● Memo view (Page 315)
● Block icon for ShrdResL (Page 1310)
Refer to the sections Structure of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure
(Page 239) for general information on the faceplate and block icon.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1305
Motor and valve blocks
7.7 ShrdResL - Multiplexer for shared resources (Large)

7.7.8.2 ShrdResL standard view

ShrdResL standard view






 

(1) Allocation
The allocation status is displayed in this area:
● "None": Display for all Occ_1...Occ_4 = 0 and Occupied = 0
● "Requested": Display for one of Occ_1...Occ_4 = 1 and Occupied = 0
● "Active": Display for Occupied = 1

(2) Active channel


The channel number of the active channel is displayed in this area.
If the text is configured for this command (Text 1 in the object properties), it is displayed as
additional text and button label for command selection. Additional information is available in
the section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1306 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.7 ShrdResL - Multiplexer for shared resources (Large)

(3) Resource
The status of the enable signal is displayed in this area:
● "Idle": Display for ReadyIn = 1
● "Not ready": Display for ReadyIn = 0

(4) Jump key to standard view of any faceplate


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is interconnected.
Use this navigation button to jump to the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system (ES). The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the
engineering system (ES).
You can find more information on this in the section Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

(5) Release batch


This area displays if the block is released for operation via SIMATIC BATCH (BatchEn = 1).

(6) Batch name


This area displays the name of the batch that is currently running (Batchname).

(7) Batch ID
This area displays the identification number of the batch that is currently running (BatchID).

(8) Batch step


This area displays the step number of the batch that is currently running (StepNo).

(9) Display channel 1 to 8


This area is only visible when the (10) "Expand" button is pressed.
The "Allocation" and "Release" status of the channels 1 to 8 are displayed in this area.
The next channel for allocation, which is in waiting position, is marked with a yellow exclamation
mark.

(11) Expand/Collapse
This button enables or disables the display areas (9). The label of the button changes
accordingly.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1307
Motor and valve blocks
7.7 ShrdResL - Multiplexer for shared resources (Large)

7.7.8.3 ShrdResL general preview

ShrdResL general preview

(1) Enabled operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Icons for enabled operation:
● Green check mark: The OS operator can control this parameter.
● Gray check mark: The OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process.
● Red cross: The OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS
operator permissions (OS_Perm).
The following enabled operation is shown here:
● "Local operator permission": Use the ← button to switch to the standard view of the
OpStations block. You can find additional information on this in the section Operator control
permissions (Page 265).

7.7.8.4 ShrdResL preview

ShrdResL preview




Each of the eight channels has its own preview. The previews of the individual channels are
identical. The preview shown in this graphic is of channel 4.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1308 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.7 ShrdResL - Multiplexer for shared resources (Large)

(1) Allocation
The allocation status of the channel is displayed in this area.
● "No": Display for Occ_1 = 0
● "Requested": Display for Occ_1 = 1and ActChnNo = 0
● "Active": Display for ActChnNo = 1

(2) Enable
The status of the enable is displayed in this area.
● "Yes": Display for ChnEn = 1
● "No": Display for ChnEn = 0

(3) Release batch


This area displays if the block is released for operation via SIMATIC BATCH (BatchEn = 1).

(4) Batch name


This area displays the name of the batch that is currently running (Batchname).

(5) Batch ID
This area displays the identification number of the batch that is currently running (BatchID).

(6) Batch step


This area displays the step number of the batch that is currently running (StepNo).

7.7.8.5 ShrdResL parameter view

Parameter view of ShrdResL

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1309
Motor and valve blocks
7.7 ShrdResL - Multiplexer for shared resources (Large)

(1) Enabled operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Icons for operation enable:
● Green check mark: The OS operator can control this parameter.
● Gray check mark: The OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process.
● Red cross: The OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS
operator permissions (OS_Perm).

(2) Parameters
In this area, you can change the parameters and thereby influence the behavior of ShrdResL.
You can find more information on this in the section Changing values (Page 270).
You can influence the following parameters:
● "Priority Chn 1": Priority for channel 1
● "Priority Chn 2": Priority for channel 2
● "Priority Chn 3": Priority for channel 3
● "Priority Chn 4": Priority for channel 4
● "Priority Chn 5": Priority for channel 5
● "Priority Chn 6": Priority for channel 6
● "Priority Chn 7": Priority for channel 7
● "Priority Chn 8": Priority for channel 8

7.7.8.6 Block icon for ShrdResL

Block icons for ShrdResL


A variety of block icons are available with the following functions:
● Display active channel
● Process tag type (2 only)
● Memo display (2 only)
● Fixed text (language dependent, 2 only)

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV8.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special features


1
2

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1310 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.7 ShrdResL - Multiplexer for shared resources (Large)

Additional information on the block icon and the control options in the block icon is available
in the following chapters:
● Configuring the block icons (Page 246)
● Block icon structure (Page 239)
● Operation via the block icon (Page 248)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1311
Motor and valve blocks
7.8 ShrdResS - Multiplexer for shared resources (Small)

7.8 ShrdResS - Multiplexer for shared resources (Small)

7.8.1 Description for ShrdResS

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1914
Family: Drives

Area of application for ShrdResS


The block is used for the following applications:
● Organize individual requests for downstream block from upstream applications

How it works
The block coordinates the access from up to four SFC step sequencers to a technologic block
of the families "Drives" or "Dose". These blocks include:
● Motors
● Valves
● Dosers
The block has four channels, each with a standardized command interface.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1312 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.8 ShrdResS - Multiplexer for shared resources (Small)

3URFHVV $XWRPDWLRQVWUXFWXUH

6)&GUDLQ7 6)&GUDLQ7

7 7
&RPPDQGLQWHUIDFH &RPPDQG
LQWHUIDFH

   Q Q   

9 9

'UDLQYDOYH9 'UDLQYDOYH9
9,Y/ 9,Y/

   Q
3
6KDUHG5HV
0DQDJHPHQW
6KUG5HV6

'UDLQSXPS3
0RW/

The block can be cascaded via the fourth channel so that accesses via more than four upstream
applications are possible. Use the cascade by interconnecting the output parameter CasOut
of the first block to the input parameter CasIn of the second block. The output interface of the
upstream block is then used as channel 4 for the second block.
As soon as a channel is allocated, its command interface is aligned 1-to-1 with the command
interface at the output.
The channel with the lower number always has priority with shared allocation. Cascaded blocks
are always allocated to channel 4 of the upstream block; they are then in 4th place.

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38). The block is
also installed automatically in the startup OB (OB100).

Startup characteristics
Use the Feature Bit Set startup characteristics (Page 141) to define the startup characteristics
of this block.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1313
Motor and valve blocks
7.8 ShrdResS - Multiplexer for shared resources (Small)

Status word allocation for Status parameter


You can find a description for each parameter in section ShrdResS I/Os (Page 1319).

Status bit Parameter


0 ReadyIn, readiness signal of the interconnected technologic block
1 ChnEn_1
2 ChnEn_2
3 ChnEn_3
4 ChnEn_4
5 Ready, channel allocation is possible
6 ActChnNo = 1, 1 = Channel 1 enabled
7 ActChnNo = 2, 1 = Channel 2 enabled
8 ActChnNo = 3, 1 = Channel 3 enabled
9 ActChnNo = 4, 1 = Channel 4 enabled
10 MultiOcc, 1 = Request for more than one channel
11 Cascaded, 1 = 4. Channel is cascaded
12 BatchEn
13 Occupied
14 - 20 Not used
21 BaEn_1
22 BaEn_2
23 BaEn_3
24 BaEn_4
25 Occ_1
26 Occ_2
27 Occ_3
28 Occ_4
29 - 31 Not used

See also
ShrdResS modes (Page 1314)
ShrdResS functions (Page 1315)
ShrdResS error handling (Page 1318)
ShrdResS messaging (Page 1318)
ShrdResS block diagram (Page 1327)

7.8.2 ShrdResS modes

ShrdResS operating modes


This block does not have any modes.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1314 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.8 ShrdResS - Multiplexer for shared resources (Small)

See also
Description for ShrdResS (Page 1312)
ShrdResS functions (Page 1315)
ShrdResS error handling (Page 1318)
ShrdResS messaging (Page 1318)
ShrdResS I/Os (Page 1319)
ShrdResS block diagram (Page 1327)

7.8.3 ShrdResS functions

Functions of ShrdResS
The functions for this block are listed below.

Opening additional faceplates


This block provides the standard function Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).
If the block is cascaded, the standard view of the ShrdResS block interconnected to CasIn
can be opened in addition to the freely configured faceplate.

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the section
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133). The following functionality is available
for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
0 Set startup characteristics (Page 141)

Readiness signal
In order to assign one of the channels, the ready signal must be ReadyIn = 1 and at least one
channel enable must be ChnEn_x = 1 (x = 1...4) . The ready signal is output at the Ready
output.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1315
Motor and valve blocks
7.8 ShrdResS - Multiplexer for shared resources (Small)

Channel management
Overview of the channel management

5HDG\,Q 5HDG\

&KQ(QB

&KQ(QB

&KQ(QB

&KQ(QB

2FFB $OORFDWLRQUHTXHVWFKDQQHO &KDQQHO
DOORFDWLRQ


2FFB $OORFDWLRQUHTXHVWFKDQQHO


2FFB $OORFDWLRQUHTXHVWFKDQQHO


2FFB $OORFDWLRQUHTXHVWFKDQQHO

VWFKDQQHO

2FFB

QGFKDQQHO

2FFB

2XWSXWFRPPDQGV
UGFKDQQHO

2FFB

WKFKDQQHO
&KDQQHOVHOHFWLRQ
2FFB

Allocate/enable channel
A channel can only be allocated if the readiness signal (ReadyIn = 1) and the respective
channel enabling is available for the allocation ChnEn_x = 1.
With ChnEn_x = 0 the channel x is disabled and cannot be allocated.
The allocation of a channel by the upstream application is accomplished via the input Occ_x.
As long as this input is 1, the channel is allocated and enabled. The applied commands are
aligned 1-to-1 with the output command interface.
The number of the allocated channel is displayed at the output ActChnNo (INT format). If no
channel is allocated, the output is 0.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1316 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.8 ShrdResS - Multiplexer for shared resources (Small)

Enable/disable channel
If no channel enabling via Occ_x = 0 occurs or if the channel is disabled via ChnEn_x = 0, the
next highest priority channel is automatically switched to the command outputs. If there is no
other allocation request (every Occ_x = 0), the commands of the output interface are reset to
the default values.

Channel prioritization
Channel 1 has the highest priority, channel 4 has the lowest. If the input Occ_x is set at multiple
enabled channels, the channel with the highest priority is allocated and the output
MultiOcc = 1 is set.

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


This block provides the standard function SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

Cascading
For cascading, the output CasOut of a ShrdResS block B must be connected with the input
CasIn of the downstream ShrdResS block A. Therefore, the fourth channel of the downstream
block ShrdResS A is allocated by the ShrdResS B block connected to CasIn. The command
interface of the fourth channel is tracked in this case to the output interface of the connected
ShrdResS B block.

6KUG5HV6 6KUG5HV6
&KQ

&KQ

% $
LQWHUIDFH

LQWHUIDFH
2XWSXW

2XWSXW
&KQ

&KQ

&DVF,Q &DVF2XW &DVF,Q &DVF2XW

Any values applied via interconnection at the 4th channel of block A are not taken into account
in the block code during cascading.

See also
Description for ShrdResS (Page 1312)
ShrdResS modes (Page 1314)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1317
Motor and valve blocks
7.8 ShrdResS - Multiplexer for shared resources (Small)

ShrdResS error handling (Page 1318)


ShrdResS messaging (Page 1318)
ShrdResS I/Os (Page 1319)
ShrdResS block diagram (Page 1327)

7.8.4 ShrdResS error handling

ShrdResS error handling


Please refer to the section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum I/O can be used to output the following error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; block will not be processed
0 There is no error.
40 Interconnection error on CasIn, incorrect block type interconnected

See also
Description for ShrdResS (Page 1312)
ShrdResS modes (Page 1314)
ShrdResS functions (Page 1315)
ShrdResS messaging (Page 1318)
ShrdResS I/Os (Page 1319)
ShrdResS block diagram (Page 1327)

7.8.5 ShrdResS messaging

Messaging
This block does not offer messaging.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1318 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.8 ShrdResS - Multiplexer for shared resources (Small)

See also
Description for ShrdResS (Page 1312)
ShrdResS modes (Page 1314)
ShrdResS functions (Page 1315)
ShrdResS error handling (Page 1318)
ShrdResS I/Os (Page 1319)
ShrdResS block diagram (Page 1327)

7.8.6 ShrdResS I/Os

I/Os of ShrdResS

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AutMod_1* 1= "Automatic mode" via interconnection STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AutMod_2* 1= "Automatic mode" via interconnection STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AutMod_3* 1= "Automatic mode" via interconnection STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AutMod_4* 1= "Automatic mode" via interconnection STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
BaEn_1 1 = Enable allocation for channel 1 BOOL 0
BaEn_2 1 = Enable allocation for channel 2 BOOL 0
BaEn_3 1 = Enable allocation for channel 3 BOOL 0
BaEn_4 1 = Enable allocation for channel 4 BOOL 0
BaID_1 Batch number for channel 1 DWORD 16#00000000
BaID_2 Batch number for channel 2 DWORD 16#00000000
BaID_3 Batch number for channel 3 DWORD 16#00000000
BaID_4 Batch number for channel 4 DWORD 16#00000000
BaName_1 Batch designation for channel 1 S7-String
BaName_2 Batch designation for channel 2 S7-String
BaName_3 Batch designation for channel 3 S7-String

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1319
Motor and valve blocks
7.8 ShrdResS - Multiplexer for shared resources (Small)

Parameter Description Type Default


BaName_4 Batch designation for channel 4 S7-String
CasIn Input for cascade, to be interconnected ANY
with the output parameter CasOut of the
preceding ShrdResS block
ChnEn_1 1 = Channel 1 is enabled and can be al‐ STRUCT -
located ● Value: BOOL ● 1
0 = Channel 1 is blocked and cannot be ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
allocated.
ChnEn_2 1 = Channel 2 is enabled and can be al‐ STRUCT -
located ● Value: BOOL ● 1
0 = Channel 2 is blocked and cannot be ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
allocated.
ChnEn_3 1 = Channel 3 is enabled and can be al‐ STRUCT -
located ● Value: BOOL ● 1
0 = Channel 3 is blocked and cannot be ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
allocated.
ChnEn_4* 1 = Channel 4 is enabled and can be al‐ STRUCT -
located ● Value: BOOL ● 1
0 = Channel 4 is blocked and cannot be ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
allocated.
ChnCmd_1 Channel 1: Command interface (re‐ STRUCT
served)
ChnCmd_2 Channel 2: Command interface (re‐ STRUCT
served)
ChnCmd_3 Channel 3: Command interface (re‐ STRUCT
served)
ChnCmd_4 Channel 4: Command interface (re‐ STRUCT
served)
Ctrl01_1* 1. Control command for channel 1 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Ctrl02_1* 2. Control command for channel 1 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Ctrl03_1* 3. Control command for channel 1 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Ctrl04_1* 4. Control command for channel 1 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Ctrl05_1* 5. Control command for channel 1 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1320 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.8 ShrdResS - Multiplexer for shared resources (Small)

Parameter Description Type Default


Ctrl06_1* 6. Control command for channel 1 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Ctrl01_2* 1. Control command for channel 2 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Ctrl02_2* 2. Control command for channel 2 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Ctrl03_2* 3. Control command for channel 2 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Ctrl04_2* 4. Control command for channel 2 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Ctrl05_2* 5. Control command for channel 2 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Ctrl06_2* 6. Control command for channel 2 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Ctrl01_3* 1. Control command for channel 3 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Ctrl02_3* 2. Control command for channel 3 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Ctrl03_3* 3. Control command for channel 3 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Ctrl04_3* 4. Control command for channel 3 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Ctrl05_3* 5. Control command for channel 3 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Ctrl06_3* 6. Control command for channel 3 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1321
Motor and valve blocks
7.8 ShrdResS - Multiplexer for shared resources (Small)

Parameter Description Type Default


Ctrl01_4* 1. Control command for channel 4 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Ctrl02_4* 2. Control command for channel 4 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Ctrl03_4* 3. Control command for channel 4 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Ctrl04_4* 4. Control command for channel 4 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Ctrl05_4* 5. Control command for channel 4 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Ctrl06_4* 6. Control command for channel 4 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CtrlW1_1* 1. Available user control word for chan‐ DWORD 16#00000000
nel 1
CtrlW1_2* 1. Available user control word for chan‐ DWORD 16#00000000
nel 2
CtrlW1_3* 1. Available user control word for chan‐ DWORD 16#00000000
nel 3
CtrlW1_4* 1. Available user control word for chan‐ DWORD 16#00000000
nel 4
CtrlW2_1* 2. Available user control word for chan‐ DWORD 16#00000000
nel 1
CtrlW2_2* 2. Available user control word for chan‐ DWORD 16#00000000
nel 2
CtrlW2_3* 2. Available user control word for chan‐ DWORD 16#00000000
nel 3
CtrlW2_4* 2. Available user control word for chan‐ DWORD 16#00000000
nel 4
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1
Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 1315) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
ManMod_1* 1 = "Manual mode" via interconnection STRUCT -
for channel 1 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1322 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.8 ShrdResS - Multiplexer for shared resources (Small)

Parameter Description Type Default


ManMod_2* 1 = "Manual mode" via interconnection STRUCT -
for channel 2 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManMod_3* 1 = "Manual mode" via interconnection STRUCT -
for channel 3 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManMod_4* 1 = "Manual mode" via interconnection STRUCT -
for channel 4 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ModLi_1* 1 = Control via interconnection or SFC STRUCT -
for channel 1 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ModLi_2* 1 = Control via interconnection or SFC STRUCT -
for channel 2 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ModLi_3* 1 = Control via interconnection or SFC STRUCT -
for channel 3 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ModLi_4* 1 = Control via interconnection or SFC STRUCT -
for channel 4 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Occ_1 1 = Occupied BOOL 0
Is also used as a control signal for the
channel allocation for channel 1
Occ_2 1 = Occupied BOOL 0
Is also used as a control signal for the
channel allocation for channel 2
Occ_3 1 = Occupied BOOL 0
Is also used as a control signal for the
channel allocation for channel 3
Occ_4* 1 = Occupied BOOL 0
Is also used as a control signal for the
channel allocation for channel 4
ReadyIn Readiness signal: STRUCT -
1 = Signal for channel enabling active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RstLi_1* 1 = Resetting via interconnection for STRUCT -
channel 1 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RstLi_2* 1 = Resetting via interconnection for STRUCT -
channel 2 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1323
Motor and valve blocks
7.8 ShrdResS - Multiplexer for shared resources (Small)

Parameter Description Type Default


RstLi_3* 1 = Resetting via interconnection for STRUCT -
channel 3 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RstLi_4* 1 = Resetting via interconnection for STRUCT -
channel 4 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SelFpRes Selection for faceplate resource ANY
SP_Ex_1 1 = Select external setpoint (via intercon‐ STRUCT -
nection) for channel 1 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_Ex_2 1 = Select external setpoint (via intercon‐ STRUCT -
nection) for channel 2 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_Ex_3 1 = Select external setpoint (via intercon‐ STRUCT -
nection) for channel 3 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_Ex_4 1 = Select external setpoint (via intercon‐ STRUCT -
nection) for channel 4 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_In_1* 1 = Select internal setpoint (via intercon‐ STRUCT -
nection) for channel 1 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_In_2* 1 = Select internal setpoint (via intercon‐ STRUCT -
nection) for channel 2 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_In_3* 1 = Select internal setpoint (via intercon‐ STRUCT -
nection) for channel 3 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_In_4* 1 = Select internal setpoint (via intercon‐ STRUCT -
nection) for channel 4 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP1Ext_1* 1. External setpoint for channel 1 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP2Ext_1* 2. External setpoint for channel 1 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP1Ext_2* 1. External setpoint for channel 2 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1324 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.8 ShrdResS - Multiplexer for shared resources (Small)

Parameter Description Type Default


SP2Ext_2* 2. External setpoint for channel 2 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP1Ext_3* 1. External setpoint for channel 3 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP2Ext_3* 2. External setpoint for channel 3 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP1Ext_4* 1. External setpoint for channel 4 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP2Ext_4* 2. External setpoint for channel 4 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
StepNo_1 Step number for channel 1 DWORD 16#00000000
StepNo_2 Step number for channel 2 DWORD 16#00000000
StepNo_3 Step number for channel 3 DWORD 16#00000000
StepNo_4 Step number for channel 4 DWORD 16#00000000

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


ActChnNo Displaying the allocated channel INT 0
AutMod 1= "Automatic mode" via interconnection STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation BOOL 0
BatchID Batch ID DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name S7-String
Cascaded 1 = Block is cascaded BOOL 0
CasOut 1 = Output parameter for cascade forma‐ DWORD 16#00000000
tion, to be interconnected with the input
parameter CasIn of the following
ShrdResS block
Ctrl01 1. Control command STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1325
Motor and valve blocks
7.8 ShrdResS - Multiplexer for shared resources (Small)

Parameter Description Type Default


Ctrl02 2. Control command STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Ctrl03 3. Control command STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Ctrl04 4. Control command STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Ctrl05 5. Control command STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Ctrl06 6. Control command STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CtrlW1 1. Available user control word DWORD 16#00000000
CtrlW2 2. Available user control word DWORD 16#00000000
ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without BOOL 0
errors
ErrorNum Output of current error number. For error INT -1
numbers that can be output by this block,
see ShrdResS error handling
(Page 1318)
ManMod 1 = "Manual mode" via interconnection STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ModLi 1 = Control via interconnection or SFC STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MultiOcc 1 = More than one channel request is BOOL 0
present
Occupied 1 = Occupied BOOL 0
Is also used as a control signal for the
channel allocation
Ready 1 = Active readiness STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RstLi 1 = Reset via interconnection STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP_ExtLi 1 = Select external setpoint (via intercon‐ STRUCT -
nection) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1326 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.8 ShrdResS - Multiplexer for shared resources (Small)

Parameter Description Type Default


SP_IntLi 1 = Select internal setpoint (via intercon‐ STRUCT -
nection) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP1Ext 1. External setpoint STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SP2Ext 2. External setpoint STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Status1 Status word 1 (Page 1312) DWORD 16#00000000
StepNo Step number DWORD 16#00000000

See also
ShrdResS modes (Page 1314)
ShrdResS messaging (Page 1318)
ShrdResS block diagram (Page 1327)

7.8.7 ShrdResS block diagram

ShrdResS block diagram


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

See also
Description for ShrdResS (Page 1312)
ShrdResS modes (Page 1314)
ShrdResS functions (Page 1315)
ShrdResS error handling (Page 1318)
ShrdResS messaging (Page 1318)
ShrdResS I/Os (Page 1319)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1327
Motor and valve blocks
7.8 ShrdResS - Multiplexer for shared resources (Small)

7.8.8 Operator control and monitoring

7.8.8.1 ShrdResS views

Views of the ShrdResS block


The block ShrdResS provides the following views:
● ShrdResS standard view (Page 1328)
● ShrdResS preview (Page 1330)
● Memo view (Page 315)
● Block icon for ShrdResS (Page 1331)
Refer to the sections Structure of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure
(Page 239) for general information on the faceplate and block icon.

7.8.8.2 ShrdResS standard view

ShrdResS standard view






 

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1328 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.8 ShrdResS - Multiplexer for shared resources (Small)

(1) Allocation
The allocation status is displayed in this area.
● "None": Display for Status1.Bit 10 = 0 and Status1.Bit 13 = 0
● "Requested": Display for Status1.Bit 10 = 1 and Status1.Bit 13 = 0
● "Active": Display for Status1.Bit 13 = 1

(2) Active channel


The channel number of the active channel is displayed in this area.
If text is configured for this command (Text 1 in the object properties), it is displayed as
additional text and button label for command selection. Additional information is available in
the section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218).
Use the ← button to switch to the standard view of the connected CasIn block.
Use the → button to switch to the standard view of the connected CasOut block.

(3) Resource
The status of the general enable signal is displayed in this area.
● "Idle": Display for ReadyIn = 1
● "Not ready": Display for ReadyIn = 0
Use the → button to switch to the standard view of the connected SelFpRes block.

(4) Release batch:


This area shows you if the block is released for operation via SIMATIC BATCH (BatchEn =
1).

(5) Batch name


This area shows the name of the batch that is currently running (Batchname).

(6) Batch ID
This area shows the identification number of the batch that is currently running (BatchID).

(7) Batch step


This area shows you the step number of the batch that is currently running (StepNo).

(8) Display channel 1-4


This area is only visible when the (9) "Expand" button is pressed.
The "Allocation" und "Release" status of channels 1-4 are displayed in this area.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1329
Motor and valve blocks
7.8 ShrdResS - Multiplexer for shared resources (Small)

(9) Expand / Collapse


This button enables or disables the display area (8). The label of the button changes
accordingly.

7.8.8.3 ShrdResS preview

ShrdResS preview

 





Each of the four channels has its own preview. The previews of the individual channels are
identical except for number (7) . The preview described here is based on channel 4.

(1) Allocation
The allocation status of the channel is displayed in this area.
● "No": Display for Occ_1 = 0
● "Requested": Display for Occ_1 = 1 and ActChnNo = 0
● "Active": Display for ActChnNo = 1

(2) Enable
The status of the enable is displayed in this area.
● "Yes": Display for ChnEn = 1
● "No": Display for ChnEn = 0

(3) Release batch:


This area shows you if the block is released for operation via SIMATIC BATCH (BatchEn =
1).

(4) Batch name


This area shows the name of the batch that is currently running (Batchname).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1330 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.8 ShrdResS - Multiplexer for shared resources (Small)

(5) Batch ID
This area shows the identification number of the batch that is currently running (BatchID).

(6) Batch step


This area shows you the step number of the batch that is currently running (StepNo).

(7) Button ←
Use the ← button to switch to the standard view of the cascaded ShrdResS block. This button
is only available for channel 4.

7.8.8.4 Block icon for ShrdResS

Block icons for ShrdResS


A variety of block icons are available with the following functions:
● Display active channel
● Process tag type (2 only)
● Memo display (2 only)
● Fixed text (language dependent, 2 only)

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV8.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special features


1
2

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV7.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special features


1
2

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1331
Motor and valve blocks
7.8 ShrdResS - Multiplexer for shared resources (Small)

Additional information on the block icon and the control options in the block icon is available
in the following chapters:
● Configuring the block icons (Page 246)
● Block icon structure (Page 239)
● Operation via the block icon (Page 248)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1332 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

7.9.1 Description of Vlv2WayL

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1897
Family: Drives

Area of application for Vlv2WayL


The block is used for the following applications:
● Control of multi-way valves with up to three switching positions. One of these positions is
the neutral position (de-energized position)
● Control of three individual valves (valve network) to implement a 2-way valve circuit with
neutral position (de-energized position)

How it works
The multi-way valve (or valve network) is controlled via position 0 (neutral position), position
1 (way 1), or position 2 (way 2). Various inputs are available for controlling the positions.

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38). The block is
also installed automatically in the startup OB (OB100).
For the Vlv2WayL block, the Advanced Process Library contains a template for process tag
types as an example with an application scenario for this block.
Example of process tag types:
● Two-way valve (Valve2Way) (Page 2432)

Startup characteristics
Use the Feature Bit Set startup characteristics (Page 141) to define the startup characteristics
of this block.
The messages are suppressed after startup for the number of cycles set at RunUpCyc.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1333
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


You can find a description for each parameter in section Vlv2WayL I/Os (Page 1350).

Status bit Parameter


0 Occupied
1 BatchEn
2 SimOn
3 OosAct.Value
4 OosLi.Value
5 AutoAct.Value
6 LocalAct.Value
7 0: Open padlock in the block icon
1: Closed padlock in the block icon
8 "Open"/"Closed" command for V0
9 "Open"/"Closed" command for V1
10 "Open"/"Closed" command for V2
11 Feedback error without control change
12 Feedback error due to control change
13 BypProt active
14 Invalid signal status
15 Mode switchover error
16 1 = Intlock is active
17 1 = Permit is active
18 1 = Protect is active
19 Display „Force Pos0“
20 Display „Force Pos1“
21 Display „Force Pos2“
22 Feedback for Pos0 OK
23 Feedback for Pos1 OK
24 Feedback for Pos2 OK
25 Feedback for current position OK
26 Automatic preview Pos0
27 Automatic preview Pos1
28 Automatic preview Pos2
29 SafeV0
30 SafeV1
31 SafeV2

Status word allocation for Status2 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 MsgLock
1 Forcing active

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1334 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

Status bit Parameter


2 Display for interlocks in block icon
3 WarnAct.Value
4 External error generated by FaultExt or external control system fault from CSF with
set Feature.Bit18 Activating error state for external process control error CSF
(Page 154)
5 For the status display error in the valve
6 Current monitoring time P0 is visible
7 Current monitoring time V0 is visible
8 Current monitoring time V1 is visible
9 Current monitoring time V2 is visible
10 Current monitoring time P1 is visible
11 Current monitoring time P2 is visible
12 1 = Input parameter FbkP1 is connected and Feature.Bit12 = 1
13 1 = Input parameter FbkP2 is connected and Feature.Bit12 = 1
14 1 = Input parameter FbkP0 is connected
15 1 = Input parameter FbkV0 is connected and Feature.Bit12 = 0
16 1 = Input parameter FbkV1 is connected and Feature.Bit12 = 0
17 1 = Input parameter FbkV2 is connected and Feature.Bit18 = 0
18 Reset request in automatic
19 1 = No impact of input signals on "local mode" with LocalSetting = 2 and
LocalSetting = 4
20 CtrlV0.Value
21 CtrlV1.Value
22 CtrlV2.Value
23 FbkV0Out.Value
24 FbkV1Out.Value
25 FbkV2Out.Value
26 FbkP0Out.Value
27 Feedback V0 (FbkV0), for OS display only
28 Feedback V1 (FbkV1), for OS display only
29 Feedback V2 (FbkV2), for OS display only
30 Bypass information from previous function block
31 MS_RelOp

Status word allocation for Status3 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 "Interlock" button is enabled
1 "Permission" button is enabled
2 "Protection" button is enabled
3 Pos0Out
4 Travel in position 0
5 Monitoring error in position 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1335
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

Status bit Parameter


6 Pos1Out
7 Travel in position 1
8 Monitoring error in position 1
9 Pos2Out
10 Travel in position 2
11 Monitoring error in position 2
12 Preview position 0 control CtrlV0
13 Preview position 0 control CtrlV1
14 Preview position 0 control CtrlV2
15 Preview position 1 control CtrlV0
16 Preview position 1 control CtrlV1
17 Preview position 1 control CtrlV2
18 Preview position 2 control CtrlV0
19 Preview position 2 control CtrlV1
20 Preview position 2 control CtrlV2
21 Preview for automatic control CtrlV0
22 Preview for automatic control CtrlV1
23 Preview for automatic control CtrlV2
24 UserAna1 interconnected
25 UserAna2 interconnected
26 Show automatic preview in the standard view
27 Not used
28 GrpErr.Value
29 RdyToStart.Value
30 1 = with position feedback messages (Feature.Bit12)
31 Not used

Status word allocation for Status4 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 Effective signal 1 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
1 Effective signal 2 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
2 Effective signal 3 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
3 Effective signal 4 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
4 Effective signal 5 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
5 Effective signal 6 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
6 Effective signal 7 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
7 Effective signal 8 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
8 - 15 Effective signal 9..16 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
16 - 22 Not used
23 Hidden bypass signal in Permit
24 Hidden bypass signal in interlock

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1336 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

Status bit Parameter


25 Hidden bypass signal in Protect
26 Feature2.Bit2: Separate bypass signal
27 1 = Input parameter CtrlV0ChnST is interconnected
28 1 = Input parameter CtrlV1ChnST is interconnected
29 1 = Input parameter CtrlV2ChnST is interconnected
30 - 31 Not used

See also
Vlv2WayL functions (Page 1339)
Vlv2WayL messaging (Page 1349)
Vlv2WayL block diagram (Page 1361)
Vlv2WayL error handling (Page 1346)
Vlv2WayL modes (Page 1337)
Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors (Page 43)

7.9.2 Vlv2WayL modes

Vlv2WayL operating modes


The block can be operated using the following modes:
● Local mode (Page 80)
● Automatic mode (Page 76)
● Manual mode (Page 76)
● Out of service (Page 72)
The next section provides additional block-specific information relating to the general
descriptions.

"Local mode"
You can find general information on "Local mode", switching modes and Bumpless switchover
in the Local mode (Page 80) section.
Valve actions you can control in "local mode":
● Travel to neutral position (Pos0Local = 1)
● Moving to position 1 (Pos1Local = 1)
● Moving to position 2 (Pos2Local = 1).
A block operated in "local mode" is controlled either by "local" signals (input parameters
Pos0Local = 1, Pos1Local = 1 and Pos2Local = 1) or by feedback signals (input

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1337
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

parameters FdbV0, FdbV1, FdbV2 and FdbP0; if no position can be assigned, the last valid
position is accepted). Configuration takes place via the input parameter LocalSetting.

"Automatic mode"
You can find general information on "Automatic mode", switching modes and Bumpless
switchover in the Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76) section.
Valve actions you can control in "automatic mode":
● Travel to neutral position (Pos0Aut = 1)
● Moving to position 1 (Pos1Aut = 1)
● Moving to position 2 (Pos2Aut = 1).

"Manual mode"
You can find general information on "Manual mode", switching modes and bumpless
switchover in the section Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers
(Page 76).
Valve actions you can control in "manual mode":
● Travel to neutral position (Pos0Man = 1)
● Moving to position 1 (Pos1Man = 1)
● Moving to position 2 (Pos2Man = 1).

"Out of service"
You can find general information about the "Out of service" mode in the section Out of
service (Page 72).
With Feature2.Bit1 =1 the following output parameter become the status of simulation
16#60, if mode is changed to "Out of service".
With Feature2.Bit1 =0 the following output parameter become the status of 16#80, if mode
is changed to "Out of service".
● FbkV0Out.ST
● FbkV1Out.ST
● FbkV2Out.ST
● FbkP0Out.ST
● FbkP1Out.ST
● FbkP2Out.ST
● Pos0.ST
● Pos1.ST
● Pos2.ST

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1338 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

See also
Vlv2WayL block diagram (Page 1361)
Vlv2WayL I/Os (Page 1350)
Vlv2WayL messaging (Page 1349)
Vlv2WayL error handling (Page 1346)
Vlv2WayL functions (Page 1339)
Description of Vlv2WayL (Page 1333)

7.9.3 Vlv2WayL functions

Functions of Vlv2WayL
The functions for this block are listed below.

Defining valve positions for individual valves


The control outputs for position 1 and position 2 can be selected individually with DefPos1
and DefPos2:

Route 1 or route 2 Control outputs


DefPos1 or DefPos2 Valve V0 (CtrlV0) Valve V1 (CtrlV1) Valve V2 (CtrlV2)
0 closed closed closed
1 closed closed open
2 closed open closed
3 closed open open
4 open closed closed
5 open closed open
6 open open closed
7 open open open

Position 0 is the neutral position (de-energized state) and cannot be configured. In position 0
all control outputs are de-energized (CtrlVx = 0).

Output signal as a pulse signal or static signal


This block provides the standard function Output signal as a static signal or pulse signal
(Page 52). In addition to the static control outputs CtrlV0, CtrlV1, CtrlV2, Pos0Out,
Pos1Out, Pos2Out, the block also has pulse outputs P_CtrlV0, P_CtrlV1, P_CtrlV2,
P_CtrlP0, P_CtrlP1, P_CtrlP2 which are output depending on the static control outputs.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1339
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

Neutral position
This block provides the standard function Neutral position for motors, valves and controllers
(Page 48). The neutral position (de-energized state) is set individually using parameters
SafeV0, SafeV1, SafeV2 for each valve (CtrlV0, CtrlV1, CtrlV2):
● SafeVx = 0 means that at CtrlVx = 0 the valve drive closes and at CtrlVx = 1 it opens
(de-energized state is "closed")
● SafeVx = 1 means that at CtrlVx = 0 the valve drive opens and at CtrlVx = 1 it closes(de-
energized state is "open")

Specify warning times for control functions


This block provides the standard function Specifying warning times for control functions at
motors and valves (Page 51). The warning signal is output before the valve moves into position
1 or position 2 . No warning signal is output for position 0 (neutral position).
You can generate warning signals when, for example, valves open. Warning signals can be
generated in the following modes:
● Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76) (Input parameter
WarnTiMan)
● Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76) (Input parameter
WarnTiAut)
You specify the warning times in seconds using the input parameters WarnTiMan and
WarnTiAut. If, for example, a valve opens then, this is displayed at the output parameter with
WarnAct = 1. The valve then opens after the set warning time has expired and WarnAct then
returns to 0.
A corresponding warning is not output if the warning times (WarnTiMan or WarnTiAut) are
specified with a smaller value than the SampleTime parameter.

Feedback monitoring
This block provides the standard function Monitoring the feedbacks (Page 98).
The monitoring of the feedback signal is dependent on Feature.Bit12 "Position feedback
signals are active (Page 172)".

Valve feedback signals are active (Feature.Bit12 = 0):


Startup characteristic monitoring is individually set up for every output signal CtrlV0, CtrlV1,
CtrlV2 via parameters MonTiV0Dynamic, MonTiV1Dynamic and MonTiV2Dynamic and
is set for position 0 via MonTiP0Dynamic. The parameter MonTiStatic monitors compliance
with the position.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1340 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

The position feedback signals (FbkP1, FbkP2) are not used to monitor the control outputs.

Note
The monitoring function does not take into consideration the neutral positions (SafeV0,
SafeV1, SafeV2), which means the feedback messages FbkV0, FbkV1, FbkV2 must
correspond to the CtrlV0, CtrlV1, CtrlV2 controls (e.g., CtrlV0 = 1 means the feedback
FbkV0 is monitored for "1").
FbkP0 must not occur for positions 1 or 2; at position 0, FbkV0, FbkV1 and FbkV2 must not
occur.
If there are several feedback messages for position 0 (e.g. with a valve network), these must
be combined using an upstream AND block at FbkP0.

Position feedback signals are active (Feature.Bit12 = 1):


Startup characteristic monitoring is individually set up for the position feedback signals
Pos1Out and Pos2Out via the parameters MonTiP1Dynamic and MonTiVP2Dynamic and
for position 0 via MonTiP0Dynamic. The MonTiStatic parameter monitors compliance with
the position.
The position feedback signals FbkP0, FbkP1 and FbkP2 are used to monitor the output signals
Pos0Out, Pos1Out and Pos2Out.

Note
The separate valve feedback signals(FbkV0, FbkV1, FbkV2) are not used to monitor the
control outputs.

Disabling feedback
This block provides the standard function Disabling feedback for valves (Page 100). Feedback
monitoring can be deactivated separately for each feedback with NoFbkV0, NoFbkV1,
NoFbkV2, NoFbkP0, NoFbkP1, NoFbkP2.

Suppressing messages using the MsgLock parameter


This block provides the standard function Suppressing messages using the MsgLock
parameter (Page 214).

Forcing operating modes


This block provides the standard function Forcing operating modes (Page 41). The inputs
Pos0Force, Pos1Force, Pos2Force force the block into position 0, position 1 or position
2.

Simulating signals
This block provides the standard function Simulating signals (Page 59)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1341
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

Interlocks
This block provides the following interlocks:
● Activation enable
● Interlock without reset ("Interlock")
● Interlock with reset ("Protection")
Refer to the Interlocks (Page 101) section for more on this.

Disabling interlocks
This block provides the standard function Disabling interlocks (Page 104).

Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors


This block provides the standard function Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors
(Page 43).

External error (FaultExt), external control system fault (CSF)


This block provides the possibility to pass an external error via the FaultExt parameter or
an external control system fault via the CSF parameter. See Vlv2WayL error handling
(Page 1346)

Group error
This block provides the standard function Outputting group errors (Page 124).
The following parameters are taken into consideration when forming the group error:
● CSF
● MonDynV0 only with valve feedback signals (Feature.Bit12 = 0)
● MonDynV1 only with valve feedback signals (Feature.Bit12 = 0)
● MonDynV2 only with valve feedback signals (Feature.Bit12 = 0)
● MonDynP0
● MonDynP1only with position feedback signals (Feature.Bit12 = 1)
● MonDynP2only with position feedback signals (Feature.Bit12 = 1)
● MonStaV0
● MonStaV1
● MonStaV2
● MonStaP0
● FaultExt

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1342 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

Outputting a signal for start readiness


This block provides the standard function Outputting a signal for start readiness (Page 54).

Forming the group status for interlocks


This block provides the standard function Forming the group status for interlock information
(Page 106).

Forming the signal status for blocks


This block provides the standard function Forming and outputting the signal status for
technologic blocks (Page 110).
The worst signal status ST_Worst for the block is formed from the following parameters:
● FbkV0Out.ST only with valve feedback signals (Feature.Bit12 = 0)
● FbkV1Out.ST only with valve feedback signals (Feature.Bit12 = 0)
● FbkV2Out.ST only with valve feedback signals (Feature.Bit12 = 0)
● FbkP0Out.ST
● FbkP1Out.STonly with position feedback signals (Feature.Bit12 = 1)
● FbkP2Out.STonly with position feedback signals (Feature.Bit12 = 1)
● LocalLi.ST
● Pos0Local.ST
● Pos1Local.ST
● Pos2Local.ST
● V0P0ChnST.ST
● V1P1ChnST.ST
● V2P2ChnST.ST
● Pos0Aut.ST (only if Feature2.Bit10 = 1)
● Pos1Aut.ST (only if Feature2.Bit10 = 1)
● Pos2Aut.ST (only if Feature2.Bit10 = 1)

Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values


If the Feature2 bit Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values
(Page 190) is set to 1 and one of the following parameters has bad signal status (16#00 or
16#28), the block goes to the neutral position in the "Automatic" mode:
● Pos0Aut.ST
● Pos1Aut.ST
● Pos2Aut.ST

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1343
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

Release for maintenance


This block provides the standard function Release for maintenance (Page 65).

Selecting a unit of measure


This block provides the standard function Selecting a unit of measure (Page 221).

Opening additional faceplates


This block provides the standard function Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

Generating instance-specific messages


This block provides the standard function Generating instance-specific messages (Page 213).

Operator permissions
This block provides the standard function Operator control permissions (Page 265).
The block has the following permissions for the OS_Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 1 = Operator can switch to "automatic mode"
1 1 = Operator can switch to "manual mode"
2 1 = Operator can switch to "local mode"
3 1 = Operator can switch to "Out of service" mode
4 1 = Operator can switch to position 0
5 1 = Operator can switch to position 1
6 1 = Operator can switch to position 2
7 1 = Operator can reset the valve
8 1 = Operator can define the monitoring time for startup
9 1 = Operator can define the monitoring time for the end position
10 1 = Operator can activate the monitoring time function (Bit 8 - 9)
11 Not used
12 1 = Operator can activate the Release for maintenance function
13 - 31 Not used

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1344 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

Configurable reactions with the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133) . The following functionality is
available for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
0 Set startup characteristics (Page 141)
1 Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 181)
2 Resetting the commands for changing the mode (Page 165)
3 Enabling resetting of commands for the control settings (Page 165)
4 Setting switch or button mode (Page 170)
9 Resetting via input signals in the event of interlocking (Protection) or errors (Page 167)
10 Exiting local mode (Page 181)
11 Activating the run time of feedback signals (Page 157)
12 Position feedback signals are active (Page 172)
17 Enabling bumpless switchover to automatic mode for valves, motors, and dosers (Page 177)
18 Activating error state for external process control error CSF (Page 154)
20 Disable calculation of impulse control in LocalSetting 2 and 4 (Page 190)
21 Enable bumpless switchover to "Automatic" mode for operator only (Page 176)
22 Update acknowledgment and error status of the message call (Page 163)
24 Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162)
25 Suppression of all messages (Page 178)
27 Interlock display with LocalSetting 2 or 4 (Page 182)
30 Set reset depending on the operating mode or the LiOp parameter (Page 167)
31 Activating reset of protection / error in manual mode (Page 168)

In pushbutton operation (Bit 4 = 0) the automatic commands in "automatic mode" are latching,
in other words Pos0Aut, Pos1Aut, Pos2Aut can be reset to 0 after switching to the selected
position. In "manual" and "local" modes, however, the automatic commands are not saved and
in the absence of automatic commands the position is tracked.
In switching mode (Bit 4 = 1) positions 1 and 2 are selected by static signals via inputs
Pos1Aut and Pos2Aut. If inputs Pos1Aut and Pos2Aut are not set, the block switches to
position 0. Control via Pos0Aut is not needed.

Configurable reactions using the Feature2 parameter

Bit Function
1 Changes signal status of outputs in OOS (Page 198)
2 Separate evaluation for excluded and simulated interlock signals (Page 155)
3 Control priority in the event of an invalid input command (Page 179)
4 Setting switch or button mode for local commands (Page 185)
5 Evaluation of the signal status of the interlock signals (Page 146)
8 Forcing operating modes in the "Local" mode (Page 188)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1345
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

Bit Function
10 Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values (Page 190)
11 Suppress MsgLock and “Out of service” mode for a connected message block (Page 192)

Displaying auxiliary values


This block provides the standard function Displaying auxiliary values (Page 220).

Connection of the time-stamped messages from EventTs or Event16Ts


This block provides the standard function Connection of the time-stamped messages from
EventTs or Event16Ts (Page 216).

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


This block provides the standard function SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

Button labels
This block provides the standard function Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218)
Instance-specific text can be configured for the following parameters:
● Pos0Man
● Pos1Man
● Pos2Man

See also
Description of Vlv2WayL (Page 1333)
Vlv2WayL messaging (Page 1349)
Vlv2WayL I/Os (Page 1350)
Vlv2WayL block diagram (Page 1361)
Vlv2WayL modes (Page 1337)
EventTs functions (Page 1698)

7.9.4 Vlv2WayL error handling

Vlv2WayL error handling


Refer to the section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions for the error handling
of all blocks.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1346 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

The following errors can be displayed for this block:


● Error numbers
● Mode switchover error
● Control system fault (CSF)
● Invalid input signals

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum I/O can be used to output the following error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; the block is not executed.
0 There is no error.
41 The value for the LocalSetting I/O is not within the approved limit of 0 to 4.
42 LocalSetting = 0 and LocalLi = 1
51 For ModLiOp = 1:
● AutModLi = 1 and ManModLi = 1
If "local mode" is enabled:
● Pos0Local = 1 and Pos1Local = 1
● Pos0Local = 1 and Pos2Local = 1
● Pos1Local = 1 and Pos2Local = 1
If "automatic mode" is enabled:
● Pos0Aut = 1 and Pos1Aut = 1
● Pos0Aut = 1 and Pos2Aut = 1
● Pos1Aut = 1 and Pos2Aut = 1
Generally:
● Pos0Force = 1 and Pos1Force = 1
● Pos0Force = 1 and Pos2Force = 1
● Pos1Force = 1 and Pos2Force = 1
52 LocalAct = 1 and LocalSetting = 2 or 4 and SimOn = 1

Mode switchover error


This error can be output by the block, see the section Error handling (Page 121).

Invalid input signals


This error can be output by the block, see the section Error handling (Page 121).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1347
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

For the following invalid input signals, the control output can be kept or switched to the neutral
position. This depends on the function Control priority in the event of an invalid input
command (Page 179).

Operating mode Invalid input signals Control reaction with


Feature2.Bit3 = 1
Local: Localsetting = 1 or Pushbutton operation for local mode Valve is set to Pos0.
Localsetting = 3 (Feature2.Bit4 = 0):
Pos1Local = 1 and Pos2Local = 1 or
Pos1Local = 1 and Pos0Local = 1 or
StopLocal = 1 and Pos2Local = 1
Switching mode (Feature2.Bit4 = 1):
Pos1Local = 1 and Pos2Local = 1
Local: Localsetting = 1 or Pos1Force = 1 and Pos2Force = 1 or
Localsetting = 3 and forc‐ Pos1Force = 1 and Pos0Force = 1 or
ing
Pos0Force = 1 and Pos2Force = 1
Forcing and no "local mode" Pos1Force = 1 and Pos2Force = 1 or
Pos1Force = 1 and Pos0Force = 1 or
Pos0Force = 1 and Pos2Force = 1
"Automatic mode" and no Pushbutton operation (Feature.Bit4 = 0):
forcing Pos1Aut = 1 and Pos2Aut = 1 or
Pos1Aut = 1 and Pos0Aut = 1 or
Pos0Aut = 1 and Pos2Aut = 1
Switching mode (Feature.Bit4 = 1):
Pos1Aut = 1 and Pos2Aut = 1
"Manual mode" and no forcing Pos1Man = 1 and Pos0Man = 1 or
Pos1Man = 1 and Pos0Man = 1 or
Pos0Man = 1 and Pos2Man = 1

Control system fault (CSF)


An external signal can be activated via the CSF input. A control system fault is triggered if this
signal changes to 1. Refer to the Error handling (Page 121) section for more on this.

See also
Vlv2WayL block diagram (Page 1361)
Vlv2WayL I/Os (Page 1350)
Vlv2WayL messaging (Page 1349)
Vlv2WayL functions (Page 1339)
Vlv2WayL modes (Page 1337)
Description of Vlv2WayL (Page 1333)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1348 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

7.9.5 Vlv2WayL messaging

Messaging
The following messages can be generated for this block:
● Process control fault
● Instance-specific messages

Process control fault


The following control system error messages can be output:

Message in‐ Message identi‐ Message class Event


stance fier
MsgEvId1 SIG 1 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
Position 0 feedback error (neutral
position)
SIG 2 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
Position 1 or 2 feedback error
SIG 3 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External error has occurred

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment
You can interconnect an external fault (signal) to input parameter CSF. If it changes to CSF =
1, a process control fault is triggered (MsgEvId1, SIG 3).

Instance-specific messages
You can use up to three instance-specific messages with this block.

Message in‐ Message identifier Message class Event


stance
MsgEvId1 SIG 4 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 1
SIG 5 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 2
SIG 6 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 3

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1349
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId1

Associated value Block parameters


1 BatchName
2 StepNo
3 BatchID
4 ExtVa104
5 ExtVa105
6 ExtVa106
7 ExtVa107
8 ExtVa108
9 Reserved
10 Reserved

The associated values 4 ... 8 are allocated to the parameters ExtVa104 ... ExtVa108 , and
can be used. Additional information is available in the "Process Control System PCS 7 -
Engineering System" manual.

See also
Description of Vlv2WayL (Page 1333)
Vlv2WayL functions (Page 1339)
Vlv2WayL I/Os (Page 1350)
Vlv2WayL block diagram (Page 1361)
Vlv2WayL error handling (Page 1346)
Vlv2WayL modes (Page 1337)

7.9.6 Vlv2WayL I/Os


I/Os of Vlv2WayL

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AutModLi* 1= "Automatic mode" via: STRUCT -
Interconnection or SFC (controlled via ● Value: BOOL ● 0
ModLiOp = 1) ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AutModOp* 1 = "Automatic mode" via operator (con‐ BOOL 0
trolled by ModLiOp = 0)
BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation BOOL 0
BatchID Batch ID DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name S7-String

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1350 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

Parameter Description Type Default


BypProt 1 = Bypassing interlock in "local mode" BOOL 0
and in "simulation"
CSF 1 = External error (control system fault) STRUCT -
Error handling (Page 121) ● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
DefPos1 Output signal parameter setting for posi‐ INT 3
tion 1
DefPos2 Output signal parameter setting for posi‐ INT 6
tion 2
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1
EventTsIn For interconnecting data between a tech‐ ANY
nology block and the message blocks
EventTs, Event16Ts.
The EventTsIn input parameter serves
to interconnect the EventTsOut output
parameter of the EventTs, Event16Ts
block. When this interconnection is con‐
figured, the messages of the EventTs,
Event16Ts block are displayed on the
OS in the alarm view of the technology
block and can also be acknowledged
there.
ExtMsg1 Binary input for freely selectable mes‐ STRUCT -
sage 1 ● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg2 Binary input for freely selectable mes‐ STRUCT -
sage 2 ● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg3 Binary input for freely selectable mes‐ STRUCT -
sage 3 ● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
ExtVa104 Associated value 4 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa105 Associated value 5 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa106 Associated value 6 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa107 Associated value 7 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa108 Associated value 8 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
FaultExt 1 = External error STRUCT -
Error handling (Page 121) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1351
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

Parameter Description Type Default


FbkP0 1 = Feedback for position 0 STRUCT -
● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#FF
FbkP1 1 = Feedback for position 1 STRUCT -
● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#FF
FbkP2 1 = Feedback for position 2 STRUCT -
● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#FF
FbkV0 1 = Feedback for control output CtrlV0 STRUCT -
● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#FF
FbkV1 1 = Feedback for control output CtrlV1 STRUCT -
● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#FF
FbkV2 1 = Feedback for control output CtrlV2 STRUCT -
● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#FF
Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 1339) STRUCT -
● Bit:0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
Feature2 I/O for additional functions (Page 1339) STRUCT -
● Bit:0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
Intlock 0 = Interlocking without reset is active; STRUCT -
you can operate the block without reset ● Value:BOOL ● 1
once the interlocking condition has dis‐
appeared ● ST:BYTE ● 16#FF
1 = Interlock not activated ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
Intl_En 1 = Interlock without reset (interlock, BOOL 1
Intlock parameter) is active
LocalLi 1 = Activate "local mode" via plant signals STRUCT -
● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
LocalOp* 1 = "Local mode" via operator BOOL 0
LocalSetting Properties for the Local mode (Page 80) INT 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1352 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

Parameter Description Type Default


ManModLi* 1 = "Manual mode" via interconnection STRUCT -
or SFC (controlled by ModLiOp = 1) ● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
ManModOp* 1 = "Manual mode" via OS operator (con‐ BOOL 1
trolled by ModLiOp = 0)
ModLiOp Switchover of operating mode between: STRUCT -
0 = Operator ● Value:BOOL ● 0
1 = Interconnection or SFC ● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
Monitor 1 = Feedback monitoring BOOL 1
MonSafePos 1 = Go to neutral position in the event of BOOL 1
monitoring errors
MonTiP0Dynamic* Monitoring time for position 0 after oper‐ REAL 3.0
ation in [s]
MonTiP1Dynamic* Monitoring time for position 1 after oper‐ REAL 3.0
ation in [s]
MonTiP2Dynamic* Monitoring time for position 2 after oper‐ REAL 3.0
ation in [s]
MonTiV0Dynamic* Monitoring time for feedback errors REAL 3.0
FdbV0 after operation in [s]
MonTiV1Dynamic* Monitoring time for feedback errors REAL 3.0
FdbV1 after operation in [s]
MonTiV2Dynamic* Monitoring time for feedback errors REAL 3.0
FdbV2 after operation in [s]
MonTiStatic* Monitoring time for feedback errors with‐ REAL 3.0
out operation in [s]
MS_RelOp* 1= Release for maintenance via OS op‐ BOOL 0
erator
MsgEvId1 Message number (assigned automatical‐ DWORD 16#00000000
ly)
MsgLock 1 = Suppress process messages. STRUCT -
See also the section Suppressing mes‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
sages using the MsgLock parameter ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
(Page 214) for more on this.
NoFbkP0 1 = Feedback for position 0 not present BOOL 0
NoFbkP1 1 = Feedback for position 1 not present BOOL 0
NoFbkP2 1 = Feedback for position 2 not present BOOL 0
NoFbkV0 1 = Feedback for control output CtrlV0 BOOL 0
not present
NoFbkV1 1 = Feedback for control output CtrlV1 BOOL 0
not present
NoFbkV2 1 = Feedback for control output CtrlV2 BOOL 0
not present
Occupied 1 = In use by a batch BOOL 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1353
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

Parameter Description Type Default


OosLi 1 = "Out of service", via interconnection STRUCT -
or SFC (0-1 edge transition) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosOp* 1 = "Out of service", via OS operator BOOL 0
OpSt_In Input parameter for local operator au‐ DWORD 16#00000000
thorization, connected with the Out out‐
put parameter of the upstream block,
OpStations (Page 423)
OS_Perm I/O for operator permissions STRUCT -
(Page 1339) ● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● ... ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
Permit 1 = Enable for opening / closing from STRUCT -
neutral position ● Value:BOOL ● 1
0 = Valve activation not enabled on OS ● ST:BYTE ● 16#FF
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
Perm_En 1 = Activation enable (enable, Permit BOOL 1
parameter) is active
Pos0Aut* 1 = Select position 0 in "automatic mode" STRUCT -
● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
Pos0Force 1 = Force position 0 STRUCT -
● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
Pos0Local 1 = Select position 0 in "local mode" STRUCT -
● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
Pos0Man* 1 = Select position 0 in "manual mode" BOOL 0
Pos1Aut* 1 = Select position 1 in "automatic mode" STRUCT -
● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
Pos1Force 1 = Force position 1 STRUCT -
● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
Pos1Local 1 = Select position 1 in "local mode" STRUCT -
● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
Pos1Man* 1 = Select position 1 in "manual mode" BOOL 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1354 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

Parameter Description Type Default


Pos2Aut* 1 = Select position 2 in "automatic mode" STRUCT -
● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
Pos2Force 1 = Force position 2 STRUCT -
● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
Pos2Local 1 = Select position 2 in "local mode" STRUCT -
● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
Pos2Man* 1 = Select position 2 in "manual mode" BOOL 0
Protect 0 = Protective interlocking is effective; STRUCT -
once the interlocking condition has dis‐ ● Value:BOOL ● 1
appeared, you will have to reset the block
● ST:BYTE ● 16#FF
1 = Protective interlocking not activated
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
Prot_En 1 = Protective interlock (protection, BOOL 1
Protect parameter) is active
PulseWidth* Pulse width of control signal [s] REAL 3.0
RstLi* 1 = Reset via interconnection STRUCT -
● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
RstOp* 1 = Reset via operator BOOL 0
RunUpCyc Number of cycles in startup; messages INT 3
are suppressed during these cycles
SafeV0 Neutral position for valve V0 (CtrlV0): BOOL 0
1= Open
0 = Closed
SafeV1 Neutral position for valve V1 (CtrlV1): BOOL 0
1= Open
0 = Closed
SafeV2 Neutral position for valve V2 (CtrlV2): BOOL 0
1= Open
0 = Closed
SampleTime Sampling time [s] (assigned automatical‐ REAL 0.1
ly)
SimLiOp Activation/deactivation of the simulation STRUCT -
by: ● Value: BOOL ● 0
0 = Operator ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
1 = Interconnection or SFC
SimOnLi 1 = Simulation via interconnection or STRUCT -
SFC (controlled by SimLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1355
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

Parameter Description Type Default


SimOn* 1 = Simulation on BOOL 0
SelFp1 Call a block saved in this parameter as ANY
an additional faceplate (Page 217) in the
standard view
SelFp2 Call a block saved in this parameter as ANY
an additional faceplate (Page 217) in the
preview
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
UserAna1 Analog auxiliary value 1 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
UA1unit Unit of measure for analog auxiliary val‐ INT 0
ue 1
UserAna2 Analog auxiliary value 2 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
UA2unit Unit of measure for analog auxiliary val‐ INT 0
ue 2
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use in PCS 7 BYTE 16#00
OS
V0P0ChnST Signal status of output channel for STRUCT -
CtrlV0 or Pos0Out ● Value: BOOL ● 0
Should be connected to an output chan‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
nel block
V1P1ChnST Signal status of output channel for STRUCT -
CtrlV1 or Pos1Out ● Value: BOOL ● 0
Should be connected to an output chan‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
nel block
V2P2ChnST Signal status of output channel for STRUCT -
CtrlV2 or Pos2Out ● Value: BOOL ● 0
Should be connected to an output chan‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
nel block
WarnTiAut Prewarning for valve movement into po‐ REAL 0.0
sition 1 or position 2 in "automatic mode"
in [s]
WarnTiMan Prewarning for valve movement into po‐ REAL 0.0
sition 1 or position 2 in "manual mode"
in [s]

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1356 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AutAct 1 = "Automatic mode" enabled STRUCT -
0 = "Manual mode" is enabled ● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
AutoST 1 = Worst signal status of automatic com‐ BYTE 16#80
mands
CtrlV0 Control output V0 STRUCT -
● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
CtrlV1 Control output V1 STRUCT -
● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
CtrlV2 Control output V2 STRUCT -
● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
CurrMonP0 Remaining monitoring time P0 [s] DINT 0
CurrMonP1 Remaining monitoring time P1 [s] DINT 0
CurrMonP2 Remaining monitoring time P2 [s] DINT 0
CurrMonV0 Remaining monitoring time V0 [s] DINT 0
CurrMonV1 Remaining monitoring time V1 [s] DINT 0
CurrMonV2 Remaining monitoring time V2 [s] DINT 0
ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without BOOL 0
errors
ErrorNum Output of pending error number. For er‐ INT -1
ror numbers that can be output by this
block, see Vlv2WayL error handling
(Page 1346)
FbkP0Out Feedback from position 0 STRUCT -
● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
FbkP1Out Feedback from position 1 STRUCT -
● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
FbkP2Out Feedback from position 2 STRUCT -
● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
FbkV0Out Control output feedback CtrlV0 STRUCT -
● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
FbkV1Out Control output feedback CtrlV1 STRUCT -
● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1357
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

Parameter Description Type Default


FbkV2Out Control output feedback CtrlV2 STRUCT -
● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
GrpErr 1 = Group error pending STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
LocalAct 1 = "Local mode" enabled STRUCT -
● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
LockAct 1 = Interlock (Intlock, Permit or STRUCT -
Protect) is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManAct 1 = "Manual mode" enabled STRUCT -
● Value:BOOL ● 1
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
MonDynP0 1 = Feedback error for position 0 due to STRUCT -
a control change ● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
MonDynP1 1 = Feedback error for position 1 due to STRUCT -
a control change ● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
MonDynP2 1 = Feedback error for position 2 due to STRUCT -
a control change ● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
MonDynV0 1 = Feedback error for FdbV0 due to STRUCT -
control change ● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
MonDynV1 1 = Feedback error for FdbV1 due to STRUCT -
control change ● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
MonDynV2 1 = Feedback error for FdbV2 due to STRUCT -
control change ● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
MonStaP0 1 = Feedback error for position 0 due to STRUCT -
an unexpected feedback change ● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
MonStaP1 1 = Feedback error for position 1 due to STRUCT -
an unexpected feedback change ● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1358 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

Parameter Description Type Default


MonStaP2 1 = Feedback error for position 2 due to STRUCT -
an unexpected feedback change ● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
MonStaV0 1 = Feedback error FdbV0 due to unex‐ STRUCT -
pected feedback change ● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
MonStaV1 1 = Feedback error FdbV1 due to unex‐ STRUCT -
pected feedback change ● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
MonStaV2 1 = Feedback error FdbV2 due to unex‐ STRUCT -
pected feedback change ● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
MS_Release Release for maintenance: STRUCT -
1 = Release for OS operator ● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
MsgAckn1 Message acknowledgement status 1 WORD 16#0000
(output ACK_STATE of first ALARM_8P)
MsgErr1 Alarm error 1 (output ERROR of first BOOL 0
ALARM_8P)
MsgStat1 Message status 1 (output STATUS of first WORD 16#0000
ALARM_8P)
OosAct 1 = Block is "out of service" STRUCT -
● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
OpSt_Out Value of the OpSt_In input parameter, DWORD 16#00000000
for feedforwarding to other blocks. Bit 31
of this parameter is used by
Feature.Bit24
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with settings DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
changed by the block algorithm
P_CtrlP0 1 = Pulse signal for moving the valve to STRUCT -
position 0 ● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
P_CtrlP1 1 = Pulse signal for moving the valve to STRUCT -
position 1 ● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
P_CtrlP2 1 = Pulse signal for moving the valve to STRUCT -
position 2 ● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
P_CtrlV0 1 = Pulse signal for moving the valve to STRUCT -
route 0 (V0) ● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1359
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

Parameter Description Type Default


P_CtrlV1 1 = Pulse signal for moving the valve to STRUCT -
route 1 (V1) ● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
P_CtrlV2 1 = Pulse signal for moving the valve to STRUCT -
route 2 (V2) ● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
P_Rst 1= Pulse output for reset STRUCT -
The parameter persists for one cycle af‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
ter a reset. ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Pos0 1 = Pos0 is reached STRUCT -
● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
Pos1 1 = Pos1 is reached STRUCT -
● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
Pos2 1 = Pos2 is reached STRUCT -
● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
Pos0Out 1 = Position 0 is active STRUCT -
● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
Pos1Out 1 = Position 1 is active STRUCT -
● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
Pos2Out 1 = Position 2 is active STRUCT -
● Value:BOOL ● 0
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80
RdyToReset 1 = Ready for reset via RstLi input or STRUCT -
commands in "local", "automatic", or ● Value: BOOL ● 0
"manual mode"
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RdyToStart 1 = Active start readiness STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
Status1 Status word 1 (Page 1333) DWORD 16#00000000
Status2 Status word 2 (Page 1333) DWORD 16#00000000
Status3 Status word 3 (Page 1333) DWORD 16#00000000
Status4 Status word 4 (Page 1333) DWORD 16#00000000
WarnAct 1 = Prewarning for valve movement to STRUCT -
position 1 or position 2 enabled (param‐ ● Value:BOOL ● 0
eter WarnTiAut and WarnTiMan)
● ST:BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1360 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

See also
Vlv2WayL messaging (Page 1349)
Vlv2WayL block diagram (Page 1361)
Vlv2WayL modes (Page 1337)
Error handling (Page 121)

7.9.7 Vlv2WayL block diagram

Vlv2WayL block diagram


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

See also
Vlv2WayL I/Os (Page 1350)
Vlv2WayL messaging (Page 1349)
Vlv2WayL error handling (Page 1346)
Vlv2WayL functions (Page 1339)
Vlv2WayL modes (Page 1337)
Description of Vlv2WayL (Page 1333)

7.9.8 Operator control and monitoring

7.9.8.1 Vlv2WayL views

Views of the Vlv2WayL block


The block Vlv2WayL provides the following views:
● Vlv2WayL standard view (Page 1362)
● Alarm view (Page 313)
● Trend view (Page 317)
● Vlv2WayL parameter view (Page 1365)
● Vlv2WayL preview (Page 1367)
● Memo view (Page 315)
● Batch view (Page 313)
● Block icon for Vlv2WayL (Page 1372)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1361
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

Refer to the sections Structure of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure
(Page 239) for general information on the faceplate and block icon.

7.9.8.2 Vlv2WayL standard view

Vlv2WayL standard view


 

 


 





(1) Displaying and switching the operating mode


This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
● Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76)
● Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76)
● Local mode (Page 80)
● Out of service (Page 72)
Refer to section Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) for information
on switching the operating mode.

(2) Selecting the position for 2-way valve


This area shows you the default operating state for the valve. The following states can be
shown and executed here:
● "Pos0"
● "Pos1"
● "Pos2"
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for information
on changing the state.
If text is configured for these commands, it is displayed as status text and as button labels for
command selection. You can find more information about this in section Labeling of buttons
and text (Page 218)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1362 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

(3) Resetting the block


Click "Reset" for interlocks or errors. You can find additional information on this in the section
Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors (Page 43).

(4) Operating range for the interlock functions of the block


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
You can use this button to control the interlock functions of the block. You can find additional
information on this in the section Interlocking functions (Page 101).
The following is displayed in addition to the buttons:
● Interlock status (see Forming the group status for interlock information (Page 106)), e.g.:

● Signal status (see Forming and outputting the signal status for technologic blocks
(Page 110)), e.g.:

● Bypass information (see Forming the group status for interlock information (Page 106)):

(5) Display of auxiliary values


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
You can use this area to display two auxiliary values that have been configured in the
engineering system (ES). You can find additional information on this in the section Displaying
auxiliary values (Page 220).

(6) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
Use this navigation button to open the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system (ES). The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the
engineering system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in the section Opening additional faceplates
(Page 217).

(7) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Maintenance"
Additional information on this is available in section Release for maintenance (Page 65) Display
area for block states.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1363
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

(8) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Simulation"
● "Delay"
You will find more detailed information on this in the sections Simulating signals (Page 59) and
Display of delay times (Page 267).

(9) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "External error"
● "End position error"
● "Control error"
● "Invalid signal"
● "Changeover error"
Additional information on these errors is available in the sections Monitoring the feedbacks
(Page 98) , Error handling (Page 121) (section "Invalid input signals" and "Mode switchover
error") and Motor protection function (Page 100).

(10) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Force Pos0"
● "Force Pos1"
● "Force Pos2"
● "Request 0/1": A reset to "automatic mode" is expected.
You can find additional information on this in the section Forcing operating modes (Page 41).

(11) Automatic preview


This display is only visible in "manual mode", in "local mode", or with a reset request in
"automatic mode", when the current output signals are not identical to the control in "automatic
mode".
The display shows what state the valve would assume if you switched from "manual" or "local"
mode to "automatic mode", or performed a reset to "automatic mode".

(12) Status display of the valve


You can find additional information on this in the section Block icon for Vlv2WayL
(Page 1372).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1364 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

(13) Neutral position of the valve


The neutral position of the valve is shown here.
If the neutral position of the valve is "Closed" (SafePos = 0), a gray valve is shown.
If the neutral position of the valve is "Open" (SafePos = 0), a green valve is shown.

7.9.8.3 Vlv2WayL parameter view

Parameter view of Vlv2WayL

Two-way valve with separate valve feedback signals (Feature.Bit12 = 0)

Two-way valve with position feedback signals (Feature.Bit12 = 1)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1365
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

(1) Monitoring
In this area, you change parameters and therefore influence the valve. Refer to the Changing
values (Page 270) section for more on this.
You can influence the following parameters:
● "Control P0": Monitoring time while "opening"/"closing" the valve
● "Control P1": Monitoring time while "opening"/"closing" the valve
● "Control P2": Monitoring time while "opening"/"closing" the valve
● "Control V0": Monitoring time while "opening"/"closing" the valve
● "Control V1": Monitoring time while "opening"/"closing" the valve
● "Control V2": Monitoring time while "opening"/"closing" the valve
● "End position": Monitoring time for maintaining the valve position

Enable monitoring
You can enable monitoring by selecting the check box (☑)
You can find additional information on this in the section Monitoring the feedbacks (Page 98).

(2) Service
You can select the following functions in this area:
● "Simulation"
● "Release for maintenance"
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for more on
this.

(3) Enabled operation


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Icons for enabled operation:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1366 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

7.9.8.4 Vlv2WayL preview

Preview of Vlv2WayL
Two-way valve with single value feedback signals (Feature.Bit12 = 0)

The preview has an upper half and a lower half. You can change between the two halves with
the arrow keys.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1367
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

Two-way valve with position feedback signals (Feature.Bit12 = 1)

The preview has an upper half and a lower half. You can change between the two halves with
the arrow keys.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1368 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

(1) Automatic preview


This area shows you the block status after it has switched from the "Manual" mode or "Local"
mode to the "Automatic" mode.
If the block is in "Automatic" mode, the current block state is displayed.
This area also displays the worst signal status of the following automatic commands:
● Pos0Aut
● Pos1Aut
● Pos2Aut

(2) Preview area


The following enabled operations are shown here:
● "Monitoring time P0": Display of the remaining monitoring time P0 (Feature.Bit12 = 1)
● "Monitoring time P1": Display of the remaining monitoring time P1 (Feature.Bit12 = 1)
● "Monitoring time P2": Display of the remaining monitoring time P2 (Feature.Bit12 = 1)
● "Monitoring time V0": Display of the remaining monitoring time V0 (Feature.Bit12 = 0)
● "Monitoring time V1": Display of the remaining monitoring time V1 (Feature.Bit12 = 0)
● "Monitoring time V2": Display of the remaining monitoring time V2 (Feature.Bit12 = 0)

(3) Enable operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1369
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

Icons for enabled operation:


● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)
The following enabled operations are shown here:
● "Pos0": You can set the valve to position 0.
If text is configured for this command, it is also displayed in brackets. You can find additional
information on this in the section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218).
● "Pos1": You can set the valve to position 1.
If text is configured for this command, it is also displayed in brackets. You can find additional
information on this in the section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218).
● "Pos2": You can set the valve to position 2.
If text is configured for this command, it is also displayed in brackets. You can find additional
information on this in the section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218).
● "Reset": You can reset the valve if errors occur.
● "Automatic": You can switch to "automatic mode".
● "Manual": You can switch to "manual mode".
● "Local": You can switch to "local mode".
● "Out of service": You can switch to "Out of service" operating mode.
● "Local operator permission": Use the ← button to switch to the standard view of the
OpStations block. You can find additional information on this in the section Operator control
permissions (Page 265).

(4) Specified Position


Preview of the valve positions, as configured in the engineering system (ES).

(5) Displaying current control signals


This area shows the most important parameters for this block with the current selection:
● "Permission":
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Valve activation not enabled on OS
– 1 = Enable for "starting"/"stopping" from the neutral position
● "Protection":
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Protective interlocking is effective; once the interlocking condition has disappeared,
you will have to reset the block
– 1 = "Good" state

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1370 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

● "Interlock":
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Interlocking without reset is active; you can operate the block without reset once the
interlocking condition has disappeared
– 1 = "Good" state
● "Local correct": 1 = Control signal for "Local mode" (LocalLi) is active
● "Local Pos0": 1 = Block was set to position 0 in "local mode"
● "Local Pos1": 1 = Block was set to position 1 in "local mode"
● "Local Pos2": 1 = Block was set to position 2 in "local mode"
● "Interlock deact.":
– 0 = Bypass disabled
– 1 = Bypassing interlock in "local mode" and in "simulation"
Control and feedback signals with Feature.Bit12 = 0
● "Control Pos0": 1 = Control signal for the position 0
● "Control V0": 1 = Control signal for the valve 0
● "Control V1": 1 = Control signal for the valve 1
● "Control V2": 1 = Control signal for the valve 2
● "Feedback Pos0": 1 = Valve is in position 0
● "Feedback V0": 1 = Feedback if valve 0 was opened
● "Feedback V1": 1 = Feedback if valve 1 was opened
● "Feedback V2": 1 = Feedback if valve 2 was opened
Control and feedback signals with Feature.Bit12 = 1
● "Control Pos0": 1 = Control signal for the position 0
● "Control Pos1": 1 = Control signal for the position 1
● "Control Pos2": 1 = Control signal for the position 2
● "Feedback Pos0": 1 = Valve is in position 0
● "Feedback Pos1": 1 = Valve is in position 1
● "Feedback Pos2": 1 = Valve is in position 2
Control signals of the output channel block
● "Channel control V0 P0": Control signal for V0 or P0 of the output channel block
● "Channel control V1 P1": Control signal for V1 or P1 of the output channel block
● "Channel control V2 P2": Control signal for V2 or P2 of the output channel block

(6) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1371
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

Use this navigation button to open the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system (ES). The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the
engineering system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in the section Opening additional faceplates
(Page 217).

7.9.8.5 Block icon for Vlv2WayL

Properties of the Vlv2WayLblock icon


A variety of block icons are available with the following functions:
● Process tag type
● Limits (high/low)
● Violation of alarm, warning, and tolerance limits as well as the control system fault
● Operating modes
● Signal status, release for maintenance
● Forcing states
● Displays for bypassing interlocks
● Interlocks
● Memo display
● Valve status display

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV8.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special features


1

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1372 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV7.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special features


1 Block icon in the full display

10

- Block icon in "Out of service"


mode (example with type 1 block
icon)

Additional information on the block icon and the control options in the block icon is available
in the following sections:
● Configuring the block icons (Page 246)
● Block icon structure (Page 239)
● Operation via the block icon (Page 248)

Valve status display


The following valve states are shown here:

Icon Meaning
Valve open

Error at valve

Valve is opening

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1373
Motor and valve blocks
7.9 Vlv2WayL - Two-way valve

Icon Meaning
Valve closed

Valve is closing

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1374 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.10 VlvL - Valve (Large)

7.10 VlvL - Valve (Large)

7.10.1 Description of VlvL

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1899
Family: Drives

Area of application for VlvL


The block is used for the following applications:
● Controlling a valve in two positions ("open"/"closed") with adjustable neutral position

Note
This block is also available as a small block. A comparison of the VlvL and VlvS blocks is
available in the section: VlvL compared to VlvS (Page 1092)

How it works
The valve is opened or closed by a control signal. The signal 0 corresponds to the de-energized
state (neutral position) of the valve.
The control is monitored by the "open"/"close" (feedback) signals. Missing feedback can be
derived from the control in the block.
Various inputs are available for control purposes. The next sections provide more detailed
information on configuration, operating principles, visualization and operation.

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38). The block is
also installed automatically in the startup OB (OB100).
For the VlvL block, the Advanced Process Library contains a template for process tag types
as an example with an application scenario for this block.
Example of process tag types:
● Valve (Valve_Lean) (Page 2431)

Startup characteristics
Use the Feature Bit Set startup characteristics (Page 141) to define the startup characteristics
of this block.
The messages are suppressed after startup for the number of cycles set at RunUpCyc.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1375
Motor and valve blocks
7.10 VlvL - Valve (Large)

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


You can find a description for each parameter in section VlvL I/Os (Page 1389).

Status bit Parameter


0 Occupied
1 BatchEn
2 SimOn
3 OosAct.Value
4 OosLi.Value
5 AutoAct.Value
6 LocalAct.Value
7 0: Open padlock in the block icon
1: Closed padlock in the block icon
8 "Open"/"Closed" command (1 = "Open")
9 FbkOpenOut.Value
10 FbkCloseOut.Value
11 Feedback error without control change
12 Feedback error due to control change
13 BypProt
14 Invalid signal status
15 Mode switchover error
16 1 = Intlock is active
17 1 = Permit is active
18 1 = Protect is active
19 Display „Forced open“
20 Display „Forced close“
21 Force
22 Automatic preview (1 = "Open")
23 Bumpless switchover to "automatic mode" enabled
24 SafePos
25 UserAna1 interconnected
26 UserAna2 interconnected
27 WarnAct.Value
28 For the Error status display in the Closed valve
29 For the Error status display in the Opened valve
30 External error generated by FaultExt or external control system fault from CSF with
set Feature.Bit18 Activating error state for external process control error CSF
(Page 154)
31 1 = Input parameter CtrlChnST is interconnected

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1376 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.10 VlvL - Valve (Large)

Status word allocation for Status2 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 MsgLock
1 Not used
2 Display for interlocks in block icon
3 - 15 Not used
16 1 = Input parameter FbkClose is connected
17 1 = Input parameter FbkOpen is connected
18 Reset request in automatic
19 1 = No impact of input signals on "local mode" with LocalSetting = 2 and
LocalSetting = 4
20 1 = Valve open
21 1 = Valve closed
22 1 = Valve opens
23 1 = Valve closes
24 - 29 Not used
30 Bypass information from previous function block
31 MS_RelOp

Status word allocation for Status3 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 Effective signal 1 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
1 Effective signal 2 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
2 Effective signal 3 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
3 Effective signal 4 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
4 Effective signal 5 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
5 Effective signal 6 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
6 Effective signal 7 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
7 Effective signal 8 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
8 "Interlock" button is enabled
9 "Permission" button is enabled
10 "Protection" button is enabled
11 Hidden bypass signal in Permit
12 Hidden bypass signal in interlock
13 Hidden bypass signal in Protect
14 Feature2.Bit2: Separate bypass signal
15 Current monitoring time is visible
15 - 25 Not used
26 Show automatic preview in the standard view
27 Not used
28 GrpErr.Value

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1377
Motor and valve blocks
7.10 VlvL - Valve (Large)

Status bit Parameter


29 RdyToStart.Value
30 - 31 Not used

Status word allocation for Status4 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0-7 Effective signal 9..16 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
8 - 31 Not used

See also
VlvL functions (Page 1380)
VlvL messaging (Page 1387)
Overview of the modes (Page 70)
VlvL block diagram (Page 1396)
VlvL error handling (Page 1386)
VlvL modes (Page 1378)
Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors (Page 43)

7.10.2 VlvL modes

VlvL operating modes


The block supports all standard modes:
● Local mode (Page 80)
● Automatic mode (Page 76)
● Manual mode (Page 76)
● Out of service (Page 72)
The next section provides additional block-specific information relating to the general
descriptions.

"Local mode"
You can find general information on "Local mode", switching modes and Bumpless switchover
in the Local mode (Page 80) section.
Valve actions you can control in "local mode":
● "Open" (OpenLocal = 1)
● "Close" (CloseLocal = 1)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1378 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.10 VlvL - Valve (Large)

A block operated in "local mode" is controlled either by "local" signals or by feedback signals
(input parameters FbkOpen and FbkClose; if no position can be assigned, the last valid
position is accepted). Configuration takes place via the input parameter LocalSetting.

"Automatic mode"
You can find general information on "Automatic mode", switching modes and Bumpless
switchover in the Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76) section.
Valve actions you can control in "automatic mode":
● "Open" (OpenAut = 1)
● "Close" (CloseAut = 1)

"Manual mode"
You can find general information on "Manual mode", switching modes and bumpless
switchover in the section Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers
(Page 76).
Valve actions you can control in "manual mode":
● "Open" (OpenMan = 1)
● "Close" (CloseMan = 1)

"Out of service"
You can find general information about the "Out of service" mode in the section Out of
service (Page 72).
With Feature2.Bit1 =1 the following output parameter become the status of simulation
16#60, if mode is changed to "Out of service".
With Feature2.Bit1 =0 the following output parameter become the status of 16#80, if mode
is changed to "Out of service".
● FbkOpenOut.ST
● FbkCloseOut.ST
● Opened.ST
● Closed.ST
● Opening.ST
● Closing.ST

See also
Description of VlvL (Page 1375)
VlvL block diagram (Page 1396)
VlvL I/Os (Page 1389)
VlvL messaging (Page 1387)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1379
Motor and valve blocks
7.10 VlvL - Valve (Large)

VlvL error handling (Page 1386)


VlvL functions (Page 1380)

7.10.3 VlvL functions

Functions of VlvL
The functions for this block are listed below.

Opening additional faceplates


This block provides the standard function Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

Operator permissions
This block provides the standard function Operator control permissions (Page 265).
The block has the following permissions for the OS_Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 1 = Operator can switch to "automatic mode"
1 1 = Operator can switch to "manual mode"
2 1 = Operator can switch to "local mode"
3 1 = Operator can switch to "Out of service" mode
4 1 = Operator can open the valve
5 1 = Operator can close the valve
6 1 = Operator can reset the valve
7 1 = Operator can define the monitoring time for startup
8 1 = Operator can define the monitoring time for the end position
9 1 = Operator can activate the monitoring time function (Bit 7 - 8)
10 Not used
11 1 = Operator can activate the Release for maintenance function
12 - 31 Not used

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1380 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.10 VlvL - Valve (Large)

Interlocks
This block provides the following interlocks:
● Activation enable
● Interlock without reset ("Interlock")
● Interlock with reset ("Protection")
Refer to the Interlocks (Page 101) section for more on this.

Disabling interlocks
This block provides the standard function Disabling interlocks (Page 104).

Resetting the block in case of interlocks


This block provides the standard function Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors
(Page 43).

External error (FaultExt), external control system fault (CSF)


This block provides the possibility to pass an external error via the FaultExt parameter or
an external control system fault via the CSF parameter. See VlvL error handling (Page 1386)

Group error
This block provides the standard function Outputting group errors (Page 124).
The following parameters are taken into consideration when forming the group error:
● CSF
● MonDynErr
● MonStaErr
● FaultExt

Outputting a signal for start readiness


This block provides the standard function Outputting a signal for start readiness (Page 54).

Forming the group status for interlocks


This block provides the standard function Forming the group status for interlock information
(Page 106).

Forming the signal status for blocks


This block provides the standard function Forming and outputting the signal status for
technologic blocks (Page 110).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1381
Motor and valve blocks
7.10 VlvL - Valve (Large)

The worst signal status ST_Worst for the block is formed from the following parameters:
● FbkOpenOut.ST
● FbkCloseOut.ST
● LocalLi.ST
● OpenLocal.ST
● CloseLocal.ST
● CtrlChn.ST
● OpenAut.ST (only if Feature2.Bit10 = 1)
● CloseAut.ST (only if Feature2.Bit10 = 1)

Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values


If the Feature2 bit Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values
(Page 190) is set to 1 and one of the following parameters has bad signal status (16#00 or
16#28), the block goes to the neutral position in the "Automatic" mode:
● OpenAut.ST
● CloseAut.ST

Forcing operating modes


This block provides the standard function Forcing operating modes (Page 41). Inputs
OpenForce and CloseForce force the block to open or close.

Feedback monitoring
This block provides the standard function Monitoring the feedbacks (Page 98). Startup
characteristics are monitored by setting parameterMonTiDynamic. The parameter
MonTiStatic monitors compliance with the position.

Disabling feedback
This block provides the standard function Disabling feedback for valves (Page 100). Feedback
monitoring can be deactivated separately for each feedback with NoFbkOpen or
NoFbkClose as required.

Suppressing messages using the MsgLock parameter


This block provides the standard function Suppressing messages using the MsgLock
parameter (Page 214).

Release for maintenance


This block provides the standard function Release for maintenance (Page 65).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1382 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.10 VlvL - Valve (Large)

Specify warning times for control functions


This block provides the standard function Specifying warning times for control functions at
motors and valves (Page 51). The warning signal is output before the valve moves away from
the neutral position. No signal is output for movement to the neutral position.
You can generate warning signals when, for example, valves open. Warning signals can be
generated in the following modes:
● Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76) (Input parameter
WarnTiMan)
● Description of VlvL (Page 1375) (Input parameter WarnTiAut)
You specify the warning times in seconds using the input parameters WarnTiMan and
WarnTiAut. If, for example, a valve opens then, this is displayed at the output parameter with
WarnAct = 1. The valve then opens after the set warning time has expired and WarnAct then
returns to 0.
A corresponding warning is not output if the warning times (WarnTiMan or WarnTiAut) are
specified with a smaller value than the SampleTime parameter.

Simulating signals
This block provides the standard function Simulating signals (Page 59).

Selecting a unit of measure


This block provides the standard function Selecting a unit of measure (Page 221).

Neutral position
This block provides the standard function Neutral position for motors, valves and controllers
(Page 48). The neutral position (de-energized state) is set using the SafePos parameter.
● SafePos = 0 means that at Ctrl = 0 the valve drive closes and at Ctrl = 1 it opens (de-
energized state is "closed")
● SafePos = 1 means that at Ctrl = 0 the valve drive opens and at Ctrl = 1 it closes (de-
energized state is "open")

Generating instance-specific messages


This block provides the standard function Generating instance-specific messages (Page 213).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1383
Motor and valve blocks
7.10 VlvL - Valve (Large)

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133) . The following functionality is
available for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
0 Set startup characteristics (Page 141)
1 Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 181)
2 Resetting the commands for changing the mode (Page 165)
3 Enabling resetting of commands for the control settings (Page 165)
4 Setting switch or button mode (Page 170)
9 Resetting via input signals in the event of interlocking (Protection) or errors (Page 167)
10 Exiting local mode (Page 181)
11 Activating the run time of feedback signals (Page 157)
17 Enabling bumpless switchover to automatic mode for valves, motors, and dosers (Page 177)
18 Activating error state for external process control error CSF (Page 154)
20 Disable calculation of impulse control in LocalSetting 2 and 4 (Page 190)
21 Enable bumpless switchover to "Automatic" mode for operator only (Page 176)
22 Update acknowledgment and error status of the message call (Page 163)
24 Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162)
25 Suppression of all messages (Page 178)
27 Interlock display with LocalSetting 2 or 4 (Page 182)
30 Set reset depending on the operating mode or the LiOp parameter (Page 167)
31 Activating reset of protection / error in manual mode (Page 168)

In pushbutton operation (Bit 4 = 0) the automatic commands in "automatic" mode are latching,
in other words OpenAut, CloseAut can be reset to zero after changing the control. In
"manual" and "local" modes, however, the automatic commands are not saved and in the
absence of automatic commands the automatic control is tracked.
In switching mode (Bit 4 = 1), the control is selected with the static signal OpenAut. If input
OpenAut is not set the valve is closed. Control via CloseAut is not needed. If the "Activate
command reset for control" function (Bit 3 = 1) is also activated, the OpenAut input is reset to
the neutral position after evaluation in the block.

Configurable reactions using the Feature2 parameter

Bit Function
1 Changes signal status of outputs in OOS (Page 198)
2 Separate evaluation for excluded and simulated interlock signals (Page 155)
3 Control priority in the event of an invalid input command (Page 179)
4 Setting switch or button mode for local commands (Page 185)
5 Evaluation of the signal status of the interlock signals (Page 146)
8 Forcing operating modes in the "Local" mode (Page 188)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1384 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.10 VlvL - Valve (Large)

Bit Function
10 Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values (Page 190)
11 Suppress MsgLock and “Out of service” mode for a connected message block (Page 192)

Displaying auxiliary values


This block provides the standard function Displaying auxiliary values (Page 220).

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


This block provides the standard function SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

Output signal as a pulse signal or static signal


This block provides the standard function Output signal as a static signal or pulse signal
(Page 52). In addition to the static control output Out, the block also has pulse outputs P_Open,
P_Close, which are dependent on the static control output.

Connection of the time-stamped messages from EventTs or Event16Ts


This block provides the standard function Connection of the time-stamped messages from
EventTs or Event16Ts (Page 216).

Button labels
This block provides the standard function Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218)
Instance-specific text can be configured for the following parameters:
● OpenMan
● CloseMan

See also
VlvL messaging (Page 1387)
VlvL I/Os (Page 1389)
VlvL modes (Page 1378)
VlvL block diagram (Page 1396)
EventTs functions (Page 1698)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1385
Motor and valve blocks
7.10 VlvL - Valve (Large)

7.10.4 VlvL error handling

Error handling of VlvL


Refer to section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions for the error handling of all
blocks.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers
● Mode switchover error
● Invalid input signals
● Control system fault (CSF)

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum I/O can be used to output the following error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; the block is not executed
0 There is no error.
41 The value for the LocalSetting I/O is not within the approved limit of 0 to 4.
42 LocalSetting = 0 or LocalSetting = 3 or LocalSetting = 4 and LocalLi = 1
51 AutModLi = 1 and ManModLi = 1
OpenLocal = 1 and CloseLocal = 1
OpenAut = 1 and CloseAut = 1
OpenForce = 1 and CloseForce = 1
52 LocalAct = 1 and LocalSetting = 2 or 4 and SimOn = 1

Mode switchover error


This error can be output by the block. Refer to the Error handling (Page 121) section for more
on this.

Invalid input signals


This error can be output by the block. Refer to the Error handling (Page 121) section for more
on this.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1386 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.10 VlvL - Valve (Large)

For the following invalid input signals, the control output can be kept or switched to the neutral
position. This depends on the function Control priority in the event of an invalid input
command (Page 179).

Operating mode Invalid input signals Control reaction with


Feature2.Bit3 = 1
Local: Localsetting = 1 or Pushbutton operation for local mode Valve is set to its neutral
Localsetting = 3 (Feature2.Bit4 = 0): position.
OpenLocal = 1 and CloseLocal = 1
Local: Localsetting = 1 or OpenForce = 1 and CloseForce = 1
Localsetting = 3 and forc‐
ing
Forcing and no "local mode" OpenForce = 1 and CloseForce = 1
"Automatic mode" and no Pushbutton operation
forcing (Feature2.Bit4 = 0):
OpenAut = 1 and CloseAut = 1
"Manual mode" and no forcing OpenMan = 1 and CloseMan = 1

Control system fault (CSF)


An external signal can be activated via the CSF input. A control system fault is triggered if this
signal changes to 1. Refer to the Error handling (Page 121) section for more on this.

See also
Description of VlvL (Page 1375)
VlvL modes (Page 1378)
VlvL block diagram (Page 1396)
VlvL I/Os (Page 1389)
VlvL messaging (Page 1387)
VlvL functions (Page 1380)

7.10.5 VlvL messaging

Messaging
The following messages can be generated for this block:
● Process control fault
● Instance-specific messages

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1387
Motor and valve blocks
7.10 VlvL - Valve (Large)

Process control fault

Message in‐ Message identifier Message class Event


stance
MsgEvId1 SIG 1 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
Feedback error
SIG 2 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External error has occurred

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment
You can interconnect an external fault (signal) to input parameter CSF. If it changes to CSF =
1, a process control fault is triggered (MsgEvId1, SIG 2).

Instance-specific messages
You can use up to three instance-specific messages with this block.

Message in‐ Message identifier Message class Event


stance
MsgEvId1 SIG 3 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External message 1
SIG 4 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External message 2
SIG 5 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External message 3

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId1

Associated value Block parameters


1 BatchName
2 StepNo
3 BatchID
4 ExtVa104
5 ExtVa105
6 ExtVa106
7 ExtVa107
8 ExtVa108
9 Reserved
10 Reserved

The associated values 4 ... 8 are allocated to the parameters ExtVa104 ... ExtVa108 and
can be used. See the "Process Control System PCS 7 - Engineering System" manual.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1388 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.10 VlvL - Valve (Large)

See also
VlvL modes (Page 1378)
VlvL block diagram (Page 1396)
VlvL error handling (Page 1386)

7.10.6 VlvL I/Os


I/Os of VlvL

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AutModLi* 1= "Automatic mode" via interconnection STRUCT -
or SFC (controlled by ModLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AutModOp* 1 = "Automatic mode" via operator (con‐ BOOL 0
trolled by ModLiOp = 1)
BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation BOOL 0
BatchID Batch ID DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name S7-String
BypProt 1 = Bypassing interlock is active in "local BOOL 0
mode" and in simulation
CloseAut* 1 = Select Close valve in "automatic STRUCT -
mode" ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CloseForce 1 = Force valve closure STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CloseLocal 1 = Select Close valve in "local mode" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CloseMan* 1 = Select Close valve in "manual mode" BOOL 0
CSF 1 = External error (control system fault) STRUCT -
Error handling (Page 121) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CtrlChnST Signal status of output channel Ctrl STRUCT -
Should be connected to an output chan‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
nel block ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1389
Motor and valve blocks
7.10 VlvL - Valve (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


EventTsIn For interconnecting data between a tech‐ ANY
nological block and the message blocks
EventTs, Event16Ts.
The EventTsIn input parameter serves
to interconnect the EventTsOut output
parameter of the EventTs block. When
this interconnection is configured, the
messages of the EventTs block are dis‐
played on the OS in the alarm view of the
technological block and can also be ac‐
knowledged there.
ExtMsg1 Binary input for freely selectable mes‐ STRUCT -
sage 1 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg2 Binary input for freely selectable mes‐ STRUCT -
sage 2 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg3 Binary input for freely selectable mes‐ STRUCT -
sage 3 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtVa104 Associated value 4 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa105 Associated value 5 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa106 Associated value 6 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa107 Associated value 7 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa108 Associated value 8 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
FaultExt 1 = External error STRUCT -
Error handling (Page 121) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FbkOpen 1 = Valve open feedback signal STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
FbkClose 1 = Valve closed feedback signal STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 1380) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1390 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.10 VlvL - Valve (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


Feature2 I/O for additional functions (Page 1380) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
Intlock 0 = Interlocking without reset is active; STRUCT -
you can operate the block without reset ● Value:BOOL ● 1
once the interlocking condition has dis‐
appeared ● ST:BYTE ● 16#FF
1 = Interlock not activated ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
Intl_En 1 = Interlock without reset (interlock, BOOL 1
Intlock parameter) is active
LocalLi 1 = Activate "local mode" via plant signal STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
LocalOp* 1 = "Local mode" via operator BOOL 0
LocalSetting Properties for the Local mode (Page 80) INT 0
ManModLi* 1 = "Manual mode" via interconnection STRUCT -
or SFC (controlled by ModLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManModOp* 1= "Manual mode" via: OS operator (con‐ BOOL 1
trolled via ModLiOp = 0)
ModLiOp Switchover of operating mode between: STRUCT -
0 = Operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
1 = Interconnection or SFC ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Monitor 1 = Feedback monitoring BOOL 1
MonSafePos 1 = Go to neutral position in the event of BOOL 1
monitoring errors
MonTiDynamic* Monitoring time after operation in [s] REAL 3.0
MonTiStatic* Monitoring time for feedback errors with‐ REAL 3.0
out operation in [s]
MS_RelOp* 1= Release for maintenance via OS op‐ BOOL 0
erator
MsgEvId1 Message number (assigned automatical‐ DWORD 16#00000000
ly)
MsgLock 1 = Suppress process messages. STRUCT -
See also the section Suppressing mes‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
sages using the MsgLock parameter ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
(Page 214) for more on this.
NoFbkClose 1 = No feedback present for "valve BOOL 0
closed"
NoFbkOpen 1 = No feedback present for "valve open" BOOL 0
Occupied 1 = In use by a batch BOOL 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1391
Motor and valve blocks
7.10 VlvL - Valve (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


OosLi 1 = "Out of service", via interconnection STRUCT -
or SFC ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosOp* 1 = "Out of service", via OS operator BOOL 0
OpenAut* 1 = Select Open valve in "automatic STRUCT -
mode" ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpenForce 1 = Force valve opening STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpenLocal 1 = Select Open valve in "local mode" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpenMan* 1 = Select Open valve in "manual mode" BOOL 0
OpSt_In Input parameter for local operator au‐ DWORD 16#00000000
thorization, connected with the Out out‐
put parameter of the upstream block,
OpStations (Page 423)
OS_Perm I/O for operator permissions STRUCT -
(Page 1380) ● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● ... ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
Permit 1 = Enable for opening / closing from STRUCT -
neutral position ● Value:BOOL ● 1
0 = Valve activation not enabled on OS ● ST:BYTE ● 16#FF
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
Perm_En 1 = Activation enable (enable, Permit BOOL 1
parameter) is active
Protect 0 = Protective interlocking is effective; STRUCT -
once the interlocking condition has dis‐ ● Value:BOOL ● 1
appeared, you will have to reset the block
● ST:BYTE ● 16#FF
1 = Protective interlocking not activated
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
Prot_En 1 = Protective interlock (protection, BOOL 1
Protect parameter) is active
PulseWidth* Pulse width of control signal [s] REAL 3.0
RstLi* 1 = Reset via interconnection STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RstOp* 1 = Reset via operator BOOL 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1392 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.10 VlvL - Valve (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


RunUpCyc Number of cycles in startup; messages INT 3
are suppressed during these cycles
SafePos Neutral position for valve: BOOL 0
1= Open
0 = Closed
SampleTime Sampling time [s] (assigned automatical‐ REAL 0.1
ly)
SimLiOp Activation/deactivation of the simulation STRUCT -
by: ● Value: BOOL ● 0
0 = Operator ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
1 = Interconnection or SFC
SimOnLi 1 = Simulation via interconnection or STRUCT -
SFC (controlled by SimLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SimOn* 1 = Simulation on BOOL 0
SelFp1 Call a block saved in this parameter as ANY -
an additional faceplate (Page 217) in the
standard view
SelFp2 Call a block saved in this parameter as ANY -
an additional faceplate (Page 217) in the
preview
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
UserAna1 Analog auxiliary value 1 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
UA1unit Unit of measure for analog auxiliary val‐ INT 0
ue 1
UserAna2 Analog auxiliary value 2 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
UA2unit Unit of measure for analog auxiliary val‐ INT 0
ue 2
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use in PCS 7 BYTE 16#00
OS
WarnTiAut Prewarning of valve movement from REAL 0.0
neutral position in "automatic mode" in
[s]
WarnTiMan Prewarning of valve movement from REAL 0.0
neutral position in "manual mode" in [s]

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1393
Motor and valve blocks
7.10 VlvL - Valve (Large)

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AutAct 1 = "Automatic mode" enabled STRUCT -
0 = "Manual mode" is enabled ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AutoST 1 = Worst signal status of automatic com‐ BYTE 16#80
mands
Closed 1 = Valve is closed STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Closing 1 = Valve is closing STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Ctrl Control output STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CurrMon Remaining monitoring time [s] DINT 0
ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without BOOL 0
errors
ErrorNum Output of pending error number. For er‐ INT -1
ror numbers that can be output by this
block, see VlvL error handling
(Page 1386)
FbkCloseOut Valve closed feedback STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FbkOpenOut Valve open feedback STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
GrpErr 1 = Group error pending STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
LocalAct 1 = "Local mode" enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
LockAct 1 = Interlock (Intlock, Permit or STRUCT -
Protect) is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManAct 1 = "Manual mode" enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1394 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.10 VlvL - Valve (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


MonDynErr 1 = Feedback error due to control change STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MonStaErr 1 = Feedback error due to unexpected STRUCT -
feedback change ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MS_Release Release for maintenance: STRUCT -
1 = Release for OS operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MsgAckn1 Message acknowledgement status 1 WORD 16#0000
(output ACK_STATE of first ALARM_8P)
MsgErr1 Alarm error 1 (output ERROR of first BOOL 0
ALARM_8P)
MsgStat1 Message status 1 (output STATUS of first WORD 16#0000
ALARM_8P)
OosAct 1 = Block is "Out of service" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Opened 1 = Valve is open STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Opening 1 = Valve is opening STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpSt_Out Value of the OpSt_In input parameter, DWORD 16#00000000
for feedforwarding to other blocks. Bit 31
of this parameter is used by
Feature.Bit24
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with settings DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
changed by the block algorithm
P_Close 1 = Pulse signal to close valve STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
P_Open 1 = Pulse signal to open valve STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
P_Rst 1= Pulse output for reset STRUCT -
The parameter persists for one cycle af‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
ter a reset. ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RdyToReset 1 = Ready for reset via RstLi input or STRUCT -
commands in "local", "automatic", or ● Value: BOOL ● 0
"manual mode"
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1395
Motor and valve blocks
7.10 VlvL - Valve (Large)

Parameter Description Type Default


RdyToStart 1 = Active start readiness STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
Status1 Status word 1 (Page 1375) DWORD 16#00000000
Status2 Status word 2 (Page 1375) DWORD 16#00000000
Status3 Status word 3 (Page 1375) DWORD 16#00000000
WarnAct 1 = Prewarning for valve movement STRUCT -
away from neutral position active (pa‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
rameters WarnTiAut and WarnTiMan)
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

See also
VlvL messaging (Page 1387)
VlvL modes (Page 1378)
VlvL block diagram (Page 1396)
Error handling (Page 121)

7.10.7 VlvL block diagram

VlvL block diagram


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

See also
Description of VlvL (Page 1375)
VlvL modes (Page 1378)
VlvL error handling (Page 1386)
VlvL messaging (Page 1387)
VlvL I/Os (Page 1389)
VlvL functions (Page 1380)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1396 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.10 VlvL - Valve (Large)

7.10.8 Operator control and monitoring

7.10.8.1 VlvL views

Views of the VlvL block


The block VlvL provides the following views:
● VlvL standard view (Page 1397)
● Alarm view (Page 313)
● Trend view (Page 317)
● Parameter view for motors and valves (Page 297)
● VlvL preview (Page 1401)
● Memo view (Page 315)
● Batch view (Page 313)
● VlvL block icon (Page 1404)
Refer to the sections Structure of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure
(Page 239) for general information on the faceplate and block icon.

7.10.8.2 VlvL standard view

VlvL standard view




 

 


 





(1) Displaying and switching the operating mode


This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
● Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76)
● Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1397
Motor and valve blocks
7.10 VlvL - Valve (Large)

● Local mode (Page 80)


● Out of service (Page 72)
Refer to section Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) for information
on switching the operating mode.

(2) Opening and closing the valve


This area shows you the default operating state for the valve. The following states can be
shown and executed here:
● "Open"
● "Close"
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for information
on changing the state.
If text is configured for these commands, it is displayed as status text and as button labels for
command selection. You can find more information about this in section Labeling of buttons
and text (Page 218)

(3) Resetting the block


Click "Reset" for interlocks or errors. You can find additional information on this in the section
Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors (Page 43).

(4) Operating range for the interlock functions of the block


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
You can use this button to control the interlock functions of the block. You can find additional
information on this in the section Interlocking functions (Page 101).
The following is displayed in addition to the buttons:
● Interlock status (see Forming the group status for interlock information (Page 106)), e.g.:

● Signal status (see Forming and outputting the signal status for technologic blocks
(Page 110)), e.g.:

● Bypass information (see Forming the group status for interlock information (Page 106)):

(5) Display of auxiliary values


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1398 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.10 VlvL - Valve (Large)

You can use this area to display two auxiliary values that have been configured in the
engineering system (ES). You can find additional information on this in the section Displaying
auxiliary values (Page 220).

(6) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
Use this navigation button to open the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system (ES). The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the
engineering system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in the section Opening additional faceplates
(Page 217).

(7) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Maintenance"
Additional information on this is available in section Release for maintenance (Page 65) Display
area for block states.

(8) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Simulation"
● "Delay"
You will find more detailed information on this in the sections Simulating signals (Page 59) and
Display of delay times (Page 267).

(9) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "External error"
● "End position error"
● "Control error"
● "Invalid signal"
● "Changeover error"
Additional information on these errors is available in the sections Monitoring the feedbacks
(Page 98) , Error handling (Page 121) (section "Invalid input signals" and "Mode switchover
error") and Motor protection function (Page 100).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1399
Motor and valve blocks
7.10 VlvL - Valve (Large)

(10) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Forced open"
● "Forced close"
● "Request 0/1": A reset to "automatic mode" is expected.
You can find additional information on this in the section Forcing operating modes (Page 41).

(11) Automatic preview


This display is only visible in "manual mode", in "local mode", or with a reset request in
"automatic mode", when the current output signals are not identical to the control in "automatic
mode".
The display shows what state the valve would assume if you switched from "manual" or "local"
mode to "automatic mode", or performed a reset to "automatic mode".

(12) Status display of the valve


The current status of the valve is graphically displayed here.
You can find more information about this in section VlvL block icon (Page 1404)

(13) Neutral position of the valve


Display the neutral position for the valve:
● If the neutral position of the valve is "Closed" (SafePos = 0), , a gray valve is shown.
● If the neutral position of the valve is "Open" (SafePos = 1), a green valve is shown.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1400 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.10 VlvL - Valve (Large)

7.10.8.3 VlvL preview

Preview of VlvL

Display of the current monitoring time is visible.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1401
Motor and valve blocks
7.10 VlvL - Valve (Large)

Display of the current monitoring time is not visible.

(1) Automatic preview


This area shows you the block status after it has switched from the "Manual" mode or "Local"
mode to the "Automatic" mode.
If the block is in "Automatic" mode, the current block state is displayed.
This area also displays the worst signal status of the following automatic commands:
● OpenAut
● CloseAut

(2) Enable operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Icons for enabled operation:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1402 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.10 VlvL - Valve (Large)

The following enabled operations are shown here:


● "Open": You can open the valve.
If text is configured for this command, it is also displayed in brackets. You can find additional
information on this in the section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218).
● "Close": You can close the valve.
If text is configured for this command, it is also displayed in brackets. You can find additional
information on this in the section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218).
● "Reset": You can reset the valve if interlocks or errors occur.
● "Automatic": You can switch to "automatic mode".
● "Manual": You can switch to "manual mode".
● "Local": You can switch to "local mode".
● "Out of service": You can switch to "Out of service" operating mode.
● "Local operator permission": Use the ← button to switch to the standard view of the
OpStations block. You can find additional information on this in the section Operator control
permissions (Page 265) .
● "Monitoring time": Display of the remaining monitoring time.

(3) Displaying current control signals


This area shows the most important parameters for this block with the current selection:
● "Permission":
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Valve activation not enabled on OS
– 1 = Enable for "opening"/"closing" from the neutral position
● "Protection":
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Protective interlocking is effective; once the interlocking condition has disappeared,
you will have to reset the block
– 1 = "Good" state
● "Interlock":
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Interlocking without reset is active; you can operate the block without reset once the
interlocking condition has disappeared
– 1 = "Good" state
● "Local correct": 1 = Control signal for "Local mode" (LocalLi) is active
● "Local open": 1 = Opening the valve in "local mode"
● "Local close": 1 = Closing the valve in "local mode"
● "Interlock deact.":
– 0 = Bypass disabled
– 1 = Bypassing interlock in "local mode" and in "simulation"

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1403
Motor and valve blocks
7.10 VlvL - Valve (Large)

● "Control": Display for valve control:


– 0 = Valve is closing
– 1 = Valve is opening
● "Feedback open": 1 = Valve is open
● "Feedback close": 1 = Valve is closed
● "Channel Control": Control signal of the output channel block

(4) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
Use this navigation button to open the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system. The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the engineering
system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in the section Opening additional faceplates
(Page 217) .

7.10.8.4 VlvL block icon

Block icons for VlvL


A variety of block icons are available with the following functions:
● Process tag type
● Limits (high/low)
● Violation of alarm, warning, and tolerance limits as well as control system faults
● Operating modes
● Signal status, release for maintenance
● Forcing states
● Displays for bypassing interlocks
● Interlocks
● Memo display
● Valve status display

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1404 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.10 VlvL - Valve (Large)

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV8.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in Special features


CFC
1

3 Non-rotating block icon

4 Non-rotating block icon

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV7.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in Special features


CFC
1 Block icon in the full display

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1405
Motor and valve blocks
7.10 VlvL - Valve (Large)

Icons Selection of the block icon in Special features


CFC
10

- Block icon in "Out of serv‐


ice" mode (example with
type 1 block icon)

Additional information on the block icon and the control options in the block icon is available
in the following chapters:
● Configuring the block icons (Page 246)
● Block icon structure (Page 239)
● Operation via the block icon (Page 248)

Valve status display


The following valve states are shown here:

Icon Meaning
Valve open

Valve closed

Error at valve

Valve is opening

Valve is closing

Valve closed

Valve is closing

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1406 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.11 VlvS - Valve (small)

7.11 VlvS - Valve (small)

7.11.1 Description of VlvS

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1911
Family: Drives

Area of application for VlvS


The block is used for the following applications:
● Controlling a valve in two positions ("open"/"closed") with adjustable neutral position

Note
This block is also available as a large block. A comparison of the VlvL and VlvS blocks is
available in the section: VlvL compared to VlvS (Page 1092)

How it works
The valve is opened or closed by a control signal. The signal 0 corresponds to the de-energized
state (neutral position) of the valve.
The control is monitored by the "open"/"close" (feedback) signals. Missing feedback can be
derived from the control in the block.
Various inputs are available for control purposes. The next sections provide more detailed
information on configuration, operating principles, visualization and operation.

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38). The block is
also installed automatically in the startup OB (OB100).

Startup characteristics
Use the Feature Bit Set startup characteristics (Page 141) to define the startup characteristics
of this block.
The messages are suppressed after startup for the number of cycles set at RunUpCyc.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1407
Motor and valve blocks
7.11 VlvS - Valve (small)

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


You can find a description for each parameter in section VlvS I/Os (Page 1418).

Status bit Parameter


0 Occupied
1 BatchEn
2 SimOn
3 OosAct.Value
4 OosLi.Value
5 AutoAct.Value = 1; ManAct.Value = 0
6 LocalAct.Value
7 LockAct.Value
8 "Open"/"Closed" command (1 = "Open")
9 FbkOpenOut.Value
10 FbkCloseOut.Value
11 Feedback error without control change
12 Feedback error due to control change
13 BypProt
14 Invalid signal status
15 Not used
16 1 = Intlock is active
17 - 21 Not used
22 Automatic preview (1 = "Open")
23 Bumpless switchover to "automatic mode" enabled
24 SafePos
25 - 27 Not used
28 For the Error status display in the Closed valve
29 For the Error status display in the Opened valve
30 External error generated by FaultExt or external control system fault CSF with set
Feature.Bit18 Activating error state for external process control error CSF
(Page 154)
31 1 = Input parameter CtrlChnST is interconnected

Status word allocation for Status2 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 MsgLock
1 Not used
2 Display for interlocks in block icon
3 - 15 Not used
16 1 = Input parameter FbkClose is interconnected
17 1 = Input parameter FbkOpen is interconnected
18 Reset request in automatic
19 1 = No impact of input signals on "local mode" when LocalSetting = 2

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1408 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.11 VlvS - Valve (small)

Status bit Parameter


20 1 = Valve open
21 1 = Valve closed
22 1 = Valve opens
23 1 = Valve closes
24 - 29 Not used
30 Bypass information from previous function block
31 MS_RelOp

Status word allocation for Status3 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0-7 Not used
8 "Interlock" button is enabled
9 - 11 Not used
12 Hidden bypass signal in interlock
13 Not used
14 Feature2.Bit2: Separate bypass signal
15 - 25 Not used
26 Show automatic preview in the standard view
27 Not used
28 GrpErr.Value
29 RdyToStart.Value
30 - 31 Not used

See also
VlvS modes (Page 1409)
VlvS functions (Page 1411)
VlvS error handling (Page 1415)
VlvS reporting (Page 1417)
VlvS block diagram (Page 1423)

7.11.2 VlvS modes

VlvS operating modes


The block supports all standard modes:
● Local mode (Page 80)
● Automatic mode (Page 76)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1409
Motor and valve blocks
7.11 VlvS - Valve (small)

● Manual mode (Page 76)


● Out of service (Page 72)
The next section provides additional block-specific information relating to the general
descriptions.

"Local mode"
You can find general information on "Local mode", switching modes and Bumpless switchover
in the Local mode (Page 80) section.

Note
"Local mode" for the block VlvS
In contrast to the "Large" blocks, it is only possible to perform settings in this block
LocalSetting with 0, 2 and 5.

"Automatic mode"
You can find general information on "Automatic mode", switching modes and Bumpless
switchover in the Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76) section.
Valve actions you can control in "automatic mode":
● "Open" (OpenAut = 1)
● "Close" (CloseAut = 1)

Note
Information about the "Small" block
This "Small" block works with pushbutton operation. The automatic commands are therefore
latching, in other words, OpenAut and CloseAut can be reset to 0 after the control is changed.
In "manual" and "local" modes, however, the automatic commands are not saved and in the
absence of automatic commands the automatic control is tracked.

"Manual mode"
You can find general information on "Manual mode", switching modes and bumpless
switchover in the section Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers
(Page 76).
Valve actions you can control in "manual mode":
● "Open" (OpenMan = 1)
● "Close" (CloseMan = 1)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1410 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.11 VlvS - Valve (small)

"Out of service"
You can find general information about the "Out of service" mode in the section Out of
service (Page 72).
With Feature2.Bit1 =1 the following output parameter become the status of simulation
16#60, if mode is changed to "Out of service".
With Feature2.Bit1 =0 the following output parameter become the status of 16#80, if mode
is changed to "Out of service".
● FbkOpenOut.ST
● FbkCloseOut.ST
● Opened.ST
● Closed.ST
● Opening.ST
● Closing.ST

See also
Description of VlvS (Page 1407)
VlvS functions (Page 1411)
VlvS error handling (Page 1415)
VlvS reporting (Page 1417)
VlvS I/Os (Page 1418)
VlvS block diagram (Page 1423)

7.11.3 VlvS functions

Functions of VlvS
The functions for this block are listed below.

Opening additional faceplates


This block provides the standard function Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

Operator permissions
This block provides the standard function Operator control permissions (Page 265).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1411
Motor and valve blocks
7.11 VlvS - Valve (small)

The block has the following permissions for the OS_Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 1 = Operator can switch to "automatic mode"
1 1 = Operator can switch to "manual mode"
2 1 = Operator can switch to "local mode"
3 1 = Operator can switch to "Out of service" mode
4 1 = Operator can open the valve
5 1 = Operator can close the valve
6 1 = Operator can reset the valve
7 1 = Operator can define the monitoring time for startup
8 Not used
9 1 = Operator can activate the monitoring time function (Bit 7)
11 1 = Operator can activate the Release for maintenance function
12 - 31 Not used

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Button labels
This block provides the standard function Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218)
Instance-specific text can be configured for the following parameters:
● OpenMan
● CloseMan

Interlocks
This block provides the following interlocks:
● Interlock without reset ("Interlock")
Refer to the Interlocks (Page 101) section for more on this.

Disabling interlocks
This block provides the standard function Disabling interlocks (Page 104).

Resetting the block in case of interlocks


This block provides the standard function Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors
(Page 43).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1412 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.11 VlvS - Valve (small)

Forming the group status for interlocks


This block provides the standard function Forming the group status for interlock information
(Page 106).

External error (FaultExt), external control system fault (CSF)


This block provides the possibility to pass an external error via the FaultExt parameter or
an external control system fault via the CSF parameter. See VlvS error handling (Page 1415)

Group error
This block provides the standard function Outputting group errors (Page 124)
The following parameters are taken into consideration when forming the group error:
● CSF
● MonDynErr
● MonStaErr
● FaultExt

Neutral position
This block provides the standard function Neutral position for motors, valves and controllers
(Page 48). The neutral position (de-energized state) is set using the SafePos parameter.
● SafePos = 0 means that at Ctrl = 0 the valve drive closes and at Ctrl = 1 it opens
(de-energized state is "closed")
● SafePos = 1 means that at Ctrl = 0 the valve drive opens and at Ctrl = 1 it closes
(de-energized state is "open")

Outputting a signal for start readiness


This block provides the standard function Outputting a signal for start readiness (Page 54).

Forming the signal status for blocks


This block provides the standard function Forming and outputting the signal status for
technologic blocks (Page 110).
The worst signal status ST_Worst for the block is formed from the following parameters:
● FbkOpenOut.ST
● FbkCloseOut.ST
● LocalLi.ST
● CtrlChn.ST
● OpenAut.ST (only if Feature2.Bit10 = 1)
● CloseAut.ST (only if Feature2.Bit10 = 1)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1413
Motor and valve blocks
7.11 VlvS - Valve (small)

Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values


If the Feature2 bit Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values
(Page 190) is set to 1 and one of the following parameters has bad signal status (16#00 or
16#28), the block goes to the neutral position in the "Automatic" mode:
● OpenAut.ST
● CloseAut.ST

Feedback monitoring
This block provides the standard function Monitoring the feedbacks (Page 98). Startup
characteristics are monitored by setting parameterMonTiDynamic. The parameter
MonTiStatic monitors compliance with the position.

Suppressing messages using the MsgLock parameter


This block provides the standard function Suppressing messages using the MsgLock
parameter (Page 214).

Release for maintenance


This block provides the standard function Release for maintenance (Page 65).

Simulating signals
This block provides the standard function Simulating signals (Page 59).

Generating instance-specific messages


This block provides the standard function Generating instance-specific messages (Page 213).

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133) . The following functionality is
available for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
0 Set startup characteristics (Page 141)
1 Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 181)
2 Resetting the commands for changing the mode (Page 165)
3 Enabling resetting of commands for the control settings (Page 165)
9 Resetting via input signals in the event of interlocking (Protection) or errors (Page 167)
10 Exiting local mode (Page 181)
11 Activating the run time of feedback signals (Page 157)
18 Activating error state for external process control error CSF (Page 154)
25 Suppression of all messages (Page 178)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1414 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.11 VlvS - Valve (small)

Bit Function
27 Interlock display with LocalSetting 2 or 5 (Page 182)
30 Set reset depending on the operating mode or the LiOp parameter (Page 167)
31 Activating reset of protection / error in manual mode (Page 168)

Configurable reactions using the Feature2 parameter

Bit Function
1 Changes signal status of outputs in OOS (Page 198)
2 Separate evaluation for excluded and simulated interlock signals (Page 155)
3 Control priority in the event of an invalid input command (Page 179)
5 Evaluation of the signal status of the interlock signals (Page 146)
10 Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values (Page 190)

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


This block provides the standard function SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

See also
Description of VlvS (Page 1407)
VlvS modes (Page 1409)
VlvS reporting (Page 1417)
VlvS I/Os (Page 1418)
VlvS block diagram (Page 1423)
Disabling feedback for valves (Page 100)
Selecting a unit of measure (Page 221)
Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162)

7.11.4 VlvS error handling

Error handling of VlvS


Refer to section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions for the error handling of all
blocks.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers
● Mode switchover error

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1415
Motor and valve blocks
7.11 VlvS - Valve (small)

● Invalid input signals


● Control system fault (CSF)

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum I/O can be used to output the following error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; the block is not executed
0 There is no error.
41 The value for the LocalSetting I/O is not within the valid limit of 0, 2 or 5
42 LocalSetting = 0 and LocalLi = 1
51 AutModLi = 1 and ManModLi = 1
OpenAut = 1 and CloseAut = 1
52 LocalAct = 1 and LocalSetting = 2 or 5 and SimOn = 1

Mode switchover error


This error can be output by the block, see the section Error handling (Page 121).

Invalid input signals


This error can be output by the block, see the section Error handling (Page 121).
For the following invalid input signals, the control output can be kept or switched to the neutral
position. This depends on the function Control priority in the event of an invalid input
command (Page 179).

Operating mode Invalid input signals Control reaction with


Feature2 bit 3 =1
"Automatic mode" OpenAut = 1 and CloseAut = 1 Valve is set to its neutral
"Manual mode" OpenMan = 1 and CloseMan = 1 position.

Control system fault (CSF)


An external signal can be activated via the CSF input. A control system fault is triggered if this
signal changes to 1. Refer to the Error handling (Page 121) section for more on this.

See also
Description of VlvS (Page 1407)
VlvS modes (Page 1409)
VlvS functions (Page 1411)
VlvS reporting (Page 1417)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1416 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.11 VlvS - Valve (small)

VlvS I/Os (Page 1418)


VlvS block diagram (Page 1423)

7.11.5 VlvS reporting

Messaging
The following messages can be generated for this block:
● Process control fault
● Instance-specific messages

Process control fault

Message in‐ Message identifier Message class Event


stance
MsgEvId1 SIG 1 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
Feedback error
SIG 2 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External error has occurred

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment
You can interconnect an external fault (signal) to input parameter CSF. If it changes to CSF =
1, a process control fault is triggered (MsgEvId1, SIG 2).

Instance-specific messages
You have the option to use two instance-specific messages for this block.

Message in‐ Message identifier Message class Event


stance
MsgEvId1 SIG 3 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External message 1
SIG 4 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External message 2

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1417
Motor and valve blocks
7.11 VlvS - Valve (small)

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId1

Associated value Block parameters


1 BatchName
2 StepNo
3 BatchID
4 ExtVa104
5 ExtVa105
6 - 10 Reserved

The associated values 4 ... 5 are allocated to the parameters ExtVa104 ... ExtVa105 and
can be used. Additional information is available in the "Process Control System PCS 7 -
Engineering System" manual.

See also
Description of VlvS (Page 1407)
VlvS modes (Page 1409)
VlvS functions (Page 1411)
VlvS error handling (Page 1415)
VlvS I/Os (Page 1418)
VlvS block diagram (Page 1423)

7.11.6 VlvS I/Os


I/Os of VlvS

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AutModLi* 1= "Automatic mode" via interconnection STRUCT -
or SFC (controlled by ModLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AutModOp 1 = "Automatic mode" via operator (con‐ BOOL 0
trolled by ModLiOp = 1)
BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation BOOL 0
BatchID Batch ID DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name S7-String
BypProt 1 = Bypassing interlock is active in "local BOOL 0
mode" and in simulation
CloseAut* 1 = Select Close valve in "automatic STRUCT -
mode" ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1418 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.11 VlvS - Valve (small)

Parameter Description Type Default


CloseMan* 1 = Select Close valve in "manual mode" BOOL 0
CSF 1 = External error (control system fault) STRUCT -
Error handling (Page 121) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CtrlChnST Signal status of output channel Ctrl STRUCT -
Should be connected to an output chan‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
nel block ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1
ExtMsg1 Binary input for freely selectable mes‐ STRUCT -
sage 1 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg2 Binary input for freely selectable mes‐ STRUCT -
sage 2 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtVa104 Associated value 4 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa105 Associated value 5 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
FaultExt 1 = External error STRUCT -
Error handling (Page 121) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FbkOpen 1 = Valve open feedback signal STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
FbkClose 1 = Valve closed feedback signal STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 1411) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
Feature2 I/O for additional functions (Page 1411) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
Intlock 0 = Interlocking without reset is active; STRUCT -
you can operate the block without reset ● Value:BOOL ● 1
once the interlocking condition has dis‐
appeared ● ST:BYTE ● 16#FF
1 = Interlock not activated ● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1419
Motor and valve blocks
7.11 VlvS - Valve (small)

Parameter Description Type Default


Intl_En 1 = Interlock without reset (interlock, BOOL 1
Intlock parameter) is active
LocalLi 1 = Activate "local mode" via plant signal STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
LocalSetting Properties for the Local mode (Page 80) INT 0
ManModLi* 1 = Manual mode via interconnection or STRUCT -
SFC (controlled by ModLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManModOp* 1 = Manual mode via: OS operator (con‐ BOOL 1
trolled via ModLiOp = 0)
ModLiOp Switchover of operating mode between: STRUCT -
0 = Operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
1 = Interconnection or SFC ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Monitor 1 = Feedback monitoring BOOL 1
MonSafePos 1 = Go to neutral position in the event of BOOL 1
monitoring errors
MonTiDynamic* Monitoring time after operation in [s] REAL 3.0
MS_RelOp* 1= Release for maintenance via OS op‐ BOOL 0
erator
MsgEvId1 Message number (assigned automatical‐ DWORD 16#00000000
ly)
MsgLock 1 = Suppress process messages. STRUCT -
See also the section Suppressing mes‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
sages using the MsgLock parameter ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
(Page 214) for more on this.
Occupied 1 = In use by a batch BOOL 0
OosLi 1 = "Out of service", via interconnection STRUCT -
or SFC ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosOp* 1 = "Out of service", via OS operator BOOL 0
OpenAut* 1 = Select Open valve in "automatic STRUCT -
mode" ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpenMan* 1 = Select Open valve in "manual mode" BOOL 0
OpSt_In Input parameter for local operator au‐ DWORD 16#00000000
thorization, connected with the Out out‐
put parameter of the upstream block,
OpStations (Page 423)
OS_Perm I/O for operator permissions STRUCT -
(Page 1411) ● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● ... ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1420 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.11 VlvS - Valve (small)

Parameter Description Type Default


RstLi* 1 = Reset via interconnection STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RstOp* 1 = Reset via operator BOOL 0
RunUpCyc Number of cycles in startup; messages INT 3
are suppressed during these cycles
SampleTime Sampling time [s] (assigned automatical‐ REAL 0.1
ly)
SafePos Neutral position for valve: BOOL 0
1= Open
0 = Closed
SimOn 1 = Simulation on BOOL 0
SelFp1 Call a block saved in this parameter as ANY
an additional faceplate (Page 217) in the
standard view
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use in PCS 7 BYTE 16#00
OS

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AutAct 1 = "Automatic mode" enabled STRUCT -
0 = "Manual mode" is enabled ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AutoST 1 = Worst signal status of automatic com‐ BYTE 16#80
mands
Ctrl Control output STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Closed 1 = Valve is closed STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Closing 1 = Valve is closing STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without BOOL 0
errors

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1421
Motor and valve blocks
7.11 VlvS - Valve (small)

Parameter Description Type Default


ErrorNum Output of pending error number. For er‐ INT -1
ror numbers that can be output by this
block, see VlvS error handling
(Page 1415)
FbkCloseOut Valve closed feedback STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FbkOpenOut Valve open feedback STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
GrpErr 1 = Group error pending STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
LocalAct 1 = "Local mode" enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
LockAct 1 = Interlock is active STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManAct 1 = "Manual mode" enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MonDynErr 1 = Feedback error due to control change STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MonStaErr 1 = Feedback error due to unexpected STRUCT -
feedback change ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MS_Release Release for maintenance: STRUCT -
1 = Release for OS operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosAct 1 = Block is "Out of service" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Opened 1 = Valve is open STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Opening 1 = Valve is opening STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1422 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.11 VlvS - Valve (small)

Parameter Description Type Default


OpSt_Out Value of the OpSt_In input parameter, DWORD 16#00000000
for feedforwarding to other blocks. Bit 31
of this parameter is used by
Feature.Bit24
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with settings DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
changed by the block algorithm
P_Rst 1= Pulse output for reset STRUCT -
The parameter persists for one cycle af‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
ter a reset. ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RdyToReset 1 = Ready for reset via RstLi input or STRUCT -
commands in "local", "automatic", or ● Value: BOOL ● 0
"manual mode"
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RdyToStart 1 = Active start readiness STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
Status1 Status word 1 (Page 1407) DWORD 16#00000000
Status2 Status word 2 (Page 1407) DWORD 16#00000000
Status3 Status word 3 (Page 1407) DWORD 16#00000000

See also
VlvS modes (Page 1409)
VlvS block diagram (Page 1423)
VlvS reporting (Page 1417)
Error handling (Page 121)

7.11.7 VlvS block diagram

VlvS block diagram


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

See also
Description of VlvS (Page 1407)
VlvS modes (Page 1409)
VlvS functions (Page 1411)
VlvS error handling (Page 1415)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1423
Motor and valve blocks
7.11 VlvS - Valve (small)

VlvS I/Os (Page 1418)


VlvS reporting (Page 1417)

7.11.8 Operator control and monitoring

7.11.8.1 VlvS views

Views of the VlvS block


The block VlvS provides the following views:
● VlvS standard view (Page 1424)
● Alarm view (Page 313)
● Trend view (Page 317)
● Parameter view for motors and valves (Page 297)
● VlvS preview (Page 1427)
● Memo view (Page 315)
● Batch view (Page 313)
● VlvS block icon (Page 1429)
Refer to the sections Structure of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure
(Page 239) for general information on the faceplate and block icon.

7.11.8.2 VlvS standard view

VlvS standard view




 

 

 





Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1424 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.11 VlvS - Valve (small)

(1) Displaying and switching the operating mode


This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
● Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76)
● Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76)
● Local mode (Page 80)
● Out of service (Page 72)
Refer to section Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) for information
on switching the operating mode.

(2) Opening and closing the valve


This area shows you the default operating state for the valve. The following states can be
shown and executed here:
● "Open"
● "Close"
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for information
on changing the state.
If text is configured for these commands, it is displayed as status text and as button labels for
command selection. You can find more information about this in section Labeling of buttons
and text (Page 218)

(3) Resetting the block


Click "Reset" for errors. You can find additional information on this in the section Resetting the
block in case of interlocks or errors (Page 43).

(4) Operating range for the interlock functions of the block


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
You can use this button to control the interlock functions of the block. You can find additional
information on this in the section Interlocks (Page 101).
The following is displayed in addition to the buttons:
● Interlock status (see Forming the group status for interlock information (Page 106)), e.g.:

● Signal status (see Forming and outputting the signal status for technologic blocks
(Page 110)), e.g.:

● Bypass information (see Forming the group status for interlock information (Page 106)):

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1425
Motor and valve blocks
7.11 VlvS - Valve (small)

(5) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
Use this navigation button to open the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system (ES). The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the
engineering system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in the section Opening additional faceplates
(Page 217).

(6) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Maintenance"
Additional information on this is available in section Release for maintenance (Page 65) Display
area for block states.

(7) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Simulation"
You can find additional information on this in the section Simulating signals (Page 59).

(8) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "External error"
● "End position error"
● "Control error"
● "Invalid signal"
Additional information on these errors is available in the sections Monitoring the feedbacks
(Page 98) , Error handling (Page 121) (section "Invalid input signals" and "Mode switchover
error") and Motor protection function (Page 100).

(9) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Request 0/1": A reset to "automatic mode" is expected.
You can find additional information on this in the section Forcing operating modes (Page 41).

(10) Automatic preview


This display is only visible in "manual mode", in "local mode", or with a reset request in
"automatic mode", when the current output signals are not identical to the control in "automatic
mode".

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1426 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.11 VlvS - Valve (small)

The display shows what state the valve would assume if you switched from "manual" or "local"
mode to "automatic mode", or performed a reset to "automatic mode".

(11) Status display of the valve


The current status of the valve is graphically displayed here.
● Green: Valve is open
● Gray: Valve is closed
● Red: Fault at valve
You can find more information about this in section VlvS block icon (Page 1429)

(12) Neutral position of the valve


Display the neutral position for the valve:
● If the neutral position of the valve is "Closed" (SafePos = 0), , a gray valve is shown.
● If the neutral position of the valve is "Open" (SafePos = 1), a green valve is shown.

See also
Displaying auxiliary values (Page 220)

7.11.8.3 VlvS preview

Preview of VlvS

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1427
Motor and valve blocks
7.11 VlvS - Valve (small)

(1) Automatic preview


This area shows you the block status after it has switched from the "Manual" mode or "Local"
mode to the "Automatic" mode.
If the block is in "Automatic" mode, the current block state is displayed.
This area also displays the worst signal status of the following automatic commands:
● OpenAut
● CloseAut

(2) Enable operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Icons for enabled operation:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)
The following enabled operations are shown here:
● "Open": You can open the valve.
If text is configured for this command, it is also displayed in brackets. You can find additional
information on this in the section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218).
● "Close": You can close the valve.
If text is configured for this command, it is also displayed in brackets. You can find additional
information on this in the section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218).
● "Reset": You can reset the valve if interlocks or errors occur.
● "Automatic": You can switch to "automatic mode".
● "Manual": You can switch to "manual mode".
● "Out of service": You can switch to "Out of service" operating mode.
● "Local operator permission": Use the ← button to switch to the standard view of the
OpStations block. You can find additional information on this in the section Labeling of
buttons and text (Page 218) .

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1428 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.11 VlvS - Valve (small)

(3) Displaying current control signals


This area shows the most important parameters for this block with the current selection:
● "Interlock":
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Interlocking without reset is active; you can operate the block without reset once the
interlocking condition has disappeared
– 1 = "Good" state
● "Local correct": 1 = Control signal for "Local mode" (LocalLi) is active
● "Interlock deact.":
– 0 = Bypass disabled
– 1 = Bypassing interlock in "local mode" and in "simulation"
● "Control": Display for valve control:
– 0 = Valve is closing
– 1 = Valve is opening
● "Feedback open": 1 = Valve is open
● "Feedback close": 1 = Valve is closed
● "Channel Control": Control signal of the output channel block

See also
Operator control permissions (Page 265)

7.11.8.4 VlvS block icon

Block icons for VlvS


A variety of block icons are available with the following functions:
● Process tag type
● Violation of alarm, warning, and tolerance limits as well as control system faults
● Operating modes
● Signal status, release for maintenance
● Displays for bypassing interlocks
● Interlocks
● Memo display
● Valve status display

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1429
Motor and valve blocks
7.11 VlvS - Valve (small)

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV8.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in Special features


CFC
1

3 Non-rotating block icon

4 Non-rotating block icon

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV7.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in Special features


CFC
1 Block icon in the full display

- Block icon in "Out of service"


mode (example with type 1
block icon)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1430 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.11 VlvS - Valve (small)

Additional information on the block icon and the control options in the block icon is available
in the following chapters:
● Configuring the block icons (Page 246)
● Block icon structure (Page 239)
● Operation via the block icon (Page 248)

Valve status display


The following valve states are shown here:

Symbol Meaning
Valve open

Valve closed

Error at valve

Valve is opening

Valve is closing

Valve closed

Valve is closing

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1431
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

7.12.1 Description of VlvMotL

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1900
Family: Drives

Area of application for VlvMotL


The block is used for the following applications:
● Motor valve control

How it works
Various operating modes are available for controlling the motor-driven valve. This functionality
allows you to set specific valve states. All changes of modes or states and faults occurring in
this context are monitored, visualized in the faceplate and reported to the operator. Operators
with suitable permissions can use the block icon and the faceplate to view the current states
of the motor-driven valve and to operate it.

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38). The block is
also installed automatically in the startup OB (OB100).
For the VlvMotL block, the Advanced Process Library contains templates for process tag types
as examples with various application scenarios for this block.
Examples of process tag types:
● Step controller with assigned actuator block and position feedback (StepControlActor)
(Page 2398)
● Motor valve (ValveMotor) (Page 2433)

Startup characteristics
Use the Feature Bit Set startup characteristics (Page 141) to define the startup characteristics
of this block.
The messages are suppressed after startup for the number of cycles set at RunUpCyc.
After a startup without control (Open, Close = 0)", no monitoring of the feedback signals
FbkOpen and FbkClose takes place during the V_MonTiStatic time. Changes to
FbkOpen and FbkClose are applied. This means that the feedback is monitored again, also
in stop state.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1432 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


You can find a description for each parameter in section VlvMotL I/Os (Page 1453).

Status bit Parameter


0 Occupied
1 BatchEn
2 SimOn
3 OosAct.Value
4 OosLi.Value
5 AutoAct.Value
6 LocalAct.Value
7 0: Open padlock in the block icon
1: Closed padlock in the block icon
With Feature2.Bit16 = 1, a closed padlock is displayed if "Interlock Open" or
"Interlock Close" is active.
8 Open.Value
9 Motor is stopped
10 Close.Value
11 Torque shutdown enabled (TorqOpen or TorqClose = 1)
When the seal valve function is enabled, the torque shutoff is only active if the
TorqClose signal is enabled before the valve feedback.
12 WarnAct.Value or
IdleTime active
13 Feedback error without control change
14 Feedback error due to control change
15 Mode Switch Fail
16 1 = Intlock is active
17 1 = Permit is active
18 1 = Protect is active
19 Trip.Value
20 Display „Forced open“
21 Display „Forced stop“
22 Display „Forced close“
23 "Interlock" button is enabled
24 0 = Display neutral position "Closed"
1 = Display neutral position "Open"
25 1 = Display neutral position "Stop"
26 Bypass information from previous function block
27 Bypass enabled (BypProt = 1) and Local.Act = 1 or SimOn = 1
28 Invalid signal status
29 0 = closed
1 = open
30 "Permission" button is enabled
31 "Protection" button is enabled

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1433
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

Status word allocation for Status2 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 MsgLock
1 AV_AH_Act.Value
2 AV_WH_Act.Value
3 AV_TH_Act.Value
4 AV_TL_Act.Value
5 AV_WL_Act.Value
6 AV_AL_Act.Value
7 AV_AH_En OR Feature.Bit23
8 AV_WH_En OR Feature.Bit23
9 AV_TH_En OR Feature.Bit23
10 AV_TL_En OR Feature.Bit23
11 AV_WL_En OR Feature.Bit23
12 AV_AL_En OR Feature.Bit23
13 AV_AH_MsgEn
14 AV_WH_MsgEn
15 AV_TH_MsgEn
16 AV_TL_MsgEn
17 AV_WL_MsgEn
18 AV_AL_MsgEn
19 1 = No impact of input signals on "local mode" with LocalSetting = 2 and
LocalSetting = 4
20 1 = Valve closes
21 1 = Valve closed
22 1 = Valve stopped
23 1 = Valve opens
24 1 = Valve open
25 For the Error status display in the Closed valve
26 For the Error status display in the Opened valve
27 Automatic preview for "opening"
28 Automatic preview for "closing"
29 Automatic preview for "stopping"
30 Display for interlocks in block icon
31 MS_RelOp

Status word allocation for Status3 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 M_MonStaErr.Value
1 M_MonDynErr.Value
2 V_MonStaErr.Value
3 V_MonDynErr.Value

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1434 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

Status bit Parameter


4 M_MonStopErr.Value
5-7 Not used
8 Reset request in automatic
9 External error generated by FaultExt or external control system fault from CSF with
set Feature.Bit18 Activating error state for external process control error CSF
(Page 154)
10 Not used
11 Motor protection display (Trip.Status ≠ 16#FF)
12 1 = Input parameter FbkClose is connected
13 1 = Input parameter FbkClosing is connected
14 1 = Input parameter FbkOpen is connected
15 1 = Input parameter FbkOpening is connected
16 1 = Input parameter TorOpen is connected
17 1 = Input parameter TorClose is connected
18 SimLiOp.Value
19 1 = Enable for "rapid stop"(Feature Bit Enabling rapid stop via faceplate
(Page 172))
20 1 = Input parameter OpenChnST is interconnected
21 1 = Input parameter CloseChnST is interconnected
22 Not used
23 Command for "rapid stop"
24 "Open"/"Stop" command
25 "Close"/"Stop" command
26 Show automatic preview in the standard view
27 Not used
28 GrpErr.Value
29 RdyToStart.Value
30 Auxiliary value 1 visible
31 Auxiliary value 2 visible

Status word allocation for Status4 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 Effective signal 1 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
1 Effective signal 2 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
2 Effective signal 3 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
3 Effective signal 4 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
4 Effective signal 5 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
5 Effective signal 6 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
6 Effective signal 7 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
7 Effective signal 8 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
8 AV not connected
9 Delay of the AV_AH_Lim message

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1435
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

Status bit Parameter


10 Delay of the AV_WH_Lim message
11 Delay of the AV_TH_Lim message
12 Delay of the AV_TL_Lim message
13 Delay of the AV_WL_Lim message
14 Delay of the AV_AL_Lim message
15 Collection of message delays
16 "Permission Open" button is enabled
17 "Permission Close" button is enabled
18 "Interlock Open" button is enabled
19 "Interlock Close" button is enabled
20 "Protection Open" button is enabled
21 "Protection Close" button is enabled
22 1 = "Permission Close" is active
23 Hidden bypass signal in Permit
24 Hidden bypass signal in interlock
25 Hidden bypass signal in Protect
26 Feature2.Bit2: Separate bypass signal
27 1 = "Interlock Close" is active
28 1 = "Protection Close" is active
29 Current motor monitoring time is visible
30 Current valve monitoring time is visible
31 Separate monitoring of shutdown of the motor (Feature.Bit13)

Status word allocation for Status5 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0-7 Effective signal 9..16 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
8 1 = Valve still closes (Status2 Bit 20) but the motor is not running
9 1 = Valve still opens (Status2 Bit 23) but the motor is not running
10 Hidden bypass signal in "Permission Close"
11 Hidden bypass signal in "Interlock Close"
12 Hidden bypass signal in "Protection Close"
13 Feature2.Bit16 Separate interlock for each direction, position, or speed
(Page 173)
14 - 15 Not used
16 - 31 Effective signal 1...16 of the message block connected via EventTs2In

See also
VlvMotL functions (Page 1439)
VlvMotL messaging (Page 1452)
VlvMotL block diagram (Page 1464)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1436 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

VlvMotL error handling (Page 1449)


VlvMotL modes (Page 1437)

7.12.2 VlvMotL modes

VlvMotL operating modes


The block supports all standard modes:
● Local mode (Page 80)
● Automatic mode (Page 76)
● Manual mode (Page 76)
● Out of service (Page 72)
The next section provides additional block-specific information relating to the general
descriptions.

"Local mode"
You can find general information on "Local mode", switching modes and Bumpless switchover
in the Local mode (Page 80) section.
Motor valve actions you can control in "local mode"
● "Open" (OpenLocal = 1)
● "Close" (CloseLocal = 1)
● "Stop" (StopLocal = 1).
A block operated in "local mode" is controlled either by "local" signals or by feedback signals
(input parameters FbkOpen and FbkClose; if no position can be assigned, the last valid
position is accepted). Configuration takes place via the input parameter LocalSetting.

"Automatic mode"
You can find general information on "Automatic mode", switching modes and Bumpless
switchover in the Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76) section.
Motor valve actions you can control in "automatic mode":
● "Open" (OpenAut = 1)
● "Close" (CloseAut = 1)
● "Stop" (StopAut = 1)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1437
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

"Manual mode"
You can find general information on "Manual mode", switching modes and bumpless
switchover in the section Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers
(Page 76).
Motor valve actions you can control in "manual mode":
● "Open" (OpenMan = 1)
● "Close" (CloseMan = 1)
● "Stop" (StopMan = 1)

"Out of service"
You can find general information about the "Out of service" mode in the section Out of
service (Page 72).
With Feature2.Bit1 =1 the following output parameter become the status of simulation
16#60, if mode is changed to "Out of service".
With Feature2.Bit1 =0 the following output parameter become the status of 16#80, if mode
is changed to "Out of service".
● FbkOpenOut.ST
● FbkCloseOut.ST
● FbkOpngOut.ST
● FbkClsgOut.ST
● Opened.ST
● Closed.ST
● Opening.ST
● Closing.ST
● Stop.ST
● AV_Out.ST

See also
VlvMotL block diagram (Page 1464)
VlvMotL I/Os (Page 1453)
VlvMotL error handling (Page 1449)
VlvMotL functions (Page 1439)
VlvMotL messaging (Page 1452)
Description of VlvMotL (Page 1432)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1438 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

7.12.3 VlvMotL functions

Functions of VlvMotL
The functions for this block are listed below.

Opening additional faceplates


This block provides the standard function Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

Operator permissions
This block provides the standard function Operator control permissions (Page 265).
The block has the following permissions for the OS_Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 1 = Operator can switch to "automatic mode"
1 1 = Operator can switch to "manual mode"
2 1 = Operator can switch to "local mode"
3 1 = Operator can switch to "Out of service" mode
4 1 = Operator can stop the motor
5 1 = Operator can open the valve
6 1 = Operator can close the valve
7 1 = Operator can reset the valve
8 1 = Operator can define the monitoring time for the valve startup
9 1 = Operator can define the monitoring time for the end position of the valve
10 1 = Operator can enable the monitoring time function of the valve (Bit 8 - 9)
11 1 = Operator can define or change the monitoring time for startup
12 1 = Operator can define the monitoring time for the motor status
13 1 = Operator can enable the monitoring time function of the motor (Bit 8 - 9)
14 1 = Operator can activate the Simulation function
15 1 = Operator can activate the Release for maintenance function
16 1 = Operator can change the limit (AV) for high alarm
17 1 = Operator can change the limit (AV) for high warning
18 1 = Operator can change the limit (AV) for high tolerance
19 1 = Operator can change the limit (AV) for hysteresis
20 1 = Operator can change the limit (AV) for low alarm
21 1 = Operator can change the limit (AV) for low warning
22 1 = Operator can change the limit (AV) for low tolerance
23 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via AV_AH_MsgEn
24 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via AV_WH_MsgEn
25 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via AV_TH_MsgEn
26 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via AV_TL_MsgEn
27 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via AV_WL_MsgEn

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1439
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

Bit Function
28 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via AV_AL_MsgEn
29 1 =Operator can change the simulation value SimAV
30 1 = Operator can define the monitoring time for stopping
31 Not used

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Restart lock after changing direction of rotation or switching off the motor
Use the input parameter IdleTime to enter a restart lock for changing the direction of rotation
or restarting the motor. When the "Stop" command is given, the motor goes immediately into
"Stop" mode, and IdleTime starts after the feedback (FbkOpening and FbkClosing = 0)
is given. The motor cannot be started again (open or close) until the IdleTime has expired.

Limit monitoring of an additional analog value


This block provides the standard function Limit monitoring of an additional analog value
(Page 92).

Limit monitoring with hysteresis


This block provides the standard function Limit monitoring with hysteresis (Page 98). It is
performed via the input parameter AV_Hyst.

Suppressing messages using the MsgLock parameter


This block provides the standard function Suppressing messages using the MsgLock
parameter (Page 214).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1440 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

Interlocks
This block provides the following interlocks:
● Feature2.Bit16 = 0
– Activation enable ("Permission")
– Interlock without reset ("Interlock")
– Interlock with reset ("Protection")
● Feature2.Bit16 = 1
– Activation enable Open ("Permission Open")
– Activation enable Close ("Permission Close")
– Interlock open without reset ("Interlock Open")
– Interlock close without reset ("Interlock Close")
– Interlock open with reset ("Protection Open")
– Interlock close with reset ("Protection Close")
Refer to the section Interlocks (Page 101) as well as Influence of the signal status on the
interlock (Page 105).

Motor protection function


This block provides the standard function Motor protection function (Page 100).

Rapid stop for motors


This block provides the standard function Rapid stop for motors (Page 108).

Torque monitoring
The block provides torque monitoring.
The signals of the torque monitoring switches are interconnected to input parameters
TorqOpen and TorqClose for opening and closing the motor valve.
An active torque shutdown is displayed in the parameter either by the value 0 or by the signal
status 16#00 or 16#28.
If the torque shutdown is active, the motor is stopped. You have the option of moving the valve
in the opposite direction.
If, for example, the torque shutdown is active when the valve opens, you can still close the
valve.
Active torque shutoff appears in the standard view of the display area for block states.
When the "Seal valve" function is enabled via Feature.Bit8, the torque shutoff for the
closing TorqClose is also evaluated (see section Sealing the valve).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1441
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

Reset of motor control after valve end position has been reached
After a motor control in the direction of one of the end positions, open or closed, the valve is
opened or closed accordingly. After the end position is reached, the block is notified of this via
the FbkOpen or FbkClose input. The Feature bit Motor stop in end position depends only
on the corresponding feedback signal (Page 188) can affect the dependencies of the feedback
signals to downscale the motor in the end position.

Note
If you deactivate one of the valve feedback signals via the inputs NoFbkOpen,
NoFbkClose, the corresponding valve feedback signal FbkOpen, FbkClose for the motor
switch off in the end position is no longer evaluated. After the valve monitoring time
V_MonTiDynamic has expired, the corresponding output of the valve feedback signal
FbkOpenOut, FbkCloseOut is set and the associated motor control Open, Close is reset
again.
In the case of missing valve feedback signals, the corresponding signals of the torque
monitoring with the inputs TorqOpen or TorqClose must be used.

Sealing the valve


The function is activated via Feature.Bit8 Sealing the valve (Page 179). The seal valve
function combines the query of the end position CLOSED via the input parameter FbkClose
with the limit violation of the configured torque via the input parameter TorqClose. This
ensures that the valve is completely sealed.
The valve is only considered completely sealed when the feedback for the end position CLOSE
has been received (0->1) and the torque cutoff for Closed is enabled. The torque shutoff should
not come before the feedback in this case. The FbkCloseOut output shows whether the valve
is sealed:

FbkCloseOut := FbkClose.Value has been received (0->1)


And "Torque shutoff closed is enabled"
And "Torque shutoff closed is enabled" did not come before FbkClose (0->1)
"Torque shutoff closed is enabled" means that TorqClose = 0 or the signal status is 16#00
or 16#28.
When "Torque shutoff closed is enabled" comes before the end position feedback closed, this
is displayed in the faceplate in the standard view and the motor stops. Opening the valve is
still possible.

Note
The command text for Close in the standard view and preview can be changed to Seal in the
CFC at the CloseMan parameter in Text 1. See Section Labeling of buttons and text
(Page 218)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1442 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

Disabling interlocks
This block provides the standard function Disabling interlocks (Page 104).

Resetting the block in case of interlocks


This block provides the standard function Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors
(Page 43).

External error (FaultExt), external control system fault (CSF)


This block provides the possibility to pass an external error via the FaultExt parameter or
an external control system fault via the CSF parameter. See VlvMotL error handling
(Page 1449)

Group error
This block provides the standard function Outputting group errors (Page 124).
The following parameters are taken into consideration when forming the group error:
● CSF
● Trip
● V_MonDynErr
● V_MonStaErr
● M_MonDynErr
● M_MonStaErr
● FaultExt

Outputting a signal for start readiness


This block provides the standard function Outputting a signal for start readiness (Page 54).

Forming the group status for interlocks


This block provides the standard function Forming the group status for interlock information
(Page 106).

Forming the signal status for blocks


This block provides the standard function Forming and outputting the signal status for
technologic blocks (Page 110).
The worst signal status for the block is formed from the following parameters:
● FbkClsgOut.ST
● FbkOpngOut.ST
● FbkOpenOut.ST

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1443
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

● FbkCloseOut.ST
● LocalLi.ST
● OpenLocal.ST
● StopLocal.ST
● TorqClose.ST
● CloseLocal.ST
● Trip.ST
● TorqOpen.ST
● AV_Out.ST
● OpenChn.ST
● CloseChn.ST
● OpenAut.ST (only if Feature2.Bit10 = 1)
● CloseAut.ST (only if Feature2.Bit10 = 1)
● StopAut.ST (only if Feature2.Bit10 = 1)

Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values


If the Feature2 bit Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values
(Page 190) is set to 1 and one of the following parameters has bad signal status (16#00 or
16#28), the block goes to the neutral position in the "Automatic" mode:
● OpenAut.ST
● CloseAut.ST
● StopAut.ST

Forcing operating modes


This block provides the standard function Forcing operating modes (Page 41). Inputs
OpenForce and CloseForce and StopForceforce the block to open, close or stop.

Feedback monitoring
This block provides the standard function Monitoring the feedbacks (Page 98).
The FbkOpen and FbkClose feedback is monitored for the valve; the FbKOpening and
FbkClosing feedback is monitored for the motor.
The monitoring of the feedback for the valve will not be active if it was stopped during opening
or closing.

Monitoring valve feedback


The monitoring of valve feedback is set using the parameter V_Monitor.
Startup characteristics are monitored by setting parameterV_MonTiDynamic. The parameter
V_MonTiStatic monitors compliance with the position.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1444 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

Feedback errors are displayed at the corresponding parameters V_MonDynErr and/or


V_MonStaErr.

Note
After the motor valve stops in the intermediate position or end position or after a startup without
control (Open, Close = 0)" no monitoring of the feedback signals FbkOpen and FbkClose
takes place during the V_MonTiStatic time. Changes to FbkOpen and FbkClose are
applied. This means that the feedback is monitored again, also in stop state.

Note
When the "Seal valve" function is enabled via Feature.Bit8, the torque shutoff for closing
TorqClose is also evaluated (see section Sealing the valve (Page 179)).

Monitoring the motor feedback


The monitoring of motor feedback is set using the parameter M_Monitor.
Startup characteristics are monitored by setting parameterM_MonTiDynamic. The parameter
M_MonTiStatic monitors compliance with the position.
Feedback errors are displayed at the corresponding parameters M_MonDynErr and/or
M_MonStaErr.

Disabling feedback
This block provides the standard function Disabling feedback for valves (Page 100). Feedback
monitoring can be deactivated separately for each feedback with NoFbkOpen or
NoFbkClose as required.

Tracking the valve position after a motor stop or after a startup


Because of vibration or mass inertia after a motor stop the block tracks the valve position for
the time V_MonTiStatic. During this time the static feedback monitoring is not active. The
monitoring starts after the time V_MonTiStatic.
● Motor is stopped in end position open (FbkOpen =1, FbkClose =0):
Open and intermediate position will be tracked.
FbkOpen =1, FbkClose =0: valve goes to open position
FbkOpen =0, FbkClose =0: valve goes to intermediate position
● Motor is stopped in intermediate position (FbkOpen =0, FbkClose =0):
Open, Close and intermediate position can be tracked.
FbkOpen =1, FbkClose =0: valve goes to open position
FbkOpen =0, FbkClose =0: valve goes to intermediate position
FbkOpen =0, FbkClose =1: valve goes to close position
● Motor is stopped in end position close (FbkOpen =0, FbkClose =1):
Close and intermediate position can be tracked.
FbkOpen =1, FbkClose =0: valve goes to open position
FbkOpen =0, FbkClose =0: valve goes to intermediate position

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1445
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

Because of preparing the feedback signals after startup the block tracks the valve position for
the time V_MonTiStatic.
● Open, Close and intermediate position can be tracked.
FbkOpen =1, FbkClose =0: valve goes to open position
FbkOpen =0, FbkClose =0: valve goes to intermediate position
FbkOpen =0, FbkClose =1: valve goes to close position

Note
After resetting the block, in the case of interlocks or errors, the valve position will always be
tracked, depending on FbkOpen and FbkClose.

Release for maintenance


This block provides the standard function Release for maintenance (Page 65).

Specify warning times for control functions


This block provides the standard function Specifying warning times for control functions at
motors and valves (Page 51).
You can generate warning signals when, for example, valves open. Warning signals can be
generated in the following modes:
● Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76) (Input parameter
WarnTiMan)
● Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76) (Input parameter
WarnTiAut)
You specify the warning times in seconds using the input parameters WarnTiMan and
WarnTiAut. If, for example, a valve opens, this is displayed at the output parameter with
WarnAct = 1. The valve then opens after the set warning time has expired and WarnAct then
returns to 0.
A corresponding warning is not output if the warning times (WarnTiMan or WarnTiAut) are
specified with a smaller value than the SampleTime parameter.

Note
The warning is activated for each actuation that causes the motor to start, even if this means
that the valve is moved to the neutral position

Simulating signals
This block provides the standard function Simulating signals (Page 59).
You can simulate the following values:
● Additional value (SimAV, SimAV_Li)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1446 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

In the case of internal simulation with immediate tracking of feedback, it is possible to simulate
a position between the open and closed state (FbkOpenOut = FbkCloseOut = 0) by means
of a stop command.

Selecting a unit of measure


This block provides the standard function Selecting a unit of measure (Page 221).

Neutral position
This block provides the standard function Neutral position for motors, valves and controllers
(Page 48).

Output signal as a pulse signal or static signal


This block provides the standard function Output signal as a static signal or pulse signal
(Page 52). In addition to the static control outputs Open and Close, the block also has pulse
outputs P_Open, P_Close, and P_Stop, which are dependent on the static control output.

Generating instance-specific messages


This block provides the standard function Generating instance-specific messages (Page 213).

Disabling of limits
The block provides the standard function Disabling of limits.

Fact

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133) . The following functionality is
available for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
0 Set startup characteristics (Page 141)
1 Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 181)
2 Resetting the commands for changing the mode (Page 165)
3 Enabling resetting of commands for the control settings (Page 165)
4 Setting switch or button mode (Page 170)
8 Sealing the valve (Page 179)
9 Resetting via input signals in the event of interlocking (Protection) or errors (Page 167)
10 Exiting local mode (Page 181)
11 Activating the run time of feedback signals (Page 157)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1447
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

Bit Function
12 Motor feedback is not available (Page 160)
13 Separate monitoring time for stopping the motor (Page 173)
14 Enabling rapid stop via faceplate (Page 172)
15 Motor stop in end position depends only on the corresponding feedback signal (Page 188)
17 Enabling bumpless switchover to automatic mode for valves, motors, and dosers (Page 177)
18 Activating error state for external process control error CSF (Page 154)
19 Reset even with locked state (Page 169)
20 Disable calculation of impulse control in LocalSetting 2 and 4 (Page 190)
21 Enable bumpless switchover to "Automatic" mode for operator only (Page 176)
22 Update acknowledgment and error status of the message call (Page 163)
23 Limits disabled in faceplate (Page 195)
24 Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162)
25 Suppression of all messages (Page 178)
26 Reaction of the switching points in the "Out of service" operating mode (Page 180)
27 Interlock display with LocalSetting 2 or 4 (Page 182)
28 Disabling operating points (Page 149)
29 Signaling limit violation (Page 174)
30 Set reset depending on the operating mode or the LiOp parameter (Page 167)
31 Activating reset of protection / error in manual mode (Page 168)

In switching mode (Bit 4 = 1), control is selected with the static signals OpenAut and
CloseAut. If the OpenAut and CloseAut inputs are not set, the motor is stopped. Control
via StopAut is not needed. If the "Activate command reset for control" function (Bit 3 = 1) is
activated, the inputs OpenAut and CloseAut are reset to 0 after evaluation in the block.

Displaying auxiliary values


This block provides the standard function Displaying auxiliary values (Page 220).

Configurable reactions using the Feature2 parameter

Bit Function
1 Changes signal status of outputs in OOS (Page 198)
2 Separate evaluation for excluded and simulated interlock signals (Page 155)
3 Control priority in the event of an invalid input command (Page 179)
4 Setting switch or button mode for local commands (Page 185)
5 Evaluation of the signal status of the interlock signals (Page 146)
8 Forcing operating modes in the "Local" mode (Page 188)
10 Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values (Page 190)
11 Suppress MsgLock and “Out of service” mode for a connected message block (Page 192)
16 Separate interlock for each direction, position, or speed (Page 173)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1448 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

Connection of the time-stamped messages from EventTs or Event16Ts


This block provides the standard function Connection of the time-stamped messages from
EventTs or Event16Ts (Page 216).

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


This block provides the standard function SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

Button labels
This block provides the standard function Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218)
Instance-specific text can be configured for the following parameters:
● OpenMan
● CloseMan
● StopMan
● RapidStp

See also
Description of VlvMotL (Page 1432)
VlvMotL messaging (Page 1452)
VlvMotL I/Os (Page 1453)
VlvMotL block diagram (Page 1464)
VlvMotL modes (Page 1437)
EventTs functions (Page 1698)

7.12.4 VlvMotL error handling

Error handling of VlvMotL


Refer to section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions for the error handling of all
blocks.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers
● Mode switchover error
● Invalid input signals
● Control system fault (CSF)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1449
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum I/O can be used to output the following error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; the block is not executed
0 There is no error.
41 The value for the LocalSetting I/O is not within the approved limit of 0 to 4.
42 LocalSetting = 0 or LocalSetting = 3 or LocalSetting = 4 and LocalLi = 1
51 OpenLocal = 1 and StopLocal = 1
CloseLocal = 1 and StopLocal = 1
OpenLocal = 1 and CloseLocal = 1
OpenAut = 1 and StopAut = 1
CloseAut = 1 and StopAut = 1
OpenAut = 1 and CloseAut = 1
AutModLi = 1 and ManModLi = 1
OpenForce = 1 and StopForce = 1
CloseForce = 1 and StopForce = 1
OpenForce = 1 and CloseForce = 1
52 LocalAct = 1 and LocalSetting = 2 or 4 and SimOn = 1

Mode switchover error


This error can be output by the block, see the section Error handling (Page 121).

Invalid input signals


This error can be output by the block, see the section Error handling (Page 121).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1450 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

For the following invalid input signals, the control output can be kept or switched to the neutral
position. This depends on the function Control priority in the event of an invalid input
command (Page 179).

Operating mode Invalid input signals Control reaction with


Feature2.Bit3 = 1
Local: Localsetting = 1 or Pushbutton operation for local mode Motor is started in valve
Localsetting = 3 (Feature2.Bit4 = 0): neutral position direc‐
OpenLocal = 1 and CloseLocal = 1 or tion.
OpenLocal = 1 and StopLocal = 1 or
StopLocal = 1 and CloseLocal = 1
Switching mode (Feature2.Bit4 = 1):
OpenLocal = 1 and CloseLocal = 1
Local: Localsetting = 1 or OpenForce = 1 and CloseForce = 1 or
Localsetting = 3 and forc‐ OpenForce = 1 and StopForce = 1 or
ing
StopForce = 1 and CloseForce = 1
Forcing and no "local mode" OpenForce = 1 and CloseForce = 1 or
OpenForce = 1 and StopForce = 1 or
StopForce = 1 and CloseForce = 1
"Automatic mode" and no Pushbutton operation
forcing (FFeature.Bit4 = 0):
OpenAut = 1 and CloseAut = 1 or
OpenAut = 1 and StopAut = 1 or
StopAut = 1 and CloseAut = 1
Switching mode (Feature.Bit4 = 1):
OpenAut = 1 and CloseAut = 1
"Manual mode" and no forcing OpenMan = 1 and CloseMan = 1 or
OpenMan = 1 and StopMan = 1 or
StopMan = 1 and CloseMan = 1

Control system fault (CSF)


An external signal can be activated via the CSF input. A control system fault is triggered if this
signal changes to 1. Refer to the Error handling (Page 121) section for more on this.

See also
VlvMotL block diagram (Page 1464)
VlvMotL I/Os (Page 1453)
VlvMotL functions (Page 1439)
VlvMotL modes (Page 1437)
Description of VlvMotL (Page 1432)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1451
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

7.12.5 VlvMotL messaging

Messaging
The following messages can be generated for this block:
● Process control fault
● Instance-specific messages

Process control fault


The following control system error messages can be output:

Message in‐ Message identi‐ Message class Event


stance fier
MsgEvId1 SIG 1 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
Motor feedback error
SIG 2 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
Motor protection triggered
SIG 3 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
Valve feedback error
SIG 4 AS process control message - fault $$BlockComment$$
External error has occurred

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment
You can interconnect an external fault (signal) to input parameter CSF. If it changes to CSF =
1, a process control fault is triggered (MsgEvId1, SIG 4).

Instance-specific messages
You can use up to three instance-specific messages with this block.

Message in‐ Message identifier Message class Event


stance
MsgEvId1 SIG 5 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 1
SIG 6 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 2
SIG 7 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 3

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1452 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId1

Associated value Block parameters


1 BatchName
2 StepNo
3 BatchID
4 ExtVa104
5 ExtVa105
6 ExtVa106
7 ExtVa107
8 ExtVa108
9 Reserved
10 Reserved

The associated values 4 ... 8 are allocated to the parameters ExtVa104 ... ExtVa108 , and
can be used. Additional information is available in the "Process Control System PCS 7 -
Engineering System" manual.

See also
VlvMotL block diagram (Page 1464)
VlvMotL modes (Page 1437)

7.12.6 VlvMotL I/Os


I/Os of VlvMotL

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AutModLi* 1= "Automatic mode" via interconnection STRUCT -
or SFC (controlled by ModLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AutModOp* 1 = "Automatic mode" via operator (con‐ BOOL 0
trolled by ModLiOp = 1)
AV Input additional analog value, to be con‐ ANY
nected to AV_Tech of the AV block
AV_AH_Lim Limit high alarm REAL 95.0
AV_AL_Lim Limit low alarm REAL 5.0
AV_Hyst Hysteresis for alarm, warning and toler‐ REAL 1.0
ance limits
AV_TH_Lim Limit high tolerance REAL 85.0
AV_TL_Lim Limit low tolerance REAL 15.0
AV_WH_Lim Limit high warning REAL 90.0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1453
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

Parameter Description Type Default


AV_WL_Lim Limit low warning REAL 10.0
BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation BOOL 0
BatchID Batch ID DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name S7-String
BypProt 1 = Bypassing interlock is active in "local BOOL 0
mode" and in simulation
CloseAut* 1 = Select Close valve in "automatic STRUCT -
mode" ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CloseChnST Signal status of output channel for STRUCT -
Close ● Value: BOOL ● 0
Should be connected to an output chan‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
nel block
CloseForce 1 = Force valve closure STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CloseLocal 1 = Select Close valve in "local mode" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CloseMan* 1 = Select Close valve in "manual mode" BOOL 0
CSF 1 = External error (control system fault) STRUCT -
Error handling (Page 121) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1
EventTsIn For interconnecting data between a tech‐ ANY
nology block and the message blocks
EventTs, Event16Ts.
The EventTsIn input parameter serves
to interconnect the EventTsOut output
parameter of the EventTs, Event16TS
block. When this interconnection is con‐
figured, the messages of the EventTs,
Event16TS block are displayed on the
OS in the alarm view of the technology
block and can also be acknowledged
there.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1454 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

Parameter Description Type Default


EventTs2In For interconnecting data between a tech‐ ANY
nology block and the message blocks
EventTs, Event16Ts.
The EventTs2In input parameter
serves to interconnect the EventTsOut
output parameter of the
EventTs,Event16Ts block. When this
interconnection is configured, the mes‐
sages of the EventTs, Event16Ts
block are displayed on the OS in the
alarm view of the technology block and
can also be acknowledged there.
ExtMsg1 Binary input for freely selectable mes‐ STRUCT -
sage 1 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg2 Binary input for freely selectable mes‐ STRUCT -
sage 2 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg3 Binary input for freely selectable mes‐ STRUCT -
sage 3 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtVa104 Associated value 4 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa105 Associated value 5 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa106 Associated value 6 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa107 Associated value 7 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa108 Associated value 8 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
FaultExt 1 = External error STRUCT -
Error handling (Page 121) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FbkClose 1 = Valve closed feedback signal STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
FbkClosing 1 = Valve closing feedback signal STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
FbkOpen 1 = Valve open feedback signal STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1455
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

Parameter Description Type Default


FbkOpening 1 = Valve opening feedback signal STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 1439) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
1 = Separate monitoring time for stop‐ ● Bit 13: BOOL ● 0
ping the motor
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
Feature2 I/O for additional functions (Page 1439) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
IdleTime* Wait time for change of direction or re‐ REAL 5.0
start in [s]
Intlock 0 = Interlock / interlock Open is activated. STRUCT -
Once the interlock condition has cleared, ● Value:BOOL ● 1
the block can be operated without reset. ● ST:BYTE ● 16#FF
1 = Interlock / interlock Open is deacti‐
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
vated.
(Bypass information
bit)
Intl_En 1 = Parameter Intlock is enabled BOOL 1
IntlCls 0 = Interlock Close is activated. STRUCT -
Once the interlock condition has cleared, ● Value:BOOL ● 1
the block can be operated without reset. ● ST:BYTE ● 16#FF
1 = Interlock Close is deactivated.
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
IntlClsEn 1 = Parameter IntlCls is enabled BOOL 1
LocalLi 1 = Activate "local mode" via plant signal STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
LocalOp* 1 = "Local mode" via operator BOOL 0
LocalSetting Properties for the Local mode (Page 80) INT 0
ManModLi* 1 = Manual mode via interconnection or STRUCT -
SFC (controlled by ModLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManModOp* 1= "Manual mode" via: OS operator (con‐ BOOL 1
trolled via ModLiOp = 0)
ModLiOp Switchover of operating mode between: STRUCT -
0 = Operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
1 = Interconnection or SFC ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1456 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

Parameter Description Type Default


MonSafePos 1 = Go to neutral position in the event of BOOL 1
monitoring errors
MonTiDynamic* Monitoring time for feedback errors or REAL 3.0
feedback start error after successful op‐
eration in [s]
MonTiDyStop* Monitoring time for feedback stop errors REAL 3.0
after successful operation in [s]
M_Monitor 1 = Motor feedback monitoring BOOL 1
M_MonTiDynamic* Motor monitoring time after operation in REAL 3.0
[s]
M_MonTiStatic* Monitoring time for feedback errors with‐ REAL 3.0
out operation in [s]
MS_RelOp* 1= Release for maintenance via OS op‐ BOOL 0
erator
MsgEvId1 Message number (assigned automatical‐ DWORD 16#00000000
ly)
MsgLock 1 = Suppress process messages. STRUCT -
See also the section Suppressing mes‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
sages using the MsgLock parameter ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
(Page 214) for more on this.
MS_RelOp 1 = Release for maintenance via OS op‐ BOOL 0
erator
NoFbkClose 1 = No feedback present for "valve STRUCT -
closed" ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
NoFbkOpen 1 = No feedback present for "valve open" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Occupied 1 = In use by a batch BOOL 0
OosLi 1 = "Out of service", via interconnection STRUCT -
or SFC ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosOp* 1 = "Out of service", via OS operator BOOL 0
OpenAut* 1 = Select Open valve in "automatic STRUCT -
mode" ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpenChnST Signal status of output channel for Open STRUCT -
Should be connected to an output chan‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
nel block ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
OpenForce 1 = Force valve opening STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1457
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

Parameter Description Type Default


OpenLocal 1 = Select Open valve in "local mode" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpenMan* 1 = Select Open valve in "manual mode" BOOL 0
OpSt_In Input parameter for local operator au‐ DWORD 16#00000000
thorization, to be connected with the
Out output parameter of the upstream
block, OpStations (Page 423)
OS_Perm I/O for operator permissions STRUCT -
(Page 1439) ● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● Bit11: BOOL ● 1
1 = Operator can set or change the mon‐
itoring time for "Control: Start"
● Bit 20: BOOL ● 1
● Bit 30: BOOL ● 1
1 = Operator can set or change the mon‐
itoring time for "Control: Stop"
Permit 1 = Activation / activation Open is activa‐ STRUCT -
ted ● Value:BOOL ● 1
0 = Activation / activation Open is deac‐ ● ST:BYTE ● 16#FF
tivated
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
Perm_En 1 = Parameter Permit is enabled BOOL 1
PermCls 1 = Activation Close is activated STRUCT -
0 = Activation Close is deactivated ● Value:BOOL ● 1
● ST:BYTE ● 16#FF
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
PermClsEn 1 = Parameter PermCls is enabled
Protect 0 = Protective interlock / protective inter‐ STRUCT -
lock Open is activated. ● Value:BOOL ● 1
Once the interlock condition has cleared, ● ST:BYTE ● 16#FF
the block must be reset.
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
1 = Protective interlock / protective inter‐
(Bypass information
lock Open is deactivated.
bit)
Prot_En 1 = Parameter Protect is enabled BOOL 1
ProtCls 0 = Protective interlock Close is activa‐ STRUCT -
ted. ● Value:BOOL ● 1
Once the interlock condition has cleared, ● ST:BYTE ● 16#FF
the block must be reset.
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
1 = Protective interlock Close is deacti‐
(Bypass information
vated.
bit)
ProtClsEn 1 = Parameter ProtCls is enabled BOOL 1

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1458 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

Parameter Description Type Default


PulseWidth* Pulse width of control signal [s] REAL 3.0
RapidStp* Rapid stop for the motor BOOL 0
0 = Motor On
1 = Motor Off
RstLi* 1 = Reset via interconnection STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RstOp* 1 = Reset via operator BOOL 0
RunUpCyc Number of cycles in startup; messages INT 3
are suppressed during these cycles
SafePos Neutral position for valve: INT 2
0 = Closed
1 = Open
2 = stop
SampleTime Sampling time [s] (assigned automatical‐ REAL 0.1
ly)
SimAV* Additional value used for SimOn = 1 REAL 0.0
SimAV_Li Additional analog value that is used for STRUCT -
SimOnLi.Value = 1 ● Value: REAL ● 0
(SimLiOp.Value = 1)
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SimLiOp Activation/deactivation of the simulation STRUCT -
by: ● Value: BOOL ● 0
0 = Operator ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
1 = Interconnection or SFC
SimOnLi 1= Simulation per interconnection or STRUCT -
SFC (controlled by SimLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SimOn* 1 = Simulation on BOOL 0
SelFp1 Call a block saved in this parameter as ANY
an additional faceplate (Page 217) in the
standard view
SelFp2 Call a block saved in this parameter as ANY
an additional faceplate (Page 217) in the
preview
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
StopAut* 1 = Stopping the motor in "automatic STRUCT -
mode" ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
StopForce 1 = Force motor stop STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1459
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

Parameter Description Type Default


StopLocal 1 = Stopping the motor in "local mode" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
StopMan* 1 = Stopping the motor in "manual mode" BOOL 0
TorqOpen 0 = Torque shutdown active when open‐ STRUCT -
ing ● Value: BOOL ● 1
1 = "Good" state ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
TorqClose 0 = Torque shutdown active when closing STRUCT -
1 = "Good" state ● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
Trip 1 = Motor is in "good" state STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
UserAna1 Analog auxiliary value 1 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
UA1unit Unit of measure for analog auxiliary val‐ INT 0
ue 1
UserAna2 Analog auxiliary value 2 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
UA2unit Unit of measure for analog auxiliary val‐ INT 0
ue 2
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use in PCS 7 BYTE 16#00
OS
V_Monitor 1 = Valve feedback monitoring BOOL 1
V_MonTiDynamic* Valve monitoring time after operation in REAL 5.0
[s]
V_MonTiStatic* Monitoring time for valve feedback er‐ REAL 5.0
rors without operation in [s]
WarnTiAut* Prewarning of valve movement from REAL 0.0
neutral position in "automatic mode" in
[s]
WarnTiMan* Prewarning of valve movement from REAL 0.0
neutral position in "manual mode" in [s]

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1460 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AutAct 1 = "Automatic mode" enabled STRUCT -
0 = "Manual mode" is enabled ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AutoST 1 = Worst signal status of automatic com‐ BYTE 16#80
mands
AV_OpScale Limit for scale in AV bar graph of face‐ STRUCT -
plate ● High: REAL ● 100.0
● Low: REAL ● 0.0
AV_Out Output additional analog value STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AV_Unit Unit of measure for additional analog val‐ INT 0
ue
CascaCut Cascade connection: STRUCT -
1 = Control chain from master controller ● Value: BOOL ● 0
to secondary valve is interrupted ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Close Control output STRUCT -
1= Close valve ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Closed 1 = Valve is closed STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Closing 1 = Valve is closing STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CurrMonV Remaining valve monitoring time [s] DINT 0
CurrMonM Remaining motor monitoring time [s] DINT 0
ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without BOOL 0
errors
ErrorNum Output of pending error number. For er‐ INT -1
ror numbers that can be output by this
block, see VlvMotL error handling
(Page 1449)
FbkCloseOut Valve closed feedback STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FbkClsgOut Valve closing feedback STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1461
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

Parameter Description Type Default


FbkOpenOut Valve open feedback STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FbkOpngOut Valve opening feedback STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
GrpErr 1 = Group error pending STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
LocalAct 1 = "Local mode" enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
LockAct 1 = Interlock (Intlock, Permit, STRUCT -
Protect) or Trip is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManAct 1 = "Manual mode" enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MonDynErr 1 = Feedback error or feedback start er‐ STRUCT -
ror due to control change ● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MonDynStopErr 1 = Feedback stop error due to control STRUCT -
change ● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
M_MonDynErr 1 = Motor feedback error due to control STRUCT -
change ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
M_MonStaErr 1 = Motor feedback error due to unex‐ STRUCT -
pected feedback change ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MS_Release Release for maintenance: STRUCT -
1 = Release for OS operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MsgAckn1 Message acknowledgment status 1 (out‐ WORD 16#0000
put ACK_STATE of first ALARM_8P)
MsgErr1 Alarm error 1 (output ERROR of first BOOL 0
ALARM_8P)
MsgStat1 Message status 1 (output STATUS of first WORD 16#0000
ALARM_8P)
OosAct 1 = Block is "Out of service" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1462 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

Parameter Description Type Default


Open Control output: STRUCT -
1 = Open the valve ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Opened 1 = Valve is open STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Opening 1 = Valve is opening STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpSt_Out Value of the OpSt_In input parameter, DWORD 16#00000000
for feedforwarding to other blocks. Bit 31
of this parameter is used by
Feature.Bit24
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with settings DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
changed by the block algorithm
P_Close 1 = Pulse signal to close valve STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
P_Open 1 = Pulse signal to open valve STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
P_Rst 1= Pulse output for reset STRUCT -
The parameter persists for one cycle af‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
ter a reset. ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
P_Stop 0 = Pulse signal for stopping the valve STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
R_StpAct 1 = Rapid stop of the motor is active STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RdyToReset 1 = Ready for reset via RstLi input or STRUCT -
commands in "local", "automatic", or ● Value: BOOL ● 0
"manual mode"
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RdyToStart 1 = Active start readiness STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
Status1 Status word 1 (Page 1432) DWORD 16#00000000
Status2 Status word 2 (Page 1432) DWORD 16#00000000
Status3 Status word 3 (Page 1432) DWORD 16#00000000
Status4 Status word 4 (Page 1432) DWORD 16#00000000

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1463
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

Parameter Description Type Default


Stop 1 = Motor stopped and valve is in inter‐ STRUCT -
mediate position ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
V_MonDynErr 1 = Valve feedback error due to control STRUCT -
change ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
V_MonStaErr 1 = Valve feedback error due to unex‐ STRUCT -
pected feedback change ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
WarnAct 1 = Prewarning for valve movement STRUCT -
away from neutral position active (pa‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
rameters WarnTiAut and WarnTiMan)
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

See also
VlvMotL messaging (Page 1452)
VlvMotL block diagram (Page 1464)
VlvMotL modes (Page 1437)
Error handling (Page 121)

7.12.7 VlvMotL block diagram

VlvMotL block diagram


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

See also
VlvMotL I/Os (Page 1453)
VlvMotL messaging (Page 1452)
VlvMotL error handling (Page 1449)
VlvMotL functions (Page 1439)
VlvMotL modes (Page 1437)
Description of VlvMotL (Page 1432)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1464 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

7.12.8 Operator control and monitoring

7.12.8.1 VlvMotL views

Views of the VlvMotL block


The VlvMotL block provides the following views:
● VlvMotL standard view (Page 1465)
● Limit view of motors (Page 305)
● Alarm view (Page 313)
● Trend view (Page 317)
● VlvMotL parameter view (Page 1469)
● VlvMotL preview (Page 1472)
● Memo view (Page 315)
● Batch view (Page 313)
● Block icon for VlvMotL (Page 1476)
Refer to the sections Structure of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure
(Page 239) for general information on the faceplate and block icon.

7.12.8.2 VlvMotL standard view

VlvMotL standard view


With Feature2.Bit16 = 0:



 

 


 






With Feature2.Bit16 = 1:

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1465
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve



 

 










(1) Displaying and switching the operating mode


This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
● Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76)
● Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76)
● Local mode (Page 80)
● Out of service (Page 72)
Refer to section Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) for information
on switching the operating mode.

(2) Open, close and stop the motor valve


This area shows you the default operating state for the motor valve. The following states can
be shown and executed here:
● "Open"
● "Close"
● "Stop"
● "Rapid stop"
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for information
on changing the state.
If text is configured for these commands, it is displayed as status text and as button labels for
command selection. You can find more information about this in section Labeling of buttons
and text (Page 218)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1466 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

(3) Resetting the block


Click "Reset" for interlocks or errors. You can find additional information on this in the section
Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors (Page 43).

(4) Operating range for the interlock functions of the block


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
You can use this button to control the interlock functions of the block. You can find additional
information on this in the section Interlocking functions (Page 101).
The following is displayed in addition to the buttons:
● Interlock status (see Forming the group status for interlock information (Page 106)), e.g.:

● Signal status (see Forming and outputting the signal status for technologic blocks
(Page 110)), e.g.:

● Bypass information (see Forming the group status for interlock information (Page 106)):

(5) Display of auxiliary values


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
You can use this area to display two auxiliary values that have been configured in the
engineering system. You can find additional information on this in the section Displaying
auxiliary values (Page 220).

(6) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
Use this navigation button to open the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system (ES). The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the
engineering system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in the section Opening additional faceplates
(Page 217).

(7) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Maintenance"
Additional information on this is available in section Release for maintenance (Page 65) Display
area for block states.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1467
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

(8) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Simulation"
● "Delay"
You will find more detailed information on this in the sections Simulating signals (Page 59) and
Display of delay times (Page 267).

(9) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Motor protection"
● "External error"
● "Torque active"
● "End position error"
● "Control error"
● "Invalid signal"
● "Changeover error"
Additional information on these errors is available in the sections Monitoring the feedbacks
(Page 98) , Error handling (Page 121) (section "Invalid input signals" and "Mode switchover
error") and Motor protection function (Page 100).

(10) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Forced open"
● "Forced close"
● "Forced stop"
● "Request 0/1": A reset to "automatic mode" is expected.
You can find additional information on this in the section Forcing operating modes (Page 41).

(11) Automatic preview


This display is only visible in "manual mode", in "local mode", or with a reset request in
"automatic mode", when the current output signals are not identical to the control in "automatic
mode".
The display shows what state the valve would assume if you switched from "manual" or "local"
mode to "automatic mode", or performed a reset to "automatic mode".

(12) Status display of the motor valve


The current status of the motor valve is graphically displayed here.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1468 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

You can find more information about this in section Block icon for VlvMotL (Page 1476)

(13) Neutral position of the valve


This representation shows the neutral position for the valve:
● Green: Neutral position is "Open"
● Gray: Neutral position is "Closed"
● Light green: Neutral position is "Stop"

7.12.8.3 VlvMotL parameter view

Parameter view of VlvMotL

Parameter view for VlvMotL with Feature.Bit13 = 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1469
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

Parameter view for VlvMotL with Feature.Bit13 = 1

(1) Enabled operation


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Icons for enabled operation:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).

(2) Monitoring valve


In this area, you change parameters and therefore influence the valve. You can find additional
information on this in the section Changing values (Page 270).
You can influence the following parameters:
● "Control": Monitoring time for the valve run time (dynamic)
● "End position": Monitoring time for maintaining the valve position (static)
● "Monitoring":
You can enable monitoring by selecting the check box (☑)
You can find additional information on this in the section Monitoring the feedbacks
(Page 98).

(3) Monitoring motor


In this area, you change parameters and therefore influence the motor. You can find additional
information on this in the section Changing values (Page 270).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1470 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

You can influence the following parameters:


Feature bit 13 = 0
● "Control": Monitoring time during startup and shutdown of the motor (dynamic)
● "Status": Monitoring time during permanent operation of the motor (static)
Feature bit 13 = 1
● "Control start": Monitoring time during startup of the motor (dynamic)
● "Control stop": Monitoring time during shutdown of the motor (dynamic)
● "Status": Monitoring time during permanent operation of the motor (static)
● "Monitoring":
You can enable monitoring by selecting the check box (☑)
You can find additional information on this in the section Monitoring the feedbacks
(Page 98).

(4) Service
You can select the following functions in this area:
● "Simulation"
● "Release for maintenance" (with display for a maintenance request)
You can find additional information on this in the section Switching operating states and
operating modes (Page 268).
You can find information on this area in the section:
● Simulating signals (Page 59)
● Release for maintenance (Page 65)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1471
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

7.12.8.4 VlvMotL preview

Preview of VlvMotL

Display of the current monitoring time of the motor/valve is visible.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1472 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

Display of the current monitoring time of the motor/valve is not visible.

(1) Automatic preview


This area shows you the block status after it has switched from the "Manual" mode or "Local"
mode to the "Automatic" mode.
If the block is in "Automatic" mode, the current block state is displayed.
This area also displays the worst signal status of the following automatic commands:
● OpenAut
● CloseAut
● StopAut

(2) Enable operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1473
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

Icons for enabled operation:


● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)
The following enabled operations are shown here:
● "Stop": You can stop the motor of the valve.
If text is configured for this command, it is also displayed in brackets. You can find additional
information on this in the section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218) .
● "Open": You can open the motor valve.
If text is configured for this command, it is also displayed in brackets. You can find additional
information on this in the section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218) .
● "Close": You can close the motor valve.
If text is configured for this command, it is also displayed in brackets. You can find additional
information on this in the section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218) .
● "Reset": You can reset the motor valve if interlocks or errors occur.
● "Automatic": You can switch to "automatic mode".
● "Manual": You can switch to "manual mode".
● "Local": You can switch to "local mode".
● "Out of service": You can switch to "Out of service" operating mode.
● "Local operator permission": Use the ← button to switch to the standard view of the
OpStations block. You can find additional information on this in the section Operator control
permissions (Page 265) .
● "Monitoring motor": Display of the remaining monitoring time of the motor.
● "Monitoring valve": Display of the remaining monitoring time of the valve.

(3) Displaying current control signals


This area shows the most important parameters for this block with the current selection:
● "Permission" (Feature2.Bit16 = 0):
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Motor valve activation not enabled on OS
– 1 = Enable for "opening"/"closing" from the neutral position
● "Permission Open" (Feature2.Bit16 = 1):
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Motor valve activation not enabled on OS
– 1 = Enable for "open" from the neutral position

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1474 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

● "Permission Close" (Feature2.Bit16 = 1):


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Motor valve activation not enabled on OS
– 1 = Enable for "close" from the neutral position
● "Protection" (Feature2.Bit16 = 0):
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Protective interlocking is effective; once the interlocking condition has disappeared,
you will have to reset the block
– 1 = "Good" state
● "Protection Open" (Feature2.Bit16 = 1):
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Protective interlocking is effective; once the interlocking condition has disappeared,
you will have to reset the block
– 1 = "Good" state
● "Protection Close" (Feature2.Bit16 = 1):
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Protective interlocking is effective; once the interlocking condition has disappeared,
you will have to reset the block
– 1 = "Good" state
● "Interlock" (Feature2.Bit16 = 0):
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Interlocking without reset is active; you can operate the block without reset once the
interlocking condition has disappeared
– 1 = "Good" state
● "Interlock Open" (Feature2.Bit16 = 1):
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Interlocking without reset is active; you can operate the block without reset once the
interlocking condition has disappeared
– 1 = "Good" state
● "Interlock Close" (Feature2.Bit16 = 1):
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Interlocking without reset is active; you can operate the block without reset once the
interlocking condition has disappeared
– 1 = "Good" state
● "Local correct": 1 = Control signal for "Local mode" (LocalLi) is active
● "Motor protection": 1 = Motor is in "good" state
● "Interlock deact.":
– 0 = Bypass disabled
– 1 = Bypassing interlock in "local mode" and in "simulation"

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1475
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

● "Torque opening": 0 = Torque shutdown when opening


● "Torque closing": 0 = Torque shutdown when closing
● "Local stop": 1 = Stopping the motor valve in "local mode"
● "Local open": 1 = Opening the motor valve in "local mode"
● "Local close": 1 = Closing the motor valve in "local mode"
● "Feedback open": 1 = Motor valve is open
● "Feedback close": 1 = Motor valve is closed
● "Open": 1 = Motor valve is opened
● "Close": 1 = Motor valve is closed
● "Channel Open": Signal from the output channel block for "Open"
● "Channel Close": Signal from the output channel block for "Close"

(4) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
Use this navigation button to open the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system. The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the engineering
system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in the section Opening additional faceplates
(Page 217) .

7.12.8.5 Block icon for VlvMotL

Block icons for VlvMotL


A variety of block icons are available with the following functions:
● Process tag type
● Limits (high/low)
● Violation of alarm, warning, and tolerance limits as well as control system faults
● Operating modes
● Signal status, release for maintenance
● Displays for bypassing interlocks
● Interlocks
● Memo display
● Valve status display

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1476 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV8.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in Special features


CFC
1

3 Non-rotating block icon

4 Non-rotating block icon

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV7.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special features


1 Block icon in the full display

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1477
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special features


7

10

- Block icon in "Out of service"


mode (example with type 1 block
icon)

Additional information on the block icon and the control options in the block icon is available
in the following sections:
● Configuring the block icons (Page 246)
● Block icon structure (Page 239)
● Operation via the block icon (Page 248)

Valve status display


The following valve states are shown here:

Icon Meaning
Valve open

Valve closed

Error at valve

Valve is opening

Valve is closing

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1478 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.12 VlvMotL - Motor valve

Icon Meaning
Valve stop

Valve closed

Valve is closing

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1479
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

7.13.1 Description of VlvAnL

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1896
Family: Drives

Area of application for VlvAnL


The block is used for the following applications:
● Control of an analog control valve and positioner with adjustable neutral position
● Control of an optional auxiliary valve for regulating the auxiliary power of the control valve

How it works
The control valve is brought to a specified position using and analog activation signal. The
activation signal can be formed by a ramp function in this case.
The block forms the manipulated variable error from the difference between the activation
signal and the acquired position feedback and can monitor it for adherence to high and low
limits.
The control valve is monitored for the "Open"/"Closed" position. The block can be connected
with a digital limit switch for this purpose. The block can generate the digital position signals
itself through the adjustable limits for the "Open"/"Closed" position.
Missing feedback can be derived from the control in the block.
Various inputs are available for control purposes. The next sections provide more detailed
information on configuration, operating principles, visualization and operation.

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38). The block is
also installed automatically in the startup OB (OB100).
For the VlvAnL block, the Advanced Process Library contains templates for process tag types
as examples with various application scenarios for this block.
Examples of process tag types:
● Control valve (VlvAnL) (Page 2434)
● Control valve for PA/FF devices (ValveAnalog_Fb) (Page 2435)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1480 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

Startup characteristics
Use the Feature Bit Set startup characteristics (Page 141) to define the startup characteristics
of this block.
The messages are suppressed after startup for the number of cycles set at RunUpCyc.
If Feature Bit Set startup characteristics (Page 141) = 0, the following applies to the startup
characteristics:
● Feature.Bit16 = 0 closes the main valve
● With Feature.Bit16 = 1 the main valve is moved into the neutral position

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


You can find a description for each parameter in section VlvAnL I/Os (Page 1504).

Status bit Parameter


0 Occupied
1 BatchEn
2 SimOn
3 OosAct.Value
4 OosLi.Value
5 AutoAct.Value
6 LocalAct.Value
7 0: Open padlock in the block icon
1: Closed padlock in the block icon

In case of Feature2.Bit16 = 1 then a closed padlock is displayed if Interlock


Open OR Interlock Close is active.
8 Control valve "Open"/"Closed" command (0 = "Closed", 1 ="Open")
9 FbkOpenOut.Value control valve
10 FbkCloseOut.Value control valve
11 1 = Feedback error control valve without control change
12 1 = Feedback error control valve due to control change
13 BypProt
14 1 = Invalid signal status
15 1 = Mode changeover error
16 1 = Intlock is active
17 1 = Permit is active
18 1 = Protect is active
19 Display "Forced open"
20 Display "Forced stop"
21 1 = Force
22 Automatic preview of auxiliary valve (1 = "Open")
23 1 = Bumpless switchover to "automatic mode" enabled
24 1 = Actuator active (PosDiClose < MV <PosDiOpen)
25 UserAna1 interconnected

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1481
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

Status bit Parameter


26 UserAna2 interconnected
27 Auxiliary valve "Open"/"Closed" command (0 =" Closed", 1 = "Open")
28 FbkOpenAuxVOut.Value (auxiliary valve)
29 FbkCloseAuxVOut.Value (auxiliary valve)
30 1 = Feedback error auxiliary valve without control change
31 1 = Feedback error auxiliary valve due to control change

Status word allocation for Status2 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 1 = MsgLock message suppression active
1 1 = "Open" and "Close" commands deactivated (command line not visible)
2 1 = Display for interlocks in block icon
3 1 = Neutral position control valve "Open"
4 1 = Neutral position control valve "Closed"
5 1 = Neutral position control valve "Stop"
6 1 = Operator can reset the valve
7 WarnAct.Value
8 1 = External manipulated variable active (MV_ExtAct.Value)
9 1 = Forced manipulated variable (MV_Forced) is output without limit at output MV
10 1 = Tracking of manipulated variables MV, MV_TrkOn.Value = 1 and
MV_ForOn.Value = 0
11 1 = Manipulated variable greater than limit (low) for manipulated variable MV
(MV.Value > ManLoLim)
12 1 = Input parameter Rbk is not interconnected (RbkOut.ST = 16#FF)
13 1 = Input parameter FbkAuxVClose is connected
14 1 = Input parameter FbkAuxVOpen is connected
15 1 = Input parameter FbkClose is connected
16 1 = Input parameter FbkOpen is connected
17 For the Error status display in the Closed valve
18 Reset request in automatic
19 1 = No impact of input signals on "local mode" with LocalSetting = 2 and
LocalSetting = 4
20 1 = Control valve open
21 1 = Control valve closed
22 1 = Control valve opening
23 1 = Control valve closing
24 1 = Control valve in intermediate position ("Stop")
25 1 = Position reached
26 Control of valve, open auxiliary valve
27 Control of valve, close auxiliary valve
28 1 = Control valve is in intermediate position
29 For the Error status display in the Opened valve

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1482 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

Status bit Parameter


30 1 = Bypass information from previous function block
31 MS_RelOp

Status word allocation for Status3 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 Effective signal 1 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
1 Effective signal 2 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
2 Effective signal 3 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
3 Effective signal 4 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
4 Effective signal 5 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
5 Effective signal 6 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
6 Effective signal 7 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
7 Effective signal 8 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
8 1 = "Interlock" button is enabled
9 1 = "Permission" button is enabled
10 1 = "Protection" button is enabled
11 1 = Manipulated variable difference high limit violated (ER_AH_Act.Value)
12 1 = Manipulated variable difference low limit violated (ER_AL_Act.Value)
13 ER_AH_En OR Feature.Bit23
14 ER_AL_En OR Feature.Bit23
15 1 = Report manipulated variable difference high limit violation (ER_AH_MsgEn)
16 1 = Report manipulated variable difference low limit violation (ER_AL_MsgEn)
17 1 = Readback value high limit violated (RbkWH_Act.Value)
18 1 = Readback value low limit violated (RbkWL_Act.Value)
19 RbkWH_En OR Feature.Bit23
20 RbkWL_En OR Feature.Bit23
21 1 = Report readback value high limit violation (RbkWH_MsgEn)
22 1 = Report readback value low limit violation (RbkWL_MsgEn)
23 1 = Automatic preview control valve "Open"
24 1 = Automatic preview control valve "Closed"
25 1 = Automatic preview control valve "Stop"
26 1 = Show automatic preview in the standard view
27 1 = Auxiliary valve present
28 GrpErr.Value
29 RdyToStart.Value
30 MV_UpRaAct, MV_DnRaAct limits enabled for gradient mode (MV_RateOn = 1)
31 SimLiOp.Value

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1483
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

Status word allocation for Status4 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 External error generated by FaultExt or external control system fault CSF with set
Feature.Bit18 Activating error state for external process control error CSF
(Page 154)
1 Delay of the ER_AH_Lim message
2 Delay of the ER_AL_Lim message
3 Delay of the RbkWH_Lim message
4 Delay of the RbkWL_Lim message
5 Collection of message delays
6 1 = MV ramp active
7 - 18 Not used
19 Feature2.Bit16: Separate interlock for each direction, speed or position
20 Hidden bypass signal in Permit Close
21 Hidden bypass signal in Interlock Close
22 Hidden bypass signal in Protect Close
23 Hidden bypass signal in Permit
24 Hidden bypass signal in interlock
25 Hidden bypass signal in Protect
26 Feature2.Bit2: Separate bypass signal
27 1 = Input parameter MV_ChnST is interconnected
28 1 = Input parameter CtrlChnST is interconnected
29 Current monitoring time is visible
30 Current auxiliary valve monitoring time is visible
31 Not used

Status word allocation for Status5 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0-7 Effective signal 9..16 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
8 - 15 Not used
16 "Permission Open" button is enabled
17 "Permission Close" button is enabled
18 "Interlock Open" button is enabled
19 "Interlock Close" button is enabled
20 "Protect Open" button is enabled
21 "Protect Close" button is enabled
22 1 = Permission Close is active
23 1 = Intlock Close is active
24 1 = Protect Close is active
25-29 Not used
30 MV_TrkOn.Value
31 Not used

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1484 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

See also
VlvAnL modes (Page 1485)
VlvAnL functions (Page 1488)
VlvAnL error handling (Page 1501)
VlvAnL messaging (Page 1502)
VlvAnL block diagram (Page 1517)

7.13.2 VlvAnL modes

VlvAnL operating modes


The block can be operated using the following modes:
● Local mode (Page 80)
● Automatic mode (Page 76)
● Manual mode (Page 76)
● Out of service (Page 72)
The next section provides additional block-specific information relating to the general
descriptions.

"Local mode"
The block supports the local modes 2 and 4. Therefore, the control settings for the block are
also made based on internal adjustment of the feedback value.
You can find general information on "Local mode", switching modes and Bumpless switchover
in the Local mode (Page 80) section.

"Automatic mode"
You can find general information on "Automatic mode", switching modes and Bumpless
switchover in the Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76) section.
With auxiliary valve
In "automatic mode", the automatic commands affect the auxiliary valve, which you can
● "Open" (OpenAut = 1)
● "Close" (CloseAut = 1)
Without auxiliary valve

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1485
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

In "automatic mode", the automatic commands affect the control valve, which you can
● "Open" (OpenAut = 1)
● "Close" (CloseAut = 1)
Note
If no auxiliary valve is configured, no internal manipulated variable specifications can be
made in "automatic mode". Manipulated variable specification is set to external when the
mode is switched to "automatic".

"Manual mode"
You can find general information on "Manual mode", switching modes and bumpless
switchover in the section Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers
(Page 76).
With auxiliary valve:
In "manual mode", the operator actions affect the auxiliary valve, which you can:
● "Open" (OpenMan = 1)
● "Close" (CloseMan = 1)
Note
If no auxiliary valve is configured, no external manipulated variable specifications can be
made in the manual operating mode. With an internal manipulated value, the switchover
from "automatic mode" to "manual mode" is bumpless. With an external manipulated value,
the switchover is bumpless only if MV_TrkExt = 1 is parameterized.

Without auxiliary valve:


In "manual mode", the operator actions affect the control valve, which you can:
● "Open" (OpenMan = 1)
● "Close" (CloseMan = 1)
Note
If no auxiliary valve is configured, no external manipulated variable specifications can be
made in the manual operating mode. Manipulated variable specification is set to internal
when the mode is switched to manual. The switching is bumpless depending on the
parameter MV_TrkExt.

"Out of service"
You can find general information about the "Out of service" mode in the section Out of
service (Page 72).
With Feature2.Bit1 =1 the following output parameter become the status of simulation
16#60, if mode is changed to "Out of service".

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1486 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

With Feature2.Bit1 =0 the following output parameter become the status of 16#80, if mode
is changed to "Out of service".
● FbkAuxVOpenOut.ST
● FbkAuxVCloseOut.ST
● FbkOpenOut.ST
● FbkCloseOut.ST
● FbkOpngOut.ST
● FbkClsgOut.ST
● Opened.ST
● Closed.ST
● Opening.ST
● Closing.ST
● AuxOpened.ST
● AuxClosed.ST
● AuxOpning.ST
● AuxClsing.ST
● RbkOut.ST
● RbkWH_Act.ST
● RbkWL_Act.ST
● PosReached.ST
● ER.ST
● ER_AH_Act.ST
● ER_AL_Act.ST

See also
Description of VlvAnL (Page 1480)
VlvAnL functions (Page 1488)
VlvAnL error handling (Page 1501)
VlvAnL messaging (Page 1502)
VlvAnL I/Os (Page 1504)
VlvAnL block diagram (Page 1517)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1487
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

7.13.3 VlvAnL functions

Functions of VlvAnL
The functions for this block are listed below.

Opening additional faceplates


This block provides the standard function Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

Interlocks
This block provides the following interlocks:

Feature 2 bit 16 = 0:
● Activation enable
● Interlock without reset ("Interlock")
● Interlock with reset ("Protection")

Feature 2 bit 16 = 1:
● Activation enable Open
● Activation enable Close
● Interlock open without reset ("Interlock open")
● Interlock close without reset ("Interlock close")
● Interlock open with reset ("Protection interlock open")
● Interlock close with reset ("Protection interlock close")

Refer to the section Interlocks (Page 101) as well as Influence of the signal status on the
interlock (Page 105).

Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors


This block provides the standard function Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors
(Page 43).

External error (FaultExt), external control system fault (CSF)


This block provides the possibility to pass an external error via the FaultExt parameter or
an external control system fault via the CSF parameter. See VlvAnL error handling
(Page 1501)

Group error
This block provides the standard function Outputting group errors (Page 124).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1488 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

The following parameters are taken into consideration when forming the group error:
● CSF
● MonDynErr
● MonStaErr
● MonDynAuxVErr
● MonStaAuxVErr
● FaultExt

Outputting a signal for start readiness


This block provides the standard function Outputting a signal for start readiness (Page 54).

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


This block provides the standard function SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

Simulating signals
This block provides the standard function Simulating signals (Page 59).
You can simulate the following values:
● Position feedback (SimRbk, SimRbkLi)

Using a manipulated variable ramp


The block provides the standard function Using a manipulated variable ramp (Page 127)
This function is ignored with tracking and forced tracking.

Gradient limiting of the manipulated variable


This block provides the standard function Gradient limiting of the manipulated variable
(Page 128)

Note
This function is ignored with tracking, forced tracking, forced operating states and travel to the
neutral position.

Tracking and limiting a manipulated variable


You can correct the manipulated variable output to the tracking value MV_Trk or the
manipulated variable feedback Rbk to realize Bumpless switchover. To track the manipulated
variable output, you have to set the parameter MV_TrkOn = 1.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1489
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

If the parameter is MV_TrkRbk = 0, the manipulated variable output is corrected to the tracking
value MV_Trk. The manipulated variable output MV is limited to the MV_HiLim and
MV_LoLim parameters.
If the parameter is MV_TrkRbk = 1, the manipulated variable output is tracked to the position
feedback Rbk. There are no limits here.
The "Tracking" text is displayed additionally in the standard view of the faceplate.
Tracking has a higher priority than interlock for a control valve.

Forming the group status for interlocks


This block provides the standard function Forming the group status for interlock information
(Page 106).

Forming the signal status for blocks


This block provides the standard function Forming and outputting the signal status for
technologic blocks (Page 110).
The signal status of the output for the manipulated variable feedback RbkOut always
corresponds to the signal status of the Rbk input or when the block is in simulation, the signal
status of the 16#60 output.
The signal status of the FbkCloseOut and FbkOpenOut outputs is fetched and sent from the
worst signal status from the RbkOut output and the corresponding feedback signal inputs
FbkClose and FbkOpen.
The signal status of the manipulated variable output MV always corresponds to the signal status
of the input parameter MV_Ext or MV_Int, depending on how the setpoint is specified. If the
internal manipulated variable MV_Int is used, the signal status is always output as 16#80.
The signal status of manipulated variable difference ER is fetched and sent from the worst
signal status of the two outputs RbkOut and MV.
The worst signal status ST_Worst for the block is formed from the following parameters:
● FbkOpenOut.ST
● FbkCloseOut.ST
● FbkAuxVOpenOut.ST
● FbkAuxVCloseOut.ST
● RbkOut.ST
● LocalLi.ST
● MV_Chn.ST
● CtrlChn.ST
● OpenAut.ST (only if Feature2.Bit10 = 1)
● CloseAut.ST (only if Feature2.Bit10 = 1)
● MV_Ext.ST (only if Feature2.Bit10 = 1)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1490 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values


If the Feature2 bit Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values
(Page 190) is set to 1 and one of the following parameters has bad signal status (16#00 or
16#28), the block goes to the neutral position in the "Automatic" mode:
● OpenAut.ST
● CloseAut.ST
● MV_Ext.ST

Forcing operating modes


This block provides the standard function Forcing operating modes (Page 41).

Note
If the block is operated with a auxiliary valve, the OpenForce and CloseForce commands
also affect the auxiliary valve.
The high range limit (MV_HiLim) and the low range limit (MV_LoLim) are output at MV for
OpenForce and CloseForce respectively.
With CloseForce, the auxiliary valve is closed, thereby triggering the neutral position of the
control valve regardless of the MV output.
A configured ramp limit has no effect.

Feedback monitoring
This block provides the standard function Monitoring the feedbacks (Page 98).
Digital feedback signals for the "Open" and "Closed" positions are formed from the position
feedback:
● Feedback for "Open" position: Rbk ≥ PosDiOpen
● Feedback for "Closed" position: Rbk ≤ PosDiClose

Specifying control valve positions:


There are the positions:
● Valve closed ("Closed")
● Valve closes
● Valve open ("Open")
● Valve opens
● Valve has reached defined position

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1491
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

Valve closed ("Closed")


When the control valve reaches the "Close" position, the output is FbkCloseOut.Value = 1:
● With a binary limit switch for the "Close" position (NoFbkClose = 0):
The valve is considered closed when FbkCloseOut is set. FbkCloseOut is set when Rbk
≤ PosDiClose and FbkClose = 1.
● Without a binary limit switch for the "Close" position (NoFbkClose = 1):
The valve is considered closed when FbkCloseOut is set. FbkCloseOut is set when Rbk
≤ PosDiClose.

Valve closes
If the control valve travels in the direction of the "Close" position, the output is FbkClsgOut
= 1:
● FbkClsgOut is set when MV.Value < RbkOut.Value and not when
PosReached.Value = 1 .

Valve open ("Open")


When the control valve reaches the "Open" position, the output is FbkOpenOut.Value = 1:
● With a binary limit switch for the "Open" position (NoFbkOpen = 0):
The valve is considered open when FbkOpenOut is set. FbkOpenOut is set when Rbk ≥
PosDiOpen and FbkOpen = 1.
● Without a binary limit switch for the "Open" position (NoFbkOpen = 1):
The valve is considered open when FbkOpenOut is set. FbkOpenOut is set, when Rbk ≥
PosDiOpen.

Valve opens
If the control valve travels in the direction of the "Open" position, the output is FbkOpngOut =
1:
● FbkOpngOut is set when MV.Value > RbkOut.Value and is not PosReached.Value
= 1.

Valve has reached defined position


If the control valve is sent to a specified intermediate position (MV > PosDiClose and MV <
PosDiOpen), the targeted position is reached when the difference MV.Value -
RbkOut.Value is within the configured tolerance range ± PosDeadBand and therefore
ER.Value = 0.0.
If the control valve is set to the end position "Open" (MV.Value >= PosDiOpen), this position
is reached when ER.Value = 0.0 and also FbkOpenOut.Value = 1.
If the control valve is set to the end position "Closed" (MV.Value <= PosDiClose), this
position is reached when ER.Value = 0.0 and also FbkCloseOut.Value = 1.
When the control valve reaches the specified position, the PosReached = 1 output is set.

Dynamic monitoring
The monitoring is based on the effective feedback signals FbkOpenOut and FbkCloseOut
and not directly on the feedback inputs FbkOpen and FbkClose.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1492 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

A dynamic monitoring error is generated if:


● The "Close" end position is targeted (MV ≤ PosDiClose) and this position
(FbkCloseOut) is not reached within the monitoring time MonTiDynamic.
● The "Close" end position is targeted (MV ≤ PosDiClose) and the feedback of the binary
limit switch FbkClose is already within the control range.
● The "Open" position is targeted (MV ≥ PosDiOpen) and this position (FbkOpenOut) is not
reached within the monitoring time MonTiDynamic.
● The "Open" end position is targeted (MV ≥ PosDiOpen) and the feedback for the binary
limit switch FbkOpen is already within the control range.
● A further intermediate position is controlled and this position is not reached (PosReached
= 0) within the monitoring time MonTiDynamic.

Static monitoring
The monitoring is based on the effective feedback signals FbkOpenOut and FbkCloseOut
and not on the feedback inputs FbkOpen and FbkClose.
A static monitoring error is generated if:
● The "Close" end position (FbkCloseOut = 1) is abandoned without a command having
been issued beforehand, and the monitoring time MonTiStatic has expired.
● The "Close" end position is reached (FbkCloseOut = 1), the feedback of the binary limit
switch FbkClose is gone, and monitoring time MonTiStatic has expired.
● The "Open" end position (FbkOpenOut = 1) is abandoned without a command having been
issued beforehand and the monitoring time MonTiStatic has expired.
● The "Open" end position is reached (FbkOpenOut = 1), the feedback of the binary limit
switch FbkOpen is gone, and monitoring time MonTiStatic has expired.
● The valve is in intermediate position and with constant MV, the analog feedback Rbk has
been changed so much that the position is no longer reached (PosReached = 0) and the
monitoring time MonTiStatic has expired.

Suppressing messages using the MsgLock parameter


This block provides the standard function Suppressing messages using the MsgLock
parameter (Page 214).

Monitoring the feedback for the auxiliary valve


The auxiliary valve provides dynamic and static monitoring of the feedback. No special
monitoring time can be configured for overseeing the retention of the end position of the
auxiliary valve. If the end position is exited without the corresponding command, a "monitoring
runtime error" is reported after expiration of the time configured under "Control".
Monitoring is disabled by default and no connections are displayed.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1493
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

The following parameters can be used to monitor the auxiliary valve

Parameter Function
FbkAuxVOpen 1 = Auxiliary valve open feedback signal
FbkAuxVClose 1 = Auxiliary valve closed feedback signal
NoFbkAuxVOpen 1 = No feedback present for Auxiliary valve open (default = 1)
NoFbkAuxVClose 1 = No feedback present for Auxiliary valve closed (default = 1)
MonitorAuxV 1 = Feedback monitoring of the auxiliary valve (default = 0)
MonAuxVTime Monitoring time after auxiliary valve operation in [s]
MonDynAuxVErr Dynamic monitoring error pending
MonStaAuxVErr Static monitoring error pending

Otherwise, the monitoring works like the monitoring function of the control valve.

Selecting a unit of measure


This block provides the standard function Selecting a unit of measure (Page 221).

Neutral position
This block provides the standard function Neutral position for motors, valves and controllers
(Page 48).
The neutral position (de-energized state) for the auxiliary valve is set using the SafePosAux
parameter.
● SafePosAux = 0 means that the auxiliary valve closes with Ctrl = 0 and opens with
Ctrl = 1.
● SafePosAux = 1 means that the auxiliary valve opens with Ctrl = 0 and closes with
Ctrl = 1 .
The setting is made with the SafePos parameter for the control valve.
● SafePos = 0 means that the control valve closes in the de-energized state (MV is set to
MV_OpScale.Low)
● SafePos = 1 means that the control valve opens in the de-energized state (MV is set to
MV_OpScale.High)
● SafePos = 2 means that the control valve retains its position in the de-energized state.
(MV remains unchanged)
The control valve is brought to the neutral position when the FbkAuxVCloseOut = 1 control
valve is closed.

Generating instance-specific messages


This block provides the standard function Generating instance-specific messages (Page 213).

Disabling of limits
The block provides the standard function AUTOHOTSPOT.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1494 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133) . The following functionality is
available for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
0 Set startup characteristics (Page 141)
1 Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 181)
2 Resetting the commands for changing the mode (Page 165)
3 Enabling resetting of commands for the control settings (Page 165)
4 Setting switch or button mode (Page 170)
5 Control via auxiliary valve (Page 175)
6 Disabling opening and closing (Page 162)
7 Ramp rate calculation (Page 183)
9 Resetting via input signals in the event of interlocking (Protection) or errors
(Page 167)
10 Exiting local mode (Page 181)
11 Activating the run time of feedback signals (Page 157)
12 Gradient limitation with time duration (Page 186)
15 Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect with "out of service" operating
mode (Page 170)
16 Neutral position manipulated variable takes effect at startup (Page 169)
17 Enabling bumpless switchover to automatic mode for valves, motors, and dosers
(Page 177)
18 Activating error state for external process control error CSF (Page 154)
21 Enable bumpless switchover to "Automatic" mode for operator only (Page 176)
22 Update acknowledgment and error status of the message call (Page 163)
23 Limits disabled in faceplate (Page 195)
24 Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162)
25 Suppression of all messages (Page 178)
26 Reaction of the switching points in the "Out of service" operating mode (Page 180)
27 Interlock display with LocalSetting 2 or 4 (Page 182)
28 Disabling operating points (Page 149)
29 Signaling limit violation (Page 174)
30 Set reset depending on the operating mode or the LiOp parameter (Page 167)
31 Activating reset of protection / error in manual mode (Page 168)

With auxiliary valve (Feature bit 5 = 1):


In this case the automatic commands OpenAut and CloseAut control the auxiliary valve
In pushbutton operation (Bit 4 = 0) the automatic commands in automatic mode are latching,
in other words OpenAut, and CloseAut, can be reset to 0 after changing the control. In
manual and local modes, however, the automatic commands are not saved and in the absence
of automatic commands the automatic control is tracked.
In switching mode (Bit 4 = 1), control is selected with the static signals OpenAut. If input
OpenAut is not set the auxiliary valve is closed. Control via CloseAut is not needed. If the

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1495
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

"Activate command reset for control settings" function (Bit 3 = 1) is activated, the OpenAut
input is reset to the neutral position after evaluation in the block.

Without auxiliary valve (Feature bit 5 = 0):


The analog valve is opened or closed in automatic mode with the automatic commands
OpenAut and CloseAut. If OpenAut and CloseAut are reset, the output MV is set to
MV_Ext. For "Activate command reset for control settings" (Bit 3 = 1), OpenAut and CloseAut
are reset and the control elements are self-locking. This means the output MV is only set to
MV_Ext after a change of MV_Ext. Control via switch or button mode (bit 4) does not affect
the behavior of OpenAut and CloseAut.

Configurable reactions using the Feature2 parameter

Bit Function
1 Changes signal status of outputs in OOS (Page 198)
2 Separate evaluation for excluded and simulated interlock signals (Page 155)
3 Control priority in the event of an invalid input command (Page 179)
5 Evaluation of the signal status of the interlock signals (Page 146)
10 Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values (Page 190)
11 Suppress MsgLock and “Out of service” mode for a connected message block (Page 192)
16 Separate interlock for each direction, position, or speed (Page 173)

Displaying auxiliary values


This block provides the standard function Displaying auxiliary values (Page 220).

Alarm delays with two time values per limit pair


This block has the standard alarm delay function Two time values per limit pair (Page 210) for
limit monitoring of the feedback and limit monitoring of the manipulated variable difference.
The function here relates solely to the limits of the manipulated variable difference.

Digital feedback from the readback value


This block forms a digital position feedback for "Closed" and "Open" from the configured
operating points of the position feedback values PosDiClose and PosDiOpen.

Operator permissions
This block provides the standard function Operator control permissions (Page 265).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1496 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

The block has the following permissions for the OS_Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 1 = Operator can switch to "automatic mode"
1 1 = Operator can switch to "manual mode"
2 1 = Operator can switch to "local mode"
3 1 = Operator can switch to "Out of service" mode
4 1 = Operator can open the valve
5 1 = Operator can close the valve
6 1 = Operator can reset the valve
7 1 = Operator can define the monitoring time for startup
8 1 = Operator can define the monitoring time for the end position
9 1 = Operator can enable the monitoring the control valve feedback function (Bit 7 - 8)
10 1 = Operator can activate the Simulation function
11 1 = Operator can activate the Release for maintenance function
12 1 = Operator can change the simulation value SimRbk
13 - 23 Not used
24 1 = Operator can define the monitoring time of the auxiliary valve for startup
25 Not used
26 1 = Operator can enable the monitoring the auxiliary valve feedback function (Bit 24)
27 - 31 Not used

The block has the following operator permissions for the OS1Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0-3 Not used
4 1 = Operator can switch the manipulated variable to "external" MV_ExtOp
5 1 = Operator can switch the manipulated variable to "internal" MV_IntOp
6 Not used
7 1 = Operator can change the manual manipulated variable MV_Int
8-9 Not used
10 1 = Operator can change the operation high limit of the manipulated variable
MV_HiLim
11 1 = Operator can change the operation low limit of the manipulated variable MV_LoLim
12 1 = Operator can enable the manipulated variable's gradient limitation function
MV_RateOn
13 1 = Operator can change the manipulated variable's high limit for the ramp MV_UpRaLim
14 1 = Operator can change the manipulated variable's low limit for the ramp MV_DnRaLim
15 1 = Operator can switch between the time value or the value for the ramp
(MV_RmpModTime)
16 1 = Operator can change the ramp time MV_RmpTime
17 1 = Operator can change the target manipulated variable MV_RmpTarget for the ma‐
nipulated variable ramp
18 1 = Operator can enable the manipulated variable ramp function MV_RmpOn
19 Not used

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1497
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

Bit Function
20 1 = Operator can enable the track manipulated variable function in tracking mode
MV_TrkRbk
21 1 = Operator can enable the bumpless switchover from external to internal
MV_TrkExt
22 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via ER_AH_MsgEn
23 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via ER_AL_MsgEn
24 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via RbkWH_MsgEn
25 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via RbkWL_MsgEn
26 1 = Operator can change the limit (manipulated variable difference) for the high alarm
ER_AH_Lim
27 1 = Operator can change the hysteresis (manipulated variable difference) ER_Hyst
28 1 = Operator can change the limit (manipulated variable difference) for the low alarm
ER_AL_Lim
29 1 = Operator can change the limit (position feedback) for the high warning RbkWH_Lim
30 1 = Operator can change the hysteresis (position feedback) RbkHyst
31 1 = Operator can change the hysteresis (position feedback) for low warning
RbkWL_Lim

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Generation of manipulated variables


The manipulated variable MV is formed as follows:

MV_ Close OpenF Man Aut Local MV_ MV_ MV_ MV = Limit State
For Force orce Act Act Act Trk Trk Ext
On On Rbk Act
1 0 0 - - - - - - MV_Forced none Forced tracking with‐
out limit
- 1 0 - - - - - - MV_OpScale MV_OpScale. Forced close
.Low Low
- 0 1 - - - - - - MV_OpScale MV_OpScale. Forced open
.High High
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 - 0 MV_Int MV_HiLim Manual mode with in‐
MV_LoLim ternal manipulated var‐
iable
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 - 1 MV_ExtOut MV_HiLim Manual mode with ex‐
MV_LoLim ternal manipulated var‐
iable and limit
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 - 1 MV_Int MV_HiLim Automatic with exter‐
MV_LoLim nal manipulated varia‐
ble and limit

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1498 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

MV_ Close OpenF Man Aut Local MV_ MV_ MV_ MV = Limit State
For Force orce Act Act Act Trk Trk Ext
On On Rbk Act
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 - 1 MV_ExtOut MV_HiLim Automatic with exter‐
MV_LoLim nal manipulated varia‐
ble and limit
0 0 0 - - 0 1 0 - MV_Trk MV_HiLim Tracking with limitation
MV_LoLim
0 0 0 0 - 0 1 1 - Rbk none Tracking to position
feedback without limit
0 0 0 0 0 1 - - - Rbk None Local mode with track‐
ing to position feed‐
back without limit

"Actuator active" information


● The following applies for PosReached.Value = 0:
With PosDiClose < MV < PosDiOpen, the control valve is detected as active and Bit 24
is set in Status1.
● The following applies for PosReached.Value = 1:
Status1.Bit 24 = 0
This status can be used to indicate a customized symbol in the process image, for example,
and is saved in the status word (see Status word section in Description of VlvAnL
(Page 1480)).

General function "MV difference"


The manipulated variable difference is sent to the ER output and is calculated with the following
formula:
ER = MV - Rbk
If ER is within the dead band, ER = 0 is set and the manipulated variable is considered reached.

Manipulated variable difference generation and dead band


The manipulated variable difference is formed by the effective manipulated variable MV and
the position feedback Rbk, and sent to the ER output. A dead band can be set at the
PosDeadBand input:
● PosDeadBand = 0 Dead band is disabled
● PosDeadBand ≠ 0 Dead band is enabled
(5

'HDGEDQG

095EN
'HDGEDQG

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1499
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

Limit monitoring of manipulated variable and error signal


The block provides the standard function Limit monitoring of setpoint, manipulated variable
and control deviation (Page 96)
Monitoring is disabled in the following situations:
● The auxiliary valve is closed
● The control valve is in the neutral position

Group display SumMsgAct for limit monitoring, CSF and ExtMsgx


The block provides the standard function Group display for limit monitoring, CSF and
ExtMsgx (Page 86).

Specifying warning times for control functions at motors and valves


This block provides the standard function Specifying warning times for control functions at
motors and valves (Page 51)
The warning time affect the analog manipulated variable MV. The output is updated only with
the specification of a new manipulated variable after the warning time has expired.
Warning time is ignored in tracking MV_TrkOn = 1 and in forced tracking MV_ForOn.

Disabling feedback
This block provides the standard function Disabling feedback for valves (Page 100).
This function is available for both the control valve and auxiliary valve. The feedback for the
auxiliary valve is disabled by default, connections are not displayed.
The disable setting is made with the NoFbkOpen and NoFbkClose parameters for the control
valve.
The disable setting is made with the NoFbkAuxVOpen and NoFbkAuxVClose parameters for
the auxiliary valve.

Connection of the time-stamped messages from EventTs or Event16Ts


This block provides the standard function Connection of the time-stamped messages from
EventTs or Event16Ts (Page 216).

Button labels
This block provides the standard function Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218)
Instance-specific text can be configured for the following parameters:
● OpenMan
● CloseMan

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1500 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

See also
EventTs functions (Page 1698)
VlvAnL modes (Page 1485)
VlvAnL messaging (Page 1502)
VlvAnL I/Os (Page 1504)
VlvAnL block diagram (Page 1517)
Disable calculation of impulse control in LocalSetting 2 and 4 (Page 190)

7.13.4 VlvAnL error handling

Error handling of VlvAnL


Refer to section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions for the error handling of all
blocks.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers
● Mode switchover error
● Invalid input signals
● Control system fault (CSF)

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum I/O can be used to output the following error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; the block is not executed
0 There is no error.
41 The value of the LocalSetting connection is outside the valid range. Valid values are 0, 2 and 4
42 LocalSetting = 0 or LocalSetting = 4 and LocalLi = 1
51 AutModLi = 1 and ManModLi = 1
OpenAut = 1 and CloseAut = 1
OpenForce = 1 and CloseForce = 1
52 LocalSetting = 2 or 4 and SimOn = 1

Mode switchover error


This error can be output by the block, see the section Error handling (Page 121).

Invalid input signals


This error can be output by the block, see the section Error handling (Page 121).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1501
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

For the following invalid input signals, the control output can be kept or switched to the neutral
position. This depends on the function control priority for invalid input command (Page 179).

Operating mode Invalid input signals Control reaction with


Feature2.Bit3 = 1
Forcing OpenForce = 1 and CloseForce = 1 Valve without auxiliary
"Automatic mode" and no Pushbutton operation (Feature.Bit4 = 0): valve (Feature.Bit5
forcing = 0):
OpenAut = 1 and CloseAut = 1
Valve is set to its neutral
"Manual mode" and no forcing OpenMan = 1 and CloseMan = 1 position.

Valve with auxiliary


valve (Feature.Bit5
= 1):
Valve is set to its neutral
position.

Control system fault (CSF)


An external signal can be activated via the CSF input. A control system fault is triggered if this
signal changes to 1. Refer to the Error handling (Page 121) section for more on this.

See also
VlvAnL messaging (Page 1502)
Description of VlvAnL (Page 1480)
VlvAnL modes (Page 1485)
VlvAnL functions (Page 1488)
VlvAnL I/Os (Page 1504)
VlvAnL block diagram (Page 1517)

7.13.5 VlvAnL messaging

Messaging
The following messages can be generated for this block:
● Process control fault
● Instance-specific messages
● Process messages

Process control fault


● The following control system error messages can be output:

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1502 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

Message instance Message identifier Message class Event


MsgEvld1 SIG 1 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault Feedback error
SIG 6 AS process control message - External error has occurred
fault

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment
You can interconnect an external fault (signal) to input parameter CSF. If it changes to CSF = 1,
a process control fault is triggered (MsgEvld1, SIG 6).

Process messages

Message instance Message identifier Message class Event


MsgEvId1 SIG 2 Alarm - high $$BlockComment$$
ER - high alarm limit violated
SIG 3 Alarm - low $$BlockComment$$
ER - low alarm limit violated
SIG 4 Warning - high $$BlockComment$$
Rbk - high warning limit violated
SIG 5 Warning - low $$BlockComment$$
Rbk - low warning limit violated

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment

Instance-specific messages
You have the option to use one or two instance-specific messages for this block.

Message instance Message identifier Message class Event


MsgEvId1 SIG 7 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 1
SIG 8 AS process control message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 2

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId1

Associated value Block parameters


1 BatchName
2 StepNo

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1503
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

Associated value Block parameters


3 BatchID
4 ExtVal04
5 ExtVal05
6 ExtVal06
7 ExtVa107
8 ExtVa108
9 Reserved
10 Reserved

The associated values 4 ... 8 are allocated to the parameters ExtVa104 ... ExtVa108 and
can be used. Additional information is available in the "Process Control System PCS 7 -
Engineering System" manual.

See also
Description of VlvAnL (Page 1480)
VlvAnL functions (Page 1488)
VlvAnL I/Os (Page 1504)
VlvAnL modes (Page 1485)
VlvAnL error handling (Page 1501)
VlvAnL block diagram (Page 1517)

7.13.6 VlvAnL I/Os


I/Os of VlvAnL

Input parameter master

Parameter Description Type Default


AutModLi* 1= "Automatic mode" via interconnection STRUCT -
or SFC (controlled by ModLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AutModOp* 1 = "Automatic mode" via operator (con‐ BOOL 0
trolled by ModLiOp = 0)
BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation BOOL 0
BatchID Batch ID DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name S7-String
BypProt 1 = Bypassing interlock is active in "local BOOL 0
mode" and in simulation

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1504 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

Parameter Description Type Default


CloseAut* 1 = Select Close valve in "automatic STRUCT -
mode" ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CloseForce 1 = Force valve closure STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CloseMan* 1 = Select Close valve in "manual mode" BOOL 0
CSF 1 = External error (control system fault) STRUCT -
Error handling (Page 121) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CtrlChnST Signal status of output channel for Ctrl STRUCT -
Should be connected to an output chan‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
nel block ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1
ER_A_DC* Delay for incoming alarms during manip‐ REAL 0.0
ulated variable difference monitoring
ER_A_DG* Delay for outgoing alarms during manip‐ REAL 0.0
ulated variable difference monitoring
ER_AH_En 1 = Activate alarm (high) for manipulated BOOL 1
variable difference monitoring
ER_AH_Lim Alarm limit (high) for manipulated varia‐ REAL 100.0
ble difference monitoring
ER_AH_MsgEn 1 = Activate messages for alarm (high) BOOL 1
for manipulated variable difference mon‐
itoring
ER_AL_Lim Alarm limit (low) for manipulated variable REAL -100.0
difference monitoring
ER_AL_En 1 = Activate alarm (low) for manipulated BOOL 1
variable difference monitoring
ER_AL_MsgEn 1 = Activate messages for alarm (low) for BOOL 1
manipulated variable difference monitor‐
ing
ER_Hyst Alarm hysteresis for manipulated varia‐ REAL 1.0
ble difference monitoring
EventTsIn For interconnecting data between a tech‐ ANY
nology block and the message blocks
EventTs, Event16Ts.
The EventTsIn input parameter serves
to interconnect the EventTsOut output
parameter of the EventTs, Event16Ts
block. When this interconnection is con‐
figured, the messages of the EventTs,
Event16Ts block are displayed on the
OS in the alarm view of the technology
block and can also be acknowledged
there.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1505
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

Parameter Description Type Default


ExtMsg1 Binary input for freely selectable mes‐ STRUCT -
sage 1 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg2 Binary input for freely selectable mes‐ STRUCT -
sage 2 ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtVa104 Associated value 4 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa105 Associated value 5 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa106 Associated value 6 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa107 Associated value 7 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
ExtVa108 Associated value 8 for messages ANY
(MsgEvID1)
FaultExt 1 = External error STRUCT -
Error handling (Page 121) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FbkAuxVClose 1 = Auxiliary valve closed feedback sig‐ STRUCT -
nal ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
FbkAuxVOpen 1 = Auxiliary valve open feedback signal STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
FbkClose 1 = Valve closed feedback signal STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
FbkOpen 1 = Valve open feedback signal STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 1488) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
Feature2 I/O for additional functions (Page 1488) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
IntlCls 0 = Interlock Close is activated. BOOL 1
Once the interlock condition has cleared,
the block can be operated without reset.
1 = Interlock Close is deactivated.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1506 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

Parameter Description Type Default


IntlClsEn 1 = Parameter IntlCls is enabled BOOL 1
Intl_En 1 = Parameter Intlock is enabled BOOL 1
Intlock 0 = Interlock / Interlock Open is activa‐ STRUCT -
ted. ● Value:BOOL ● 1
Once the interlock condition has cleared, ● ST:BYTE ● 16#FF
the block can be operated without reset.
1 = Interlock / Interlock Open is deacti‐
vated.
LocalLi 1 = Activate "local mode" via plant signal STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
LocalOp* 1 = "Local mode" via operator BOOL 0
LocalSetting Properties for the Local mode (Page 80) INT 0
ManModLi* 1 = "Manual mode" via interconnection STRUCT -
or SFC (controlled by ModLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManModOp* 1= "Manual mode" via: OS operator (con‐ BOOL 1
trolled via ModLiOp = 0)
ModLiOp Switchover of operating mode between: STRUCT -
0 = Operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
1 = Interconnection or SFC ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MonAuxVTime* Monitoring time for feedback monitoring REAL 3.0
of the auxiliary valve
Monitor 1 = Monitoring of control valve feedback BOOL 1
MonitorAuxV 1 = Monitoring of auxiliary valve feedback BOOL 1
MonSafePos 1 = Go to neutral position in the event of BOOL 1
monitoring errors
MonTiDynamic* Monitoring time after operation in [s] REAL 3.0
MonTiStatic* Monitoring time for feedback errors with‐ REAL 3.0
out operation in [s]
MS_RelOp* 1= Release for maintenance via OS op‐ BOOL 0
erator
MsgEvId1 Message number (assigned automatical‐ DWORD 16#00000000
ly)
MsgLock 1 = Suppress process messages. STRUCT -
See also the section Suppressing mes‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
sages using the MsgLock parameter ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
(Page 214) for more on this.
MV_ChnST Signal status of output channel for MV STRUCT -
Should be connected to an output chan‐ ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
nel block ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
MV_DnRaLim* Gradient limit (low) for manipulated vari‐ REAL 100.0
able [Unit/(Time unit)]
Time unit depends on TimeFactor

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1507
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

Parameter Description Type Default


MV_Ext External manipulated variable STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_ExtLi Select external manipulated variable STRUCT -
(via interconnection) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_ExtOp* Select external manipulated variable BOOL 0
(via operator)
MV_Forced Forced manipulated variable that is not STRUCT -
limited and assumes top priority ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_ForOn 1 = Output forced manipulated variable STRUCT -
MV_Forced unlimited at output MV ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_HiLim Limit (high) for manipulated variable MV REAL 100.0
MV_Int* Internal manipulated variable REAL 0.0
MV_IntLi Select internal manipulated variable (via STRUCT -
interconnection) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_IntOp* Select internal manipulated variable (via BOOL 1
operator)
MV_LiDnRaLim Linkable limit (low) for the gradient of the REAL 100.0
manipulated variable [Unit/(Time unit)]
Time unit depends on TimeFactor
MV_LiOp Select manipulated variable source (in‐ STRUCT -
ternal/external): ● Value: BOOL ● 0
1 = Via interconnection ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
0 = Via operator
MV_LiRmpTime Linkable time [Time unit] for gradient lim‐ REAL 0.0
itation in ramp mode duration
Time unit depends on TimeFactor
MV_LiUpRaLim Linkable gradient limit (high) for the ma‐ REAL 100.0
nipulated variable [Unit/(Time unit)]
Time unit depends on TimeFactor
MV_LoLim Limit (low) for manipulated variable MV REAL 0.0
MV_OpScale OS display range for manipulated varia‐ STRUCT -
ble MV ● High: REAL ● 100.0
● Low: REAL ● 0.0
MV_RateOn* Change of manipulated variable is limi‐ BOOL 0
ted by MV_UpRaLim and MV_DnRaLim

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1508 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

Parameter Description Type Default


MV_RmpModTime 1 = Use time values (MV_RmpTime, BOOL 0
MV_LiRmpTime)
0 = Use gradient limits (MV_DnRaLim,
MV_LiDnRaLim, MV_UpRaLim,
MV_LiUpRaLim)
MV_RmpOn* 1 = Activate manipulated variable ramp BOOL 0
to target value MV_RmpTarget
MV_RmpTarget* Time value for manipulated variable REAL 0.0
ramp
MV_RmpTime* Time [Time unit] for manipulated varia‐ REAL 0.0
ble ramp from current MV up to
MV_RmpTarget or time [Time unit] for
gradient limitation in ramp mode duration
Time unit depends on TimeFactor
MV_Trk Tracking value for the manipulated vari‐ STRUCT -
able MV ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_TrkExt 1 = Bumpless switchover from external BOOL 0
to internal manipulated variable active
MV_TrkOn 1 = Tracking of manipulated variable MV STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_TrkRbk 1 = Bumpless switchover of manipulated BOOL 0
variable tracking active (track manipu‐
lated variable to position feedback)
MV_Unit Unit of measure for manipulated variable INT 1342
MV_UpRaLim* Gradient limit (high) for manipulated var‐ REAL 100.0
iable [Unit/(Time unit)]
Time unit depends on TimeFactor
NoFbkAuxVClose 1 = No "closed" feedback for auxiliary BOOL 1
valve present
NoFbkAuxVOpen 1 = No "open" feedback for auxiliary BOOL 1
valve present
NoFbkClose 1 = No feedback present for "control BOOL 0
valve closed"
NoFbkOpen 1 = No feedback present for "control BOOL 0
valve open"
Occupied 1 = In use by a batch BOOL 0
OosLi 1 = "Out of service", via interconnection STRUCT -
or SFC ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosOp* 1 = "Out of service", via OS operator BOOL 0
OpenAut* 1 = Select Open valve in "automatic STRUCT -
mode" ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1509
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

Parameter Description Type Default


OpenForce 1 = Forced open of control valve STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpenMan* 1 = Select Open valve in "manual mode" BOOL 0
OpSt_In Input parameter for local operator au‐ DWORD 16#00000000
thorization, connected with the Out out‐
put parameter of the upstream block,
OpStations (Page 423)
OS_Perm I/O for Operator control permissions STRUCT -
(Page 265) ● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● Bit 12: BOOL ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
OS1Perm I/O for Operator control permissions STRUCT -
(Page 265) ● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● ... ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
PermCls 1 = Activation close enable STRUCT -
0 = No activation close enable ● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
PermClsEn 1 = Parameter PermCls is enabled BOOL 1
Perm_En 1 = Parameter Permit enable BOOL 1
Permit 1 = Activation enable / Activation open STRUCT -
enable. ● Value: BOOL ● 1
0 = No activation enable / No activation ● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
open enable.
PosDeadBand Dead band for forming manipulated var‐ REAL 0.1
iable difference
PosDiClose Limit for control valve position "closed" REAL 5.0
PosDiOpen Limit for control valve position "open" REAL 95.0
ProtCls 0 = Protective interlock close is activated. STRUCT -
Once the interlock condition has cleared, ● Value:BOOL ● 1
the block must be reset. ● ST:BYTE ● 16#FF
1 = Protective interlock close is deacti‐
vated.
ProtClsEn 1 = Parameter ProtCls enable BOOL 1
Prot_En 1 = Parameter Protect enabled BOOL 1
Protect 0 = Protective interlock / protective inter‐ STRUCT -
lock open is activated. ● Value:BOOL ● 1
Once the interlock condition has cleared, ● ST:BYTE ● 16#FF
the block must be reset.
1 = Protective interlock / protective inter‐
lock open is deactivated.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1510 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

Parameter Description Type Default


Rbk Position feedback for display on OS STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RbkHyst Alarm hysteresis for position feedback REAL 1.0
RbkW_DC* Delay time for incoming warnings [s] REAL 0.0
RbkW_DG* Delay time for outgoing warnings [s] REAL 0.0
RbkWH_En 1 = Enable warning (high) for position BOOL 0
feedback
RbkWH_Lim Limit for position feedback of warning REAL 90.0
(high)
RbkWH_MsgEn 1 = Enable messages for warning (high) BOOL 1
for position feedback
RbkWL_En 1 = Enable warning (low) for position BOOL 0
feedback
RbkWL_Lim Limit for position feedback of warning REAL 10.0
(low)
RbkWL_MsgEn 1 = Enable messages for warning (low) BOOL 1
for position feedback
RstLi* 1 = Reset via interconnection STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RstOp* 1 = Reset via operator BOOL 0
RunUpCyc Number of cycles in startup; messages INT 3
are suppressed during these cycles
SafePos Neutral position for control valve: INT 0
0 = Closed
1 = Open
2 = Stop
SafePosAux Neutral position for auxiliary valve: BOOL 0
1= Open
0 = Closed
SampleTime Sampling time [s] (assigned automatical‐ REAL 0.1
ly)
SelFp1 Call a block saved in this parameter as ANY
an additional faceplate (Page 217) in the
standard view
SelFp2 Call a block saved in this parameter as ANY
an additional faceplate (Page 217) in the
preview
SimLiOp Activation/deactivation of the simulation STRUCT -
by: ● Value: BOOL ● 0
0 = Operator ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
1 = Interconnection or SFC

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1511
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

Parameter Description Type Default


SimOnLi 1 = Simulation via interconnection or STRUCT -
SFC (controlled by SimLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SimOn* 1 = Simulation on BOOL 0
SimRbk* Position feedback used for SimOn = 1 REAL 0.0
SimRbkLi Position feedback used for STRUCT -
SimOnLi.Value = 1 ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
(SimLiOp.Value = 1)
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
TimeFactor Time unit: INT 0
0 = Seconds
1 = Minutes
2 = Hours
UA1unit Unit of measure for analog auxiliary val‐ INT 0
ue 1
UA2unit Unit of measure for analog auxiliary val‐ INT 0
ue 2
UserAna1 Analog auxiliary value 1 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
UserAna2 Analog auxiliary value 2 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use in PCS 7 BYTE 16#00
OS
WarnTiAut Prewarning of valve movement in auto‐ REAL 0.0
matic mode in [s]
WarnTiMan Prewarning of valve movement in man‐ REAL 0.0
ual mode in [s]

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AutAct 1 = "Automatic mode" enabled STRUCT -
0 = "Manual mode", "Local mode" or ● Value: BOOL ● 0
"Out of service" enabled ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AutoST 1 = Worst signal status of automatic com‐ BYTE 16#80
mands

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1512 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

Parameter Description Type Default


AuxClosed 1 = Auxiliary valve is closed STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AuxClsing 1 = Auxiliary valve is closing STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AuxOpened 1 = Valve is open STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AuxOpning 1 = Auxiliary valve is opening STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CascaCut Cascade connection: STRUCT -
1 = Control chain from master controller ● Value: BOOL ● 0
to secondary valve is interrupted ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Closed 1 = Valve is closed STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Closing 1 = Valve is closing STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Ctrl Control output for auxiliary valve (de‐ STRUCT -
pends on SafePosAuxV) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CurrMon Remaining monitoring time [s] DINT 0
CurrMonAuxV Remaining auxiliary valve monitoring DINT 0
time [s]
ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without BOOL 0
errors
ER Manipulated variable difference STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ER_AH_Act 1 = Alarm limit (high) for manipulated STRUCT -
variable difference violated. ● Value: BOOL ● 0
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐
olation (Page 174)).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1513
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

Parameter Description Type Default


ER_AL_Act 1 = Alarm limit (low) for manipulated var‐ STRUCT -
iable difference violated. ● Value: BOOL ● 0
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐
olation (Page 174)).
ErrorNum Output of pending error number. For er‐ INT -1
ror numbers that can be output by this
block, see VlvAnL error handling
(Page 1501)
FbkAuxVCloseOut 1 = Auxiliary valve is closed STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FbkAuxVOpenOut 1 = Auxiliary valve open STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FbkCloseOut 1 = Control valve is open STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FbkClsgOut Control valve closing feedback STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FbkOpenOut 1 = Control valve is open STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FbkOpngOut Control valve opening feedback STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
GrpErr 1 = Group error pending STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
LocalAct 1 = "Local mode" enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
LockAct 1 = Interlock (Intlock, Permit or STRUCT -
Protect) is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManAct 1 = "Manual mode" enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1514 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

Parameter Description Type Default


MonDynAuxVErr 1 = Feedback error auxiliary valve due STRUCT -
to output change ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MonDynErr 1 = Feedback error control valve due to STRUCT -
control change ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MonStaAuxVErr 1 = Feedback error from auxiliary valve STRUCT -
due to unexpected feedback change ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MonStaErr 1 = Feedback error from control valve STRUCT -
due to unexpected feedback change ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MS_Release Release for maintenance: STRUCT -
1 = Release for OS operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MsgAckn1 Message acknowledgement status 1 WORD 16#0000
(output ACK_STATE of first ALARM_8P)
MsgErr1 Alarm error 1 (output ERROR of first BOOL 0
ALARM_8P)
MsgStat1 Message status 1 (output STATUS of first WORD 16#0000
ALARM_8P)
MV Manipulated variable STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_DnRaAct Positive limit (low) for manipulated vari‐ STRUCT -
able is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_ExtAct 1 = External manipulated variable active STRUCT -
0 = Internal manipulated variable active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_ExtOut Output for external manipulated variable STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_HiAct 1 = Limit (high) of manipulated variable STRUCT -
violated ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_LoAct 1 = Limit (low) of manipulated variable STRUCT -
violated ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_RateTarget Target manipulated variable for the gra‐ REAL 0.0
dient limitation
MV_UnitOut Unit of measure for manipulated variable INT 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1515
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

Parameter Description Type Default


MV_UpRaAct Positive limit (high) for manipulated vari‐ STRUCT -
able is active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_RemRT Remaining ramp time of the manipulated REAL 0.0
variable
OosAct 1 = Block is "Out of service" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Opened 1 = Valve is open STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Opening 1 = Valve is opening STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpSt_Out Value of the OpSt_In input parameter, DWORD 16#00000000
for feedforwarding to other blocks. Bit 31
of this parameter is used by
Feature.Bit24
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with settings DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
changed by the block algorithm
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS1PermLog Display of OS1Perm with settings DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
changed by the block algorithm
OS1PermOut Display of OS1Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
P_Rst 1= Pulse output for reset STRUCT -
The parameter persists for one cycle af‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
ter a reset. ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
PosReached 1 = Control valve has reached specified STRUCT -
position ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RbkOut Position feedback output STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RbkWH_Act 1 = Warning (high) enabled. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐
olation (Page 174)).
RbkWL_Act 1 = Warning (low) enabled. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this pa‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
rameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
bling operating points (Page 149)) and
with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit vi‐
olation (Page 174)).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1516 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

Parameter Description Type Default


RdyToReset 1 = Ready for reset via RstLi input or STRUCT -
commands in "local", "automatic", or ● Value: BOOL ● 0
"manual mode"
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RdyToStart 1 = Active start readiness STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
Status1 Status word 1 (Page 1480) DWORD 16#00000000
Status2 Status word 2 (Page 1480) DWORD 16#00000000
Status3 Status word 3 (Page 1480) DWORD 16#00000000
Status4 Status word 4 (Page 1480) DWORD 16#00000000
Status5 Status word 5 (Page 1480) DWORD 16#00000000
WarnAct 1 = Prewarning for control valve move‐ STRUCT -
ment away from neutral position active ● Value: BOOL ● 0
(parameters WarnTiAut and
WarnTiMan)) ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

"local", "automatic", or "manual" mode"

See also
VlvAnL modes (Page 1485)
VlvAnL messaging (Page 1502)
VlvAnL block diagram (Page 1517)
Error handling (Page 121)

7.13.7 VlvAnL block diagram

VlvAnL block diagram


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

See also
Description of VlvAnL (Page 1480)
VlvAnL modes (Page 1485)
VlvAnL functions (Page 1488)
VlvAnL error handling (Page 1501)
VlvAnL messaging (Page 1502)
VlvAnL I/Os (Page 1504)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1517
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

7.13.8 Operator control and monitoring

7.13.8.1 VlvAnL views

Views of the VlvAnL block


The VlvAnL block provides the following views:
● VlvAnL standard view with auxiliary valve (Page 1519)
● VlvAnL standard view without auxiliary valve (Page 1525)
● VlvAnL limit view (Page 1530)
● Alarm view (Page 313)
● Trend view (Page 317)
● VlvAnL parameter view (Page 1538)
● VlvAnL preview (Page 1533)
● Memo view (Page 315)
● Batch view (Page 313)
● Ramp view (Page 311)
● Block icon for VlvAnL (Page 1539)
Refer to the sections Structure of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure
(Page 239) for general information on the faceplate and block icon.

See also
Parameter view for motors and valves (Page 297)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1518 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

7.13.8.2 VlvAnL standard view with auxiliary valve

Standard view with auxiliary valve of VlvAnL

1
22
2
3

21 4

20 5
6
19
7
5
8
9
10
11
18
17 12
16
15
13
14

Feature2.Bit16 = 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1519
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve






 

 

















Feature2.Bit16 = 1

(1) Displaying and switching the operating mode


This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
● Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76)
● Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76)
● Local mode (Page 80)
● Out of service (Page 72)
Refer to section Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) for information
on switching the operating mode.

(2) Opening, closing and stopping the control valve


This area shows you the default operating state for the valve. The following states can be
shown and executed here:
● "Open"
● "Close"
● "Stop" (display only, no operation possible)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1520 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

"Close"/"open" command relates to the auxiliary valve. If no auxiliary valve is required for
controlling the control valve, the "Open" and "Close" commands affect the control valve.
If text is configured for these commands, it is displayed as status text and as button labels for
command selection. You can find more information about this in section Labeling of buttons
and text (Page 218)
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for information
on changing the state.

(3) Displaying and switching the default manipulated variable


This area shows how to specify the manipulated variable. The manipulated variable can be
specified as follows:
● By the application ("External", CFC/SFC)
● By the user directly in the faceplate ("Internal").
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for information
on switching the setpoint specification.

(4) Resetting the block


Click "Reset" for interlocks or errors. You can find additional information on this in the section
Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors (Page 43).

(5) High and low scale range for the manipulated variable
These values provide information on the display range for the bar graph of the manipulated
variable. The scale range is defined in the engineering system.

(6) Displaying and changing the manipulated variable including signal status:
This area shows the current manipulated variable with the corresponding signal status.
The manipulated variable can only be changed by
● Internal manipulated variable specification (MV_ExtAct = 0) and
● An opened auxiliary valve (due to the dependency on the standard function Neutral position
for motors, valves and controllers (Page 48) )
For more information on changing the manipulated variable, refer to section Changing values
(Page 270).

(7) Display of the position feedback including signal status


This area shows the current feedback of the manipulated variable with the corresponding signal
status.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1521
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

(8) Display for the target manipulated variable of the manipulated variable ramp
This display [R] shows the target setpoint and is only visible if you have enabled ramp
generation in the Ramp view (Page 311).

(9) Bar graph for the manipulated variable


This area shows the current manipulated variable in the form of a bar graph. The visible area
in the bar graph depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).

(10) Bar graph for position feedback


This area shows the current position feedback in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in
the bar graph depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).
The limits for the "open" and "close" positions are shown with 2 green lines.

(11) Display of external manipulated variable


This display [E] is only visible when you have selected "Internal" manipulated variable
specification. It shows the external manipulated variable that would apply if you were to change
the manipulated variable specification to "External".

(12) Operating range for the interlock functions of the block


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
You can use this button to control the interlock functions of the block. You can find additional
information on this in the section Interlocking functions (Page 101).
The following is displayed in addition to the buttons:
● Interlock status (see Forming the group status for interlock information (Page 106)), e.g.:

● Signal status (see Forming and outputting the signal status for technologic blocks
(Page 110)), e.g.:

● Bypass information (see Forming the group status for interlock information (Page 106)):

If there is a bypass, it is displayed instead of the signal status.

(13) Display of auxiliary values


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
You can use this area to display two auxiliary values that have been configured in the
engineering system (ES). You can find additional information on this in the section Displaying
auxiliary values (Page 220).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1522 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

(14) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
Use this navigation button to open the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system (ES). The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the
engineering system (ES).
See also the section Opening additional faceplates (Page 217) for more on this.

(15) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Maintenance"
Additional information on this is available in section Release for maintenance (Page 65) Display
area for block states.

(16) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Simulation"
You can find additional information on this in the section Simulating signals (Page 59).

(17) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "External error"
● "End position error"
● "Control error"
● "Invalid signal"
● "Changeover error"
Additional information on these errors is available in the sections Monitoring the feedbacks
(Page 98), Error handling (Page 121) (section "Invalid input signals" and "Mode changeover
error").

(18) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Forced open" (OpenForce)
● "Forced close" (CloseForce)
● "Forced tracking" (MV_ForOn)
● "Tracking" (MV_TrkOn)
● "Request 0/1": A reset to "automatic mode" is expected.
● "MV ramp active"

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1523
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

You can find additional information on this in the section Forcing operating modes (Page 41).

(19) Representation of neutral position


This representation shows the neutral position for the control valve:
● Green: Neutral position is "Open"
● Gray: Neutral position is "Closed"
● Light green: Neutral position is "Stop"

(20) Automatic preview


This display is only visible in "manual mode", in "local mode", or with a reset request in
"automatic mode", when the current output signals are not identical to the control in "automatic
mode".
The display shows what state the valve would assume if you switched from "manual" or "local"
mode to "automatic mode", or performed a reset to "automatic mode".

(21) Status display of the control valve


You can find more information about this in section Block icon for VlvAnL (Page 1539)

(22) Picture of auxiliary valve


The small auxiliary valve and the associated line are only shown when the control valve has
an additional auxiliary valve and it can be controlled. This can be configured with
Feature.Bit5 on the block.
The current status of the auxiliary valve is graphically displayed here.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1524 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

7.13.8.3 VlvAnL standard view without auxiliary valve

Standard view without auxiliary valve of VlvAnL

1
2
3

21 4

20 5
6
19
7
5
8
9
10

18 11
17 12
16
15
13
14

Feature2.Bit16 = 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1525
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve





 

 

















Feature2.Bit16 = 1

(1) Displaying and switching the operating mode


This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
● Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76)
● Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76)
● Local mode (Page 80)
● Out of service (Page 72)
Refer to section Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) for information
on switching the operating mode.

(2) Opening, closing and stopping the control valve


This area shows you the default operating state for the valve. The following states can be
shown and executed here:
● "Open"
● "Close"
● "Stop" (display only, no operation possible)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1526 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

"Close"/"Open" command relates to the control valve.


The "Open" command sets the manipulated variable equal to the high limit of the control range
(MV_OpScale.High).
The "Close" command sets the manipulated variable equal to the low limit of the control range
(MV_OpScale.Low)
If there is no auxiliary valve (Feature.Bit5 = 0), the command line can be completely hidden
with Feature.Bit6.
● 0: (default) line is displayed
● 1: Command line hidden.
If text is configured for these commands, it is displayed as status text and as button labels for
command selection. You can find more information about this in section Labeling of buttons
and text (Page 218)
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for information
on changing the state.

(3) Displaying and switching the default manipulated variable


This area shows how to specify the manipulated variable. The manipulated variable can be
specified as follows:
● By the application ("External", CFC/SFC)
● By the user directly in the faceplate ("Internal").
If there is no auxiliary valve, the specification of the manipulated variable depends on the mode,
"manual" or "automatic". You cannot switch between "internal" and "external" here in this case.
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for information
on switching the setpoint specification.

(4) Resetting the block


Click "Reset" for interlocks or errors. You can find additional information on this in the section
Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors (Page 43).

(5) High and low scale range for the manipulated variable
These values provide information on the display range for the bar graph of the manipulated
variable. The scale range is defined in the engineering system.

(6) Displaying and changing the manipulated variable including signal status:
This area shows the current manipulated variable with the corresponding signal status.
The manipulated variable can only be changed by internal manipulated variable specification
(MV_ExtAct = 0).
For more information on changing the manipulated variable, refer to section Changing values
(Page 270).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1527
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

(7) Display of the position feedback including signal status


This area shows the current feedback of the manipulated variable with the corresponding signal
status.

(8) Display for the target manipulated variable of the manipulated variable ramp
This display [R] shows the target setpoint and is only visible if you have enabled ramp
generation in the Ramp view (Page 311).

(9) Bar graph for the manipulated variable


This area shows the current manipulated variable in the form of a bar graph. The visible area
in the bar graph depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).

(10) Bar graph for position feedback


This area shows the current position feedback in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in
the bar graph depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).
The limits for the "open" and "close" positions are shown with 2 green lines.

(11) Display of external manipulated variable


This display [E] is only visible when you have selected "Internal" manipulated variable
specification. It shows the external manipulated variable that would apply if you were to change
the manipulated variable specification to "External".

(12) Operating range for the interlock functions of the block


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
You can use this button to control the interlock functions of the block. You can find additional
information on this in the section Interlocking functions (Page 101).
The following is displayed in addition to the buttons:
● Interlock status (see Forming the group status for interlock information (Page 106)), e.g.:

● Signal status (see Forming and outputting the signal status for technologic blocks
(Page 110)), e.g.:

● Bypass information (see Forming the group status for interlock information (Page 106)):

If there is a bypass, it is displayed instead of the signal status.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1528 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

(13) Display of auxiliary values


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
You can use this area to display two auxiliary values that have been configured in the
engineering system (ES). You can find additional information on this in the section Displaying
auxiliary values (Page 220).

(14) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
Use this navigation button to open the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system (ES). The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the
engineering system (ES).
See also the section Opening additional faceplates (Page 217) for more on this.

(15) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Maintenance"
Additional information on this is available in section Release for maintenance (Page 65) Display
area for block states.

(16) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Simulation"
● "Delay"
You will find more detailed information on this in the sections Simulating signals (Page 59) and
Display of delay times (Page 267).

(17) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "External error"
● "End position error"
● "Control error"
● "Invalid signal"
● "Changeover error"
Additional information on these errors is available in the sections Monitoring the feedbacks
(Page 98), Error handling (Page 121) (section "Invalid input signals" and "Mode changeover
error").

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1529
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

(18) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Forced open" (OpenForce)
● "Forced close" (CloseForce)
● "Forced tracking" (MV_ForOn)
● "Tracking" (MV_TrkOn)
● "Request 0/1": A reset to automatic mode is expected.
● "MV ramp active"
You can find additional information on this in the section Forcing operating modes (Page 41).

(19) Representation of neutral position


This representation shows the neutral position for the control valve:
● Green: Neutral position is "Open"
● Gray: Neutral position is "Closed"
● Light green: Neutral position is "Stop"

(20) Automatic preview


This display is only visible in "manual mode", in "local mode", or with a reset request in
"automatic mode", when the current output signals are not identical to the control in "automatic
mode".
The display shows what state the valve would assume if you switched from "manual" or "local"
mode to "automatic mode", or performed a reset to "automatic mode".

(21) Picture of control valve


The current status of the control valve is graphically displayed here.
You can find more information about this in section Block icon for VlvAnL (Page 1539)

7.13.8.4 VlvAnL limit view

Limit view of VlvAnL


Several values are set in this view by default:
● Manipulated variable difference limits
● Readback value limits
● Manipulated variable operating range
The toolbars of the faceplate and the block icon indicate when the limits are reached or violated.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1530 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

 

(1) Enabled operation


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Icons for enabled operation:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)

(2) Manipulated variable difference limits


In this area, you can enter the limits for the manipulated variable error. Refer to the Changing
values (Page 270) section for more on this.
You can change the following limits:
● "H alarm": Alarm high
● "Hysteresis"
● "L alarm": Alarm low

(3) Readback value limits (MV)


In this area, you can enter the limits for the readback value (position feedback). Refer to the
Changing values (Page 270) section for more on this.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1531
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

You can change the following limits:


● "H warning": Warning high
● "Hysteresis"
● "L warning": Warning low

(4) Manipulated variable operating range (MV)


In this area, you can enter the limits for the manipulated variable operation range. Refer to the
Changing values (Page 270) section for more on this.
You can change the following limits:
● "H range": Range limit high
● "L range": Range limit low

(5) Message suppression / delay


Message suppression indicates whether or not the suppression of the associated message in
the AS block is activated with the xx_MsgEn parameter. The output of messages is not
suppressed when the block is installed (all xx_MsgEn parameters are preset to 1). Messages
can only be output if limit monitoring of the additional analog value has been enabled.
Alarm delays are also displayed in this position; for more on this see section
Area of application of the alarm delays (Page 208).

(6) Suppress messages


You can enable / disable messages by setting the check mark.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1532 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

7.13.8.5 VlvAnL preview

Preview of VlvAnL

The preview has an upper half and a lower half. You can change between the two halves with
the arrow keys.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1533
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

(1) Automatic preview


This area shows you the block status after it has switched from the "Manual" mode or "Local"
mode to the "Automatic" mode.
If the block is in "Automatic" mode, the current block state is displayed.
This area also displays the worst signal status of the following automatic commands:
● OpenAut
● CloseAut
● MV_Ext

(2) Preview area


● "Manipulated variable external": Display current external manipulated variable
(MV_ExtOut).
● "Manipulated variable internal": Display current internal manipulated variable (MV_Int).
● "Rem. time MV ramp": Remaining time to reach the ramp target value.
● "Manipulated variable difference": Current manipulated variable error (ER)
● "Permissible dev.": Permissible ± deviation (PosDeadBand) of manipulated variable that
is output. If the manipulated variable feedback Rbk is within this range, the manipulated
variable is considered reached.
● "Open limit": Limit (PosDiOpen) for forming the "Control valve Open" signal
(FbkOpenOut). If the position feedback reaches this limit, the control valve is open.
● "Close limit": Limit (PosDiClose) for forming the "Control valve Closed" signal
(FbkCloseOut). If the position feedback reaches this limit, the control valve is closed.
● "Manipulated variable tracking": (MV_TrkOn = 1) manipulated variable is corrected to the
tracking value. Tracking value for the effective manipulated variable for "Track manipulated
variable"

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1534 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

● "Channel MV" Display of the manipulated variable by the output channel block
● "Auxiliary valve monitoring" Display of the remaining monitoring time of the auxiliary valve.
● "Monitoring valve" Display of the remaining monitoring time of the valve.

(3) Enable operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Icons for enabled operation:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)
The following enabled operations are shown here:
● "Manipulated variable external": You can enable external manipulated variable specification
● "Manipulated variable internal": You can enable internal manipulated variable specification
● "Change MV": You can change the manipulated variable
● "Open": You can open the valve. The display always relates to the auxiliary valve and
control valve. Neither the auxiliary valve nor the control valve can be opened if there is no
enable.
For the control valve this means: If a new manipulated variable is greater than the current
valve position, this new manipulated variable take effect.
If text is configured for this command, it is also displayed in brackets. You can find additional
information on this in the section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218).
● "Close": You can close the valve. The display always relates to the auxiliary valve and
control valve. Neither the auxiliary valve nor the control valve can be closed if there is no
enable.
For the control valve this means: If a new manipulated variable is less than the current valve
position, this new manipulated variable does not take effect and the control valve retains
its position.
If text is configured for this command, it is also displayed in brackets. You can find additional
information on this in the section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218).
● "Reset": You can reset the valve if interlocks or errors occur.
● "Automatic": You can switch to "automatic mode".
● "Manual": You can switch to "manual mode".
● "Local": You can switch to "local mode".
● "Out of service": You can switch to "Out of service" operating mode.
● "Local operator permission": Use the ← button to switch to the standard view of the
OpStations block. You can find additional information on this in the section Operator control
permissions (Page 265) .

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1535
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

(4) Inputs and outputs


This area shows the most important parameters for this block with the current selection.
● "Permission" (Feature 2 bit 16 = 0):
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Motor valve activation not enabled on OS
– 1 = Enable for "opening"/"closing" from the neutral position
● "Permission open" (Feature 2 bit 16 = 1):
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Motor valve activation not enabled on OS
– 1 = Enable for "open" from the neutral position
● "Permission close" (Feature 2 bit 16 = 1):
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Motor valve activation not enabled on OS
– 1 = Enable for "close" from the neutral position
● "Protection" (Feature 2 bit 16 = 0):
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Protective interlocking is in effect; once the interlocking condition has disappeared,
you will have to reset the block
– 1 = "Good" state
● "Protection open" (Feature 2 bit 16 = 1):
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Protective interlocking is in effect; once the interlocking condition has disappeared,
you will have to reset the block
– 1 = "Good" state
● "Protection close" (Feature 2 bit 16 = 1):
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Protective interlocking is in effect; once the interlocking condition has disappeared,
you will have to reset the block
– 1 = "Good" state
● "Interlock" (Feature 2 bit 16 = 0):
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Interlocking without reset is active; you can operate the block without reset once the
interlocking condition has disappeared
– 1 = "Good" state
● "Interlock open" (Feature 2 bit 16 = 1):
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Interlocking without reset is active; you can operate the block without reset once the
interlocking condition has disappeared
– 1 = "Good" state

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1536 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

● "Interlock close" (Feature 2 bit 16 = 1):


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Interlocking without reset is active; you can operate the block without reset once the
interlocking condition has disappeared
– 1 = "Good" state
● "Local correct": 1 = Control signal for "Local mode" (LocalLi) is active
● "Interlock deact.":
– 0 = Bypass disabled
– 1 = Bypassing interlock in "local mode" and in "simulation"
Since, depending on the configuration, the block itself forms the digital feedback signals
internally via the "Open" and "Closed" positions, the following reaction results from the
"Feedback open" and "Feedback closed" signals.
● Control valve:
– "Feedback open": The display is derived from the FbkOpenOut output. However, this
output is formed from the configured limit for the "Open" position.
– "Feedback close": The display is derived from the FbkCloseOut output. However, this
output is formed from the configured limit for the "Closed" position.
● "Control auxiliary valve": only visible when there is a auxiliary valve
– Control binary control Ctrl.Out
– "Feedback open auxiliary valve": FbkAuxVOpenOut.
– "Feedback closed auxiliary valve": FbkAuxCloseOut.
– "Channel Control auxiliary valve": Signal for controlling the auxiliary valve by the output
channel block

(5) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
Use this navigation button to open the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system (ES). The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the
engineering system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in the section Opening additional faceplates
(Page 217)
.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1537
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

7.13.8.6 VlvAnL parameter view

Parameter view of VlvAnL

(1) Enabled operation


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Icons for enabled operation:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).

(2) Monitoring
In this area, you change parameters and therefore influence the control valve. Refer to the
Changing values (Page 270) section for more on this.
You can influence the following parameters:
● "Control": Monitoring time during opening and closing of the control valve (dynamic)
● "End position": Monitoring time of the end position of the control valve (static)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1538 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

Enable monitoring
You can enable monitoring by selecting the check box (☑)
You can find additional information on this in the section Monitoring the feedbacks (Page 98).

(3) Monitoring auxiliary valve


As under (2) Monitoring, but only visible when there is an auxiliary valve. Only one common
monitoring time can be entered for dynamic and static monitoring.

(4) Settings
● MV = Rbk in tracking mode: Correction is performed with the position feedback Rbk instead
of the MV_Trk tracking value. The switchover from "Track manipulated variable"
(MV_TrkOn = 1) to "Do not track manipulated variable" is bumpless (MV_TrkOn = 0).
Set MV_TrkRbk parameter.
● MV = MV extern: Bumpless switchover of manipulated variable from external to internal. The
internal manipulated variable is tracked to the external one.
Set MV_TrkExt parameter.

(5) Service
You can select the following functions in this area:
● "Simulation"
● "Release for maintenance" (with display for a maintenance request)
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for more on
this.
You can find information on this area in the section:
● Simulating signals (Page 59)
● Release for maintenance (Page 65)

7.13.8.7 Block icon for VlvAnL

Block icons for VLvAnL


A variety of block icons are available with the following functions:
● Limits (high/low)
● Alarm violation. Warning and tolerance limits as well as control system faults
● Operating modes
● Signal status, release for maintenance
● Forcing states
● Displays for bypassing interlocks

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1539
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

● Interlocks
● Valve status display
● Display of feedback value (white, with decimal places)
● Operation of the manipulated variable
● Process tag type
● External/internal manipulated variable specification
● Memo display

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV8.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special features


1

3 Non-rotating block icon

4 Non-rotating block icon

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV7.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special features


1 Block icon in the full display

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1540 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special features


5

- Block icon in "Out of service"


mode (example with type 1 block
icon)

Additional information on the block icon and the control options in the block icon is available
in the following sections:
● Configuring the block icons (Page 246)
● Block icon structure (Page 239)
● Operation via the block icon (Page 248)

Valve status display


The following valve states are shown here:

Icon Meaning
Valve open

Valve closed

Error at valve

Valve is opening

Valve is closing

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1541
Motor and valve blocks
7.13 VlvAnL - Control valve

Icon Meaning
Valve stopped

Valve closed

Valve is closing

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1542 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

7.14.1 Description of VlvPosL

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1918
Family: Drives

Area of application for VlvPosL


The block is used for the following application:
● Control of a motor valve with analog position feedback.

How it works
Various operating modes are available for controlling the motorized valve. This enables you
to change the valve states individually. All changes of modes or states, as well as errors
occurring in this context, are monitored, visualized in the faceplate and reported to the operator.
Operators with suitable permissions can use the block icon and the faceplate to view the current
state of the motorized valve and operate it.
The motor valve with analog position feedback can be controlled via binary signals such as
"Open", "Close", or "Stop" or via analog manipulated variable signals. An internal position
controller is activated when analog manipulated variable signals are used. This enables even
motor valves with delayed reaction in their position feedback to be position controlled.

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38). The block is
also installed automatically in the startup OB (OB100).

Startup characteristics
Use the Feature Bit Set startup characteristics (Page 141) to define the startup characteristics
of this block.
Following startup, the messages are suppressed for the number of cycles assigned in the
RunUpCyc parameter.
After a startup without control (Open, Close = 0) no monitoring of the feedback signals
FbkOpen and FbkClose takes places during the V_MonTiStatic time. Changes to
FbkOpen and FbkClose are applied. This means that the feedback is monitored again even
in the stop state.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1543
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

Status word assignment for Status1 parameter


You can find a description of the individual parameters in the section VlvPosL I/Os
(Page 1571).

Status bit Parameter


0 Occupied
1 BatchEn
2 SimOn
3 OosAct.Value
4 OosLi.Value
5 AutoAct.Value
6 LocalAct.Value
7 0 = Open padlock in the block icon
1 = Closed padlock in block icon
With Feature2.Bit16 = 1, a closed padlock is displayed if "Interlock Open" or "Inter‐
lock Close" is active.
8 Open.Value
9 Motor is stopped
10 Close.Value
11 Torque shutoff enabled (TorqOpen or TorqClose = 1)
When the seal valve function is enabled, the torque shutoff is only active when the
TorqClose signal is active before the valve feedback.
12 WarnAct.Value
13 Feedback error without control change
14 Feedback error due to control change
15 Mode switch fail
16 1 = Intlock is active
17 1 = Permit is active
18 1 = Protect is active
19 Displays forced operating state in the block icon: Force
20 Not used
21 1 = Position control is active
22 1 = Position control is not active
23 "Interlock" button is enabled
24 0 = Displays neutral position "Closed"
1 = Displays neutral position "Open"
25 1 = Displays neutral position "Stop"
26 Bypass information from the previous function block
27 Bypass active (BypProt = 1) and Local.Act = 1 or SimOn = 1
28 Invalid signal status
29 0 = Closed
1 = Open
30 "Permission" button is enabled
31 "Protection" button is enabled

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1544 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

Status word assignment for Status2 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 MsgLock
1 AV_AH_Act.Value
2 AV_WH_Act.Value
3 AV_TH_Act.Value
4 AV_TL_Act.Value
5 AV_WL_Act.Value
6 AV_AL_Act.Value
7 AV_AH_En OR Feature.Bit23
8 AV_WH_En OR Feature.Bit23
9 AV_TH_En OR Feature.Bit23
10 AV_TL_En OR Feature.Bit23
11 AV_WL_En OR Feature.Bit23
12 AV_AL_En OR Feature.Bit23
13 AV_AH_MsgEn
14 AV_WH_MsgEn
15 AV_TH_MsgEn
16 AV_TL_MsgEn
17 AV_WL_MsgEn
18 AV_AL_MsgEn
19 1 = Input signals have no impact on "Local mode" when LocalSetting = 2 and
LocalSetting = 4
20 1 = Valve is closing
21 1 = Valve is closed
22 1 = Valve is stopped
23 1 = Valve is opening
24 1 = Valve is open
25 For the error status display in the closed valve
26 For the error status display in the opened valve
27 Automatic preview for "Open"
28 Automatic preview for "Close"
29 Automatic preview for "Stop"
30 Display for interlocks in block icon
31 MS_RelOp

Status word assignment for Status3 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 M_MonStaErr.Value
1 M_MonDynErr.Value
2 V_MonStaErr.Value
3 V_MonDynErr.Value

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1545
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

Status bit Parameter


4 M_MonStopErr.Value
5 Automatic preview for "Position Control" on
6 Automatic preview for "Position Control" off
7 Torque shutoff opening enabled
8 Torque shutoff closing enabled
9 External fault generated by FaultExt or external control system fault CSF with set
Feature.Bit18 Activating error state for external process control error CSF
(Page 154)
10 Vibration successfully completed – Reset required
11 Display motor protection (Trip status, Trip.ST ≠ 16#FF)
12 1 = Input parameter FbkClose is interconnected
13 1 = Input parameter FbkClosing is interconnected
14 1 = Input parameter FbkOpen is interconnected
15 1 = Input parameter FbkOpening is interconnected
16 1 = Input parameter TorOpen is interconnected
17 1 = Input parameter TorClose is interconnected
18 SimLiOp.Value
19 1 = Enable for rapid stop (Feature.Bit14 Enabling rapid stop via faceplate
(Page 172))
20 1 = Input parameter OpenChnST is interconnected
21 1 = Input parameter CloseChnST is interconnected
22 Not used
23 Command for rapid stop
24 "Open"/"Stop" command
25 "Close"/"Stop" command
26 Show automatic preview in the standard view
27 Not used
28 GrpErr.Value
29 RdyToStart.Value
30 Auxiliary value 1 visible
31 Auxiliary value 2 visible

Status word assignment for Status4 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 Delay of message ER_AH_Lim
1 Delay of message ER_AL_Lim
2 Delay of message RbkWH_Lim
3 Delay of message RbkWL_Lim
4 Collection of message delays
5 ER_AH_En OR Feature.Bit23
6 ER_AL_En OR Feature.Bit23
7 1 = Signal manipulated variable difference high limit violation (ER_AH_MsgEn)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1546 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

Status bit Parameter


8 1 = Signal manipulated variable difference low limit violation (ER_AL_MsgEn)
9 RbkWH_En OR Feature.Bit23
10 RbkWL_En OR Feature.Bit23
11 1 = Signal readback value high limit violation (RbkWH_MsgEn)
12 1 = Signal readback value low limit violation (RbkWL_MsgEn)
13 OpenForce.Value
14 StopForce.Value
15 CloseForce.Value
16 1 = Forced manipulated variable MV_Forced is active
17 1 = Tracking value MV_Trk is active
18 Reset request in automatic mode
19 Trip.Value
20 1 = Vibrate enabled
21 - 22 Not used
23 Hidden bypass signal in "Permit"
24 Hidden bypass signal in "Interlock"
25 Hidden bypass signal in "Protect"
26 Feature2.Bit2 Separate evaluation for excluded and simulated interlock signals
(Page 155)
27 Feature2.Bit16 Separate interlock for each direction, position, or speed
(Page 173)
28 Current position feedback monitoring time is visible
29 Current motor monitoring time is visible
30 Current valve monitoring time is visible
31 Feature.Bit13 Separate monitoring time for stopping the motor (Page 173)

Status word assignment for Status5 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0-7 Effective signal 1 to 8 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
8 - 15 Effective signal 9 to 16 of the message block connected via EventTsIn
16 AV is not connected
17 Delay of the message AV_AH_Lim
18 Delay of the message AV_WH_Lim
19 Delay of the message AV_TH_Lim
20 Delay of the message AV_TL_Lim
21 Delay of the message AV_WL_Lim
22 Delay of the message AV_AL_Lim
23 Collection of the message delays
24 1 = High limit of the manipulated variable difference is violated (ER_AH_Act.Value)
25 1 = Low limit of the manipulated variable difference is violated (ER_AL_Act.Value)
26 1 = High limit of the readback value is violated (RbkWH_Act.Value)
27 1 = Low limit of the readback value is violated (RbkWL_Act.Value)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1547
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

Status bit Parameter


28 1 = Valve still closes (Status2 Bit 20) but the motor is not running
29 1 = Valve still opens (Status2 Bit 23) but the motor is not running
30 MV_TrkOn.Value
31 Not used

Status word allocation for Status6 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 - 15 Effective signal 1 to 16 of the message block connected via EventTs2In
16 Hidden bypass signal in "Permission Close"
17 Hidden bypass signal in "Interlock Close"
18 Hidden bypass signal in "Protection Close"
19 "Permission Open" button is enabled
20 "Permission Close" button is enabled
21 "Interlock Open" button is enabled
22 "Interlock Close" button is enabled
23 "Protection Open" button is enabled
24 "Protection Close" button is enabled
25 1 = "Permission Close" is active
26 1 = "Interlock Close" is active
27 1 = "Protection Close" is active
28 - 31 Not used

See also
VlvPosL functions (Page 1551)
VlvPosL messaging (Page 1569)
VlvPosL block diagram (Page 1584)
VlvPosL error handling (Page 1566)
VlvPosL modes (Page 1548)

7.14.2 VlvPosL modes

VlvPosL operating modes


The block supports all standard operating modes:
● Local mode (Page 80)
● Automatic mode (Page 76)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1548 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

● Manual mode (Page 76)


● Out of service (Page 72)
The next section provides additional block-specific information relating to the general
descriptions.

"Local mode"
You can find general information on "Local mode", switching modes, and bumpless switchover
in the section Local mode (Page 80).
When you put a block into "Local mode", it is controlled either by "Local" signals or by feedback
signals. With LocalSetting = 1 or 3, you can control the motor valve with the following
“Local” signals:
● "Open" (OpenLocal = 1)
● "Close" (CloseLocal = 1)
● "Stop" (StopLocal = 1)
The feedback signals FbkOpening, FbkClosing, FbkOpen, FbkClose, and the analog
readback Rbk will be monitored.
With LocalSetting = 2 or 4, the control outputs Open.Value, Close.Value, and the
internal status Open/Close/Stop of the block will be tracked.
In the case where motor feedback signals are available (Feature.Bit12 = 0), the control
outputs Open.Value and Close.Value will be tracked from the motor feedback signals
FbkOpening and FbkClosing. The valve feedback signals FbkOpen, FbkClose, and the
analog readback Rbk will be monitored.
In the case where no motor feedback signals are available (Feature.Bit12 = 1), the internal
status Open/Close/Stop of the block will be tracked from the valve feedback signals
FbkOpen, FbkClose, and the analog readback Rbk. It will only be monitored if the analog
readback and valve feedback signals are not suitable together.
If no position can be identified, the last valid position is assumed.

"Automatic mode"
You can find general information on "Automatic mode", switching modes and bumpless
switchover in the section Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers
(Page 76).
You can control the motor valve in "Automatic mode" with analog position feedback:
● "Open" (OpenAut = 1)
● "Close" (CloseAut = 1)
● "Stop" (StopAut = 1)
Position control is terminated with "Open", "Close", or "Stop". It is enabled again with:
● "Activate position control" (PosOnAut = 1)
For position control, the motor valve is controlled via the Open and Close outputs such that
the manipulated variable MV and position feedback Rbk come into agreement.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1549
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

"Manual mode"
You can find general information on "Manual mode", switching modes and bumpless
switchover in the section Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers
(Page 76).
You can control the motor valve in "Manual mode" with analog position feedback:
● "Open" (OpenMan = 1)
● "Close" (CloseMan = 1)
● "Stop" (StopMan = 1)
Position control is terminated with "Open", "Close", or "Stop". It is enabled again with:
● "Activate position control" (PosOnMan = 1)
For position control, the motor valve is controlled via the Open and Close outputs such that
the manual value Man and position feedback Rbk come into agreement.

"Out of service"
You can find general information about the "Out of service" mode in the section Out of
service (Page 72).
With Feature2.Bit1 =1 the following output parameter become the status of simulation
16#60, if mode is changed to "Out of service".
With Feature2.Bit1 =0 the following output parameter become the status of 16#80, if mode
is changed to "Out of service".
● FbkOpenOut.ST
● FbkCloseOut.ST
● FbkOpngOut.ST
● FbkClsgOut.ST
● Opened.ST
● Closed.ST
● Opening.ST
● Closing.ST
● Stop.ST
● RbkOut.ST
● RbkWH_Act.ST
● RbkWL_Act.ST
● PosReached.ST
● ER.ST
● ER_AH_Act.ST
● ER_AL_Act.ST
● AV_Out.ST

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1550 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

See also
VlvPosL block diagram (Page 1584)
VlvPosL I/Os (Page 1571)
VlvPosL error handling (Page 1566)
VlvPosL functions (Page 1551)
VlvPosL messaging (Page 1569)
Description of VlvPosL (Page 1543)

7.14.3 VlvPosL functions

Functions of VlvPosL
The functions for this block are listed below.

Motor valve control


The motor valve is controlled via the Open and Close outputs or via the pulse outputs P_Open,
P_Close, and P_Stop. The outputs are set by either of the following methods:
● Directly via the corresponding inputs:
– OpenMan, CloseMan, and StopMan in manual mode
– OpenAut, CloseAut, and StopAut in automatic mode
– OpenLocal, CloseLocal, and StopLocal in local mode
– OpenForce, CloseForce, and StopForce for the force operating states function.
● Calculated by a control algorithm after the position controller is switched on in such a way
that the position feedback Rbk reaches a specified manipulated variable.
Position control is switched on by:
● PosOnMan in manual mode
● PosOnAut in automatic mode
● MV_ForOn for the force operating states functions.
In the local mode, the manipulated variable is always tracked to the position feedback.
For direct control via the Open, Close, Stop inputs above, position control is terminated and
must be reactivated via the PosOn inputs.

Motor valve control with position control


When controlling with enabled position control PosAct =1, the motor valve is moved to the
desired valve position using the specified manipulated variable.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1551
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

Depending on the mode and function, the effective manipulated variable MV_Out is specified
by:

PosAct MV_ForOn Permit Int‐ ManAct MV_TrkOn MV_Out = Limits State


lock Protect
…Cls
0 0 - - - RbkOut none Without posi‐
tion control:
Tracking to
RbkOut with‐
out limitation
1 1 - - - MV_Forced none Forced track‐
ing without
limitation
1 0 1 - - Neutral posi‐ MV_HiLim Interlock
tion: de‐ MV_LoLim state
pends on RbkOut
SafePos
1 0 0 1 - Man MV_HiLim Manual
MV_LoLim mode, set by
the operator
1 0 0 0 1 MV_Trk MV_HiLim Tracking with
AutAct = 1 MV_LoLim limitation
1 0 0 0 0 MV MV_HiLim Automatic
AutAct = 1 MV_LoLim mode

If the motor valve is in "out of service" mode, position control is switched off and the controls
Open and Close are set in depending of SafePos. Accordingly, the output MV_Out is tracking
to MV_HiLim, MV_LoLim or RbkOut.
The manipulated variable difference MV_Out – RbkOut is controlled via a deadband with the
deadband width DeadBand and displayed at the ER output.

Manipulated variable difference ER Deadband range


(MV_Out – RbkOut) - DeadBand MV_Out – RbkOut >= DeadBand
0.0 -DeadBand <= MV_Out – RbkOut <= DeadBand
(MV_Out – RbkOut) + DeadBand MV_Out – RbkOut <= -DeadBand

The internal position controller is set with the following parameters:


● Gain: Controller gain
● MotorTime: Motor runtime from closed to fully open valve
● TmLag: Delay time caused, for example, by lag of the motor valve when switching on and
off.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1552 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

The pulse output is formed by a three-step element with hysteresis and set with the following
parameters:
● PulseTime: Minimum pulse length of the outputs Open or Close
● BreakTime: Mminimum pulse break between two pulse outputs of Open or Close
Note
PulseTime and BreakTime are limited to SampleTime. If they are smaller parameterized
than SampleTime they will be written back to the input with the value of SampleTime.
PulseTime and BreakTime values which are too large, can reduce the precision of
position control.

The effective trip threshold and response threshold of the three-step element is displayed at
the ThreshOff and ThreshOn output parameters.
The PosReached output shows whether the specified position has been reached. This is the
case when:
● Intermediate position:
PosRbkHys >= ABS(MV_Out - RbkOut)
● End position open:
MV_Out >= PosDiOpen AND RbkOut >= PosDiOpen AND FbkOpenOut AND NOT
FbkCloseOut
● End position closed:
MV_Out <= PosDiClose AND RbkOut <= PosDiClose AND FbkCloseOut AND NOT
FbkOpenOut
The control and feedback signals of the motor are at "Stopped" state.

Opening additional faceplates


This block provides the standard function Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

Operator permissions
This block provides the standard function Operator control permissions (Page 265).
The block has the following permissions for the parameter OS_Perm:

Bit Function
0 1 = Operator can switch to "Automatic mode"
1 1 = Operator can switch to "Manual mode"
2 1 = Operator can switch to "Local mode"
3 1 = Operator can switch to "Out of service mode"
4 1 = Operator can stop the motor
5 1 = Operator can open the valve
6 1 = Operator can close the valve
7 1 = Operator can trigger rapid stop for motors
8 1 = Operator can activate position control

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1553
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

Bit Function
9 1 = Operator can reset the valve
10 1 = Operator can change the manual value Man
11 1 = Operator can change the simulation value SimRbk
12 1 = Operator can define the valve monitoring time for control
13 1 = Operator can define the valve monitoring time for end position
14 1 = Operator can activate the function valve monitoring time (bits 12 and 13)
15 1 = Operator can define the motor monitoring time for control start or stop
16 1 = Operator can define the monitoring time for control stop
17 1 = Operator can define the motor monitoring time for status
18 1 = Operator can activate the function motor monitoring time (bits 15,16, and 17)
19 1 = Operator can define the readback monitoring time
20 1 = Operator can activate the function readback monitoring time (bit 19)
21 Not used
22 1 = Operator can change proportional gain of the position control
23 Not used
24 1 = Operator can set the delay time of the motor valve
25 1 = Operator can set the deadband width of the manipulated variable difference
26 1 = Operator can set the motor run time
27 1 = Operator can set the minimum pulse duration
28 1 = Operator can set the minimum break duration
29 Not used
30 1 = Operator can activate the "Simulation" function
31 1 = Operator can activate the "Release for maintenance" function

The block has the following permissions for the parameter OS1Perm:

Bit Function
0 1 = Operator can change the high operating limit of the manipulated variable MV_HiLim
1 1 = Operator can change the low operating limit of the manipulated variable MV_LoLim
2 Not used
3 1 = Operator can enable/disable messages via ER_AH_MsgEn
4 1 = Operator can enable/disable messages via ER_AL_MsgEn
5 1 = Operator can enable/disable messages via RbkWH_MsgEn
6 1 = Operator can enable/disable messages via RbkWL_MsgEn
7 1 = Operator can change the limit (manipulated variable difference) for the high alarm
ER_AH_Lim
8 1 = Operator can change the hysteresis (manipulated variable difference) ER_Hyst
9 1 = Operator can change the limit (manipulated variable difference) for the low alarm
ER_AL_Lim
10 1 = Operator can change the limit (position feedback) for the high warning RbkWH_Lim
11 1 = Operator can change the hysteresis (position feedback) RbkHyst
12 1 = Operator can change the hysteresis (position feedback) for the low warning RbkWL_Lim
13 Not used
14 1 = Operator can change the simulation value SimAV

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1554 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

Bit Function
15 1 = Operator can change the limit (AV) for the high alarm
16 1 = Operator can change the limit (AV) for the high warning
17 1 = Operator can change the limit (AV) for the high tolerance
18 1 = Operator can change the limit (AV) for the hysteresis
19 1 = Operator can change the limit (AV) for the low alarm
20 1 = Operator can change the limit (AV) for the low warning
21 1 = Operator can change the limit (AV) for the low tolerance
22 1 = Operator can enable / disable messages via AV_AH_MsgEn
23 1 = Operator can enable / disable messages via AV_WH_MsgEn
24 1 = Operator can enable / disable messages via AV_TH_MsgEn
25 1 = Operator can enable / disable messages via AV_TL_MsgEn
26 1 = Operator can enable / disable messages via AV_WL_MsgEn
27 1 = Operator can enable / disable messages via AV_AL_MsgEn
28 - Not used
31

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm, OS1Perm as a parameter, you
have to reset the corresponding OS_Perm, OS1Perm bit.

Limit monitoring for additional analog value


This block provides the standard function Limit monitoring of an additional analog value
(Page 92).

Limit monitoring with hysteresis


This block provides the standard function Limit monitoring with hysteresis (Page 98). This is
done using the input parameter AV_Hyst.

Suppress messages using the MsgLock parameter


This block provides the standard function Suppressing messages using the MsgLock
parameter (Page 214).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1555
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

Interlocks
This block provides the following interlocks:
● Feature2.Bit16 = 0
– Activation enable ("Permission")
– Interlock without reset ("Interlock")
– Interlock with reset ("Protection")
● Feature2.Bit16 = 1
– Activation enable Open ("Permission Open")
– Activation enable Close ("Permission Close")
– Interlock open without reset ("Interlock Open")
– Interlock close without reset ("Interlock Close")
– Interlock open with reset ("Protection Open")
– Interlock close with reset ("Protection Close")
For more on this, see the sections Interlocks (Page 101) and Influence of the signal status on
the interlock (Page 105).
When an interlock is pending and position control is enabled, the block remains in position
control. The following manipulated variables are controlled based on the configured neutral
position for an interlock with/without reset:

SafePos Manipulated variable


0: Closed MV_Out = MV_LoLim
1: Opened MV_Out = MV_HiLim
2: Stopped MV_Out = RbkOut

Note
The neutral position cannot be reached if the limit MV_HiLim is not configured greater than or
equal to PosDiOpen or MV_LoLim is not configured less than or equal to PosDiClose.

With VlvPosL in position control, the neutral position is reached when:

SafePos Neutral position is reached when


0: Closed PosReached = 1, FBkOpenOut = 0, FBkCloseOut = 1
1: Opened PosReached = 1, FBkOpenOut = 1, FBkCloseOut = 0
2: Stopped PosReached = 1, independent of FBkOpenOut, FBkCloseOut

If VlvPosL is in the neutral position, it can only leave this position when an activation enable
is set.

Motor protection function


This block provides the standard function Motor protection function (Page 100).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1556 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

When motor protection is pending and position control is enabled, the block remains in position
control. The manipulated variable is tracked to the feedback value (MV_Out = RbkOut) and
with this, the motor is in the stop state.

Rapid stop for motors


This block provides the standard function Rapid stop for motors (Page 108).
When rapid stop is pending and position control is enabled, the block remains in position
control. The manipulated variable is tracked to the feedback value (MV_Out = RbkOut) and
with this, the motor is in the stop state.

Torque monitoring
This block provides torque monitoring.
The signals of the torque monitoring switches are interconnected to input parameters
TorqOpen for opening and TorqClose for closing the motor valve.
The good state is indicated via this parameter with the value 1. In this case, the signal status
cannot be 16#00 or 16#28.
Using Feature2.Bit6 (Vibrate), you can define how to proceed in automatic mode when
the torque has been reached. With Feature2.Bit6 = 0 (no vibrating), position control is
terminated and the motor is stopped. In the case where TorqClose is in end position close
or TorqOpen is in end position open, the position control will not be terminated.
Vibration is disabled or VlvPosL is not in automatic mode:
If the torque monitoring is enabled, the motor is stopped. You can move the valve in the
opposite direction.
If, for example, the torque shutdown is active when the valve opens, you can still close the
valve.
Active torque shutoff appears in the standard view of the display area for block states.
When the "Seal valve" function is enabled by means of Feature.Bit8, the torque shutoff for
the closing TorqClose is also evaluated (see section Sealing the valve (Page 179)).
Vibration is enabled and VlvPosL is in automatic mode:
If torque monitoring is enabled, the motor runs in the opposite direction. After traveling
VibrWidth seconds or VibrPerc %, the motor runs in the opposite direction again to solve
the cause of the torque shutoff using vibration. This procedure is repeated a maximum of
VibrNo times.
With activated position control, the motor travels from the current position VibrPerc % in the
opposite direction. When position control is disabled, the control outputs are immediately sent
in the opposite direction for VibrWidth seconds.
If, for example, the torque shutdown is active when the valve opens with activated position
control, the motor valve returns to the value:
RbkOut - (MV_HiLim - MV_LoLim) / 100.0 * VibrPerc
When this point is reached, the motor attempts to open to the previously set manipulated
variable once again.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1557
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

During reversing, the display area of the standard view, "Vibrate enabled" is displayed.
After attempting to correct the cause of the torque VibrNo times, the motor is stopped. The
block must be reset before vibrating can be enabled again.

Sealing the valve


This function is enabled using Feature.Bit8 Sealing the valve (Page 179). The seal valve
function combines the query of the end position "Closed" via the input parameter FbkClose
and Rbk with the limit violation of the configured torque via the input parameter TorqClose.
This ensures that the valve is completely closed.
The valve is only considered completely closed when the feedback for the end position "Close"
has been received (0->1), the position feedback Rbk is smaller than or equal to
PosDiClose, and the torque shutdown for "Closed" is enabled. The torque shutoff should not
come before the feedback in this case. The FbkCloseOut output shows whether the valve is
sealed tight with the following conditions:
● FbkCloseOut:= FbkClose.Value AND RbkOut.Value <= PosDiClose has come in
(0->1)
● "Torque shutoff closed is enabled"
● "Torque shutoff closed is enabled" did not come before FbkCloseOut (0->1)
"Torque shutoff closed enabled" means TorqClose = 0 or the signal status is 16#00 or 16#28.
When "Torque shutoff closed is enabled" comes before the end position feedback closed, this
is displayed in the faceplate in the standard view and the motor stops. Opening the valve is
still possible.

Note
The command text for Close in the standard view and preview can be changed to Seal in the
CFC at the CloseMan parameter in Text 1. See section Labeling of buttons and text
(Page 218).

Disable interlocks
This block provides the standard function Disabling interlocks (Page 104).

Resetting the block in case of interlocks


This block provides the standard function Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors
(Page 43).

External fault (FaultExt), External control system fault (CSF)


This block provides the possibility to pass an external fault via the FaultExt parameter or an
external control system fault via the CSF parameter. See VlvPosL error handling (Page 1566).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1558 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

When an external fault or control system fault is pending (Feature.Bit18 = 1) and position
control is enabled, the block remains in position control. The following manipulated variable is
set based on the configured neutral position:

SafePos Manipulated variable


0: Closed MV_Out = MV_LoLim
1: Opened MV_Out = MV_HiLim
2: Stopped MV_Out = RbkOut

Note
The neutral position cannot be reached if the limit MV_HiLim is not configured greater than or
equal to PosDiOpen or MV_LoLim is not configured less than or equal to PosDiClose.

Group error
This block provides the standard function, Outputting group errors (Page 124).
The following parameters are taken into consideration when forming the group error:
● CSF
● Trip
● V_MonDynErr
● V_MonStaErr
● M_MonDynErr
● M_MonStaErr
● RbkMonDynErr
● RbkMonStaErr
● FaultExt

Outputting a signal for start readiness


This block provides the standard function, Outputting a signal for start readiness (Page 54).

Forming the group status for interlocks


This block provides the standard function, Forming the group status for interlock information
(Page 106).

Forming the signal status for blocks


This block provides the standard function, Forming and outputting the signal status for
technologic blocks (Page 110).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1559
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

The worst signal status for the block is formed from the following parameters:
● FbkClsgOut.ST
● FbkOpngOut.ST
● FbkOpenOut.ST
● FbkCloseOut.ST
● RbkOut.ST
● LocalLi.ST
● OpenLocal.ST
● StopLocal.ST
● CloseLocal.ST
● Trip.ST
● TorqOpen.ST
● TorqClose.ST
● AV_Out.ST
● OpenChn.ST
● CloseChn.ST
● OpenAut.ST (only if Feature2.Bit10 = 1)
● CloseAut.ST (only if Feature2.Bit10 = 1)
● StopAut.ST (only if Feature2.Bit10 = 1)
● MV.ST (only if Feature2.Bit10 = 1)
● PosOnAut.ST (only if Feature2.Bit10 = 1)

Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values


If the Feature2 bit Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values
(Page 190) is set to 1 and one of the following parameters has bad signal status (16#00 or
16#28), the block goes to the neutral position in the "Automatic" mode:
● OpenAut.ST
● CloseAut.ST
● StopAut.ST
● MV.ST
● PosOnAut.ST

Force operating states


This block provides the standard function, Forcing operating modes (Page 41). The
OpenForce, CloseForce, and StopForce inputs force the block to open, close, or stop.
With activated position control, this mode is terminated and must be separately reactivated.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1560 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

With MV_ForOn = 1, position control is enabled and set to the manipulated variable
MV_Forced.

Feedback monitoring
This block provides the standard function, Monitoring the feedbacks (Page 98).
The FbkOpen, FbkClose, and Rbk feedback is monitored for the valve, the FbkOpening
and FbkClosing feedback is monitored for the motor.
Position control is terminated if a monitoring error of the feedback occurs. The configured
neutral position is targeted if a monitoring error of the valve feedback occurs.
The control signals are switched to motor stop if a monitoring error of the motor feedback
occurs.

Monitoring valve feedback


The monitoring of valve feedback is set using the V_Monitor parameter.
Startup characteristics are monitored by setting the V_MonTiDynamic parameter. When
starting the motor valve, the current position feedback Rbk is taken into consideration and is
included in the calculation of the monitoring time as follows:
Monitoring of the position feedback is switched on (RbkMonitor =1):
● Monitoring time = V_MonTiDynamic – MotorTime + Abs(MV_Out - RbkOut) *
MotorTime/100

Note
The dynamic monitoring time V_MonTiDynamic should be greater than motor actuating time
MotorTime.

Monitoring of the position feedback is switched off (RbkMonitor =0):


● Open or close motor valve: Monitoring time = V_MonTiDynamic
Monitoring of the position feedback Rbk with activated position control can be set separately
using RbkMonitor, RbkMonTi.
The V_MonTiStatic parameter sets the compliance with the valve position.
Feedback errors are displayed at the corresponding parameters V_MonDynErr or
V_MonStaErr.
The valve travel range is divided into three ranges for monitoring:
● Valve open: RbkOut ≥ PosDiOpen
● Valve in intermediate position: PosDiClose < RbkOut < PosDiOpen
● Valve closed: RbkOut ≤ PosDiClose
To monitor the end positions, the FbkOpenOut and FbkCloseOut outputs are formed as
follows:

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1561
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

When the motor valve reaches the "Open" position, the output is FbkOpenOut = 1:
● With a binary limit switch for the "Open" position (NoFbkOpen = 0):
The valve is considered open if FbkOpenOut is set. FbkOpenOut is set if RbkOut ≥
PosDiOpen and FbkOpen = 1.
● Without binary end switch for the position "Open" (NoFbkOpen = 1):
The valve is considered open if FbkOpenOut is set. FbkOpenOut is set if RbkOut ≥
PosDiOpen.
When the motor valve reaches the "Closed" position, the output is FbkCloseOut = 1:
● With a binary limit switch for the "Closed" position (NoFbkClose = 0):
The valve is considered closed if FbkCloseOut is set. FbkCloseOut is set if RbkOut ≤
PosDiClose and FbkClose = 1.
● Without binary end switch for the position "Closed" (NoFbkClose = 1):
The valve is considered closed if FbkCloseOut is set. FbkCloseOut is set if RbkOut ≤
PosDiClose.

Note
After the motor valve stops in the intermediate position or end position or after a CPU startup
without control (Open, Close = 0), no monitoring of the feedback signals FbkOpen and
FbkClose takes place during the time V_MonTiStatic. Changes to FbkOpen and
FbkClose are applied. This means that the feedback is monitored again, also in the stop state.

Note
When the "Seal valve" function is enabled by means of Feature.Bit8, the torque shutoff for
the closing TorqClose is also evaluated (see section Sealing the valve (Page 179)).

Monitoring the motor feedback


The monitoring of motor feedback is set using the M_Monitor parameter.
Startup characteristics are monitored by setting the M_MonTiDynamic parameter; the
M_MonTiStatic parameter monitors maintenance of the position.
Feedback errors are displayed at the corresponding parameters M_MonDynErr or
M_MonStaErr.

Monitoring of the position feedback Rbk with activated position control


The monitoring of position feedback Rbk is set using the RbkMonitor parameter.
The monitoring of the startup characteristics is set at the RbkMonTi parameter. The effective
monitoring time is calculated as follows:
● Monitoring time = ABS(MV_Outn - MV_Outn-1) * MotorTime/100 + RbkMonitor
MV_Outn: Current manipulated variable to be reached
MV_Outn-1: Last manipulated variable reached
The monitoring of maintaining the valve position is set at the RbkMonTi
● Monitoring time = RbkMonitor

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1562 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

Feedback errors are displayed at the corresponding parameters RbkMonDynErr or


RbkMonStaErr.

Release for maintenance


This block provides the standard function, Release for maintenance (Page 65).

Specify warning times for control functions


This block provides the standard function, Specifying warning times for control functions at
motors and valves (Page 51).
You can generate warning signals when, for example, valves open. Warning signals can be
generated in the following modes:
● Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76) (input parameter
WarnTiMan)
● Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76) (input parameter
WarnTiAut)
You specify the warning times in seconds using the input parameters WarnTiMan and
WarnTiAut . If, for example, a valve opens, this is displayed at the output parameter with
WarnAct = 1. The valve then opens after the set warning time has expired and WarnAct then
returns to 0.
A corresponding warning is not outputted if the values specified for the warning times
(WarnTiMan or WarnTiAut) are lower than the SampleTime parameter.

Note
The warning is activated for each actuation that causes the motor to start, even if this means
that the valve is moved to the neutral position.
A parameterized warning time (WarnTiMan, WarnTiAut) is not active in the position control
mode.

Simulating signals
This block provides the standard function, Simulating signals (Page 59).
You can simulate the following values:
● Additional value (SimAV, SimAV_Li)
With internal simulation with immediate tracking of feedback, it is possible to simulate a position
between the open and closed state (FbkOpenOut = FbkCloseOut = 0) by means of a stop
command.

Select unit of measure


This block provides the standard function, Selecting a unit of measure (Page 221).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1563
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

Neutral position
This block provides the standard function, Neutral position for motors, valves and controllers
(Page 48).

Output signal as pulse signal or static signal


This block provides the standard function Output signal as a static signal or pulse signal
(Page 52). In addition to the static control outputs Open and Close, the block also has pulse
outputs P_Open, P_Close, and P_Stop, which are dependent on the static control output.

Generate instance-specific messages


This block provides the standard function, Generating instance-specific messages (Page 213).

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


An overview of all the reactions that are provided by the Feature parameter is available in
section Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133). The following functionality is
available for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
0 Set startup characteristics (Page 141)
1 Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 181)
2 Resetting the commands for changing the mode (Page 165)
3 Enabling resetting of commands for the control settings (Page 165)
4 Setting switch or button mode (Page 170)
8 Sealing the valve (Page 179)
9 Resetting via input signals in the event of interlocking (Protection) or errors (Page 167)
10 Exiting local mode (Page 181)
11 Activating the run time of feedback signals (Page 157)
12 Motor feedback is not available (Page 160)
13 Separate monitoring time for stopping the motor (Page 173)
14 Enabling rapid stop via faceplate (Page 172)
17 Enabling bumpless switchover to automatic mode for valves, motors, and dosers (Page 177)
18 Activating error state for external process control error CSF (Page 154)
19 Reset even with locked state (Page 169)
20 Disable calculation of impulse control in LocalSetting 2 and 4 (Page 190)
21 Enable bumpless switchover to "Automatic" mode for operator only (Page 176)
22 Update acknowledgment and error status of the message call (Page 163)
23 Limits disabled in faceplate (Page 195)
24 Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162)
25 Suppression of all messages (Page 178)
26 Reaction of the switching points in the "Out of service" operating mode (Page 180)
27 Interlock display with LocalSetting 2 or 4 (Page 182)
28 Disabling operating points (Page 149)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1564 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

Bit Function
29 Signaling limit violation (Page 174)
30 Set reset depending on the operating mode or the LiOp parameter (Page 167)
31 Activating reset of protection / error in manual mode (Page 168)

In switching mode (Feature.Bit4 = 1), the control is selected with the static signals
OpenAut and CloseAut. If the OpenAut and CloseAut inputs are not set, the motor is
stopped. Control via StopAut is not required. If the "Enable reset of commands for control"
function (Feature.Bit3 = 1) is also enabled, the OpenAut and CloseAut inputs are reset
to 0 after evaluation in the block.
In switching mode (Feature.Bit4 = 1), the PosOnAut control acts as a switch. The "Enable
resetting of commands for control" function (Feature.Bit3 = 1) has no influence on
PosOnAut.

Display auxiliary values


This block provides the standard function, Displaying auxiliary values (Page 220).

Configurable reactions using the Feature2 parameter

Bit Function
1 Changes signal status of outputs in OOS (Page 198)
2 Separate evaluation for excluded and simulated interlock signals (Page 155)
3 Control priority in the event of an invalid input command (Page 179)
4 Setting switch or button mode for local commands (Page 185)
5 Evaluation of the signal status of the interlock signals (Page 146)
6 Vibrate after torque monitoring (Page 182)
8 Forcing operating modes in the "Local" mode (Page 188)
10 Considering bad quality of automatic commands or external values (Page 190)
11 Suppress MsgLock and “Out of service” mode for a connected message block (Page 192)
16 Separate interlock for each direction, position, or speed (Page 173)

Connection of the time-stamped messages from EventTs or Event16Ts


This block provides the standard function Connection of the time-stamped messages from
EventTs or Event16Ts (Page 216).

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


This block provides the standard function, SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

Disable feedback
This block provides the standard function, Disabling feedback for valves (Page 100). Feedback
monitoring can be disabled separately for each feedback signal with NoFbkOpen or
NoFbkClose.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1565
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

Labeling of buttons
This block provides the standard function, Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218).
Instance-specific text can be configured for the following parameters:
● OpenMan
● CloseMan
● StopMan
● RapidStp

See also
EventTs functions (Page 1698)
Description of VlvPosL (Page 1543)
VlvPosL messaging (Page 1569)
VlvPosL I/Os (Page 1571)
VlvPosL block diagram (Page 1584)
VlvPosL modes (Page 1548)

7.14.4 VlvPosL error handling

Error handling of VlvPosL


For troubleshooting all blocks, see also the Error handling (Page 121) section in the basics.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers
● Mode switchover error
● Invalid input signals
● Control system fault (CSF)

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum parameter can be used to output the following error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Pre-defined value when inserting the block; the block is not executed.
0 No error pending.
41 The value for the LocalSetting connection is not within the valid limit of 0 to 4.
42 LocalSetting = 0 or LocalSetting = 3 or LocalSetting = 4 and
LocalLi = 1

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1566 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

Error number Meaning of the error number


51 OpenLocal = 1 and StopLocal = 1
CloseLocal = 1 and StopLocal = 1
OpenLocal = 1 and CloseLocal = 1
OpenAut = 1 and StopAut = 1
CloseAut = 1 and StopAut = 1
OpenAut = 1 and CloseAut = 1
PosOnAut = 1 and StopAut = 1
PosOnAut = 1 and OpenAut = 1
PosOnAut = 1 and CloseAut = 1
AutModLi = 1 and ManModLi = 1
OpenForce = 1 and StopForce = 1
CloseForce = 1 and StopForce = 1
OpenForce = 1 and CloseForce = 1
52 LocalAct = 1 and LocalSetting = 2 or 4 and SimOn = 1

Mode switchover error


This error can be outputted by the block, see section Error handling (Page 121).

Invalid input signals


This error can be outputted by the block, see section Error handling (Page 121).
For the following invalid input signals, the control output can be stopped or switched to the
neutral position. This depends on the function Control priority in the event of an invalid input
command (Page 179).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1567
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

Operating mode Invalid input signals Control reaction with


Feature2.Bit3 = 1
Local: Localsetting = 1 or Pushbutton operation for local mode Motor is started in valve neu‐
Localsetting = 3 (Feature2.Bit4 = 0): tral position direction.
OpenLocal = 1 and CloseLocal = 1 or
OpenLocal = 1 and StopLocal = 1 or
StopLocal = 1 and CloseLocal = 1
Switching mode (Feature2.Bit4 = 1):
OpenLocal = 1 and CloseLocal = 1
Local: Localsetting = 1 or OpenForce = 1 and CloseForce = 1 or
Localsetting = 3 and forcing OpenForce = 1 and StopForce = 1 or
StopForce = 1 and CloseForce = 1
Forcing and no "Local mode" OpenForce = 1 and CloseForce = 1 or
OpenForce = 1 and StopForce = 1 or
StopForce = 1 and CloseForce = 1
"Automatic mode" and no forcing Pushbutton operation (Feature.Bit4 = 0):
OpenAut = 1 and CloseAut = 1 or
OpenAut = 1 and StopAut = 1 or
StopAut = 1 and CloseAut = 1 or
StopAut = 1 and PosOnAut = 1 or
CloseAut = 1 and PosOnAut = 1 or
OpenAut = 1 and PosOnAut = 1

Switch mode (Feature.Bit4 = 1):


OpenAut = 1 and CloseAut = 1 or
CloseAut = 1 and PosOnAut = 1 or
OpenAut = 1 and PosOnAut = 1
"Manual mode" and no forcing OpenMan = 1 and CloseMan = 1 or
OpenMan = 1 and StopMan = 1 or
StopMan = 1 and CloseMan = 1

Control system fault (CSF)


An external signal can be activated via the CSF input. If this signal CSF.Value = 1, a control
system fault is triggered. For more information on this, see section Error handling (Page 121).

See also
VlvPosL block diagram (Page 1584)
VlvPosL I/Os (Page 1571)
VlvPosL functions (Page 1551)
VlvPosL modes (Page 1548)
Description of VlvPosL (Page 1543)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1568 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

7.14.5 VlvPosL messaging

Message characteristics
The following messages can be generated for this block:
● Control system fault
● Process messages
● Instance-specific messages

Control system fault


The following control system fault messages can be outputted:

Message instance Message ID Message class Event


MsgEvId1 SIG1 AS control system message - $$BlockComment$$
fault Motor feedback error
SIG2 AS control system message - $$BlockComment$$
fault Motor protection triggered
SIG3 AS control system message - $$BlockComment$$
fault Valve feedback error
SIG4 AS control system message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External fault has occurred

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment
You can interconnect an external fault (signal) to the input parameter CSF. If this CSF = 1, a
control system fault is triggered (MsgEvId1, SIG4).

Process messages

Message instance Message ID Message class Event


MsgEvId2 SIG1 Alarm - high $$BlockComment$$
ER - Alarm high limit violated
SIG2 Alarm - low $$BlockComment$$
ER - Alarm low limit violated
SIG3 Warning - high $$BlockComment$$
Rbk - High warning limit violated
SIG4 Warning - low $$BlockComment$$
Rbk - Low warning limit violated

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1569
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

Instance-specific messages
You can use up to four instance-specific messages with this block.

Message instance Message ID Message class Event


MsgEvId1 SIG5 AS control system message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 1
SIG6 AS control system message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 2
MsgEvId2 SIG5 AS control system message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 3
SIG6 AS control system message - $$BlockComment$$
fault External message 4

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment

Associated values for the message instance MsgEvId1

Associated value Block parameter


1 BatchName
2 StepNo
3 BatchID
4 ExtVa104
5 ExtVa105
6 ExtVa106
7 Reserved
8 Reserved
9 Reserved
10 Reserved

The associated values 4 to 6 are assigned to the parameters ExtVa104 to ExtVa106, and
are usable. For more information on this, refer to the manual "Process Control System PCS 7
- Engineering System".

Associated values for the message instance MsgEvId2

Associated value Block parameter


1 BatchName
2 StepNo
3 BatchID
4 ExtVa204
5 ExtVa205
6 ExtVa206
7 Reserved
8 Reserved

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1570 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

Associated value Block parameter


9 Reserved
10 Reserved

The associated values 4 to 6 are assigned to the parameters ExtVa204 to ExtVa206, and
are usable. For more information on this, refer to the manual "Process Control System PCS 7
- Engineering System".

See also
Description of VlvPosL (Page 1543)
VlvPosL functions (Page 1551)
VlvPosL I/Os (Page 1571)
VlvPosL block diagram (Page 1584)
VlvPosL modes (Page 1548)

7.14.6 VlvPosL I/Os


I/Os of VlvPosL

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AutModLi* 1= "Automatic mode" via interconnection or SFC STRUCT -
(controlled via ModLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AutModOp* 1 = "Automatic mode" via operator (controlled via BOOL 0
ModLiOp = 1)
AV Input additional analog value, to be connected to ANY  
AV_Tech of the AV block
AV_AH_Lim Limit high alarm REAL 95.0
AV_AL_Lim Limit low alarm REAL 5.0
AV_Hyst Hysteresis for alarm, warning and tolerance limits REAL 1.0
AV_TH_Lim Limit high tolerance REAL 85.0
AV_TL_Lim Limit low tolerance REAL 15.0
AV_WH_Lim Limit high warning REAL 90.0
AV_WL_Lim Limit low warning REAL 10.0
BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation BOOL 0
BatchID Batch ID DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name S7 string  
BreakTime* Minimum break duration [s] REAL 1.0
BypProt 1 = Bypass interlock is enabled in "Local mode" and BOOL 0
in simulation

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1571
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

Parameter Description Type Default


CloseAut* 1 = Select Close valve in "Automatic mode" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CloseChnST Signal status of the output channel of Close. STRUCT -
It should be connected to an output channel block. ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
CloseForce 1 = Force Close valve STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CloseLocal 1 = Select Close valve in "Local mode" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CloseMan* 1 = Select Close valve in "Manual mode" BOOL 0
CSF 1 = External fault (control system fault) Error han‐ STRUCT -
dling (Page 121) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
EN 1 = Called block is executed BOOL 1
ER_A_DC* Delay for incoming alarms during monitoring of the REAL 0.0
manipulated variable difference
ER_A_DG* Delay for outgoing alarms during monitoring of the REAL 0.0
manipulated variable difference
ER_AH_En 1 = Activate alarm (high) for manipulated variable BOOL 1
difference monitoring
ER_AH_Lim Alarm limit (high) for manipulated variable differ‐ REAL 100.0
ence monitoring
ER_AH_MsgEn 1 = Enable messages for alarm (high) for manipu‐ BOOL 1
lated variable difference monitoring
ER_AL_Lim Alarm limit (low) for manipulated variable difference REAL -100.0
monitoring
ER_AL_En 1 = Activate alarm (low) for manipulated variable BOOL 1
difference monitoring
ER_AL_MsgEn 1 = Enable messages for alarm (low) for manipu‐ BOOL 1
lated variable difference monitoring
ER_Hyst Alarm hysteresis for manipulated variable differ‐ REAL 1.0
ence monitoring
EventTsIn For interconnecting data between a technology ANY  
block and the message blocks EventTs,
Event16Ts.
Input parameter EventTsIn is used to intercon‐
nect output parameter EventTsOut of the
EventTs, Event16TS block. When this intercon‐
nection is configured, the messages of the
EventTs, Event16TS block are displayed and
can also be acknowledged on the OS in the mes‐
sage view of the technological block.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1572 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

Parameter Description Type Default


EventTs2In For interconnecting data between a technology ANY
block and the message blocks EventTs,
Event16Ts.
The EventTs2In input parameter serves to inter‐
connect the EventTsOut output parameter of the
EventTs,Event16Ts block. When this intercon‐
nection is configured, the messages of the
EventTs, Event16Ts block are displayed on the
OS in the alarm view of the technology block and
can also be acknowledged there.
ExtMsg1 Binary input for freely selectable message 1 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg2 Binary input for freely selectable message 2 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg3 Binary input for freely selectable message 3 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtMsg4 Binary input for freely selectable message 4 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ExtVa104 Associated value 4 for messages (MsgEvId1) ANY  
ExtVa105 Associated value 5 for messages (MsgEvId1) ANY  
ExtVa106 Associated value 6 for messages (MsgEvId1) ANY  
ExtVa204 Associated value 4 for messages (MsgEvId2) ANY  
ExtVa205 Associated value 5 for messages (MsgEvId2) ANY  
ExtVa206 Associated value 6 for messages (MsgEvId2) ANY  
FaultExt 1 = External fault Error handling (Page 121) STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FbkClose 1 = Valve closed feedback signal STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
FbkClosing 1 = Valve closing feedback signal STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
FbkOpen 1 = Valve open feedback signal STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
FbkOpening 1 = Valve opening feedback signal STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1573
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

Parameter Description Type Default


Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 1551) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
Feature2 I/O for additional functions (Page 1551) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
Gain Position control gain STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 1.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
Intlock 0 = Interlock / Interlock Open is activated. STRUCT -
Once the interlock condition has cleared, the block ● Value:BOOL ● 1
can be operated without reset. ● ST:BYTE ● 16#FF
1 = Interlock / Interlock Open is deactivated.
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information bit)
Intl_En 1 = Parameter Intlock is enabled BOOL 1
IntlCls 0 = Interlock Close is activated. STRUCT -
Once the interlock condition has cleared, the block ● Value:BOOL ● 1
can be operated without reset. ● ST:BYTE ● 16#FF
1 = Interlock Close is deactivated.
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information bit)
IntlClsEn 1 = Parameter IntlCls is enabled BOOL 1
LocalLi 1 = Activate "Local mode" via plant signal STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
LocalOp* 1 = "Local mode" via operator BOOL 0
LocalSetting Properties for Local mode (Page 80) INT 0
Man* Manipulated variable in "manual mode" REAL 0.0
ManModLi* 1 = "Manual mode" via interconnection or SFC STRUCT -
(controlled via ModLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManModOp* 1= "Manual mode" via: OS operator (controlled via BOOL 1
ModLiOp = 0)
ModLiOp Toggle operation between: STRUCT -
0 = Operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
1 = Interconnection or SFC ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MonSafePos 1 = Go to neutral position in the event of monitoring BOOL 1
errors
MotorTime* Motor actuating time [s] REAL 30.0
M_Monitor 1 = Motor feedback monitoring BOOL 1

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1574 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

Parameter Description Type Default


M_MonTiDynami Monitoring time for feedback errors or feedback REAL 3.0
c* start errors after successful operation in [s]
M_MonTiStatic Monitoring time for feedback errors without opera‐ REAL 3.0
* tion in [s]
M_MonTiStop* Monitoring time for feedback stop errors after suc‐ REAL 3.0
cessful operation in [s]
MS_RelOp* 1= Release for maintenance via OS operator BOOL 0
MsgEvId1 Message number (assigned automatically) DWORD 16#00000000
MsgEvId2 Message number (assigned automatically) DWORD 16#00000000
MsgLock 1 = Suppress process messages. STRUCT -
For more on this, refer to the section Suppressing ● Value: BOOL ● 0
messages using the MsgLock parameter ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
(Page 214).
MV Manipulated variable in "automatic mode" STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_Forced Forced manipulated variable that is not limited and STRUCT -
has top priority ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_ForOn 1 = Output forced manipulated variable STRUCT -
MV_Forced unlimited at output MV ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_HiLim Limit (high) for manipulated variable MV REAL 100.0
MV_LoLim Limit (low) for manipulated variable MV REAL 0.0
MV_OpScale OS display range for the manipulated variable MV STRUCT -
● High: REAL ● 100.0
● Low: REAL ● 0.0
MV_Trk Tracking value for manipulated variable MV STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_TrkOn 1 = Tracking of manipulated variable MV STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
NoFbkClose 1 = No feedback present for "valve closed" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
NoFbkOpen 1 = No feedback present for "valve open" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Occupied 1 = Occupied by a batch BOOL 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1575
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

Parameter Description Type Default


OosLi 1 = "Out of service", via interconnection or SFC STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosOp* 1 = "Out of service", via OS operator BOOL 0
OpenAut* 1 = Select Open valve in "Automatic mode" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpenChnST Signal status of the output channel of Open. STRUCT -
It should be connected to an output channel block. ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
OpenForce 1 = Force Open valve STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpenLocal 1 = Select Open valve in "Local mode" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpenMan* 1 = Select Open valve in "Manual mode" BOOL 0
OpSt_In Input parameter for local operator permission, to be DWORD 16#00000000
connected with the Out output parameter of the
upstream block OpStations (Page 423)
OS_Perm I/O for Operator control permissions (Page 265) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● ... ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
OS1Perm I/O for Operator control permissions (Page 265) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● ... ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
Permit 1 = Activation / activation Open is activated STRUCT -
0 = Activation / activation Open is deactivated ● Value:BOOL ● 1
● ST:BYTE ● 16#FF
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information bit)
Perm_En 1 = Parameter Permit is enabled BOOL 1
PermCls 1 = Activation Close is activated STRUCT -
0 = Activation Close is deactivated ● Value:BOOL ● 1
● ST:BYTE ● 16#FF
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information bit)
PermClsEn 1 = Parameter PermCls is enabled BOOL 1
DeadBand Deadband for forming manipulated variable differ‐ REAL 0.1
ence

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1576 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

Parameter Description Type Default


PosDiClose Limit for control valve position "closed" REAL 5.0
PosDiOpen Limit for control valve position "open" REAL 95.0
PosOnAut 1 = Select Activate position control in "Automatic STRUCT -
mode" ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
PosOnMan 1 = Select Activate position control in "Manual BOOL 0
mode"
Protect 0 = Protective interlock / protective interlock Open STRUCT -
is activated. ● Value:BOOL ● 1
Once the interlock condition has cleared, the block ● ST:BYTE ● 16#FF
must be reset.
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
1 = Protective interlock / protective interlock Open
(Bypass information bit)
is deactivated.
Prot_En 1 = Parameter Protect is enabled BOOL 1
ProtCls 0 = Protective interlock Close is activated. STRUCT -
Once the interlock condition has cleared, the block ● Value:BOOL ● 1
must be reset. ● ST:BYTE ● 16#FF
1 = Protective interlock Close is deactivated.
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information bit)
ProtClsEn 1 = Parameter ProtCls is enabled BOOL 1
PulseTime Minimum pulse duration [s] REAL 1.0
PulseWidth* Pulse width of the control signal [s] REAL 3.0
RapidStp* Rapid stop for the motor BOOL 0
0 = Motor On
1 = Motor off
Rbk Position feedback STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RbkHyst Alarm hysteresis for position feedback REAL 1.0
RbkMonitor 1 = Position feedback monitoring BOOL 0
RbkMonTi Monitoring time for the position feedback in [s] REAL 5.0
RbkW_DC* Delay time for incoming warnings [s] REAL 0.0
RbkW_DG* Delay time for outgoing warnings [s] REAL 0.0
RbkWH_En 1 = Enable warning (high) for position feedback BOOL 0
RbkWH_Lim Limit for position feedback of warning (high) REAL 90.0
RbkWH_MsgEn 1 = Enable messages for warning (high) for position BOOL 1
feedback
RbkWL_En 1 = Enable warning (low) for position feedback BOOL 0
RbkWL_Lim Limit for position feedback of warning (low) REAL 10.0
RbkWL_MsgEn 1 = Enable messages for warning (low) for position BOOL 1
feedback

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1577
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

Parameter Description Type Default


RstLi* 1 = Reset via interconnection STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RstOp* 1 = Reset via operator BOOL 0
RunUpCyc Number of cycles in startup; messages are sup‐ INT 3
pressed during these cycles
SafePos Neutral position for valve: INT 2
0 = Closed
1 = Open
2 = stop
SampleTime Sampling time [s] (assigned automatically) REAL 0.1
SelFp1 Call a block saved in this parameter as an Opening ANY -
additional faceplates (Page 217) in the standard
view
SelFp2 Call a block saved in this parameter as an Opening ANY -
additional faceplates (Page 217) in the preview
SimAV* Additional value used with SimOn = 1 REAL 0.0
SimAV_Li Additional analog value used with STRUCT -
SimOnLi.Value = 1 (SimLiOp.Value = 1) ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SimLiOp Activation/deactivation of the simulation by: STRUCT -
0 = Operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
1 = Interconnection or SFC ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SimOn* 1 = Simulation on BOOL 0
SimOnLi 1 = Simulation via interconnection or SFC (control‐ STRUCT -
led via SimLiOp = 1) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SimRbk* Position feedback used with SimOn = 1 REAL 0.0
SimRbkLi Position feedback used with SimOnLi.Value = 1 STRUCT -
(SimLiOp.Value = 1) ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
StopAut* 1 = Stop the motor in "Automatic mode" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
StopForce 1 = Force motor stop STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
StopLocal 1 = Stop the motor in "Local mode" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
StopMan* 1 = Stop the motor in "Manual mode" BOOL 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1578 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

Parameter Description Type Default


TmLag Delay time of the LeadLag filter [s] REAL 0.0
TorqClose 0 = Torque shutdown active when closing STRUCT -
1 = Good state ● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
TorqOpen 0 = Torque shutdown active when opening STRUCT -
1 = Good state ● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
Trip 1 = Motor is in "good" state STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
UA1unit Unit of measure for analog auxiliary value 1 INT 0
UA2unit Unit of measure for analog auxiliary value 2 INT 0
UserAna1 Analog auxiliary value 1 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
UserAna2 Analog auxiliary value 2 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use in PCS 7 OS BYTE 16#00
V_Monitor 1 = Valve feedback monitoring BOOL 1
V_MonTiDynami Valve monitoring time after operation in [s] REAL 30.0
c*
V_MonTiStatic Monitoring time for valve feedback errors without REAL 5.0
* operation in [s]
WarnTiAut* Prewarning of valve movement in "automatic REAL 0.0
mode" in [s]
WarnTiMan* Prewarning of valve movement in "manual mode" REAL 0.0
in [s]

* Values can be written back to these inputs during execution of the block by the block algorithm.

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AutAct 1 = "Automatic mode" enabled STRUCT -
0 = "Manual mode" is enabled ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AutoST 1 = Worst signal status of automatic commands BYTE 16#80
AV_OpScale Limit for scale in AV bar graph of faceplate STRUCT -
● High: REAL ● 100.0
● Low: REAL ● 0.0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1579
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

Parameter Description Type Default


AV_Out Output additional analog value STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
AV_Unit Unit of measure for additional analog value INT 0
CascaCut Cascade connection: STRUCT -
1 = Control chain from master controller to secondary valve ● Value: BOOL ● 0
is interrupted ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Close Control output STRUCT -
1= Close valve ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Closed 1 = Valve is closed STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Closing 1 = Valve is closing STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
CurrMonM Remaining motor monitoring time [s] DINT 0
CurrMonRbk Remaining monitoring time of position feedback [s] DINT 0
CurrMonV Remaining valve monitoring time [s] DINT 0
ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without errors BOOL 0
ER Difference of the manipulated variable and the position feed‐ STRUCT -
back (ER = MV_Out - RbkOut) ● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ER_AH_Act 1 = Alarm limit (high) for manipulated variable difference vio‐ STRUCT -
lated ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ER_AL_Act 1 = Alarm limit (low) for manipulated variable difference vio‐ STRUCT -
lated ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ErrorNum Output of pending error number. For error numbers that can INT -1
be output by this block, see the section VlvPosL error han‐
dling (Page 1566)
FbkCloseOut Valve closed feedback STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FbkClsgOut Valve closing feedback STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
FbkOpenOut Valve open feedback STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1580 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

Parameter Description Type Default


FbkOpngOut Valve opening feedback STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
GrpErr 1 = Group error pending STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
LocalAct 1 = "Local mode" enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
LockAct 1 = Interlock (Intlock, Permit, Protect) or Trip is active STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ManAct 1 = "Manual mode" enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
M_MonDynErr 1 = Feedback error or feedback start error of the motor due STRUCT -
to control change ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
M_MonStaErr 1 = Motor feedback error due to unexpected feedback change STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
M_MonStopErr 1 = Feedback stop error of the motor due to unexpected feed‐ STRUCT -
back change ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MS_Release Release for maintenance: STRUCT -
1 = Enable for OS operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MsgAckn1 Message - acknowledgment status 1 (ACK_STATE output of WORD 16#0000
the first ALARM_8P)
MsgAckn2 Message - acknowledgment status 2 (ACK_STATE output of WORD 16#0000
the first ALARM_8P)
MsgErr1 Message error 1 (ERROR output of the first ALARM_8P) BOOL 0
MsgErr2 Message error 2 (ERROR output of the first ALARM_8P) BOOL 0
MsgStat1 Message status 1 (STATUS output of the first ALARM_8P) WORD 16#0000
MsgStat2 Message status 2 (STATUS output of the first ALARM_8P) WORD 16#0000
MV_HiAct 1 = Limit (high) of manipulated variable violated STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MV_LoAct 1 = Limit (low) of manipulated variable violated STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1581
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

Parameter Description Type Default


MV_Aut Manipulated variable in automatic mode REAL 0.0
MV_Out Manipulated variable STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosAct 1 = Block is "Out of service" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Open Control output: STRUCT -
1 = Open the valve ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Opened 1 = Valve is open STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Opening 1 = Valve is opening STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpSt_Out Value of the input parameter OpSt_In for further intercon‐ DWORD 16#00000000
nection with other blocks. Bit 31 of this parameter is used by
Feature.Bit24
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS1PermOut Display of OS1Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with settings changed by the block algo‐ DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
rithm
OS1PermLog Display of OS1Perm with settings changed by the block algo‐ DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
rithm
PosReached 1 = Control valve has reached specified position STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
P_Close 1 = Pulse signal to close valve STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
P_Open 1 = Pulse signal to open valve STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
P_Rst 1= Pulse output for reset STRUCT -
The parameter persists for one cycle after a reset. ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
P_Stop 0 = Pulse signal for stopping the valve STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1582 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

Parameter Description Type Default


R_StpAct 1 = Rapid stop of the motor is active STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RbkMonDynErr 1 = Position feedback error due to control change STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RbkMonStaErr 1 = Position feedback error due to unexpected feedback STRUCT -
change ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RbkOut Position feedback output STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RbkWH_Act 1 = Warning (high) enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RbkWL_Act 1 = Warning (low) enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RdyToReset 1 = Ready for reset via RstLi input or commands in "local", STRUCT -
"automatic", or "manual mode" ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RdyToStart 1 = Ready to start STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
Status1 Status word 1 (Page 1543) DWORD 16#00000000
Status2 Status word 2 (Page 1543) DWORD 16#00000000
Status3 Status word 3 (Page 1543) DWORD 16#00000000
Status4 Status word 4 (Page 1543) DWORD 16#00000000
Status5 Status word 5 (Page 1543) DWORD 16#00000000
Stop 1 = Motor stopped and valve is in intermediate position STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
SumMsgAct 1 = Active hardware interrupt STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ThreshOff Trip threshold of the three-step element REAL 0.0
ThreshOn Response threshold of the three-step element REAL 0.0
V_MonDynErr 1 = Valve feedback error due to control change STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1583
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

Parameter Description Type Default


V_MonStaErr 1 = Valve feedback error due to unexpected feedback change STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
WarnAct 1 = Prewarning for control valve movement away from active STRUCT -
(WarnTiAut and WarnTiMan parameters) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

See also
VlvPosL messaging (Page 1569)
VlvPosL block diagram (Page 1584)
VlvPosL modes (Page 1548)
Disabling operating points (Page 149)
Signaling limit violation (Page 174)
Error handling (Page 121)

7.14.7 VlvPosL block diagram

Block diagram of VlvPosL


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

See also
VlvPosL I/Os (Page 1571)
VlvPosL messaging (Page 1569)
VlvPosL error handling (Page 1566)
VlvPosL functions (Page 1551)
VlvPosL modes (Page 1548)
Description of VlvPosL (Page 1543)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1584 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

7.14.8 Operator control and monitoring

7.14.8.1 VlvPosL views

Views of the VlvPosL block


The VlvPosL block provides the following views:
● VlvPosL standard view (Page 1586)
● VlvPosL limit view (Page 1591)
● Alarm view (Page 313)
● Trend view (Page 317)
● VlvPosL parameter view (Page 1593)
● VlvPosL preview (Page 1597)
● Memo view (Page 315)
● Batch view (Page 313)
● Block icon for VlvPosL (Page 1602)
You can find general information about the faceplate and block icon in the sections Structure
of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure (Page 239).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1585
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

7.14.8.2 VlvPosL standard view

Standard view of VlvPosL


With Feature2.Bit16 = 0:



















 







With Feature2.Bit16 = 1:

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1586 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner



























(1) Display and switch the operating mode


This area displays the current operating mode of the block. The following operating modes
can be shown here:
● Manual and automatic mode for motors, valves and dosers (Page 76)
● Local mode (Page 80)
● Out of service (Page 72)
For information on switching the mode, see section Switching operating states and operating
modes (Page 268).

(2) Open, close and stop the motor valve


This area displays the default operating state for the motor valve. The following states can be
shown and executed here:
● "Open"
● "Close"
● "Stop"
● "Rapid stop"
Analog positioning mode is terminated if one of these commands is executed. Positioning
mode can be reactivated using the (3) button.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1587
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

For information on switching the mode, see section Switching operating states and operating
modes (Page 268).
If text is configured for these commands, it is displayed as status text and as button labels for
command selection. You can find more information on this in the section Labeling of buttons
and text (Page 218).

(3) Activate positioning at an analog manipulated variable


This area shows you the default operating state for positioning to the analog manipulated
variable. The following states can be shown here:
● "On"
● "Off"
Only the positioning mode is activated here:
● "On"
Positioning mode is terminated when the motor valve is operated using the (2) button.

(4) Reset the block


Click "Reset" in the event of interlocks or errors. You can find more information on this in the
section Resetting the block in case of interlocks or errors (Page 43).

(5) High and low scale range for the manipulated variable
These values provide information on the display range for the bar graph of the manipulated
variable. The scale range is defined in the engineering system.

(6) Display and change the manipulated variable including signal status
This area shows the current manipulated variable with the corresponding signal status.
The manipulated variable can only be changed in manual mode and active position control.
You can find more information about changing the manipulated variable in the section
Changing values (Page 270).

(7) Display for position feedback including signal status


This area shows the current feedback of the manipulated variable with the corresponding signal
status.

(8) Display of the manipulated variable for automatic mode


The display [A] is only visible when the block is not in automatic mode. In Automatic mode, it
is displayed when it needs to be reset or when tracking or forced tracking is enabled.
This display shows the manipulated variable that would apply if you were to switch to automatic
mode or if you were to reset in automatic mode or disable tracking or forced tracking.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1588 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

(9) Bar display for manipulated variable


This area shows the current manipulated variable in the form of a bar graph. The visible area
in the bar graph depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).

(10) Bar display for position feedback


This area shows the current position feedback in the form of a bar graph. The visible area in
the bar graph depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).
The limits for the "open" and "closed" positions are shown with 2 green lines.

(11) Area for operating the interlock functions of the block


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is interconnected.
You can use these buttons to control the interlock functions of the block. You can find more
information on this in the section Interlocking functions (Page 101).
The following is displayed in addition to the buttons:
● Interlock status (see Forming the group status for interlock information (Page 106)), for
example:

● Signal status (see Forming and outputting the signal status for technologic blocks
(Page 110)), for example:

● Bypass information (see Forming the group status for interlock information (Page 106)):

(12) Display for auxiliary values


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is interconnected.
You can use this area to display two auxiliary values that have been configured in the
engineering system. You can find more information on this in the section Displaying auxiliary
values (Page 220).

(13) Jump key to standard view of any faceplate


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is interconnected.
Use this navigation button to jump to the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system (ES). The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the
engineering system (ES).
You can find more information on this in the section Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1589
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

(14) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Maintenance"
You can find more information on this in the section Release for maintenance (Page 65) display
area for block states.

(15) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Simulation"
● "Time delay"
You can find more information on this in the sections Simulating signals (Page 59) and Display
of delay times (Page 267).

(16) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Motor protection"
● "External error"
● "Vibrate enabled"
● "End position error"
● "Control error"
● "Invalid signal"
● "Changeover error"
● "Torque active"
You can find more information on this in the sections Monitoring the feedbacks (Page 98),
Error handling (Page 121) (headings "Invalid input signals" and "Mode switchover error") and
Motor protection function (Page 100).

(17) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Forced open" (OpenForce)
● "Forced closed" (CloseForce)
● "Forced stop" (StopForce)
● "Forced tracking" (MV_ForOn)
● "Tracking" (MV_TrkOn)
● "Request 0/1": A reset to "automatic mode" is expected.
You can find more information on this in the section Forcing operating modes (Page 41).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1590 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

(18) Neutral position of the valve


This representation shows the neutral position for the valve:
● Green: Neutral position is "Open"
● Gray: Neutral position is "Closed"
● Light green: Neutral position is "Stop"

(19) Automatic preview


This display is only visible in "Manual mode", in "Local mode", or with a reset request in
"Automatic mode", when the current output signals are not identical to the control in "Automatic
mode".
The display shows what state the valve would assume if you switched from "Manual" or "Local"
mode to "Automatic mode", or performed a reset to "Automatic mode".

(20) Status display of the motor valve


The current status of the motor valve is graphically displayed here.
You can find more information on this in the section Block icon for VlvPosL (Page 1602).

7.14.8.3 VlvPosL limit view

Limit view of VlvPosL


Several values are set in this view by default:
● Manipulated variable difference limits
● Readback value limits
● Manipulated variable operating range
The toolbar of the faceplate and the block icon indicate when the limits are reached or violated.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1591
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

 

(1) Enabled operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Icons for operation enable:
• Green check mark: The OS operator can control this parameter
• Gray check mark: The OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
• Red cross: The OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)

(2) Limits of the manipulated variable difference


In this area, you can enter the limits for the manipulated variable difference. For more on this,
see section Changing values (Page 270).
You can change the following limits:
● "H alarm": Alarm high
● "Hysteresis"
● "L alarm": Alarm low

(3) Readback value limits (Rbk)


In this area, you can enter the limits for the readback value (position feedback). For more on
this, see section Changing values (Page 270).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1592 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

You can change the following limits:


● "H warning": Warning high
● "Hysteresis"
● "L warning": Warning low

(4) Manipulated variable operating range


In this area, you can enter the limits for the manipulated variable operation range. For more
on this, see section Changing values (Page 270).
You can change the following limits:
● "H range": Range limit high
● "L range": Range limit low

(5) Message suppression / delay


Message suppression indicates whether or not the suppression of the associated message in
the AS block is activated with the xx_MsgEn parameter. The output of messages is not
suppressed when you install the block (all xx_MsgEn parameters are assigned the default
value 1). Messages can only be outputted if limit monitoring of the additional analog value has
been enabled.
Alarm delays are also displayed in this position; for more on this, see section Area of application
of the alarm delays (Page 208).

(6) Suppress messages


You can enable/disable messages by setting the check mark.

7.14.8.4 VlvPosL parameter view

Parameter view of VlvPosL


The parameter has an upper half and a lower half. You can navigate between the two halves
with the arrow keys.
Upper half of the parameter view of VlvPosL with Feature.Bit13 = 0:

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1593
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

Upper half of the parameter view of VlvPosL with Feature.Bit13 = 1:

Lower half of the parameter view of VlvPosL:

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1594 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

(1) Enabled operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Icons for operation enable:
● Green check mark: The OS operator can control this parameter.
● Gray check mark: The OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process.
● Red cross: The OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS
operator permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).

(2) Monitor valve


In this area, you can change parameters and thereby influence the valve. You can find more
information on this in the section Changing values (Page 270).
You can influence the following parameters:
● "Control": Monitoring time while "Opening"/"Closing" the valve (dynamic)
● "End position": Monitoring time for maintaining the valve position (static)

Enable monitoring
You can enable monitoring by selecting the check box (☑).
You can find more information on this in the section Monitoring the feedbacks (Page 98).

(3) Monitor motor


In this area, you change parameters and thereby influence the motor. You can find more
information on this in the section Changing values (Page 270).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1595
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

You can influence the following parameters:


● "Control": Monitoring time during startup and stopping of the motor (dynamic)
Feature.Bit13 = 0
● "Control start": Monitoring time during startup of the motor (dynamic) Feature.Bit13 =
1
● "Control stop": Monitoring time during stopping of the motor (dynamic) Feature.Bit13 =
1
● "Status": Monitoring time during permanent operation of the motor (static)

Enable monitoring
You can enable monitoring by selecting the check box (☑).
You can find more information on this in the section Monitoring the feedbacks (Page 98).

(4) Monitoring the valve position


In this area, you change parameters and thereby influence the valve. You can find more
information on this in the section Changing values (Page 270).
You can influence the following parameter:
● "Position": Monitoring time for the valve

Enable monitoring
You can enable monitoring by selecting the check box (☑).
You can find more information on this in the section Monitoring the feedbacks (Page 98).

(5) "Parameters"
In this area, you change parameters and thereby influence the controller. For more on this,
see section Changing values (Page 270).
You can influence the following parameters:
● "Deadband": Width of deadband
● "Gain": Gain
● "Delay": Delay time in [s]
● "Motor actuating time": Motor actuating time [s]
● "Minimum pulse duration": Minimum pulse duration [s]
● "Minimum break duration": Minimum break duration [s]

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1596 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

(6) Service
You activate the following functions in this area:
● "Simulation"
● "Release for maintenance" (with display for maintenance demanded)
You can find more information on this in the section Switching operating states and operating
modes (Page 268).
You can find information on this area in the sections:
● Simulating signals (Page 59)
● Release for maintenance (Page 65)

7.14.8.5 VlvPosL preview

Preview of VlvPosL
The preview has an upper half and a lower half. You can navigate between the two halves
with the arrow keys.
Upper half of the preview of VlvPosL:

Lower half of the preview of VlvPosL:

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1597
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

(1) Automatic preview


This area shows you the block status after it has switched from the "Manual" mode or "Local"
mode to the "Automatic" mode.
If the block is in "Automatic" mode, the current block state is displayed.
This area also displays the worst signal status of the following automatic commands:
● OpenAut
● CloseAut
● StopAut
● PosOnAut
● MV

(2) Preview area


● "MV Automatic": Display of the current automatic manipulated variable (MV).
● "MV difference": Current manipulated variable difference (ER).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1598 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

● "Open limit": Limit (PosDiOpen) for forming the "Control valve open" signal
(FbkOpenOut). If the position feedback reaches this limit, the control valve is open.
● "Close limit": Limit (PosDiClose) for forming the "Control valve closed" signal
(FbkCloseOut). If the position feedback reaches this limit, the control valve is closed.
● "Manipulated variable tracking": (MV_TrkOn = 1) Manipulated variable is tracked to the
tracking value.
● "Tracking value": Effective manipulated variable for "Track manipulated variable"
● "Monitoring motor": Display of the remaining monitoring time of the motor.
This display is only visible when monitoring is activated.
● "Monitor valve": Display of the remaining monitoring time of the valve.
This display is only visible when monitoring is activated.
● "Monitoring Rbk": Display of the remaining monitoring time for the position feedback.
This display is only visible when monitoring is activated.

(3) Enabled operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Icons for operation enable:
● Green check mark: The OS operator can control this parameter.
● Gray check mark: The OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process.
● Red cross: The OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS
operator permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).
The following enabled operations are shown here:
● "Stop": You can stop the motor of the valve.
If text is configured for this command, it is also displayed in brackets. You can find more
information on this in the section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218).
● "Open": You can open the motor valve.
If text is configured for this command, it is also displayed in brackets. You can find more
information on this in the section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218).
● "Close": You can close the motor valve.
If text is configured for this command, it is also displayed in brackets. You can find more
information on this in the section Labeling of buttons and text (Page 218).
● "Position Control": You can switch on the position control.
● "Reset": You can reset the motor valve if interlocks or errors occur.
● "Automatic": You can switch to "Automatic mode".
● "Manual": You can switch to "Manual mode".
● "Local": You can switch to "Local mode".

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1599
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

● "Out of service": You can switch to "Out of service" operating mode.


● "Local operating permission": Use the ← button to change to the standard view of the
OpStations block. You can find more information on this in the section Operator control
permissions (Page 265).

(4) Display current control signals


This area shows the most important parameters for this block with the current selection:
● "Permission" (Feature2.Bit16 = 0):
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Motor valve activation not enabled on OS
– 1 = Enable for "opening"/"closing" from the neutral position
● "Permission Open" (Feature2.Bit16 = 1):
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Motor valve activation not enabled on OS
– 1 = Enable for "open" from the neutral position
● "Permission Close" (Feature2.Bit16 = 1):
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Motor valve activation not enabled on OS
– 1 = Enable for "close" from the neutral position
● "Protection" (Feature2.Bit16 = 0):
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Protective interlocking is effective; once the interlocking condition has disappeared,
you will have to reset the block
– 1 = "Good" state
● "Protection Open" (Feature2.Bit16 = 1):
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Protective interlocking is effective; once the interlocking condition has disappeared,
you will have to reset the block
– 1 = "Good" state
● "Protection Close" (Feature2.Bit16 = 1):
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Protective interlocking is effective; once the interlocking condition has disappeared,
you will have to reset the block
– 1 = "Good" state
● "Interlock" (Feature2.Bit16 = 0):
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Interlocking without reset is active; you can operate the block without reset once the
interlocking condition has disappeared
– 1 = "Good" state

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1600 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

● "Interlock Open" (Feature2.Bit16 = 1):


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Interlocking without reset is active; you can operate the block without reset once the
interlocking condition has disappeared
– 1 = "Good" state
● "Interlock Close" (Feature2.Bit16 = 1):
This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is connected.
– 0 = Interlocking without reset is active; you can operate the block without reset once the
interlocking condition has disappeared
– 1 = "Good" state
● "Local correct": 1 = Control signal for "Local mode" (LocalLi) is active
● "Motor protection": 1 = Motor is in "good" state
● "Interlock deact.":
– 0 = Bypass disabled
– 1 = Bypass interlock in "Local mode" and in simulation
● "Torque opening": 0 = Torque shutoff when opening
● "Torque closing": 0 = Torque shutoff when closing
● "Local stop": 1 = Stop the motor valve in "Local mode"
● "Local open": 1 = Open the motor valve in "Local mode"
● "Local close": 1 = Close the motor valve in "Local mode"
● "Feedback open": 1 = Motor valve is opened
● "Feedback closed": 1 = Motor valve is closed
● "Open": 1 = Motor valve is opening
● "Close": 1 = Motor valve is closing
● "Channel Open": Signal from the output channel block for "Open"
● "Channel Close": Signal from the output channel block for "Close"

(5) Jump key to standard view of any faceplate


This display is only visible when the corresponding block input is interconnected.
Use this navigation button to jump to the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system. The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the engineering
system (ES).
You can find more information on this in the section Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1601
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

7.14.8.6 Block icon for VlvPosL

Block icons for VlvPosL


A variety of block icons are available with the following functions:
● Process tag type
● Limits (high/low)
● Violation of alarm, warning, and tolerance limits as well as control system faults
● Operating modes
● Signal status, release for maintenance
● Forcing states
● Operating the manipulated variable in manual mode
● Display of active position control
● Display of the position feedback (white, with decimal places)
● Display for bypassing interlocks
● Interlocks
● Memo display
● Valve status display
The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV8.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in CFC Special features


1  

2  

3 Non-rotating block icon

4 Non-rotating block icon

Additional information on the block icon and the control options in the block icon is available
in the following sections:
● Configuring the block icons (Page 246)
● Block icon structure (Page 239)
● Operation via the block icon (Page 248)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1602 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

Valve status display


The following valve states are shown here:

Icon Meaning
Valve open

Valve closed

Error at valve

Valve is opening

Valve is closing

Valve is stopping

Valve closed

Valve is closing

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1603
Motor and valve blocks
7.14 VlvPosL - Valve positioner

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1604 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Interlock blocks 8
8.1 Intlk02 - Interlock display with 2 input signals

8.1.1 Description of Intlk02

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1824
Family: Interlck

Area of application for Intlk02


The block is used for the following applications:
● Standardized interlock with display

How it works
The block is used to calculate a standardized interlock that can be displayed on the OS. A
maximum of 2 input signals can be supplied to the block. They are linked using selectable
binary logic. The signal status of the output signal is also determined. You can assign an analog
value with the signal status and unit to each input value for display in the faceplate.
The current state is displayed at the Out output parameter:
● Out = 0: Interlock
● Out = 1: "Good" state

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38).
For the Intlk02 block, the Advanced Process Library contains templates for process tag types
as examples with various application scenarios for this block.
Examples of process tag types:
● Dosing (Dose_Lean) (Page 2422)
● Dosing with PA/FF devices (Dose_Lean_Fb) (Page 2423)
● Two-speed motor (Motor2Speed) (Page 2426)
● Reversing motor (MotorReversible) (Page 2427)
● Reversible motor with controllable speed (MotorSpeedControlled) (Page 2428)
● Two-way valve (Valve2Way) (Page 2432)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1605
Interlock blocks
8.1 Intlk02 - Interlock display with 2 input signals

● Motor valve (ValveMotor) (Page 2433)


● Control valve (VlvAnL) (Page 2434)
● Control valve for PA/FF devices (ValveAnalog_Fb) (Page 2435)

Startup characteristics
The block does not have any startup characteristics.

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


You can find a description for each parameter in section Intlk02 I/Os (Page 1612).

Status bit Parameter


0 1 = Logic = OR
1 1 = Logic = AND
2 Not used
3 Result of logic operation Out.Value
4 1 = At least one input value is excluded. See the section Excluding input values in
Intlk02 functions (Page 1608).
5 1 = All input values are excluded
6 1 = No input value is interconnected or NotUsed.Value
7 Status display for simulation
8 Status display for not interlocked
9 Status display for interlocked
10 Activate OS_Perm bits
11 Feature.Bit2: Separate evaluation for excluded and simulated interlock signals.
12 - 29 Not used
30 Occupied
31 BatchEn

Status word allocation for Status2 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 In01.Value
1 In02.Value
2 - 31 Not used

Status word allocation for Status3 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 InvIn01
1 InvIn02
2 - 31 Not used

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1606 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Interlock blocks
8.1 Intlk02 - Interlock display with 2 input signals

Status word allocation for Status4 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 In01 with inversion
1 In02 with inversion
2 - 15 Not used
16 Bypass In01 (via interconnection)
17 Bypass In02 (via interconnection)
18 - 31 Not used

Status word allocation for Status5 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 BypIn01
1 BypIn02
2 - 15 Not used
16 In01 hidden bypass information
17 In02 hidden bypass information
18 - 31 Not used

Status word allocation for Status6 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 In01 not connected
1 In02 not connected
2 - 31 Not used

Status word allocation for Status7 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 AV01 not connected
1 AV02 not connected
2 - 31 Not used

Status word allocation for Status8 parameter


Identical to FirstIn.

See also
Intlk02 messaging (Page 1612)
Intlk02 block diagram (Page 1616)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1607
Interlock blocks
8.1 Intlk02 - Interlock display with 2 input signals

Intlk02 error handling (Page 1611)


Intlk02 modes (Page 1608)

8.1.2 Intlk02 modes

Intlk02 modes
This block does not have any modes.

See also
Intlk02 block diagram (Page 1616)
Intlk02 I/Os (Page 1612)
Intlk02 messaging (Page 1612)
Intlk02 error handling (Page 1611)
Intlk02 functions (Page 1608)
Description of Intlk02 (Page 1605)

8.1.3 Intlk02 functions

Functions of Intlk02
The functions for this block are listed below.

Handling non-connected inputs


Inputs which are not interconnected are not evaluated. They are not displayed in the faceplate
either.
Special situation: If no inputs are connected, the output value is defined using the
DefaultOut parameter. The signal status is set to 16#FF.

Opening additional faceplates


This block provides the standard function Opening additional faceplates (Page 217). However,
only one additional faceplate can be called up using SelFp1 = 1.

First-in detection for interlock blocks


This block provides the standard function Recording the first signal for interlock blocks
(Page 53). Note that a signal status change only has an effect on the first-in detection when
the Feature bit Evaluation of signal status (Page 145) and the input FirstInEn is set.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1608 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Interlock blocks
8.1 Intlk02 - Interlock display with 2 input signals

The response to deactivation via the FirstInEn input can be influenced by Feature bit First-
in detection response to deactivation (Page 180).

Note
This function can only be executed in the faceplate with "process control" operating permission.

Forming the signal status for blocks


This block provides the standard function Forming and outputting the signal status for interlock
blocks (Page 117).
The worst signal status ST_Worst for the block is formed from the following parameters:
● Out.ST

Bypass

Note
Bypassing the interlock means that the interlock signal (input signal) is excluded from the logic
of the interlock block, in other words, this signal is ignored in the logic operation.
This function can only be executed in the faceplate with "high-level operating permission".

You can bypass interlock signals as follows:


● From operator over faceplate (BypInx = 1):
Independent BypLix is connected or not, the operator can bypass the input signal.
● By connecting BypLix in CFC (BypLix.Value = 1, BypLix.ST <> 16#FF)
Follow this if interlock signals are connected to parameters, which has no bypass
information bit for bypass. Refer to section Bypassing signals (Page 109).
● By connected interlock signal Inx. For this the corresponding enable bit (BypEn.Inx = 1)
and Feature.Bit2 Separate evaluation for excluded and simulated interlock signals
(Page 155) have to be set. Follow this if the interlock signals are all connected to parameters
which has the bypass information. Refer to section Bypassing signals (Page 109).
The bypassed interlock signal is shown in the faceplate as the symbol below:

You can reset all the bypass of interlock signals as follows:


● From operator over faceplate (RstBypOp = 0 -> 1)
● Over CFC linkable parameter (RstBypLi = 0 -> 1)
Special situation: If all input parameters are bypassed, the output value is defined using the
DefaultOut parameter.
Depending on the configuration of the Feature.Bit2 Separate evaluation for excluded and
simulated interlock signals (Page 155), the output BypAct is formed and the bypass signal/
information is set at the output Out.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1609
Interlock blocks
8.1 Intlk02 - Interlock display with 2 input signals

Feature.Bit2 = 0:
If one of the interlock inputs is bypassed by the operator or by connected BypLix, then the
output BypAct is set. The bypass signal/information at the output Out is always reset.
● BypAct.Value =
BypIn01 OR BypLi01
OR BypInx OR BypLix
The calculation is simplified and described.
● Out.Bit1 = 0
A bypassed interlock signal, that is switch-relevant, sets the status of Out to Simulation.

Feature.Bit2 = 1:
If one of the interlock inputs is bypassed or the block which is connected to interlock signal is
in bypass (signal is set at an interlock input In01...Inx), the output BypAct is set. The bypass
informataion in the signal at the input In01...Inx can be read from the upstream interlock
block at the output BypAct or from the upstream technical block with bypass functionallity
(MonDiL, MonAnL, TotalL, PIDConL, PIDConR, PIDStepL) at the output BypassAct.
The bypass signal information at the output Out is set to the value of BypAct.
● BypAct.Value =
BypIn01 OR BypLi01 OR In01.Bit1
OR BypInx OR BypLix OR In01.Bitx
OR In01.Bit1 OR Inx.Bit1
The calculation is simplified and described.
● Out.Bit1 = BypAct.Value
An bypassed interlock input has no influence on the status of Out.

Note
Do not connect the input BypLix with the output BypAct from an interlock block because
BypAct is calculated from the bypass signal information.

Operating permissions
This block provides the standard function Operator control permissions (Page 265).
The block has the following permissions for the OS_Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 1 = Operator can exclude values
1 1 = Operator can reset the exclusion of input values
2 1 = Operator can reset the recording of the first signal
3 - 15 Not used
16 1 = Operator can set or reset the exclusion of input value In01
17 1 = Operator can set or reset the exclusion of input value In02
18 – 31 Not used

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1610 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Interlock blocks
8.1 Intlk02 - Interlock display with 2 input signals

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the chapter
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133). The following functionality is available
for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
2 Separate evaluation for excluded and simulated interlock signals (Page 155)
5 Activate OS_Perm bits (Page 161)
0 = OS_Perm bits 16...17 inactive (evaluation only in faceplate)
1 = OS_Perm bits 16...17 active (evaluation only in faceplate)
21 First-in detection response to deactivation (Page 180)
23 Evaluation of signal status (Page 145)
24 Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162)
31 Activating recording of the first signal (Page 154)

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


This block provides the standard function SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

See also
Description of Intlk02 (Page 1605)
Intlk02 messaging (Page 1612)
Intlk02 I/Os (Page 1612)
Intlk02 block diagram (Page 1616)
Intlk02 error handling (Page 1611)
Intlk02 modes (Page 1608)

8.1.4 Intlk02 error handling

Error handling of Intlk02


Refer to the section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions for the error handling
of all blocks.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1611
Interlock blocks
8.1 Intlk02 - Interlock display with 2 input signals

The following errors can be displayed for this block:


● Error numbers

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum I/O can be used to output the following error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; the block is not processed.
0 There is no error.
13 The parameter Logic has not been set to 0 or 1.

See also
Intlk02 block diagram (Page 1616)
Intlk02 I/Os (Page 1612)
Intlk02 messaging (Page 1612)
Intlk02 functions (Page 1608)
Intlk02 modes (Page 1608)
Description of Intlk02 (Page 1605)

8.1.5 Intlk02 messaging

Messaging
This block does not offer messaging.

See also
Description of Intlk02 (Page 1605)
Intlk02 functions (Page 1608)
Intlk02 I/Os (Page 1612)
Intlk02 block diagram (Page 1616)
Intlk02 error handling (Page 1611)
Intlk02 modes (Page 1608)

8.1.6 Intlk02 I/Os


I/Os of Intlk02

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1612 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Interlock blocks
8.1 Intlk02 - Interlock display with 2 input signals

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AV01 Analog value of In01 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV02 Analog value of In02 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV01_Unit Unit of measure for AV01 INT 0
AV02_Unit Unit of measure for AV02 INT 0
BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation BOOL 0
BatchID Batch ID DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name S7-String
BypIn01* 1 = Input In01 is not used BOOL 0
BypIn02* 1 = Input In02 is not used BOOL 0
BypLi01 Bypass In01 (via interconnection) STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
BypLi02 Bypass In02 (via interconnection) STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
DefaultOut Output value for cases where all inputs BOOL 1
are excluded or not interconnected. Re‐
fer to the section Intlk02 functions
(Page 1608) of the block.
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1
Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 1608) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
FirstInEn First-in detection STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
In01 Input In01 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1613
Interlock blocks
8.1 Intlk02 - Interlock display with 2 input signals

Parameter Description Type Default


In02 Input In02 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
InvIn01 Invert input In01 BOOL 0
InvIn02 Invert input In02 BOOL 0
Logic Logical operation: INT 0
0 = Logical OR
1 = Logical AND
NotUsed 1 = Block is not used (only for display in STRUCT -
the faceplate). You can find additional ● Value: BOOL ● 0
information on this in the section Inter‐
lock blocks standard view (Page 287) / ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Color of the field.
Occupied 1 = Occupied by batch control BOOL 0
OS_Perm I/O for operating permissions STRUCT -
(Page 1608) ● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● ... ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
OpSt_In Input parameter for local operator au‐ DWORD 16#00000000
thorization, connected with the Out out‐
put parameter of the upstream block,
OpStations (Page 423)
RstBypOp* 1 = Reset via BypIn01and BypIn02 BOOL 0
RstLi 1 = Reset via interconnection STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RstOp* 1 = Reset via operator BOOL 0
SelFp1 Call a block saved in this parameter as ANY
an additional faceplate (Page 217) in the
standard view
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use in PCS 7 BYTE 16#00
OS

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1614 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Interlock blocks
8.1 Intlk02 - Interlock display with 2 input signals

Output parameters

Parameter Description Data type Default


BypAct 1 = Bypass active STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without BOOL 0
errors
ErrorNum Output of pending error number. For er‐ INT -1
ror numbers that can be output by this
block, see Intlk02 error handling
(Page 1611).
FirstIn Bit-coded number of the first signal that DWORD 16#00000000
has resulted in a change at the output
OpSt_Out Value of the OpSt_In input parameter DWORD 16#00000000
for feedforwarding to other blocks. Bit 31
of this parameter is used by
Feature.Bit24
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with settings DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
changed by the block algorithm
Out Output STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
Status1 Status word 1 (Page 1605) DWORD 16#00000000
Status2 Status word 2 (Page 1605) DWORD 16#00000000
Status3 Status word 3 (Page 1605) DWORD 16#00000000
Status4 Status word 4 (Page 1605) DWORD 16#00000000
Status5 Status word 5 (Page 1605) DWORD 16#00000000
Status6 Status word 6 (Page 1605) DWORD 16#00000000
Status7 Status word 7 (Page 1605) DWORD 16#00000000
Status8 Status word 8 (Page 1605) DWORD 16#00000000

See also
Intlk02 messaging (Page 1612)
Intlk02 block diagram (Page 1616)
Intlk02 modes (Page 1608)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1615
Interlock blocks
8.1 Intlk02 - Interlock display with 2 input signals

8.1.7 Intlk02 block diagram

Intlk02 block diagram


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

See also
Intlk02 I/Os (Page 1612)
Intlk02 messaging (Page 1612)
Intlk02 error handling (Page 1611)
Intlk02 functions (Page 1608)
Intlk02 modes (Page 1608)
Description of Intlk02 (Page 1605)

8.1.8 Operator control and monitoring

8.1.8.1 Interlock block views

Views of the blocks Intlk02, Intlk04, Intlk08, Intlk16


The blocks provide the following views:
● Interlock blocks standard view (Page 287)
● Preview of interlock blocks (Page 310)
● Batch view (Page 313)
● Block icon for interlock blocks (Page 251)
Refer to the sections Structure of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure
(Page 239) for general information on the faceplate and block icon.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1616 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Interlock blocks
8.2 Intlk04 - Interlock display with 4 input signals

8.2 Intlk04 - Interlock display with 4 input signals

8.2.1 Description of Intlk04

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1825
Family: Interlck

Area of application for Intlk04


The block is used for the following applications:
● Standardized interlock with display

How it works
The block is used to calculate a standardized interlock that can be displayed on the OS. A
maximum of 4 input signals can be supplied to the block. They are linked using selectable
binary logic. The signal status of the output signal is also determined. You can assign an analog
value with the signal status and unit to each input value for display in the faceplate.
The current state is displayed at the Out output parameter:
● Out = 0: Interlock
● Out = 1: "Good" state

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38).
For the Intlk02 (Intlk04) block, the Advanced Process Library contains templates for process
tag types as examples with various application scenarios for this block.
Refer to Description of Intlk02 (Page 1605) for more information.

Startup characteristics
The block does not have any startup characteristics.

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


You can find a description for each parameter in section Intlk04 I/Os (Page 1625).

Status bit Parameter


0 1= Logic = OR
1 1 = Logic = AND
2 Not used

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1617
Interlock blocks
8.2 Intlk04 - Interlock display with 4 input signals

Status bit Parameter


3 Result of logic operation Out.Value
4 1 = At least one input value is excluded. See the section Excluding input values in
Intlk04 functions (Page 1620).
5 1 = All input values are excluded
6 1 = No input value is interconnected or NotUsed.Value
7 Status display for simulation
8 Status display for not interlocked
9 Status display for interlocked
10 Not used
11 Feature bit 2: Separate evaluation for excluded and simulated interlock signals
12 - 29 Not used
30 Occupied
31 BatchEn

Status word allocation for Status2 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 In01.Value
1 In02.Value
2 In03.Value
3 In04.Value
4 - 31 Not used

Status word allocation for Status3 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 InvIn01
1 InvIn02
2 InvIn03
3 InvIn04
4 - 31 Not used

Status word allocation for Status4 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 In01 with inversion
1 In02 with inversion
2 In03 with inversion
3 In04 with inversion
4 - 15 Not used
16 Bypass In01 (via interconnection)
17 Bypass In02 (via interconnection)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1618 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Interlock blocks
8.2 Intlk04 - Interlock display with 4 input signals

Status bit Parameter


18 Bypass In03 (via interconnection)
19 Bypass In04 (via interconnection)
20 - 31 Not used

Status word allocation for Status5 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 BypIn01
1 BypIn02
2 BypIn03
3 BypIn04
4 - 15 Not used
16 In01hidden bypass information
17 In02hidden bypass information
18 In03hidden bypass information
19 In04hidden bypass information
20-31 Not used

Status word allocation for Status6 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 In01 not connected
1 In02 not connected
2 In03 not connected
3 In04 not connected
4 - 31 Not used

Status word allocation for Status7 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 AV01 not connected
1 AV02 not connected
2 AV03 not connected
3 AV04 not connected
4 - 31 Not used

Status word allocation for Status8 parameter


Identical to FirstIn.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1619
Interlock blocks
8.2 Intlk04 - Interlock display with 4 input signals

See also
Intlk04 messaging (Page 1625)
Intlk04 block diagram (Page 1629)
Intlk04 error handling (Page 1624)
Intlk04 modes (Page 1620)

8.2.2 Intlk04 modes

Intlk04 modes
This block does not have any modes.

See also
Intlk04 block diagram (Page 1629)
Intlk04 I/Os (Page 1625)
Intlk04 messaging (Page 1625)
Intlk04 error handling (Page 1624)
Intlk04 functions (Page 1620)
Description of Intlk04 (Page 1617)

8.2.3 Intlk04 functions

Functions of Intlk04
The functions for this block are listed below.

Inversion of logic signals


You can invert the input signals by setting the input parameter InvInx for the input concerned
to Inx = 1, e.g. for input In01 set the I/O InvIn01.
The inversion is displayed in the faceplate. If you invert signals using any other method this is
not shown in the faceplate.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1620 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Interlock blocks
8.2 Intlk04 - Interlock display with 4 input signals

Bypass

Note
Bypassing the interlock means that the interlock signal (input signal) is excluded from the logic
of the interlock block, in other words, this signal is ignored in the logic operation.
This function can only be executed in the faceplate with "high-level operating permission".

You can bypass interlock signals as follows:


● From operator over faceplate (BypInx = 1):
Independent BypLix is connected or not, the operator can bypass the input signal.
● By connecting BypLix in CFC (BypLix.Value = 1, BypLix.ST <> 16#FF)
Follow this if interlock signals are connected to parameters, which has no bypass
information bit for bypass. Refer to sectionBypassing signals (Page 109).
● By connected interlock signal Inx. For this the corresponding enable bit (BypEn.Inx = 1)
and Feature.Bit2 Separate evaluation for excluded and simulated interlock signals
(Page 155) have to be set. Follow this if the interlock signals are all connected to parameters
which has the bypass information. Refer to sectionBypassing signals (Page 109).
The bypassed interlock signal is shown in the faceplate as the symbol below:

You can reset all the bypass of interlock signals as follows:


● From operator over faceplate (RstBypOp = 0 -> 1)
● Over CFC linkable parameter (RstBypLi = 0 -> 1)
Special situation: If all input parameters are bypassed, the output value is defined using the
DefaultOut parameter.
Depending on the configuration of the Feature.Bit2 Separate evaluation for excluded and
simulated interlock signals (Page 155), the output BypAct is formed and the bypass signal/
information is set at the output Out.

Feature.Bit2 = 0:
If one of the interlock inputs is bypassed by the operator or by connected BypLix, then the
output BypAct is set. The bypass signal/information at the output Out is always reset.
● BypAct.Value =
BypIn01 OR BypLi01
OR BypInx OR BypLix
The calculation is simplified and described.
● Out.Bit1 = 0
A bypassed interlock signal, that is switch-relevant, sets the status of Out to Simulation.

Feature.Bit2 = 1:
If one of the interlock inputs is bypassed or the block which is connected to interlock signal is
in bypass (signal is set at an interlock input In01...Inx), the output BypAct is set. The bypass
informataion in the signal at the input In01...Inx can be read from the upstream interlock

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1621
Interlock blocks
8.2 Intlk04 - Interlock display with 4 input signals

block at the output BypAct or from the upstream technical block with bypass functionallity
(MonDiL, MonAnL, TotalL, PIDConL, PIDConR, PIDStepL) at the output BypassAct.
The bypass signal information at the output Out is set to the value of BypAct.
● BypAct.Value =
BypIn01 OR BypLi01 OR In01.Bit1
OR BypInx OR BypLix OR In01.Bitx
OR In01.Bit1 OR Inx.Bit1
The calculation and described.
● Out.Bit1 = BypAct.Value
A bypassed interlock input has no influence on the status of Out.

Note
Do not connect the input BypLix with the output BypAct from an interlock block because
BypAct is calculated from the bypass signal information.

Handling non-connected inputs


Inputs which are not interconnected are not evaluated. They are not displayed in the faceplate
either.
Special situation: If no inputs are connected, the output value is defined using the
DefaultOut parameter. The signal status is set to 16#FF.

Opening additional faceplates


This block provides the standard function Opening additional faceplates (Page 217). However,
only one additional faceplate can be called up using SelFp1 = 1.

First-in detection for interlock blocks


This block provides the standard function Recording the first signal for interlock blocks
(Page 53). Note that a signal status change only has an effect on the first-in detection when
the Feature bit Evaluation of signal status (Page 145) and the input FirstInEn is set.
The response to deactivation via the FirstInEn input can be influenced by Feature bit First-
in detection response to deactivation (Page 180).

Note
This function can only be executed in the faceplate with "process control" operating permission.

Forming the signal status for blocks


This block provides the standard function Forming and outputting the signal status for interlock
blocks (Page 117).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1622 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Interlock blocks
8.2 Intlk04 - Interlock display with 4 input signals

The worst signal status ST_Worst for the block is formed from the following parameters:
● Out.ST

Operating permissions
This block provides the standard function Operator control permissions (Page 265).
The block has the following permissions for the OS_Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 1 = Operator can exclude values
1 1 = Operator can reset the exclusion of input values
2 1 = Operator can reset the recording of the first signal
3 - 15 Not used
16 1 = Operator can set or reset the exclusion of input value In01
17 1 = Operator can set or reset the exclusion of input value In02
18 1 = Operator can set or reset the exclusion of input value In03
19 1 = Operator can set or reset the exclusion of input value In04
20 - 31 Not used

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Configurable reactions using the Feature I/O


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the chapter
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133). The following functionality is available
for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
2 Separate evaluation for excluded and simulated interlock signals (Page 155)
5 Activate OS_Perm bits (Page 161)
0 = OS_Perm bits 16...17 inactive (evaluation only in faceplate)
1 = OS_Perm bits 16...17 active (evaluation only in faceplate)
21 First-in detection response to deactivation (Page 180)
23 Evaluation of signal status (Page 145)
24 Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162)
31 Activating recording of the first signal (Page 154)

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


This block provides the standard function SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1623
Interlock blocks
8.2 Intlk04 - Interlock display with 4 input signals

See also
Description of Intlk04 (Page 1617)
Intlk04 messaging (Page 1625)
Intlk04 I/Os (Page 1625)
Intlk04 block diagram (Page 1629)
Intlk04 error handling (Page 1624)
Intlk04 modes (Page 1620)

8.2.4 Intlk04 error handling

Error handling of Intlk04


Refer to the section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions for the error handling
of all blocks.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum I/O can be used to output the following error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; the block is not processed.
0 There is no error.
13 The parameter Logic has not been set to 0 or 1.

See also
Intlk04 block diagram (Page 1629)
Intlk04 I/Os (Page 1625)
Intlk04 messaging (Page 1625)
Description of Intlk04 (Page 1617)
Intlk04 modes (Page 1620)
Intlk04 functions (Page 1620)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1624 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Interlock blocks
8.2 Intlk04 - Interlock display with 4 input signals

8.2.5 Intlk04 messaging

Messaging
This block does not offer messaging.

See also
Description of Intlk04 (Page 1617)
Intlk04 functions (Page 1620)
Intlk04 I/Os (Page 1625)
Intlk04 block diagram (Page 1629)
Intlk04 error handling (Page 1624)
Intlk04 modes (Page 1620)

8.2.6 Intlk04 I/Os


I/Os of Intlk04

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AV01 Analog value of In01 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV02 Analog value of In02 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV03 Analog value of In03 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV04 Analog value of In04 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV01_Unit Unit of measure for AV01 INT 0
AV02_Unit Unit of measure for AV02 INT 0
AV03_Unit Unit of measure for AV03 INT 0
AV04_Unit Unit of measure for AV04 INT 0
BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation BOOL 0
BatchID Batch ID DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name S7-String

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1625
Interlock blocks
8.2 Intlk04 - Interlock display with 4 input signals

Parameter Description Type Default


BypIn01* 1 = Input In01 is not used BOOL 0
BypIn02* 1 = Input In02 is not used BOOL 0
BypIn03* 1 = Input In03 is not used BOOL 0
BypIn04* 1 = Input In04 is not used BOOL 0
BypLi01...BypLi04 Bypass In01...In04 (via interconnec‐ STRUCT -
tion) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
DefaultOut Output value for the case that all inputs BOOL 1
are excluded or not connected. Refer to
section Intlk04 functions (Page 1620) of
the block.
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1
Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 1620) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
FirstInEn First-in detection STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
In01 Input In01 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
In02 Input In02 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
In03 Input In03 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
In04 Input In04 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1626 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Interlock blocks
8.2 Intlk04 - Interlock display with 4 input signals

Parameter Description Type Default


InvIn01 Invert input In01 BOOL 0
InvIn02 Invert input In02 BOOL 0
InvIn03 Invert input In03 BOOL 0
InvIn04 Invert input In04 BOOL 0
Logic Logical operation: INT 0
0 = Logical OR
1 = Logical AND
NotUsed 1 = Block is not used (only for display in STRUCT -
the faceplate). You can find additional ● Value: BOOL ● 0
information on this in the section Inter‐
lock blocks standard view (Page 287) / ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Color of the field.
Occupied 1 = Occupied by batch control BOOL 0
OpSt_In Input parameter for local operator au‐ DWORD 16#00000000
thorization, connected with the Out out‐
put parameter of the upstream block,
OpStations (Page 423)
OS_Perm I/O for operating permissions STRUCT -
(Page 1620) ● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● .... ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
RstBypOp* 1 = Reset inputs BypIn01 to BypIn04 BOOL 0
RstLi 1 = Reset via interconnection STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RstOp* 1 = Reset via operator BOOL 0
SelFp1 Call a block saved in this parameter as ANY
an additional faceplate (Page 217) in the
standard view
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use in PCS 7 BYTE 16#00
OS

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1627
Interlock blocks
8.2 Intlk04 - Interlock display with 4 input signals

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


BypAct 1 = Bypass active STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without BOOL 0
errors
ErrorNum Output of pending error number. For er‐ INT -1
ror numbers that can be output by this
block, see Intlk04 error handling
(Page 1624)
FirstIn Bit-coded number of the first signal that DWORD 16#00000000
has resulted in a change at the output
OpSt_Out Value of the OpSt_In input parameter, DWORD 16#00000000
for feedforwarding to other blocks. Bit 31
of this parameter is used by
Feature.Bit24
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with settings DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
changed by the block algorithm
Out Output STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
Status1 Status word 1 (Page 1617) DWORD 16#00000000
Status2 Status word 2 (Page 1617) DWORD 16#00000000
Status3 Status word 3 (Page 1617) DWORD 16#00000000
Status4 Status word 4 (Page 1617) DWORD 16#00000000
Status5 Status word 5 (Page 1617) DWORD 16#00000000
Status6 Status word 6 (Page 1617) DWORD 16#00000000
Status7 Status word 7 (Page 1617) DWORD 16#00000000
Status8 Status word 8 (Page 1617) DWORD 16#00000000

See also
Intlk04 messaging (Page 1625)
Intlk04 block diagram (Page 1629)
Intlk04 modes (Page 1620)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1628 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Interlock blocks
8.2 Intlk04 - Interlock display with 4 input signals

8.2.7 Intlk04 block diagram

Intlk04 block diagram


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

See also
Intlk04 I/Os (Page 1625)
Intlk04 messaging (Page 1625)
Intlk04 error handling (Page 1624)
Intlk04 functions (Page 1620)
Intlk04 modes (Page 1620)
Description of Intlk04 (Page 1617)

8.2.8 Operator control and monitoring

8.2.8.1 Interlock block views

Views of the blocks Intlk02, Intlk04, Intlk08, Intlk16


The blocks provide the following views:
● Interlock blocks standard view (Page 287)
● Preview of interlock blocks (Page 310)
● Batch view (Page 313)
● Block icon for interlock blocks (Page 251)
Refer to the sections Structure of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure
(Page 239) for general information on the faceplate and block icon.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1629
Interlock blocks
8.3 Intlk08 - Interlock display with 8 input signals

8.3 Intlk08 - Interlock display with 8 input signals

8.3.1 Description of Intlk08

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1826
Family: Interlck

Area of application of Intlk08


The block is used for the following applications:
● Standardized interlock with display

How it works
The block is used to calculate a standardized interlock that can be displayed on the OS. A
maximum of 8 input signals can be supplied to the block. They are linked using selectable
binary logic. The signal status of the output signal is also determined. You can assign an analog
value with the signal status and unit to each input value for display in the faceplate.
The current state is displayed at the Out output parameter:
● Out = 0: Interlock
● Out = 1: "Good" state

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38).
For the Intlk02 (Intlk08) block, the Advanced Process Library contains process tag type
templates; these serve as examples by providing various application scenarios for this block.
Refer to Description of Intlk02 (Page 1605) for more information.

Startup characteristics
The block does not have any startup characteristics.

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


You can find a description for each parameter in section Intlk08 I/Os (Page 1639).

Status bit Parameter


0 1 = Logic = OR
1 1 = Logic = AND
2 Not used

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1630 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Interlock blocks
8.3 Intlk08 - Interlock display with 8 input signals

Status bit Parameter


3 Result of logic operation Out.Value
4 1 = At least one input value is excluded. See the section Excluding input values in
Intlk08 functions (Page 1634)
5 1 = All input values are excluded
6 1 = No input value is interconnected or NotUsed.Value
7 Status display for simulation
8 Status display for not interlocked
9 Status display for interlocked
10 Not used
11 Feature.Bit2: Separate evaluation for excluded and simulated interlock signals
12 - 29 Not used
30 Occupied
31 BatchEn

Status word allocation for Status2 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 In01.Value
1 In02.Value
2 In03.Value
3 In04.Value
4 In05.Value
5 In06.Value
6 In07.Value
7 In08.Value
8 - 31 Not used

Status word allocation for Status3 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 InvIn01
1 InvIn02
2 InvIn03
3 InvIn04
4 InvIn05
5 InvIn06
6 InvIn07
7 InvIn08
8 - 31 Not used

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1631
Interlock blocks
8.3 Intlk08 - Interlock display with 8 input signals

Status word allocation for Status4 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 In01 with inversion
1 In02 with inversion
2 In03 with inversion
3 In04 with inversion
4 In05 with inversion
5 In06 with inversion
6 In07 with inversion
7 In08 with inversion
8 - 15 Not used
16 Bypass In01 (via interconnection)
17 Bypass In02 (via interconnection)
18 Bypass In03 (via interconnection)
19 Bypass In04 (via interconnection)
20 Bypass In05 (via interconnection)
21 Bypass In06 (via interconnection)
22 Bypass In07 (via interconnection)
23 Bypass In08 (via interconnection)
24 - 31 Not used

Status word allocation for Status5 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 BypIn01
1 BypIn02
2 BypIn03
3 BypIn04
4 BypIn05
5 BypIn06
6 BypIn07
7 BypIn08
8 - 15 Not used
16 - 23 In01..IN08 hidden bypass information
24 - 31 Not used

Status word allocation for Status6 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 In01 not connected
1 In02 not connected
2 In03 not connected

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1632 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Interlock blocks
8.3 Intlk08 - Interlock display with 8 input signals

Status bit Parameter


3 In04 not connected
4 In05 not connected
5 In06 not connected
6 In07 not connected
7 In08 not connected
8 - 31 Not used

Status word allocation for Status7 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 AV01 not connected
1 AV02 not connected
2 AV03 not connected
3 AV04 not connected
4 AV05 not connected
5 AV06 not connected
6 AV07 not connected
7 AV08 not connected
8 - 31 Not used

Status word allocation for Status8 parameter


Identical to FirstIn.

See also
Intlk08 messaging (Page 1639)
Intlk08 block diagram (Page 1644)
Intlk08 error handling (Page 1638)
Intlk08 modes (Page 1633)

8.3.2 Intlk08 modes

Intlk08 modes
This block does not have any modes.

See also
Intlk08 block diagram (Page 1644)
Intlk08 I/Os (Page 1639)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1633
Interlock blocks
8.3 Intlk08 - Interlock display with 8 input signals

Intlk08 messaging (Page 1639)


Intlk08 error handling (Page 1638)
Intlk08 functions (Page 1634)
Description of Intlk08 (Page 1630)

8.3.3 Intlk08 functions

Functions of Intlk08
The functions for this block are listed below.

Logic operators
Use the Logic input to specify the logic operator that the block should employ when
determining the interlock state. Make the following settings:
● Logic = 0: OR
● Logic = 1: AND

Inversion of logic signals


You can invert the input signals by setting the input parameter InvInx for the input concerned
to Inx = 1 , e.g. for input In01 set the I/O InvIn01.
The inversion is displayed in the faceplate. If you invert signals using any other method, this
is not shown in the faceplate.

Bypass

Note
Bypassing the interlock means that the interlock signal (input signal) is excluded from the logic
of the interlock block, in other words, this signal is ignored in the logic operation.
This function can only be executed in the faceplate with "high-level operating permission".

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1634 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Interlock blocks
8.3 Intlk08 - Interlock display with 8 input signals

You can bypass interlock signals as follows:


● From operator over faceplate (BypInx = 1):
Independent BypLix is connected or not, the operator can bypass the input signal.
● By connecting BypLix in CFC (BypLix.Value = 1, BypLix.ST <> 16#FF)
Follow this if interlock signals are connected to parameters, which has no bypass
information bit for bypass. Refer to sectionBypassing signals (Page 109).
● By connected interlock signal Inx. For this the corresponding enable bit (BypEn.Inx = 1)
and Feature.Bit2 Separate evaluation for excluded and simulated interlock signals
(Page 155) have to be set. Follow this if the interlock signals are all connected to parameters
which has the bypass information. Refer to sectionBypassing signals (Page 109).
The bypassed interlock signal is shown in the faceplate as the symbol below:

You can reset all the bypass of interlock signals as follows:


● From operator over faceplate (RstBypOp = 0 -> 1)
● Over CFC linkable parameter (RstBypLi = 0 -> 1)
Special situation: If all input parameters are bypassed, the output value is defined using the
DefaultOut parameter.
Depending on the configuration of the Feature.Bit2Separate evaluation for excluded and
simulated interlock signals (Page 155), the output BypAct is formed and the bypass signal/
information is set at the output Out.

Feature.Bit2 = 0:
If one of the interlock inputs is bypassed by the operator or by connected BypLix, the output
BypAct is set. The bypass signal/information at the output Out is always reset.
● BypAct.Value =
BypIn01 OR BypLi01
OR BypInx OR BypLix
The calculation is simplified and described.
● Out.Bit1 = 0
A bypassed interlock signal, that is switch-relevant, sets the status of Out to Simulation.

Feature.Bit2 = 1:
If one of the interlock inputs is bypassed or the block which is connected to interlock signal is
in bypass (signal is set at an interlock input In01...Inx), then the output BypAct is set. The
bypass informataion in the signal at the input In01...Inx can be read from the upstream
interlock block at the output BypAct or from the upstream technical block with bypass
functionallity (MonDiL, MonAnL, TotalL, PIDConL, PIDConR, PIDStepL) at the output
BypassAct.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1635
Interlock blocks
8.3 Intlk08 - Interlock display with 8 input signals

The bypass signal information at the output Out is set to the value of BypAct.
● BypAct.Value =
BypIn01 OR BypLi01 OR In01.Bit1
OR BypInx OR BypLix OR In01.Bitx
OR In01.Bit1 OR Inx.Bit1
The calculation and described.
● Out.Bit1 = BypAct.Value
A bypassed interlock input has no influence on the status of Out.

Note
Do not connect the input BypLix with the output BypAct from an interlock block because
BypAct is calculated from the bypass signal information.

Handling non-connected inputs


Inputs which are not interconnected are not evaluated. They are not displayed in the faceplate
either.
Special situation: If no inputs are connected, the output value is defined using the
DefaultOut parameter. The signal status is set to 16#FF.

Opening additional faceplates


This block provides the standard function Opening additional faceplates (Page 217). However,
only one additional faceplate can be called up using SelFp1 = 1 .

First-in detection for interlock blocks


This block provides the standard function Recording the first signal for interlock blocks
(Page 53). Note that a signal status change only has an effect on the first-in detection when
the Feature bit Evaluation of signal status (Page 145) and the input FirstInEn is set.
The response to deactivation via the FirstInEn input can be influenced by Feature bit First-
in detection response to deactivation (Page 180).

Note
This function can only be executed in the faceplate with "process control" operating permission.

Forming the signal status for blocks


This block provides the standard function Forming and outputting the signal status for interlock
blocks (Page 117).
The worst signal status ST_Worst for the block is formed from the following parameters:
● Out.ST

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1636 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Interlock blocks
8.3 Intlk08 - Interlock display with 8 input signals

Operating permissions
This block provides the standard function Operator control permissions (Page 265).
The block has the following permissions for the OS_Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 1 = Operator can exclude values
1 1 = Operator can reset the exclusion of input values
2 1 = Operator can reset the recording of the first signal
3 - 15 Not used
16 1 = Operator can set or reset the exclusion of input value In01
17 1 = Operator can set or reset the exclusion of input value In02
18 1 = Operator can set or reset the exclusion of input value In03
19 1 = Operator can set or reset the exclusion of input value In04
20 1 = Operator can set or reset the exclusion of input value In05
21 1 = Operator can set or reset the exclusion of input value In06
22 1 = Operator can set or reset the exclusion of input value In07
23 1 = Operator can set or reset the exclusion of input value In08
24 - 31 Not used

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the chapter
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133). The following functionality is available
for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
2 Separate evaluation for excluded and simulated interlock signals (Page 155)
5 Activate OS_Perm bits (Page 161)
0 = OS_Perm bits 16...17 inactive (evaluation only in faceplate)
1 = OS_Perm bits 16...17 active (evaluation only in faceplate)
21 First-in detection response to deactivation (Page 180)
23 Evaluation of signal status (Page 145)
24 Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162)
31 Activating recording of the first signal (Page 154)

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


This block provides the standard function SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1637
Interlock blocks
8.3 Intlk08 - Interlock display with 8 input signals

See also
Description of Intlk08 (Page 1630)
Intlk08 messaging (Page 1639)
Intlk08 I/Os (Page 1639)
Intlk08 block diagram (Page 1644)
Intlk08 error handling (Page 1638)
Intlk08 modes (Page 1633)

8.3.4 Intlk08 error handling

Error handling of Intlk08


Refer to the section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions for the error handling
of all blocks.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum I/O can be used to output the following error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; the block is not processed.
0 There is no error.
13 The parameter Logic has not been set to 0 or 1

See also
Intlk08 block diagram (Page 1644)
Intlk08 I/Os (Page 1639)
Intlk08 messaging (Page 1639)
Intlk08 functions (Page 1634)
Intlk08 modes (Page 1633)
Description of Intlk08 (Page 1630)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1638 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Interlock blocks
8.3 Intlk08 - Interlock display with 8 input signals

8.3.5 Intlk08 messaging

Messaging
This block does not offer messaging.

See also
Description of Intlk08 (Page 1630)
Intlk08 functions (Page 1634)
Intlk08 I/Os (Page 1639)
Intlk08 block diagram (Page 1644)
Intlk08 error handling (Page 1638)
Intlk08 modes (Page 1633)

8.3.6 Intlk08 I/Os


I/Os of Intlk08

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AV01 Analog value of In01 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV02 Analog value of In02 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV03 Analog value of In03 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV04 Analog value of In04 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV05 Analog value of In05 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV06 Analog value of In06 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1639
Interlock blocks
8.3 Intlk08 - Interlock display with 8 input signals

Parameter Description Type Default


AV07 Analog value of In07 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV08 Analog value of In08 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV01_Unit Unit of measure for AV01 INT 0
AV02_Unit Unit of measure for AV02 INT 0
AV03_Unit Unit of measure for AV03 INT 0
AV04_Unit Unit of measure for AV04 INT 0
AV05_Unit Unit of measure for AV05 INT 0
AV06_Unit Unit of measure for AV06 INT 0
AV07_Unit Unit of measure for AV07 INT 0
AV08_Unit Unit of measure for AV08 INT 0
BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation BOOL 0
BatchID Batch ID DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name S7-String
BypIn01* 1 = Input In01 is not used BOOL 0
BypIn02* 1 = Input In02 is not used BOOL 0
BypIn03* 1 = Input In03 is not used BOOL 0
BypIn04* 1 = Input In04 is not used BOOL 0
BypIn05* 1 = Input In05 is not used BOOL 0
BypIn06* 1 = Input In06 is not used BOOL 0
BypIn07* 1 = Input In07 is not used BOOL 0
BypIn08* 1 = Input In08 is not used BOOL 0
BypLi01...BypLi08 Bypass In01...In08 (via interconnection) STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
DefaultOut Output value for cases where all inputs are BOOL 1
excluded or not interconnected. Refer to
the section Intlk08 functions (Page 1634)
of the block.
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1
Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 1634) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
FirstInEn First-in detection STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1640 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Interlock blocks
8.3 Intlk08 - Interlock display with 8 input signals

Parameter Description Type Default


In01 Input In01 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
In02 Input In02 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
In03 Input In03 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
In04 Input In04 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
In05 Input In05 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
In06 Input In06 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
In07 Input In07 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1641
Interlock blocks
8.3 Intlk08 - Interlock display with 8 input signals

Parameter Description Type Default


In08 Input In08 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
InvIn01 Invert Input In01 BOOL 0
InvIn02 Invert Input In02 BOOL 0
InvIn03 Invert Input In03 BOOL 0
InvIn04 Invert Input In04 BOOL 0
InvIn05 Invert Input In05 BOOL 0
InvIn06 Invert Input In06 BOOL 0
InvIn07 Invert Input In07 BOOL 0
InvIn08 Invert Input In08 BOOL 0
Logic Logical operation: INT 0
0 = Logical OR
1 = Logical AND
NotUsed 1 = Block is not used (only for display in the STRUCT -
faceplate). You can find additional informa‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
tion on this in the section Interlock blocks
standard view (Page 287) / Color of the ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
field.
Occupied 1 = Occupied by batch control BOOL 0
OpSt_In Input parameter for local operator authori‐ DWORD 16#00000000
zation, connected with the Out output pa‐
rameter of the upstream block, OpSta‐
tions (Page 423)
OS_Perm I/O for operating permissions (Page 1634) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● ... ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
RstBypOp* 1 = Reset inputs BypIn01to BypIn08 BOOL 0
RstLi 1 = Reset via interconnection STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RstOp* 1 = Reset via operator BOOL 0
SelFp1 Call a block saved in this parameter as an ANY
additional faceplate (Page 217) in the
standard view
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use in PCS 7 OS BYTE 16#00

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1642 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Interlock blocks
8.3 Intlk08 - Interlock display with 8 input signals

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


BypAct 1 = Bypass active STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without er‐ BOOL 0
rors
ErrorNum Output of pending error number. For error INT -1
numbers that can be output by this block,
see Intlk08 error handling (Page 1638)
FirstIn Bit-coded number of the first signal that has DWORD 16#00000000
resulted in a change at the output
OpSt_Out Value of the OpSt_In input parameter, for DWORD 16#00000000
feedforwarding to other blocks. Bit 31 of
this parameter is used by Feature.Bit24
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with settings changed DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
by the block algorithm
Out Output STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
Status1 Status word 1 (Page 1630) DWORD 16#00000000
Status2 Status word 2 (Page 1630) DWORD 16#00000000
Status3 Status word 3 (Page 1630) DWORD 16#00000000
Status4 Status word 4 (Page 1639) DWORD 16#00000000
Status5 Status word 5 (Page 1630) DWORD 16#00000000
Status6 Status word 6 (Page 1630) DWORD 16#00000000
Status7 Status word 7 (Page 1630) DWORD 16#00000000
Status8 Status word 8 (Page 1630) DWORD 16#00000000

See also
Intlk08 block diagram (Page 1644)
Intlk08 modes (Page 1633)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1643
Interlock blocks
8.3 Intlk08 - Interlock display with 8 input signals

8.3.7 Intlk08 block diagram

Intlk08 block diagram


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

See also
Intlk08 I/Os (Page 1639)
Intlk08 messaging (Page 1639)
Intlk08 error handling (Page 1638)
Intlk08 functions (Page 1634)
Intlk08 modes (Page 1633)
Description of Intlk08 (Page 1630)

8.3.8 Operator control and monitoring

8.3.8.1 Interlock block views

Views of the blocks Intlk02, Intlk04, Intlk08, Intlk16


The blocks provide the following views:
● Interlock blocks standard view (Page 287)
● Preview of interlock blocks (Page 310)
● Batch view (Page 313)
● Block icon for interlock blocks (Page 251)
Refer to the sections Structure of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure
(Page 239) for general information on the faceplate and block icon.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1644 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Interlock blocks
8.4 Intlk16 - Interlock display with 16 input signals

8.4 Intlk16 - Interlock display with 16 input signals

8.4.1 Description of Intlk16

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1827
Family: Interlck

Area of application for Intlk16


The block is used for the following applications:
● Standardized interlock with display

How it works
The block is used to calculate a standardized interlock that can be displayed on the OS. A
maximum of 16 input signals can be supplied to the block. They are linked using selectable
binary logic. The signal status of the output signal is also determined. You can assign an analog
value with the signal status and unit to each input value for display in the faceplate.
The current state is displayed at the Out output parameter:
● Out = 0: Interlock
● Out = 1: "Good" state

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38).
For the Intlk02 (Intlk16) block, the Advanced Process Library contains templates for process
tag types as examples with various application scenarios for this block.
Refer to Description of Intlk02 (Page 1605) for more information.

Startup characteristics
The block does not have any startup characteristics.

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


You can find a description for each parameter in section Intlk16 I/Os (Page 1655).

Status bit Parameter


0 1 = Logic = OR
1 1 = Logic = AND
2 Not used

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1645
Interlock blocks
8.4 Intlk16 - Interlock display with 16 input signals

Status bit Parameter


3 Result of logic operation Out.Value
4 1 = At least one input value is excluded. See the section Excluding input values in
Intlk16 functions (Page 1650)
5 1 = All input values are excluded
6 1 = No input value is interconnected or NotUsed.Value
7 Status display for simulation
8 Status display for not interlocked
9 Status display for interlocked
10 Not used
11 Feature.Bit2: Separate evaluation for excluded and simulated interlock signals
12 - 29 Not used
30 Occupied
31 BatchEn

Status word allocation for Status2 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 In01.Value
1 In02.Value
2 In03.Value
3 In04.Value
4 In05.Value
5 In06.Value
6 In07.Value
7 In08.Value
8 In09.Value
9 In10.Value
10 In11.Value
11 In12.Value
12 In13.Value
13 In14.Value
14 In15.Value
15 In16.Value
16 - 31 Not used

Status word allocation for Status3 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 InvIn01
1 InvIn02
2 InvIn03
3 InvIn04

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1646 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Interlock blocks
8.4 Intlk16 - Interlock display with 16 input signals

Status bit Parameter


4 InvIn05
5 InvIn06
6 InvIn07
7 InvIn08
8 InvIn09
9 InvIn10
10 InvIn11
11 InvIn12
12 InvIn13
13 InvIn14
14 InvIn15
15 InvIn16
16 - 31 Not used

Status word allocation for Status4 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 In01 with inversion
1 In02 with inversion
2 In03 with inversion
3 In04 with inversion
4 In05 with inversion
5 In06 with inversion
6 In07 with inversion
7 In08 with inversion
8 In09 with inversion
9 In10 with inversion
10 In11 with inversion
11 In12 with inversion
12 In13 with inversion
13 In14 with inversion
14 In15 with inversion
15 In16 with inversion
16 Bypass In01 (via interconnection)
17 Bypass In02 (via interconnection)
18 Bypass In03 (via interconnection)
19 Bypass In04 (via interconnection)
20 Bypass In05 (via interconnection)
21 Bypass In06 (via interconnection)
22 Bypass In07 (via interconnection)
23 Bypass In08 (via interconnection)
24 Bypass In09 (via interconnection)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1647
Interlock blocks
8.4 Intlk16 - Interlock display with 16 input signals

Status bit Parameter


25 Bypass In10 (via interconnection)
26 Bypass In11 (via interconnection)
27 Bypass In12 (via interconnection)
28 Bypass In13 (via interconnection)
29 Bypass In14 (via interconnection)
30 Bypass In15 (via interconnection)
31 Bypass In16 (via interconnection)

Status word allocation for Status5 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 BypIn01
1 BypIn02
2 BypIn03
3 BypIn04
4 BypIn05
5 BypIn06
6 BypIn07
7 BypIn08
8 BypIn09
9 BypIn10
10 BypIn11
11 BypIn12
12 BypIn13
13 BypIn14
14 BypIn15
15 BypIn16
16 - 31 In01..In16hidden bypass information

Status word allocation for Status6 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 In01 not connected
1 In02 not connected
2 In03 not connected
3 In04 not connected
4 In05 not connected
5 In06 not connected
6 In07 not connected
7 In08 not connected
8 In09 not connected
9 In10 not connected

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1648 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Interlock blocks
8.4 Intlk16 - Interlock display with 16 input signals

Status bit Parameter


10 In11 not connected
11 In12 not connected
12 In13 not connected
13 In14 not connected
14 In15 not connected
15 In16 not connected
16 - 31 Not used

Status word allocation for Status7 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 AV01 not connected
1 AV02 not connected
2 AV03 not connected
3 Av04 not connected
4 AV05 not connected
5 AV06 not connected
6 AV07 not connected
7 AV08 not connected
8 AV09 not connected
9 AV10 not connected
10 AV11 not connected
11 AV12 not connected
12 AV13 not connected
13 AV14 not connected
14 AV15 not connected
15 AV16 not connected
16 - 31 Not used

Status word allocation for Status8 parameter


Identical to FirstIn.

See also
Intlk16 block diagram (Page 1663)
Intlk16 error handling (Page 1654)
Intlk16 modes (Page 1650)
Intlk16 messaging (Page 1655)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1649
Interlock blocks
8.4 Intlk16 - Interlock display with 16 input signals

8.4.2 Intlk16 modes

Intlk16 modes
This block does not have any modes.

See also
Intlk16 block diagram (Page 1663)
Intlk16 I/Os (Page 1655)
Intlk16 messaging (Page 1655)
Intlk16 functions (Page 1650)
Intlk16 error handling (Page 1654)
Description of Intlk16 (Page 1645)

8.4.3 Intlk16 functions

Functions of Intlk16
The functions for this block are listed below.

Logic operators
Use the Logic input to specify the logic operator that the block should employ when
determining the interlock state. Make the following settings:
● Logic = 0: OR
● Logic = 1: AND

Inversion of logic signals


You can invert the input signals by setting the input parameter InvInx for the input concerned
to Inx = 1, e.g. for input In01 set the I/O InvIn01.
The inversion is displayed in the faceplate. If you invert signals using any other method, this
is not shown in the faceplate.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1650 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Interlock blocks
8.4 Intlk16 - Interlock display with 16 input signals

Bypass

Note
Bypassing the interlock means that the interlock signal (input signal) is excluded from the logic
of the interlock block, in other words, this signal is ignored in the logic operation.
This function can only be executed in the faceplate with "high-level operating permission".

You can bypass interlock signals as follows:


● From operator over faceplate (BypInx = 1):
Independent BypLix is connected or not, the operator can bypass the input signal.
● By connecting BypLix in CFC (BypLix.Value = 1, BypLix.ST <> 16#FF)
Follow this if interlock signals are connected to parameters, which has no bypass
information bit for bypass. Refer to sectionBypassing signals (Page 109).
● By connected interlock signal Inx. For this the corresponding enable bit (BypEn.Inx = 1)
and Feature.Bit2 Separate evaluation for excluded and simulated interlock signals
(Page 155) have to be set. Follow this if the interlock signals are all connected to parameters
which has the bypass information. Refer to sectionBypassing signals (Page 109).
The bypassed interlock signal is shown in the faceplate as the symbol below:

You can reset all the bypass of interlock signals as follows:


● From operator over faceplate (RstBypOp = 0 -> 1)
● Over CFC linkable parameter (RstBypLi = 0 -> 1)
Special situation: If all input parameters are bypassed, the output value is defined using the
DefaultOut parameter.
Depending on the configuration of the Feature.Bit2 Separate evaluation for excluded and
simulated interlock signals (Page 155), the output BypAct is formed and the bypass signal/
information is set at the output Out.

Feature.Bit2 = 0:
If one of the interlock inputs is bypassed by the operator or by connected BypLix, then the
output BypAct is set. The bypass signal/information at the output Out is always reset.
● BypAct.Value =
BypIn01 OR BypLi01
OR BypInx OR BypLix
The calculation is simplified and described.
● Out.Bit1 = 0
A bypassed interlock signal, that is switch-relevant, sets the status ofOutto Simulation.

Feature.Bit2 = 1:
If one of the interlock inputs is bypassed or the block which is connected to interlock signal is
in bypass (signal is set at an interlock input In01...Inx), the output BypAct is set. The bypass
informataion in the signal at the input In01...Inx can be read from the upstream interlock

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1651
Interlock blocks
8.4 Intlk16 - Interlock display with 16 input signals

block at the output BypAct or from the upstream technical block with bypass functionallity
(MonDiL, MonAnL, TotalL, PIDConL, PIDConR, PIDStepL) at the output BypassAct.
The bypass signal information at the outputOutis set to the value of BypAct.
● BypAct.Value =
BypIn01 OR BypLi01 OR In01.Bit1
OR BypInx OR BypLix OR In01.Bitx
OR In01.Bit1 OR Inx.Bit1
The calculation is simplified and described.
● Out.Bit1 = BypAct.Value
An bypassed interlock input has no influence on the status of Out.

Note
Do not connect the input BypLix with the output BypAct from an interlock block because
BypAct is calculated from the bypass signal information.

Handling non-connected inputs


Inputs which are not interconnected are not evaluated. They are not displayed in the faceplate
either.
Special situation: If no inputs are connected, the output value is defined using the
DefaultOut parameter. The signal status is set to 16#FF.

Opening additional faceplates


This block provides the standard function Opening additional faceplates (Page 217). However,
only one additional faceplate can be called up using SelFp1 = 1 .

First-in detection for interlock blocks


This block provides the standard function Recording the first signal for interlock blocks
(Page 53). Note that a signal status change only has an effect on the first-in detection when
the Feature bit Evaluation of signal status (Page 145) and the input FirstInEn is set.
The response to deactivation via the FirstInEn input can be influenced by Feature bit First-
in detection response to deactivation (Page 180).

Note
This function can only be executed in the faceplate with "process control" operating permission.

Forming the signal status for blocks


This block provides the standard function Forming and outputting the signal status for interlock
blocks (Page 117).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1652 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Interlock blocks
8.4 Intlk16 - Interlock display with 16 input signals

The worst signal status ST_Worst for the block is formed from the following parameter:
● OUT.ST

Operating permissions
This block provides the standard function Operator control permissions (Page 265).
The block has the following permissions for the OS_Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 1 = Operator can exclude values
1 1 = Operator can reset the exclusion of input values
2 1 = Operator can reset the recording of the first signal
3 - 15 Not used
16 1 = Operator can set or reset the exclusion of input value In01
17 1 = Operator can set or reset the exclusion of input value In02
18 1 = Operator can set or reset the exclusion of input value In03
19 1 = Operator can set or reset the exclusion of input value In04
20 1 = Operator can set or reset the exclusion of input value In05
21 1 = Operator can set or reset the exclusion of input value In06
22 1 = Operator can set or reset the exclusion of input value In07
23 1 = Operator can set or reset the exclusion of input value In08
24 1 = Operator can set or reset the exclusion of input value In09
25 1 = Operator can set or reset the exclusion of input value In10
26 1 = Operator can set or reset the exclusion of input value In11
27 1 = Operator can set or reset the exclusion of input value In12
28 1 = Operator can set or reset the exclusion of input value In13
29 1 = Operator can set or reset the exclusion of input value In14
30 1 = Operator can set or reset the exclusion of input value In15
31 1 = Operator can set or reset the exclusion of input value In16

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1653
Interlock blocks
8.4 Intlk16 - Interlock display with 16 input signals

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the chapter
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133). The following functionality is available
for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
2 Separate evaluation for excluded and simulated interlock signals (Page 155)
5 Activate OS_Perm bits (Page 161)
0 = OS_Perm bits 16...17 inactive (evaluation only in faceplate)
1 = OS_Perm bits 16...17 active (evaluation only in faceplate)
21 First-in detection response to deactivation (Page 180)
23 Evaluation of signal status (Page 145)
24 Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162)
31 Activating recording of the first signal (Page 154)

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


This block provides the standard function SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

See also
Intlk16 block diagram (Page 1663)
Intlk16 error handling (Page 1654)
Intlk16 modes (Page 1650)
Description of Intlk16 (Page 1645)
Intlk16 I/Os (Page 1655)
Intlk16 messaging (Page 1655)

8.4.4 Intlk16 error handling

Error handling of Intlk16


Refer to the section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions for the error handling
of all blocks.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1654 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Interlock blocks
8.4 Intlk16 - Interlock display with 16 input signals

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum I/O can be used to output the following error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; the block is not processed.
0 There is no error.
13 The parameter Logic has not been set to 0 or 1.

See also
Intlk16 block diagram (Page 1663)
Intlk16 I/Os (Page 1655)
Intlk16 messaging (Page 1655)
Intlk16 functions (Page 1650)
Intlk16 modes (Page 1650)
Description of Intlk16 (Page 1645)

8.4.5 Intlk16 messaging

Messaging
This block does not offer messaging.

See also
Intlk16 block diagram (Page 1663)
Intlk16 error handling (Page 1654)
Intlk16 modes (Page 1650)
Description of Intlk16 (Page 1645)
Intlk16 I/Os (Page 1655)
Intlk16 functions (Page 1650)

8.4.6 Intlk16 I/Os


I/Os of Intlk16

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1655
Interlock blocks
8.4 Intlk16 - Interlock display with 16 input signals

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AV01 Analog value of In01 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV02 Analog value of In02 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV03 Analog value of In03 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV04 Analog value of In04 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV05 Analog value of In05 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV06 Analog value of In06 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV07 Analog value of In07 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV08 Analog value of In08 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV09 Analog value of In09 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV10 Analog value of In10 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV11 Analog value of In11 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV12 Analog value of In12 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV13 Analog value of In13 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1656 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Interlock blocks
8.4 Intlk16 - Interlock display with 16 input signals

Parameter Description Type Default


AV14 Analog value of In14 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV15 Analog value of In15 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV16 Analog value of In16 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV01_Unit Unit of measure for AV01 INT 0
AV02_Unit Unit of measure for AV02 INT 0
AV03_Unit Unit of measure for AV03 INT 0
AV04_Unit Unit of measure for AV04 INT 0
AV05_Unit Unit of measure for AV05 INT 0
AV06_Unit Unit of measure for AV06 INT 0
AV07_Unit Unit of measure for AV07 INT 0
AV08_Unit Unit of measure for AV08 INT 0
AV09_Unit Unit of measure for AV09 INT 0
AV10_Unit Unit of measure for AV10 INT 0
AV11_Unit Unit of measure for AV11 INT 0
AV12_Unit Unit of measure for AV12 INT 0
AV13_Unit Unit of measure for AV13 INT 0
AV14_Unit Unit of measure for AV14 INT 0
AV15_Unit Unit of measure for AV15 INT 0
AV16_Unit Unit of measure for AV16 INT 0
BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation BOOL 0
BatchID Batch ID DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name S7-String
BypIn01* 1 = Input In01 is not used BOOL 0
BypIn02* 1 = Input In02 is not used BOOL 0
BypIn03* 1 = Input In03 is not used BOOL 0
BypIn04* 1 = Input In04 is not used BOOL 0
BypIn05* 1 = Input In05 is not used BOOL 0
BypIn06* 1 = Input In06 is not used BOOL 0
BypIn07* 1 = Input In07 is not used BOOL 0
BypIn08* 1 = Input In08 is not used BOOL 0
BypIn09* 1 = Input In09 is not used BOOL 0
BypIn10* 1 = Input In10 is not used BOOL 0
BypIn11* 1 = Input In11 is not used BOOL 0
BypIn12* 1 = Input In12 is not used BOOL 0
BypIn13* 1 = Input In13 is not used BOOL 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1657
Interlock blocks
8.4 Intlk16 - Interlock display with 16 input signals

Parameter Description Type Default


BypIn14* 1 = Input In14 is not used BOOL 0
BypIn15* 1 = Input In15 is not used BOOL 0
BypIn16* 1 = Input In16 is not used BOOL 0
BypLi01...BypLi16 Bypass In01...In16 (via interconnec‐ STRUCT -
tion) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
DefaultOut Output value for cases where all inputs BOOL 1
are excluded or not interconnected. Re‐
fer to the section Intlk16 functions
(Page 1650) of the block.
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1
Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 1650) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
FirstInEn First-in detection STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
In01 Input In01 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
In02 Input In02 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
In03 Input In03 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
In04 Input In04 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1658 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Interlock blocks
8.4 Intlk16 - Interlock display with 16 input signals

Parameter Description Type Default


In05 Input In05 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
In06 Input In06 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
In07 Input In07 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
In08 Input In08 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
In09 Input In09 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
In10 Input In10 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
In11 Input In11 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1659
Interlock blocks
8.4 Intlk16 - Interlock display with 16 input signals

Parameter Description Type Default


In12 Input In12 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
In13 Input In13 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
In14 Input In14 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
In15 Input In15 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
In16 Input In16 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
InvIn01 Invert input In01 BOOL 0
InvIn02 Invert input In02 BOOL 0
InvIn03 Invert input In03 BOOL 0
InvIn04 Invert input In04 BOOL 0
InvIn05 Invert input In05 BOOL 0
InvIn06 Invert input In06 BOOL 0
InvIn07 Invert input In07 BOOL 0
InvIn08 Invert input In08 BOOL 0
InvIn09 Invert input In09 BOOL 0
InvIn10 Invert input In10 BOOL 0
InvIn11 Invert input In11 BOOL 0
InvIn12 Invert input In12 BOOL 0
InvIn13 Invert input In13 BOOL 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1660 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Interlock blocks
8.4 Intlk16 - Interlock display with 16 input signals

Parameter Description Type Default


InvIn14 Invert input In14 BOOL 0
InvIn15 Invert input In15 BOOL 0
InvIn16 Invert input In16 BOOL 0
Logic Logical operation: INT 0
0 = Logical OR
1 = Logical AND
NotUsed 1 = Block is not used (only for display in STRUCT -
the faceplate). You can find additional ● Value: BOOL ● 0
information on this in the section Inter‐
lock blocks standard view (Page 287) / ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
Color of the field.
Occupied 1 = Occupied by batch control BOOL 0
OpSt_In Input parameter for local operator au‐ DWORD 16#00000000
thorization, connected with the Out out‐
put parameter of the upstream block,
OpStations (Page 423)
OS_Perm I/O for operating permissions STRUCT -
(Page 1650) ● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● ... ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
RstBypOp* 1 = Reset inputs BypIn01 to BypIn16 BOOL 0
RstLi 1 = Reset via interconnection STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RstOp* 1 = Reset via operator BOOL 0
SelFp1 Call a block saved in this parameter as ANY
Opening additional faceplates
(Page 217) in standard view
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use in PCS 7 BYTE 16#00
OS

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1661
Interlock blocks
8.4 Intlk16 - Interlock display with 16 input signals

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


BypAct 1 = Bypass active STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
● Bit 1: BOOL ● 0
(Bypass information
bit)
ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without BOOL 0
errors
ErrorNum Output of pending error number. For er‐ INT -1
ror numbers that can be output by this
block, see Intlk16 error handling
(Page 1654)
FirstIn Bit-coded number of the first signal that DWORD 16#00000000
has resulted in a change at the output
OpSt_Out Value of the OpSt_In input parameter, DWORD 16#00000000
for feedforwarding to other blocks. Bit 31
of this parameter is used by
Feature.Bit24
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Prem with settings DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
changed by the block algorithm
Out Output STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
Status1 Status word 1 (Page 1645) DWORD 16#00000000
Status2 Status word 2 (Page 1645) DWORD 16#00000000
Status3 Status word 3 (Page 1645) DWORD 16#00000000
Status4 Status word 4 (Page 1645) DWORD 16#00000000
Status5 Status word 5 (Page 1645) DWORD 16#00000000
Status6 Status word 6 (Page 1645) DWORD 16#00000000
Status7 Status word 7 (Page 1645) DWORD 16#00000000
Status8 Status word 8 (Page 1645) DWORD 16#00000000

See also
Intlk16 block diagram (Page 1663)
Intlk16 modes (Page 1650)
Intlk16 messaging (Page 1655)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1662 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Interlock blocks
8.4 Intlk16 - Interlock display with 16 input signals

8.4.7 Intlk16 block diagram

Intlk16 block diagram


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

See also
Intlk16 I/Os (Page 1655)
Intlk16 messaging (Page 1655)
Intlk16 functions (Page 1650)
Intlk16 error handling (Page 1654)
Intlk16 modes (Page 1650)
Description of Intlk16 (Page 1645)

8.4.8 Operator control and monitoring

8.4.8.1 Interlock block views

Views of the blocks Intlk02, Intlk04, Intlk08, Intlk16


The blocks provide the following views:
● Interlock blocks standard view (Page 287)
● Preview of interlock blocks (Page 310)
● Batch view (Page 313)
● Block icon for interlock blocks (Page 251)
Refer to the sections Structure of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure
(Page 239) for general information on the faceplate and block icon.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1663
Interlock blocks
8.5 Firstln - Transform output Intlck FirstIn for message associated value

8.5 Firstln - Transform output Intlck FirstIn for message associated value

8.5.1 Description of Firstln

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FC 1929
Family: Interlck

Area of application for FirstIn


The block is used for the following applications:
● To generate an external message that can be seen in the technological block.
● To generate an external message from EventTs or Event16Ts block.

How it works
FirstIn block works only with the combination of a technological block that has ExtMsgx and
ExtValxx input parameters.
The block generates messages requiring acknowledgment that appear in the alarm view of
the interconnected technological block.
The block must be connected to a technological block. Messages of the interconnected
technological blocks are displayed in the message view.
FirstIn block also works with EventTs and Event16Ts blocks to generate an external message.
External signals of FirstIn block should be connected with EventTs or Event16Ts block. When
a fault occurs, EventTs or Event16Ts block is triggered and the message can be viewed in the
interconnected technological block.

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38).
Connect the following output parameters with the input parameters as indicated in the following
table:

Output parameter Input parameter


Parameter name Block Parameter name Block
FirstIn Interlock FirstIn FirstIn
Out Interlock Interlock Technological
FirstInAct FirstIn ExtMsgx Technological
ExtVa1FI FirstIn ExtValxx Technological
ExtVa2FI FirstIn ExtValxx Technological

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1664 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Interlock blocks
8.5 Firstln - Transform output Intlck FirstIn for message associated value

For example:
● Output parameters ExtVa1FI and ExtVa2FI are connected to the input parameters
ExtVa104 and ExtVa108 respectively.
● Output parameter FirstInAct is connected to the input parameter ExtMsg2.
In the PCS7 special message property of the external message 2 signal, add the following
syntax:
“@4%s@@8%s@”.

With EventTs/Event16Ts blocks:


You can connect FirstIn block with the block EventTs or Event16Ts. Connect the input
parameters ExtVaxxx (ExtVal01...ExtVal03 in case of EventTs block and ExtVal01…
ExtVa106 in case of Event16Ts block) with the output parameters ExtVa1FI or ExtVa2FI
of the FirstIn block.
The output parameter FirstInAct of the FirstIn block should be connected with any Inx
input parameters of the EventTs/Event16Ts blocks.

Startup characteristics
The block does not have any startup characteristics.

Status word allocation for Status parameter


This block does not have the Status parameter.

See also
Firstln modes (Page 1665)
Firstln functions (Page 1666)
Firstln error handling (Page 1666)
Firstln messaging (Page 1667)
Firstln I/Os (Page 1667)
Firstln block diagram (Page 1668)

8.5.2 Firstln modes

FirstIn operating modes


This block does not have any operating modes.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1665
Interlock blocks
8.5 Firstln - Transform output Intlck FirstIn for message associated value

See also
Description of Firstln (Page 1664)
Firstln functions (Page 1666)
Firstln error handling (Page 1666)
Firstln messaging (Page 1667)
Firstln I/Os (Page 1667)
Firstln block diagram (Page 1668)

8.5.3 Firstln functions

Functions of FirstIn
This block does not have any special function.

See also
Description of Firstln (Page 1664)
Firstln modes (Page 1665)
Firstln error handling (Page 1666)
Firstln messaging (Page 1667)
Firstln I/Os (Page 1667)
Firstln block diagram (Page 1668)

8.5.4 Firstln error handling

Error handling of FirstIn


This block does not have any error handling.

See also
Description of Firstln (Page 1664)
Firstln modes (Page 1665)
Firstln functions (Page 1666)
Firstln messaging (Page 1667)
Firstln I/Os (Page 1667)
Firstln block diagram (Page 1668)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1666 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Interlock blocks
8.5 Firstln - Transform output Intlck FirstIn for message associated value

8.5.5 Firstln messaging

Messaging
This block does not offer messaging.

See also
Description of Firstln (Page 1664)
Firstln modes (Page 1665)
Firstln functions (Page 1666)
Firstln error handling (Page 1666)
Firstln I/Os (Page 1667)
Firstln block diagram (Page 1668)

8.5.6 Firstln I/Os

I/Os of FirstIn

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1
FirstIn First active input DWORD 16#00000000

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without errors BOOL 0
FirstInAct First signal active for ExtMsgX or EventTs STRUCT -
message ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1667
Interlock blocks
8.5 Firstln - Transform output Intlck FirstIn for message associated value

Parameter Description Type Default


ExtVa1FI STRUCT -
● Char1: CHAR ● ''
● ... ● ''
● Char15: CHAR ● ''
ExtVa2FI STRUCT -
● Char1: CHAR ● ''
● ... ● ''
● Char23: CHAR ● ''

See also
Description of Firstln (Page 1664)
Firstln modes (Page 1665)
Firstln functions (Page 1666)
Firstln error handling (Page 1666)
Firstln messaging (Page 1667)
Firstln block diagram (Page 1668)

8.5.7 Firstln block diagram

Block diagram of FirstIn


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

See also
Description of Firstln (Page 1664)
Firstln modes (Page 1665)
Firstln functions (Page 1666)
Firstln error handling (Page 1666)
Firstln messaging (Page 1667)
Firstln I/Os (Page 1667)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1668 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Message blocks 9
9.1 Event - Creating messages

9.1.1 Description of Event

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1811
Family: Report

Area of application for Event


The block is used for the following applications:
● Generation of messages requiring acknowledgment

How it works
The block is used to simultaneously output up to eight different messages that require
acknowledgment.
The individual messages are assigned to the monitored signals via the inputs and the
messages released or blocked depending on the process status data. If a change is made to
one or more of the monitored signals enabled for reporting, a message is output.
The signals to be monitored are interconnected with inputs In1 ... In8. Each Inx signal can
also be inverted via input InvInx. A message is output if a signal value is changed (but taking
inversion into account).
Each input is assigned a separate message text. A message received at input In5, for
example, is output with the message text for the SIG 5 signal.

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38). The block is
also installed automatically in the startup OB (OB100).
Further addressing is not required.

Startup characteristics
During startup, the message block suppresses all messages. The duration (number of cycles)
of message suppression is set at the RunUpCyc parameter. During restart (OB100) an internal
counter that is initialized with this value decrements each time the block is executed. Messages
are not generated if the counter value does not equal zero.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1669
Message blocks
9.1 Event - Creating messages

Messages whose alarm delay has not elapsed during this period are then output.

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


You can find a description for each parameter in section Event I/Os (Page 1677).

Status bit Parameter


0 In1.Value
1 In2.Value
2 In3.Value
3 In4.Value
4 In5.Value
5 In6.Value
6 In7.Value
7 In8.Value
8 InvIn1
9 InvIn2
10 InvIn3
11 InvIn4
12 InvIn5
13 InvIn6
14 InvIn7
15 InvIn8
16 In1 with inversion
17 In2 with inversion
18 In3 with inversion
19 In4 with inversion
20 In5 with inversion
21 In6 with inversion
22 In7 with inversion
23 In8 with inversion
24 In1 not connected
25 In2 not connected
26 In3 not connected
27 In4 not connected
28 In5 not connected
29 In6 not connected
30 In7 not connected
31 In8 not connected

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1670 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Message blocks
9.1 Event - Creating messages

Status word allocation for Status2 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 In1MsgEn
1 In2MsgEn
2 In3MsgEn
3 In4MsgEn
4 In5MsgEn
5 In6MsgEn
6 In7MsgEn
7 In8MsgEn
8 AV1 not connected
9 AV2 not connected
10 AV3 not connected
11 AV4 not connected
12 AV5 not connected
13 AV6 not connected
14 AV7 not connected
15 AV8 not connected
16 Active signal 1 for messages
17 Active signal 2 for messages
18 Active signal 3 for messages
19 Active signal 4 for messages
20 Active signal 5 for messages
21 Active signal 6 for messages
22 Active signal 7 for messages
23 Active signal 8 for messages
24 MsgLock
25 Occupied
26 BatchEn
27 Batch - parameter exists
28 - 31 Not used

See also
Event functions (Page 1672)
Event messaging (Page 1675)
Event block diagram (Page 1681)
Event error handling (Page 1674)
Event modes (Page 1672)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1671
Message blocks
9.1 Event - Creating messages

9.1.2 Event modes

Event operating modes


The block can be operated using the following modes:
● On (Page 72)
● Out of service (Page 72)

"On"
You can find general information about the "On" mode in the On (Page 72) section.

"Out of service"
You can find general information about the "Out of service" mode in the section Out of
service (Page 72).

See also
Event block diagram (Page 1681)
Event I/Os (Page 1677)
Event messaging (Page 1675)
Event error handling (Page 1674)
Event functions (Page 1672)
Description of Event (Page 1669)

9.1.3 Event functions

Functions of Event
The functions for this block are listed below.

Activation and deactivation of messages


Set the I/Os In1MsgEn to In8MsgEn accordingly to activate or deactivate the messages
applied to inputs In1 to In8. All messages are activated by default.
To deactivate messages received at I/O In4, for example, you set I/O In4MsgEn = 0
accordingly.
You can deactivate all messages via I/O MsgLock = 1 .

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1672 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Message blocks
9.1 Event - Creating messages

Delay of alarms
You can delay the alarms indicating signal changes.
For incoming alarms (signal change 0 - 1), set the delay at parameter AlmOnDly; for outgoing
alarms (signal change 1 - 0) set it at parameter AlmOffDly.
Enter 0 or a negative value to deactivate the delay.

Suppressing messages using the MsgLock parameter


This block provides the standard function Suppressing messages using the MsgLock
parameter (Page 214).

Release for maintenance


This block provides the standard function Release for maintenance (Page 65).

Operator control permissions


The block has the following Operator control permissions (Page 265) for the OS_Perm
parameter:

Bit Function
0 Not used
1 1 = Operator can switch to "On" mode
2 Not used
3 1 = Operator can switch to "Out of service" mode
4 - 31 Not used

This block does not have a faceplate yet; the operator control permissions have already been
assigned in the planning phase for these faceplates.

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the section
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133). The following functionality is available
for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
1 Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 181)
8 Reporting with BATCH parameters (Page 160)
22 Update acknowledgment and error status of the message call (Page 163)
27 Selecting values associated with messages (Page 159)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1673
Message blocks
9.1 Event - Creating messages

Forming the signal status for blocks


The block provides the standard function Forming and outputting the signal status for
technologic blocks (Page 110).
The block determines the worst signal status via all interconnected binary and analog inputs,
and outputs this value at ST_Worst.
● In1
etc. to
● In8
● AV1
etc. to
● AV8

See also
Description of Event (Page 1669)
Event messaging (Page 1675)
Event I/Os (Page 1677)
Event block diagram (Page 1681)
Event error handling (Page 1674)
Event modes (Page 1672)

9.1.4 Event error handling

Error handling of Event


Refer to the section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions for the error handling
of all blocks.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum I/O can be used to output the following error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; the block is not processed.
0 There is no error.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1674 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Message blocks
9.1 Event - Creating messages

See also
Event block diagram (Page 1681)
Event I/Os (Page 1677)
Event messaging (Page 1675)
Event functions (Page 1672)
Event modes (Page 1672)
Description of Event (Page 1669)

9.1.5 Event messaging

Messaging
Messages which can be acknowledged are generated using ALARM_8P. The block uses the
PMC communication channel and has 8 digital inputs and 8 associated values.
Every edge transition detected for one or more digital inputs results in a message. The
associated values are assigned consistently to the message at the time of edge evaluation.
All 8 signals are assigned a common message number, which is split at the OS into 8
messages. The Engineering System (ES) assigns the message number automatically by
calling the message server.

Process messages

Message Message Message class Event


instance identifier
MsgEvId SIG 1 AS process control message - error Text 1
SIG 2 AS process control message - error Text 2
SIG 3 AS process control message - error Text 3
SIG 4 AS process control message - error Text 4
SIG 5 AS process control message - error Text 5
SIG 6 AS process control message - error Text 6
SIG 7 AS process control message - error Text 7
SIG 8 AS process control message - error Text 8

You can change the message class and the event to meet your needs at the block type and/
or block instance.

Depending on Feature.Bit27 "Select message associated values", either the signal status
or the associated analog value is written as message associated value ( Feature.Bit8 = 0).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1675
Message blocks
9.1 Event - Creating messages

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId (Feature.Bit27 = 0)

Associated value Block parameters


1 In1.ST
2 In2.ST
3 In3.ST
4 In4.ST
5 In5.ST
6 In6.ST
7 In7.ST
8 In8.ST
9 Not allocated
10 Not allocated

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId (Feature.Bit27 = 1)

Associated value Block parameters


1 AV1.Value
2 AV2.Value
3 AV3.Value
4 AV4.Value
5 AV5.Value
6 AV6.Value
7 AV7.Value
8 AV8.Value
9 Not allocated
10 Not allocated

The batch information is transmitted with Feature.Bit8 = 1:


The first three associated values are described as follows and are followed by the signal status
of the input signal or the associated analog value, depending on Feature.Bit27 "Selecting
message associated values":

Associated value Block parameters


1 BatchName
2 StepNo
3 BatchId
4 In1.ST / AV1.Value
5 In2.ST / AV2.Value
6 In3.ST / AV3.Value
7 In4.ST / AV4.Value
8 In5.ST / AV5.Value

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1676 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Message blocks
9.1 Event - Creating messages

Associated value Block parameters


9 In6.ST / AV6.Value
10 In7.ST / AV7.Value

Enter the batch ID @1%s@ under "Properties - Block - Special properties - Messages
extended - Message texts block".

See also
Description of Event (Page 1669)
Event functions (Page 1672)
Event I/Os (Page 1677)
Event block diagram (Page 1681)
Event error handling (Page 1674)
Event modes (Page 1672)
Selecting values associated with messages (Page 159)

9.1.6 Event I/Os

I/Os of Event

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AlmOnDly Alarm delay time [s] for signal transition REAL 0.0
0→1
AlmOffDly Alarm delay time [s] for signal transition REAL 0.0
1→0
AV1 Message associated value for In1 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV1_Unit Unit for AV1 INT 0
AV2 Message associated value for In2 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV2_Unit Unit for AV2 INT 0
AV3 Message associated value for In3 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1677
Message blocks
9.1 Event - Creating messages

Parameter Description Type Default


AV3_Unit Unit for AV3 INT 0
AV4 Message associated value for In4 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV4_Unit Unit for AV4 INT 0
AV5 Message associated value for In5 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV5_Unit Unit for AV5 INT 0
AV6 Message associated value for In6 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV6_Unit Unit for AV6 INT 0
AV7 Message associated value for In7 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV7_Unit Unit for AV7 INT 0
AV8 Message associated value for In8 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV8_Unit Unit for AV8 INT 0
BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation BOOL 0
BatchID Batch ID DWORD 16#00
BatchName Batch name S7-String
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1
Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 1672) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
In1 Input In1 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
In1MsgEn 1 = Activate message for input In1 BOOL 1
In2 Input In2 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
In2MsgEn 1 = Activate message for input In2 BOOL 1
In3 Input In3 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
In3MsgEn 1 = Activate message for input In3 BOOL 1

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1678 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Message blocks
9.1 Event - Creating messages

Parameter Description Type Default


In4 Input In4 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
In4MsgEn 1 = Activate message for input In4 BOOL 1
In5 Input In5 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
In5MsgEn 1 = Activate message for input In5 BOOL 1
In6 Input In6 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
In6MsgEn 1 = Activate message for input In6 BOOL 1
In7 Input In7 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
In7MsgEn 1 = Activate message for input In7 BOOL 1
In8 Input In8 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
In8MsgEn 1 = Activate message for input In8 BOOL 1
InvIn1 1 = Invert input In1 BOOL 0
InvIn2 1 = Invert input In2 BOOL 0
InvIn3 1 = Invert input In3 BOOL 0
InvIn4 1 = Invert input In4 BOOL 0
InvIn5 1 = Invert input In5 BOOL 0
InvIn6 1 = Invert input In6 BOOL 0
InvIn7 1 = Invert input In7 BOOL 0
InvIn8 1 = Invert input In8 BOOL 0
MS_RelOp 1 = Release for maintenance by OS oper‐ BOOL 0
ator
MsgEvId Message number (assigned automatically) DWORD 16#00000000
MsgLock 1 = Suppress process messages. STRUCT -
Refer also to the Suppressing messages ● Value: BOOL ● 0
using the MsgLock parameter (Page 214) ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
section for more on this.
Occupied 1 = In use by a batch BOOL 0
OnOp* 1 = "On" mode via operator BOOL 0
OosLi 1 = "Out of service", via interconnection or STRUCT -
SFC (0-1 edge transition) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosOp* 1 = "Out of service", via OS operator BOOL 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1679
Message blocks
9.1 Event - Creating messages

Parameter Description Type Default


OS_Perm I/O for operator control permissions STRUCT -
(Page 1672) ● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● ... ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
RunUpCyc Number of cycles in startup; messages are INT 3
suppressed during these cycles
SampleTime Sampling time [s] (assigned automatically) REAL 0.1
SelFp1 1 = Call a block saved in this parameter as ANY
an additional faceplate (Page 217) in the
standard view
SelFp2 1 = Call a block saved in this parameter as ANY
an additional faceplate (Page 217) in the
preview
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use in PCS 7 OS BYTE 16#00

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without er‐ BOOL 0
rors
ErrorNum Output of current error number. For error INT -1
numbers that can be output by this block,
see Event error handling (Page 1674)
MsgAckn Message acknowledgment status (output WORD 16#0000
ACK_STATE of ALARM_8P)
MsgErr 1 = Alarm error (output ERROR of BOOL 0
ALARM_8)
MsgStat Alarm status (output STATUS of WORD 16#0000
ALARM_8P)
MS_Release Release for maintenance: STRUCT -
1 = Release for OS operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OnAct 1 = "On" mode enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosAct 1 = Block is "Out of service" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with settings changed DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
by the block algorithm

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1680 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Message blocks
9.1 Event - Creating messages

Parameter Description Type Default


ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
Status1 Status word 1 (Page 1669) DWORD 16#00000000
Status2 Status word 2 (Page 1669) DWORD 16#00000000

See also
Event messaging (Page 1675)
Event block diagram (Page 1681)
Event modes (Page 1672)

9.1.7 Event block diagram

Event block diagram


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

See also
Event I/Os (Page 1677)
Event messaging (Page 1675)
Event error handling (Page 1674)
Event functions (Page 1672)
Event modes (Page 1672)
Description of Event (Page 1669)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1681
Message blocks
9.2 EventNck - Generating messages without acknowledgment

9.2 EventNck - Generating messages without acknowledgment

9.2.1 Description of EventNck

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1904
Family: Report

Area of application for EventNck


The block is used for the following applications:
● Generation of messages not requiring acknowledgment

How it works
The block is used to simultaneously output up to eight different messages that do not require
acknowledgment.
The individual messages are assigned to the monitored signals via the inputs and the
messages released or blocked depending on the process status data. If a change is made to
one or more of the monitored signals enabled for reporting, a message is output.
The signals to be monitored are interconnected with inputs In1 to In8. Each Inx signal can
also be inverted via input InvInx. A message is output if a signal value is changed (but taking
inversion into account).
Each input is assigned a separate message text. A message received at input In5, for
example, is output with the message text for the SIG 5 signal.

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38). The block is
also installed automatically in the startup OB (OB100).
Further addressing is not required.

Startup characteristics
During startup, the message block suppresses all messages. The duration (number of cycles)
of message suppression is set at the RunUpCyc parameter. During restart (OB100) an internal
counter that is initialized with this value decrements each time the block is executed. Messages
are not generated if the counter value does not equal zero.
Messages whose alarm delay has not elapsed during this period are then output.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1682 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Message blocks
9.2 EventNck - Generating messages without acknowledgment

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


You can find a description for each parameter in section EventNck I/Os (Page 1689).

Status bit Parameter


0 In1.Value
1 In2.Value
2 In3.Value
3 In4.Value
4 In5.Value
5 In6.Value
6 In7.Value
7 In8.Value
8 InvIn1
9 InvIn2
10 InvIn3
11 InvIn4
12 InvIn5
13 InvIn6
14 InvIn7
15 InvIn8
16 In1 with inversion
17 In2 with inversion
18 In3 with inversion
19 In4 with inversion
20 In5 with inversion
21 In6 with inversion
22 In7 with inversion
23 In8 with inversion
24 In1 not connected
25 In2 not connected
26 In3 not connected
27 In4 not connected
28 In5 not connected
29 In6 not connected
30 In7 not connected
31 In8 not connected

Status word allocation for Status2 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 In1MsgEn
1 In2MsgEn
2 In3MsgEn

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1683
Message blocks
9.2 EventNck - Generating messages without acknowledgment

Status bit Parameter


3 In4MsgEn
4 In5MsgEn
5 In6MsgEn
6 In7MsgEn
7 In8MsgEn
8 AV1 not connected
9 AV2 not connected
10 AV3 not connected
11 AV4 not connected
12 AV5 not connected
13 AV6 not connected
14 AV7 not connected
15 AV8 not connected
16 Active signal 1 for messages
17 Active signal 2 for messages
18 Active signal 3 for messages
19 Active signal 4 for messages
20 Active signal 5 for messages
21 Active signal 6 for messages
22 Active signal 7 for messages
23 Active signal 8 for messages
24 MsgLock
25 - 31 Not used

See also
EventNck modes (Page 1684)
EventNck functions (Page 1685)
EventNck error handling (Page 1687)
EventNck messaging (Page 1688)
EventNck block diagram (Page 1693)

9.2.2 EventNck modes

EventNck modes
The block provides the following modes:
● On (Page 72)
● Out of service (Page 72)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1684 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Message blocks
9.2 EventNck - Generating messages without acknowledgment

"On"
General information on the "On" mode is available in the section On (Page 72).

"Out of service"
You can find general information about the "Out of service" mode in the section Out of
service (Page 72).

See also
Description of EventNck (Page 1682)
EventNck functions (Page 1685)
EventNck error handling (Page 1687)
EventNck messaging (Page 1688)
EventNck I/Os (Page 1689)
EventNck block diagram (Page 1693)

9.2.3 EventNck functions

Functions of EventNck
The functions for this block are listed below.

Activation and deactivation of messages


Set the I/Os In1MsgEn ... In8MsgEn accordingly to enable or disable the messages applied
to inputs In1 ... In8. All messages are activated by default.
To deactivate messages received at I/O In4, for example, you set I/O In4MsgEn = 0
accordingly.
You can deactivate all messages via I/O MsgLock = 1.

Delay of alarms
You can delay the alarms indicating signal changes.
For incoming alarms (signal change 0 - 1), set the delay at parameter AlmOnDly; for outgoing
alarms (signal change 1 - 0) set it at parameter AlmOffDly.
Enter 0 or a negative value to deactivate the delay.

Suppressing messages using the MsgLock parameter


This block provides the standard function Suppressing messages using the MsgLock
parameter (Page 214).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1685
Message blocks
9.2 EventNck - Generating messages without acknowledgment

Release for maintenance


This block provides the standard function Release for maintenance (Page 65).

Operator control permissions


The block has the following Operator control permissions (Page 265) for the OS_Perm
parameter:

Bit Function
0 Not used
1 1 = Operator can switch to "On" mode
2 Not used
3 1 = Operator can switch to "Out of service" mode
4 - 31 Not used

This block does not have a faceplate yet; the operator control permissions have already been
assigned in the planning phase for these faceplates.

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the section
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133). The following functionality is available
for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
1 Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 181)
22 Update acknowledgment and error status of the message call (Page 163)
27 Selecting values associated with messages (Page 159)

Forming the signal status for blocks


The block provides the standard function Forming and outputting the signal status for
technologic blocks (Page 110).
The block determines the worst signal status via all interconnected binary and analog inputs,
and outputs this value at ST_Worst.
● In1
etc. to
● In8
● AV1

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1686 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Message blocks
9.2 EventNck - Generating messages without acknowledgment

etc. to
● AV8

See also
Description of EventNck (Page 1682)
EventNck modes (Page 1684)
EventNck error handling (Page 1687)
EventNck messaging (Page 1688)
EventNck I/Os (Page 1689)
EventNck block diagram (Page 1693)

9.2.4 EventNck error handling

Error handling of EventNck


Refer to the section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions for the error handling
of all blocks.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum I/O can be used to output the following error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; the block is not processed.
0 There is no error.

See also
Description of EventNck (Page 1682)
EventNck modes (Page 1684)
EventNck functions (Page 1685)
EventNck messaging (Page 1688)
EventNck I/Os (Page 1689)
EventNck block diagram (Page 1693)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1687
Message blocks
9.2 EventNck - Generating messages without acknowledgment

9.2.5 EventNck messaging

Messaging
Messages not requiring acknowledgment are generated with NOTIFY_8P . The block uses the
PMC communication channel and has 8 digital inputs and 10 associated values.
Every edge transition detected for one or more digital inputs results in a message. The
associated values are assigned consistently to the message at the time of edge evaluation.
All 8 signals are assigned a common message number, which is split at the OS into 8
messages. The Engineering System (ES) assigns the message number automatically by
calling the message server.

Process messages

Message Message Message class Event


instance identifier
MsgEvId SIG 1 Operating message – without acknowledg‐ Text 1
ment
SIG 2 Operating message – without acknowledg‐ Text 2
ment
SIG 3 Operating message – without acknowledg‐ Text 3
ment
SIG 4 Operating message – without acknowledg‐ Text 4
ment
SIG 5 Operating message – without acknowledg‐ Text 5
ment
SIG 6 Operating message – without acknowledg‐ Text 6
ment
SIG 7 Operating message – without acknowledg‐ Text 7
ment
SIG 8 Operating message – without acknowledg‐ Text 8
ment

You can change the message class and the event to meet your needs at the block type and/
or block instance.

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId


You can use the Feature Bit Selecting values associated with messages (Page 159) to define
whether the signal status of the signal or the associated analog value is to be used as the
associated value for the message.

Associated value Block parameters


1 In1.ST
2 In2.ST
3 In3.ST
4 In4.ST

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1688 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Message blocks
9.2 EventNck - Generating messages without acknowledgment

Associated value Block parameters


5 In5.ST
6 In6.ST
7 In7.ST
8 In8.ST
9 Not allocated
10 Not allocated

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId

Associated value Block parameters


1 AV1.Value
2 AV2.Value
3 AV3.Value
4 AV4.Value
5 AV5.Value
6 AV6.Value
7 AV7.Value
8 AV8.Value
9 Not allocated
10 Not allocated

See also
Description of EventNck (Page 1682)
EventNck modes (Page 1684)
EventNck functions (Page 1685)
EventNck error handling (Page 1687)
EventNck I/Os (Page 1689)
EventNck block diagram (Page 1693)

9.2.6 EventNck I/Os

I/Os of EventNck

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1689
Message blocks
9.2 EventNck - Generating messages without acknowledgment

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AlmOnDly Alarm delay time [s] for signal transition REAL 0.0
0→1
AlmOffDly Alarm delay time [s] for signal transition REAL 0.0
1→0
AV1 Message associated value for In1 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV1_Unit Unit for AV1 INT 0
AV2 Message associated value for In2 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV2_Unit Unit for AV2 INT 0
AV3 Message associated value for In3 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV3_Unit Unit for AV3 INT 0
AV4 Message associated value for In4 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV4_Unit Unit for AV4 INT 0
AV5 Message associated value for In5 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV5_Unit Unit for AV5 INT 0
AV6 Message associated value for In6 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV6_Unit Unit for AV6 INT 0
AV7 Message associated value for In7 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV7_Unit Unit for AV7 INT 0
AV8 Message associated value for In8 STRUCT -
● Value: REAL ● 0.0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
AV8_Unit Unit for AV8 INT 0
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1690 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Message blocks
9.2 EventNck - Generating messages without acknowledgment

Parameter Description Type Default


Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 1685) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
In1 Input In1 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
In1MsgEn 1 = Activate message for input In1 BOOL 1
In2 Input In2 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
In2MsgEn 1 = Activate message for input In2 BOOL 1
In3 Input In3 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
In3MsgEn 1 = Activate message for input In3 BOOL 1
In4 Input In4 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
In4MsgEn 1 = Activate message for input In4 BOOL 1
In5 Input In5 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
In5MsgEn 1 = Activate message for input In5 BOOL 1
In6 Input In6 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
In6MsgEn 1 = Activate message for input In6 BOOL 1
In7 Input In7 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
In7MsgEn 1 = Activate message for input In7 BOOL 1
In8 Input In8 STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
In8MsgEn 1 = Activate message for input In8 BOOL 1
InvIn1 1 = Invert input In1 BOOL 0
InvIn2 1 = Invert input In2 BOOL 0
InvIn3 1 = Invert input In3 BOOL 0
InvIn4 1 = Invert input In4 BOOL 0
InvIn5 1 = Invert input In5 BOOL 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1691
Message blocks
9.2 EventNck - Generating messages without acknowledgment

Parameter Description Type Default


InvIn6 1 = Invert input In6 BOOL 0
InvIn7 1 = Invert input In7 BOOL 0
InvIn8 1 = Invert input In8 BOOL 0
MS_RelOp 1 = Release for maintenance by OS oper‐ BOOL 0
ator
MsgEvId Message number (assigned automatically) DWORD 16#00000000
MsgLock 1 = Suppress process messages. STRUCT -
Refer also to the Suppressing messages ● Value: BOOL ● 0
using the MsgLock parameter (Page 214) ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
section for more on this.
OnOp* 1 = "On" mode via operator BOOL 0
OosLi 1 = "Out of service", via interconnection or STRUCT -
SFC (0-1 edge transition) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosOp* 1 = "Out of service", via OS operator BOOL 0
OS_Perm I/O for operator control permissions STRUCT -
(Page 1685) ● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● ... ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
RunUpCyc Number of cycles in startup; messages are INT 3
suppressed during these cycles
SampleTime Sampling time [s] (assigned automatically) REAL 0.1
SelFp1 1 = Call a block saved in this parameter as ANY
an additional faceplate (Page 217) in the
standard view
SelFp2 1 = Call a block saved in this parameter as ANY
an additional faceplate (Page 217) in the
preview
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use in PCS 7 OS BYTE 16#00

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without er‐ BOOL 0
rors
ErrorNum Output of current error number. For error INT -1
numbers that can be output by this block,
see EventNck error handling (Page 1687).
MsgErr 1 = Alarm error (output ERROR of NOTI‐ BOOL 0
FY_8P)
MsgStat Alarm status (output STATUS of NOTI‐ WORD 16#0000
FY_8P)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1692 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Message blocks
9.2 EventNck - Generating messages without acknowledgment

Parameter Description Type Default


MS_Release Release for maintenance: STRUCT -
1 = Release for OS operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OnAct 1 = "On" mode enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosAct 1 = Block is "Out of service" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with settings changed DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
by the block algorithm
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
Status1 Status word 1 (Page 1682) DWORD 16#00000000
Status2 Status word 2 (Page 1682) DWORD 16#00000000

See also
EventNck modes (Page 1684)
EventNck messaging (Page 1688)
EventNck block diagram (Page 1693)
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133)

9.2.7 EventNck block diagram

EventNck block diagram


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

See also
Description of EventNck (Page 1682)
EventNck modes (Page 1684)
EventNck functions (Page 1685)
EventNck error handling (Page 1687)
EventNck messaging (Page 1688)
EventNck I/Os (Page 1689)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1693
Message blocks
9.3 EventTs - Creating messages with time stamp

9.3 EventTs - Creating messages with time stamp

9.3.1 Description of EventTs

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1812
Family: Report

Area of application for EventTs


The block is used for the following applications:
● Generating messages which have to be acknowledged for time-stamped signals

How it works
The block must be linked to a channel block and monitors up to eight different binary signals.
From these, it generates time-stamped messages requiring acknowledgment that appear in
the alarm view of the technological block to which it is connected.
The individual messages are assigned to the monitored signals via the inputs and the
messages released or blocked depending on the process status data. If a change is made to
one or more of the monitored signals enabled for reporting, a message is output containing a
time stamp for the signal change.
EventTs can operate independently or in combination with one of the technological blocks
that has the EventTsIn or EventTs2In input parameter. When this interconnection is
configured, the messages of the EventTs block are displayed in the OS of the alarm view of
the technological block and can also be acknowledged there. The following functions are
controlled by the technological block:
● Switching to "Out of service" mode and switching back to "On" mode: OosAct, OnAct
● Release for maintenance: MS_Release
● Suppressing messages using the MsgLock parameter
● Batch parameters: BatchEn, BatchID, BatchName, StepNo, Occupied

Note
The EventTs instance must be newly created between deleting the interconnection of
EventTs and the technological block and a delta download.

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38). The block is
also installed automatically in the startup OB (OB100) and in OB1 because of the time stamp.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1694 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Message blocks
9.3 EventTs - Creating messages with time stamp

If the EventTs operates together with a technological block, interconnect the output parameter
EventTsOut of the EventTs block and the input parameter EventTsIn or EventTs2In of
the technological block in the CFC.
Depending on how the time stamp is generated, the signals to be monitored for this are
interconnected at inputs In1 ... In8 or InTS1 ... InTS8. Each Inx or InTSx signal can also
be inverted via input Invx. A message is output if a signal value is changed (but taking
inversion into account).
Each input is assigned a separate message text. A message received at input InTS5, for
example, is output with the message text for the SIG 5 signal.
Configuration of the alarms for negative edges 1 → 0 in HW Config only effects the signal inputs
InTS1 ... InTS8 of EventTs.
If TimeStrampOn = 0 , meaning the inputs In1 ... In8 are used, you will have to set the input
Invx = 1 to generate an alarm 1 → 0 at input Inx for a negative edge.

Note
Interconnection of the block to multiple technological blocks is not permitted.

For the EventTs block, the Advanced Process Library contains process tag type templates;
these serve as examples by providing various application scenarios for this block.
Examples of process tag types:
● Motor with an additional analog value and time-stamped signals (Motor_AV_EventTs)
(Page 2429)

Startup characteristics
During startup, the message block suppresses all messages. The duration (number of cycles)
of message suppression is set at the RunUpCyc parameter. During restart (OB100) an internal
counter that is initialized with this value decrements each time the block is executed. Messages
are not generated if the counter value does not equal zero.

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


You can find a description for each parameter in section EventTs I/Os (Page 1704).

Status bit Parameter


0 Active signal 1
1 Active signal 2
2 Active signal 3
3 Active signal 4
4 Active signal 5
5 Active signal 6
6 Active signal 7
7 Active signal 8
8 InvIn1
9 InvIn2

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1695
Message blocks
9.3 EventTs - Creating messages with time stamp

Status bit Parameter


10 InvIn3
11 InvIn4
12 InvIn5
13 InvIn6
14 InvIn7
15 InvIn8
16 Active signal 1 with inversion
17 Active signal 2 with inversion
18 Active signal 3 with inversion
19 Active signal 4 with inversion
20 Active signal 5 with inversion
21 Active signal 6 with inversion
22 Active signal 7 with inversion
23 Active signal 8 with inversion
24 Active signal 1 not connected
25 Active signal 2 not connected
26 Active signal 3 not connected
27 Active signal 4 not connected
28 Active signal 5 not connected
29 Active signal 6 not connected
30 Active signal 7 not connected
31 Active signal 8 not connected

Status word allocation for Status2 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 In1MsgEn
1 In2MsgEn
2 In3MsgEn
3 In4MsgEn
4 In5MsgEn
5 In6MsgEn
6 In7MsgEn
7 In8MsgEn
8 Effective signal 1 for message
9 Effective signal 2 for message
10 Effective signal 3 for message
11 Effective signal 4 for message
12 Effective signal 5 for message
13 Effective signal 6 for message
14 Effective signal 7 for message
15 Effective signal 8 for message

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1696 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Message blocks
9.3 EventTs - Creating messages with time stamp

Status bit Parameter


16 MsgLock
17 - 24 Not used
25 Occupied
26 BatchEn
27 Batch - parameter exists
28 - 31 Not used

See also
EventTs block diagram (Page 1708)
EventTs messaging (Page 1701)
EventTs error handling (Page 1700)
EventTs functions (Page 1698)
EventTs modes (Page 1697)

9.3.2 EventTs modes

EventTs operating modes


The block provides the following modes:
● On (Page 72)
● Out of service (Page 72)

"On"
General information on the "On" mode is available in the section On (Page 72).

"Out of service"
You can find general information about the "Out of service" mode in the section Out of
service (Page 72).

See also
EventTs block diagram (Page 1708)
EventTs I/Os (Page 1704)
EventTs messaging (Page 1701)
EventTs error handling (Page 1700)
EventTs functions (Page 1698)
Description of EventTs (Page 1694)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1697
Message blocks
9.3 EventTs - Creating messages with time stamp

9.3.3 EventTs functions

Functions of EventTs
The functions for this block are listed below.

Activation and deactivation of messages


You can set the I/Os InMsgEn1 ... InMsgEn8 to individually enable or disable the messages
applied to inputs In1 ... In8 or InTS1 ... InTS8. All messages are activated by default.
To deactivate messages received at I/O InTS4, for example, you set I/O InMsgEn4 = 0
accordingly.
You can deactivate all messages via I/O MsgLock = 1 .

Suppressing messages using the MsgLock parameter


This block provides the standard function Suppressing messages using the MsgLock
parameter (Page 214).

Time stamp as associated value of a message


You can use input TimeStampOn to select how the time stamp for the signals of EventTs will
be generated:
● If you want to use the high-precision time stamp from the I/O devices, set
TimeStampOn = 1. Interconnect one of the InTSx inputs with output TS_Out of block
Pcs7DiIT.
● If you want to use the time stamp from the CPU, set
TimeStampOn = 0. Interconnect one of the Inx inputs with output PV_Out of block
Pcs7DiIT or with an appropriate output of a different block.
For additional time stamp properties, refer to the description of the standard function Time
stamp (Page 214).

Signal status as associated value of a message


The signal status as an associated value of the message is output for every signal, as is the
time stamp.

Release for maintenance


This block provides the standard function Release for maintenance (Page 65).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1698 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Message blocks
9.3 EventTs - Creating messages with time stamp

Operator permissions
The block has the following Operator control permissions (Page 265) for the OS_Perm
parameter:

Bit Function
0 Not used
1 1 = Operator can switch to "On" mode
2 Not used
3 1 = Operator can switch to "Out of service" mode
4 - 31 Not used

This block does not have a faceplate yet; the operator permissions have already been assigned
in the planning phase for these faceplates.

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Configurable functions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133) . The following functionality is
available for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
1 Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 181)
8 Reporting with BATCH parameters (Page 160)
9 Enable external message (Page 189)
22 Update acknowledgment and error status of the message call (Page 163)

Displaying and outputting the signal status


The block provides the standard function Forming and outputting the signal status for
technologic blocks (Page 110).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1699
Message blocks
9.3 EventTs - Creating messages with time stamp

The block determines the worst signal status via all interconnected binary inputs (according
to TimeStampOn) and outputs this value at ST_Worst.
● TimeStampOn = 0
– In1
etc. to
– In8
● TimeStampOn = 1
– InTS1
etc. to
– InTS8

See also
EventTs block diagram (Page 1708)
EventTs I/Os (Page 1704)
EventTs messaging (Page 1701)
EventTs error handling (Page 1700)
EventTs modes (Page 1697)
Description of EventTs (Page 1694)

9.3.4 EventTs error handling

Error handling of EventTs


Refer to the section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions for the error handling
of all blocks.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum I/O can be used to output the following error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; the block is not processed.
0 There is no error.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1700 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Message blocks
9.3 EventTs - Creating messages with time stamp

See also
EventTs block diagram (Page 1708)
EventTs I/Os (Page 1704)
EventTs messaging (Page 1701)
EventTs functions (Page 1698)
EventTs modes (Page 1697)
Description of EventTs (Page 1694)

9.3.5 EventTs messaging

Messaging
Messages which can be acknowledged are generated using ALARM_8P. The ALARM_8P has
8 digital inputs and 10 associated values. Every edge transition detected for one or more digital
inputs results in a message. The associated values are assigned consistently to the message
at the time of edge evaluation. All 8 signals are assigned a common message number, which
is split at the OS into 8 messages. The Engineering System (ES) assigns the message number
automatically by calling the message server.

Process messages

Message Message iden‐ Message class Event


instance tifier
MsgEvId SIG 1 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
1 sage - fault InTS1 Status 16#@1%x@
SIG 2 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS2 Status 16#@2%x@
SIG 3 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS3 Status 16#@3%x@
SIG 4 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS1 Status 16#@4%x@
SIG 5 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS5 Status 16#@5%x@
SIG 6 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS6 Status 16#@6%x@
SIG 7 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS7 Status 16#@7%x@
SIG 8 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS8 Status 16#@8%x@

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1701
Message blocks
9.3 EventTs - Creating messages with time stamp

The following applies for TimeStampOn = 0 : 16#@n%x@ (n = 1 ... 8): The value contains the
signal status of In1 ... In8
The following applies for TimeStampOn = 1 : 16#@n%x@ (n = 1 ... 8): Statement on the validity
of the time stamp from InTS0 ... InTS8. If the value is 80, the time stamp is formed by the I/
O. If the value is ≠ 80, the time stamp of the I/O is invalid; the time stamp is generated by the
CPU as a substitute and is therefore not exact.
You can change the message class and the event to meet your needs at the block type and/
or block instance.

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId

Associated value Block parameters


1 TimeStampOn = 0: In1.ST
2 TimeStampOn = 0: In2.ST
3 TimeStampOn = 0: In3.ST
4 TimeStampOn = 0: In4.ST
5 TimeStampOn = 0: In5.ST
6 TimeStampOn = 0: In6.ST
7 TimeStampOn = 0: In7.ST
8 TimeStampOn = 0: In8.ST
9 Not allocated
10 Not allocated

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId

Associated value Block parameters


1 TimeStampOn = 1: InTS1.ST
2 TimeStampOn = 1: InTS2.ST
3 TimeStampOn = 1: InTS3.ST
4 TimeStampOn = 1: InTS4.ST
5 TimeStampOn = 1: InTS5.ST
6 TimeStampOn = 1: InTS6.ST
7 TimeStampOn = 1: InTS7.ST
8 TimeStampOn = 1: InTS8.ST
9 Not allocated
10 Not allocated

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1702 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Message blocks
9.3 EventTs - Creating messages with time stamp

The batch information is transmitted with Feature bit 8 =1:


The first three associated values are described as follows and are followed by the signal status
of the input signals or the validity of the time stamp depending on TimeStampOn:

Associated value Block parameters


1 BatchName
2 StepNo
3 BatchId
4 In1.ST / InTS1.ST
5 In2.ST / InTS2.ST
6 In3.ST / InTS3.ST
7 In4.ST / InTS4.ST
8 In5.ST / InTS5.ST
9 In6.ST / InTS6.ST

The tenth associated value is not available.


Enter the batch ID @1%s@ under "Properties - Block - Special properties - Messages
extended - Message texts block".
The associated values in the process messages (event) must be incremented by 3:

Message Message iden‐ Message class Event


instance tifier
MsgEvId SIG 1 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
1 sage - fault InTS1 Status 16#@4%x@
SIG 2 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS2 Status 16#@5%x@
SIG 3 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS3 Status 16#@6%x@
SIG 4 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS1 Status 16#@7%x@
SIG 5 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS5 Status 16#@8%x@
SIG 6 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS6 Status 16#@9%x@
SIG 7 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS7 Status1
SIG 8 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS8 Status1
1
You cannot specify a separate associated value here.

See also
EventTs block diagram (Page 1708)
EventTs I/Os (Page 1704)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1703
Message blocks
9.3 EventTs - Creating messages with time stamp

EventTs error handling (Page 1700)


EventTs functions (Page 1698)
EventTs modes (Page 1697)
Description of EventTs (Page 1694)
Selecting values associated with messages (Page 159)

9.3.6 EventTs I/Os


I/Os of EventTs

Inputs

Parameter Description Type Default


BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation BOOL 0
BatchID Batch ID DWORD 16#00
BatchName Batch name S7-string
EN 1 = Called block will be pro‐ BOOL 1
cessed
ExtVal01 External message 1 ANY
ExtVal02 External message 2 ANY
ExtVal03 External message 3 ANY
Feature I/O for additional functions STRUCT -
(Page 1698) ● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
In1 Signal 1 for CPU time stamp STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
In2 Signal 2 for CPU time stamp STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
In3 Signal 3 for CPU time stamp STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
In4 Signal 4 for CPU time stamp STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
In5 Signal 5 for CPU time stamp STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1704 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Message blocks
9.3 EventTs - Creating messages with time stamp

Parameter Description Type Default


In6 Signal 6 for CPU time stamp STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
In7 Signal 7 for CPU time stamp STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
In8 Signal 8 for CPU time stamp STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
InTS1 Signal 1 with I/O-device time ANY
stamp
InTS2 Signal 2 with I/O-device time ANY
stamp
InTS3 Signal 3 with I/O-device time ANY
stamp
InTS4 Signal 4 with I/O-device time ANY
stamp
InTS5 Signal 5 with I/O-device time ANY
stamp
InTS6 Signal 6 with I/O-device time ANY
stamp
InTS7 Signal 7 with I/O-device time ANY
stamp
InTS8 Signal 8 with I/O-device time ANY
stamp
Inv1 1 = Invert input In1 or InTS1 BOOL 0
Inv2 1 = Invert input In2 or InTS2 BOOL 0
Inv3 1 = Invert input In3 or InTS3 BOOL 0
Inv4 1 = Invert input In4 or InTS4 BOOL 0
Inv5 1 = Invert input In5 or InTS5 BOOL 0
Inv6 1 = Invert input In6 or InTS6 BOOL 0
Inv7 1 = Invert input In7 or InTS7 BOOL 0
Inv8 1 = Invert input In8 or InTS8 BOOL 0
MsgEn1 1 = Activate message for in‐ BOOL 1
put In1 or InTS1
MsgEn2 1 = Activate message for in‐ BOOL 1
put In2 or InTS2
MsgEn3 1 = Activate message for in‐ BOOL 1
put In3 or InTS3
MsgEn4 1 = Activate message for in‐ BOOL 1
put In4 or InTS4
MsgEn5 1 = Activate message for in‐ BOOL 1
put In5 or InTS5
MsgEn6 1 = Activate message for in‐ BOOL 1
put In6 or InTS6

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1705
Message blocks
9.3 EventTs - Creating messages with time stamp

Parameter Description Type Default


MsgEn7 1 = Activate message for in‐ BOOL 1
put In7 or InTS7
MsgEn8 1 = Activate message for in‐ BOOL 1
put In8 or InTS8
MsgEvId Message number (assigned DWORD 16#00000000
automatically)
MsgLock 1 = Suppress process mes‐ STRUCT -
sages. ● Value: BOOL ● 0
See also the section Sup‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
pressing messages using the
MsgLock parameter
(Page 214) for more on this.
MS_RelOp 1 = Release for maintenance BOOL 0
by OS operator
Occupied 1 = In use by a batch BOOL 0
OnOp* 1 = "On" mode via operator BOOL 0
OosLi 1 = "Out of service", via inter‐ STRUCT -
connection or SFC (0-1 edge ● Value: BOOL ● 0
transition)
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosOp* 1 = "Out of service", via OS BOOL 0
operator
OS_Perm I/O for EventTs functions STRUCT -
(Page 1698) ● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● ... ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
RunUpCyc Number of cycles in startup; INT 3
messages are suppressed
during these cycles
SampleTime Sampling time [s] (assigned REAL 0.1
automatically)
SelFp1 1 = Call a block saved in this ANY
parameter as an additional
faceplate (Page 217) in the
standard view
SelFp2 1 = Call a block saved in this ANY
parameter as an additional
faceplate (Page 217) in the
standard view
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00
TimeStampOn 0 = Use time stamp of the BOOL 0
CPU
1 = Use time stamp of the I/O
devices
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use BYTE 16#00
in PCS 7 OS

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1706 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Message blocks
9.3 EventTs - Creating messages with time stamp

Outputs

Parameter Description Type Default


ENO 1 = Block algorithm comple‐ BOOL 0
ted without errors
ErrorNum Output of pending error num‐ INT -1
ber. For error numbers that
can be output by this block,
see EventTs error handling
(Page 1700)
EventTsOut For maneuvering of data be‐ STRUCT
tween a technological block
and the message blocks
EventTs, Event16Ts.
MS_Release Release for maintenance: STRUCT -
1 = Release for OS operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MsgAckn Message acknowledgment WORD 16#0000
status (output ACK_STATE of
ALARM_8P)
MsgErr 1 = Message error (output BOOL 0
ERROR of ALARM_8P)
MsgStat Message status (output WORD 16#0000
STATUS of ALARM_8P)
OnAct 1 = "On" mode enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosAct 1 = Block is "Out of service" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with set‐ DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
tings changed by the block al‐
gorithm
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
Status1 Status word 1 (Page 1694) DWORD 16#00000000
Status2 Status word 2 (Page 1694) DWORD 16#00000000

See also
EventTs block diagram (Page 1708)
EventTs messaging (Page 1701)
EventTs modes (Page 1697)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1707
Message blocks
9.3 EventTs - Creating messages with time stamp

9.3.7 EventTs block diagram

EventTs block diagram


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

See also
EventTs I/Os (Page 1704)
EventTs messaging (Page 1701)
EventTs error handling (Page 1700)
EventTs functions (Page 1698)
EventTs modes (Page 1697)
Description of EventTs (Page 1694)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1708 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Message blocks
9.4 Event16Ts - Creating 16 messages with time stamp

9.4 Event16Ts - Creating 16 messages with time stamp

9.4.1 Description of Event16Ts

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1887
Family: Report

Area of application for Event16Ts


The block is used for the following applications:
● Generating messages which have to be acknowledged for time-stamped signals
For Event16Ts block, use the templates for the process tag types of the EventTs block in the
Advanced Process Library as examples with various use cases. Replace the EventTs block
with the Event16Ts block.

How it works
The block monitors up to sixteen different binary signals, connect the block to a channel block.
The block generates time-stamped messages requiring acknowledgment that appear in the
alarm view of the technological block to which it is connected.
The individual messages are assigned to the monitored signals via the inputs and the
messages released or blocked depending on the process status data. If a change is made to
one or more of the monitored signals enabled for reporting, a message is output containing a
time stamp for the signal change.
Event16Ts can operate independently or in combination with one of the technological blocks
that has the EventTsIn or EventTs2In input parameter. When the interconnection is
configured, the messages of the Event16Ts block are displayed in the OS of the alarm view
of the technological block and you can also acknowledge the messages. The following
functions are controlled by the technological block:
● Switching to "Out of service" mode and switching back to "On" mode: OosAct, OnAct
● Release for maintenance: MS_Release
● Suppressing messages using the MsgLock parameter
● Batch parameters: BatchEn, BatchID, BatchName, StepNo, Occupied

Note
The Event16Ts instance must be newly created between deleting the interconnection of
Event16Ts and the technological block and a delta download.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1709
Message blocks
9.4 Event16Ts - Creating 16 messages with time stamp

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38). The block is
also installed automatically in the startup OB (OB100) and in OB1 because for time stamping.
If the Event16Ts operates together with a technological block, interconnect the output
parameter EventTsOut of the Event16Ts block and the input parameter EventTsIn or
EventTs2In of the technological block in the CFC.
Depending on how the time stamp is generated, the signals to be monitored for this are
interconnected at inputs In1 ... In16 or InTS1 ... InTS16. Each Inx or InTSx signal can
also be inverted via input Invx. If a signal value changes taking inversion into account, a
message is output.

Note
1. The input parameters ExtVal01, ExtVal02, and ExtVal03 will be used for In1...In8
and InTS1...InTS8.
2. The input parameters ExtVal04, ExtVal05, and ExtVal06 will be used for In9...In16
and InTS9...InTS16.

Each input is assigned a separate message text. A message received at input InTS5, for
example, is output with the message text for the SIG 5 signal.
Configuration of the alarms for negative edges 1 → 0 in HW Config only effects the signal inputs
InTS1 ... InTS16 of Event16Ts.
If TimeStrampOn = 0 , meaning the inputs In1 ... In16 are used, you will have to set the
input Invx = 1 to generate an alarm 1 → 0 at input Inx for a negative edge.

Note
Interconnection of the block to multiple technological blocks is not permitted.

For the Event16Ts block, the Advanced Process Library contains templates for process tag
types as an example with various application scenarios for this block.
Examples of process tag types:
● Motor with an additional analog value and time-stamped signals (Motor_AV_EventTs)
(Page 2429)

Startup characteristics
During startup, the message block suppresses all messages. The duration (number of cycles)
of message suppression is set at the RunUpCyc parameter. During restart (OB100) an internal
counter that is initialized with this value decrements each time the block is executed. Messages
are not generated if the counter value does not equal zero.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1710 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Message blocks
9.4 Event16Ts - Creating 16 messages with time stamp

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


You can find a description for each parameter in section I/Os of Event16Ts.

Status bit Parameter


0 Active signal 1 with inversion
1 Active signal 2 with inversion
2 Active signal 3 with inversion
3 Active signal 4 with inversion
4 Active signal 5 with inversion
5 Active signal 6 with inversion
6 Active signal 7 with inversion
7 Active signal 8 with inversion
8 Active signal 9 with inversion
9 Active signal 10 with inversion
10 Active signal 11 with inversion
11 Active signal 12 with inversion
12 Active signal 13 with inversion
13 Active signal 14 with inversion
14 Active signal 15 with inversion
15 Active signal 16 with inversion
16 Active signal 1 not connected
17 Active signal 2 not connected
18 Active signal 3 not connected
19 Active signal 4 not connected
20 Active signal 5 not connected
21 Active signal 6 not connected
22 Active signal 7 not connected
23 Active signal 8 not connected
24 Active signal 9 not connected
25 Active signal 10 not connected
26 Active signal 11 not connected
27 Active signal 12 not connected
28 Active signal 13 not connected
29 Active signal 14 not connected
30 Active signal 15 not connected
31 Active signal 16 not connected

Status word allocation for Status2 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 Active signal 1
1 Active signal 2
2 Active signal 3

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1711
Message blocks
9.4 Event16Ts - Creating 16 messages with time stamp

Status bit Parameter


3 Active signal 4
4 Active signal 5
5 Active signal 6
6 Active signal 7
7 Active signal 8
8 Active signal 9
9 Active signal 10
10 Active signal 11
11 Active signal 12
12 Active signal 13
13 Active signal 14
14 Active signal 15
15 Active signal 16
16 InvIn1
17 InvIn2
18 InvIn3
19 InvIn4
20 InvIn5
21 InvIn6
22 InvIn7
23 InvIn8
24 InvIn9
25 InvIn10
26 InvIn11
27 InvIn12
28 InvIn13
29 InvIn14
30 InvIn15
31 InvIn16

Status word allocation for Status3 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 In1MsgEn
1 In2MsgEn
2 In3MsgEn
3 In4MsgEn
4 In5MsgEn
5 In6MsgEn
6 In7MsgEn
7 In8MsgEn
8 In9MsgEn

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1712 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Message blocks
9.4 Event16Ts - Creating 16 messages with time stamp

Status bit Parameter


9 In10MsgEn
10 In11MsgEn
11 In12MsgEn
12 In13MsgEn
13 In14MsgEn
14 In15MsgEn
15 In16MsgEn
16 Effective signal 1 for message
17 Effective signal 2 for message
18 Effective signal 3 for message
19 Effective signal 4 for message
20 Effective signal 5 for message
21 Effective signal 6 for message
22 Effective signal 7 for message
23 Effective signal 8 for message
24 Effective signal 9 for message
25 Effective signal 10 for message
26 Effective signal 11 for message
27 Effective signal 12 for message
28 Effective signal 13 for message
29 Effective signal 14 for message
30 Effective signal 15 for message
31 Effective signal 16 for message

Status word allocation for Status4 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0-7 Not used
8 - 15 Not used
16 MsgLock
7 - 24 Not used
25 Occupied
26 BatchEn
27 Batch - parameter exists
28 - 31 Not used

See also
Event16Ts block diagram (Page 1725)
Event16Ts I/Os (Page 1723)
Event16Ts messages (Page 1717)
Event16Ts error handling (Page 1717)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1713
Message blocks
9.4 Event16Ts - Creating 16 messages with time stamp

Event16Ts functions (Page 1714)


Event16Ts operating modes (Page 1714)

9.4.2 Event16Ts operating modes

Event16Ts operating modes


The block provides the following modes:
● On (Page 72)
● Out of service (Page 72)

"On"
General information on the "On" mode is available in the section On (Page 72).

"Out of service"
You can find general information about the "Out of service" mode in the section Out of
service (Page 72).

See also
Event16Ts block diagram (Page 1725)
Event16Ts I/Os (Page 1723)
Event16Ts messages (Page 1717)
Event16Ts error handling (Page 1717)
Event16Ts functions (Page 1714)
Description of Event16Ts (Page 1709)

9.4.3 Event16Ts functions

Functions of Event16Ts
The functions for this block are listed below.

Activation and deactivation of messages


You can set the I/Os InMsgEn1 ... InMsgEn8 to individually enable or disable the messages
applied to inputs In1 ... In8 or InTS1 ... InTS8. All messages are activated by default.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1714 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Message blocks
9.4 Event16Ts - Creating 16 messages with time stamp

To deactivate messages received at I/O InTS4, for example, you set I/O InMsgEn4 = 0
accordingly.
You can deactivate all messages via I/O MsgLock = 1 .

Suppressing messages using the MsgLock parameter


This block provides the standard function Suppressing messages using the MsgLock
parameter (Page 214).

Time stamp as associated value of a message


You can use input TimeStampOn to select how the time stamp for the signals of Event16Ts
will be generated:
● If you want to use the high-precision time stamp from the I/O devices, set
TimeStampOn = 1. Interconnect one of the InTSx inputs with output TS_Out of block
Pcs7DiIT.
● If you want to use the time stamp from the CPU, set
TimeStampOn = 0. Interconnect one of the Inx inputs with output PV_Out of block
Pcs7DiIT or with an appropriate output of a different block.
For additional time stamp properties, refer to the description of the standard function Time
stamp (Page 214).

Signal status as associated value of a message


The signal status as an associated value of the message is output for every signal, as is the
time stamp.

Release for maintenance


This block provides the standard function Release for maintenance (Page 65).

Operator permissions
The block has the following Operator control permissions (Page 265) for the OS_Perm
parameter:

Bit Function
0 Not used
1 1 = Operator can switch to "On" mode
2 Not used
3 1 = Operator can switch to "Out of service" mode
4 - 31 Not used

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1715
Message blocks
9.4 Event16Ts - Creating 16 messages with time stamp

This block does not have a faceplate yet; the operator permissions have already been assigned
in the planning phase for these faceplates.

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Configurable functions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133) . The following functionality is
available for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
1 Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 181)
8 Reporting with BATCH parameters (Page 160)
9 Enable external message (Page 189)
22 Update acknowledgment and error status of the message call (Page 163)

Displaying and outputting the signal status


The block provides the standard function Forming and outputting the signal status for
technologic blocks (Page 110).
The block determines the worst signal status via all interconnected binary inputs (according
to TimeStampOn) and outputs this value at ST_Worst.
● TimeStampOn = 0
– In1
etc. to
– In16
● TimeStampOn = 1
– InTS1
etc. to
– InTS16

See also
Event16Ts block diagram (Page 1725)
Event16Ts I/Os (Page 1723)
Event16Ts messages (Page 1717)
Event16Ts error handling (Page 1717)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1716 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Message blocks
9.4 Event16Ts - Creating 16 messages with time stamp

Event16Ts operating modes (Page 1714)


Description of Event16Ts (Page 1709)

9.4.4 Event16Ts error handling

Error handling of EventTs


Refer to the section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions for the error handling
of all blocks.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum I/O can be used to output the following error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; the block is not executed.
0 There is no error.

See also
Event16Ts block diagram (Page 1725)
Event16Ts I/Os (Page 1723)
Event16Ts messages (Page 1717)
Event16Ts functions (Page 1714)
Event16Ts operating modes (Page 1714)
Description of Event16Ts (Page 1709)

9.4.5 Event16Ts messages

Messaging
Messages which can be acknowledged are generated using ALARM_8P. The ALARM_8P has
8 digital inputs and 10 associated values. Every edge transition detected for one or more digital
inputs results in a message. The associated values are assigned consistently to the message
at the time of edge evaluation. All 8 signals are assigned a common message number, which
is split at the OS into 8 messages. The Engineering System (ES) assigns the message number
automatically by calling the message server.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1717
Message blocks
9.4 Event16Ts - Creating 16 messages with time stamp

Process messages (MsgEvId1)

Message Message iden‐ Message class Event


instance tifier
MsgEvId SIG 1 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
1 sage - fault InTS1 Status 16#@1%x@
SIG 2 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS2 Status 16#@2%x@
SIG 3 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS3 Status 16#@3%x@
SIG 4 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS4 Status 16#@4%x@
SIG 5 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS5 Status 16#@5%x@
SIG 6 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS6 Status 16#@6%x@
SIG 7 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS7 Status 16#@7%x@
SIG 8 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS8 Status 16#@8%x@

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment
The following applies for TimeStampOn = 0 : 16#@n%x@ (n = 1 ... 8): The value contains the
signal status of In1 ... In8
The following applies for TimeStampOn = 1 : 16#@n%x@ (n = 1 ... 8): Statement on the validity
of the time stamp from InTS0 ... InTS8. If the value is 80, the time stamp is formed by the I/
O. If the value is ≠ 80, the time stamp of the I/O is invalid; the time stamp is generated by the
CPU as a substitute and is therefore not exact.
You can change the message class and the event to meet your needs at the block type and/
or block instance.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1718 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Message blocks
9.4 Event16Ts - Creating 16 messages with time stamp

Process messages (MsgEvId2)

Message Message iden‐ Message class Event


instance tifier
MsgEvId SIG 1 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
2 sage - fault InTS9 Status 16#@1%x@
SIG 2 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS10 Status 16#@2%x@
SIG 3 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS11 Status 16#@3%x@
SIG 4 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS12 Status 16#@4%x@
SIG 5 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS13 Status 16#@5%x@
SIG 6 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS14 Status 16#@6%x@
SIG 7 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS15 Status 16#@7%x@
SIG 8 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS16 Status 16#@8%x@

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment
The following applies for TimeStampOn = 0 : 16#@n%x@ (n = 1 ... 8): The value contains the
signal status of In9 ... In16
The following applies for TimeStampOn = 1 : 16#@n%x@ (n = 1 ... 8): Statement on the validity
of the time stamp from InTS9 ... InTS16. If the value is 80, the time stamp is formed by the
I/O. If the value is ≠ 80, the time stamp of the I/O is invalid; the time stamp is generated by the
CPU as a substitute and is therefore not exact.
You can change the message class and the event to meet your needs at the block type and/
or block instance.

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId1

Associated value Block parameters


1 TimeStampOn = 0: In1.ST
2 TimeStampOn = 0: In2.ST
3 TimeStampOn = 0: In3.ST
4 TimeStampOn = 0: In4.ST
5 TimeStampOn = 0: In5.ST
6 TimeStampOn = 0: In6.ST
7 TimeStampOn = 0: In7.ST
8 TimeStampOn = 0: In8.ST
9 Not allocated
10 Not allocated

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1719
Message blocks
9.4 Event16Ts - Creating 16 messages with time stamp

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId2

Associated value Block parameters


1 TimeStampOn = 1: In9.ST
2 TimeStampOn = 1: In10.ST
3 TimeStampOn = 1: In11.ST
4 TimeStampOn = 1: In12.ST
5 TimeStampOn = 1: In13.ST
6 TimeStampOn = 1: In14.ST
7 TimeStampOn = 1: In15.ST
8 TimeStampOn = 1: In16.ST
9 Not allocated
10 Not allocated

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId1

Associated value Block parameters


1 TimeStampOn = 0: InTS1.ST
2 TimeStampOn = 0: InTS2.ST
3 TimeStampOn = 0: InTS3.ST
4 TimeStampOn = 0: InTS4.ST
5 TimeStampOn = 0: InTS5.ST
6 TimeStampOn = 0: InTS6.ST
7 TimeStampOn = 0: InTS7.ST
8 TimeStampOn = 0: InTS8.ST
9 Not allocated
10 Not allocated

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId2

Associated value Block parameters


1 TimeStampOn = 0: InTS9.ST
2 TimeStampOn = 0: InTS10.ST
3 TimeStampOn = 0: InTS11.ST
4 TimeStampOn = 0: InTS12.ST
5 TimeStampOn = 0: InTS13.ST
6 TimeStampOn = 0: InTS614.ST
7 TimeStampOn = 0: InTS15.ST
8 TimeStampOn = 0: InTS16.ST
9 Not allocated
10 Not allocated

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1720 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Message blocks
9.4 Event16Ts - Creating 16 messages with time stamp

The batch information is transmitted with Feature bit 8 =1:


The first three associated values are described as follows and are followed by the signal status
of the input signals or the validity of the time stamp depending on TimeStampOn:

MsgEvId1

Associated value Block parameters


1 BatchName
2 StepNo
3 BatchId
4 In1.ST / InTS1.ST
5 In2.ST / InTS2.ST
6 In3.ST / InTS3.ST
7 In4.ST / InTS4.ST
8 In5.ST / InTS5.ST
9 In6.ST / InTS6.ST

MsgEvId2

Associated value Block parameters


1 BatchName
2 StepNo
3 BatchId
4 In7.ST / InTS7.ST
5 In8ST / InTS8.ST8
6 In9.ST / InTS9.ST
7 In10.ST / InTS10.ST
8 In11.ST / InTS11.ST
9 I12.ST / InTS12.ST

The tenth associated value is not available.


Enter the batch ID @1%s@ under "Properties - Block - Special properties - Messages
extended - Message texts block".

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1721
Message blocks
9.4 Event16Ts - Creating 16 messages with time stamp

The associated values in the process messages (event) must be incremented by 3:

Message Message Message class Event


instance identifier
MsgEvId1 SIG 1 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS1 Status 16#@4%x@
SIG 2 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS2 Status 16#@5%x@
SIG 3 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS3 Status 16#@6%x@
SIG 4 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS4 Status 16#@7%x@
SIG 5 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS5 Status 16#@8%x@
SIG 6 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS6 Status 16#@9%x@
SIG 7 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS7 Status1
SIG 8 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS8 Status1
1
You cannot specify a separate associated value here.

Message Message iden‐ Message class Event


instance tifier
MsgEvId SIG 1 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
2 sage - fault InTS9 Status 16#@4%x@
SIG 2 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS10 Status 16#@5%x@
SIG 3 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS11 Status 16#@6%x@
SIG 4 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS12 Status 16#@7%x@
SIG 5 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS13 Status 16#@8%x@
SIG 6 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS14 Status 16#@9%x@
SIG 7 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS15 Status1
SIG 8 AS process control mes‐ $$BlockComment$$
sage - fault InTS16 Status1
1
You cannot specify a separate associated value here.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1722 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Message blocks
9.4 Event16Ts - Creating 16 messages with time stamp

See also
Event16Ts block diagram (Page 1725)
Event16Ts I/Os (Page 1723)
Event16Ts error handling (Page 1717)
Event16Ts functions (Page 1714)
Event16Ts operating modes (Page 1714)
Description of Event16Ts (Page 1709)
Selecting values associated with messages (Page 159)

9.4.6 Event16Ts I/Os


I/Os of EventTs

Inputs

Parameter Description Type Default


BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation BOOL 0
BatchID Batch ID DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name S7-string
EN 1 = Called block will be pro‐ BOOL 1
cessed
Feature I/O for additional functions STRUCT -
(Page 1714) ● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
ExtVal01 External message 1 ANY
ExtVal02 External message 2 ANY
ExtVal03 External message 3 ANY
ExtVal04 External message 4 ANY
ExtVal05 External message 5 ANY
ExtVal06 External message 6 ANY
In1..In16 Signal 1..16 for CPU time STRUCT -
stamp ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#FF
InTS1..InTS16 Signal 1..16 with I/O-device ANY
time stamp
Inv1..Inc16 1 = Invert input In1..In16 BOOL 0
or InTS1..InTS16
MsgEn1..MsgEn16 1 = Activate message for in‐ BOOL 1
put In1..In16 or
InTS1..InTS16

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1723
Message blocks
9.4 Event16Ts - Creating 16 messages with time stamp

Parameter Description Type Default


MsgEvId1 Message number (assigned DWORD 16#00000000
automatically)
MsgEvId2 Message number (assigned DWORD 16#00000000
automatically)
MsgLock 1 = Suppress process mes‐ STRUCT -
sages. ● Value: BOOL ● 0
See also the section Sup‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
pressing messages using the
MsgLock parameter
(Page 214) for more on this.
MS_RelOp 1 = Release for maintenance BOOL 0
by OS operator
Occupied 1 = In use by a batch BOOL 0
OnOp* 1 = "On" mode via operator BOOL 0
OosLi 1 = "Out of service", via inter‐ STRUCT -
connection or SFC (0-1 edge ● Value: BOOL ● 0
transition)
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosOp* 1 = "Out of service", via OS BOOL 0
operator
OS_Perm I/O for Event16Ts functions STRUCT -
(Page 1714) ● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● ... ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
RunUpCyc Number of cycles in startup; INT 3
messages are suppressed
during these cycles
SampleTime Sampling time [s] (assigned REAL 0.1
automatically)
SelFp1 1 = Call a block saved in this ANY
parameter as an additional
faceplate (Page 217) in the
standard view
SelFp2 1 = Call a block saved in this ANY
parameter as an additional
faceplate (Page 217) in the
standard view
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
TimeStampOn 0 = Use time stamp of the BOOL 0
CPU
1 = Use time stamp of the I/O
devices
UserStatus Freely assignable bits for use BYTE 16#00000000
in PCS 7 OS

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1724 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Message blocks
9.4 Event16Ts - Creating 16 messages with time stamp

Outputs

Parameter Description Type Default


ENO 1 = Block algorithm comple‐ BOOL 0
ted without errors
ErrorNum Output of pending error num‐ INT -1
ber. For error numbers that
can be output by this block,
see Event16Ts error han‐
dling (Page 1717)
EventTsOut For maneuvering of data be‐ STRUCT
tween a technological block
and the message blocks
EventTs, Event16Ts.
MS_Release Release for maintenance: STRUCT -
1 = Release for OS operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MsgAckn1..MsgAckn2 Message acknowledgment WORD 16#0000
status (output ACK_STATE of
ALARM_8P)
MsgErr1..MsgErr2 1 = Message error (output BOOL 0
ERROR of ALARM_8P)
MsgStat1..MsgStat2 Message status (output WORD 16#0000
STATUS of ALARM_8P)
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with set‐ DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
tings changed by the block al‐
gorithm
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
Status1 Status word 1 (Page 1709) DWORD 16#00000000
Status2 Status word 2 (Page 1709) DWORD 16#00000000
Status3 Status word 3 (Page 1714) DWORD 16#00000000
Status4 Status word 4 (Page 1714) DWORD 16#00000000

See also
Event16Ts block diagram (Page 1725)
Event16Ts messages (Page 1717)

9.4.7 Event16Ts block diagram

EventTs block diagram


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1725
Message blocks
9.4 Event16Ts - Creating 16 messages with time stamp

See also
Event16Ts I/Os (Page 1723)
Event16Ts messages (Page 1717)
Event16Ts error handling (Page 1717)
Event16Ts functions (Page 1714)
Event16Ts operating modes (Page 1714)
Description of Event16Ts (Page 1709)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1726 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Counter blocks 10
10.1 CountScL - Counter with up and down counting direction

10.1.1 Description of CountScL

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1806
Family: Count

Area of application for CountScL


The block is used for the following applications:
● Count up or count down with rising edge of the binary input signal.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1727
Counter blocks
10.1 CountScL - Counter with up and down counting direction

How it works
Positive edges at the binary input signal In increment or decrement the count value at Out,
depending on settings.
1. Count up (UpOp = 1 or UpLi =1)
The block counts up for each rising edge of In. (Output parameter CountMode = 1)
2. Count down (DnOp = 1 or DnLi = 1)
The block counts down for each rising edge of In. (Output parameter CountMode = 2)
3. Off (OffOp = 1 or OffLi = 1)
The block is disabled (output parameter CountMode = 0). No counting takes place.
&RXQWXS

 
,Q
 

2XW$+B/LP

2XW:+B/LP

2XW7+B/LP

2XW

2XW7+B$FW

2XW:+B$FW

2XW$+B$FW

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1728 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Counter blocks
10.1 CountScL - Counter with up and down counting direction

&RXQWGRZQ

 
,Q
 

2XW

2XW7/B/LP

2XW:/B/LP

2XW$/B/LP

2XW7/B$FW

2XW:/B$FW

2XW$/B$FW

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38). The block is
also installed automatically in the startup OB (OB100).

Startup characteristics
Define the startup characteristics for this block via two Feature Bits:
Bit 0: Set startup characteristics (Page 141)
Bit 5: Use the last value following a complete download as the current value during startup of
the block (Page 158)

Time response
The block does not have any time response.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1729
Counter blocks
10.1 CountScL - Counter with up and down counting direction

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


You can find a description for each parameter in section CountScL I/Os (Page 1737).

Status bit Parameter


0 Occupied
1 BatchEn
2 Not used
3 OosAct.Value
4 OosLi.Value
5 Not used
6 OnAct.Value
7 - 10 Not used
11 LiOp
12 - 13 Not used
14 1 = Invalid signal status
15 - 31 Not used

Status word allocation for Status2 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 MsgLock.Value
1 OutAH_Act.Value
2 OutWH_Act.Value
3 OutTH_Act.Value
4 OutTL_Act.Value
5 OutWL_Act.Value
6 OutAL_Act.Value
7 OutAH_En OR Feature.Bit23
8 OutWH_En OR Feature.Bit23
9 OutTH_En OR Feature.Bit23
10 OutTL_En OR Feature.Bit23
11 OutWL_En OR Feature.Bit23
12 OutAL_En OR Feature.Bit23
13 OutAH_MsgEn
14 OutWH_MsgEn
15 OutTH_MsgEn
16 OutTL_MsgEn
17 OutWL_MsgEn
18 OutAL_MsgEn
19 Not used
20 Count up
21 Counter off
22 Count down

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1730 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Counter blocks
10.1 CountScL - Counter with up and down counting direction

Status bit Parameter


23 - 30 Not used
31 MS_RelOp

See also
CountScL functions (Page 1732)
CountScL messaging (Page 1736)
CountScL block diagram (Page 1741)
CountScL error handling (Page 1735)
CountScL modes (Page 1731)

10.1.2 CountScL modes

CountScL operating modes


This block provides the following operating modes:
● On (Page 72)
● Out of service (Page 72)

"On"
General information on the "On" mode is available in the section On (Page 72).

"Out of service"
You can find general information about the "Out of service" mode in the section Out of
service (Page 72).
With Feature.Bit4 =1 the following output parameter become the status of simulation
16#60, if mode is changed to "Out of service".
With Feature.Bit4 =0 the following output parameter become the status of 16#80, if mode
is changed to "Out of service".
● OutAH_Act.ST
● OutWH_Act.ST
● OutTH_Act.ST
● OutTL_Act.ST
● OutWL_Act.ST
● OutAL_Act.ST

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1731
Counter blocks
10.1 CountScL - Counter with up and down counting direction

See also
CountScL block diagram (Page 1741)
CountScL I/Os (Page 1737)
CountScL messaging (Page 1736)
CountScL error handling (Page 1735)
Description of CountScL (Page 1727)
CountScL functions (Page 1732)

10.1.3 CountScL functions

Functions of CountScL
The functions for this block are listed below.

Limit monitoring of the count value


This block provides the standard function Limit monitoring of the count value (Page 90).

Group display SumMsgAct for limit monitoring, CSF and ExtMsgx


The block provides the standard function Group display for limit monitoring, CSF and
ExtMsgx (Page 86).

Read back the last counted value


When counting (visible at the Out output parameter), this count value is passed directly to the
OldOut input parameter:
OldOut = OutIf a warm restart is performed at this point, the count value (Out) is automatically
reset to the default value, if the Feature Bit Set startup characteristics (Page 141) is set
accordingly (= 0) (OldOut ≠ Out). In this case, the value from OldOut is only updated when
the (Out) count value is changed again by a pulse. OldOut = Out now applies again.

Reset counter to zero


The counted value at the Out output parameter is reset with the interconnectable
ResetCount parameter. The reset is made with a 0 - 1 edge.
The count cannot be reset to zero from the faceplate.
You can use Feature.Bit30 "Set reset depending on operating mode or the LiOp parameter"
to configure a reset depending on the LiOp parameter:
Feature.Bit30 = 0: The reset does not depend on LiOp
Feature.Bit30 = 1: The reset is only possible when LiOp =1.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1732 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Counter blocks
10.1 CountScL - Counter with up and down counting direction

Setting the count value to the default setting


You can use the PresetVal input parameter to enter a value at which the count should start,
if the command has been given for setting the count to the default via the PresetEn input
parameter with 1. This can also be done with the faceplate.
In this case, the Out output parameter is set to the PresetVal value.
You can use Feature.Bit30 "Set reset depending on operating mode or the LiOp parameter"
to configure the setting of the count value to a default depending on the LiOp parameter:
Feature.Bit30 = 0: Setting the count value to the default setting does not depend on LiOp
Feature.Bit30 = 1: Setting the count value to the default is only possible if LiOp =0.

Suppressing messages using the MsgLock parameter


This block provides the standard function Suppressing messages using the MsgLock
parameter (Page 214).

Selecting a unit of measure


This block provides the standard function Selecting a unit of measure (Page 221).

Forming the signal status for blocks


This block provides the standard function Forming and outputting the signal status for
technologic blocks (Page 110).
The worst signal status ST_Worst for the block is formed from the following parameter:
● In.ST
● OutST
The following signal status is formed by:

Signal sta‐ Used status


tus
OutST Count up, count down: Formed from the signal status In.ST and the last signal status
OutST.
Counter off: Signal status OutST is frozen.
Resetting CountScL also resets the signal status: OutST := 16#80

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature I/O in the Configurable
functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133) . The following functionality is available for this
block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
0 Set startup characteristics (Page 141)
1 Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 181)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1733
Counter blocks
10.1 CountScL - Counter with up and down counting direction

Bit Function
4 Changes signal status of outputs in OOS (Page 198)
5 Use the last value following a complete download as the current value during startup of the
block (Page 158)
22 Update acknowledgment and error status of the message call (Page 163)
23 Limits disabled in faceplate (Page 195)
24 Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162)
26 Reaction of the switching points in the "Out of service" operating mode (Page 180)
28 Disabling operating points (Page 149)
29 Signaling limit violation (Page 174)

Operator permissions
This block provides the standard function Operator control permissions (Page 265).
The block has the following permissions for the OS_Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 Not used
1 1 = Operator can switch to "On" mode
2 Not used
3 1 = Operator can switch to "Out of service" mode
4 1 = Operator can stop counting
5 1 = Operator can switch to incrementing mode
6 1 = Operator can switch to decrementing mode
7 - 11 Not used
12 1 = Operator can activate the Release for maintenance function
13 1 = Operator can change the limit (OutAH_Lim) for high alarm
14 1 = Operator can change the limit (OutWH_Lim) for high warning
15 1 = Operator can change the limit (OutTH_Lim) for high tolerance
16 Not used
17 1 = Operator can change the limit (OutAL_Lim) for low alarm
18 1 = Operator can change the limit (OutWL_Lim) for low warning
19 1 = Operator can change the limit (OutTL_Lim) for low tolerance
20 Not used
21 1 = Operator can set the count to the default value (PresetEn)
22 1 = Operator can specify the default value (PresetTime)
23 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via OutAH_MsgEn
24 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via OutWH_MsgEn
25 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via OutTH_MsgEn
26 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via OutTL_MsgEn
27 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via OutWL_MsgEn
28 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via OutAL_MsgEn
29 - 31 Not used

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1734 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Counter blocks
10.1 CountScL - Counter with up and down counting direction

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Release for maintenance


This block provides the standard function Release for maintenance (Page 65).

Opening additional faceplates


This block provides the standard function Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


This block provides the standard function SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

See also
Description of CountScL (Page 1727)
CountScL messaging (Page 1736)
CountScL I/Os (Page 1737)
CountScL block diagram (Page 1741)
CountScL error handling (Page 1735)
CountScL modes (Page 1731)

10.1.4 CountScL error handling

Error handling of CountScL


Refer to the section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions for the error handling
of all blocks.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1735
Counter blocks
10.1 CountScL - Counter with up and down counting direction

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum I/O can be used to output the following error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; the block is not processed.
0 There is no error.
51 Invalid signal at LiOp = 1:
● OffLi = 1 and UpLi = 1 and/or DnLi = 1
● OffLi = 0 and UpLi = 1 and DnLi = 1

See also
CountScL block diagram (Page 1741)
CountScL I/Os (Page 1737)
CountScL messaging (Page 1736)
Description of CountScL (Page 1727)
CountScL modes (Page 1731)
CountScL functions (Page 1732)

10.1.5 CountScL messaging

Messaging
The following messages can be generated for this block:
● Functions for displaying measured limits
Messages generated as a reaction to limit violations, can be suppressed by the settings
MsgEn and MsgLock.

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId

Associated value Block parameters


1 BatchName
2 StepNo
3 BatchID

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1736 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Counter blocks
10.1 CountScL - Counter with up and down counting direction

Process messages

Message in‐ Message identifier Message class Event


stance
MsgEvId SIG 1 Alarm - high $$BlockComment$$
High alarm limit violated
SIG 2 Warning - high $$BlockComment$$
High warning limit violated
SIG 3 Tolerance - high $$BlockComment$$
High tolerance limit violated
SIG 4 Tolerance - low $$BlockComment$$
Low tolerance limit violated
SIG 5 Warning - low $$BlockComment$$
Low warning limit violated
SIG 6 Alarm - low $$BlockComment$$
Low alarm limit violated
SIG 7 Reserved $$BlockComment$$
SIG 8 Reserved $$BlockComment$$

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment

See also
Description of CountScL (Page 1727)
CountScL functions (Page 1732)
CountScL I/Os (Page 1737)
CountScL block diagram (Page 1741)
CountScL modes (Page 1731)
CountScL error handling (Page 1735)

10.1.6 CountScL I/Os


I/Os of CountScL

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation BOOL 0
BatchID Batch ID DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name S7-String

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1737
Counter blocks
10.1 CountScL - Counter with up and down counting direction

Parameter Description Type Default


DnLi 1 = Down counter, via interconnection STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
DnOp* 1 = Down counter, via operator BOOL 0
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1
Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 1732) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
In Binary input value STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
LiOp 1 = Interconnection STRUCT -
0 = Operator ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MsgEvId Message number (assigned automatically) DWORD 16#00000000
MsgLock 1 = Suppress process messages. STRUCT -
See also the section Suppressing messages using the ● Value: BOOL ● 0
MsgLock parameter (Page 214) for more on this. ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MS_RelOp* Operator can switch release for maintenance BOOL 0
Occupied 1 = In use by a batch BOOL 0
OffLi 1 = Counter disabled via interconnection STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OffOp* 1 = Counter disabled via operator BOOL 1
OldOut* Previous output value DINT 0
OnOp* 1 = "On" mode via operator BOOL 0
OosLi 1 = "Out of service", via interconnection or SFC (0-1 edge STRUCT -
transition) ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosOp* 1 = "Out of service", via OS operator BOOL 0
OpSt_In Input parameter for local operator authorization, connec‐ DWORD 16#00000000
ted with the Out output parameter of the upstream block,
OpStations (Page 423)
OS_Perm I/O for operator permissions (Page 1732) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● ... ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
OutAH_En 1 = Enable alarm (high) for count BOOL 1
OutAH_Lim Limit for count alarm (high) DINT 95
OutAH_MsgEn 1 = Enable message for count alarm (high) BOOL 1

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1738 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Counter blocks
10.1 CountScL - Counter with up and down counting direction

Parameter Description Type Default


OutAL_En 1 = Enable alarm (low) for count BOOL 1
OutAL_Lim Limit for count alarm (low) DINT 0
OutAL_MsgEn 1 = Enable message for count alarm (low) BOOL 1
OutOpHiScale High limit for scale in count bar graph of faceplate DINT 100
OutOpLoScale Low limit for scale in count bar graph of faceplate DINT 0
OutTH_En 1 = Enable tolerance message (high) BOOL 0
OutTH_Lim Count tolerance limit message (high) DINT 85
OutTH_MsgEn 1 = Enable message for count tolerance message (high) BOOL 1
OutTL_En 1 = Enable count tolerance message (low) BOOL 0
OutTL_Lim Count tolerance message limit (low) DINT 0
OutTL_MsgEn 1 = Enable message for count tolerance message (low) BOOL 1
OutUnit Unit of measure for count Out INT 0
OutWH_En 1 = Enable count warning (high) BOOL 1
OutWH_Lim Count warning limit (high) DINT 90
OutWH_MsgEn 1 = Enable message for count warning (high) BOOL 1
OutWL_En 1 = Enable count warning (low) BOOL 1
OutWL_Lim Count warning limit (low) DINT 0
OutWL_MsgEn 1 = Enable message for count warning (low) BOOL 1
PresetEn* 1 = Set block to default count (PresetVal) BOOL 0
PresetVal Default setting for the count DINT 0
ResetCount 1 = Counter restart STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RunUpCyc Number of operating cycles for which all messages are INT 3
suppressed
SampleTime Sampling time [s] (assigned automatically) REAL 0.1
SelFp1 Call a block saved in this parameter as an additional ANY
faceplate (Page 217) in the standard view
SelFp2 Call a block saved in this parameter as an additional ANY
faceplate (Page 217) in the preview
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
UpLi 1 = Forward counter, via interconnection STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
UpOp* 1 = Forward counter, via operator BOOL 0

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1739
Counter blocks
10.1 CountScL - Counter with up and down counting direction

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


CountMode 0 = Counter off INT 0
1 = Count up
2 = Count down
ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without errors BOOL 0
ErrorNum Output of pending error number. For error numbers that INT -1
can be output by this block, see CountScL error han‐
dling (Page 1735)
MsgAckn Message acknowledgement status (output ACK_STATE WORD 16#0000
of first ALARM_8P)
MsgErr 1 = Message error (output ERROR of the first ALARM_8P) BOOL 0
MsgStat Message status (output STATUS of the first ALARM_8P) WORD 16#0000
MS_Release Release for maintenance STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
O_MS_Ext Reserved DWORD 0
OnAct 1 = "On" mode enabled STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosAct 1 = Block is "Out of service" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpSt_Out Value of the OpSt_In input parameter, for feedforward‐ DWORD 16#00000000
ing to other blocks. Bit 31 of this parameter is used by
Feature.Bit24
OS_PermLog Display of OS_Perm with settings changed by the block DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
algorithm
OS_PermOut Display of OS_Perm DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
Out Count DINT 0
OutAH_Act 1 = Count alarm (high) enabled. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this parameter with ● Value: BOOL ● 0
Feature.Bit28 (Disabling operating points ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
(Page 149)) and with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit
violation (Page 174)).
OutAL_Act 1 = Count alarm (low) enabled. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this parameter with ● Value: BOOL ● 0
Feature.Bit28 (Disabling operating points ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
(Page 149)) and with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit
violation (Page 174)).
OutST Signal status for Out BYTE 16#80
OutTH_Act 1 = Count tolerance message (high) enabled. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this parameter with ● Value: BOOL ● 0
Feature.Bit28 (Disabling operating points ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
(Page 149)) and with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit
violation (Page 174)).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1740 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Counter blocks
10.1 CountScL - Counter with up and down counting direction

Parameter Description Type Default


OutTL_Act 1 = Count tolerance message (low) enabled. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this parameter with ● Value: BOOL ● 0
Feature.Bit28 (Disabling operating points ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
(Page 149)) and with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit
violation (Page 174)).
OutWH_Act 1 = Count warning (high) enabled. You can change the STRUCT -
reaction for this parameter with Feature.Bit28 (Disa‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
bling operating points (Page 149)) and with
Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit violation (Page 174)). ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

OutWL_Act 1 = Count warning (low) enabled. STRUCT -


You can change the reaction for this parameter with ● Value: BOOL ● 0
Feature.Bit28 (Disabling operating points ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
(Page 149)) and with Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit
violation (Page 174)).
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
Status1 Status word 1 (Page 1727) DWORD 16#00000000
Status2 Status word 2 (Page 1727) DWORD 16#00000000

See also
CountScL messaging (Page 1736)
CountScL block diagram (Page 1741)
CountScL modes (Page 1731)

10.1.7 CountScL block diagram

CountScL block diagram


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

See also
Description of CountScL (Page 1727)
CountScL modes (Page 1731)
CountScL functions (Page 1732)
CountScL error handling (Page 1735)
CountScL messaging (Page 1736)
CountScL I/Os (Page 1737)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1741
Counter blocks
10.1 CountScL - Counter with up and down counting direction

10.1.8 Operator control and monitoring

10.1.8.1 CountScL views

Views of the CountScL block


The block CountScL provides the following views:
● CountScL standard view (Page 1742)
● Alarm view (Page 313)
● CountScL limit view (Page 1744)
● Trend view (Page 317)
● CountScL parameter view (Page 1745)
● CountScL preview (Page 1746)
● Memo view (Page 315)
● Batch view (Page 313)
● Block icon for CountScL (Page 1747)
Refer to the sections Structure of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure
(Page 239) for general information on the faceplate and block icon.

10.1.8.2 CountScL standard view

CountScL standard view









Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1742 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Counter blocks
10.1 CountScL - Counter with up and down counting direction

(1) Displaying and switching the operating mode


This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
● On (Page 72)
● Out of service (Page 72)
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for information
on switching the operating mode.

(2) Enabling and disabling the counter


This area shows you the default operating state for the counter. The following states can be
shown and executed here:
● "On ⇑"
● "On ⇓"
● "Off"
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for information
on changing the state.

(3) High and low scale range for the count value
These values provide information on the display range for the bar graph of the count. The scale
range is defined in the engineering system.

(4) Display of the count value


This area shows the current count value with the signal status OutST.
The name for the current count value can be set using the s7_shortcut attribute at the
corresponding output parameter. The default text is displayed if nothing is specified.
You can find additional information on this in the section Labeling of buttons and text
(Page 218) .

(5) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
Use this navigation button to open the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system (ES). The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the
engineering system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in the section Opening additional faceplates
(Page 217) .

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1743
Counter blocks
10.1 CountScL - Counter with up and down counting direction

(6) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Maintenance"
● "Invalid signal"

(7) Graphic display of the current count value


This area shows you the current count in form of a bar graph. The visible area in the bar graph
depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).

(8) Limit display


These colored triangles indicate the configured limits in the respective bar graph:
● Red: Alarm
● Yellow: Warning
● Blue: Tolerance
In counting mode "count up", only the colored triangles of the upper limits are visible; and in
counting mode "count down", only the colored triangles of the lower limits are visible.

10.1.8.3 CountScL limit view

Limit view of CountScL

 

(1) Limits for the counter


In this area, you can enter the limits for the counter. Refer to the Changing values (Page 270)
section for more on this.
You can change the following limits:
● "H alarm": Alarm high
● "H warning": Warning high

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1744 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Counter blocks
10.1 CountScL - Counter with up and down counting direction

● "H tolerance": Tolerance high


● "L tolerance": Tolerance low
● "L warning": Warning low
● "L alarm": Alarm low

(2) Enabled operation


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Icons for enabled operation:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)

(3) "Message suppression"


Message suppression indicates whether or not the suppression of the associated message in
the AS block is activated with the xx_MsgEn parameter. The output of messages is not
suppressed when the block is installed (all xx_MsgEn parameters are preset to 1). Messages
can only be output if limit monitoring of the additional analog value has been enabled.

(4) Suppress messages


You can enable / disable messages by setting the check mark.

10.1.8.4 CountScL parameter view

Parameter view of CountScL





(1) Preset counter


Enter the default setting here, where the counter should start. You can find additional
information on this in the Changing values (Page 270) section.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1745
Counter blocks
10.1 CountScL - Counter with up and down counting direction

(2) Set to default


Set the counter to the default value here. You can find additional information on this in the
Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section.

(3) Service
You can select the following function in this area:
● "Release for maintenance"
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for more on
this.
You can find information on this area in the Release for maintenance (Page 65) section.

(4) Enabled operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator control permissions are assigned.
They depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Symbols for enabled operations:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
control permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).

10.1.8.5 CountScL preview

Preview of CountScL

(1) Enabled operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator control permissions are assigned.
They depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1746 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Counter blocks
10.1 CountScL - Counter with up and down counting direction

Symbols for enabled operations:


● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
control permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)
The following enabled operations are shown here:
● "Off": You can disable the counter.
● "On ⇑": You can operate the incremental counter.
● "On ⇓": You can operate the decremental counter.
● "On": You can switch to "On" operating mode.
● "Out of service": You can switch to "Out of service" operating mode.
● "Local operating permission": Use the ← button to switch to the standard view of the
OpStations block. Additional information is available in the section Operator control
permissions (Page 265).

(2) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
Use this navigation button to reach the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system. The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the engineering
system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in the Opening additional faceplates (Page 217)
section.

10.1.8.6 Block icon for CountScL

Block icons for CountScL


A variety of block icons are available with the following functions:
● Process tag type
● Limits (high/low)
● Violation of alarm, warning, and tolerance limits
● Operating modes
● Signal status, release for maintenance
● Memo display
● Display counter running

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1747
Counter blocks
10.1 CountScL - Counter with up and down counting direction

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV8.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in the Special features


CFC
1

3 Block icon in the full display

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV7.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in Special features


CFC
1 Block icon in the full display

- Block icon in "Out of service" mode


(example with type 1 block icon)

Additional information on the block icon and the control options in the block icon is available
in the following chapters:
● Configuring the block icons (Page 246)
● Block icon structure (Page 239)
● Operation via the block icon (Page 248).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1748 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Counter blocks
10.2 CountOh - Determining runtime

10.2 CountOh - Determining runtime

10.2.1 Description of CountOh

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1864
Family: Count

Area of application for CountOh


The block is used for the following applications:
● Calculating the runtime of a unit

How it works
The block calculates the operating time of a unit.
1. Off (OffOp = 1 or OffLi = 1)
The block is disabled (output parameter CountMode = 0). No counting takes place.
2. Count up (UpOp = 1 or UpLi = 1)
The operating time of the connected unit is incremented (output parameter CountMode =
1).
3. Count down (DnOp = 1 or DnLi = 1)
The operating time of the connected unit is decremented (output parameter CountMode =
2).
The operating time is shown depending on the course of days, hours, minutes and seconds.
If the operating time exceeds the configured limits, an alarm is triggered.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1749
Counter blocks
10.2 CountOh - Determining runtime

&RXQWXS
'D\VKRXUV
DQGPLQXWHV

$+B0LQXWHV

:+B0LQXWHV

7/B0LQXWHV

7LPH

7+B$FW

:+B$FW

$+B$FW

When the block counts up and the total operating time (TimeMin) of the connected unit is
greater than or equal to the limits (TH_Minutes, WH_Minutes and AH_Minutes), the alarms
TH_Act, WH_Act and AH_Act are set.

'D\VKRXUV &RXQWGRZQ
DQGPLQXWHV

7/B0LQXWHV

:/B0LQXWHV

$/B0LQXWHV

7LPH

7/B$FW

:/B$FW

$/B$FW

When the block counts up and the total operating time (TimeMin) of the connected unit is
greater than or equal to the limits (TL_Minutes, WL_Minutes and AL_Minutes), the alarms
TL_Act, WL_Act and AL_Act are set.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1750 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Counter blocks
10.2 CountOh - Determining runtime

The operating time can be preset. The value can be specified by the operator. The operator
can set values for days, hours and minutes to begin counting, if the required operator control
permission has been issues for this.
The maximum configurable value for the operating time is 24855 days, 3 hours and 14 minutes.

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38). The block is
first installed automatically in the startup OB (OB 100).

Startup characteristics
Define the startup characteristics for this block via two Feature bits:
Bit 0: Set startup characteristics (Page 141)
Bit 5: Use the last value following a complete download as the current value during startup of
the block (Page 158)
When Feature.Bit5 is set to 1, then:
● Days := OldDays
● Hours := OldHours
● Minutes := OldMinutes
● Seconds := OldSeconds
When you set Feature.Bit5 and Feature.Bit0 to 1, then:
● TotalTime := PresetTime
The output parameters Days, Hours, Minutes are converted accordingly based on
PresetTime.
When you set Feature.Bit5 to 0 and Feature.Bit0 to 1, no preset is made.

Time response
The block only functions properly in a cyclic interrupt OB. To ensure correct time acquisition,
it should be installed (if configured in CFC) in the same runtime group as the control block of
the monitored unit.

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


You can find a description for each parameter in section CountOh I/Os (Page 1760).

Status bit Parameter


0 Occupied
1 BatchEn
2 Not used
3 OosAct.Value
4 OosLi.Value

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1751
Counter blocks
10.2 CountOh - Determining runtime

Status bit Parameter


5 Not used
6 OnAct.Value
7 - 10 Not used
11 LiOp
12 - 13 Not used
14 1 = Invalid signal status
15 - 31 Not used

Status word allocation for Status2 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 MsgLock.Value
1 AH Act.Value
2 WH_Act.Value
3 TH_Act.Value
4 TL_Act.Value
5 WL_Act.Value
6 AL_Act.Value
7 AH_En OR Feature.Bit23
8 WH_En OR Feature.Bit23
9 TH_En OR Feature.Bit23
10 TL_En OR Feature.Bit23
11 WL_En OR Feature.Bit23
12 AL_En OR Feature.Bit23
13 AH_MsgEn
14 WH_MsgEn
15 TH_MsgEn
16 TL_MsgEn
17 WL_MsgEn
18 AL_MsgEn
19 Not used
20 Count up
21 Counter off
22 Count down
23 - 30 Not used
31 MS_RelOp

See also
CountOh functions (Page 1754)
CountOh messaging (Page 1759)
CountOh block diagram (Page 1765)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1752 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Counter blocks
10.2 CountOh - Determining runtime

CountOh error handling (Page 1758)


CountOh modes (Page 1753)

10.2.2 CountOh modes

CountOh operating modes


The block can be operated using the following modes:
● On (Page 72)
● Out of service (Page 72)

"On"
You can find general information about the "On" mode in the On (Page 72) section.

"Out of service"
You can find general information about the "Out of service" mode in the section Out of
service (Page 72).
With Feature.Bit4 =1 the following output parameter become the status of simulation
16#60, if mode is changed to "Out of service".
With Feature.Bit4 =0 the following output parameter become the status of 16#80, if mode
is changed to "Out of service".
● DeviceOn.ST
● AH_Act.ST
● WH_Act.ST
● TH_Act.ST
● TL_Act.ST
● WL_Act.ST
● AL_Act.ST

See also
CountOh block diagram (Page 1765)
CountOh I/Os (Page 1760)
CountOh messaging (Page 1759)
CountOh error handling (Page 1758)
Description of CountOh (Page 1749)
CountOh functions (Page 1754)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1753
Counter blocks
10.2 CountOh - Determining runtime

10.2.3 CountOh functions

Functions of CountOh
The block provides the following functions:

Limit monitoring of the operating time


The total time in minutes (TimeIn) is displayed for the following limits:
1. Alarm (AH_Minutes and AL_Minutes)
2. Warning (WH_Minutes and WL_Minutes)
3. Tolerance (TH_Minutes and TL_Minutes)

Note
Limit monitoring:
Limit monitoring depends on the counting direction:
● Operation mode 1 (counting up), limit monitoring top
– AH_Minutes
– WH_Minutes
– TH_Minutes
● Operation mode 2 (counting down), limit monitoring bottom
– AL_Minutes
– WL_Minutes
– TL_Minutes

Group display SumMsgAct for limit monitoring, CSF and ExtMsgx


The block provides the standard function Group display for limit monitoring, CSF and
ExtMsgx (Page 86).

Suppressing messages using the MsgLock parameter


This block provides the standard function Suppressing messages using the MsgLock
parameter (Page 214).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1754 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Counter blocks
10.2 CountOh - Determining runtime

Configurable reactions using the Feature parameter


You can find an overview of all reactions provided by the Feature parameter in the
Configurable functions using the Feature I/O (Page 133) . The following functionality is
available for this block at the relevant bits:

Bit Function
0 Set startup characteristics (Page 141)
1 Reaction to the out of service mode (Page 181)
4 Changes signal status of outputs in OOS (Page 198)
5 Use the last value following a complete download as the current value during startup of the
block (Page 158)
22 Update acknowledgment and error status of the message call (Page 163)
23 Limits disabled in faceplate (Page 195)
24 Enabling local operator authorization (Page 162)
26 Reaction of the switching points in the "Out of service" operating mode (Page 180)
28 Disabling operating points (Page 149)
29 Signaling limit violation (Page 174)

Read back the last counted value


When counting (DeviceOn.Value = 1 and CountMode = 1 or 2), the inputs of the most
recently valid operating time are updated:
● OldDays := Days
● OldHours := Hours
● OldMinutes := Minutes
● OldSeconds := Seconds
The inputs OldDays, OldHours, OldMinutes, OldSeconds are read back with a complete
download.
After a warm restart, the outputs of the operating time are set depending on the configuration
of the Feature parameter.
When Feature.Bit5 is set to 1, then:
● Days := OldDays
● Hours := OldHours
● Minutes := OldMinutes
● Seconds := OldSeconds
When you set Feature.Bit5 and Feature.Bit0 to 1, then:
● TotalTime := PresetTime
The output parameters Days, Hours, Minutes are converted accordingly based on
PresetTime.
When you set Feature.Bit5 to 0 and Feature.Bit0 to 1, no preset is made.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1755
Counter blocks
10.2 CountOh - Determining runtime

Display and operator input area for process values and setpoints
This block provides the standard function Display and operator input area for process values
and setpoints (Page 216).

Reset counter to zero


The output parameters of the operating time are reset via the interconnectable Reset
parameter. The reset is made with a 0 - 1 edge.
The count cannot be reset to zero from the faceplate.
You can use Feature.Bit30 "Set reset depending on operating mode or the LiOp parameter"
to configure a reset depending on the LiOp parameter:
Feature.Bit30 = 0: The reset does not depend on LiOp
Feature.Bit30 = 1: The reset is only possible when LiOp =1

Setting the count value to the default setting


You can enter the operating time at which counting should begin with the input parameters
PresetTime and PresetEn.
When PresetEn is set, the following applies:
● TotalTime := PresetTime
The outputs Days, Hours, Minutes are converted accordingly based on PresetTime.
PresetTime can also be entered in the faceplate.
The PresetTime time value is always indicated in seconds.
You can use the Feature.Bit30 "Set reset depending on operating mode or the LiOp
parameter" to configure the setting of the count value to a default depending on the LiOp
parameter:
Feature.Bit30 = 0: Setting to the default does not depend on LiOp
Feature.Bit30 = 1: Setting to the default is only possible if LiOp =0.

Opening additional faceplates


This block provides the standard function Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

Forming the signal status for blocks


This block provides the standard function Forming and outputting the signal status for
technologic blocks (Page 110).
The worst signal status ST_Worst for the block is formed from the following parameter:
● In.ST
● TmMinSt
The following signal status is formed by:

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1756 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Counter blocks
10.2 CountOh - Determining runtime

Signal status Used status


TmMinST Count up, count down: Formed from the signal status In.ST and the last signal
status TmMinST.
Counter off: Signal status TmMinST is frozen.
Resetting CountOh also resets the signal status: TmMinST := 16#80

Operator permissions
This block provides the standard function Operator control permissions (Page 265).
The block has the following permissions for the OS_Perm parameter:

Bit Function
0 Not used
1 1 = Operator can start the block
2 Not used
3 1 = Operator can switch to "Out of service" mode
4 1 = Operator can stop the block
5 1 = Operator can switch to incrementing mode
6 1 = Operator can switch to decrementing mode
7 - 11 Not used
12 1 = Operator can enable release for maintenance
13 1 = Operator can enter AH_Lim
14 1 = Operator can enter WH_Lim
15 1 = Operator can enter TH_Lim
16 Not used
17 1 = Operator can enter AL_Lim
18 1 = Operator can enter WL_Lim
19 1 = Operator can enter TL_Lim
20 Not used
21 1 = Operator can enable default
22 1 = Operator can apply configured time
23 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via AH_MsgEn
24 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via WH_MsgEn
25 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via TH_MsgEn
26 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via TL_MsgEn
27 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via WL_MsgEn
28 1 = Operator can activate / deactivate messages via AL_MsgEn
29 - 31 Not used

Note
If you interconnect a parameter that is also listed in OS_Perm as a parameter, you have to
reset the corresponding OS_Perm bit.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1757
Counter blocks
10.2 CountOh - Determining runtime

Release for maintenance


This block provides the standard function Release for maintenance (Page 65).

SIMATIC BATCH functionality


This block provides the standard function SIMATIC BATCH functionality (Page 68).

See also
Description of CountOh (Page 1749)
CountOh messaging (Page 1759)
CountOh I/Os (Page 1760)
CountOh block diagram (Page 1765)
CountOh error handling (Page 1758)
CountOh modes (Page 1753)

10.2.4 CountOh error handling

Error handling of CountOh


Refer to the section Error handling (Page 121) in the basic instructions for the error handling
of all blocks.
The following errors can be displayed for this block:
● Error numbers

Overview of error numbers


The ErrorNum I/O can be used to output the following error numbers:

Error number Meaning of the error number


-1 Predefined value when inserting the block; the block is not processed.
0 There is no error.
51 Invalid signal at LiOp = 1
● OffLi = 1 and UpLi = 1 and/or DnLi = 1
● OffLi = 0 and UpLi = 1 and DnLi = 1

See also
CountOh block diagram (Page 1765)
CountOh I/Os (Page 1760)
CountOh messaging (Page 1759)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1758 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Counter blocks
10.2 CountOh - Determining runtime

CountOh functions (Page 1754)


CountOh modes (Page 1753)
Description of CountOh (Page 1749)

10.2.5 CountOh messaging

Messaging
The following messages can be generated for this block:
● Functions for displaying measured limits
Messages generated as a reaction to limit violations, can be suppressed by the settings
xx_MsgEn and MsgLock.

Process messages

Message Message iden‐ Message class Event


instance tifier
MsgEvId SIG 1 Alarm - high $$BlockComment$$
1 High alarm limit violated
SIG 2 Warning - high $$BlockComment$$
High warning limit violated
SIG 3 Tolerance - high $$BlockComment$$
High tolerance limit violated
SIG 4 Tolerance - low $$BlockComment$$
Low tolerance limit violated
SIG 5 Warning - low $$BlockComment$$
Low warning limit violated
SIG 6 Alarm - low $$BlockComment$$
Low alarm limit violated
SIG 7 Reserved $$BlockComment$$
For internal use
SIG 8 Reserved $$BlockComment$$
For internal use

Explanation:
$$BlockComment$$: Content of the instance-specific comment

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1759
Counter blocks
10.2 CountOh - Determining runtime

Associated values for message instance MsgEvId1

Associated value Block parameters


1 BatchName
2 StepNo
3 BatchID

See also
Description of CountOh (Page 1749)
CountOh functions (Page 1754)
CountOh I/Os (Page 1760)
CountOh block diagram (Page 1765)
CountOh error handling (Page 1758)
CountOh modes (Page 1753)

10.2.6 CountOh I/Os


I/Os of CountOh

Input parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AH_En High alarm enabled BOOL 1
AH_MsgEn Message for high alarm enabled BOOL 1
AL_En Low alarm enabled BOOL 1
AL_MsgEn Message for low alarm enabled BOOL 1
BatchEn 1 = Enable allocation BOOL 0
BatchID Batch number (Batch ID) DWORD 16#00000000
BatchName Batch name S7-String
DayOpHiScale* Operating stage - High limit of bar display for INT 100
OS
DayOpLoScale* Operating stage - Low limit of bar display for INT 0
OS
DaysAHLim* Days - high limit alarm INT 95
DaysALLim* Days - low limit alarm INT 0
DaysTHLim* Days - high limit tolerance INT 85
DaysTLLim* Days - low limit tolerance INT 0
DaysWHLim* Days - limit for high warning INT 90
DaysWLLim* Days - limit for low warning INT 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1760 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Counter blocks
10.2 CountOh - Determining runtime

Parameter Description Type Default


DnLi 1 = Decrement via interconnection STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
DnOp* 1 = Decrement via OS operator BOOL 0
EN 1 = Called block will be processed BOOL 1
Feature I/O for additional functions (Page 1754) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 0
● ... ● 0
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 0
HrsAHLim* Hours - high limit alarm INT 0
HrsALLim* Hours - low limit alarm INT 0
HrsOpHiScale* Operating hours - high limit of bar display for INT 23
OS
HrsOpLoScale* Operating hours - low limit of bar display for INT 0
OS
HrsTHLim* Hours - high limit tolerance INT 0
HrsTLLim* Hours - low limit tolerance INT 0
HrsWHLim* Hours - high limit warning INT 0
HrsWLLim* Hours - low limit warning INT 0
In Device status: STRUCT -
1=On ● Value: BOOL ● 0
0=Off ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
LiOp Switchover of operating mode between: STRUCT -
1 = Interconnection ● Value: BOOL ● 0
0 = Operator ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
MinOpHiScale* Operating minutes - high limit of bar display INT 59
for OS
MinOpLoScale* Operating minutes - low limit of bar display for INT 0
OS
MinsAHLim* Minutes - high limit alarm INT 0
MinsALLim* Minutes - low limit alarm INT 0
MinsTHLim* Minutes - high limit tolerance INT 0
MinsTLLim* Minutes - low limit tolerance INT 0
MinsWHLim* Minutes - high limit warning INT 0
MinsWLLim* Minutes - low limit warning INT 0
MS_RelOp* Operator input for release for maintenance, BOOL 0
1: Release for maintenance demand
MsgEvId Message number (assigned automatically) DWORD 16#00000000
MsgLock 1= Suppress process messages. STRUCT -
See also the section Suppressing messages ● Value: BOOL ● 0
using the MsgLock parameter (Page 214) for ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
more on this.
Occupied 1 = In use by a batch BOOL 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1761
Counter blocks
10.2 CountOh - Determining runtime

Parameter Description Type Default


OffLi Counter disabled via interconnection: STRUCT -
1 = Off ● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OffOp* Counter disabled via operator: BOOL 1
1 = Off
OldDays* Previous day value INT 0
OldHours* Previous hour value INT 0
OldMinutes* Previous minute value INT 0
OldSeconds* Previous second value INT 0
OnOp* 1 = "On" mode via operator BOOL 0
OosLi 1 = "Out of service", via interconnection STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosOp* 1 = "Out of service", via operator BOOL 0
OpSt_In Input parameter for local operator authoriza‐ DWORD 16#00000000
tion, connected with the Out output parame‐
ter of the upstream block, OpStations
(Page 423)
OS_Perm I/O for CountOh functions (Page 1754) STRUCT -
● Bit 0: BOOL ● 1
● ... ● 1
● Bit 31: BOOL ● 1
PresetEn* 1 = Set block to default time time value BOOL 0
(PresetTime)
PresetTime* Default setting for the time value [s] DWORD 16#00000000
Reset 1 = Reset counter STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
RunUpCyc Number of cycles in startup; messages are INT 3
suppressed during these cycles
SampleTime Sampling time [s] REAL 0.1
SelFp1 Open faceplate 1 ANY
SelFp2 Open faceplate 2 ANY
StepNo Batch step number DWORD 16#00000000
TH_En High tolerance enabled BOOL 0
TH_MsgEn Alarm for high tolerance enabled BOOL 1
TL_En Low tolerance enabled BOOL 0
TL_MsgEn Alarm for low tolerance enabled BOOL 1
UpLi 1 = Increment (via interconnection) STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
UpOp* 1 = Increment (via faceplate) BOOL 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1762 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Counter blocks
10.2 CountOh - Determining runtime

Parameter Description Type Default


WH_En High warning enabled BOOL 1
WH_MsgEn Alarm for high warning enabled BOOL 1
WL_En Low warning enabled BOOL 1
WL_MsgEn Alarm for low warning enabled BOOL 1

* Values can be written back to these inputs during processing of the block by the block
algorithm.

Output parameters

Parameter Description Type Default


AH_Act High alarm enabled. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this parame‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
ter with Feature.Bit28 (Disabling operat‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ing points (Page 149)) and with
Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit violation
(Page 174)).
AH_Minutes High alarm time [in min] DINT 0
AL_Act Low alarm enabled STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this parame‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
ter with Feature.Bit28 (Disabling operat‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ing points (Page 149)) and with
Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit violation
(Page 174)).
AL_Minutes Low alarm time [in min] DINT 0
BarOpHiScale High limit for bar display [min] DINT 100
BarOpLoScale Low limit for bar display [min] DINT 0
CountMode Count mode: INT 0
0 = Off
1 = Increment
2 = Count down
Days Operating stage INT 0
DeviceOn 1 = Unit on STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ENO 1 = Block algorithm completed without errors BOOL 0
ErrorNum Output of pending error number. For error INT -1
numbers that can be output by this block, see
CountOh error handling (Page 1758)
Hours Operating hours INT 0
Minutes Operating minutes INT 0
MS_Release Release for maintenance STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1763
Counter blocks
10.2 CountOh - Determining runtime

Parameter Description Type Default


MsgAckn Message acknowledgment status (output WORD 16#0000
ACK_STATE of ALARM_8P)
MsgErr 1 = Message error (output ERROR of BOOL 0
ALARM_8P)
MsgStat Message status (output STATUS of WORD 16#0000
ALARM_8P)
O_MS_Ext Reserved DWORD 16#00000000
OnAct Block running STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 1
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OosAct Block is "out of service" STRUCT -
● Value: BOOL ● 0
● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
OpSt_Out Value of the OpSt_In input parameter, for DWORD 16#00000000
feedforwarding to other blocks. Bit 31 of this
parameter is used by Feature.Bit24
OS_PermLog Operator permission: Output for OS DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
OS_PermOut Operator permission: Output for OS DWORD 16#FFFFFFFF
Seconds Operating time [in sec] INT 0
ST_Worst Worst signal status BYTE 16#80
Status1 Status word 1 (Page 1749) DWORD 16#00000000
Status2 Status word 2 (Page 1749) DWORD 16#00000000
TH_Act High tolerance enabled. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this parame‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
ter with Feature.Bit28 (Disabling operat‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ing points (Page 149)) and with
Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit violation
(Page 174)).
TH_Minutes Tolerance high DINT 0
TimeMin Operating period [min] DINT 0
TL_Act Low tolerance enabled. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this parame‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
ter with Feature.Bit28 (Disabling operat‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ing points (Page 149)) and with
Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit violation
(Page 174)).
TL_Minutes Low tolerance time [in min] DINT 0
TotalTime Total operating time DWORD 16#00000000
WH_Act High warning enabled. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this parame‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
ter with Feature.Bit28 (Disabling operat‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ing points (Page 149)) and with
Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit violation
(Page 174)).
WH_Minutes High warning time [in min] DINT 0

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1764 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Counter blocks
10.2 CountOh - Determining runtime

Parameter Description Type Default


WL_Act Low warning enabled. STRUCT -
You can change the reaction for this parame‐ ● Value: BOOL ● 0
ter with Feature.Bit28 (Disabling operat‐ ● ST: BYTE ● 16#80
ing points (Page 149)) and with
Feature.Bit29 (Signaling limit violation
(Page 174)).
WL_Minutes Low alarm time [in min] DINT 0

See also
CountOh messaging (Page 1759)
CountOh block diagram (Page 1765)
CountOh modes (Page 1753)

10.2.7 CountOh block diagram

CountOh block diagram


A block diagram is not provided for this block.

See also
CountOh I/Os (Page 1760)
CountOh messaging (Page 1759)
CountOh error handling (Page 1758)
CountOh functions (Page 1754)
CountOh modes (Page 1753)
Description of CountOh (Page 1749)

10.2.8 Operator control and monitoring

10.2.8.1 CountOh views

Views of the CountOh block


The block CountOh provides the following views:
● CountOh standard view (Page 1766)
● Alarm view (Page 313)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1765
Counter blocks
10.2 CountOh - Determining runtime

● CountOh limit view (Page 1768)


● Trend view (Page 317)
● CountOh parameter view (Page 1769)
● CountOh preview (Page 1770)
● Memo view (Page 315)
● Batch view (Page 313)
● Block icon for CountOh (Page 1771)
Refer to the sections Structure of the faceplate (Page 258) and Block icon structure
(Page 239) for general information on the faceplate and block icon.

10.2.8.2 CountOh standard view

CountOh standard view





 

(1) Displaying and switching the operating mode


This area provides information on the currently valid operating mode. The following operating
modes can be shown here:
● On (Page 72)
● Out of service (Page 72)
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for information
on switching the operating mode.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1766 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Counter blocks
10.2 CountOh - Determining runtime

(2) Enabling and disabling the counter


This area shows you the default operating state for the counter. The following states can be
shown and executed here:
● "On ⇑"
● "On ⇓"
● "Off"
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for information
on changing the state.

(3) High and low scale range for the count value
These values provide information on the display range for the bar graph (5) of the count value.
The scale range is defined in the engineering system.

(4) Displaying the counts values


The following counts are shown here:
● "Days" with signal status TmMinST
● "Hours" with signal status TmMinST
● "Minutes" with signal status TmMinST

(5) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
Use this navigation button to open the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system (ES). The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the
engineering system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in the section Opening additional faceplates
(Page 217) .

(6) Display area for block states


This area provides additional information on the operating state of the block:
● "Maintenance"
● "Invalid signal"

(7) Graphic display of the current count value


This area shows you the current count in form of a bar graph. The visible area in the bar graph
depends on the configuration in the engineering system (ES).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1767
Counter blocks
10.2 CountOh - Determining runtime

(8) Limits
These colored triangles indicate the configured limits in the respective bar graph:
● Red: Alarm
● Yellow: Warning
● Blue: Tolerance
In counting mode "count up", only the colored triangles of the upper limits are visible; and in
counting mode "count down", only the colored triangles of the lower limits are visible.

10.2.8.3 CountOh limit view

Limit view of CountOh

 

(1) Limits for the counter


In this area, you can enter the limits for the counter. Refer to the Changing values (Page 270)
section for more on this.
You can change the following limits:
● "H alarm": Alarm high
● "H warning": Warning high
● "H tolerance": Tolerance high
● "L tolerance": Tolerance low
● "L warning": Warning low
● "L alarm": Alarm low

(2) Enabled operation


This area shows all operations for which special operator permissions are assigned. They
depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1768 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Counter blocks
10.2 CountOh - Determining runtime

Icons for enabled operation:


● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)

(3) "Message suppression"


Message suppression indicates whether or not the suppression of the associated message in
the AS block is activated with the xx_MsgEn parameter. The output of messages is not
suppressed when the block is installed (all xx_MsgEn parameters are preset to 1). Messages
can only be output if limit monitoring of the additional analog value has been enabled.

(4) Suppress messages


You can enable / disable messages by setting the check mark.

10.2.8.4 CountOh parameter view

Parameter view of CountOh






(1), (2) and (3) preset counter


Enter the default setting here, where the counter should start.
You can change the following presets:
● "Days"
● "Hours"
● "Minutes"
You can find additional information on this in the Changing values (Page 270) section.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1769
Counter blocks
10.2 CountOh - Determining runtime

(4) Set to default


Set the counter to the default value here. You can find additional information on this in the
Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section.

(5)Service
You can select the following function in this area:
● "Release for maintenance"
Refer to the Switching operating states and operating modes (Page 268) section for more on
this.
You can find information on this area in the Release for maintenance (Page 65) section.

(6) Enabled operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator control permissions are assigned.
They depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.
Symbols for enabled operations:
● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
control permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm).

10.2.8.5 CountOh preview

Preview of CountOh

(1) Enabled operations


This area shows all operations for which special operator control permissions are assigned.
They depend on the configuration in the engineering system (ES) that applies to this block.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1770 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Counter blocks
10.2 CountOh - Determining runtime

Symbols for enabled operations:


● Green check mark: the OS operator can control this parameter
● Gray check mark: the OS operator cannot control this parameter at this time due to the
process
● Red cross: the OS operator cannot control this parameter due to the configured AS operator
control permissions (OS_Perm or OS1Perm)
The following enabled operations are shown here:
● "Off": You can disable the counter.
● "On ⇑": You can operate the incremental counter.
● "On ⇓": You can operate the decremental counter.
● "On": You can switch to "On" operating mode.
● "Out of service": You can switch to "Out of service" operating mode.
● "Local operating permission": Use the ← button to switch to the standard view of the
OpStations block. Additional information is available in the section Operator control
permissions (Page 265).

(2) Navigation button for switching to the standard view of any faceplate
Use this navigation button to reach the standard view of a block configured in the engineering
system. The visibility of this navigation button depends on the configuration in the engineering
system (ES).
You can find additional information on this in the Opening additional faceplates (Page 217)
section.

10.2.8.6 Block icon for CountOh

Block icons for CountOh


A variety of block icons are available with the following functions:
● Process tag type
● Limits (high/low)
● Violation of alarm, warning, and tolerance limits
● Operating modes
● Signal status, release for maintenance
● Memo display
● Display counter running

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1771
Counter blocks
10.2 CountOh - Determining runtime

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV8.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in Special features


CFC
1

2 Block icon in the full display

The block icons from template @TemplateAPLV7.PDL:

Icons Selection of the block icon in Special features


CFC
1 Block icon in the full display

- Block icon in "Out of service"


mode (example with type 1 block
icon)

Additional information on the block icon and the control options in the block icon is available
in the following sections:
● Configuring the block icons (Page 246)
● Block icon structure (Page 239)
● Operation via the block icon (Page 248).

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1772 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Counter blocks
10.3 TotalL - Additive counter with upward or downward counting direction (totalizer)

10.3 TotalL - Additive counter with upward or downward counting direction


(totalizer)

10.3.1 Description of TotalL

Object name (type + number) and family


Type + number: FB 1906
Family: Count

Area of application for TotalL


The block is used for the following applications:
● Triggered upward or downward summing
● Continuous upward or downward summing
● Upward or downward integration of an analog input value

How it works
With a positive edge at the input parameter (pulse signal) P_In the output parameter Out is
increased by a variable increment or reduced by a variable decrement.
Configure how it works via the following Feature Bits:
● Feature.Bit6: Block as summing unit or integrator (Page 146)
● Feature.Bit7: Summing characteristics continuous or triggered (Page 177)

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1773
Counter blocks
10.3 TotalL - Additive counter with upward or downward counting direction (totalizer)

Using this parameterization, determine whether the block is to operate as an edge-triggered


adder or summer, continuous adder or summer or as an integrator:

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1774 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Counter blocks
10.3 TotalL - Additive counter with upward or downward counting direction (totalizer)

Parameterization on How the block operates


the Feature Bit
Feature.Bit6 = 0 Block operates as an edge-triggered adder or summer.
Feature.Bit7 = 0 The calculation at the output parameter Out is performed with a 0 - 1 edge at input parameter P_In.
The output parameter Mode shows whether the value is incremented or decremented.
The pulses counted at the input parameter P_In are output to the output parameter CntOut.
Triggered sum up
Out.Value = Out.Value(n-1) + Incr.Value

,PSOQ9DOXH

5VW/L9DOXH5VW2S

2XW$+B/LP

2XW:+B/LP

2XW7+B/LP

,QFU9DOXH

2XW9DOXH
3UHVHW9DO9DOXH

2XW7+B$FW9DOXH

2XW:+B$FW9DOXH

2XW$+B$FW9DOXH

Triggered sum down


Out.Value = Out.Value(n-1) - Decr.Value

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1775
Counter blocks
10.3 TotalL - Additive counter with upward or downward counting direction (totalizer)

Parameterization on How the block operates


the Feature Bit

,PSOQ9DOXH

5VW/L9DOXH5VW2S

3UHVHW9DO9DOXH
2XW9DOXH

'HFU9DOXH

2XW7/B/LP

2XW:/B/LP

2XW$/B/LP

2XW7/B$FW9DOXH

2XW:/B$FW9DOXH

2XW$/B$FW9DOXH

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1776 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Counter blocks
10.3 TotalL - Additive counter with upward or downward counting direction (totalizer)

Parameterization on How the block operates


the Feature Bit
Feature.Bit6 = 0 Block operates as a continuous adder or summer.
Feature.Bit7 = 1 The calculation at the output parameter Out is performed continuously.
The output parameter Mode shows whether the value is incremented or decremented.
The result is output to the output parameter Out.
The output parameter CntOut always includes the value 0.
Continuously sum up
Out.Value = Out.Value(n-1) + Incr.Value

5VW/L9DOXH5VW2S

2XW$+B/LP

2XW:+B/LP

2XW7+B/LP

,QFU9DOXH

2XW9DOXH
6DPSOH7LPH
3UHVHW9DO9DOXH

2XW7+B$FW9DOXH

2XW:+B$FW9DOXH

2XW$+B$FW9DOXH

Continuously sum down


Out.Value = Out.Value(n-1) - Decr.Value

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1777
Counter blocks
10.3 TotalL - Additive counter with upward or downward counting direction (totalizer)

Parameterization on How the block operates


the Feature Bit

5VW/L9DOXH5VW2S

3UHVHW9DO9DOXH
6DPSOH7LPH
2XW9DOXH

'HFU9DOXH

2XW7/B/LP

2XW:/B/LP

2XW$/B/LP

2XW7/B$FW9DOXH

2XW:/B$FW9DOXH

2XW$/B$FW9DOXH

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1778 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Counter blocks
10.3 TotalL - Additive counter with upward or downward counting direction (totalizer)

Parameterization on How the block operates


the Feature Bit
Feature.Bit6 = 0 Block operates as an continuous integrator.
Feature.Bit7 = The direction of integration depends on the operation in the faceplate or from the interconnection.
non-operational The input value In is integrated in accordance with the trapezoid rule dependent upon the counting
direction according to the formula of the Integral block (Page 1895).
The output parameter Mode shows whether the value is integrated up or down.
The result is output to the output parameter Out.
The output parameter CntOut always includes the value 0.
Continuously integrate up
Mode = 1: Out.Value = Out.Value n-1 + SampleTime/TI * (In.Value + In.Value n-1)/2
Set direction of integration:
● Operation in the faceplate using the "On" command (UpOp = 1)
Requirement: LiOp.Value = 0
● Interconnection LiOp.Value = 1 and UpLi.Value = 1

5VW/L9DOXH5VW2S

,Q9DOXH GHOWD,Q

2XW$+B/LP

2XW:+B/LP

2XW7+B/LP

6DPSOH7LPH7, GHOWD,Q
2XW9DOXH
6DPSOH7LPH
3UHVHW9DO9DOXH

2XW7+B$FW9DOXH

2XW:+B$FW9DOXH

2XW$+B$FW9DOXH

Continuously integrate down


Mode = 2: Out.Value = Out.Value n-1 - SampleTime/TI * (In.Value + In.Value n-1)/2
Set direction of integration:
● Operation in the faceplate using the "Off" command (DnOp = 1)
Requirement: LiOp.Value = 0
● Interconnection LiOp.Value = 1 and DnLi.Value = 1

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1779
Counter blocks
10.3 TotalL - Additive counter with upward or downward counting direction (totalizer)

Parameterization on How the block operates


the Feature Bit

5VW/L9DOXH5VW2S

,Q9DOXH GHOWD,Q
3UHVHW9DO9DOXH
6DPSOH7LPH
2XW9DOXH

6DPSOH7LPH7, GHOWD,Q
2XW$+B/LP

2XW:+B/LP

2XW7+B/LP

2XW7+B$FW9DOXH

2XW:+B$FW9DOXH

2XW$+B$FW9DOXH

Configuration
Use the CFC editor to install the block in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB30 to OB38). The block is
also installed automatically in the startup OB (OB100).

Startup characteristics
Define the startup characteristics for this block via two Feature Bits:
Bit 0: Set startup characteristics (Page 141)
Bit 5: Use the last value following a complete download as the current value during startup of
the block (Page 158)
The messages are suppressed after startup for the number of cycles specified in the
RunUpCyc parameter.

Time response
The block does not have any time response.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1780 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Counter blocks
10.3 TotalL - Additive counter with upward or downward counting direction (totalizer)

Status word allocation for Status1 parameter


You can find a description for each parameter in section TotalL I/Os (Page 1790).

Status bit Parameter


0 Occupied
1 BatchEn
2 SimOn
3 OosAct.Value
4 OosLi.Value
5 BypassAct.Value
6 OnAct.Value
7-8 Not used
9 Display of BypassAct.Value in faceplate (display and operator controls) and
block icon
10 SimLiOp.Value
11 LiOp
12 - 13 Not used
14 1 = Invalid signal status
15 Triggered summing; Feature.Bit6 = 0, Feature.Bit7 = 0
16 Continuous summing; Feature.Bit6 = 0, Feature.Bit7 = 1
17 Integrate; Feature.Bit6 = 1
18 - 31 Not used

Status word allocation for Status2 parameter

Status bit Parameter


0 MsgLock.Value
1 OutAH_Act.Value
2 OutWH_Act.Value
3 OutTH_Act.Value
4 OutTL_Act.Value
5 OutWL_Act.Value
6 OutAL_Act.Value
7 OutAH_En OR Feature.Bit23
8 OutWH_En OR Feature.Bit23
9 OutTH_En OR Feature.Bit23
10 OutTL_En OR Feature.Bit23
11 OutWL_En OR Feature.Bit23
12 OutAL_En OR Feature.Bit23
13 OutAH_MsgEn
14 OutWH_MsgEn
15 OutTH_MsgEn
16 OutTL_MsgEn
17 OutWL_MsgEn

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1781
Counter blocks
10.3 TotalL - Additive counter with upward or downward counting direction (totalizer)

Status bit Parameter


18 OutAL_MsgEn
19 Not used
20 Mode = 1, upward summing or integration
21 Mode = 0, summer/integrator off
22 Mode = 2, downward summing or integration
23 - 30 Not used
31 MS_RelOp

See also
TotalL operating modes (Page 1782)
TotalL functions (Page 1783)
TotalL error handling (Page 1787)
TotalL messaging (Page 1789)
TotalL block diagram (Page 1795)

10.3.2 TotalL operating modes

TotalL operating modes


This block provides the following operating modes:
● On (Page 72)
● Out of service (Page 72)

"On"
General information on the "On" mode is available in the section On (Page 72).

"Out of service"
You can find general information about the "Out of service" mode in the section Out of
service (Page 72).
With Feature.Bit4 =1 the following output parameter become the status of simulation
16#60, if mode is changed to "Out of service".
With Feature.Bit4 =0 the following output parameter become the status of 16#80, if mode
is changed to "Out of service".
● Out.ST
● OutAH_Act.ST
● OutWH_Act.ST

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


1782 Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC
Counter blocks
10.3 TotalL - Additive counter with upward or downward counting direction (totalizer)

● OutTH_Act.ST
● OutTL_Act.ST
● OutWL_Act.ST
● OutAL_Act.ST

See also
Description of TotalL (Page 1773)
TotalL functions (Page 1783)
TotalL error handling (Page 1787)
TotalL messaging (Page 1789)
TotalL I/Os (Page 1790)
TotalL block diagram (Page 1795)

10.3.3 TotalL functions

Functions of TotalL
The functions for this block are listed below.

Limit monitoring of the count value


This block provides the standard function Limit monitoring of the count value (Page 90).

Group display SumMsgAct for limit monitoring, CSF and ExtMsgx


The block provides the standard function Group display for limit monitoring, CSF and
ExtMsgx (Page 86).

Suppressing messages using the MsgLock parameter


This block provides the standard function Suppressing messages using the MsgLock
parameter (Page 214).

Opening additional faceplates


This block provides the standard function Opening additional faceplates (Page 217).

Selecting a unit of measure


This block provides the standard function Selecting a unit of measure (Page 221).
For In and Out different units of measure can be entered.

Advanced Process Library (V9.0 SP2)


Function Manual, 08/2018, A5E39147331-AC 1783
Counter blocks
10.3 TotalL - Additive counter with upward or downward counting direction (totalizer)

Simulating signals

You might also like